100% found this document useful (1 vote)

172 views835 pages

ATPRuleBook BM PDF

Uploaded by

Alberto Cadena

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

172 views835 pages

ATPRuleBook BM PDF

Uploaded by

Alberto Cadena

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

Iternative

ransients

rogram
(AT P)
R u Ie Book
Copyright © 1987-92 by Canadian I American EMTP User Group

All rights reserved by (for details contact) :

Canadian I American EMTP User Group; Co - Chairmen :

Dr. W. Scott Meyer Dr. Tsu - huei Liu
The Fontaine, Unit 68 3179 Oak Tree Court
1220 N.E. 17-th ,Avenue West Linn, Oregon 97068
Portland, Oregon 97232 United States of America
O. Table of Contents - 1

o. Table of Contents
No page numbers accompany the chapters and sections listed below because such
numbers are methodically generated from the given information. This is most easily
explained by illustration. Section I-D is seen to concern the SUBROUTINE CIMAGE,
which would begin on page number 1D-1. The following page would be numbered 1D-2,
etc. This assumes that there is sufficient material to warrant two levels of
independence (Chapter I, Section D). Some chapters are so short that sections are
not warranted, in which case the letter in the middle will be omitted. For
example, the references of Chapter XXV begin on page 25-1, followed by page 25-2,
etc. In rare cases there may be three levels of categorization. For example,
Section IV-D-3 will begin on page 4D3-1, followed by page 4D3-2, etc.

I. General Introductory Information About ATP Version of EMTP

A. Background of ATP; user groups; ATP education

1. History of royalty-free EMTP Development
2. Learning. to use ATP; user groups; newsletters; E-mail
B. Development centers for ATP
C. Summary program capability; ways execution begins
D. $-cards of SUBROUTINE CIMAGE
E. Computer-dependent aspects and alternatives:
1. Summary of installation-dependent EMTP modules
2. STARTUP disk file for program initialization
3. STARTSPY disk file for program initialization
F. Different computer systems, specific details for all brands
G. Variable dimensioning and Dynamic Dimensioning
H. FORTRAN data format specifications
I. Structure of EMTP input data
J. EMTP data sorting by class (use of "/" cards)
K. $INCLUDE use for data modularization (including arguments)
L. Separate interactive plotting programs:
1. TPPLOT for sophisticated, single-window, plotting
2. WINDOWPLT for simpler, multiple-window, plotting

II. Cards that Begin a New Data Case

A. Special-request cards having key words

B. Miscellaneous data cards
C. Extensions to miscellaneous data cards

III. TACS and MODELS to Simulate Control Systems

A. Purpose of TACS
B. Summary of TACS capability
C. How to simulate what
D. TACS steady-state initialization rules
E. TACS elements and card formats
1. Transfer functions or S-blocks
2. Limiters
3. Signal sources
4. Supplemental variables and devices
5. TACS output-variable specification
6. TACS user-defined initial conditions
F. Printed/Plotted Output of the TACS Variables
G. TACS User-Defined Initial Conditions
H. Use of TACS and MODELS in the Same Data Case
I. MODELS: more powerful, flexible, and newer than TACS
o. Table of Contents - 2

IV. Branch Cards to Model Linear Elements

A. Branch card for lumped, series R, L, C

B. Branch cards for Pi-circuits
C. Branch cards for mutually-coupled R-L elements
D. Branch cards for distributed-parameter transmission lines
1. Constant-parameter model with constant [T]
2. Constant-parameter, double-circuit model with special [T]
3. Rigorous, frequency-dependent model (Jose Marti)
4. 2nd-order, recursive-convolution model (Serolyen)
E Saturable transformer component
F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature
G. Phasor branch [Yl input if no transient simulation
H. High-order rational admittance function

V. Branch Cards to Model Single-Phase Nonlinear Elements

A. Pseudo-nonlinear resistance R(i) (type-99 branch)

B. Pseudo-nonlinear reactor L(i) (type-98 branch)
C. Staircase time-varying resistance R(t) (type-97 branch)
D. Pseudo-nonlinear hysteretic reactor L(i) (type-96 branch)
E. Exponential ZnO surge arrester R(i) (type-92; "5555")
F. Piecewise-linear time-vary resistor R(t) (type-91; "3333")
G. True-nonlinear resistance R(i) (type-92; "4444")
H. True nonlinear inductance L(i) (type-93 branch)
I. Circuit breaker or electric arc R(t,i) (type-91; "TACS")
J. User-supplied FORTRAN for compensation (Type-93; FORTRAN)
K. Corona modeling for cascaded line sections ("CORONA MODEL"

VI. Switch Cards (Including Thyristors and Diodes

A. Time, voltage, current-controlled switches

B. Diode or thyristor (TACS-controlled, type-II)
C. Spark gap or triac (TACS-controlled, type-12)
D. TACS-controlled ordinary switch (type-13)

VII. Electric Network Source Cards (Other than Rotating Machinery)

A. Static electric network source functions

B. Type-16 simplified equivalent of hvdc converter

VIII. Dynamic Synchronous Machine (3-phase S.M.; Type-59) Cards

IX. Dynamic Universal Machine (U.M. ; Type-19) Cards

X. EMTP Load Flow Cards (for "FIX SOURCE" Usage)

XI. Cards to Override Initial Conditions of the Electric Network

XII. Cards to Request Electric Network Output Variables

XIII. Source Type-I Definitions (for each time step

XIV. Batch-Mode Plotting of Resulting Simulation

xv. Request Cards for Statistical Tabulations

O. Table of Contents - 3

XVI. Interactive Execution, Observation, and Control (SPY)

A. Initiating EMTP execution that includes Spy

B. Opportunities for SPY dialogue: the keyboard interrupt
C. Spy commands explained according to general function
1. Loading and/or changing EMTP data cards via Spy
2. Spy commands to halt or resume program execution
3. Spy commands to observe EMTP tables: BUS, BRANCH, etc.
4. "PLOT" for vector or character plots during execution
5. Command files: @K, FILES, COMMENT, VERIFY, TYPE
6. EMTP variables: EXAMINE, NAMES, ROLL, LIST, FIND, DEPOSIT
7. Table dumping/restoring: SAVE, RESTORE, SLEEP, WAKE, WHEN
8. "DICE" for statistical tabulation of Monte Carlo simulations
9. Mathematics within command files: "APPEND"
10. "RAMP" & "SERIES" for continuous linear parameter variations
11. Utilities: HEADING, TIME, SIZE, LIMIT, HONK, ECHO, WAIT, $
12. "TACS": gateway to Concurrent Sequential Processing (CSP)
13. Servicing [Y] changes: YFORM, NOY, FACTOR, NOF
D. Batch-mode execution of Spy commands: $SPY and $SPYEND
E. Use of SPY "PLOT" instead of separate program "TPLOT"

XVII . "JMARTI SETUP" Supporting Program

XVIII. "NODA SETUP" Supporting Program not yet available

XIX. ~l Fixed-Dimension Supporting Programs

A. "XFORMER" to derive [R], [L] of 1-phase transformers

B. "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" for parallel "STATISTICS"
C. "BCTRAN" to derive [R], [L] of multi-phase transformers
D. "CHANGE SWITCH" to process former switch cards
E. "OLD TO NEW ZNO" to update pre-"M39." ZnO data cards
F. "DATA BASE MODULE" to modularize for $INCLUDE arguments
G. "SATURATION" for magnetic saturation calculations
H. "HYSTERESIS" to punch Type-96 branch cards
I. "ZNO FITTER" to punch Type-92 ZnO branch cards

XXI. "LINE CONSTANTS" Supporting Program

XXII. "SEMLYEN SETUP" Supporting Program

XXIII. "CABLE CONSTANTS" Supporting Program

XXIII. Appendix "CABLE PARAME'l'ERS" Supporting Program

XXIV. "NETWOlU{ EQUIVALENT" for Supporting Program "NETEQV"

xxv. Associated Reference Material

XXVI. Index of ~phabetically-Ordered References

I. Introductory Information About Program - 1

I. Introductory Information About Program

=====================================================================
© Copyright 1987-1995 by the Can/Am EMI'P User Group. All rights reserved.
=====================================================================

No part of either this manual or the associated computer program (ATP version
of the EMI'P)may be reproduced in any fonn, using cards, paper, microfilm, magnetic
media, or any other means, without written permission from the Canadian/American
(Can/Am) EMI'P User Group. Further, such materials have restricted circulation, and
their informational content shall not be released to third parties.

The content of this manual, the associated computer program, and all other
ATP EMI'P materials, are all made available .for use by others without any guarantee
of usefulness, accuracy, fidelity, or completeness. No author, licensing agent,
or authorized distributor wi~~ be he~d responsib~e for any damages that might
possibly result from the use or misuse of ATP EMI'P materials for any purpose. The
user is solely responsibility for any damages that might possibly result from the
use or misuse of ATP EMI'P materials for any purpose.

I-A. Background of ATP; User Groups; Education

The Electromagnetic Transients Program, or EMI'P (pronounced by naming the
four letters sequentially), is primarily a simulation program of the electric power
industry. It can predict variables of interest within electric power networks as
functions of time, typically following some disturbance such as the switching of
a circuit breaker, or a fault. It also is used by those who specialize in power
electronics.

EMI'P has its roots in Portland, Oregon (USA), at the Bonneville Power
Administration (BPA), an agency of the U.S. Department of Energy. Thanks to
generous contributions of both manpower and money (the latter to support
specialists working on EMI'P research and development under contract), BPA dominated
EMI'P development for more than a decade. This was all public-domain work, and it
was given freely to any interested party. This was prior to attempted
commercialization of the EMI'P during the summer of 1984 (see Section I-A-1
below) .

The present manual basically is just a complete .set of rules for EMI'P input
and output. Except for the Table of Contents and Introduction at the front
(through the end of Section I), and the References and Index at the back
(Sections XXV and XXVI, respectively), nothing but rules of program usage will be
found. Since most EMI'P data have a required order of input, the rules of this book
have been written in this same order of data input. Supporting programs (e.g.,
"LINE CONSTANTS") are exceptions, and they have all been forced to the back
(Chapters XVII through XXIV) to agree with the order of appearance wi thin the
computer source file (UTPF). Details about interactive execution, observation, and
control (SPY) also have no fixed order, and they have been placed in Chapter XVI,
preceding the supporting programs.

I-A-l. History of Royalty-Free Development

Following attempted commercialization of the EMI'P by certain large
organizations of the North American power industry ("EPRI and some friends," as
explained later), all EMI'P development no longer was given to BPA by persons who
had cooperated with BPA in the past. Included was the prodigious after-hours,
weekend, and vacation work of Dr. W. Scott Meyer. There evolved a distinct EMI'P
version known by the acronym ATP (Alternative Transients Program). Although ATP
work remains the property of the individuals who produced it, the Can/Am user group
is the licensing agent for the use of these EMI'P materials by others. For other
parts of the world (England, Europe, Taiwan, etc.), such authority has been
delegated to others. ATP materials are royalty-free for those who have not
I-A. Background of ATP; User Groups; Education - 2

participated in "EMTP commerce" (defined by form letter LICENSE. ZIP of the

Can/Am user group), but they are not public-domain in nature (as is the case with
BPA EMITP work). This distinction is necessary in order to protect such materials
from commercial exploitation.

The Can/Am user group is grateful to BPA for all of its public-domain EMTP
development that formed the basis for this newer, improved, offering of the
program. The roots of ATP can be traced to early 1984, when it became apparent
to BPA EMTP developers that DCG was not working as it was supposed to, and formed
a threat to free EMTP. At that point (February or March), 12 years of "EMTP
Memoranda" were ended by Dr. Meyer, and every available hour of his free (non-
BPA) time was switched from BPA's EMTP to the creation of a viable alternative that
would be denied to those having commercial ambitions (already apparent among
several DCG members). ATP, the Alternative Transients Program, was the result
during the fall of 1984. This followed Dr. Meyer's return from Europe (the first
European EMTP short course, in Leuven) and purchase of his first horne computer (the
new IBM PC AT) during August of 1984.

In September of 1982, a "coordination agreement" concerning the EMTP was

signed by six large power organizations of North America: three U.S. government
agencies (BPA, the Western Area Power Administration, and the U. S. Bureau of
Reclamation, with the latter two headquartered in Denver, Colorado) and three
Canadian organizations (Hydro-Quebec/IREQ, Ontario Hydro, and the Canadian
Electrical Association on behalf of the remaining Canadian utilities). Known by
the acronym DCG (for EMTP Development Coordination Group), this organization agreed
during March of 1983 to keep the EMTP proper (the UTPF) in the public domain. But
there followed a loose Association with the Electric Power Research
Institute (EPRI, of Palo Alto, California) during the summer of 1984. During the
fall of that year, it was claimed by the DCG Steering Committee. that BPA EMTP work
would no longer be in the public domain, and would not be given freely to others.

But such DCG/EPRI policy was nothing more than wishful thinking by those
wanting to commercialize the EMTP. During April of 1985, a U.s. Freedom of
Information Act (FOIA) request was filed with BPA, and BPA disclosed its
then-latest version of the UTPF as required by that U.S. law. Since then, strong
statements from BPA indicated that both U.S. government work and money must result
only in public-domain EMTP products. This was consistent with the hopes of
European EMTP users, of course. Prior to such statements by higher management and
its representatives at BPA, LEC (the Leuven EMTP Center with headquarters on the
campus of K.U. Leuven in Belgium) was formed by Prof. Daniel Van Dommelen during
the spring and summer of 1984 as a defensive measure. This was after hearing of
proposed DCG/EPRI prices during. a personal visit by DCG Chairman Doug Mader.
Although LEC later had problems of mismanagement, everyone involved can be proud
of those early years, and the obvious spirit of independence ("hell no, we won't
pay") that drove the effort. The first annual meeting. of LEC was held in Leuven
on November 4th of 1985, and Dr. Meyer agreed to bring ATP. About possible
cooperation with those who then were trying to sell EMTP, the official minutes of
this meeting records the following:
If_ It was unanimously agreed that the User Group wants to
influence the politics of development by making a
distinction between:
- the EMTP proper (UTPF),
which should remain free and intact.
- Preprocessors, postprocessors and data bases,
which could be things to sell.
- After this discussion, it was agreed that TA should
contact DCG in order to request EPRI not to sell the EMTP
proper (UTPF). Should this first attempt prove to be
unsuccessful, then DVD could try."
Here "TA" stands for Mr. Ture Adielson of MEA, who at the time was the EMTP
representative of MEA to both DCG and LEC. Finally "DVD" indicates Prof. Van
Dommelen, the Chairman of LEC. Prior to the vote authorizing this statement, Dr.
Meyer had agreed to turn his ATP work into the public domain provided DCG and
EPRI would do likewise. No response from DCG or EPRI was ever received, as far
as the Can/~ user group knows.
I-A. Background of ATP; User Groups; Education - 3

Both K.U. Leuven and LEC operated through 1993 without any formal connection
to any power organization of North America. However, LEe did cooperate with BPA
on an informal basis for several years (most effectively from 1985 to 1989), and
it remained willing to consider the establishment of a formal tie provided non-
commercial EMI'P activity at K.U. Leuven could thereby be assisted. This was the
stated goal of LEC, which was supposed to be a nonprofit organization. The
Chairman did serve without pay, and decisions normally were made (or subsequently
reaffirmed) by majority vote of the members. That was through 1990, anyway. But
with growth came affluence, and with affluence seemed to come corruption as
discovered by LEC's own Steering Committee. After failing to account for all money
collected from members, and failing to honor voting rights of members in this
regard (accurate accounting of money), LEC was closed at the end of 1993.

But the European EMI'P User Group (EEUG) was reformed in Hannover, Germany,
during November of 1994. This followed the leadership of Dr. Mustafa Kizilcay, who
was working for Lahmeyer International as the meeting was planned, but had been
named to be a Professor at the university in Osnabrueck before the meeting was
actually held. By German law, all money must be accounted for, and voting rights
of members are guaranteed by an associated charter. As this text is being revised
during the spring of 1995, operation is beginning slowly (German law is
demanding), but with considerable promise.

I-A-2. Learning to Use ATP; User Groups

By far the best way to learn about EMI'P capability and usage is by working
beside a competent, experienced veteran. Those power organizations that have been
using the EMI'P for a broad range of power system simulation, and which have not
suffered disrupting changes of personnel, represent the ideal learning
environment. If the reader is working for such an organization, he should count
his blessings, and disregard most of what follows. In case of questions or
problems, go see the local experts. Always ask questions. Prog,ram users must
adopt this habit, since they will be doing it until the day they retire, so broad
and complex is transient simulation!

For those not so blessed by local experts, the next-best alternative is a

strong national or regional EMI'P User Group to which new users can turn for help.
Contact personnel of ATP-licensed organizations that are officially recognized by
the Can/Am user group are as follows:

Dr. Akihiro Ametani, Professor and

Chairman, Japanese EMI'P Committee
Dr. Naoto Nagaoka, Professor and Secretary
Faculty of Electric Engineering
Doshisha University
Tanabe, Tsuzuki-gun
Kyoto 610-03
JAPAN

Prof. Dr.-Ing Mustafa Kizilcay

Chairman, European EMI'P-ATP Users Group
Association
Fachhochschule Osnabrueck
Fachbereich Elektrotechnik
Albrechtstr. 30
D-49076 Osnabrueck
GERMANY

Mr. Marco Polo Pereira

Chairman, Latin American EMTP User Group
Furnas Centrais Eletricas S.A.
Rua Real Grandeza 219, C 1608
CEP 22283-900 -- Rio de Janeiro
BRAZIL
I-A. Background of ATP; User Groups; Education - 4

Dr. Brian J. Elliott, Chairman

Mr. Stephen Boroczky, Secretary
Grid Planning & Development
Electricity Transmission Authority
PO Box 1000
Sydney South, NSW, 2000
AUSTRALIA

Dr. W. Scott Meyer and

Dr. Tsu-huei Liu, Co-Chairmen
Canadian/American EMTP User Group
The Fontaine, Unit 6B
1220 N.E. 17th Avenue
Portland, Oregon 97232
U.S.A.

JinBoo Choo, Manager

Korean EMTP Committee
Electric Power Research Department
Korea Electric Power Corporation
(KEPCO) Research Center
117-15, Yong Jeon Dong, Dong.-Gu
Dae Jeon
SOUTH KOREA

Mr. chiang-Tsung Huang., Chairman

Mr. Shui-Hsiu Lin, Secretary
Republic of China EMTP User Group
(Includes Hong Kong and singapore)
System Planning Department
Taiwan Power Company (Taipower)
242 Roosevelt Road, Section 3
P. O. Box 171
Taipei 107
REPUBLIC OF CHINA (TAIWAN)

Dr. Warren Levy

Information Technology Dept.
Electricity Supply Commission (ESKOM)
Megawatt Park, .Maxwell Drive
P. O. Box 1091
Johannesburg 2000
SOUTH AFRICA

While each group was primarily designed to serve users of its geographical region,
anyone in the world can order ATP materials directly from either Osnabrueck or
Portland. Also, computer files are being shared on a world-wide basis among ATP-
licensed users by E-mail (the Internet). See later paragraph.

EMTP education is being handled separately, and materials related to it are

not available through BPA, so do not write to Portland for a copy. EMTP education
began in June of 1978 with a one-week EMTP short course at the University of
Wisconsin -- Madison. This was basically an introductory course, and it has been
offered most summers since its inception. Following the switch from BPA's EMTP to
the commercial offering of DCG/EPRI in 1987 or 1988, the Madison offering has
ceased to be of much value to ATP users, however. Other universities have offered
introductory courses, too, from time to time. For ATP, this began in Leuven,
Belgium, during the summer of 1987 the first public exposition of ATP. Then
during the summers ofo1988 and 1989, Cal Poly in San Luis Obispo, California, USA,
offered the first EMTP course that used only PCs (Personal Computers). The spring
I-B. Development Centers for ATP - 1

of 1989 saw the beginning of such now-famous PC-based education offered by Prof.
Dennis Carroll at the University of Florida in Gainesville. Prof. Ned Mohan began
his popular 2-day, traveling (it follows IEEE PES Summer Meetings) course in 1990
when the PES meeting was near his home campus in Minneapolis. As for more advanced
education, Europeans were first, when a high-level course for experienced users
was given during the summer of 1984 by Prof. Daniel Van Dommelen atK.U. Leuven in
Belgium. While needed, such advanced courses have difficulty attracting adequate
numbers of students to be offered regularly.

Power electronics can be simulated using the EMTP as documented by a textbook

on the subject that first appeared in 1989. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., of New York
City (USA), publish "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and
Design" by Ned Mohan, Tore Undeland, and William Robbins. An associated set of 64
ATP data cases and paper documentation of them (a separate book) can be purchased
from Prof. Mohan at the University of Minnesota. Beginning about 1993, this
package was bundled with Prof. Mohan's short course, which now specializes in ATP
applied to power electronics of power systems.

The EMTP Rule Book contains almost nothing about what is happening in the
world of EMTP usage and development. For EMTP-related announcements, reports of
interesting stUdies by program users, corrections to the Rule Book and/or common
program versions, and summaries of ongoing EMTP research, see the newsletter of
the Can/Am user group. This is Can/Am EMTP News, which during 1994 and 1995 has
consisted of 20 pages per quarterly issue (January, April, July, and October of
each year). Dating to the second half of 1988, WordPerfect 5.1 documents of the
content can be obtained by E-mail from several Anonymous FTP sites around the world
(more about such E-mail usage later).

"EMTP News" was a valuable journal about EMTP that was published by LEC for
some 6 or 7 years prior to LEC's demise in 1993. Early issues of the Can/Am
newsletter will refer to this, which is an important part of the historical record
of ATP usage and development. Unfortunately, no computer storage of most of the
published material is believed to exist. It is hoped that the tradition of a
journal for .full-Iength articles about ATP use (more than development) can be
resurrected during 1995 by the new EEUG, which would use the more appropriate name
"EMTP Journal." A newsletter, this was not (during its prime, each issue of the
quarterly "EMTP News" averaged about 100 pages).

E-mail (electronic mail) has become critically important to many ATP users.
As WordPerfect disk files, the newsletter and other ATP-useful things can be
obtained from FTP server f~.[Link] (the former plains server, which became
a mirror [Link] during April of 1995) using Anonymous FTP transfers
of Internet. These two sites are in the north-central USA (Michigan Tech in
Houghton and North Dakota State University in Fargo, respectively). There also is
a mirror in Europe, at the University of Hannover in Germany at address
[Link] Details are summarized in the January, 1995, newsletter. Prof. Bruce
Mork of Michigan Tech in Houghton manages this material. He also established a
free electronic bulletin board atp-em~@~.[Link] that allows ATP users to
exchange messages. See the october, 1991, issue of the newsletter for Prof. Bruce
Mork's 3-page exposition about this pioneering, ATP service he founded. That
article also can be found in [Link] within disk file EMro:[Link] on the GIVE2
disk of SalfordEMTP distribution. The service is free, and had grown to more
than 200 addresses by the end of 1994. Prof. Mork explained FTP use in the July,
1992, issue (see [Link] within EMro:[Link]). ATP itself can be distributed
by FTP, but not without security (a password). ATP also can be distributed by
normal E-mail using the Attach button of MS Mail within MS Windows (this
UUENCODEs an archive such as GIVEI. ZIP automatically) as described in the
January, 1995, newsletter.

I-B. Development Centers for ATP

The Can/Am EMTP User group can be reached most easily by E-mail <electronic
mail) since use of it was begun by the user group in the fall of 1993. The current
Internet address used by Drs. Meyer and Liu is: atp@[Link] The non-
I-C. Summary Program Capability - 1

electronic mailing address in The Fontaine was displayed previously.

BPA personnel who are preoccupied with free EMTP development are Drs. W.
Scott Meyer and Tsu-huei Liu, who most easily can be reached by telephone using
number (503) 230-4404. Dr. Liu's telephone is -4401, but this is less useful
because it has no recorder, and a secretary might answer. If no human answers
4404, after a full four rings a personalized recording in Dr. Meyer's voice will
be heard. If the phone is in use, the recording will be heard immediately.
Following Dr. Meyer's brief greeting, a caller will be given an opportunity (after
the tone) to leave a recorded message (not over about 8 minutes). A warning is
appropriate, however: Speak slowly and distinctly, since the recording system
produces distortion of j ts own as evidenced by the quality of the recording. When
the message is complete, a flashing red light will be seen on Dr. Meyer's
telephone. For a telephone call to be returned, be sure the name
and telephone number are slowly and clearly enunciated. Finally, the address for
conventional mail, E-mail, and also telephone facsimile (FAX) is:
Dr. W. Scott Meyer or
Dr. Tsu-huei Liu E-mail: thliu@[Link]
BPA, Route TEOS; Floor 4, Post S-14
P. o. Box 3621
Portland, Oregon 97208
U.S.A. FAX: (503) 230-3212
Those wanting to use a delivery service will require a street address: 905 N.E.
11th Avenue, with different postal code 97232. Be sure to include the floor and
post, since BPA's is one big building of some 2200 workstations.

Laurent Dube, author of MODELS (new control system modeling), also can
be reached most easily by E-mail. Use dube@[Link] (Internet address). He also
has voice telephone with a recorder: (503) 392-4551. For FAX, Mr. Dube uses
392-4575. Located on the Oregon coast about 2 hours by car from Portland, the
mailing address is: DEI Simulation Software
7000 Rowan Road Manor
P. O. Box 848
Neskowin, Oregon 97149
U. S .A.

I-C. Summary Program Capability; Ways Execution Begins;

Errors
The EMTP is used to simulate transients of electrical power networks. That
is, it is used to solve the algebraic, ordinary, and/or partial differential
equations that are associated with an interconnection of the following components:

* Lumped resistance, R

* Lumped inductance, L

* Lumped capacitance, e:
* Multiphase pi-equivalents,
where the preceding scalar
R, L, and e become
symmetric, square matrices
[R] , [L] , and [e].

* Multiphase distributed-parameter
transmission lines, wherein propagation
time of the component is represented.
Both constant-parameter and frequency-
dependent representations are provided.
I-C .. Summary Program Capability - 2

* Nonlinear resistors, where the

v-i characteristic is single-valued.

* Nonlinear inductors, either with the conventional

single-valued characteristic (see sketch at right)
or including hysteresis and residual flux.

* Time-varying resistance.

* Switches, used to simulate circuit

breakers, spark gaps, or any other
connection change of the network.
Diodes and thyristers (ac/dc valves)
are included.

* Voltage or current sources. In addition

to standard mathematical functions
(sinusoids, surge functions, steps, and
ramps), the user may specify sources point
by point as functions of time, or in user-
supplied FORTRAN, or viaTACS control (see
control system modeling below) .

* Dynamic rotating electric machinery, of which

the most common form is conventional, 3-phase
synchronous machines. But induction machinery
and dc-machinery also can be represented, for
1, 2, or 3 phases. Such machine models can be
connected to TACS control system models (see
immediately below), thereby allowing dynamics
for voltage regulators and speed governors.

* control system dynamics as years ago were

represented by differential analyzers ("analog
computers"). This modeling has been named TACS,
an acronym derived from "Transient Analysis of
control Systems." Nonlinear and logical
operations of various types are allowed. Inputs
and outputs may be interfaced with the electric
network of the EMTP, thereby providing hybrid
computer capability. All TACS configurations
are user-patchable, and hence configuration-
free. See Section III for details.

Trapezoidal-rule (second-order) implicit integration is used on the

describing equations of most elements that are described by ordinary differential
equations. The result is the formation of an associated set of real, simultaneous,
algebraic equations that must be solved at each time step (see Ref. #1) • These
equations are placed in nodal-admittance form, with new unknown voltages as
variables, and are solved by ordered triangular factorization (Ref.#4).

Program output consists of component variables (e.g., branch currents or

voltages, machine torques or speeds, etc.) as functions of time, for those
variables that were requested by the user. Both printed and plotted output is
possible, with plotting available in either character or vector-graphic mode. See
Section#XIV for the batch-mode (both character and vector) plotting, and
Section#XVI for the details of interactive (Spy) usage.

Initial conditions for differential equations of the various components can

be determined automatically by the program for many if not most cases of practical
interest. The most important restriction is to linear elements (nonlinear
components must generally be ignored during phasor steady-state solutions). Yet
injections of the electric network may be specified in terms of power and voltage
I-C. Summary Program Capability - 3

magnitude, thereby providing multi-phase load flow capability. Control system

modeling (TACS) allows for the superposition of an arbitary number of linear phasor
solutions of different frequencies.

An enormous discontinuity in the EMTP occurred during 1984-198S. As DCG/EPRI

made proprietary claims toBPA work (later rejected by BPA in connection with a
Freedom of Information Act request durins Apri~ of 1985), the ATP (~ternat1ve
Transients Program) version was developed outside of BPA by W. #Scott Meyer and
other cooperating individuals and organizations. Because the program was
restructured in important ways, former translators had to be abandoned. A new
beginning has taken place.

As a general rule, the new EMTP (i.e., ATP) is less demanding of computers
than were the older ("M39." and before) versions. However, structure is different,
so successful experience gained from "M39." and earlier versions is being omitted
from this documentation. Most if not all of the two dozen. or more distinct
computers that once were proven to be EMTP-compatible (for the old code) probably
remain compatible for the new code, too. Yet this is not yet known for sure. As
an honest, conservative approach, all former (pre-ATP) material is being removed.
For those wanting information about the portability of "M39." and earlier EMTP
Versions, refer to the Rule Book dated June, 1984.

For all computer systems, program execution begins with a one-line prompt
that shows the most important alternatives within parentheses:

$emtp
EMTP begins. Send (SPY, file_name, DISK, HELP, GO, KEY)
Spy

If the user is communicating with the operating system in real time via a keyboard
(as opposed to being horne in bed while some batch-mode processor runs his job
during the middle of the night), then his next input is crucial to how the program
begins execution. If the user knows nothing, he might send the 4th listed
alternative ("HELP"), which results in the following universal information about
the various choices:

1) "SPY" is the gateway to interactive execution, observation, and control,

as documented in section#XVI of the Rule Book. For details, send "SPY", "HELP"
and then "ALL" resulting in a total of about SOO lines of instruction.

2) "file name". If not one of the listed key words (in capital letters),
the input line is taken as the name of a disk file of data. for batch-mode solution.
If this ends with a period, ".dat" (the implied file type DATTYP of the
STARTUP file) will be appended.

3) "DISK" is request for later prompt for LUNIT6 disk file name.

4) "HELP" provides the overview of options now being read.

5) "GO" is for batch solution, like 2, only for the special case of an
external connection of the data file to LUNITS.

6) "KEY" is for use of LUNIT5#=#S data input (no use of LUNT10 cache).

7) "STOP" will terminate execution immediately (FORTRAN STOP).

The 1st alternative, "SPY", should be used only with those computers that have
the capability of interactive EMTP execution, observation, and control. Verify
availability in the installation-dependent section applicable to the computer of
interest before any such attempt. Then refer to Section#XVI for generic
instructions of usage. A disk file name. may follow "SPY", separated by a blank
and possibly preceed~d by the character. "@" (indicating a Spy command file rather
than an EMTP data file). For further details, see the "DATA" command of Spy in
Section XVI:"C-l.
I-C. Summary Program Capability - 4

For non-SPY EMTP execution, it is the 2nd option ("file_name") of the

initial EMTP prompt that can always be used. Just send the name of any legal disk
file that contains EMTP data to be solved. Since such names depend upon computer
system (file names were not standardized by ANSI FORTRAN#77), any example might
be misleading, so none will be given.

Arguments of the type used with SINCLUDE can follow the file name for
special cases. Of course, a special data file is required, and arguments must
match the demands of the data file in both number and type. If ".dat" is not
explicitely keyed, remember to leave room for it (at least 4 blanks) before any
arguments begin, since the ".dat" will erase whatever exists at the time and
place of its application. An illustration using a single argument is provided by
BENCHMARK DC-65, which begins execution as follows. Note that there is only one
argument, the end time TMAX of the study, which is being set to 7/10 second:

Semtp
EMTP begins. Send (SPY, file_name, DISK, HELP, GO, KEY)
dc65. 0.70

For more details, see "DATA BASE MODULE" of Section XIX-F. Two or more arguments
require use of a comma "," as a separator (possibly changed by variable CHRCOM
on card 19 of the STARTUP file). To continue the argument list on a second or
later input line, simply key "SS" (possibly changed by variable CHRCOM on card
19 of the STARTUP file) on the right in any columns not exceeding 79-80. The
following continuation line begins in column 2 (column 1 is ignored, so do not
begin an argument there). There is no limit to the number of such continuation
lines.

The third possible beginning is "DISK", which provides a universal way of

sending the EMTP's LUNIT6 output to a disk file of the user's choice, in case of
non-SPY execution. If the user is communicating with the operating system in real
time, and i f his computer has windows that can be .scrolled the way- Apollo's can,
then usage of "DISK" is not generally recommended, since it masks important
information about how execution is progressing. For example, the user will not
know how close to termination a simulation might be. On the other hand, in cases
of batch-mode solution with the user at home and asleep in bed, this is precisely
what is wanted. For such use, the "DISK" request is sent first, followed by
"file_name" (to specify the data), followed by a second file name to which LUNIT6
is to be connected. If such commands are done in real time, the third and final
input will be in response to the prompt:

Send desired disk file name for LUNIT6:

To over-write an existing file of the same name, append "-r" or "-R" for most
computers. For example: "dc4. -rtf. Without this request to replace the old file
with the new one, the EMTP will prompt for a correction.

The 5th alternative input is "GO", which is not universal, and which is not
recommended for any computer that has dynamic OPEN/CLOSE capability. It is only
necessary and sufficient for those installations that lack such capability (e.g.,
mainframe IBM systems) --- computers that require the user to connect the EMTP
input data file externally. For typical batch-mode IBM usage, this would be as
part of the Job Control Language that runs the program. The "GO" command then
informs the computer that data has already been connected, and that the user now
wants the solution to proceed.

The 6th al ternati ve input is "KEY", which has specialized use. One
application is for program (or data) debugging using computers with windows (see
the Apollo pages). Another application is for the production of batch-mode EMTP
plots one at a time, with the user allowed to see the preceding plot before
creating the following plot card. This assumes that the user is communicating with
the operating system in real time, and that he is using a terminal that is capable
of displaying the requested plots. It also assumes that the simulation of interest
has already been performed, and that raw plot data points have been saved on disk
(integer miscellaneous data parameter ICAT > 0). Consider the following sequence
of keyed input lines in response to the initial EMTP prompt:-
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 1

KEY
$OPEN, UNIT=4 FILE=//A/WSM/DC3T054.PL4 .... (etc.)
REPLOT
144 1. 0.0 20. 18-A 18-B 18-C

The 2nd card shown connects the plot file to the program, whereas the 3rd
("REPLOT") transfers control to batch-mode EMTP plotting. The 4th card is the 1st
of an indeterminate number of batch-mode EMTP plot cards. Since these are only
read one at a time as needed, the user can request whatever he wants in whatever
quantity he wants, based of the results of previous plots. It is possible that an
extra card, "DISK PLOT DATA", might be required after "KEY" and before
"REPLOT". This is the case for those program versions (e.g., Apollo) that do not
have an LUNIT4 connection to disk by default. There may also be need of a
"CALCOMP PLOT" or "PRINTER PLOT" request before the first [Link] card, if .the
STARTUP file does not correspond to the available mode of the terminal being used.
Finally, remember that the $OPEN card is installation-dependent. For details
of this example, see BENCHMARK DC-54.

The 7th and final alternative, not suggested by the prompt, ~s "STOP",
which represents a generic way to terminate program execution. But since most if
not all computers have vendor-specific ways that may be more convenient and
natural, it is unclear whether the average user will want to key "STOP" just to
halt the program.

Once program execution is under way, output designed for the line printer
(the LUNIT6 I/O channel) will be created at intervals, and variables of interest
may be written to a disk file (typically with file type ".PL4") for later
plotting. Whether the user sees much if any of this will depend upon whether or
not he can see the LUNIT6 output on a computer monitor during this time. The
"DISK" conunand obviously prevents this for most systems, as might the "GO"
conunand (if a file were assigned externally to LUNIT6).

Formal error terminations are a special form of output with which every user
should be familiar. It is difficult to overlook any such messages, since the
LUNIT6 output is marked before and after by the following characteristic, 4-line
band of printing that is a full 132 columns wide:

ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ .. , etc.
ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/ERROR/

Following such an introduction will be 5 lines of standard explanation ("You lose,

fella ..• ") to which only the beginning user need pay any attention. But then
comes valuable information, beginning an 80-column card image of the last-read data
card. Location of the difficulty in the EMTP source code is provided by the
numbers that are labeled as: "KILL code number", "Overlay number", and "Nearby
statement number". Finally, there is the specific error message itself, always
beginning with "KILL =XX" where "XX" is the KILL-code number (between unity and
about 230). After a second printing. of the "ERROR/ERROR" band, there will be
attempted recovery of execution, with the program reading through remaining data
cards until a "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card is found. Case sununary statistics will
then separate the error termination from the following solution (if enough data
remains to be solved).

Non-fatal warning messages are usually much more inconspicuous, but should
be looked for, and understood, by the intelligent user. Usually such messages will
be indented, and often they are preceded by several special symbols. As an
example, consider: "///##Warning.##Nonzero XOPT or COPT differs from the power
frequency of 6.00000000E+Ol Hz. Did the user really want this?" Not shown here
is the indentation of two spaces.
I-D. $-Cards of ·CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered AIbitrarily - 2

I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily

An EMTP data case is made of EMTP data cards (or more formally, of 80-column
card-image records, in this day of CRT monitors). Most such cards require specific
ordering (see Section I-I), so are the subject of later sections of this manual
(Section#IIonward) . But there is an exception -- a class of cards called
"$-cards" for which ordering is arbitary. Such cards will be explained in the
remainder of this section.

A $-card (pronounced "dollar card") consists of a dollar sign in column

one, followed immediately by some short command. All such cards are requests for
operations that can be serviced locally within installation-dependent SUBROUTINE
CIMAGE. Due to the installation-dependent character, it is true that no one can
be sure of what applies to all systems. For example, a particular computer might
refuse to recognize any such card. Yet this should not happen. There should be
a solid, universal framework that applies to all computers for the following cards:

1- $OPEN 2. $CLOSE 3. $WIDTH

4. $ABORT 5. $ ENABLE 6. $NEW EPSILN, EPS
7. $MONITOR 8. $LISTOFF 9. $LISTON
10. $VINTAGE,M 11- $STOP 12. $WATCH
13. $ COMMENT 14. $DEBUG, M 15. $UNITS
16. $ PUNCH 17. $ERASE 18. $ STARTUP, file name
19. $KEY 20. $ BREAK 2" 1,,vcLU I:.E

It is such universal rules that will be described in the remainder of the present
section. For specifics of computer- or installation-dependent exceptions or
extensions, see that section of the Rule Book that applies to the computer of
interest.

I-D-1. SOPEN to connect a disk file to an I/O channel.

$OPEN##is used to connect a disk file to an I/O channel of the program.

Similar to the ANSI FORTRAN#77 definitions of these statements, qualifiers are
allows. While some qualifiers are required for all computers (e.g., the I/O unit
number with qualifier "UNIT=") , others (e. g., the record length specification
"RECL=") may be required only for certain computers. So, although details may vary
from computer to computer, the structure is universal, and this is what will now
be summarized. First, consider sample $OPEN usage for Apollo, as drawn from
BENCHMARK DC-54 (and split into two lines only for ease of display):

$OPEN, UNIT=4 FILE=//A/WSM/DC3T054.PL4 FORM=UNFORMATTED

STATUS=OLD RECL=SOOO

Note the single comma, after the request word. All other qualifiers are separated
from each other by one or more blanks, not commas (note!). Although the display
has been spread onto a second line for convenience of presentation, this is not
allowed as EMTP data, which must all fit within a single, SO-column card image.
The qualifiers can appear in any order, and variations should be obvious to any
FORTRAN programmer. For example, FORM=FORMATTED would be possible, as would
STATUS=NEW, STATUS=SCRATCH, or STATUS=UNKNOWN. Yet some of this is
computer-dependent. For example, VAX can always create a NEW file (given a higher
version number by VAX/VMS), whereas Apollo only can do so if a file of the desired
name does not already ~xists. An unfortunate peculiarity of Apollo Aegis is the
need for the "RECL=" qualifier (most systems can dispense with this detail).
Remember that using STATUS=SCRATCH conflicts with the use of "FILE=", so these
two should never be used together (see the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-24 for
sample STATUS=SCRATCH usage).

An illustration of $OPEN usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-40, which

c'ontinues the Monte Carlo simulation of DC-24 (which only performed 3 of the 6
total energizations)~~sing "START AGAIN". Before emtp tables can be read via I/O
channel LUNIT2#=#2, the disk file storing them must be connected. The data card
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered AIbitrarily - 3

interpretation for this operation is as follows:

Other test cases illustrating $OPEN are: 1)##DC-3, which illustrates the manual
naming of the plot file (rather than having a random name based on the date and
time of day); 2) ##the second subcase of DC-24, to connect the file of
user-supplied switch times, [Link], to unit 8; 3)##DC-32, where the disk
file of program tables (created because MEMSAV#=#l) must be connected by the
user. 4)##DC-46, where the plot file created by DC-45, DC45.PL4, is connected
for postprocessing using TACS; 4)##DC-49, which is like DC-40 except for the
lack of dice rolling (it provides a continuation for the deterministic DC-32);
5)##DC-54, where the plot file created by DC-3, DC3T054.PL4, is connected for
purposes of delayed, batch-mode plotting. using REPLOT.

Should more than 80 columns be required due to a long file name, the user is
advised to use a continuation request "=$$" on the right of his $OPEN card. All
partial cards begin with "$OPEN," in columns 1-6. For an illustration of such
usage, see BENCHMARK DC-66. Interpretation will be identical whether or not the
$OPEN is contained on a single card.

I-D-2. $ CLOSE to ciisconnect a ciisk file from an I/O channel

$CLOSE is used to disconnect a previously-connected file. Sometimes this

is done to protect a data file from being written on after it has been used. At
other times it is used to free the I/O unit for another connection that is to
follow. In any case, only the UNIT= and STATUS= qualifiers are applicable.
The first of these is self-explanatory, and the second will either he STATUS=SAVE
or STATUS=DELETE.

The addition of "SHOW CARDS" anywhere on the $CLOSE request will result
in a listing of 80-column card images of the file just as though the cards had been
punched (see $PUNCH). This is just before the file is released. For an
illustration, see the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-52.

An illustration of $CLOSE usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-40, which

continues the simulation of DC-24 using "START AGAIN". After emtp tables have
been connected and read, they are immediately disconnected to protect them against
some unplanned, stray WRITE to the I/O channel being used (this is the
extra-cautious approach). The following. interpretation documents this:

Any data case with MEMSAV#=#l, or the associated subsequent "START AGAIN", will
use $CLOSE. Other test cases are the first and third subcases of BENCHMARK
DC-24, DC-32, all subcases of DC-49, and the 2nd subcase of DC-52.

I-D-3. $W1D'l'EI to change the L'ONIT6 output width

$WIDTH,#M##allows the user to modify the LUNIT6 output Width, most commonly
between 80 and 132. Such $-card specification will overide the initial choice that
has been built into the STARTUP file. All output structures for simulation usage
can have the width so controlled, although little has been done for non-simulation
supporting programs (e. g. , "LINE CONSTANTS"), most of which produce only
132-column output. '~ne usage that may have nothing to do with width is to have
132-column output everywhere except for the branch flows and nodal injections of
I-D. $-Caras of "CIMAGE".Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 4

the phasor solution. This can both speed output and save considerable paper, since
no reverse flows are printed, and the forward flows are shorter.

An illustration of $WIDTH usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-5, which

illustrates 80-column output capability of the program. The following
interpretation documents this:

1:-D-4. SABORT to proceed to next clatasubcase

$ABORT results only in setting the error flag KILL#=#88. For most places
of a data case, this will direct control to special error message number 88, and
then result in a skip to the next data subcase of the disk file, should one exist.
The location of $ABORT is not arbitrary, although it can be placed before just
about any blank terminator card as an extra record.

An illustration of $ABORT usage is provided by the second subcase of

BENCHMARK DC-42, which is to abort before the blank card ending plot cards. The
following interpretation documents this:

1:-D-5. SDI:SABLE to treat data cards as if they were comment cards

SENABLE to end such implicit commenting of data cards

The $DISABLE/ENABLE feature is one trivial, universal feature. First,

a $DISABLE card tells the EMTP to treat all following data cards as if they were
comment cards, until the following appearance of a $ENABLE card. This is a very
handy feature for big blocks of comments, or for the temporary removal of
components from a data case without actually throwing the records away (one might
later want to restore them, and this allows easy remembrance) .

Any $ INCLUDE file may contain $DISABLE and $ENABLE as a matched pair.
Just be sure that $ ENABLE always appears in the same disk file as the preceding
$DISABLE. For an illustration, see BENCHMARK DC-17, which has $DISABLE and
$ENABLE within [Link], which is called by [Link] (in turn called
by DCn .DAT) •

The $DISABLE/ENABLE feature is no longer actually in SUBROUTINE [Link]

where it began. Instead, the cards to be discarded are ignored as they are first
read from disk at the beginning of execution. Only the last card of the block will
be retained, and this will be recreated to include a count of the total number of
data cards (including both $DISABLE and $ENABLE) of the extraneous block. As
an illustration, for BENCHMARK DC-17 this appears as follows:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
End of data to be .ignored (implicit ftC ft). I $ENABLE, ONLY THIS ONE C
•.. ARD ENDING 5 CARDS OF $DISABLE/ENABLE IS RETAINED.
Another illustration can be found in BENCHMARK DC-24:
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 5

1:-D-6. SNEW EPS1:LN to alter miscellaneou! data parameter EPS1:LN

SNEW#EPSILN,#EPS##allows the user to redefine the floating-point

misceilaneous data parameter EPSILN at any point of the input data. The new
nurner:'cal value is "EPS" --- a free-format, positive, floating-point constant.
Consu:t Section II-B for general information about EPSILN.

Interpretation of the $NEW#EPSILN request confirms both the old and the new
value for the tolerance. The following illustration is from BENCHMARK DC-12:

I-D-7. SMONITOR to display date and time on the computer monitor

$MONITOR was originally designed to result in the display of this interpeted

card ~age on the CRT monitor, which might be useful if the LUNIT6 output otherwise
would be unseen <e.g., it might be sent to disk rather than to the computer CRT
monitcr). The result would be a single, 132-column line: 51 columns for the
interFretation on the left, 1 columns for the vertical separator, and finally the
80-col~~ card image (which begins with the request $MONITOR) on the right. Since
the card in question usually should serve to mark some position of special
importance (e.g., the final branch card), comment information to inform the user
is apF::opriate. Any such arbitrary text can follow the in-line comment marker "{",
of co;.:::-se.

So much for the original use of $MONITOR, which was designed before the use
of scientific workstations such as Apollo. For dedicated personal computers that
have scrollable windows, there is seldom a good excuse for diverting the LUNIT6
output from the window in which the program is being executed. So, there was
little use for the $-card. When the idea of a request for the wall-clock time came
to mind, it was easy to switch to this more useful and different meaning. So, for
Apollc and some other more modern computers, $MONITOR will still produce the
132-cclumn line of the preceding paragraph, but this is just part of the regular
LUNITE output. The card index for LUNTI0 storage is displayed, as shown by the
following illustration:

But there also is an extra such output that includes the date and the time in the
interpretation, and this extra line goes to the CRT screen (Apollo window). An
illustration follows:

To observe such usage, see the solution to standard test case BENCHMARK DC-3 for
the computer of interest. The preceding. two examples were taken from the Apollo
solution of this data.
I-D. $-Cards of ftCIMAGE" Can Be Ordered AIbitrarily - 6

7-0-8. SL7STOFF to cease output1nq 1nterpreted 1maqes of 1nput cards

:I -0-9 • .!IIi$~LI.:!7t.!lS~TO~N~_~t:::o~r..:!ei:.ls~t~1T~ne......!!<o:.!Out.::t~p~u~t=:"1",,,'n~q::t-l.=·~n~t:.:o:e""rp,.......re~t::e""d",,-=;m=a::g""e,..s......o...,f=--l.=·""n""p;.::u""t.....,c",,&r=d.s=

$LISTOFF/LISTON is another universal feature. First a $LISTOFF card

tells the EMTP not to display and interpret data cards that follow. This
continues until a following $LISTON card is encountered. The purpose of such use
generally is to minimize the size of the output file by omitting the listing and
interpretation of blocks of data that have been tested and used before. This is
particularly advantageous for users of slow computer terminals, in order that
solution speed not be inhibited by unneeded output (assuming that i t goes to the
terminal display) .

An illustration of such usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-17. The

interpretation is documented by the following two consecutive lines from the LUNIT6
output of the solution:

Note that two card images, numbered 5506 and 5507 (indices of the EMTP card cache),
are invisible in between the two that are seen in the solution.

7-0-~O. SVIN'I'AGE to choose among a1ternate data formats

$VINTAGE,#M allows the user to choose between old and new data formats on
a component by component basis. Here integer constant "M" characterizes the age
of the data (only 0 and 1 have meaning so far). Data options will be described
later in the manual, along with the components that allow such a choice.

Interpretation of the $VINTAGE request is simple enough. The following was

drawn from the solution to BENCHMARK DCPRINT-3:

7-0-~~. SSTOP to terminate the present solution

$STOP terminates the present "solution" as quickly as possible. But what

exactly is meant by "solution" in this context? As this feature was originally
conceived and implemented, the EMTP response to $STOP was the termination of
program execution via an immediate, local FORTRAN STOP statement. So much for the
original idea, which rapidly was modified to rely upon an installation-dependent
module that serves this function: CALL STOPTP. Then a much bigger change came
wi th the concept that EMTP execution should not be restricted to a single data
file. Recall that one disk file (a collection of stacked EMTP data cases) after
another can now be solved without execution ever terminating. This is for non-Spy
usage, Wherein execution begins with the opening prompt:

EMTP begins. Send (Spy, file_name, DISK, HELP, GO, KEY) :

When data of a disk file runs out (blank card ending the last EMTP data case),
execution returns to this prompt. Well, this is the intended result of $STOP
usage, too. Yet operation is necessarily less than perfect, depending upon where
execution was when the card was read. All "[Link]" can do is set a flag (KILL =
-9999) that will be looked for at various places in the program (e.g., the end of
each overlay). Since there are hundreds of calls to the module, it is unrealistic
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 7

to burden the program with a check after each call. So, there will be the hoped
for reprompt if nothing illegal to the operating system (e.g., a numerical decode
of the character string "$STOP") occurs before the flag is observed. For an
example, see BENCHMARK DC-42, the second subcase of which uses $STOP after plot
cards. There is no problem with recognition and recovery, it will. be seen.

Interpretation of the $STOP request is simple enough. The following was

drawn from the solution to BENCHMARK DC-13:

%-D-12. SWATCH to request extra. periodic output to CRT

$WATCH,#M is used to define the frequency of special, extra output that

always goes to the CRT monitor. This really only has meaning. if the. LUNIT6 output
would otherwise be unseen (e. g., it might be sent to disk rather than to the
computer CRT monitor). If "M" were 100, then every 100-th input data card would
be shown on the CRT monitor. This periodic output is only 80-columns in width, and
it begins with the LUNTI0 index number, which. leaves only 72 columns for the input
card image (to the right of a colon). As an illustration, consider the solution
to BENCHMARK DC-12, of which one of the more readily recognizable monotoring
lines is the following:

Interpretation of the $WATCH request includes confirmation of the

user-specified frequency "M". The following. is an illustration drawn from
BENCHMARK DC-12:

%-D-13. $COMMENT to toggle the syppression of comment cards

$ COMMENT serves to toggle the binary flag that controls the interpreted
output of comment cards among input data. Following the first appearance of such
a card, comment cards will be discarded and. not seen in the LUNIT6 file. A second
such request card will return the control to its original state, so that subsequent
comment cards will be interpreted and displayed.

An example of such usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-3. As for the

interpretation, it confirms the new status of the binary flag: zero means that
comment cards are seen, whereas unity means that comment cards are being.
suppressed. The first usage within BENCHMARK DC-3 is interpreted as follows:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------I----~--------------------
Toggle comment card destruction. New Nl1 = 1. I$COMMENT {
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - B

I-D-14. SDEBUG for local control of diagnostic printout

$DEBUG,#M is a request to redefine the current diagnostic printout control

variable IPRSUP (see the integer miscellaneous data card of Section II-B) to
value "M" (an integer constant most often in the range of 0 to 9). Confined to
the UTPF overlay currently being executed, this allows redefinition of the
DIAGNOSTIC printout level. But when the current UTPF overlay is exited, the
effect of the $DEBUG definition is lost. Free-format is used for the ", #M" part,
so imbedded blanks are optional here. Printout can be turned off later in the same
UTPF overlay using "$DEBUG,#O" (remember that level zero implies none). Use of
this $-card does not replace the "DIAGNOSTIC" special-request card of Section
II-A (for diagnostic printout control overlay by overlay). In fact, this is why
the $-card definition is local to the UTPF overlay in which ~t is read: because
IPRSOV is used to reset IPRSUP every time a new overlay is begun.

A somewhat artificial example of such usage is provided by BENCHMARK

DCPRINT-5. The interpretation confirms the new value of diagnostic control, of
course:

I-D-15. $UNITS to alter XOPT and/or COPT

$UNITS,#XOPT,#COPT is used to change the two floating-point miscellaneous

data parameters that specify the units of input inductance (millihenries vs. ohms)
and capacitance (microfarads vs. micromhos). This allows different branches to
have different such choices, and it modi:fies the initial choice that is read :from
the floating-point miscellaneous data card of Section II-B.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the new values for parameters XOPT
and COPT. An illustration is provided by BENCHMARK DC-11, from which the
following line was taken:

I-D-16. $PUNCB to flush the buffer that holds punChed cards

$PUNCH##is used to flush card images that have accumulated in the

punched-card buffer (originally I/O channel number LUNIT7) since the last such
usage, or since the last usage of $ERASE -- which ever is the most recent.
Because $ PUNCH involves installation-dependent code, details could vary among
different computers.

Of course, punched cards have just about gone the way of the dinosaur, so the
first question is about the disposition of the card images. Most systems will
produce both a separate disk file and also a labeled display of the card images on
LUNIT6. For details, consult the appropriate installation-dependent information
in Section I-F, and look to established illustrations such as BENCHMARK DC-13.
It should always be legal to follow the request by a disk file name that is
separated from the preceding "$ PUNCH " by a comma and an arbitrary number of
blanks. See the illustration immediately below. But be aware that there is no
guarantee that all computers will actually send the punched cards to that file.
Most should, however.
I-D. $-Cards of ftCIMAGE ft Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 9

Interpretation of the $PUNCH request is simple enough. The following was

drawn from the solution to BENCHMARK DC-13:

Immediately after this will follow a listing of the card images being
processed, below a 4-line heading that includes an 80-column ruler. The heading
will appear as follows (truncated on the right):

A listing of 80-column card images now being flushed from punch buffer folIo
=======~================================---================================

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
============================================================================

After the last card image, there will be a single bounding record to inform
the user that card "punching" is done. This will appear as follows (truncated on
the right):

=========< End of LUNIT7 punched cards as flushed by $PUNCH request >===

Rather than place the disk file name on the $PUNCH card itself, it should
be possible for him to connect the file manually using a separate, preceding $OPEN
statement. Should unusual file attributes be desired or required, this might be
needed in exceptional cases.

:I-D-17. SEBASE to ini [Link] the buffer that holds punched cards

$ERASE##is used to destroy any card images that might be in the punch buffer
at the time this request is encountered. A conservative strategy is to always
include $ ERASE at the start of data that is designed to result in punched cards,
since it is not always clear what might be executed ahead of the data case of
interest.

Interpretation of the $ERASE request confirms the number of card images in

the punch buffer at the time of usage. The following was drawn from the beginning
of solution to BENCHMARK DC-13. Note that no punched cards existed at the
beginning of execution:

:I-D-1B. SSTARTUP to re-read the STARTUP fil.e

$STARTUP,#file name is used to read a STARTUP file (see Section I-E-2)

immediately, at the-instant of time the $-card is read. One or more spaces
following the comma after "$STARTUP" are optional. The file name can be any
complete, legal specification for the computer being used, not to exceed
32#characters. l.t is the name of the STARTUP disk file that is wanted at this
point of program execution. There must not be a trailing comma (at the end of the
file name).

An illustration of $ STARTUP usage is provided by the first and third

subcases of standard test case BENCHMARK DC-37. The following interpretation was
taken from the solution of the first subcase, which calls for revised parameters
immediately before plotting:
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 10

C 1 2 345 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ---------------------<--------------------------- I -------------------------
Reinitialize using this STARTUP file. I$STARTUP, [Link]

];-D-19. $KEY to change card input from LUNT10 channel. to keyboard

$KEY##is used to provide keyboard input of EMTP data cards at some

preselected location (the position of the $KEY request) of the program. Maybe
when execution begins the user is unsure of some data, and he wants to supply that
data later, based on initial program output. This is possible via $KEY, which
can be used as often as desired. Each time $KEY is encountered, input will. be
switched from the normal card image storage of I/O unit LUNT10. Then input cards
will be read from the keyboard until the user terminates such interactive input
with "END", at which point input will be switched returned to the normal card
image storage of LUNT10 at the record immediately following the $KEY request.
In terms of card counting, keyboard input does not affect variable NUMDCD of the
comment-card interpretation. In effect, keyboard input in extra input.

Note that $KEY is for interactive use only. It either provides no

assistance at all, or will not function properly, for batch-mode usage. Standard
test cases do not illustrate such usage because, if it were added, then the case
could not be properly executed in the batch mode. So, if the user wants an
illustration, he must make his own. In any case, interpretation should appear as
follows:

I-D-20. $BREAK to [Link] trigger a d:[Link]-level SPY interrupt

$BREAK##is similar to the preceding $KEY, only here the alternate input is
changed to the SPY input channel rather than the keyboard. Of course, the two
channels may be the same, for a crude, single-window implementation. But whether
or not the input medium or channel is distinct, the destination of the input data
is completely different. Whereas $KEY introduces normal EMTP data cards, $BREAK
introduces Spy data. Time-sharing has automatically been disabled, so Spy input
will continue until the user sends "GO". Of course, $BREAK can only be used
with interactive execution (Spy), and this must be selected at the beginning of
execution.

$BREAK##is much more powerful than $KEY because Spy provides a new
dimension of flexibility. For example, the user can modify any EMTP variable using
DEPOSIT, and this includes the variable controlling $KEY usage. That is, if the
user wants $KEY to be in effect when he leaves Spy with a subsequent "GO",
he need only change the value of binary flag KEYBRD from zero to one.

Since the disaster-level audible warning of Spy is used by the program in

other circumstances, it is natural to employ it here, too. This alerts the user
to the fact that the program is ready for interactive input. In the case of
apollo, there will be the familiar audible tones of $HONK (10) , which are
[Link] by a simple carriage return in the SPY window. After the last SPY input
that is of interest to the user, "GO" will end the SPY input and return control
to the batch-mode input that began the interactive operation. If the user wants
to switch from SPY input to data card input, he need merely follow the $BREAK
request by $KEY of the preceding subsection. They work well together as such an
ordered pair.

Note that $BREAK is for interactive use only. It either provides no

assistance at all, or will not function properly, for batch-mode usage. Standard
I-D. $-Cards of "CIMAGE" Can Be Ordered Arbitrarily - 11

test cases do not illustrate such usage because, if it were added, the case then
could not be properly executed in the batch mode. So, if the user wants an
illustration, he must make his own. In any case, interpretation should appear as
follows:

I -0-21. !I'$~I....
N..,C""L"!:UD~...
E'___ _ _~n~o<-...:1.""o""n....:::tg~e"'r......,w"'1=·..>:t~h"".i....n____'_'C::<:I""MA,""",G,..E,,-"

$INCLUDE##is a very powerful and important command that once was honored by
"CIMAGE". But since the advent of data modularization and sorting by class (see
Section I-J), the original code of "CIMAGE" was removed. In its place, fortified
and generalized service has been added at the beginning of program execution. So,
if the original data had $ INCLUDE usage, all of this will have been converted
before "CIMAGE" is called for the first time.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 1

I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives

ATP has been proven to be compatible with more than 30 distinctly

different computer systems during its first decade (1984-1993), although at any
one time, current program versions typically will be available only for those few
computer systems that are actively supported by important contacts. It is machine
(i.e., computer) translation of a Universal Transients Program File (UTPF) that
makes such portability possible. Conceived in November of 1974 (see
Reference 13), this procedure utilizes a different Editor/Translator (E/T) program
for each different computer system of interest. An E/T machine translates the
UTPF, converting it to legal EMTP FORTRAN for the particular installation of
interest. This translation is done by program maintenance and hence should not be
of concern to normal users. Just keep in mind that all EMTP code actually begins
with the same master file (the UTPF) , but differs according to the built-in or
specially-requested properties of the translation. The need to update UTPF and
computer-specific code regularly can not be stressed enough. With this in mind,
the writing of a cornmon Rule Book for all different computer systems is just a
little tricky.

Numerical precision is a computer-dependent detail about which a good user

should be aware. The precision'of INTEGER values is not much of an issue, since
all computers in recent years allow adequate preCision for all values of interest.
Floating-point representation in the form of either REAL or COMPLEX variables is
the only realistic concern, then. Today, most computers are byte-organized, and
they allow REAL*8 and COMPLEX*16 representations, which provide about 15 or 16
decimal digits of precision. Problems of numerical roundoff that once were
associated with 36-bit program versions for word machines such as Honeywell, DEC
PDP-I0 and SYSTEM20, and Univac have largely disappeared. Either such
computers are no longer being used for the EMTP, or program versions have been
converted to use DOUBLE PRECISION, which provides an enormous 72 bits of
floating-point precision. The question of COMPLEX is trickier because not all
vendors allow precision equal to that of DOUBLE PRECISION for this case. Such
was the case with .l\pollo, which was limited to 32 bits of precision up to
operating system release SR9.7. But beginning with SRlO.O, Apollo too has DOUBLE
PRECISION COMPLEX. Fortunately, it is only the "CABLE CONSTANTS" calculation that
is affected by the use of COMPLEX. So, while most program users need not be
concerned very much with computer precision, they certainly should be aware of the
precision that is being used.

Disk file names are not defined by the ANSI FORTR.l\N 77 standard. Disk,
directory, and subdirectory names, and file extensions (if any) all may vary from
one system to another. There are no general rules. Furthermore, beware of the
fact that some operating systems (e.g. Unix and Apollo Aegis SRlO.x) are case
sensitive as far as file naming is concerned. Hence, all program features that
depend on file names (e.g., REPLOT, $ INCLUDE , $ PUNCH , etc.) might vary from one
computer to another. Most such usage relies on the FORTR.l\N OPEN statement,
which may involve further variations, and which may not even exist in the intended,
dynamic sense (for years, ATP versions for IBM mainframe computers allowed no such
use). Installation-dependent information must be consulted for all aspects of disk
file naming and use.

Interactive execution, observation, and control ("SPY") is highly dependent

upon the computer system in various ways, beginning with the display possibilities.
If available, "windows" should be used for display, of course (see Apollo as an
example) . The keyboard interrupt will vary from computer to computer. Spy
functions that are based on memory location (e.g., "EXAMINE" or "DEPOSIT") might
have trouble for some computers. Etc.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 2

The environment for actually executing EMTP depends upon the computer being
used and also, sometimes, upon the mode of usage (thinking of the difference
between "batch mode" and "demand service"). Operating systems will vary with
manufacturer, except for the increasingly popular Unix that now is available (but
not always used) for almost any computer. Hence, no details that are universal,
and applicable to all computers, can be provided. Yet local experts should always
be able to advise about such matters.

There is another type of difference among program versions that can

profitably be described in general terms, however. As summarized in Ref. 17,
FORTRAN statements that are highly dependent on computer brand and/or installation
usage have been isolated in installation-dependent EMTP modules. Examples of this
are batch mode plotting, SPY windows, intrinsic functions, etc. Rules peculiar to
such code should be described in files that accompany the program versions of
interest (e.g., READ [Link] of Salford EMTP distribution for Intel PCs running
MS-DOS) .

Still another aspect of installation-dependent variation is embodied in

program "start up" files. For Salford EMTP and most other program versions that
use this concept, the disk file names are STARTUP, STARTSPY, and GRAPHICS (use
lower case for case-sensitive operating systems). The idea is simple: rather than
build installation-dependent choices into EMTP FORTRAN, installation-dependent
parameters are loaded as data from disk files that are under user control. Details
are provided in following sections.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 3

I.E.1 STARTUP File for Program Initialization

STARTUP is the name of a disk file that will be used by all computers to
initialize installation-dependent variables as a new disk file of input data is
about to be loaded. Possibly the name will be different for some computers or
installations, however, because it is installation-dependent FUNCTION RFUNL1
that connects STARTUP. In any case, a representative sample of the disk file for
Salford EMTP, as distributed by the Can/Am user group during March of 1994, is
shown immediately below.

1 RHIGH EPSZNO EPWARN EPSTOP EPSUBA EPDGEL EPOMEG SZPLT SZBED TENFLZ
1.D+10 1.D-8 1.D-3 0.1 100. 1. D-16 1.D-15 10.0 72.0 10.
2 SIGMAX TENERG DEGMIN DEGMAX ZNOLIM ( 1), ( 2 ) STATFR ZNVREF XMAXMX AINCR
4.0 1.D+20 0.0 360. 1.0 1.5 60.0 1.E-6 2.0 .05
3 FREQFR HLETT1 Unused VHS VS VH TAXISL VAXISL FILL1 FILL2
0.25 8.0 1.0 10. 10.0 8.0 6. 7.0
4 TOLRCE FHTAX FXSUP FYSUP FXTIT FYTIT VPLOTS VPLOTL Unused FTCARR
8.E-5 0.5 .25 .03 0.10 0.1 1.0 5.0 1.5
5 FXNUMV FXNUMH FVAXTT FXVERT Unused TIMTAC OVRLAP FLZERO EPSILN FLTINF
1.5 5.0 -2.5 0.0 0.0 0.5 1. D-12 1.D-8 1.D+19
6 XHEADM YHEADM HGTHDM XCASTI YCASTI HGTCST XLEGND YLEGND HGTLGN PIXPUN
2.5 7.95 .55 0.5 7.3 .35 0.5 1. 30 .25 40
7 XALPHA YALPHA HGTALF D4FACT PEKEXP EPSLRT EPSPIV PLMARK FACOSC
1.5 6.5 . 25 -2.0 43 . 1.E-12 1. E-16 1.0 0.3
8 NMAUTO INTINF KOL132 MUNIT5 MAXZNO IPRSPY IPRSUP LNPIN MINHAR MAXHAR
1 9999999 132 1 50 o o 6 0 20
9 NFORS2 NIOMAX MRGN LINLIM MPAGE MODE28 KPGRID KPEN(l) KPEN(2) KPEN(3)
30 10 2 100 o 1 3 12 10 11
10 .. (4) KOMLEV NSMTH MODSCR KOLALP MAXFLG LIMCRD NOBLAN MOUSET NOTPPL
14 -1 50 2 5 1 3000 1 o 1
1 NOCOMM NOHELP NEWPL4 JDELAY Unused NSMPLT KOLWID KOLSEP JCOLU1 KSLOWR
o o o 0 -777 50 11 1 o 5
2 KSYMBL NOBACK KOLEXM LTEK NCUT1 NCUT2 INCHPX INCHPY NODPCX LCHLIM
200 1 60 1 13 11 2 2 o o
3 NORUN JTURBO MAXSYM IHS LIMCOL KLEVL KEXTR NOHPGL NOPOST IZGR1
013 3 79 o 000 2
14 IZGR2 LENREC LU6VRT LRLIM KASEND LUNDAT KTRPL4 JORIEN LIMPNL LUNTEX
o o 32768 75 5 3 -4 o 200 -11
5 KINSEN LISTON LIMTAC NOCALC MFLUSH L4BYTE KOMPAR LIST01 NOGNU
1 o 25 o 1000 1 1 o 1
6 LUNIT1 LUNIT2 LUNIT3 LUNIT4 LUNIT5 LUNIT6 LUNIT7 LUNIT8 LUNIT9 LUNT10
21 22 3 -4 1 6 7 8 9 10
17 KS (1) KS(2) KS(3) KS(4) KP(l) KP(2) KP(3) KP(4) KOLROV Unused
o o 12 10 7 14 o o 18
18 Name of language font file ] Window] SPY @K file name ] Central Monte file]
\atp\[Link] junk inclspy .dat
9 SSONLY CHEFLD TEXNAM CHVBAR BRANCH TXCOPY USERID -TRASH -TERRA CHRCOM
PHASOR E DUM I NAME COPY HANNOV TERRA C {} $,
o DATTYP LISTYP PCHTYP PL4TYP EFIELD FMTPL4 PSCTYP -BLANK
.dat .lis .pch .p14
C After regular STARTUP comes optional VMS-like symbol definitions that are
C used for input data file name in response to the opening prompt.
scott:==c:\atp\ {1st of 2 remote directories
ieee:==c:\surges\study\ {2nd of 2
$EOF {Software end-of-file terminates last of 20 or fewer VMS-like symbols

Note that each data card with meaningful numbers is (and must always be)
preceded by a comment card upon which the card number and variable names can
conven~ently be remembered. There are a total of 20 cards, beginning with seven
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 4

cards of floating-point values (read as 10E8.0 data), followed by ten cards of

integers (cards 8-17, read as 1018 data), followed by one card of [Link]
text, and finally, terminated by two cards of ALPHANUMERIC text (A6 names) .
Meanings of all variables for Salford EMTP use follow in natural order:

Card 1. 1st Miscellaneous Floating-point Numbers

1 RHIGH EPSZNO EPWARN EPSTOP EPSUBA EPOGEL EPOMEG SZPLT SZBED TENFAC
1.0+10 1.0-8 1.0-3 0.1 100. 1.0-16 1.0-15 10.0 72.0 10.

RHIGH (1-8) is a near-infinite value of resistance. The program may add such
resistance internally, for reasons of connectivity (e.g., in parallel with
the Type-99 pseudo-nonlinear resistance element). It should be low enough
so as to be legal, yet high enough so that no numerical problems (e.g.,
overflow) result. The reciprocal of 100 times FLZERO is commonly used.

EPSZNO (9-16) is the convergence tolerance for the Newton iteration to solve
nonlinear elements such as ZnO. This is just an initial value. It might
later be redefined by a "ZINC OXIDE" request in EMTP data.

EPWARN (17-24) is the corresponding nonfatal warning tolerance.

EPSTOP (25-32) is the corresponding fatal error tolerance.

EPSUBA (33-40) is the normalized damping index Rp/(2*L/dT) for the Type-59 S.M.
This is just an initial value. It might later be redefined by a
"TOLERANCES" request within S.M. data.

EPOGEL (41-48) is a warning convergence tolerance for the Type-59 S.M. This is
just an initial value that later might be redefined by a "TOLERANCES"
request within S.M. data.

EPOMEG (49-56) is a fatal error tolerance for the Type-59 S.M. This is just a
default value. It might be redefined by a "TOLERANCES" request within
S.M. data.

SZPLT (57-64) is the height of the plotter paper, in [inches], for batch-mode
vector (CALCOMP PLOT) plotting. The value could be changed later by a
"PLOTTER PAPER HEIGHT" request at the start of any data subcase.

SZBEO (65-72) is the limiting plot length in [inches], for the batch-mode vector
(CALCOMP PLOT) plotting. This was originally used for flat-bed plotters
(mnemonically, "size of bed"), which had a clear maximum. SZBED has no
meaning for Salford EMTP with its Epson or LJ2 outputs.

TENFAC (73-80) is a parameter that is used to multiply FLZERO to produce a

larger near-zero tolerance TENFLZ.. Naming comes from the fact that
constant value 10.0 was used at one time for what now is a variable.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 5

Card 2. 2nd ~sce11aneous F1oatinq-point Numbers

2 SIGMAX TENERG DEGMIN DEGMAX ZNOLIM(l) , (2) STATFR ZNVREF XMAXMX AINCR
4.0 1.D+20 0.0 360. 1.0 1.5 60.0 1.E-6 2.0 .05

SIGMAX (1-8) is the number of standard deviations a of a Gaussian (normal)

distribution of switching times that will be accounted for correctly during
a Monte Carlo study. In the absence of a special request using the
following parameter TENERG, any switching times farther below (i. e. ,
earlier than) the mean will be raised to this limit. The value 4,
corresponding to an exception rate of about half of one percent, has been
used for years without complaint.

TENERG (9-16) is the time (in seconds) for table dumping of Monte Carlo
simulations. Any value in excess of 1.E+I0 is interpreted as a request
for table dumping SIGMAX (typically 4) standard deviations before the
smallest mean switching time. This is what the average STATISTICS user
wants, since it will avoid repetitive resimulation of most of the previous
deterministic portion of the solution. For those wanting to dump tables
at time zero, a value less than or equal to -1.E+I0 is required.

DEGMIN (17-24) is the beginning angle of any extra, random switch bias.

DEGMAX (25-32) is the ending angle of any extra, random switch bias.

These two parameters, both in degrees at the power frequency STATFR,

define the time window of the possible extra random delay for STATISTICS
switches. It is variable ITEST that controls such possible use. If
used, the extra random bias will be uniformly distributed over the first
power cycle (time zero through l/STATFR seconds).

ZNOLIM(l) (33-40) is the maximum per unit voltage correction that will be permitted
for any iteration of Newton I s method that is used to solve nonlinear
elements such as Zinc Oxide (ZnO) surge arresters. This initial value
might be redefined later by a ZINC OXIDE request at the beginning of any
data subcase.

ZNOLIM(2) (41-48) is like the preceding ZNOLIM(l) but applies to variable value
rather than the change in that value.

STATFR (49-56) is the default power frequency in [Hertz]. The value could be
redefined later by a "POWER FREQUENCY" request at the start of any data
subcase. Note that a STARTUP file from North America will normally
contain a value of 60 Hz whereas many in the world will want to change this
to 50 Hz.

ZNVREF (57-64) is an indication of the precision of FORTRAN COMPLEX that is

used by CABLE CONSTANTS. If there is full precision (generally 64 bits),
set this value to zero. Such is the case for Salford EMTP, IBM, VAX,
Apollo SRI0.x and most other computers. But for reduced precision (the
case for Apollo SR9.7 which has only single-precision COMPLEX), the value
is interpreted as a reachable tolerance (e.g., 1.E-6 was used for older,
32-bit Apollo precision). April, 1994, warning to Salford EMTP users:
Until the change to zero is approved by Profs. Ametani and Nagaoka of
Doshisha University in Kyoto, Japan, leave the value at 1.E-6 where. it has
been. See April, 1994, newsletter for details.

XMAXMX (65-72) is an initial per unit value that is expected to limit all
variables that are to be tabulated statistically at the conclusion of a
STATISTICS or SYSTEMATIC simulation. Later, during such tabulations,
XMAXMX could be changed by a STATISTICS DATA request. The base value
of each tabulation can be defined on the request itself (see Section XV-B,
parameter BASE in columns 3-14). For the original case of voltage
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 6

tabulations, a value of 2.0 has been used satisfactorily for years.

Actually, there is an additional, hidden factor of safety equal to five.
But for current, power or energy, per unit values may be much less
predictable, so extra care might be required. In any case, XMAXMX is used
only to reserve storage for the tabulation; it does not otherwise affect
results.

AINCR (73-80) is the initial per unit compartment size used for statistical
tabulations. As '..vith the preceding XMAXMX, AINCR later could be
changed by a STATISTICS DATA request.

Card 3. 3rd Miscellaneous Floating-Point Numbers

3 FREQFR HLETT1 Unused VHS VS VH TAXISL VAXISL FILL1 FILL2

0.25 8.0 1.0 10. 10.0 8.0 6. 7.0

FREQFR (1-8) is the old (last-used) fundamental frequency of the interactive

Fourier series calculation. For usage, see the "FOURIER" subcommand of the
"PLOT" command of SPY. Normally this value will be identical to that of
STATFR. If non-positive (typically blank or zero), the program will set
FREQFR = STATFR if it was created after 29 March 1994.

HLETT1 (9-16) is the height lettering for the curve numbers and symbols on the
right edge of a batch-mode, vector-graphic (CALCOMP PLOT) plot. Beside
each curve number and symbol is a sample horizontal line.

VHS (17-24) is the length of the vertical (Y) axis for batch-mode, vector-
graphic (CALCOMP PLOT) graphs.

VS (25-32) is the height of the lower end of the vertical (Y) axis for batch-
mode, vector-graphic (CALCOMP PLOT) graphs.

VH (33-40) is the height of the plot paper being used for batch-mode, vector-
graphic (CALCOMP PLOT) graphs.

TAXISL (41-48) is the length of the horizontal axis of both vector and character
graphs of SPY plotting.

VAXISL (49-56) is the length of the vertical (Y) axis, as used for vector Spy
plotting.

FILL1 (64-72) is for SPY vector-graphic plotting. For Salford EMTP, it is the
color number for SPY "PLOT" axes and their numbers. The floating-point
number will be moved to an INTEGER variable prior to its use, so FILLI
should be an integer (e.g., "6."). For original, monochrome Apollo, FILLI
was a fill-in or visibility factor of the first of two possible
superimposed grids of Spy vector-graphic plotting. Grids were drawn with
dashed lines, and this was the fraction of drawing (as opposed to spacing) .
Unity gave a solid grid, which was usually good enough for at least one of
the grids. If two grids were used (so horizontal and vertical lines every
half unit, for more accuracy), then one could be dashed for
distinguishability.
FILL2 (73-80) is for SPY vector-graphic plotting. For Salford EMTP, it is the
color number for the SPY "PLOT" legend, which begins with the text "Graph
Number", followed by date and time, etc. The floating-point number will
be moved to an INTEGER variable prior to its use, so FILL2 should be
an integer (e.g., "7."). For original, monochrome Apollo, FILL2 was the
fill-in or visibility factor of the second of two possible superimposed
grids of Spy vector-graphic plotting. See preceding FILL1.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 7

Card 4. SPY "PLOT" Controls (Floatinq Point)

4 TOLRCE FHTAX FXSUP FYSUP FXTIT FYTIT VPLOTS VPLOTL Unused FTCARR
S.E-5 0.5 .25 .03 0.10 0.1 1.0 5.0 1.5

TOLRCE (1-8) is the square of the maximum distance that a point can depart from
a curve and yet still be discarded in order to speed SPY plotting and
minimize the associated storage. A value of zero or blank means that all
points will be plotted (i.e., none will be discarded).

FHTAX (9-16) is the fractional height to place the horizontal axis for Spy
plotting should there be no zero level. The fraction is expressed in terms
of the vertical-axis height, so that zero will place the horizontal axis
at one end of the vertical axis, and unity will place it at the other end.
Note that "one" and "the other" are used rather than "bottom" and "top" due
to the inverted pixel addressing of some computers.

FXSUP (17-24) is the fractional horizontal offset for the start of the single-
line super title line for Spy plotting. The fraction is expressed in terms
of the horizontal-axis length, so that zero will begin the super title at
the left end of the horizontal axis, whereas unity (never used) would place
it off the right side, beginning at the right edge of the horizontal axis.

FYSUP (25-32) is the fractional vertical offset for the start of the single-line
super title (SPY plotting). The fraction is expressed in terms of the
vertical-axis length, so that zero will place the super title at one end
of the Y-axis, whereas unity would place it at the other.

FXTIT (33-40) is the fractional horizontal offset for the start of the multi-
line case title of Spy plotting. The fraction is expressed in terms of the
horizontal-axis length, so that zero will begin the case title at the left
end of the horizontal axis, whereas unity (never used) would place it off
the right side, beginning at the right edge of the horizontal axis.

FYTIT (41-48) is the fractional vertical offset for the start of line one of the
mUlti-line case of SPY plotting. The fraction is expressed in terms of the
vertical-axis length, so that zero will place the super title at one end
of the Y-axis, whereas unity would place it at the other.

VPLOTS (49-56) is the vertical position of the lower end of the Y-axis of a
vector Spy plot, expressed in inches.

VPLOTL (57-64) is the span or length in inches of the vertical axis of a vector
SPY plot.

VPLOTH (65-72) is unused beginning 28 March 1994. For older programs, it is the
vertical position of the top end of the vertical axis of vector Spy plot.
Note VPLOTH must equal the sum of VPLOTS and VPLOTL.

FTCARR (73-80) is the factor controlling vertical, interline spacing of text for
a vector Spy plot. The vertical pixels of one line are displaced from
those of the next line by FTCARR times the height of the letters. Hence
a value of unity provides no extra space (single spacing), whereas the
value 2.0 would provide double spacing.
I.E computer-Dependent A3pect3 and Alternatives - 8

Card 5. More SPY "PLOT" Controls, and [Link] (Floating Point)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 FXNUMV FXNUMH FVAXTT FXVERT Unused TIMTAC OVRLAP FLZERO EPSILN FLTINF
1.5 5.0 -2.5 0.0 -3333. 0.0 0.5 1.0-12 1.0-8 1.0+19

FXNUMV (1-8) is the factor controlling vertical positioning of the numbering on

the horizontal axis of a vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. This multiplies
the letter height to provide an offset from the horizontal axis. Due to
possible inversion of vertical pixel counting, the sign may depend on the
computer system (see FYSUP, card number 4) . But the magnitude is clear:
larger FXNUMV means further vertical separation from the horizontal axis,
at a rate of one line for every change in value of unity.

FXNUMH (9-16) is the corresponding factor controlling horizontal positioning. By

changing this value by unity, the numbers will shift either left (if
negative) or right (if positive) one character position.

FVAXTT (17-24) is the factor controlling horizontal positioning of the vertical-

axis label of a vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. This multiplies the
letter width in pixels to provide a horizontal offset from the vertical
axis. By changing this value by unity, the numbering will shift either
left (if negative) or right (if positive) one character position.

FXVERT (25-32) is the factor controlling the horizontal positioning of the

vertical-axis of a vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. If zero, the vertical
axis will obtain its normal positioning. If nonzero, the user is forcing
horizontal placement of the vertical axis. There is a linear variation
between the left edge of the horizontal axis and the right edge, as this
control varies from zero to unity. The value 0.5 will place the vertical
axis right in the middle of the horizontal span.

Unused (33-40) Former TIMULT became unused beginning 25 March 1994. For older
programs, it is a scaling factor that corresponds to time units index IHS
for Spy plot usage. One multiplies time in seconds by TIMULT to produce
time in user units. The non-unity pairings are for IHS = 1 (use 360 times
the power frequency in Hz), IHS = 2 (use the power frequency in Hz), IHS
= 4 (use 1000), and IHS = 5 (use 10**6).
TIMTAC (41-48) is an initial value for the time in seconds before which all TACS
warning messages will be suppressed. A value zero means no such
suppression will occur, of course. TIMTAC later might be redefined as
part of EMTP data by "TACS WARN LIMIT" (see this for rationale of use) .

OVRLAP (49-56) is the fractional overlap of the time axis, between the old plot
that is ending and the next plot that is just beginning, for "ROLLV" usage
(rolling vector plot) within the "PLOT" command of Spy. A value of zero
means that there will be no overlap, whereas unity would mean complete
overlap (the absurd case where no progress at all is made). A value of one
half would mean that the right half of the old plot would be reproduced in
the left half of the new plot before rolling continued, when a new page was
called for.

FLZERO (57-64) is a near-zero tolerance that allows room for lots of roundoff
during counting and arithmetic. For 64-bit computation, the value 1.D-12
has been used successfully for years, even though the choice is highly
conservative (there really is more precision) .

EPSILN (65-72) is the default value for the matrix singularity tolerance. This
value can later be modified by a nonblank field of the same name on the
floating-point miscellaneous data card, or by a "$NEW EPSILN" card.

FLTINF (73-80) is a very large floating point number. Since certain calculations
may internally use this value, which might be squared, this commonly is set
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 9

close to the square root of the largest floating point number that can be
represented. Because it is useful for all computers to employ the same
value, the minimum floating-point limit of a little over l.E+38, which
applies to DEC VAX-II computers, is commonly used. The square root of
this, 1.E+19, is still so big as to appear infinite for just about any
computation of engineering significance.

Card 6. 1st CALCOMP PLOT Controls (Floating Point)

6 XHEADM YHEADM HGTHDM XCASTI YCASTI HGTCST XLEGND YLEGND HGTLGN PIXPUN
2.5 7.95 .55 0.5 7.3 .35 0.5 1.30 .25 40

XHEADM (1-8) is the "X" coordinate where the 16-character graph heading label of
a batch-mode, vector-graphic plot is to begin. This is the left edge.

YHEADM (9-16) is the corresponding "Y" coordinate.

HGTHDM (17-24) is the height of lettering for this 16-character label.

XCASTI (25-32) is the "X" coordinate where the 78-character case-title line of
a CALCOMP PLOT is to begin. This defines the left edge of the line.

YCASTI (33-40) is the corresponding "Y" coordinate.

HGTCST (41-48) is the height of lettering for this 78-character label.

XLEGND (49-56) is the "X" coordinate where the CALCOMP PLOT legend (6-
character user identification, date, time, plot variables, etc.) is to
begin. This defines the left edge. Usually the plot legend is placed at
the bottom of the plot, toward the left.

YLEGND (57-64) is the corresponding "Y" coordinate where the CALCOMP PLOT legend
is to begin. This fixes the bottom of the first of several lines.

HGTLGN (65-72) is the height of lettering to be used for the plot legend.

PIXPUN (73-80) is the number of screen pixels per unit length for a CALCOMP PLOT
that is sent to the screen. Although not exact for most screens, the same
figure is used for both horizontal and vertical dimensions.

Card 7. 2nd CALCOMP PLOT Controls (Floating Point)

7 XALPHA YALPHA HGTALF o 4FACT PEKEXP EPSLRT EPSPIV PLMARK FACOSC

1.5 6.5 .25 -2.0 43. 1.E-12 1.E-16 1.0 0.3

XALPHA (1-8) is the "X" coordinate where the multi-line subheading text of
CALCOMP PLOT is to begin. This defines the left edge of the 78-character
lines.

YALPHA (9-16) is the corresponding "Y" coordinate.

HGTALF (17-24) is the height of lettering to be used for this labeling.

o 4 FACT (25-32) is a delay time in seconds that each batch-mode (CaIComp) plot
will be held on the screen after it is completed. If negative, the program
will wait for a <CR> before erasing the screen and switching to text mode
for the reading of more plot cards. That is for Salford EMTP. The
original meaning for other computers had to do with magnification of a
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 10

CALCOMP PLOT. A value of unity meant full size. Later, this value could
be altered by a "SCALE" request (key word of columns 3-7) during batch-
mode plotting. Variable D4FACT originally was the argument of the
CalComp routine "FACTOR", so it is the reciprocal of variable SS of the
"SCALE" request.

PEKEXP (33-40) is the largest argument used with the library function "CEXPZ"
(complex exponential). This is not a limitation of the library function,
but rather of the usage within the "CABLE CONSTANTS" code. First, take the
largest number that the computer can represent (about 10**38 for Apollo)
using COMPLEX. Next, if division by a complex number requires the squaring
of it (as seems to be the case for Apollo), take the square root of this:
about 10**19 for Apollo. Finally, PEKEXP is the natural logarithm of the
result.

EPSLRT (41-48) is the convergence tolerance ("epsiln") of the LR transform

("LRT") that is used by "LINE CONSTANTS" to calculate eigenvalues. For
maximum precision of the eigenvalue calculation, EPSLRT should be set to
the precision limit of the floating-point variables being used. For 64-bit
computation, this is about 16 digits, of course. There is no problem with
being too close to the precision limit, since any positive tolerance can
be met (the LR algorithm seems to drive the subdiagonal elements
arbitrarily close to zero). On the other hand, using a value smaller than
the precision limit of the computer would seem to add numerical effort, but
with no improvement in the accuracy of the resultant eigenvalues. Hence
it is not recommended to use a value smaller than the precision limit of
the computer.

EPSPIV (49-56) is the minimum pivoting tolerance for use with the "LINE
CONSTANTS" code. This is used only for for the eigenvector calculation,
which results in the modal transformation matrix [Ti]

PLMARK (57-64) is the mUltiple of a default value for the number of symbols that
will be used to mark each batch-mode, vector-graphic curve.
The value unity is a request for the default number of markings, which
corresponds to one symbol per unit (inch) before the discarding of data
pOints that are not significant. Two would give twice the default number,
and half would give about half or none if the number would be less
than unity (because of INTEGER truncation) . Hence any very small value
(e.g., 1.E-8) is guaranteed to suppress all curve marking.

FACOSC (65-72) is the scaling factor for corrections of the Newton iteration of
coupled nonlinear elements if there is oscillation. To disable all such
scaling, make this non-positive.

Card 8. 1st ~scellaneous Integers

8 NMAUTO INTINF KOL132 MUNIT5 MAXZNO IPRSPY IPRSUP LNPIN MINHAR MAXHAR
1 9999999 132 1 50 o o 6 o 20

NMAUTO (1-8) is the binary flag that controls automatic branch/switch naming
(default names such as "LIN001", etc.). It is initialized from STARTUP,
but later might be toggled by an AUTO NAME request among input data.
Unity means there will be such naming, whereas zero [Link] this nicity.
Root names for any such naming come from the language file [Link],
so they could be language-dependent. Remember that each component
automatically named will expand the header of a .PL4 file by one name,
which could overflow PCPLOT. Why should branches be named? Sometimes
to allow a unique reference in case of parallel components. Normally this
would involve manual rather than automatic naming., however, in order that
the user give meaningful names. Automatic naming is more appropriate for
Spy use, where names can be seen.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 11

INTINF (9-16) is the largest integer that can ever be used by the program for
indexing. For machines using INTEGER*4, the artificially reduced limit
that is one short of 10**7 is used for convenience. Since this value is
sometimes assigned internally as a flag, and can then be sent to LUNIT6
(particularly as part of DIAGNOSTIC printout), excessive values that might
overflow out~ut formats should be avoided. On the other hand, one can go
higher usin; the special requests that follow: 107 gives 1. E7, 108
gives 1.E8, 109 gives 1.E9, and 209 gives 2.E9 (this last number
is close to ~he Intel/Salford limit for 4-byte integers) .

KOL132 (17-24) is the column width for LUNIT6 output. Popular choices are 80 and
132. Although the time-step loop output can be any width, many other
structures only have these two standard choices. Hence it is recommended
that the user stick to these.

MUNITS (25-32) is the I/O channel number for "EMTSPY" input. Using the same
value as Lu}T!T5 means that SPY dialogue begins with the keyboard for input.

MAXZNO (33-40) is the initial value for the maximum number of Newton iterations
that are used to solve nonlinear elements such as ZnO. This might later
be redefined by means of a ZINC OXIDE request within any data subcase.

IPRSPY (41-48) is ~he initial value for diagnostic output associated with SPY.
It is advised that IPRSPY be made positive only if there is trouble very
early in exe=ution before the first data card is read.

IPRSUP (49-56) is the initial value for conventional (non-SPY) diagnostic output.
Normally 0, value -1 suppresses stray output (see April 96 newsletter) .

LNPIN (57-64) is the number of lines per inch of printed output of LUNIT6. This
is used to scale character ("PRINTER PLOT") plots.

MINHAR (65-72) is the beginning harmonic number of a bar chart that displays the
results of Fourier analysis. This is for the FOURIER subcommand of the
PLOT command of SPY. To ignore nothing, a value zero (for dc) is used.
The keyed value is just an initial value that can be changed interactively
at the time of FOURIER usage.

MAXHAR (73-80) is ~he ending harmonic of a bar chart that displays the results
of Fourier analysis. Etc. (see preceding MINHAR).

Card 9. 2nd ~sce11aneous Inteqers

9 NFORS2 NIOMAX MRGN LINLIM MPAGE MODE28 KPGRID KPEN(l) KPEN(2) KPEN(3)
30 10 2 100 o 1 3 12 10 11

NFORS2 (1-8) is the number of rows of the Fourier series table that will be
printed. Each harmonic occupies one row. Etc. (see preceding MINHAR) .

NIOMAX (9-16) is the initial limit for rotor speed iterations of the Type-59 S.M.
This default value later might be redefined by a "TOLERANCES" request as
part of Type-59 S.M. data.

MRGN (17-24) is the margin of blank space in inches that will separate adjacent
batch-mode vector-graphic plots that are produced on a roll of paper.

LINLIM (25-32) is the line limit for each batch-mode "PRINTER PLOT" graph. In
the absence of such protection, users have been known to waste incredible
quantities of paper due to errors of scaling.

MPAGE (33-40) is a binary flag that indicates whether the user wants each batch-
mode character plot ("PRINTER PLOT") to begin on a new page (following
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 12

usage of the "IHl" carriage control). A value of unity will begin each
such plot on a new page, whereas zero will bypass such special treatment.

MODE28 (41-48) is an integer index that chooses the starting mode of batch-mode
plotting. The choices are: 1) CALCOMP PLOT; 2) PRINTER PLOT; and
finally, 3) CALCOMP PRINTER.

KPGRID (49-56) is the Salford color number for the grid or grids of screen
plotting. For a batch-mode "CALCOMP PLOT", there is just one whereas SPY
"PLOT" uses two nested grids (both have this one color). Zero will
suppress grids.

KPEN(l) (57-64) is the Salford color number for the first curve of all vector
screen (either batch-mode or Spy) plotting. The four numbers associated
with vector KPEN are those parameters numbered 2 through 5 of the "PEN
CHOICE" request of batch-mode vector-graphic plotting.

KPEN(2) (65-72) is like KPEN(I), but is for curve 2.

KPEN(3) (73-80) is like KPEN(I), but is for curve 3.

Card 10. 3rd ~scellaneous Integers

10 .. (4) KOMLEV NSMTH MODSCR KOLALP MAXFLG LIMCRD NOBLAN MOUSET NOTPPL
14 -1 50 2 5 1 3000 1 o 1

KPEN(4) (1-8) is like the preceding KPEN(I), but is for curve 4. Also, for
batch-mode (CALCOMP PLOT) plotting, this 4th of 4 color numbers also is
used for all labeling.

KOMLEV (9-16) is the level for echoing comment cards during the input of data
base modules of $INCLUDE usage. Value "-1" suppresses all such display.

NSMTH (17-24) is the default value for the limit on the number of consecutive
ups and downs before averaging of successive ordinates will occur as part
of batch-mode, vector-graphic plotting. Later, this initial value could
be changed as part of batch-mode plot data (see the "SMOOTH" request).

MODSCR (25-32) is the default value for a flag that indicates the destination of
batch-mode, vector plotting. For any computer, the 3 choices are:
o for graphics on a separate plotter (no screen plot) ;
1 for both screen and plotter graphics; and finally,
2 for screen plotting only. Salford EMTP only has screen graphics, which
might be redirected to disk by PEN PLOT (see DC-35) .

KOLALP (33-40) is one less than the number of bytes in each ALPHANUMERIC
variable name (e.g., a node name). Mnemonically, this is
"column ALPHANUMERIC."
Node names are six characters long.

MAXFLG (41-48) is the multiplicity with which Spy will check for user-keyed
interrupts. A value of unity means that such checking will be performed
at every opportunity. Yet if such checking might be time consuming (this
will be dependent upon computer, of course), this continual checking could
involve a significant waste of time. Remember, there are four
opportunities for a Spy break each time-step. If the user set MAXFLG = 4,
he still would have the chance to interrupt execution every time step.

LIMCRD (49-56) is the upper limit on the number of 80-column card images that can
be stored in the cache of LUNTI0. Hence, input data is read into
unoccupied LUNTI0 storage, and the remainder, through position LIMCRD, is
never used unless there is data modularization ($INCLUDE usage of Section
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 13

I-K) or data sorting by class (Sections I-J), in which case the blank space
is used to insert or reorder the input records. A few other features of
the program use the bottom of LUNT10 storage to accumulate records, too,
but this burden is generally negligible compared with that of the sorting
of input data. As a general rule, there must be as much free space as
actually required to store user data cards. So, for example,
LIMCRD = 4000 allows about 2000 free spaces after storage of 2000 data
cards (including any expansion due to the use of $INCLUDE, of course). So
why not make LIMCRD equal to infinity, thereby allowing arbitrarily large
data cases? Some computers might have a limit on such usage, whereas
others may execute slower with astronomical indexing. Most computers will
tie up that much more disk space, it is believed (how many operating
systems would be smart enough not to store the unused gap in the middle?) .
It is to be emphasized that card images are actually stored at the bottom
of LUNT10 with inverse indexing, sometimes, and this bottom is defined by
LIMCRD.

NOBLAN (57-64) is a ternary flag concerning the treatment of truly blank input
cards as described in the October, 1993, newsletter. Zero means nothing
will be done (implied $BLANK DATA use). Unity means the program should
halt if a true blank is encountered (implied $BLANK HALT use). 'Finally,
value 2 means true blank lines will be converted to comment lines (implied
$BLANK COMMENT use).

MOUSET (65-72) is a binary flag that indicates possible use (value unity) or non-
use (value zero) of the mouse as described in the October, 1994,
newsletter. No use (e.g., Spy) other than the beginning of interactive
execution is yet supported.

NOTPPL (73-80) is a binary flag that either prohibits (value unity) or allows
(value zero) the use of TPPLOT for concurrent plotting as described in
the October, 1994, newsletter. This is illustrated by DC-1 (see data
between USE TPPLOT BEGIN and END declarations). Such data is ignored
when NOTPPL = 1.

Card 11. 4th ~scellaneous Integers

1 NOCOMM NOHELP NEWPL4 JDELAY Unused NSMPLT KOLWID KOLSEP JCOLU1 KSLOWR
o o o o -777 50 11 1 o 5

NOCOMM (1-8) is a binary flag that will either destroy (value unity) or allow to
be passed through (value zero) all comment cards as data first is loaded
from the user's disk file. This is as described in the January, 1995"
newsletter.

NOHELP (9-16) is a binary flag that will either prevent (value unity) or have
automatically displayed (value zero) at the start of execution the
information in disk file [Link] This is as described in the April,
1995, newsletter.

NEWPL4 (17-24) is a binary flag that will either request (value unity) or prevent
(value zero) the elimination of unused names in the .PL4 file header.
This is as described in the April, 1995, newsletter.

JDELAY (25-32) is a binary flag that is as described in the July, 1996,

newsletter. It is to be ignored (value zero) unless there might sometime
be trouble with the delay time of a switch. For any program created May
20th or later, special value -55666 will restore the ADELAY transfer of
OVER12 as in years past.

NSMPLT (41-48) is the number of successive ups and downs (cycles of a saw-toothed
oscillation) before averaging will be instituted for SPY "PLOT" usage.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 14

KOLWID (49-56) is the default width for each column of output of the time-step
loop. The value of "11" is minimal, corresponding to early years when only
six significant digits were printed. Later, this could be changed at the
start of any data subcase using "PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH" (see illustration
of DC-4).

KOLSEP (57-64) is the default inter-column blank separation that is included as

part of the preceding KOLWID. Value unity is minimal, corresponding to
early years. The average production user may want to expand this to two.
In any case, the initial value can be altered at the start of any data
subcase using "PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH" (see illustration of DC-4).

JCOLU1 (65-72) is a binary flag that controls whether or not LUNIT6 output is
to begin each line with an extra blank as a carriage-control character.
Few computers want or need this, so leave JCOLU1 = O. Value unity will
provide the extra blank column 1.

KSLOWR (73-80) is the frequency with which a rolling vector plot (use of "ROLLV")
is updated, for SPY "PLOT" usage. If unity, every time a new solution
point is known, it will be displayed. But such instantaneous display slows
the simulation. It is more efficient to allow several solution points to
accumulate before they are displayed. Who needs to see each time step
instantly, anyway?

Card 12. 5th ~scellaneous Integers

2 KSYMBL NOBACK KOLEXM LTEK NCUT1 NCUT2 INCHPX INCHPY NODPCX LCHLIM
200 1 60 1 13 11 2 2 o o

KSYMBL (1-8) is the initial frequency of marking symbols on a vector plot (use
of "ROLLV"), for SPY "PLOT" usage. If no marking is wanted, set KSYMBL
to a very large positive integer. Later, the "MARK" sub-subcommand of
the "TEK" subcommand of the "PLOT" command of Spy might redefine this
initial value.

NOBACK (9-16) is a binary flag that indicates whether BACKSPACE of the LUNIT4
plot file is permissible within the "LUNIT4" command of Spy. Zero means
that BACKSPACE is reliable for the computer of interest, whereas 1 means
that it is not (and is to be avoided by alternate reliance upon REWIND
and then forward READs).

KOLEXM (17-24) is the maximum width of each line of SPY "EXAMINE" output. This
should normally be set so as to fit within the Spy window. For Apollo,
this avoids scrolling left or right to see parts of the output output.

LTEK (25-32) is the initial value of a binary flag that indicates which mode
of plotting (character vs. vector) is to be used by the "PLOT" command
of SPY. Zero means character plotting, whereas unity is for vector
plotting. This initial choice might later be toggled at any time by the
"MODE" subcommand of the "PLOT" command of Spy.

NCUT1 (33-40) is the Salford color number for the single super-title line of
each vector plot of Spy "PLOT".

NCUT2 (41-48) is the Salford color number for the multi-line case title of each
vector plot of SPY "PLOT".

INCHPX (49-56) is the number of inches between tic marks and corresponding
numbers of the X-axis for vector Spy plotting. A value of two is common,
meaning that every other inch of the horizontal axis will be given a
numbered tic mark.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 15

INCRPY (57-64) is like the preceding INCHPX, but is for the Y-axis.

NODPCX (65-72) is a binary switch that either accepts (value zero) or rejects
(value unity the automatic creation of a .PCX disk file for each vector
plot of batch-mode plotting. Output files will be named [Link],
etc. That is for Salford EMTP.

LCHLIM (73-80) cor.~rols output of lines 3 onward of the plot identification of

vector SPY p~otting. Included are the scaling and limits of both axes, as
well as any ~~dden factors and offsets. A negative value (e.g., -1) will
suppress such output, whereas zero will allow it.

Card 13. 6th M1sce11aneous Integers

3 NORON JTURBO MAXSYM IRS LIMeOL KLEVL KEXTR NOHPGL NOPOST IZGR1
o 1 3 3 79 o o o o 2

NORON (1-8) is a binary flag that will either prevent simulation (value unity)
or allow it (value zero). If unity, ATP will halt following the
assembly and sorting by class of all data, and a special copying of the
resul ting data file to LUNIT6 output. This is as described in the
January, 1995, newsletter.

JTURBO (9-16) is a binary flag that either accepts (value unity) or rejects
(value zero) turbo table dumping and restoring by NYPA's Robert Schultz.
See story in the October, 1993, newsletter.

MAXSYM (17-24) is the maximum number of symbols that will be placed on each curve
of a vector plot of SPY "PLOT" as identification. This feature is not
applicable 2.:1 "ROLLV" mode, and the discarding of visually-redundant
points may effectively reduce the number.

IRS (25-32) the initial value for the time-units of SPY "PLOT". Later, this
could be cha:1ged by the "TIME UNITS" subcommand of the "PLOT" command
of Spy. Possible values are the same as for batch-mode plotting: 1 for
degrees based on the power frequency, 2 for cycles based on power
frequency, 3 for seconds, 4 for milliseconds, 5 for microseconds,
6 for Hertz, 7 for log-10 of Hertz, and finally (only for LEC SPY) 8
for double-logarithmic scale.

LIMCOL (33-40) is the initial column width for a character plot of Spy "PLOT".
Later, this might be changed by the "SET COLUMN" subcommand of the
"PLOT" command of SPY.

KLEVL (41-48) is the initial value for the binary flag that indicates whether
or not level crossings are to be displayed for SPY "PLOT" variables. A
zero will result in no level-crossing output, whereas unity will produce
a table showing when variables of the plot cross the specified levels. The
current status of KLEVL can be toggled at any later time by the LEVEL
subcommand of the PLOT command of SPY.

KEXTR (49-56) is the initial value for the binary flag that indicates whether
or not extrema are to be calculated for the SPY "PLOT" variables. A zero
will result in no extrema output, whereas unity will produce a table of
extrema for the variables of the plot prior to creating the plot. The
current status of this variable can be toggled at any later time by the
"EXTREMA" subcommand of the "PLOT" command of Spy.

NOHPGL (57-64) is a binary switch that either accepts (value zero) or rejects
(value unity) the automatic creation of HP-GL disk files for each vector
plot of batch-mode plotting. Output files will be named [Link],
etc.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 16

NOPOST (65-72) is like NOHPGL, only it is for PostScript. Output files will
be named ATPPOST.001, etc.

IZGR1 (73-80) provides control over the first (the outer) of two staggered grids
of the vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. For all computers allowing Spy
vector graphics, a negative value (use "-1" for uniformity) will suppress
this outer grid. ?or Salford EMTP, this is the color number.

Card 14. 7th ~scellaneous Integers

14 IZGR2 LENREC LU6VRT LRLIM KASEND LUNDAT KTRPL4 JORIEN LIMPNL LUNTEX
o o 32768 75 5 3 -4 o 200 -11

IZGR2 (1-8) provides control over the second (the inner) of two staggered grids
of the vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. Values are as for preceding IZGR1.

LENREC (9-16) is a binary flag to control only Crlike .PL4 files. For Salford
EMTP, value zero means no change from the past whereas value one is taken
as a request for extra empty space between the header and the initial time
step as described in the January, 1994, newsletter. This is "to start the
timestep data at an offset which is an integer multiple of the length of
the data for one timestep." This was requested by Prof. Bruce Mark for use
with other compilers.

LU6VRT (17-24) is the size of the LUNIT6 output buffer in bytes. This is only
for output that goes to disk (output to the screen is not buffered). A
limit of 65536 exists. Value zero means no such buffering. See the
January, 1994, newsletter for details.

LRLIM (25-32) is the iteration limit ("LIM") of the LR-transform ("LR") that is
used to calculate eigenvalues by the "LINE CONSTANTS" code.

KASEND (33-40) is the minimum number of input cards that must remain at the
completion of one data subcase in order for the program to consider a
possible following one. At issue is whether or not the program will read
a blank bounding data case after case-summary statistics. With value 5,
note that it will not, thereby saving a little output, and speeding
execution a little. If the user wants to have the program read into the
blank data subcase, set KASEND = O.

LUNDAT (41-48) is the I/O unit number to which the input data file can be
connected as program execution begins. This serves as a channel for
reading all data cards as a block, in order to transfer them to the
ACCESS=' DIRECT' storage of unit LUNT10. For nearly all computers,
LUNDAT can and should be set equal to LUNIT3.

KTRPL4 (49-56) indicates the disk being used for the main ATP directory. Values
3 (meaning C:) and 4 (meaning D:) are most common. An extra minus sign
indicates that all output files (.LIS, .PL4, and .PCH) will be named in
parallel with the input data file. This is the modern, preferred scheme,
generally. Note the Can/Am user group distributes with value -4, so if
the user's data is on C: rather than D:, he should change this to -3.

JORIEN (57-64) is a binary flag that indicates whether Oriental language is

possible as part of built-in language. Zero means Oriental language is not
possible. Use unity if Oriental language is being used (this assumes
installation-dependent SUBROUTINE. ORIENT is available and compatible,
of course) .

LIMPNL (65-72) is the limit on the number of switching messages for Type-99
pseudo-nonlinear resistance flashover and clearing (opening). See Section
V-A for an illustration. Every time there is a Type-99 flashover or
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 16

NOPOST (65-72) is like NOHPGL, only it is for PostScript. Output files will
be named ATPPOST.001, etc.

Card 14. 7th ~scellaneous Integers

14 IZGR2 LENREC LU6VRT LRLIM KASEND LUNDAT KTRPL4 JORIEN LIMPNL LUNTEX
o o 32768 75 5 3 -4 o 200 -11

IZGR2 (1-8) provides control over the second (the inner) of two staggered grids
of the vector plot of SPY "PLOT" usage. Values are as for preceding IZGR1.

LRLIM (25-32) is the iteration limit ("LIM") of the LR-transform ("LR") that is
used to calculate eigenvalues by the "LINE CONSTANTS" code.

JORIEN (57-64) is a binary flag that indicates whether Oriental language is

clearing, LIMPNL is decremented by unity. The associated switching

message will be seen only as long as LIMPNL remains positive. A negative
LIMPNL at the end of the simulation indicates unannounced switchings,
which will be mentioned in a single line of printout preceding possible
extrema.

LUNTEX (73-80) is the I/O unit number for an external language text file. If
positive (typically 11), this will be used. But if negative, internal
English-language text will be used instead of [Link] (the external
disk file). This is faster another reform by Robert Schultz of NYPA
as explained in the January, 1994, newsletter.

Card 15. 8th ~sce11aneous Integers

5 KINSEN LISTON LIMTAC NOCALC MFLUSH L4BYTE KOMPAR LISTOl NOGNU

1 o 25 o 1000 1 o 0 1

KINSEN (1-8) is a ternary case-sensitivity flag. For no modification of the case

of input letters, leave this zero or blank. Unity will convert lower case
to upper case before use. Finally, -1 will convert upper case to lower
case before use. Yet, case changes of any individual input line can be
prevented or inhibited by the appearance of an exclamation point ("!")
anywhere on the line. Although the associated logic is universal, the
feature possibly could be installation-dependent due to its location in
installation-dependent SUBROUTINE NEWCAS. Since the first "!" of any line
is erased after it is recognized, the user must be careful that the
replacement blank is really what he wants. For example, in the case of a
file name (e.g., in response to the opening prompt at the beginning of
execution), put the "!" on the right where it can do no harm (most
operating systems will either reject an imbedded blank as being illegal,
or try to connect a file having the wrong name). Further note that Spy and
MODELS use their own, imbedded logic to deal with case conversion.

LISTON (9-16) is a binary flag that possibly will disable any $LISTOFF request
of EMTP data. Unity will ignore any $LISTOFF request. Leave blank or
zero for no such override of the normal meaning of $LISTOFF. Final
production usage with proven data will almost always be with value zero.
But during debugging of large data cases, it sometimes is convenient to see
all input data cards in spite of numerous $LISTOFF declarations. Setting
LISTON 1 may be much simpler than removing numerous $LISTOFF
declarations.

LIMTAC (17-24) is a limit on the number of TACS warning messages that will be
displayed. Remember that before TIMTAC seconds, TACS warning messages
are ignored. Well, such ignored messages do not count for LIMTAC
consideration.

NOCALC (25-32) is a flag to disable vector-graphic output of batch-mode plotting.

Zero means no such disabling (i.e., vector-graphic plots will be possible),
whereas unity means that all cards between "CALCOMP PLOT" and a
subsequent "PRINTER PLOT" declaration will be treated as if they were
comment cards.

MFLUSH (33-40) is a counter of the number of times the RAM buffer for plot data
points has been written (flushed) to disk via I/O channel LUNIT4. The
actual value is immaterial to transients, since the counting is just for
cosmetic appeal (human intelligence), anyway. The command that performs the
plot-data transfer to disk is the "SPACE" command of SPY. Normally, MFLUSH
should be zero. But value 1000 is a special request for the automatic
(without any user intervention via the keyboard) flushing to disk when the
RAM buffer becomes full. Counting still occurs, so the first flushing
would appear with visual marking MFLUSH = 1001, the second would have index
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 18

1002, etc. The batch-mode user of SPY "PLOT" (with $SPY) needs value -
1000 in order to create a .PL4 file of plot data points for later usage.

L4BYTE (41-48) is a binary flag that determines whether or not the .PL4 file
is to be C-like. Unity will produce a C-like file; zero is for others.

KOMPAR (49-56) is a switch that allows the user better to compare old and new
LUNIT6 solutions on a line by line basis using an operating system utility
such as Mike Albert's shareware utility FC for MS-DOS. The production
user will normally use value zero, which means no such help. A value of
unity will result in no numerical serialization of comment cards. Also,
case summary statistics will be abbreviated as though the user had
requested 80-column output using KOL132 = 80. If KOMPAR is set to 2, the
date and time are fixed to correspond to the armistice that ended World War
I. Also, component solution times are zeroed, so only one line that
for the total solution time will differ. Finally, value 3 sets
this, too, to zero, so there will be no difference if a deterministic case
is solved twice. This was explained in the January, 1994, newsletter.

LIST01 (57-64) is a binary flag that allows Type-l source points to be stored in
a separate disk file. Value zero corresponds to the original way (no such
usage, data points must be within the input data file). Value unity means
data points are in a separate file that the user is responsible for
connecting to 1/0 unit 44 using $OPEN.

NOGNU (65-72) is like NOHPGL, only for GNUPLOT. The output file will be parallel
to the input data file, with file type . GNU, if KTRPL4 < O.

Card 16. I/O Unit Numbers

6 LUNIT1 LUNIT2 LUNIT3 LUNIT4 LUNITS LUNIT6 LUNIT7 LUNIT8 LUNIT9 LUNT10
21 22 3 -4 1 6 7 8 9 10

The 10 available fields, read using 1018 format, are used to assign
numerical values to the variable 1/0 channels LUNITl, LUNIT2,
LUNIT9, and LUNT10. Some of these depend on computer or compiler, so
the user is advised not to change any of them unless advised to do so by
some knowledgeable party. Nominally, values 1, 2, ... 9, 10 will be used
unless there is some conflict. LUNIT2 is used for table dumping and
restoring of STATISTICS, SYSTEMATIC, and START AGAIN usage. LUNIT4 is
used to create a .PL4 plot file, with an extra minus sign meaning that
points will be allowed to accumulate in RAM prior to being flushed to disk.
LUNIT5 is the input channel (nominally the keyboard) whereas LUNIT6 is
for display (nominally, a computer monitor) . For debugging in the case.
of trouble, production printout can be unified with DIAGNOSTIC output by
use of LUNIT6 = 46 (which is connected to disk file DEBUG. LIS) . LUNIT7
is the 1/0 channel used for punched cards (response to $PUNCH). LUNIT8
is reserved for batch-mode, CALCOMP PLOT use, should such an 1/0 channel
be required. However, LUNIT8 can also be used for output of SEMLYEN
SETUP. Finally, LUNTI0 is the unit number to which input data is copied
(LUNTI0 is used. as a random access (ACCESS='DIRECT') cache.

Card 17. I/O SPY/PLOT Window Controls

17 KS(l) KS(2) KS(3) KS (4) KP (1) KP(2) KP(3) KP(4) KOLROV Unused
o o 12 10 7 14 o o 18

KS (1) (1-8) controls copying of the Spy window to disk file JUNKS. Set to zero
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 19

for this service only upon filling and closure (the Esc key). Set to -1
to prevent all such use. Set to +1 for continuous backup as 1/0 is
generated.
See KP(3) for reuse or destruction of the old JUNKS.

KS(2) (9-16) is like KS (1), but it is for LUNIT6 output to JUNKE rather
than for SPY output to JUNKS. See also K?(4) rather than KP(3) for
possible concatenation.

KS(3) (17-24) is the Salford color number for the window frame (title line at
the top and border at the bottom) of the Spy dialogue window.

KS (4) (25-32) is the Salford color number for the title line at the top of the
simulation (LUNIT6) window.

KP(l) (33-40) is the Salford color number for content of the Spy window.

KP(2) (41-48) is the Salford color number for content of the simulation (LUNIT6)
window. A non-positive integer is taken as a request for cyclic use of the
first 15 colors in order.

KP(3) (49-56) is a binary flag controlling whether Spy window contents will be
concatenated to the end of old disk file JUNKS. This assumes the user has
requested backup by KS(l). Zero means no concatenation (i.e., new backup
will overwrite any old file contents). Unity will preserve the old
contents, adding new ones at the end (bottom) of old ones.

KP(4) (57-64) is like the preceding KP(3) but for LUNIT6 (JUNKE) rather than
for Spy (JUNKS).

KOLROV (65-72) is the Salford color number to be used for overwriting of the
character search that is requested by pressing the F9 key. If the
string is found, it will be highlighted using this color.

Card 18. Variable-Length Character Strings

18 Name of language font file ] Window] SPY @K file name ] Central Monte file]
\atp\[Link] junk inclspy .dat

Name of language font file (1-32) is the name of the disk file that is to be
connected to 1/0 unit LUNTEX if LUNTEX is positive. Otherwise (for
negative LUNTEX), the name is ignored and program language will corne from
internally-stored (nominally English) information.

Window (33-40) is the root name for the windows of Spy dialogue and Spy vector
"PLOT" usage. An "s" and an "e" will be appended to form two file
names
for storage on disk (file names JUNKS and JUNKE, for this example).

SPY @K file name (41-60) is the skeletal name for files of numbered Spy "@"
usage. The first blank byte is to be replaced by a decimal digit at
execution time, prior to the connection of this file.

Central Monte file (61-80) is the name of the central statistics file, if any --
to be used by the request word "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO". This disk
file frequently will be stored on another disk of another computer in the
network. If this file name is left blank, any Monte Carlo simulation will
not attempt to write status information to this summary file at the end of
each energization (see also Sections XIX-B and II-A-47). Since MS-DOS
is a single-user operating system, parallel Monte Carlo simulation has
never been tried. Salford EMTP users are advised to leave columns 61-80
blank.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 20

Card 19. A6 ALPHANUMERIC names, 1st of 2 cards

9 SSONLY CHEFLD TEXNAM CHVBAR BRANCH TXCOPY USERID -TRASH -TERRA CHRCOM
PHASOR E DUM I NAME COpy WSMTHL TERRA C 0$,

All data fields of Cards 19 and 20 are for ALPHANUMERIC (the UTPF type
declaration) variables, which presently occupy 6 characters. For ease of
presentation, each is preceded by two blanks. Each card is read using
FORTRAN FORMAT ( 10( 2X, A6 ) ). In general, data is left-adjusted.
This begins with Card 19, which has content:

SSONLY (3-8) is the 6-character request word for columns 21-26 of a series R-L-C
branch that is to be present only during the phasor, steady-state solution
for initial conditions. Such extra, special branches might be used to
account for nonlinear R(i) or R(t) which otherwise would be ignored during
the phasor solution. See Chapter V for use. The second subcase of DC-42
provides an illustration.

CHEFLD (11-16) is to be the single character that is produced by E-field

encoding within FORTRAN on the computer of interest. Although 6 columns
of the card are reserved for data input, in fact it is just the single
character of column 11 that is used. For example, the encoding of
STRING by
WRITE (STRING, 4126) D9
4126 FORMAT ( E35.22 )
will involve the use of CHEFLD. The user must beware of case sensitivity
(e.g., "E" and "en differ).

TEXNAM (19-24) is the root name for the first 3 bytes of internally-defined node
names of $INCLUDE data modularization (Section XIX-F). Numerical
serialization will be encoded in locations 4-6. TEXNAM is just the
beginning name; it can be changed during execution by a $DUMMY command
(Section XIX-F) .

CHVBAR (27-32) is the single character that will be used to represent the
vertical bar that separates the listing of input data cards on the right
from interpretations on the left. This is for LUNIT6 output of the printer
or screen. For those computers having a vertical bar, use it. For others,
use either "1" or "In.

BRANCH (35-40) is the 6-character request word to name a branch. In English,

this commonly will be "NAME "

TXCOPY (43: 48) is the request word to copy a preceding branch by name. In
English, this commonly will be "COpy "

USERID (51-56) initializes the 6-character name that is used to identify

ownership of batch-mode vector plots. It will appear in the plot legend.
Yet, this name later can be redefined by a USER IDENTIFICATION request
at the start of any data subcase.

TRASH (59-64) is a 6-character garbage name (nominally" ...... ") for certain
internally-defined nodes (e.g., the type-16 source of Section VII-C-6).

TERRA (67-72) is a 6-character name for local earth (or ground) to be used in
some character output (not input data). Use of "TERRA" is common in
English.

CHRCOM (75-80) is a collection of 5 different special symbols, concatenated into

a single 6-character word. Bytes 1 and 2 store the 2-byte indication for
comment cards of EMTP data (e.g.,"C"). Bytes 3 & 4 store the opening
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 21

and closing symbols for in-line comments (e. g., "{}"). Finally,
bytes 5 & 6 store the continuation character and the separator character
of free-format input (e.g., "$,").

Card 20. A6 ALPHANUMERIC names, 2nd of 2 cards

o DATTYP LISTYP PCHTYP PL4TYP EFIELD FMTPL4 PSCTYP BLANK-

.dat .lis .pch .p14 10E8.0 .ps

DATTYP (3-8) is the default file type for input data files, including a separator
character (if appropriate) at the start. For most operating systems and
user organizations, the separator character will be a period as shown
(" . dat" begins with period in column 1). A file name ending in this
character will be extended to include the information of columns 2-6 (the
file type following the separator character). This is used at the
beginning of execution either in response to the opening program
prompt for input, or to the "DATA" command of SPY. Beware: ".DAT" and
".dat" may differ, and represent different files, for case-sensitive
operating systems (e.g. Unix and Apollo Aegis SRI0.x).

LISTYP (11-16) is the default file type for output (printer) files, including a
separator character at the start. This is used after the "DISK" or
"BOTH" selection at the beginning of execution, in response to the prompt
for a disk file name for LUNIT6 output (see section I-C) .

PCHTYP (19-24) is the default file type for punched card output, including a
separator character at the start. This is used for computers that do not
have scrollable windows, for which $PUNCH requests (see section I-D-16)
result in the punched cards being sent to a disk file. Variable PCHTYP
is used to complete the name of that file.

PL4TYP (27-32) is the default file type for LUNIT4 plot data storage, including
a separator character at the start. This is used to complete the name of
the disk file for cases where this is determined automatically by the
program. PL4TYP is ignored if $OPEN is used on LUNIT4.

EFIELD (35-40) is normally left blank, which means that optimal encoding will
be used for printed variable output of the time-step loop (the columns of
numbers under the heading of variable names). This is the normal case, and
it should be used unless uniform output structure (typically with an
exponential) is required for some reason. If non-blank, field EFIELD
is interpreted to be the desired fixed format that is to replace optimal
encoding. An extra "lP" is automatically supplied. For example, if the
user supplies the character string "E13.5 ", the program will encode a
number such as: "-8.77139E-Ol". See also related parameter CHEFLD on
the preceding Card 19.

FMTPL4 (43-48) is the format to read floating-point numbers in the .PL4 plot
file of 1/0 unit number LUNIT4 if a FORMATTED (universal) .PL4 plot file
is involved (if L4BYTE = 0 and if FMTPL4 is not blank). If FMTPL4
is blank while L4BYTE = 0, the .PL4 file is UNFORMATTED. If seven
columns are needed, omit the trailing zero (e.g., "10EI0."). [Link] is for
field width less than 12, for which optimal encoding will be used. But for
12 or more columns of width, the 6-byte specification (e.g., 6E13.6) is
taken literally, output is performed using it with a conventional,
FORMATTED WRITE to LUNIT4.

PSCTYP (51-56) is the file type for PostScript output of batch-mode plotting (if
NOPOST = 0). A blank will result in use of the NYPA default .ps

BLANK (59-64) stores 6 blank characters. This is independent of language and

computer, of course at least for European languages.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 22

So much for STARTUP variable definitions. When two or more data cases
are stacked within a single disk file, STARTUP will be read only once at
the beginning of the first of the data subcases. Yet, $ STARTUP of "CIMAGE"
(see section I-D-18) allows redefinition at any point of data input. However, the
user should be warned that such usage is still being refined, and it involves some
restrictions. For example, as presently coded, only the first 15 cards are read
and used.

End of mandatory data of STARTUP. But this can be followed by symbols

that define directory paths used to locate the input file name in response to the
opening prompt. Comment cards are ignored, $EOF should terminate such definitions;
if not, a real end-of-file will. For example, the definition

IEEE:==D:\SURGES\SIMULATE\BERLIN\

could be used as ieee:test. to connect disk file

d:\surges\simulate\berlin\[Link] as described in the April, 1997, newsletter.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 23

I.E.2 GRAPHICS File for Plotting Choices

GRAPHICS is the name of a disk file that will be used by all computers to
define vector-graphic plot parameters. Possibly the name will be different for
some computers or installations, however, because it is installation-dependent
BEGPLT that connects GRAPHICS. In any case, a representative sample of the disk
file for Salford EMTP, as distributed by the Can/Am user group during January of
1997, is shown immediately below.

C NYMAX NUMFNT INDLPT LAB LAX JCHYAX KCHYAX LTIC LASERJ Unused KOLBAK
104 0 25 11 10 7 1 0 0
C LCHFIL LCHSUP LCHTIT LCHXAX LCHYAX KPYPCT LJ2DPI LJ2MOD LJ2PAP KVIRTU
30 73 35 28 28 87 100 a 1 a
C FNTHED FNTSUP FNTTIT WHTBAK XVLABL YVLABL HVLABL XHLABL YHLOFF HHLABL
0.4 .17 .17 0.3 -0.7 4.0 0.3 5.0 -0.5 0.3
C JXMAX JYMAX JXINCH JYINCH JXOFF JYOFF JTIC NPGRID Unused Unused
2560 2048 210 210 240 180 15 4
C HPXOFF HPYOFF YAXHPX YAXHPY
1.10 1.0 1.0 0.1
C KSUPSC KHEDSC KCASSC KLGDSC KAXESC KLABSC KGRDSC
14 14 14 14 14 14 3
C LCOLSC is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 2014:
12 10 11 14 13 15 9 2 4 5 6 7 1 8 3 12 10 11 14 13
C KSUPHP KHEDHP KCASHP KLGDHP KAXEHP KLABHP KGRDHP
8 2 3 9 5 6 7
C LNTYHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 2014:
0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 4 2 1
C LCOLHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 2014:
1 2 3 5 6 7 9 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 1 2 3 5 6 7
C LENGHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 2014:
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2

As with STARTUP, precisely one comment card precedes each data card. Extra
comments can only be placed at the end. Meanings for Salford EMTP follows:

Card 1 of GRAPHICS fil.e :

C NYMAX NUMFNT INDLPT LABLAX JCHYAX KCHYAX LTIC LASERJ Unused KOLBAK
104 o 25 11 10 7 1 .0 o

NYMAX (1-8) gives the total vertical pixels of the screen. Recognized special
values are: 1) 350 for EGA; 2) 480 for standard VGA; 3) 600 for the
original Super VGA (600 by 800); 4) 768 for 768 by 1024; and 5) 1024
for 1024 by 1280. Value -7777 is a special flag that requests the
loading of a dozen dependent parameters, in addition to NYMAX, from the
extra disk file [Link]. Finally, a blank or zero will result in
DBOS selecting the highest supported mode that is common to both the
screen and the output card.

NUMFNT (9-16) gives the Salford font number for graph lettering. The default 104
gives a duplex, stroke (drawn as opposed to bit-mapped) font. Alternatives
include: 1 (an 8x14 bit-mapped font), 101 for Simplex Roman sans serif,
102 for Duplex Roman sans serif bold, 103 for Simplex Greek sans serif,
104 for Complex Roman seriffed, 105 for Complex Italic seriffed, 106
for Triplex Roman seriffed bold, 107 for Triplex Italic seriffed bold,
108 for Simplex Script, 109 for Complex Script bold, 110 for Complex
Greek seriffed, 111 for Complex Cyrillic seriffed, 112 for Gothic
English, 113 for Gothic German, and finally, 114 for Gothic Italian.
These can be inspected using the FONT subcommand of the LABEL command
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 24

of Salford TPPLOT.

INDLPT (17-24) is an index to the MS-DOS computer port that is connected to an

Epson-compatible dot-matrix printer or an H-P LaserJet series II-compatible
(LJ2-compatible) laser printer. If Epson or LJ2 plots instead are to go
to disk (as files named ATPPAPER.001, etc.), set INDLPT to zero.
There are 4 legal positive values: 1) "1" for LPT1i 2) "Z" for LPT2i 3)
"3" for LPT3; and 4) "4" for LPT4. An Epson or LJ2 disk file
ATPVIDEO.003 could then be plotted later by coping to any compatible
printer. Remember to use the Ib qualifier: COPY ATPVIDEO.003 PRN IB

LABLAX (25-32) controls the size of labeling for the axes. The font for such
labeling is to be scaled (a multiple of the base font) by this value
divided by 10. For example, a value of 25 implies 2.5 times the base font.

JCHYAX (33-40) controls horizontal (X-direction) displacement of the

vertical-axis label, which is rotated 90 degrees and written from the
bottom to the top. Its horizontal position is this many tenths of a line
from the left edge. Each line has height controlled by LABLAX.

KCHYAX (41-48) is the vertical offset in bytes (characters) for the vertical-axis
label. The Y-axis label begins this many bytes from the bottom. The
width of each character is controlled by LABLAX, note.

LTIC (49-56) is the length of both X- and Y-axis tic marks in integer
hundredths of an inch.

LASERJ (57-64) is a binary flag that chooses between Epson and LJ2 for output
that is produced by PEN PLOT within CALCOMP PLOT. Zero means Epson (a
dot-matrix printer) whereas unity means H-P Laserjet series II.

Unused (65-72) is unused. This space is available for future expansion (the next
new integer graphics parameter) .

KOLBAK (73-80) is the number of the background color for screen plotting. A
non-positive value will suppress such usage (no background painting as a
new plot begins). If black initialization is needed, use 16. Gray (weak
white) is 8. To see other colors, click on WHEEL within CURVE of
TPPLOT.

Card 2 of GRAPHICS file:

C LCHFIL LCHSUP LCHTIT LCHXAX LCHYAX KPYPCT LJ2DPI LJ2MOD LJ2PAl? KVIRTU
30 73 3S 28 28 87 100 o 1 o

LCHFIL (1-8) is the height in hundredths of an inch (approximately) for the font
that will be used to document the .PL4 file (the date, time, etc.)

LCHSUP (9-16) is the height in hundredths of an inch (approximately) for the font
that will be used for the super title.

LCHTIT (17-24) is the height in hundredths of an inch (approximately) for the

font that will be used for the case title.

LCHXAX (25-32) is the height in hundredths of an inch (approximately) for the

font that will be used for labeling of the [Link] (X) axis.

LCHYAX (33-40) is the height in hundredths of an inch (approximately) for the

font that will be used for labeling of the vertical (Y) axis.

KPYPCT (41-48) is the "percent copy" (magnification factor in %) for any H-P
Laserjet series II output (if LASERJ=l). The 87% shown above provides
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 25

reasonable margins for 8.5 by 11-inch paper. Who knows what might be
appropriate for other paper sizes (see LJ2PAP below) .

LJ2DPI (49-56) gives the dots/inch for any H-P Laserjet series II output (if
LASERJ = 1). Choices are 75, 100, 150, and 300 (the latter
requiring mc~e than the minimum 512 Kbytes of RAM to print) .

LJ2MOD (57-64) is an integer index indicating the mode of H-P Laserjet series II
output (if LASERJ = 1). Nothing other than 0 has ever been used,
although Salford documentation indicates value 2 is a possible alternative.

LJ2PAP (65-72) is an integer index indicating which size of paper is to be used

for any H-P Laserjet series II output (if LASERJ = 1). For the USA, unity
is standard, to be converted to LETTER of Salford. For alternative
indices 2, 3, and 4, the text for Salford is LEGAL, EXECUTIVE, and
A4, respectively.

KVIRTU (73-80) is a binary switch that chooses either real screen plotting (if
0) or virtual (RAM) plotting (if unity). For 768x1024-pixel graphics,
the latter may be required. Otherwise, the former generally is preferable
since the user of real screen plotting sees graphics as they are being
painted. For more information, see the April, 1993, newsletter.

Card3 of GRAPHICS file:

C FNTHED FNTSUP FNTTIT WHTBAK XVLABL YVLABL HVLABL XHLABL YHLOFF HHLABL
0.4 .17 .17 0.3 -0.7 4.0 0.3 5.0 -0.5 0.3

FNTHED (1-8) is the height in inches of the 16-byte main heading line.

FNTSUP (9-16) is the height in inches of the 78-character super title line.

FNTTIT (17-24) is the height in inches for all 78-character, multiline subheading
lines.

WHTBAK (25-32) controls the whiteness in the Postscript plot background by

ranging from 1.0 (white) to 0.0 (black). Windows NT and Windows 9x users
will want to use black or dark gray if they rely on Ghostview/Ghostscript
for screen plot display. OS/2 users will want white backgrounds to avoid
the intermediate steps [of using psplot to remove the black/gray
background] in the printing process, since they use the display2. exe
program for plot display. It independently defines the background color
of the display.

XVLABL (33-40) locates the start of the Y-axis label horizontally, in screen
inches, for PostScript plots.

YVLABL (41-48) locates the start of the Y-axis label vertically, in screen
inches, for PostScript plots.

HVLABL (49-56) is reserved for the height in inches of the font used for the
vertical axis (Y-axis) label of a PostScript plot. This is not yet used,
however.

XHLABL (57-64) locates the start of the X-axis label horizontally, in screen
inches, for PostScript plots.

YHLOFF (65-72) is the vertical offset in inches between the X-axis and its label,
for a PostScript plot.

HHLABL (73-80) is reserved for the height in inches of the font used for the
horizontal axis (X-axis) label of a PostScript plot. This is not yet
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 26

used, however.

Card 4 of GRAPHICS file:

C JXMAX JYMAX JXINCH JYINCH JXOFF JYOFF JTIC

2560 2048 210 210 240 180 15

JXMAX (1-8) is the maximum horizontal pixels of PostScript output (assuming. this
is allowed by NOPOST of STARTUP). There are no natural values or right
answers here. The value shown is twice that of monitors being used at NYPA
during 1995, when PostScript was freed from screen resolution. One must
look closely to detect the difference between 1024 and 2048. See the
January, 1996, newsletter.

JYMAX (9-16) is the maximum vertical pixels of PostScript output.

JXINCH (17-24) is the number of PostScript pixels per inch horizontally.

JYiNCH (25-32) is the number of PostScript pixels per inch vertically.

JXOFF (33-40) is the number of horizontal pixels offset for PostScript. This
is the horizontal indentation where plotting begins (location of y-axis).

JYOFF (41-48) is the number of vertical pixels offset for PostScript. This is
the vertical indentation to where any background grid would begin.

JTIC (49-56) is the number of pixels for tic marks on PostScript axes.

NPGRID (57-64) controls the grid of Postscript plots. Robert [Link] of NYPA
explains: Calcomp plots displayed by [Link] have additional screen
grid flexibility through selection of NPGRID = 1, 2, 3 or 4. (zero or
negative = no grid; 1= 2" solid grid; 2= 2" solid and 1" dashed grids;
3= 1" solid grid; 4= 1" solid and 0.5" dashed grids). Postscript plots
have only the number of grids determined by NPGRID. Their solid or dashed
patterns are described by the Postscript header, not by display2's screen
appearance.

Card 5 of GRAPHICS file:

C HPXOFF HPYOFF YAXHPX YAXHPY

1.10 1.0 1.0 0.1

HPXOFF (1-8) is the horizontal offset in inches for the HP-GL disk files
ATPHPGL.001, etc., The default value is 1.10, and the name reflects
the fact that a positive value offsets the plot to the right by about
this amount in inches. This default value is a compromise that
accommodates reasonably well both the HP-GL-compatible QMS 1725 used at
BPA, and also MS Word for Windows.

HPYOFF (9-16) is the vertical offset in inches the HP-GL disk files
ATPHPGL.001, etc. The default value is 1.0. BPA's QMS 1725 had no
such need, but MS Word certainly did to raise the plot that
otherwise had no bottom margin at all. Value 1.0 is being used to
produce a nice, centered appearance in MS Word 6.0a

YAXHPX (17-24) is the horizontal offset in inches for Y-axis numbers of the HP-
GL disk files. A positive value indicates movement to the right.
Differences of fonts (e.g., most noticeably between fixed and
I.E computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 27

proportionally-spaced ones) make it impossible for developers to locate

precisely the Y-axis numbers. Possible overlap with the Y-axis tic
marks depends not only on the starting location (X, Y), but also on the
font, which is unknown to developers. So this and next new variable
were added to allow a demanding user to displace Y-axis numbers however
he likes.

YAXHPY (25-32) is the vertical offset in inches for Y-axis numbers of the HP-GL
disk files. A positive value indicates movement upward.

Card 6 of GRAPHICS file:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C KSUPSC KHEDSC KCASSC KLGDSC KAXESC KLABSC KGRDSC
14 14 14 14 14 14 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KSUPSC (1-8) controls the color of the super title of the screen plot. The
default value of 14 displays the super title in yellow.

KHEDSC (9-16) controls the color of the single heading line of the screen plot.
The default value of 14 displays this line in yellow.

KCASSC (17-24) controls the color of the multi-line case title of the screen
plot. The default value of 14 displays these lines in yellow.

KLGDSC (25-32) controls the color of the legend of the screen plot. The
default value of 14 displays all legend lines in yellow.

KAXESC (33-40) controls the color of the axes of the screen plot. The default
value of 14 displays axes in yellow.

KLABSC (41-48) controls the color of the labeling of the axes of the screen
plot. The default value of 14 displays axis labeling in yellow.

KGRDSC (49-56) controls the color of the grid lines of the screen plot. The
default value of gives a weak aqua-colored grid.

Card 7 of GRAPHICS file:

C LCOLSC is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 2014:
12 10 11 14 13 15 9 2 4 5 6 7 1 8 3 12 10 11 14 13

LCOLSC (20I4) controls the colors of the curves of the screen plot. This
vector LCOLSC occupies one row, with the first column corresponding to
the color of the first curve, etc. One can find the numbers
corresponding to available colors by running TPPLOT, and choosing either
"wheel" or "colorize" within the "CURVE" window. 12 = red, 10 = green,
11 = aqua, 14 = yellow, 13 = purple, 15 = white ---- all bright colors.

Card 8 of GRAPHICS file:

C KSUPHP KHEDHP KCASHP KLGDHP KAXEHP KLABHP KGRDHP

8 2 3 9 5 6 7

KSUPHP (1-8) controls the color/pen number of the super title of HP-GL disk
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 28

file.

KHEDHP (9-16) controls the color/pen number of the heading line of HP-GL disk
file.

KCASHP (17-24) controls the color/pen number of the case title of HP-GL disk
file.

KLGDHP (25-32) controls the color/pen number of the legend of HP-GL disk file.

KAXEHP (33-40) controls the color/pen number of the axes of HP-GL disk file.

KLABHP (41-48) controls the color/pen number of the labeling of the axes of HP-
GL disk file.

KGRDHP (49-56) controls the color/pen number of the grid lines of HP-GL disk
file.

Card 9 of GRAPHICS file:

C LNTYHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 20I4:
065 432 1 0 6 5 432 1 0 6 5 421

LNTYHP (20I4) controls the line type of curve drawing of HP-GL disk files.
Vector LNTYHP occupies one row, with the first column corresponding to
the line type of the first curve, etc.

Card 10 of GRAPHICS file :

C LCOLHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 20I4:
1 2 3 5 6 7 9 1 2 3 5 6 7 912 3 5 6 7

LCOLHP (20I4) controls the color of curve drawing of HP-GL disk files. For
use with MS Word, this became critical: the good color yellow, which
is so effective on a black background, was found to be practically
unreadable on the default white background used by MS Word for its
graphics. This vector LCOLHP occupies one row, with the first column
corresponding to the color of the first curve, etc.

Card 11 of GRAPHICS file:

C LENGHP is a vector of 20 cells (one for each curve) that is read as 20I4:
444 444 4 4 4 444 4 4 4 4 442 2

LENGHP (20I4) controls the pattern length of curve drawing of HP-GL disk
files. Vector LENGHP occupies one row, with the first column corresponding to
the pattern length of the first curve, etc.
I.E Computer-Dependent Aspects and Alternatives - 29

I.E.3 STARTSPY Disk File for Spy Initialization

Unlike STARTUP and GRAPHICS of the preceding two subsections, the

STARTSPY disk file that initializes interactive execution, observation, and
control (Spy) has no particular order or content. This is because no fixed READ
statement is used. Instead, it is the "DEPOSIT" command of Spy that performs
the initialization, and the STARTSPY disk file is nothing more than a command
file to accomplish this automatically, at the time the first Spy input is being
handled. Any variables carried in COMMON can so be initialized. But for now,
nothing more than is already done by STARTUP is needed, so there are no active
lines of STARTSPY. That is, execution has no effect:

C Begin STARTUP disk file that initializes etc.

C variables automatically when Spy is first etc.
VERIFY { SPY command that turns the echoing of etc.
DEPOSIT { This Spy command is used internally to etc.
END { Exit "DEPOSIT" loop etc.
VERIFY { Spy command that turns etc.
C That's all there is; EOF comes etc.

Yet, the user of Spy will see such execution in the SPY window, so he
should be aware of what is happening. Such automatic, internal execution at the
time Spy is requested appears as follows:

@»>C Begin STARTUP disk file that initializes etc.

@»>C variables automatically when Spy is first etc.
@»>VERIFY
Toggle to "ON" (Suppress "@" execution)
Toggle to "OFF" (Suppress "@" execution)
@»>C That's all there is; EOF comes ... etc.
SPY:
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 1

I-F. Many Different computers Support ATP

Compatibility with the full (not reduced) ANSI FORTRAN 77 standard is
required for support of ATF. There must be an INDEX function for CHARACTER
variables, and CHARACTER variables must not be limited to fewer than 255 bytes in
length. Dynamic OPEN/CLOSE capability is not mandatory, but it certainly is
nice. Without it, data modularization (Section I-K) is not automatic.

Virtual computer architecture, and its relation to quality support of the

EMTP, deserve a few words of explanation. The issue is not one of computer size,
since MS-DOS PCs offer virtual memory for 386 or newer processors. Rather, the
issue concerns satisfaction of some very special needs of the EMTP. Most
important is the dimensioning problem. With 27 independent dimensioning controls,
the sizing of EMTP tables pcses a serious potential problem for the non-virtual
computer shop that must solve a variety of transient problems. During the mid-
'80s, this paragraph continued with a long explanation of why virtual memory is
desirable. Now, in 1995, it is sufficient merely to note that lack of virtual
memory management should be grounds for the immediate disqualification of any
compiler or operating system.

A general recommendatic~ about computer systems for support of the EMTP can
be made. If the user has a choice, generally the system that is the most
interactive, and the most nearly under user control, is to be preferred. Carefully
selected minicomputers have Froven to be ideal for support of the EMTP. Indeed,
BPA itself gave up the use cf its CDC mainframes and switched to a transients-
dedicated DEC VAX-ll/780 in February, 1979. Minnesota Power earlier had pioneered
the way with PRIME minicomputers. But even better than minicomputers for most
users were scientific workstations, of which Apollo was by far the most widely used
for the EMTP by the mid-80s. Both BPA and LEC used Apollo to develop ATP. By the
early '90s, some 25 or 30 dis~inct computers had been proven to be ATP-compatible.
Only the older machines, li=ited by 16-bit addressing, have been found to be
incompatible, and should not be considered. Interactivity between the user and
the program is very important, so choose among available computers carefully.
If in doubt about ATP compatibility with some system, computer-search disk-stored
newsletter files. If that fails, check with the Can/Am user group in Portland.

Around 1990, there was a following subsection for each computer that had
proven to be ATP-compatible. But then in 1989, the Salford compiler and DOS
extender were proven to be compatible with MS-DOS, 386-based PCs, and most
alternatives have been abandoned. For the historic record, the original list was
as follows: 1) Apollo, 2) MS-DOS (IBM PC), 3) AT&T Unix pc, 4) DEC VAX/VMS,
5) Mainframe IBM, 6) PRIME, 7) HP 9000, 8) Virtual CDC, 9) Sun Microsystems,
10) Data General, 11) Charles River, 12) Apple Macintosh, 13) Univac, 14) Cray,
15) cydrome. 16) Floating Point systems, 17) Intel 80286, 18) Intel 80386 unix,
19.) DEC Unix; 20) IBM RT PC, 21) Siemens, and 22) Intel 80386 Salford. As this
section is being overhauled in April of 1995, most of this material is being
removed, although section headings and summary explanations remain. Details of
older systems can be found by consulting either older paper copies or the
installation-dependent "read me" files that should accompany the different
versions. Finally, some newer systems could be added, but time is short. So,
only the most important will be documented: 23) Watcom ATP for OS/2, DOS, and
Windows NT.

I-F-l. Apollo ATP as used by NYPA

An Apollo EMTP version once was available from either the Can/Am user group
in Portland or the Leuven EMTP Center (LEC) in Belgium. In 1990, the Apollo
version was by far the best, and the most highly developed. Of course, Apollo
itself (windows, networking.) was very good. But since 1990, development in
Portland has concentrated on Salford EMTP for MS-DOS computers. Apollo has not
been used in. Portland for development since the summer of 1990, and LEC was ready
to collapse 3 years later. Finally, the company (Apollo computer) was sold to
Hewlett-Packard (H-P), and has gradually been forced to accommodate H-P desires
and standards (e.g., Unix). To summarize, in recent years, Apollo usage has
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 2

declined drastically.

New York Power Authority (NYPA) in White Plains took over the distribution
of ATP materials for Apollo Aegis after the service was dropped in Portland. NYPA
experts do a good job,and have a nice package. But such Apollo usage and service
is not expected to last much longer as this paragraph is being written in April of
1995. IBM's OS/2 for Intel PCs has been found to be a worthy replacement for
NYPA use by Robert Meredith and Robert Schultz. Details of this breakthrough using
OS/2 Warp can be found in newsletters beginning with the January, 1995, issue.

For details of what is still available, consult the "read me" file of
Apollo ATP distribution. Some 30 pages of details peculiar to the Apollo ATP
version existed in older Rule Books, and should still be distributed with the
computer code itself.

l:-F-2. l:BM PC XT ( intel 8088 ) Usage

Nothing more glamorous or innovative than an old IBM PC XT, or a PC
XT-compatible computer running MS-DOS, is required to support real EMTP [45, 48].
Although slow due to overlaying, and although EMTP List Sizes must be restricted
for such use, PC XT-compatible machines .remain useful for education. The same goes
for PC AT-compatible (Intel 80286-based) machines.

Work on the PC XT-compatible version of ATPwas abandoned around 1991.

Serious users had, by then, switched to 386s and Salford EMTP. But the Can/Am
user group has continued to hand out old files for PC XT owners. In 1994, a
couple of requests might have been received (usage has spiraled nearly down to
zero). But the code remains old, dating to 1990. For details, consult the
[Link] file of the PC XT ATP distribution, which contains some 20 pages of
information peculiar to the PC XT version, which was produced by the Lahey F77L
compiler and could use GEOGRAF graphics by Geocomp.

i-F-3. AT&T [Link] PC 7300 No Longer Used

AT&T is the abbreviation for American Telephone and Telegraph company, once
the world's largest corporation (before involuntary segmentation that was ordered
by the U.S. judiciary). Although not a great success in the personal computer
market place, around 1985 Unix PC 7300 was an excellent product for scientific
use. It was built around a 10-MHz Motorola 68010 microprocessor. Rather than
being all new, Unix PC 7300 technology and .system software were perfected earlier
by Convergent Technologies for the minicomputer market. It is understood that AT&T
merely selected a minimal configuration of the proven Convergent machine, and
repackaged it in a much more affordable form. The separate interactive plotting
program TPPLOT was used with Unix PC, after a simulation had ended. A Tektronix
PLOT10 interface was assumed.

Unix PC was last used by the father of the U.M., Hian K. Lauw, Professor
of Electrical & Computer Engineering at Oregon state University in Corvallis (USA).
But Prof. Lauw moved to other interests (the manufacture of power electronics),
and those in Corvallis who continued to use ATP moved to other computers (e.g.,
Salford EMTP for MS-DOS PCs). As this section is overhauled in April of 1995, no
one still is known to be using Unix PC to support ATP.

i-F-4. DEC VMS ATP Used by BPA

A batch-mode version of EMTP that relies on the factory-supplied operating
system VAX/VMS or Open VMS will be described in this section. Not considered
is VAX Unix (Ultrix), Which is a distinct program version that first was
established andtes~e.d at the University of Illinois in Urbana, Illinois. For a
summary, read the 2-page article by Messrs. Lesieutre and sauer in the september,
1988, issue of EMTP News. There also is newer (1995) DEC OSF Unix for Alpha
I-F. Many Different Computer.5 Support ATP - 3

workstations (see story in the April, 1995, newsletter).

DEC Alpha running Open VMS is fully compatible with VAX/VMS. The same code
is compiled on either platform. As time passes, old VAX hardware is
disappearing; it is being replaced by Alpha RISC workstations, and these can run
VMS (as well as OSF Unix and Windows NT).

BPA's Randy Suhrbier has a superb interactive plotting program to accompany

DEC VMS ATP. This is the way graphics (both screen and paper) are handled by VMS
users at BPA.

For details, consult the "read me" file of the DEC VMS ATP distribution,
which contains further details that once were printed on paper in the Rule Book.

:I-F-S. Mainframe :IBM ATP by LEe

The central computer of K.U. Leuven was an IBM 3033 for many years, but has
recently (late '80s) been replaced by a faster, compatible Amdahl. An EMTP version
for the batch-mode use of this system is available from the Leuven .EMTP Center
(LEC). Such support for ATP never was used in North America, however.

That was the situation around 1990. But it deteriorated rapidly. Around
1992, LEC's own Steering Committee recommended discontinuance of support for IBM
mainframes. Of course, LEC itself ended the following year, and nothing further
is known to have been done with the materials. To a large extent, it was the IBM-
standard PC and Salford EMTP that ended the use of IBM mainframes for the support
of ATP.

:I-F-6. PRIME ATP for PTI PSS/E Users

During the late '70s and early to mid-'80s, PRIME was an important computer
for the support of EMTP. PRIME was the first really successful platform used by
Power Technologies for its load flow and transient stability package named PSS/E
that became the standard of the industry. As a result, many planning departments
had PRIME minicomputers, and wanted EMTP to run on the same computer. Before
DEC VAX-l1/780, EMTP ran on PRIME minicomputers --- thanks to the excellent
collaboration of Thomas Varilek, then with Minnesota Power in Duluth (USA). This
spanned the years 1976 through 1984 (the initial ATP work). At that point, another
great ATP worker took the lead: Robert Newell of Basin. Electric Power Cooperative
of Bismarck, North Dakota (USA), which had switched from Honeywell to PRIME.

But by the late '80s, PRIME Computer was sinking. As this text is being
overhauled in April of 1995, the company exists no longer. Does the product
exist? Probably not. The problem was, when PRIME began, it had a technical
edge. PRIME was the first to offer virtual memory at an affordable price. But
soon others (e.g., DEC VAX-ll/780) closed the gap, sold products cheaper, had
newer systems (e.g., with no traces of 16-bit indexing), etc. Then Apollo, Sun,
and other workstations appeared, and began attacking the minicomputer market from
below. PRIME never adapted, and did not survive. But PRIME has its place in
EMTP history. One detail that many readers may not be aware of: PRIME's decline
seemed to prompt Salford success using MS-DOS. Yes, Salford Software wrote the
FORTRAN compiler recommended by PTI for PRIME computers. As PTI moved to
alternatives, so did Salford. By 1989, Salford was working hard to complete the
movement of its compiler to the Intel 386 (including virtual memory). The rest is
history (PRIME could not compete with 386-based PCs) .

I-F-7. Hewlett-Packard HP-9000 Minicomputers

Dr. Olov Einarsson and associates of ASEA Research in Sweden used HP 9000
minicomputers for the support of ATP during the late '80s. A little like PRIME
ATP of the preceding section, this now (April, 1995) is history. The usage is
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 4

believed to have ended.

Unlike PRIME computer, H-P remains a very successful company. But many
things have changed. ASEA joined Brown Boveri to create ABB, and Dr. Olov
Einarsson, who managed the ATP work in Vasteras, Sweden, was moved to other work.
Then there was the·growth of workstation and pc markets, which eroded the more
expensive minicomputer market. H-P computers made the transition, but H-P
minicomputers may have been left behind.

Prof. Corwin Alexander of Oregon State University in Corvallis did set up an

ATF version by hand-modifying .Sun ATF FORTRAN some time around 1991 or 1992.
Whether he might be interested in working further with the OSU H-P minicomputer is
not known as this paragraph is being reworked in April of 1995. Around 1993,
Pro.f. Alexander did volunteer to send a copy to someone in England (to
Nottingham?), it is recalled. Continued OSU use of an H-P minicomputer should not
be taken as a sign of commercial viability, however. H-P has a plant in Corvallis,
and has donated lots of surplus hardware to the school. To learn what no longer
can be profitably sold, look at what companies donate to schools for purposes of
good will and tax reduction (joke)!

I-F-8. Virtual CDC ATP in Hannover

For about two decades, the Control Data Corporation (CDC) was known for
powerful scientific computers without virtual memory management. Involved were
GO-bit word machines that involved an 18-bit address --- terribly limited once
memory prices began dropping from a million dollars (or more) per megabyte to $100
or less per megabyte. Former users of those old, memory-bound, CDC machines had
all disappeared by the late '80s, having migrated to newer, more flexible
machinery.

One of those newer, more flexible alternatives was a fully-virtual CDC

computer line. As crudely understood by the Can/Am user group, this was an
all-new product line that involved 64-bit words and wide-open, fully-virtual
architecture. During the late '80s, it was heavily used at the University in
Hannover in Germany, where new versions were set up at least once a year (during
October, at the time of the annual LEC meeting, typically). This was by then-
student Mustafa Kizilcay (today a Professor in Osnabrueck}. Harald Wehrend took
over this work upon Dr. Kizilcay's departure. But then (1992 or 1993), those
[Link] the computer decided to abandon CDC by switching to Sun Unix
workstations.

Like the Ia~ mainframe version, the CDC version of ATP has lost to smaller,
cheaper, more convenient alternatives. Even though fully compatible, there is no
incentive to continue. In April of 1995 as this text is being overhauled, CDC
seems to be a dead-end road for ATP.

I-F-9. Sun Microsystems Unix Workstations

ATP for Sun workstations was developed and distributed by BPA during the late
t80s. This was for Motorola 68020-based Sun-3 with monochrome monitors
hardware that continued to be used for ATP until 1992. Distribution was on 60-
Mhyte cartridge tapes only, and details were described by a file named "read. me"
of the distribution tape. Both free CGI and optional GKS graphics could be used.
This information now (April, 1995) is being removed from the Rule Book.

SPARC is the Sun name for RISC workstations that superseded the Motorola CISC
machines around 1989. BPA never used such hardware for ATF, although it did
cooperate with an ABB user in Switzerland during 1990 to establish an ATP version
for SPARC. Then LEC of Leuven, Belgium, took over such work, added support for
multi-window SPY, and distributed copies widely to members until its demise in
1993. Robert Sarf±, of the University of Waterloo in Ontario, Canada, used the
product at his school, where he supported Profs. M.M.A. Salama and Raymond
Ramshaw, who specialize in power electronics. Mr. Sarfi is believed to be among
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 5

the first to distribute ATP using E-mail.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, Mr. Sarfi has just
succeeded in setting a new Sun ATP translation. There are no windows, SPY, or
graphics, but the code should correctly create .PL4 files that then could be
plotted using LEC' sold LECPLOT (said to be [Link]). Look for details in
the July, 1995, newsletter. E-mail addressrjsarfi@hivo~[Link]~[Link] used
by Mr. Sarfi.

J:-F-10. Data General: Minicomputers, Aviion

A batch-mode (no Spy) version of the EMTP for Data General minicomputers with
virtual memory management was used by Instituto de Investigacion Tecnologica in
Madrid, Spain. This began with the support of BPA's "M39." EMTP version during
1985. Without any assistance from BPA, that computer code was made operational on
the university's Data General computer. Then early in 1987, lIT was supplied with
an ATP translation.

But as this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, such Data General
minicomputers have long been forgotten. Adaptation to the ongoing microprocessor
revolution was named Aviion during the late '80s a Unix-based workstations
that are built around the Motorola 88000 RISC rr~croprocessor. This was a good
platform for ATP support, and computer expert Szymanski (see 386 Unix of Section
I-F-18) even supported his own special ATP software using. it for a while. But
Motorola 88000 did not compete well against Intel. Today, no one is known to be
using DG Aviion to support ATP. Is Aviion still on the market? Who has heard
of Data General in recent years?

I-F-ll. Charles River Data Systems ( CRDS )

Charles River Data Systems (CRDS) computers were used in the power industry
by the important Indian manufacturer Bharat Heavy Electricals, Ltd. Work on an ATP
translator for CROS began April 1, 1987. For a year, we were waiting for virtual
memory management for the Motorola 68020 microprocessors that are used. Then, in
February, we gave up hope and decided to proceed with all code in RAM at all times,
just as for the DOS extender of OS/286 (see Section I-F-17). There are two halves
to the program: a front end for simulation, and a back end for the supporting
programs. Unlike the Intel translations, there will be no SPY, at least
initially. Because CRDS used the same compiler (SVS) as did AT&T's Unix PC
(Section I-F-3), that translator was modified to serve both systems. See disk
files of installation-dependent modules [Link], etc.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, it seems likely that eRDS
did not survive. It was too late supplying virtual memory management. Nothing
about eRDS has been heard for years.

I-F-12. Apple Macintosh . Slow Simulation

The Macintosh II by Apple Computer still is not an attractive platform for
support of EMTP at the end of 1990. The problem is a lack of memory management
of any sort using Apple's regular (non-Unix) operating system. Yet, for those
with 4 or more Mbytes of RAM, there finally was a solution from Drexel University
in Philadelphia. Interested readers are referred to the report on pages 38-41 of
the september, 1990, issue of LEe's EMTP News. That was for Motorola 68020-based
hardware, using a 16-bit Language Systems compiler that produced half-speed
execution.

Around 1993, Prof. Jim Smith of Montana State University in Bozeman (USA)
reconsidered ATP using his 68040-based Mac Quadra. Several parties around the
world have been using this even though it, too, simulates slowly and is not
otherwise (graphics, windows, SPY) developed.
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 6

Finally, Stu Cook of JUST Services in a suburb of Montreal, Quebec, Canada,

has been working on ATP for Quadra. Look for a report in the April, 1995,
newsletter. Execution remains slow, but enhancements are being made and testing
has been complete. Finally, there has been consideration of Mac Power PC, which
Mr. Cook has available on an expansion card. As this text is being overhauled in
April of 1995, Macintosh is being given very serious attention for ATP use. Speed
may remain a problem, however.

i-F-13. Univac Mainframe of EDP in Lisbon

A batch-mode (no .spy) version of the ATP for old Univac mainframes (36-bit
word machines requiring overlaying) was used during the mid-to-late • Bas by J.
Allen Lima of Electricidade de Portugal (EDP) in Sacavem outside Lisbon.

As this text is being overhauled in April of .1995, such old Univac usage must
be long gone. First, Mr. Lima' s creative work with ATP was interrupted by a
promotion. Then Univac disappeared (Unisys was the result of a merger with
Burroughs). Like IBM and CDC mainframes, it seems unlikely that any Univac or
Unisys mainframe ever again will be used for the support of ATP.

i-F-14. Cray or SCS Clone Supercomputers

Cray Research, Inc. has manufactured the supercomputers of choice during the
'70s and '80s; and, for what it's worth, ATP has been proven to be compatible.
Actually, it was an imitation Cray "near supercomputer" by SCS (Scientific
Computer Systems) that first was tested: model SCS-40. SCS ran Cray software.
Later, during the Summer of 1988, a separate compilation and linking was done on
a Cray XMP at the University of Illinois in Urbana, Illinois.

No one has ever shown supercomputers to be cost effective for EMTP

simulation. With all the cheaper and more convenient alternatives, it seems
unlikely that Cray-compatible supercomputers ever will gain a following for ATP
use. Only some possible real-time simulation need, or free access ("the computer
has already been paid for, and it is not much used") might rekindle interest in
Cray.

i-F-15. Cydrome Cydra 5 Mini Supercomputer

Cydrome of Milpitas, California, was a maker of what it chose to call a
"departmental level, mini supercomputer." It was being benchmarked with ATP
materials during September of 1988.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, it seems likely that

Cydrome did not survive the decline of the supercomputer market. The ongoing
microprocessor revolution has taken a heavy toll, and cydrome probably was one of
the victims.

i-F-16. Floating Point Systems ( FPS )

During the mid-to-late '80s, Floating Point Systems (FPS) manufactured
high-speed scientific processors that were generalizations of the earlier array
processors that made the company famous. Typically a flexible minicomputer such
as DEC VAX was used for access (a user-friendly "front end"). In fact, DEC itself
sold FPS products named FPS 30 and FPS 60 for connection to its B600-series
VAX/VMS computers.

For test purposes, the SCS/Cray translator of Section I-F-14 was used. This
was because translation rules were compatible. Yet, the first serious user really
deserves better. FPS FORTRAN does have INCLUDE, which was ignored by SCS/Cray.
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 7

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, FPS use for ATP is dead.
On the verge of bankruptcy, Cray acquired part of the FPS operation. But now
(1995) Cray itself is in trouble. Like Cydrome, FPS could not withstand the
challenge of the ongoing microprocessor revolution. FPS was compatible, but
seemed to be impractical for ATP use.

I-F-17. OS/286 DOS Extender for Intel 286

The DOS extender that was chosen to support ATP on Intel 80286-based (IBM PC
AT-compatible) PCs was named OS/286, and was written by Eclipse Computing.
Solutions, Inc. (formerly A.I. Architects). The associated FORTRAN compiler and
linker are F77L-EM/16 and LINK/286, respectively both from Lahey Computer.
This combination applied to the ATP will be referred to simply as "the OS/286
version" of ATP. Details are covered in Ref. [49].

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, OS/286 is long. gone for
the support of ATP. The Salford compiler for 386s rapidly proved superior, and
serious users abandoned 286-based computers in favor of 386s as prices dropped. The
niche for 286-based solutions did not last long.

The old (original ) OS/2 for 286s never was tried. During September of 1989,
Dr. Mustafa Kizilcay had demonstrated feasibility of Salford EMTP for 386s. The
window of opportunity for l6-bit OS/2 had closed. Further explanation can be found
in the December, 1989, issue of EMTP News (the 11-page paper by Messrs. Kizilcay
and Riedel) .

I-F-18. Uni.x for Intel 386-based PCs

An EMTP version for Unix on 80386-based computers was described in LEC's
"EMTP News" beginning in September of 1988 in articles by David Szymanski.
References can be found in the newsletter, of course. Being used was Unix System
V, Release 3.2, which could be obtained from several companies in the USA. A
batch-mode version of ATP for Unix on 386-based PCs became available free of charge
to licensed ATP users in september of 1989. By definition, Spy was missing,
and bit-mapped plotting was done by use of separate MS-DOS programs such as TPPLOT
and WINDOWPLT (the Unix ATP could create compatible [Link] ".PL4" plot files).
But almost no one had the required Unix, which was neither cheap nor simple.
Finally, with the complete success of the alternative, simpler Salford version of
Section I-F-22, Unix was abandoned quickly.

In addition to being a computer consultant, David Szymanski was a computer

reseller who had offered specially-configured a0286-based (PC AT-compatible) Unix
systems in the past. For a time, he filled the void for those wanting the ideal
a0386-based system for ATP simulation. His enhancements could be found in special
installation-dependent modules, and these were superior in many important ways.
But Unix was much more complex than MS-DOS. As Salford EMTP continued to improve,
the demand for Unix to support ATP on pes disappeared. But Szymanski t s. was an
important piece of ATP history that should not be forgotten. It included the
running of Spy in parallel as a separate Unix process., dynamic dimensioning half
a decade before the 1993 breakthrough of Salford EMTP, and the compression of
tables during dumping (5 years before Robert Schultz t s breakthrough of [Link]
EMTP) .

I-F-19. DEC Uni.x .. VAX Ultri.x, MIPS, OSF

During the spring and summer of 1988, a VAX ULTRIX (DEC' s Unix)
translation was tested at the University of Illinois in Urbana, Illinois, U.S.A.
See the 2-page report by Messrs. Lesieutre and Sauer in the September, 1988,
issue of LEC's "EMTP News."
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 8

The RISC DECstation 3100, a workstation .manufactured by MIPS, was said to run
ULTRIX-32 as it is introduced in the spring of 1989. This was benchrnarked at BPA
as reported in the June, 1989, issue of EMTP news. Then, early in 1990, a second
round of testing of DECStation 3100 was completed by Prof. Jim Smith and students
at Montana State University in Bozeman. ATP certainly was compatible. But
DECstation 3100 was short-lived, as DEC turned its Unix attention from MIPS
to its own Alpha microprocessor.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, there no longer is

interest in the old flavors of DEC Unix. The new DEC Alpha workstations
running OSF Unix certainly are of interest, however. Look in the April, 1995,
newsletter for a story about such use by Dr. S0ren St0vring-Hallsson of NESA in
Hellerup, Denmark. The European user group (EEUG) can arrange distribution.

I-F-20. IBM RT PC Workstation Uses Unix

RT PC was IBM's workstation of the late '80s that ran only Unix. Unlike
the top of the IBM PS/2 line, RT PC did not use any Intel microprocessor.
Rather, it used IBM's own proprietary RISC chip.

FORTRAN for RT PC was first produced during July of 1989, but never was
tested due to lack of Can/Am time (the Portland office of IBM had volunteered a
machine) . Then, on 30 March 1989, an RT PC owner of the power industry
telephoned to express interest. A new translation was rapidly produced and mailed
on 1 April 1989. But the Can/Am user group never learned what happened.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, more than just ATP for
RT PC is believed to be dead. RT PC itself seems to have passed away (nothing
has been read about it in years). Of course, as well know, IBM has moved along
with Apple to the newer, more-open Motorola Power PC.

I-F-21. Siemens Mainframe in Saarlandes

Siemens is the giant German electrical manufacturer that included some
computers in its product line during the '80s. At least certain of these were
proven to be ATP-compatible at Universitat des Saarlandes in Germany. This was
during 1988. The Siemens FORTRAN compiler proved useful as a diagnostic tool, so
during late winter of 1989, a separate translator for Siemens was established,
and a new ATP version was mailed to Saarlandes on March 28th.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, Siemens computers have

been long forgotten. Like all time-shared computers, they no longer are in favor
for the support of ATP. Does Siemens even continue to sell them?

I-F-22. Salford DOS Extender for Intel 386

Salford EMTP and TPPLOT for Intel 386, 486, or Pentium PCs that run
MS-DOS are by far the most widely used ATP software. These are used more than all
other versions combined. Intel PC hardware is the standard of the industry, and
the Salford DOS extender, DBOS/386, can be distributed free of charge of any
interested user.

As this text is being overhauled in April of 1995, the many pages of details
are being removed. See the READ [Link] file on the GIVE 2 disk of Salford EMTP
distribution for this material. Also, consult recent issues of the newsletter.
Any potential user should have more than 2 Mbyte of RAM, however, along with 10
free Mbytes on the hard disk, a color monitor (most use standard VGA), and a
mouse. That is all it takes for the most high-developed and sophisticated ATP
version in the universe.

Some Japanese PCs sold within Japan are incompatible with Salford DBOS,
I-F. Many Different Computers Support ATP - 9

however, it should be noted. NEC and Fujitsu had known problems during. the
early' 90s. Prof. Naoto Nagaoka at Doshisha University in Kyoto understands. such
details.

I-F-23. Watcom ATP for OS/2 Warp

IBM's OS / 2 Warp is one alternative to business as usual (Salford DBOS
running under MS-DOS). Robert Meredith and Robert Schultz of NYPA (New York Power
Authori ty in White Plains) have been pursuing this as detailed in newsletter
stories that begin with the January, 1995, issue. They pursue OS/2 Warp because
of dissatisfaction with MS Windows as a multitasking environment.

Warp is a relatively-new, 32-bit operating system that should not be confused

with the crummy; old, 16-bit version of OS/2 that EPRI used to support DCG/E'PRI
EMTP during the late '80s. EPRI used OS/2 that was written for 286-based PC,
and it simulated very, very slowly. NYPA uses the Watcom compiler, and has
demonstrated full-speed (not quarter-speed) simulation.

As this section is added in April of 1995, the Can/Am user group is

following the NYPA lead. Although OS/2 has not yet been purchased, the Watcom
compiler already is being used with plain MS-DOS. It is compatible. with both, as
well as MS Windows NT. DOS4GW is the name of the DOS extender used by Watcom,
and NYPA has shown that this, too, will support ATP. Look in the July newsletter
for more about this rapidly-evolving story.
I-G. Variable D~ensioning and Dynamic Dimensioning - 1

I-G. [Link] [Link] and [Link] [Link]

VARDIM is the separate variable-dimensioning program that sizes EMTP

tables used to store data describing the network that is to be simulated
at linkage-editing (loading; binding; etc.) time. Prior to the fall of 1993,
this was the only way to size tables. The concept was originally detailed in Ref.
8, Vol. II, 30 January 1975, pagination VARD. See also 17 April 1975,
pagination RSFU. In this present section, only universal aspects will be
summarized. The user also is referred to the installation-dependent instructions
for his particular computer (see Section I-F) since various details of the
procedure depend upon the brand of computer.

Dynamic dimensioning should be understood before any further explanation of

variable-dimensioning, however. This is because dynamic dimensioning modifies the
effect of variable dimensioning. Dynamic dimensioning was introduced in the
October, 1993, newsletter. It allows the user to reduce table sizes at the start
of execution. There is no separate program associated with dynamic dimensioning,
which is built into ATP. At the start of execution, ATP reads the same data
VARDIM would: disk file LISTSIZE. DAT. The difference is, ATP reads table
sizes that are actually to be used for the following simulation. On the other
hand, VARDIM typically will read very large sizes the limits on dynamic
dimensioning that never should be reached by most users. As long as dynamic
dimensioning is available, the table sizing of VARDIM typically will be
artificially large.

VARDIM input generally consists of 4 data cards that embody the user I s
desired table sizes. Such numeric data cards are read using 1018 format. With
only a few relatively-minor exceptions, the user can size all EMTP tables at
will. The first 3 data cards apply to tables used by EMTP simulation, and these
are treated in Section I-G-l immediately below. The 4th card, which applies to
non-solution overlays, is treated in the following Section I-G-2. Proportional
scaling and other special requests involving text are covered in section I-G-3
along with illustrations for Salford EMTP.

l:-G-1. 1st 3 VARD~ data cards: [Link] tables

Input to VARDIM begins with three data cards that size EMTP tables that
are used for simulation. Currently there are 27 independent tables (or "list
sizes"), and these cover the top lines of the display immediately below. Any
blank or zero data fields are assigned default values that are shown below the
dividing lines, to the right of "Default", for the variables of interest.
Detailed definitions for all of these EMTP List Sizes then follow this initial
summary display, card by card.

C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
LEUS LERNCH LDATA LEXCT LYMAT LSWTCH LSIZE7 LPAST LNONL LCBAR
(1) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
250 300 500 50 2500 40 700 1750 75 160

LSMOUT LSIZ12 LSIZ13 LBSTAC LCTACS LIMASS LSYN MAXPE LTACST LFSEM
(2) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
50 50 5000 20 3600 40 4 5 1600 860

LFD LHIST LSIZ23 NCOMP LSPCUM LSIZ26 LSIZ27 LRTACS LSIZ29

(3) --------------------------------------------------____ ----________ _
100 350 4000 3 400 84 1 7000 1
I-G. Variable Dimensioning and Dynamic Dimensioning - 2

Card 1 of VARDIM input for Lists 1.-1.0 ..

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B
~234567B 90123456 7~..901234 ~6789012 ~4567890 p345678 ~O123456 r8901234 ~6789012 ~4567890

IB IB IB IS IS IB Ie Ie Ie Ie

LBUS LBRNCH LDATA LEXCT LYMAT LSWTCH LSIZE7 LPAST LNONL LCHAR

1. LBUS (1-8) is the maximum number of nodes (busses) of the electric

network. Ground occupies one entry.

2. LBRNCB (9-16) is the maximum number of branches of the electric

network. A series R-L-C branch occupies one entry, a 3-phase overhead line
occupies three positions, etc.

3. LDA'l'A (17-24) is the maximum number of floating-point

parameter entries (R, L, C) that represent branches. A series R-L-C branch
contributes one, a 3-phase Pi-circuit contributes six (storage on and below the
diagonal only), etc.

4. LEXCT (25-32) is the maximum number of problem sources. Each. Type-59

dynamic S.M. of List 17 contributes three entries.

5. LYMA'l' (33-40) is the limit on floating-point storage for both the

admittance matrix [YJ of the time-step loop (all nonzero entries must be stored)
and also its factors (diagonal and upper-triangular factors only). This is for
the electric network. Both matrices must be stored simultaneously.

6. LSWTCH (41-48) is the maximum number of switches of the electric

network. Diodes and thyristors (hvdc valves) contribute to this count.

7. LSlZE7 (49-56) is a limit on the total number of distinct, 6-character

(A6), ALPHANUMERIC names that are used to describe the electric network. Node
names have their own special storage, so do not count them for purposes of sizing
List Size 7. Also, do not count Spy symbol names (this has its own extra,
separate storage). But beware of automatic naming. of branches and switches (see
variable NMAUTO of STARTUP), which can require many entries.

8. LPAS'l' (57-64) is the maximum number of modal past-history points, for

distributed-parameter transmission lines and cables. Storage requirements vary
inversely with the time-step size DELTAT.

9. LNONL (65-72) is the maximum number of nonlinear and pseudo-nonlinear

elements of the network. Each saturable TRANSFORMER may contribute one for the
magnetization characteristic.

10. LCBAR (73-80) is the maximum number of points that define the
characteristics of nonlinear or pseudo-nonlinear elements of List 9. Type-96
hysteretic inductors are an exception, however. For the first such element, 2*N
+ 8 cells are allocated, where N is the number of data cards that define the
characteristic. Second and later elements might use the reference-branch feature,
in which case requirements drop to only six cells per element. See Section V-D
for further details of this exceptional case of Type-96 branches. A second
exception is provided by Zno surge arresters, which require extra storage. The
burden of each arrester is equal to the number of. segments (exponentials) that
require representation.
I-G. Variable Dimensioning and Dynamic Di::.Ensioning - 3

Card 2 of VARDIM .input for [Link] 11-20 ..

1 2 3 4 5 € 7 8
~2345678 90123456 78901234 56789012 ~45€7890 2345678 90123456 78901234 r'>6789012 ~45E7890

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 ~8

LSMOUT LSIZ12 LSIZl3 LBSTAC LCTACS LIMASS LSYN MAXPE LTACST LfSEM

11. LSMOUT (1-8) is the maximum number of Type-59 synchrc::lous machine

(S.M.) outputs of the time-step loop. Value unity is taken as a spe=ial flag to
minimize all other Type-59 storage as well. The alternate use of [Link] for List
Sizes 16 and 17 wastes space if no machinery at all is wanted (remember, one
machine and one mass require real tables to store).

12. LSXZ12 (9-16) is the maximum number of outputs of the time-step loop.

13. LSXZ13 (17-24) is working space (in £loating-point wores) for both
batch-mode and interactive (SPY) plotting.

14. LBSTAC (25-32) is the maximum number of connections between Type-92

sources of TACS and rotating machinery (either the Type-59 S.M. or t~e U.M.).

15. LCTACS (33-40) is the maximum number of bytes of [Link],i;CTER storage

for MODELS (new control system modeling) . See also List 28.

16. LIMASS (41-48) is the maximum total number of masses of all Type-59
synchronous machines (List 17). This is the total for all shafts of all machines
of the network.

17. LSYN (49-56) is the maximum number of Type-59 synchronous machines

(S.M. components) of Section VIII.

18. ~E (57-64) is the maximum number of branch or switch power and

energy requests. Thinking of the old, original form of the request, this is the
maximum number of column-80 requests that have a value of "4".

19. LTACST (65-72) is the maximum number of floating-point cells o£ total

storage for all of the TACS tables (see Section III). A value cf 23 is the
minimum allowed (any small value will be increased to this value automatically).
A reasonable practical minimum for production usage might be 2000. Serious TACS
users will generally want more.

20. LFSEM (73-80) is storage for frequency~dependent transmission lines

and cables. For Marti modeling (Sect. IV-D-3), each branch contributes 5 + 7 *
NP cells, where NP is the number of poles used to represent the two functions
Zo and Al. For Sernlyen modeling (Sect. IV-D-4), each branch requires one cell,
plus five times the number of poles of the propagation functions, plus four times
the number of poles of the admittance functions.
I-G. Variable Dimensioning and Dynamic Dimensioning - 4

Card 3 of VARDIM input for Lists 21-30 .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S
r r
~234567S 90123456 S901234 567S9012 ~4567S90 ~234567S ~0123456 S901234 567S9012 ~4567S90

IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS

LFD LHIST LSIZ23 NCOMP LSPCUM LSIZ26 LSIZ27 LRTACS LSIZ29

21. LFD (1-8) is the max~um number of cells used to store transformation
matrices for both constant-parameter and frequency-dependent distributed
transmission line models. For each non-copied transmission circuit of N phases,
2 x N x N cells are required.

22. LB~ST (9-16) is the maximum of yet more frequency-dependent storage.

For each Marti line, 15 cells are required for each coupled phase. For each
Semlyen line, it is the larger of six times the number of coupled phases and two
times the number of poles of both functions (propagation & characteristic
admittance) that is required.

23. LS~Z23 (17-24) is a value that must be supplied for computers that do
not overlay EMTP tables. For fully-virtual systems that are not short of address
space, LSIZ23 gives the length in floating-point words of three giant vectors
that are used for node renumbering and the phasor steady-state solution. That is
the conventional use of List 23, which applies to all computers. A possible
exceptional use of List 23 for computers with virtual. memory (more precisely,
those computers with KBURRO = 1) is for the storage of intexmediate results of
STATISTICS or SYSTEMATIC solutions. For each energization, the vectors of
switch closing times and opening times, and the output vector (extrema) all are
saved in one floating-point vector that is dimensioned by List Size 23. Note that
such storage requirements vary linearly with the number of energizations, so any
allocation will be overflowed as the number of shots approaches infinity (beware,
user!). Also for virtual computers, statistical tabulations impose even further
on List 23, which is used for working space to produce the tabulation.

24. NCOMP (25-32) is the maximum number of phases of compensation for

peak problem size. The actual max~um number of phases then varies inversely with
the number of problem nodes. Use of NCOMP = 3 is common, since this allows
3-phase compensation for a network that is of maximum size, 6-phase compensation
with a network of half size, etc.

25. LSPCUM (33-40) is the max~um number of floating-point cells of total

storage for all universal machine (U.M.) tables. If U.M. modeling. of Section IX
is not of interest, set LSPCUM to unity. Practical production usage allowing
two 3-phase induction machines typically requires a value of 1500 (or more).

26. LSIZ26 (41-48) is the length of several small working vectors that
are used for various functions in ATP. The square of the number of coupled
phases of various components (e.g., lines or Pi-circuits) must not exceed List 26.
Note that the common value of 3 times default gives 150, which allows a 12-phase
line.

27. LSIZ27 (49-56) is no longer being used. It once was reserved for use
with frequency-dependent sources of Ref. 35. BPA's EMTP has such solution code,
but not the associated data generator (never contributed to the public domain by
Ontario Hydro). After years of disuse, the code was removed.

28. LRTACS (57-64) is the total numeric storage in floating-point words

for MODELS (new control system modeling). See also List 15.

29. LS~Z29 (65-72) is the size of extra, auxiliary storage. for LABCOM
tables of STATISTICS/SYSTEMATIC energizations. The average user is advised to
leave this field blank. Those wanting such storage for byte-organized computers
I-G. Variable D~ensioning and Dynamic D~ensioning - 5

can obtain it automatically using the RAM TABLES declaration (see below). Only
for word machines should an actual large value be keyed, and then only after
careful study. 132-column case summary statistics at the end of EMTP execution
will display a row for this entry only if meaningful storage has been requested.

i-G-2. 4th VARDIM card .. non-s:imulation tables

For virtual computers (including Salford EMTP), certain supporting programs
do all of their calculations in one giant working array that the user can size at
will. This is variable LWORK of a 4th and final input card:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2345678 90123456 ?890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

18 18

LWORK [Link]

LWORK (1-8) is the total working space in 4-byte words. Value 240K has
been used for years without difficulty. It will allow the representation of about
100 conductors within LINE CONSTANTS.

LMARTI (9-16) is dimensioning for JMARTI SETUP. The fixed value 742
has been used without difficulty for years.

For overlaid program versions, the situation is substantially more

complicated. Fortunately, as this section is being revised in September of 1994,
no overlaying is being contemplated. overlaying was used in years past with CDC
and IBM mainframe computers, but all such usage has disappeareq within North
America. Associated instructions can no longer be justified, so are being
omi tted. If overlaying might ever be used again, information about it should
accompany the installation-dependent subsection within Section I-F.

i-G-3. Proportional d:imensioning & illustrations

The DEFAULT declaration is optional, but is very useful; and it is
strongly recommended except in cases of very large data sets. If DEFAULT is
found in columns 1 through 7, then the number of columns 9-16 is taken as the
multiple of default dimensioning that is to apply to all blank variable fields.

The SCALE declaration is optional. If this key word is found in columns

1 through 6, then the number of columns 9-16 is taken as a final multiplier for
all variable fields. Note the difference from the preceding DEFAULT
declaration, which
applies only to blank fields. If both declarations are used, then any blank field
is sized using the product of the two multipliers and the associated default
dimensioning.

The FIXED declaration is optional. If this key word is found in columns

1 through 5, then the numbers of columns 11-70, read as 3012, are taken as list
numbers. The SCALE multiplier is applied only to blank or zero lists. That is,
keying unity will prevent such scaling, thereby holding the associated entry
fixed. The FIXED declaration allows the user to exclude the effect of SCALE

The RAM TABLES declaration is optional. If this key word is found in

columns 1 through 10, then list size 29 is internally defined to equal LTLABL
(the LABCOM size in INTEGER words), thereby creating duplicate, alternate storage
space for tables that can be used by some computers for the storage of tables of
STATISTICS/SYSTE~TIC energizations.
I-G. Variable Dimensioning and Dynamic Dimensioning - 6

There should never be any need to size tables at less than default
dimensioning, so former cautions about the dangers of this have been removed. For
Salford EMTP or other virtual comp~ters, this has no meaning.

Normal execution of the variable-dimensioning. program results in printout

that includes a listing of the input data-cards. For example, as part of normal
Salford EMTP setup using. [Link] dimensions, the following output was
produced. It has been truncated on the right (missing. are the final 40 columns of
the input data cards) for ease of display:

o 1 2 3 4
o o o o o
1st card (Lists 1-10) . 1 3000 3000 10000 340 20000
2nd card (Lists 11-20) . 1 360 900 36400 255 64800
3rd card (Lists 21-29). 1 3000 12000 40000 24 30000
Supplemental offsets. 1 240000 742
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Normal termination of "VARDIM" . LTLABL = 2127549 (the size of OIL

These, then are the limiting dimensions, which result in tables of 2127 Kbytes
total size. Each time Salford EMTP. begins, it reads [Link] to reduce
these for actual use. As distributed by the user group, 3 -times default
dimensioning. will produce the following output to the screen immediately before
the opening prompt:
EMTP table dumping to RAM. I RAM TABLES
Default multiplier = 3.000 I DEFAULT 3.0
1st card (Lists 1-10). IBLANK
2nd card (Lists 11-20). IBLANK
3rd card (Lists 21-29). IBLANK
Supplemental offsets. I 240000 742
The total size of these tables will be 232 Kbytes, as will be seen from the
following heading. of LUNIT6 output. That is, on average, use is being made of
only 11% of the total possible space. Yet, scaling is not uniform. One can not
use nine times this size (27 times default dimensioning). The limit to such
uniform scaling is somewhere between 5 and 6 times default dimensioning. For
example, the user who tries 8 times default will receive the following error
complaining about 5 of the list sizes:
***********************************************
Error. Vardim input file [Link] has
too big dimensions. Bad values are:
List J Limiting value Requested
4 340 400
9 460 600
10 900 1280
11 360 400
13 36400 40000
***********************************************

system-dependent control cards or commands will be required to actually

effect the dimension-changing process. VARDIM builds FORTRAN subroutines that
must then be compiled and linked with EMTP. Refer to installation-dependent
instructions for the computer of interest for details. For Salford EMTP,
[Link] is used.
Page lH-l

I-H. FCRTRAN Data Format Specifications, both Fixed- and Free-Format

1'hroLghout this manual, data formats or requirements are indicated using

fixed-format FCRTRAN notation. symbols such as "Fl0.3" or "18" or "E10.0"
are comnon indications of such requirements. AlthoLgh usually not stated,
there also is an alternative, parallel, free-format way of specifying such data.
While such fixed-format notation, and the free-format alternative, may be clear
enough for those who program in FCRTAAN, a few words of explanation might be
helpful to the average reader \Iho does not. '.Ibis is the £unetion of the present
Section. If the idea still is -unclear after reading this smmary, the user is
referred to some local expert, or to any FCRTRAN manual.

F-field [Link] (and generally requires) the user to key a decimal

point, and that he not key any polft1er of ten to shift that decimal point. In the
example "F10.3", the width is tencolunns. 1'he beginning and ending colunns
should always be clear from the context. As long as the user keys a decimal
point, the nunber can be positioned anywhere within the 10-colunn data field
(the computer does not care), a1thotgh COrtITIon practice right-adjusts nunbers for
increased readability, and consistency. 1'he "3" at the end of "F10.3"
indicates that 3 decimal digits to the right of the decimal point are asslllled if
no decimal point is keyed. For cases where a decimal point is keyed, the "3" is
ignored. Except for those cases where the user bel ieves he must gain one more
digit of precision (at the expense of the decimal p:>int), keying of the decimal
point is always advised. Missing decimal points are an easy source of error,
particularly if the program FCRTRAN does not correspond to the user
docunentation (in which case movement of the decimal point would be different
than advertised) 1. Examples of F-field nunbers that could be read using F10.3
format are:
C 34567890
-39.5 - Ok, althoLgh not right-adjusted
132745 ---- Gives 132.745 (implied decimal)
3.141592 ---- Gives the circular constant Pi

I-field format is for integers, and no decimal point is allowed. No polft1er

of ten (scientific notation) can be keyed, . either. [Link] must be right-
adjusted, if shifting of the decimal p:>lnt (resulting in incredible confUSion!)
Is to be avoided. kly blanks on the .right are interpreted as thoLgh they were·
zeros (hence shifting of the decimal p:>int). Excrnples of 110 usage are:
C 34567890
-39 ---- Correctly right-adjusted
1024
..;99 ---- Gives -99,0001 Beware!
9 3 ---- Avoid such imbedded blanks
,'!he final example involves an imbedded blank, the treatment of \oJhich may be
catlp,lter-dependent. For example, DEC VAX/VMS would read the nunber as 903,
\oJhereas Ap::>llo would not. 'lhe user is advised to avoid imbedded blanks always.

A-field format is for character strings, which are just about arbitary in
content. Node names, or comp:ment names, are examples of the most comnon such
usage that involves N5 format, with the "6 11 indicating 6 characters. 'lhe
beginning and ending colunn for such data should always be clear from the
context. Examples of legal A6 data follow:
Page 18-2

C 3456
J~'lA Typical node name with 1 blank on left
1.e+<! Meaningless, but legal, character string
GRown A full 6-character name without blanks

E-field format is for nllllbers in scientific notation. If the p:>wer of 10

is nonzero, and is explicitely keyed, then the nllllber should always be right-
adj usted. Otherwise, the exp:>nent will differ by a p:>wer of 10, and will ei ther
be grossly wrong, or simply illegal (operating systems will often produce an
error termination, due to overflow during decoding). ':the preceding F-field data
are just a special case (always legal) in which the p:>wer of ten is zero, and
hence is missing. For the example "E10.3", the field width is 10, and 3
decimal digits to the right of the decimal point are [Link] i f no decimal point
is keyed. For cases where a decimal p:>int is keyed, the "3" is ignored. Except
for those cases where the user believes he must gain one more digit of precision
(at the expense of the decimal point), keying of the decimal p:>int is always
advised. Missing decimal p:>ints are an easy source of error, particularly if
the program FCRTAAN does not correspond to the user docllllentation! Examples of
E-field data that could be read using El0.3 format are:
C 34567890
1.609E3 ---- Gives 1609
1.609E3 - Gives 1.6e9E+300 (wrong!)
3.141592 ---- Gives the circular constant pi
-39.5 ---- Ok, al though not r ight-adj usted
-5.2E-4 ---- Gives -.00052
5.2E+4 ---- Gives 52000

So much for fixed-format data. ':there also is the option of free-format

data specification, for perhaps half or more of the different EMTP data
stroctures. ':the idea is simple. Rather than p:>sitioning. data fields in fixed
colunn locations, there is an ordering from left to right, with a separator
character (a corrma) used to delineate the field boundaries. If more than one
data card is needed for the string of data items, a continuation character (a
dollar sign) is used rather than a separator character, which means that another
data card is to be read before extracting the next data item.

To illustrate, consider the special request word "PCWER FRECUENCY" which

provides for redefinition of the steady-state frequency (see Section II-A).
Using free-format, an equivalent declaration would be:
PC)\IER FREc,m:N:Y, 50
Rather than keying 50.0 in colunns 33-40, n, sen has been appended to the
key word. ':the corrma is a separator character, dividing the key word from the
parameter; the space after it is optional, since blank characters are ignored
in this mode. Note also that no decimal p:>int has been keyed, since integers
and floating p:>int variables are interchangable when using free-format.
It is not always clear whi::h EM'I'P data structures can be handled by the
EMTP free-format option. As a general rule, the simple or regular structures
can, whereas complicated and/or irregular structures can not. Why? For
canplicated and/or irregular structures, the counting of coomas is a pain at
best, and error prone at worst. In any case, be skeptical, and always test the
capability before relying on it for the coding of any substantial volume of
data.
page 1H-3

For m..rneric data fields, blanks are ignored, no matter where they appear.
For example, ", 10 3," is the sarne as ",103," •

For floating-point [Link], ei ther "D" or "E" can be used to iOO icate
a power of ten. 'thus "l.E+9" and "1.0+9" are identical. Also i the plus
sign preceding an exponent can be dropped, so that "1.E9" is equally valid.

Errors with the use of fMTP free-format capability can be confusing

sometimes, due to the fact that execution will not al\..eys be stopped
inlnediately. A KILL = 166 error flag can be set wi thin module "FREFlD" , and
there should be one line of diagnostic printout annoll'lcing the fact:
WRITE (UJNIT6, 9207) LSTAT(19), lCli\IN, IASTOV, I<OLBm,
1 NFRFLD, ~IGHT
9207 FCRMAT ( I, , Error stop within "mEFLD". ISTAT(19),',
1 'NCli\IN, IASTOV, I<OLBEX:i, NFRFLD, lIRIGHT =', 618
But there is no easy way for the program immediately to transfer control to the
EMTP error routine in all cases. It .may take some time before a check on the
control variable KILL being nonzero is encountered , at which point the formal
EMTPerror stop ("You lose, fella") should result. If the erroneous data causes
more serious numerical problems in the interim (e.g., division by zero), the
formal error stop may never be reached. 'this is a hasard of free-format usage
that the user must learn to live with.
Page 1H-4

Daniel's warning about possible need for extra coomas at end of card

When raniel (Prof. raniel Van D:mnelen of K.U.L. in Belgiun, Chairman of

the European EMTP Users Group) "-Orked with us in Portland during August of 1982,
he reminded WSM of sane additional information about EMTP free-format usage, as
mentioned on page 2 of a letter fran him dated 26 May 1982. Although WSM has
not independently checked this information, it is being relayed as reliable
runor. If not true for current program versions, it certainly must have been
true for the "M28.+" and/or "M3l." IBM versions with which Daniel had been
"-Orking at that time. 'lhe following 'Nere Daniel t s points, as slItlnarized by WSM
during August of 1982:

Restriction 1: 'Itle branch type code ITYPE and four node names
Bts1, Bts2, Bts3, and Bts4, must be contained in
colunns one through 26. Note that this is the
normal fixed-format location. Why the EMTP needs
this is no longer clear to me. I suspect that l'f
the last name and its separator carma ("Bts4,")
must be to the left of colunn 27, then the
numeric data to follow must also be to the right
of colunn 26. 'lhis agrees with the exanple of
Vladimir's "'IREIEG" output. in the tx>ttan half of
page 100e.

Restriction 2 For the uncoupled, series R-L-C branch, at least

nine data fields are required. Since only three
floating-point fields are actually used, this
suggests that six extra carmas after the third
of these might be a good idea.

Restriction 3 For coupled R-L elements, at least six data fields

are required. Since the first phase only shows the
use of t"-O nunbers, and extra four "-Ould seem to
always provide safety. But what about. pi-circuits?
Al thougt{ I wrote nothing, I suspect that the rule
of Restriction 2 might 'Nell apply to these as
'Nell. 'lhe "nine" data fields "-Ould correspond
to three triplets of R-L-C parameters, which is
the longest Pi-circuit data card - - and probably
the source of the trouble.
page 11-1

I-I. Structure of EMTP inp..1t data

1-1-1. Ordering of Different Classes of Data cards

EachEMTP [Link] described by a collection of data cards that will be

called a "data case". Except for data sorting by class (see the following
section I-J for details), data cards must be ordered by the user according to
class. For a transient simulation (the most imFOrtant case of program usage),
the following classes are involved, in the order shown. 'Ibis is the order that
data is explained in this Rule Book, too:

1) cards to begin a new data case. Inclooed are a "BEl31N NE.W !li\'tl\ CASE"
card, special request cards of various types (if any), and finally, the EMTP
miscellaneous data cards and any extensions to those cards.

2) Cards that define any 'I1>.CS model ing. 'Ibis is for control systems,
inc100ing transfer function blocks (e.g., integrators) of the type that once
were solved using analog canp..1ters.

3) Cards for linear and nonlinear branches, transformers, and transmission

lines (or cables), terminated by a blank card.
4) Cards for electric-network switches, diodes, and thyristers (ac/dc
converter valves) , terminated by a blank card.

5) Source cards for the electrical network: voltage sources, current

sources, dynamic rotating .machinery. '1bese are terminated by a blank card.

6) Load flow cards for ·FIX SOURCE" usage.

7) cards for over-riding the internally-calculated initial conditions

(Wiich cane from the tbasor steady-state network solution) •

8) Output variable specification cards. 'Ibese are terminated by a blank

card if the specification is selective. But if all node voltages are requested
by means of a ·1" incollmn two, then there is to be no blank terminating
card.

9) cards for specifying '1YPe I-Ie EMTP source functions FOint by FOint.
'Ibere is one card for each time-step, terminated by a ·9999" card.

1e) Batc~mode plotting cards (either for ca1Ccxnp vector-graphic plotting

or line printer plotting) , terminated by a blank card.

This data structure is for a single , deterministic, transient simulation, which

is the most common case (see next paragraph for exceptions). Often data classes
2, 6, 7, and/or 9) are not required, and can simply be omitted. If data class
4, 5, or 10) might possibly not be needed due to the nature of the problem under
consideration, then only the terminating blank card is required (and must never
be forgotten) •
page 11-2

There are valid EMTP data cases that do not have the above structure. The
first class of such exceptions involves usage of the EMTP supporting routines.
Examples are "UNE CCNSTANTS" (used to calculate the constants of overhead
transmission lines) and "REPLOT" (used for the batch-mode plotting of a
previously-solved data case) • The second class of such exceptions involves the
usage of multiple-simulation features such as for statistical overvoltage
studies (the "STATISTICS" request of switch cards). Details of such exceptions
are covered in the body of this manual.

As seen from the preceding explanation of data-deck structure, the blank

card is extensively used as a terminator card, for various classes of data.
Sanetimes a user is confused as to the purpose of one or more blank cards, and
would like to add some explanation of the meaning. This is easy; just use
"SIANK " for the first six characters, and the remainder of the card is
available for comnent. For example, "SIANK CARD ENDING SAAN:H CARtS" The
EMTP recognizes all such cards, and blanks them out internally, before
processing them (but after listing on the printer; they appear as as they were
keyed by the user).

Just as with FCRTRAN prograrrming, "ccmnent cards" of [Link]\an language

(e.g., English or French) text can be added to the data deck at any point. The
keying of "c" in [Link] 1-2 (note. the blank colLmn two, which is
mandatory) is all that it takes for the EMTP to ignore a data card completely.
Such ccmnent cards will appear as part of the input data 1 isting , but otherwise
will be disregarded by the EMTP.

Also, whole blocks of data can be so ignored by the EMTP if recourse is

made to $DISABrE and $El'W)rE cards. Refer to Section 1-0, as well as to the
installation-dependent information for the computer system of interest (Section
I-F) •
In-line comnents are even more powerful and flexible. Wherever there is a
blank region on an EMTP data card, the user may insert an in-line carment
(arbitrary text) within delimiting braces, such as "{Any text}". The second
(closing) brace is required only if nonblank characters exist to the right of
the point of usage.

A final form of comnent information consists of arbitrary records at the

end of a data file, following an "EOF" card (the three characters within
quotation .marks keyed in [Link] 1-3). This is a "software" end-of-file, which
terminates the reading of input records. Hence any following information is
ignored completely by the program. For an illustration of such usage, see
SENClfWU< OC-8.

1-1-2. Principles for Describing the Electric Network

Each non-ground node of the electric net\o¥Ork is given a 6-character

alPianLll\eric name. Qlly identical sequences of 6 characters will be recognized
as the same name. Therefore, -VOLTS" will be a different node than • VOLTS".
Six blanks (an all-blank name) are reserved as the name for ground (the common
reference, or local ground.). Other special, reserved names that the user should
avoid incllrle: " •••••• ", "'n!P-l6" , "HEIGHT", "MARGIN", "SMCXJTH" , "'mRGET" ,
Page 1I-3

"Nl\ME ", "BRAOCH", "NJNLIN", "~E:", and "COp.{ ". At least these are the
names in English (defined by either the STARTUP file or the file of program
language, such names are in fact computer- and/or user-dependent). [Link] names
automatically follow from the names that accompany electric net~rk branches and
swi tches. 'Ihere is no separate entry of node-related quanti ties.
Branches are identified by their data and the names of the nodes to which
they are connected. SUch infonnation is to be keyed into carefully deltroited
fields of 8e-colunn card troages, as moch of the remainder of this docllnent
describes. SUch card troages are called "branch cards." SWitches really are
just special branches that are segregated fran the non-switch branches for
reasons of history and program efficiency only. 'Ihe name ·[Link] cards· applies
to these special branch cards. In addition to node names, branch or switch
cards can carry optional branch names, 1Itlich have the advantage of uniqueness
and compactness (one name instead of t~) • Because branches can be placed in
parallel, the names of tenninal nodes may not LI'liquely identify a branch of
interest.

A .static voltage or current source is a scalar element that generally has

one end connected to local ground (althou;h there are exceptions) • Various
standard source functions (e.g., batteries, ramps, surge functions, sinusoids,
etc.) are p:>ssible, as is the specification of functions po int-by-p:>int , or the
definition of sources by user-defined FCRTRAN, or by control signals (TACS). By
specifying t~ or more such sources for a node, canplex wavefonns consisting of
the SLll'l of more elementarycanp::ments are p:>ssible. 'Ihat is, t~ or more
voltage sources at a node are considered to be in series, whereas t~ or more
current sources at a node are considered to be in parallel.

A
-- - - -- E eA i8 TOltase between

I -I
terminals A and AI;
~ is vol tase between
termiD&lsB and :B I •
-
-.
. ~,

'<' ...',r~),(~,~~,'.r!(;' I'-~.

!l'r&na~a8ion Line
with Ground Resistance
.... -.......

Volt~ Source Current Source

Node voltage is the voltage from a net~rk node to local ground. Since
distributed-parameter lines and cables inclooe the effects of the earth and
geograp"licalseparation, the user should be aware that p:>tential of the earth is
not constant.
page 11-4

'A branch voltage is the voltage difference across a branch. EMTP voltage
outputs can consist of a mixture of node voltages and branch voltages. If one
wants a voltage difference where no branch normally would exist, it is simple to
add a very high resistance (1. E18 oms will work for any known computer) in the
desired place, and then request the voltage of this sampling resistor.

I-I-3. Description of Control System M:x1eling (T'ACS)

The preceding SUImIary has considered only the description of the electric
network (resistors, capacitors, sources, etc.). The modeling of control system
dynamics is separate and distinct, as provided by the ~CS code of Section III.

Control system blocks can take various forms: Laplace transfer functions,
[Link] junctions, nonlinear algebraic operations (multiply, divide, square
root, etc.), log icaloperations, etc. The output of each control system block
is associated with a distinct, 6-character, alphanlJlleric name that identifies
the signal in question. SUch blocks can be defined and interconnected quite
arbitrarily by the user, fooning a control system circuit. one such sample
illustrative diagram is shown in the following sketch:

..-----....,.
Kz. ti3
_----r
~
- ~.-.~

NOD£ MXTAGES
BRANCH CURRENTS A + B$ + cs2t--....-t~.
{ SWIJS OF swr1O£S "'--_..... - .

I
HACHtH£ AJG.E • . .

SUP
~AG£ SQURCES
OJRRENT SQURCES
SW'IrtH CQNrROl.
_V£ FIllING. ~
N2.. - .,

....._ _... 7'.:

It might be mentioned that the same 6-character, alphanllneric name can be used
both within ~CS and also for the electric network. There is no confusion by
the EMTP, since the ~CS solution is completely separate from the electric
network solution. SUch double usage is in fact recommended for interface
quantities that are equal, to remind the user of the connection.

Note the one-way flow of the signals (unlike for the electric network,
control system canp:ments are directional, and are not bilateral) • Signal
sources which serve as input to such control circuitry can be either sel£-
contained (e.g., a sinusoidal oscillator, or a step function) , or can be defined
by the electric net'NOrk (e.g., any node voltage or any switch current can be
used as a 'mCS source) • Likewise, any 'mCS variable can be passed back to the
electric network for control purposes (e.g., the status of an electric net'NOrk
switch can be controlled by ~CS, as can a voltage source, or the field voltage
of a dynamic synchronous machine. Variables of this type which are passed back
and forth between the electric net'NOrk and 'mCS are referred to as interface
quantities.
Page 11-5

I-I-4. 6-Character Element Names for Branch and SWitch Identification

In the beg inn in; , when caseS\ro1ere snall and methods \ro1ere less mechanized,
the use of the pair of terminal node names was adequate for element
identification. But since this is often not unique (parallel branches are
allo\ro1ed, and switches may parallel branches), there can be confusion and/or
error fran this, so branches have also been given 6-character names just as
nodes are. In the years ahead, it is expected that branch and switch names will
receive increased usage. So, altholJ3h today the feature is not carmon, program
users should at least be aware of the concept, and how it can be employed.

The first point is that each and every branch and switch can be given a
default name, before any data input begins. See variable tlo1AlJI'O of the
STAATUP file. If DIA~OSTIC printout is turned on, or if SP'f is used for
interactive observation (e.g., the -BRAN:H", -S*lI'ICH", or -NJNLIN W corrrnands),
these names will be seen:
UN00l, UN002,etc. for rows of the linear branch table;
NLN001 ,NI..N002, etc. for rows of the nonlinear element table;
SW'm0l, S*l'I'002, etc. for rows of the swi tch table.
Hence, even if the user does not supply names of his own (as explained below) ,
he can use these default names, which really correspond to referring to elements
by row number of the associated storage table.

For both linear and nonlinear branches, it is simple to supply a name

provided the element of interest is not a copy of sane preceding element. In
this case, the Bl.E3 and Bl.E4 name fields (collmns 15 throlJ3h 26) \!IOuld
otherwise be left blank. 'Ib provide a name, use:
Bl.E3 = - ~E:- ---- A request \!lOrd for the naming operation;
Bl.E4 = -br nam- ---- Whatever branch name the user desires.
This is not possible for switches, ho\ro1eVer, since no such name fields exist
(unfortunately) •

'Ib copy a previously-named branch using the 6-character branch name of that
original branch (rather than the pair of terminal node names), one again uses
the t\!106-character name fields of co1s. 15-26:
Bl.E3 = -COP'f - - - A request \!lOrd for the copying operation;
Bl.E4 = -br_narn- - Name of the branch being copied.

'Ib name a branch that is a copy of sane preceding branch (so that co1l1!1ns
15-26 are already being used), precede the branch to be named by a special,
extra card that performs this function. The just-listed BUS3 and BUS4 awear in
columns 15-26 of this extra card; in columns 3-14, add the special-request text:
BRAN:H NAME: if following branch to be named is linear;
NONLIN NAME: ---- if fo1lowin; branch to be named is nonlinear.

'Ib name a switch, such a separate declaration card preceding the switch of
interest is required. The request text wNNt\E W is required in [Link] 3-8,
follo\ro1ed by the chosen switch name in colll!1ns 9-16.
Page lJ-l

1-0. EMTP Data Sorting by Class (Use of "I" cards)

For small problems, the user is advised to have all data contained in a
single disk file where it easily can be inspected and modified as a single,
self-contained piece. Such data should be ordered to conform to the rules of
the preceding Section 1-1-1. '!his is easy, for small problems.

But big problems are another matter. If data cards are so nunerous that a
user can not remember or think about all at the same time, any..way, then the time
probably has come to work in smaller pieces, perhaps using SINCUJDE (Section
I-K below), to spread the data out over more than one disk file. If data has
already been modularized, tested, and stored in a data base, this will almost
certainly require data sorting by class, USing "I" cards. Or, even within a
single file, the user may want to use such sorting to remove restrictions on
input ordering. It may be clearer to the user to group comFOnent data
"geogratx'lically" rather than by data class, for example. For whatever reason it
may be used, data sorting by class is a FOwerful and imFOrtant technique of the
large-scale production user. usage of the "1ft cards that control it are
explained in the remainder of this section.

'!he sorting of EMTP input data by class is built around the special
character "I" in colunn one. Not unlike the ·S" of S-cards (see Section 1-
D), this is a special, reserved symbol that then must be followed by the desired
key word that names the variable class. '!he following FOssibilities are
recogni zed :
lREcm:ST I'lJ>.CS IBRAN:H 1&I:rn:H lSOURCE
IID.D FI..CW IIN1TIAL IOl1I'PUT /PLCYr I srATIST1CS
This should be almost self-explanatory for the user who has read Section 1-1-1
above, where the different FOssible data classes of a. deterministic simulation
are defined. O1ly the very last key word ("ISI'ATISTICS") has no corresFOndence,
since the information of Section 1-1-1 is restricted to single, deterministic
simulations. But for srATISTICS/SYSTEMATIC usage, there will be requests for
statistical tabulation (see Section XV), and the final key word is associated
with these. As for the preceding nine key words, these correStx>nd to the
numbered classes of Section 1-1-1 as follows: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 11,
respectively.

Superficially, usage is simple. Whenever there is a change of data class,

the user simply inserts a ·I"-card. When two or more disk files are used (with
S1NCUJDE), then the user is advised to asslltle nothing upon entry. '!hat is,
always begin data of a SINCWDE file with a "I"-card. AA illustration of
"1ft -card usage is provided by BENClft1ARK DC-33. While BENClft1ARK DC-17 also
involves data sorting, this is combined with argunents of S1NCWDE usage (see
Section I-K), which make it more involved.

'!he beginning of data in the disk file is handled exceptionally. '!his is

so that a "BEI:iIN NEW ~'m CASE" card can aRJear first., followed by corrment
cards ("C" in colunns 1-2) - cards that will not be reordered by any
sorting. Later cooment cards will be sorted, but not those that irrmediately
follow the very first "BEX:;1N NEW ~TA CASE" card that begins the file of data.
Page IJ-2

The normal, undeclared miscellaneous data cards (inclu:Ung extensions) , and

the declaration that precedes the .first ~CS data if any (either "'[Link] STAND
AI..C1lE" or "~CS HYBRID"), are also exceptions. Wi th no blank termination
card for posi tioning, and no special "I" card to identify them, such data cards
can only be positioned with care. Such data must precede the first blank card
(ending ~C5 if there is such usage; otherwise, the blank card ending branch
cards) •

Special blank termination cards are critical to the sorting of data.

Recall that a blank card terminates ~CS data, branch cards, switch cards, etc.
Well, the positioning of these blank cards is used to provide insertion points
for the different classes of data. To simplify program logic, a critical
assLlIlption was made, namely that the key word of the class could be found on the
blank card that terminates data of that class. For exanple, on the blank card
that terminates branches, it is required that the key word "BAAN:H" is located
somewhere on the card. '!be following would be such a legal card:
BlANK card ending all BAAN:H cards
Normally the user would not switch fran lower case to capi tol letters for the
word "BRAN:H" as shown here, but for this data sortin;; by class, it is
mandatory. If the user forgets and uses lower-case letters, the key word will
not be recognized, and the sortin;; will be quite erroneous. Note that the blank
cards themselves are not sorted, so the user must place them all in the file in
the correct natural order. If all other data except for miscellaneous data
cards and the ~CS declaration are identified by preceding "/" cards, then it is
these cards that can all appear together at the start of the data file. '!be
following stnx:ture is recarmended:
BEXiIN NEW D\'lJI. CASE
C First of an arbitrary [Link] of carment cards at start.
< < Etc. > >
C [Link] of an arbitrary nlJ'llber of carment cards at start.
Miscellaneous data cards and extensions
~CS HYBRID -I Present
.. or I only if
'.l1>.CS STAND ALCNE 1 TACS usag e
BlANK card terminates all ~CS data-l
BlANK card endin;; all BRAN:H cards
BlANK card end ing all £WITCH cards
BlANK terminates the last SOURCE card
BlANK card ends OOTPUT variable requests
BlANK card ending all batch-mode FLOT cards
BEXiIN NEW D\~ CASE
BlANK
< < Etc. "lhe remai~er of the case will
consist of data cards preceded
by "/" cards that identify the
discontinuities of data class. > >
To avoid mistakes, it is recomnended that each new data case beg in wi th such a
standard skeleton, to which all "/" cards and the associated data are added at
the end. Note that the end of the data case (as indicated by a "BEXiIN NEW D\'lJI.
CASE" card and blank card) has been placed ~ediately after the last blank
card that is associated with a data type being used. For this single,
deterministic simulation, this is ~ediately after the blank card ending plot
cards.
Page lJ-3

Dimensioning of tables for the "/"-card sortill3 of this section should

never pose a problem - provided the program is dimensioned large enough to
solve the data case of interest. O'le cell of List 1 (bus vectors) is required
for each "/" card. 'Ihere is no overflow checking.

To bypass data sorting by class for a data case that has "/" cards, the
user merely places "N)SCRT" on the "BEx;IN NEW D\'l1\ CASE" card that begins
the file. Key "N)SCRI'" anywhere to the right on the normal request word. For
an illustration of such usage, see BEN:tfo1ARI< 0:-36. Although later there may
be other uses, for now usage is confined to "M'l1\ BASE MODULE" cases. In
fact, not just sortill3 but also the $INCUJDE processing of the following
section are bypassed by the use of "N)SCRI''' •
Page lK-l

I-K. $INCWDE Use for Data Modularization

The $INCWDE statement is a lX'werful construction that a110ws the user to

build an EMTP data file by reference to sma11er pieces that have been previously
established and tested. Each such statement ca11s for the insertion (or
inclusion) of another file at the lX'int of usage. The general fonn of usage is:
$INCWDE, file_name, arg_l, arg_2, •••• arg_N
where "$ INCLUDE" must begin in column one, and where all following entries are
free-fonnat, separated by corrmas. Chly a single line is presently a110wed for
the statement (continuation on a second card is not a11owed) • The fi rst
argunent is a disk filename indicating where records are stored (more about
this immediately below) • The second and remaining argunents are optional; they
are used only if the disk .file being referenced requires them, in which case
such argunents must precisely match those of the disk file in mmber, type, and
fonnat. Argunents ("arg l" ,etc.) are just character strings without imbedded
blanks, al thoU;h the asstiiiptions and regulations for handling those strings are
different for mrnerical argunents than they are for alphanuneric strings (more
about this later). Finally, such $INCWDE statements can be nested (imbedded
inside of one another) without limit.

Warning! Unless the FCRTRAN compiler of the cOOlputer being used lX'ssesses
dynamic OPEN/ClOSE capability, the use of SINCWDE is not generally
possible. IBM mainframe usage of VS FffiTRAN has this problem as last checked
during the fa11 of 1986.

The present section will only treat the usage of $INCWDE files that have
(,
already been established. That is, there shall be no details about how such
files are constructed. Without arguments, the construction is trivial, since
any interactive text editor is all that is required. But for argunents, special
integer lX'inters are requi red, and the creation of these is the \I\Ork of a
separate suPlX'rting program (see the servicing of "D.l>.TA BASE MODULE" in
Section XIX-F) •

The first clarification of the initial summary definition of $INCLUDE

usage applies to the first argument, ·file name", which is more than just a
complete disk file name.l'ore precisely, Tt is the critical central lX'rtion
only of a legal disk file name. 'ttlis root can be au;mented autOOlatica11y by a
standard prefix and a standard suffix, which are to be declared as follows:
SPREFIX, string pre
SSUFFIX, string-suf
These t\l\O lX'ssible declarations are indepeooent of each other in that ei ther one
or both can be used. The ·S· must be keyed in column one, as usual. But
thereafter, free-fonnat applies, except that the character strings must not
involve imbeddeci blanks. 'lhat is, once a string begins, the first blank that is
encountered in scanning to the right will tenninate the string. There is
practically no limit on the lengths of prefixes and suffixes, since strings up
to 40 bytes each are allowed for "string pre" and "string suf". If no such
prefix or suffix declaration has previoUSly been made by the user, then none
will be added to ·file name" of $INCLUDE usage, of course. But such
automatic augmentation of- disk file names is strongly recomnended for the
serious production user, since it is very powerful, and it allows considerable
flexibility at virtually no cost to the user. The addition of a standard file
type, version nunber, directory, disk, aDd even canputer (in the case of
net\l\Orked usage) are all p::lssible - automatically, internally, by the EMTP.
Page lK-2

One advantage of using file name prefixes and suffixes is that nfile name n
can then be made independent of computer (at least for most computers of (
interest) • Consider an example, beginning with VAX-II, which might use the
following declarations:
$PREFIX, rnB2: [EOGBWS>1]
$SUFFIX, .LEC;88
Such declarations \<wOuld precede the $INCWDE usage, of course. '!hen the
effect \<wOuld be that the VAX disk file being referenced by the original
$INCLUDE definition actually be:
DRB2:[£OGBWS>1]file [Link];88
The idea is to make nfile_name" a character string that will be accepted by
all computers of interest (see the " BRIIX;E32 " exanple below). '!he prefix and
suffix as illustrated above for VAX-ll are highly dependent on computer, note.
Apollo Aegis certainly would not accept such declarations, since square brackets
are not used for directories, colons are not used for disks, and version nunbers
are not preceded by simicolons. But the following \<wOuld be believable for
Apollo Aegis: .
$PREFIX, / /B/WSV
$SUFFIX, .LEC.88
aOO \<wOuld result in the total file name:
/ / B/WS>1/ file name. LEe. 88
Note that $PREFIX and SSUFFIX will generally appear only once, to define the
location of the data base on the computer of interest. '!hen SINCLUDE
statements will appear over and over, as different components of the data base
are requested.
(

Without argunents, SINCWDE usage is trivial. Historically, this is the

way SINCLUDE began: as a $-card that was processed wi thin the installation-
dependent SUBROtrrINE CIM1IGE. Much as for the FCRTAAN construction of the same
name (for most computers, if not for the AN51 FCRTRAN n standard) , the result
is merely the insertion of a second file in-line at the point of usage. As a
simple example involving no argunents and t\<wO levels of nesting, see [Link]:H-1ARK
DC-58 for the computer of interest.

But such simple initial usage was replaced by much more involved usage with
argunents, in order to connect to standard, modularized data. Another reason to
change was the need to extend from single-tilase to multi-tilase data input. A
paper docunenting the change is Ref. 22, volune 4, lib. 2, Novanber, 1983. It is
such usage of $INCWDE with argllDents that dominates the present section.
However, whether argunents are used or not, SINCWDE has become an exceptional
$-card that no longer is associated with the other $-cards of Section I-D.
'1bday, $ INC WDE is serviced by canpletely different, universal code; it is no
longer processed wi thin installation-dependent SUBROl1I'INE CIMAGE.

It was said before that argllDents narg 1", etc. are just character strings
wi thout imbedded blanks. '!here can be blanks on ei ther side of the comma that
separates argllDents, but not within the argllDent itself. If the nunber of
characters in sane argllDent exactly equals the nllDber expected, there will be
simple one-for-one substitution in the data field or fields of interest. But
suppose the nunber of input characters does not equal the [Link] expected by the
lIodule? Special rules apply to these more complex cases about argunent length:
page lK-3

SRI. If the length of any user-specified argunent exceeds ~at the module
( expects, this is an error, and there will be an error message of ~ich the
following is typical (split in 3 pieces for ease of presentation) :
+++ Argunent 2 length-mismatch error. USed on card 5.
N24, Nl (KBEX:i), N2 (KENO) ,N3 (length from $INCWDE) =
~ 27 32 7

For batch-mode usage, correction is not possible, so a KILL = 79 error

termination will follow. But for interactive (S~) usage, the user will be
prompted to supply a corrected argunent as follows:
SEND CCRRECTED ARGUMENT (STOP) :
Provided the data [Link] is correct, and it is just the referance to it (the
$INCWDE line) that is incorrect, this provides a powerful extension to former
procedures of EMTP data assembly.

SR2. If the length of any user-specified argll\'lent is less than ~at the
module expects, then the argll\'lent type must be checked. For a nll\'leric argLlTlent,
this is acceptable, and the nlEber (the character string ~ich is a mmber if it
is interpreted nunerically) is right-adjusted in the data field of usage, with
blank fill on the left. en the other hand, if the argunent is non-mmeric, this
is an error, and the result is the same as for the preceding case SRI.

SR3. If the user really wants a non-nll\'leric argll\'lent to be shorter than

the module expects, this is done by extendill3 the user-supplied name with pounds
signs (""). By definition, this will be converted to a blank at the very end
--{ of considerations, after the insertion is complete. Common usage is for node
names, for ~ich the module will normally [Link] the maximlJTl of six. Yet users
will often shorten this, as would be the case for the 5-character name "PFCRM ".
While pounds signs could in rare cases be imbedded in the middle of a character
string, they will usually be placed on either the right or the left edge. For
that case, the user must remember ~ich edge, just as with normal node names
since the year one.

In order to employ $INCillDE as part of his EMTP data, the prospective

user must know what disk files are available, and what the interface
requirements are. '!here is a close analogy bet~n $INCillDE usage of the
production EMTP user and libraries of mathematical functions (e.g., matrix
inversion, or statistical regression analysis) for the scientific computer
progrart1l'ler. For each proposed usage, there should be an explanation of the
purpose of the module, and details of the interface requirements (argll\'lents).

As an introduction to $INCillDE usage with arglJTlents, consider the exanple

of Section V of that 1983 Newsletter article, which inchrles both multi-phase
input and data sorting by class. Fig. 1 shows a schematic of the 6-pulse hvdc
bridge circuit that is assumed to have been modularized, and at the bottom of
the same page 34, there is sample usage that shows the argunents:

$INCWDE, BRIlXiE32, }cNJD, MINts, PLUS, FIRE, MID

"
Page lK-4

MINUS
fIRE.2 FIRE'"
(
Cs C.s

La
ACNOOAe---~----~

ACN008 __--------~~--------~

ACNOOC __----------~----------~----------..
FIRE' FIRE3

La. (

PLUS

Fig. 1. Schematic diagram of hvdc bridge circuit. AsSlltled

parameter values are La = 1. E-3 Henry and Ra =
3000 Om for the anode reactors and resistors. Rs
= 1200 Om and Cs = 1.E-7 Farad for the snubbers.

0) Here SRIDGE32 is the disk file name. If there were previous $PREFIX
or $SUFFIX declarations, then the actual disk file name will be an augmented
version of this central root, as explained previously.

1) "}Cl{)D" is the first [Link]: a 5-character root name for the 3-P"lase
bus connecting to the br~dge. Why only five characters, rather than the more
corrmon six? Because SRIDGE32 has been set up so that it will append an "A",
"S", or "C' automatically. '!his illustrates the multi-J:tlase aspect mentioned
previously. '!he user just names the three-phase bus ("AIl-IOD") , and
modularization extends this to the three phases automatically.

2) "MINUS" is the secooo [Link]: a self-contained 5-character node

name in which right adjustment within the data field of width six is desired.
'!hat is, the [Link] is for an EMTP node name, which normally is six
characters. Sut here the user wanted only five, and has chosen to right-adjust
the name, leaving a blank on the left. Note that unlike the first argunent,
there is no multiphase action associated with the secooo argunent. AltholJ3h it
could have been, the module has not be established this way.
Page lK-5

3) " PLUS" is the third argLlIlent. It is like the second argLlIlent, only
wi th one fewer character. Another single-Fi'lase name.

4) n FIRE" is the fourth argLlIlent, which provides a mul ti!*lase (vector)

connection between the grids of the six valves and ~CS control system modeling.
AI tholl3h names a 6 characters in length, note carefully that only five have here
been provided for: the root word "FIRE" preceded by a blank. '!his is
intentional, and mandatory, since the sixth character is part of the vector
extension to the six node names FIREl, FIRE2, •••• FIRE6. '!his illustrates
that there is nothing inherently 3-Fi'lase about multi!*lase capability. '!he
dimensionality can be arbitrarily chosen by the person defining the module, and
is even variable within anyone module. Since the six variations are not
phases, "vector usage" is probably a more proper tenm than "multiphase," in this
case.

5) " MID" is the fifth argLlIlent. It is like the fourth argLlIlent, only
here there is no ~CS connection, and there is one fewer character to the
nonblank portion of the name.

Altholl3h this exanple is infonmative, it fails to show the important

exception involving nLlIlerical argLlIlents. An example involving nLlIlbers was
provided in the Newsletter article, which shall be repeated here See the second
argLlIlent "45." in both lines:
$INCUJDE, OC+, +, 45. , ocros , AC'IDP
( $INCWDE, OC-, -, 45. , OCNEG , K:Bar

Along with the sorting of data by class (Section I-I-J), the processing of
$INCWDE is a11 done at the very start of execution, before the EMTP heading is
issued. All traces of the origin of the records is lost by the time the EMTP
actually reads the records, except for a ccmnent card at the start and a cOOITIent
card at the end (before FOssible sorting may reorder records). From BENCJ:f'1ARK
DC-58:
C $INCWDE, OCSSINCLl.D\T, - carment card at the start
< < •••• Etc. (omitted cards in middle) > >
C End of $INCWDE. File name = OCSSINCLl.D\T - end

Dimensioning of tables for the $INCWDE processing of this section should

never FOse a problem - provided the program is dimensioned large enou;h to
solve the data case of interest. Ole cell of List 2 (branch vectors) is
required for each argllDent of any $INCWDE card. But these are processed one
at a time, so it is only the maximll'O nunber of argllDents that is limited by
List 2 (variable LBRNCH). There is no overflow checking. .
Page It-l

I-t. Separate Interactive Plotting Programs: TPPLaI' and WINIX:WPLT

(

There are t'WO separate interactive plotting [Link], "TPPLar" and

"WIND<:1flPLT", that can be used to produce graphs of disk-stored II .PL4" plot
files. These are files that were created by previous EMTP simulations having
integer miscellaneous data parameter ICAT set to unity (see Section II-B).
AI tholJ3h neither plotting program is a part of the EMTP proper, most EMTP users
with modern computers. will have need of them, so instructions are being placed
here in the EMTP Rule Book for convenience of reference.

Interactive plotting means that the user makes his requests for plot
variables, scaling, sizes, etc. in real time, while sitting in front of a
computer monitor. The computer will rapidly resp:>oo with a plot on the CRT
screen. If only a character (alphanllTleric) monitor is available, the result
will be a printer plot. But if a vector-graphic monitor is being used, and if
the plotting program supp:>rts this, then the result will be a more accurate (and
desirable) vector-graphic plot. Since such details are installation-dependent,
it is difficult to be more specific in this universal section. See the
appropriate installation-dependent subsection of Section I-F for details.

Batch-mode plotting is not considered in the present section, and is a

completely separate subject. By definition, batch-mode plotting is that
plotting that is a part of an EMTP data case (see Section XIV for details). Of (
course, any interactive program can be executed in the batch mode, provided the
user can anticipate all program prompts for data input, and can key his
resp:>nses without seeing those prompts. But these are specialized cases that do
not modify our fundamental naming distinctions.

"TPPLar" is limited to a single plot on the screen at anyone time,

wnereas "WINIX:WPLT" allows several short plots of full width to be stacked
vertically on the screen. AltholJ3h limited to only a single graph at anyone
time, "TPPLC7l''' is the more general program. "WINIX:WPLT" is a special-purFOse
derivative that lacks many standard features of "TPPLar". But it does allow
multiple windows, so it is used only in case the user wants such multiple
stacked mini plots. Both interactive plotting programs have hard-copy capabili ty
via the "COFf" coomand, which cormects with calcanp plotting software in the
batch mode. If the user likes \rJhat he sees on the screen following his
interactive adjustment, he sends "COFf" to order a paper copy (assuming that
the computer of interest has such vector-graphic plotting capability) •

The "ERASE" resp:>nse is associated with blank text of both plotting

programs. There are several prompts for labeling that will show an existing
(old) label wi thin square brackets. The user can accept this old label (i.e.,
leave it unchanged) by sending a carriage return «CR». But \rJhat if the user
really wants the text to be blank? Then he sends "ERASE", which can not be
confused with a <CR>. 'Ihe program's resp:>nse to "ERASE" is the blanking of
the character string in question. ~
Page lL-2

" The selection among branch variables that are not unique is possible with
both interactive plotting programs, whereas no such flexibility is provided by
batch-mode plotting. TWo or more identical output variable names result from
parallel branches of, the electric network, of course. If parallel branches have
outputs of the same class (branch voltages or branch currents, for plotting
p.1rposes), there will be no l..I1iqueness. '!he plotting program will respond with
a warning message that shows al1 output positions satisfying the pair of user
names, followed by an extraordinary prompt for a selection among these. M
illustration for the case of 4 candidates follows:

Warning! TWo or more output variables satisfy the

user's branch request. Indices of theEMTP
output vector for these follows, with a"-"
sign indicating polarity reversal: 5 6 -7 -8
SELECT THE IESIRED ENTRY AMCNG THESE:

Clltput posi tions5 through 8 al1 have the same names (NODE2, OODE3) as
artificially constructed by the ".PL4ft plot file data generator named
"PLO'I'Ilh.T" • Excrnples of the need to select among parallel entries can be found
in the test files [Link]\T and WlNl:X:[Link]\T that illustrate usage of the
tVJO interactive plotting programs.

I
Page lLl-l

I-L-l. TPPLaI' - for sophisticated, single-window, plotting

(
When "TPPLOT" is waiting for the user's next corrmand, it issues the
prompt "»> PLaI' :". O1e possible response is "MENU", a COfl1TlanC which
displays all possible responses. Rearranged to better fit on the printed page,
the subsequent output appears as follows:
»> PLaI' :MElru
List of all possible corrmand ~rds follows
All TIME AVERAGE BA'ICH CHOICE COLUMN CURSrn
EXTREMA G:> HELP LABEL LEVEL LIMITS
MENU MESSAGE MODE MULTIPLY NAME OFFSET
PURGE REFILE RESCALE SET COLU SET ~'l1\ SIZE
STOP TIME TIME lI'lITS T IMES PAN STACK X-Y PLaI'
DEBt..(; FILE UNE LCN:iER mINTER PUNCH
SHCW SMOOTH BOLD CCLffi roT

The "HELP" COlIltland merely resul ts in a display of surrmary explanations of

all IX>ssible plot corrmands. About. 130 lines in length, the new user may want to
print a paper copy of this file. For most computers, this is just a text file
named "TPPLaI'.HLP". Explanations that follow will be more conversational:
perhaps not complete, . but more understandable. The "HELP" file is sort of a
dictionary of short explanations.

"FILE" is the first request of most users as execution begins. It will'

r~slul t
f in a prompt for th~ name of a ~is~ f~le of. raw plot data ~~nts.
1 e names are computer-uependent, 1t 1S lmposslble to be spec1flc.
Since
'!he six
(_.

dig its of the time at the beg inning of execution (HH.f.'M.55) will usually be
involved. So should the six digits of the date, if the computer permits such
longer names. As to whether a missing root nane (e.g., "PLaI'" of Apollo), date
(DD-Mth-YY), or file [Link] (" • PIA" for most systems) is supplied automatically,
see computer-specific details in Section I-F. In all cases, a response
beginning with a percent sign ("%") is taken as the indication that a complete,
legal, file name follows. Any exanple that requests the standard test file
produced by "PL~T" follows:
»> PLOT :FlLE
SUPPLY DISK FILE NAME (HHMMSS}: %HHMM55. PL4
Should another file be connected when this request is received, that other plot
file will be released automatically before the new file is connected, of course.
Hence the "FILE" request can be used as often as is desi red •

"CHOICE" is the request for a tabulation of available EMTP output

variables. It can only be used after "FILE" (i.e., after a plot file has
been connected) •

"Nl>.ME" provides the initiation of variable specification for the next

plot. 'ttlere are three classes of variables for plot purposes: 1) node
voltages; 2) branch voltages; 3) branch currents. variable specification is
sequential, wi th one class continuing until "EN)" swi tches to the following
class, in the order stated. After the last variable of interest, "LAST" will
terminate the variable specification and return to the "»> PLOT:" prompt.
As an example, consider the specification of one node voltage and one branch \
current (see top of next page) :
Page lLl-2

>» PLCYI' : [Link]

SEND OODE NAME OR END ] :OODEl
SEND OODE NAME OR END [ ] : END
SEND BRAN:H VOLTAGE [Link] CR END [NODE2 , ] :END
SEND BRAN:H CURRENT NAMES 00 END [NODE2 , ] :ooDE2 NODE3
SEND BRAN:H CURRENT NAMES 00 END [ , ] :IAST

"MODE" toggles the switch that chooses between character plotting and
vector-graphic plotting. The default setting will depend on computer (consult
Section I-F).

"~EL" begins the specification of plot labels (super title, vertical

axis label, and the multi-line case title) • 'Ib reuse a previous label (shown
within square brackets), send just <CR>. Fo"r the case title, "FUJSH" will
rewind the pointer that counts lines. The text will remain, to be accepted or
rejected line by line. 'Ib show the entire case title, "PLAYBACK" can be used
at any point before the terminating "END" freezes it.' If no labels are ever
specified, they will be blank, by default.

"TIMESPAN" will result in the experimental determination of beginning and

end ing times of the plot data. After such usage, uni ts will be in [sec], and
"AU.. TIME" can be used for 2 complete plot of all time instants of the chose
curves. 1m excrnple follows:
»> PLCYI' :TIMESPAN
11 Time points. T-min, T-max [sec] = ~.~~~~0E+00 6. 28319E+00
(
"AU.. TIME" is the request for a plot over the full time range of available
data. This only [Link] if the "TIMESPAN" com:nand previously has been issued.

"TIME WITS" is used to specify the desired units of time for all such
quanti ties. Just as with batch-mode plotting of Section XIV, integer codes are
used to respond to a following. prompt :
1 ==> Degrees based on the power frequency;
2 ==> Cycles based on the power frequency;
3 ==> Seconds;
4 ==> Milliseconds
5 ==> Microseconds
6 ==> Hertz (for usage with "rm:QJEN:Y SCAN");
7 => Log to the base 10 of Hertz.

"TIME" is the request to input time-axis limits T-min and T-max of the
plot in resp:mse to a subsequent prompt. This serves as the ccmnand to perform
the plot, too. 1m al te rna te co.-rrnand to per form the plot is "GO",· which will
reuse the preceding T-min and 'I:..max.

"LIMITS" is the request for manual specification of the vertical axis

limits. There will be a subsequent prompt for the axis minimLITI and maximLITI, and
this will include the current limits within square brackets. As an
ill ustration:
VERI'ICAL Mrn & MAX r -2. 000E+0l 2.000E+01
Send a .pair of zeros to cancel such previous usage and return to automatic,
internal scaling of the vertical axis.
Page lLl-3

"FAC'roR" and "OFFSET" are requests for multiplicative and additive

modifications to all ordinates of all curve." These are the variables "A" and
"B", respectively, of the linear mapping z::; A * Y T B. Each corrunand will (
require the inp..1t of a vector of free-format values - one "A" and/or "B" for
each curve being plotted. Of course, the initial, default setting has "A" equal
to unity and "B" equal to zero. Other values are cOll;non in cases where
variables of different types (e.g., one shaft torque and one aomature current of
a synchronous machine) are to be plotted on the same graph. TO return to
natural (default) scaling after such use, the user can send "RESCALE".

"SET DA~" is used to override default parameter values with user

preferances that have been pre-stored in a disk file having the reserved named
TPPARAM.I:1\T (for most cornp..1ters). The program response to a ·SET CA'm"
command will be a prompt showing four alternative responses:
Select (MENU LIST END SELECT):
"MENU" will result in a display of all" comment cards contained in each data
subset in turn. As long as the user surrmarizes the p..1rpose of each data subset
on comment cards, this provides a handy online summary of available
al ternati ves. Even without any comment cards, it shows the user which subset
[Link] are legal. If the user wants to see a listing of the entire contents of
the file, he can type ·UST·. This generally would be used only by those not
having windows, since with windows, it is easier just to edit the file. TO exit
considerations of ·SET DA~· and return to the ">>> PLOT:" prompt, send
"END" • Finally, to specify a subset of plot parameters to be loaded, send
"SELECT" , followed by the appropriate subset nunber after a subsequent prompt
for it. But what if available data subsets do not provide all that the user
wants? In this case, the user can add his own data subset to the end of the
[Link].T file. 'Ihere can be an arbitrary nlJTlber of such subsets, with e.;.:;, (
having three classes of variables: REAL (floating-point), INTEGERs, and M
alphanlJTleric command words, in that order. Each parameter change requi res one
line of the file, and this consists of two values: first the index nlJTlber, and
second the desired parameter value. But which parameter should be changed? The
following list of common nlJTlerical parameters should satisfy most needs. First
corne the REALs, then the INTEGER variables, corresponding to the required
order within disk file TPPARAM.I:1\T. But. in case of doubt, consult the FORTRAN
files: TPPLOT.F'lN and 'IEKPLT.F'lN for Apollo, with [Link].F'lN being
the INCWDE file that defines the indices.

Index Name Default F\Jnction of the REAL variable; rules of its use

6. ~SL 10.0 Time axis length in inches for both screen and
cal canp plots.
7. TOLRCE 8.E-5 The square of the maximun error in inches, for the
discarding of data points to speed plotting.
8. HI'AX 4.0 Height of the horizontal (time) axis in inches for
• COpy· (calcanp) usage.
9. XTIT 0.5 The 80-colunn, multi-line case title is indented
this many inches from the left edge of a "COP'Y"
(calcanp) plot.
10. YTIT 8.5 Like XTIT, only for height above the bottom of
plot, in inches.
11. SIZTIT 0.12 Height of lettering, in inches, for the multi-line
case title of a "COPY" (calOomp) plot.
Page 1Ll-4

12. XSUPER 1.00 The single-line super title is indented this many
inches from the left edge of a "CO?t" (ca1Comp)
plot.
13. ySUPER 0.60 Like XSUPER, only for height above the bottom of
plot, in inches.
14. SIZSUP 0.30 Height of lettering, in inches, for the super
ti tIe of a "CO?t" (calComp) plot.
16. SIZID 0.17 Height in inches of the lettering that is used for
the case title, etc. of a "CO?t" (calComp) plot.
17. XID 0.5 The plot file identification line (date/time) is
indented this many inches from the left edge of
a "CO?t" (ca1Cootp) plot.
18. YID 0.75 Like YID, only for height above the bottom of
plot, in inches.
19. FACT 1.0 Magnification factor for plot. 'Ibe use of unity
is for measurements in inches. 'Ib use metr ic
(see "METRIC" request), change to 0.7874 so
half-inch marks are changed to centimeter marks.
20 • D>lGRDl 1.0 X-direction inches spacing of 1st "CO?t" grid.
21. t1iGRDl 1. 0 Y-direction inches spacing of 1st "CO?t" grid.
22. D>lGRD2 0. 2 X-direction inches spacing of 2nd "CO?t" grid.
23 • OiGRD2 0•2 Y-direction inches spacing of 2nd "COP'f" grid.
32. FHTAX 0.5 Height of time axis of screen plot: the fraction
along the Y-axis if there is no zero level for it.
33. FXSUP 0.3 Fractional displacement along the x-axis, to the
right of the Y-a>:is, for the start of the super
t·~tle line. 'Ibis is for screen plots only.
34. FYSUP -.03 Fractional displacement along the Y-axis, for the
super title. 'Ibis is for screen plots only. 'Ibe
(
sign depends on the comp,lter and/or plot software,
as does the direction of the measurement (from
bottom to top, or vice versa) •
35. FXTIT Pl. HI Fractional displacement along the x-axis, to the
right of the Y-axis, for the start of the mul ti-
line case title. 'Ibis is for screen plots only.
36. FYTIT· 0.15 Fractional displacement along the Y-axis, for the
case title. 'Ibis is for screen plots only. 'Ibe
sign depends on the comp,lter and/or plot software,
as does the direction of the measurement (from
bottom to top, or vice versa) •
39. FTCARR 1.0 Multiplying factor for interline spacing of lines
of text on a screen plot. Unity means single
spacin;, since the actual pixels equal this factor
times the character height in pixels.
40. VAXISL e.0 Length of the y-axis in inches, for a screen plot.
41. FXNlfwtV 1.5 The mmber of lines below X-axis for placement of
x-axis mmbers of a screen plot.
42. FXNUMH 5.0 The X-axis nunbers of a screen plot begin this
many bytes to left of the x-axis tic marks.
43. FVAXTT -7.5 The Y-axis label of a screen plot is to be located
this many bytes to the right of the y-axis itself.

44. FXVERT The fraction along the X-axis for placement of the
y-axis of an X-Y screen plot. Zero is taken to
mean a request for placement of the y-axis at the
( value X=0, if such a zero crossing occurs.
45. FSYMB 0.83 The power frequency in Hertz for cycles, degrees.
46. FFO-iER 60.0 The power frequency in Hertz for cycles, degrees.
Page lLl-5

- ==--=--=--==
Index Name Default Function of the lNTEGER variabL:. _ules of its use

1. KLEVL Binary flag to select whether level crossings of

(
plot variables are to be calculated. Zero means
no such calculation, whereas unity requests it.
2. KEXTR Binary flag to select whether extrema of plot
variables are to be calculated. Zero means no
such calculation, whereas unity requests it.
3. IHS 3 Integer code for time uni ts being used: [seconds].
The carmon alternative is "4" for milliseconds.
9. LTEK 3 A binary switch that chooses between character
plotting and vector-graphic plotting for screen
plots.
11. NUMSYM 3 Number of times each curve will be marked with
an identifying symbol. 'Ihis applies to both
"COPY" (CalCcxnp) and screen plots.
13. MAXISX 3 Pen width for the X-axis structure of a "COF'i"
(CalCcxnp) plot. Use "0" to suppress the x-axis
and associated labels.
14. MAXISY 3 Like MAXISX, only for the Y-axis of "COF'i" plot.
15. ~IDI o Pen width for 1st "COF'i" (CalCcxnp) grid. 'Ihis is
the outer, [Link] grid. Use "0" to suppress it.
16. MGRID2 Pen width for 200 "COF'i" (CalCcxnp) grid. 'Ihis is
the inner, fine grid. use "0" to suppress it.
17. MSUPER 5 Pen width for super title of a "COF'i" (CalComp)
plot. USe "0" to suppress the super title.
22. tSM'IH 50 Limit on consecutive ups and downs before the
cOlllTlencement of averaging of successive ordinates. (
23. LSYMB 1 Binary flag that controls the table of curve
marking ~bols (and % of data points used) for
a screen plot. To suppress this table, use "0".
26. LCHID 2 Tektronix PLOT10-like size code for the date/time
line lettering. 'Ihis is an argunent of "CHRSIZ".
27. NXINCH 71 Pixels/inch in X direction for screen plot. 'Ihis
figure is for a 19-inch Apollo with landscape
display of resolution 800 x 1024. For the 17-inch
r:N3XX screens, use something closer to 80.
28. NYINCH 72 Pixels/inch in Y direction for screen plot. 'Ihis
figure is for a 19-inch Apollo with landscape
display of resolution 800 x 1024. For the 17- inch
W3XX screens, use something closer to 85.
29. NXOFF The Y-axis is located this many pixels to the
right of the left edge, for a vector screen plot.
30. NYOFF The top or bottan of the Y-axis of a vector plot
has this pixel address. It will be the top if
pixel addresses increase downward (as for Apollo
GPR). Otherwise, it will be the bottom.
32. LCHSUP 3 Tektronix PLOTl0-like size code for the super-
title lettering. It is also used for the X-axis
labeling. 'Ihe variable is an argunent of "CffiSrZ"
used only for vector screen plots.
33. LCHI'IT 2 Tektronix PLOT10-like size code for the multiline
case title. It is also used for the axis nunbers.
The variable is an argunent of "CffiSIZ", used
only for vector screen plots.
Page lLl-6

34. LCHXAX Control variable for the presence or absence of

the x-axis and its label ing on a vector screen
plot. The value "-I" will suppress everything,
whereas "0" will result in labeling without the
axis or tic marks. Finally, "+1" will produce
both the axis and the associated labeling.
35. LCHYAX 0 Tektronix PLOT10-like size code for the Y-axis and
its labeling. 'Ibe variable is an argunent of
"CHRSIZ" , used only for vector screen plots. A
value of zero will suppress the Y-axis itself
while retaining the labeling. A value of "-I"
.ill suppress everything, whereas a value "+1"
will produce both the Y-axis and its labeling.
37. LTIC 7 Half the pixel width of the 2-sided tic marks for

39 1ZGRt '*
OAL
the axes of a screen plot.
To suppress the .f-iJ:.st-fettt:ett background grid of
a vector screen plot, key this value as "(1".
Whether any positive value other than "1" has
special meaning in terms of boldness of the grid
will depend on the program version be:ing used.
like ...ar-iable 12aiU, on1¥- for 2nd {[Link]...---
X-pixels for the beginning of the date/time line
below the vector screen plot. 'Ibis figure is to
the right of the left edge of plot.
46. NYID6 620 y-pixels for the beg inning of th,= date/time 1 ine
below the vector screen plot.
50 • NX'JERN 70 The nunber of pixels to the right of the left
( edge of a vector screen plot, for the beginning
(left edge) of Y-axis [Link].

53. INCHPX 2 The placement frequency for X-axis nunbers that

accompany axis tic marks of a vector screen plot.
The value "2" means nunbers will appear for every
2nd inch mark.
54. INCHP'l 2 Similar to variable INCHPX, only for the y-axis.
57. LCHFIL 1 Binary control over appearance of the line of
"PL4." plot-file identification (date/time), and
also the following line of plot variable names.
To suppress the associated output, use the value
zero instead of unity.
58. LCHUM 1 Code controlling appearance of the line of tim~
axis limits and scaling of a "COP'i" (CalCanp)
plot. USe "+1" to see such a line, and "-1"
to suppress such output.

"CCLUMN" and "SET CCLUMN" are used only for character plots, to control
the width (mmber of characters) being used. '!he first corrrnand toggles the
( switch that chooses between 80 and l32-colunn character plots. 'Ibe second
'\ allows for other widths (there will be a subsequent prompt for the desired
value) •
Page lLl-7

"STOP" will tenninate execution cleanly with a closure of all files. For
most [Link], this is not necessary, and it probably is easier for the user (
simply to abort execution by whatever means the operating system provides. But
this caused trouble (e.g., a failure to close I/O channels) for some [Link],
so a clean tennination is also provided.

"EXTREMA" is used to toggle the switch that decides whether or not

variable extrema of subsequent plots are to be printed as a separate tabulation
preceding the associate plot. Following such possible output, the program will
pause before drawing the graph. If the user sends a <CR>, the graph will
follow. Alternatively, the user can send "ID PLOT" to bypass the subsequent
plot completely.

"LEVEL" is like "EXTREMA" only it applies to level crossings. If such

output is being turned on, there will be a prompt for a vector of desired
levels, to \lVhich the user should respond in free-fonnat.

"CO~a will dispatch a just-completed plot (either character or vector) to

the calCanp (or imitation calComp) plotter. 'Ihe [Link] will resp:>ril with a
request for a revised time-axis scaling. Q1ce the new dt/inch figure is sent
(or blank, to leave this scaling una 1 tered, the calComp plot will automatically
be produced. When the calCanp plot is done, the prompt "PLOT:" will reappear.

"x-y PLOT" will toggle the binary switch that chooses between regular (
plotting of variables as functions of time and the less ccmnon plotting. of one
variable against another wi th time as a parameter of the resulting locus. 'Ihe
program will begin in conventional (non-XY) mode, of course.

"CURSOR" initiates dialogue involving the cursor to identify p:>ints of

user interest on the screen. But few systems will use this. It depends not
only on [Link], but also on the tenninal or meni tor being used. O'leck with
program maintenance.

"AVERAGE" adjusts the oscillation limit after which averaging of

successive ordinates of a curve will be instituted. 'Ihis is generally useful
only in cases having artificial numerical oscillation about the true value due
to trouble with trapezoidal rule integration.

"SMOOTH" allows the user to redefine the tolerance for discarding plot
data points. Why are any data points discarded? 'l11e issue is plotting speed
and storage: less [Link] is used, and it is faster, if the graphical output is
minimized. Many curves are sufficiently smooth so that most data points can be
anitted without the user being able to observe the difference. 'Ihe default
tolerance should be set to correspond to the visual limit of the plotting
device, or the eng ineering application. See var iable 'IDLRCE (REAL index 7 of
"SET ~TA"). 'Ihe lower right hand corner of a vector screen plot should (for
most computers) display statistics about the effectiveness of p:>int discarding.
Beside the syml:x>ls for each curve will be first the total number of p:>ints
actually plotted, and second, the percentage that this is of the total available
points. For excrnple: "a - 356 23%". If the tolerance 'IDLRCE is set to \.
zero, this percentage should approach 100, of course.
Page lLl-8

"BOLD" allows the user to change the boldness of curves of a vector screen
r'\ plot. A value of zero means that plotting will be done with minimum pixel
width. A positive value is interpreted as the excess width in pixels on each
side of the normal line segments that define the curve. 'Ihat is, a rectangle is
actually drawn, and the width of this will be twice the pixel width requested by
the user in response to a subsequent prompt:
SEND PIXEL WIDI'H OF FACH SIDE
TO suppress such [Link], key zero.

"COLOO" is the request to change the colors used for the curves of each
wiooow of a vector screen plot. 'Ihere will be a subsequent prompt for t\t,O
integers:
Old color codes for screen plot = 1 2 3 4 5
SEND BEGINNING INDEX AN) VEC'IOR IENGTH :
The user is allo\¥ed to redefine a contiguous range of curve colors, with the
first index of the range, aoo the length of the range, being defined here. 'Ihen
a subsequent prompt will allow the user to redefine the requested colors:
SEND VEC'IOR CE ALTERED CCLCRS :

"DOT" is the request to turn on or off dots (more precisely, disks) that
mark each plot data point after the discarding of points by "EMOOTH". A
prompt will then request the size of the disks:
SEND RADIUS OF CIRCLE IN PIXElS [ " ] :
USe zero to suppress such marking, whereas a positive value is interpreted as
the radius of the disk (to be filled with the color of the curve) in pixels.
(
Page lL2-1

I-L-2. WINrXWPLT - for simpler, multiple-window, plotting

Program "WINDCWPLT" is designed to display many curves on the sarne screen '(
or piece of paper. '!'he name comes from "window plotting," 'Nhich emphasizes the
dominant attraction. '!'he user is allowed up to 9 independent plot windows that
are stacked vertically one on top of the other. Each of these windows has an
independent display, al tholl3h the time scales (horizontal axes) of all must be
the sarne. Needless to say, only vector-graphic plotting is allowed (the
character mode is hopelessly short of resolution for typical usage). Both
vector-graphic monitor plots and calComp hard-COpy plots are available.

For flexible [Link] such as Apollo, there seems to be no limit on the

total height of these stacked plots if they are written to the screen. But this
is only possible because Apollo windows can be, scrolled vertically. For less
intelligent displays (e.g., the [Link], old, storage-tube devices of Tektronix,
such as the 19-inch 4014), the user will be limited to the height of the screen,
should output be directed to the screen. Consult installation-dependent
".nstructions of Section I-F for specifics. As for hard copy (paper) output,
present logic limits this to the width of the paper, since the time axis runs
the length of the paper (for roll plotters such as Versatek printer/plotters, or
CalComp drum plotters).

Program "WINDCWPLT" is in fact just a special version of the regular

interactive plotting program "TPPLOT" of the preceding subsection I-L-l. It
is less sophisticated in that some of the features of the original logic are
unavailable. Specifically, the "MENU" display shows restriction to the
following:
>>> PLCYI' :MENU (
List of all possible command words follows
AU. TIME CHOICE rEBt.(; ERASE SHCW WINIX:WS
G) HELP FILE TIMES PAN TIME WITS
MENU MODE tWtE SHCW ClRVES lABEL
PURGE REFILE TIME SET I1'.'lr\ STOP
COLCR
Since most of these commands have already been explained in the preceding
subsection I-L-I, the explanation here shall be limited to new commands only:

"W?" is a request to begin the specification of window number "?" (a

single decimal digit between unity "I" and "9"). By definition, windows are
numbered from top to bottom of the screen or paper, in natural order. yet
numbers need not be consecutive (unused or inactive window numbers can be
skipped without difficulty). '!he "W?" request will be acknowledged by a
sequence of six prompts as follows:
1) Old l,line window ti tie = {AB0}
SEND NEW «CR>=>accept; ERASE; ACTIVE)
2) Old Y-axis label = {AB0}
SEND NEW «CR>=>accept; ERASE) :
3) vertical axis minimlJtl and maxirn\III = {2EI4. 6 }
SEND NEW «CR>=>accept; 0,0) :
4) Window height and separation = {2E14.6}
SEND NEW «CR>=>accept) :
5) Y-axis units and numbers = {2I5}
SEND NEW «CR>=>accept) :
6) Curves [ {913}
SEND NUMBER CURVES «CR>=> accept)
7) SEND NEW CURVE NLf1BERS :
Page lL2-2

Note that the first five prompts involve two lines each, with the first of the
two lines describing what is required of the user, and showing the existing
\. (old) content that can be reused if just a carriage return «CR» is keyed by
the user. Following a display of all old curve nunbers of the window, prompt 6
demands the new mmber of curves NUMC to be plotted in the window. Finally,
prompt 7 asks for a string of NUMC new curve mrnbers (from the [Link] order of
the preceding variable selection by "~E") • Just as with [Link] of the
conventional "TPPLOT", a single usage of "~E" requests all plot variables.
The difference is that now these variables can be allocated arbitrarily among
mul tiple windows. Also, any variable can be plotted in two or more different
windows, if desi red.

"SHew WJ:NIXlolS" (or simply "SHew W" in abbreviated form) is a cOll1Tland to

display the parameters associated with each window that the user has defined.
The 2-line heading of the resul ting display, along with an entry for window
mmber 1, are illustrated as follows (truncated on the right):

First Number Y-axis Window Window Window Y Window Y Y-axis Y-

curve curves limits height spacing axis min axis max units nu
@@@ Window 1. Title =First window case title line
2 2 0 4.00 1.00 0. 000E+00
The zero in the 3rd coll..lN1 ("Y-axis limits") means that vertical scaling will be
done autanatically "by' the program, so the "min" and "max" entries to the right
are to .be ignored (note that both are zero). '!he first coll..lN1 ("First curve")
will be negative if the window is defined but inactive (see the "ERASE"
cOOITIand) •
(
"SHew CURVES" (or simply "SHCW C" in abbreviated form) is a cOOITIand to
surrmarize the plot variables that have already been selected during the most
recent preceding "~E" request. Whereas not necessary for window plotting,
this is just an added diagnostic tool to simplify 1 ife for the user. Most
imFOrtantly, the output will show variable nl..lTlbers (as required for the "W?"
cOOITIand) • :As an illustration, consider the display associated with all 4
variables to the test plot file HFf-tMss. PL4 prodoced by program "PLOT!)?>,'!'":
»> PLOT : SHCW C
LAS'INODEV, IASTBRANV, ~, JPLT = 2 4 6 4
l.l'«:xle voltage for node "N:>DEl" • Variable MPLOT = 2
2. l'«:xle vol tage for node "N:>DE2". Variable MPLOT = 1
3. Branch voltage "N:>DEl" to "N:>DE2". Variable MPLOT = 3
4. Branch current "NJDE2" to "N:>DE3". Variable- MPLOT = 4
The MPLOT [Link] on the right is the FOsi tion in the output vector (not
normally of interest to the user).

"MCDE" allows for the selection of output device: screen, or paper, or

both. Unlike "TPPLOT" , there is no "COP':{" conrnand to produce hard copy
after the screen plot. Instead, the selection must be made before plotting
begins. Consider the following illustration:
>>> PLOT :MODE
Vector plot modes: l=screen; 2=Ca 1 <:anp; 3=both.
( SUPPLY MODE [ 1 ] :
Shown wi thin square brackets is the present mod~ of output (uni ty for screen-
only plotting, for this exanple) that is about to be changed.
Page lL2-3

"ERASE" will deactivate all windows without actually destroying or lOSing

any parameter specifications of them. Recall that there are 9 possible windows. (
When program execution be9ins, all 9 windows are both undefined and inactive.
Activity of a window is indicated by a };X)sitive nunber for the 1st curve of the
window. What the erase corrrnand does is replace all such nunbers (for all
windows) to the negatives of the absolute values. Inactive windows will show up
in the "SHCW WINIX:'WS" display as having a negative integer in the first colunn
on the left. 'Ib reactivate a previously-deactivated window, identify the
window via a "w?" conmand, and then send "/ICTIVE" in response to the fi rst
subprornpt.

"SET r:[Link]." functions the same. way as already described for "TPPLCYI'".
H:>wever, a different plotting program is involved, and the INCWDE file defining
the control variables and their associated indices, WIN'IX1IJKOM. INS.F'lN (for
Apollo), differs somewhat. '!he following table applies:

Index Name Default FUnction of the REAL variable; rules of its use

6. 'mXISL 10.0 Time axis length in inches for both screen and
calComp plots.
7. 'fOLRCE 8. £-5 The square of the maximun error in inches, for the
discardin; of data points to speed plotting.
9. X'I'IT 2.5 The window title line is to begin this many inches
to the right of the left edge of a calComp plot.
11. SIZTIT 0.12 Height of mul ti-line case ti tie for calComp plot. (
13 • XOFFAX 0. 60 The Y-axis of a calComp plot is located this many
inches to the right of the left edge of the page.
16. SIZID 0.17 Height in inches of the lettering that is used
for the case title, etc. of a calComp plot.
17. XID 1.8 The plot file identification line (date/time) is
indented this many inches fran the left edge of a
calComp plot.
20. OXGRDI 1.0 X-direction inches spacin; of 1st calComp grid
21. D'fGRDl 1.0 Y-direction inches spacin; of 1st calComp grid
22. O)[;RD2 0 2 X-direction inches spacing of 2nd calComp grid
23. D'fGRD2 0~2 Y-direction inches spacing of 2nd calComp grid
32. FHTAX 0.5 He:ght of time axis of screen plot: fraction alon;
the Y-axis if there is no zero level for it.
33. FXSlP 0.3 Fractional displacement along the x-axis, to the
right of the Y-axis, for the start of window ti tIe
line. This is for screen plots only, not calCornp.
39. FTCARR 1.3 The number of lines that the time-axis label is
below the time axis itself, for a screen plot.
41. FXNUMV 1.5 The number of lines below X-axis for placement of
x-axis numbers of a screen plot.
43. FVAX'M' -9 .5 The Y-axis label of a screen plot is to be located
this many bytes to the right of the Y-axis itself.
42. FXNtMH 5.0 The nunber of characters to the left of the time-
axis tic mark for the beginning of an associated
nunerical time value of a screen plot. \
46 • FFCWER 60 • 0 The power frequency in Hertz for cycles, degrees.
Page lL2-4

Index Name Default FUnction of the INTEGER variable; rules of its use

2. JMCOE 1 Ternary (3) integer code to select the mode of

plotting. "I" is for Screen plotting only, "2"
is for Calcatlp only, and "3" is for both.
3. IHS 3 Integer code for time units being used: [seconds].
The carmon alternative is "4" for milliseconds.
11. Nll'\Si'M 3 [Link] of times each curve will be marked wi th
an identifying S}mbol. "!his applies to both
calGanp and screen plots.
13. MAXISX 1 Binary s~tch controlling Whether a CalCbmp plot
will have an X-axis or not. USe "I" if the
x-axis is wanted, or "0" to suppress it.
14. MAXISY 1 Like variable MAXlSX, only for Calcatlp Y-axis.
15. M:iRIDl 1 Binary switch controlling Whether the course first
calcanp grid is wanted. Use "I" to request such
a grid, or "0" to suppress it.
16. M:;RID2 1 Binary switch controlling Whether the fine second
calcanp grid is wanted. USe "I" to request such
a grid, or "0" to suppress it.
22. N5M'IE 50 Limit on consecutive ups and doW'ls before the
carmencement of averaging of successive ordinates.
27. NXINCH 71 Pixels/inch in X direction for screen plot. This
figure is for a 19-inch A{X>llo with landscape
display of resolution 800 x 1024. For the 17-inch
003XX screens, use sanething closer to 80.
28. NYINCH 72 Pixels/inch in Y direction for screen plot. This
figure is for a 19-inch A{X>llo with landscape
display of resolution 800 x 1024. For the 17-inch
003XX screens, use sanething closer to 85.
29. NXOFF 142 The Y-axis is located this many pixels to the
right of the left edge of a screen plot.
30. N\'OFF 5 The window ti tIe line is to be located this many
pixels from the top of the window grid. This will
be above the top of the grid (or upper end of the
Y-axis) if pixel addresses increase dOW'lward (as
I for Apollo G?R). Otherwise, it will be below.
32. LCHSUP 3 Tektronix PLaI'10-like size code for the super-
title letterill3. This is an argllnent of "cmsIZ".
33. LCHrIT 2 Tektronix PLaI'l0-likesize code for the multiline
case title. This is an argllnent of "cm5IZ".
34. LCHXAX 2 Tektronix .PLaI'l0-like size code for the time-axis
nunbering and LI'li ts labeling of the bottom window
only of a screen plot. This is an argllnent of
"CHRSIZ". To suppress such labeling, use the
value "-1".
35. LCHYAX 2 Like variable ICHXAX (34), only for the Y-axis.
37. LTIC 7 Half the pixel width of the 2-sided tic marks for
the axes of a screen plot.
39 IZGRI -1 Te suppress the first (outer) background grid of
a screen plot, key this value as "-I". Whether
any pesi ti ve val ue other than "I" has special
meaning in terms of boldness of the grid ~ll
depend on the program version being used.
page 1L2-5

40. IZGR2 -1 Like IZGR1 (39), only for the 2nd (inner) grid.
45. NXID6 130 X-pixels for the beginning of the date/time line
below the bottan window of a screen plot. This
figure is to the right of the left edge of plot.
50. NXVERN 70 The number of pixels to the right of the left
edge of a screen plot, for the beginning (left
edge) of y-axis numbers.
53. INCHPX 2 The placement frequency for X-axis [Link] that
accanpany axis tic marks of a screen plot. The
value "2" means numbers will appear for every 2nd
inch mark.
54. INCHP'i 2 Like variable INCHPX (53), only for the Y-axis.
57. lCHFIL 2 Tektronix PLO'I'10-like size code for the "PL4."
plot file identification (date/time). This is
used as an [Link] of "ORSIZ". To suppress such
labeling, use the value "-I" •
58. lCHLIM 1 Code controlling appearance of the line of time-
axis limits and scaling of a calcanp plot. USe
"+1" to see such a line, and "-I" to suppress
such output.
59. lCfW..M 2 Tektronix PLO'I'l0-like size code for the line of
plot variable names. This is an [Link] of
"CHRSIZ". To suppress such labeling, use the
value "-1".

Although wWJ:NIX:1tiPLT" is an interactive program, with pranpts designed for

the screen, most production usage will be in the batch mode. This is done via
files of prestored input. 1J1 exanp1e of four such screen plots, and one calcanp
(paper) plot, can be found in the disk file WJ:NIX:1,iPLT.D\T (the name used for
Apollo) • Note that both ccmnent cards (beginning with "C", just as for EMTP
data) and in-line ccmnents (to the right of "{ If) are allowed. Whereas the
interactive user -.ould seldan key such explanation, the batch-mode user is
encouraged to [Link] his input this way. To see a demonstration of most
features, simply execute the contents of ~T. D\T by pasting the contents
into the input pane of a window that is full height and nearly full width. Then
sit back, relax, and watch the action! To avoid noticeable delays of input,
use a plot file (produced by PLO'I'D\T.F'IN) with few data FOints (e.g., 10 or
20) •
II-A. Special-Requeet Carde That Precede Hiscellaneoue Data - 1

II. CARDS TO BEGIN A NEW DATA CASE (INCLUDING MISCELLANEOUS DATA)

Each new data case that is to be solved must begin with one or more of the
data types described in the following subsections. Structurally. there is an
indeterminate number (possibly zero) of special-request inputs (Section II-A) that
come first. in any order (unless usage dictates an order for the problem of
interest). The miscellaneous data cards of Section II-B. followed by possible
extensions to these cards in Section II-C, only come after the last of any such
special-request cards of Section II-A.

II-A. Special-Reguest Cards That Precede Miscellaneous Data

Free-format data options are useful for special-request inputs. particularly

for the user who is keying data via a conventional. dumb computer terminal (on
which column position is not intuitively obvious). Take the "FREQUENCY SCAN"
declaration of Section A-16 as an example. Using free format. a valid sample
card image is as follows: "FREQUENCY SCAN. 10 •• 5.0, 100., 0". Even further
abbreviation is possible for the really-lazy data assembler. Rather than using
the full request word, an acronym made up of the first letter of each sub-word can
be used. In this case, "FREQUENCY SCAN" can be abbreviated as "FS", if desired.
All special-request words are recognized in such abbreviated. free-format fashion.
All possible special-request cards that could be recognized at this point of
EMTP data input shall now be listed in alphabetical order, for ease of location.
Before each is the number of the subsection (within the present Section II-A) that
contains an explanation of usage:
1) ABSOLUTE TACS DIMENSIONS allocation of storage for 8 TACS tables
2) ABSOLUTE U.M. DIMENSIONS allocation of storage for 4 U.M. tables
55) ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN branch cards for multi-phase transformer
3) ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRINTOUT selective printout in time-step loop
4) ANALYTIC SOURCES USAGE user supplied sources: desire to use
41) AUTO NAME toggle choice of internal branch naming
5) AVERAGE OUTPUT average values for EMTP output variables
6) BEGIN NEW DATA CASE case-separation card precedes data case
7) BEGIN PEAK VALUE SEARCH time the extrema computation can begin
8) BLANK card to signal the end of stacked data cases
9) CABLE CONSTANTS cable system: calculation of constants
48) CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE name of the OPMC file PARALLEL. LIS
10) CHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENCY change frequency of solution printout
42) CHANGE SWITCH to ·modernize former switched-R,L data
56) CHANGE TRANSFORMER to Convert saturable TRANSFORMER to [Z]
11) CUSTOM PLOT FILE change precision of the plot file
43) DATA BASE MODULE modularize data: SINCLUDE with arguments
12) DIAGNOSTIC selective diagnostic printout specified
44) DISK PLOT DATA toggle plot data storage (disk vs. RAM)
53) EXACT PRASOR EQUIVALENT toggle lumped-R to long-line formulas
14) FILE REQUEST access to module "MIDOV1" during input
15) FIX SOURCE EMTP load flow: declare intention to use
16) FREQUENCY SCAN multiple-freq. steady state solutions
45) HYSTERESIS to punch Type-96 hysteresis branch cards
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. Data - 2

17) JMARTI SETUP frequency-dependent overhead line data

16) KILL CODES output range of program error messages
19) LINE CONSTANTS calculate overhead line constants
20} LINEAR BIAS USAGE linearly-varied (not random) switch bias
57) LOAD MORE SHOTS to combine 2 or more Monte Carlo studies
21} MISCELLANEOUS DATA CARDS read program miscellaneous data cards
22) MODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT modal voltage output of distributed line
13) NETWORK EQUIVALENT transfer to network equivalent routine
47} OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO display and manage central status file
23} OLD TO NEW ZNO convert old data of Zno to new formats
24) OMIT BASE CASE skip base base solution of Monte Carlo
25) PEAK VOLTAGE MONITOR request for peak node or branch voltage
26) POSTPROCESS PLOT FILE postprocess ".PL4" plot file using TACS
27) POWER FREQUENCY change the synchronous power frequency
28) PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH for width, blanks of DELTAT-Ioop numbers
49) RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR SEED initialize the random number generator
54} READ PL4 HEADER REWIND LUNIT4 and then read header only
29) RELATIVE TACS DIMENSIONS relative sizing of the 8 TACS tables
30) REPLOT batch-mode plot of previous solution
31) SATURATION produce regular & hysteretic B-H curves
32) SEMLYEN SETUP 2-order frequency-dependent line fitter
33) START AGAIN restart a halted, preceding simulation
34) STEP ZERO COUPLE subnetwork ident. with switches closed
58) TACS SPLIT to define INTEGER/REAL ratio of new TACS
35) TACS WARN LIMIT limit on the number of TACS warnings
36) TIME STEP LOOP transfer control to the time-step loop
52) TOGGLE EXTREMA MODE FORMAT1'ED vs. UNFORM. "LOAD MORE SHOTS"
51) TRUNCATE OUTPUT LINES output line limit after formed as KOL132
46) UM TO TACS U.M. output variables go to Type-92 TACS
50) USER IDENTIFICATION 6-byte label overrides USERID of STARTUP
37) USER SUPPLIED SWITCH TIMES user supplied random switching times
38) XFORMER derive impedance matrix for transformers
39) ZINC OXIDE redefine controls of Zno Newton solution
40) ZNO FITTER to fit exponentials to Zno data points
Most of these (e.g. "AUTO NAME") are self-contained, so the explanation that
follows will be complete. But a few represent requests for the transfer to separate
supporting programs, and for these requests, there will be references to further
explanation at the back end of the book. An example of the latter is "NETWORK
EQUIVALENT". A final point is about abbreviations, which can always be used
(although such use is not encouraged). In alphabetical order, corresponding to
the preceding tabulation, we have:
ATD AUMD AMB ADP ASU AN AO BNDC BPVS CC
CSF CPF CS CT CPF DBM D DPD EPE FR
FXS FS HYS JMS KC LC LBU LMS MOC MVO
NE OPMC OTNZ OBC PVM PPF PF PNW RNGS RPH
RTD R S SS SA SZC TS TWL TSL TEM
TOL UTT UID USST X ZO ZF
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Miscellaneous Data - 3

[[-A-I. Request tor Absolute Allocation ot Total TACS Storage

TACS is the control-system modeling feature of Section 8. Total working space

for all TACS tables is assigned in List 19. along with the other 27 or so EMTP
lists (see Section I-G). But there still remains the question of how this total
working space is to be divided among the eight TACS tables. This allocation can
be performed at execution time, according to the description of the present section.
thanks to the procedure of offset subscripting (see Ref. 8. Vol. VIII. 27 January
1979. pages PROV-19 through 22).
The first way to allocate total TACS storage is with a request for absolute
TACS table sizing ("ABSOLUTE TACS DIMENSIONS"). followed by a card giving the
desired absolute sizes:

1JJJJJ1~JJ1JJJJll~J~IJJIJJ1JJ~lJJJJ~)~J~lJ1JJJ1JJ~IJJJJllJJ~IJIJJ~IJJ~IJIJIJIJJ~
ABSOlUTE TACS DIMENSION

I
~~
I, ~ I~ If
~I ~ f~i ~ E ~s Ie 1~
I' ~ ~f f rfl ( . :~, f ~C ~i- I"! :ff tfl f >( ,E 'Ei SI( ;. ,~I~ If 'E I c~ C f·1 ~ :~i€ ' E~ CI ( 'E

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

lTl lT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7 LT8

The format for the sizes is 818. with the 8 required TACS table sizes having
the following meaning:

LTl : Maximum number of TACS dynamic function blocks. having Laplace transfer
functions H(s) •
LT2 : Maximum number of nonzero factors of the triangularized TACS network matrix.
This limit applies to both the steady-state solution and the transient solution.
LT3 : Maximum total number of input variables to TACS dynamic function and
supplemental devices.

LT4 : Maximum number of TACS sources. This includes built-in sources (e.g .• "TIMEX"
or "UNITY") and variables passed from the electric network to be TACS driving
functions.

LTS : Maximum number of supplemental variables and devices (type codes 99. 98,
or 88 keyed in columns 1-2).
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede "[Link]. Data - 4

LT6 : Maximum total number of extra INTEGER pointers which are associated with
supplemental variables and devices. There is no easy, exact formula, although
sample figures can be given. Each parenthesis requires 3 cells, as does each
arithmetic operation ("+". "*", "=").

LT7 : Maximum total number of extra REAL cells which are associated with TACS
variables. Each TACS variable requires one or more such cells. Again, a
simple rule is impossible to state. Each first-order function block requires
10 cells, intermediate variables of supplemental-variable expression evaluation
each requires one, the average device might require between 3 and 5, and the
most complex device (the RMS sensor, Type 66 (requires 1 / { f * DELTAT }
where "f" is the fundamental frequency.
LT8 : Maximum number of distinct TACS variables used in the TACS data specification.
Provided the total storage represented by this request is less than or equal
to the List-19 space available, execution will proceed normally. If not, the
overflow will be noted before any TACS data will actually be read. The result
would be a KILL = 1 message pOinting to List 19.
A second way to allocate total TACS storage is via a request for relative
sizing. That is, rather than request a specific number of function blocks,
supplemental variables, etc •• the user can simply request a proportional allocation
(e.g., 5% of the total storage for function blocks, etc.). See Section A-29 for
details.
The interpretation of the two input data cards confirms only the first 5 of
the 8 integers being specified. The following illustration has been taken from
the 2nd half of BENCHMARK DC-18:
C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Request to define new TACS allocation absolutely. IABSOLUTE TACS DIMENSIONS
TACS table sizes. 10 90 100 20 30 10 90 100

II-A-2. ReQUest tor Absolute Allocation at Total u.n. Storage

The universal machine (U.M.) component of Section IX has total working space
for all tables assigned in List 25 of the overall program variable dimensioning
{see Section I-G}. But there still remains the flexibility of dividing this total
working space among among the four U.M. tables by means of the following request
for absolute sizes:
II-A. Special-Request Cards That Precede Miscellaneous nata - S

I· I- ,'I € IE
I~I' ~~i ~ ~ E E Ie f! I ~f( I~:~ fE IEI~IC I~I~ ~ E 1~~9C ~~ IE :f'E ,.I~ IefE rfl~lc I~ ~.M ~ E tm I( I: bE tElsIC
A8SOL UTE U. M. 01 MENSI ON<: 18 18 18 18

NCLFIX NUMFIX IOTFIX 18SFIX

Parameters:
NCLFIX (33-40): Maximum total number of U.M. coils in the data case. This is the
total for all U.M. components involved.
NUMFIX (41-48): Maximum number of U.M. components for the data case.
IOTFIX (49-56): Maximum number of U.M. output quanti ties (total for all machines) .
IBSFIX (57-64): Maximum number of U.M. 6-character alphanumeric names (total for
all machines).
Provided the total storage represented by this user request is less than or
equal to the List-25 space available, execution will proceed in a nominal
fashion. If not, this fact will be noted in UTPF overlay 5 as the first U.M.
data component itself is ready for input, and an EMTP error message will result.
In any case, the corresponding minimum size for List 25 will be shown as part
of the column 1-50 interpretation of the Type-19 request card for U.M. modeling.
This way, the user knows what fraction of the available space he is utilizing.
If the user fails to input such a request for U.M. table sizing, then the EMTP
allocates default dimensions equal to (20, 3. 50. 60) within UTPF overlay 5. For
computers with 32-bit integers and 64-bit floating-point values (e.g .• Apollo.
VAX. PRIME, and IBM), a List-25 size of 300 is sufficient for this usage (and it
corresponds to the default allocation of "VARDIM" for List 25). Word machines
will need more (it appears that value 410 should be adequate).
Interpretation of the input data confirms the four U.M. table sizes that have
been requested. of course. As an illustration, consider the associated output
line of BENCHMARK DCNEW-1:

II-A-J. Request for Alternqtive Diqgnostic Printout of the Time-Step Loop

If minus Signs are applied to MULT(K) as part of the printout frequency changes
of Section II-C (or the equivalent "CHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENCY" declaration of
Section A-10). then diagnostic printout controls of the time-step loop are to be
switched. Those of the "DIAGNOSTIC" request (Section A-12) are in effect initially.
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede H1acellaneoua nata - 6

Then, at the time of the first change, an a1ternate set of printout control
parameters IPR(1:4) is used instead. These four new variables replace IPRSOV(16:19) ,
to control the diagnostic output of the four pieces of the time-step loop. Upon
the second such change (the second negative MULT), there is a switch back to the
original DIAGNOSTIC printout control codes. Etc. (for each minus sign, the two
sets of control variables are switched).

The alternate set of printout control parameters IPR(l:4) is automatically

ini tialized to zero at the beginning of execution. If this is what the user wants,
a declaration of the present section is not required. This would be for the common
usage that will begin with diagnostic printout for steps 0 and 1, but which has
no such output thereafter.

On the other hand, if the time-step loop is to begin without any diagnostic
tlrintout, then nonzero IPR(K) must be defined by the user. This is done using the
following special-request card:

l~ tilJ~
I! IE
I: 1,1' if Wlc I'H tH( I,t· t ~ t11 ~~ c I' ~ E ti I~l ( H til!l( I!I! tl~* 1~ ~! ~q(

"
ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PR I NTOU 18 18 18 18

IPRl IPR2 IPR3 IPR4

Interpretation of the input data confirms the four printout controls that have
been requested, of course. As an illustration, consider the associated output
line of BENCHMARK DC-53:

C 1 234 5 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
DELTAT-loop printout. 9 9 9 9 IALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRIN

ll-A-4. Declaration of Intention to Use Tupe 1-1Q Sources Analytically

As explained in Section VII, source types 1 through 10 are reserved for functions
that are directly defined by the user. If one or more such source functions is
to be defined in FORTRAN within a special user-supplied version of SUBROUTINE
ANALYT, then the following special request record must precede input of the
miscellaneous data cards for the data case in question:
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede "[Link]. Data - 7

,~ € E
~
1* IEi~!e I ~I c ~I~ I:if If~ ~I ( ~ i ~I~, f If I( I~r= ~ f rf~ ~ :~!~ 1=lf : f~ ~ C '~ I~l' I (:~ Ie I' H rfi f

ANALYTIC SOURCES USAGE

It is the user's responsibility to see to it that his own special SUBROUTINE

ANALYT has replaced the near-dummy module comes with the UTPF. of course. The
UTPF module is useful only for the artificial illustration of BENCHMARK Dc-6.
Interpretation of the input declaration appears as follows (note that there
are no parameter values to be confirmed):

II-A-5. Request to Average EnT? Output

Successive values of EMTP output variables will be averaged prior to printing

and plotting if the following request is made:

!JJ1JJ1JJJ1J!lJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJlJJ~iJJJJJi~J~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1J~11JJJJif~J~
VERAGE OUTP

The mathematics of theEMTP solution are not affected; this is just a massaging
of the answers at the time answers are printed and/or written to the plot file of
LUNIT4. By averaging is meant the arithmetic mean of the current and the preceding
variable value: (V-new + V-old) / 2 •

For studies where EMTP output variables are smooth functions of time. the
"AVERAGE OUTPUT" request would have negligible effect. and should not be used (it
just adds a small error to the answer). But there are problem cases such as the
hanging inductor (see the two pages of discussion in Section VI about'"REMARKS ON
OPENING ACTION"). There are pathological cases where the trapezoidal rule gives
answers that oscillate around the true value. so this remedy might sometimes be
useful. As an example of such usage. see BENCHMARK DC-55.

Interpretation of the input declaration appears as follows (note that there

are no parameter values to be confirmed):
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. nata - 8

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------l-------------------------
Request to average (smooth) output variables. lAVERAGE OUTPUT

II-d-6. Qptionat Case-Sgparatjon card

While not mandatory, it is good practice for the EM!? user to make the very
first card of each data case a special case-separation marker:

!JJ1JJ1J~~I~J1JJJJI~IJJ1J~lJJ~IJJJJJJ~J~IJJ~JJJ~JI1JJJJ~lJ~~IJJ1JJIlJ~lJJJ~JIJJ~
BEGI N NEW DATA CAS

See any standard test case (e.g., BENCHMARK DC-18) for an example.

For execution that terminates normally, or for single-data-case solutions,

this just described card serves no operational purpose. It does, of course, appear
on the 80-column input data listing, with appropriate interpretation on the left.
but that's all.
On the other hand, should the EM!? decide to prematurely terminate execution
of a particular data-case solution (with an EM!? error message), then a case-se-
paration marker becomes important. The program automatically steps over remaining
input cards, discarding them one at a time until it finds such a "BEGIN NEW DATA
CASE" record. At that pOint, a new data case is known to begin. so the EM!? can
correctly recover to solve the just-found following case. This is referred to as
EMTP error-recovery capability, during execution involving two or more data cases.

Yet suppose that it was during the solution of the final data case of program
execution that a fatal EM!? error termination occurs. In this case, there would
be no following data case, so further solutions would not be possible. To distinguish
this situation, the final data case should always be followed by a "BEGIN NEW DATA
CASE" card and a blank card, in order to terminate execution cleanly. The blank
card in this situation is read as the start of a new data case, and the lack of
any keying on it is recoiIlized by the EMTP as the end of all data cases. In the
absence of such usage, recovery following an EMTP error will result in the encounter
of an end to input data, which will be accompanied by a second EM!? error message
(messy) •

It should be emphasized that "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" cards must be properly
positioned in the data deck; they do not in any way alter the need for blank
termination cards (the function of which is explained in section II-A-8). The
identity and function of these special cards is recognized by the EMTP in only two
places:

1. Following an EMTP fatal error, such cards are watched for as other records of
the input data are discarded.
II-A. Special-Requeat Card. That Precede Miacellaneoua Data - 9

2. Following normal completion of the solution for any particular data case, the
very first non-comment record of the following data case will be checked for
"BEGIN NEW DATA CASE".

Any other placement of these key cards will generally lead to error termination
by the operating system, since the alphanumeric text will be decoded numerically
(which is impossible).

Interpretation of the input declaration appears as follows (note that there

are no parameter values to be confirmed):

II-4-7. Bequest tor Delay in Extrema Calculation

The integer miscellaneous data parameter MAXOUT (see Section II-B) provides
for the calculation and output of variable extrema. The
same vector of extrema is used for "STATISTICS" and "SYSTEMATIC" output as well.
Normally, extrema are wanted over the full time span of the simulation. But not
always. There are cases where one wants to ignore a certain initial interval of
the simulation, only considering transients after a certain minimum time. For
example, in a "STATISTICS" simulation, it is possible that random closing will
follow the opening of breakers (the clearing of a fault), but that the peak
simulation voltage will be produced during the deterministic opening portion of
the simulation. If extrema were calculated over the entire time span of the
simulation, each energization would generate identical peaks, which is useless to
the designer. So, in this case, the solution is to inhibit the calculation of
extrema until transients of the opening .phase of execution have passed. This is
possible, using the following speCial-request card upon which the beginning time
BEGMAX in seconds is to be keyed in columns 33-40:

,. IE
i~€ 'EI~ ie I~ ~.j I ~!( I·I..;I~ !f~~1 ( I~,..;'~ ,€ :E~~IC
I'
'mic 1- ,~:~
It
,ElSie ,.. it
~ • ~~ ~ i( ,< .• rm[c
BEGIN PEAK VALUE SEARCt- EB.O

BEGMAX

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-48.

II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede "[Link] Data - 10

So much for the simplest possible case, where an initial time span is simply
ignored in the extrema calculation. But more complex time ranges are possible,
if the above BEGMAX is given a value of "-1.0". In this case, an extra card is
to follow, upon which monotone increasing times Tl, T2, etc. are to be keyed:

I!
I~I- "ll tE IEI~ ~( I~ l!H rAe ~~ tH~I(
I~

[Link] fl t~1 <Ie I' H tIle , . I' i/ tEl cle II tl ie !( I'

IE
rll~l(

, st interval 2nd interval 3rd interval 4th interval 5th interval

E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10

In this case, extrema are to be calculated only for those portions of the
simulation that intersect the sub-intervals of time (Tl, T2), (T3, T4), etc.
Present dimensioning of this feature has been limited to the single card of five
subintervals, as shown. In case fewer than this maximum are actually desired, the
4 or fewer pairs should be followed by a very large time that will never be reached:
the beginning time of a bounding subinterval.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the starting time BEGMAX of the
search for extrema, if this is positive (the simple case). Using BENCHMARK DC-53
as an illustration:

On the other hand, if BEGMAX = -1.0, then the more complicated, 2-card input
is involved. BENCHMARK DC-53 provides an illustration of such usage:

C 1 234 567
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ~-----------------------------------------------:-------------------------
Extrema lookout begins at t = -[Link]+OO sec. :BEGIN PEAK VALUE SEARCH
(Tl,T2): 5.00E-Ol 1.50E+00 2.50E+00 3.50E+00: 0.5 1.5 2.5

II-A-8. Blank Cqrd to Terminqte EMTP Execution

The traditional termination procedure for the solution of a disk file that
contains one or more stacked data cases is to have the first card of the following
(non-existent) data case completely blank. The use of "BLANK" in columns 1-7,
followed by anything for the rest of the card image, is also acceptable. By
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Hiacellaneoua Data - 11

agreement, either of these tell the program that there remain no more data cases
to be solved, so that EMTP execution can return to the original opening prompt
( "EMTP begins. Send ••• " ) •

In order to protect against termination by the operating system after an EMTP

error stop, the just-mentioned final blank card should always be preceded by a
"BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card. This is as per Section A-6.
This was the si tuation for years and years. and it remains good practice today.
Yet the blank terminating card at the end .generally will not be read. If fewer
than 5 data cards remain when the final "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card is encountered.
the program now is smart enough to realize that data is done. so it immediately
reissues the opening prompt ("EMTP beginS. Send ••• "). This saves a little output.

II-A-9, Calculation of Parameters of Multi-Phase Coaxial Cables

The calculation of parameters for multi-phase coaxial cables is isolated in

a separate UTPF overlay. It is really a separate. self-contained program, and all
usage is described in the separate Section XXIII. To transfer to that separate
program, the following special-request card is used:

I- ~ I~ If IE
~ ~iE IE Ie i ~~: fE rEI C I~I~ rE Ifl~1 ( " I~: ~ , E 'EI~ C 'f 'E I( ,~I!' IE :EI* ,~, :IE 'El~c ., 'f, s: c

CABL E CONSTANT C \8

KTRL9II(3)

Normally only the request word is required (leave columns 16 onward blank).
For an example of such usage. see BENCHMARK DC-27 or DC-28.

The parameter KTRLSW(3) of columns 49-56 is optional. It is used to modify

the number of conductors per SC (single core) coaxial cable within the memory part
reserved for CABLE CONSTANTS parameters (as explained near the top of MAIN27).
As a rule of thumb, following equation is valid:
,
ratio = #conductors/SOcable = 2 + KTRLSW(3}

Of course this implies KTRLSW(3) > -2.

Following table was derived for 0.85 times default dimensioning.
II-A. Spee1al-Reque.t Card. That Preeede [Link]. nata - 12

KTRLSW(3) #SC #conductors ratio

-2 92 0 0
-1 42 42 1
0 22 45 2
1 15 46 3
2 11 47 4

Interpretation of the input data confirms the usually blank (zero) value of
KTRLSW. Using BENCHMARK DC-27 as an illustration:

C 1 234 5 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Find parameters of cables. Type = O. ICABLE CONSTANTS

II-A-IO. Request to Cbqnge tbe Frequencu of Time-Step Loop Printout

The frequency of LUNIT6 printout within the time-step loop is nominally

controlled by integer miscellaneous data parameter lOUT of Section II-B. But this
frequency can be varied as the simulation time is advanced. One way is to use an
extension to the integer miscellaneous data card (see Section II-C). But it is
possible to accomplish identically the same control by having the same numerical
card of {KCHG. MULT} pairs preceded by the appropriate special-request card. as
follows:

11JJIJJJJJ~IJJJJJJ~J~IJJ~JJJ~~IJJJJJIJJ~IJJIJJJJJ~IJJJJJIJJ~IJIJJJIJJ1IJIJI'IJ~~
CHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENC

I~ I~ Ie IE
~ ~ ~IE If e ~ IE 'E I cle I~I~ fE 11 Ie' ~ ~~ E :sle I' I~H t ~I~I( ,~I'iE '~~~Ic ,oil' IE 11:~!( I.l'~ E rE:~!C

, st change 2nd change 3rd change 4th change 5th change

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Miacellaneoua Data - 13

The numeric card specifies at which time steps the printout frequency is to
be changed, and to what values the frequency is to be changed. Up to five pairs
of these {KCHG, MOLT} controls are permitted, as per the following definitions:

KCHG(K}: The time step number at which the K-th variation of printout frequency
is to begin. Printout for this particular step number is always provided, as
a beginning to the new frequency of output.

MULT(K): The modified value of lOUT (see 2nd miscellaneous data card) that takes
effect at time step KCHG(K).
If a minus sign is appended to MULT(K) , then at the corresponding step number
KCHG(J}, the diagnostiC printout .status will be changed. That is, there will be
a switching of the two sets of diagnostic printout controls:

1. IPRSOV(16:19) of Section A-12 (a "DIAGNOSTIC" request);

2. IPR{1:4) of Section A-3 ("ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRINTOUT").
If there is no minus sign, there will be no change in status of the diagnostic
printout at the associated time step. Any minus signs are merely extra flags.
The absolute value ofMULT still controls the production (non-diagnostic) printout
frequency as originally described.
Note that the present usage is more general than that of Section II-C. The
extension to the integer miscellaneous data card is possible only if integer
miscellaneous data parameter IPUN is given a value of minus one (columns 41-48).
But IPUN also has meaning when it is positive, as a request for the keying of
terminal conditions. The user might want to do both of these operations in the
same data case, which before was impossible (since variable IPUN could not be
both negative and positive at the same time). Another advantage is clarity, since
the present structure is clearly labeled by the special-request card.
Interpretation of the input data confirms only the first three of the five
pairs of integers that are defined. An illustration is provided by BENCHMARK
Dc-48:

II-A-U, Bequest far Non-Stqndard Precison at Plot FUe Data Storage

The user will normally employ whatever prec~s~on of plot file data has been
decided upon by Program Maintenance for his computer system, and not think further
about the question. For plotting only, which requires low-accuracy, any computer
precision should be adequate, so the user need never worry. But there may be more
concern for other uses of the plot file data, such as "POSTPROCESS PLOT FILE"
(where plot file variables become TACS sources of a subsequent simulation), or
"FOURIER ON" (to request Fourier series decomposition of a plot file variable).
In such cases, full EMTP solution precision may be desired. For those computers
II-A. Special-Reque.t Car4. That Precede [Link]. Data - 14 .

that store output variables with reduced (typically half) prec~s~on, a special
request (the "CUSTOM PLOT FILE" request illustrated below) is required to override
the default decision favoring reduced precision. It also is conceivable that some
user might sometime want to decrease the precision of his plot data point storage.
although such usage is probably much less common. Actually, the declaration toggles
the choice of plot file precision, so can be used for either operation:

IllJJJiiJJJ1JJJJjjJJilJJJJJiJJ~1~JJJJjJ~~lJ1JJJjJ~~l~JJJJiJ~~111JJJ1JJJ1JJJJJtJJ~
CUSTOM PLOT FI L

Interpretation of the input declaration appears as follows (for this illus-

tration, the change was from single precision (M4PLOT = 2) to double precision
(M4PLOT = 0):

II-A-12. Bequest for Selective Diagnostic Printout

Integer miscellaneous data parameter IPRSUP (see Section II-B) will turn
diagnostic printout on or off irrespective of the location of that printout within
the program. That is. either all diagnostic output is turned on, or all is turned
off, at a certain threshold level. If positive, IPRSUP will override the selective
printout request of this present section.

But if IPRSUP is to be keyed zero or blank, then the EMTP diagnostic printout
can be controlled overlay by overlay of the UTPF. A special-request card bearing
the key word "DIAGNOSTIC" in columns 1-10 is used in this case, followed by 10
blanks, followed by values for each of the 29 overlays as 2912 information:

. 14 I€ E
·~I € E Ie ~ l~ r~t (~( 'E ! e IE iElcle I~ !
iE ~I~ ~,.f~ rci~lc ~~.~ IE r f~~ ie .. 'EI ~ C

01 AGNOST I ( I~ I ~ I ~I ~ 12 1 ~ 1 1~ 1 • 1 ~ 1 I~ I~ 1 ~ 1 ~ 1 ~ I ~ 1 ~ I : 1 ~ 1 : 1 2 1 ~ 1 ~ 12 121 I I~

Overlay number: 2 -4 ~ 6 I E ~ 1C 1 1 ~ 1 l' , Hl 1 ( 1 ( 2C 2 2~ 2. 2 2~ 2E 2 2 2'

In the selection of these diagnostic output codes, special care should always
be taken with regard to the time-step loop of overlays 16-19. Remember that
diagnostic output can be generated for each time step, so beware of the termination
time TMAX in relation to the step-size DELTAT, should such output be requested.
Another consideration is for large networks. which will generate voluminous output
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Miacellaneoua Data - 15

in overlay number 7 (network node-renumbering) and the [Y] formation of overlay 14.
In these cases, output can be produced for each row of the matrix. It is recommended
that diagnostic for overlay 7 almost never be used, and that the value for overlay 14
be limited to level 3. If in doubt about such control, consult Program Maintenance,
or try the usage in real time, looking at the output on a computer monitor as it
is being generated. In case the output is excessive, execution then could be
aborted, and the controls modified appropriately. A summary of the function of
key overlays at the start of the program follows:
Overlay 1: Special-request cards, miscellaneous data
Overlay 2: Only TACS data input
Overlay 3: Branch input
Overlay 4: Switch (including diodes/valves) input
Overlay 5: Source (including S.M. and U .M.) input
Overlay 6: Network connectivity
Overlay 7: Node renumbering

If diagnostiC printout is being turned off and on as a function of time (see

Section 1.1b, with a minus sign on MUtT), then (IPRSOV{16:19) alternate with
IPR(1:4) for control of diagnostic printout of the time-step loop. There are two
distinct cases of importance:
Case 1. If the user wants to start with no diagnostic (i.e., for time steps zero
or one), then IPRSOV(16:19) should all be zero, and the "ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC
PRINTOUT" request of Section A-3 should be used to define the nonzero printout
codes (one or more nonzero).

Case 2. If the user wants to start with diagnostic (Step zero), then IPRSOV(16:19
should not all be zero. In this case, no "ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRINTOUT"
request is needed, since zero values are the default.

Interpretation of the input data confirms only the first 12 of the 29 integers
that are defined. An illustration is provided by BENCHMARK DCPRINT-5:

11-A-1$. Calculation at Constant-parameter. ail. ttl Neoork E0'ivaZent

The calculation of coupled [R],[L] branches to represent parts of the network

that are not to be modeled explicitly is done by a separate supporting program
named "NETEQV". Instructions for the usage of this utility are covered in Section
XXIV. To transfer to that separate program, the following special-request card
is used:
II-A. [Link].~ car4. Tha~ Precede [Link]. Da~a - 16

-
:~ IE IE
~ I~'c IE Ei~ !e i ~,- .~i E rE .!: lEI c'c 1'1' IE If { I~ I ~lc
,E I' ~ 1~le ~~.~ If I (~~ Ie I~ " ., iSiC

NETWORK EQUIVALEN1 E8.0

IOFBND

IOFBND of columns 33-40 is optional, and normally will be left blank. If a

value is keyed, it is taken. to be the maximum number of busses that are allowed.
If omitted, the EMTP will dimension tables of the supporting program as large as
possible (within available working space of overlay 28 (/c28B01/). Since the
sparsity diagram (which shows nonzero terms of the Jacobian) can only be produced
if there is extra storage, this diagram will only be seen if a positive IOFBND is
keyed, and if this positive value leaves sufficient extra working space for the
sparsity diagram.

Interpretation of the request card confirms the value of IOFBND. An illustration

is provided by the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-14:

II-A-14. Calling ot Installation-Dgpendent Module "MIDOYl"

The principal installation-dependent module that is called at the start of

execution of each data case is "SYSDEP". But there once was another such module
in overlay 1, a former SUBROUTINE that has since been. converted to a speCial,
optional logic branch wi thin "SYSDEP". This can be used for any necessary
initialization that is possible only after miscellaneous data cards have been read,
for those computer systems that require such special treatment. The request for
such special initialization (originally associated with file opening and closing)
is shown immediately below. But do not use this without the knowledge and approval
of Program Maintenance. It will result in execution of the statement CALL SYSDEP,
which could be disasterous for those computer systems that do not have alternate
logic to intercept such advance usage.

IE
Ie-
€
~ l~!f IE { 'EtC ~E If 'El~ iE lEI ~ I~i-'~ I' i~!( f- '!:if 'H~IC 'EI'iC
FILE REQUES

Interpretation of the input declaration then appears as follows:

II-A. Special-Request Cards That Precede Miscellaneous Data - 17

II-A-15. Declaration of Intention to UseEMTP Load Flaw

EMTP load flow capability is associated with special data cards that are to
follow the blank card ending sources, as explained in Section X. But such observation
of power constraints is optional. If such data is to be read at the appropriate
time and place, the EMTPmust know of its existence. The user declares such
existence by means of the following request card:

11JJJJJ1JJllJJJJIJJ~~IJJJJllJ~~IJJJJJIJ~~lJJJJJIJJ~IJJJJ~J~~~IJIJJJJJJ~IJJJJIIJJ~
FIX SOURC

For examples of such usage, see the standard test cases BENCHMARK DC-25 and
DC-26. Interpretation of the input declaration then appears as follows:

II-A-16. Declaration of Intention to Use "fREQUENCY SCAN"

The "FREQUENCY SCAN" feature (cfr. DC-51) of the EMTP allows for the .repeti tion
of steady-state phasor solutions (so be sure to put '!'MAX = 0, DELTAT has no meaning) ,
as the frequency of sinusoidal sources is automatically incremented between a
beginning and an ending frequency. Rather than conventional EMTP time-response
output, the user then has available a frequency-response output. When plotted,
the time axis of conventional EMTP simulations becomes the frequency axis, with
the result being a Bode plot. Either polar coordinates (magnitude and angle) or
rectangular coordinates (real and imaginary parts) of the phasor solution variables
are used for output purposes. For example, the following could apply to the node
voltage of phase "at! somewhere in the network:
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. Data - 18

Magnitude Angle
***
* * 1
I
* *
* * II *
* * 11 *
*** * 11 *
* 1I *
* 1I * *
* 1*
1 *
* I
1

+----------------------------->
Frequency
+---------------------------->
Frequency
Should the user desire such multiple steady-state phasor solutions, then the
following special-request card must precede the miscellaneous data cards:

I~
!~i~JJl ,e t!
€ iE
; ~~i f I! Ie I" ~.1 tE tII ~ Ie i 'f~ 1<" 'f I!I~ f( :;!~ [Link]~ ff II,s :; ~< t!' t! ISle I' f:lf 'a~le ,! rEI~1 c

FREQUENCY SCA" E8.0 E8.0 i .0 18

FMINFS DELFFS FMAXFS NPD

Parameters :
FM1NFS of cols. 25-32: the beginning (minimum) frequency of the scan, in [Hertz].
This must be a positive number.

DELFFS of cols. 33-40: the frequency increment between successive solutions of the
scan, if the user wants uniform (as opposed to logarithmic) spacing. For
logarithmic spacing, this field should be left blank.

FMAXFS of cols. 41-48: the ending (maximum) frequency of the scan, in [Hertz].
This must be greater than or equal to FM1NFS, of course. The solution loop
will end with the last frequency that does not exceed this upper limit.

NPD of cols. 49-56 is used only for geometric or logarithmic spacing as opposed
to uniform or arithmetic spacing of the frequency points. For geometric or
logarithmic spacing. provide an integer value for the number of points per
frequency decade. Successive frequency points then will be related by: (f(k+l)
/ f{k» ** NPD = 10.
Special attention should be paid to integer miscellaneous data parameter KSSOUT
when using the "FREQUENCY SCAN" option. See the Section 11-B definition. If
punched with unity. the full phasor branch flow and injection output will result
for each solution frequency of the scan. This could produce large quantities of
printed output, if the number of frequency points is large. Other positive values
of KSSOUT will produce additional phasor output, only in smaller quantity. Hence.
be careful of positive KSSOUT.
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Miacellaneoua Data - 19

Except for the just-mentioned full branch-flow and injection printout. only
node-vol tage output is presently available for "FREQUENCY SCAN" solutions. The
node voltage output request format is explained in chapter XII. Any request to
output branch or switch variables (voltage differences. branch currents. powers
and energies) or TACS variables will be disregarded in FREQUENCY SCAN mode. Node
voltages are outputted in both polar (magnitude, angle in degrees) and rectangular
( real. imaginary) forms.

The induction (asynchronous) alternative of the U.M. should not be used with
"FREQUENCY SCAN" unless it is known that installation-dependent SUBROUTINE
PLTFIL does not rely upon storage of the COMMON block for vector 14BYTE. The
UTPF contains an Apollo module. and this uses the storage of 14BYTE for conversion
of the "FREQUENCY SCAN" output vector to single precision prior to storage. The
replacement of 14BYTE by a local vector of sufficient length (equal to the maximum
number of output variables) will remove the restriction. of course.

For the LUNIT6 line printer output. there really are two component output
vectors, beginning with the polar form, and ending (after starting on the left on
a new line) with the rectangular form. For the plot file of I/O unit number LUNIT4,
the two parts are concatenated into a single, double-length. output vector. An
extract of the LUNIT6 output is displayed hereafter.
_g:LOlU)
...g:CUR
......1: LOlU)
....1 : CUR
angle:LOlU)
angle: CUR
l_g:LOlU)
t...g:CUR
_g:'UD
-g:
real:IIID
....1:
_l.:IIID

t...9:IIID
_:-
real:_ t...9:-
_:TIIM

....l:TIIM

----- OUtput vector for nap n _ r 1. Frequency - 6.000000001+01 Hz.

1.00000001+02 0.00000001.00 9.35715221-01 -2.06559971.01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 9.3571522£001 -2.06559971+01
9.3571522E+01 -2.06559971+01
1.0000000E.02 0.0000000£+00 1.75562971-01 -3.3007'461-01 [Link]+oo 0.00000001+00 1.7556297!-01 -3.3OO7946E-01
1.75562971+01 -3.3OO7946E+01
Tap °TAPSAV·. IIOIAIN· 8
Total nat_rk 10" P-lo.. by a.-tng [Link]...... 3. 991500107967!.03

----- OUtput [Link] for atap nuaDar 2. [Link]. '.000000D01+01 Bz.

1.00000002+02 [Link]'oo 1.93476371-01 -2.66166101+01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 1.93476371-01 -2.66866101+01
1.93476371+01 -2.66166102+01
1.0000000E+02 0.00000001+00 7.91300021001 -4.01269361001 0.0000000I+00 0.00000001+00 7.91300021001 .... 01269362-01
7.91300021+01 -4.0126936!+01
Tap °TAPSAV·. IIOIAIN ° 1
Total network loaa P-loaaby au.a1ng inj.ct1 ..... ° 3.5&47&40016241+03

This output is extracted from a modified version of BENCHMARK DC-51. One extra
node "DUMMY" was added, to produce more output, thereby clearly showing the
boundary between the polar and the rectangular outputS. The final line of heading
(before the step-1 output) shows that there are five complex output quantities,
or 10 numbers total in both the polar output and the rectangular output.

Also for plotting. only node voltage output can be requested although all
output variables are considered to be of type "9" (branch currents). ·One pair of
names is associated with each node name. Suppose that NODNAM is the name of the
node voltage which .is of immediate interest. The corresponding pair of names then
should be one of the following:

(NODNAM, mag) ---- for the magnitude of node voltage NODNAM;

(NODNAM, ang) ---- for the associated angle in degrees.
(NODNAM. real ) for the real part of node voltage NODNAM;
(NODNAM, imag) --- for the associated imaginary part.
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. nata - 20

Such plotting is illustrated by BENCHMARK DC-51, where character plots of both

polar and rectangular quantities are illustrated. For easy reference, I reproduce
the two plot cards of that data case. All plotting is for steady-state node voltage
components versus frequency at node "CUR "

C 1 . 2 3 4 5
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C ------------------------------------------------
PRINTER PLOT
19630. 60.150. CUR mag CUR angle
19630. 60.150. CUR real CUR imag
BLANK card ending plot cards
For details regarding the card format of this plot card, please consult section
XIV-A-3.

An extract of the corresponding printer plot output looks as follows:

Reque.t for character (line printer) plotting.
» Plot card. [Link] 6.000£.01 1.500£.02
22-Jun-88 10.33.56 1
I PRllITEI! PLOT
19630. 60.150.

Plot type 9
Noele na88. CUI! .....0 CUI! MOI..E
Ti_-ad. legend : Frequency f in Jlertz

( ,,10··1 I) )
-4.134 -3.096 -2.058 -1.020 0.011 1.055 2.093 3.131 4.168 5.206 6.24. 1.282 '.319 9.351
.---_..----.---------+---------.... _-------.---------.---------.---------.---------.---------.---------.---------.---------.---------.
•
•
90.

•
• A

B A
Ene! of graph.

However, if the user needs branch currents or voltage differences, rather than
node voltages, he is adviced to add one or more measuring transformers for this
purpose (see Section IV-E). A 2-winding transformer that draws no magnetizing
current, and that has small leakage impedance, would be appropriate, to insure
accurate measurement (ju~t as in the real world of instrumentation).

- For a voltage differente between BUSK and BUSM, following scheme could be used:

network
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Kiacellaneoua Data - 21

The primary of the transformer should be connected across the two desired nodes.
The turn ratio should be unity. The secondary should have one grounded terminal.
The open circuit terminal vol tage VKM then is a measure for the vol tage difference.

- For a branch current in a resistor R between nodes BUSK and BUSM, following
scheme could be used:

BUSK

BUSM

The primary of the transformer should be connected across the resistor with value
R. The turn ratio should be R: 1. The secondary should have one grounded terminal.
The open circuit terminal voltage IKM then is a measure for the current flowing
in the resistor R.

If phasor branch-[YJ data is being used with "FREQUENCY SCAN" (see Section
IV-C), then the user must connect the file of such data to I/O channel LUNIT8
using SOPEN. The format of data is simple enough. Data is ordered with increasing
frequency. There must be one set of phasor branch-[YJ data for each frequency
of the "FREQUENCY SCAN". Each such data set consists of a single, arbitrary
comment line followed by [Y] --- for each branch so represented, in order of
branch input. Since [V] is symmetric, only the lower-triangle is inputted.
Numerical data is ordered as for the [V] input of Section IV-C, although more
preciSion is allowed: use FORMAT ( 4E20. 0 ). No node names are used, note, since
these are already known, Just supply the (a,B) pairs, up to two per card. Data
is inputted by rows of the lower triangle (up to and including the diagonal),
with data for each row beginning on a new card. Readers having access to FORTRAN
can search for LUNIT8 usage wi thin SUBROUTINE SUBR10.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the four input numbers on the
declaration. As an illustration, consider the associated output line of BENCHMARK
DC-51:

11-A-17. Frequency-Dependent Representation of Overhead Lines

In order to represent overhead transmission lines with frequency-dependent

parameters and a constant transformation matrix as required by Section IV-D-3,
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede MiacellaneQua Data - 22

recourse is made to a separate supporting program. Instructions for the usage of

this separate program are contained in Section XVII. The transfer to this supporting
program is accomplished by the following request:

1
I~ I~ I! IF
. ~ t:~ E 11 jC le ~.l •H ! q~l( 11~ ~ ~ ( ,< 1_ll r :fE rH~lc ~, 11~ ~I ( Ill: IE' (I~I( ,:fE rH~'e .,~' rll~lr

J MA-RT I SET UF E8.0

PDTO

Variable PDTO of columns 33-40 has the same meaning as the parameter of columns
33-38 of frequency-dependent branch cards of Section IV-D-3. In fact, the parameter
is not actually used by the fitter, but is merely passed along from the declaration
card just shown to any branch cards that later are to be punched. This is no
different than for node names of a "BRANCH" request, only here the request comes
earlier, outside the supporting program.

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DCNEW-3. Interpretation of the

input declaration then confirms the input parameter as follows~

II-A-18. Request tor the Printing of Fatal enTP Error Messgges

It sometimes is handy to be able to generate the text of any particular fatal

EMTP error message (or "KILL code") without actually being obliged to set up a
data case that will so terminate erroneously during execution. This is possible
using the request:

.~ i€ IE
['I E II Ie L' I~f( ,~I~ 111q( ~<I ~ fE [11 ~ Ie I~ ,<I: fE rm ~ ~. f! rlt~ Ie I ~t' ~'I !I! t~f ( ~, p~ rmle
KILL CODE~ 18 18

KILL 1 KILL2

Here KILL1 (columns 33-40) and KILL2 (columns 41-48) are the beginning and
ending numbers of the consecutive error messages that are to be printed. Of
necessity, KILL2 must not be less than KILL1.
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Hiacellaneoua nata - 23

The most common usage of this feature will be on an impromptu basis, which
suggests interactive input following the "KEY" response to the opening prompt of
the program.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the beginning and ending indices of
the error messages. An illustration has been placed at the end of BENCHMARK DC-13,
resulting in the output:

C 1 2 345 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------l-------------------------
Test output of error messages 13 through 14 IKILL CODES, 13, 14,

1I-6-19. CaLcuLation at Pqrameters at Overhead Transmission Lines

The calculation of parameters for overhead transmission lines is isolated in

a separate UTPF overlay. It really is a separate, self-contained program, and all
usage is described in the separate Section XXI. To transfer to that separate
program, the following special-request card is used:

11JJJJJiJ~~1~Jl~JjJ~~lJJJJJiJJ~1~J~~JiJJ~lJJJiJiJ~~lJJJi~j~J~lJ1JJJt~~~lJ1JJ~f~~~
LINE CONST ANT

For examples of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-29 or DC-59. The latter of these
provides an illustration of interpretation, which is as follows:

In addition to the nature of the message, note that there is confirmation of

the limiting number of conductors. The value shown was for Apollo with default
dimensioning and an offset (4th card) of 50K.

11-4-20. Option at lineqrlv-varied bias tor Monte Carlo Studies

At the request of BPA production users (specifically, Dan Goldsworthy), the

normally random or zero bias that can be added to all switch times of Monte Carlo
studies can be replaced by a linear variation. This will be the program response
to the request:
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Hiacellanecua Data - 24

i~ ~ iE IE
i" l', E IE Ie I ~I- '''f~ ~ € rEI~iC i~'o IE~ ~I C fl' ,€ :EI ~ e '~ I" 1 € :H~ I~- I" f€ I f~ SiC " f~ i~1 ( H rEi~lc

L I NEAR 81 AS USAGE

No further information is required, since limits on the bias have already been
provided by the "STATISTICS" miscellaneous data parameters DEGMIN and DEGMAX (see
Section II-C. columns 41-56). For a case with "LINEAR BIAS USAGE", there is
replacement of the random number that normally is used by a variable that varies
linearly between 1.0 / NENERG and unity as theNENERG energizations are performed.

The interpretation of this request appears as follows (note that it involves

the confirmation of no parameter values):

11-4-21. ReQUest to Read Misqellaneous Data Cards

The floating-point and integer miscellaneous data cards are described in

Section II-B. For a conventional Simulation, they come after all special requests
of the type now being considered. For the normal Simulation, this is fine. and
there is no problem.

But for special circumstances. the user may want to define one or more of the
miscellaneous data parameters "ahead of time." along with other special request
cards. This is required for "START AGAIN" usage. for example (see BENCHMARK Dc-40
as an illustration). If such usage is wanted, Simply precede the usual miscellaneous
data cards of Sections II-B and II-C by the special-request word "MISCELLANEOUS
DATA CARDS" as follows:

11JJJJ~]JJJ1JJIJ~]~~~IJJIJ~]JJ~lJJIJJ1JJ~lJ11J~1~~~lJJ~J~1~J~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJl1J~IJ~~
MISCELLANEOUS DATA CARD .

The user is advised not to do this casually. however. There should be a clear,
real, known need as approved by standard instructions, or as recommended by local
Program Maintenance.
The interpretation of these data only requires documentation of the request
card, since the miscellaneous data cards (and possible extensions) are interpreted
exactly as explained in Sections II.-B and II -C. As for the leading card, it is
interpeted as follows:
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Kiacellaneoua Data - 25

II-d-22. Trickv Mode-voltage Output Request tor Distributed Line

There are cases where mode voltage rather than phase vol tage is desired as the
output of a distributed transmission line. This will generally be for educational
usage of one form or another, since the quantities in question can not be physically
measured. Since all distributed-parameter transmission-line models use a modal
transformation matrix to decouple the multi-conductor equations, the modal quan-
tities area part of the solution process, and it is just a matter of directing
such variables to the output vector. With care, the user can request the modal
voltage to ground at both ends of one distributed-parameter transmission line.
The request has the following form:

I~ 1.1 I~ I€ IE
~I~ foil- fE 'EI~IC rel ~iC . ~ 4~ 'Ei9C l ~~! tEi~lc l~fE [t 1~lc I·J~ r t I~!C f· 'EI~I C 'ESiC

MCDE VOL T AGE OUTPU 18

MODOUT

Variable MODOUT (co1s. 33-40) is to be keyed with the number of phases or

coupled conductors that are involved. A blank or zero field is defaulted to
MODOUT = 3, so it is really only in other cases that the numerical value need be
keyed.

Such modal output is possible for only one transmission line, and that line
must be placed at the very end of branches, immediately before the blank card that
terminates all branch cards. In addition, the very first branch data must consist
of extra, high-reSistance branches that are connected from each node to ground at
both ends of the line in question. Equal in number to 2" MODOUT, column 80 of
these uncoupled (type-O) series R-L-C branches must be keyed with a "1" so as to
request branch current output. Use a resistance value so large that the answer
is unaffected.

So much for data input. After the case has been run. the user will find his
modal voltages in the output locations that would otherwise have been reserved for
the branch currents just mentioned. This is why the present feature is a little
tricky. The first "MODOUT" ouput currents are in reality modal voltages to local
ground at the "BUS1" end of the line, in natural order; the next "MODOUT" output
currents are mode voltages to ground at the other end ("BUS2" end) of the line,
also in natural order. A reminder message to this effect is printed immediately
below the column headings for the output variables, so the user will not forget.
Note that if one is plotting, type-9 plot requests (see Section 1.10) must be used.
Since the EMTP thinks that the modal voltages are currents in the 2 .. MODOUT
high-reSistance branches which were supplied by the user.
II-A. Special-Requeat Caraa That Precede "iacallaneoua Data - 26

An illustration of this feature is provided by the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK

DC-38. It is from this solution involving a 3-phase, constant-parameter line that
the following interpretation has been extracted:

II-A-23. Request to Convert ZnO Branch Cards fram Ola to New formgts

The following request will provide conversion from old ("M36." or earlier
vintage) zinc oxide arrester branch data into the current formats (as required for
"M38." and later versions of the program):

11JJJJJJJJJ1JJIJJiJ~~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJiJ~~lJJJJJJJ~~lJJJJJiJ~~lJJJlJtJ~~
OLD TO NEW ZN

This special-request card is to be added before the first miscellaneous data

card of a data case involving old Zno data cards. The EMTP reads such data, and
punches (see $PUNCH) replacement branch cards to represent the Zno arresters. It
will then be the userts responsibility to replace the old card images with the new
ones, using his system editor.

An example of such conversion is provided by the second subcase of standard

test case BENCHMARK DC-13. The following illustrative interpretation has been
extracted from the solution of this case:

II-A-24. Request tor Omission of Bgse Cgse gf "STATISTICS" Simulgtign

The conventional. "STATISTICS" or "SYSTEMATIC" data case involves a base case

solution before any of the NENERG (integer miscellaneous data parameter; see
Section II-B) energizations are performed. This is a preliminary shot, right down
the middle, with all of the variances set to zero. Well, the user can suppress
this extra, preliminary simulation by a special request card reading:
II-A. Special-Requeat Cerda That Precede Miacellaneoua Data - 27

IlJJJJJ1JJJ1JJlJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJJIJJ~lJJIJJIJ~~
OMI T BASE CAS

Resulting statistical tabulations are unaffected. since the base case solution
was not part of the statistical processing, anyway. So. if the user already knows
how the base case solution looks, he can save one shot, as well as some paper.

An example of such usage is provided by of standard test case BENCHMARK DC-13.

The following illustrative interpretation has been extracted from this solution:

II-A-25. Bequest tor Peak Voltage ot Simulation

The user may be interested in peak node voltage, or in peak linear brancn
voltage, or both, without being concerned about the location in the network that
this will occur. If so. there exists the paper-saving alternative that avoids
voltage output for all nodes or branches:

:; !~
,~
€ E

.*
i

:;i~ IE 'c ,~~ t rt, SI C :; I' 'eISiC I~ l'H t ciS ~,l ' ff I C,SiC :; ~ t rt i~ 'EI~I ( 'EI ~ic
ie '" " IC '"
PEAK VOLTAGE MONI TOF 18

MAX\Ii...T

=. Variable MAXVLT chooses the type of voltages being monitored:

1 for node voltages only;

2 for linear branch voltages only;
3 for both node voltages and also linear branch voltages.

Zero or blank will be interpreted as unity (a request for the peak of node voltages
only). This is the request. Later. at the end of the simulation. before the usual
peak-value printout for the output vector. will be generated the requested output
or outputs.
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. Oata - 28

For the monitoring of node voltages (MAXVLT 0 or 1). one line will give the =
node name. the time of the peak. and the value of the overall peak. The following
is an illustration taken from the first subcase of BENCHMARK DC-7:

Overall simulation peak node voltage = 5.69470365E+05

occurred at bus "TRANS" at time (sec) = 1.17000000E-02

For 132-column output. this will be a single line. of course (it has here been
split in two for ease of presentation only). The printed value at the end is the
peak of all node voltages. in volts. not the peak of all node voltages in per unit.
If the problem has transformers that change the nominal voltage level. there is
no easy way of spotting peaks of per unit voltage that might occur on the low
voltage side. So. usage is somewhat specialized. and it requires caution.

For the case of MAXVLT = 2 or 3. there will be output for the peak branch
voltage as follows (from the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-7):

Overall simulation peak branch voltage = 5.66276224E+01

occurred at linear branch number 3. which connects node
"TRAN " to" "The time [sec] = [Link]+OO .el
Many of the standard test cases employ such usage. The following illustration
of interpretation was taken from the solution to the second subcase of BENCHMARK
DC-7:

II-A-26. ReQUest tor Postprocessing ot Plot File USing TACS

TACS can be used for the postprocessing of plot files. The user first connects
the old plot file (input to the post processor) to I/O unit number LUNIT2 using
SOPEN. For an example (which may be installation-dependent). see BENCHMARK DC-46.
Variables of the plot file will be assigned to user-defined TAC5 sources in natural
order by the EMTP. thereby providing the connection for postprocessing by the user.
This is the response to the request:

I- I~ I~ IE F
I~ I~i' ft :E15 I( ~ rEt (I< I ~ I 'f ~~! IE Ie I~ l~H f- L'~! IEI~I( rE~* tH~IC
i l' tEI* ,~

'* 'EIS{

POSTPROCESS PLOT FILE 18

IPLOT
II-A. Special-Request Cards That Precede Miscellaneous Data - 29

Variable IPLOT of cols. 33-40 is to be an integer indicating frequency of the

output, not unlike the miscellaneous data parameter of the same name. For example,
if IPLOT = 3 is used, then only every third point of the old plot file will be
used. The most common (and least tricky) case uses IPLOT = 1. so that there are
as many output points as there are input points. .

The data case is completed by cards for a TACS-only (TACS STAND ALONE) EM!?
data case. There are generally to be as many TACS sources as there are variables
in the old data file. with 6-character names being arbitrary. In the order defined,
these are automatically (internally) connected to variables of the old plot file.
Most post-processing will involve supplemental variables, although function blocks
are also useful (e.g.. l/S for integration of some voltage to give flux).
The interpretation of the request card confirms the user-keyed frequency IPLOT,
of course. This is illustrated by the following line from the solution to BENCHMARK
Dc-46:

C 1 2 345 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
c ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Postprocess with frequency IPLOT = 1. IPOSTPROCESS PLOT FILE

I1-A-27. Redefinition of Svnchronous Power FrequenCJI STdTfR

Although the synchronous power frequency STATFR can be defined arbitrarily in

the STARTUP file, it is not convenient to alter such a critical value for occasional
foreign data cases that might deviate from the local frequency. In the case of
stacked data cases, it is even conceivable that different values would be required
within the same disk file. So, at the beginning of each new data case, the user
has the ability to alter the assumed power frequency by means of a request such
as:

.... ! iE IE
~~ ·E !EI~ Ie .~
I"
'mfc .~I~ lei E t~
I";
Ie ~i - I~I'IE t~ IS! C I~" "f~IE tf'~{ ~i': I' ~E I (:~iC I: ,.l' 'EI~I ( i'" 'f, s! C

PO'M:R F"REQUENC~ EB.O

STATFR

Variable STATFR of columns 33-40 is the synchronous power system frequency in

Hertz. Without such a declaration, this will normally be either 50 Hz or 60 Hz,
depending upon contents of the STARTUP file.

The interpretation of the request card confirms the user-keyed frequency

STATFR, of course. This is illustrated by the following line from the solution
to BENCHMARK DC-26:
II-A. Spec1al-Requea~ Carda Tha~ Precade M1acellaneoua Deta - 30

11-A-28. Request to change Width and SPacing of Time-Stgp Loqp Printqut

The dominant printout of the time-step loop is the step number, time. and
variable values which occurs at frequency lOUT (miscellaneous data parameter of
Section II-B). Although spacing of the step number and the time are fixed, all
following numbers will be of uniform width and intercolumn spacing as determined
by variables KOLWID and KOLSEP of the STARTUP file. Yet such formatting is important
enough that it has been placed under user control at the beginning of each data
case, too. by means of the following request:

!~ E E
I~,E !EI~ iC " I(
'~I ( I ~ I~I ~ ~ € I~I~,€ r~I~:( i.I~,€ I·I~ ~ € r~I( !( ~ ~ ~l ' ,E I (i~ IC
I ~
·'iE IE I( rE . 1<·' 'EI ~ C

PR I NTED NUMBER WIOH 18 18

KOLWID KOLSEP

Parameters:
KOLWID of columns 33-40 is the total column width in characters. including blanks
that separate columns.

KOLSEP of columns 41-48 is the number of blank characters separating nonblank

numbers.

The interpr€tation of the request card confirms the two user-keyed integers
KOLWID and KOLS , of course. This is illustrated by the following line from the
solution to Bc,'L-\RK DC-26:

C 1 234 5 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Width of time-step loop numbers. W=13 S=2 IPRINTED NUMBER WIDTH. 13,

11-A-29. Request tor Retative Allocation of Total TACS Storgge

Refer to Section A-1. which provided the first and most common way to allocate
total TACS storage, namely "ABSOLUTE TACS DIMENSIONS". The second way to allocate
total TACS storage is with a request for relative sizing. That is. rather than
request a specific number of function blocks. supplemental variables, etc., the
[Link]-Reque.t Card. That Precede Miseellaneou. Data - 31

user can simply request a proportional allocation (e.g., 5% of the total storage
for function blocks, etc.). There first is the special-request card, then the
data card bearing the 8 proportions, read as 8I8:

11JJJJ~j~~~lJJJJJ1~J~lJJl~Ji~~~lJJJJ~1~J~lJJJJ~1~J~lJJJJJ1~~~lJ1JJJiJJ~lJ1JJJiJJ~
RELATIVE TACS DIMENSION

. 1~ I! € IE
4': f:iE IEl* I" i",~ ~ E r1~ C ~i": ~, 'Ei9C ..: Ie I~f'
f€ 'EI S fE ISle I" ,"I: iE '1 tC{ ;.; l ~~ f i~! C I" ,
~.~ ~ E rmle
IS' IS IS IS IS IS 18 18

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

In theory, this is simple enough. But one practical problem with this second
alternative for sizingTACS tables is that the user has no intuitive feel for the
relative space taken by different tables. To aid the user, the following is an
approximate correspondence between nominal (default) absolute dimensions and the
proportions that produced them:

Absolute size 20 90 100 20 30 250 300 60

Relative size 11 15 7 7 3 8 21 28

This applies to translations having integers that are half as long as

floating-point variables (e.g., INTEGER*4 vs. REAL*8 for computers such as Apollo,
IBM, PRIME, and VAX). Proportions are a little different for computers that store
floating-point variables in words of the same length as integers (old CDC, Cray,
Burroughs, FPS-164; also single-precision Univac, Honeywell,and DEC PDP-I0/SYS-
TEM20), of course.

Interpretation of the two input data cards includes confirmation of just the
first 3 of the 8 input numbers. An illustration follows:
C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Request to define TACS allocation proportions. IRELATIVE TACS DIMENSIONS
TACS proportions. 1.60E+01 4.00E+00 2.00E+00 16 4 2
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede Miacellaneou. Data - 32

U-A-3Q, "REPLOT" For Batch-node Plotting of Previous Simulations

If a previously-solved data case had miscellaneous data parameter ICAT set to

1 or 2, then the plot data points of that solution were saved on disk as a permament
file. Should the user now (at some later time) wish to do batch-mode plotting
using this data, then he must do two things. First. he must connect the file of
raw data points of I/O channel LUNIT4 using SOPEN (see Section I-D). Second and
finally, he must transfer control to batch-mode plotting by means of the following
request:

11JJJ~llJJ~IJJJJJJ~JI1JJJJ~1~~~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~llJJJJJ~J~IJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJIIJl~
REPLO

As an example of such usage, see the standard test case BENCHMARK DC-54 for
the computer of interest. Remember that the SOPEN card is installation-dependent,
in general (which is why the recommendation is "for the computer of interest"),
As for interpretation, this is as follows:

II-A-31. Convert RnS V-I Saturation Characteristic to Instantaneous B-H

The calculation of instantaneous B-H characteristics for use with Type-92 or

Type-98 nonlinear reactors is not trivial, sometimes. If the user only has a curve
of RMS values for voltage and current. the separate supporting program named
"SATURA" can profitably be used. Instructions for the usage of this utility are
covered in Section XIX-G. To transfer to that. separate program, the following
special-request card is used:

11JJJJJIJJll~JJJJIJJIIJJJJJIJJ~IJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~IJJJJJ1JJ~IJIJJJIJJ~IJJJIJI~J~
SATURATIO

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-13. It is from the

solution to this case that the following interpretation was drawn:
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Hiacellaneoua Data - 33

ll-A-32. Model Overhead Line b~ 2nd Order Recursive Convolution

In order to represent overhead transmission lines with frequency-dependent

parameters and a constant transformation matrix as required by Section IV-D-4,
recourse is made to a separate supporting program. Instructions for the usage of
this separate program are contained in Section XXII. The transfer to this supporting
program is accomplished by the following request:

11JJJJJ1~~~lJIJJJJJJI1JJJJJJ~~~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJ1JJ1~J~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJ1~J~
SEM...YEN SETU

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-29. It is from the solution
to this case that the following interpretation was drawn:

ll-A-33. Request to Restart a Halted Simulation ("START AGAIN")

Integer miscellaneous data parameterMEMSAV will result in the dumping of EMTP

memory onto disk at the conclUSion of a simulation. For a single, deterministic
simulation, this will be at the end time of the simulation. t = Tmax. For a Monte
Carlo {"STATISTICS"} study, this will be upon the completion of the final energization
number NENERG. For those computer systems that allow this capability (e.g., any
flexible minicomputer or microcomputer), such a simulation can be restarted at any
later time by means of the following initial request:

11JJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1~~~lJJJJ~iJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJ1J~~lJJJJJ{JJ~
START AGAI
II-A. Spec1al-aequeat Carda That Precede K1aeellaneoua Data - 34

Actually, this is only the request to load tables from the disk file that has
already been connected to I/O unit number LUNIT2 by means of a SOPEN request (see
Section I-D). For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK Dc-40 for the computer
of interest (due to installation-dependence of the SOPEN card). If integrity of
the disk file that stores EMTP tables is important, a copy of the original file
should be used, in order to prevent accidental destruction. At the present time,
there is no READ-only insurance for any connected file.

As the hibernating solution is awakened, certain parameters can be changed,

should the user desire this. The "START AGAIN" request is to be followed by an
arbitrary number of cards that redefine switch and TACS source parameters, one
card per component or quantity that is to be changed. The last of these is
terminated by a "9999"-card (keyed in columns 5-8):

SOPEN, (etc. for control parameters)

START AGAIN
One card for each switch or TACS source to be changed
9999
There are 5 choices for the format of the cards to change parameters of switches
or TACS sources, as follows:

1) Cols. 55-60 left blank means that a special, dedicated input structure for a
switch is assumed. In the format below. "J" is the switch number, in order of
data input. The switch opening time T-open will be redefined only if columns
25-40 are keyed with a positive number. More commonly. it is the closing time
T-close that will be altered, for switches that are open at the end of the
preceding, discontinued simulation. Columns 9-24 are always read. and T-close
is always redefined (blank is interpreted as a request for zero closing time).
The format is:

I~ IE
! ~ l'~E rE Ie rEI~I( I~ H rE Ie I~I~ ~ E rf~~lc iE is I" I ~I~ iE r! I~IE r!~ ( f~
,E ' E~~lc

18 [16.0 E16.0

J T-close T-open

2) Cols. 55-60 keyed with "1111~" means that the data card is a TACS source card,
wi th its usual format (except for cols. 55-60). Any blank field of such a TACS
source card will result in no change to the associated source parameter. 1. e. ,
the user only need key those parameters that he actually wants to alter.

3) Cols. 55-60 keyed with "2222Y" means that the data card is a switch card, with
its usual format (except for\cols. 55-60). Any blank field of such a switch
card will result in no change to the associated source parameter. I.e., the
user need only key those parameters that he actually wants to alter.

4} Cols. 55-60 keyed with "-1111\" ---- like 2}. except that all data fields are
read. Here. blanks mean zeroes.
5} Cols. 55-60 keyed with "-2222\" ---- like 3), except that all data fields are
read. Here. blanks mean zeroes.

Following the "9999" terminator {keyed in columns 5-8} for all such change
cards, the end-time TMAX can be altered by means of a "MISCELLANEOUS DATA CARDS"
request (Section A-21). Then a "TIME STEP LOOP" request (Section A-36) actually
transfers control to the time-step loop, to continue the suspended simulation.

A few additional points might be passed along as well. Between the "MISCELLANEOUS
DATA CARDS" and the "TIME STEP LOOP" requests, the user is able to place any other
special requests which seem appropriate. The most commonly used is "CHANGE PRINTOUT
FREQUENCY", to alter the frequency of the time-step loop printout. If this is
done, remember that step numbers begin where the previous halted run left off
(e.g., for TMAX = 50 msec and DELTAT = 100 microsec, the first printed step would
be for number 500). The user should be aware that, although all requests might
be accepted by the EMTP, some of the more complex ones can not possibly be honored
in practice. Perhaps the best example is "FREQUENCY SCAN" of Section A-16. There
is no way a hibernating simulation of the time-step loop can be awakened and
directed to perform a series of phasor solutions (which is what the usage of such
a request implies)! Yet this is simple and obvious. More insidious are requests
that would simply make erroneous or inconsistent certain parameters of the memory
contents that to be restarted. An example of such a potential disaster is provided
by use of the "ABSOLUTE TACS DIMENSIONS" request of Section A-1. Use of this
feature would alter the pointers to the TACS tables, without changing the tables
themselves (which are already built), leading to "garbage out," and most likely
to an operating system interrupt of some sort. Hence the user is warned to be
both intelligent and skeptical about any such usage; if there are some added
hiddenbenefi ts, there also are .some very real limits. and some hidden traps. Be
cautious!

Several different input data card interpretations can be involved with the
just described data. The beginning and the ending of these are fixed, and are
illustrated by the following two lines from BENCHMARK DC-40:

C 1 2 345 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------l-------------------------
Continuation of partial previous simulation. \START AGAIN
Terminator for modified switching times. \ 9999

In between these two, it is possible to have several different structures, of

which the most commoni~ that for altered switch closing time {Case 1 above}.
Interpretation for this case confirms the three input parameters, as the following
line from the solution of BENCHMARK nc-49 illustrates:

C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------\-------------------------
Altered switch. 1 1. 1990E-02 [Link]+OO \ 1 .011990
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede "iacellaneoua Data - 36

So much for single simulations. Monte Carlo studies. too. can involve "START
AGAIN". In this case. there are additional alternatives. To the right of the
basic declaration, there can be as many as 15 integer numbers (Kl. K2. etc.) :

~~ I~ If IE
~ l c! f t ~l~ I( ~ l'~ E IdS IC ~ :~ I( I~ I~ If '~is 1~ f~ ~€ '~ Ie i~ ,~i:l€ ~slc I' f~ if '/: Ie ~ i~ >E '1 ~H

ST ART AGAI" 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
. 14 14 14 14 14

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 KB Kg K10 K 11 K12 K13 K14 K15

These are the numbers of already-simulated energizations that are to be ignored

as the Monte Carlo study is restarted. Most commonly there will be no such numbers.
of course, meaning that all previous energizations will be saved. As an illustration.
see the first subcase of BENCHMARK Dc-40. The second and third subcase of this
same file ignore one of the 3 preceding simulations by means of nonzero R1.
Nonzero integers must be in increasing order. and no fields can be skipped (the
first blank or zero will terminate such declarations).

If K15 (columns 77-80) of the preceding paragraph is keyed with the special
value -888. then the seed of the random number generator "RANDNZ" will be
reinitialized to the value that existed at the start (not at the end!) of the last
preceding energization. This allows a repeat of the last (generally incomplete.
for such usage) energization of the preceding execution. It is useful when something
went wrong and execution was terminated abnormally by the EMTP with an error stop
(a "KILL" message). The most common usage is for cases of non-convergence of
the Newton iteration for Zno surge arresters (see Section V-E). Convergence is
unpredictable, and the difficulty is different for each energization due to the
different switching times. which give rise to different transients. Eventually
there may be an energization that is aborted with an error termination KILL =
212. Whereas the abortive energization could be ignored completely (it will not
be a part of the history that is saved in MEMSAV tables), the intelligent. or
sophisticated user probably will want to go back with a subsequent execution and
exactly repeat the switching times that caused the trouble. The problem energization
might be made to converge by better control of the Newton iteration (see "ZINC
OXIDE" of Section II-A-39). in which case the continuation will be continuous,
without any reinitialization of the random number generator. This may be desired
or required for some reason. Another reason to repeat an abortive energization
is to study it further via additional printout and/or plotting. Such post-mortim
examination is possible only if switching times can be duplicated exactly. and the
flag K15 = -888 allows this. Note that value "-888" is not a legal energization
number, so there is no confusion with the regular meaning of Kl5.
II-A. Special-Request Cards Tbat Precede Miscellaneous Data - 37

Monte Carlo studies can conbine the history of more than one preceding simulation,
too. The first uses "START AGAIN" as just described. Immediately after this
single card can come an arbitrary number of declarations for additional parts of
the history. The integers have exactly the same format and meaning, although the
declaration word is changed to avoid ambiguity:

12 I' IE Ie
I
; ~I- !~.: € tf i( ~I- f~i~ f€ r (i~ IC ~ f!~E 'EI~ IC : 2 f€ l(iS Ic ! '1- i~ f€ tEI~ ~ ~~ ,€ rf iSIC ~~ '~ I( 1.< )E 'f ~cl 0

LOAD MORE SHOP 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 Kg K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15

The energization numbers are always local to the portion being loaded, so no mental
arithmetic is required. Each such declaration will be preceded by a $OPEN card
to connect the new associated file to unit LUNIT2, and each of these will be
preceded by a $CLOSE card to disconnect the file of the preceding portion. It
is critical to note that the disk file of "START AGAIN" is completely different
in structure and size than the disk file or files of "LOAD MORE SHOTS". For
"START AGAIN", a complete set of tables (including "LABCOM" of size LTLABL words)
is required, as produced on unit LUNIT2 of a preceding simulation with MEMSAV
= 1 (integer miscellaneous data parameter). On the other hand, the file of
"LOAD MORE SHOTS" consists of only switching times and extrema of each energization,
as produced on unit LUNIT2 of a preceding simulation with MEMSAV = 2. The
user must remember which is which, since otherwise execution will be impossible.
For an example of such usage ,see the 2nd and 3rd subcases of BENCHMARK Dc40.
Illustrative interpretation shall be taken from the 3rd data subcase:

C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------:-------------------------
Connect disk file to I/O unit. : $OPEN, UNIT=2 FILE=DC24A
Continuation of partial previous simulation. :START AGAIN 3
Completed table restoration. Reset simulation time T =
Load more Monte Carlo extrema. 3 0 0 :START AGAIN 3
Disconnect disk file from I/O unit. 'SCLOSE, UNIT=2 STATUS=K
Connect disk file to I/O unit. SOPEN, UNIT=2 FILE=DC24c
Load more Monte Carlo extrema. 1 2 0 LOAD MORE SHOTS 1
Terminator for modified switching times. 9999 {
Disconnect disk file from I/O unit. $CLOSE , UNIT=2 STATUS=K
Connect disk file to I/O unit. $OPEN, UNIT=2 FILE=DDM.B
Request preceding 2 miscellaneous data cards. MISCELLANEOUS DATA CARDS

Of the 15 possible energization numbers, only the first 3 are confirmed by the
interpretation, note. The same single "START AGAIN" card is interpreted twice
only because the first integer K1 is nonzero. Note that the second interpretation
has the same structure as that for "LOAD MORE SHOTS". If Kl were left zero
or blank, no such 2nd interpretation showing K1 K2, and K3 would be seen. t
II-A. Special-Request Carda That Precede Kiacellaneous Date - 38

II-A-34. Subnetwork Identification Using All SWitches Closed at time zero.

With this special request card. the program will perform. automatic subnetwork
identification with all the non-grounding switches closed at time zero. There
will be no further subnetwork identification (normally it is a dynamic process
within the time-step loop). Without this special request. the program would
determine the subnetwork identification dynamically at each time step that a
switching operation will occurred. More information on subnetwork identification
can be found in Ref. 8. Vol. XIV, pages CUMA-30 to 33.

11JJJJJJJJ~IJJIJII~JI1JJJJJjJJ~IJJJJJ1JJ~IJJJJJIJ~~IJJJJJjJJ~IJIJJ~j~~~IJJJJIIJJ~
STEP ZERO COUPL

For an example of such usage. see the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-38. It
is from the solution to this subcase that the following interpretation. was drawn:

II-A-JS. Request to Redefine Limit on Number of lACS Warning Messages

There are special cases for which certain TACS warning messages are a nuisance.
An example is the frequency sensor. which might produce many warning messages
before steady-state operation is reached during hvdc initialization. Such warning
messages can be limited in total number. and also suppressed completely before a
certain starting time. by means of the following request:

t I~
1<1 ~ f~!E tE Ie I' f: 6 •Et~ f~I' r~~ f I( ,.1' f~fe tE~ ~ i E •fl~ i~!! ~ E rEt (IC ~~ f~l( I' ~ f 151 (

T ACS WARN L I 10.411 18 E8.0

LIM T-beg

Here LIM is the limit on the number of TACS warning messages that will be
displayed. and T-beg is the time before which all TACS warnings are ignored
(and not counted toward the limit LIM). The interpretation of this request card
confirms the two user-keyed integers. of course. This is illustrated by the
following line from the solution to the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-18:
II-A. Special-Request Cards That Precede Miscellaneous Data - 39

II-A-36. Bequest tor Trqnsfer to the Time-Stgp Leap

Used in conjunction with the "START AGAIN" request of Section A-33. the effect
of a tlTlME STEP LOOP" request is to awaken the hibernating simulation by a transfer
of control to the time-step loop of lJI'PF overlay 16. The format is:

I": ~ I! E Ie
.~ '~fE tEI~ Ie ! ~ I~ I 11 ~ f~l~ f€ IE Ie ~ I~i~ IE rf '\, iE rfi ~t{ I~I~ fE if~N ! ~
f! 'm~( ~~ r! :~lc

T I tvE STEP LOOF

The interpretation of this request card is illustrated by a line extracted

from the solution to BENCHMARK DC-49:

II-A-37. User Supplied SWitch Times tor nonte Carta Studies

This special reques tallows the user to .specify the random switch closing/opening
times of a Monte Carlo simulation himself. rather than have the random number
..... generator of the program determine such times. To use this feature, one prepares
*'" the data the same way as for the regular statistics case. except for the following
two items:

1) Input a special request card to notify the program of such desired usage. The
format is:

11JJJJJ1J~~1~11JJ1JJ~lJJ~JlJJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~IJJJiJIJ~~lJJJJJIJJ~IJllJJIJJ~llJJ'JIJJ~
USER SUPPLIED SWITCH TIME

This serves to forewarn the program that switching times are to be read from
a disk file that is connected to I/O unit number LUNIT8 (set in the STARTUP
file). It is the user's responsibility to connect such a disk file to LUNIT8
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Hiacellaneoua Data. - 40

using SOPEN before such switching times are needed. Any place before the blank
card ending source cards should always be acceptable. But for clarity. it is
recommended that the $OPEN precede the "USER SUPPLIED SWITCH TIMES" request.

2) Specify the switch closing times (T-close) and opening times (T-open) for all
the switches. This is done in a data file that is to be connected to I/O unit
number LUNIT8. Values are to be keyed using 5E15.0 formats, for as many cards
as may be required (more than one if there are more than 5 switches in the
network) :

C 1 234 5
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
Arbitrary 80-column comment line to separate energizations

I- I~ IE
H~ i€ IEI~ !C 1~ f!~ E '~i~ tE .E~c I~ I~ rfl~ic f~l~ r~~~ i·l·i~ r! Id~ I"f- ~I I(:S!1..

1st switch 2nd switch 3rd switch 4th switch 5th switch
T-close T-close T-close T-close T-close

E15.0 E15.0 E15.0 E15.0 E15.0

1st switch 2nd switch 3rd switch 4th switch 5th switch
T-open T-open T-open T-open T-open

E15.0 E15.0 E15.0 E15.0 E15.0

Note that each switch contributes such entries. whether the switch is random
or deterministic. Yes, this involves redundancy. but it was simplest to program.
Construct such a set of switching times (closing and opening) for each energization
of the Monte Carlo study. and precede each by an arbitrary SO-column comment
line (upon which the energization should be keyed for clarity). Then stack
such cards in order. I.e.. the first-keyed set will be used for the 1st
energization. the 2nd set for the 2nd energization. etc.
For an example of such usage. consider the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-24.
which connects the disk file [Link] (for systems permitting such a long
name) to I/O unit number LUNIT8. The first of the two subcases of DC-24 involved
the rolling of dice to determine the random switch closing times for each of the
three energizations. Of course. the dice are "loaded" or "fixed" so that results
are repeatable (important for test cases). The second subcase of DC-24 bypasses
the dice. and instead reads desired closing times from LUNIT8. Since the file
[Link] was constructed using the same clOSing times as result from solution
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Kiacallaneoua Data - 41

of the first subcase, the two solutions should agree exactly. The second subcase
does have a base case solution for variety, but that difference is unimportant for
the subject of current interest.

There is no interpretation of the card images of switching times that are read
from I/O unit number LUNIT8. However, the special-request card will be interpreted
as follows:

Since there is no output of the LUNIT8 records themselves, the alrert user
will randomly verify several .switching times from the values that precede each
energization ("Random .switchingtimes for energization number XX :"). He also
should confirm the just-shown request card, since without this, dice will be rolled
and the user's data file would be totally ignored. Also, he should not be fooled
by the standard 1/3 of a page of Monte Carlo text that precedes the energizations.
There will be the usual talk about uniform for Gaussian distributions, of course,
and none of this applies to the user's case. Only the user knows what, if any,
distribution applies to his own customized switching times of the LUNIT8 file.

II-A-38. Calculation of Matrices to Rgpresent Transformers

The calculation of parameters to represent transformers involves the usage of

separate, self-contained programs,such as XFORMER (section XIX-A) or BCTRAN
(section XIX-C). To transfer to such code, the following special-request card is
used:

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-15. The interpretation extracted
from this solution appears as follows:

C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Request for transformer [R] +jw[L] computation. IXFORMER
II-A. Spec1al-Requeat Carda That Precede M1acellaneoua Pata - 42

Another possibility is to transfer control to the BCTRAN program. Following

special request card is used:

IlJl1JJJ~J~lJl1JJ!~JI1Jl1~JJ~J~lJJJJll~~~lJ1JJJlJJtIJlJJJJJ~~IJJ1JJIJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~
ACCESS MODUlE BCTRA

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DCNEW-8.

II-A-39. Parameters to Control the ZnO Newton Itergtign

Zinc Oxide (ZnO) surge arresters require branch cards as described in

Section V-E. Yet no controls on the Newton iteration that is used to solve the
associated nonlinear equations will be seen as part of such data. Instead, such
controls are first defined by the STARTUP file. They then. can be redefined by a
special-request card such as the following:

1~ I~ IE IE
~.; :'1 E :~IC . ~ iE .~ Iffc l~fE 1~19C 'f 'E i ~Ic I~ ... I~ fE I (~~ ~ ~ .. 1(:9C 1~
~* 'EI ~I C

ZI NC OXI DE 18 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0

MAXZNO EPSZNO EPWARN EPSTOP ZLIM(1 ) ZLIM(2)

Parameters:

MAXZNO of cols. 17-24 is the maximum number of Newton iterations that will be
allowed for the solution of the surge arresters in each subnetwork. The Newton
iteration will go this long unless tolerance EPSZNO is attained first.

EPSZNO of cols. 25-32 is the convergence tolerance for the Newton iteration. All
vol tage corrections of the coupled elements must be smaller than this in
absolute value, for the equations to be judged to be solved. A blank (zero)
value is taken as a request for the value EPSILN * Vref, where EPSILN is
the familiar floating-point miscellaneous data parameter of Sect. II-B (1.E-8
for 60- and 64-bit program versions for CDC, IBM, PRIME, VAX, SEL, and
Apollo) •

EPWARN of cols. 33-40 is the voltage convergence tolerance for non-fatal warning
message about a "sloppy solution." A blank (zero) data field is taken as a
request for the value Vref / 1000 -- representing one tenth of one percent of
rated voltage, then, which is about the limit of graphical resolution.
II-A. Speeial-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. nata - 43

EPSTOP of cols. 41-48 is the voltage convergence tolerance for a fatal error stop
complaining about a non-converged iteration. A blank (zero) data field is
taken as a request for the value Vref / 10 -- or 10% of rated voltage. The
current error in such a case could be astronomical, remember, due to the extreme
nonlinearity (e.g., 1.1**26 • 11.9).
ZLIM(l) of cols. 49-56 is the .maximum per unit (based on the reference voltage
VREF of Section V-E usage) voltage correction at each iteration step. A blank
or zero is given the default value of unity.
ZLIM (2) of cols. 57-64 is the maximum per unit (based on the reference voltage
VREF of Section V-E usage) arrester voltage that will be permitted during the
iteration. A blank or zero is changed to the default value of 1.5
Instead of this fixed-column specification, it may be more convenient to employ
free-format input, with commas separating the data fields in question.
The interpretation of this request card confirms only the first four parameters
on the card. This is illustrated by the follow~ line from the solution to
BENCHMARK 00-38:

11-A-4Q. E%ponential Fitting to Bgpresent ZnD Surge Arresters

The calculation of parameters to represent Zno surge arresters involves a

separate, self-contained program "ARRDAT". as described in Section XIX-I. To
transfer to such code, the following special-request card is used:

Il~J1JJJJJllJJJJJ1Jl~lJJ1JJJJl~lJJ1JJtJ~~lJJJJJ1J~~lJJlJJlJl~lJJJJJtJ~~lJJ1JllJl~
ZND FITTE

Foran example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-39. The interpretation extracted
from this solution appears as follows:

C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Request to generate TYPe-92 Zno branch cards. IZNO FITTER
II-A. Special-Raquaat Carda That Preceda Hiacallanaoua Data - ••

II-A-41 I Contrqt ~f Autqmatic. InterngZ Branqb and SWitqh Naming

The startup file initializes variable NMAUTO, which controls whether or not
branches will automatically be serialized by the program. There are only two
possibilities: "0" means no such automatic naming, whereas "1" will result in such
naming. Well, whatever the STARnJP decision might be, the following declaration
will toggle (reverse) it:

The interpretation of this request confirms the status of variable NMAUTO after
the change. As an illustration, consider the following change from naming to no
names:

C 1 234 5 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
c ------------------------------------------------:-------------------------
Toggle auto branch/switch name. NMAUTO = O. IAUTO NAME

II-A-42. Conversion of Former Switched-B,L Elements to Type-99 gnd 98

Years ago (prior to the "M32." update), the EMTP had switch components that
allowed for both resistive and inductive discontinuities: so-called switched-R and
switched-L elements. Today, such modeling can be accomplished using the more
general pseudo-nonlinear elements of type codes 99 and 98. The user who wants to
antiquated data involving switched-R or switched-L elements into modern, equivalent,
representations can issue the following request:

.oj I! ! € :1:
l~ f"" ,E :cl~ I( ," I~ .~ fE r~~ ~ I"! .; fE 'c Ie ~I~ I"; ~f€ r~l~ c !E :fi~l( ,~I" l!iE ~~~~IC i- '''f! 'f~ ~I ( '~fs{
,
CHANGE SWI T Ct- E8.0

XOPT

This special-request card is to be added before the first miscellaneous data

card of the antiquated data case. Conversion is accomplished within a special
program described in Section XIX-D. Parameter XOPT of columns 33-40 is the
miscellaneous data parameter that specifies the units that are being used for
inductance (millihenries if zero or blank; ohms at frequency XOPT Hz if positive).
Specification on the request card means less intelligence inside the supporting
II-A. Spee1al-Requeat Carda That Precede K1acellaneoua nata - 4S

program (no need to look for the integer miscellaneous data card, and read it).
The supporting program will then read all input data, and punch (see $PUNCH)
replacement branch cards to represent the antiquated components. It will then be
the user's responsibility to .replace the old card images with the new ones, using
his sys tem editor (assuming card images rather than actual punched cards are
involved) •

An example of such conversion is provided by the third subcase of standard

test case BENCHMARK DC-14. The interpretation of the request card for this solution
appears as follows:

11-d-43. MOdulqrtzatton ot Data tor S1NCLUPE Use witb Arguments

The request for a copy of some data component that is stored in a data base
generally requires $INCLUDE usage with one or more .arguments. But when arguments
are present, data must first be processed by the supporting program of Section XIX-F.
This program searches the user's raw data for the character strings of interest,
and establishes numerical pointers for all arguments in order to speed later usage.
A special-request card, to be placed in front of the user's raw data, transfers
control to this conversion code:

Il~JJJ~iJ~J1JJJJlt~~~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJ1J~~lJJJiJ1J~~lJJ~JJJJ~~lJiJJJJJJ~lJJJJJtJ~~
DATA BASE MODUL

An example of such usage is provided by BENCHMARK DC-14. It was from the first
subcase of this solution that the following interpetation was drawn:

11-A-44. ToggZe Cboice Between Disk and Memory tar Plot Data Storage

The startup file initializes variable LUNIT4, which controls whether plot data
points are to be stored on disk or in memory within SUBROUTINE PLTFIL. The sign
on what otherwise would be an I/O channel number makes this choice: "+" means
II-A. [Link] Carda That Preeed. Miaeellaneoua Oat. - 46

that disk storage connected to I/O unit LUNIT4 will be used, whereas "-" will
result in the storage of plot data in COMMON /C29B01/. Well, whatever the STARTUP
decision might be, the following declaration will toggle (reverse) it:

Il~JJJJ1JJ~IJJIJJJJJ~IJJ1JJJJJ~IJJJJJJJJ~IJJJJJ~J~IJJJJJ)J~~IJJJJJJJJ~IJJJJJIJJ~
01 SK PLOT OAT

For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-3 for any virtual computer
(e.g., Apollo). It was from this solution that the following interpetation was
drawn:

II-A-45. Puncb Brancb Cards tor Tupe-96 Hysteretic Inductor

The normal user of hysteresis modeling will know his B-H characteristic. and
can Simply input it according to the. rules. of Section V-D. But some users may not
have any idea about magnetic losses (and hence the width of the hysteresis. loop).
Some users may only want a representative loop, for preliminary experimentation.
Or some users may not even care about the loop itself, since possibly residual
magnetism is the only phenomenon of interest (and hysteresis must be requested to
have it). For whatever reason, the user can access a standard hysteresis loop by
means of the following request:

11JJIJJ)JJllJJJJJJJJI1JJJJJ)J~~IJJlJJIJJ~IJJJJJ)JJ~IJJJJJIJl~IJJJJJ)JJ~IJJJI'IJJ~
HYSTERESI

Such a card transfers to the code of Section XIX-H, which will create branch
cards for the Type-96 hysteretic inductor of interest.
For an example of such usage, see the 3rd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-13. The
following illustrative interpretation was taken from that solution:

II-A-46. Pass u.n. Output Variables to TwPe-92 TAcs Sources

It is possible to pass any U.M. output variable to TACS. provided two simple
rules are observed. First. the TACS variable that is to be defined by the U.M.
must be a Type-92 TACSsource of the same name (the second of the two 6-character
names that identify the U.M. variable). Second. the program must be alerted to
the user's desire for such control by means of a declaration reading:

11JJJJJJJ~llJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJ1~J~lJJJJ~iJJ~lJJ~J~i~J~lJ1JJltJJ~lJJJ1J{J~~
UMTOTAC

Note that the U.M. variable being passed must be a U.M. output variable. but
that there is no requirement of this type withinTACS. where output is optional.
Since nothing was done to identify the correct [Link] the case of two or more
machines. the attentive reader may have concluded that there is a temporary
limitation to just a single machine. But limitations are not actually this
restrictive. In fact. the connection logic will merely match a TYPe-92 source
with the first U.M •.output variable having the requested name. The only usage
that is impossible is passing of the same U.M. variable from two different machines
to TACS. then. Later. if there is adequate demand. this limitation obviously could
be provided. But for now (February. 1987) • we are beginning slowly. with the
simplest possible logic. Another temporary limitation has to do with initial
conditions: there will be no transfer on step zero (for time zero). This is because
the transfer is done within theTACS code of the time-step loop. and this code is
not called for step zero. If the resulting discontinuity at time zero bothers the
user. he is always free to manually supply the initial conditions for the TACS
variables. of course.

An example of the just-explained declaration is provided by BENCHMARK DCNEW-l0.

to which TACS modeling was added solely to receive U.M. variables. It was from
this solution that the following interpretation was drawn:

C 1 234 567
C 3456789012345678901234?678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ---------------------~--------------------------:-------------------------
Send U.M. outputs to any TYPe-92 TACS sources. rUM TO TACS {Declaration

11-A-47. Displgy and nanaqe Central Status rUe of ParaUet "STATISTICS"

Some program versions and some installations have networking of two or more
computers that allow central monitoring and control of the parts of a Monte Carlo
study that is being solved in pieces. generally by parallel processing. Reference
II-A. Special-Requeat Carda That Precede Miacellaneou. Oata - 48

[52] provides a detailed explanation. Well, access to the supporting program that
displays and manipulates the central statistics file PARALLEL. LIS is by the
request:

11J1JJ~i~J~lJ1JJJ1JJ~11JJJJjJJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJ1JJJJJJ~lJJJJ~JJJ~lJJJJ~fJJ~lJJJJJHJ~
08 SERVE PARA LL EL MON 1E CARL

Since usage normally is interactive, the "KEY" request would precede this one,
which can be abbreviated "OPMC" for quicker keying. The "CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE"
request to name PARALLEL. LIS should come between these two, as the following
interpretation shows:

C 1 2 345 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------/-------------------------
Name of file for "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" :CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE
File name:[Link] /[Link]
Moni tor and control parallel "STATISTICS". : OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CA
Some computers {e.g., Apollo, Sun. and DEC VAX/VMS} should have the OPMC code
available as a separate. small supporting program. If so. a common name would be
[Link]. Frequent users probably will find such an alternative preferable. since
a small program is less demanding of computer resources than the EMTP. Also, it
allows for computer-dependent extensions to the universal features described in
Section XIX-B.

II-A-48. Name the Central Status File of Parallel nSTATISTICS"

The user of "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" ("OPMC" in abbreviated form) must
name [Link]. his central file of summary statistics. This name. up to 40
bytes in length, is to follow the declaration:

11JJJJJi~JJ1JJJJJIJJ~lJ1JJ~lJJ~lJJJJJtJJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJJJ~lJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJfJJ~
CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE

Column one of the file name must not be a slash {"/"}. since this would be
mistaken by the program as a request for data sorting by class (Section I-J).
There usually are computer-dependent ways to avoid the problem (e.g., for Apollo
Aegis, begin with a backslash "\"). But for those who are either unwilling or
unable to use such tricks, precede the leading slash. by an extra, leading percent
Sign ("%") which will be discarded upon input. Finally, for case-sensitive
II-A. Special-aequeat Carda That Precede Miaeellaneoua Data - 49

computers, the file name generally should be in lower case, followed by an exclamation
point ("!") to hold that case even though STARTUP variable KINSEN has value
unity.

An example of the just-explained declaration is provided by BENCHMARK DC-48 ,

It was from this solution that the following interpretation was drawn:

C 1 234 5 6 7
C34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Name of file for "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" I CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE
File name: parallel. lis Iparallel. lis ! {Actual

II-8-49. 1nitiaZize tbe Random Number Generator of "STATISTICS"

A Single floating-point number is used to initialize the random number generator

of Monte Carlo ("STATISTICS") studies. The experienced user can define this seed,
SEEDRN, using the following request:

I: I- I": IE If
1:1- f~f! ,f I~I~ !e
:~
'fi~l( ~~ 'fl~i( :"i- I ~~ f [!ISle I~ ,f w~ ,.i.o: ff ~ f I ~ ie 1:1- f~if 'f~( I{ ,_I,l~ rmlc
RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR SEED E24.0

SEEDRN

11-8-50. 6-Character User Identification Qverrides USERID of STARTUP

Normally, the STARTUP file will supply the 6-character user identification
USERID. But the user may want to override this for some reason. The most important
case is for parallel Monte Carlo simulations, where different processes are
identified in the "CENTRAL STATISTICS FILE" by different USERID. Rather than
require different STARTUP files, the following special-request word can be used
to re-define USERID:

I' I! .E F
~! .. '~ff

USER IDENnnCATION
c :1- f! r(iflC i.:l~ rfl9C i-
A6
If ifl* I- f!ff
i* "iJ~ 'fl~ Ie .~
f! 'fl~ >( 'Ei~ (

USERID

Remember that USERID is text, so for the common s1 tuation having STARTUP
variable KINSEN = 1, lower case will be maintained only if an "!" is added.
Interpretation is illustrated by the solution to BENCHMARK DC-66. from which
"Leuven##!" unfortunately has been lost from the right:
II-A. Spec1al-Requeat Carda That Precede H1acellaneoua Data - 50

II-A-51. Truncate Output Lines after Formation USing Width KOLIS2

Normally, the STARTUP file will supply the line width for LUNIT6 output text
using variable KOL132. But the user might want to truncate the output after it
has been formed to this width in order to make it even narrower. This is possible,
if variable KUTOFF is defined to be less than KOL132. The request has the following
format:

I- ~ ;~ E IE
~I~ .* IE Ie .~ ~~ Islc ~ i~ rE IC I~ ~ ~~! 19C ~~ !€ ifl c i~l~ rfl ~ ~ C i~l' fE 1< ,SIC I~ ~M iE [clslC
TRUNCATE OUTPUT LINES 18
KUTOFF

Sample usage can be found in the 5th subcase of BENCHMARK 00-66, which truncates
the 132-column output of two short error messages to 125 columns. Illustrative
interpretation, taken from the solution to this data set, is as follows:

II-A-52. Switch Between 'FORMATTED' & 'UNFORMATTED' for "LOAD MORE $HOTS"

The default setting for the disk files of Monte Carlo extrema is. 'UNFORMATTED' ,
so if this is what is wanted when using "LOAD MORE SHOTS", no extra request is
required. But before loading a 'FORMATTED' file of extrema, the following request
mus t be used to inform the program of the mode change:

Should a subsequent file be 'UNFORMATTED', a second application of the request

will be required to return to the default setting. There is no limit on the number
of mode changes. For an illustration, see the 2nd and 3rd subcases of BENCHMARK
Dc-40. Interpretation confirms the new (just-modified) status. [Link] associated
II-A. Special-Request Cards That Precede Miscellaneous Data - 51

variable L2FORM = o indicating 'UNFORMATTED' and L2F0RM = 1 indicating' FORMATrED' •

Ill~strative interpretation comes from the first usage within the solution to
BENCHMARK Dc-40:

I1-A-SS, Use Long-line formulas for Constant-Parameter Distributed lines

Normally. for the phasor solution. resistance is lumped (1/4 on each end and
half in the middle) for constant-parameter distributed lines. This agrees with
the modeling of the time-step loop. of course. But sometimes the user may want
the correct. (exact) representation for the phasor solution. It can be obtained
by the regues t:

An example of such usage can be found in the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-11.
Illustrative interpretation comes from the solution of this data set:

11-A-54. Position ",1'W" plot tHe on lUNIT4 ready tor 1st time step

Special positioning is required if .new simulation numbers are to be written

immediately following existing header information of an old ",PL4" plot file.
Assuming that the plot file already is connected to I/O unit number LUNIT4 (see
STARTUP). the user request for such positioning is:

IlmJJiJmmiJmmmmmmmmummmmmmnmmmumm~
READ PL4 HEADER
II-A. Special-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link]. nata - 52

The usual application will involve "START AGAIN" which otherwise would create
a plot file without the header information that is needed for later plotting. By
means of the "READ PL4 HEADER" request, a complete, self-contained plot file can
be produced by the "START AGAIN" simulation. An example can be found in the 4-th
subcase of BENCHMARK DC-40, which uses the header produced by the 2nd subcase of
BENCHMARK DC-24. Note that no plot points from the first simulation will be
preserved, however. Illustrative interpretation comes from the solution to
BENCHMARK DC-40:

II-A-55. Calqutation ot Matrices to Rgpresent Transformers

The calculation of matrices [R] and [L] or [A] and [R] to represent arbitrary
transformers is described in the separate Section XIX-C. Whereas the "XFORMER"
request of Section II-A-38 is for data limited to a single phase and three windings,
the code now being considered (supporting program "BCTRAN") can be used with an
arbitrary number of phases and windings. The transfer to "BCTRAN" is by means
of the special-request card:

IIJJJJJJJJJ1JJJJJ1~~tlJJJJJ1~~~IJJJJJIJ~~IJIJJJIJJ~lJIJJJIJJ~IJl1JJIJJ~IJJ1JJIJ~~
ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN

For an example of such usage, see any of the three subcases of BENCHMARK
DCNEW-8. Interpretation extracted from the solution to this data case appears as
follows:

C 1 2 345 6 7
c 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
c ------------------------------------------------~-------------------------
Generate transformer [R],[L] or [A],[R]. 1ACCFSS MODULE BCTRAN

II-A-56. Convert SATURABLE transformer cards to [nl. [Ll

The calculation of matrices [R] and [L] to provide a linear representation for
a saturable TRANSFORMER is described in the separate Section XIX-J. The spe-
cial-request word "CHANGE TRANSFORMER" provides the transfer, as illustrated by
BENCHMARK DC-67. The output of this solution illustrates interpretation of the
transfer:
II-A. Speeial-Reque.t Card. That Precede [Link] Data - 53

II-d-57. Combination of 2 or more partial Monte Carto studies

The "LOAD MORE SHOTS" request is used to read from a disk file of extrema that
was produced by a preceding Monte Carlo solution. For details, see "START AGAIN"
in Section II-A-33.

II-d-58. Define tbe INTEGER/REAL variable Sl'[Link] of new TACS

The newTACS (unavailable before 1989) stores integer and floating-point data
ina single vector that is sized by List Size .28 of "VARDIM". The division of the
single storage into integer and floating-point portions can be controlled by the
user by means of the following request:

i~ !€ IE
i' f'l: IE I fl~l( :~ If" '~tcl{ ~ EI ~ ~( i' ff c!s !e
I
I~ i,l' ,I r!:s f~ rmlc ,~I f r tlCle rEi cl c
TACS SPLIT EB.D
RATIO

Variable RATIO is the integer to floating-point ratio for the allocation. In the
absence of such a declaration, the value 2.0 will be used.
11-8. Miscellaneous Data Caras, Ploating-point and Integer - 54

II-B. Miscellaneous Data Cards. FIQatin~-point and Integer

There are two types of miscellaneous data cards: floating-point and integer.
Both card types will be explained in the remainder of section II-B. Further, there
are also extensions to these miscellaneous data cards. These extensions will be
explained in section II-C.

11-B-1. tlQatin~-point misceZZaneous data card

The first non-comment card that is not recognized as being any of the preceding
special-request cards will be assumed to be the floating-point miscellaneous data
card, which has the following format:

!~ € ,E
~ ~iE I~I~ 'e I~ I~'~I ~ 1,1 ( lCf€ I~I ~~ ( .~ 'fl~l( 1'1- i~lc fE W! '1- "t!tE '~IH i .l< ~ t I( !C I" ~ " E r ESC

E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 E8.0

DEL TAT TMAX XOPT COPT EPSILN TOLMAT TSTART

Parameters:

DELTAT: the Size-of the time step of the numerical integration, in seconds. A
simulation will be calculated at discrete moments of time that have this time
separation. Take care of the Nyquist criterion: the time step preferably
should be 1/2 •.• 1/10 of the smallest time constant of the system one wants
to simulate. Whenever nonlinear elements are present in the network under
study, an even smaller time step might be advisable.

!MAX the end time of the study, in seconds.

XOPT a value that indicates whether it is inductance in millihenries or inductive

reactance in ohms that is to be keyed on linear branch cards.
1) If XOPT = 0, inductances are to be keyed in millihenries.
2) If XOPT > 0, then values are to be in ohms at frequency XOPT (in Hertz).
In either case, remember that this choice of the miscellaneous data card
can be changed at any point of data input by means of the first argument
of a $UNITS card.

COPT: a value that indicates whether it is capacitance in microfarads or capacitive

reactance in micromhos that is to be keyed on linear branch cards.
1) If COPT = 0, capicitances are to be keyed in microfarads.
2) If COPT> 0, then values are to be in micromhos at frequency COPT (in Hertz).
In either case, remember that this choice of the miscellaneous data card
can be changed at any point of data input by means of the second parameter
of a $UNITS card.
II-B. Miacellaneous Data Carda. Float ins-point and Inteser - 55

EPSILN : the near-zero tolerance that is used to test singularity of the real
coefficient matrix within the time-step loop. A blank or zero value means
that the value of the STARTUP file will be used. For 64-bit (REAL*8) computation
which is the most common, a default value of l.E-8 is typical. Historically,
work began using 36-bit computation, for which a default value of 1.E-5 was
used.

TOLMAT : the near-zero tolerance that is used to test singularity of the complex
admittance matrix [Y] of the steady-state, phasor solution. A blank or zero
value means that a value equal to that of EPSILN will be used. Please note
that TOLMAT can NOT be specified in the STARTUP file.

TSTART : The beginning time of a simulation, in seconds. Normally, TSTART will be

zero or blank. Only when the ftSTART AGAIN" feature is in use (see section
II-A-33), it can be usefull to specify TSTART > 0 (e.g. put the value equal
to TMAX of a previous data case you want to continue). Details regarding final
table dumping, etc. [Link] found in DC49.

[[-B-2. integer miscellqneous data card

The just-described floating-point miscellaneous data card is to be followed
by an integer miscellaneous data card bearing the following information:

1 I: H I~ If IE
1~I~~4~IE tfl* I~~14~ ~ E tf ~Q(
14- 14~ fEr'ta~ tC I:I~14~ ff tffs10 14'~4~IEr't~ ~* 14-t~l~ fEr ~f ~*I~: f*
1 t~ t~sIe I'f'~' l'p! tf I(
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

lOUT IPLOT IDOUBL KSSOUT MAXOUT IPUN MEMSAV ICAT NERERG IPRSUP

Parameters:

lOUT gives the frequency of LUNIT6 (printed) output within the time-step loop.
E.g., a value of 3 means that every 3rd time step will be printed. A value
of zero or blank is changed to unity. For "FREQUENCY SCAN" usage , it is
output within the loop over frequencies that is controlled, rather than the
loop over time, of course.

IPLOT gives the frequency for saving solution points of the time-step loop for
purposes of later plotting. E.g., a value of 3 means that every 3rd time
step will be saved. A value of zero or blank is changed to unity, and any
even value is increased by one to make it odd. An even plotting frequency
is not allowed because of the likelihood of deception: a saw-toothed oscillation
would go unnoticed.
II-B. Miscellaneous Data Card., Ploatina-point and Integer - 56

IDOUBL controls the LUNIT6 output of a table showing network connectivity. A

value of zero or blank will suppress such output, whereas unity will produce
it. For each node there is shown a list of other nodes to which there are
physical connections. Mutual coupling between phases of multiphase elements
is ignored in this output, as is the capacitance to ground of Pi-circuits and
distributed-parameter lines. The name "TERRA " (as read in from the STARTUP
file) is used for ground instead of six blank characters, to improve readabili ty.
Ordering of the rows is in order of input, except for the final row, which
applies to ground (node number one, which is labeled "TERRA FIRMA").

KSSOUT controls the printout of the steady-state phasor solution. There are 3
basic types of outputs: branch flows, switch flows, and nodal injections.
These can be controlled by the value of KSSOUT as follows:
o ===> No steady-state solution printout.
1 ===> Print the complete steady-state solution: branch flows,
switch flows, and source injections.
2 ===> Print switch flows and source injections, but not branch flows.
3 ===> Print branch flows requested by column 80 punches, switch
flows, and source injections.

MAXOUT controls printout of extrema at the completion of the simulation. Keying

a zero or blank will suppress such computation and output, whereas the value
unity will produce it.

IPUN is used to request the input of an extra, following card to vary the printout
frequency. Use a value of "-1" to request such an extra card. or zero or
blank if no such extra card is wanted. Refer to Section II-C-4 for details
of the following card. Alternatively. use "CHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENCY" of
Section II-A to accomplish the same thing.

MEMSAV controls the dumping of EMTP memory onto disk at the end of the simulation
for subsequent use with the "START AGAIN" request of Section II-A. Key
"1" if such memory saving is desired, or zero or blank if it is not. For
the single, deterministic simulation. the table saving is done at time TMAX
(floating-point miscellaneous data parameter). For Monte Carlo ("STATISTICS")
studies, this is upon completion of energization number NENERG (integer
miscellaneous data parameter). Memory saving is a powerful and useful tool
of the production user. However, be warned that such table saving and later
use may be computer, dependent, so information about the computer being used
should be consulted. The name of the resultant tables is determined by a
$OPEN declaration on LUNIT2 that must precede such usage. Most commonly
the SOPEN is placed immediately before the blank card ending output requests.
Also, once the tables are complete, it is the user's responsibility to
disconnect them (use SCLOSE at the beginning of following plot cards). Any
user of this feature should be further warned that a later awakening of the
hibernating simulation is guaranteed only if the same program version is saved
and is used for the following "START AGAIN" simulation. For an illustration
involving a single, deterministic Simulation, see BENCHMARK DC-32 and Dc-49.
For such usage with a Monte Carlo study, see BENCHMARK DC-24 and Dc-40.
II-B. Miseellaneous Data Cards. Floating-point and Integer - 57

A final comment is about Monte Carlo studies. If some study is to be solved

in two or more independent pieces that are later to be combined. then for the
2nd or later portion (each associated with a "LOAD MORE SHOTS" declaration
of the execution that combines the results), the value "2" is to be keyed
rather than "1". The difference is great. Unity results in the dumping
of all tables (including [Link] words of "LABCOM"). whereas "2" will produce
an abbreviated file consisting of only switching times and extrema. An
abbreviated file is useless by itself, but can be appended to a complete file
by means of the "LOAD MORE SHOTS" declaration. Of course. it is important
to have a different seed for the random number generator of such simulations
that are later to be combined. since otherwise. the user would just be repeating
the same energizations (a waste of computation). For an illustration involving
Monte Carlo simulations. see BENCHMARK DC-24 and Dc-40.

ICAT is to be left blank (or zero) if there is to be no permanent saving of raw

plot data points that might be written to I/O channel number LUNIT4 during
the simulation. But should such permanent saving be desired, then a positive
value is required:
1 ===> Save the points. but ignore any batch-mode
plot cards that might be present.
2 ===> Save the points, and also honor any batch-mode
plot cards that .mightbe present.
For most computers. the disk file in question will be internally named based
on the date and time of day when the simulation began. See the plot file
heading for such details. Such details are controlled by installation-dependent
SUBROUTINE SYSDEP. so it is not possible to be much more specific. See details
for the computer of interest.

NENERG is to be left blank {or zero} for single, deterministic simulations. But
for "STATISTICS" or "SYSTEMATIC" data cases, this is to be the total number
of energizations (exclusive of any poSSible, extra. base-case solution).
Append a minus Sign if "SYSTEMATIC" usage is involved --- a flag to distinguish
such a case from Monte Carlo studies. Also, remember that an extra "STATISTICS"
or "SYSTEMATIC" miscellaneous data card (Section II-C-l) must follow.

IPRSUP is normally left blank or zero. If keyed as a .posi ti ve value, this is the
diagnostic printout control that is to be applied to all UTPF overlays. The
same result can be obtained via parameter IPRSUP in the STARTUP file. But
since the user normally will want to selectively control such output overlay
by overlay, he should instead use the "DIAGNOSTIC" special-request card (see
section II-A-12).

Interpretation of the just-described floating-point and integer miscellaneous

data cards confirms only the first three floating-point parameters • but all integer
parameters. As an illustration. consider the two associated output lines of
BENCHMARK Dc-4:
II-B. Miscellaneous Data Car41, Floating-point and Integer - 58

C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------1-------------------------
Misc. data. 1.000E-02 6.000E+OO [Link]+OO I .010 6.0
Misc. data. 1 1 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 1
II-C. Speeially-Requeste4 Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Car4s - 59

II-C. Specially-Reguested Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Cards

Two of the just-described integer miscellaneous data parameters (see section

II-B) can require the input of additional, supplemental extensions that are to
immediately follow the integer miscellaneous data cards. If none or only one is
used, there is no question of ordering. But if both extensions are required, then
these must be appended in the order of presentation, with the "STATISTICS/SYSTEMATIC"
card (Section II-C-l to II-C-3) preceding the card that controls the output frequency
(Section II-C-4).

II-C-1. "STATISTICS" Miscellaneous Data Card tor Actual Simulation

If and only if NENERG (cols. 65-72) of the integer miscellaneous data card is
positive (i.e. flag for STATISTICS studies. see section VI.B.l), then the following
additional card. called the "STATISTICS" miscellaneous data card. is required:

I~ If IE
I ~I- I': cfE ,St( ~.~ E r~ I ~:- l', E r~ ,c ...;i~ if rf~ ~ I' ~. 'Ei~'( !~ - ,~l~ 'Et~lc ,.l~ ff r! I~I( f· ide
18 18 18 18 18 , 18 18 Unused 18

ISW ITEST IDIST IMAX IDICE KSTOUT KNTRPT NSEED

Parameters:

ISW determines whether there is to be printed output of all the variable switch
closing/opening times. for each of theNENERG energizations. Zero will suppress
such output. whereas unity will provide it. For the special case where "4444"
is keyed in columns 5-8. please refer to section II-C-3. describing the special
feature of DICE TESTING.
ITEST controls whether an extra random delay, calculated using the parameters
DEGMIN. DEGMAX. and STATFR (see STARTIJP file), is to be added to random-
ly-generated switching times for each energization.
A zero or blank [Link] that there will be such an addition for .all. random
switches;
the value "1" means that there will be no such addition for ~ random swi tch;
the value "2" means that such an addition will be made only to random closing
(not opening) times;
a value "3" means that such an addition will be made only to random opening
(not closing) times.
For details on these different switch types, we refer to section VI.B.
IDIST chooses between the two types of dice (distribution laws) that are aVailable.
A zero or blank value means that all randomly-generated switching times are
to have Gaussian (normal) distribution. whereas a value of unity means that
II-C. Specially-Requested Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Cards - 60

a uniform distribution is to be used instead. Note that this is NOT applicable

to the extra random delay (see ITEST parameter), which is assumed always to
follow a uniform distribution.

IMAX will normally be left blank or keyed as zero. I t is to be keyed with "1"
if the user wants additional printout of deterministic extrema for each
energization. The extrema in question are those normally seen at the end of
a conventional, single simulation that has integer miscellaneous data parameter
MAXOUT equal to unity. Such output has maxima, times of maxima, minima, and
times of minima --- all extra output (an addition to, rather than a replacement
for, the normal output for each energization).

IDICE controls whether or not standard random numbers (that vary neither with
time nor with manufacturer of the computer) are to be used. The value "1"
will give such standard random numbers, whereas a blank or zero will result
in the use of computer-dependent dice, i f such separate dice have been provided.
Specifics will depend upon the installation-dependent logic of ENTRY RANDNZ
of "RFUNL1". For reasons of repeatability and universality, standard test
cases such as BENCHMARK DC-24 , DC-40, DC-48 , DC-50, and DCPRINT-13 all use
IDICE = 1.

KSTOUT controls whether or not each energization is to have added printout that
normally is associated only with a conventional, single simulation. Included
are output of the time-step loop. and variable extrema (if integer miscellaneous
data parameter MAXOUT is positive). The scalar extrema of "PEAK VOLTAGE
MONITOR" also will be honored. if it has been declared. Such extra output is
in addition to the regular, minimum program output of STATISTICS/SYSTEMATIC
simulations. Since any such special output is repeated for each energization,
the user should be careful in its use. To obtain such extra output for each
energization, key a zero explicitely. A blank or minus one ("-1") will suppress
such extra output.

KNTRPT is normally left blank or zero. If keyed with a nonzero integer, it is

taken to be the energization number KNT that is to be repeated (mnemonically,
"count repeat"). This only has meaning for "START AGAIN" usage, where
execution begins with the Monte Carlo history (including energization number
KNTRPT) already stored in memory. In case two or more sets of Monte Carlo
history have been loaded (the first by "START AGAIN" and the second or later
set by "LOAD MORE SHOTS"). numbering of the energizations is cumulative, in
the order the files were loaded. Of course. KNTRPT must be positive and not
larger than the total number of loaded energizations. Following the "TIME
STEP LOOP," request. the user will see the heading of variable names followed
by time-step loop printout (assuming he requested this with KSTOUT = 0).
Following such output. the memory of Monte Carlo usage is erased, so batch-mode
plotting (not yet operational) will complete the data case. For an illustion,
see the 4th data subcase of BENCHMARK DC-40.

NSEED, controls whether or not a Monte Carlo simulation is repeatable, should it

ever be rerun using the same computer. A blank or zero means that that every
solution will be different (i.e., no repeatability), whereas unity will result
in identical answers every time the data case is solved on the computer of
interest. At issue is the seed of the random number generating algorithm.
Normally (for blank or zero in cols. 73-80), this depends on the time of day.
But for repeatability (value unity), a constant seed is used.
II-C. Specially-Requested Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Cards - 61

Monte Carlo studies are important enough. and tricky enough. so that each
should be solved separately using a separate disk file. The stacking of two or
more data cases. of which one is a Monte Carlo study. is not recommended. But for
those who believe in living dangerously by stacking two or more Monte Carlo studies
within a single disk file • remember to use SSTARTUPat the beginning of the second
or later of these. This is needed to reini tialize the critical table-dumping
controlTENERG. Let the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK 00-24 serve as an example in
this regard.

Interpretation of the previously-described "STATISTICS" miscellaneous data

card confirms only the first six parameters. As an illustration. consider the
associated output of BENCHMARK 00-24:

11-C-2. nSYSTEMAT1cn Miscellaneous Data Card

If and only if NENERG (cols. 65-72}of the integer miscellaneous data card is
negative (i.e. flag for SYSTEMATIC studies. see section VI.B.2), then the following
additional card. called the "SYSTEMATIC" miscellaneous data card, is required:

I, I~
I- I~ I~ IE If
~ 14' ~ E tftclc ~ ,~l'H ' fi~I( I· ~!
18* ,·1 !fE tfl* ~f tft ~ Ie I": •I·I~ IE Icl* : ~I' f~E tm Ie i ~I'; I<f!~E tfl~(

18 18 Unused 18 Unused 18

ISW ITEST IMAX KSTOUT

Parameters:

ISW : Same as for preceding "STATISTICS" use.

ITE'ST controls whetherswi tch times to be specified on columns 15-24 of the

SYSTEMATIC switch card are to be Tbel or Taid (see section VI.B.2).
Use blank or zero if Taid is to be used,
or uni ty if Tbeg is to be specified.

lMAX : Same as for preceding "STATISTICS" use.

KSTOUT : Same as for preceding "STATISTICS" use.

Interpretation of the just-described "SYSTEMATIC" miscellaneous data card is

in fact identical to that for "STATISTICS". As an illustration. consider the
associated output of BENCHMARK DC-16:
II-C. Specially-Requested Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Cards - 62

11-C-3. nSTAT1ST1csn MiscellaneOUs Data Card (or Dice Testing

It is possible to test a random number generator without actually performing

the simulations that normally would depend upon the random number generator. If
and only if NENERG (cols. 65-72) of the integer miscellaneous data card is positive,
and if cols. 5-8 of the "STATISTICS" miscellaneous data card (Le., variable ISW)
are keyed with "4444", then only a test of random numbers is desired. For such
usage, the extra card following the integer miscellaneous data card has the following
format, as a simpler version of the original card of Section II-C-1:

I~ I~ iE :E
~ f~!E Ifl~l( I~i~ :-1 E rEte "~IE :-1 E Ie I' IE :E Isle I 'i~ L-~ I If isle 1'1, IE :f~* 'E,sie
4444 18 Unused 18 Unused 18

ISW ITEST IOICE NSEED

ISW : The "4444" is a request for dice testing.

ITEST gives the number of points per standard deviation of the tabulations that
are to result. A zero is given the default value of 2.0 (meaning 8 entries
on ei ther side of the mean, if SIGMAX = 4.0 in the STARTUP file).

IDICE The same as for Section II-C-1 above.

NSEED The same as for Section II-C-1 above.

Concerning the rest of the data case, it should be legal through the blank
card ending switch cards. Only the switch cards are actually used, so branch cards
are arbi tary as long as no error results before the switch cards are read. Finally,
there should be a "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card at the bottom, since this will be
searched for just as would be the case following an EMTP error message.

Switching times will be generated for each of the NENERG imaginary energizations
(in fact, program control never leaves overlay 12). There then will be a tabulation
for each pair of Gaussian switches. Recall that if the closing time for each of
two switches has Gaussian (normal) distribution, then so does the difference of
these two. The mean of the difference will be the difference of the means, whereas
the variance of the difference will be the sum of the two variances. For M
Gaussian swi tches, there will be M* (M-1 ) /2 such pairs of swi tches • For each pair
, there will be one tabulated output showing both the experimental and the theoretical
cumulative distribution functions. See BENCHMARK DC-50 for an example.
II-C. [Link] Extension. to Miscellaneous Data Card. - 63

The just-described tabulation only applies to two switches having Gaussian

switching times. If one of the switches is deterministic, or if one is random but
uniformly-distributed, then the tabulation is skipped.

There is no new interpretation for the miscellaneous data card of dice testing.
Refer to the preceding Sections II-C-2 or lI-C-3 for illustrations.

II-C-4. Change of Frequencu of the Time-Ste;p LoW Printout

The frequency of LUNIT6 printout wi thin the time-step loop is nominally

controlled by integer miscellaneous data parameter lOUT of Section II-B. But this
frequency can be varied as the simulation time advances. One way has already been
documented in Section II-A: use of a "CHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENCY" request. Another
is to key integer miscellaneous data parameter IPUN (cols. 41-48) as "-1", and
append the following card:

t: ),ll Ifl~ ~ ( I~ t ,l ~ f! r! ~ !! ( I'!_"IIH tIl!!! I: .~

I'
I~I( I: ~, I ~~ t tl ),
It"
IE
tq* f~ rll!!(
11
rll*
1st change 2nd change 3rd change 4th change 5th change

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT KCHG MULT

This card specifies at which time steps the printout frequency is to be changed,
and to what values the frequency is to be changed. Up to five pairs of these
(KCHG, MOLT) controls are permitted. The meaning is as follows:

KCHG(K): The time step number at which the K-th variation of printout frequency
is to begin. Printout for this particular step number is always provided. as
a beginning to the new frequency of output.

MULT(K): The modified value of lOUT (see 2nd miscellaneous data card) that takes
effect at time step KCHG(K}.

If a minus Sign is appended to MULT(K} , then at the corresponding step number

KCHG(J), the diagnostic printout status will be changed. That is, there will be
a switching of the two sets of diagnostic printout controls:

1. IPRSOV(16:19} of Section lI-A-12 (a "DIAGNOSTIC" request);

2. IPR(1:4} of Section II-A-3 ("ALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRINTOUT").

If there is no minus sign. there will be no change in status of the diagnostic

printout at the associated time step. Any minus signs are merely extra flags.
The absolute value of MULT still controls the production (non-diagnostic) printout
frequency as originally described.
II-C. Specially-Requested Extensions to Miscellaneous Data Cards - 64

Interpretation of the just-described printout control card confirms only the

first three pairs of numbers. As an illustration, consider the associated output
of BENCHMARK DC-16:

III. 'nl>.CS m'nl>. CARI:S FCR CCNTROL SYSTEM MCDEUNG (if any)

TACS is an acron~ derived from the nane -Transient Analysis of Control

Systems." In very general terms, it directly provides the user with modeling
that [Link] is associated with an analog canputer. 'Ihe theory was first
described in Ref. 12. 'U\CS data Is optional for the EM'I'P. If it appears, it
immediately precedes the first branch card of section IV.

'!he beginning of 'U\CS data is declared to the EMTP by one of the following
two possible special-request records:
C 1 2 3 4
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890
C ---------------------------------
Choice 1: 'nl>.CS STAND ALONE
Choice 2: 'nl>.CS HYBRID

Choice 1. "'l1>.CS STAND ALCNE It is to be used if there is no electric

network. For such a degenerate problen, this declaration is to be followed by
'l1>.CS data (see Section III), which is to be followed by batch-mode plot cards,
thereby completing the data case.

Clioice 2. "'l1>.CS HYBRID" is to be used if an electric network does exist.

For such a general case, this declaration is to be followed by 'U\CS data (see
Section III), which is to be followed by the usual non-TACS data beginning with
the first electric-network branch card.

O'le additional option can be requested in exceptional cases using these

same declaration cards. Normally, the 12 data field of colLmns 19-20 will be
left blank, meaning that default 'U\CS ordering of Section III-C-2 will be used.
But two other alternative requests to be keyed in columns 19-20 are possible:
1 ====> Solve using user-suppl ied (input) order ing;
-1 > Solve using the reverse of input ordering.
Interpretation of the two just-described request cards for 'U\CS carry only
text. As illustrations, consider the associated one output line from each of
[Link] OC-18 and IX:-19:
C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C I----------~---
No electric netw:>rk. But 'n\CS data follows ••• ITACS STAND ALCNE
Electric network, too. But 'l1\.CS data first ••• I TACS HYBRID

III-A. Purpose of 'U\CS

As al ready mentioned, 'l1\.CS functions 1 ike an analog coml=Oter. But it adds

to this algebraic and logical processing, so it really is more general. It is
particularly useful to the EMTP because signals can be passed between the
electric network and ~CS, with the result functioning like a hybrid computer.
In this mode, 'n\CS allows the simulation of hvdc converters and static var
controllers, as well as control circuitry associated with rotating machinery.
III. TACS - 1

III. TACS DATA CARDS FOR CONTROL SYSTEM MODELING

TACS is an acronym derived from the name "Transient Analysis of Control Systems." In very
general terms, it directly provides the user with modeling that normally is associated with an analog
computer. The theory was first described in Ref. 12. TACS data is optional for the EMTP. Ifit appears,
it immediately precedes the first branch card of section IV.

The beginning ofTACS data is declared to the EMTP by one of the following two possible
special-request records:

123456789~~2345678 902 123456789~12345678961123456789~123456789~123456789~1123456789~

Choice 1:trACS STAND ALONE
Choice 2 : ~ACS HYBRID
I2

Choice 1. "TACS STAND ALONE" is to be used if there is no electric network. For such a
degenerate problem, this declaration is to be followed by TACS data, which is to be followed by batch-
mode plot cards, thereby completing the data case.

Choice 2. "TACS HYBRID" is to be used if an electric network does exist. For such a general
case, this declaration is to be followed by TACS data, which is to be followed by the usual non-TACS
data beginning with the first electric-network branch card.

One additional option can be requested in exceptional cases using these same declaration cards.
Normally, the I2 data field of columns 19-20 will be left blank, meaning that default TACS ordering of
Section III-C-2 will be used. But two other alternative requests to be keyed in columns 19-20 are
possible:
1 -t Solve using user-supplied (input) ordering;
-1 -t Solve using the reverse of input ordering.

Interpretation of the two just-described request cards for TACS carry only text. As illustrations,
consider the associated one output line from each of BENCHMARK DC-18 and DC-19:

--------------------------------------------------+-------------------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card images
012
0123456789012345678901234
--------------------------------------------------+-------------------------
DC-18 output ...
No electric network. But TACS data follows ITACS STAND ALONE
DC-19 output ...
Electric network, too. But TACS data first ITACS HYBRID
[Link]

ID-A. Purpose ofTACS

As already mentioned, TACS function like an analog computer. But it adds to this algebraic and
logical processing, so it really is more general. It is particularly useful to the EMTP because signals can
be passed between the electric network and TACS, with the result fuIictioning like a hybrid computer.
In this mode, T ACS allows the simulation of hvdc converters and static var controllers, as well as
control circuitry associated with rotating machinery.

ID-B. Summary ofTACS capabilities

The TACS program is used to solve the differential and algebraic equations associated with an
arbitrary interconnection of the following elements:

- transfer functions in "s", of any order;

OUTPUT = GAIN . L inputs· G(s)

- order-zero blocks;

OUTPUT = GAIN . L inputs

- limiters (saturation), static or dynamic (with or without windup), with constant or variable limit
values, superimposed on the transfer functions and order..:zero blocks;

- input signal sources, such as level, pulse and step functions, sinusoidal signals, any node voltage,
switch current or switch status as measured in the electrical network, and others;

- supplemental algebraic and logical variables, using the standard algebraic and logical operators and
all functions of the FORTRAN library;

- special-application devices, such as frequency meter, relay, level-trigger, transport delay, pulse
delay, digitizer, point-by-point user-defined non-linearity, time-sequenced switch, controlled
integrator, simple derivative, input-IF component, signal selector, sample and track, instantaneous
minimax, minimax tracking, accumulator and counter.

In addition, any signal among these elements can be passed to the electrical network as a voltage or
current source, as time-varying resistance, or as a signal controlling the operation of a switch, valve or
diode.

Program output (printed and/or plotted) consists of values of the block-output signals as a function of
time, for those variables requested by the user.

Both global allocation and internal distribution of the number of memory cells required for the storage
ofthe TACS arrays are variable and user-defined. (See Section I-G, List 19)
III. TACS - 3

ill-C. How to simulate what

While designing TACS, all efforts have been made to permit the translation of a case, from its
physical description to a series of data cards, to be as straightforward as possible. (Any deviation from
this principle should be promptly pointed out to Program Maintenance.)

Here are the basic rules which must be followed when the user is preparing the data for
simulation.

Requirement 1

The control circuitry whose behavior is to be simulated must be first described as a block
diagram, showing the interconnections (with sign and direction) between all blocks and signal
sources. Recognizable blocks are, as detailed elsewhere in this Section, transfer functions,
order-zero blocks. limiters, algebraic functions and logical operators, and a series of other
special-purpose devices.

This type of description (blocks and arrows) has been chosen because it is very close to the
form in which control systems are generally represented for purposes of design and analysis.

Requirement 2

Each block and signal source must then be assigned a single output, which must be "named" in
a way that will unequivocally identify it among the other blocks of the setup. The name itself
can be any arbitrary mnemonic code, and it is the user's prerogative to choose an adequate level
of confusion in this naming process. These names will later be used to directly identify the
interconnections between the blocks. A name is any sequence of 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters,
including blanks.

Requirement 3

The user must then assemble the data according to the rules set for the different types of blocks
and devices. It is suggested at this point that the user get acquainted with the technicalities of
the TACS data setup by preparing and running a few simple cases at first. This method of self-
teaching has proven to give positive results in getting the user to gain flexibility in dealing with
constraints of the program, ability to see the file of time-domain simulation in a more realistic
perspective, and familiarization with the typical gumption-traps which could make the
preparation of a case to be more annoying than expected for overconfident users.

In summary:

- use block diagram representation to describe the system

- name all variables

- define the data in specified formats.

4 - III. TACS

m-C-l. Ordering of the blocks

At execution time, when the TACS program calculates the value of each variable of the system
for a particular instant of time, it does so in specific (and sensible) sequence. This sequence is given
below. In most applications the user does not need to worry about this sequence of solution (the
program does the proper sequencing itself). But knowledge of the sequence may be used to entangle
some tricky situations involving non-linearities such as the limiters and supplemental "inside" variables
and devices.

All linear variables (transfer functions and order-zero blocks) are solved as one group, by
triangularization and backward substitution, thus providing a "simultaneous" solution of all such
variables, even in the so-called "looped" configurations.

Supplemental variables and devices are separated in three supplemental groups (input, output
and inside). The variables of each group are solved sequentially within each group, in the order in which
the data cards were read in.

Order in which the TACS variables are calculated:

During the past few years, there have been reports written about the inadequacy ofthe TACS
order rules which were given on this page by the original author Laurent DuM. Since the fall of 1983,
Ma Ren-ming, a visiting scholar from PRC, has done a very thorough study and investigation into
Laurent's coding logic. He summarized his findings in an EMTP Newsletter article to be published in
the spring of 1984 (Vol. 4, No.3). According to Ma, the following revised TACS order rules would
match with "M39." program versions:

1. Sources, sequentially as read in.

2. Supplemental variables and devices whose inputs have already been evaluated.

3. Z-blocks, S-blocks and supplemental variables whose inputs have already been evaluated.
Such variables are selected recursively until no additional ones remain.

4. Supplemental variables/devices and function blocks with limits. This involves selecting one
at a time, recursively, until no additional such blocks remain. It begins with the selection of
a function block with limits, followed by supplemental variables/devices and other function
blocks for which the inputs are now known. Repeat until no further blocks can so be
selected. When complete, no function blocks with limits remain.

5. Remaining blocks. The selection begins with that function block which has the most inputs.
Next, supplemental variables/devices and any other function blocks for which the inputs are
now are all known. This process is repeated until all remaining function blocks of the
network have been selected.
III. TACS - 5

ill-D. TACS Steady-State Initialization Rules

Point 1

Why bother with definition and calculation of initial conditions in TACS?

a) All history terms must be initialized before the program is ready to calculate the solution of
the system at the first time step. For this purpose, the program will need the values of the
inputs and the output at t = 0 of all s-blocks and devices type 53, 58, 59, 62, 64 and 65.

b) The variables requested for output (printed and/or plotted) should have correct values for
the time t = O.

Point 2

The program will automatically calculate the dc steady-state output values of certain types of
blocks (read on), while the user must provide "user-defined initial conditions" for the others.
However, the program does not need (and will not calculate) any dc steady-state output values,
unless there is one or more type-I, -92 and -93 sources connected at time t = O. and active in
steady-state (as indicated by a value ofT-START < 0.).

Point 3

When TACS does calculate its own dc steady-state output values,

a) the program will take care of computing output values for all order-zero blocks and all s-
blocks (transfer function blocks); Except: integrators [ G(s) = K / s ]

b) and the user must provide the dc initial conditions for any other blocks if needed
(see Point 1).

Point 4

When T ACS does not calculate its own dc steady-state output values, it will nevertheless
recognize any user-defined initial condition that can be used as of Point 1, in which case the
user assumes all responsibility for the whole dc initialization.

In such a case, the user must also remember to define any nonzero initial values of the
"named entries" (columns 69-80) to the supplemental devices, unless these entries are other
than previously-defined supplemental variables or devices, or than a signal source.
(See Section llI-C-2)

Point 5

Whether TACS does or does not calculate its own dc steady-state solution, the program will
always take care of initializing the dc and ac history terms of the transfer functions and the
transport delays. Remember that, in either case, the output values of all integrators (see Point 3)
must be supplied by the user. There is no alternative.
6 -ill. TACS

Point 6

When TACS calculates an ac steady-state solution,

a) TACS takes care of computing the output values of all order-zero blocks and all s-blocks
without exception;

b) The ac contribution of all supplemental variables and devices are totally ignored (the ac
component of their output is assumed to be zero).

T1-W golden rules

1. Make sure that all nonzero inputs to and output of the s-blocks and devices type 53, 58,
59, 62, 64 and 65 are defined for time t = 0 (either by the user or by the program);

2. For program-calculated steady-state solutions, make sure that integrator outputs, delay
s-block outputs and named limits are all defined for time t = o.

ID-D-l. Initialization of the Interfaced Variables

The steady-state initialization of the electrical network in the EMTP is calculated before the
TACS steady-state initialization.

Consequence 1

In the electrical network, the user must himself initialize any TACS variable (which are not yet
calculated for time t = 0) by means of user-defined initial conditions in the EMTP or other sort
of stratagem.

Consequence 2

In the TACS steady-state initialization, the interfaced signals of sources type 90, 91, 92, 93 are
defined and accessible at time t = 0, since they have already been calculated by the EMTP.

Consequence 3

The respective EMTP and TACS steady-state initialization cannot be thought of as an

interactive process, but as a sequential operation.
- - - - - , " , - - " " "

III. TACS-7

ill-E. TACS Elements and Card Formats

The various classes or types ofTACS data are described in subsection below. Such data can be
assembled in arbitrary order, terminated by blank card.

ill-E-l. Transfer Functions or S-blocks

This element i~ used to describe a transfer function of arbitrary order in "s". The operator "s"
can be thought of as either the Laplace transform variable or as the "dldt" operator.

The nih-order transfer function is defined as:

where
N + N s + '" + Nns n
G(s) = G A I N · -1 o - - - - - -
Do + DIS + ... + D nS n

and is solved as:

1----..x(t)

Examples of valid functions are:

~ m ~
1 + 'tIS
1 + 'tzs

~
1 + 'tIS 1 + 'tIS
(1 + 't zs)(1 + 't3 s) A + Bs + Cs 2
8 -III. TACS

Format:

1 ~ 3 4 6 7 8
12 ~45678 90 *345678 012345 8901234 678901 3456789 0~23456f7 890 12 ~45678 901234 ~67890
NPUTPUT FIXED FIXED NAMED NAMED
INl IN z IN3 IN4 INs GAIN
NAME - - - -LO -HI -LO -HI
2
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0 E6.0 A6 A6
1 1 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

No Nl Nz N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

Do D1 Dz 03 04 05 06 07

E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0

Rules:

1. "N" is the order of highest power of "s" of either numerator or denominator polynomials.
Its value must be punched (right-justified) in columns 1-2.
The special degenerate case where N = 0 is called the "order-zero" block or Z-block.
It is defined as:

where K is the gain setting.

2. This block is identified by the alphanumeric name of its output. (Columns 3-8)

3. The total input to the block is the sum of any or all signed input signals. The sign character
( + or - ) must be punched for all such non-blank inputs.

4. The value of a non-unity gain maybe defined in columns 51-56. When this field is left blank
(or zero), GAIN = 1.0 is the default value automatically assigned by the program.

5. This block may also be defined either as a static limiter if it is a Z-block, or as a dynamic
limiter if it is a s-block. See Section ID-E-2 for details.
III. TACS - 9

The following two rules apply only to the s-blocks, and they are not needed for the Z-blocks.

6. The coefficients of the numerator (No, Nl ,etc.) must be supplied on the next card(s). The
order of coefficients is identified by the fields they occupy on the card. For example, N 4 , if
nonzero, must appear in columns 41-50 and nowhere else.

7. The coefficients of the denominator (Do, D J ' etc.) then follow on the next card(s). Here
again, the order of the coefficients is identified by the fields they occupy on the card. For
example, D" ifnonzero, must appear in columns 11-20.

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
(a) 10UT1 +IN1 -IN2
1.
1. 0.1
(b) lINTGR +DERIV
1.
1.
(c) 2SECND +ERR -REF +UNITY 0.25
1. 0.14
1. 0.04 0.04

1
(a) OUT 1 = -- - . (INI - IN2)
1 + [Link]

(b) INTGR = ..!.. . DERIV

(c) SECND = 0.25 . _ _I_+_0,_14_s_ _ . (ERR - REF + UNITY)

1 + 0.04s + 0.04s 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
(a) SUM2 +A -ERR +REF8
(b) EX3 +IN1 -LIM2 0.072
(c) NEGEX +SUM2 +EX3 -0.82

(a) SUM2 = A - ERR + REF8

(b) EX3 = 0.072 . (INI - LIM2)

(c) NEGEX = -0.82 . (SUM2 + EX3)

10 - III. TACS

ill-E-2. Limiters

Low and/or high limits of fixed or calculated value can be superimposed on any transfer
function block or order-zero block.

HI HI

G(s) K

LO LO

Dynamic limiter Static limiter Static limiter on a

transfer function

Static limiter

The output value of an order-zero block is always calculated without considering any existing
limit, and then, if the output value is seen to have exceeded either the lower or higher limit
values, the output value is readjusted according to the value of this limit or saturation level.

Dynamic limiter

The output value of an s-block is calculated differently depending on whether the element is
operating inside or outside its defined limits. In the latter case, the derivatives of the output are
automatically set to zero. Most limiters must be assumed to be of the static type, unless the user
can positively identify that, for example, the complex impedance feedback loop of an amplifier
is electrically modified or by passed when the limit is reached.

Rules:

1. Limits are defined on the card describing the element on which they apply. See Section
III-E-i.

2. The user may define any combination of two types of limits: fixed and variable (See table
below). The fixed limits are defined as the "FIXED-LO" parameter and the "FIXED-ill"
parameter of columns 57-62 and 63-68 respectively on the block card. The variable limits
are defined by using the alphanumeric A6 names of other blocks or elements of the system,
whose output will be the required calculated limit.
These "NAMED-LO"and "NAMED-ill" identifications are punched respectively in the
fields 69-74 and 75-80 of the block card.
III. TACS - 11

3. The following table can be used to determine how the program interprets the different
user-supplied combinations of fixed and variable limit definitions.

A combination of: is taken as:

FIXED FIXED NAMED NAMED LOW HIGH
NO -La -HI -La -HI limit limit
LIMIT --- --- --- ---
-00 +00
O. o. --- ---

A --- --- --- A O.

--- B --- --- O. B
SINGLE --- --- LLL --- LLL(t) +00

LIMIT --- --- --- HHH -00 HHH(t)

1. --- LLL --- LLL(t) o.
--- 1. --- HHH o. HHH(t)

A B --- --- A B
DOUBLE --- --- LLL HHH LLL(t) HHH(t)
LIMIT A --- --- HHH A HHH(t)
--- B LLL --- LLL(t) B

B A A A for B > A
B O. O. for B > 0
DEGENERATE A A A for A < 0
A HHH HHH(t i ) HHH(tJ for HHH (t i ) <A
B LLL B B for LLL(td > B

Notes:

a) Check the above interpretation for each application.

b) A warning message will be printed at the first occurrence of a crisscrossing of double

variable limit.

4. The limiters are not active during the TACS-calculated steady-state initialization at time
t= O.
12 - Ill. TACS

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
(a) 99STAT-G +G(S) STATIC
1G(S) +IN2
1. 58
1. 0.01
(b) 99NEG2 +DYNA 2.5 -0.85 -0.32
1 DYNA +STATIC 0.1 1.0
1.
1. 0.1
99STATIC +IN1 0.36 -0.2 0.95

(a) IN2 + 1.58 G(8) + STAT-G

1.0
1+0.01s

STATIC

+0.95 1.0 - 0.32

(b) + STATIC + 1 DYNA + NEG2

0.36 2.5
1 + [Link]

-0.2 +0.1 - 0.85

.......... " ...." ............... \

.........
.....................................
\ ....... without limit
ill. TACS - 13

ill-E-3. Signal Sources

TACS signal sources are signal generators that can be used. as inputs to other blocks and
elements of the system. Each source is defined on a single card as a separate system component. The
user specifies the type and the name of the source according to the rules that are defined below.

Resident sources

Some source names are permanently available to the user as built-in TACS sources. They have
pre-defined, reserved names, and need not be specified on a source card by user. To use them as input
to any other block or element, simply mention the name of the source as for any other input to a
component. The resident sources are also available as voltage or current sources in the electrical
network through the TACS-EMTP interface.

'TIMEX , = simulation time in seconds (= 0.0 in steady-state)

'ISTEP , = number of the present time step in the simulation
'DELTAT' = size of the time step (TIMEX = ISTEP' DELTAT)
'FREQHZ' system frequency in Hz (as read from the 1st sinusoidal source)
'OMEGAR' = 2n' FREQHZ (inradians)
'ZERO , = 0.0
'MINUS1' = -1.0
'PLUSl , = +1.0
'UNITY , = 1.0 (kept for convenience only; use PLUS 1)
, INFNTY' +00 (very large number fitting your computer system)
'PI ,= n

Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 90 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 12345678901234567890 1234567890 1234567890

T
Y PUT PUT
P NAME A B C T-START T-STOP
E
2 A6 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0

Rules:

1. The source is identified by the alphanumeric name of its output

2. T-START = blank or O. source is activated at t > 0

= some value source is activated at t ~ value
= negative source is activated at t s 0 (except type 23, 24 and 91 for
which a user defined initial condition must be specified.)
14-lli. TACS

3. T -STOP =blank or O. : source is never de-activated

=value : source is de-activated at t ~ value
Note: When de-activated, the source signal is zero.

4. Types of sources

TYPE A B C
11 AMPL - -

14 AMPL FREQ (Hz) <p (deg.)

23 AMPL T (sec) WIDTH (sec)
24 AMPL T (sec) -

90, 91 O. or blank, if ac f, ifac -

1.0, ifdc [Link] blank, if dc
92, 93 - - -

TYPE = 11: level signal

AMPL 1------- AMPL AMPL

t~-START< 0 OtT_START> 0

TYPE = 14: output AMPL . COS ( U) t + l\1)

= AMPL' COS ( 2 1t f t + 2 1t <p / 360 )

O~--~~----------~~~ t Or-----~----------~~~ t

T-START < 0 o·!: T-START !: At

III. TACS - 15

TYPE = 23: pulse

l T-START

(T-START ~ 0 is valid, although this source cannot be included as active during the dc
steady-state initialization unless a nonzero user-defined initial condition is specified.

TYPE = 24: ramp

(T-START < 0 is valid, although this source cannot be included as active during the dc
steady-state initialization unless a nonzero user-defined initial condition is specified.

t T-START

TYPE = 90: Output = EMTP node voltage

In which case the NAME must be a node name already defined in the electrical network.
The output value is not calculated by TACS itself, but is simply made equal to the value of
the vohage (with respect to TERRA), as measured at the node which bears the same name
in the electrical network

TYPE = 91: Output = EMTP switch current

In which case the NAME must be a node name to which a switch (of any type) is
connected in the electrical network. The output value of the source will then be set equal
to the current flowing from the LEFT-node to the RIGHT-node, as defined on the EMTP
switch card. In cases where more than one switch are attached to the said node, reference
is assumed to be to the first of these switches, in the order of the data cards.
16 - 1lI. TACS

TYPE = 92: Output = internal variable of special EMTP components

This source type is reserved for passing to TACS the values of certain internal variables of
special EMTP components. For example, Rule 3 of class 6 S.M. data cards (see
Section VllI) shows how rotor angles and angular velocities can be passed to TACS. This
is for a dynamic synchronous machine (S.M.) Source component, as used in
subsynchronous resonance (SSR) studies. Such variables are then accessed (picked up and
used) within TACS by means of the Type-92 TACS source component.

= 0 : switch is open
TYPE = 93: Output = EMTP switch status {
= 1 : switch is closed

The name of this T ACS source must be a node name to which a switch (of any type) is
connected in the electrical network. In cases where more than one switch are attached to
the said node, reference is assumed to be to the first of these switches, in the order of the
data cards.

Note: Any of the sources that can be defined in the electrical network (type 1 to 15) can
also be used in TACS as follows:

NAME

Source 1.0
~
TYPE-90

In the electrical network In TACS

ID-E-4. Supplemental variables and devices

These elements are called "supplemental" because they differ from the linear s-blocks and
z-blocks in the following way:

they are not part of the solution matrix ofthe set of linear equations in TACS;

they are calculated sequentially, instead of simultaneously for the other s- and z-blocks ( so
that the data cards must be ordered accordingly).
Ill. TACS - 17

Supplemental variables may be part of three different groups of elements, as follows:

I
I
I

0- :~
Sources
I
I
Is-block j-... ~ I s-block I..... ~

0- ~~ I
I
I s-block j-...,~~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I s-block I..... ~~ I
I

"input" "inside" "outpuf'

To make the solution simultaneous for the largest possible number of s-blocks and zero-order
blocks, the user should keep the number of "inside" supplemental elements as low as possible, and
rather place the supplemental elements into the "input" or the "output" group, if applicable.
( See Section III-C-2)

The "input" group: TYPE = 99

All the inputs to these "input" supplemental elements must be either T ACS signal
sources or the output of other supplemental "input" elements.

The "output" group: TYPE = 98

The output of these supplemental "output" elements must not be used as input to any other
block except other supplemental "output" elements. (Although they may be used as interfaced variables
to the EMTP.)

The "inside" group: TYPE = 88

These are the leftover from the two previous groups. They must be used when, for example, the
inputs and output are connected to elements of the system other than those allowed for the two
previous groups. ( See Section III-C-2 details of the calculation.)

IMPORTANT NOTE: According to the contribution by Ma Ren-ming during 1993-1984, the

grouping of supplemental elements (type 99, 98 or 88) is done automatically by TACS. As a
consequence, the user needs only to specify all the supplemental elements of "inside" group (type
88). TACS will convert any element having type code 88 to the appropriate alternative, if the
element actually does not belong to "inside" group.
18 - III. TACS

ill-E-4-1. The Algebraic and Logical FORTRAN Expression

Note: The older-type fixed-format variable has now been replaced by the the free format arbitrary
FORTRAN expression described in this section. However, although the older type is not
documented in this User's Manual anymore, it can still be accepted by the program for the
convenience of those users wishing to continue running older versions of their data cases.

Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 p45678 90 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

99 pUT PUT Free-format FORTRAN expression

NAME
~~
br
88
** A6

** see Section III-E-4

Rules:

1. This variable is identified by the alphanumeric name of its output (Columns 3-8). This
alphanumeric name may not start with a numeric number in the free format expression.

2. The character '=' must appear in column 11 of the first card ofthe expression.

3. All the rules for constructing standard FORTRAN expressions apply.

algebraic operators +, - , * ,/ , **

10 gical operators .OR. , .AND. , .NOT.

relational operators .EQ. , .NE., .LT., .LE. , .GE. , .GT.

FORTRAN Functions SIN, COS, TAN, COTAN, SINH, COSH, TANH

(with arguments in radians);

ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, (answer in radians);

EXP, LOG, LOGlO, SQRT, ABS

III. TACS - 19

special functions TRUNC ( the integer part of ..... )

MINUS ( sign inversion)

INVRS ( 1.0 I arg )

RAD ( Conversion from degrees to radians )

DEG ( Conversion from radians to degrees)

SIGN ( = - 1 if arg < 0 , = +1 if arg z 0 )

NOT ( = 0 if arg < 0 , = + 1 if arg ~ 0)

SEQ6 ( = INT( modulo - 6(arg) ) ( see example below)

RAN ( to obtain a random number, the argument can

be an arbitrary number or an existing TACS
name)

nesting 20 levels

arguments any of the TACS alphanumeric names of user-defined and

resident variables

- any numerical arguments (either integer or real)

4. All functions accept only one argument, as in SQRT ( arg). Valid arguments are either a
TACS name, a numerical constant, or another function, as in SQRT(ABS (INVRS (X)))

5. The characters t+t, t_' , '*' , 'I', '(' , ')' and blank are separator characters, and cannot
be part of a TACS alphanumeric that is going to be used in a FORTRAN expression.

Examples:

'VARL ~' and ,~ ~V ARl I will both be interpreted as 'VARl I ;

'VAR-L' will be interpreted as 'V~ ~ ~' - 1.0;

'V~ I will be interpreted as 'V~ ~ ~' followed by '~ _ ~ ~ ~'

( here meaningless) ;

tl.O~ E6 ' will be interpreted as 1.0 followed by 'E6~ ~ ~ _' ( here meaningless)

Note: Dots ('.') ~ be embedded within a name.

20 - III. TACS

6. Any TACS alphanumeric variables can be associated with either algebraic or logical
operators, regardless of whether it is itself of algebraic or logical contents (no such
distinction in TACS). "

Thus, if a logical expression is used in an algebraic context, its value will be considered as
either = 0.0 or 1.0 ( for respectively '0' and '1 ').

Similarly, if an algebraic expression is used in logical context, its value will be considered
as either '0' or '1' ( for respectively s; 0.0 and:?: 0.0 ) .

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
99ANGLE =DEG( ATAN(CNTRL - BIA52)) + 36.2
88EXPR =-A * ( B+ C** (-D +3))
+ E / PI
99FIFTY = 50.
98IF3 = . NOT.A+B .LT.3 .AND. (ISTEP .GE . 100 )

AboutSEQ6 :

arg -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
etc ...
SEQ6(arg) 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2

The output is an integer.

III. TACS - 21

ID-E-4-2. The Devices

Format:

1 2 3 4 6 7 8
12 345678 90 12345678 012345 890123 45678901 456789 0123456 r89012 345678 901234 567890
T C
Y OUTPUT 0
P NAME D
INl -
IN z
- IN3 -
IN,
- IN5 A B C D E
E E
~ ~
12 A6 121 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0 E6.0 A6 A6
1 1 1 1

Rules:

1. TYPE = 99,98, or 88. See Section llI-E-4 definition.

2. This device is identified by the alphanumeric name of its output. (Columns 3-8).

3. The total input to the device is the sum of any or all signed input signals (except for devices
type 60,61 and 63 where each input signal is interpreted individually). The sign character
( + or -) must be punched for all non-blank inputs.

4. The different devices are:

CODE

50: frequency-sensor
51: relay-operated switch
52: level-triggered switch
53: transport delay
54: pulse transport delay
55: digitizer
56: point-by-point user-defined non-linearity
57: multi-operation time-sequenced switch
58: controlled integrator
59: simple derivative
60: input-IF component
61 : signal selector
62: sample and track
63: instantaneous minimax
64: minimax tracking
65: accumulator and counter
22 - III. TACS

CODE = 50: Frequency meter

A initial frequency (Hz)

±INI B max. acceptable change, in %

±m, ):D,----i.~I_f_:_-... OUTPUT C

D
ignored
ignored
E ignored

OUTPUT = measured frequency of the input

The time between successive zero-crossing of the input signal is measured and converted to a
frequency value in Hertz. The device will automatically reject higher-frequency non-characteristic
oscillations appearing on the main signal. Alternately, the user may choose to process the input signal
through a low-pass filter [I / ( I + T's ) ], in cases where the input noise causes difficulties in
measuring the main signal frequency.

input ... --- ...

signal
~:'~''\,
o t----T-----f----~-:-"
.. - .. t r, II
,
- ,
\
,, '
I
'
'
-- -- --

As for the algorithm used, let T 1 be the

time of the most-recent zero crossing, and T2
the time of the one preceding that. Then the
current frequency estimate f is given by:
----~----~~~---~~---.t

error in estimation
of zero crossing
time Tl

Of course one rarely knows the time of

zero crossing exactly; linear interpolation (see
sketch) is used to estimate these.
III. TACS - 23

Example:

1 ~ 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 90 1234567 81':J 012345 r890123~ 67890W 45678S 012345€ ~89012 345678 901234 567890
98 FREQ2 50 ~ENA ~ENB 60.

~~
~)I
88

This card would describe a frequency-sensor named 'FREQ2' applied to the sum of the inputs
[ 'GENA' - 'GENB' ]. Initial frequency of 60 Hz.

Note: This value of 60 Hz. will not change until at least two zero-crossing of the signal have been
detected, so that an interval can be measured.

CODE = 51 : Relay-operated switch

A Value of the GAIN (def. = 1.0)

±IN
2
iD-1
±IN 1

: I
•
GAIN H: --("-
I

I
I
~OUTPUT
B
C
Value of FIXED TRESHOLD
oor2
1
normally-open
normally-closed
±INs I
-2 normally-open, but
DRIVING _ _ _--"'
SIGNAL
closed at steady state
-1 normally-closed, closed
at steady state too
+ TRESHOLD D NAMED TRESHOLD (optional)
FIXED
E DRIVING SIGNAL

Following conditions apply according to switch operation:

if switch is closed, OUTPUT = GAIN' L (inputs)

if switch is open, OUTPUT = 0.0

The switch will operate from its "normal" state when:

- if normally-open, when I DRIVING SIGNAL I ~ NAMED + FIXED TRESHOLDS

- ifnormally-closed, when I DRIVING SIGNAL I < NAMED + FIXED TRESHOLDS

Note: D and E can be the names of any other TACS variable. (See examples below.)
24-Ill. TACS

CODE = 52: Level-triggered switch

This device is defined in exactly the same way as the relay. The only difference in the operation
of the level-trigger, as opposed to the relay, is that the actual value of the driving signal is taken
(instead of the absolute value), and is compared to a treshold which here can be either positive or
negative.

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 90 1P4567 8 01234516 17 890123 45 678901 456785 0123456 1789012 345678 901234 567890
(a) 98 iREL-A 51 AmITY 0.5 SIG2
0'"
(b) 99iREL-B 51 +IN1 ISlAS 2.0 1. tr'RESH IDRIV1
or
(c) 88 IDETECT 52 +~OURCE 1. 3E tr'R-2 ANY

(a) 'REL-A' = 'UNITY' when I 'SIG2' I ~ 0.5

(b) 'REL-B' = 2' ('IN!' - 'BIAS') when I 'DRIVI' 1< 'TRESH '

(c) 'DETECT' = 'SOURCE' when 'ANY' ~ 'TR-2 '+ 1.36

CODE = 53 : Transport delay

Input the value of the user

A
supplied dc history for the device

B Value of FIXED DELAY (sec)

C Value of MAX. DELAY (sec)

FIXED + NAMED D NAMED DELAY (optional)
DELAY
Punch "VALUE" in columns
75-79 ifuser would like to supply
E
value of the dc history of the
At any time "t", for a value of total delay = T sec., delay blocks (see below the note)
Note:
OUTPUT (t) = INPUT ( t - T )
User may input his own dc history for
the device only if there is no any user
defined dc source in the case.
Otherwise the pro gram will calculate
its own dc orland ac history, and the
data field "E" should be left blank
III. TACS - 25

Note about the variable 'NAMED DELAY' :

When the user wants the value of the delay to be variable (as opposed to 'fixed'), he may define
this delay as being the output of some other TACS block at which the delay itself is calculated.
In such a case, the user must also specify the maximum value that will be reached by the total
delay time, and punch this maximum value in field 'C' of the device card. (The program needs
to know ahead of time how many cells of memory are to be allocated to the storage of the
'past history' of the input signal.)

Examples:

1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 90 1~345678 012345 8901234 5678901 456789 01234561789012 345678 901234 567890

(a) 98 DEL-A 53 SIGNAL 0.002 .004 SLOW2

o:r
99
(b) o:r DEL-B 53 IN2 .0035
88

(a) 'DEL-A' ( t) = 'SIGNAL' ( t - T) where T = 'SLOW2' + 0.002 [ Tmax = 0.004 ]

(b) 'DEL-B ' ( t) = 'IN2' (t - 0.0035 )

Note: When the input signal is known to be a pulse or succession of pulses, the user should consider
using a 'pulse transport delay' instead of this 'storage-hungry' device

CODE = 54 : Pulse delay

A value of i.c. T -ON (see below)

B value of FIXED DELAY (sec)

C Value of i.c. T-OFF (see below)

D NAMED DELAY (optional)

FIXED + NAMED
DELAY E ignored

input output input output

1.0 ~I' r------.--
I I . .......
,'\ ~.

. ! \\
I I

! ! : ,,
:
I
:
I

O~----~I--~:----~--~----~~~t I t , . t
o~-~~/~----~,-.----~----~----~

..... delay -... ....- delay --JIIo-t

Note: Constraint on the frequency of the input signal. Overall period of input > pulse width + delay.
26-ill. TACS

Initial conditions T-ON and T-OFF

The user can make the OUTPUT respond to an input signal which partly or totally occurred
before simulation time t > o.

This situation can be simulated as follows:

specify T -ON in field 'A' of the card

specify T -OFF in field 'C'
where T -ON < T -OFF < 0
o

t specify T -ON only in field 'A'

note: There is no need to specify T -OFF here, since
it will be detected by the program itself.
CD ~t

When reading the cards, the computer does not make the difference
between a blank field and the value 0.0.
o If the user does want to specify a value of T -ON or T -OFF that is
exactly 0.0, he must instead specify a value that is negative and very close
to 0.0 ( < Llt), but is not exactly 0.0.

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 90 12345678 01234516 8901234 678901j<: 456789 0123456 789012 ~45678 901234 1567890

(a) 98 PDEL1 54 +LOGIK .0035

(b) ~9 ~DEL2 ~4 +SIGN-I' 1-0.028 frARDL

lor
(c) 88 DETECT 4 +SOURCE 0.001
15 PELAY

(a) 'PDELI' (t) = 'LOGIK' (t - 0.0035)

(b) 'PDEL2' (t) = 'SIGN-L' (t -'VARDL'), with the input being 'ON' since 0.028 seconds prior
to the beginning of the simulation.

(c) 'CTRL'(t) = 'SOURCE'(t-T)whereT=DELAY' +0.001

III. TACS - 27

CODE = 55: Digitizer

-I GAIN H/ ~ OUTPUT output

input
Specify the GAIN in field 'A' of the card (defaulted to 1.0)

Specify the levels (enough to cover the expected range) by punching

as many card as there are levels, one value oflevel per card.
End with a 'terminator' card: punch '9999' in columns 13-16.

1 2 3 4 6 7 8
12 345678 90 11234567 81S 012345 118901234 678901 213 456789 012345E 789012 345678 901234 567890
T
yjoUTPUT rt
55 INl ~ etc ...
P NAME
E
level - 1 I
level - 2 I
. in order of increasing value

level - n l
9999./
--
Example:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
STAIRS55 +SMOOTH
98
lor -l.
99
O.
or
88 l.
9999.

+I
'SMooTH'

-1

+1
'STAIRS'

0 t

-1
28 - III. TACS

CODE = 56: Point-by-point non-linearity

-I GAIN H-:::::r~ ~ OUTPUT

Specify the GAIN in field 'A' of the card (defaulted to 1.0)

Define the function y = f(x) with as many points as needed to cover the expected range of variation
(linear interpolation is performed by the program for values between the given points).
Specify one such point per card by punching the pair of coordinates (x,y).
Place the cards in order of increasing values of 'x'.
End with a 'terminator' card: punch '9999' in columns 13-16.

1 2 3 4 6 7 8
12 345678 901 234567 89 012345 678901234 678901 23 456789 0123456 789012 345678 901234 !:>67890
T
ypUTPUT ft ft etc ...
56 INl
P NAME
E
,,""~, ,-
Xl I Yl I
Xz I Y2 I
in order of increasing value of 'x'

Xn I Yn I
9999.[

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
~2 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
NL 56+x
-1000. -3.
98 -1l. -3.
o~

99 -6. -5.
or 3. 5.
88
6. 3.
1000. 3.
9999.

6
1lI. TACS - 29

CODE = 57: Time-sequenced switch

INPUT -I ~- ~ OUTPUT

This switch is assumed to be initially open. The user specifies the sequence of operation of the switch
as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12~45678 90 1~345678 012345IE r8901234 678901 456785 012345E 1789012 ~45678 9012341567890
T
ypUTPU'I
P NAME 15 _ _~tc ...
5 INl
E
tCLOSE - 1
t OPEN - 1
tCLoSE - 2

. in order of increasing values of time

.
t LAST OPERATION I ~-

9999·1

Remember to end with a 'terminator' card: punch '9999' in columns 13-16.

Note: Since the devices are ignored during the program-calculated steady-state initialization, this
switch is also open during steady-state. However, since user-defined initial conditions may be
defined for any TACS variable, the user may choose to define a nonzero initial condition for the
output of this device, thus bypassing the effect of this stUbbornly-open switch at t = O.

Example:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
SWCTRL57+UNITY
0.0025
98
PL 0.0030
99
0.0105
OL
88 0.0110
0.0205
9999.
30 - III. TACS

CODE = 58 : Controlled integrator

named reset A value of GAIN (def. = 1.0)

B value of Do (possibly 0.0)

C value ofDl (possibly 0.0)

D name of the control signal

E named reset value (or blank)

- if control signal> 0.0

}
OUTPUT = _G_AIN
__ . L inputs
- ifno control signal name Do + Dt • S

if control signal :s; 0.0 ~ OUTPUT = value of named reset (or 0.0 ifno name specified)

Examples:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 P45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
98 pUT 58+IN 1.0 0.0 1.oCTRL1 VAR1
OI
99
PUT2 58+IN 3.2 1.8 1. CTRL2
OI
88
pUT 3 58+IN -OTHER +ETC 3.1 1.0 o. CTRL3 VAR3

t
- if CTRL > 0, OUT(t) = OUT(t - ~t) + J IN(T}) dT}
t-~t
OUT
s if CTRL :s; 0, OUT(t) = VARlet)
(which will also be used as initial condition for the next time
step)

CTRL2

K if CTRL2 > 0, OUT2 = ~ . IN

IN
s + a
OUT2 S + a
if CTRL2 :s; 0, OUT2 = 0.0
(same remarks as above)

- if CTRL3 > 0, OUT3 =K . IN

OUT3
- if CTRL3 :s; 0, OUT3 = V AR3
III. TACS - 31

Note: In a previous version ofthis program, the type-58 device has also been used as a counter. This
function is now served more flexibly by the device type 65. However, for the convenience of
users wishing to run older versions of their data cases, the "counter" function of this type-58
device is kept operational, and is defined as follows:

A ignored
B ignored
C ignored
D The keyword 'COUNTR'
E ignored

and OUTPUT = OUTPUT(t -Llt) + L inputs

CODE = 59 : Simple derivative

A value of GAIN (defaulted to 1.0)

±INI

±IN2~
B ignored
- '\' GAIN. Llul - t - --~~ OUTPUT
ignored
-. ~ Llt C

D ignored
E ignored

OUTPUT(t) = GAIN . u(t) - u(t - Llt)

Llt

Note: This device will be properly initialized by the program at t = 0.0, provided that all the initial
conditions for the inputs INI , IN2, etc. are available (either program-calculated or user defined).
See Section III-D.
To assign a nonzero initial value to the OUTPUT, specifY also a user-defined initial condition as
per Section III-G.
32 - III. TACS

CODE =60: Input -IF component

SIGNALI {: } SIGNAI2 + CONSTANT A numerical CONSTANT (optional)

B ignored
IF
C ignored
±INI --~-------. D name of SIGNAL!
±IN2 --. = • '------ii--~ OUTPUT
> • E name of SIGNAL2 (optional)
±IN3--~------~

if SIGNALI {: } SIGNAI2 + CONSTANT,

Note: For this device, the inputs are not summed up. Each inputs is interpreted individually.

Examples:

- OTHER!
-OTHER! }
OUT ={ ZERO
+ ZERO ----1-"" OUT PASS!
+PASSI
Note: FLAG! can itself be a more complex logical
/algebraic expression defined in a FORTRAN
expression

-PLUSl
PLUSI }
+ PLUSl '----I!--. . . OUT2 if FLAG2 {: } =4.75, OUT2 ={ PLUS!
+THRU2 -THRU2
III. TACS - 33

CODE =61: Signal selector

_.----.,~O

: I" /
B SELECTOR A ignored

~~:
±IN3 : I '\:!,...,- - - . . . OUTPUT
B output LO when SELECTOR 0.5
C output lIT when SELECTOR 6.5
± IN4 • \
± IN5 • \
D ....lin D name of 6th input (or blank)
c o
0-0_ _----oJ.
E name of SELECTOR variable

± IN! (default = 0.0)

= 1.0 ± 0.5
= 2.0 ± 0.5 ± IN2 (default = 0.0)
= 3.0 ± 0.5 ± IN3 (default = 0.0)
if SELECTOR
= 4.0 ± 0.5
OUTPUT = (default = 0.0)
± IN4
= 5.0 ± 0.5 ± INs (default = 0.0)
= 6.0 ± 0.5
D (default = 0.0)

if SELECTOR {< 0.56.5 } '

~
OUTPUT = {~}

Note: For this device, the inputs are not summed. Each input is interpreted individually.
34 - Ill. T ACS

CODE =62: Sample and Track

TRACK SAMPLE A ignored

B ignored
HOLD, ignored
C
l-----.,.... SAMPLE, 1----.. OUTPUT
TRACK D name of TRACK signal (or blank)
E name of SAMPLE signal (or blank)

initial condition initial condition

/ output /
output
/ ....,........., /
,......
.. , .. ..-."....
. ..
~ ,
, '0 •;' 0,
,,;. .' '.
",
. .4
,,' '. o. t t
0 0
.
.....,.-\ ......
~.
,
,,
'0 ". ,.,
........ I ...•••\ ......'
,
input input
, , ,
I' ,,, ,,, ,,,
TRACK , , , "SAMPLE
>0 i-- r---' >0 r-- r--
o ~ t 0 "" t
'"'- l....-

sO sO

Note: - In the absence ofboth TRACK signal and SAMPLE signa~ the OUTPUT is in HOLD mode.

- The TRACK signal supercedes the SAMPLE signal, should both control signals be > 0
simultaneously.

- The SAMPLE mode involves a two-step operation. The order to sample a new value is only
performed on the rising front of the SAMPLE control signal, which must then be reset to ~ 0
before the next SAMPLE order is given.

- The TRACK operation becomes equivalent to a SAMPLE operation if the TRACK control
signal lasts only one time step.

To assign a nonzero initial condition to the OUTPUT (the initial HOLD value), specify a user-defined
initial condition as per Section Ill-G
36 - III. TACS

CODE =65: Accumulator and counter

A ignored
RESET HOLD
±INI 1- B ignored
, t
±IN2~~. ~ I
~J!Yi-----I~-..I ~CC ~ OUTPUT
C
D
numerical reset value
name of RESET signal (or blank)
± IN5 +
reset E name of HOLD signal (or blank)
value

if RESET signal> 0.0, OUTPUT=C

else if HOLD signal> 0.0, OUTPUT(t) = OUTPUT(t -Llt)

else OUTPUT(t) = OUTPUT(t - Llt), input(t)

Note: This device will be properly initialized by the program at t = 0.0, provided that the initial
condition for the OUTPUT value is supplied.

To assign a nonzero initial condition to the OUTPUT (which will also be the initial accumulator
contents), specify a user-defmed initial condition.

Special application:

PLUSl -I ACC ~ OUTPUT

provides a straight fOIWard step counter
with and without reset

CODE =66: RMSvalue

A frequency (Hz)

B ignored

C ignored
I---~~ OUTPUT
D ignored

E ignored

OUTPUT = the RMS value

Note: The storage needed for this device is allocated in the 7th of the total of 8 TACS tables.
The number of cells needed is equalto: 1 + 1 / (frequency· DELTAT)
III. TACS - 37

ill-F. PrintedIPlotted Output of the TACS Variables

The time-varying values ofthe signals and variables in TACS are calculated by the program at
discrete intervals of time t =0, at, 2at, etc..

Just as for the electrical network, the value of each variable in TACS can be observed in
printed or plotted form. Under user control are:

a) which variables are to be printed or plotted (see specifications below)

b) the printing and plotting intervals lOUT and IPLOT (see Section II-B)

c) the printout of the minima and maxima of the output variables (see Section II-B:
MAXOUT)

d) permanent disk storage of the plot data points (see Section II-B: ICAT)

e) program diagnostic printout (see Section [Link] : IPRSUP)

To specify which TACS variables are to be printed or plotted

a) for output of all the variables
a single card is needed, with a 'I' in column 2

b) for output of only some variables

use as many card as needed, in the following format.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
~2 ~45678 901234 567890 12345E 789012 ~45678 901234 567890 12345E 789012 ~45678 901234 567890
name name name name name name name name name name name name name
~3
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

Note: any of the A6 fields on anyone output card may be blank, provided that at least one field per
card is non-blank.

As for locating the TACS variables which have been so requested in the resultant printout, a pair
of A6 names is used. The first is always "TACS", and the second is the user-supplied name of the
TACS variable. For plotting purposes (either batch-mode or interactive), this same pair of names is
used, and TACS variables are treated as ifbranch currents were involved (Type-9 plot variables). This
presumes a hybrid problem with both TACS and also some electric network representation. For a
TACS-only data case, TACS variables are treated like node voltages (Type-lor 4 for plotting
purposes), and only a single name (that of the TACS variable) is used for identification.
38-ill. TACS

ill-G. TACS User-Defmed Initial Conditions

Steady-state initialization as calculated by the program is discussed in Section III-D.

The initial value at t = 0.0 of variables not covered by the program initialization calculations can
be provided by the user, in the format presented below.

Typically, the following elements will require user-defined initial conditions for t = 0.0. The
default value of unspecified initial condition is zero.
. 1
mtegrators -
s
FORTRAN expressions
devices 50,51,52 etc...
sources type 23 and 24 (pulse and ramp)
sources where T-START is not specified or is 0.0.

Format:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 ~45678 90 ~234567890 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
initial
name
value
177
A6 E10.0

Use as many cards as required, and terminate with a blank card, whether any initial conditions are
defined or not. This blank card also marks the end of the TACS data case altogether.
III. TACS - 39

ill-H. Use of TACS and MODELS in the Same Data Case

It is allowed to include both a TACS section and a MODELS section in the same data case. Typically.
this will enable users to use existing data cases containing a T ACS section. while still being able to add
one or more MODELS routines to the data case as needed.

A new input type has been added to the MODELS section, to allow input of any variable from TACS
into MODELS. For example, a TACS variable named "SIGNAL" could be used as input to the
MODELS section as follows:

INPUT local_name { TACS(SIGNAL) }

indicating that the TACS variable named "SIGNAL" would be available in the MODELS section under
the name "local name".

The complete list of input types that can be used in the MODELS section is now:

v(node name) : node voltage

i(node or branch name) switch current
switch(node or branch name) : switch status
mach(machine variable name) : machine variable
imssv(node name) : imaginary part of a steady-state node voltage at t=O
imssi(node or branch name) : imaginary part of a steady-state switch current at t=O
tacs(variable name) : T ACS variable

When both T ACS and MODELS are used in a data case, the TACS section precedes the MODELS
section:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

TACS HYBRID

BLANK card ending TACS section

MODELS

ENDMODELS
e1ectric circuit description

During the simulation, the order of execution at each time step is:

1. Electric circuit solution

2. TACS section solution
3. MODELS section solution

MODELS variables requested for printout/plotting using the MODELS directive "RECORD variable
AS name" are identified by ATP with the keyword "MODELS" (instead of "TACS") being used as the
first name of the name pair identifYing each printout or plotted variable (see the printout heading in the
example below).
40 - Ill. TACS

The fonnat rules of ATP branch, switch, source, and machine cards making use of control signals from
TACS or MODELS remain unchanged. In either case, the keyword "TACS" used on these cards
continues to mean "The Alien Control Signal", and is used for identifying control signals coming from
outside the electric circuit from either TACS or MODELS.

The 4th subcase ofDC-30 shows the use ofTACS and MODELS in the same data case:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C 4th of 4 subcases is the same as the first and the third, except that
C i t uses both TACS and MODELS. The [Link] BUS2 and BUS3 are input to TACS.
C VSW is output from TACS and input to MODELS. GRID is output from MODELS.
C Compare [Link] at t=O with 3rd subcase.
C del. tat tmax xopt copt epsil.n [Link] tstart
LOE-6 3.0E-3
C print points connec s-s minmax vary again [Link]
110 o 1 -1
S S 20 20 100 100
TACS HYBRID
lDUMMY +UNITY
1.0
1.0 [Link]-3
90BUS2
90BUS3
99VSW = BUS2 BUS 3
33BUS2 BUS3 VSW
BLANK card ends al.l. TACS data
MODELS
INPUT del. tav {TACS (vsw) }
OUTPUT grid
MODEL dc30
INPUT dv
VAR grid
OUTPUT grid
EXEC
IF abS(dv)>=1.Se8*t +leS THEN grid:=l ELSE grid:=O ENDIF
ENDEXEC
ENDMODEL
USE dc30 AS dc30
INPUT dv: =del. tav
OUTPUT grid:=grid
ENDUSE
RECORD
dc30 . dv AS dv
ENDMODELS
GEN BUS 1 15.
BUS 1 2.9
BUSl BUS2 0.1
BUS2 0.1
BUS3 .017
BUS3 490.
BUS2 BUS2R 24.34
BUS 3 BUS3R BUS2 BUS2R
BLANK card terminates [Link] network branches
BUS 2 BUS 3 -1. 1.E9
llBUS2R BUS3R 20. GRID 12
BLANK card ends al.l. switches
14GEN 66500. 50. -2.0508 -1.
BLANK card terminates [Link] network sources
{ No node [Link] printout/[Link]
BLANK card ending node vol. tage request
BLANK card ending [Link] cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................... 1
1.1 THE MODELS LANGUAGE ........................................................... 1
1.2 MAIN FEA TljRES ................................................................... 1

2. MODEL DESCRIPTION .................................................................. 2

2.1 SYSTEM REPRESENTATION ......................................................... 2
2.2 MODEL REPRESENTATION .......................................................... 3
2.2.1 MODEL DECOMPOSITION ....................................................... 3
2.2.2 MODEL DEFINITION ............................................................. 3
2.2.3 FOREIGN MODELS .............................................................. 4
2.2.4 EXTERNAL MODELS ............................................................ 6
2.3 STATEMENTS ...................................................................... 6
2.3.1 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS ..................................................... 6
[Link] VALUE ASSIGNMENT ........................................................ 6
[Link] DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION ................................................... 6
[Link] LAPLACE TRANSFER FUNCTION ............................................. 8
[Link] Z TRANSFER FUNCTION ..................................................... 9
2.3.2 ALGORITHM CONTROL STATEMENTS .... , .................................. , ... 10
[Link] IF ......................................................................... 10
[Link] WHILE ..................................................................... 10
[Link] FOR ....................................................................... 11
[Link] DO ........................................................................ 11
[Link] REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11
[Link] COMBINE .................................................................. 12
[Link] SEQUENCE ................................................................. 13
[Link] USE ....................................................................... 13
2.3.3 SIMULATION DIRECTIVE STATEMENTS ..............•.......................... 14
[Link] WRITE .................... '................................................. 14
[Link] ERROR .................................................................... 14
[Link] DEPOSIT ................................................................... 15
2.4 VALUE-HOLDING ELEMENTS ....................................................... 15
2.4.1 ARRAyS ....................................................................... 15
2.4.2 CONSTANTS ................................................................... 16
2.4.3 RESIDENT CONSTANTS ........................................................ 16
2.4.4 DATA ........................................•................................ 17
2.4.5 V ARlABLES ................................................................... 18
2.4.6 RESIDENT V ARlABLES ......................................................... 18
2.5 MODEL INTERFACE ................................................................ 19
2.5.1 INPUT ....................................................... " ................ 19
2.5.2 OUTPUT ....................................................................... 20
2.6 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................... 20
2.6.1 FUNCTIONS IN A MODEL ....................................................... 20
2.6.2 STATEMENT FUNCTION ........................................................ 20
2.6.3 POINTLIST FUNCTION .......................................................... 21
2.6.4 FOREIGN FUNCTIONS .......................................................... 22
2.6.5 EXTERNAL FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 22
2.6.6 RESIDENT FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 23
2.6.7 RESIDENT SIMULATION FUNCTIONS ............................................ 24
2.7 NAMES ................................................................... '........ 25
2.7.1 NAME DEFINITION ............................................................. 25
2.7.2 USE PATHNAMES .............................................................. 25
2.8 VALUES ..................................... , .................................... 26
2.8.1 VALUE TYPES ................................................................. 26
2.8.2 VALUE REFERENCE ............................................................ 26
2.8.3 VALUE LIMITS ................................................................. 27
2.9 EXPRESSIONS ..................................................................... 28
2.9.1 EXPRESSIONS IN A MODEL ...................... , ...................... '" ..... 28
2.9.2 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS ....................................................... 28
2.9.3 SUM EXPRESSIONS ............................................................ 31
2.9.4 DERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS ..................................................... 32
2.9.5 INTEGRALS .................................................................... 32
[Link] INTEGRAL EXPRESSION ............................................ : ....... 32
[Link] INTEGRAL VALUE RESET ................................................... 33
2.10 FORMAT ......................................................................... 34
2.10.1 DESCRIPTION FORMAT ........................................................ 34
2.10.2 DELIMITERS .................................................................. 34
2.10.3 LINE INDENTATION ....................................... , ................... 34
2.10.4 COMMENTS ..............•................................................... 34

3. MODEL SIMULATION .................................................................. 35

3.1 SIMULATION DIRECTIVES .......................................................... 35
3.1.1 TIMESTEP ........."............................................................ 35
3.1.2 INTERPOLATION ............................................................... 36
3.1.3 DELAy ........................................................................ 36
3.2 SIMlJLATION PROCESS ............................................................ 37
3.2.1 INITIALIZATION ................................................. .-.......... "... 37
3.2.2 HISTORY FUNCTIONS .......................................................... 38
3.2.3 INIT PROCEDURE .............................................................. 39
3.2.4 EXEC PROCEDURE .............................................................. 39
3.2.5 SIMULTANEOUS VARIABLES ................................................... 40
3.2.6 SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR VARIABLES USING A LINEAR COMBINE ................. 40
3.2.7 SIMULTANEOUS NONLINEAR VARIABLES USING A LINEAR COMBINE ............. 41

4. MODELS IN ATP ...................................................................... 43

4.1 MODELS SECTION IN THE DATA CASE .............................................. 43
4.1.1 INPUTS FROM THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TO MODELS ........................... 44
4.1.2 OUTPUTS FROM MODELS TO THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ............ " ........... 45
4.1.3 TOP VARIABLES OF THE MODELS SECTION ........................ , ..... , ....... 45
4.1.4 RECORDED VALVES IN MODELS ................................................ 46
4.2 TYPE-94 COMPONENTS IN THE CIRCUIT ............................................. 46
4.2.1 THREE TYPES: THEVENIN, ITERATED, NORTON .................................. 46
4.2.2 TYPE-94 FORMAT IN ATP ....................................................... 47
4.2.3 TYPE-94 MODEL TEMPLATES ................................................... 48
[Link] THEVENINMODELTEMPLATE .............................................. 48
[Link] ITERATED MODEL TEMPLATE .............................................. 49
[Link] NON-TRANSMISSIONNORTONMODELTEMPLATE ........................... 50
[Link] TRANSMISSION NORTON MODEL TEMPLATE ................................ 50
MODELS -- p. I

L INTRODUCTION

1.1 THE MODELS LANGUAGE

MODELS is a general-purpose description language supported by a set of simulation tools for the representation
and study of time-variant systems.

The MODELS language provides a format which focuses on the description of the structure of a model and on the
function of its elements.

The description of a model is intended to be self-documenting, and can therefore be used both as the description
document used for representing the system and as the data used in the actual simulation.

A system can be described in MODELS as an arrangement of inter-related submodels, independent from one another
in their internal description (for example, in selecting the names of their variables) and in their simulation (for
example, in selecting the size of their individual simulation time step). .

There is also a clear distinction in MODELS between the description of a model, and the use of a model. Individual
models can be developed separately, grouped in one or more libraries of models, and used in other models as
independent building blocks in the construction of a system.

Finally, the description of each model uses a free~format, keyword-driven syntax of local context,. and does not
require ftxed formatting in its representation.

The present documentation is divided in two sections, the fITS! covering the description of a model, and the second
describing the use of a model in a simulation.

A general overview of the model description approach in MODELS is presented in the next pages, under the
headings MAIN FEATURES, SYSTEM REPRESENTATION, MODEL DECOMPOSITION, and MODEL
DEFINITION.

1.2 MAIN FEATURES

The main description features of the MODELS language are the following:
- the syntax of MODELS allows the representation of a system to closely follow the system's functional
structw"e, supporting the explicit description of composition, sequence, concurrence, selection, repetition, and
replication;
- the description of a model can also be used as the model's documentation;
- the interface of a model with the outside world is clearly specified;
- the components of a model can be given meaningful names representative of their function;
- a system can be partitioned into individual submodels, each with a local name space;
- the models and functions used for describing the operation of a system can be constructed in programming
languages other than the MODELS language.

The main simulation features supported by the MODELS language are the following:
- distinction between the description of a model and its use, allowing mUltiple independent replications of a
model with individual simulation management (time step, dimensions, initial conditions, etc.); .
- hierarchical combination of three initialization methods (default, use-dependent, and built-in), each
contributing to the description of the pre-simulation history of a model by a direct representation of the pre-
simulation value of its inputs and variables as functions of time;
- dynamically-controlled modification of the values of the inputs and variables of a model during the. course of
a simulation;
MODELS -- p. 2

- d)-1lamically-controlled modification of the structure of a model (both topological composition and algorithmic
flow) during the course of a simulation.

2. MODEL DESCRIPTION

2.1 SYSTEM REPRESENTATION

The description blocks of the MODELS language are model definitions. Four aspects of a model are included in its
description:
- what elements are present in the model~
- how these elements interact with each other,
- how the model interacts with the environment in which it operates,
- how the operation of the model is to be simulated.

A model is composed of elements of two types:

- value-holding elements (constants, data parameters, inputs, and variables),
- submodels (local groups of value-holding elements).

The internalmteraction of the elements of a model is described by specifying the structure in which the elements
are assembled, using:
- composition, where the joined operation of a group of statements is assembled into a submodel;
- replication, where several independent uses of a model are specified in the description of a system (see USE
statement); .
- selection, where different .groups of statements are active depending on a specified set of conditions (see IF
statement);
- association, where some statements are explicitly identified as belonging to a common group (see DO
statement);
- repetition, where the action of a group of statements is repeated according to directives internal to the
description of the group (see REDO statement);
- conditional repetition, where the action of a group of statements is repeated according to a specified external
condition (see WHILE statement);
- indexed repetition, where the action of a group of statements is repeated using a list specifying the values of
one or more parameters (see FOR statement);
- concurrence, where the statements of a group are active simultaneously with each other (see COMBINE
statement);
- sequence, where the statements of a group are active consecutively, in the order in which they are described
(see SEQUENCE statement).

The external interaction of a model with its immediate surrounding environment is described by specifying how
information is carried to and from the model, through:
- its input connections (see INPUT);
- its output connections (see OUTPUT).

The operation directives that are specific to the individual uses of a model are specified in each USE statement, in
the formoflocal DATA and HISTORY assignments, and oflocal simulation directives (see USE).
MODELS -- p. 3

2.2 MODEL REPRESENTATION

2.2.1 MODEL DECOMPOSITION

Although it is generally possible to represent the operation of a model without defining any submodels, there are
many advantages to dividing a larger model into groups of elements each perfonning a more simple function.

Each composite group is represented as a separate model in the overall description of a system, describing the
interaction of the group's elements among each other and the interaction of the group itself with the environment
in which it operates, with the following advantages:
- explicit interface: the interaction of a model with its environment takes place exclusively through
its specified interface;
- local operation: the elements contained in a model operate independently from the environment
in which the model itself is used;
- local naming: all names used as identifiers in a model can be selected without concern for the
possible duplication of names used outside that model;
- replication: once defmed, a model can be used in many separate applications, each application
being used independently from other applications of the same model;
- simulation control: the directives controlling the simulation of a model can be specified individually
for different uses of the same model~

- state history: state information is retained for each separate use of a model, in the form of the
present and past values assigned to its variables~
- local development: being a self-contained description, a model can be developed and tested separately
from the larger context in which it may eventually be used;
- local maintenance: the internal implementation of a model can be modified without affecting the rest
of a system description, provided that the original specifications of the model's
interface remain unchanged;
- model library: an assortment of models can be gathered in a library of models, to be utilized
individually as required;
- rough-modeling: when developing the description of a large system, a model of the overall system
can be prototyped early, by temporarily approximating the internal operation of
unfmished submodels with simplified equivalent representations using the same
model interfaces as the fmal product;

2.2.2 MODEL DEFINITION

A model written in the MODELS language includes declarations, simulation directives, and operation procedures.
The syntax used for a model defmition is the following:
MODEL name declaration
directive
procedure
' - - - - - - - - - ENDMODEL

declarations:
- CONST declarations specify the name, array range, and value of the constants of the model (the internally-
assigned constant value-holding elements);
- DATA declarations specify the name, array range, and optional default value of the data parameters of the
model (the externally-assigned constant value-holding elements);
MODELS -- p. 4

- VAR declarations specify the name and array range of the variables of the model (the internally-assigned
variable value-holding elements);
- INPUT declarations specify the name, array range, and optional default value of the inputs of the model (the
externally-assigned variable value-holding elements);
- OUTPUT declarations specify which of the model's elements may be used as outputs of the model;
- FUNCTION declarations specify the description of functions used in the model;
- MODEL declarations specify the description of submodels used in the model;

simulation directives:
- TIMESTEP directives specify the optional default value of time step minimum and maximum limits for the
model;
- INTERPOLATION directives specify the default interpolation degree to be applied to the inputs of the model
if the model is used at sub-steps of the external time step;
- DELAY directives specify the default size of value storage associated with usage of the delayO function in the
model;
- mSTORY declarations specify the name of the model's variables for which a history function must be defmed
when using the model; they may optionally be used to assign default history functions to any of the model's
inputs and variables;

operation procedures:
- the EXEC procedure describes the execution algorithm of the model;
- the INIT procedure describes the initialization algorithm of the model.

Once defmed, a model can be used independently in as many separate uses as required. Each use of a model is
introduced in a separate USE statement specifying the inputs and outputs of the used model, and stating the local
directives controlling its simulation (see USE).

The names chosen for identifying the constants, data, variables, inputs, functions, and submodels defmed in a model
are local to the model. They are not visible outside the model, and can be selected without concern for the possible
duplication of names already used outside the model.

2.2.3 FOREIGN MODELS

In addition to using the MODELS language for describing the operation of a model, it is also possible to use
procedures written in other programming languages. MODELS provides a pre-defmed interface that can be used
by the user to connect "foreign" programs to a simulation. The interface is defmed as four arrays carrying the values
of data, input, output, and history variables between MODELS and the foreign procedure. Each foreign model must
provide both an execution procedure and an initialization procedure, with a function corresponding to the EXEC
procedure and the INIT procedure of a model. For example, a Fortran model would be written as:

SUBROUTINE execsub(xdata, xin, xout, xvar)

DIMENSION xdata(*), xin(*), xout(*), xvar(*)
... execution procedure ...
ENTRY inisub(xdata, xin, xout, xvar)
... initialization procedure '"
END

where
- execsub: arbitrary name of the execution section of the foreign model;
MODELS -- p. S

- inisub: arbitrary name of the initialization section of the foreign model;

- xdata: array of the DATA values of the model;
- xm: array of the INPUT values of the model;
- xout: array of the OUTPUT values of the model:
- xvar: array of the history variables of the model (initial and ongoing) with storage managed by
MODELS.

In order to be recognized as a model, a foreign model is declared in the model in which it is used. The declaration
fonnat is as follows:
MODEL name FOREIGN idname { T dimension-name: expr '1
- - }

where:
- name: local name by which the foreign model can be referenced in the model;
- idname: arbitrary name used in the connection table of the foreign interface subroutine of MODELS to
recognize calls to this model;
and where the following pre-defined names must be used to identify the size of the four arrays used to interface this
model with the rest of the simulation:
- ixdata: number of elements in the array xdata
- ixin: number of elements in the array xin
. - ixout: number of elements in the array xout
- ixvar: number of elements in the array xvar
A foreign program must be compiled and linked to the simulation program before it can be called by MODELS. Any
source language may be used, provided that the compiled object code is compatible with the linker available on the
computer platform used to run the simulation. The interface routine of MODELS (in file modOO [Link]) is where the
user registers the correspondence between the idname used in the foreign model declarations, and the actual names
of the foreign subroutines and functions linked with the program.

Once declared and named, a foreign model can be used independently in as many separate uses as required. The
inputs and outputs of the foreign model, along with the directives controlling its simulation, are specified in a
regular USE statement (see USE). The following simulation directives apply:
- DATA directives specify the value of the elements of the xdata array;
- INPUT directives specify values to be assigned to elements of the xin array at model execution;
- OUTPUT directives specify usage of the values of elements of the xout array at model execution;
- HISTORY directives specify history functions used for assigning pre-simulation history to elements ofxvar
andxin;
- TIMESTEP and INTERPOLATION directives can be specified as in a regular USE statement.

All local variables of a foreign model are considered to be under memory management defmed locally in the foreign
procedure. Storage for the elements of the anays xdata, xin, xout, and xvar is provided automatically by MODELS.
The array xvar can be used by the foreign procedure for storage by MODELS, between calls to the procedure, of
the state variables of the procedure. Storage of these values is provided and managed by MODELS, automatically
taking into account the possibly many separate uses of the same model.
MODELS -- p. 6

2.2.4 EXTERNAL MODELS

No model can be used in a model without being first declared in that model. If the defmition of a model is not
included in a model in which it is used, it must be declared as EXTERNAL to that model, as follows:
MODEL name EXTERNAL

The implied search algorithm for the location of the defmition of an external model inspects the model structure
from the local model upward. All models defmed at the same level as the model containing the external declaration
are candidates (including the host model itself, which permits a model to use itself). This search is carried to the top
of the model structure, one level at a time.

2.3 STATEMENTS

Three categories of statements are available for describing the operation of a model's procedures: assignment
statements, algorithm control statements, and simulation directive statements.

2.3.1 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS

[Link] VALUE ASSIGNMENT

Value assignment statements are used for assigning or modifying the values of a model's variables (see
VARIABLES).

Explicit values are specified on the right-hand side of an assignment in the form of a regular expression (see
REGULAR EXPRESSIONS), a linear sum of variables (see SUM EXPRESSIONS), a linear polynomial of the
derivatives ofa variable (see DERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS), or the integral ofa variable (see INTEGRALS).

Implicit value assignments in the form of differential equations and Laplace or Z transfer functions are also available
for specifying the value of a variable (see DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION, LAPLACE TRANSFER FUNCTION,
Z TRANSFER FUNCTION).

A single value can be assigned to a single variable, to a single element of a variable array, or to a group ofelements
of a variable array sharing the same value, by using a single-value assignment as follows:

1
name
name I expr]
name I expr .. expr ]
3 .= expr

and an array of values can be assigned to a group of elements of a variable array, using an array-value assignment
as follows:
name I expr .. expr] := array expr

Minimllm and maximum limits can be attached to the value of a variable or array of variables inside the expression
describing the value (see EXPRESSIONS).

[Link] DIFFERENTIALEQUATION

A differential equation of the form

( ao + aJD + a fY +... ) y =x
can be used for expressing the value of a variable "y", where "D" is the time derivative operator d/dt.
MODELS -- p. 7

A differential equation is specified in MODELS as follows:

OIFFEQ ( O-polynomial ) I y:= X

where "y" can refer to any variable of the model, and "x" to any variable or input of the model, specified using a
simple name or a reference to an element of an array as follows:
, - name
L name [expr] J
The D-poJynomial describes the tenus "ap;" of the equation, written as follows:

TL :~p~~;;]
LX~~
where each coefficient can be represented as an arbitrary expression (linear or nonlinear, constant or time-varying),
and is separated from the D operator by a vertical bar, which is the "applies to" operator of MODELS, with the
meaning of "expression applied to D;" (see DERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS for examples). Minimum and maximum
limits can be specified for any of the coefficients (see EXPRESSIONS).

The keyword CDIFFEQ can be used instead ofDIFFEQ, as follows:

COIFFEQ ( O-polynomial ) I y:= X

to indicate a constant-coefficients .differential equation. The expressions specifying the value of the coefficients in
CDIFFEQ are not re-evaluated during the execution, regardless of the variation of the values of any input or variable
possibly referred to in these expressions. Using CDIFFEQ instead of DIFFEQ when the coefficients are constant
will increase the simulation speed of the solution by avoiding needless re--evaluation of the coefficients at each step.

Dynamic minimum and maximum limits can be imposed on the value of "y". The limits are specified in the
statement as follows:
OIFFEQ ( O-polynomial ) I y{ limits} := x

or
COIFFEQ ( O-polynomial ) I y{ limits} := x
where the limits are expressed using the following syntax:
{[l DMIN : expr
OMAX: expr
1
}

The limit applied to a variable expressed by means of a differential equation is a "dynamic limit". While an external
static limit would simply clip the value of the variable outside of the procedure by which the value of the variable
is calculated, a dynamic limit modifies the calculation procedure itself by recognizing that the values of the
derivatives of the variable held at a constant limit are zero.

In a case in which the value of the variable calculated by means of a differential equation is subsequently reassigned
by other means during the same time step, the action of any dynamic limit previously applied to that variable at that
time step is ignored.

When the driving variable "x" of a differential equation of "y" is itself a function of "y", the differential equation
should be solved simultaneously with the equation of "x" in a COMBINE group or in an explicitly-defmed iteration
structure, because both are together defining the value of "y" concurrently with the value of the derivatives of "y" .

.. r
MODELS -- p. 8

2-3.1.3 LAPLACE TRANSFER FUNCTION

A Laplace transfer function of the fonn

y N(s)
~

X D(s) a O +a 1s.;-a 1 s-+ ...

can be used for expressing the value

of a variable "y", where "s" is the Laplace operator.

A Laplace transfer function is specified in MODELS as follows:

LAPLACE ( V / X) := (S-polynomial ) / ( S-polynomial )

where "y" can refer to any variable of the model, and "x" to any variable or input of the model, specified using a
simple name or a reference to an element of an array as follows:
. - name
L name [ expr ] J
The s-polynomials describe the terms "a;si .. and "b;~" of the Laplace function, with each polynomial written as
follows:

T[:~P~ ~ ;;-]
LX~~
where each coefficient can be represented as an arbitraIy expression (linear or nonlinear, constant or time-varying),
and is separated from the "s" operator by a vertical bar, which is the "applies to" operator of MODELS, with the
meaning of "expression applied to Sill (see DERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS for examples). M~um and maximum
limits can be specified for any ofthe coefficients (see EXPRESSIONS).

The keyword CLAP LACE can be used instead of LAPLACE, as follows:

CLAPLACE ( V / x) := (S-polynomial) / (S-polynomial )

to indicate a constant-coefficients Laplace function. The expressions specifying the value of the coefficients in
CLAPLACE are not re-evaluated during the execution, regardless of the variation of the values of any input or
variable possibly referred to in these expressions. Using CLAP LACE instead of LAPLACE when the coefficients
are constant will increase the simulation speed of the solution by avoiding needless re-evaluation of the coefficients
at each step.

Dynamic minimum and maximum limits can be imposed on the value of "y". The limits are specified in the
statement as follows:
LAPLACE ( V / x) { limits} := (S-polynomial ) / (S-polynomial )

where the limits are expressed using the following syntax:

{ [ [DMIN: expr
DMAX: expr
1
}

The limit applied to a variable expressed by means of a Laplace function is a "dynamic limit". While an external
static limit would simply clip the value of the variable outside of the procedure by which the value of the variable
is calculated, a dynamic limit modifies the calculation procedure itself by recognizing that the values of the
derivatives of the variable held at a constant limit are zero.
MODELS - p.9

In a case in which the value of the variable calculated by means of a Laplace function is subsequently reassigned
by other means during the same time step, the action of any dynamic limit previously applied to that variable at that
time step is ignored.

When the driving variable "x" of a Laplace function of "y" is itself a function of "y", the Laplace function should
be solved simultaneously with the equation of "x" in a COMBINE group or in an explicitly-defmed iteration
structure, because both are together defining the value of tty" concurrently with the value of the derivatives of "y".

The operator "p" may be used equivalently to "s" when describing the polynomials of the Laplace function.

[Link] Z TRANSFER FUNCTION

A Z transfer function of the fonn

can be used for expressing the value of a variable "y", where "z" is the Z operator.

A Z transfer function is specified in MODELS as follows:

ZFUN ( y / x) := ( Z-polynomial ) / ( Z-polynomial )

where ny" can refer to any variable of the model, and "x" to any variable or input of the model, specified using a
simple name or a reference to an element of an array as follows:
....,-- name
L name [expr] J
The z-polynomials describe the tenns "[Link]-i" and "biZ-i" of the Z function, with each polynomial written as follows:

T[~~pr~~
Lx~r~
where each coefficient can be represented as an arbitrary expression (linear or nonlinear, constant or time-varying),
and is separated from the "z" operator by a vertical bar, which is the "applies to" operator of MODELS, with the
meaning of "expression applied to z-i" (seeDERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS for examples). Minimum and maximum
limits can be specified for any of the coefficients (see EXPRESSIONS).

The keyword CZFUN can be used instead of ZFUN, as follows:

CZFUN ( y / X) := (Z-polynomial ) / (Z-polynomial)
to indicate a constant-coefficients z. function. The expressions specifying the value of the coefficients in CZFUN
are not re~aluated during the execution, regardless of the variation of the values of any input or variable possibly
referred to in these expressions. Using CZFUN instead of ZFUN when the coefficients are constant will increase
the simulation speed of the solution by avoiding needless re-evaluation of the coefficients at each step.

Dynamic minimum and maximum limits can be imposed on the value of "y". The limits are specified in the
statement as follows:
ZFUN ( y / X) { limits} := ( Z-polynomial ) / ( Z-polynomial )
or
CZFUN ( y / x) { limits} := (i-polynomial) / ( Z-polynomial )
MODELS - p.l0

where the limits are expressed using the following syntax:

{[l DMIN :
DMAX: expr
exprl
}

In a case in which the value of the variable calculated by means of a Z function is subsequently reassigned by other
means during the same lime step, the action of any dynamic limit previously applied to that variable at that time step
is ignored.

When the driving variable "x" of a Z function of "y" is itself a function of "y", the Z function should be solved
simultaneously with the equation of "x" in a COMBINE .group or in an explicitly-defmed iteration structure, because
both are together defming the value of "y" concurrently with the value of the derivatives of "y".

2.3.2 ALGORITHM CONTROL STATEMENTS

[Link] IF

The use of an IF statement allows the conditions applying to the selective operation of groups of statements to be
stated explicitly. An IF statement is specified as follows:
-IF expr THEN statement-list
ELSIF expr THEN statement-list

ELSE statement-list - - - - - - - ENDIF

in which the conditions are expressed as logical expressions, and the statement lists can include any arrangement
of MODELS statements.

Only one option among the IF, ELSIF, and ELSE options of an IF statement is operative at a time: it is the fIrst
option for which the logical expression describing the condition associated with the option is evaluated as true (see
EXPRESSIONS). All remaining options are ignored at that time.

[Link] WHILE

The use of a WHILE statement allows the conditions applying to the repetition of a group of statements to be stated
explicitly. A WHILE statement is specified as follows:
WHILE expr DO statement-list ENDWHILE

in which the condition is expressed as a logical expression, and the statement list can include any arrangement of
MODELS statements.

The entire statement list placed in a WHILE statement is considered to be looped onto itself as a repetition. The
condition expressed in the associated logical expression is evaluated every time the decision to enter or re-enter the
list of statements must be made. The group is entered only if the condition is true. The group is then re-entered as
many times as required at the same simulation time as long as the condition continues to be evaluated as true (see
EXPRESSIONS).
MODELS -- p. 11

The use of a FOR statement allows the value of the parameters controlling the repetition of a group of statements

1
to be stated explicitly. One or more parameters can be specified in the same FOR statement, as follows:
FOR argument-name:~ value-list J
DO statement-list ENDFOR

in which the statement list can include any arrangement of MODELS statements.

The values of each parameter ca."} be specified as a list of values, a range of values, and a combination of the two,
as follows:
--~- expr------------------
expr TO expr - - - - - I
expr TO expr BY expr

The entire statement list placed in a FOR statement is considered to be looped onto itself as a repetition. The list
of statements is entered and re-entered as many times as required until all the parameters have been assigned all
combinations of their specified values.

The names chosen for representing the parameters are local to the FOR statement. They are not visible outside the
FOR statement, and can be selected without concern for the possible duplication of names of variables already
defined in the model. They may not, however, duplicate the names of the resident variables and constants and of
the model's constants, data, and inputs.

When a parameter of a FOR statement is used as an array index, and the expression defming its value yields a
non-integer value, a value rounded to the nearest integer is implied and used.

When the size of the "BY" interval used for covering a range of values is not specified, a default value of +1 is
implied.

[Link] DO

The use of a DO statement allows the association of a group of statements to be stated explicitly. An DO list of
statement is specified as follows:
DO statement-list ENDDO

in which the statement list can include any arrangement of MODELS statements.

The use of the OO ... ENDOO statement is equivalent to the use of parentheses marking association in an algebraic
expression. It defmes the boundaries of a group of statements to which a COmmon operation applies (see REDO).

[Link] REDO

The use of a REDO statement allows internal conditions controlling the repetition of a DO ... ENDDO group of
statements to be stated explicitly.

The indication that the operation of a DO ...ENDDO group of statements is to be repeated is specified within the
group by the use of one or more REDO statements. The boundaries of application of the REDO directive are
determined by the extent of the DO ... ENDDO statement enclosing the group that is to be repeated (see DO).
MODELS -- p. 12

The REDO statement sets a repetition flag if it is encountered during the execution of the DO ... ENDDO group of
statements. At the start of each repeated execution of the group, the repetition flag is reset. At the end of each
execution of the group, the status of the flag determines whether the group will be repeated or not.

The REDO directive has no qualifiers, and is specified by the simple use of the "REDO" statement anywhere in a
DO ... ENDDO group.

The simple DO repetition structure differs from the conditional (see WHILE) and indexed (see FOR) repetition
structures as follows:

- the directives controlling the repetition are internal to the group of statements forming the DO ... ENDDO
repetition group;

- the execution of the DO ...ENDDO group of statements is conducted at least once ..

[Link] COMBINE

A group of variables can be solved simultaneously by placing their assignment statements inside a COMBINE group
of linear statements of the form:
COMBINE AS identifier statement-list ENDCOMBINE

or a COMBINE group of nonlinear statements of the form:

COMBINE ITERATE AS identifier statement-list ENDCOMBINE
or COMBINE ITERATE { max-iter} AS identifier statement-list ENDCOMBINE

where the identifier is a name or an indexed name uniquely identifying the group in the model, and "max-iter" is
the maximum allowed number of iterations to convergence, defaulted to 10.

The first form is used for groups of linear variables, and is solved in matrix form using Gaussian elimination. The
statement list of a linear COMBINE can include any of the following value assignments:
- differential equations
- Laplace functions
- Z functions
- linear value assignment of a variable or of an array element of a variable, using: .
- linear sum of variables (sum expression)
- polynomial of derivatives of a variable (derivative expression)
- integral of a variable (integral function)
- first and second derivative of a variable (derivative function)
- no regular expression (considered as possibly nonlinear)
- one set of static or dynamic minimax limits in one of the group's assignments (allowed by the Gaussian
elimination method)

The second form is used for groups ofnonlinear variables, and is solved by iteration using the Newton method. The
statement list of an iterated COMBINE can include a combination of any type of assignments, at the cost of
possibly-longer execution times and possible non-convergence of the solution, or convergence to a local (non-
global) solution point. Accuracy of initial history and size of time step are determining factors in attaining correct
solution points. '

All assignments placed in a COMBINE group are evaluated simultaneously. Examples of simultaneous groups
include:
- a group of value assignments in a tightIy-couple.d (non-delayed) feedback loop,
MODELS -- p. 13

- a set of interdependent variables operating concurrently,

- a procedure described as a set of simultaneous equations.

Each statement in a COMBINE statement list specifies how to calculate the value of each simultaneous variable.
The value of each simultaneous variable cannot be specified in more than one statement.

The simultaneous variables of a COMBINE group are considered to be evaluated concurrently with each other. For
this reason, any reference to the value of these variables within the COMBINE group is considered to be a reference
to the present value of the variable, not to its previous value. It is however possible to refer to the previous value
of a simultaneous variable by defming, outside of the CO MBINE group, a separate variable carrying that previous
value. Note that this distinction is not required in ordinary sequences of statements.

The configuration of a COMBINE group is considered to remain unchanged throughout a simulation. The array
index values identifying the group's simultaneous variables are therefore considered to remain constant throughout
the simulation.

Both the linear and the nonlinear COMBINE groups accept the coefficients used in the statements to be time-
dependent as well as nonlinear expressions. However, in the linear COMBINE solution, the value of each
coefficient, Whether linear or not, is calculated every time step before fmding the solution point of the group. As a
consequence, in cases where the value of a coefficient is dependent on the value of a simultaneous variable, the
coefficient is pre-evaluated using the variable's value from the preceding time step. This allows the solution to
remain linear by inserting one-step delays in these dependency loops. This is discussed in more detail in the section
on model simulation below.

[Link] SEQUENCE

When no other form of structure is specified, the statements describing the operation of a model are considered to
be assembled in a sequence fonn. The sequence structure can also be specified explicitly in a SEQUENCE statement
as follows:
SEQUENCE statement-list ENDSEQUENCE

in which the statement list can include any arrangement of MODELS statements.

The statements assembled in a sequence are considered to operate consecutively from the first statement to the last.

[Link] USE

Once defmed, a model can be used in as many instances as needed in the model in which it is defmed. Each instance
is introduced by its own USE statement specifying the defIned model, the usename of the instance, and the directives
controlling its simulation. The syntax for a USE statement is the following:
USE modelname AS usename -.------......
ITERATE
directive
' - - - - - - ENDUSE

where:
- modelname is the name of the used model;
MODELS -- p. 14

- usename is a unique local identifier of each instance of the used model, in the form of a single name or an
indexed name, as foHows: -
-,- name
L name [ expr] J

- ITERATE is a keyword indicating that this instance may be re-used more than once at each time step;

- INPUT directives are used to assign values to the inputs of the model:

- OUTPUT directives are used to assign the values of the outputs of the model to variables of the calling model;
- DATA directives are used to assign values to the data of the model;
- HISTORY directives are used to assign history functions to variables and inputs of the model;
- TIMESTEP directives are used to assign minimum and maximum limits to the execution time step of the
model;
- INTERPOLATION directives are used to specify the interpolation degrees to be applied to the inputs of the
model if the model is used at sub-steps of the external time step;
- DELAY directives are used to specify the size of storage associated with usage of the delayO function in the
model.

A model can be used only in a model in which its name is visible. The name of a model is only visible in the model
in which it is declared (see MODEL DEFINITION, FOREIGN MODEL, EXTERNAL MODEL).

2.3.3 SIMULATION DIRECTIVE STATEMENTS

[Link] WRITE

Individual lines of text can be written to the computer's standard output during a simulation, as specified in a model
description in one or more WRITE statements as follows:
WRITE ( write-list)

where the write-list is specified as follows:

n=~~:~~:'~
LX~
,

The statement keywords WRITEI and WRITE2 can be used instead of WRITE, to send the respective lines of text
to the files named models.l and models.2 .

[Link] ERROR

Predicted error situations related to the simulation of a model can be stated explicitly in the model, using an
ERROR... STOP structure to specify the pre-termination procedure to be followed before the simulation is halted
in a well-ordered manner.

An ERROR statement is specified as follows:

ERROR statement-list STOP
MODELS -- p. 15

where the statement list can include any arrangement of MODELS statements.

On completion of the execution of the statement list specified in an ERROR statement, the simulation is
immediately terminated.

2_3.3.3 DEPOSIT

The DEPOSIT statement allows a model to modify the value of any program variable of A TP that can be changed
using ATP's SPY command DEPOSIT. The ATP documentation of the Spy commands describes what program
variables can be modified.

The DEPOSIT statement is used as follows:

DEPOSIT( name, value)

DEPOSIT( nattle[expr], value)
DEPOSIT( name[expr.. expr], value)

where 'name' is the name of a program variable accessible from Spy;

and where a single value can be assigned to single variable, to a single element of an array variable, or to a group
of elements of an array variable.

2.4 VALUE-HOLDING ELEMENTS

2.4.1 ARRAYS

The value-holding elements of a model can be specified singly or as elements of unidimensional arrays, with the
following advantages:
- the symmetry or similarity of a group of elements can be made more explicit when an array form is used (for
example in identifying similar inputs to a model)
- the possibility of referring to many instances of a variable or constant under the same name simplifies the use
of repetition structures (WHILE, FOR, DO).

The total index range of an array is inferred from one or more declarations of the elements of the array in the model
definition (see DATA, INPUT, CONSTANTS, VARIABLES). The default index range is one.

A non-array element is identified by simply indicating its name:

name

A single array element is identified by indicating the name of the array and, within square brackets, a numerical
expression specifying the value of the array index:
name [expr]

A group of array elements is identified by indicating the name of the array and, within square brackets, the two
numerical expressions specifying the index range of the group:
name [ expr .. expr]

When the evaluation of an expression defining the value of an array index yields a non-integer value, a value
rOWlded to the nearest integer is automatically implied and used.
MODELS -- p. 16

2.4.2 CONSTANTS

The constants of a model are named value-holders carrying constant values. Their name, optional array range, and
value are declared in one or more CONST declarations in a model definition as follows:
CONST T constant-element {VAL: expr} l
- where each constant element can be specified as a single name, a single array element, or a group of array
elements, as follows:
name

1 name [expr]
name ( expr .. expr 1 j
- where a single value can be assigned to a single constant, to a single element of a constant array, or to a group
of elements of a constant array sharing the same value;
- and where an array of values can be assigned directly to a group of elements of a constant array by using an
array-value [Link] describe the assigned value.

The constants of a model are used as follows:

- their name, array range, and value are declared in one or more CONST declarations in the model definition;
- their value cannot be modified in the model;
- their value can be used in any expression in the model.

2.4.3 RESIDENT CONSTANTS

A number of numerical and logical constants are permanently defmed and are available for use in model
descriptions. Their value can be used directly in any expression of a model (see VALUE REFERENCE,
EXPRESSIONS). Their names are visible in any model, and can be used directly without being declared in a
CONST declaration.

The following resident constants are defmed:

- resident numerical constants:

pi = 3.14159 ...
inf = very large number fitting the computer in use
undefmed = 88888.88888 (value held by any element before it is assigned a first value)
::.. resident logical constants:
false =0
true =1
no =0
yes =1
open =0
closed =1
off =0
on =1
MODELS -- p. 17

2.4.4 DATA

The data of a model are named value-holders carrying use~defmed constant values. They allow a model to be
described with generic dimensions, coefficients, parameters, and flags which can be assigned specific values at the
time the model is used. Their name. optional array range, and optional default value are declared i.n one or more
DATA declarations in the model definition, and they can then be assigned local values in each USE statement where
the model is used. ..

The data elements are declared in a model defmition as follows:

DATA
[L
data-element
data-element { DFLT: expr} 1
- where each data element can be specified as a single name, a single array element, or a group of array elements,
as follows:
name

1 name [ expr ]
name [expr .. expr J j
- where a single default value can be assigned. to a single data, to a single element of a data array, or to a group
of elements of a data array sharing the same value;
- and where an array of default values can be assigned directly to a group of elements of a data array by using
an array-value expression to describe the assigned default value.

In a USE statement, values can be assigned to the data elements of the used model as follows:
DATA T data-element:= expr l
- where a single value can be assigned to a single data, to a single element of a data array, or to a group of
elements of a data array sharing the same value;
- and where an array of values can be assigned in array form to a group of elements of a data array.

Not all data elements of a model need be assigned a value in each model use, provided that a default value has been
specified in the model's DATA declaration for each optional data. assignment.

The value of a data element is determined at the first instant each use of a model is first executed, and remains
constant throughout the rest of the simulation for that model use.

Minimum and maximum limits can be attached to the value of a data element in the expressions describing its
default and assigned values (see EXPRESSIONS).

The data of a model are used as follows:

- their name, optional array range, and optional default value are declared. in one or more DATA declarations
in the model definition;
- their value is assigned in a DATA directive of a USE statement (optional for data with a default value);
- their value cannot be modified in the model;
- their value can be used in any expression in the model;

- references to data values can be used in expressions defining the dimensions of an array in any array range
declaration of a model definition; this allows the size of arrays to be dynamically specified later when the model
is used.
MODELS -- p. 18

2.4.5 VARIABLES

The variables of a model are named value-holders carrying the internal variable values used in a model. Their name
and optional array range are declared in one or more VAR declarations in a model definition as follows:
VAR T var-element )

where each variable element can be specified as a single name, a single array element, or a group of array elements,
as follows:

1
name
name [expr]
name [ expr .. expr ]
J
The variables of a model are used as follows:
- their name and optional array range are declared in one or more VAR declarations in the model defmition;
- their value is assigned and can be modified in any value assignment statement in the model;
- their value can be used in any expression in the model's procedures;
- their value can be used as an output of the model.

2.4.6 RESIDENT VARIABLES

A number of variables are permanently defmed and are available for use in a model. Their value can be used directly
in any variable expression of a model (see VALUE REFERENCE), and cannot be modified in assignment
statements in the model. Their names are visible in any model, and can be used directly without being declared in
a V AR declaration.

The following resident variables provide access to the time characteristics of the simulation of a model. A separate
set of values of these variables exists locally for each use of each model. They are:
t the present value of the simulation time in the model;
prevtime the previous value of the simulation time in the model;
timestep the present value of the simulation interval in the model (=t-prevtime);
endtime the external simulation time to which the model is to be updated;
fullstep the total time interval over which the model is to be updated (= endtime - previous endtime);
maxstep the calculated present maximum allowed value of the time step in the model;
minstep the calculated present minimum allowed value of the time step in the model;

Three other resident variables are defmed globally for a simulation. They are:
starttime the value of time at the start of the simulation;
stop time the value of time at which the simulation will end;
startstep the value of the outermost time step at the start of the simulation.
In addition to representing the present value of the simulation time in a model, the variable t can also be used as a
general reference to the value of time in expressions describing history functions in a model (see HISTORY).
MODELS -- p. 19

2.5 MODEL INTERFACE

2.5.1 INPUT

The inputs of a model are named value-holders canying the external input values used in a model. Their name,
optional array range, and optional default value are declared in one or more INPUT declarations in a model
defmition, and they can then be assigned local values in each USE statement where the model is used.

The input elements are declared in a model defmition as follows:

INPUT input-element
[ ~ input-element { DFLT: expr} {
- where each input element can be a single name, a single array element, or a group of array elements, as follows:
name

1 name [expr]
name [expr .. expr 1 j
- where a single default value can be assigned to a single input, to a single element of an input array, or to a
group of elements of an input array sharing the same value;
- and where an array of default values can be assigned directly to a group of elements of an mput array by using
an array-value expression to describe the assigned default value.

In a USE statement, values can be assigned to the input elements of the used model as follows:
INPUT T input-element := expr l
- where a single value can be assigned to a single input, to a single element of an input array, or to a group of
elements of an input array sharing the same value;
- and where an array of values can be assigned in array form to a group of elements of an input array.

Not all input elements of a model need be assigned a value in each model use, provided that a default value has been
specified in the model's INPUT declaration for each optional input assignment.

The value of an input element is re-calculated at each call to a model use.

Minimum and maximum limits can be attached to the value of an input in the expressions describing its default and
assigned values (see EXPRESSIONS).

The input variables of a model are used as follows:

- their name, optional array range, and optional default value are declared in one or more INPUT declarations
in the model defmition;
- their value is assigned in an INPUT directive of the USE statement (optional for inputs with a default value);
- their value cannot be modified in the model;
- their value can be used in any expression in the model's procedures;
- their value can be used as an output of the model.
MODELS -- p. 20

Any input or variable of a model can be used as outputs of the model. Their name and optional array range are
specified as outputs of the model in one or more OUTPUT declarations in the model definition as follows:
OUTPUT T output-element l
where each output element can be specified as a single name, a single array element, or a group of array elements,
as follows:

1 name
name [ expr ] ---~
3
name [ expr " expr ]

In a USE statement, the value of any output of the used model can be assigned to any variable of the calling model.
The use of a model's outputs is specified in one or more OUTPUT directives of a USE statement, as follows:
OUTPUT T var-element := output-element l
- where the value of a single output can be assigned to a single variable, to a single element of a variable array,
or to a group of elements of a variable array assigned the same output value;

- and where the value of a group of elements of an output array can be assigned in array fonn to a group of
elements of a variable array.

All outputs specified in a model definition are available for reference in any use of the model, although not all
outputs need be used in each model use.

2.6 FUNCTIONS

2.6.1 FUNCTIONS IN A MODEL

A function describes the method by which a value or an array of values is calculated, given the values assigned to
the function's arguments. When used in an expression, a function returns the value or array of values it calculates.

Four types of functions can be declared in a model defmition:

- statement functions
- pointlist functions
- foreign functions
- external functions

In addition, two sets of functions are pre-defmed and are available for use in any model:
- resident numerical and logical functions
- resident simulation functions

2.6.2 STATEMENT FUNCTION

A statement function is a parametrized expression evaluated according to the values assigned to the function's
arguments. It calculates a numerical value, or an array of numerical values, and is defmed in a model as follows:
FUNCTION name ( T argument-name l
) := expr
MODELS -- p. 21

The input arguments of a function are single elements with names that are local to the function. They are not visible
outside the function, and can be selected without concern for the possible duplication of names already defmed
outside the function. They may not, however, duplicate the names of the resident variables and constants dermed
in MODELS.

A statement function is used by referring to the function's name and providing values for the function'S arguments
in the same order as they appear in the function definition:
function-name ( LXP~ )
,

A statement function can be used in any expression of the model in which it is dermed (see EXPRESSIONS), except
in its own defmition.

Minimum and maximum limits can be attached to the value of the expression describing the statement function in
the function definition (see EXPRESSIONS). Minimum and maximum limits can be attached to the value of the
function's arguments when the function is used, in the expressions describing their value.

2.6.3 POINTLIST FUNCTION

A pointlist function is a list of coordinates {(xk'Yk)' k=l..n}, ordered in increasing values of x. The function is
assumed to be defmed over the entire range of x (from -infmity to +infmity) in one of the two following ways:
- either as a continuous function, where the missing inteIIDediate points ('S' y) in
the interval Xk_1 < 'S < x k will be interpolated using linear of quadratic interpolation;
- or as a discontinuous function, where)} holds a constant value equal to Yk-I for each missing inteIIDediate point
('S' y) in the interval Xk_1 < 'S < x k .

A pointlist function is defmed in a model as follows:

FUNCTION name POINTlIST T (expr, expr) l
The expressions defming the coordinates of each point are regular expressions which can refer to the value of any
value-holding element visible in the model, and which can use other functions available in the model,. including
other pointlist functions (allowing the use offamilies of parametrized curves defmed as pointlists of pointlists).

A pointlist function is used by referring to the function's name and by providing a value for its "x" argument and
for its optional "pol" argument, in the fOIID of f(x) or f(x,pol), as follows:
function-name (LXP~)
,

- where "x" is the value at which the pointlist function f(x) is to be evaluated;
- and where "pol" is an optional argument indicating the interpolation degree 0, 1, or 2 used for evaluating the
function between its defmed points (O=discontinuous, 1=linear, 2=quadratic) (default= 1).

A pointlist function can be used in any expression of the model in which it is defmed.

When the variable x is considered to be holding values of time, the pointlist function can be considered to represent
a function of time f(t).
MODELS -- p. 22

2.6.4 FOREIGN FUNCTIONS

In addition to defIning functions using the MODELS language, it is also possible to use functions written in other
programming languages. MODELS provides a pre-defmed interface that can be used by the user to connect
"foreign" functions to a simulation. The interface is defmed as one array carrying the input arguments passed to the
function, and returning the output values calculated in the function. For example, a foreign function written in C
would have the form:
double cfun(double xarg[])
{ ...
xarg(O]=.. .
xarg(l]= .. .
xarg(2]=.. .
return 3; 1* indicating it placed 3 values on xarg[] *1
}

where
- cfun: arbitrary name of the foreign function
- xarg: array of values carrying the input and output values of the function

In order to be recognized as a function, a foreign function is declared in the model where it is used. The declaration
is as follows:
FUNCTION name FOREIGN idname {IXARG : expr }

where:
- name: local name by which the foreign function can be referenced in the model;
- idname: arbitrary name used in the connection table of the foreign interface subroutine of MODELS to
recognize calls to this function;
- xarg: pre-defmed keyword that must be used to specify the size of the argument array.

A foreign function must be compiled and linked to the simulation program before it can be called by MODELS. Any
source language may be used, provided that the compiled object code is compatible with the linker available on the
computer platform used to run the simulation. The interface routine of MODELS (in file modOO [Link]) is where the
user registers the correspondence between the idname used in the foreign function declarations, and the actual names
of the foreign functions linked with the program.

A foreign function is .used by referring to the function's name and providing values for the function's arguments in
the same order as they are expected in the foreign function:
function-name (LXP~)
,

A foreign function can be used in any expression of the model in which it is defmed. Minimum and maximum limits
can be attached to the value of the function's arguments when the function is used, with each expression describing
their value.

2.6.5 EXTERNAL FUNCTIONS

No function can be used in a model without being flrst declared in that model. If the defmition of a function is not
included in a model in which it is used, it must be declared as EXTERNAL to that model, as follows:
FUNCTION name EXTERNAL
MODELS -- p. 23

The implied search algorithm for the location of the defmition of an external function inspects the model structure
from the local model upward.

2.6.6 RESIDENT FUNCTIONS

A number of numerical and logical functions are permanently defined and are available for use in a model. Their
names are visible in any model, and can be used directly without being declared in a FUNCTION declaration.

A resident function is used by referring to the function's name and by providing values for the function's arguments,
as follows:
function-name (LXPJ)
,

where each argument of the function is assigned a value, in the same sequence as the arguments appear in the
function defmition.

The following resident functions are defmed:

- numerical functions returning one value for each input argument:
abs absolute value of each argument
sqrt square root of each argument
exp exponential of each argument
In base-e logarithm of each argument
log 10 base-l0 logarithm of each argument
10g2 base-2 logarithm of each argument
recip 1Ix for each x, with zero-division protection (110 = inf)
factorial x! for each argument x
trunc integer part of each argument
fract fractional part of each argument
round rounded value of each argument (to the nearest integer)
sign =-1 when x<O, =0 when x=O, =+1 when x>O, for each x
rad value conversion from degrees to radians, for each. argument
deg value conversion from radians to degrees, for each argument
sin sine of each argument
cos cosine of each argument
tan tangent' of each argument
asin arc sine of each argument
acos arc cosine of each argument
atan arc tangent of each argument
sinh hyperbolic sine of each argument
cosh hyperbolic cosine of each argument
tanh hyperbolic tangent of each argument
asinh arc hyperbolic sine of each argument
acosh arc hyperbolic cosine of each argument
atanh arc hyperbolic tangent of each argument
- double-argument numerical functions returning a single value:
atan2(xl,x2) l with 4-quadrant range as determined by the signs of Xl and x2
tan- (x l /x2)
binom(n,r) C(n,r) combination of r elements in a set of n
= n!l(n-r)!r!
permut(n,r) P(n,r) permutation of r elements in a set of n
=n!/(n-r)!
- multiple-argument numerical functions returning a single value:
minimum value of {XI' x2.... }
MODELS -- p. 24

max(x"x 2 ,· .. ) maximum value of {x" x2, ••• }

nonn( x, ,x2 , •.• ) Euclidian nann =sqrt(X,2+x/+... )

- no-argument numerical functions returning a single value:
random single random number between 0 and I, uses no argument
- logical functions returning one value for each input argument:
bool value conversion of each argument from numerical to Boolean
= I when x >0
=Owhenx <=0
- multiple-argument logical functions returning a single value:
and(x"x 2 , ••• ) returns value of "x, AND X2 AND ... "
=1 only when all the arguments are true
returns value of "x, OR x2 OR ... "
=1 when one or more of the arguments are true
returns value of ''NOT(x, AND x2 AND ... )"
=1 when one or more arguments are false
returns value of "NOT(x, OR x 2 OR ... )"
=1 onlywhen all the arguments are false
returns value of "xl XOR x2 XOR ... "
= 1 when only one of the arguments is true

2.6.7 RESIDENT SIMULATION FUNCTIONS

A number of functions which are related to the time simulation of a model are permanently defmed and are available
for use in a model. Their names are visible in any model, and can be used directly without being declared in a
FUNCTION declaration.

A resident simulation function is used by indicating the function's name, the single element to which the function
is applied, and values of any required function arguments, as follows:
function-name ( element =-:=--l
LX~ )
.
- where the element can be any input or variable element of a model, as follows:
-,- name
L name [ expr ] J
- and where, in the case of the functions histdef and histval, the element can also be the integral of any input or
variable of the model:
integral ( -,- name J )
L name [ expr ]

For those functions requiring inteIpolation or extrapolation (seethe list of functions below), the interpolation degree
''pol'' is an optional argument indicating the interpolation degree 0, 1, or 2 used for evaluating the function between
the available values of the element (O=discontinuous, l=linear, 2=quadratic) (default=l).

The following resident simulation functions are defmed:

deriv(x) the value of the flrst-order time derivative of x at the present simulation time
deriv2(x) the value of the second-order time derivative of x at the present simulation time
MODELS -- p. 25

delay(x,d,pol) past value of x at time (t-d), including references to pre-simulation times using
the history function assigned to x
prevval(x) the value of x at the previous simulation tinle
backval(x,t,pol) past value of x at a time t within the last time step
backtime(x,vai,pol) time at which x had the value val during the last time step
= "undefmed" if not possible

predval(x,t,pol) predicted value of x at time t

predtime(x,val,pol) predicted value of time at which x will reach the value val
= "undefmed" if not possible
histdef(x) a reference to the defmition of the history function associated with x, used when
defming the history of an element in terms of the history of another element
histval(x,t) the value of x evaluated at time t, calculated using the history function associated
with x
atp(x) the value of a single ATP program variable or array element x accessible by
ATP's Spy command EXAMINE

2.7 NAMES

2.7.1 NAME DEFINITION

A name is a string of contiguous characters of arbitrary length, starting with a letter, and including any number of
letters, digits, and underscore characters "_". Names in a model are not case-sensitive.

Names are used for identifying models, functions, and value-holding elements (constant, data, input, variable,
function argument, and FOR parameters). The reference to a named element is direct, by simple indication of the
name.

The following identifiers have a reserved interpretation and may not be assigned as names in the description of a
model. They are:
- the names of the resident models, functions, variables, and constants;
- the syntactic keywords of the MODELS language.

2.7.2 USE PATHNAMES

A use pathname is the unique pathname describing the location of a model use in a system. It consists of a
contiguous sequence ofusenames, each separated by a period. A USename is the local identification name assigned
to a model in each use of the model, and may be a single name or an indexed array name, as follows:
-,- name
L name [ expr ] J
Use pathnames are used by the simulation program in the printout of warning and error messages.
MODELS -- p. 26

2.8 VALUES

2.8.1 VALUE TYPES

Three types of values are available: numerical values, logical values, and text values.

Numerical values are integer or real values in the interval (-inf,+inf), specified as follows:

where n is any contiguous sequence of decimal digits.

Logical values are the values troe and false, and can be specified by using the resident logical constants troe(false,
on/off, closed/open, and yes/no.

A text value is an arbitrary string of characters enclosed in quotes or apostrophes. A string can include any character
except the string delimiter used for enclosing the string.

Numerical values can be used directly as logical values, where they are interpreted as troe when positive, and as
false when negative or zero.

Logical values can be used directly as numerical values, where they are interpreted as having the value 1.0 when
troe, and 0.0 when false.

2.8.2 VALUE REFERENCE

The value associated with a named value-holding element can be accessed in any expression of the model in which
the name of the element is visible. The value-holding elements visible in a model are:
- the constants, data, variables, and inputs declared in the model
- the resident constants and variables of MODELS

The names of the arguments of a statement function are visible only in the function where they are defmed.

The names of the parameters of a FOR statement are visible only in the statement list associated with the FOR
statement.

The value of an element is accessed directly by using the element's name as a reference to its value.

The reference context of an expression is the model in which the value-holding elements referred to in the
expression are defmed The reference context of most expressions is the model in which the expression is specified.
However, the reference context of some expressions in a USE statement also includes the model being used, as
follows:
- data names of the used model can be referenced in any expression of a USE statement defining values or array
indexes of elements of the used model;
- input names of the used model can be referenced in any expression of a USE statement defming values of
elements of the used model, except values of data elements of the used model.
MODELS -- p. 27

2.8.3 VALUE LIMITS

Static limits are specified in the following format:

{ [ [MIN.
MAX: expr
eXP'l
}

Static limits ("clipping") can be applied to any of the following calculated values:

- a regular expression
- a sum expression
- a derivative polynomial expression

Dynamic limits are specified in the following format:

{ [ [ DMIN • exp,
DMAX: expr
1
}

Dynamic limits can be applied to any of the following calculated value:

- integrals
- variables calculated by a differential equation
- variables calculated by a Laplace or Z transfer function

A static limit modifies the value of a variable outside and independently of the procedure by which the variable is
calculated. A dynamic limit directly affects the procedure used for the calculation of the variable.

In -control circuitry, applying a dynamic limit corresponds to modifying the value of a signal within a component's
internal feedback loop. Applying a static limit corresponds to modifying the value of a signal externally from the
component producing the signal.
MODELS -- p_ 28

The effect of applying an external static limit and an internal dynamic limit to an integral, for instance, is
demonstrated in the following example:

." without Ii miter

/' "
"
static limiter
integral(x)
....:..-.::..---/
, dynamic limiter

x(t)
-'-----'

2.9 EXPRESSIONS

2.9.1 EXPRESSIONS IN A MODEL

An expression is a description of the method by which a value is determined. An expression can refer to names of
functions and of value-holding elements visible in the context where the expression is used (see VALUE
REFERENCE). An expression can be used for specifying the value of a single element or of a group of array
elements. It is implicitly an array of one or more elements.

The type of value (numerical or logical) resulting from the evaluation of an expression is determined by the type
of the operators used in the expression.

The following forms of expressions can be used in MODELS:

- regular expressions
- sum expressions
- derivative expressions
- use of integrals

2.9.2 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS

A regular expression is either a logical expression or a numerical expression depending on the operators used in the
expression. The value of a regular expression is either a single value or an array of values depending on the value
descriptions used in the expression.

A regular expression is dermed in the following format and order of precedence:

- a regular expression consists of one or more logical terms separated by the OR operator:

T I09ic~IRterm T
- a logical term consists of one of more logical factors separated by the AND operator:

~i~~~ctorT
MODELS -- p. 29

- a logical factor is a logical relation or a numerical expression:

-,-- logical. relation -r
L numertcal expr -.J

- a logical relation consists of two numerical expressions separated by one of the six relational operators:
- - numerical expr - - relational op - numerical expr-

where the relational operators are:

> greater than
>= greater than or equal to
< less than
<= less than or equal to
= . equal to
<> not equal to

- a numerical expression consists of one or more numerical terms separated by the addition or subtraction
operators + and - :
Tnum~termT

- a numerical tenn consists of one or more numerical factors separated by the mUltiplication or division operators
* and/:

- a numerical factor is an exponent relation or a value reference:

~
xponent relation=r
modulo relation
value reference

- an exponent relation consists of two value references separated by the exponent operator ** :
value-ref ** value-ref

- a modulo relation consists of two value references separated by the modulo operator MOD:
value-ref ** value-ref

- a value reference is one of the following:

1'-------,."""'"'1'"-
:~r:~~~~~e
named value
function value
NOT ( expr )

where:
- a simple numerical value or an array value can be described directly
- a named value, a function value, or a sub-expression can be preceded by the unary numerical or logical
inverse operators - and NOT
MODELS -- p. 30

- a numerical value is described in the following format:

-..c-+-j"- n-[-l--n-j-'--"["'--E=:==:-n-j"""-
. L+J
where n is any contiguous sequence of decimal digits

- an array value is a list of regular single-value or array-value expressions enclosed in square brackets:
- [--''"""""""'1'-- exp:v-:-J
[ LarraY,~J_
- a named value is:
a reference by name to a single value-holding element,
- a reference by name and array index to a single element of an array,
- or a reference by name and array index range to a group of elements of an array
(when used, the left bracket must immediately follow the name)
name

1 name [expr]
name [ expr .. expr ]
j
- a function value is expressed as a function name followed by a list of argument values
(the left parenthesis must immediately follow the function name)
function-name ([Link]~ )
I

- a sub-expression is a regular expression enclosed in parentheses.

( expr)

Numerical limits can be applied to the value of a regular expression. Limits applied to an expression are static limits.

{ [ L MIN: expr
MAX: expr
1
They are specified immediately following the expression, enclosed in a pair of braces:

Some examples of regular expressions follow:

a + b[i+2] sum of single element a and of element [i+ 2] of array b

-sin(2omegat) use of resident function sin()

a AND NOTb logical expression

a>=2*b +c**(2*d) logical expression

-3.582 * 3E6 product of two numerical values

[3,5,9, cnt-2] array value of length 4

MODELS -- p. 31

2.9.3 SUM EXPRESSIONS

A linear polynomial expression of the fonn

Go + a,x, + ar] +...
can be used for expressing the value of a variable y.

A linear polynomial is specified in MODELS as follows:

y :::: sum ( polynomial)

where y can refer to any variable of the model, specified using a single name or a single element of an array:
-,- name
L name [expr] J

The polynomial describes the tenns "a;Xj" of the equation, written as follows:

T [ ~~~~I
~ ~ element-L
where each element can be a single name or a single element of an array:
-,- name
L name [ expr ] J
and where each coefficient can be represented as an arbitrary expression (linear or nonlinear, constant or time-
varying), and is separated from the element by a vertical bar, which is the "applies to" operator of MODELS, with
the meaning of "expression applied to x". Minimum and maximum limits can be specified for any of the coefficients
(see EXPRESSIONS).

Minimum and maximum limits can be assigned to the value of the sum as follows:
y:= sum ( polynomial) { limits}

Limits applied to a sum expression are static limits_ They are specified immediately following the sum expression,
enclosed in a pair of braces:
{ [ (MIN: exprl
MAX: expr
}

An expression is specified as a sum expression when it is necessaxy to put in evidence the linearity of the expression
with respect to the x elements. It can be used as the right-hand side of any value assignment, but is required only
in a COMBINE group of statements (see COMBINE, SIMULTANEOUS ELEMENTS).

The following are examples of sum terms:

3.0 I a coef= 3.0, x-element::: a
1.0 I b[2*i-6] coef= 1.0, x-element = b[2*i-6]
6.42*a I coef= 6.42*a, no x-element
MODELS -- p. 32

2.9.4 DERIVATIVE EXPRESSIONS

References to the value of the fIrst- and second-order time derivatives of an input or variable can be used in any
expression of a modeL by means of the functions deriv(x) and deriv2(x) (see RESIDENT SIMULATION
FUNCTIONS). Alternately, a linear polynomial of the time derivatives of an element can be used, of the fornl:
(a o +ap+ap2+ ... )x
where D is the time derivative operator representing dldt.

In MODELS, a derivative expression can be used for describing a linear polynomial of derivatives, as follows:
y := derivpol ( D-polynomial ) I x

- where y can refer to any variable of the model, and x can refer to any input or variable of the model, each
specified using a single name or a single element of an array:
-,- name
L name [expr] J
- and where the polynomial is separated from the element to which it is applied by a vertical bar, the "applies
to" operator of MODELS, with the meanmg of "polynomial applied to x".

The D-polynomial describes the terms "api" of the equation, written as follows:

TC ~~p~~~
LX~~
where each coefficient can be represented as an arbitrary expression (linear or nonlinear, constant or time-varying),
and is separated from the D operator by a vertical bar, the "applies to" operator of MODELS, with the meaning of
"expression applied to D". Minimum and maximum limits can be specified for any of the coefficients (see
EXPRESSIONS).

Minimum and maximum limit values can be assigned to a derivative polynomial as follows:
y:= derivpol ( D-polynomial ) I x { limits}

Limits applied to a derivative polynomial expression are static limits. They are specified immediately following the
element to which the derivative expression is applied, as follows:
{ [ (MIN :expri
MAX: expr
-}
An expression is specified as a derivative expression when it is necessary to put in evidence the linearity of the
expression with respect to the derivatives of x. It can be used as the right-hand side of any value assignment, but
is required only in a COMBINE group of statements (see COMBINE, SIMULTANEOUS ELEMENTS).

An example of a derivative polynomial is shown below, with its interpretation:

(cos(a)1 +21D +3.56*aID2 -11D3) I x : cos(a)'x +2·dx/dt +3.56"a·d2xJdt2 -d3xJdt3

2.9.5 INTEGRALS

[Link] INTEGRAL EXPRESSION

The time integral of any input or variable of a model is automatically calculated during the simulation whenever an
integral expression is evaluated. The value of the integral of an element at a given time step is a cumulative value
dependent on the previous value of the integral and on the present and previous value of the integrated element.y
MODELS -- p. 33

An integral expression is specified as follows:

y := integral ( x)

where y and x can be references to a single element or to a single array element, of the fonn:
-,- name
L name [ expr ] J
Minimum and maximum limits can be assigned to the value of an integral as follows:
y := integral ( x) {limits}

{ [ ( DMIN : expr
DMAX: expr
1
They are specified immediately following the integral, enclosed in a pair of braces:

The limit applied to an integral is a "dynamic limit". While an external static limit would simply clip the value of
the integral separately from the procedure by which it is calculated, a dynamic limit modifies the calculation
procedure itself by recognizing that the past value used in a later calculation of the integral is the integral's limited
value.

When more than one integral expressions affect the same element at a given time step of a simulation, the integral
is re-evaluated each time it is used, to reflect possible changes in the value of the element to which it applies. Each
new evaluation of the integral during the same time step also releases any previously-applied limit to that integral
at that time step.

[Link] INTEGRAL VALUE RESET

The value of an integral can be reset at any time of a simulation, using an integral value assignment. A single value
can be assigned to the integral of a single element, of a single array element, or of a group of array elements sharing

integral ( 1
the same value, by using a single-value integral assignment as follows:
name
name[expr]-------~·
J ):= expr

name [ expr .. expr ]

and an array of values can be assigned to the integral of a group of array elements, using an array-value integral
assignment as follows:
integral ( name [ expr .. expr] ):= array expr

Minimum and maximum limits can be attached to the value assigned to the integral, in the expression describing
the value (see EXPRESSIONS).

From the point where a reset value is assigned to an integral until the end of the execution of that model at that
simulation time, the value of the integral becomes fixed, and is not influenced anymore by the value of the integrated
variable.
MODELS -- p. 34

2.10 FORMAT

2.10.1 DESCRIPTION FORMAT

The syntax of MODELS allows the use of free-style fonnatting throughout the description of a model. The
interpretation of the description is based exclusively on the use of single keywords (for example, DATA, INPUT,
TlMESTEP) and of sets of delinliters (for example, MODEL. .. ENDMODEL, USE ... ENDUSE, IF ... ELSE ... ENDIF,
"..... ), and by the local context of interpretation defmed by their use.

The interpretation of the description of a model is not sensitive to the case of the identifiers used in the model.
Uppercase letters have been used for identifying the various keywords in this documentation, but only in order to
increase their visibility.

2.10.2 DELIMITERS

Names, numerical values, and reserved keywords, must be written as strings of contiguous characters.

In a name, any character other than a letter, a digit, or the underscore character, is interpreted to indicate the end of
the name (see NAME DEFINITION).

In a numerical value, any character other than a decimal digit, a plus sign, a minus sign, a period, or the letter E, is
interpreted to indicate the end of the numerical value (see VALUE TYPES).

In a reserved keyword, any character other than a letter is interpreted to indicate the end of the keyword (see NAME
DEFINITION).

All groups of commas, semicolons, and white-space characters (spaces, tabs, carriage returns, line feeds), are
interpreted as spaces, with no additional syntactical meaning. There is one exception: a carriage return or line feed
is used to mark the end of an in-line comment.

2.10.3 LINE INDENTATION

Line indentation can be used in the description of a model for the purpose of facilitating the reader's identification
of the structure of the model description.

Any space or tab characters used for indenting the lines of a model description are only visual place markers in the
written presentation of the model, and cany no syntactic meaning affecting the interpretation of the description,
other than their regular use as delimiters of names and numerical values (see DELIMITERS).

Blank lines can similarly be used freely for increasing the readability of a model description.

2.10.4 COMMENTS

Comments can be included anywhere in a model description, and do not affect the syntactic interpretation of the
model description.

Two types of comments can be used: in-line comments, and block comments.

An in-line comment is any text beginning with a hyphen string (two or more contiguous hyphens) and ending at
the end of the line.
MODELS -- p. 35

A block comment is enclosed by the keywords:

COMMENT ... ENDCOMMENT
or ILLUSTRATION ... ENDILLUSTRA TION

and can contain any combination of text and ~'Taphics, as follows:

COMMENT tex~ 0S3

t L graphics
' - - - - - - - " - - ENDCOMMENT

or
ILLUSTRATION --.,.......r---- text :-l
[l graphics 1
- ENDILLUSTRATION

3. MODEL SIMULATION

3.1 SIMULATION DIRECTIVES

3.1.1 TIMESTEP

Over the course of a simulation, the state of a model is updated at successive instants of time, every time the model
is called for execution by the environment in which it is used. The size of the time interval between two successive
instants of execution of a model is referred to as the simulation time step of the model.

It is possible to defme limits on the pennitted time interval between successive executions of a model. Variable
minimum and maximum size of a model's time step can be specified in any defInition and in any USE of a model,
using one or more TIMESTEP directives, as follows:
TIMESTEP [ l MIN: expr
MAX: expr
i
Whenever a model is called for execution after a time step that is smaller than the calculated minimum time step,
the execution request is ignored. A model can in this way be executed with a time step larger than the time step used
in the environment in which the model is used, its state and its outputs remaining constant from one execution to
the next.

Whenever a model is called for execution after a time step that is larger than the calculated maximum time step, the
model's local time step is divided into equal sub-steps of a size satisfying the stated maximum, and the model is
executed successively at each sub-step until the complete interval is covered. A model can in this way be executed
with a time step smaller than the time step used in the environment in which the model is used (see
INTERPOLATION for calculation of the inputs to the model at each sub-step).

When no minimum and maximum values are specified for the time step, a model is executed every time it is called
by a USE statement.

The values of the minimum and maximum specifIed for a model's time step in a USE statement are subject to the
minimum and maximum values specified in the defmition of the used model.
MODELS -- p. 36

3.1.2 INTERPOLATION

When a model is executed, the values presented to its inputs by the calling model are values calculated at the
simulation time of the calling model. If the used model runs at sub-steps of the calling model (see TIMESTEP), the
values of the inputs are undefined at those intermediate times, and must be estimated by the model, using
interpolation.

The inputs can be treated as continuous or discontinuous, depending on the level of interpolation used for
calculating their value for sub-step execution (O=discontinuous, 1=linear, 2=quadratic) (default= 1).

The interpolation degree to be applied to the inputs of a model for sub-step execution can be specified for individual
input elements, in the model defmition and in USE statements, in INTERPOLATION DEGREE directives of the
form:

- where a different degree value can be specified for different lists of input elements;
- and where a default degree value can be specified for the remaining unlisted input elements.

Each list of elements is written in the following form:

Te'ement l
with each element either a single input, a single element of an input array, or a group of elements of an input array,
as follows:
name

1 name [expr]
name [expr .. expr 1 j
When unspecified, a default interpolation degree value of 1 is automatically selected.

An INTERPOLATION DEGREE directive specified in a model defmition applies to all uses of the model, and can
be modified by specifying individual INTERPOLATION DEGREE directives in local USE statements.

Interpolation on the values ofan element x in an interval (Xc, XI) has the following interpretation depending on the
interpolation degree:
o uses the value Xc for any time to <= t < tl
uses the value XI for time t = tl
(equivalent to considering x as a step function oftime)
uses linear interpolation based on the two most recent values of x
2 uses quadratic interpolation based on the three most recent values of x

3.1.3 DELAY

The resident simulation function delayO provides access to past values of the input and variable elements of a
modeL The simulation program reserves a default number of memory cells for each element to which the function
is applied. However, a different number of storage cells can be assigned to any delay element, in the model defmition

1
and in USE statements, in DELAY CELLS directives of the form:

DELAY CELLS L..(6~SL~ ~ : expr T

MODELS -- p. 37

- where a different number of cells can be specified for different lists of elements;
- and where a new default degree value can be specified for the remaining unlisted elements.

Each list of elements is written in the following form:

Te'ement l
with each element either a single element, a single array element, or a group of array elements, as follows:
name

1 name [ expr]
name [ expr .. expr]
j
When unspecified, the program reserves a default number of 100 cells for each element to which the delay function
~~~. .

A DELAY CELLS directive specified in a model definition applies to all uses of the model, and can be modified
by specifying individual DELA Y CELLS directives in local USE statements.

Depending on how it is specified, the number of storage cells for each delay element is calculated as follows:
if specified in a DELAY CELLS list in the USE defmition, then that number;
- else if specified in a DELAY CELLS list in the MODEL defmition, then that number;
- else if there ~ a DELAY CELLS DFLT in the USE defmition, then that number;
- else if there is a DELAY CELLS DFLT in the MODEL defmition, then that number;
- else 100 cells.

This allows the developer and. the user of a model to adjust the storage size that is required to match the maximum
number of storage cells necessary for lodging the largest delay value applied to a given element (number of cells =
largest delay value / smallest time step value).

3.2 SIMULATION PROCESS

3.2.1 INITIALIZATION

During the simulation of a system, the state of each used model is evaluated repeatedly at discrete instants of time
over a number of time intervals (the time steps of the model) covering the course of the simulation.

Evaluating the state of a used model at a given instant of the simulation consists in calculating the present value of
the model's variables and integrals according to the execution procedure describing the operation of the model (see
EXECUTION), using the values being applied to the model's inputs (see INPUT) and the accumulated history of
some of the model's variables required in the operation of the model.

At the first call for execution of a used model, this evaluation could not be conducted without first knowing the
history of the quantities expected to have been carried from non-existent previous execution times.

The minimum initialization task then consists in defming the pre-simulation history of the quantities expected to
have been carried from the missing previous execution times.

A history function can be associated to any variable of a model. It can be defmed as a general function of time f(t),
including references to pointlist functions and to the history functions of other variables.
MODELS -- p. 38

Three levels of history defmition can be successively applied. The history can be first specified in the defmition of
a model in the form of a default function; then in the HISTORY section of each USE statement; and fmally in the
form of history assignment statements in the !NIT procedure of the model description.

3.2.2 HISTORY FUNCTIONS

During the simulation of a model, references are made to the past values of an element in the following situations:
- when referring to a variable for which a value has not yet been detennined at the present execution time;
- when using a variable as argument of the simulation functions delay, prevval, predval, predtime, backval,
backtime, histdef, histval, deriv, and deriv2;
- when applying a Laplace or Z function, a differential equation, an integral, or a derivative expression to an
element;
- when using interpolation on the inputs ofa model during sub-step execution (see INTERPOLATION).
These past values do not exist when a reference is for a simulation time preceding the start of the execution of a
model However, it is possible to defme history functions that describe the value of an element for times preceding
the simulation of a model. History functions can be defmed for any element of a model, as follows:
- in HISTORY directives in the definition ofa model;
- in HISTORY directives in a USE statement defining the use of a model;
- in a history assignment statement inside the INIT procedure of a model.

All variables publicly requiring a history function in a model (as opposed to history functions privately defmed in
the INIT section of a model) must be declared in a HISTORY directive of the model definition. HIS TORY directives
in the model defInition can also be used for assigning a default history function to any input or·variable element of
the model. The fonnat ofa HISTORY directive in the model definition is the following:
HISTORY
lL history-element
history-element { DFLT: expr} =l
- where a history element can be a single name, a single array element, or a group of array elements, as follows:
name

1 name [ expr]
name [expr .. expr J J
- where a history element can also be the integral of a single name or of a single array element, as follows:
integral ( -,- name J)
L name [ expr J

- where a single default value can be assigned to a single history element or to a group of array elements sharing
the same value;
- and where an array of default values can be assigned directly to a group of array elements using an array-value
expression to describe the assigned default value.

In a USE statement, history functions are assigned to the elements of the used model in a HISTORY directive of
the form:
HISTORY T history-element := expr l.
MODELS -- p. 39

In the INIT procedure of a model, history functions can be assigned privately (as opposed to publicly in a USE
statement) to elements of the model by using a history assignment statement of tile form:
histdef ( history-element) := expr

where the expression can be any of the following:

- a regular expression describing an analytical function of time f(t) by using the variable "t" as a reference to any
value of time;
- a regular expression using references to point list functions describing the value of a variable as a list of points
{ t, f(t) } describing a function of time;
- a regular expression using references to existing history functions by using the resident simulation functions
histdefO and histvalO.

Because Laplace or Z functions and differential equations are solved in a model by applying trapezoidal integration
to both sides of the equation, the solution implicitly uses past values of both the driving variable and the calculated
variable. History functions must therefore be defined for both variables if these types of calculation are used in the
ftrst n time steps of the execution of a model, given a s-polynomial or D-polynomial of order n.

Integrals are evaluated using the trapezoidal rule. Their solution implicitly uses the past value of the integrated
variable and of the integral. History functions must therefore be defmed for both if integrals are used at the ftrst step
of an execution without any previous integral value assignment.

No history function or default history function need be assigned to the inputs of a model which is not executed at
sub-steps of the applied time step at the ftrst time step that the model is used.

3.2.3 !NIT PROCEDURE

It is possible to defme, in the model description, an initialization procedure that is different from the regular
execution procedure of the model. The INIT procedure, if present in a model description, is executed once at the ftrst
execution of each use of the model. It can be used, typically, for completing the history assignments required in the
model, and for verifying, correcting, and possibly rejecting the conditions under which the model is being used.

When defmed, the initialization procedure is specifted in the INIT section of a model defmition as follows:
INIT statement-list ENDINIT

The statement list of an INIT procedure may include any statement and function not requiring the existence of a
history for their execution, namely:
- value assignments other than differential equations and Laplace or Z functions;
- history assignment statements;
- integral assignment statements;
- algorithm control statements other than the USE statement;
- the simulation directive statements ERROR and WRITE;
- the simulation functions histdef and histval, but not the functions delay, predval, predtime, backval, backtime,
and prevva1;
- and no derivatives or integrals.

3.2.4 EXEC PROCEDURE

The EXEC procedure is the main procedure of a model. It contains the algorithm describing how the model operates
at the successive instants of the simulation. It is executed each time the model is called by a USE statement.
MODELS -- p, 40

Each time the model is used, the execution procedure updates the values of the variables of the model for the new
simulation time, taking into account the values assigned to the inputs of the model in the USE statement.

The execution procedure is specified in the EXEC section of a model definition as follows:
EXEC statement-fist ENDEXEC

The statement list of the EXEC procedure may include any type of statements except histOIY assi b'l1ment statements
(see STATEMENTS). The execution flow is directed by the algorithm control statements used in the procedure (see
ALGORITHM CONTROL STATEMENTS).

3.2.5 SIMULTANEOUS VARlABLES

The description of a model may include sets of interdependent variables represented by a group of value
assignments, differential equations, and transfer functions connected in a closed-loop configuration.

The statements describing a group of simultaneous variables can be assembled in a COMBINE statement (see
COMBINE), or can be grouped inside an iterative solution algorithm dermed explicitly in the model using a WHILE
or DO statement.

The distinction between linear and nonlinear groups of simultaneous variables is discussed in the following two
sections.

3.2.6 SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR VARIABLES USING A LINEAR COMBINE

The statements of a linear COMBINE group are considered to be linear descriptions of the value of the simultaneous
variables ofthe group, with the possible inclusion of one nonlinearity in the form of a limit applied to the value of
one of the group's variables.

The linearity requirement of the linear COMBINE is only with respect to the group's simultaneous variables, and
does not apply to references made to variables external to the group in the expressions describing the coefficients
used in the group's statements.

In the solution, the differential and integral equations of the group are frrst converted to algebraic equations, by
application of the trapezoidal rule of integration. The dependencies of the group's simultaneous variables is then
represented in matrix form, as follows:
[C], x= b

where [C] matrix of coefficients

x vector of group's interdependent and independent variables
b vector of driving terms

During the simulation, the values of the interdependent variables in x are calculated using the two-step procedure
of, first, Gaussian elimination using Crout's algorithm of LU decomposition, transforming [C] and b into a
triangu1arized form [C w ] and b' which, in tum, are used for evaluating the unknown part of x by back-substitution,
in the form:
[Cw ]' x = b'

When the coefficients in [C] and b remain constant over successive execution times, re-triangularization is not
required and only back-substitution is performed, using the existing values of [C w ] and b'.
MODELS -- p.41

In most instances of a change in the value of some elements of [C] or b from one execution time to the next, only
a partial re-triangularization is sufficient for reflecting the change, either because only a subset of the equations is
affected, or only elements of b are modified. These situations are automatically recognized, and after the partial re-
triangularization is performed, the back-substitution process takes place as usual.

3.2.7 SIMULTANEOUS NONLINEAR VARIABLES USING A LINEAR COMBINE

As described in the previous section, a set of simultaneous linear equations can be solved without iteration by using
a linear COMBINE group. Groups of nonlinear simultaneous variables, however, must normally be solved using
some iteration algorithm.

But in cases where the iteration approach would produce longer execution times or convergence difficulties, a
linearized approach may be considered. In cases where the time step is small with respect to the group's time
constants, it is 'often possible to insert delays inside the dependency loops of simultaneous nonlinear equations and
still represent adequately the higher-frequency variations of the group's variables. Under this condition, it is
therefore possible to adequateJy solve simultaneous groups of nonlinear equations by breaking them into a sequence
of smaller linear groups which can be represented without iteration in separate linear COMBINE groups.

As a result of this artificial sequencing, a reference within a linear sub-group to the not-yet-calculated value of one
of the outer group's nonlinear variables is in effect a reference to the value that was calculated at the previous time
step of the simulation. This is equivalent to transferring the previous value of that variable to the sub-group of
independent variables used in the solution of the group's interdependent variables (see example below).

This solution technique is equivalent to introducing a time delay equal to the size of the present time step of the
model and affecting how the present values of some of the group's variables are available for the calculation of the
remaining variables dependent on these values for their evaluation.

The error introduced by this solution method is controlled by prescribing a time step size that is small enough to
ensure that the values of the variables delayed by their exclusion from the group do not vary appreciably from one
execution time to the next. It is recommended to place the artificial delays (that is, to break a feedback loop) on the
value of a slower-varying continuous variable, in order to minjmjze the approximation error.

An example consisting of a closed-loop arrangement of linear components, one nonlinear component, and one limit
is illustrated below using a block diagram representation:
U W

where a,b,d linear interdependent variables

c linear interdependent variable with limit
nl nonlinear interdependent variable
u,v,w independent variables

Under the conditions discussed above, the diagram could be reduced to a sequence of individual elements and of
linear COMBINE groups of elements, for the purpose of avoiding the use of an iteration structure for its solution.

In this example, the loop containing the nonlinear element may be opened at one of three possible points in the loop,
as shown below, preferably at a slowly-varying continuous variable. The variables a, c, and d are grouped in a
COMBINE statement and solved simultaneously as a set. The COMBINE group is executed in sequence with the
value assignments of the variables b and nl, in one of the three possible ordering arrangements illustrated below.
MODELS -- p. 42

u w

u w
nl(t-t.t)
MODELS -- p. 43

4. MODELS IN A TP

All models used in a data case must be declared and defmed in the MODELS section of the data case. Once defmed,
these models can be used in a control-type connection to the circuit, or in a circuit-type connection.

In the control-type connection, each application of a model is dcfined with a USE statemcnt placed in the MODELS
section. Inputs are measurements taken from the circuit at simulation time t. and outputs are control signals passed
to the circuit at simulation time t+timestep.

In the circuit-type connection, each application of a model is introduced by defining a type-94 component in the
circuit part of the data case. Inputs are voltage values at the tenninals of the component, and outputs are current
values. Three types of modeling are available: Thevenin, Norton, and iterated.

4.1 MODELS SECTION IN THE DATA CASE

The MODELS section of the data case is introduced by the keyword MODELS, and ends with the keyword
ENDMODELS. It is placed in the data case immediately before the description of the electrical circuit.

The MODELS section contains the model defmitions of all models used in a simulation. It also contains the
directives indicating use instances of the models used with a control-type connection, for identifying the inputs and
outputs used between the models and the electrical circuit, for declaring the top variables of the MODELS section,
and for recording the values of variables during the simulation.

- Model defmitions:
Each model used in a simulation must be defmed in the MODELS section of the data case. Each model
provides a separate environment where names can be chosen independently from the names existing in the
other models of the data case. A model can be described using the MODELS language, or can be defmed as
a "foreign" model that is written in a programming language (for example, Fortran or C) as a subroutine or a
function that is compiled and linked to ATP prior to running the simulation.

- Using a control-connection model:

It is necessary to provide a USE statement for each instance of a control-connected model in the simulation.
Each USE statement specified the inputs, outputs, data, and use directives determining the operation of the
model instance. For this type of model use, the USE statements defmed in the MODELS section are called in
sequence by ATP in the order of their appearance in the data case, as follows:
- for a regular time simulation, these USE statements are executed at the end of each time step of the circuit
solution,. with inputs received from the electrical circuit at the time step that has just been solved, and with
outputs to be used by the electrical circuit at the next time step of the simulation;
- for a frequency-scan data case, these USE statements are executed at the end of each frequency step of
the simulation, with inputs received from the electrical circuit at the frequency step that has just been
solved, and with outputs to be used by the electrical circuit at the next frequency step of the simulation.

- Inputs/outputs fromlto the electrical circuit:

A USE statement of the MODELS section may refer to the values of inputs taken from the electrical circuit.
It may also assign values to outputs used for controlling the operation of components of the circuit. The names
of these inputs and outputs must be declared in the INPUT and OUTPUT declarations of the MODELS section
of the data case.

- Top variables of the MODELS section:

Variables other than inputs and outputs can be defmed in the MODELS section. These variables may then be
used for carrying values from one model to another in. the MODELS section. Their name must be declared in
one or more V AR declarations of the MODELS section of the data case.
MODELS -- p. 44

- Specifying values to be recorded:

The value of any element of any instance of any model of a data case may be recorded during the simulation.
Each recorded element is added to the printout list and the plotting list of the simulation. The RECORD
directives identifying these elements are specified in the MODELS section of the data case.

The MODELS section may contain any number of the above INPUT, OUTPUT, VAR, MODEL, USE, and
RECORD directives, in the following format:

MODELS --r-....--INPUT ...

OUTPUT ...
VAR ...
MODEL ...
USE ...
RECORD ...
"'----------'- ENDMODELS

4.1.1 INPUTS FROM THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TO MODELS

The name and type of each variable passed from the electrical circuit to the MODELS section are specified in one
or more INPUT declarations as follows:
INPUT T input-name { type ( id ) } l
where the input names are arbitrary names given to each input;
where the identifier is a node name or a switch name, as required for each type;
and where the input types are v, imssv, i, imssi, switch, mach, tacs, p14, and atp, used as follows:
- v(nodename) indicates the value of the voltage measured at node "nodename";
- imssv(nodename) indicates the imaginary part of the complex steady-state value of the voltage measured at
node "nodename" at t=O;
- i(switchname) or i(nodename) indicates the value of the current measured through the switch named
"switchname", or through the first switch connected to node "nodename" (in the order in which the case data
is presented), with the direction of the current considered to be from "left node" to "right node";
- imssi(switchname) or imssi(nodename) indicates the imaginary part of the complex steady-state value of the
current measured at t=O through the switch named "switchname", or through the first switch connected to node
"nodename" (in the order in which the case data is presented), with the direction of the current considered to
be from "left node" to "right node".
- switch(switchname) or switch.(nodename) indicates the status of the switch named "switchname", or of the first
switch connected to node "nodename" (in the order in which the case data is presented);
= 0 when the switch is OPEN
= 1 when the switch is CLOSED
- mach(varname) indicates the value of an electrical or mechanical variable internal to a machine, as specified
in the documentation of the synchronous machine and of the universal machine for variables which can be used
by T ACS and MODELS;
- tacs(vamame) indicates the value of a variable from the TACS section of the data case;
- pI4(number) indicates the curve number of a signal obtained from a PL4 plot file; the PL4 fIle is identified in
ATP using a "POSTPROCESS PLOT FILE" request.
- atp(name), or atp(name[expression]), indicates the value of a single A TP program variable or array element
accessible by ATP's SPY command EXAMINE.
MODELS -- p. 45

The names chosen for identifying the MODELS inputs are not visible outside MODELS, and can be selected
without concern for the possible duplication of names already used in the electrical circuit_

4.1.2 OUTPUTS FROM MODELS TO THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

Outputs from MODELS can be used in the electrical circuit:

- to control the operation of a switch
- to detennine the amplitude of voltage or current sources
- to detennine the value of machine variables
- to control the operation of nonlinear elements

In the electrical circuit, output variables from MODELS are used identically to output variables from TACS.

The MODELS output variables passed to the electrical circuit must be declared globally in one or more OUTPUT
declarations as follows:
OUTPUT T output-name l
Values can be assigned to the MODELS output variables in any USE statement of the MODELS section. Once
assigned, the output values can be used as input to other USE statements of the MODELS section as well as control
variables in the electrical circuit.

The names of the MODELS outputs are limited in length to 6 characters, in order to be compatible with the names
that can be used in A TP.

The names chosen for identifying the global MODELS outputs are not visible from inside the models defmed in the
MODELS section. They can be selected without concern for the possible duplication of names already used in the
models.

4.1.3 TOP VARIABLES OF THE MODELS SECTION

Variables can be defmed in the MODELS section for carrying information between the models used in the
MODELS section.

These "top" variables of the MODELS section must be declared in one or more V AR declarations as follows:
VAR T var-name l
Values can be assigned to these variables from outputs of any USE statement at the top level. Once assigned, their
value can be used as input to other USE statements at the top level.

The names of these top variables are limited in length to 6 characters, in order to be compatible with the name
storage of ATP.

The names chosen for identifying these top variables are not visible from inside the models defmed in the MODELS
section. They can be selected without concern for the possible duplication of names already used in the models.
MODELS -- p. 46

4.1.4 RECORDED VALUES IN MODELS

A recording of the values of any value-holding element of a model or submodel (except arguments of FOR
statements) can be included in the ATP printouUpiotting list. The recording is done at each execution time step of
the electrical modeL

The values that will be included in the A TP pri.11touUplotting list can be specified in one or more RECORD
directives, in the following format:
RECORD T record-element AS labell

where each recorded element is assigned a 1- to 6-character label to be used by ATP to identify the element in the
printout/plotting list;

and where each recorded element is identified by its name, optionally preceded by an indication of where it is used,
as follows: -
--r-------..,,- value-element -
F usename .3'
When a recorded element is an input, output, or top variable of the MODELS section, no path is required. When
it belongs to a model or submodel called from a USE statement of the MODELS section, the path is the sequence
of use names of the models leading to its location, separated by periods. A use name is the AS labe! given to each
used instance of a modeL

The path of an element belonging to a model called from a type-94 component of the A TP simulation is an 18-
character name formed using the left node name, the right node name, and the model name. All blank characters in
these three names are each replaced by underscore characters '_', in order to form a single I8-character label, which
is then followed by a period and the name of the recorded element from inside that model.

4.2 TYPE-94 COMPONENTS IN THE CIRCUIT

Instead of being used in a control connection to the circuit, a model can also be used as a circuit element in the
circuit part of a data case. In this case, all inputs, outputs, data, and use directives for that model are generated
automatically by the type-94 component referring to that model. For this type of model use, no USE statement is
needed in the MODELS section of the data case, because the model is called directly by the type-94 component
during the simulation.

The type-94 component (Thevenin, iterated, or Norton) is a general nonlinear single- or multi-phase circuit
component. It allows the user to simulate arbitraty nonlinear circuit and control elements in a circuit. The operation
of the component can be described in MODELS, and also in procedures written in other languages called from
MODELS. The interaction between the model and the rest of the circuit is defmed in terms of voltage, current and
impedance or admittance at the terminals of the component.

4.2.1 THREE TYPES: THEVENIN, ITERATED, NORTON

In the Thevenin type, the component sees the rest of the linear circuit as a Thevenin equivalent. Inputs are Thevenin
voltages and resistance matrix at the terminals of the component. The model calculates the value of the resulting
current at each time step.

In the iterated type, a group of nonlinear components see the rest of the linear circuit as a Thevenin equivalent, and
each calculate their current (outputs) corresponding to estimated voltages (inputs) provided by A TP's Newton
iteration algorithm.

Both of these approaches provide a solution synchronized with the rest of the circuit. In the Thevenin type, it is the
model that solves the Thevenin circuit equation. In the iterated type, that solution is done by A TP. In cases with only
MODELS -- p" 47

one nonlinear component (which can be multi-phase), the Thevenin type can be used, and provides a faster
execution time as it avoids iteration. The iterated type allows to connect more than one nonlinear components (type-
94 and others) per subnetwork.

For the Norton type, the circuit sees the component as a Norton equi\"alent, an admittance to ground in parallel with
a current source. For a multi-phase component. the admittance to ground is a matrix. and there is a current source
at each node. At each time step, the component receives node voltage valueS as inputs. and calculates as outputs the
admittance and current sources to be used in the circuit solution at the next time step. No iteration is performed by
ATP. Changes in values take effect with a delay of one time step. The time step delay is not a problem for passive
components, as this is the same method already used in ATP for the representation of inductances, capacitances,
and transmission lines. The current sources typically represent past values, and can be easily synchronized, using
prediction, with the solution time at which they will be used. The only values affected by the delay are the
admittance values, with normally negligible consequences.

In the Norton case, when admittance values change, A TP must re-triangularize the admittance matrix of the circuit.
Because of the relatively time-consuming re-triangularization,. this type is best used for infrequently-changing values
of admittances. There is no execution cost in having frequently-changing values of the current sources. Under these
conditions, the Norton type-94 is faster than the other two, because ATP is not required. to calculate a Thevenin
equivalent at each time step (needed for Thevenin and iterated), and because no iteration is taking place (needed for
iterated). The Norton approach also provides the greatest flexibility in component representation, because it allows
the user to directly control values in the admittance matrix of the ATP solution.

Because the admittance or admittance matrix supplied by the Norton type-94 component is an admittance to ground,
this type is normally used with its left nodes connected to the circuit, and its right nodes unconnected. This provides
an opportunity to assign the following additional function to this component: when the component is connected to
the circuit on both sides, it is interpreted by A TP to be operating in transmission mode, actually isolating the
subnetworks on each side from each other. Each side of the component provides its own admittance matrix and set
of current sources to the circuit. This interpretation is not possible with the Thevenin and iterated types, because
they are branch-based instead of node-based.

4.2.2 TYPE-94 FORMAT IN ATP

The type-94 component is seen by ATP as an electrical black box connected to the circuit. The black box may be
a one-branch component or a multi-branch component. It is specified in the data case along with the other branches
of the circuit. The model it uses is placed in the MODELS section of the data case, and doesn't need a corresponding
USE statement.

Column assignments on the first card of the type-94 component are:

cols 1- 2 '94' as the type of the nonlinear component
cols 3- 8 name of left node of the branch
cols 9-14 name of right node of the branch
cols 15-20 name of the model representing this component in MODELS
cols 21-24 one of three keywords: THEV, ITER, or NORT
col 80- printout request of current, etc. as for other branches

A single-branch type-94 iterated component between nodes Al and Bland using a model named 'ml' would be
specified as follows:
94A1 B1 M1 ITER
>END
MODELS -- p. 48

A multi-branch component is specified in a similar way, with the additional branches following the first card,
without repeating the model information:
94Al B1 Ml ITER
94A2 B2
94A3 B3
etc. "
>END

Data values can be assigned to the model used by the component, just like in a USE statement of MODELS. Each
data card specifies the name of the parameter expected by the model, and its value, as follows:
94A1 B1 M1 ITER
94A2 B2
94A3 B3
>DATA 01 xxxxxxxxxx
>OATA 02 xxxxxxxxxx
>etc ...
>END

Like other nonlinear branches in A TP, the type-94 branches are excluded from the initial linear steady-state
calculations by ATP. Typically, a user would represent a simplified operation of the component during steady-state
in a separate sub-circuit, using the 'phasor' keyword or switches to remove this sub-circuit from the solution at t>O.
Steady-state voltages and currents from such a sub-circui.t can be used to initialize the operating point of the type-94
component, using SSI and SSV lines as follows:
94A1 B1 M1 ITER
94A2 B2
94A3 B3
>OATA 01 xxxxxxxxxx
>OATA D2 xxxxxxxxxx
>ssv KA Vol tage (t"'O) at left-node #1 = voltage at node KA
>SSV #2 = default existing value at A2
>SSV KB #3 = voltage at node KB
>SSV KC Voltage (t"'O) at right-node #1 = voltage at node KC
>SSV #2 = default existing value at B2
>SSV KD " " " #3 '" voltage at node KO
>SSI KA Current (t=O) into left-node #1 = current in switch KA
>SSI " #2 default value of zero
>SSI KB " " iI3= current in switch KB
>END

N-branch Thevenin and iterated types can use up to 2n SSV values and up to n SSI values. N-phase non-
transmission Norton components can use up to n SSV and n SSI values. Transmission-mode Norton components
can use up to 2n SSV and 2n SSI value, n for each side.

4.2.3 TYPE-94 MODEL TEMPLATES

The following are templates for building models to be used by type-94 components.

[Link] THEVENINMODEL TEMPLATE

MODEL name
comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I First, declarations required for any type-94 Thevenin model I
I - these data and input values are provided to the model by ATP I
I - these output values are used by ATP I
I - these names can be changed, except 'n', but not their order I
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
DATA n number of node pairs
n2 {dflt: n*n} number of matrix elements
INPUT vth [1. • n] Thev. voltage(t) across each branch
rth [1. . n2] Thev. resistance(t) matrix, symmetrical
gth II.. n2] inverse of rth
vO[1..nJ voltage (t=O) across each branch
iO [1. .nJ current (t"'O) into each branch
MODELS -- p. 49
VAR v(I. .n) calculated voltage{t) across each branch
i [1. . n) calculated current{t) into each branch
OUTPUT i(1..n)

comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations of user-defined data for this particular model
I - their value is defined at the time of using the type-94 component
------------------------------------------------~------------------ endcomment
DATA

comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations private to the operation of this model
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
VAR •.•
INIT
ENDINIT
EXEC
ENDEXEC
END1'10DEL

[Link] ITERATED MODEL TEMPLATE

MODEL name
comment --------------------~-------------------------------------------------
I First, declarations required for any type-94 Thevenin model I
I - these data and input values are provided to the model by ATP I
I - these output values are used by ATP I
I - these names can be changed, except 'n', but not their order I
- .. ----------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
DATA n number of node pairs
n2 {dflt: n*n} number of matrix elements
INPUT v[1. .n) guessed voltage(t) across each node pair
vO[1..n) voltage (t=O) across each node pair
iO[l. .n) current (t=O) into each left node
VAR ill. .n) calculated current{t) into each left node
didv[l. .n2) calculated left-side nodal conductance(t) matrix
(formed for solving matrix equation [didv)V=I)

OUTPUT ill. .n), didv[l. .n2)

comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations of user-defined data for this particular model I
I - their value is defined at the time of using the type-94 component I
--,----------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
DATA

comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations private to the operation of this model I
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
VAH ...
INIT
ENDINIT
EXEC
ENDEXEC
ENDM,ODEL
MODELS .- p. 50

[Link] NON-TRANSMISSION NORTON MODEL TEMPLATE

INPUT v[l. .n) voltage(t) at each left node

vO [1. .n) voltage (t=O) at each left node
iOll. .n) current (t=O) into each left node
VAR i [1. .n) current(t} into each left node (for printout/plotting)
is [1 .• n] Norton source(t+timestep) at each left node
g[l._ng) conductance (t+timestep) at each left node
sequence is l-gr, 1-2, 1-3 .. 1-n, 2-gr, 2-3 .. 2-n, n-gr
flag set to 1 whenever a conductance value is modified
OUTPUT i [1. .n), is [1. .n), g[l. .ngJ, flag

comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations of user-defined data for this particular model I
I - their value is defined at the time of using the type-94 component I
------------------------------------------------------------------- end comment
DATA

comment ----------------~-----------------------------------------------------
I Next, declarations private to the operation of this model I
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
VAR •••

INIT

ENDINIT
EXEC
ENDEXEC
ENDMODEL

[Link] TRANSMISSION NORTON MODEL TEMPLATE

MODEL name
comment ----------------------------------------------------------------------
I First, declarations required for any type-94 Thevenin model I
I - these data and input values are provided to the model by ATP I
I - these output values are used by ATP I
I - these names can be changed, except 'n', but not their order I
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
DATA n number of phases
ng {dflt: n*(n+l)/2) -- number of conductances on each side
INPUT Iv[l. .n) voltage(t} at each left node
rv[1. .n) " right node
IvO [1. .n) voltage (t=O) at each left node
rvO [1. .n) ".. right node
liO [1. .n) current (t=O) into each left node
riO [1.: n) .. right node
VAR li[l. .n) current(t} into each left node (for printout/plotting)
ri[l. .n) .. right node .." "
lis [1. .n) Norton source(t+timestep} at each left node
ris[1. .n) .. right node
19[1. .ng) conductance (t+timestep) at each left node
rg[1. .ng) " right node
sequence is I-gr, 1-2, 1-3 .• 1-n, 2-gr, 2-3 .. 2-n, n-gr
flag set to 1 whenever a conductance value is modified

OUTPUT li[L.n], ri[1..n), lis[1..n], ris[L.n], 19[[Link]], rg[[Link])' flag

MODELS -- p. 51

calument ---------------------------------- -----------------------------------

I Next, declarations private to the operation of this model
------------------------------------------------------------------- endcomment
VAR ...

INIT

ENDINIT
EXEC

ENDEXEC
ENDMODEL
Introduction - 1

IV. LINEAR BRANCH CARDS

Introduction

1. Wbat are branch cards

Branch cards are cards where one can define different kinds of branches.
Distinction should be made between linear and non-linear branches. The non-linear
branches will be discussed in more detail in chapter V. Following types of linear
branches will be discussed in this chapter:
- uncoupled, lumped. series R-L-C (type 0)
- mutually-coupled. lumped R-L-C elements (type 1,2.3 •••• )
• single phase PI-circuit
• multiphase PI-circuit
- mutually-coupled. lumped R-L elements (type 51.52.53 •••• )
- distributed-parameter elements with constant transformation matrix (type
-1,-2.-3 •••• )
• constant-parameter line models
(distortionless or lumped resistance or exact PI)
transposed = Clarke model
untransposed = [Link] model
• double-circuit constant-parameter line models
• frequency dependent line model (JMARTI)
• recursive-convolution line model (SEMLYEN)
- saturable transformer component
- cascaded PI feature (steady state only)
- phasor branch [Y] input (steady state only)
For all lumped elements. a normal precision as well as an high-precision format
exist. This will be explained on relevant places.
For all mutually coupled. lumped elements, both an RL as well as an AR notation
exist. This will be explained on relevant places.
For most of the above branch types, there are supporting routines available
which can be used to generate the necessary data in the proper input format.
Wherever appropriate, reference will be made to relevant supporting routines.
2, Where are the branch cards situated on the input file structure
As explained in section I-I (Structure of EMTP input data), the branch cards
always precede the switch card grouping. This means that branch cards have to
follow either the miscellaneous data cards (when no TACS HYBRID is active) or the
TACS card grouping (whenever TACS HYBRID is in use). Recall that both. linear as
well as non-linear branch cards belong to the branch card group. They can be put
in any arbitrary order. Do not forget to terminate the grouping of branch cards
by a blank card or a card containing the text
"BLANK card ending BRANCH cards"
This text should start in column 1. Both BLANK and BRANCH should be in capitals.
All the remaining text can be in mixed mode (lower case or capitals). This will
be of particular importance when using "DATA BASE MODULE" punched card results.
Introduction - 2

3. Different formats
The "$VINTAGE. 1"-card. which is honoured by most computer systems, provides
for an alternate high-precision format. Specifically the R. L and C fields are
switched from limited accuracy (E6.2) to extended accuracy (E16.0) when the request
card "$VINTAGE, 1" precedes a branch card (grouping). If " $VINTAGE , 0" follows
this card (grouping). the high-precision format will be toggled to a normal format.
For example:
$VINTAGE, 1
lumped series R-L-C branches of any type (e.g. type 0: uncoupled RLC; type
1,2.3 •••• : coupled RLC; type 51.52,53, ••• : coupled RL) as long as they use
the high-preciSion formats.
$VINTAGE, 0

4. COnnectivity definition
Each branch is defined by its terminal ends (BUS1 and BUS2). By allocating
node names to these terminal ends, the network connectivity is defined. But in
effect. the terminal node names do not uniquely specify the branch; just think
about two (or more) parallel branches having the same terminal node names. Only
in a limited number of cases, it will be necessary to distinct between branches;
• Branch output request (column 8O-punch)
. Reference branch usage (see next paragraph).
If no special care is taken, the order of appearance in the input is withheld
for parallel branches. If two or more parallel branches occur in the input, it is
the first one appearing that will be used as reference branch or that will generate
the requested branch output.
When distinction should be made between two parallel branches, it is sufficient
to alter the sequence of the node names. This simple action indeed is sufficient
to distinct between two parallel branches.
Example; Suppose one wants to define two parallel branches between node NODA
and NODB. For one branch. BUS1 = NODAand BUS2 = NODB. For the other
branch, BUS1 =NODB and BUS2 =
NODA.
When dis tinction should be made between more then two parallel branches. users'
inventivity is called upon. Possible solutions; define an extra. intermediate node
by splitting the series RLC in two different parts. or by using dummy measuring
switches.

5. Reference branch aption

When there are two or more branches that have the same elements (R,L,C) with
the same values, a memory storage saving option exists; the reference branch option.
In such case, one should only define the terminal ends of the branch being defined
(BUS1 and BUS2), and in addition in the fields BUS3and BUs4, reference should be
made to the terminal ends of the branch being referred to (BUS1, BUS2). All other
fields remain blank.
It is clear that the branched being referenced to previously should be defined.
Further recall that the sequence in which node names are specified is of crucial
importance. Finally, refer to the preceding paragraph (4.- connectivity definition)
for special remarks regarding parallel branches.
IV.A. Branch carda for uncoupled:. lWllped aeriea RLC branchea (type 0) - 3

IV.A. Branch cards for uncoupled, lumped series RLe branches

(type 0)

IV.A.l. ARRlication

1 GENERAL USAGE;
Uncoupled or single phase. lumped series RLC branches specify the non-zero
impedance of a branch between two named nodes. or between one named node and the
ground (no special name. but just a blank will be sufficient to specify the ground).
This impedance can be either a resistance. a capacitor. an inductor or a series
connection of any of these.
R R L R L C

~
L C

0-----1 ~
Within FIX SOURCE. a data generator is available that converts the active and
reactive loads(P and Q} into equivalent RLC branches (uncoupled. lumped series
elements). See section X (FIX SOURCE) for more details.

2 SPECIAL USAGE;
The uncoupled. lumped series RLC element can be used for following purposes:
- measure the branch current or voltage (see remark 2).
break closed loops of parallel connected switches (e. g. thyristor and
free-wheeling diode).
damp out numerical oscillations which could occur when interrupting the
current in an inductor. or applying a step voltage to a capacitor (i.e.
scaling of a resistance by the time step DELTAT - see section IV.A.3;
remark 7),
link a floating. subnetwork to the reference network (e.g. delta connected
loads. ungrounded transformer or machine windings).
Remarks:
- There are limitations on the values of the resistance; there is a maximum
and a minimum resistance we have to take into account (remark 5 and 6 of
section IV.B.3.).
- For current-sampling purposes, there is also another facility called a
measuring switch (remark 6 of section IV.B.3.).
- Usage of a high-precision format is explained in section IV.B.2-2.
IV.A. Branch carda for uncoupled. lumped aerie. RLC branchea (type 0) - 5

3 [Link]. FORMAT
Besides the regular format and the high-precision format, a third (but tricky)
way can be used to input RLC branches. This input is called FREE FORMAT, but it
is not totally "free". Some important rules apply here:
separate each field by comma's (i.e. last sign of the variable CHRCOM in
the STARTUP file);
- blanks are totally ignored. and node names are left adjusted;
- do not input node names after column 26;
- do not input values before column 27;
- Make sure there is always a total of five comma's before column 26 (delimiting
one type field and four node name fields) and a total of eight comma's
should follow column 27 (delimiting three numeric fields for R, L, C.
augmented by 6 dummy fields, probably to make the format compatible wi th
the type l,2.3-format).
- for output requests you still MUST use column 80;
- if a zero is not entered explicitly, the comma should nevertheless always
be entered (even for column 1).
With these rules. only column 27 and possibly column 80 must be determined as
position information. On the other hand. a painstaking count of comma's is necessary.

IV.A,3. Parameters

Following is an explanation of the parameters used in the above card formats.

ITYPE: The branch-type has to be punched as zero or blank.
BUSl. BUS2: Terminal node names. of a branch. Each node can be specified by a
6-character alphanumerical node name. Node names always have to be left
adjusted. Note that a blank-name is understood as being ground (TERRA).
BUS3. Bus4: Reference branch terminal node names (see section 5 of the
introduction), normally left blank. Recall that. when BUS3 and BUS4 are
specified. the R,. L and C field should remain blank.
For the special situation "scaling of a resistance by the time step DELTAT".
we refer to remark 7 below.
R: Resistance value in Ohms. Except in case of free-format usage, values always
have to be right adjusted.
L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms, depending on XOPT).
- an inductance L: mH (XOPT = zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT = f)
C: Capacitance value (in pF or pMho' s, depending on COPT).
- a capacitance C : pF (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: pmhos (COPT f) =
OUTPUT OPTION: The options for printing and/or plotting have to be specified
in this area. There are four output possibilities:
'1' branch current;
'2' branch voltage;
'3' branch current and branch voltage;
'4' branch power and energy consumption.
Remarks:
IV.A. Branch carda for uncoupled. lumped aeriea RLe branchea (type 0) - 6

1) There are two different ways to specify or alter XOPT and COPT. They can
be defined in the miscellaneous cards (see II-B.), or one can use the $UNITS
card. This card can be inserted in the branch card grouping, on several
places, to switch the units of the capacitors and inductors any time. The
use of the $UNITS ~ard is further explained in section I-D-15.
2} At least one value of R, L and C per branch must be non-zero.
3) When a branch has only one or two elements (R, L, Rand C, L and C, etc.),
just leave the fields blank of the elements which do not occur in the branch.
4) When using a reference branch which has other branches in parallel, it is
not clear which of them should be the reference branch. Therefore the highest
mentioned branch among the parallel branched always is the reference branch.
Note that NODEA to NODEB and NODEB to NODEA are two different node-name
pairs. These can therefore be used as two distinct reference branches.
5) A high resistance. being used for voltage sampling for example. may not
exceed the maximum resistance value, which depends on the computer system.
The general rule is that R must not exceed the square root of the largest
number which the computer system can represent in floating-point form (e.g.
1.E1B ohms on Univac and Honeywell/GE, 1.E35 ohms on IBM and 1.E100 ohms
on CDC).
Startup file parameter FLTINF contains the maximum resistance value.
6) A low resistance, being used for current sampling for example, may not be
taken lower then the minimum resistance value, which depends on the computer
system and the program release. Following limitations exist:
- the fundamental limitation is due to floating-point word length (system
dependen t) •
- the .singularity tolerance parameters EPSILN and TOLMAT. The general
idea is that all impedances which terminate on a given node should
not differ drastically in value, as measured by the just-mentioned
singulari ty tolerances. Specific relevant points related hereto
include the following:
EPSILN = singularity tolerance for real, all-resistive transient
equivalent-network solutions. For transient studies, the
impedances in question are equivalent Norton resistances,
depending not only on the element. but also on the time
step DELTAT.
• For a resistor, this is just the value of the resistance
in Ohms.
• For an inductor of L Henries, the equivalent resistance
is 2L/DELTAT.
• For a capacitor of C Farads, the equivalent resistance
equals DELTAT/2C.
pistributed parameter lines or cables can be treated like
a resistor having a resistance equal to the characteristic
impedance.
EPSILN can be specified in the floating-point miscellaneous
data card. or in the .startup file.
TOLMAT = singularity tolarance for complex (i.e. phasor) admittance
solutions during steady state ini tial condi tions. For steady
state studies. the impedances in question are phasor
impedances. depending not only on the element but also on
the frequency f of the sinusoidal excitation being used.
· For a resistor. this is just the value of the resistance.
· For an inductor. this is 2nf*L.
IV.A. Branch card. for uncoupled. lWllped series RLC branches (type 0) - 7

• For a capacitor, this is (2nf*C)-l.

TOLMAT can only be specif'ied in the f'loating-point mis-
cellaneous data card.
Current sampling can alternatively be done by permitting current output
requests using the familiar column-80 punch. A second alternative is to use
a measuring switch, which is permanently closed. The use of this switch is
explained in section VI-A.
7) Scaling of a resistance by the time step DELTAT (Theory Book, section 2.2.2
and 2.3.2).
Particularly useful for damping resistors to control numerical oscillation
of the trapezoidal rule is the program feature that allows the resistance
to be scaled by the time step DELTAT. For a resistor in parallel with an
otherwise hanging (disconnected) inductor having value L [Henry]. default
damping is provided by the formula
R - DE~~L"T (L in Henry, DELTAT in sec, R in Ohm)
The less-common dual case is that of the series capacitor which otherwise
would be shorted, in which case resistance proportional to DELTAT is used:
R _ DELTAT
16C

Ei ther proportional or inverse scaling by DELTAT is available for any simple

resistor, if the user makes the right request in the reference branch fields
BUS3 and Bus4 (columns 15-26) of the series R-L-C branch card that defines
the resistance R as 16*L (Henry) or R as 16*c (Farad). L and C should be
left blank.
C 1: 2 : 3
C 345678901234:567890123456:7890
c ------------t------------:----
:DIVIDE»ELTATl -- to have R divided br DELTAT : inductance
:KULTIPDELTAT: -- to have R .ultiplied br DELTAT : capacitance
No special acknowledgement of such requests will be provided, although the
user can verify that the program has understood by checking the first
parameter of the data card interpretation (column 1-51 of the LUNIT6 output),
which will reflect the scaling. If the user makes an error in spelling the
request words (DIVIDEDELTAT or MULTIPDELTAT), the program should terminate
execution with a complaint about inability to find the appropriate reference
branch. Hence usage carries little danger of misunderstanding. For an
illustration of "DIVIDEDELTAT" usage, see the 4th subcase of BENCHMARK
DC-55.

IV.A.4. Examples

e 1 2 3 4 5 678
e 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
VOLT-A10-A 1. 123 •• 211-3
$VINTAGE. 1
$UNITS. O. 0
BUSA BUSB 12.8000000000000 10. 3
$VINTAOE. 0
$UNITS. -1. -1
VOLT-B10-B VOLT-AlO-A 1
PORT 300.
e 1 23 4 5 6 7 8
e 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
IV.A. Branch carda ~or uncoupled, lumped aeriea RLC branchea (type 0) - 8

The examples in the above figure are representing the branches following below.
Presume that XOPT and COPT are set to 0 respectively 60 (Hz) in the miscellaneous
data cards. When we switch to high-precision notation, we also use the SUNITS, 0, 0
card to change the units of the capacitance to pF (the units of the inductance
remain the same, because XOPT already was 0). At this point. we have to be careful
when weare going to use referencing. The branch with nodenames VOLT-B and 10-B
will use now the reference branch with nodenames VOLT-A and 10-A. Therefor the
units must be the same for these two branches. To switch to the old units again,
we will use the SUNITS, -1, -1 card.

The current of the branch with terminal nodes VOLT-B and 10-B will be included
in the output as well as both current and voltage of branch BUSA to BUSB.

10 123 mH 0.21E- 3 p mho (f=60 Hz)

VOLT-A ~ ~ 10-A

12.8 mH 10 P F

8USA 0 I .~ BUSS

,0 123 mH 0.21E- 3 pmho (f=60 Hz)

VOLT-8 ~ ~ 10-8

PORT

3000
IV.B. Branch card. for .utually coupled RLC element. (type 1.2.3) - 9

IV.B. Branch cards for mutually coupled RLC elements (type 1,2,3)

IV.B.I. Applications

1 GENERAL USAGEi
First of all it is important to realize that, in contrast with the previous
branches (type 0), the capacitance values specified on the input cards of type
1,2,3 are for shunt connected capacitances, not for series connected ones. A further
observation worth reminding is that the capacitance value that is entered, is
internally allocated half at the beginning and half at the end of the model.
R L

c
R L

This class of branches thus provides for the representation of lumped-element

resistance, inductance and capacitance matrices. The elements of the matrices [R],
[L] and [C] have the following meaning (steady state):
- diagonal Ru + [Link] : self impedance of branch i (impedance of loop "branch
i-ground return");
- off-diagonal Rik + ju..Lik : mutual impedance between branches i and k (Rik t-
O with nonzero ground resistivity);
- diagonal Cii : sum of all capacitances connected to the nodes at both ends
of branch i;
- off-diagonal Cl k : negative value of capacitance from branch i to branch k.

• 1 dV t •
i --[C]-+i tm
t 2 dt

• 1 dUm.
im - Z[C]dT- i tm

Note that all matrices are assumed to be symmetric and that the matrix of the
capacitance is split in two, with half of the total on each end of the branch.
This model, better known as a multi-phase nominal PI-equivalent, can be used
to simulate transient phenomena on short lines or cables. By connecting many short
sections in series, keeping track of any actual transposition (if any), even a
transient model for a long line can be obtained. Yet because of increased running
time and memory requirements, this modelling should generally be used only as a
last resort, where more sophisticated models (e.g. distributed-parameter models)
IV.B. Branch card. for mutually coupled RLe element. (type 1.2.3) - 10

are believed to be inadequate. Note that this is DQ!. the CASCADED PI option referred
to in section IV.F; cascaded PI uses the long-line equivalent, which is valid only
for steady state, at one specific frequency.
The supporting routine LINE CONSTANTS (section XXI-E) or CABLE CONSTANTS
(section XXIII-B) can be used as data generator for type 1.2.3 branch cards. Indeed
the parameters [R], [L] and [C] cannot easily be calculated by hand.
But also transformers can be modelled using PI-equivalents. Because most
transformers have a small P.U. excitation current. the admittance matrix is nearly
singular. The leakage impedance is rather low and can be obtained by substracting
the mutual impedance from the self-impedance. Because off the fact that the
admittance matrix is ill-conditioned, the leakage impedance can get lost in the
magnetizing impedance. Therefor. it is necessary to have sufficient accuracy for
the inductance. Hence, the normal card format (E6.0) is not sufficient. For
transformers, either the alternative high-precision format should be used (see
section IV.B.2 and related data generator BCTRAN, section XIX-C} , or a more
appropriate branch card format (type 51-52-53. see section IV-C) should be used
(see data generator XFORMER. section XIX-A). In the ideal case of non-existing (or
very low) P.U. excitation currents, the inductance matrix does not even exist. For
this special situation. a special option (AR notation) is used. Here, A stand for
L-l (the inverse of the inductance). which does exist (be it almost singular). This
is later explained in more detail (see section IV.B.2). In both cases (AR and RL
notation), the positions for the capacitance can be used succesfully to derive
frequency dependent transformer models. where one needs to take into account the
interwinding capacitances. as well as the capacitances to ground. At this moment
(November 1990) , no related automatic data generator is available within EMTP.
2 SPECIAL USAGE:
A first special situation is when [C] = [0] (there are no capacitances). This
case represents only mutually-coupled RL branches. for which even a separate input
format {type 51,52,53, see section IV.C.} has been provided. This is the normal
situation for transformer modelling.

r R L
O~--~I~~r--~""r--rl---0
1
I I
I I
I
I
R L I
I
O~--~I--~c==Jr--~""r--r1---0
I I
I I
I R L I
0~--41--~c:=J I o
L_________________J
I I

Coupling

If the user wants a multiphase capacitance matrix to ground (e.g. a capacitor

bank), be it in star or in delta, then he can input near-infinite-impedance series
branches and ground all conductors at the far end.
IV.B. Branch card. for mutually coupled RLe element. (type 1.2.3) - 11

c
c
c
c

Note hereby that the series impedances must be chosen large enough to represent
an open-circuit. Recall. that there is a limitation on the used values (see section
IV.A.3). The C-matrix. specified in the input file must be twice the desired final
matrix values, as mentioned before. Recall that the specified value is internally
allocated half to the beginning and half to the far end of the model.
One can also obtain a single phase (i.e. uncoupled) PI-equivalent. The difference
with the representation by uncoupled, lumped series RLC branches is that you can
enter the shunt capacitance to ground directly instead of having to introduce two
separate branches for this purpose. The only thing you have to do, is using branch
type number 1.

IV.B.2. Card format

First. the three different card formats will be discussed:

• normal format ($VINTAGE, 0)
· high-precision format ($VINTAGE, 1)
· free format.
For this card-type, 2 different notations exist: the RL-notation and the
AR-notation. The card formats first will be explained for the RL-notation (normal
usage). Next, the AR-notation will be discussed.
RL notation
Normally the RL notation is used. You can stack the values for [R], [L] and
[C] in the way explained in section IV.B.3 (remarks). If previously the AR notation
was used. you can toggle. to the RL notation by using the following card:
IV.B. Branch card. for mutually coupled RLC element. (type 1.2.3) - 12

1 NORMAL .caRl2 FORMAT ($VINTAGE, QJ.

I' If IE
~ l<fE If Ie I~ i'f~ H rn~ Ie I: I~~~ fE Imlc I: i.t: ff tm .: t' f~l( I" ~ ~I f tIi~ Ie I~ rf ,~Ie
w node names reference br. elements (k. m) elements (k. m+ 1) elements (k. m+2)
CL
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L C R L C R L C

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

If there is no special request card, the normal format is in use. The R, L and
C fields only have a limited accuracy (E6.2 format). See section IV.B.3 (remarks)
for further usage.

2 HIGH-PRECISION ~ FORMaT ($VINTAGE, ~

IE If
I: l~~! If Ie I' ~! tC I: ~f p ~. H tit! t·t' I!I! m~l( I: ~~ tll!l( ~, rlt~l(

w node names reference br. elements

CL
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L C

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 [16.0 E16.0 E16.0

Usage of an extended prec~s~on (E16.0) is possible for mutually coupled RLC

branches. See section IV. B. 3 (remarks) for further usage.
3 FREE. FORMAT
Besides the regular format and the high-precision format, a third (but tricky)
way can be used to input RLC branches. This input is called FREE FORMAT, but it
is not totally "free"« Some important rules apply here :
separate each field by comma's (i.e. last Sign of the variable CHRCOM in
the STARTIJP file);
- blanks are totally ignored, and node names are left adjusted;
- do not input node names after column 26;
- do not input values before column 27;
- Make sure there is always a total of five comma's before column 26 (delimiting
one type field and four node name fields) and a total of eight comma's
should follow column 27 (delimiting nine numeric fields for R, L, C).
- If the figures are to be continued on the next card because the number of
columns per card exceeded, the continuation symbol (fifth character of
CHRCOM of STARTUP, usually "$") must be used. On such card, no extra comma's
are needed.
With these rules, only column 27 must be determined as position information.
On the other hand, a painstaking count of comma's is necessary. See section IV.B.3
(remarks) for further usage.
IV.B. Branch carda for mutually coupled RLe elementa (type 1.2.3) - 13

AR notation
In some cases. the [L]-l-matrix is ill-conditionned or singular. so [L] does
not exist. Therefor the AR notation is used. "A" stands for the [L]-l-matrix and
"R" stands for the [R]-matrix.
Switching to the AR notation can be done by the following card:

In this case, we use the following equation:

dv _I _I
- - [L] v- [L] [R]i
dt

Now we have to be carefull when punching the data in the input format. The
[L]-l-matrix replaces R in the input format. In the same way, the [R]-matrix replaces
L in the input format.
Remarks:
- This notation can not be used for single-phase situations; only for coupled
phases (minimum two).
- Before using the AR notation, the program automatically sets XOPT as 0.1591549
(XOPT - -i;). In this case w = 1. COPT remains unchanged. The values of the
corresponding term of the inverse of L are now to be specified in Henry-l.
Before switching to the RL notation. the old value of XOPT can be restored
using the command SUNITS,-1,-1.
- The AR notation can be combined with the use of the high extention format
($VINTAGE, 1) and the free format.

IV.B.3. Parameters

Following is an explanation of the parameters used in the above card formats.

~ITYPE: Numbers 1 up to 40 can be used to express each phase of the PI -equivalen t •
When there are continuation cards, ITYPE must be left blank for these (see
remark 2).
BU51. BU52: Specify the terminal node names of each phase in these fields.
Nodes may be grounded (indicated by blank field name), if desired.
BU53 , Bus4: Equally to uncoupled RLC branches, referencing can be used here.
The same rules must be taken into account, except that only the first card
(first phase) bears the reference nodes, specified as the nodes appearing
on the first card used as reference set. The following cards (following
phases) just specify the consecutive type numbers and the node names of
the other input ports. not the nodes of the reference set nor the RLC
values.
R: resistance. value in ohms.
L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms, depending on XOPT).
- an inductance L: mH (XOPT = zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT = f)
IV.B. Branch card. for mutually coupled RLe element. (type 1.2.3) - 14

c: Capacitance value (in pF or pMho's, depending on COPT).

- a capacitance C : pF (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: pmhos (COPT = f)
Col80 punch: only value 2 is allowed, only on the first two cards.
Remarks:
1} At least one of the matrices [R], [L] or [C] must be nonzero. When matrix
[C] is zero, an alternate input format (type 51,52,53; see section IV.C.),
can be used.
2} Matrices [R], [L] and [C] are symmetric, so one only needs to specify the
elements on and below the diagonal. Hence the following format applies. For
phase 1 (A), BUSl = "SA" and BUS2 = "RA", for phase 2 (B), we have SB and
RB,etc. When one card is not sufficient for all RLC values (second and
later phases for $VINTAGE, l;fourth and later phases for $VINTAGE, O), then
continuation cards are used, with columns 1-26 left blank.

a} for $VINTAGE, 0:

Rll Lll
2 S8 R8 R21 L2l C2l R22 L22 C22
3 SC RC R31 L31 C3l R32 L32 C32 R33 L33 C33
4 SO RD R41 L4l C4l R42 L42 C42 R43 L43 C43
R44 L44 C44
5 SE RE R51 L51 C5l R52 L52 C52 R53 L53 C53
R54 LS4 C54 R55 L55 C55
: Etc:.

b) for$VINTAGE, 1:

It IE
• IE Ie I ~ 1.11< rEfS f'; IE ~c I·f~ IE ~~ I!~E .. i~ If~SIC ~E Ie I' tEis:c
1 SA RA Rll Lll Cll
2 S8 RB R2l L21 C2l
R22 L22 C22
3 SC RC R3l l3l C3l
R32 L32 C32
R33 L33 C33
4 SO RO R4l L41 C41
: Etc:.

3) No branch current output is possible for this branch type. However, the
branch voltage can be obtained on the first two phases. In these phases,
column 80 is still free and can therefor be used to punch number 2 for
branch voltage output requests. By the next phases, column 80 is occupied
(at least for $VINTAGE,O) and can therefore not be used for output requests.
IV.B. Branch card. for autua11r coupled RLC element. (trPe 1.2.3) - 15

IY.B.4. Examples

The next example contains two identical.3-phase circuits. Together, these two
circuits constitute six coupled conductors. With two. identical PI-equivalents
cascaded, the data cards appear as follows:
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
$t1NITS. 60. 0
110-A 20-A 1.41 8.334 .164
210-B 20-B 0.972.8586-.0289 1.239.1392 .1626
310-C 20-c 0.912.2823-.0088 0.863.4218-.0273 1.16 9.518 .1662
411-A 21-A 1.002.0984-.0180 0.942.1248-.0101 0.902.0398-.0053
1.41 8.334 .164
511-B 21-B 0.942.1248-.0101 0.892.5064-.0104 0.862.6454-.0087
0.972.8586-.0289 1.239.1392 .1626
611-C 21-C 0.902.0398-.0053 0.862.6454-.0087 0.833.1597-.0142
0.912.2823-.0088 0.863.4218-.0273 1.16 9.518 .1662
C 1 2 345 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
USE AR
$VINTAGE. 1.
IBUS1 RBUSH 2.4311266503345 1.369233463069
2BUS[Link]RBUSL -29.04015078715 0.0
361.43763967638 .0095961038351
.06629545237001 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
2.4311266503345 1.369233463069
-.7919085305828 0.0
23.900085059572 0.0
-29.04015078715 0.0
361.43763967638 .0095961038351
.06629545237001 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
.06629545237001 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
2.4311266503345 1.369233463069
-.7919085305828 0.0
23.900085059572 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
23.900085059572 0.0
-29.04015078715 0.0
361.43763967638 .0095961038351
USE RL
$VINTAGE. O.
$UNITS. -1. -1 (do not forget thi.1
C 1 234 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
120-A 30-A 10-A 20-A
220-B 30-B
320-C 30-C
421-A 31-A
521-B 31-B
621-C 31-C

As you can see in the grid, following matrices are used in the first six phases
)

of the PI-equivalent:
1.41 8.3340
0.97 1.23 2.8586 9.1392
0.91 0.86 1.16 2.2823 3.4218 9.5180
[R]- n [wL]- n
1.00 0.94 0.90 1.41 2.0984 2.1248 2.0398 8.3340
0.94 0.89 0.86 0.97 1.23 2.1248 2.5064 2.6454 2.8586 9.1392
0.90 0.86 0.83 0.91 0.86 1.16 2.0398 2.6454 3.1597 2.2823 3.4218 9.5180
IV.B. Branch card. for mutually coupled RLC element. (type 1.2.3) - 16

0.1640
-0.0289 0.1626
-0.0088 -0.0273 0.1662
[C]- I1F
-0.0180 -0.0101 -0.0053 0.1640
-0.0101 -0.0104 -0.0087 -0.0289 0.1626
-0.0053 -0.0087 -0.0142 -0.0088 -0.0273 0.1662

Remark the symmetric structure of each matrix and interprete the units of the
[L] matrix in ohms (XOPT is set to 60 Hz). The next 6 phases represent a multiphase
transformer. The AR notation is used representing following matrices:
2.4311266503345
- 29.04015078715 316.43763967638
(Ll- I • • 06629545237001 -.7919085305828 2.4311266503345
-.7919085305828 23.900085059572 - 29 .040 15078715 361.43763967638
[ .06629545237001

3" . ".3"",.]
- .7919085305828 .06629545237001 -.7919085305828 2.4311266503345
-.7919085305828 23.900085059572 -.7919085305828 23.900085059572 -29.04015078715

1.369233463069
0.0 .0095961038351
0.0 0.0 1.369233463069
[RJ • n
0.0 0.0 0.0 .0095961038351

f 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.369233463069
0.0 .009596 103835.J
The high-precision format ($VINTAGE, 1) is also used, because the transformer
needs this format to be as accurate as possible.
Remark the use of $UNITS, -1, -1 which resets the old units of the inductors
(XOPT = 60) and capacitors (COPT = 0). This is indispensable because when using
the AR notation, the program automatically changes the units to $UNITS. 0.1591549.
O.
Finally. there is a multiphase PI-equivalent which will be referred to the
first multiphase PI-equivalent. As mentioned in section IV.B.3. only the first
phase bears the reference nodes.
IV.C. Branch carda tor mutually coupled RL elements (type 51.52.53 •••• ) - 17

IV _C - Branch cards for mutuall.y coupled RL elements

(type 51,52,53, ••• )

lY,e.1. Application

1 GENERAL USAGE;
This class of branches provides for the representation of lumped-element,
mutually-coupled R-L branches.
r----R-------C---l
1 O----~I~~
I
I
I o
I R L I
I I
2 O----~I~~
I
I
I
o 2
I I
I I
I R L I
N 0..----1-1--I[Link]J I o N
I-----------------~I
Coupling

The input cards for these branches do not differ much fro~ the previous type
1,2,3 branches. except that there is no provision for inputting a shunt capaci tance
matrix ([C] = [0]). On the other hand. the inductance data field provides for 12
columns rather then only 6. allowing for greater precision. This is primarily
intended for representing the coupled impedances of transformers. as with lower
precision the leakage impedances. obtained by substracting the mutual impedances
from the self impedances. are very badly and get lost in the magnetizing impedance.
However, this drawback can be circumvented by using the high-precision format for
type 1,2.3 (see section IV.B). Also network equivalents can be represented using
coupled R-L equivalents. Following data generators create punched cards in the
type 51.52.53-format: .
XFORMER (section XIX.A) = transformer model
NETEQV (section XXIV.) = network equivalent
CHANGE TRANSFORMER (section XIX.J) = convert SATURABLE TRANSFORMER data into
XFORMER punched card output format.

2 SPECIAL USAGE;
1) Sequence value;
For transposed (balanced) lines. the associated [R] and [L] matrices {phase
values} have a special structure: all diagonal elements have a common value Zs and
all off-diagonal elements have a common value z.. When in addition. we only consider
transposed three-phase cases, an easier notation. based on Fortesque decomposition,
exists. In this case. it is no longer necessary to store the entire matrix {or
even the lower-diagonal part}. It is more convenient to specify only the associated
zero- and positive-sequence values (Ro,Lo) and (Rt.R2) of a purely diagonal matrix.
z".
Z. ... F ortesque =+
Z".
xv.c. Branch card. for autually coupled RL element. (type 51.52.53 •••• ) - 18

The relation between phase values (Z•• z.) and sequence values ([Link]) is very
simple;
z.-z.-z".
Furthermore. sequence values can be calculated automatically using supporting
routines LINE CONSTANTS (section XXI-C or section XXI-D) or CABLE CONSTANTS STAND
ALONE.
Note, however that data manually should be put in the correct input format!
This input format will be discussed in more detail in section IV.D.2-3 and 3-2.
2) AR notation:
In the ideal case of a transformer having non-existing (or very low) P.U.
excitation currents,the inductance matrix does not even exist. For this special
situation. a special option (AR notation) is used. Here. "A" stands for L-l (the
inverse of the inductance). which does exist. Remark. however, that the supporting
routine XFORMER .is not able to create output in AR notation in order to treat such
an "ideal" transformer. On the other hand, BCTRAN can, but it does not create the
type 51,52.53 branch format being discussed here.

IV.C.2. Card format

For this card-type. 2 different formulations exist: phase value and sequence
value formulation. For the phase value formulation, in addition 2 different notations
exist: the RL-notation and the AR-notation. In both notations. three different
card formats can be used:
• normal format ($VINTAGE, 0)
• high-precision format ($VINTAGE. 1)
· free format.
These card formats first will be explained for the RL-notation (normal usage).
Next, the AR-notation will be discussed. These notations, which .belong to the phase
value formulation. will be followed by another part, where an extra format used
for the sequence value formulation will be discussed.
Phase values
RL notation
Normally the RL notation is used. You can stack the values for [R] and [L] in
the way explained in section IV.C.3. If previously the AR notation was used. you
can toggle to the RL notation by using the following card:

1 NQRMAL ~ FORMAT (SVINTAGE. Ql

To specify N mutually coupled R-L elements. the following format is used:
IV.C. Branch cards tor mutuallr coupled RL elements (t7Pe 51.52.53 ••.• ) - 19

•~ I' ~'If t~ Ie !~ I' tel<

I'
,.11 ~ I
t~l* ~t tIle ~. ft tII~ I'I~ II p ~~~(
If
LI rl~( ~ . It
I~I(

w node names reference br. elements (k. m) elements (k. m+ 1) elements (k. m+ 2)
Cl.
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L R L R L

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E12.2 E6.2 E12.2 E6.2 E12.2

2 HIGH-PRECISION CARD FORMAT ($VINTAGE, 11

Even in this case there is a high-precision format available. All value formats
are now switched to the E16.o format. Next grid shows the input structure.
I' I- [e
I~ iE t~ Ie 'I_ I~ ~_I< r~ Ie I- f! r~l* I' ~;
f* r.~~ tl i ~ f~f! l(~(
f· r!I~lc

w node names reference br. elements

Cl.
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E16.0 E16.0

3 EBEE. FORMAT
Besides the regular format and the high-precision format. a third (but tricky)
way can be used to input type 51.52.53 RL branches. This input is called FREE
FORMAT. but it is not totally "free". Some important rules apply here:
- separate each field by comma's (i.e. last Sign of the variable CHRCOM in
the STARTUP file);
- blanks are totally ignored, and node names are left adjusted;
- do not input node names after column 26;
- do not input values before column 27;
- Make sure there is always a total of five comma's before column 26 (delimiting
one type field and four node name fields) and a total of six comma's should
follow column 27 (delimiting six numeric fields for R and L).
- If the figures are to be continued on the next card because the number of
columns per card exceeded, the continuation symbol (fifth character of
CHRCOM of STARTUP. usually "$") must be used. On such card. no extra comma IS
are needed.
With these rules, only column 27 must be [Link] position information.
On the other hand, a painstaking count of comma's is necessary. See section IV. C. 3
(remarks) and section Iv.c.4 (examples) for further usage. Supporting routine
XFORMER (section XIX.A) creates punched card output in free-format notation.
AR notation
In some cases, the [L]-l-matrix is ill-conditionned or singular, so [L] does
not exist. Therefor the AR notation is used. "A" stands for the [L]-l-matrix and
"RI! stands for the [R]-matrix.
IV.C. Branch card. tor mutually coupled RL element. (type 51.52.53 •••• ) - 20

Switching to the AR notation can be done by the following card:

In this case, we use the following equation:

dv _ [Lr1v- [Lrl[R]i
dt

Now we have to be carefuil when punching the data in the input format. The
[L]-l-matrix replaces R in the input format. In the same way, the [R]-matrix replaces
L in the input format.
Sequence values

When using the sequence value formulation, only one card format exists:

Il I! If !E
I~ fl:! If E ,e I~ I·;!l f!lf rft~1 e ,~ l~1 f tE Ie If 'EI~ Ie I' I~'l f!lf tE ,~ic .i _f' 'EI~le H:~ If rf~~ Ie
I~
~.l~ ~ E rEI~ r

w node names reference br. sequence values

c..
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E12.2

IV.C,3. Parameters

Following is an explanation of the parameters used in the above card formats.

A distinction should be made between phase value and sequence value usage.

1 PHASE VALUE USAGE (NORMaL. HIGH-PRECISION QR FORMaT) ~

ITYPE: Specifies N phases by numbering 51, 52, 53 •••• (50+N} in this field.
N is limited up to 40. Continuation cards must have blank ITYPE fields.
BUSl. BUS2: Terminal node names of the elements in the phase, indicated by the
ITYPE field. Nodes may be grounded (indicated by blank field name) if
desired.
BUS3, Bus4: Equally to mutually coupledRLC branches, referencing can be used
here. The same rules must be taken into account as typing only the node
names of the first phase of the reference set in the same sequence.
R. L: The numerical values of the matrices [R] and [L] are to be put in these
fields. The units for R will be in ohms and for L there are two cases:
- Inductance L : mH if XOPT = zero;
- Reactance 2nf~ in ohms at frequency f = XOPT
IV.C. Branch card. tor autua11y coupled RL e1eaent. (type 51.52.53 •••. ) - 21

Remarks
- Matrices [R] and [L] are symmetric, so only need to be specified on and below
the diagonal. When one card is not sufficient to specify all R-L values,
then continuation cards are used, with columns 1-26 left blank. The following
format applies:
a) for $VINTAGE, 0:

I~ IE
I~I~
5 SA
ISle I~

RA
f~ f· r* Rll
tf Ie
L11
tfl~ I~ tf ~~ ~t 'EI*

5~ 5B RB R21 L21 R22 L22

5 SC RC R31 L31 R32 L32 R33 L33
5~ 50 RO R41 L41 R42 L42 R43 L43
R44 L44
5t 5E RE RS1 L51 R52 L52 R53 L53
RS4 L54 R55 L55

: Etc.

b) for $VINTAGE, 1:

.
.~
,

IC
5 SA RA Rll L11
5 5B RB R21 L21
R22 L22
5~ 5C RC R31 L31
R32 L32
R33 L33
5"1 SO RO R41 L41
R42 L42
R43 L43
R44 L44

: Etc.

- There is no branch current output possible for this branch type. However,
the branch voltage can be obtained on the first two phases (column 80 is not
being used) .
- There is only one supporting routine that can be used to generate the data
in the proper input format:
IV.C. Branch card. tor mutually coupled RL element. (type 51.52.53 .... ) - 22

XFORMER: to derive [R] and [uL] for single-phase transformers in free

format. RL notation (phase value formulation). See also section
XIX.A.

2 SE~UENCE VALUES UsaGE

ITYPE: Specifies N phases by numbering 51, 52. 53 •••• {50+N) in this field.
N is limited up to 40.
BUSl. BUS2: Terminal node names of the elements in the phase. indicated by the
ITYPE field. Nodes may be grounded (indicated by blank field name) if
desired.
BUS3. Bus4: Terminal node names of the first branch (phase) of the reference
set.
R. L: The first card (type 51) carries the homopolar or zero sequence values
(Ro. Lo) • The second card (type 52) contains the direct or positive sequence
values (R1 • L1) and the R and L field of the third card has to be left
blank. The units for R and L are the same as mentioned for the previous
format. For L:
- Inductance L : mH if XOPT = zero;
- Reactance ~L in ohms at frequency f = XOPT
Remark
- If columns 15-80 of the third and further cards for sequence values. are not
left blank. the EMTP will not .recognize the coupled branches as being specified
wi th sequence values. In this case. the phase domain format will be assumed.
with the result being a very unbalanced. erroneous representation.

IV.C.4. Examples

Next example will show the use of normal mutually coupled RL elements. We'll
use the output of the supporting routine XFORMER (see section XIX-A) which format
is a high-precision and free format.
C 1 234 567 8
c 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
[Link] 0.9272618817281£-01. 0.3493188082966£+03 •••••
52.L1 -0.5411077293636£-01. 0.2037410770117£+03 S
0.3157657837292E-Ol. 0.1189555285801£+03 •••••
c 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

A second example shows the special case of sequence values:

r-----------------~
N1A I R L I N2A
O~---~:---~c:=J I o
I I
N1B I R L I N2B
o~---+I~c:=J I o
I I
I I
N1C I R L I N2C
O~----4I---~c:=J
I
I
I o
I I
~-----------------~
Coupling
IV.C. Branch carda tor mutually coupled RL element. (type 51.52.53 •••• ) - 23

The sequence parameters for example could be:

RO = 4.5 ohm R1 = 3.1 ohm
LO = 87.6 mH L1 = 66.4 mH

C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
51 N1A N2A 4.5 87.6
52 N1B N2B 3.1 66.4
53 N1C N2C
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1,-2,-3) - 24

IV.D. Branch cards for distributed-parameter elements

(type -1,-2,-3)

Introduction

A generalized frequency dependent model with frequency dependent matrix is not

yet available in EMTP. Hence. this section only deals with distributed parameter
models with constant transformation matrix.
Taking the geometry of the power carrier (line or cable) into account, one can
distinguish between transposed or untransposed power carriers. Further distinction
is related to the parameters used to derive the model: constant parameters or
frequency dependent parameters.
Depending on the geometry of the power carrier, for constant parameter models
one distinguishes:
• Clarke model : transposed
• K.C. Lee model: untransposed
The constant parameter models further can be subdivided into
• distortionless models
• lumped resistance models
• exact PI models (for steady state only)
The frequency dependent parameter models currently available in EMTP are:
• JMARTI setup (for lines and cables)
· SEMLYEN setup (for lines and cables)
For all these models, usually, phase values will be obtained as a result of
simulation. When the user wants, he can also obtain mode voltage output. Then, the
special request "MODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT" is needed (see section 11-2). Benchmark DC38
illustrates such special usage.
GENERAL MODEL;
A number of possibilities can be chosen by the user to get the required model.
The general scheme is shown in the figure below.
R'lI x L'1I x

This figure represents just one incremental section, of a line with only one
phase. In general, the equations of a multiphase line can be written as follows:
dU dt •
- dX = [L]dt + [R]i
dt dV -
- dX = [C]~+ [G]u

[R]. [L] and [C] can be determined from a supporting program. See "LINE
CONSTANTS" (section XXI) or "CABLE CONSTANTS" (section XXIII).
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 25

It should be stressed that none of the above models uses phase value. notation.
Modal values and sequence va1ues are used instead. Both notations will be explained
here after.

1 Modal value notation;·

For untransposed power carriers, one relies on the modal analysis (eigenva-
lue-eigenvector calculation). Input data thus contain modal quantities ([Link], Lmode,
Cmode ) as well as a modal transformation matrix [Til (see theory book). The number
of modes is equal to the number of phases. Strictly speaking, [Ti] is complex,
frequency dependent and dependent on the power carrier configuration. This frequency
dependency is certainly true for strongly unbalanced power carriers as well as for
most practical cases of double-circuit transmission lines. However, this frequency
dependency can not be taken into account. On the other hand, all supporting routines
(LINE CONSTANTS, CABLE CONSTANTS, SEMLYEN, JMARTI) allow the user to specify the
frequency at which the transformation matrix should be calculated. Hence the user
is advised to take the value for this frequency equal to a value within the region
of interest for transients to be studied.
For transposed power carriers, one can also rely on the modal analysis. Some
peculiarities exist, however, making the modal value notation less usefull in case
of transposition:
• some of the modes are equal amongst themselves (and hence do not
need to be calculated). Furthermore, most numerical techniques used
for eigenvalue-eigenvector calculations fail on a transposed system
since they are unable to determine the multiple modes correctly.
Hence. for this special situation. an alternative called "sequence
value notation" was developped (see next paragraph).
• the transformation matrix is real (not complex), constant (frequency
independent) and independent of the power carrier configuration (as
long as it is balanced).
Input data only contain modal quantities {[Link] [Link] ClIIOde ) , not a modal
transformation matrix [Ti]. Again. the number of modes. is equal to the number of
phases.
Similar remarks can be made for specially transposed double circuit overhead
lines (see section IV.D.2).

2 Sequence value notation

Out of the previous explanations on modal value notation, it can be derived
that a sequence value is nothing more than a modal value. But the number of sequences
is always smaller than the number of modes (some of the modes are equal amongst
themselves):
• full transposed: only two distinct values:
Z, Z". Z". Z". Z". Z". Zc 0 o
Z". Z, Z". Z". Z". Z". o ZL
Z". Z". Z, Z". Z". Z".
=+
Z". Z". Z". Z. Z". Z".
Zm Z". Zm Zm Z, Ziti
Zm Zm Zm Zm Zm Z, o
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 26

- 1 ground mode or sequence: Z c - Z.+ (N - l)Z ...

- (N-l) identical line modes or sequence: ZL-Z.-Z ...
(N = number of phases)
In the remainder of this text. we will first deal with the following models:
• constant parameter line models for a N-phase system •
• here. we will discuss the distortionless model. the lumped resistance
model. as well as the exact PI model.
• further. reference will be made to the Clarke model (transposed) and
the K.C. Lee model (untransposed).
• constant line models for specially transposed double three-phase circuits
• JMARTI model
• SEMLYEN model
Most models do not work with the full values for (Rmode. Lmode. ClDode ). but rather
with ~ unit length values. Hence it is important that the length specification
uses units which are consistent with the per unit of length modal values.

IV.D.l. Constant-parameter ~ model using constant ~

1 GENERALLY
The general figure of a power carrier (line or cable) with distributed parameters
is shown below:

PARAMElERS

IN THEMOOAl.. DOMAIN

All input parameters must previously be transformed in modal quantities. This

is done by the supporting routine "LINE CONSTANTS" or "CABLE CONSTANTS". Depending
on the power carrier configuration one can distinguish between transposed (Clarke
model) or untransposed (K.C. Lee model) situations. Depending on the internal
representation of all parameters in the model. one can distinguish between
distortionless model, lumped resistance model or exact PI model:
l.a DistortionIess line modelling
A transmission-line mode is well known to be distortionless if the parameters
for that mode satisfy the relation 7-~. Of course. actual leakage conductance for
an overhead line is nearly zero. and no provision for inputting a nonzero value
is provided by this program anyway.
If the user wants distortionless-line modelling. it is presumed that the input
value of R' is meant to be a measure of the total line losses. Therefore, the
program splits the losses into series and shunt losses by computing the series
resistance R'series and the leakage conductance G'leak from the relation
R' ...... _ G' [Link] _ o.s(~)
L' C' L'

With this formula, the ac steady-state results are practically identical whether
the line is modelled as distortionless or in the other two ways to follow. Transient
responses differ mainly in the initial rise of voltage pulses.
IV.D. Branch cards for distributed-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 27

l.b Lumped-resistance line modelling

In this distributed model, the series resistance is pulled outside of the
distributed line and represented as a lumped element. This is the most common
representation used in BPA studies, the standard representation which is assumed
unless the user specifically requests otherwise (see section IV. D. 2- 3). The program
automatically cuts the. line in two. inserting half of the resistance in the middle,
and one quart at each end.

DISTRISUTEO DISTRISUTEO
L'.t" L'.t"

OJ/lTI/I/Jm/lllll7lI/I/I/J//llll/J/lJ/JTITITI/II GROUND

The half-length distribution sections then become lossless (hence dis tor-
tionless). But at high frequency steady state (200 kHz). results of such model are
quite erroneous. Therefore. an extra option called "exact phasor equivalent" was
developed.

l.e Exact PI equivalent

For the phasor solution. resistance is lumped (1/4 on each end and half in the
middle) for constant-parameter distributed lines. This agrees with the modelling
of the time-step loop. of course. But sometimes the user may want the correct
(exact) representation for the phasor solution. using long-line formulas. It can
be obtained by the request:
EXACT PHASOR EQUIVALENT
An example of such usage can be found in the second subcase of BENCHMARK DCll.

2 ClillIl. FORMATS
As in most cases, also here one can provide input data in a normal or in
high-precision format.

2.a Normal card format

The normal card format in his general form looks as follows:

I- I! tE Ie ~ . ~m
,
~~
Q)
fC I" I..:
........
~l tf ~E
I'
t~l( I"
1* ~,l~IE
1* r~
8
0

w node names reference br. v

C
....0'
~
:I: :I:
Cl.
.8 c A B t; UW
w ZUl
~ VI'-Q)
'- c-
Z
w Z :::>0
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4
VI ' - '
Q) -
~ ;:! g,g, I~
... 0::

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 I~ 12 I~ 1=

IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter elementa (type -1.-2,-3) - 28

2.b High-precision format

In this case there is also a high-precision format available. Specifically the
resistance, A, B and length fields are now switched to the E12.2 format, as can
be observed on the next grid. Note that for IPOSE. an Ii field rather then an 12
field is available. This will have some consequences (see remark 7).

!=
If ,
f~ff Ie f~ f! ~qf
[
W l~if t~ I~I' f~ H 'E I~ l~ff { [d~ I·I~
J:
I.U Resistance u
a.. BUS1 BUS2 A B Length l.U
z z
R'[O /Iength] - :::>
~ !:QQ,

12 A6 A6 E12.2 E12.2 E12.2 E12.2 12 12

3 PARAMETERS
Branch card input:
ITYPE: indicates the sequence of the phases by punching -1. -2. -3 ••••• -N.
There is one such card for each phase. Recall that the number of modes
equals the number of phases. See remark 1 and 2.
If N is greater than 9. phase indication is alphabetical (10 = A. 11 = B.
etc. ). In practice ,such lines are believed to be transposed always. Hence,
not ITYPEbut IPOSE is the actual indication of the number of phases (see
remark 7).
BUS1, BUS2: terminal node names of each phase. Nodes may be grounded (indica ted
by a blank name field) if desired.
BUS3, Bus4: Equally to PI-equivalents, referencing can be used here. On the
other hand. this option has no advantages. since there is no saving of
memory storage anyhow. The same rules must be taken into account, so that
only the first card (first phase) bears the reference nodes. specified as
the nodes appearing on the first card used as reference set. The following
cards (following phases) just specify the consecutive type numbers and the
node names of the other input ports, not the nodes of the reference set
nor the RLC values.
Resistance: modal resistance in ohms/length. Be sure to keep length-units
consistent for "A", "B" and "LENGTH". See remarks 1 and 2.
A: dependent on "ILINE" , "A" will be punched as shown in following table. See
remarks 1 and 2. No confusion should be made with the AR-notation. it
should be noted!
B: dependent on "ILlNE", "B" will be punched as shown in following table. See
remarks 1 and 2.
LENGTH: value of the total length of the line to be examined. See remark 3.
Value should be positive for transposed cases (IPOSE = 0) and negative for
untransposed cases (IPOSE > 0).
IV.D. Branch card. for distributed-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 29

ILlNE: determines the definition of "A" and "B". See remarks 1, 2 and 3.
Following table represents the possibilities:
lLlNE "A" "B"
0
(not
-modal inductance L' in mH/length
if XOPT = 0
- modal capacitance. C' in llF/length
if COPT = 0
blank) - modal reactance uL' in njlength at - modal susceptance <.AJ:; , in
frequency :. = XOPT ~ [Link]/length at frequency ::. =COPT ~
1 Modal surge impedance Z. in ohms Modal propagation velocity in
length/sec
Z.-
# C.
v---
~
1

2 Modal surge impedance Zs in ohms Modal travel time ~ of line, in sec

"t-~-~l
Z,-
# C. v

~ Recall that XOPT and COPT can be specified in the. miscellaneous data cards
or via the $UNlTS request.
IPUNCH: specifies the type of modelling to be used on the mode of the card in
question:
o .... lumped-resistive modelling (usual case). unless the special request
"EXACT PRASOR REQUEST" was made in the input.
1 .... distortionless-mode modelling
Note that it is not obligatory to model the different modes of a mul tiphase
power carrier all in the same way!
rpOSE: specifies if the line is assumed to be transposed or untransposed:
o .... transposed line: Clarke model - no transformation matrix should be
specified.
N .... untransposed line with N phases: K.C. Lee model - a transformation
matrix should be defined following the N-th branch card (see remark
8). Please refer to remark 7 in case N > 9.
roUT: can be used for branch output requests:
,1' branch current;
'2' branch voltage;
'3' branch current and branch voltage;
'4' branch power and energy consumption.
Because of a program bug, only lOUT = 2 will give correct results. For all
other rOUT-values. results are unreliable.
See also remark 4 for further usage.
Remarks;
1} For an N-phase continuously-transposed line, there exists only two modes.
Specify the zero-sequence parameters on the first card (card for the first
phase), and the positive-sequence parameters on the second card (card for
the second phase). Leave the modal parameters blank on the third and later
branch cards. For specially-transposed double-circuit 3-phase lines. we
refer to section rV.D.2.
2) For an N-phase untransposed line, there exists N different modes. Specify
the modal parameters for the first mode on the first card, for the second
mode on the second card, etc., for the third and later modes.
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter elementa (trPe -1.-2.-3) - 30

3) Be sure to keep length units consistent for "Resistance", "A", "B" and
"Length" • The length should be negative in order to avoid the program from
misinterpreting [Ti]
4) There are two restrictions when using the lOUT output request.
a) All phases should be keyed equally whenever requesting branch current
output, which is also involved in the power and energy output requesting.
The reason for this is that a vector-matrix computation is involved to
find the line current. so all components of the current vector must be
available.
If the user does not want such symmetric current output. he is advised
to leave column 80 blank and instead to do his current sampling with
either a series switch or a low-impedance branch.
b) Never use the column 80 output request in case of a single-phase distributed
line. since the result will be wrong.
5} All modes of a line must have travel time ~ in excess of the time step size
~t. If not. the program will stop with an error message.
6) Both L' and C' must be nonzero for each mode.
7) When using the alternate high-precision format. the length of the IPOSE-field
will be 11 rather than 12. If N (number of phases) is less than 10. IPOSE
will be equal to N. If N is greater than 9. the assignement of IPOSE is :
N IPOSE
10 A
11 B
12 C
13 D
14 E
15 F
16 G
17 H
18 I
8) Transformation matrix input:
Only when " IPOSE" is nonzero. the transformation matrix [Ti] is read
immediately after the N-th branch card. Beware that this only will be
performed correctly if the LENGTH parameter obtained a negative value.
Following format is to be used:

1~~H~i~~~ ~
~ IE E
~~f E I ~ I~ 'f Ie ~ E 'f r ~ rff~l( ~~~~ rE r

Tlk.1 Tlk.2 Tlk.3 Tlk.4 Tlk.5 Tlk.6

E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5

The elements of the matrix [Ti] are read in by rows (row 1 first. then row
2. etc.). For a given row. the real part of matrix element for all columns
comes first; then the imaginary part follows on a new card. Within each
row, elements are read in order of increasing column number. Each row
begins with a new card and there are 6 or fewer elements per card.
IV.D. Branch card. tor d1.tr1buted-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 31

If the transmission line had only 3 phases, the final three fields (columns
37-72) would not be used. For N ~ 6 phases, exactly 2N data cards are
involved; for 7 ~ N S 12 phases, exactly 4N data cards are involved, etc.
Note that there must be exactly 2N2 elements for [TiJ.

4 EXAMPLE
1} Consider the 3-phase continuously-transposed line shown in the next figure,
so only two different modes should be considered; grand mode (or zero sequence
value) and line mode (or positive sequence value). Furthermore, no transformation
matrix should be specified.

GEN-Ao--....., LINE PARAMETERS ,----'-J END-A

CEN-Bo...r--..., I· ....." END-B

IN THE [Link] DOIoWN
t----<u END-C

Suppose the line length is 180 miles, with sequence parameters per unit of
length (i.e. per mile) as follows:

R' [Ohm/mileJ L' [H/mileJ C' [pF/mileJ

Zero sequence 10.9 .0774 .0107
Pos. sequence .0484 .0294 .0192
This could be the result of a LINE CONSTANTS run requesting Clarke model output
(see section XXI-Fl. Indeed, recall that, for the Clarke model, ATP only creates
a table of sequence values. This table is not the correct input format for type
-1,-2,-3 branches. So the user has to put the results in the correct input format
as follows:
C 1 2 3 4 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
SUNITS, 0., O.
-lGEH-A END-A 10.9 77.4 .0107 +180. 0 0 0
-2GEN-B END-B .0484 29.4 .0192 +180. 0 0 0
-3GEH-C END-C
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Remarks:
1} $UNITS, 0., O. was needed to specify XOPT = O. and COPT = O.
2} ILINE = 0 (col 52); "A" represents the modal inductance, in mH/mile
(XOPT = 0)
"B't represents the modal capacitance, in llF/mile
(COPT = 0)
3} Lumped resistance model is in use: IPUNCH = 0 (col 54)
4) IPOSE = 0 (col 56): transposition assumed.
5) "Length" has positive value.
2) The next example will treat four separate, uncoupled single-phase lines.
Data are shown below.
IV.D. Branch card. for d1.tr1buted-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 32

11'- 0.30/roW. 0160 Hz

l'- 0.40/roWe
LEFT o-[Link]J-------[Link]t------c::;-o -{
e-- 12.6pmho/roWe
~ ; ; ,-tII_O. 1miles

lD-11{~': ~6d1
0160 Hz
10-40----- ----_0
,.. - e60 '""
length - 200m

II'_ Q.20Lm 01 !lO Hz

PT o-c;;:::r------c;;::r------c:;::::r--o"KY Z.•_- [Link]>

300ll
mi. {
1 "2 "l length - 200m

11'_ 0.30/roWe ot 60 Hz
l'- 0.4 a/roWe
Llo-[Link]J-------[Link]t-----c::;-o Rl (
co- 12.6Pmho/roWe
~ ; ; lonvltl • 0.1 mila

The corresponding input card might be as follows:

C 1 2 3 4 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
$UNITS. 60 .• 60.
-lLEFT RIGHT 0.3 0.4 12.6 +0.1 0
-110-A 10-B 0.0 260. .66 +200. 2
$UNITS. 50 .• 50.
-lPT XY 0.2 300. 3.0E8 +200. 1
$UNITS. -1 .• -1.
-lL1 R1 LEFT RIGHT
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Remark;
For the second case (lossless case). the length specification is not realy
needed.
3) The last example treates the output of the supporting routine "LINE CONSTANTS"
in case of a 3-phase untransposed line. Suchan output can be punched as follows:
N
J P
T L •
Y I A
P N S
E £ £
SVINTACE, 1
-1./ DA UtI\. 0.48410£+00 0.59859£+03 0.13567£+06-o.13SOO£+03 1 3
-2JDII Ll'l1I D.28246E-01 0.19090£+03 0.182771-06-0.13800£-03 1 3
-3JDC LI'IC O,31914E-01 0.275301-03 0.18181£+06-0.138001-03 1 3
SVINTACE, 0
0.58603393 0.70710678 -0.40391419 ......1 part of row 1 of [Til
0.02421025 0.00000000 0.02143232 .. 1 _ . part of row 1 of [Til
0.55636368 0.00000000 0.81998412
-0.04914911 0.00000000 0.02034723
0.58603393 -0.70710678-0.40391419
0.02421025 0.00000000 0.02143232 atc.

Remark that XOPT nor COPT should be specified because ILlNE = 1.

Further remark that length indeed has a negative value; otherwise the reading of
[Ti] would go wrong.

IV.D.2. Special double-circuit distributed line. Hi±h zero-se-

quence coupling

1 [Link]
In the introduction to section IV.D, we already dealt with the full transposed
6-phase circuit. Here, only two distinct parameters were in use: Zs and Zm.
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter elementa (type -1.-2.-3) _ 33

Z$ Zm Z". Z". Z". Z.. Zc

Z .. Z. Z". Z .. Zrn Zrn ZL
Zm
Zm
Zm
Zm
Z,
Z".
Z".
Z,
Z".
Zrn
Z".
Zrn
...
Zm Zm Zm Zm Z. Zrn
Zm Zrn Z .. Z .. Z.. Z, ZL

- Zc·Z,+SZ". (multiplicity 1)
- Z L - Z. - Z rn (multiplicity 5)
This phase value impedance matrix agrees with following physical reality:
· tower configuration

2b 1b

· transposition scheme

10 ----"""'-
1 b ---___..,.
1c ------...
2 a ---___..,.
2b -----..,/
2c

A special case of transposed lines is when two multiphase circuits are physically
separated and when these two circuits are individually transposed, but mutual
untransposed. This agrees with following physical reality:
· tower configuration
IV.D. Branch cards for distributad-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 34

1c 2c

transposition scheme

;~ ----------------------;(~--------------------~~-----------------------

In the matrix. ,.only three distinct parameters are allowed: Z•• Zm and Zp.
Zs Ziti Z". Zp Zp Zp Zc
Z". Z, Z". Zp Zp Zp Z IL
Z". Z". Z, Zp Zp Zp ZL
~
Zp Zp Zp Z. Z .. Z".
Zp Zp Zp Z .. Z. Z ..
Zp Zp Zp Z .. Z .. Z,

The three distinct phase coupling parameters Z•• Zm and Zp can be indirectly
specified by three sequence parameters. The relationship is:
- Z c - Z, + 2Z .. + 3Z p (multiplicity 1)
- Z IL - Z, + 2Z .. - 3Z p (multiplicity 1)
- ZL-Z,-Z .. (multiplicity 4)
Here ZG .is the ground-mode parameter. identical to the value for the zero-sequence
mode of the continuously-transposed line of section IV.D.l. if parameters Zp and
Zm happen to be equal (all conductors are continuously transposed). Parameter ZL
is identical with the familiar line-mode of the continuously-transposed line.
Finally. parameter ZIL is completely new. It is an interline-mode associated with
intercircuit zero-sequence coupling.
The next figure shows the submatrices of the previously mentioned matrix.
Z(l.l) Z(1.2)
Z(2,1) Z(2.2)
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 3S

Submatrices Z(l,l) and Z(2,2) (which are equal amongst each other) are matrices
which are conform to the matrices of continuously transposed lines. This means
that the each circuit individually is continuously transposed.
All elements of [Z(l,2)] or [Z(2,l)] are equal to the same value (Zp), the
mutual coupling between anyone of the conductors of one circuit and anyone of
the conductors of the other circuit.

2 CARZ2. FORMATS
Again, data can be provided either in a normal or in a high-precision format.
No transformation matrix should be specified. because in this case, the program
uses the directly converted sequence parameters. An ordinary run of the supporting
routine "LINE CONSTANTS" will not generate the sequence values for this
double-circuit special transposition case. The user himself will have to calculate
the sequence values. This is explained in the example of section XXI-F-3. On the
other hand, the Semlyen setup can be used in a more userfriendly way, without the
involvement of manual calculations. This is explained in section XXII-D. Finally,
remark the obligatory input sequence (section 3. remark 1), which is different
from the sequence in which the parameters are normally obtained by an automatic
procedure.

2.a Normal card format

The same format as in section IV.D.1-2 can be used here:

:I~·I~~~~ I~! ~~~

I- I: IE 8
I II I: ~l Ie til! Ie ,. t~
tll* ~.l~ pi</< j- r, 0
CP
.....,
w
a..
node names reference br. u
c ....C'
.s:;
:I:
I-
:I:
Uw
B,c A B <-' W z(/)
~ III CP Z Z ~o
w
I~
'-0-
III ....... d
...'" . ...J Q;Q;
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 ~

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 12 12 12 -

2.b High-precision format

Also here. we use the same format as in section IV.D.1-2.

:c
Resistance ""u
"" BUS1 BUS2 A B Length z z
~ R'[O/Iength] -
Q;l~
:::>

12 A6 A6 E12.2 E12.2 E12.2 E12.2 12 12

3 PARAMETERS
ITYPE: The numbering of these circuits must be done consecutive by numbering
the first circuit in the normal way (-1, -2, -3) and continue this numbering
at the second cirCuit (-4, -5, -6).
BUS1, BUS2: terminal node names of each phase. Nodes may be grounded (indicated
by a blank name field) if desired.
IV.D. Branch cards tor distributed-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 36

BUS3, Bus4: Equally to PI-equivalents, referencing can be used here. On the

other hand, this option has no advantages, .since there is no saving of
memory storage anyhow. The same rules must be taken into account, so that
only the first card (first phase) bears the reference nodes, specified as
the nodes appearing on the first card used as reference set. The following
cards (following phases) just specify the consecutive type numbers and the
node names of the other input ports, not the nodes of the reference set
nor the RLC values.
Resistance: modal resistance in ohms/length. Be sure to keep length-units
consistent for "A", "B" and "LENGTH" • See remarks 1 and 2.
A: dependent on "ILlNE" , "A" will be punched as shown in following table. See
remarks 1 and 2. No confusion with "AR-notation" should be made!
B: dependent on "!LINE", "B" will be punched as shown in following table. See
remarks land 2.
LENGTH: total length of the line to be examined. See remarks 1 and 2. Value
should be positive for transposed cases (IPOSE = 0) and negative for
untransposed cases (IPOSE > 0).
ILlNE: determines the definition of "A" and "B". See remarks 1 and 2. Following
table represents the possibilities:

ILINE "A" "B"

0 - modal inductance L in mH/length - modal capacitance C'
t in llF/length
(not if XOPT = 0 if COPT = 0
blank) - modal reactance u.i..' in fl/length at - modal susceptance u.C' in
frequency : = XOPT ~ pmho/length at frequency: =COPT ~

1 Modal surge impedance Zs in ohms Modal propagation velocity in

Z.-
Jf.c: length/sec
1
v- ~L'C'

2 Modal surge impedance Z. in ohms Modal travel time ~ of line, in sec

~-!-~l
Z.- Jf.
C' v

~ Recall that XOPT and COPT can be specified in the miscellaneous data cards
or via the $UNlTS request.
lPUNCH: specifies the type of modelling to be used on the mode of the card in
question:
o ~ lumped-resistive modelling (usual case), unless the special request
"EXACT PRASOR REQUEST" was made in the input.
1 ~ distortionless-mode modelling
Note that it is not obligatory to model the different modes of a mul tiphase
power carrier the same way!
lPOSE: will always be blank because the line is assumed to be transposed, be
it specially transposed.
lOUT: can be used for branch output requests:
'1' branch current;
'2' branch voltage;
'3' branch current and branch voltage;
'4' branch power and energy consumption.
IV.D. Branch cards tor distributed-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 37

Because of a program bug. only lOUT = 2 will give correct results. For all
other lOUT values. results are unreliable.
See also remark 3 for further usage.
Remarks:
1) Only three sequence values have to be put in the input carcl. That is: the
G-sequence (ground mode) goes on card of conductor 1. the L.-sequence (line
mode) goes on card of conductor 2 and the IL-sequence (interline mode) goes
on card number 3. Cards 4 through 2N are to be left blank for the input
values. The node names must of course be inputted.
2) Be sure to keep length units consistent for "Resistance". "A". "B" and
"Length" •
3) There is only one restriction when using the lOUT output request:
All phases should be keyed equally whenever requesting branch current output.
which is also involved in the power and energy output requesting. The reason
for this is that a vector-matrix computation is involved to find the line
current. so all components of the current vector must be available.
If the user does not want such symmetric current output. he is advised to
leave column 80 blank and instead to do his current sampling with either
a series switch or a low-impedance branch.
4) All modes of a line must have travel time -c in excess of the time step size
~t. If not, the program will stop with an error message.
5) Both L' and C' must be nonzero for each mode.
4 EXAMPLE
Consider a 180-mile double-circuit line having the one-line diagram as sketched
below.

~~ ~-----""(-:~-~-:-i-)-:,-':-----~ ::
Note that termination of both lines at one end is on the same 3-phase bus
"SEND". while on the other end. the termination is different ("REC1" and "REC2").
The sequence parameters for this line are assumed to be taken as follows:
R [Ohm/mile] L [H/mile] C [pp/mile]
G-mode 0.58 0.00340 0.0091
L-mode 0.034 0.00068 0.0166
IL-mode 0.035 0.00110 0.0116
HQte Qn ~ generation g! double-circuit special transposition seguence values:
- Supporting routine LINE CONSTANTS can not generate such sequence values
automatically. Additional manual calculations are involved. as explained in
section XXI-F-3.
Supporting routine SEMLYEN SETUP can generate the requested sequence values
automatically. without extra manual calculations. This is explained in section
XXII-D.
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 38

The data card for input to the EMTP appears as follows:

C 1 2 3 . 567 8
C 34567890123.56789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123.567890
$UNITS. 0 .• O.
-1SENOA RECIA .58 3.4 .0091 +180. 0 0 0
-2SENDB RECIB .03. .68 .0166 +180. 0 0 0
-3SENDC RECIC .035 1.1 .0116 +180. 0 0 0
-4SENDA REC2A
-SSENOBREC2B
-6SENOC REC2C
C 1 2 3 • 5 6 7 8
C 34567890123.S678901234S6789012nS678901234S67890123.S678901234567890123.567890
Remarks;
1) XOPT and COPT both are assumed to be zero (SUNITS , 0., O. - reques t) .
2) ILINE = 0 (col 52); "A" represents the modal inductance, in mH/mile (XOPT
= 0 and length specifier also expressed in miles)
"B" represents the modal capacitance, in pF /mile (COPT
= 0 and length specifier also expressed in miles)
3) IPUNCH = 0 (col 54): lumped resistance model is in use
4} IPOSE = 0 (col 56): transposition assumed (here: special double-circui t
transposi tion) •
5) LENGTH = +180: positive value, expressed in miles.

IV.D.3. JMARTI ~ model

The JMARTI supporting routine described in .section XVII can only generate the
so-called LUNIT7 punched output for travelling wave modelling.
In this particular model. both the characteristic .impedance Zc and the
propagation function A1 are obtained using modal characteristics. calculated over
a user-defined frequency range. under the assumption of a constant transformation
matrix (phase-mode-transformation). Then, both Zc and Al undergo a high-order
rational function .approximation. In the time domain, this fitting is represented
by a sum of real exponentials, thus allowing usage of recursive convolution methods
in the time domain. Typical values for the order are 5 ..• 10.
In order to allow the program to calculate the necessary model characteristics
for the conductor .system under study, the JMARTI code imbeds the LINE CONSTANTS
code. This is explained in section XVII in sufficient detail. JMARTI code can
also imbed CABLE CONSTANTS code. Except for Single-phase cases, results are believed
to be erroneous though,because the transformation matrix for cables is highly
frequency dependent.
The LUNIT7 punched output. resulting from such run immediately is in the correct
input format.
The punched cards always contain the following sequence for each pase or mode:
- branch card
- card grouping or frequency dependent representation of Zc
- card grouping for frequency dependent representation of A1
At the very end. the card grouping specifying the current transformation matrix
[Ti]should only follow in cases where the line is assumed to be untransposed (NP
> O. see first branch card).
Let us discuss these different card types in more detail now.
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1.-2,-3) - 39

1 Branch ~ t:sJ.r.. ~ K

~ BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 SKIP

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2

parameters
ITYPE: negative value of the phase number (-1, -2, -3 •... ). Phases should be
stacked in natural order.
BUS1, BUS2: names of the terminal nodes of the phase under consideration.
Recall: blank means connection to ground.
BUS 3 , Bus4: reference branch indication.
SKIP: control flag for the amount of branch data that will be displayed as
part of the data card interpretation.
o or blank: display and interpretation of all data cards
1: omit the display of data cards carrying poles and residues
2: omit the display of both the declaration of the function order as
well as the data cards carrying poles and residues. Only the branch
cards and the cards defining the transformation matrix (only in
case of an untransposed line) will remain visible.
PDTO: control flag for possible order reduction of the approximating rational
functions
o or blank: full function approximation as created on LUNlT7 will be
used.
~1: request for automatic order reduction (Le. elimination of
low-timeconstant poles). taking the user's time step size DELTAT
(see first miscellaneous data card) into account. Poles which have
no physical meaning will be eliminated. Such reduction will speed
up the simulation time and save memory storage. For details. we
refer to the minutes of the 1986 LEe Spring Meeting, contribution
86-13. [Link] Lima: "Replacement of low-timeconstant poles by a
single equivalent pole in recursive convolution line models".
The second subcase of DCNEW4 illustrates such order reduction. Results are
to be compared with the first subcase. omitting such reduction.
-2-flag: fixed flag. typical for the JMARTl branch cards (to distinguish this
model from the other distributed line models).
NP: transposition flag
0: all mutual coupled phases belonging to the JMARTl branch cards are assumed
to be continuously transposed. At the end of the card sequence, no
transformation matrix should be specified.
>0: in case the coupled phases are untransposed. one should specify the
total number of phases in the NP-field. Furthermore. at the end of the
card sequence. a transformation matrix should be specified.
lOUT: branch output request flag
0: no output
1: branch current output
2: branch voltage output
3: both branch voltage and current output
4: branch power and energy output
IV.D. Branch carda for distributed-parameter elements (type -1.-2.-3) - 40

~:
1. All phases should be keyed equally whenever branch current, power or
energy are involved. Remember that a vector-matrix computation is involved
to find the line currents. Hence, all components of the current vector
must be available.
2. If the user does not want such symmetric current output, he is advised
to leave column 80 blank, and instead request current sampling using
either a series measuring switch or a low-impedance branch.

2 ~ grouping ~ frequency dependent representation af ~ for

mode K
Such card grouping consists of two parts:
- initial card, defining function order andZc,int
- card .grouping defining the approximating rational function. The first half will
carryall residues, the second half will carry all poles.
The card formats are as follows:
2.a Initial card

NORDER ZC,inf

18 E32.20

parameters:
NORDER: order of the approximating rational function for Zc for mode K. From
this, the program learns the number of residue or pole cards that will
follow in the card grouping defining the approximating rational function.
Ze. int: limiting value of Zc for mode K as frequency goes to infinity.

2.b Card grouping defining the approximating rational function

I- i~ IE IE
i~ l'~ E IE Ie ~I· f~~ E Ie I~ tEI~iC ~E I ~ I.I~
rEI* ~,l~~E 1~
'EI*
FUN(I) FUN(I+ 1) FUN(I+2)
•
E25.0 E25.0 E25.0

parameters :
FUN{I): fitting parameters of Ze for mode K
- first come all residues for Ze (mode K), three per card, for as many cards
that are needed (see preceding NORDER card).
- next come all poles for Ze (mode K), starting on a new card, three per
card, for as many cards that are needed (same number as for the residues).
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) _ 41

3 [Link]. grouping m.r.. frequency del}endent rcwresentatian !£ ~ m.r..

maae. K
Such card grouping consists of two parts:
- initial card, defining function order and TRAVINF
- card grouping defining the approximating rational function. The first half will
carryall residues, the second will carry all poles.
The card formats are as follows.
3.a Initial card

NORDER TRAVINF

18 E3Z.Z0

parameters:
NORDER: order of the approximating rational function for Al for mode K. From
this, the program learns the number of residue or pole cards that will
follow in the card grouping defining the approximating rational function.
TRAVINF: infinite-frequency travel time for mode K

3.b Card grouping defining the approximating rational function

I~
I ~ l~~E Ie rm '"l-
I-
IE Ie i ~I~ ,e ~~ r~i( .~ IE ,
~
l'~E ,I 'EI~lc
'"
FUN(I) FUN(I+l ) FUN(I+2)

E25.0 E25.0 E25.0

parameters:
FUN{I): fitting parameters of Al for mode K
- first come all residues for Al (mode K), three per card, for as many cards
that are needed (see preceding NORDER card).
- next come all poles for Al (mode K), starting on a new card, three per
card, for as many cards that are needed (same number as for the residues).

These groups a), b) and c) should be repeated for each phase, stacked in natural
order.

4 TransfOrmation matrix (untransposed case)

At the end of this grouping, the specification of a transformation matrix [Ti]
should follow, only in case the line is assumed NOT to be transposed (i.e. NP =
o on all branch cards).
This matrix is complex, and input is ordered row by row. Each new row begins on
a new data card. Within a row all real parts come first, in increasing column
IV.D. Branch card. tor [Link]-parameter element. (type -1,-2,-3) - 42

order. for as many data cards that are required. Then come all imaginary parts.
beginning on a new input card (wheter or not the preceding real parts completely
filled the preceding card).
The general format for all such numbers is as follows:

1< I~ If ~E

·~!E IE I~I~ '~iE rf~ ~ .~I< i!!E ~( I~I~ IE If 1* H 'fl~l( I· i~ i~lc :~ 'f~N t~'! rEin
TI(L.M) TI(L.M+1) TI(L.M+2) TI(L.M+3) TI(L.M+4) TI(L.M+5)
,
E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0

HQ.t.e.:
Recall that via the first frequency card of the imbedded LINE CONSTANTS case,
the user has control over the frequency at which the transformation matrix will
be calculated.
- Further recall that. stricktly speaking, such transformation matrix can become
highly frequency dependent.
- It hence is advised to the user to carefully select the frequency to calculate
[Ti], in close relation to the transient behaviour (frequency range) one wants
to observe.
For transposed lines. this is not an issue because in such case. [Tt] is known
apriori. Furthermore. [Tt ] is constant allover the frequency range.
5 Example
JMARTI punched cards cannot be calcultaed manually. so it is felt unusefull
to .give more details. The user is referred to supporting routine JMARTI (see
description in chapter XVII).
For examples illustrating the output sequence. we refer to benchmarks DCNEW3.
DCNEW5 and DCNEW6.
DCNEW3 generates cards to be used in DCNEW4. DCNEW5 and DCNEW6 generate cards
that are used in DCNEW7.

IV.D.4. SEMLYEH-model

Although Semlyen Setup can generate various types of output (see section
XXII-A). in this section we only clarify on the so-called LUNIT7 punched output
for travelling wave modelling.
In this model, both the propagation response as well as the admittance response
are obtained using model characteristics calculated over a user-defined frequency
range, under the assumption of a constant transformation matrix (phase-mode
transformation). Then. both the propagation response as well as the admittance
response are approximated in the time domain. using only two real exponentials.
thus allowing usage of recursive convolution methods in the time domain. Results
are represented in the form of partial-fraction expansion.
In order to allow the program to calculate the necessary modal characteristics
for the conductor system under consideration, the Semlyen code imbeds either the
LINE CONSTANTS or the CABLE CONSTANTS code. In chapter XXII. both situations are
explained in detail.
IV.D. Branch carda for diatributed-parameter elementa (type -1.-2.-3) - 43

The LUNIT7 punched output, resulting from such run immediately is in the correct
input format.
The punched card format always contains the following sequence for each phase
or mode
- branch card
- steady state information
- one card containing partial-fraction expansion specifications for the
wave propagation response
one card containing partial-fraction expansion specifications for the
characteristic admittance response.
Next come cards that define the voltage transformation matrix [Tv] and current
transformation matrix [Ti].
Let us discuss these different card types in more detail now:

1 Branch .c:.:am fm.:. ~ K

.~ fiE Ie
I, 12 1.<1 I~ iE
2 I~ f~l€ 'E Ie I~
rfl* I' tf tqc ~f Ie I' I' I~ i-I' rE Ie
BUS1 BUS2 Yo TAU N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
~

- A6 A6 E12.5 E12.5 13 13 13 13 14 1

parameters

-1: Fixed type code for each Sem1yen branch

BUSI. BUS2: Six-character alphanumeric node names for the sending and receiving
ends of the branch under consideration. Blank means: connection to ground.
Yo: Infinite-frequency characteristic modal admittances for the mode under
consideration.
TAU: Modal travel time for the mode under consideration.
Nl. N2: Mode number indicators; Nl and N2 are always equal in value (K).
N3: The number of exponential curves used in the propagation step response
fitting. For Sem1yen setup, by definition, this number is 2 (double-ex-
ponential fitting).
N4: The number of exponential curves used in the characteristic admittance
fitting. For Sem1yen setup, by definition, this number is 2 (double-ex-
ponential fitting).
N5: The number of coupled conductors (or modes) making up this transmission
circuit. This number is used as a flag so that the program knows when the
transformation matrix should follow. The value for this variable is the
same on all branch cards for a certain line.
lOUT: Used to control the availability of branch variables for printing and/or
plotting. As usual,
"i"-punch produces branch current output;
"2"-punch produces branch voltage output;
"3"-punch produces both branch current & voltage output;
"4 ft -punch produces branch power and energy consumption.
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 44

Remark:
The column-BO punch (lOUT) on the branch cards must always be supplied by the
user if branch output variables for a Recursive Convolution line are desired. The
punched-card output of "SEMLYEN SETUP" will always leave column-Bo of the branch
cards blank (corresponding to no such output).

2 Steady state information fac made K

1~11 H~ ~~l
/- IE
I~ f~lf tE 1< 1-1- f!~EI' I 'f. IE t< I~ ~f Il ,.1: Ie rE~~lc

R{J) (J L(J) G(J) (J C{J) FREQ

E15.8 E15.8 E15.8 E15.8 E1S.8

parameters

R{w). ui.(w): Total series modal impedances for mode number K. This is in Ohms.
at the frequency FREQ of the steady-state phasor solution which may be
performed to find EMTP initial conditions.
G(w). u.!:{w): Total shunt modal admittance for mode number [Link] is in mhos,
at the frequency FREQ of the steady-state phasor solution which may be
performed to find EMTP initial conditions.
FREQ: The steady-state frequency at which R, wl, G and u.£ are calculated.
Hence, XOPT and COPT (miscellaneous data parameters) have no importance
here.

3 Partial fraction expansion specification cards fac mada K

Both the modal wave propagation response as well as the modal characteristic
admittance response are specified using the same partial fraction expansion format.
For each exponential, 2 fields (real and imaginary part) are needed. The number
of exponentials is set in the branch specification card, recall (N3 for propagation
response, N4 for characteristic admittance). In addition, 2 fields (real and
imaginary part) are needed for the residue. Each card can contain up to 6 values.
Hence, for Semlyen setup, we only need one card for each response function for
each mode K.
The format to be used is as follows:

IE iF
I·l~ Iclqc I~ ~'~~~E f~lc i' r!,9C

VOLT(1) VOLT(2) VOLT(3) VOLT(4) VOLT(S) VOLT(6)

E12.S E12.S E12.S E12.5 E12.5 E12.5

The above sequence (a, b, c) must be repeated for all Kmodes. Next follows
the specification of the voltage transformation matrix and current transformation
matrix (even in case of transposition, it should be noted).
IV.D. Branch card. for [Link]-parameter element. (type -1.-2.-3) - 4S

4 voltage transfOrmation matrix

Complex matrix elements are specified by rows, in natural order (row 1 first,
then row 2, etc.) and are in terms of the real and imaginary pairs. However, the
imaginary part of each element is set to be zero. Within any row, elements are
specified in order of increasing column number. Each row begins with a new card,
and there are six or fewer numbers per card. The following format is applicable
to row "K" for a 3-phase transmission circuit:

I~
~,IJ rf~~~
I~
I- l~1 E If 1~ tl~ ~ I' l'fE Wlc 111* ~l I~ !< 111* I~ "l~ I<!!I(
R I R I R I
lY K.l lY K•t lYK•2 lY K•2 lY K•3 lY K •3

E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5

5 Current transformation matrix

The number of elements and their ordering is identical to that for the voltage
transformation matrix, which has just been described.

R I R I R I
TI K.l TI K.l TI K•2 TI K.2 TI K.3 TI K'3

E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5 E12.5

For an example, we refer to section XXII-C.

IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 46

IV.E. Saturable transformer component

The "saturable transformer" model is not a supporting routine: it has to be used

in the actual electrical network simulation data set and should be placed in the
grouping of normal branch cards. On the other hand, a supporting routine exists
to convert SATURABLE TRANSFORMER cards to linear equivalent [R], [L] (type 51-52-53
branch cards). Details and restrictions of this new feature are described in the
section XIX-J.
As output variables of the SATURABLE TRANSFORMER COMPONENT model, following variables
can be obtained by proper flagging in column 80:
- the branch voltage of the magnetizing reactance branch
- the branch current of the magnetizing reactance branch
- current in winding 1
Following will explain the input data-deck structure for Single-phase and 3-phase
N-windingtransformers (with N = 2 or 3).

The single-phase and 3-phase 3-leg shell-type or 5-leg core-type transformer

basically are using the same model, although a storage-saving option (called
"Reference-component procedure") is recommmended to use for the 3-phase 3-leg
shell-type or 5-leg core-type case.
For the 3-phase 3-leg core-type transformer on the other hand, a totally different
model is needed, taking into account the homopolar reluctance of the magnetic
circuit.

Therefore these models will be discussed separately.

lV.E.! Single-pbase case

A single-phase two-winding transformer can be represented in the following way

(Fig.1) •

BUS1-1 BUS1-2
R2
Low voltage High voltage
winding winding

BUS2-1 BUS2-2
Fig.1: Single-phose two-winding case

- There is one single-phase 2-winding ideal transformer involved, thus providing

the correct transformation ratios for the winding 2 with respect to winding 1.
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 47

- Both windings "k" have an associated leakage-impedance, characterized by resistance

Rk and inductance Lk. Note that the value for this leakage-impedance can be
obtained out of the short-circuit impedance. Leakage inductance L2 has to be
non-zero, but L1 can·have a zero value.

- The saturation effect is confined to a single nonlinear reactor (SATURA, see

fig.1) in the circuit of winding 1. As a consequence, the saturation branch
thus is connected to the star point, which is not always the best connection
point: ideally the nonlinear inductal!ce should be connected to that pOint of the
equivalent star circuit where the. integrated voltage equals the iron-core flux.
Normally, this is only true for the winding which is closest to the iron core.
One can consider three different excitation behaviours:
- In case of saturation, the TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor model is used
internally. In order to obtain the necessary data. excitate the single phase
and measure the voltages and corresponding currents at several voltage levels,
thus creating a (Vrms,Irms) characteristic. Next, use supporting program
"SATURA" (section XIX-G) to create the necessary (FLUX ,Current) peak value
characteristic.
- In the linear case, only one {FLUX, current} peak value should be entered for
the magnetizing impedance input data. This value can be obtained from the
excitation test.
- In case no flux-current characteristic is specified, the magnetizing reactance
is assumed not to exist (magnetizing current can be neglected).

- Excitation losses (iron core) are confined to a linear resistance (RMAG. see
fig.1) which is in parallel to the saturation branch. This. is all right in the
single-phase case, even for multiple windings.
The extension to a single-phase N-winding transformer is easy. Fig.2 depicts
the schematic representation.

IDEAL
~B~U~S~1-~1~....~c=~~BTU~S~T10Pr-______-lN1 :N2 C:~[Link]-=BU:;S 1-2
L1 R1 R2 L2

winding 1 winding 2

BUS2-1 BUS2-2

c===~
R2
....
L2
~B~U~S1-N

winding N

BUS2-N

Fig.2: Extension to a single-phase N-winding transformer

IV.E. Saturable tranatormer component - 48

1 INPUT RULES:
Suppose that a user wants to represent a single-phase transformer using the
SATURABLE TRANSFORMER component. The following card sequence should then be
inserted in the group of branch cards of the actual electrical network:

1. TRANSFORMER-special request card

2. flux-current specification
- to be omitted if the magnetizing reactance is assumed not to exist;
- only one card in the linear case;
- card grouping (see TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor element) for the
saturated case. Use supporting routine SATURA (see section XIX-G).
3. flag card ending flux-current specification grouping
4. "N" winding cards
~: In case the user desires to specify a transformer having parameters identical
to those of a previously-defined transformer, the special time- and
memory-saving option ("reference-component procedure") should be used. This
will be explained in section IV-E-2.

Let s discuss the normal card format in more extensive detail now. Recall
t

that this card sequence needs to be inserted in the normal group of branch cards
for a normal network simulation run.

1. First comes the special request card. Besides the special request word
"TRANSFORMER", this card also bears steady state information of the flux. as
well as an output request option.

request word FLUX flog

steady-state

Parameters:

I. FLUX: (current, flux) pair used to define the linear inductance, representing
the magnetizing branch in the first winding during the phasor steady-state
solution. Only during a transient run, the saturated part of the
(flux-current)-curve can be taken into account. it should be noted.
Note the following, in order to avoid problems during the time step loop:
1. Both current and flux are expressed as peak values. I in Ampere and flux
in Volt-second.
2. Take the steady-state ([Link])-pair equal to the first point used
in the description of the flux-current characteristic. as obtained using
SATURA (see section XIX-G). It is recommended to take this value larger
then or equal to 70 percent of the maximum saturated flux value.
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 49

BUSTOP: A name for the internal starpoint in winding 1, used to represent the
magnetizing branch (see fig.1). This name always should be mentioned. since
it uniquely identifies the tranformer.
Note that this name also can be used as a reference name. should the user
desire to specify another unit having parameters identical to those of a
previously-defined transformer (see section IV-E-2 for more details). This
internal node can not be connected with other branches of the electrical
circuit, however.

Rmag : Constant and linear resistance (in Ohms), parallel to the magnetizing
reactance (see fig.1). This resistance takes account for the excitation
losses (core) and can be calculated as:

VRAT~y
Rna" - - = : - - -
p .".Ioss

VRAT is specified in card type 4.

Note that a zero or blank in this field is taken to mean Rmag equal to infinity
(no excitation losses), which is the normal case for single-phase transformers.

flag Output specification flag for the magnetizing-reactance branch.

=1 branch current output
=2 branch voltage output
=3 both branch current and branch voltage output

2. Next comes a group of cards specifying the flux-current characteristic (see

fig.1). A distinction between several possible cases is necessary:
- In cases where no flux-current characteristic is specified. the magnetizing
reactance is assumed not to exist (exciting current can be neglected). Don't
forget to use the flag card, which will be explained in point 3 of this
section.
- In a linear case,. the flux-current characteristic is represented by one point
only (= linear magnetizing impedance). This point merely defines the slope
of the (current-flux)-characteristic, which then is assumed to extend to
infinity. The values can be derived from excitation test data.
- For the saturated case, however, several (current-flux) pairs are needed,
each such pair representing a breakpoint of the pseudo-nonlinear characteristic
(TYPE-98 element) which is used to approximate the saturation curve. Use
supporting routine SATURA (see section XIX-G) for data creation. The last
point merely defines a slope of the characteristic, which then is assumed to
extend to infinity.

For both latter cases, the card format is the same:

IV.E. Saturable tranaformer component - 50

E16.0 E16.0

FLUX
one (current-flux) pair

Notes: 1. Take the steady-state (current. flux) pair (see first card. bearing
the special request word "TRANSFORMER") equal to the first point.
used in the description of the saturation curve.
2. The steady-state flux value should be larger than or equal to 70
percent of the maximum saturated flux value.
3. The supporting routine SATURA (see section XIX-G) can be used as
data generator to create the pseudo-nonlinear saturation char-
acteristic (current. flux) (peak values) out of the measured curve
{VRMS , IRMS}'

3. The preceding (flux-current) specification group should be terminated by following

flag card (even in the case where no flux-current characteristic has been
specified! ! ) •

Ilmmml~m~lmmmlmmJ~~mmm~lJnmmlJmHmllJJUm~
999

4. Finally, the winding specification cards (one such card per winding) should
follow. The card format is as follows:

12 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

K BUSl BUS2 R L VRAT IP

node names leakage only on the
impedance first cord

Parameters:

K : Winding reference number (1, 2, •.. , N)

Note that the cards need to be placed in their natural order (1, 2, ... , N).
Recall that N certainly is limited to 3. The low voltage winding should have
number 1.
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 51

BUS1, BUS2: Terminal node names of the transformer winding "K". Thus, each winding
will be interpreted as a branch between "BUS1" and "BUS2" (see fig.1). Note
that a blank field is taken to mean "ground-connection".
R, L : Leakage resistance (in Ohm) and inductance (in Ohm or mH depending on value
XOPT), associated with the winding "K" in question. The values for this
leakage impedance can be calculated from the short circuit impedance, using
the following formula:

R P ,1&. lou • short-circuit loss

.Il - I~Il'

x ~ - l~
_1-SQRT(U 2 -
~
P~Il'IO").
l~ •
in Ohms

If Uk = rated voltage of winding k, UHV = rated voltage. of high-voltage winding

and N = total number of windings (mostly 2 or 3) then;

R," U~
R - - - - ' resistance of winding k
t N U~v'

X.I& U~
X - - - - ' reactance of winding k
t N U~v'

Notes: 1. L in mH if XOPT = 0 on first miscellaneous data card.

L in Ohms at frequency "XOPT" Hz if XOPT > 0 on first miscellaneous
data card.
2. The resistance part may be zero without restriction.
3. The inductance part must be non-zero however, except for reference
winding "1" where it can be zero only if, at the same time, the
resistance part for this winding is non-zero.

VRAT : Rated voltage (in kV) of winding "K"

IP : Output specification flag (should only be mentioned on the card for the first
winding! !
1 : branch current flowing from "BUS1" of the first winding to the internal
node "BUSTOP" will be printed as a time step loop variable.

2 EXAMPLE:
Consider the case of a one-phase 2-winding transformer with both primary and
secondary winding earthed at one terminal point. The other terminal pOints are
called "P1" and "S1" for primary and secondary. respectively. Further assume "TIl"
being the name of the internal star point of winding 1. Finally, following data
were obtained by measurement for this transformer:

Power rating S 0.0063 MVA

Excitation losses [Link] 65 W
Excitation current lex 1,85 Amps
Short-circui t losses [Link] 95 W
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 52

Short-circuit current Ish 16 Amps

Short-circuit voltage Ush 8.3 Volts
Vol tage rating Vpri./Vsec 220/377 Volts
Assuming a linear magnetizing impedance, supporting routine SATURA (section
XIX-G) should have following data entry:

FREQ = 50. Hz
PBASE = 0.0063 MVA
UBASE = 0.22 kV (RMS)
IPUNCH = 0
KTHIRD =0
The only point of the linear curve is defined by the excitation test results.
Indeed, under nominal voltage, the transformer is assumed to have no saturation.

-3 0.22
I (p. u . ) .. 1 • 85. lOx 0 • 0063 .. O. 0646 (p.u.)

V(p.u.) - 1.0 (p.u.)

As a result. we then obtain following values (peak values):

I peal - 2. 6161665255 A

4> poal - 0,9903479478 Vsec

Note that 2.61611.[2- 1.849. thus almost reconstructing the RMS value 1.85 for the
current. In case of a real saturation curve. a similar method should be used to
derive other points too.

In this linear case, a more direct way for obtaining the (flux-current) peak values
can be used. however:

I peal - I." x.[2 - 2 . 61 6 A

U"" 220
4> pool = 4. 44xJ" 4. 44x50" 0.990 Vsec
The derived values for the other parameters are:

V R AT~v 220 2
R mOOR - p - -65 -744.60hms : core excitation losses
IX, loss

R - P '11,1"$0 _ 95 _ 3711 Ohms . short circuit losses

0/1 I~II 16 2 ' •

Since in addition. N = 2, Rl = the leakage resistance of winding 1 (LV) equals

.3711/2 * (220/377)2 = 0.063 Ohms
and R2 = the leakage resistance of winding 2 (HV) equals
.3711/2 = .185 Ohms.
IV.E. Saturable tranatormer component - 53

1 P~""O") =16SQRT
2
( U'''---z- 1 (2 2)
x.,,=[SQRT 8.3 - 95
-2 =.36240hms
-" J," 16

Thus, the leakage reactance Xl of winding 1 (LV) equals

.3624/2 - (220/377)2 = 0.0617 Ohms
and the leakage reactance X2 of winding 2 (HV) equals
.3624/2 = .1812 Ohms.

Conversion to inductance values (deviding by 2 - PI-50) gives

L1 = .196 mH and L2 = .576 mHo
The data input for this transformer hence looks as follows:

c 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
c 1 234 567 8
$UNITS. 0 •• 0.
C : TRANSFORMER: :: x: : flux: ausTOP:Rmag: : flag
TRANSFORMER 2. 6161. 99034TA- 744.6 1
C I:: flux :
2.6161665255 0.9903479478
9999
C :aUS1: :8US2:: :1 B:I L::Vrat:: IP
lLl .0632 .196 .220 1
C :BUS1: :BUS2:: :: R:: L: :Vrat:
2Hl .1855 .576 .377
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C 1 234 567 8

Recall that this is part of the normal branch data in a network simulation data
deck.

IV.Ep2 Reference-component procedure

Should the user desire to specify a transformer having parameters identical

to those of a previously-defined unit, a handy time- and memory-saving option is
available, using the transformer's unique identification name "BUSTOP" as a reference
name.

1 INPUT RULES
The next card sequence should then be inserted in the group of branch cards:

1. TRANSFORMER-REFBUS special request card

2. "N" winding cards
Notes: 1. Again, N is limited to 3
2. In this case, the flux-current specification and corresponding flag
card is omitted. This is because we refer to such curve, defined
earlier.

Let's discuss the normal card format in detail now.

IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 54

1. First comes the special request card. Besides the special request word
"TRANSFORMER", this card only bears two bus names:

request word flog

Parameters:

REFBUS: This field should carry the internal node name which was used as variable
"BUSTOP" for the previously-defined reference component of which a copy is
desired (Fig.1).

BUSTOP: A name for the internal .starpoint in winding "1", used to represent the
magnetizing branch. This name should never be omitted since it uniquely
identifies the transformer (Fig.l). This internal node can not be connected
with other branches of the electrical circuit, it should be noted.

flag: Output specification flag for the shunt magnetizing reactance branch.
= 1 branch current output
= 2 branch voltage output
= 3 both branch current and branch voltage output

2. Finally, "N" winding specification cards should follow. The card format is as
follows:

12 A6 A6

K BUS' BUS2 IP
node names only on the
first cord

Parameters:

K : Winding reference number (1, 2, •••• N)

Note that the cards need to be placed in their natural order (1. 2 ••..• N).
Number "1" corresponds to the LV-side. Recall that N is limited to 3.

BUS1. BUS2: Terminal node names of the transformer winding "K". Thus. each winding
will be interpreted as a branch between "BUS1" and "BUS2".
Note that a blank field is taken to mean "ground-connection".
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 55

IP Output specification flag (should only be mentioned on the card for the first
winding) •
= 1 : branch current flowing from "BUS1" of the first winding to the internal
node "BUSTOP" will be printed as a time step loop variable.

~: 1. No other values are necessary, since they are taken the same as the
previously-defined reference component.
2. Examples of such reference component usage are discussed extensively in
the next section.

IV.E,3 Three-phase transformers with low homopolar reluctance

For three-phase 3-leg shell-type or 5-leg core-type transformers, an iron-core

path is provided for the return of the zero-sequence flux. Further, it is reasonable
to assume that:
- the magnetic induction of the 3 phases is independent;
- the zero sequence parameters are the same as the positive sequence parameters.
This implies that only the saturation curve for one core leg is needed. Thus,
it seems reasonable to model this type of transformer by using 3 separate,
identical single-phase units.

For this reason, a storage-saving option (called "Reference-component procedure"

- see section IV-E-2) has been developed.

No new rules are needed. Caution should be made for the measurement of the
saturation curve, however. The curve needed here should NOT be obtained from one
winding of one phase, with all others open-circuited. The curve needed here can
be obtained correctly by balanced excitation of the three phases, thus averaging
both the currents and voltages of the three phases. Next, use supporting routine
SATURA (see section XIX-G) to turn. this measured curve (Vrms,lrms) into a
(flux, current) (peak values) characteristic.

1 INPUT RULES
Next card sequence has to be applied and needs to be inserted in the group of
branch cards for the actual electrical network:

1ST UNIT
1. TRANSFORMER -special request card
2. flux-current specification
- to be omitted if the magnetizing reactance is assumed not to exist
- only one card in the linear case
- card grouping (see TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor element) for the
saturated case
3. flag card ending flux-current specification grouping
4. tiN" winding cards (terminal node names and winding data specified)
2ND UNIT
5. TRANSFORMER-REFBUS -special request card
6. "N tt winding cards (only terminal node names specified)
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 56

3RD UNIT
7. TRANSFORMER-REFBUS -special request card
8. "N" winding cards (only terminal node names specified)

Remark: modelling of DELTA-connected transformers

Delta transformer connections can sometimes be a little tricky. Since they

are not uncommon in usage, a more specific explanation of this configuration seems
to be in order. Three points need to be explained:
- How to derive the equivalent circuit?
- Need for a path to ground on the delta side of the bank.
- What about homopolar behaviour ?

First, there is the problem of how to derive the equivalent circuit. Suppose
that the primary winding is .D-connectedand the secondary winding Y-grounded. Fig.
3 shows the resulting interconnection of elementary components. Remark the
following:

- Rl and Ll are the primary winding leakage-impedance parameters (the same for all
three phases; reference component option).
- R2 and L2 are the secondary leakage-impedance parameters (the same for all three
phases) •
- Bus Tl is the internal node "BUSTOP" for the first single-phase unit, with primary
terminals "PA" and "PB" , and .secondary terminals "SA" and "TERRA".
- Bus T2 is the internal "BUSTOP" for the second single-phase unit,
with Tl as reference name "REFBUS" (first transformer), primary terminals "PB"
and "PC", and secondary terminals "SB" and "TERRA".
- Bus T3 is the internal "BUSTOP" for the third single-phase unit, with Tl as
reference name, "REF'BUS" (first transformer), primary terminals "PC" and "PA"
and secondary terminals "SC" and "Terra".

Thus the primary windings (PA-PB, PB-PC, PC-PAl indeed are Delta-connected and
the secondary windings (SA-Terra, SB-Terra, SC-Terra) areWye-connected to ground.
Note that through the node name allocation, the clock-system declaration can be
established.
IV.E. Saturable tran.~ormer component - 57

primary Delta secondary grounded Wye

L1
R1
T1 SA

R L2 SC

Fig.3: Delta connected transformer

A second problem concerns the need for a path to ground on the DeLta-side of
the transformer bank. Indeed. a floating delta is not honored by the program.
since mathematically the voltage there would then only be defined within an arbitrary
constant.

- Of course there is no problem if a transmission line were connected to the DELTA

side. In such cases the line capacitance indeed provides the connection to the
ground.
- Likewise. a connection to one or more voltage sources (either direct, or through
other, simple elements) will satisfy this requirement.
IV.E. Saturable tranaformer component - 58

- The common case of an isolated, delta-connected tertiary of a three-winding

transformer requires special attention, though:
a) Unbalanced method: simply ground one corner of the DELTA (fig.4a).
Use this option only is one is not interested in the voltage value on the
DELTA side.

Fig.4a: Unbalanced method

b) Balanced solution: connect three equal capacitors from the corners of the
DELTA to the ground. Take care to use realistic values (e.g. 0.003 ~ F) in
order to avoid matrix singularity (fig.4b)!
Use this option whenever it is necessary to preserve the inherent balance on
the DELTA side.

Fig.4b: Balanced method

A third problem concerns the [Link] behaviour 01 the DELTA connection. In

such case, the core construction (shell or core type) is of minor importance since
the excitation test really becomes a short-circuit test (a closed DELTA acts as
a short-circuit for zero-sequence currents). Accordingly, neither the value of
the zero-sequence exciting current nor the value of the zero sequence excitation
loss are critical.

Only in the case where the DELTA is artificially opened, the actual zero-sequence
test can be performed. In this case, the homopolar flux will close its path through
the air and the tank. Such situation cannot be represented by this SATURABLE
TRANSFORMER component model. It can only be represented by the 3-1eg core-type
option, explained in section IV-E-4.
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 59

2 ~Xl1MPLES

Consider a DELTA-connected shell-type transformer of the preceeding remark.

Further assume following values for the input parameters:

Rmagn = 3. E5 Ohms
VLV = VHV = 3.03 E5 Volts
RLV = RHV = .25 Ohms
XLV = XHV = 25. mH (XOPT = O. on miscellaneous data card)

The input data format would look as follows:

C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C -------------------------------------------------_____ - ______________________ _
$UNITS, 0.,0.
C first transformer: "BUSTOP" • T1
TRANSFORMER 2.0 1137. T1 3.00E5
2. 1137. {saturation curve: first knee point
50. 1365. {second knee point
10000. 1478.6 {third knee point
9999 {flag card. terminating saturation curve data
1TA TB .25 25. 3.03E2 1
2SA .25 25. 3.03E2
C second transformer: "BUSRBY" • T1 referencing to first transformer
C "BUSTOP" • T2
TRANSFORMERT1 T2
1TB TC
2SB
C third transformer: "BUSREY" • T1 referencing to first transformer
C "BUSTOP" • T3
TRANSFORMERT1 T3
1TC TA
2SC
C ---------------------------------------------------------------______________ _
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C 1 234 567 8

IV.E.4 Three-phase 3-leg core-type transformer

In this case, the homopolar reluctance is high and the zero sequence flux is
forced to return through the air and the tank, outside the windings. Because of
the air gap, the zero-sequence [Link] curve is nearly linear, quite unlike
the positive sequence magnetizing curve. which is highly nonlinear. It seems
therefore reasonable to approximate. the zero-sequence magnetizing curve as a linear
magnetizing inductance Le. The core-leg (positive sequence) nonlinear inductance
SATURA can again be added across the first winding of each phase. Because of this.
a whole new model (depicted in fig. 5) is needed to represent such type of transformer.

On the other hand, this complicated model is not recommended to use since it
is not possible to represent magnetic coupling between the phases. This type of
3-phase transformer better can be modelled using the supporting routine BCTRAN
(see section XIX-C), with the external addition of nonlinear elements at the proper
winding connection points (Le. those windings which are closest to the iron core).
IV.E. Saturable tranaformer component - 60

LV-winding HV-winding

I
,...1, Ll R2 L2
1
01 1
4: 1
~I
phase I1 R
IV
0:: Lr' V
c
1
1 .8
v
::J
\:)
C

0'
[Link]~l·H=:=J~~~-lN':N:f· [-=~R:2::::~H.L~2~1--'" 1:
c
'N
,...1, ~

01
4:
1
I phose
1 S
C
0'
o
~I 1 E
0:: L-r' IV
1 V
1 C
IV
::J
0"
IV

N'f
VI

• 1: 1
...o
IV
1 N
,...1, Ll Rl 4:
R2 L2
I 0::
0-
01 1 ...J
4: 1
::E 1
0:: L
1
I
1
phose T :::>
~
(/)
1:: 1"1

-r'
1
1
I •
BUS3PH
Fig.S: 2 winding 3-leg core type transformer. Yy connected

- There are (2 + 3* (N - 1) single-phase 2-winding ideal transformers involved.

N = number of windings (2 or 3).
- Two of them are used as ideal isolation transformer (turn ratio 1:1). In
combination with the zero sequence induction LO, they form the equivalent for
an ideal three-phase 3-leg core-type transformer.
- The remaining 3*(N - 1) ideal units provide the correct turn ratio's for the
windings 2, 3, ••• , N with respect to winding "1". for the three phases
respectively.
- Each of the N windings "k" has 3 associated leakage impedances (one per phase),
characterized by resistance R and inductance L. Note that the value for this
leakage impedances can be obtained out of the short circuit impedances.
- Saturation effects are confined to 3 nonlinear reactors "SATURA" (one per phase)
.on the low-voltage side. This saturation branch is connected to a fictitious
internal star point. which is not always the best connection point; ideally, the
nonlinear inductance should be connected to the point in the equivalent star
circuit where the integrated voltage .is equal to the iron-core flux. Further,
it should be clear that this model can not take magnetic coupling between phases
into account. A distinction between several cases is necessary.
- In case of saturation. the TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor model is used
internally. In order to obtain the necessary input data. use balanced
excitation of the three phases and average the voltages and their corresponding
currents over the three phases, thus creating a (Vrms,Irms) characteristic.
Next use the supporting routine "SATURA" (see section XIX-G) to create the
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 61

necessary {FLUX ,Current) characteristic using peak values. The same curve
has to be applied to all 3 phases (use the reference branch option of section
IV-E-2) .
NOTE: This is NOT the curve obtained from one winding (one phase),
with all others open circuited.
- In the linear case, only one value should be entered for the magnetizing
impedance input data. Data can be obtained from the direct excitation test.
- In case no flux-current characteristic is specified, the magnetizing reactance
is assumed not to exist (magnetizing current can be neglected).
- Excitation losses (core) are confined to 3 linear mutually coupled resistances
~Rmag (dotted elements in Fig.5) one should add manually across the low-voltage
winding terminals of all three phases. Such mutual coupling is mandatory for
representing homopolar excitation losses in a correct way. It is hence recommended
NOT to use the non-coupled resistance Rmag provided by the model (cfr. Fig.l).

1 INPUT RULES
As explained before. a whole new transformer model is needed to represent this
3-leg core-type transformer. Therefore new rules are needed. The next card
sequence should then be inserted in the group of branch cards of the actual
electrical network:

1. TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE -special request card 3-leg flag

1ST UNIT
2. TRANSFORMER -special request card
3. flux-current specification
omitted if the magnetizing reactance is assumed not to exist
- only one card in the linear case
- card grouping (see TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor element) for the
saturated case
4. flag card ending flux-current specification grouping
-5. "N" winding cards

2ND UNIT
6. TRANSFORMER-REFBUS -special request card
7. "N" winding cards
3RD UNIT
8. TRANSFORMER-REFBUS -special request card
9. "N" winding cards
Let's discuss the card input in more detail now:

1. First comes the "TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE" special request card. This is a flag
card. indicating the fact that the homopolar reluctance option has to be used.
At this point, the program will automatically introduce the two ideal isolation
transformers, as well as their proper interconnect~on (see fig.5). Further,
this card bears the value for the constant magnetic reluctance RO (representing
the linear zero-sequence inductance LO, recall) and also a unique name "BUS3PH".
IV.E. Saturable tranaformer component - 62

Ifl~ Ie I~ ~!fE rfl~ I!ff I~

," l,l~fE I~
IE
IE rf I~I( r!~ ~ I'
IE
I" !~ I" tE Ie tfl*
TRANSFORt.£R THREE PHASE A6 E6.2

special request word BUS3P~ RO

Parameters:

BUS3PH: Unique name, associated with the homopolar reluctance of the transformer.
This name refers to an internal (hidden) node, that can not be connected with
other branches of the electrical network. Accordingly, the name should be
distinct from all other names used in the same network study !

RO Reluctance of the zero-sequence air-return path for flux. This reluctance

can be calculated as follows:
VRAT~v
R0 - 3L
o
with VRAT LV (kV): rated equivalent phase voltage (see card 5)
Lo (H): homopolar inductance (single-phase value)

2-5. Next, the first transformer unit needs to be specified. This is done using
the card sequence explained in section IV-E-1. Special care should be devoted
to the following:

Card 2:

request word FLUX flag

steady-state

For current and flux, we refer to card 3.

RMAG = 0: we don't want to add a non-coupled resistance branch representing

excitation losses at the internal star point, in parallel with the magnetizing
branch, because without coupling, homopo1ar excitation losses would be
represented inaccurately. On the other hand, one should manually add mutually
coupled resistance branches (type 51, 52, 53) over the winding terminals of
all three phases on the low voltage side. The values to be used can be derived
as follows:
I I
R sal/ - j(R hom + 2R ctlr) and R m"'''DI- 3( R hom - R Iur)
IV.E. -Saturable tranaformer component - 63

"./3)2
where R /10'" =, .c."'oft
(V ....
and R Itlr
(V d,,)2
- --
' ••. cur

In these formulas, Vdir and [Link] are the excitation voltage (RMS value) and
the excitation losses for the direct excitation. test (Le. the usual test).
Similarly, VhOll and P ex . hOll apply to the homopolar excitation test. In the latter
case, do not forget to open the DELTA winding (if such winding would exist).

Card 3:

. if ~( . ~E f- tEI*
I~

f-I.~
I~

tEI~I( f-~'
I~
rEI S~( ,.:i~
€
Ie tEI* f- .1H~~~
E16.0 E16.0

I FLUX
one (current-flux) pair

- In case of saturation, the TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor model is used

internally. In order to obtain the necessary input data, use balanced
exci tat ion of the three phases and average the voltages and their corresponding
currents over the three phases, thus creating a per-phase (Vrms,Irms) char-
acteristic. Next use the supporting routine "SATURA" to create the [Link]
(FLUX,Current) peak value characteristic. Hence it is clear that this model
can not take the magnetic coupling between phases into account.
- This is NOT the curve obtained from one winding (one phase), with all others
open circuited.
- In the linear case, only one per-phase (Flux-current) peak value should be
entered for the magnetizing impedance input data. This value can be obtained
from the direct excitation test.
- In case no flux-current characteristic is specified, the magnetizing reactance
is assumed not to exist (magnetizing current can be neglected).

Card 4:

11JJJJiiJJJliliijtJ~~lJJJ~~tJJ~lJJJJiiJJ~lJJJJJtJJ~lJJJJifJ~~lJJIJJtJ~~lJJIJJ{JJ!
999
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 64

Card 5:

12 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

K BUS1 BUS2 R L VRAT IP

node names leakage only on the
impedance first card

One should work in equivalent phase values while deriving values for R,L and VRAT

WYE connection: VRAT = V /.[3 (line-to-ground)

DELTA connection: VRAT = V (line-line)

6-9. The two other single-phase uni ts are defined using the reference branch option.
The rules are already described in section IV-E-2 and thus won't be documented
here again. For allocation of internal nodes, we refer to the example explained
hereafter.

Remark: Modelling of DELTA-connected transformers:

For DELTA-connection, we refer to section IV.E.3. for some explanation.

2 EXAMPLES
Consider the case of a three-legged core type three-phase transformer with
both primary and secondary winding WYE-connected, and with both STAR points grounded
(YNynO). The other terminals are called BUSl R, BUSl S, BUSl T and BUS2 R, BUS2 S,
BUS2_T respectively. Further, following data were obtained by standard measurement
on this transformer (at 50 Hz).

Power rating 35 MVA

Voltage rating 132./11.05 kV
Direct measurements:
Excitation losses 18.112 kW
Exci tation current • 2.39 A
Excitation voltage 11.01 kV
Short-circuit losses 192.53 kW
Short-circuit current 153.1 A
Short-circuit voltage 35.213 kV
Homopolar measurements:
Excitation losses 115.325 kW
Excitation current 500.0 A
Excitation voltage 1.183 kV
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 65

Short-circuit losses 8.825 kW

Short-circuit current 70. A
Short-circuit voltage 2.86 kV

Following data can be obtained for the saturable transformer component model:
card type 1:

BUS3PH = lNHOM
Ro = 642.6
This reluctance of the homopolar air-return path for the flux can be calculated
via an estimation of the homopolar inductance:

Note the approximation for the voltage drop over the LV short-circuit impedance
(fig. 5).

Following intermediate results easily can be obtained:

[Link] = 49.15 % (see section XIX-C-3. value lEXZERO)

[Link] = 26.69 % (see section XIX-C-3. value ZPOS12)
Using these intermediate results. the above formula yields
L - 11113(1-0.4915%0.2669/2) = 0 021113 H
o (500/3)2.50 •

Finally. this results in

2
R - (11.05/./3)2 _ 11.05 _ 6 26
o 3L o 9L o 4.

1st unit
- First comes the normal "TRANSFORMER" request card.

I = 3.37997 A (peak)
FLUX = 28.6335 Vsec (peak)

If we assume a linear behaviour for the magnetizing branch. it is sufficient

to specify the direct magnetizing impedance. using RMS values for excitation
current and voltage:

lex = 2.39 A (RMS)

Vex = 11.01 kV (RMS)

This results in following peak values for current and total flux:
IV.E. Saturable tranaformer component - 66

I = 2.39 X J2 = 3.37997
A (peak)
'I' - 11010//3
4.44,,50
= 28.6335 Vsec (peak)
BUSTOP = TOP R

RMAG =0
Indeed, if one wants to be able to represent homopolar exctation losses
with enough accuracy, the magnetizing loss should not be confined to one
single resistance branch, but one should place mutually coupled resistance
branches (type 51, 52, 53) over the terminals of LV winding 1 manually. The
values for these self and mutual resistance can be calculated as follows,
using excitation voltages:
11010 2
direct: R dlr - Ta"ii2 - 6692.8 Ohm
(1183,,/3)2
homopolar: R "om - 115325 - 36.4 Ohm

Finally, this results in

1 1
R. - :;(R"o.. + 2R d1r ) - :;(36.4+ 2x6692.8) - 4474.0 Ohm
I I
R m - :;(R "0" - R dlr) - :;(36.4 - 6692.8) - -2218.8 Ohm

FLAG =1
This will result in branch current output.

- Next comes the linear (flux-current) characteristic, as obtained by supporting

routine SATURA. This curve should be terminated by a flag card (9999 in columns
13 up to 19). Of course, in this simple linear case, it is sufficient to repeat
the values of the steady state working point, as obtained before:

I = 3.379 A (peak)
'I' = 28.6148 Vsec (peak)

- Finally, two winding specification cards should follow. Using the direct
short-circuit test results, following values can be obtained (equivalent phase
values) :

R 192530/3
.,,- 153.1 2 -2.738 Ohm

35.213/.[3
[Link] - 0.1531 -132.79 Ohm

X. II -~ Z~h - R~h - 132.76 Ohm

For the high-voltage winding (number 2) we thus obtain

IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 67

R2_2.~38_1.369 Ohm

132.76
X2- 2 -66.381 Ohm or [Link] at 50 Hz

VRAT 2 -132/,[3-76.2102 kV

For the low-voltage winding (number 1) we obtain:

11.05)2
R 1 - R 2 X ( 132 - 0.00959 Ohm

11.05)2
X I - X 2 X ( 132 - 0.465 Ohm or 1.48 mH at 50 Hz

V RAT 1 - 11.05/,[3 - 6.3797kV

Further units
- For the 2nd and 3rd unit. we only have to use the special reference component
option. Hence. only the node name allocation still needs to be explained. For
the winding terminals. we have:

Winding 1 Winding 2 phose

BUS1-R BUS1-S BUS2-R BUS2-S
BUS1-R BUS2-R R

y.:.H BUSL

BUS1-S
BUSH

BUS2-S S
BUS1-T BUS2-T BUSL BUSH

BUS1-T BUS2-T T
BUSL BUSH

rig.6: Node nome allocation

For internal nodes. we have (see fig.5):

BUS3PH = INHOM
BUSTOP R = TOP R
BUSTOP=S = TOP=S
BUSTOP T = TOP T

Further remarks
- Further. in this example. the homopolar short-circuit losses can not be covered
only by winding resistance losses. Hence additional losses can be confined to
a single resistance. to be placed between BUSH (star point of HV-side) and ground.
The value of this resistance is calculated as follows:
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 68

153.09)2
P sA. ADm - 8.825 ( 70/3 - 379.94kW
Indeed. we had to upgrade the losses. since the homopolar short circuit test
was not performed under nominal conditions.

Psh,extra = Psh,hOll - Psh,dir (both under nominal conditions)

= 379.94 - 192.53 = 187.41 kW
Finally we find:

R - 187410 _ 0889 Ohm

.[Link] (3xI53.09)2 .

This finally results in following input file:

c ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Tht. ••ction _ added
C shunt resistance .&trill BC ...... .,inc1ing 1 with It-'alf (chill. 4.47446552B+03
C and [Link] [chill· -2.21891079E+03 ad4ed aanually aanually to the punched
518USl R8USL 4474.5 O. data card•.
528USl-S8USL -2219. O. 4474.5 O.
53BUS1:TBUSL -2219. O. -2219. O. 4474.5 O.
C -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C SATURA8LE TRANSFORMBIl COMPONENTS
SUHITS. SO •• 0.
TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE INKOM 632.08
C •• -.--.-------- ••••• ) 1ST UNIT
C \ TRANSFORMER I II II
I nUll \ aUSTOpl_g\ I flag
TRANSFORMER 3.379928.633TOP It O. 1
C I II flUll I -
3.37997 28.6335
9999
C 18usl1 BUS2I II II RII L\lvratll IP
18US1_RBUSL .00959.4652 6.3797
28US2 R8USH 1. 369 66.38 76.210
C ••••::.- ••• - ••••••••• ) 2ND UNIT
TRANSFORMER TOP_R TOP_S
18US1 S8USL
2aUS2- SBUSH
C···· ::- ••••••••••••• -) 3RD UNIT

18US1_TBUSL
2aUS2 TaUSH
C end of data entry for thr_-pha•• tranaforwer unit -.uS3PR-

lV,E.S Applications of the "SATURABLE TRANSFORMER MODEL"

This model can be used to simulate a single-phase or 3-phase (both shell- and
core-type) 2-winding transformer, using test data of the exciting test and the
short-circui t test at the rated frequency. In the 3-winding case. numerical
problems might occur. The obvious symptom of trouble will be following message:

"TROUBLE AT 73912 ON TYPE-99 OR 98 ELEMENT NUMBER •••• "

This message is somewhat deceptive. since there really is no trouble with this
TYPE-98 element at all. If one looks at the network node voltages. however. one
will observe an exponential blow-up of the solution without any abrupt change or
discontinuity. It rather appears to be that roundoff error (numerical noise) was
amplified as the simulation progressed, although up to now. the origin of the hash
could not yet be located.
IV.E. Saturable transformer component - 69

Excitation losses can be taken into account by this model, although these
losses can be neglected for both single-phase transformers as well as 3-phase
(3-leg shell-type or 5-leg core-type) transformers. On the other hand, for 3-phase
3-leg core-type transformers, the exciting current is fairly high in the
zero-sequence test and these excitation losses should therefore be included. The
short-circuit losses can (and always should) be taken into account.

Stray capacitances are ignored in this representation, which therefore is only

valid up to a few kHz. Because internally, the resistive and inductive parts of
all impedances are treated separately, this model also is valid for extremely low
frequencies (as it was the case for the "BCTRAN" model).

The model can be used in both the linear and the saturated case, depending on
the input data netered for the flux-current characteristic (TYPE-98 pseudo-nonlinear
reactor model). Hysteresis can be simulated by adding type 96 elements connected
to the proper transformer terminals (i.e. the terminal ends of the winding that
is closest to the iron core) in the electrical network. during the steady-state
or transient run.

On the other hand, this complicated three-leg core-type model is not recommended
to use since it is not possible to represent magnetic coupling between the phases.
This type of 3-phase transformer better can be modelled using the supporting routine
BCTRAN (see section XIX-C), with the external addition of nonlinear elements at
the proper winding connection points (i.e. those windings which are closest to the
iron core).

Delta transformer connections can be simulated, although sometimes this can

be a little tricky. Important points to keep in mind:
- How to derive the equivalent circuit ?
- Need for a path to ground on the delta side of the bank.
- What about homopolar behaviour ?
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 70

IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature

IV.F.l. Applications

1 GENERAL USAGE
In Section IV.B we already discussed the multi-phase nominal PI-equivalent.
This appeared to be a good model to simulate transient behaviour on short lines
and cables. By connecting many short sections in series, keeping track of the
actual transposition (if any), even a transient model for a long line can be
obtained. Yet, because of the enormous memory requirements, more sophisticated
models were formulated. More details can be found in section 4.2. of the Theory
Book.
For transient anaLysis, the models of section IV.D are more appropriate.
For steady state (at any frequency), the CASCADED PI option dealt with in this
section is a better alternative, since it is less memory consuming. On the other
hand, some important limitations exist:
- CASCADED PI uses the long-line equivalent (not the nominal PI-equivalent). Hence,
the model is only valid at one specific frequency. Accordingly, only steady
state calculations (TMAX SOon miscellaneous data card) at that specific frequency
FREQCS (see IV.F .2-1: Cascaded PI header card) are honored. The frequency of the
type-14 sources should have the same value as FREQCS.
- the user can only obtain results at the line terminals, not at the interconnection
points.
A representation of such a model, you can find in the figure below.
M
W

.9'"
0
>
.
"",",
0
.:
RA1 58 7.0.1

...,\''''"' RBI SC 7B

1:"'"'
~
.2
ReI 7C .
2-
0 ;;
CD
'":

T
The mathematical modelling of this can be interpreted as follows. The components
T
representing the line are defined sequentially as a chain, from one end (sending
end) to the other (receiving end). For each such section, a long-line equivalent
PI is used. This data is in its turn processed as it is read, sequentially, so
as to produce at any stage of the process a mathematical equivalent for all
components between the sending end and the last component read. This is shown in
the next figure.

- EQuiVQ~nt for
-
..- components .. Component

K -
Equivalent for

components
1.2.3 ..... K-l
1.2. 3 •.... K
~
IV.F. Branch input u8ing "CASCADED PI" feature - 71

To represent this mathematical model. only the nodal admittance matrix [Y] is
used. Hence, when input process:ing of' the last component of' the cha:in :is completed.
an adm:ittance matr:ix among the term:inal nodes of the lines ex:ists, as shown in the
following matrix.
yss Y s,]
[ Y,s Yu

Remarks:

- The number of elements Yu of the matrix [Y], only depends on the number
of transmission lines; it is independent of the number of components
which are cascaded together.
- The number of cascaded components has its effect on the computational
effort to produce an equivalent. Only the computer time for translating
the input data to the global nodal matrix [YJ will increase with the
number of cascaded components. The time figure for the steady-state
solution remains the same, because finally, only one admittance matrix
will be withheld.
2 SPECIFIC USAGE OF "CASCADED PI"
Following rules must be taken into account when using the cascaded PI feature.
1) The first line segment of the chain of elements which are to be cascaded
may not have any series or shunt connections. That is, the sending end
must begin. with a. PI-circuit.
2) Second and later sections can each consist of up to four types of
sub-components, in the order as shown below:
a) Series uncoupled R-L-C branches. if any.
b) Shunt uncoupled R-L-C branches, if any.
c) New line-position (transposition) specification, if any.
d) specification of new (Le. changed) PI-circuit parameter matrices
[R], [L] and [C].
When using diagnostic (see benchmark DCPRINT25). the program also will generate
a phasor branch admittance matrix. Only the values are obtained correctly: the
format has to be modified manually according to the specifications explained in
section IV.G.
BEWARE: diagnostic should be activated in column 26 (overlay 3 = branch input).
The minimum IPRSUP(3)-value equals three. This will give you only the final values
for the phasor branch admittance matrix to be used as input (see section IV. G.) .
A higher IPRSUP(3)-value will list all intermediate results of the section elim-
ination too.

3 INPUT STRUCTURE
In order to utilize the "CASCADED PI" modelling feature as part of an EMTP
data case, the following classes of data are involved in the order indicated:
Class 1 "CASCADED PI" header card; special request card which begins the
definition process.
Class 2 Cards which specify the sending end and receiving end bus names, as
well as the [R], [L] and [C] matrices which apply to the first
PI-circuit.
Class 3 Line position card for the first PI-circuit, the one at the sending
end of the line.
Class 4 Line position card, if any.
Class 5 Cards defining series R-L-C branches, if any.
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 72

Class 6 Cards defining shunt R-L-C banches, if any.

Class 7 Cards specifying new [R], [L] and [C] parameter matrices. if any.
Class 8 "STOP CASCADE" card. to close the definition process.

Classes 1. 2. 3 and 8 are used once for the sending and receiving end of the line
in ques tion. Classes 4. 5. 6 and 7 apply to the interior of the line. to be repeated.
once for each section.

IV.F.2. Card formats

1 CASCADED PI HEADER CARD

To begin the definition of a cascaded PI section. the following special request
card must be used:

I~ ,~ E IE
~ i.l:~ if I~ Ie I ~ ,.I 'E~~I( ~
!E IEI~ IC ,2

NPHCASF REQCe::
l~~ f 'EI~IC I· l~ff IElc 1 ~i': [Link]~ ff IE IC . ~
l~
.* '~,~l C

CASCADED PI 16 E6.2

2 SPECIFICATION CARD OF BUS NAMES AND MATRICES [R7, [L7 and [C7
These data cards are used to specify the sending-end and receiving-end bus
names of the line as well as the [R]. [L] and [C] matrices which charactarize the
line or cable geometry of the first section. The format and meaning are identical
to that of the conventional PI-circuit (type 1,2.3):

I~ . .<1 iE IE
.*
,

w
.~

node names
I~ I( I~ ,~l~ i E IE f*

reference br.
1.1 IE~~!( i ~ [Link]·~E

elements (k. m)
I( I ~ ~ ;/ iE IE~~
I· 1.1 iE r!i~l( l:;i~ l~

elements (k. m+ 1)
'Ef~lc

elements (k. m+2)

I' ~E IElqc

(L
t
BUSl BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 R L C R L C R L C

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

Supporting routines LINE CONSTANTS. CABLE CONSTANTS or SEMLYEN SETUP can be

used as data generators. Be sure to select output that corresponds to the nominal
PI (see section IV.B.). Further, be sure to run the supporting routines at the
correct frequency (FREQCS on cascaded PI header card).

3 LINE POSITION CARD FOR SENDING-END SECTION

In this line position card. one can specify control parameter pertaining to
the associated line section and lumped elements, only for the first segment, the
beginning of the cascading process. For this, the format under section 4 will be
used, specifying only the first segment.
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 73

4 LINE PQSITION CARD

For the other segments. the general format of the line position card. which
is shown below. can be used.

~ I~ l~ E IE
~I- f~ff 't Ie I~ fE rt 1< IC I~ It ie :"1- l' rt~* I~I- ~ ,l~, t I~i( I~ i~i: rU~le
:" I ,l~ .
~~~, ( rE~5

Phose-location indicator MAP CAS (I)

-:>
I- a.. l-
U
W
i=
....J
0::
W 0::
U
w - N ,.., Etc. for all phases
Vl :::> Vl CD Vl II) II) II)

'"0 '"0
(I)
Cl ~ ~ ~ ~
0 . ..
.c
~

.c .c
a.. a.. a.. (MAPCAS(I). 1= 1. NPHCAS)

E6.2 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 ....

5 SERIES R-L-C BRANCH CARD

Each series R-L-C branch, connected in series with any particular conductor
of the line, can be punched in the following format:

Series Series Series

R L C

12 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

6 SHUNT R-L-C BRANCH CARD

Series R-L-C branches may be connected in shunt between any two nodes which
are either conductor nodes or intermediate axtra nodes, including local ground.
Following format will be used:

TERMINAL
BRANCH
NODE
PARAMETER VALUES
NUMBERS

N1 N2 R L C

16 16 E6.2 E6.2 E6.2

7 CHANGE QF LINE PARAMETERS rRZ. rLZ and rcz

During the cascading process, the line geometry can be altered if desired,
which necessitates the redefinition of the matrices [R], [L] and [C]. If this is
the case, the previously specified line-position card must be adapted as evaluated
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 74

in section IV.F. 3-4. The general format then, used for this change of line parameters,
is the same format as shown in point 2 of this section, but notice the remarks in
section IV.F.3-7.

8 TERMINATION OF CASCADED PI DATA

The last card in the cascaded PI definition .sequence is a record reading "STOP
CASCADE". This card indicates the end of processing all segments making up the
line which connects the sending-end and receiving-end busses.

IliJIJJi4J~1~ljJ4jJ~~lJJJJJiJ~~IJJIJJjJJ~lJJIJJiJ~~IJJJJJ±JJ~llIIJJfJ~~lJJIJ~tJ~~
STOP CASCAD

IV.F.3. Parameters

1 CASCADED PI HEADER CARD

CASCADED PI: Request word to indicate the beginning of processing all segments
of the cascaded PI circuit.
NPHCAS: The number of phases or conductors in the circuit to be cascaded. See
also the remark following.
FREQCS: The frequency in Hz of the sinusoidal steady-state phasor solution
that is to be performed. Recall that on the miscellaneous data cards,
T MAX :S 0 should be specified {see section IV. F .1-1: general usage}.
Remark;
The maximum permissable number of NPHCAS is dependent upon VARDIM dimensioning
(see section I-G). Execution should terminate with an overflow error message,
if the user attempts to represent a line or cable having too many conductors.

2 SPECIFICATION CARD OF BUS NAMES AND MATRICES [R7, [L7 and [e7
ITYPE: Fill out the number of phases, beginning with 1, 2, 3, etc. up to NPHCAS
(see point 1 of this section).
BUSl. BUS2: Node names at both ends of the circlli t consisting of NPHCAS phases.
Nodes may be grounded (indicated by a blank field name) if desired. See
also remark 2.
BUS 3 , Bus4: If the cascaded PI circuit we are now specifying, is identical
with another previously specified cascaded PI circuit, following
storage-saving option may be used:
Repeat only the first node names of the reference cascaded PI circuit in
the same sequence in the BUS3-BUS4 fields. Leave the R-L-C fields blank.
On the second and later phases, only the node names of these phases must
be specified. See also remark 3.
R: ReSistance value in Ohms.
L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms. depending on XOPT).
- an inductance L: mH (XOPT = zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT = f)
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCP~ED PI" feature - 75

C: Capacitance value (in ~F or pMho's, depending on COPT).

- a capacitance C : ~ (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: pmhos (COPT = f)
Remarks;
1) Supporting routines LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS can be used as data
generators. Be sure to select output that corresponds to the long-line
equivalent. Further, be sure to run the supporting routines at the correct
frequency (FREQCS on cascaded PI header card),
2) The node names on a particular card do not necessarily correspond to the
R-L-C matrix values on the same card. The line position card takes care of
the relation between bus name and R-L-C matrix values. See section IV.F.3-3.
3) When using reference cascaded PI circuits, the program will properly process
the reference data with or without the CASCADED PI header card and STOP
CASCADE terminator card. Care must be taken that either both or none of
these cards should appear.
4) At least one of the matrices [R] and [L] must be nonzero. Matrix [C] may
be zero. Specifically, [R]+ jw[L] must be non-singular.
5) Matrices [R], [L] and [C] are symmetric, so they are only need to be specified
on and below the diagonal. The following format applies:

I~ ,I~~~~ 11,*
SA RA
I'
tl~* !~ \! I( I: ~I H
I!
Ie Wlc tl
If

1 Rll L11 Cll

2 SB RB R21 L21 C2l R22 L22 C22
3 SC RC R31 L3l C31 R32 L32 C32 R33 L33 C33
4 SO RD R41 L41 C41 R42 L42 C42 R43 L43 C43
R44 L44 C44
5 SE RE R51 L51 C51 R52 L52 C52 R53 L53 C53
R54 L54 C54 R55 L55 C55
: Etc.

6) No branch voltage or branch current output is possible for this feature.

Don't put any of these special punches in col. 80. Of course, the complete
steady-state solution will show all branch flows.

3 LINE POSITION CaRD FOR SENDING-END SECTION

•
The general explanation, you can find in the following section.

4 LINE POSITION CARD

DSECT~: Specifies the total length of segments. This length is determined as
a per unit length, where this unit is the base length of a line represented
by the equivalent PI matrix.
Example: If we have a total length of a line of 5 miles and the equivalent
PI matrix is per mile, then DSECTJ = 5.0. If the equivalent PI matrix
represents the total line, being 5 miles, then DSECTJ = 1.0.
MULTIP: Multiplicity factor. If N identical sections are cascaded together
without any transposition, then MULTIP can be set to N rather then include
N line position cards. See also remark 1.
IV.F. Branch input using -CASCADED PZ- feature - 76 .

MSER: Specification of series R-L-C connections.

MSER = 1:
this indicates that there is a R-L-C series connection for this
section(s) and data for this is to follow.
MSER = 0: this indicates that there is no R-L-C series connection for this
section(s}.
MSER = -l:this indicates that there is a R-L-C series connection for this
section(s}. The data from the last R-L-C series connection is
to be used.

5 SERIES R-L-C BRANCH CARD

ITYPE: This is the conductor number of which the R-L-C branch being defined
is to be placed in series with.
R: Resistance value in Ohms.
L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms, depending on XOPT).
- an inductance L: mH (XOPT = zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT = f)
c: Capacitance value (in p.F or pMho' s, depending on COPT).
- a capaci tance C : p.F (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: [Link] (COPT = f)
Remark;
1} If a short circuit is desired, simply do not enter a data card of this class
for that conductor.
2) If an open circuit is desired, punch field "R" of columns 27-32 with "999999",
to be interpreted by the EMTP as a special flag meaning "open circuit".
3) At least one of the parameter values R, L or C must be nonzero.
4) If the branch has no R, L or even C, just leave the corresponding field
blank. In case of a capacitor, the EMTP will interprete this as a short
circuit, where normally a zero value capacitor has an infinite impedance.
5) The end of these kind of branches is indicated by a blank card.

6 SHUNT R-L-C BRANCH CARD

N1.N2: These are the numbers of the terminal nodes between which a shunt R-L-C
branch occurs. If one of the nodes of such a branch is connected to a
conductor, then the number of this conductor (phase) has been used. If
there are new intermediate nodes (not connected to the conductors) then
negative numbers (-1, -2, ••• ) are used. A zero or blank is used when
one wants to specify the ground.
R: Resistance value in Ohms.
L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms, depending on XOPT).
- an inductance L: mH (XOPT = zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT : f)
C: Capacitance value (in p.F of pMho's, depending on COPT).
- a capaci tance C: p.F (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: [Link] (COPT = f)
Remark:
1) At least one of the parameter values R, L or C must be nonzero.
2) If the branch has no R. L or even C. just leave the corresponding field
blank. In case of a capaCitor, the EMTP will interprete this as a short
cirCUit, where normally a zero value capacitor has an infinite impedance.
3) The end of these kind of branches is indicated by a blank card.

7 CHANGE OF LINE PARAMETERS [RZ. [LZ and [CI

ITYPE: Fill out the number of phases. beginning with 1, 2, 3 etc. up to NPHCAS
(see point 1 of this section)
BUS1. BUS2: In contrast with the format of class 2, there are DQ node names
to be specified. Leave these fields blank.
BUS3. Bus4: No storage saving (referencing) is possible. These fields are also
to be left blank.
R: Resistance value in Ohms.
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 78

L: Inductance value (in mH or Ohms, depending on XOPT).

- an inductance L: mH (XOPT : zero or blank)
- a reactance 2nf*L: ohms (XOPT = r)
C: Capacitance value (in pF or pMho's, depending on COPT).
- a capacitance C: pF (COPT = zero or blank)
- a susceptance 2nf*C: pmhox (COPT = f)
Remarks:
1} If this card has to be added, the associated line-position card must contain
value "1" in field "MSECT".
2} At least one of the matrices [R] and [L] must be nonzero. Matrix [C] may
be zero. Specifically, R+ jwL must be non-singular.
3) Matrices [R], [L] and [C] are symmetric, so they only need to be specified
on and below the diagonal. The following format applies:

l~· li~~~i~ *
1 SA RA
~~ l~
tl~~~ ~~~~E li~~~ ,,:~~~H~ ~~~Hl l~~il l!l<
I
Rll L1l Cll
I~

ill1 ~I!IC
II
~ mJ1~ ~~~ f~~~
2 5B RB R2l L21 C21 R22 L22 C22
3 5C RC R31 L31 C31 R32 L32 C32 R33 L33 C33
4 5D RD R41 L41 C41 R42 L42 C42 R43 L43 C43
R44 L44 C44
5 SE RE R5l L51 C51 R52 L52 C52 R53 L53 C53
R54 L54 C54 R55 L55 C55
: Etc.

4) No branch voltage or branch current output is possible for feature. Don't

put any of these special punches in col. 80. Of course. the complete
steady-state solution will show all branch flows.

8 TERMINaTION OF caSCADED PI DATA

STOP CASCADE: Indication that all sections, making up the line, are processed.

IV.F.4. Examples

In order to show the power of this feature, let us compare the input files for
a given configuration:
1) manual setup (benchmark DC10)
2) cascaded PI setup (benchmark DC9 or DCP25).
Remark the differences in length of the input files. Further remark that the
cascaded PI setup has less memory requirements but is less flexible: in the manual
setup, all intermedite nodes are accessible too!!

1 MANUAL EMTP DATA SETUP

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C BENCHMARK DC-10
C Companion to "CASCADED PI" test of preceding data case. Same answer
C Use batch-mode solution only. since SPY sets THAX to nearly infinity.
C and then the zero DELTAT will result in an error stop.
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 79

0.0 0.0 60.

1 1
lRAl 1A1 .877 8.40 .1628
2RBl 1B1 .747 4.14-.0252 .852 8.43 .1559
3RCl 1Cl .735 3.47-.0067 .723 4.17-.0277 .829 8.46 .1571
llAl 2Al JlAl 1Al
21B1 2B1
31C1 2C1
02B1 3B1 13.1449.071 3
12Cl 4C1 JlAl 1Al
23Al 4Al
33B1 4B1
04C1 5Cl 13.14 1
04A1 5Al 13.1449.071 2
04Bl 5B1 4C1 5C1
05C1 501 2B1 3B1
05A1 501 2B1 3B1
05B1 501 2B1 3B1
501 5.0 13.14
15B1 6B1 JlAl 1Al
25C1 6C1
35A1 6A1
6A1 7A1 4B1 5B1
681 7B1 4C1 Se1
6Cl 7C1 4Al 5Al
7A1 701 2B1 3B1
7B1 701 2B1 3B1
7Cl 701 2B1 3B1
7G1 501
17Al GAl 1.658 16.92 .3142
27B1 GB1 1.446 8.34-.0554 1.704 16.86 .3118
37Cl OC1 1.470 6.94-.0134 1.494 8.28-.0504 1.754 16.80 .3256
BLANK card ending branch carda
BLANK card ending awi tch carda (none. for thia problem)
14GAl 424.35 60. 0.0 -.1
14RAl 424.35 60. 10.0 -.1
14GB1 424.35 60. -120.0 -.1
14RBl 424.35 60. -110.0 -.1
l4GC1 424.35 60. 120.0 -.1
14RC1 424.35 60. 130.0 -.1
C --------------+------------------------------
C From bus name: Kamea of all adjacent buasea.
C
C
--------------+------------------------------
RA1 llAl *
C 1A1 IJlAl *2A1 *
C RB1 I1B1 *
C 1B1 IRBl *2B1 *
C RC1 :lC1 *
C 1C1 IRC1 *2C1 *
C 2A1 :1Al *
C 2B1 :lB1 *3Bl *
C 2C1 I1C1 *4C1 *
C 3B1 12B1 *4B1 *
fIIIIIl C 4C1 \2C1 *5C1 *
C 3A1 14A1 *
C Etc. (many more connectional)
BLANK card ending all source cards
C Total network loss P-loss by aumming injections. 9.311041032866£+03
CEnd injection: -12.95674346101 44.419110587004 -6432.468410934 9424.6247887975
C End injection: -42.48741206788 -106.9593405 -6888.171205186 -0.6825172
BLANK card ending output variable requests
C Selective branch outputs follow (for column-80 keyed branchea only). Any req
C augmented to include branch voltage. But the converse is not true (a request
C From To (........ Branch voltage Vkm • Vk - v. • •••••••• ) ( ••
C bus K bus M Magnitude Degrees Real part laag part Magni
C 2B1 3B1 1.6180264£+03 -139.359766 -1.2277813£+03 -1.0538323£+03 3.9545
C 4Cl 5Cl 3.9925372£+02 -138.975087 -3.0120669£+02 -2.62065OOE+02 3.0384
C 4A1 5A1 2.9415954£+00 92.386571 -1. 2249239E-01 2.9390439£+00
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
IV.F. Branch input using "CASCADED PI" feature - 80

2 CASCADED PI MODELLING
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C BENCHMARK DC-9
C Illustration of many "CASCADED PI" features. See DCPRINT-25 if any
C trouble. and DC-l0 for comparison (aame solution only manual cascade).
0.0 0.0 60. (TKAX-O.: only steady state
001 1
CASCADED PI 3 60.0 (FREOCS-60 Hz
lRA1 GAl .877 8.40 .1628
2RBl GBl .747 4.14-.0252 .852 8.43 .1559
3RCl GCl .735 3.47-.0067 .723 4.17-.0277 .829 8.46 .1571
1.0 2 o o 1 1 2 3
1.0 1 1 o o 2 3 1
2 999999
3 13.1449.071
BLANK card ending first Claas-5 (Seriea R-L-C) set of data
1.0 1 1 10312
1 13.14
2 13.14
3 13.1449.071
BLANK card ending 2nd Claaa-5 (Seriea R-L-C) set of data
1 -1 13.1449.071
2 -1 13.1449.071
3 -1 13.1449.071
-1 5.0 13.14
BLANK card ending firat Class-6 (Shunt R-L-C) aet of data
2.0 1 -1 -1 1 1 2 3
1 .829 8.46 .1571
2 .723 4.17-.0277 .852 8.43 .1559
3 .735 3.47-.0067 .747 4.14-.0252 .877 8.40 .1628
STOP CASCADE
BLANK card ending branch carda
BLANK card ending switch carda (none for thia problem)
CAll steady .tate .ourc•• (type-14) work at a frequency equal to
14GAl 424.35 60. 0.0 -.1
14RA1 424.35 60. 10.0 -.1
14GB1 424.35 60. -120.0 -.1
14RB1 424.35 60. -110.0 -.1
HGCl 424.35 60. 120.0 -.1
14RCl 424.35 60. 130.0 -.1
BLANK card ending aource cards
C Total network loa. P-loa. by summing injections - 9.311041032B66E+03
C 1st gen: RAl 417.90316999073 424.35 -.0131358847782 .05382578726276
C 1st gen: 73.687604192962 10.00000 .05219831324431 104.1253709
C End last gen: -12.95674346101 44.419110587004 -6432.468410934 9424.6247887975
C End last gen: -42.48741206788 -106.9593405 -6888.171205186 -0.6825172
BLANK card ending selective node voltage outputs (none for this problem)
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK card ending plot cards (none allowed for CASCADED PI use. actually)
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
IV.G. [Link] branch [Yl input it no [Link] simulation - 81

IV.G. Phasor branch [Y] input if no transient simulation

IV.G.l. General

When only a phasor solution (no transient simulation) is to occur, then a

branch may be described by steady-state phasor admittances. These phasor admittances
are represented by the branch admittance matrix [Y].
Matrix [Y] has a row and a column for each node at each end of the branch.
Hence a 3-phase branch has a 6x6 branch admittance matrix [Y]. More generally, a
N-phase circuit will have a 2Nx2N [Y] matrix.
The "CASCADED PI" case is the only data generator currently available to
retrieve the branch admittance matrix [Y]. To see this matrix in the output. we
need a DIAGNOSTIC card (column 26, with minimum value = 3) in the input of the
CASCADED PI case. Beware. since the output is not immediately in the correct input
format for phasor branch [Y] usage.
For steady state solution, the PRASOR BRANCH option dealt with in this section
is an alternative for the CASCADED PI option (of section IV.F.). Like for CASCADED
PI. some important limitations exist:
- the phasor branch solution uses the long-line equivalent (not the nominal
PI-equivalent). Hence, the model is only valid at one specific frequency.
Accordingly, only steady state calculations (TMAX SOon miscellaneous data card)
at that specific frequency are honored. The frequency of the type 14-sources
should have the same value as the frequency for which the phasor branch [Y] has
been calculated.
- the user can only obtain phasor results at the line terminals. not at the
interconnection points.
- when using the CASCADED PI case as a data generator, two runs. are necessary: the
first run results in the creation of the branch admittance matrix. The second
run results in the steady state calculation. On the other hand, CASCADED PI alone
was capable to give you this steady state result in one run.
The steady state solution of a case will be the same, whether the final branch
admittance input will be generated by the CASCADED PI representation or directly
represented by the phasor branch [Y] representation. This is logical, because the
branch admittance matrix [Y] will be resolved in the CASCADED PI solution too.
There can be a little difference in the output results depending on whether the
solution is obtained by the CASCADED PI feature or by the phasor branch [Y] feature.
The reason for this is the numerical accuracy of the matrix [Y] representation.
The CASCADED PI feature has the greatest accuracy, since the matrix [Y] is calculated
at high precision. during the solution process. The phasor branch option on the
other hand will be less accurate since it uses a lower precision for the input
format of the phasor branch admittance.

IV.G.a. Card fOrmat

Again. two different formats exist: . normal format ($VINTAGE. 0)

. high precision format ($VINTAGE. 1)
IV.O. [Link] branch [Yl input if no transient simulation - 82

The card format to input the phasor admittances basically is the same format
as used in section IV. C. (type 51.52.53). But the meaning of the parameters is
entirely different. The only way the program recognizes the difference between a
mutually coupled RL input and a phasor branch admittance input is the unnamed extra
phases for the extra rows of the branch admittance matrix.

1 NORMAL ~ FORMAT (SVINTAGE. Ql

If If
I~ l'IE I( I~ t4 f ~ H tal 1'1_ 1,1 '~E t! II fE tll! ~,
ff r!~! I'I~ tH!IC I~ ~~I ! t*l( bl t!I~
w node names reference br. elements (k. m) elements (k. m+ 1) elements (k. m+2)
a..
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 TR TX TR TX TR TX

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.2 E12.2 E6.2 E12.2 E6.2 E12.2

2 HIGH PRECISION FORMAT ($VINTAGE, ~

The same format as in section IV.C. will apply here.

I! II
I· ~~If t!llj( 1. 1' piC f')' '!~I tl I( If WI(
I'
,. ~!tE ~q( ,. t' f!lq( I' f!11 taq< I' rd!jc
IE

w node names reference br. elements

a..
~
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 TR TX

12 A6 A6 A6 A6 E16.0 E16.0

IV.G.3. Parameters

ITYPE: Specifies N phases by numbering 51. 52. 53 •.•. 50+2*N in this field.
N is limi ted up to 20. In case of 3 phases. the numbering will be:
[Link].55.56. since there are 6 rows. Continuation cards must have
blank ITYPE fields. See also remark 4.
BUS1. BUS2: Terminal node names of the elements in the phase, indicated by the
ITYPE field. Nodes may be grounded (indicated by blank field name) if
desired. In case of 3 phases. there will be 6 cards to be specified, but
only the first three cards will contain the node names. See also remark
4. This is the only difference between the ordinary type 51,52,53 element
of section IV.C. and the phasor branch admittance discussed in this section.
BUS3. Bus4: Equally to mutually coupled RLC branches. referencing can be used
here. The same rules must be taken into account as typing only the node
names of the first phase of the reference set in the same sequence.
IV.G. Phaaor branch [Y] input if no tranaient aimulation - 83

TR. TX: These fields are occupied with the phasor branch admittance values (TR
contains the real part. TX contains the imaginary part). expressed in mho
and calculated at the frequency for which the steady state calculation
will be performed. When the CASCADED PI feature was used as data generator'.
this frequency has the value FREQCS.
Unlike previous cases, XOPT always should be put equal to i;.. in order to
avoid scaling. The value of COPT has no importance for type 51,52,53 cards.
note:

TR and TX are the table headers. as obtained by the data generator {CASCADED
PI-feature. using DIAGNOSTIC output in overlay 3 (=column 26). The minimum
value for IPRSUP(3} = 3}.
Remarks
" are symmetric, so only need to be specified on and
1) Matrices [TR] and [TX]
below the diagonal. When one card is not sufficient to specify all TR-TX
values. then continuation cards are used, with columns 1-26 left blank. The
only way the program recognize the difference between a mutually coupled
RL input (type 51.52.53) and the phasor branch [V] input is the unnamed
extra phases for the extra rows of the matrix. The, following format applies
for a 3-phase case:
a) for $VINTAGE. 0:

IE If
I~ I'll tf I~ ~!!l t! I~CI( ~! tIl! WI< H! II tl 1< tI Ie
5 SA RA
!-
TRl TXl .'
5: SB RB TR2 TX2 TR3 TX3
5~ SC RC TR4 TX4 TR5 TX5 TR6 TX6
54 TR7 TX7 TRB TXB TR9 TX9
TR10 TXl0
5" TR11 TX" TR12 TX12 TR13 TX13
TR14 TX14 TR15 TX15
5E TR16 TX16 TR17 TX17 TR18 TX18
TR19 TX19 TR20 TX20 TR21 TX21
IV.G. Phasor branch [Yl input if no transient simulation - 84

b) for $VINTAGE, 1:

5 SA RA TR1 TX1
5~ 58 RB TR2 TX2
TR3 TX3
5 SC RC TR4 TX4
TRS TXS
TR5 TX6
TR7 TX7
TR8 TX8
TR9 TX9
TR10 TX10
55 TR11 TX11
TR12 TX12
TR13 TX13
TR14 TX14
TR1S TX15
SE TR16 TX16
TR17 TX17
TR18 TX18
TR19 TX19
TR20 TX20
TR21 TX21

2) There is no branch current output possible for this branch type. However,
the branch voltage can be obtained on the first two phases (column 80 is
not being used).
3) There mus t be added two $UNITS cards.
a) The first one "$UNITS, .1591549431,0." is mandatory whenever [YJ input
is used, so loading [YJ into List-3 tables TR and TX (see diagnostic
output) has been done without any scaling. In this first $UNITS card
XOPT must than be equal to .1591549431 = ~, since the scaling factor
should be unity. COPT can be anything, since it will not be used.
b) The second "$UNITS, -1., -1." card is needed to restore the previous
values of XOPT and (less important) COPT.
IV.G. Phasor branch IT] input if no transient simulation - 85

IV.G.4. Example

Data generator:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C BENCHMARK DCPR-25 Diagnostic version of DC-9.
DIAGNOSTIC 0 0 3 0 o 000 000 (critical to generate phasor branch output
0.0 0.0 60.
001 1
CASCADED PI 3 60.0
1RA1 GAl .877 8.40 .1628
2RB1 GB1 .747 4.14-.0252 .852 8.43 .1559
3RC1 GC1 .735 3.47-.0067 .723 4.17-.0277 .829 8.46 .1571

Only the extra DIAGNOSTIC line contents and place are shown here. The remainder
of this data case is the same as nC9 (already depicted in section IV.F.).
Generated branCh admittance output:

Following is an extract of the critical portion: TR-TX table.

Rows 1 through IT of List-3 par. . . ter••
R~ n n • c
1 0.48444770344828241:-08 0.122811215151664911:-03 0._1.00 O. 000000000000000£.00
2 -0.129667579383805111:-06 -o.2242269695795113E-04 O. OOOOOOOCJOO('o![Link] 0.~000000001l:'00
3 0.944175322744547611:-02 -0. 25739'JOO23024946E-Ol 0.0000000<.'\i0000000E.00 0.0000000000000D01:'00
4 0.4361450614869273E-07 -0.146253728321913111:-04 [Link];>.:x:OOOOOO£.oo [Link]'oo
5 -0.8463238089378199£-02 0.1672909357448652£-01 O. 000000Il<X >'>00£.00 0.000000000000000&.00
6 O.1659491249358986E-ol -0. 4747!197790440687£-01 0.000000000' ·-[Link] 0.0000000000000001:'00
7 -0. 14961i88542217182E-06 -O.9426424775643807E-05 0._1:+00 O. 000000000000000£.00
8 0.1871363082120123E-Ol -0.503014Ie93415707E-01 O. [Link] 0.000000000000000£.00
9 -0.1445905414197019£-01 0.2409757560660085£-01 0._1:.00 0.00000000000000001.00
10 0.463148335944757011:-01 -0.1156116986463779£-01 0.0000000000000000£.00 0.000000000000000£.00
11 0.149604601517971911:-05 0.6458965458057214£-05 O. 0000000000C0000.00 0.000000000000000£.00
12 -0. 1680598538619227E-ol 0.5971717826772237£-01 0.0000000000000000£+00 O. 00000000000000001.00
13 0.189746"6414081011:-01 -0.4245555564293230£-01 0.000000000000000£.00 0.000000000000000£.00
14 -0.3271457520158705£-01 0.30475665567539151-01 0._1:.00 0.0000000000000000£.00
15 0.3607139'7143617111:-01 -0.6062044468394332£-01 0.0000000000000000£.00 0.00000000000000011:'00
16 0.118"9017513727611:-05 0.4485645277231421£-05 0.00000000000000001:.00 0.0000000000000001'00
17 0.2094153349533659E-02 -0.2062689282010267£-01 0._1:.00 0.0000000000000001.00
18 -0.22406862694773801-02 0.3689527878049555£-01 0.0000000000000001.00 0.0000000000000001.00
19 0.3661437796623669E-02 -o.6532394073363741E-01 O. 0000000000000001.00 0.0000000000000001·00
20 -0.225850362933058911:-04 0.274250362083394011:-01 0.00000000000000D&'00 0.0000000000000001:.00
21 0.485408214635503811:-02 0.9939308070334987£-02 0.0000000000000001:+00 0.0000000000000001.00

Using branch admittance as input;

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C BENCHMARK DC-II
C Illustration of data input using IT]. KatriK caaes f~ DC-9 (or
C more precisely. DCPRIRT-25. since DIAGNOSTIC is [Link] to s.e it).
C solution is cloae to DC-9 (remember li.~t.d input IT] precision).
C Note two $UNITS cards. The 2nd. returning to original XOPT and
C COPT. does nothing. since all data input is co-pleted. aut the 1st
C is mandatory whenever IT] input is used. so input IT1 in mhos will
C be loaded into List-3 tables TR and TX without any scaling. COPT is
C not used. sO it can be anything (zero is used below). aut XOPT must
C equal the reciprocal of 2 * Pi. since the scaling factor for [Ll is
C 2 • Pi times this frequency (.1591549431) in Hz --- which is uni ty.
C 1st of 3 subcases. The 2nd will use alternate. vide format for [Y].
0.0 0.0 60. {Note XOPT. 60 (never actually used). THAX-O: only steady state
1 1 {only steady state
C New XOPT. COPT • 1.59154943E-Ol 0.000000001:+00 :$UlfITS •• 1591549431. 0.0.
C 1st of coupled R-L. 4.800001:-09 1. 22811E-04 :51RA1 GAl 4
C -1.000E-07-2.242E-05 9.440E-03-2.574E-02 9.440E-03:52Ra1 GB1
C 4.300E-08-1.463E-05-8.500E-03 1.673E-02 1.660E-02:53RCI eCl 4
C -1.000£-07-9.426£-06 1.871E-02-5.030£-02-1.450E-02:54
C 4.631E-02-1.156E-02 3.250E-03-8.199E-02 4.631E-02:
C 1.500E-06 6.459E-06-1.680E-02 5.972E-02 1.897E-[Link] 1
C -3.270E-02 3.048E-02 3.607E-02-6.062E-02 3.607E-02:
C 1.200£-06 4.486£-06 2.090E-03-2.063E-02-2.200E-03:56 1
C 3.660£-03-6.532E-02-2.000£-05 2.742E-02 4.850E-03:
C New XOPT. COPT. 6.00000000£+01 [Link]+OO :SUNITS. 60 .. 0.0. { Restore
$UNITS . . 1591549431. 0.0, ( Ensurea no scaling. of [Y] in IIIh08. XOPT· 1/{2*Pi)
51RA1 GAl 4.8E-9 1.22811£-04 { 1st row of 6x6 [Y] in lIIhoa
IV.O. [Link] branch IY] input if no [Link] .imulation - 86

52RBl OBl -1.E-7-2.24227E-05.oo944-2.57399E-02

53RC1 OCl 4.3E-8-1.46254E-05-.oo85 1.67291E-02.01660-4.74760£-02
54 -1.E-7-9.42642£-06.01871-5.03015E-02-.0145 2.40976E-02
.04631-1. 15612E-02
55 1.5E-6 6.45897£-06-.0168 5.97172E-02.01897-4.24556£-02
-.0327 3.047571-02.03607-6.06204E-02
56 1.21-6 4.48565E-06.oo209-2.06269E-02-.0022 3.68953E-02
.00366-6.53239E-02-2.E-5 2.74250E-02.oo485 9.93931E-03
$UNITS. 60 •• 0.0. { [Link] original valu •• ; ·ClMAOI- end• •caling XUKITS· 1.
BLANK card ending branch card.
BLANK card ending [Link] awi tch card.
14GAl 424.35 60. 0.0 -.1
14BAl 424.35 60. 10.0 -.1
140Bl 424.35 60. -120.0 -.1
14RBl 424.35 60. -110.0 -.1
l4Gel 424.35 60. 120.0 -.1
l4RCl 424.35 60.
C --------------+------_______________________ _
130.0 -.1

C From bu. name: Name. of all adjacent bu•••••

C --------------+-----------__________________ _
C RAl : GAl. •
C GAl. :RAl •
C RBl :OBl •
C OBl :RBl •
C RCl :OCl •
C OCl :RCl •
C --------------+----------------_____________ _
BLANK card ending .ource card.
BLANK card ending [Link] output requ •• t.
C Total [Link] 10.. P-lo.. by .umaing injection.. 9. 326316227367E+03
C End injection: -12.96755041034 44.410354381177 -6429.033843309 9422.7669408263
C End injection: -42.47495983067 -106.9773628 -6888.835943954 -0.6822873
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK card .nding [Link] .plot card.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C 2nd of 3 .ubca.e. u . . . identic.l data to the fir.t. only in vide form.t.
C [Link]• •re identic.l becau•• preciaion of the data h.a not been incr••••d.
0.0 0.0 60. {Not. XOPT. 60 [Link] --- :ne•• r actually ....d
1 1
$UNITS •• 1591549431. 0.0. ( Enaure. no .[Link] of IY) in .no.. XOPT. 1/(2-Pi)
$VINTAGE. 1. { Switch to alternat•• vide format in vith R-L are re.d a. R-L-C
5lRAl GAl. 4.8E-9 1.22811E-04 (R. L. C aa 3E16.0
52RBl GBl -1.E-7 -2.24227E-05 {One tripl.t / [Link]
.00944 -2.57399E-02
53RCl OCl 4.3E-8 -1.46254E-05
-.0085 1.672911-02
.01660 -4.7476OE-02
54 -1.E-7 -9. 42642E-06
.01871 -5.03015E-02
-.0145 2.40976E-02
.04631 -1.15612£-02
55 1.5E-6 6. 45897E-06
-.0168 5.971721-02
.01897 -4.24556E-02
-.0327 3.04757E-02
.03607 -6.06204£-02
56 1.21-6 4.48565E-06
.00209 -2.06269E-02
-.0022 3.68953&-02
.00366 -6.53239&-02
-2.&-5 2.74250E-02
.00485 9.93931E-03
$UNITS. 60 •• 0.0. { [Link] original value.: ·ClKAOE- end• •caling XUNITS· 1.
$VINTAOE. O. ( Con. inputing IY] • •0 return to original. old format.
BLANK card ending branch carda
BLANK card ending [Link] awitch card.
14GAl 424.35 60. 0.0 -.1 {only 60Hz sourc•• activ.
14BA1 424.35 60. 10.0 -.1 {during .teady· .tate!!
140Bl 424.35 60. -120.0 -.1
14RBl 424.35 60. -110.0 -.1
14GCl 424.35 60. 120.0 -.1
14RCl 424.35 60. 130.0 -.1
BLANK card ending .ouree carda
BLANK card ending non-esiatent output [Link]
C Total network loa. P-loa. by summing injection.. 9.326316227367E+03
C End injection: -12.96755041034 44.410354381177 -6429.033843309 9422.7669408263
C End injection: -42.47495983067 -106.9773628 -6888.835943954 -0.6822873
PRINTER PLOT
IV.G. Phasor branch [Y] input if no transient simulation - 87

BLANK card ending non-existent plot cards

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK card ending all subeases

Remarks;
1) TR-TX table manually should be put in the proper input format described in
this section (IV.G).
2) Although the type 51.52.53 data are preceeded by a SUNITS card. data are
only valid for the frequency for which they are created (value FREQCS = 60
Hz in DCPRINT25). So only type 14 - sources at that very frequency are
allowed. Furthermore, only Steady state calculations at the same frequency
are allowed.
IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 88

IV.H High-order rational admittance function

IV.H.I Applications

Any impedance or admittance seen from a port of a passive network or network component can be
expressed as a rational function in the frequency domain. The poles and zeros of the rational function
reflect the dynamic behavior of the system and indicate resonant frequencies of the network under
consideration. This electrical branch allows direct representation of aport -admittance given in form of .
a rational function for electromagnetic transients simulations. Rational function expression for port-
admittances can be gained by approximation of frequency response curves using external
fitting/optimization techniques.

The high-order rational admittance function Yes) (or Y(z» has been used to represent low-order
network equivalents in the EMTP for switching surge computations. An application of this branch can
be found in the paper of M. Kizilcay, Low-order network eqUivalents for electromagnetic transients
studies, European Trans. on Electr. Power Eng. (ETEP), vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 123-129, Mar./Apr. 1993.
Theoretically, the developed model can be used to represent any individual power system component,
provided that the poles and zeros of its immittances are known in an frequency interval, that is relevant
to the type oftransient studies.

BUSl BUS2 BUSl BUS2

o~--------iL~n~~-----o o------~ H ~------------o
'--------'

Yes) Y(z)

The rational admittance function of the branch connecting nodes BUS 1 and BUS2 shown in the above
figure may be described either in s (Laplace transform) or z (Z-transform) domain as follow:

in Laplace domain:
Q +QS+"'+QS'"
res) =K 0 1 '"
h +hs+···+hsn
o 1 n

inzdomain:
A +.A Z -1 + ... + .A Z-l/l
Y(Z) = K 0 1 '"
B~ + B 1Z -1 + •.• + B nz ~

IV.H.2 Card formats

The data input of this new EMTP-branch is slightly tricky. The node pair for this branch and the output
option (branch current, branch voltage, etc.) must be declared on a preceding RLC branch card (type
0). A dummy resistance value (columns 27-32), that has no meaning, must be supplied on the RLC
branch card.
IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 89

The following card sequence must be inserted in the group of branch cards of the electrical network:

1. Lumped series RLC branch card

2. KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT special request card
3. Specification of coefficients of numerator and denominator polynomials

Lumped series RLC branch card

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 1345678901234 5678901.23456 789012 3456789012345£789012345678901234567890123456789

I dummy
T node names resis.
y
p BUSI BUS2 R (Q)
E

12 A6 A6 E6.2 II
11

The parameters used in the above card are the same of uncoupled, lumped series RLC branch explained
in Section IV.A.2

KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT special request card

A special request card with the request 'KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT' in capital letters (columns 1-20)
follows immediately the RLC branch card.

1 2 3 4 5 6 "I
[1:234567-890'1234567890:1234 56789012 134561890'1234567890'1234567 [Link] Is 678901234567.890

~rZrLCAY F-DEPENDENT ORDER GAIN s

Z
F

A20, 4X I8 E25.0
1

Parameters:

ORDER: maximum value between m and n, which are the orders of the numerator and denominator
polynomials of the rational function, respectively (please refer to the equations ofY(s) and
Y(z) given above).

GAIN: gain factor K as defined in equations ofY(s) and Y(z) above.

IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 90

SZFLAG: flag to indicate the type of rational function (Y(s) or Y(z» to be entered. Please enter'S'
for Laplace-transform or 'Z' for Z-transform modelling in capital letters. Leaving blank is
the same as'S'.

Specification of coefficients of numerator and denominator polynomials

Depending on the value of ORDER, a sequence of (ORDER+I) cards with the coefficients of
numerator and denominator polynomials follow:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567S90~2345678901234!: 6789012345678901234567890 P.23456789012345678901234567890

coefficients of coefficients of
numerator polynomial denominator polynomial

ai or Ai b i or Bi
i = 0,1, •• , ORDER i = 0,1, .• , ORDER

E2S.0 E2S.0

Parameters:

~/~: coefficients of numerator polynomial in increasing order. Missing coefficients should be

gtven as zero.

coefficients of denominator polynomial in increasing order. Missing coefficients should be

gIVen as zero.

IV.H.3 Remarks

1. It is recommended to check the stability and realizibility of the rational function to be represented.
F or example, the orders of the numerator and denominator polynomials may differ at most by
unity 'I' according to network theory.

2. In an electrical network maximum 30 such branches with maximum order of25 each are allowed.

3. Time step DELTAT (see IT.B.1 floating-point miscellaneous data card) must be consistent with
the sampling period ofZ-transform applied to obtain the rational function Y(z).
IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 91

IV.H.4 Examples

Series RLC-circuit

This simple data case is selected to show data input format. A series RLC-circuit wi]] represented by a
rational admittance function Y( s) and the results of the simulation can be compared with those of an
ordinary RLC-branch.

R L c
GEN

0.050 lmH

The rational function Y(s) is derived from the series RLC-branch:

Cs
Yes) =
1 + RCs + LCs 2

EMTP data cases comparing the representation ofY(s) with the ordinary RLC-branch are given below:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C -,
C ~rdinary RLC branch representation:
C Series R-L-C: R 0.05 Q, L = 1 mH, C 5rnF
C + RL = 0.05 Q
C
C 1 2 3 4 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
.0005 0.05 O. O.
10 1 1 1 1 2
RES 0.05
GEN RES 0.05 1.0 5000. 1
BLANK
BLANK
llGEN 10.
C Use type-14 source with sample data case 2 (Z-transforrn)
C 14GEN 10. 50. -1.
BLANK
1
BLANK
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 92

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C
C Series R-L-C, modelled by KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT element:
C R = 0.05 Q, L = 1 mH, C = 5 mF
C + RL = 0.05 Q
C

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
0.0005 0.05 O. O.
10 1 1 1 1 1
C
RES 0.05
C -- preceding R branch defines node names and output option
C < .... >: dummy value!
GEN RES 99. 1
C ---Request-------> < Order><-------- Gain --------->
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT 2 1.0 S-transform
C -coeff. of numerator--><-coeff. of denominator->
0.0 1.0
0.005 2.5E-4
0.0 5.0E-6
BLANK ending branch cards
BLANK ending switch cards
llGEN 10.
BLANK ending source cards
1
BLANK ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

Z-Transfonn Application

The same series RLC branch in the figure above is represented by a rational function Y(z). The
coefficients of s given above are converted into Z-transfonn quantities by applying the bilinear
transfonnation:

2 (l-Z·l)
s = _.-'----'-

At (l+Z·l)

Following rational function is obtained for a At"= 0.0005 s

10 - 10z·2
Y(z)
41 - 79z·1 + 4Oz·2

Note, for a diffurent time step At, these coefficients are no more valid, i. e. they must be recalculated for
each new DELTAT. The EMTP data case looks as follows:
IV.H High-order rational admittance function - 93

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C
C Series R-L-C, modelled by KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT element (Z-transform):
C R = 0.05 0, L = 1 mH, C = 5 mF
C + RL 0.05 0
C
C DELTAT TMAX XOPT COPT
0.0005 0.05 50.
ClOUT IPLOT IDOUBL KSSOUT MAXOUT I CAT
10 1 111 2
RES 0.05
C -- preceding R branch defines node names and output option
C < .... >: dummy value!
GEN RES 99. 1

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C ---Request-------> < ORDER><-------- GAIN ---------> I
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT 2 1.0 Z-transforrr,

C -coeff. of numerator--><-coeff. of denominator->

10.0 41. 0
0.0 -79.0
-10.0 40.0
BLANK ending branch cards
BLANK ending switch cards
14GEN 10. 50. -1.
BLANK ending source cards
1
BLANK ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK *** ending data case ***
V. Nonlinear elements - 1

v. NONLINEAR ELEMENTS

Single-phase nonlinear elements are those consisting of a single, nonlinear network branch
having two tenninal nodes. Both resistors R and inductors L fall into this class. Although such elements
are usually installed in 3-phase banks at some location of the network, the elements themselves are
inherently single-phase. It is not the elements themselves, but rather the network, which provides
coupling among such elements. This is to be contrasted with multiphase nonlinearities of rotating
electric machinery, which are not treated in the present single-phase section (for machinery, see Section
VIII and IX) .

In addition to nonlinear elements, time-dependent elements are also treated in the present
section. Although linear, such elements can not conveniently be solved together with those linear
elements that are constant (and which can be built into a constant nodal admittance matrix [Y]. Time-
varying linear elements are grouped with nonlinear elements because they can be solved by the same
specialized solution techniques. The Type-97 staircase time-varying resistance of Section V-C is solved
along with pseudo-nonlinear elements, whereas the Type-91, piecewise-linear, time-varying resistor of
Section V -F is solved along with true nonlinear elements using compensation and superposition.

The dominant distinction among the various nonlinear and time-varying elements of the present
chapter has to do with the solution method that is used. Half are solved "exactly" as "true"
nonlinearities, using compensation and superposition. The other half, called "pseudo-nonlinear", are
only solved approximately (although this may be perfectly adequate for engineering purposes. Pseudo-
nonlinearities are represented at each time step by a single linear segment that was selected from the
known solution of the preceding time step. Whereas true nonlinearities are rigorously solved using
Newton's method to iterate on all coupled nonlinear equation of an isolated subnetwork, pseudo-
nonlinearities have no such coupling, and the resulting solution may involve error (if operation does not
remain on assumed linear segment). A pseudo-nonlinearity is really only appropriate if the user knows
that the resulting operation will vary smoothly along the characteristic as a function of time.

The various subsection of this chapter are devoted to specific nonlinear elements. They have
been ordered according to the solution method that is used. First come the pseudo-nonlinear models
(Section V-A through V-D), followed by the true nonlinear models (Section V-E through V-J). The
Table of Contents (Section 0) provides a summary list of all of them.

The computational burden of true pseudo-nonlinearities is quite different than that of pseudo-
nonlinearities, and this difference should be understood by the user. For the case of inductors, this
aspect is important in selecting between the two alternate forms of modeling. Pseudo-nonlinearities are
represented within the nodal admittance matrix [Y] for the linear network. Each time the operating
point of any pseudo-nonlinear elements of the network changes from one linear segment to another of
the piecewise-linear characteristic, the affected four elements of [Y] must be modified, and the entire
matrix must be retriangularized. Case summary statistics show the number of times this has happened
upon the completion of execution (see "No. times=" in the line of List 5). As network size grows to
infinity, reliance upon pseudo-nonlinear modeling would result in segment changes on nearly every time
step, and hence very slow simulation. Users who assemble network with thousands of nodes and
hundreds or thousands of nonlinearities should be aware of this disturbing asymptotic limit. As for true
nonlinearities, these are not a part of [Y] at all. Instead, they are handled as current injections (using
superposition) after the nonlinear elements currents have been found by a solution that involves a
2 -V. Nonlinear elements

Thevenin equivalent of the linear network . This is the compensation approach. Provided distributed-
parameter transmission circuits isolate nonlinearitiesinto subnetworks of reasonable size ( e.g.,
involving just 3, or 6 or even 12 nonlinearities for each subnetwork), compensation has the advantage
that computational effort only varies linearly with network size, and repetitive triangularization of [Y]
is avoided.

Smoothness of operation is even more important than computational efficiency in selecting

between "true"and "pseudo" nonlinear element modeling, however. After all if a simulation is
erroneous, it matters little how quickly the computer produced it. Unless the user is sure that operation
will be smooth, he should consider avoiding pseudo-nonlinear modeling, since the error might be
intolerable. On the other hand, if the user does know that operation will be smooth, he is advised to
consider avoiding true nonlinear modeling in order to minimize the burden and/or conflicts of
compensation. Resistors and inductors are quite different in this respect.

As a general rule, nonlinear resistors may undergo unpredictable and discontinuous operation.
For example, a resistor in parallel with a linear inductor will have voltage that is equal to the derivative
of the inductor current, and this derivative need not be continuous. On the other hand, resistors in
parallel with lumped, linear capacitance will necessarily operate smoothly, since the voltage is integral
of the capacitor current. So, pseudo-nonlinear modeling of resistor in parallel with a linear inductor is
generally suicidal, whereas pseudo-nonlinear modeling of resistor in parallel with a capacitor is
generally acceptable. But if such details are unclear, the general rule is that nonlinear resistors should
be modeled as true nonlinear elements. Ie., in the absence of knowledgeable advice to the contrary,
avoid Type-99 modeling of Section V-A, and use Type-92 modeling of Section V-E and V-F instead.

As a general rule, nonlinear inductors will operate smoothly, since flux is the integral of voltage.
Hence pseudo-nonlinear modeling (Type-98 of Section V-B, or Type-96 of Section V-D) are
acceptable, and are to be preferred over the true nonlinear modeling (Type-93 of Section V-H). This
assumes that the network is too large (resulting in too much triangularizing), and that the characteristic
is not represented by too many segments (resulting in too many or too fast changes among segments).
The general principle is simple: compensation is too good and too powerful to be wasted on something
as simple as a saturable reactor. Save the compensation for those cases where it may be needed (e.g.,
ZnO modeling, or maybe the U.M.).

Pseudo-nonlinear elements involve no inherent prohibitions regarding connectivity. Not so for

true nonlinear elements, which must be isolated in subnetworks (by distributed transmission circuits)
that do not contain compensation-based UM. usage. This is because any ofthe true nonlinearities of
the present Section V can be solved together as a coupled set. However, the solution method does not
allow for UM. equations, which are completely different. The U.M. can be present in the same
subnetwork, but it must be represented without compensation.

Because user-supplied FORTRAN has been connected to true nonlinear elements, but has not
yet been connected to pseudo-nonlinear elements, there is much greater potential variability of true
nonlinearities. If the reader does not notice the nonlinear modeling that he is looking for, perhaps he
could write his own. Details are covered in Section V-J.
V. Nonlinear elements - 3

"TACS CONTROL" to Modify Any True Nonlinear Element

T ACS can be used to modify or enhance any basic, true, nonlinear element in anyone or a
combination of the following three elementary ways:

1) A T ACS-controlled series voltage source can be added;

2) A TACS-controlled shunt current source can be added;
3) The nonlinear characteristic can be scaled by TACS.

Each true nonlinear element can use up to three TACS variables to control these. three
functions. The names are declared on a special-request card that must immediately follow the ""9999"-
card that terminates the nonlinear element to be controlled. The format of the declaration is as follows:

1 2 4 567 8
12345678901234 6789012345 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
TACS CONTRO

A6 A6 A6

The three TACS variable names of columns 15-32 correspond to the three functions listed, in
order. Any name that is left blank is interpreted as a request for no such TACS control. In the cases of
sources, the value (voltage or current, respectively) is set equal to the controlling TACS variable at
each time step. As for the usage ofNAME3 to scale the characteristic, it is the current that is multiplied
by the TACS variable in question. Examples of such usage can be found in the BENCHMARK test
cases. For series voltage (''NAME1'') control, see. the 2nd. subcase of BENCHMARK DC-37; For shunt
current ("NAME2") control, see the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-45; For scaling of the
characteristic ("NAME3" usage), see the 3rd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-45.

The interpretation ofthe "TACS CONTROL" declaration can be illustrated by the solution to
the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-37:

COll!lllent [Link] = 33. 'C VREF VFLASH VZERO COL

Zinc oxide. 7.7800E+05 1.0000E+00 [Link]+OO 1 0.778000000000000E+06 1.0
Comment [Link] = 35. IC COEF EXPON YMIN
Breakpoint. 2.9480E-21 1.0000E+00 9.0000E+00 , 0.294795442961157E-20 1.0 .900000E+Ol
Special termination-of-points card. , 9999 I Bound on exponentials of 1st. pre-flash v-i curve
Breakpoint. 2.9480E+04 2.6530E+01 5.4505E-Ol , 0.294795442961157E+05 0.265302624185338E+02 0.545050636122854E+OO
Special termination-of-points card. , 9999 I Bound on exponentials of 2nd. post-flash v-i curve
3 TACS Nl control variables. 40 0 0 I TACSCONTROlBATTER {Only 1st of thr•• AI ...os. for sorios voltago. is usod
Blank card ending branches. IBR. NTOT = 1 3 'BLANK card terminating branch data

Convergence of Newton Iteration for True Nonlinear Elements

While it is possible that no solution will be found using Newton's method (in which case an
EMTP error termination would result), the nonlinear element solution should be correct if the
simulation runs to completion. This is a dominant advantage of the compensation-based approach. A
disadvantage is that isolating, distributed-parameter transmission lines must be used to separate a
subnetwork containing such single-phase nonlinear elements from any compensation-based UM.
modeling. But since the UM. generally can be used without compensation if necessary, the artificial
separation using stub lines is almost a thing of the past. Such isolation is almost never necessary for
single-phase, nonlinear elements, although it might be used as a matter of computational convenience
(to reduce the maximum number ofnonlinearities within anyone subnetwork).

Consider controls of the Newton Iteration, Which may require adjustment for difficult
configurations. It is the "ZINC OXIDE" special-request card of Section II-A that allows the user to
redefine Newton controls at the beginning of execution.

A possible error termination for true nonlinear elements is associated with singularity of the
equations being solved. To invert the Jacobian matrix [J] of Newton's method, pivoting is used, and
miscellaneous data parameter EPSILN provides the measure for "how small is small". If a solution is
diverging ("blowing up"), it is not uncommon for there to be an EMTP error termination complaining
about a singular [1]: KILL == 209, LSTAT(19) == 3501. This is particularly true for ZnO arresters of
Section V-E, since excess voltage is fed back into the ZnO nonlinearity to produce astronomical
currents. Elements of the Jacobian matrix thus can be quite abnormal, and it is the singularity test that
not infrequently terminates the simulation. BPA production users have had this problem in cases where
ZnO protection of series capacitors was used, with a fault placed on the system in the phasor sinusoidal
steady state solution for initial conditions (Ref. 8, Vol. X, Page MIOG-12, "Rule", 8 March 1980). So
if a simulation ends prematurely due to a singular Jacobian matrix, the user is advised to examine the
voltages across the nonlinear element at the time of difficulty, since this is the initial guess for Newton's
method. Unless such voltages are reasonable physically, the iteration has little hope for convergence.
Possibly the iteration limit would simply be reached, but more likely, singularity of the Jacobian would
be detected.

Should the Newton iteration of coupled nonlinear elements somehow terminate abnormally, the
user of interactive execution, observation, and control (Spy of Section XVI) will be given an
opportunity to observe and correct the trouble. First, there will be an abbreviated explanation of the
trouble, followed by suspension of the simulation, and a disaster-level audible alarm and prompt as
follows:
SEND REMEDY (SPY, SOLVE, LOOK, STOP) :
The simplest of possible responses is "STOP", which is to be used if the user surrenders, and if he
V. Nonlinear elements - 5

wants to tenninate program execution. But more optimistic is always appropriate and simple "LOOK",
which will result in a repeat of the failed Newton iteration with DIAGNOSTIC printout turned on. The
user can control the level, since there will be a subsequent prompt for it in this case:

SEND DIAGNOSTIC LEVEL IPRSUP (12 FORMAT):

The response "9'~ is generally appropriate here. From the resulting diagnostic output, the source of the
trouble may be evident, in which case the user might attempt an on-line correction using Spy (which
will be available after sending "Spy"). The user might want to change control parameters of the
Newton iteration via "DEPOSIT", and for the, the following information about the storage of variables
of the "ZINC OXIDE" special-request card is critical. The maximum number of iteration is stored in
variable MAXZNO, the convergence tolerance is EPSZNO, the warning tolerance is EPWARN, and
the fatal error tolerance (resulting in the present interruption) is EPSTOP. Finally correction of the
Newton iteration are limited by ZNOLIM(l) and ZNOLIM(2). The interactive user only relinquishes
control by sending "SOLVE". Yet, if the resulting, resumed iteration fails to converge, the "SEND
REMEDY" prompt will reappear in short order.
6 -V. Nonlinear elements

V-A. Type-99 Pseudo-Nonlinear Resistance R(i)

Data cards for Type-99, pseudo-nonlinear resistor R(i) begin with a single branch card bearing
type code "99" in columns 1-2:

1 2 4 5 6 7
2 45678901234 6789012345 45678901234 678901234567890123456789012345678

BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 V FLASH T OELAY JUMP

A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0E6.0

The usual pair of terminal node names BUS1 and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and
BUS4 of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual,
column 80 can be used for branch output requests. In between are four variables VFLASH, TDELAY, JUMP,
and V SEAL - all related to flashover of the built-in gap or opening on a current zero. The Type-99
branch is an open circuit during the phasor solution, and it is only connected when the branch voltage
exceeds (in absolute value) the threshold VFLASH ' Then operation will begin on segment number JUMP,
and conduction will continue for a while (usually until a current zero).

When a current zero occurs, there will be opening, provided a time interval greater than or
equal to TDELAY has elapsed since the most recent flashover. The current zero is noted by reversal in the
sign of the current, and it is assumed that this reversal will occur only while operation is on the first
segment of the characteristic. If the current zero occurs while operation is on some higher segment, a
warning message will be issued:

!!! Tracking trouble with Type-99 or 98 element number I = XX.

If such a message is ever seen, the user should be skeptical of the solution, and should either
look for an error in his choice of parameters, or he should consider switching to true nonlinear
modeling.

An alternative opening strategy is use a voltage criterion rather than a current zero. Ifkeyed
positive, parameter V SEAL provides for this: there will be disconnection when the branch voltage falls
below this threshold in absolute value. This allows opening before a current zero (useful in some cases).

Next come cards that specifY the nonlinear i-v characteristic point by point, from left to right
(in order of increasing device current), with one data card for each pair of values defining the
piecewise-linear curve. The format is:

1 2 3 4, 5 6 7 8
23456789012345 890123456789012 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Current (i) Voltage (v)

E16.0 E16.0
V. Nonlinear elements - 7

The origin (0,0) is an implied point number zero that the. user is to skip. The v-i characteristic
is assumed to be symmetric, so no negative values are to be keyed by the user. The user merely keys 2
or more positive points (for a nonlinearity~ one point would result in a linear branch), and terminates
this characteristic with a "9999"-card (a special value of current, in effect).

The user of TYPE-99 modeling must resist the illusory idea that accuracy improves as the
number of segments that define the characteristic approaches infinity. The trouble is that operation is
only allowed to move from one segment to an adjacent segment during a single time step. Too many
segments means that operation will sometimes be on the wrong segment, leading to error.

Ifthe user wants to allow a Type-99 element to flash only once, then he can use the "SINGLE
FLASH" option. This is declared on a "9999"-card as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
234567890123456 r890123456789012 ~45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999. isINGLE FLASH

Within any data case, the "SINGLE FLASH" request is to be keyed only once, on the first
element (in order of data input) to be controlled in this way. Any other Type-99 element that has the
same first breakpoint voltage will be assumed to have such modeling, too. Hence any number of
Type-99 elements can be constrained to flash only once, but all must have the same characteristic (or
more precisely, the first voltage of each must be identical).

The interpretation of input data cards for the Type-99 pseudo-nonlinear resistance R(i) can be
illustrated using the solution to BENCHMARK DCPRINT -6. The initial branch card confirms the
values of parameters VfLASH ' TDELAy, and JUMP, whereas (x,y) values of the characteristic are
confirmed on each such card:

Should the "SINGLE FLASH" option be used on the "9999"-card, then the interpretation of
this final card is augmented as follows
Special termination-of-points card. I-fl ash 9999
8 -V. Nonlinear elements

V-B. Type-98 Pseudo-Nonlinear Reactor L(i)

Data cards for Type-98, pseudo-nonlinear reactor L(i) begin with a single branch card bearing
type code "98" in columns 1-2:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 45678901234 6789012345 890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678

BUS2BUS3 BUS4 isteacty $steacty

A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0

The usual pair of terminal node names BUSl and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and
BUS4 of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual,
column 80 can be used for branch output requests. In between are the coordinates ( i , l\r) in the
current-flux plane for the linear representation during the steady-state phasor solution.

Next come cards that specify the nonlinear i -l\r characteristic point by point, from left to right
(in order of increasing device current), with one data card for each pair of values defining the
piecewise-linear i -l\T curve. The format is:

1 2 3 4 5 678
23456789012345 890123456789012 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Current (i) Flux (~)

E16.0 E16.0

The origin (0,0) is an implied point number zero that the user is to skip. The i -l\r characteristic
is assumed to be symmetric, so no negative values are to be keyed by the user. The user merely keys 2
or more positive points (for a nonlinearity; one point would result in a linear branch), and terminates
this characteristic with a "9999"-card (a special value of current, in effect).

For typical production usage, the Type-98 pseudo-nonlinear inductance works well, and is
recommended ahead of the compensation-based, Type-93 model of Section V-H. The Type-98 reactor
a subcomponent of the saturable TRANSFORMER model of Section IV-E, and can be connected
almost anywhere, in any number, without much concern by the user. The only general concern are
about computational efficiency for very large cases (see Section V), problems with a large number of
short segments to represent the characteristic, and excessive flux during the phasor solution.

The user of Type-98 modeling must resist the illusory idea that accuracy improves as the
number of segments that define the characteristic approaches infinity. Operation is only allowed to
move from the current segment to an adjacent segment during a single time step, and this may cause
trouble. Too many segments means that operation will sometimes be on the wrong segment, leading to
error. Note that the use of 2 segments always avoid this problem (each segment is adjacent to the
other). On the other hand, two segments is too crude for typical, modem modeling. The use of3 to 5
V. Nonlinear elements - 9

is common, and generally without trouble.

Trouble with excessive flux during the phasor solution refers to operation on other than the first
segment of the nonlinear characteristic. Actually, the characteristic is not used, since an equivalent
linear inductor of the user's choice is used to represent the branch during the phasor solution. But when
the phasor solution is complete, and the flux at time zero calculated from it, there is a problem if this
initial flux exceeds the end of the first segment of the characteristic. Since flux is continuous, step one
of the transient simulation will involve an abrupt change of current, as the operating point moves
toward the appropriate 2nd or later segment. The associated surge of current produces voltage spikes
in other inductors, of course. In general, then, there may be bothersome discontinuities at time zero, if
the phasor flux exceeds the first segment of the magnetization curve. This is good reason to have a long
first segment, and also to consider adjusting the angular reference of phasors so that no one problem
flux is at its maximum at time zero.

The interpretation of input data cards for the Type-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactance L(i) can be
illustrated using the solution to the second subcase of BENCHMARK DCPRINT-15. The initial
branch card confirms the values of parameters i and l\1 , whereas (x,y) values of the characteristic are
confirmed on each such card:

--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------.--.-.------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card images are shown be1o", all 80 columns, character by character
o 123 4 5 6 7 8
012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 890 123456 7890 1234567 890 123456 7890
--------------------------------------------------+--------------~----------------------------------------------------------------.
Comment card. HUMDCD = L IC data.DCP15_2.DAT
Marker card preceding ne" EMTP data case. IBEGIN NEW DATA CASE
Comment card. HUMDCD = 3. IC 2nd. of 2 sub cases replaces the Type-93 reactor by a Type-98 one
Width of time-step loop numbers. W=13 S=2 IPRINTED NUMBER WIDTH, 13, 2, {Request maximum preciSion (for 8 output columns)
Debug print. 0 9 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 IDIAGNOSTIC 0 9 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
DELTAT-1oop printout. 0 0 0 0 IALTERNATE DIAGNOSTIC PRINTOUT, 0, 0, 0, 0, { Required for 2nd or later case only
Misc. data. 5.000E-03 1.000E+00 [Link]+OO I .005 1.0
Misc. data. 1 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 -1
Pri ntout : Z -1 5 5 20 20 I 2 -1 20 20
Series R-L-C. 1.000E+03 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I LOAD 1.0E3 3
Sat. Xformer. [Link]+OO [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I TRANSFORMER TRAN
Special termination-of-points card. I 9999
Winding 1. 5.0000E+00 5.0000E+01 5.0000E+01 I 1GENT 5.0 5.E4 50.
Winding 2. 2.0000E+01 2.0000E+OZ 1.0000E+02 I 2LOAD 20. [Link] 100.
Type-'8 psoudo-nonlinoar L. 5.000E-03 3.000E+01 1'8TRAN .005 30. 3
Breakpoint. 5.00000E-03 3.00000E+01 I •005 30 •
Breakpoint. 1.00000E-02 4.00000E+01 I .01 40.
Broakpoint. [Link]-02 4.50000E+01 I •02 45 •
Broakpoint. 1.00000E-01 5.00000E+01 I 0.1 50.
Breakpoint. 5.000ooE+OO 1.00000E+02 I 5.0 100.
Special [Link]-of·points card. I 999'
10 -V. Nonlinear elements

v-c. Type-97 Staircase Time-Varying Resistance R(t)

If a staircase representation of resistance is acceptable, then the Type-97 branch may be

appropriate for modeling a time-varying resistance. On the other hand, if continuity of the time-varying
resistance is desired, the reader is advised to consider the piecewise-linear alternative that is provided
by Type-91 modeling in Section V-F. Or the user could control the resistance himself from TACS
(using the TACS-controlled R(t) of Section V-I).

Even though it is a linear, the staircase time-varying resistance is solved by the same
computational procedure as are pseudo-nonlinear elements. That is,each time there is a change of
resistance (from one step to another), [Y] must be modified and retriangularized. As a result, the
Type-97 element is sloppily referred to as pseudo-nonlinear element for simplicity.

Data cards for Type-97 staircase, time-varying resistance R(t) begin with a single branch card
bearing type code "97" in columns 1-2:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 901234 567890 12345E 789012 ~45678 90123456789012345678901234567890123456785
97 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 V FLASH TDELAY " .. " ..•...

A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0 i,· I

The usual pair of terminal node names BUS 1 and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and
BUS4 of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual,
column 80 can be used for branch output requests. 1n between are the flashover voltage V FLASH in
columns 27-32 and a delay time TDELAy in columns 33-38. These two parameters control when the
element is connected to, and when it is to be disconnected from, the network. There are just three
common cases:

Case 1: If TDELAy = -1, then VFLASH is ignored, and the element is assumed to be connected for all
time, including the phasor solution for initial conditions. In effect, the first segment or step
is extended horizontally to the left to cover all negative times (this is the resistance used for
phasor solution).

Case 2: If TDELAY > 0 , the element will never be connected before the simulation time t reaches this
minimum time TDELAY' If no such delay is wanted, leave the field blank, or key zero.

Case 3: If VFLASH> 0 ,and TDELAy '" -1 , then the element will never be connected before the
branch voltage reaches this flashover value V FLASH' Yet the user must remember that
positive TDELAy also inhibits such connection (see case 2). By leaving V FLASH blank or
zero, there is no such flashover gap.

Next come cards that specifY the staircase resistance values point by point, from left to right (in
order of increasing time), with one data card for each pair of values defining the staircase R(t) curve.
V. Nonlinear elements - 11

The format is:

1 2 3 4 5 678
23456789012345 890123456789012 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Time (t) Resistance (R)
E16.0 E16.0

Such data (2 or more such cards) are to be terminated by a 9999-card (a special value of time,
in effect). The user need not worry about times larger than his last point, since the program
automatically extends the final step to infinite time.

The interpretation of input data cards for the Type-97, staircase, time-dependent resistance R(t)
can be illustrated using the solution to BENCHMARK DC-42. The initial branch card confirms the
values of parameters VFLASH , TDELAy , whereas (x,y) values of the characteristic are confirmed on each
such card:

35
10 ohm - - - -
4 i i

E
.s::. 3 I
- i \

o I
I
i i
i
i
I --0

I
t
I
I
I i

~I
o i
I
i
i
I
'" I
I
I
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time (5)
12 -v. Nonlinear elements

V -D. Type-96 Pseudo-Nonlinear Hysteretic Inductor L(i)

The pseudo-nonlinear hysteretic inductor is very similar to the Type-98 pseudo-nonlinear

inductor described in Section V-B. The major difference is that the Type-96 element represents the
hysteretic behavior of the magnetic core, whereas the Type-98 element does not.

Data cards for Type-96, pseudo-nonlinear, hysteretic inductor L(i) begin with a single branch
card bearing type code "96" in columns 1-2:

1 2 4 4 5 6 7
2 45678901234 6789012345 45678901234 678901234567890123456789012345678

BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS 4 isteady l\rsteady RESID

A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 E6.0 E6.0

The usual pair of terminal node names BUS1 and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and
BUS4 of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual,
column 80 can be used for branch output requests. In between are the coordinates ( i , 1.\1) in the
current-flux plane for the linear representation during the steady-state phasor solution. There also is
RESID of columns 39-44, which is for an optional residual flux. More about these final three data fields
later.

Next come cards that specify the nonlinear i - 1.\1 characteristic point by p0int. There is assumed
symmetry to the hysteresis loop, so only points of the lower half of the loop are to be inputted. These
begin with the first point to the right of the negative saturation point (where the two curves meet in the
3rd quadrant), and they end one point to the right of the positive saturation point (where the two curves
meet in the first quadrant). Points are inputted from left to right (in order of increasing device current),
with one data card for each pair of values defining the piecewise-linear lower curve. The format is:

1 2 345 678
23456789012345 890123456789012 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Current (i) Flux (~)

E16.0 E16.0

Such data are terminated by "9999"-card (a special value of current, in effect).

If hysteretic inductor is not energized during the phasor solution for initial conditions, then
residual flux is to be keyed in data field RESID of columns 39-44. On the other hand, if the inductor is
energized during the steady-state, then value RESID will generally ignored. In any case, RESID must
lie within the major hysteresis loop. If not,execution will be terminated with an error message
(KILL = 205) .
V. Nonlinear elements - 13

The steady-state phasor solution for initial conditions is the trickiest aspect of the Type-96
hysteresis element. Although only the ratio of "'steady and i steady is actually required to define. the phasor
reactance, "'steady is taken to be the limit on the linear region of operation. If initial flux exceeds this
value, the EMTP prints out a warning message after the steady-state solution. In addition, the point
(i steady, "'steady) must lie within the major hysteresis loop. Ifit does not, the program will halt execution
with an error message (KILL = 204). As a general rule, the user should avoid a phasor inductance
smaller than that corresponding to the positive saturation point.

The user also has the option of allowing. the. program to calculate i steady and "'steady itself This
option is chosen by keying i steady = 8888 and leaving "'steady (columns 33-38) blank. Then the program
will select the steady-state point by the. following method. First, an energization trajectory extending
from the origin to the positive saturation point is imagined. On this curve, the point having flux equal
to 70% of the saturation flux will then be chosen as the steady-state point. I.e., the phasor inductance
will pass through this point.

Whenever a type-96 element is being used, there must be a phasor solution, whether it is used
for subnetwork of the hysteretic inductor or not. If this is not the case, execution will be terminated
with an error message (KILL = 203). The remedy to such a complaint is easy enough. add an isolated,
dummy source and one-ohm resistor to ground.

An additional restriction must be imposed on any phasor solution for initial conditions of the
hysteretic inductor. If the initial condition is found. to lie outside of the major hysteresis loop, this is
impossible, so can not be allowed. The program will move any such illegal initial condition so that it
does lie within the major loop. Logic for this is simple enough. In effect, the program draws a line of
constant current through the illegal initial point, noting the two flux values where this line intersects the
upper and lower halves of the major hysteresis loop. An average of these two flux values is used along
with the solution current for the required initial condition. Whenever such correction is required, the
program will issue a detailed warning message. It is the user's responsibility to determine whether the
change made is acceptable or not. It should be realized that transients due to sudden changes in flux
(like those being made here) may die out very slowly. It is strongly suggested that the user make
legitimate alterations that cause all such messages to disappear.

It is anticipated that many users will have difficulty obtaining hysteresis characteristics for
type-96 modeling. Those who lack all data are referred to Section XIX-H for a simple, first attempt
based on standard magnetic core materials. An. example is provided by the third subcase of
BENCHMARK DC-I3.
14 -v. Nonlinear elements

The interpretation ofinput data cards for the Type-96 hysteretic inductor L(i) can be illustrated
using the solution to BENCMARK DC-33. The initial branch card confirms the three floating-point
parameters i , ljI, and RESID, whereas (x,y) values of the characteristic are confirmed on each such
card:

1
3

0.5

.....-
.~
)(
0

E
-0.5

-1
-4 -3 -2 -1 o 1 2 3 4
current (A)

The diagram above shows the characteristic of the hysteretic inductor defined by entering the
three points 1, 2 and 3. The hysteretic curve is assumed to be symmetric about the origin.
v. Nonlinear elements - 15

V-E. Exponential ZnO surge arrester R(i) (Type-92; "5555")

The model of this section provides for true (as opposed to pseudo) nonlinear representation of
an arbitrary number ofZnO surge arresters. The original theory and implementation are documented in
Ref 22, Vol. 1 No.2, December 1979, pages 6-9. Extension to multiple exponentials and a static gap
is documented in Ref 22, Vol. 1, No.3, April 1980, pages 8-13.

The basic constraint equation for ZnO modeling is resistive, and is highly nonlinear :

where "i" is the arrester current, "v" is the arrester voltage, and "p", Vref, and "q" are constants of the
device. Typically one picks the reference voltage Vref to be twice the rated voltage, or something close
to this. In theory, the choice is arbitrary (it is an extra parameter, note). However, it normalizes the
equation, and prevents numerical overflow during the exponentiation. Then constants "p" and "q" are
unique parameters of the device.

The nonlinear V -I arrester characteristic can be approximated by an arbitrary number of

exponential segments. Both gapped and gapless arresters can be represented. The gapped arrester
requires the specification of two sets of exponential segments, while the gap less arrester requires only
one set. The choice of exponentials can be made automatically by a separate supporting program (use
the request "ZNO FITTER" of Section XIX-I). Least-mean-square fitting is used.

Although the exponential modeling of the present section can be applied to other cases than
ZnO, as a general rule, it should not be wasted on less extreme nonlinearities. If a piecewise-linear
characteristic of only a few segments would be sufficiently accurate, the alternative of Section V-G
should probably be considered. Unless there is a real need, the use of exponentials is wasteful
computationally.

Due to the extreme nonlinearity of ZnO characteristics, very little current is drawn for voltages
that are substantially below the rated voltage Vref (e.g., 0.5 30 = 9.£:.... 10). So, in order to avoid the
possibility ofunderllow during exponentiation, and also to speed the numerical solution, a linear model
is actually used for low voltages. But this is hidden, out of sight of the user, and it need not concern
him. In physical terms, the solution is unaffected by such simplification (no amperemeter could detect
the difference).

There is some application of the present model to silicon carbide (SiC) arresters, although
serious (perhaps unacceptable) approximations must be made. No dynamics of the gap can be provided.
Hence the possibilities of such usage will not be emphasized. The interested reader is referred to
Ref 22, Vol. 1, No.3, April 1980, pages 8-13. In essence, such usage represents the block very
accurately ( "two exponential segments appear to provide a very adequate fit") while ignoring totally
the dynamics of the gap (the gap modeling after flashover) .
16 -V. Nonlinear elements

Data for a ZnO surge arrester begin with a single branch card for a Type-92 nonlinear element
(nonlinear resistance), Invariant data of such a ZnO request has "92" in columns 1-2 and the special
ZnO identifier "5555." in columns 39-44:

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7
2 45678901234 6789012345 89012345678901234 678901234567890123456789012345678 0
BUS2 BUS3 BUS4
A6 A6 A6 A6 5555.

As usual, tenninal names are BUS 1 and BUS2 ( columns 3-14 as 2A6 information), and BUS3
and BUS4 (columns 15-26) can be used for the reference branch feature, if data of this arrester is to be
copied from a preceding one. Variable K is for branch output requests (keyed in column 80 as usual,
with values 1 through 4).

The second data card of a ZnO surge arrester contains control variables V REF, V FlASH, VZERO' and
COL as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
234567890123456789012345 6789012345678901234567890 1234567890123456789012345 67890

V REF V FLASH V ZERO COL

E25.0 E25.0 E25.0 E5.0

VREF (cols. 1-25) is the reference voltage of the ZnO constraint equation, in units of voltage
(nominally, Volts).

(cols. 26-50) is the normalized (i.e., divided by VREF ) flashover voltage of the gap. If the
arrester is gapless, any negative number should be keyed .

V ZERO (cols. 51-75) is the initial arrester voltage (the value at time zero, in effect) in the same
units as VREF . In almost all cases, leave it blank. The Newton iteration then will begin with
zero current.

COL (cols. 76-80) is the number of columns (parallel copies or elements) of the characteristic.
Ifblank,zero, or unity, one column is assumed, and the characteristic is to be used without
modification. But for positive COL (normally an integer), the coefficient COEF of all
following cards will be internally multiplied by COL during data input, prior to storage and
usage.
V. Nonlinear elements - 17

Next come cards that specify the exponential segments. These begin with the characteristic
before flashover (the only characteristic if there is no gap). Each characteristic is to be terminated bv a
special "9999"-card (this value is to be keyed in columns 22-25). The following format is used for e~ch
exponential segment of each characteristic, in natural order (of increasing current and voltage):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345 6789012345678901234567890 1234567890123456789012345 67890

COEF EXPON VMIN

b'~~h~C
E25.0 E25.0 E25.0 I';~'i;'

COEF (cols. 1-25) is the coefficient "p" of the ZnO constraint equation (see the start of this
section). This is in units of current (normally amperes) .

EXPON (cols. 26-50) is the dimensionless exponent "q" [Link] constraint equation.

VMIN (cols. 51-75) is the minimum voltage for usage of the just-stated characteristic, in per unit
based on the reference voltage VREF'

All such cards describing the exponential segments of a ZnO characteristic are to be in their natural
order of increasing device current. Terminate each grouping with a "9999"-card. If the arrester is
equipped with a gap, the preflashover characteristic comes first, followed by the post-flashover
characteristic.

Control of the Newton iteration is provided by various parameters that initially are defined by
the STARTUP file, but which may be redefined by a "ZINC OXIDE" special-request card. See details
ofthe latter in Section II-A for an explanation of the six controls.

illustrations ofZnO usage can be found in the several subcases of BENCHMARK DC-37 (for
single-phase ZnO) and DC-38 (which involves a 3-phase bank ofZnO).

The interpretation of input data cards for a ZnO surge arrester can be illustrated using the
solution to the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-37:

._------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card images are shown below. all 80 columns. character by character
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456 7890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comment card. NUMDCD = 1. IC data: DC37 _2.DAT
Marker card preceding new EMTP data case. IBEGIN NEW DATA CASE
Comment card. NUMaCD = 3. IC DIAGNOSTIC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Comment card. NUMaCD = 4. IC 2nd of 3 subcases. Same basic network as just solved. only with modified
Comment card. NUMDCD = 5. IC ZnO characteristic as derived by OC-39. One exponential with fl ashover.
« Comment cards removed for brevi ty »
Width of time-step loop numbers. W=13 S=2 IPRINTED NUMBER WIDTH. 13. 2. {Request maximum preCision (for 8 output columns)
Misc. data. 5.000E-05 2.000E-02 [Link]+OO I .000050 .020
Misc. data. 1 1 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 0 -I 0
Printout : 2 10 33 1 40 10 I 2 10 33 1 40 10 100 50
Electric network, too. But TACS data first... ITACS HYBRID { We use TACS only to produce series voltage 'BATTER' of ZnO
Free-format TACS suppll!lRental variable defined. 199BATTER = 10000. { Small battery (de source) is inserted in series with ZnO
Names of TACS variables for output vector. I33BATTER { Output the only this one TACS variable that controls ZnO source
TACS initial condition. 'BATTER' 1.000000E+04 I77BATTER 10000. {Initial condition required for smooth electrical step 1
Blank card terminating all TACS data cards. IBLANK card ending all TACS data
18 -v. Nonlinear elements

3.060E-Ol 5.820E+00 1.200E-02 6.964E+02 1.671E-031-1SEND REC .306 5.82 .012 200.
Type-92R(i) [Link]+OO [Link]+OO 5.5550E+03 I92REe S55S. 1
COM-Ant carel. IUMDCD = 28. Ie ....................._ ••••••••=••••••••••"•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
e_ant card. NUMDCO" 29. Ie 9ZREC TYPll 5555. 1
c-ent card. NUMOeD = 30. IC Th. preceding c_ent card is just for verification of solutton. See the
c-ant card. NUMDeD· 31. Ie explanat;onon c_ent cards bDlow thD blank card ending switch cards.
[Link] 'card.. MINDeD· 32.. Ic ......................a • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
c-ant card. NUMDeD = 33. Ie VREF YFLASH YlERO COL
Zinc oxide. 7.7800E+05 1.0000E+OO [Link]+OO I 0.778000000000000E+06 1.0
e_ent card. NUMDCD = 3S. IC COEF EXPOM VMIN
Breakpoint. 2.9480E-Zl 1.0000E+OO 9.0000E+OO I 0.ZI479544Z1611S7E-20 1.0 .IOOOOOE+OI
Spacial teraination-of-points card. I 1199 {Bound on axponentials of 1st, pre-flash v-i curve
Breakpoint. 2.1480E+04 2.6530E+OI 5.4S05E-OI I 0.29479S442961157E+OS 0.26530262418S338E+02 0.545050636122854E+OO
Spacial teraination-of-po;nts card. I 9•• 9 {Bound on exponantials of 2nd, post-flash v-; curve
3 TACS Nl control variables. 40 0 0 I TACS CONTROlBATTER I Only 1st of three A6 names, for series voltage, is used
Blank card ending branches. IBR, NTOT = 1 3 IBLANK card terminating branch data
Blank card ending switches. KSWTCH = O. IBLANK card terminating all (in this case, nonexistent) switches
Comment card. NUMDCD = 43. Ie =============================================================================

Recommendations in Case of Nonconvergence of a ZnO Iteration

Should the ZnO solution using Newton's method fail to converge, remedial action almost always
is possible provided the parameters of the model are realistic. Understanding of basic numerical
mathematics is the key. One potential source of failure, namely singularity of the Jacobian matrix [J],
has already been discussed toward the end of Section V. Although such solution failure applies to all
nonlinear elements, it is most commonly associated with one or more ZnO elements. This is because of
the extreme nonlinearity involved. Any ZnO user is advised to read the aforementioned paragraph
carefully. In addition, there are several more specific recommendations to correct failed Newton
iterations:

1. Really gross blunders by the user are the source of considerable difficulty with production usage
ofZnO modeling. For example, ifthere is confusion between sets of arrester data, it is possible
for lower-voltage ZnO data to be applied at a higher-voltage bus, with the result typically being
a nonconverged iteration. So, any user should always check that his ZnO characteristic does in
fact match the voltage that is being applied to it.

2. Reduction of the simulation time-step size DELTAT might help, sometimes. Recall that
Newton's method is guaranteed to converge if a solution exists, provided the initial guess is
close enough. This may translate into a need to track the transient closely, since the initial guess
for the Newton iteration comes from the solution of the preceding time step (for steps
numbered 2 or later). Too big a time step might make the shock too big for the Newton
iteration to survive.

3. Some spurious voltage oscillation can sometimes be removed by connecting a leakage

capacitance or bus capacitance in parallel with the arresters having trouble. A resistor in series
with a capacitor can provide useful damping. For further details of this concept, although
emphasis is on inductors rather than capacitors,see Ref 22, Vol. 2, Number 3, February 1982,
pages 10-32.

4. Interactive execution, observation, and control (SPY) of Section XVI provides the most
convenient framework for the remedy of nonconverged groupings of ZnO. Even if the
correction is not made interactively, the diagnosis is so much simpler, particularly for big cases
(for which conventional, batch-mode DIAGNOSTIC printout can be overpowering). This was
summarized at the end of Section V.
V. Nonlinear elements - 19

V-F. Type-91 Multipbase Time-Varying Resistance R(t)

The Type-91 component of the present section provides for the continuous, piecewise-linear
representation of a time-varying resistance R(t). This is to be contrasted with the Type-97
representation of Section V-C, for which the function R(t) is necessarily a discontinuous, staircase
function. The present element uses compensation the same way "true" nonlinear elements do. Any
Type-91 elements are solved using Newton's method along with all true nonlinear elements of a
subnetwork.

The Type-91 resistive element begins as an open circuit, drawing no current. It is connected to
the circuit only when the terminal voltage exceeds (in absolute value) the user-specified initiation
voltage V START . At this instant, the timer of the resistance function R(t) is started. If TSTART is the
instant when voltage exceeds V START , then the resistance for larger times t is R( t - TSTART). This is
the correct mathematical notation, although for simplicity we usually denote this using !he shortened
form R(t). There is a time offset, however, and this offset usually is unknown ahead of time, since it
depends on the solution voltage.

Data cards for a time-varying resistance begin with a branch card bearing type code "91" in
columns 1-2 and the further identifier "3333." in columns 39-44:

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8
12 345678 9012341567890 12345E f789012345678 9012341567890123456789012345678901234567850
91 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS 4 .... ' .c. ~::, i .~

..
'
'.' ,
A6 A6 A6 A6 3333. 1 3. : , , ' ~t . . ; ,.; .•...... ..... I

The usual pair of terminal node names BUSI and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and BUS4
of columns 15-26 are used for the reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. Finally, column 80 can
be used for branch output requests. For an example of such usage, see BENCHMARK DC-42.

This initial branch card is to be followed by a separate card from which the starting voltage V START is
read:

1 2 3 4 5 678
2345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

E25.0

Present element logic requires a positive value for this datum. Hence, if the user really wants the
Type-91 timer to begin when voltage first becomes nonzero, he can key an arbitrarily small number
(e.g., I.E-38, which should be valid for all modern scientific computers).

After these two initial cards come those that specifY the piecewise-linear characteristic R(t)
20 -V. Nonlinear elements

point-by-point, with time increasing monotonically:

1 2 3 4 5 678
2345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Resistance Time

E2S.0 E25.0

Such data (two or more such cards) are to be terminated by a "9999"-card (a special value of
resistance, in effect).

Control parameters for the Newton iteration are defined by the STARTUP file. Yet they also
can be changed by the special-request word "ZINC OXlDE" (see Section II-A). But note that there is
no nonlinearity associated with the Type-91 element, which is time-dependent rather than nonlinear.
Hence the Newton iteration will converge exactly in a single step unless some Type-92 element
(nonlinear v-i) is involved in the same subnetwork, and hence must be solved as part of the same
coupled group.

The interpretation of input data cards for the Type-91 time-dependent resistance R(t) should be
self-explanatory from the illustration that follows (drawn from the solution to BENCHMARK DC-42):

V-G. ,Type-92, Multiphase, Piecewise-Linear Resistance with Flashover

The model of this section provides for true (as opposed to pseudo) nonlinear representation of
an arbitrary number of coupled, nonlinear resistances R(i) . The nonlinearity is represented by a
piecewise-linear characteristic of current and voltage.

The element of the present section is very similar to the ZnO representation of Section V-E.
Note that both use the same branch type code "92". The principal difference lies in the representation
of the nonlinearity. For accurate representation of the extreme nonlinearity of ZnO over the full range
of operation, the exponential segments of Section V -E really are required. But in the present section,
the simpler straight lines (hence the name" piecewise-linear" ) are used instead. Another difference is
that the ZnO representation of Section V-E allows to separate characteristics per element: one before
flashover, and one after. Not so for the piecewise-linear representation of the present section, which is
assumed to be an open circuit when the gap is not conducting. Another difference is that the nonlinear
element of the present section allows an extra, built-in linear resistance ~ , for user convenience.
Distinction between the two different Type-92 nonlinear resistances is made by the request number that
is keyed in columns 39-44: the ZnO model of Section V-E uses "5555." whereas the present
piecewise-linear one uses "4444."

Data cards for a piecewise-linear resistance R(i) begin with a single branch card bearing type
code "92" in columns 1-2, and the further identifier "4444." in columns 39-44:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
21345678 9012341567890 12345€ 17890121345678 9012341567890123456789012345678901234567850
.:
~2 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 N FLASH .Y • . . < ...••.. ,".::
:,

".'.'
A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0 4444.
.J •..5< ...:..~L5~ ~~.~1:l.,·.'.··.···.
h "'~'.'" • .. :.•.•..::,2:. I

The usual pair of terminal node names BUSI and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and BUS4
of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual, column 80 can
be used for branch output requests. Only variable N FLASH (columns 27-32) is new or slightly
complicated. It controls the logic of the gap.

If the user wants no series flashover gap (see later miscellaneous data parameter VFLAS~' then
he can ignore variable NFLASH . But if a series gap is to be present, then NFLASH controls possible clearing
(gap opening) and reflashing (reclosing). There are three different cases of interest, requiring N FLASH
equal to either -1, 0, or + 1. The rules are as follows:

1) Use N FLASH = + 1 if the gap is to flash and clear only once (after the single clearing, the
gap remains open for the remainder of the study)
2) Use N FLASH = °(or leave columns 27-32 blank) if the gap is to flash and clear as many
times as required by the network conditions
3) Use NFLASH = -1 if the gap is to discharge only once, and remain closed continuously
thereafter (i.e., no clearing).
22 -v. Nonlinear elements

The second Type-92 data card is for miscellaneous data. It and the following characteristic must
be omitted if the reference..;branch feature (where names BUS3 and BUS4 point to a previous such
branch) is being used, of course. But for cases without such copying of a previously-defined Type-92
element, a second card must contain Type-92 miscellaneous data (variables Rtm, VFLASH, and VZERO as
follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
234567890123456789012345 6789012345678901234567890 1234567890123456789012345 67890
""'<"c'
R lin V FLASH V URO >,
E25.0 E25.0 E25.0
:~"ihti~

Rtm (cols. 1-25) is the linear resistance that is to be connected in series with the nonlinear (actually,
piecewise-linear) characteristic. It can be used to represent the grounding resistance of an
arrester, for example. A value of zero is permissible, if desired. The units for Rtm are to be
[voltage/current] , which nominally are [ohms].

VFLASH (cols. 26-50) is the gap flashover voltage in units of voltage (nominally [voltsD. If the resistor
is to have no gap, key any negative number.

VZERO (cols. 51-75) is the starting (or initial) branch voltage in units of voltage (nominally [voltsD. In
almost all cases, leave this data field blank. Then the Newton iteration will start from zero
current, which usually is satisfactory.

Finally come cards that specify the nonlinear i-v characteristic point by point, from left to right
(in order of increasing device current), with one data card for each pair of values defining the
piecewise-linear i-v curve. The format is:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
234567890123456789012345 6789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890

Current Voltage ' <". '

E25.0 E25.0
" ~:>

Such data (2 or more such cards) are to be terminated by a 9999-card (a special value of current, in
effect).

If the characteristic is symmetrical with respect to the origin, the following feature can be used
to save both program table space (storage of List 10) and also keyboard effort. Specify only the
positive portion of the characteristic (both current and voltage positive). Do not specify the origin
(0.0, 0.0) in this case, since it will automatically be added by the program as the characteristic is
inputted. Subsequent use will exploit the assumed symmetry ofthe characteristic. The user is advised
to specify a full characteristic (including third-quadrant points of negative current and voltage) only if
the characteristic is not symmetric about the origin.
V. Nonlinear elements - 23

For illustrative usage of the Type-92 piecewise-linear resistance R(i), see the first data case of
BENCHMARK DC-38. The following interpretation has been drawn from this example:

--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card images are shown below. all 80 columns. character by character
o 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 8
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456 7890123456789012345678901234567890
-------------.. ------------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------_ . . . -_ . __ . . _-
Comment cl.\rd. NUMDCD = 1. IC data:DC38_1.DAT
Marker cl.\rd preceding new EMTP dl.\tl.\ case. IBEGIN NEW DATA CASE
Comment cl.\rd. NUMDCD = 3. IC BENCHMARK DC-38
Comment card. NUMDCD = 4. IC ZnO simulation similar to DC-37. only here a 3-phase network is used.
Comment card. NUMDCD = 5. IC The same arrester having characteristic i = 2500 * ( v / V-ref) ** 26
Comment card. NUMDCD = 6. IC is used. only here the coefficient has been cut in four (to COEF =625)
Comment card. NUMDCD = 7. IC so that the column multiplier COL = 4.0 can be used: 4 * 625 = 2500.
Comment card. NUMDCD = 8. IC Also. the usual. recommended (and more accurate) exponential modeling
Comment card. NUMDCD = 9. IC (Type-92 nonl1near R(i) requested by '5555.') is only used for two of
Comment card. NUMDCD = 10. IC the three phases. In order to Illustrate the piecewise-linear alter-
Comment card. NUMDCD = 11. IC native (requested by '4444.'). such less-accurate model ing (for the
Comment card. NUMDCD = 12. IC highly-nonlinear ZnO. anyway) has been placed in the 3rd phase ('c').
ZnO const. 20 1.000E-08 1.000E-03 1.000E-01 IZO. 20 • • • • 0.9. .1 To improve ZnO convergence. control Newton ZnO iteration
Misc. data. 5.000E-05 2.000E-02 [Link]+OO I .000050 .020000
Misc. data. 1 1 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 1 o 1 -1
Pri ntout : 5 5 20 1 30 5 I 5 5 20 1 30 5 50 50
3.055E-01 5.819E+00 1.210E-02 6.935E+02 1.678E-031-1SENDA RECA .305515.8187.01210 200. o 200-m; 1e. constant-
3.199E-02 1.556E+OO 1.937E-02 2.834E+02 1.098E-031-2SENDB RECB • 031991.5559.01937 200 • o parameter, 3-phase
3rd or later transposed distributed phase. 1-3SENDC RECC { transmission line.
Type-92 R(i) [Link]+OO [Link]+OO 5.5550E+03 192RECA 5555. lIst card of 1st of 3 ZnO arresters
Comment card. NUMDCD = 21. IC VREF VFLASH VZERO COL
Zinc oxide. 7.7800E+05 1.0000E+19 [Link]+OO I 778000. -1.0 0.0 4.0
Comment card. NUMDCD = 23. IC COEF EXPON VMIN
Breakpoint. 6.2500E+02 2.6000E+01 5.0000E-Ol I 625. 26. 0.5
Special tennination-of-points card. I 9999.
Reference branch. Copy (RECA • ) 192RECB RECA 5555. { Phase 'b' ZnO is copy of 'a'
Type-92 R(il [Link]+OO [Link]+OO 4.4440E+03 192RECC 4444. {Phase ·c D ZIIO is piecewise-linear
C_ant card. NUMDCD - 28. IC VREF VFLASH VZERO
Piecewise-lin. [Link]+OO 1.000E+19 [Link]+OO I 0.0 -1.0 0.0
Breakpoint. 1.00000E+OO 5.82400E+05 I 1.0 582400. {First point of i-v curve.
Breakpoint. 2.00000E+OO 5.'0800E+05 I 2.0 5.0800. {Data is copied frotll DC-3'
Breakpoint. 5.00000E+OO 5.99200E+05 I 5.0 591200. {which was used to create
Breakpoint. 1.00000E+01 6.04800E+05 I 10. 604800. {the ZbO branch cards that
Breakpoint. 2.00000E+01 6.16000E+05 I 20. 616000. {are used in pha511S "a" &
Breakpoint. 5.00000E+01 6.3OOO0E+05 I SO. 030000. {-b". But there is sOIIa
Breakpoint. 1.00000E+02 6.44000E+05 I 100. 644000. {distortion due to the use
Breakpoint. 2.00000E+02 1.6U20E+OS I 200. 111120. {of linear rather than the
Breakpoint. 5.0ooo0E+02 6.94400E+05 I 500. 694400. {More accurate axponential
Breakpoint. 1.00000E+03 7.21280E+05 I 1000. 721280. {Modeling. of course.
Breakpoint. 2.00oooE+03 7.56000E+05 I 2000. 756000.
Breakpoint. 3.00000E+03 7.78400E+05 I 3000. 778400. {Last point of i-v curve.
Spacial tennination-of-points card. I '999. { Tanninator for piecewise-linaar charachristic
Blank card ending. branches. IBR. NTOT = 3 7 IBLANK card follows the last branch card

The second data card shown here actually carried the three input numbers ( 0.0, -1.0, 0.0 ). But
the second of these, the value ofVFLASH , was converted by the program to FLTINF = I.EI9 prior to
interpretation of the data card. This represents a signal or flag to solution logic that in fact the element
has no gap.
24 -V. Nonlinear elements

V-H. Type-93 True, Nonlinear Inductance L(i)

For typical production usage, the Type-98 pseudo-nonlinear inductance is recommended instead
of the compensation-based, Type-93, true-nonlinear inductor of the present section. This was explained
in Section V.

Data cards for a Type-93, piecewise-linear inductance L(i) begin with a single branch card
bearing type code "93" in columns 1-2:

1 2 4 5 6 7
2 45678901234 6789012345 456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
BUS2 BUS 3 BUS 4
A6 A6 A6 A6 E6.0

The usual pair of terminal node names BUS 1 and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, and BUS3 and BUS4
of columns 15-26 are used for reference-branch or branch-naming purposes. As usual, column 80 can
be used for branch output requests. In between are the coordinates ( i , W ) in the current-flux plane for
the linear representation during the steady-state phasor solution.

Next come cards that specify the nonlinear i - W characteristic point by point, from left to right
(in order of increasing device current), with one data card for each pair of values defining the
piecewise-linear i-W curve. The format is:

1 2 3 4 5 678
23456789012345 890123456789012 45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Current (i) Flux (ljI)

E16.0 E16.0

Such data (2 or more such cards) are to be terminated by a 9999-card (a special value of current, in
effect). Usually the saturation curve is assumed to be symmetric about the origin. If this is the case,
ignore all negative values in the third quadrant, beginning with the origin ( 0,
BENCHMARK DC-4.
°).
This is illustrated in

The interpretation of input data cards for the Type-93 true, nonlinear inductance L(i) is
illustrated by the solution to BENCHMARK DC-4. The initial branch card confirms the values of
parameters ~teady and Wstcady, whereas (x,y) values of the characteristic are confirmed on each such
card:
V. Nonlinear elements - 25

100
I
.,4 5 ~6
50 (5, 100)
I 21"
1 I
>< o , i
~
u.. i
! ..)
-50 !
iI

i i
-100
-0.2 -0.1 o 0.1 0.2
Current (A)

The diagram above shows the saturation curve of Type-93 nonlinear inductance defined by
entering six points in the first quadrant. Saturation curve is assumed to be symmetric about the origin.
26 -V. Nonlinear elements

V-I. Circuit Breaker or Electric Arc Modeling Using TACSIMODELS-

Controlled R(t)

The modeling of an electric are, including the most practical case of the controlled arc within a
circuit breaker, is possible using a TACS-controlled resistance. This follows the research of
Prof Mustafa Kizilcay during his research assistance period at the University of Hanover, Germany, as
first documented in the literature in Ref. 22, vol. 5, no. 3, July 1985, pages 15-26.

The dynamics of the arc are all modeled within TACS or using MODELS. Electric voltages or
branch current represent inputstotheTACS or MODELS modeling. The output is a signal R(t) (name
BUS4 of columns 20-26 of the branch card), which is to be the arc resistance as a function of time. It
is this TACS signal that is to be connected to the electric network element of the present section, as
explained in rules that follow.

TACSfMODELS-controlled resistors are modeled using compensation in the same fashion as

conventional Type-91 time-dependent resistors (see Section V-F). The only difference is in the logic
to adjust R(t) at each time-step: rather than consult a static characteristic of resistance vs. time (the
conventional, static Type-91 case), the TACSfMODELS control imposes a known value.

Each electric arc is requested by a single branch card that defines a degenerate, controlled,
time-varying resistor. This is a compensation-based, Type-91 element without any associated
characteristic. The data format is as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
45678901234 6789012345 890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
BUS2 BUS4

A6 A6 A6 I

The usual pair of terminal node names BUSI and BUS2 occupy columns 3-14, following the type code
of"91" in columns 1-2. The special request word "TACS" must be keyed in columns 15-18, followed
by the name of the TACSfMODELS variable that defines the resistance R(t) in ohms. This is variable
BUS4 of columns 21-26. Finally, column 80 can be used for branch output requests as usual. For an
illustration of such usage, see the second sub case of BENCHMARK DC-22. But this is an artificial test
of the mechanics of connection only. For realistic parameters and time-step size, see the two subcases
of BENCHMARK DC-43, both of which come from University Hanover.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the name of the TACSfMODELS variable that controls
the resistor, of course. As an illustration, consider the first such usage in the second data subcase of
BENCHMARK DC-22:
V. Nonlinear elements - 27

--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card iMages are shown below, all 80 columns, character by character
o 1 234 5 6 7 8
01234567890 1234567890 1234567 890 1234567 890 123456 7890 12345678901234567 890 1234567 890
- - - -- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - ---- - --+- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - --
Comment card. NUMDCD = 1. IC data:DC22 [Link]
Mar~er card preceding new EMTP data. case. IBEGIN NEW DATA CASE
Comment card. NUMDCD = 3. IC 2nd of 5 subcases of OC-22 is a hybrid TACS example of the TACS-controlled
Comment card. NUMDCD = 4. IC resistance (Type-91 electric network branch type). All-resistive electric
Comment card. NUMDCD = 5. IC network allows easy checking with a pocket calculator at any step: For each
Comment card. NUMDCD = 6. IC branch, verify that program node voltages and branch currents correspond. to
Comment card. NUMDCD = 7. IC the branch constraint equations v = R * 1. There actually are two discon-
Comment card. NUMDCD = 8. IC nected subnetworks, with one having two TACS-controlled arcs (illustrating
Comment card. NUMDCD = 9. IC use of the multivariable solution code of 'ZINCOXO) and the other having 1.
Request preceding 5 printout number pairs. ICHANGE PRINTOUT FREQUENCY
Printout : 5 5 0 0 0 0 I 5 5
Misc. data. 2.000E-02 2.000E+00 [Link]+OO I .02 2.0 { Step size is immaterial since network has no dynamics
Misc. data. 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 1 1
Electric network., too. But TACS data first... ITACS HYBRID I In a real case, arcs are on electriC side, and equations in TACS
Free-format TACS supplemental variable defined. 199RESIS = 1.0 + SIN ( 3.0 * TIMEX) {1st R(t) signal -- constant + sine wave
Free-format TACS supplemental variable defined. I99RES = 1.0 + COS ( 3.0 * TIMEX) I 2nd R(t) signal -- constant + cosine
Names of TACS variabl es for output vector. 133RESIS RES {Output the only 2 TACS variabl es: the 2 Rlt) resistance functions
TACS initial condition. 'RESIS' 1.000000E+00 I77RESIS 1.0 ( Initial condition on 1st R(t) insures smooth start
TACS initial condition. 'RES 2.00oo00E+OO I77 RES 2.0 ( Initial condition on 1st R(t) insures smooth start
Bl ank card. terminating. all TACS data cards. I BLANK card ending all TACS data
Series R-L-C. 1.000E+00 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I BUS1 BUS2 1.0 {Master copy of five I-ohm resistors I 1
Reference branch. Copy (BUS1 ,BUS2) I BUS2 BUS3 BUS1 BUS2 { 2nd of 3 linear branches in 1st subnetwork
Reference branch. Copy (BUSl ,BUS2) I BUS3 BUS1 BUS2 { 3rd of 3 linear branches in 1st subnetwork
Reference branch. Copy (BUSl ,BUS2) I BUS1 BUS4 BUS1 BUS2 1st of 2 linear branches in second. subnetwork
Reference branch. Copy (BUSl ,BUS2) I BUS4 BUSl BUS2 ( 2nd of 2 linear branches in second subnetwork
TAts-controlled Typa-91 R(t). -RESIS - 1118US2 TAts RESIS {R(t) controlled by TAts variable -RESIS- } 1
TAtS-controlled Typa-91 Ret). -RES 11188S3 TAtS RES { Ret) controll.d by TAts -RES- --- 2nd of 2} 1
TAts-controlled Typa-91 Ret). -RES 1918US4 TAtS RES { Ret) within 2nd, isolatad subnetwork} 1
Blank card ending branches. IBR, NTOT = 5 5 IBLANK card ending electric network branches

Note that the just-described rules prohibit use of the reference branch feature, where columns
15-26 of the data card are used to name a preceding branch that is to be copied. Yet this is hardly a
loss, since neither program table space nor user data space could be saved by any such feature. This is
why the reference branch feature has not been provided for the arc model.

The arc model has no external gap. It is the user's responsibility to model any such dynamics
within TACSIMODELS. For an open gap, the user should define a signal R(t) with a very large
resistance (e.g., 1.E8 ohms).

If there is no automatic detennination of T ACS initial conditions, then a T ACS initial-condition

card (identified by type code "77" in columns 1-2) generally should be used to define the initial element
resistance R(O). This initial value will used within the electric network on the first time step, recall. In
the absence of either automatic or manual definition, there may be a discontinuity on the first time step,
as solution logic of the electric network first tries to cope with an erroneous, zero resistance (the value
of any otherwise-uninitialized TACS variable at time zero).

Should R(t) from TACSIMODELS ever be exactly zero, logic applicable to the electric network
will convert this value to the near-zero singularity tolerance EPSILN (see the floating-point
miscellaneous data card). This is necessary to avoid division by zero, since the admittance formulation
reqUlres

di 1
=
dv R

As with all hybrid solutions involving both TACSIMODELS and the electric network, there is a one
time-step delay between the determination ofR(t) within TACSIMODELS and its usage in the electric
network solution.
28 -V. Nonlinear elements

V -J. User-Supplied FORTRAN for Nonlinear Element Modeling

Ifthe user wants true nonlinear element modeling that differs from program-supplied logic, he
might consider writing his own FORTRAN. Yes, user-supplied FORTRAN is connected easily enough
in many if not most cases, provided the user is willing and able to compile one subroutine
("SOLVNL"), and linkage-edit the result along with other object files to produce a modified executable
version of the program.

User-supplied FORTRAN was first described publicly in Ref. 22, Vol. 3, Number 3,
February 1983, pages 37-42. Although the general concept remains unchanged, there have been several
important improvements since that early work. The interface is better and more powerful, since there
now is a connection with the phasor solution for initial conditions (in the case of reactors), and input no
longer is tied to the cumbersome ZnO modeling of "M31." vintage. Most importantly, the new
user-supplied FORTRAN elements can be mixed in the same subnetwork with any program-supplied
modeling of the present Section V. All nonlinear equations including the user's are solved using the
same coupled Newton iteration.

The 2nd sub case of BENCHMARK DC-7 illustrates logic that has been built into the UTPF.
For simplicity, a hyperbolic magnetic saturation curve has been modeled:

'P == a . tanh(b'i) + c·i

where \j.r is the reactor flux, "i" is the reactor current, and "a", "b", and "c" are parameters read from
cards numbered one and two of the 3-card characteristic of the Type-93 element. The exceptional
nature of the Type-93 characteristic is indicated by keying "FORTRAN" in columns 33-39 ofeach of
the three cards preceding the "9999"-card that ends the component. The third card is an extra bounding
card that can contain an arbitrary pair (x, y), since the numbers are not used. But the card is required to
reserve space (3 cells of List 10 are required for each nonlinear element). There is no provision for
reference branch usage, so leave the BUS3 and BUS4 fields (columns 15-26) of the leading Type-93
card blank.

123 4 5 678
23456789012345 890123456789012 01234567890123456789012345678901234567890
-333777. value "a"

value "b" value "e"

any value any value
E16.0 E16.0

No interpretation of the input data cards need be illustrated, since this is no different than for the
conventional Type-93 element of Section V-H.

User-supplied FORTRAN can involve an arbitrary number of parameters, limited only by List
10 dimensioning. The 3 values that are used to describe the hyperbolic saturation curve within the
UTPF are limited in number only by the user's data, not by the code. The program will continue to read
(x,y) points of the characteristic until the "9999"-card, and two parameters can be decoded from each
V. Nonlinear elements - 29

card. But for Type-93 usage, just do not forget that extra, unused card at the end, to protect the final
real pair of parameters. The extra card is required because Type-93 logic redefines the final (x.,y)
storage to reflect extension of the final segment to infinity (actually, just to 1000 times the last real
point).

The user can add as many different types of nonlinear elements as he wants. These will be
distinguished by varying the numerical flag ("-333777" for the hyperbolic function of the UTPF) on the
first point of the characteristic. These different numerical flags will be found in no subroutine other than
the solution routine "SOLVNL". Ifthe user were to add just one new type ofType-93 modeling of his
own, the revised structure could be as follows (assuming the use of "-444888" as the new request flag):

IF ( CCHAR(ICMIN) .NE. -333777. ) GO TO 4520

< < Logic to calculate " i II and dildv >>
< < using hyperbolic tangent saturation >>
GO TO 2261
4520 IF ( CCHAR(ICHMIN) .NE. -444888. ) GO TO 5520
< < Logic to calculate "i" and dildv >>
< < using new equations ofthe user. >>
GO TO 2261
5520 D5 =D4

Presently, the D5 = D4 statement follows S.N. 4520 since the proposed code between S.N. 4520 and
S.N. 5520 does not now exist. The generalization to two or more additions should be obvious.

Interpretation of the input data will correspond to whatever type of nonlinear element is being
used. For inductor modeling, this will be the Type-93 element. An illustration is provided by the
second data subcase of BENCHMARK DC-7:
--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Descriptive interpretation of input data cards. I Input data card images are shown below. all 80 columns. character by character
o 123 4 5 6 7 8
0123456789012345678901234567890 1234567 890 1234567 890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comment card. NUMDCD = 1. IC data:DC7 _2.DAT
Marker card preceding new EMTP data case. IBEGIN NEW DATA CASE
Comment card. NUMDCD = 3. IC 2nd of 2 subcases illustrates user-supplied fORTRAN to provide for smooth
Comment card. NUMOCD = 4. IC modeling of magnetic saturation. Special logic presently is built into
« Comment cards removed for brevi ty »
Output global peak voltage of network. 3 IPEAK VOLTAGE MONITOR. 3. { Request network extrema of both node & branch voltage
Width of time-step loop numbers. W=13 S=2 IPRINTED NUMBER WIDTH. 13. 2. {Request maximum preCision (for 8 output columns)
Misc. data. 2.000E-02 4.000E+OO [Link]+OO I .020 4.0
Misc. data. 1 1 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 0 I 1 1 1 1 -1
Printout : 5 5 20 20 0 0 I 5 5 20 20
Series R-L-C. 1.000E+02 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I GEN NODE 100. { Create unknown-voltage 'NODE' for coup l1ng
Series R-L-C. [Link]+00 5.000E+Ol [Link]+OO I NODE TRAN 5.0 5.E4 1
Nonlinear L. Type 93. 5.0000E-03 3.0000E+Ol I 93TRAN .005 30. 1
Breakpoint. [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I 0.0 0.0
Breakpoint. 5.00000E-03 3.00000E+01 I .005 30.
Breakpoint. 1.00000E-02 4.00000E+Ol I .01 40.
Breakpoint. 2.00000E-02 4.50000E+Ol I .02 45.
Breakpoint. 1.00000E-01 5.00000E+Ol I .10 50.
Breakpoint. 5.00000E+00 1.00000E+02 I 5.0 100.
Special termination-of-points card. I 9999
Series R-L-C. 1.000E+03 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I TRAN 1000. (Need to damp hash within previous NL element
Series R-L-C. 5.000E+02 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO I NODE XXXX 500. ( Current-limiting. phase-shifting resistor
Comment card. NUMOCD = 43. IC User-supplied fortran follows. This is a regular Type-93 NL inductor until
Comment card. NUMDCD = 44. IC the time-step loop. Note 3-card characteristic. followed by '9999' bound.
Comment card. NUMDCD = 45. IC The characteristic parameter usage is: PSI = II • tanh ( b * i ) + c * i.
Nonlinoar L. Typo 93. 8.0000E-02 3.5000£+01 I93XXXX .08. 35.0 1
Breakpoint. -3.33777E+05 3.50000E+Ol I -333777. [Link] {-333777· flag; a • peak iron flux
Breakpoint. [Link]+Ol 5.ooo00E+OO I 20. 5.0FORTRAN { b • "arrent ault; c· linear soria, L
Breakpoint. 1.0ooooE+OO 1.0ooooE+OO I 1.0 1.0FORTRAN { o-y third card to protoct card 2
Special toraination-of-peiats "ard. I ttt. { End of usor-suppliod fortran (sao requost in cols. 33-3.)
Blank card ending branches. IBR. NTOT = 4 5 IBLANK card ending progrlllll branch cards.
30 -v. Nonlinear elements

The first card confirms ~teady and tVsleady whereas points of the characteristic involve parameters of the
hyperbolic saturation model: a = 35, b= 20, and c = 5, respectively. The third card of the characteristic
is unused (the values of unity were keyed just to insure legal numbers).
PageSK-l

V-K. Corona ftDdelingfor an CNerhead Transnission Line

Corona .modeling comes to the EMTP fran 1ST (Instituto SUperior Tecnico) of
Lisbon, Portu;al. ~e l.I1derlying research concerning the representation of each
corona cell is docunentedin the doctoral dissertion of Prof. M. T. Correia de
Barros (.see Ref. 44). Also inclu:1edin this research was an accurate, nonlinear
traveling wave propagation a1goritbn. 9:>~ver, the initial EMTP implementation
does not rely on any such new propagation model. Instead, fo.r Simplicity,
conventional, short EM'I'P lines segments are used (see following paragraFh).
Instrunenta1 to the application of this nunerica1 research to the EM'I'P has been
J. Allen .Uma o.f the nationalpo~r company (EIP). Implementation of corona in
ATP began .in Leuven, Belgiun, imnediately following the (X;tober 27th meeting of
IEC during 1986. '1tle author has been invited to write a slJm\ary article for the
EMTP Newsletter (Reference 22), so interested readers might watch for this.

Al thoU;h later implementations .maya110w or even require quite different

asstmlptions for the overhead line, the .present, ini tia1 EM'I'P implementation
requires that atransnission circuit wi thcorona be represented as a cascaded
connection of conventional, short, line sections of any type. Permitted are pi-
circuits, constant-parameter distributed lines, or frequency-dependent lines,
and the choice among these can even be varied along the cascaded connection.
But each such section must represent an equal length of line, and branch cards
for all must be regularly ordered from one end to the other (data input order) •
'1tle representation will [Link] multiphase (e.g., 3-Fhase or 6-Fhase) , with
present, temp:>rary, fixed dimensioning limited to 8 phases (typical of a double-
circuit overhead line with two ground wires) • 'Ihe nunber of phases must be
equal among all sections. Node names must all be distinct (i.e., phases must
not be paralleled) • All intermediate nodes of the cascaded connection, as ~ll
as all terminal nodes, must be of unknO\oi!'l vol tage. If kno\oi!'l vol tage is reall y
desired, the user can isolate the line node using a near-zero series impedance.

1 2 3 - Etc. - N

Corona modeling is build into the linear p:>rtion of the system just as
pseooo-nonlinear elements (e.g., 'JYpe-98 reactor) are. When voltages really are
excessive, and when corona is active, it must be expected that [YJ will be
modified and retriangularized on each time step. 01 the other hand, after the
surge moderates and corona dies out, there will be no such automatic
retriangularization due to corona. '1tle one dominant advantage of this
implementation of corona modeling usingpseooo-nonlinearities is that it does
not rely on compensation, thereby leaving compensation for other elements that
seem to be more in need of it (e.g., Zno surge arresters). It is acceptable to
apply banks of 'IYPe-92 surge arresters at either end of the line, or even at any
intennediate node of the cascaded sections (although this w::>uld be less common) •
page 5K-2

The length of each cascaded section of the line just described is a

fW1ction of the rate of change of voltage, among other things. 'IYPical usage
for studies involving lightning strokes, which are modeled by very fast surge
fW1ctions (see 'IYPe-15 source functions). 'IYPically the time-step size of the
simulation must be very small (e.g., 1.E-7 seconds), and each section must be
very short (e.g. , 3" meters) • As a result, a long long (e.g., 2e" KrIl) \[Link]
never be modeled with corona for its entire length. Instead, typically only
short portions of lines adjacent to the lightning strike will involve corona
modeling; further fran the origin of the surge, conventional frequency-dependent
line modeling will be used. Al though corona is particularly useful for
lightning stu:Hes, it can also be used with typical switching surge studies.
lbwever, the section length then \[Link] be lengthened. accordingly: length should
be chosen approximately proportional to the rise time.
All data cards describing a transmission circuit with corona belong to the
class of EMTP branch cards. Although all data for anyone circuit must be
contiguous (separated only by discretionary comment cards), there are no
ordering restrictions on the placement of any such data sets in relation to each
other, or in relation to other (non-corona) branch cards of the net\[Link].
Theoretical aspects of the corona modeling may be briefly slDtlllarized as
follows:
1.. Arbitrary wave form of applied voltage
2. Etc. Teresa will write this description in Usbon.

Data cards for the representation of a transmission circuit with corona

begin with a card carrying just the request word "CCRCNA MODEL" in colunns 3-
14 (the normal branch name fields BUSI and BUS2):
C 1 2 3 4
C 3456789"123456789"123456789"123456789"
C --------------------------------
CCRCNl>. MCDEL

This marks the beginning of a set of cards that are to follow:

1. One corona miscellaneous data card;
2. Corona ti'lase cards (one for each phase, in order)
3. capacitance matrix (Cl (one row of lower triangle per card)
4. Ordered cascade connection of line sections.

The format for the corona miscellaneous data card is:

C 1 2 3
C 34567819"1234561789"12341561789"121
C 1 1- 1-1--1
C ES." I 18 I 18 1 1 A6 I
C I I I-I I
C DIST IPHASE [Link] NAME

DIST (cols. 1-8) is the common length of all cascaded line sections in
kilometers.

?????? ??????
?????? Etc., etc. (to be completed when model ing is available). ??????
?????? As this page is being frozen for printing, ??????
?????? corona is still being developed in Usbon. ??????
?????? ??????
VI. switches - 1

VI. Switches

General

In this chapter, there are three groups of switches to be treated:

a) Stand-alone switches: the switch card alone is enough to specify the
swi tch behaviour. These switches enclose three
classes:
- Time-controlled switch
Voltage-controlled (flashover-controlled)
switch
- Measuring switch
b) Statistical switches: the switch card needs additional statistical
parameters to specify the switch behaviour. These
switches enclose two classes:
- STATISTIC
- SYSTEMATIC
c} TACS-controlled switches: the switch card needs additional TACS control
logic to specify the switch behaviour. Recall that
TACS is the EMTP fldigitally-simulated analog
computer" , as described in section III. These
switches enclose three classes:
- type-ll
- type-12
- type-13
Important special cases of this general component
capability are diodes and valves (as used for ac/dc
conversion). This is explained in section VI.C.

Such switch cards follow the regular EMTP branch cards and precede the EMTP source
cards. If a network involves no such switch components, then the blank card ending
switches immediately follows the blank card ending the branches.

Note that if a case starts from zero initial conditions, no switches are necessary
for connecting voltage and current sources to the network at time zero. provided
the sources remain connected throughout the study.

Switches can be connected quite arbitrarily. although there are a few restrictions:
- Switch currents must be unique: there must be no loop involving closed
switches. This can be circumvented by placing a small resistance in between
two switches in loop or series.
- Kirchhoff's law must not be violated for a loop involving a voltage source
and a switch. For example,a closed switch must not be connected to two nodes
of known voltage (including ground).
Yet such restrictions seem almost never to be a problem for practically-formulated
studies, so the average production user normally will not have to deal with these
restrictions.

There exists an optional printout of steady-state phasor switch flows (both current
and power can be monitored). The integer miscellaneous data parameter KSSOUT (cols
25-32, see section II.B.) continues to control such steady-state output. If such
phasor switch output is requested (KSSOUT positive), it will follow the phasor
branch flows and precede the .injections at nodes of known voltage.
VI. Switches - 2

For any switch which is closed in the steady-state, printed and plotted values
will be correctly assigned for step zero. Also such switch currents at time zero
can be seen from printout which immediately follows the variable heading of the
time-step loop. As an illustration, consider BENCHMARK DC-32 at and immediately
above the printout for step zero:
M5 All, uc. SItCA SICC l\II4 M5 A116 TIIAIIA
CAT1I5 CATS' CAD1 CATB2 CATB3 CA'J'IM CAT1I5 CATS' GDIII
••• I'IIIISOa 1101 -
0.168733OZ+02 SIItTCII"SItCA - TO -CATS2 - CLOSED APTEK [Link] SEC
... I'BA5OIt 1101" 0.2407845Z+01 SIItTCII "AII4 - TO "CA'J'IM " CLOSED APTEK O. oooooZ+OO SEC
I'IIIISOa 1101 -
0.2947680Z+01 SIIITCII -Mi - TO -CATB6 - CLOSED AnEll [Link]+OO SEC
o 0.000000-0.358383Z+01-o.358383Z+01 0.127072Z+02-o.753039Z+02-o.6793471:+02-o.739543Z+02-o.753039Z+02 0.161380Z+03-0.739543Z00
0.770132Z+02 0.1613801:+03 0.7701321:+02 0.6714131:+00-0.819947Z+02 0.806896Z+02-0.679347Z+02 0.7701321+02-0.799739100

The printed "PHASOR I(O}" equals the real part of the complex phasor switch current
of the steady-state display, of course. Such output will be found for any switch
which was closed during the steady-state phasor solution (three of them for this
example). Note that the closing time for these switches are zero.

Finally, it might be usefull to stress following general remarks:

a) rejected configurations

- No switch is permitted between voltage sources or between one voltage source

and ground. Such a condition is absurd, of course, leading to a contradiction.
The program will flag such a situation with an error message.•
- If a switch connects a voltage source to a current source. then the current
source is ignored whenever the switch is closed. This is a logical extellsion
of the general restrictions on the use of sources, as explained in chapter
VII.

b) Remarks on opening action

Following circuit is used to indicate the difficulties which can result during the
opening of a switch in a physically improper model.

0.180
~~--~

V=sillJ.> t (f=60Hz)
..
0.299711

at 60Hz
~--~~
I\-L
221 OO~ F

Assume that both switches (I and II) are closed at t = O. Then a transient current
i(t) will charge the capacitor. Switch II shall open as soon as i(t} is approximately
zero. In the time step in which the opening is signaled (iSW1TCH changing sign for
IE = 0 and lisw1TCHI < IE for IE > 0), there will still be a residual current Ai. through
the inductance L. The next time step, switch II will be open with no path left to
dissipate the rest energy iL(~i)2.

But the problem is even far more fundamental. There will in fact be voltage
oscillations even though the switch opening occurs exactly at a current zero. The
problem is inherent to the trapezoidal rule of integration which is being used.
As a result, the computer cannot find the correct voltage V2(t) anymore (see figure
below) .
VI. Switchea - 3

Voltage

Switch opens when i ... 0

Decreasing "DELTAT" so as to decrease the "rest energy" will D.2.t. solve the problem.

o 0
or

It should be noted that the incapability of the computer is a consequence of

improper modelling.

Solution: 1} By putting a very small fraction of the capacitance over onto the
left side of the switch, a path is provided for dissipating the
rest ~nergy and a solution becomes possible again {see figure
below} •
VI.A. Stand-alone awitchea - 4

Voltage

Switch opens when i ... a

2} Another possible solution is the placement of a damping resistor

across the switch (see DIVIDEDELTAT or MULTIPDELTAT, section
IV.A.3. remark 7). This is illustrated in benchmark DC55.

c) Remarks on delay in closing action oJ ~itches

Except for a complication to be explained shortly, switch closing occurs as one

would expect. When the program prints a message that a. switch is closed after T
seconds, it means that the closing occurs precisely at time t = T. For most cases
then, this is simple.

But a 1-step delay may actually occur in certain cases (e.g. non-linear elements).
A switch closing represents a change in the network; certain conditions (voltages
for example) immediately following the closure may be quite different than those
immediately preceding the closure (t = T-). Ideally. we really should get a network
solution for t = T+ too. Among other things, this would clearly equalize the node
voltages across the switch in question and hence perhaps thereby initiate other
flashovers which should also really be performed at time instant t = T+. But ~
program does not presently perform such extra solutions in the same time step.
Equalization of node voltages for the just-closed switch will only occur as part
of the network solution at time T + 6t. thereby introducing a delay of 6t.

VItA. Stand-alone switches

Switches which are different from diodes. valves or gaps and which do not need
additional data cards to specify the switch behaviour, can be subdivided in following
three classes:
- time-controlled (closing is time-controlled. opening depends on current)
- voltage-controlled (closing depends on voltage, opening depends on
current)
- measuring (always closed)
VI.A. Stand-alone switches - 5

These three classes will be treated next.

VI.A.l Time-controlled switch

This switch (often stated as a breaker pole) is open originally, unless
TCWSE < O. Closing and opening of the switch are controled by time and current.
The switch closes at t = TCWSE and tries to open again at t ~ TOPEN , whenever the
current condition is met. Depending on the value of IE (current margin), this extra
opening condition is different. Possible values are: IE = 0 and IE ,0.

a) IE = 0 (no current margin)

Opening at t ~ TOPEN , as soon as the switch current iSWITCH goes through zero
(changes sign)
isWITCH

isWITCHchonges sign
~

I I

I--.~ " A,.

TOPEN ,,/ Opening will be effective
.A1~~' next time step

Fig 1: Current condition if IE = 0

After a succesfull opening. the switch will stay open. Restrike can not
be simulated using this switch type.

b) IE ~ 0 (current margin set)

Opening at t ~TOPEN' as soon as liswITCHI < IE
iswrrCH

TOPEN
+1:: ---- ----------------------------

-t
.-'
~./ i
. I

-----+--------------------------
Opening will be effective
next time step

Fig 2: Current condition if IE ~ 0

After a succesfull opening, the switch will stay open. Restrike can not
be simulated using this switch type. To model air-blast circuit breakers,
one should specify at least anon-zero current margin.

The card format and parameters are explained below.

VI.A. Stand-alone switches - 6

a) Format

Node Nomes Time Criterio

IE
o
BUS1 BUS2 Tclose Topen "o
A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0

b) Parameters
BUS1. BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of them may be grounded,
which is indicated with a blank field for the associated name.
TCLOSE: Actual time at which the switch will close. Normally, the switch is
open during steady state. Put TCWSE < 0 if switch should be closed during
steady state.
TOPEN : Time before which the switch can not open again. The actual opening time
depends on the extra current condition (cfr. fig 1 & fig 2).
IE: The current margin IE. See also remark 2.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting are punched as
follows:
"1": request for switch current output
"2": request for switch voltage output
"3": request for both switch current and voltage output
"4": request for switch power and energy flow·
'c) Remarks:
1) If transients start from a. non-zero ac steady-state condition, make TCLOSE < 0
for time-controlled switches which should be closed during the ac steady-state
calculation.
2) With IE = 0, the switch will open as soon as iSWITCH changes its sign. Since
the value of the current might be larger in the step where the sign change
is noticed as compared with the value in the preceding step, it is advisable
to use a non-zero current margin (see fig 1 and fig 2. earlier in this
section) .

VI.A.2 voltage-controlled switch

This switch (often stated as a flashover-controlled switch or a. gap) is open
originally. The closing of the switch happens at t ~ TCLOSE, whenever the flashover
voltage VFLASH is reached. After a delay TDELAy , the switch tries to open again.
Opening then will be effective whenever the current condition is met (see
time-controlled switch).
VI.A. Stand-alone switches - 7

WHENEVER CURRENT CONDITION IS MET

______
~ ________
~A~ ~

VOlT....GE
ACROSS SWITCH / OPENS OPENS OPENS"-

• •
• -------} ~HO'JER
VOlT....GE

~HO\IER
VOLTAGE
-vFlAS
---------------+------- ---------+-------
a..OSES a..OSES a..OSES

'~--------~V~--------~/
WHENEVER "swiTCH OIIERSTEPS VnAsH

a) Format

Time Criteria
o~---r----~------.-------~

BUS1 BUS2 Tcl ose "o

A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0

b) Parameters
BUS1, BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of them may be grounded,
which is indicated with a blank field for the associated name.
TCLOSE : Time at or after which the switch will close depending on VFLASH . Before
this time, the switch is prevented from flashing over (see remark 2).
TDELAY: Time after flashover,before which the opening of the switch will not
be allowed. At or after this delay, the switch will open, as soon as the
current condition is met: current margin IE or change of sign of the switch
current (see time-controlled switches).
IE: The opening of the switch appears when the current through the switch
(iSWITCH) oversteps the current marge IE (after delay TDELAY). See also remark
3 for IE = O.
VPLASH : The closing of the swi tchappears when the voltage across the switch
exceeds VFLASH (after time [Link]>.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting are punched as
follows:
"lit: request for switch current output
"2": request for switch voltage output
"3": request for both switch current and voltage output
"4": request for switch power and energy flow
VI.A. Stand-alone switch•• - 8

c) Remarks:
1) In case the voltage across the gap oscillates around the true value (i.e.
an inductance "hanging in the air". as per sketch). this can be avoided by
computing the gap voltage for checking flashover as the average of the last
two time-step figures:
_(V(t)+V(t-M))
Vgap ( t ) 2

2) Flashover-controlled switches will always be open during the ac steady-state

calculation. If the user punches TCLOSE < 0 on this switch type. the program
will change it to TcLOsE = 0 with the message "TcLosE CHANGED TO 0".
3) With IE = O. the switch will open as soon as iSW1TCH changes its sign. Since
the value of the current might be larger in the step where the Sign change
is noticed as compared with the value in the preceding step. it is advisable
to use a non-zero current margin.

VI,A,3 Measuring switch

By definition. a "measuring" switch is permanently closed for all time (including
any phasor steady-state solution for initial conditions). 11; is used for the
monitoring of current or power and energy in places where these quantities are not
otherwise available. This may be for EMTP output purposes (printing or plotting).
or in conjunction with use of the type-91 TACS signal source (see section III-E-3).

To request a measuring switch. the following switch. card is to be used:

I~ IE
rfl~IC ~ ./ r~l~ f·J.~ if I- ~€ ~~ f' ~E r~~~ I' r~~~I( f'f~ r~~~!( ~t '~I~I(
c::
Node Names 2
g
0 MEASURINC :>

BUS1 :>
BUS2 a

A6 A6 I

Parameters
BUS1. BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of them may be grounded.
which is indicated with a blank field for the associated name.
MEASURING: Special request word to specify the measuring switch.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting are punched as
follows:
"1": request for switch current output
tl2": request for switch voltage output
tl3": request for both switch current and voltage output
"4": request for switch power and energy flow
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 9

VI. A. 4 Exam"l e
This example treats each class of stand-alone switches of section VI.A. First,
the cards are shown in the proper format, followed by a verbal explanation.
C 1 2 3 4 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
BUS-1 Bus-2 .001
BUS-3 BUS-4 .0005 .002 .001
GAP-1 GAP-2 .1 1.E6
BUS-5 BUs-6 MEASURING
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CARD 1: Breaker pole lt BUS-llt to "BUS-2" closes at t = 0 and opens after t ~ [Link]
as soon as the current goes through 0 (current margin field IE was left
blank) •
CARD 2: Breaker pole ItBUS-3 1t to ItBus41t closes at t ~ 0.0005s and opens after
t ~ 0.002s as soon as the absolute value of the switch current becomes
smallet than [Link] or goes through O.

CARD 3: Gap "GAP-lit to "GAP-21t closes whenever the voltage across the switch becomes
bigget than 1000000V (indeed: Tclose = blank or zero) and opens as soon as
the absolute value of the switch current becomes smalletthan [Link] or
goes through 0 (indeed: Tdelay = blank or zero) •
CARD 4: Measuring switch "BUS-5 1t to "BUS-6" will be permanently closed.

VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches

In order to perform statistical network studies (e.g. statistical overvoltage

studies, yielding results for coordination of insulation), it is sufficient to
study a network in which at least one switch can have altering opening or closing
times. The resulting physical quantities (e.g. peak voltage, peak current, etc.)
then can be processed statistically. According to the distribution of opening or
closing times, one can distinguish between statistical (probalistic) and systematic
(regular) distribution. .

In case the closing/opening times of a switch change at random, we refer to

this switch as being a STATISTICS switch. In case the closing times of a switch
vary linearly between a given beginning and ending time (fixed number of equidistant
time intervals), such switch is referred to as being a SYSTEMATIC switch.

A data case designed for statistical network studies (Le. containing at least
one STATISTICS or SYSTEMATIC switch), has a peculiar structure:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

miscellaneous data cards (3 cards needed for STATISTICAL/SYSTEMATIC analysis)
branch cards (linear and non-linear elements)
BLANK card ending all branches
switch cards (minimum 1 STATISTICAL/SYSTEMATIC switch)
BLANK card ending all switches
source cards
BLANK card ending all sources
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 10

cards to override initial conditions of the electrical network

output specifications for the base case
BLANK card ending output specifications for the base case
batch-mode plotting specifications for the base case
BLANK card ending batch mode specifications for the base case
output request for statistical tabulation (Sc, cJ,.iJJ~ter XV)
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK card ending all cases

VI.D.l STATISTIC switch

Let us first describe this switch type in general, before going into more
details.

First, one should distinguish between random closing and random opening switches
(flag CLOP)
• Random closing switches (CLOP = blank) are always open initially (Le. during
steady state). They close instantaneous at a random time and will never open
again •
• Random opening switches (CLOP = 3333.) are always closed initially {i.e.
during steady state}. They open after random time and never close again. But
this opening in not necessarily instantaneous. The current criterium (see
current controlled switches; [Link] = 0 or [Link] < IE) should be. met too.
Only when both the time and current criterium are met, opening will take
place. Hence it is quite possible that the switch will never open (e.g. too
small current margin IE)'
The random opening/closing time is to be specified. for each STATISTICS switch
individually, using the average value T and a corresponding standard deviation a.
On the other hand, a tricky alternative (the so-called "TARGET" feature) allows
the user to avoid the keying of the average value T, which then will be the same
for all independent switches. This general value will be set equal to the average
value specified for the "target" switch. But C1 can be different on all independent
switches and hence should be specified on each switch card separately.

Further, one should distinguish between two distribution laws (types of dice)
for the opening/closing time (flags IDIST and ITYPE); Gaussian or uniform dis-
tribution. For Gaussian distribution, in addition, parameter IDICE (see section
II-C-l) controls whether or not. standard random numbers are to be used. Further,
parameter NSEED (see section II-C-l) is important too. Finally, please refer to
section II-C-3 for more details on how to perform dice [Link] without actually
performing the corresponding network energizations.
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 11

~~ f(T)

b T
~
~
+

F(T)
1.0

0.5

T T

fig 1 Gaussian distribution fig 2 Uniform distribution

f(t} = distribution f(t} = distribution
F(t} = cumulative distribution F(t} = cumulative distribution

Two different situations can exist, depending on the fact whether all switches
will follow the same distribution law or that different switches will follow
different distribution laws:

a} all statistic switches follow the same distribution law:

• Put miscellaneous statistics parameter IDIST (see section II-C-l)
IDIST = 0 : Gaussian distribution
= 1 : Uniform distribution
Put ITYPE = 0 on all "statistics" switch cards

b) some switches should follow Gaussian, other switches should follow uniform
distribution :
• Put IDIST = 0 (miscellaneous statistics parameter, see section II-C-l)
• Put ITYPE = 0 for those switches that follow Gaussian distribution and
ITYPE = 76 for those switches that follow uniform distribution

Finally. one should distinguish between independent and dependent statistical

switches (flags BUS5 and BUS6).
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 12

• for independent statistical switches. the random opening/closing time of one

switch does not influence the random opening/closing time of another switch.
BUS5 and BUS6 are left blank •
• for dependent statistical switches, the random opening/closing time of one
switch (master) does influence the random opening/closing time of another
switch (slave). The BUS5-field on the slave switch refers to the BUS1-field
of the master switch. Similarly. BUS6 refers to the BUS2-field.
"A"
~ (master)
o~----~· 0

O>---_ _"_B~"~ (s lave)

where:

T: 1D•• = previously-determined closing time of another "STATISTICS" switch

(master), labeled here as switch "A". Note that this is a random
variable, not a constant.
T~..nd"'" = random time delay having an average time f, and a standard deviation
0, (parameters as punches on the data card for switch "B").

Remark that the use of dependence only affects the average closing time T. No
efects can be made on the standard deviation o. Finally note that this dependency
character of the "STATISTICS" switch is not limited to two switches. The EMTP
allows an arbitrary number of such dependencies and an arbitrary number of levels
of servitude are permitted.

In addi tion to the random opening/closing time (which can be specified for
each statistical switch individually). one can add an extra random delay, applicable
to all statistic switches, all opening switches or all closing switches (depending
on parameter ITEST - see section II-C-l):
ITEST = 0: extra random delay applicable to all statistics switches
= 1: no extra random delay applicable to any statistics. switches
= 2: extra random delay applicable only to random closing switches
= 3: extra random delay applicable only to random. opening switches
Unlike the random opening/closing time (which can be either Gaussian or uniform
distributed). this extra random delay always follows a uniform distribution. This
extra random delay is expressed in degrees, based on power frequency STATFR (cfr.
STARTUP file). Relevant parameters are DEGMIN and DEGMAX.

Finally, the STARTUP variable NENERG (positive for STATISTICS studies) defines
the number of energizations (number of shots). If the number of shots is too low.
statistical postprocessing of peak voltages will be meaningless. The adviced minimum
value for NENERG = 30.
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 13

Let us now discuss the random closing and random opening STATISTICS switch in
more detail. Finally. some illustrative examples will be given.
a) Random closing "STATISTICS" switch (CLOP = blank)
Format:
Following card format is to be used

BUS1 BUS2
BUS5 BUS6

A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 BLANK A6 A6

Parameters:
ITYPE: Together with IDIST (miscellaneous data parameter), ITYPE can be used
to select between a Gaussian (normal) or a uniform distribution of the
switch closing times. Either zero (blank) or "76" are allowed.

ITYPE IDIST Distribution

"0" or blank "1" Uniform
"0" Gaussian
"76" Uniform

Whenever all switches use the same distribution. it is recommended to leave

ITYPE zero or blank and specify IDIST (miscellaneous parameter). On the
other hand. when not all switches use the same distribution. the user is
advised to specify ITYPE at each switch card and punch only a zero for
IDIST.
BUSl. BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of these nodes may be
grounded. indicated by a blank field for the associated name.
T: If the .switch is independent (cols 65-76 blank) or if the switch is a
"target" switch (cols 65-70= 'TARGET'. cols 71-76 blank).T is the average
switch closing time (in seconds). If the switch is dependent. T of the
slave switch then is the average slave closing delay (in seconds) to be
added to the average closing time of the master switch. See introduction
to point VI.B.l. For valid average switching times. also see the remark.
applicable to both random opening as well as random closing STATISTICAL
switches.
a: If the switch is independent or if it is a "target" switch. a is the standard
deviation (in seconds) of the switch closing time. If the switch is
dependent. a for the slave switch is the standard deviation (in seconds)
of the slave closing delay. See introduction to point VI.B.l. For valid
values of a, also seethe remark applicable to both random opening as well
as random closing STATISTICAL switches.
STATISTICS: Special request word to indicate a STATISTICS switch.
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 14

TARGET or BUS5: If the switch is chosen to be a target, the special request

word "TARGET" has to be punched in this field. Only one such target swi tch
is allowed for the entire network. When the switch is independent and no
target, this field has to be left blank. Finally, when the switch is
dependent, BUS5 of the slave switch should refer to BUSl of the master
switch.
Bus6: If the switch is dependent, the second node name of the master switch
has to be punched in this field (BUS6). If the switch is independent and/or
a target switch, this field has to be left blank.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
'2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow
b) Random opening "STATISTICS" switch (CLOP = 3333.)
Format:

BUS1 BUS2 :::I

BUSS BUS6 o

A6 A6 El0.0 El0.0 3333 A6 A6

Parameters:
ITYPE: Together with IDIST (miscellaneous data parameter), ITYPE can be used
to choose between a Gaussian. (normal) or a uniform distribution. Either
zero (blank) or "76" are al:;Lowed (see following table).

ITYPE IDIST Distribution

"0" or blank "1" Uniform
• "0" Gaussian
"76" Uniform

Whenever all switches use the same distribution, it is recommended to leave

ITYPE zero or blank and specify IDIST (miscellaneous parameter). On the
other hand, when not all switches use the same distribution, the user is
advised to specify ITYPE at each switch card and punch only a zero for
IDIST.
BUS1 , BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of these nodes may be
grounded, indicated by a blank field for the associated name. •
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 15

T: If the switch is independent (cols 65-76 blank) or if the switch is a

"target" switch (cols 65..;70 = 'TARGET'. cols 71-76 blank) • T is the average
switch opening time (in .seconds). If the switch is dependent. T of the
slave switch then is the average slave opening delay (in seconds) to be
added to the average opening time of the master switch. See introduction
to point VI.B.l. For valid average switching times. also see the remark.
applicable to both random opening as well as random closing STATISTICAL
switches.
a: If the switch is independent or if it is a "target" switch. a is the standard
deviation (in seconds) of the switch opening time. If the switch is
dependent. C1 for the slave switch is the standard deviation (in seconds)
of the slave opening delay. See introduction to point VI.B.1. For valid
values of a, also see the remark. applicable to both random opening as
well as random clOSing STATISTICAL switches.
IE: When this current margin is unequal to zero (but positive). the random
opening switch would open after the normal opening (specified by the average
opening time and eventually extra opening delay applicable to all statistics
switches). as soon as the switch current becomes smaller then the current
margin. If the switch current never becomes smaller then the current margin,
the switch will never open.
3333.: This numerical flag indicates that the switch to be simulated is a
random OPENING switch.
STATISTICS: Special request word to indicate a STATISTICS switch.
TARGET or BUSS: If the switch is chosen to be a target. the special request
word "TARGET" has to be punched in this field. Only one such target switch
is allowed for the entire network. When the switch is independent and no
target. this field has to be left blank. Finally. when the switch is
dependent, BUSS of the slave switch should refer to BUSl of the master
switch.
BUS6: If the switch is dependent, the second node name of the target switch
has to be punched in this field (BUS6). If the switch is independent and/or
a target. this field has to be left blank.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
, 2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
, 4 ': switch power and energy flow
Remark (for both random opening as well as random closing STATIS-
TICAL switches:
t
The user must be carefull when specifying the average closing/opening time. The
resulting closing/opening time must be positive. because a negative time in an
EMTP simulation corresponds to the sinusoidal steady-state solution. Recall
that it is not possible for EMTP to perform switching events during steady-state.
To avoid such problems. there isa restriction which can be made upon data
input, namely T-SIGMAX*a must be positive. In this equation. SIGMA){ is a
constant which depends upon the distribution type. A fatal error termination
is the result if this check is not satisfied for all "STATISTICS" switches.
- For a Gaussian distribution. this check ensures that any particular switch
closing/opening time has a low probability, that it will be negative. Moreover,
for Gaussian distributions. SIGMAX can be specified in the STARTUP file (see
table below).
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 16

SIGMAX probability for negative closing/opening time

1.04 15%
2.05 2%
3.09 0.1%
4 < 0.005%
- For a uniform distribution, a value of .[3 guarantees that all switch
closing/opening times will always be positive. For uniform [Link],
SIGMAX is fixed to .[3. It can not be reset in the STARTUP file.
- For dependent switches in which Gaussian and uniform distribution offsets are
mixed, the "SIGMAX" value from the STARTUP file is applicable to all the
"Gaussian" components, whereas .[3 is used on all "uniform." components.

c) Example of STATISTIC switches

The following example will show the use of statistical switches. First. the
card formats are treated, followed by some verbal explanations.
C 1 234 567 &
c 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
JDAYGAJDAYA .002 .0004 STATISTICS
BS BSW .004.0005 STATISTICS TARGET
DS DSW .006.0002 STATISTICSAS ASW
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CARD' 1: "STATISTICS" switch connecting node "JDAYGA" to node "JDAYA" has an average
clOSing time of 2.0 ms and an associated [Link] deviation of 0.4 ms.
Assuming that statistics miscellaneous parameter "IDIST" is zero, the
probabilistic distribution will be Gaussian (normal). This assumes that
there is no "TARGET" statistics switch in the data case {unlike this
example} .

CARD 2: "STATISTICS" switch connecting node "BS" to node "BSW" i.s the ttTARGET"
switch for the data case in question. All non-dependent "STATISTICS"
swi tches of the data case will have the same average closing time of 4.0 ms.
In other words, the information which is punched in columns 15-24 {T} of
all non-dependent "STATISTICS" switches is over-ridden by the value for
the present "TARGET" switch. The standard deviation of the closing time
for this "TARGET tt switch is 0.5 ms.
tt
CARD 3: The switch connecting node "OS" to node "OSW" is a dependent ttSTATISTICS
tt
switch. Its reference switch is the one connencting node "JOAYGA to node
"JOAYA tt . Note that the reference switch must have been previously specified.
The closing time of the present switch is delayed from that of its reference
by a random delay time which has an average of 6.0 ms and a standard
deviation of 0.2 ms.

VI.B.2 SYSTEMATIC switch

Let us first describe this switch type in general, before going into more
details.
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 17

Unlike STATISTICS switches, SYSTEMATIC switches are always open initially {i. e •
during steady state}. Each .systematic switch has its closing time systematically
(regularly) varied between a given beginning and ending time, in steps which are
uniformly spaced. The switch closing is instantaneous and permanent (meaning the
switch will not open again).

The time span is to be specified for each SYSTEMATIC switch individually. using
the beginning time Tbeg or mid-time [Link] (depending on ITEST. see section II-C-2).
time incrementINCT as well as number of equidistant time intervals NSTEP. On the
other hand, a tricky alternative (the so-called "TARGET" feature) allows the user
to avoid the keying of Tbeg/Tmidt which then will be the same for all independent
switches. This general value will be set equal to the Tbeg/Tllid value specified for
the "TARGET"switch. But the time increment INCT and the number of equidistant
time intervals NSTEP can be different on all independent switches and hence should
be specified on each switch card separately.
Finally, one should distinguish between independent and dependent SYSTEMATIC
switches (flags BUS5 and BUS6) •
. for independent .systematic switches, the regularly varying closing times
of one switch do not influence the regularly varying closing times of
another switch. BUS5 and Bus6 are blank.
Adding an independent systematic switch augments the dimensionality of
the vector space of switch closing times which is to be systematically
explored. The number of energizations is increased by a factor ttNSTEP"
(see remarks under ttIndependent SYSTEMATIC switches") •
• for dependent systematic switches, the regularly varying closing time
of the master switch does affect the closing time of the slave switch.
The BUS5-field of the slave switch should refer to the BUS1-field of
the master switch. Similarly, .BUS6 refers to the BUS2-field. Adding a
dependent systematic switch does not increase the dimensionality of the
vector space of switch closing times which is to be systematically
explored.
The closing time of a dependent "SYSTEMATIC tt switch ttBtt can be subdevided
in two elements. The first element is the closing time of the master
switch ttAtl • The second element is an offset by a fixed amount from the
closing time of the reference switch "B".

T: ,.... = T:,.... + T:. ,ay

Here T:"ay is a constant time which is the same for all energizations
(and should be specified on the switch card of the dependent systematic
switch). Remark that the dependency is not limited to two .switches. The
EMTP allows an arbitrary number of such dependencies and an arbitrary
number of levels of servitude are permitted.

Finally, the absolute value of the STARTUP variable NENERG (negative for
Systematic stUdies) defines the total number of energizations (number of shots).
It should be equal to the product of all NSTEP values of all independent systematic
switches.

Let us now discuss the independent and dependent systematic switch in more
detail. Finally, also some illustrative examples will be given.
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 18

a) Independent SYSTEMATIC switch

Format:

Node Names
w Tbeg
~
or INCT NSTEP or
~ BUS1 BUS2 Tmid BLANK "
o

A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 A6

Parameters:
ITYPE: The "SYSTEMATIC" switch type code always is zero. This field may also
be left blank.
BUS1, BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of these nodes may be
grounded, indicated by a blank field for the associated name.
Tbeg or Talid: Depending on the miscellaneous parameter "ITFST" (see section
II-C-2) the beginning time or the mid time (both in seconds) are to be
punched. See also next table:
ITEST col 15-24 punch
0 Tlllid
1 Tbeg

beg Tmid

tlose
...
Tl T2 T3 T4 TS T6
'-v---I
/::,.T
tIIJ!I# NSTEP = 6

In case of target switch usage, this field can be left blank. Please refer
to the remarks 1 and 2 for more details.
INCT: For each non-dependent "SYSTEMATIC" switch. the. size of the time increments
&' (in seconds) is to be punched in this field.
NSTEP: This field contains the number of time increments for the non-dependent
"SYSTEMATIC" switch. For a relation between NSTEP and INENERGI. please refer
to remark 3.
SYSTEMATIC: Special request word to indicate a SYSTEMATIC switch.
TARGET: If an independent switch is chosen to be a "target". the special request
word "TARGET" has to be punched in this field (see remark 1). When the
switch is independent and no target. this field has to be left blank.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 19

'1': switch current

'2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow
Remarks:
1) Any non-dependent "SYSTEMATIC" switch can be designated as a "TARGET" switch.
Only one such designation is permitted per data case. The effect is that
all other non-dependent "SYSTEMATIC" switches will be internally given
mid-times or beginning times which are equal to that of the "TARGET" switch.
2) The use of "TARGET" only affects the mid or the beginning time, not the
time increment INCT, nor the number of steps NSTEP.
3) The user is warned about the potentially enormous number of energizations
which can be involved in a SYSTEMATIC data case. As an example, consider
a data case which has three independent SYSTEMATIC switches. Then one can
think of the internally-generated energizations as being a methodical
exploration of a rectangular region of the 3-dimensional vector space of
switch closing times (see sketch below). For example, if switch "A" were
to take 5 steps, switch "B" 3 steps and switch "C" 4 steps, then a total
of INENERGI = 60 = 5x4x3 energizations would be internally generated by the
EMTP.

NENERG = -5.4.3
"fclose

-------------~---------~
/ /1 /1
t; T~/{ / 1 1 /
/ /
/ 1 NO
1
= 5/ / 1
1
~-- ---->I
/1/
/1 / C
N /'11
f--J-~-- ------~~-T--r-, /
1 1/ / 1
1 ~---- -----~-+--~~~ 1
1 /1 1
1/ 1
f--4----
1 1
------~~~~~~ N~ = 3 I
1 1 llT~
1 1
1 1
1 1 1 / /
1 1 1 / / ~Iose
Ill-rtl 1 1 / 1 1 /
I I 1/ 1 1/
1
I
-----------r--r-----,--7
1 / 1 /
______________ L1/ 1/
________ - f

~Iose

b) Dependent SYSTEMATIC switch

Format:
VI.B. Statistic and systematic switches - 20

Node Names
w
Cl.. TDELAY
~ BUS1 BUS2 :I
0

A6 A6 E10.0 A6 A6

Parameters:
ITYPE: The "SYSTEMATIC" switch type code always is zero. This field may also
be left blank.
BUSl. BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of these nodes may be
grounded. indicated by a blank field for the associated name.
TDELAY: Constant delay time (in seconds) with respect to its "master" switch.
applicable to the considered "slave" switch. The master switch is refered
to via parameters BUS5 and Bus6.
SYSTEMATIC: Special request word to indicate a SYSTEMATIC switch.
BUS5: BUS5 of the "slave" switch should refer to BUSl of the. "master" switch.
Bus6: Bus6 of the "slave" switch should refer to BUS2 of the "master" switch.
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
'2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow
Remarks:
Adding dependent switches does not augment the demensionality of the problem.
since TDELAY of a "slave" switch is a constant value for all energizations
(see also the introduction to point VI.B.2).

c) Examples of SYSTEMATIC switches:

The following example will show the use of SYSTEMATIC switches. First. the
card formats are treated. followed by some verbal explanations.
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
AS ASW .003 .0001 12. SYSTEMATIC
CS CSW .002 .0001 8. SYSTEMATICTARGET
ES ESW -.005 SYSTEMATICCS CSW
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CARD 1: Non-dependent "SYSTEMATIC" switch connecting node "AS" to node "ASW". The
mid-closing time is 3. Oms, assuming "ITEST" is zero and that the data case
in question has no "TARGET" switch (unlike the situation presented here).
The closing time of the switch is to be varied in steps of size [Link]. 12
steps are to be taken.
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 21

CARD 2: "SYSTEMATIC" switch connecting node "CS" to node "CSW" is the "TARGET"
switch for the data case. All non-dependent "SYSTEMATIC" switches of the
data case have the same mid-closing time of [Link] (if "ITFST" is zero) or
the same beginning closing time of [Link] (if "ITFST" is unity). The
information of columns 15-24 (Tbeg or Taid) on all other non-dependent
"SYSTEMATIC" switch cards is over-ridden by the value on the "TARGET"
switch card (that now being discussed). The closing time of this switch
is to be varied through 8 steps. the step size is [Link].

CARD 3: The switch connecting node "ES" with node "ESW" is a dependent "SYSTEMATIC"
switch. Its reference switch is the one which connects node "CS" to node
"CSW". The closing time of the present switch is offset (delayed) from
that of its reference by a constant offset time of -5.0ms. In other words.
the present switch will always close [Link] before closure of the reference
switch.

[Link]-coDtrolled switches

VI.C.I Type-II switch for diode and valve appljcation

This type of switch is used to simulate a switch which may be simultaneously
controlled by any given TACS variable while following the simple opening/closing
rules of a standard diode. Such a TACS variable can be used as:
- a grid firing signal
- an overriding OPEN/CLOSE signal
This type-ll switch may thus represent any of the following:

1st 2nd
NODE O---"~_"'I!----o NODE

"GRID"
Firing signol

1st . 2nd
NODE 0 --t'
I
0 NODE
TACS-CONTROLLED
OPENING/CLOSING "SIGNAL"

Any combination of these three modes can represent a switch. in which case
either or both grid signal and overriding signal can simultaneously be active.
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 22

a) Format

NODE NAMES
Vig Ihold tDEION
11 OPEN/
BUS1 BUS2 (in sec.) CLOSE :>
0
A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 A6 A6 I I

b) Parameters
11: Number to indicate a type-ll switch for diode and valve applications.
BUS1. BUS2: Terminal node names of the swi tch. One of the nodes may be grounded.
indicated by a blank. field name. The direction of the current is taken to
be from "BUS1" to "BUS2". In other words. for both valve and diode. we
have
anode : always "BUS1"
cathode : always "BUS2"
Vis: Minimum ignation voltage. The meaning of this parameter in the opening
and closing of the switch is explained in the following section.
I HoLD : Minimum holding current. The meaning of this parameter in the opening
and closing of the switch is explained in the following section.
tDEION: De-ionization time. The meaning of this parameter in the opening and
closing of the switch is explained in the following section.
CLOSED: The switch may be specified as closed during the program-calculated
steady-state initialization. if the user punches the keyword "CLOSED".
SAME: When data for the parametric fields have to be repeated on one ore more
cards. the keyword "SAME" should be used on these cards. immediately
following the card bearing the definition of these parameters.
GRID. OPEN/CLOSE: These alphanumeric names correspond with the names of the
associated TACS variable. Next section explains the opening/closing results
on actions of the GRID and OPEN/CLOSE variables on the diode or valve,
depending on Vis' I HoLD and tDEION'
ECHO: The user may obtain a printed echo of the occurrence of all opening and
closing operations of the switch, by punching a '1' in this field. No such
diagnostic will be printed if this field is. punched with a '0' or left
blank
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
'2': switch voltage
'3': both [Link] current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow

c) Opening and closing actions as a result of the GRID and

OPEN/CLOSE signals
c.l) The GRID and the OPEN/CLOSE signal are not applied (no TACS control)
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 23

---: theoretical
- : simplified

~
ANODE 0 ~ ~I 0 CATHODE
I Vra\ed \jg
I reyerse blocking
I region
I
- The switch acts as a DIODE.
- When the forward voltage across the terminals becomes greater than Vig. than
the diode starts conducting.
- As soon as the forward current through the switch becomes smaller than I HoLD •
than the diode ceases conducting.
- Restrictions of this simplified model:
operation below reverse blocking region can not be simulated
. heat sink requirements and actual design can not be simulated

c.2) The GRID signal only is applied

,On-state
I off\von .
........ if 'G applied
_\ _I Off-slot.

"'II vol<

- The switch acts as a thyristor valve

- The closing of the valve will take place if following two contitions are
fulfilled:
. the forward voltage across the terminals becomes greater than Vig
• the value of the gate current GRID becomes positive.
- Once the device begins to conduct. it behaves as a diode. The gate signal
even can be removed. The thyristor can not be turned off by the gate.
- Similar to the diode. the valve ceases conducting as soon as the forward
current through the switch becomes smaller than I~LD'
- As opposed to the diode. reclosing of the switch will be immediate if and
only if the forward voltage becomes greater than Vig within the de-ionization
time tDEION following a previous opening. In such case. the gate current GRID
has no importance. Such premature reclosing could damage the thyristor in
real-life situations.
- The grid signal can not regain control on the closing before time tDElON
following a previous opening. Only after time tDEION. normal GRID control
becomes effective again.

c.3) The OPEN!CL~)E signal is BPecified (the switch acts not as a diode neither
as a varve)
on
v
~
I ,
off
BUS1 ~----<> BUS2
v
TACS - CONTROLLED
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 24

- The switch is purely TACS-controlled. It can be used successfully to model

BJT's. MOSFET's. GTO's and IGBT's. This effect can also be obtained using
the type-13 switch.
- A positive OPEN/CLOSE signal will result in an immediate closing of the
switch and this will remain closed as long as this positive signal is active.
It can conduct arbitrary large currents with zero voltage drops.
- A negative OPEN/CLOSE signal will result in an immediate opening of the
switch (irrespective the instantaneous current flow) and this will remain
open as long as this negative signal is active. It can block arbitrary large
forward and reverse voltages with zero current flow.
- The change OPEN/CLOSE and CLOSE/OPEN is assumed to be instantaneously when
triggered. The trigger power requirement is assumed negligable.
- A zero OPEN/CLOSE signal of course will result in the regular diode or valve
operating mode.

d) Example
Following example shows the use of the type-11 switch. First the format is
shown for several cases, whereafter a verbal explanation can be found.
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
11L2 R2 CLOSED
11LEFT RIGHT FIRE2 1
11HOD£1 HODE2 ORDER
11L6 R6 DELAY TRIG
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CARD 1: Diode from node "L2" to "R2". conducting in steady state.

CARD 2: Thyristor valve from "LEFT" to "RIGlIT", with "FIRE2" as grid signal which
is received from a TACS variable. Every change of status will be echoed
in the printout ('1' punched in column 79).
CARD 3: TACS-controlled switch from "NODE1" to "NODE2", operating as a diode when
"ORDER" has the value "0.0". A positive value of "ORDER" will result in
an immediate closing of the switch. It will remain closed as long as this
positive signal is active. A negative value for "ORDER" will result in an
immediate opening of the switch. It then will remain open as long as this
negative Signal is active. The change OPEN/CLOSE and CLOSE/OPEN is assumed
to be instantaneous.
CARD 4: Valve from "L6" to "R6", with the grid signal "DELAY", with its operation
overriden by the TACS-variable "TRIG" during the periods in which the value
of "TRIG" is different from zero.

VI.C.2 TYDe-12 switch for sDark gap and triac application

This type of switch is used to simulate a spark gap or triac with firing
controlled by a TACS variable.
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 2S

a) Format

IE
H ~! 'E Ie
NODE NAMES TACS NAMES ~
Ie
Ihold CLOSED
BUS1 BUS2 SPARK CLAMP ~
~
A6 A6 E10.0 E10.0 A6 A6 I I

b) Parameters
12: Flag for spark gap and triac applications.
BUS1, BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of the nodes may be grounded,
indicated by a blank field name. See also remark 1.
Vi~: Minimum ignationvoltage. See point c for more details on the usage.
IHoLD:Minimum holding current. See point c for more details on the usage.
CLOSED: The switch may be specified as closed during the program-calculated
steady-state initialization, if the user punches the keyword "CLOSED".
Otherwise, the switch will be assumed open during steady-state.
SPARK, CLAMP: These alphanumeric names correspond with the names of the
associated TACS variables. Point c explains the opening/closing actions
of the triac depend on variables SPARK , CLAMP, Vi~ and I HOLD •
ECHO: The user may obtain a printed echo of the occurrence of all opening and
closing operations of the switch, by punching a '1' in this field. No such
messages will be printed if this field is punched with a '0' or left blank
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
'2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow
c) Opening and [Link] actions as a resul. t of the SPARK and CLAMP
signals

The CLAMP signal:

- If the CLAMP signal is undefined, the opening and closing of the switch than
depends on the SPARK signal.
- If the CLAMP signal is defined, there are three possibilities:
a) 0 opening and closing of the switch depends on the SPARK signal
b) <0 if the switch was closed, it will OPEN
if the switch was open, it remains OPEN
c} >0 if the switch was closed, it remains CLOSE
if the switch was open, it will CLOSE

The SPARK signal:

If the SPARK signal is undefined, the switch remains open.
If the SPARK signal is defined, there are two possibilities:
a) ~ : if the switch was open, it will remain open
if the swi tch was closed, it depends on I HoLD :
Iii ~ I HoLD : the swi tch remain CLOSED
VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 26

Iii < I HOLD : the swi tch will OPEN

b) >0 if the switch was open, it depends on Vi~:
!vi < Vi~ : the swi tch remains OPEN
!vi 2: Vi~ : the swi tch will CLOSE
if the switch was closed, it remains CLOSED

Following table shows some grafics of results on opening and closing actions
of the type-12 [Link]:

If switch CLAMP <0

was .... ------~ ,;--_... _-....... ,

/' ~
already I
I
" ",
,
I
closed f
I
I
\
\
\
-- ,
I

1
f I

\
I I \

1
I I \
I \

I
I
I
I
I \
,
.
/
/

SPARK
/
/
", -

If switch CLAMP > 0

was --_._- ....... , /

A
\
,,------- ... ,
already ( ", iswrrCH < lhoid

( '\
/

",,
open

~AAK
It
~
11 \
\
\
I

)
) i SPARK
\ ) 1
I
\
\
\
\
,
", -
Depending on SPARK

CLAMP Undefined or zero <0 >0

VI.C. TACS-controlled switches - 27

ti~hold
/~-------"'"

I
/ , \

,,
I \
\
I

I
I \
\ ,
/
I
I
\
,,
/

If lil<I ho1d "" .... --........ ,---- ...

switch /' ',iswrT'CH <~ / ' , ,~<"""
was ,/ \' _;"-'>0
~
y
already
s1 \
I

\
I
I I
I I

closed -"
/
,- /

tvt<Vign
"'""
--/1'---'" y 'swrrcH <.....

)~L \
If tv~Vign
switch --- 1---" y ''''''"''"< .....
was
already f\ f\ "'""
) .,- \
open ) \ ) \
SPARK Undefined g) >0

VI. C. 3 TYDe-13 simDleTACS-controlled switch

This type is used to represent a switch which is controlled by any given TACS
variable. It is a special case of the type-ll TACS-controlled switch.

a) Format

IE F
fL~C IC f~i~ iL IE Ie ~ f: ;E 1< :EI~ l'IE Ie I~ IE .~ l' ,E tE
TACS
NODE NAMES
OPEN!
I
BUSl BUS2
, CLOSED
CLOSE ~ci
SIGNAL
A6 A6 A6 A6 I I

b) Parameters
13: Number to indicate a type-13 simple TACS-controlled switch.
BUS1, BUS2: Terminal node names of the switch. One of the nodes may be grounded,
indicated by a blank field name.
CLOSED: The switch may be specified as closed during the program-calculated
steady-state initialization, if the user punches the keyword "CLOSED".
VI.C. TACS-eontro11ed switches - 28

OPEN/CLOSE: This alphanumeric name correspond with the name of the associated
TACS variable. Next section explains the opening/closing results on actions
of the OPEN/CLOSE variable on the switch.
ECHO: The user may obtain a printed echo of the occurrence of all opening and
closing operations of the switch, by punching a '1' in this field. No such
diagnostic will be printed if this field is punched with a '0' or left
blank
OUTPUT OPTION: Output options for printing and/or plotting can be obtained by
the following punches:
'1': switch current
'2': switch voltage
'3': both switch current and voltage
'4': switch power and energy flow

c) Opening and closing actions as a result of the OPEN/CLOSE sig-

nal
There are only two cases which influence the opening or closing of the switch.
The OPEN/CLOSE signal can be:
- s) the swi tch will then always be OPEN
- >0 : the switch will then always be CLOSED

d) Example
Following example shows the use of the type-12 switch. First the format is
shown for several cases, whereafter a. verbal explanation can be found.
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
13LEFT RIGHT ORDER
13HODE1 CLOSED SIC 1
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CARD 1: Switch form node "LEFT" to node "RIGHT" controlled by the TACS variable
"ORDER".

CARD 2: Switch from node "NODE1" to ground controlled by the TACS variable "SlOtt
and closed at t S 0.0. Every change of status will be echoed in the printout.
VII. Static electric network sources - 1

VII. Static electric network sources

VII.A. General

- Sources usually have just two terminals and one of these must be ground. Therefore,
most source types only have to be specified by one node-name.
But also ungrounded sources exist. For current sources, this is trivial, since
a current source connected between two nodes is equivalent to two current sources,
each of which have one end grounded. The two replacement sources then should
have equal amplitudes but opposite signs (one source injects current, the other
extracts it). But ungrounded voltage sources are more involved: a special type-18
source had to be created.
- Further, one can distinguish between current sources and voltage sources.
- Following rules apply to nodes where different sources are active at the same
time:
- when several voltage sources are active on the same node, all such source
influences will be added.
- when several current sources are active on the same node, all such source
influences will be added.
- in case both current and voltage sources are active on the same node, only
the voltage source influence is taken into account. The current source
influence is not taken into account.
- Sources can be subdivided in two distinct groups: static and dynamic sources.
- the group of static sources containes following types:
- empirical functions, defined point by point: type-i
- analytical functions: type-ii = step function
type-12 = ramp function
type-13 = 2-slope ramp
type-14 = cosine or trapped charge
type-15 = surge function or renewed surge function
type-16 = simplified ac/dc converter model
type-18 = ideal transformer or ungrounded voltage
source
- TACS-controlled functions: type-17 = TACS modulation
type-60 = connection to TACS variable
- the group of dynamic electrical sources contains:
- dynamic rotating machine models: type-19 = universal machine
type-59 = synchronous machine
This chapter VII will deal with all static electrical sources. The dynamic
electrical sources will be discussed in later chapters: chapter VIII deals with
the dynamic synchronous machine model, whereas chapter IX will deal with the dynamic
universal machine model.
As far as static electrical sources are of concern, only type-14, type-16 and
type-18 in combination with type-14 sources are taken into account during
steady-state, provided TSTART is specified negative on the source card. All other
source types are zeroed during steady-state.
For the dynamic electrical sources. steady-state ini tial values can be specified
by the user or such values can be calculated automatically. We refer to chapter
VIII and IX for further details regarding special rules to be applied.
VII. Static electric network source. - 2

Unless explicitely dictate. otherwise, the program user is strongly advised to

define all sources in unsealed units: [volts] for voltage sources, [amperes] for
current sources. Although, this is not mandatory, it is believed to be clearer and
easier in the long run.

VII.B. Static empirical sources

1 TYPE-l: EMPIRICAL FUNCTIONS

The empirical function has a total random shape depending on the users
requirements. The user can define this function point by point at each time step.
This function is assumed to have zero value during steady-state. To specify a
type-l source, the user needs to specify the function point by point at each time
step, in addition to the normal type-l source card.
f(t)
01\
0.4
• e1j
·1~"'\
, \
,, \

,,,
\
0.2 \
\
\
"12e I \-'IQ
: .... -'11

0.0
"13 : """14
0.02
"'2.
0.2 0.14

°1\3
t
seconds' 100"

-0.2
.,:
-0.4

l.a. Type-l source definition card:

The definition card for type 1 is located, just like other source-types, after
the blank card ending the swi tch cards and before the blank card ending the source
cards. The following format applies for a type-l source:

~~!~H~~~ I~: :HH!lH~~~,~

1 I" I": If
~~ Ie . ~ r!~ ~I e ~~ Ie ~( I ,~~ 1~1 r! Ie
w
a.. NAME S TSTART TSTOP
~
,
I:; A6 12 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters :

ITYPE: Numbers 1 to 9 are permitted to specify type-l sources.• Identification

of the source with its values (point 1.b) is not via. value ITYPE, but via
sequence of input.
NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer (tI_l t1 ) : current source
VII. Static electric network sources - 3

TSTART:Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART

is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART), the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic. See
also remark 2.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic. See also remark 2.
l.b. Type-l function value specification card:
In contrast with the type-1source definition card, the fuction value spec-
ification cards are located after the output request card Or the blank card ending
this output request card. Furthermore, this card is located before the printer or
calcomp plot request. All the values are placed in the following format:

'1<1+3
EB.O EBoO EBoO EBoO EBoO EBoO EB.O EBoO EBoO EBoO

Parameters:

Vki •• Vki+9: These are the source values (current or voltage) for the k-th
time-step on the i, i+1, .•• , i+9-th source. The source sequence is defined
by the sequence of apprearance of the different type-1 source definition
cards rather than by the type-code (value 1 to 9).
If there is a time-step beyond which all source functions are identical to
zero, such input cards can be terminated by a 9999-card (keyed in columns 5-8).
For each new time step, one needs a new card or card grouping to specify the
function values for all type-1 sources at that time step. Per card there are 10
fields, which means that there can be specified the values of 10 sources on that
card. If there are more then 10 type-1 sources, 2 or more cards are needed per
time step. The number of cards (card grouping) equals the number of time steps.
This can be calculated by deviding '!'MAX (miscellaneous data card) by DELTAT
(miscellaneous data card).
Remark:
1) Beware that, in contrast with other source types, there is no time shift
of the type-l function when using TSTART.
2) If TSTART is in use, all the specified source values between time = 0 and
time = TSTART (excluding time TSTART) are set to zero value. If TSTOP is
in use, all the specified source values after time = TSTOP (including time
TSTOP) are set to zero value. All the specified values between TSTART and
TSTOP are unchanged.
VII. Static electric network soyrees - 4

1.c. Example:
Next example shows the place of the cards and the values of the sources in
these cards.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
1.0 20. {Time interval: (O.O, 20.) seconds: time-step: 1.0 second
1 1
VALUE 1.0
VALUE2 1.0
BLANK card enda branch cards
BLANK card ends switch cards (none, for this case)
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
lVALUE {First type 1-10 souree } 4.001 12.0
lVALUE2 {Second type 1-10 souree}
BLANK card enda aouree carda
VALUE VALUE2 (OUtput request on nodea VALUE, VALUE2
BLANK card ends requeats for program outputs (here., just node voltages)
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
4. 3. (First column for node: VALUE
1. 0.0 (Second column for node: VALUE2
0.0 -1.
-1.6 -2.6
-.2 -1.2
-0.7 -1.7
-.4 -1.4
2.9 1.9
3.41 2.41
.850 -.150
0.5 -1.
-.1 -1.1
-.8 -1.8
-1.0
9999 (Specification card to terminate souree-values
CALCOMP PLOT
143 2. 0.0 20. VALUE VALUE2
,BLANK card ending plot carda
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK card ending all cases

vxx.c. Static Analytic functions

1 TYPE 11: STEP FUNCTION

The step function can be described as a function which is zero during steady-state
(at time zero) and which has a constant specific value starting from a positive
time. For this function, it is sufficient only to specify the type-ll source card.
f(t)

t..-_..-.....-.....-...
:I :
Tl
i -.. - ... i
I I
I I
I I

I I
I I
I I

!
I
AMPLITUDE I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I

-
I I
I I

DELTAT

lSTNH

TSTOP

Format:

The following format applies:

VII. Static electric network sources - 5

1 I~ !, I~ I€ It
"- IC I ~ rfl~l( .~ ic rf~* I-~"" I~ I"" rfl~l( ~* IC rE!sic
11 NAME 51 AMPLITUDE T5TART T5TOP

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

11: Number to indicate type-ii sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
AMPLITUDE: The amplitude of the function.
TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART) , the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP:Time at which the function becomes inactive .irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
Note; The above explanation of TSTART is correct as far as TSTART is chosen greater
than zero. If TSTART has been chosen zero, then f(O) = 0 and
f(DELTAT) = AMPLITUDE. If the user really wants to have f(O) = AMPLITUDE
(also non-zero steady-state value), he should use a type-14 near-DC source
(see point 4.b. further in this section).

Example:
Next example shows the use of the type-ll source.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
.05 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
BUS3 1.0
~LANK card ending electric network branches
BLANK card ending switches
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
llBUS3 2.0 .059 .36
BLANK card ending electric network source cards.
1
CALCOHP PLOT
143.05 0.0 2.0 BUS3
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
VII. Static electric network sources - 6

2 TYPE 12; RAMP BETWEEN ZERO AND A CONSTANT

This source provides for a linear rise from zero to some limiting, constant
value. The initial slope then is defined by the duration from. which the function
begins to rise until the function reached the limiting constant value. A type-12
source always is zero during steady-state.
1(1)

!'STOP

Format:

A6 12 E10.6 El0.6 El0.6 E10.6

Parameters:

12: Number to indicate type-12 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
AMPLITUDE: The limiting contant value which defines the end of the rise.
TIME-O: The duration of the rise, beginning at value zero at time TSTART and
ending at the value amplitude at time TSTART .. TIME-O (disregarding whether
TSTART and. TIME-O both are an integer multiple of DELTAT or not). Note
that the final curve appearance might look different due to plotting logic.
TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART) , the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on {TSTOP
included}, the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
VII. Static electric network sources - 7

Example:
Next example shows the place of the cards and the values of the sources in
these cards.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
0.1 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
EXTRA 5.
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending non-existent switch cards
C 1 2 3 4 5 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
12EXTRA 100. .22 .15 .72
BLANK card ending all electric source cards
1
CALCOHP PLOT
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1430.1 0.0 2.0 EXTRA
BLANK card terminating plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

3 TYPE 13: 2-SLOPE RAMP

This source provides for two different linear variations. First there is a
rise from zero to some limiting value at which the slope is defined by the duration
of that rise. Thereafter, the function changes slope, so as to pass through a
predefined value after a certain time. A type-13 source always is zero during
steady-state.
f(t)

....-. .......
At

•
I
I
I
I
I
f> ....-....
.... -.... -.I
I
I
I I
I I
I I

•
I I
I
I

IotTAT I
TSTART l n..E-O
TlIoIE-l
TSTOP

Format:

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

13: Number to indicate type-13 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
VII. Static electric network sources - 8

- Negative integer ("_1"): current source

AMPLITUDE: The limiting value which defines the end of the rise, as well as
the beginning of the second slope.
TIME-O: The duration of the rise, beginning at value zero at time TSTART and
ending at the value AMPLITUDE for time TSTART + TIME-O (disregarding whether
TSTART and TIME-O both are an integer multiple of DELTAT or not). Note
that the final curve appearance might look different due to plotting logic.
A1: The value of the signal at time TIME-1, which defines the second slope.
TIME-l: The time at value Al which defines the second slope. This time begins
at the value of TSTART (disregarding whether TSTART is an integer multiple
of DELTAT or not).
TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART {even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART} , the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
Remarks;
1) For the special case of TlME-O to be zero, only the second linear segment
exists. At steady-state, the source value is zero!
f(t)

A'
~. -....-.- ... -.- ....-.- ....---
....-.- .....- --
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

~TAT t

TINE-I
TSTOP

Example:
Next example shows the use of the type-13 source.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
0.1 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
NODE3 5.
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending non-existent switch cards
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
13NODE3 2. .2 1. 1.0 0.1 1.15
BLANK card ending all electric source cards
1
CALCOMP PLOT
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1430.1 0.0 2.0 NODE3
VII. Static electric network sources - 9

BLANK card terminating plot cards

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

4 TYPE 14; STEADY-STATE FUNCTIONS

The type-14 source grouping are the only functions that can be active during
steady-state. In such case,TSTART should be specified with a negative value, as
a special flag. Furthermore, the type-14 source in effect groups several different
sources:
- normal cosine function at a certain frequency
near-DC cosine function
- trapped charge function
4.a. Normal sinusoidal function:
I(t)
A., - 0 ; PHASE • 0 4eogr...

TSTOP

Format:

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

14: Number to indicate type-14 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
AMPLITUDE: The peak value (not RMS) of the function.
FREQUENCY: Frequency in hertz.
PHASE: Phase shift in degrees or seconds depending on Al.
A1: Parameter to specify whether the phase units are in seconds or degrees:
Ai = 0: PHASE is in degrees
f(t) - AMPLITU DE* cos{2*n* F REQU E NCY*t + PH ASE}

A1 > 0: PHASE is in seconds

J(t) - AMPLITU DE*cos{2*n* F REQU E NCY*(t + PH ASE)}
VII. Static electric network sources - 10

TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART) , the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer mUltiple of DELTAT. is the
unrealistic representation of the function. due to plotting logic. See
also remark 1.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
Remarks;
1) The phasor solution for initial conditions is driven only by type-14 sources
so such sources are very important for power system use. If a type-14 source
is to be part of the phasor solution, this is indicated by keying the
starting time TSTART negative. The program then will automatically precompute
the correct phasor conditions and will use these as initial conditions to
begin the corresponding time step simulation. Different phasor frequencies
are allowed only if the different frequencies are separated in disconnected
subnetworks. For an illustration of such multiple-frequency phasor solution,
see BENCHMARK DCNEW-1.
2) A special case of phasor solution is the so-called frequency scan. This
feature services the repetition of the steady-state phasor solution (so be
sure to put TMAX = 0 on the miscellaneous data card and TSTART < 0 on the
type-14 source card), as the frequency of type-14 sources is automatically
incremented between a beginning and an ending frequency. See section II-A-16
for more details regarding this feature.

Example:
This example treats the normal sinusoidal function in two ways:
1) type-14 non-steady-state:
2) type-14 steady-state:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C In this case the difference between a normal type-14
C source and a type-14 source used for a phasor solution is shown.
.1 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
EXTRA2 5.
EXTRA3 5.
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending non-existent switch cards
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
14 EXTRA2 100. 0.5 -1. 2.0 {steady-state
14 EXTRA3 100. 0.5 2.0 {non-steady-state
BLANK card ending all electric source cards
1
CALCOMP PLOT
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
143 .1 0.0 2.0 EXTRA2EXTRA3
BLANK card terminating plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
VII. Static electric network sources - 11

4.h. Near-DC source

Although true dc (zero frequency ac) is not allowed in the phasor solution,
it can be approximated using ac for a near-zero frequency. For 64-bit floating-point
computation (used by most program versions), there should be no trouble with use
of either f=[Link] or 0.0001 Hz, plenty close to zero for most engineering purposes.
With caution, the user can even go much closer to zero frequency (e.g., BENCHMARK
DCNEW-l uses 1.0E-6 Hz). Hence, the same format as fora normal cosine function
applies here.

4.c. Trapped charge function:

Trapped charge of a transmission circuit is an important special case of DC
solutions for which a special remedy may be .applicable.
I(t)

f~ fiE l~4 ~f 'fr~~

1 «I ~ I
I ~ i~IE Ie ~ ~ <fE t!l* f~ Ie 'E IC I" f~,E IC tHe Ie I~ t$q
14 NAME S AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY 5432.

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

14: Number to indicate type-14 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: In case of a trapped charge function the ST-parameter muat be specified
as "_1".
AMPLITUDE: The peak value of the function.
FREQUENCY: Frequency in hertz. For a trapped charge function, the frequency
should be [Link].
5432.: Punch this field (61-70) with the number 5432. (real or integer) as an
indicator for the trapped charge function.
Remarks:
1) Due to the above special flags, the trapped charge source wil not be present
for the time step loop. For the steady-state phasor solution, it will be
treated as a voltage source (despite the fact that ST=-l rather than blank,
and that TSTART=5432 rather than -1).
VII. Static electric network sources - 12

2) There is only one necessity when using trapped charge sources. The isolated
subnetwork to which such sources are to be applied may not have other sources
of a different frequency. Also. all trapped charge sources of the same
subnetwork must have identically the same frequency. This is because solutions
of differing frequency must not overlap: one can have only one at a time,
not the superposition of two or more at anyone point of the network. For
an illustration of the usage of a trapped charge source. see BENCHMARK Dc-6.
Examples:
This example shows the use of a trapped charge type-14 source:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C 2nd of 3 subcases. In this case the trapped charge source is in use •
•1 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
EXTRA1 5.
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending non-existent switch cards
C 1 234 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
14EXTRA1-1 2. 1.E-3 5432. 2.0
BLANK card ending all electric source cards
1
CALCOHP PLOT
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
143 .1 0.0 2.0 EXTRA1
BLANK card terminating plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK card ending the case

5 TYPE 15: SURGE FUNCTION

There are two possible forms of type-15 sources: a single- and a double
exponential one.

5.a. Function based on two exponentials:

Next figure shows a surge function based on two exponentials. The user can
determine the amount of the slope by parameters which are further explained. The
equation used for this function is:
J(t) - AMPLITU DE[exp(,.II)-exp(81)]

-.
I(t)

\ ---------------:=-.::-..:::::::==-=--._1-
------
1

\
\
\
\ / .....
\
\ ;'
/
\
,, " /
/

)~
I ...
I ...
,I ' , .....

I
,. '-,
-,

I
/ -'-"
...........
.,..
/
,. -,
',.,',.,.,.,.,.-.-
,
VII. Static electric network sources - 13

Format:

1 i. I~ IE IE
~ l~fE IE Ie I ~ L'IE rml( i~ll IE IE Ie ~E IE tEi~l( I'I~ I d~~( l'~E 'EISIC I·l~ IEi S:C

1~ NAME S AMPLITUDE A B TSTART TSTOP

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 El0.6

Parameters:

15: Number to indicate type-15 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
AMPLITUDE: This is the value. which the first exponential has at time-step 0
and the second exponential reaches at time-step infinity. It does NOT
correspond to the peak value in case of a double exponential.
A: Negative number to specify the falling slope. See remark 1.
B: Negative number to specify the rising slope. See remark 1.
TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective whether TSTART
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limi tthat the time approximatesTSTART). the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer mUltiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
Remarks;
1) A and B normally will be non-positive, since otherwise, f(t) will grow
without bound (if not ended by use of TSTOP)
2) For one constant (either A or B) equal to zero, f(t) is a single exponential,
which also can be usefull (simulation of first-order systems with one time
constant) .

S.b. Function based on one exponential:

This model has been introduced by Bernd Stein of FOR, Mannheim, West Germany,
at the LEC meeting of 27 October 1986, see attachment 86-R-06: B. Stein; liThe
Heidler-lightning model for LEMP calculations, an alternative to the original
type-15 source".
The original two-exponential type-15 source has many disadvantages:
i} it is only a crude approximation of measured lightning currents because
the highest steepness of the function occurs at time zero. This is not
corresponding to the pulse shape proposed by ClORE study committee No.33.
VII. Static electric network sources - 14

2) It is cumbersome to the user that the field "AMPLITUDE" does not correspond
to the peak value.
3) Finally, due to numerical instability of the formula (substraction of two
exponentials), numerical oscillations can occur.
In order to avoid the above disadvantages, the Heidler-model was implemented
in the code. This model is described by following function:
I k" :!
i(t)-~--e'
T) 1 + k"

where
t
k=-
1:1

in this formula,
= front time constant: is proportional to the front duration (=time interval
"t 1
between t=O to the time of the function peak)
1: is proportional to the stroke duration
(= time interval between t=O and the point on the tail where the function
amplitude has fallen to 50% of its peak value)
10 = peak value
11 = adjustment constant
n = influences the rate of rise and the instant of time of the maximum rate
of rise. With increasing n, this instant is shifted from the tail end
towards the 50%-value of the peak.
Although the original Heidler model uses 1:1 (front time constant), the EMTP
implementation uses the front duration TFRONT. The model is reasonable accurate
for normalized surge functions (e.g. 1,2 - 50), but can behave very strange for
other shapes (e.g. 1,2 - 1,4). In the latter case, the user has almost no control
over the parameters AMPLITUDE and 1:.

Format:

1 ~ I~ E IE
~ f<l'fE IEI~IC f<·< iE I! { :< I~ fE iE Ie 1< f·f< IEi~lc f< Iff~ ~ I~ ,e ~~~€ Id* l' 'Ei~lc

15 NAME S AMPLITUDE TFRONT '"t N TSTART TSTOP

A6 12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

.
Parameters:

15: Number to indicate type-15 sources.

NAME: Name of the ungrounded terminal node of the source.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
AMPLITUDE: This is the maximum value which the function can represent.
TFRONT: The front duration in seconds. This is the time interval between t=O
to the time of the function peak. Typical value: 1,2 ~sec.
VII. Static electric network sources - 15

~: The stroke dUration in seconds. This is the time interval between t=O and
the point on the tail where the current amplitude has fallen to 50% of its
peak value. Typical value: 50 llsec.
N: Factor influencing the rate of rise of the function. Increasing N increases
the rate of rise and shifts the instant of maximum steepness from the tail
end towards the 50% value of the peak. Reasonable values for N are 5 ••• 10.
Do not specify zero or blank, for this is a switch to distinguish between
the old and the new model.
TSTART: Time at which the function becomes active irrespective [Link]
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART (even in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART), the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.
Examples:
Next examples show the place of the card and the values of the source in this
card. The first example shows the use of the type-15 source based on two exponentials.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
.05 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
SURGE 1.0 {Dummy branch connecta Type-15 aurge function
~LANK card ending electric network branches
BLANK card ending switches
C 1 234 567 8
c 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
15SURGE 2.0 -1.0 -3.0
BLANK card ending electric network source carda.
1
CALCOMP PLOT
143.25 0.0 2.0 SURGE
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

The second example shows the use of the type-15 source based on one exponential.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
.1 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
LIGHTN 1.0
ALGHTN 1.0
ALGHT2 1.0
BLANK card ending electric network branches
BLANK card ending switches
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
15ALGHTN-l 2.0 1.2 50.0 2.0
15LIGHTN-l 2.0 1.2 50.0 7.0
15ALGHT2-1 2.0 1.2 50.0 0.5
BLANK card ending electric network source cards.
1
CALCOMP PLOT
143 .1 0.0 2.0 ALGHTNLIGHTNALGHT2 { Plot limits: (0.000. 1.000)
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
VII, Static electric network sources - 16

6 TYPE 16; SIMPLIFIED EOUIVALENT OF HYDC CONVERTER

6.a. General:
The type-16 source is taken into account during steady-state and can be used
to model a DC-voltage source which is controlled by its current output. Because
of this simplified assumption, ripples in the DC-voltage will be ignored.
The type-16 source is listed here for completeness. For most HVDC simulations,
it is believed that TACS-controlled switches and thyristors (see chapter VI'> have
largely replaced this simplified type-16 model.
Following is a schematic representation of the type-16 source. as implemented
in EMTP:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - external RC-snubber - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
I I
! ..,.,.,~----.... ......... , I
"BUS1" "lYP-16" "TRASH" /' " ''BUSZO'
~--~--~~ ~
Anade FY ) / Requiv ~atllade
r·~:;~:~-:::;:~~~·················-l
1 diode --Jr>I- 1
I
I --JIroo
\I
1 0) opens for current \ I
: How right to lett . \ i-'t)= vo(t) J
1 b) Closes for potential 1 \ (J\ Requiv /
1 drop + to- 1 \ /
L.. _...........•..•. _.................•.••..••, ~ I
"
.............. -...._-_ ...... .,.;/
/

Note that the type-16 DC-voltage source is not defined by its positive and
negative terminals, but by the cathode and anode side. Furthermore, during
steady-state it is actually represented as a near-DC source.
The positive direction of the current flow is from anode to cathode. The current
is not permitted to flow in the negative direction. This is simulated with a switch
on the anode side between internal nodes ttTIP-16 tt and ttTRASHtt. Beware that this
switch can cause numerical oscillations when opening or closing. This oscillation
can be eliminated by the use of an HC snubber branch between anode and cathode
(e.g. H = 900n, C = 0.15 lIF). Also see section IV.A.3. remark 7 (i.e. scaling of
a resistance by the time step DELTAT).
An isolation resistor He is placed between the user-supplied anode node name
"BUS1" and the internally-defined node ttTIP-16 tt • This isolation resistance is
needed in order to allow the type-16 source to be connected to any other EMTP
element, even to a switch (recall that two switches never can be connected directly;
they should be separated at least by a small resistance).
The equivalent resistance HE~IV is function of parameters defining the current
regulator dynamics, because it results from the transformation of the differential
equations describing the source dynamics to difference equations using the
trapezoidal rule of integration (see theory book, p 7-14). This results in :
v de (t) - Vo (t) - R _qui. * i (t)
a voltage source vo(t) in series with an internal resistance R equi., or a current
source io(t) in parallel to Requru.
The dynamic relation between the regulator output voltage en and the control
curren t (I BI AS - i) can be shown as follows:
VII. Static electric network sources -

eo MIOI"-DC~I"
G(s) -
-
8C)Uf"C'.
v • 1(.. )
ck

~----"i
\~ t
The current regulator can be described as an amplifier with two input signals
(I BlAS and i) and one output (e a ) determining the firing angle of the HYDe converter.
The relation between the input and the output is given by following equation:
e" - (1.,.15 - i)G(s)

with: - ea the output voltage of the current regulator which determines '
source voltage v d<
- I BlAS the bias current
- i the measured source current
- O(s) the transfer function of the current regulator:
K(1+sT2) (1)
G (5) = --:..----=..:...-
(l+sT,)(I+sT3)

There are implied limits e... min and e a • max on ea. Those limits are in accordance
with the minimum firing angle of the rectifier or the minimum extinction angle of
the invertor.
The relation between the source voltage V dt and the regulator output voltage
eO. can be described by following equation:
(2)
meaning that the. current regulator output e .. minus a bias value is proportional
to [Link] invertor normally operates on the limit e ... min'
Rather than specifying limits on e...
the user should specify limiting val
for using equation (2).
V de • .
Next figure shows the relation between the source voltage vd<and the regulator
output voltage ea. inclusive the limits on these voltages:

"dC,rnax h-----

•Omox

cos::>l

~min
VII. Static electric network sources - 18

During the transient conditions. the limits will be observed on the regulator
output voltage e .. only. If' the convertor operates at :its l:im:its (e. max or [Link])
either in initial steady-state. or later during the transient simulation. it will
back off the limits as soon as the value of the following derivative changes sign:
(3)

In case of eel" e Clmax the sign will turn from positive to negative. At· either
d 2•
limit the value for -T equals
dl
zero in the right-hand side of equation (3).

6.b. Card formats:

Two cards must be specified in order to initialize a type-16 source. One card
is needed for the cathode side while the other card is needed for the anode side.
Cathode side:

A6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6

Anode side:

ANODE
NAME v dC,min v dC,max freq

A6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6 El0.6

6.e. Parameters:
Cathode side:
16: Fixed number to specify the type-16 source.
CATHODE NAME: Terminal node name for the ungrounded cathode side of the type-16
source.
INFLAG: Depending on the value of INFLAG. the following value will be allocated
to the steady-state source voltage e(O).
INFLAG e(O)
1 [Link] (field INVAL. cathode side card 21-30)
2 [Link] (field Vdc,max. anode side card 41-50)
3 [Link] (field Vdc,min. anode side card 31-40)

All other values for INFLAG will be rejected; tlERROR IN IDENTIFICATION OF

SOURCE".
VII. Static electric network sources - 19

K: Constant. determining the transfer function of the current regulator (see

equation (1».
INVAL: initial value specification. Depending on the value of INFLAG. following
values should be specified:
INFLAG INVAL
1 v de, INITIAL
2 iSETTING
3
. Vde, INITIAL: Initial value of source voltage Vde which can be chosen by the
user .
. iSETTING: Defines the point where the convertor backs off the limit and
goes into constant current control.
Tl.T2.T3: Values to determine the transfer function of the current regulator,
with T2 speCifying the pole and T1 , T3 speCifying the zero's (see equation
(1)) •
iINITIAL: This initial current must be given by the user. If the initial current
is wrong, then the initial voltage at the terminals will not be exactly
Vde(O); this error mayor may not be negligible depending on wether
[Link] « IVde(O) I or not. Note that iINITIAL is only used for the
ini tialisation and for nothing else. If iINITIAL < 0, then it is set to zero
internally in the program.
Anode side:
16: Fixed number to specify the type-16 source.
ANODE NAME: Terminal node name for the ungrounded anode side of the type-16
source.
K1 .K2: These are the constants from equation (2). which define the relation
between source voltage Vde and regulator output voltage ea.
Vdc,[Link],max: These values determine the limits of the source voltage Vde. Via
relation (2). alsoe".min and e a • max can be obtained.
RE: This value is used to specify the resistance in ohms of a small series
isolation resistor which is defined internally by the program. See also
figure 1 and remark 2.
£req: frequency of the near-DC type-16 source. Recall that for a near-DC source.
the frequency must be chosen very low (1.E-3) but non-zero.
lOUT: Following values are valid for output request options:
"1":~branch current
"2": branch voltage
"3": branch current and branch voltage
Remarks;
1) The value I BlAS is automatically computed after the return from the steady-state
subroutine. The user should not concern about this.
2) If field RE is left blank (or punched with value 0.0). the EMTP will
automatically supply a default value equal to the square root of "EPSILN",
where "EPSILN" can be set either in the STARTUP file or on the floating-point
miscellaneous data card (see section I-H). A column-Bo (data field "lOUT")
request for current output will be internally converted into a current-output
request for resistor HE and it will show up this way in the printed column
headings which precede the transient printout; a column-Bo request for
branch-voltage output will produce the voltage difference from anode to
cathode.
VII. Static electric network sources - 20

3} Both names TRASH = " •••••• " and "TYP-16" (see fig i) are reserved for
internal definition by the program. These names should never be used for
anything else by the user.
Example:
Next example shows the place of the source card and the values of this source
in the case.
BEGIN NEW nATA CASE
.000050 .300
1 5 1 1 -1
10 10 100 100
VR A 0.5
GR 0.5
BLANK card ending all branches
BLANK card ending (here non-existent) switches
ellA -1 -1000.
13A -1 250. 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.3
e 13A -1 -1000. -10. 0.3
e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
e 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
16VR 1 1.00 7380. 4.4 .040 .0103 1000.
16GR -148000. 14800. -70000. 70000. 1.E-8 .001 3
e 14A -1 -1000. .001 0.0 0.0 0.0 -1. .30
e Note: 2 cards before. the 2nd Type-16. cols. 69-72. now have the near-zero
e frequency f . 1.E-3 Hz. Until 18 Sept 1988. this was zero. which
e was set wi thin "SUBR5" to TENK3 --- the same value. But aOlDe
e computers (ene. Green Hills 386) did not have equality with the
e frequency f · .001 on the following Type-1., so a a a ) KILL • 222.
BLANK card ending sources
1
PRINTER PLOT ( Axis limits: (-1.493. 7.000)
18430. 0.0300. VR GR Source Voltage Voltage in volts
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW nATA CASE
BLANK

7 TYPE 18; IDEAL TRANSFORMER & UNGROUNDED VOLTAGE SOURCE

The type-18 source was designed primarily to represent a 2-winding ideal
transformer. But it can also be used to model an ungrounded voltage source. The
card format to be used is the same for both situations.
By definition, an ideal. transformer is a device for which winding vol tages and
currents are exactly related by a real number called the turns ratio:
vII 'I
. -=n
n •
V2 '2
In addition to such an ideal transformation, the type-18 source includes a
conventional voltage source {see figure below}. Accordingly. the type-18 source
contains an internal node called BUS-X. This extra voltage source should be defined
on an ordinary source card (any type). preceding the type-18 card.

secunoory primary

For an ideal transformer only, set the source amplitude of the extra voltage
source almost zero. Amplitudes must be positive, but can be arbitrarily small (e.g.
1.E-18). In this case, the shape of the source function is immaterial. A type-14
source should be withheld if one wants to have the type-18 source being active
during steady-state.
VII. Static electric network sources - L

The extra vol tage source can be made ungrounded by grounding the two secondary
nodes "kit and "m" on the type-18 source card. Then there will be no voltage across
ei ther winding and the primary transformer current will be unconstrained. The turns
ratio "n" is arbitrary. although it must have a positive value (unity is convenient).
As far as the input format is of concern. the extra voltage source is to be
defined on the source card that precedes the type-18 source card. This preceding
card is an ordinary source card of arbitrary type code and with the name of node
"j" (one end of the source) keyed in columns 3-8. For the type-18 source card, the
following format should be used.

Ratio "n" Bus-K Bus-M Bus-X

A5 E10.5 A5 A5 A5

Parameters:

18: Type of source that indicates ideal transformer and ungrounded voltage
source.
Bus-I: Node name of one end of the primary winding of the transformer. Note
that this is not the end. which is connected to the extra source.
Ratio "n": This is an arbitrary positive, real number, which represents the
relation between the secundary and the primary windings.
Bus-K, Bus-M: Node names of both ends of the secundary windings.
Bus-X: This node name is for an extra. fictitious node that will be added
internally by the program as data is read. This node will have voltage
equal to the current of the source and/or transformer. Hence. node voltage
output can be used to display this current, for purposes of either printing
or plotting. The average user of a type-18 source is advised to leave this
node name blank. In this case, the program will supply a default name
serialized from the root name "18TYP" in order of data input. That is, the
first such device will have the name "18TYP1", the fifth would have thp
name "18TYP5", etc.

Example:
Next example shows the place of the card and the values of the sources in this
card.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
.000100 .024 1.E-12
1 1 1 1 1
PRIM1 G£N 1.E-8 { Create node PR1H1 of unknown voltage
PRIM2 GEN 1.E-8 { Create node PRIM2 of unknown voltage
SEC1 0.5 l-ohm resistive load on [Link] trans. 1
S£c2 .25 l-ohm resistive load on [Link] trans. 2
PRIBOT 1.0 { 1/2 of resistor for ungrounded source
PRITOPGEN 1.0 { other 1/2 of R for ungrounded source }
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending switch cards
14GEN 1. 0 60. -90. {Network's real source is sine wave
11PRIM1 1.£-20
18 00 1.414SECI Ratio**Z a 2: step down. priaary to secondary
14PRIM2 1.0 60. 0.0 { Add vector.: 1.414 / -45 degrees
18 00 2.0SEC2 { Ratio-2: .tep down. primary to .econdary
11PRITOP 1.0 .006
18PRIBOT 1.0 { Ratio is arbitrary since secondary nodes shorted to earth
BLANK card ending source cards
VII. Static electric network sources - 22

l8TYPl18TYP2l8TYP3GEH SEC1 SEC2 PRIBOTPRITOPPRIM1

BLANK card ending selective node voltage output request.
CALCOMP PLOT
144 3. 0.0 lB. 1BTYP11BTYP2 { Axis limits: (-1.414. 1.414)
144 3. 0.0 24. 1BTYP3 { Axis limits: (-1.000. 0.500)
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK card ending all cases

VII.D. Static TACS-controled functions

1 TYPE 17: TACS MODULATION OF NEXT SOURCE

A type-17 source is used to apply a TAOS-generated modulating signal (a
multiplying factor) to the source that immediately follows the type-17 source
declaration card. The type-17 source has no numerical parameters. since it is fully
defined by the TAOS-name. The type-17 source is not taken into account during
steady-state.

Format:

The following format applies for a type-17 source:

1 I~ I~ 1<4 I~ IE IE
:2 f< ·1E IE Ie i~
IE ,(~<fe 1< IB~ Ie I" l'f~ ta~
Ie '" l* ,dQ( ~<I~IE ts~
Ie '" iE
'~* f< HEI~c
11 NAME

12 A6

Parameters:

17: Specification of a type-17 source.

NAME: Name of the TAOS variable that will be used as modulating signal or TAOS
source grouping.
Remark:
1. Recall that this TAOS variable should belong to the TAOS output grouping.
2. Remark that neither the ST-field (cols. 9-10) nor the TSTART (cols. 61-70)
and TSTOP field (cols. 71-80) are to be specified on the type-17 card but
on the source card following the type-17 source.

Example:
Next example shows the place of the card and the values of the source in this
card. The type-17 source is active on the type-14 source immediately following
the type-17 card.
VII. Static electric network sources - 23

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

.05 2.0
1 1 1 1 1
TACS HYBRID
1ELEMT +GENT
1.0
1.0 1.0
1GT/ELT +GENT
1.0
1.0 1.0
90BUS2
91BUS1
11TWO 2.0 { Constant for .odulation of electric network COSINE
99GENT • BUSl + BUS2
33ELEMT GENT GT/ELTBUS1 BUS2
BLANK card ending all TACS data
BUS3 BUS2 1.0
BUS2 BUSl 1. 0
COSINE 1.0 { Dummy branch connects source of intereat
SURGE 1.0 {Dummy branch connects Type-15 surge function
BLANK card ending electric network branches
BUSl MEASURING 1
BLANK card ending switches
I1BUS3 1.0
17 TWO { The constant 2.0 of TACS .ultiplies following 1/2 to give unity:
14COSINE 0.5 3. {Cosine starts at peak 0.5. and alao enda there
15SURGE 2.0 -1.0 -3.0 {Surge function is a smooth pulae ) 0
BLANK card ending electric network source cards.
1
CALCOMP PLOT
143.05 0.0 2.0 SURGE COSINE { Axi. [Link]: (-1.000, 1.000)
193.05 0.0 2.0 TACS GT/ELTTACS ELEMT { Axis [Link]: (0.000, 9.756)
BLANK card ending plot cards
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

2 TYPE 60; CONNECTION TO TACS VARIABLE

The type-60 source is connected to an arbitrary control system logic (TACS).
Therefore it has no numerical parameters. since it is to be defined by the TACS
variable.

bus
NAME

B TACS

Arbitrary control
system logic defines
Apply
-----~------....
SIgnal

1
60

TACS variable NAME

Electric
network

Format:

1 ~ I": ~ IE It
:; ~<f* Ie ~
~* t!
I( . ~
rE Ie i ~i~ ff C I~ If '~ ;~ 'fl~lc f~ r!~~I ( I~
'EI*
6C NAME S TSTART TSTOP

12 A6 12 E10.6 E10.6
VII. Static electric network sources - 24

Parameters:

60: Type of the source that indicates the connection to a TACS variable. Recall
that this TACS variable should belong to the TACS output grouping.
NAME: Name of the TACS variable to which the type-60 source is connected with.
ST: This field is used to select between a voltage and a current source.
- Blank or zero: voltage source
- Negative integer ("-1"): current source
TSTART: Time at which the function. becomes active irrespective whether !START
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time before TSTART ([Link] in
the limit that the time approximates TSTART). the value of the function
will be zero. The only thing we have to be carefull with, when DELTAT is
chosen too high and if TSTART is not an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the
unrealistic representation of the function, due to plotting logic.
TSTOP: Time at which the function becomes inactive irrespective whether TSTOP
is an integer multiple of DELTAT or not. Any time from TSTOP on (TSTOP
included), the value of the function will be zero. The only thing we have
to be carefull with, when DELTAT is chosen too high and if TSTOP is not
an integer multiple of DELTAT, is the unrealistic representation of the
function, due to plotting logic.

Example:
Next example shows the place of the card and the values of the sources in this
card.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C BENCHMARK DC-22
C Illustration of basic TACS logic that can be used to control the firing of
C valves (thyristers) of an ac/dc converter bridge. The electric network
C actually has no valves. however (TACS output signals are not used). The
C electric network passes balanced three-phase voltages to TACS via Type-90
C sources. Summers convert to line-to-line voltages. A constant firing
C angle DELAY1 of 1.0 msec is used. for simplicity. TACS variables FIRE1
C through FIRE6 should go back to electric network to control valves (only
C FIRE1 is passed back. and for simplicity. just to a Type-60 source).
0.0005 0.02
11111
TACS HYBRID
PHA-B +GENA -GENB
PHB-C +GENB -GENC
PHC-A +GENC -GENA
90GENA
90GENB
90GENC
9BZA-B 52+UNITY 1. O. O. PHA-B
9BZB-A 52+UNITY 1. O. 1. PHA-B
9BZB-C 52+UNITY 1. O. O. PHB-C
98zC-B 52+UNITY 1. O. 1. PHB-C
9BZC-A 52+UNITY 1. O. O. PHC-A
9BZA-C 52+UNITY 1. O. 1. PHC-A
9BDELAYl .001
9BFIREl 54+ZA-B .001 DELAY1
9BFIRE4 54+ZB-A .001 DELAYl
9BFIRE3 54+ZB-C .001 DELAYl
98FIRE6 54+ZC-B .001 DELAY1
9BFIRE5 54+ZC-A .001 DELAY 1
9BFIRE2 54+ZA-C .001 DELAY1
33PHA-B PHB-C PHC-A ZA-B ZB-A ZB-C ZC-B ZC-A ZA-C GENA GENB GENC FIRE1
33FIRE4 FIRE3 FIRE6 FIRE5
BLANK card ending all TACS data
OGENA 1.0
OGENB 1.0
OGENC 1.0
FIREl 1.0
BLANK card ending branch cards of the electric network
BLANK card ending switch cards of the electric network
14GENA 1.0 60. -90.
14CENB 1.0 60. 30.
VII. Static electric network sources - 25

14GENC 1.0 60. 150.

60FIRE1
BLAlfX card ending source cards of the electric network
C Step Time TACS TACS TACS TACS TACS TACS
C PHA-B PHB-C PHC-A %A-B ZB-A ZB-C
C
C TACS TACS TACS TACS TACS TACS
C GENS GENC FIRE1 FIRE4 FIRE3 FIRE6
C 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
C 1 .5E-3 -.56961374 1.70137143 -1.1317577 0.0 1.0 1.0
C .756995056 -.94437637 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
BLANK card ending .elective node voltage output.
C La.t .tep: 40 .02 1.15896821 .535233135 -1.6942013 1.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
C La.t .• tep: -.20791169 -.74314483 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
C Firat 7 .adma: 1.73167094 1.728633 1.7305315 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C [Link] ti.... .0055 .0165 .011 .0015 .5E-3 .5E-3 .0045
C Fir.t 7 mini.a: -1.7305315 -1.728633 -1.7316709 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
C [Link] time. .014 .0085 .0195 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
CALcot1P PLOT
194 2. 0.0 20. TACS PHA-B TACS FIREl {Axi. [Link].: (-1.731. 1.732)
BLAlfX card ending plot card.
BEGIHlfEW DATA CASE
BLANK
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 1

VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE

VIII-A. General description

y~ 'lcq
Ouadr .. -t......
ax.s
~Ph<lse c:
~

a) Mechanical part b) Electrical part

Fig. 1: Schematic representation of a three-phase. synchronous machine

The three-phase dynamic synchronous machine model assumes that the electrical
part of the machine has the following windings:
- three armature windings a, b, c, one per phase, connected to the network. The
space displacement among the a-b-c-phases must be 120 electrical degrees.
- one field winding f which produces flux in the direct axis
- one hypothetical winding kd on the direct axis which represents the damper bar
effects
- one hypothetical winding g on the quadrature axis representing the effects
produced by eddy-currents
- one hypothetical winding kq on the quadrature axis representing damper bar
effects.
The dynamic synchronous machine is internally balanced with respect to the
armature phases.

The armature windings are assumed to by Wye connected, with a possible R-L
branch between the neutral and local ground. However, the. user is allowed to
simulate a machine with delta-connected armature windings too. One should be
care full with the output interpretation of the DELTA CONNECTION request (see section
VIII-C-2-C) •

The voltage applied to the field winding is assumed to be constant, determined

by the EMTP at the time of the sinusoidal steady-state solution. But the user is
allowed to control this voltage by using TACS. In this case, the TACS output
variable is a normalized multiplicative variable (equal to unity if it is to produce
no effect) for scaling the otherwise-constant field voltage. Should the user
desire a constant field voltage representation, this can be readily provided by
the TACS connection.

Note;
1. Connection with MODELS is believed to be similar. It has not been tested yet.
2. Directly assigning the field current would be more desirable, but this is not
possible with the current version of ATP, unfortunately.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 2

Saturation effects can be studied by describing the open-circuit saturation

curve for the d and q axis. Hysteresis is not considered.

The user can simulate a three-phase dynamic synchronous machine model with any
number of lumped masses in the shaft-rotor system, see Figure 1. Each major element
is considered to bea rigid mass connected to adjacent elements by massless springs.

Each shaft mass, except generator and exciter masses, is allowd to have a
constant mechanical power applied to it (in addition to the torque of the mechanical
viscous damping and the spring connections to adjacent masses). The user specifies
proportionality factors for each mass, with the actual constant power then determined
internally by the EMTP at the time of the sinusoidal steady-state initialization.
This is the basic scheme regarding mechanical input torque, in the absence of
special connections.

The user is also allowed to represent prime mover (e. g. governor. boiler, etc.)
dynamics by using TACS to control the total mechanical power. In this case, the
required TACS output variable is a normalized multiplicative constant (equal to
unity if it is to produce no effect) for scaling the otherwise-constant mechanical
power. Should the user desire a constant-torque representation of the prime mover,
this can be readily provided by the TACS connection (TACS would divide the
steady-state speed by the instantaneous speed to produce the required control
signal) •

For output purposes, most machines parameters and variables of interest are
available.

- Electrical variables: winding currents, certain d-q-O variables

- Mechanical variables: velocities and angles of rotor masses
inter-mass shaft torques
- Initial conditions
- Electrical and mechanical parameters

Electrical and mechanical variables are automatically appended to the end of

the regular EMTP output vector upon the request of the user, and hence are available
for printing and plotting just like any other EMTP variable.

VIII-B. Tbe equations of the synchronous machine

A short explanation of the equations used to model the synchronous machine is

given next.

VIII-B-l. Equations of the electrical part

The electrical part is described by two systems of equations.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 3

a) The voltage equations

[v] - -[R][i]-~[A]
dt

where

(zero in last three components because kd. g and kq windings

are short-circuited)

[R] -diag[R a' Ra. Ra. R /. R ta' R II • R tq]

(all phases have sameR a; internally balanced with respect to

armature phases)

[A] - [Aa. All' Ae' A,. Ata • A". AtqJ'

~:
For the meaning of the subscripts, we refer to the general description and
Fig. 1.
b) The flux-current relationships
[A] - [L][i]

The instantaneous values of the elements of matrix [L] are functions of the rotor
position. The coefficients of the resulting set of differential equations are
periodic functions of the rotor angle and, therefore, functions of time. If
saturation effects are not taken into account and. terms of order 3 and higher in
the Fourier expressions of the armature winding inductances are neglected, this
time dependence can be avoided by transferring armature quantities to a reference
frame attached to the rotor. The rotating fluxes produced by the armature are
projected onto rotor axis, where they appear as stationary. This transformation
of variables, known as Park's transformation, is identical for fluxes, current and
voltages.

where

[TJ - "
f2[~ cosO
sinO
cos(9-2n/3)
sin(9 - 2n/3)
COS(O+2n/3)]
sin(9 + 2n/3)
11.[2 11.[2. 11.[2

where Sis the rotor position, in electrical radians.

Note that [T] - {[T]-l}'

VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 4

Similarly

Since the rotor quantities remain unchanged, the transformation of variables yields
the following set of voltage equations (assuming R a - R ~ - R c)

Vd Ra 0 0 id Ad -WAq
0 Ra 0 iq Aq
V" WAd
Vo 0 0 Ra io Ao 0
d
- VI RI 0 0 0 il AI + 0
dt
0 0 R ta 0 0 ita Atd 0
0 0 0 RI1 0 ill All 0
0 0 0 0 RA:q iA:q AA:q 0

If the machine isWye-connected with a branch (parameters Rn and Ln) between neutral
and the local ground, then the following term must be added to the right-hand part
of the zero-sequence equation

The d-q-o flux linkages are related to the d-q-o currents by means of the following
relationships:

[A'][
AI
Atd
-
L,
LIJ I
L a . ta
L IJ . I
LI
L I . ta
L'' l' ]
L 1.A:a
L ta
'1
ita

[A.][
All
[Link]
-
L.
La 11
La,'tq
L a . 11
LII
L I1 . tq
L'' l' ]
LII,tq
L tq
111
i tq

Ao - Loio

The Park's transformation converts the three armature windings into two ficticious
windings located on the rotor axes and a third static winding, completely uncoupled
from the other windings. The coefficients of the resulting equations are
time-invariant. Figure 2 shows the schematic representation of the electrical
part after the transformation of variables.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 5

D..~ct

Fig.2. Physical interpretation of the Park's transformation

The set of resistances and inductances of the above equations are not directly
available from measurements. Generally. data from standarized tests are known.
According to international standards. parameters available from machine tests are

Ra armature resistance
X, armature leakage inductance
Xo zero-sequence reactance
Xd' .Xq' transient reactances
Xd-.X q - sub transient reactances
"td'."t q • transient short-circuit time constants
"td-'''t q - subtransient short-circuit time constants

Instead of short-circuit time constants. open-circuit time constants could be known

"t_dO' • "t qO ' transient open-circuit time constants
"t do - • "t qo - subtransient open-circuit time constants

Parameters of machine equations. hereafter called internal parameters. can be

derived from test data. hereafter called manufacturer's data or external parameters.
by using a procedure for data conversion. However. if parameters from machine
tests are known. the synchronous machine to be simulated can be described by the
set of external parameters since a data conversion procedure is available within
the ATP machine model (see PARAMETER FITTING request: section VIII-C-2-b).

Reactances and time constants must be unsaturated values; for this reason.
short-circuit time constants are preferred over open-circuit time constants. because
these are influenced by saturation effects. If the user chooses to describe the
machine by the set of external parameters. either open-circuit or short-circuit
time constants can be input (see PM-parameter on PARAMETER FITTING request card:
section VIII-C-2-b).

VIII-B-2. Equations of tbe mechanical part

Figure 3 shows the connection of the shaft system around mass i
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 6

Fig.3. Shaft system around mass i

The mechanical system is assumed to be linear; therefore, the spring-connected

rotating masses can be described by the rotational form of the Newton's second
law.

d
dt[e] = [w]

where
[e] the vector of angular positions
[w] the vector of angular speeds
[J] the diagonal matrix of moments of inertia
[D] the tridiagonal matrix of damping coefficients (see below)
[K] the tridiagonal matrix of stiffness coefficients (see below)
[T lurb/At] the vector of torques applied to the turbine stages
[T "U/U"] the vector of electromagnetic torques of generator and exciter

The following should be noted:

DI + DI2 -D 12
-D 12 DI2+D2+D23 -D Z3
[D]- -D Z3 DZ3+ D 3+ D34 -D 34

-D._I.. D._La + D.

K 12 - K IZ
- K 12 K 12 + K 23 - K 23

[K]- -K 23 K23+K34 -K 34

-K._I.. K._ 1••

The simplest mechanical model is the single-mass representation

d 2e de
J dt2+DCii-T,ur-T"e.

de
--w
dt
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 7

For hydro units a one-mass model can be used. but it is not accurate enough for
thermal units. For these cases a lumped-mass representation is necessary. specially
in subsynchronous resonance studies.

Generally the inertia constant H rather than. the moment of inertiaJ is specified.
This new constant is a per unit representation of the kinetic energy at synchronous
speed. Following relation exists:

(seconds)

The link between the equations of the electrical and the mechanical part is provided
by the rotor position and the electromagnetic torques

a. l • c
9 ",.cll - NPI2

_-v,i,
T uc
w."c

where NP equals the number of poles.

VIII-C. Data Forma.t

The input data deck of a dynamic synchronous machine source component within
an EMTP datacase has the following structure:
1. CLASS 1 S.M. DATA CARDS: Steady state and network connectivity specification
2. CLASS 2 S.M. DATA CARDS: Special request cards (optional)
3. CLASS 3 S.M. DATA CARDS: Machine ratings and electrical parameters
4. CLASS 4 S.M. DATA CARDS: Mechanical. parameters (mass cards)
5. BLANK CARD ending mass cards
6. CLASS 5 S.M. DATA CARDS: Output requests
7. BLANK CARD ending output requests
8. CLASS 6 S.M. DATA CARDS: Connections with TACS
9. CLASS 7 S.M. DATA CARDS indicating whether the machine is parallel led by an
additional machine (FINISH PART card) or not (FINISH card).
Rules and general description of card groups in order of data input are given
next.

VIII-C-l. Class 1 SM data. cards

First come three cards (one per phase) which specify the component type code (59),
the phase voltage magnitude and angle in. the steady-state. and names for the network
nodes to which the armature windings of the phase under consideration are to be
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 8

connected. Balanced as well as unbalanced steady state can be specified (see

remark 2). The first of these 3 cards is for phase "a", next phase "btl and finally
phase "c". Following format should be used:

I "I~ f!ff '~

t- ~* .~,~
I";
It~~fc I~ ~fl· tf~( ~f tf~ ~ I ~~ of!
f
rH~I( !~ rH~ ~ . E
'E~S C

5~ BUS VOLT FREO ANGLE

A6 2) El0.6 El0.6 El0.6

Parameters:

Type code for the dynamic synchronous machine component is fixed: 59. It should
only be specified for the first phase (a).

BUS: Six-character EMTP network node name. The armature winding of the phase under
consideration is to be connected to this node of the electric network. Only
one node name per winding can be specified. Usually, all armature windings are
assumed to be Wye connected. Only via the special request "DELTA CONNECTION"
(VIII-C-2-c), another setting can be obtained.

VOLT: The steady-state voltage magnitude at the terminals of the machine. This
is peak voltage (1.414 times RMS), line to neutral (0.577 times 1ine-to-1ine).
Use units of volts. See remark 2.
FREQ: The electrical frequency of the generator in Hz, for steady-state operation.

ANGLE: The steady-state voltage phasor angle at the terminals of the machine, for
the phase under consideration. Units are degrees. See remark 1 and 2.
Remarks:

1. Conventional positive sequence is assumed. That is, phase "btl voltage lags
phasetla" voltage by 120 degrees and phase "c" voltage leads phase "a" voltage
by 120 degrees.

2. If the values of VOLT and ANGLE on cards No.2 and 3 (i.e. for phase "bit and
"c" ) are not specified, the program assumes the presence of a three-phase
balanced source at the machine terminals. Otherwise, the presence of an
unbalanced three-phase source is assumed. This allows the user to specify an
unbalanced steady state.

VIII-C-2. Class 2 SM data cards (optional)

Next in order of data input come optional special-request cards (if any) which are
associated with the machine. Please note the application restrictions for each
special reques t card individually! There are three such possible cards, wi th
format and meaning as described immediately below. Ordering of such cards (if two
or more) within the Class 2 grouping is arbitrary. Identification of the card is
via one of the following keywords: TOLERANCES, PARAMETER FITTING or DELTA CONNECTION.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 9

a. TOLERANCES special-request card (see remark 1)

I~ I~ ~ If IE
I~ ~~If 'E I( ·~f€ Id~l( f~l~ 1~lf tt fc ~I' l~IE I~ ~ , jl 'EIH i-I~ t!l* l,l~ Id~I( 'I iSlc
TOLERANCES E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 10X 110
EPSUBA EPOMEG EPDGEL NIOMAX

Parameters:

EPSUBA: Number specifying the ratio between the built-in damping resistors and the
resistive models of the inductive elements paralleled by these resistors, i.e.,
the following relationship holds true for each inductive element
Rp
E PSU BA = (2L16t)
Should the columns 11-20 be left blank, a default value of EPSUBA = 100.0 would
be assigned (see remark 2). For cases of numerical instability, the recommended
value is 20.0 - 50.0.

EPOMEO: Tolerance associated with the iterative calculation of S.M. rotor speed
at each-time of the simulation. The calculation is assumed to have failed when
the relative speed correction is greater than this tolerance after NIOMAX
iterations. The program execution is then terminated with an. appropriate error
message. A default value of 1.00-15 is assigned (see remark 2).

EPDGEL: Tolerance associated with the iterative calculation of S.M. rotor speed
at each-time. The calculation is assumed to have converged when the relative
speed correction is less than this tolerance. If the relative speed correction
is larger than this tolerance but smaller than EPOMBO the solution is assumed
to have converged marginally and an appropriate warning is printed. A default
value of 1.00-16 is assigned (see remark 2).

NIOMAX: Maximum number of iterations which are allowed for the calculation of the
S.M. rotor speed, at any time-step (default NIOMAX = 10 - see remark 2).

Remarks:

1. It should be stressed that the TOLERANCE-parameters discussed here are scalar

variables only; they apply to the entire data case (all machines) rather to the
specific machine along with which they were defined.

2. The default values of all these parameters are specified in the STARTUP file,
EPSUBA, EPOMBO and EPOGEL in the Card 1 (1st Miscellaneous floating-point
numbers), NIOMAX. in the Card 9 (2nd Miscellaneous integers).
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 10

b. PARAMETER FITTING special-request card

The PARAMETER FITTING card is used to distinguish between different types of data.
The presence of this card signals manufacturer's data, while its absence indicates
the use of internal parameters (Park's parameters) {recall section VIII-B-i}.

I~ If IE
f! If it I ~i~
PARAMETER FITTING
.* I ~i';

7X
f! Ie

E8.0
I~ [~ff :~!c I~ [~ff ~ l ~ I~I( l~ff r~ Ie I- 'dslC

The equations of the synchronous machine require the knowledge of all the appropriate
machine inductances and resistances. If the available data come from a test, a
parameter conversion is necessary. The procedure used in the present version to
calculate internal parameters was developed by M. Canay. Documentation of the
mathematics used for parameter determination is contained in Reference [48]. The
procedure is also explained in Chapter 8 and Appendix VI of the Reference Manual
(Theory Book), Reference [47].

Since only one procedure for data conversion is available , the value of the parameter
FM is unimportant for this purpose. In order to make compatible the present version
and older versions of the Type-59 S.M. model. this parameter has been preserved.
but having a different function. Parameter FM is used as a flag to distinguish
the type of time-constants which are supplied in the Class 3 data in the following
way (also refer to section VIII-B-l for some theoretical considerations regarding
saturation effect influences).

FM s 2.0 the time-constants input with the manufacturer's data are open-circuit
time constants (beware: avoid influence of saturation effects!).
FM > 2.0 short-circuit time constants are supplied in Class 3 data (preferable
since commonly not influenced by saturation effects).

Ref. [48]: I.M. Canay, "Determination of model parameters of synchronous machines",

lEE Proc. Vol. 130, Pt. B, No.2, pp. 86-94. March 1983.

c. DELTA CONNECTION special-request card

If the armature windings of the dynamic S.M. are delta-connected {rather than
Wye-connected}, then a special-request card which bears the text DELTA CONNECTION
in columns 1-16 must be'used.

11JJJJ~lJ~~IJJIJflJJI1JJJJJ1JJ~IJJJJJIJJ~IJJlJJIJJiIJJIJJIJJ~lJJIJJIJJ~lJJJIIIJJ~
DELTA CONNECTION

In absence of such a card, the armature windings are assumed to be Wye connected,
which is the most common situation for large power system generators. Except for
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 11

the possible presence of this one special-request card, no other portion of the
S.M. data specification explicitely makes reference to how the armature windings
are connected.

For a machine of which the armature windings are delta.-connected, a word about the
interpretation of armature current printout is in order. The labeling of variables
is not altered (from that used for a Wye connection), so the user must. be very
careful. There are four situations, depending upon whether one considers initial
condi tions or time-step loop printout, and whether coil variables or Park's vaI'iables
are considered. Of these four, two will be incorrectly labeled.

1) For the time-step-loop output, "ID", "IQ" and "IO" are indeed armature winding
variables (albeit in Park's coordinates). But "IA", "IB" and "IC", see figure
4, are armature coil variables. E.G., what is labeled "IA" in the S.M. initial
condition printout is actually i a ,,, the current from "a" to "b" in the winding.

2) For the steady-state initial-condition output, the situation is identical to

that in point 1)

L - -_ _ _ k:
0. e__---....J

1 •
c c
a) Conventional Wye labeling b) Erroneous inital conditions labeling,
delta-connection

Fig.4. Armature current labeling

Restriction: The option of DELTA CONNECTION, when used for parallel machines,
applies to all machines connected to the same bus. Consequently,
it is not possible to have a combination of Wye-connected and
Delta-connected machines at the same bus. If such a rare con-
figuration should ever arise, the user is required to isolate the
machines by a small reactance or resistance.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYlfAHIC SYlfCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 12

VIII-C-3. Class 3 8M data cards

Next come either 4 or 5 cards. which specify the electrical parameters of the
synchronous machine. The first card of this group has the following format:

1 I ~ I- I~ l~ E
~ I~I~ iE f Ie I~ ~ ~~ E I ( Ie .~
it Ie icl~le I 'f- ~.t·~ t i~~e I~I~ i ~~( t~ rd~ r

~::> ~ u~ NP SMOVTP SMOVTQ RMVA RKV AGLINE S1D S2D

z l£~~
12 12 121 14 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

NUMAS: The number of connected masses on the shaft system of this generator.

KMAC: The mass number which corresponds to the generator (or motor) rotor. within
the interconnected mass-spring shaft system. Masses are to be numbered by the
user for identification. beginning with number one on either end. and continuing
sequentially (2.3 •••• ) to the other end of the shaft.
KEXC: The mass number which corresponds to the exciter on the shaft system. If
no exciter exists. leave this field blank.

MECHUN: Flag used to distinguish the type of units in which mechanical parameters
are supplied
o or blank: English units
1: Metric units

NP: The number of poles (not pole pairs) which characterize the machine rotor.
The electrical frequency of the machine is equal to the mechanical frequency
times NP/2.

SMOVTP: Proportionality factor which is used only to split the real power among
the generators constituting a multiple machine during the machine initialization.
If a single machine. this field may be ignored. If a dual machine, suppose
that the user punches value PA for this half of the dual. and value PB for the
other half; then the fraction PA/(PA+PB) of the total steady-state real power
output will be assigned to this half of the dual during machine initialization.

SMOVTQ: The same as SMOUTP. only for reactive rather than real power.

RMVA: The total three-phase volt-ampere rating of the machine. in units of MVA
(million volt-amperes).

RKV: The rated line-to-line voltage of the machine, in units of RMS kV. Taken as
a pair, "RKV" and "RMVA" define the base values upon which per unit machine
parameters are assumed to apply. Should the machine in question have a
delta-connected armature (DELTA CONNECTION request, section VIII-C-2-c). specify
RKV as SQRT(3) times the rated winding voltage in RMS kV.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 13

AGLlNE: Value of the field current in amperes. which will produce the rated armature
voltage (1.0 per unit) on the air gap line (direct axis). This is an indirect
specification of the mutual inductance between the field and the armature of
the machine, see figure 5. If the S.M. is saturable, append an extra minus
sign (making "AGLINE" negative) as a flag for possible saturation.

S1D: Value of the field current in amperes which will produce rated armature voltage
(ADl per unit) on the no-load saturation curve, see figure 5. This field can
be left blank if the S.M. is not saturable (i.e. AGLINE positive).

52D: Value of the field current in amperes which will produce the rated voltage
(AD2 per unit) on the no-load saturation curve. see figure 5. This field can
be left blank if the S.M. is not saturable (i.e. AGLlNE positive) •

.
1:)
:l Iv air gap line (characteristic
+' if tht' "achint' iron wert' not
·cCJ) P.u.
d
Subject to saturation).

..
£:

CJ)
d
AD2
1.0
+'
'0 AD! curve of terl'linal voltage
>
phasor MQ,gnitude as a
d function of field current
.~
£: I at rated speed and no load.
I-
QJ
I
+' I
I
I-
0 I
1ft I
d
~ I
Cl. I
I
IS2D

AGLINE Field current, "

Fig.5. Air-gap line and no-load saturation curve (d-axis)

The parameters "AGLINE", "SlD" and "S2D" previously discussed actually apply to
the d-axis of the machine. A second card follows to provide extra Q-axis parameters.
If there is no saturation modelling (i.e. AGLINE ~ 0 on previous card), this extra
card should be left blank.

I~ Ii 1< it IE
[~ f~~ E Ifl~f( l<~ ! t~l* f-I< rH~I( I<f! ~ ! t~l( Ie I" "~I' ~ ! tl t~l( 1'
1< ~d* I; ~~ ( <~ ~I ( ~~lclc
AD1 AD2 A01 A02 AGLO S10 S20
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

AD1: Per unit voltage at which current "510" was measured on the previous card.
Should this field be left blank, the default value of 1.0 would be automatically
assigned.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 14

AD2: Per unit voltage at which current "S20" was measured on the previous card.
Should this field be left blank, the default value of 1.2 will be automatically
assigned.

AQ1: Per unit voltage at which current "SlQ" is measured. Should this field be
left blank, the default value of 1.0 would be automatically assigned.

AQ2: Per unit voltage at which current "S2Q" is measured. Should this field be
left blank, the default value of 1.2 will be automatically assigned.•

AGLQ: Value of the field current in amperes which will produce the rated armature
voltage (1.0 per unit) on the air gap line (q-axis). This is an indirect
specification of the mutual inductance between the fiee1d and the armature
of the machine (cfr. AGLINE).
A nonzero value of AGLQ indicates saturation as follows:
AGLQ > 0: Here the q-axis air-gap line is known, and AGLQ is the value of
the field current in amperes which will produce rated armature
voltage on that line. Data fields SlQ and S2Q must not be left
blank (supply correct values).
AGLQ < 0: The negative value for AGLQ is a flag indicating that the user
does not know the air-gap line for the q-axis. The EMTP will
proceed to internally generate an approximate value, and use it
for q-axis saturation modeling. In this case, SlQ and S2Q can be
left blank.

SlQ: Like S10 (see previous card), but applied to the q-axis.

S2Q: Like S20 (see previous card), but applied to the q-axis.

The remaining cards of Class 3 S.M. data depend upon whether standard
manufacturer-supplied data or internal parameters (Park's data) are being used.
An extra note regarding the simulation of reduced models is added too.

a. Manufacturer's data
If the PARAMETER FITTING card was used (Le. request to use manufacturer's data).
two additional cards having the following format complete the Class 3 data:

I~ IE IE
~ ·~IE rEI~!(
RA XL
Id~l( i~ ~!

XO
Ie I~ ~ ~f E rEI~ H ~* I"
,..:I~

XOO
r* ~~~~ ff

XDDD
raqc 1~ ~'p I rE~~I(

XO XOO XOOO
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

I' 1= it iF
f'lt IEI* rdqc ~I fElf!C ~ ~f I rEI! ~t
~* I..:f~ rMc f' Jd~!e rElc Ie
TOOP TOOP TOOPP TOOPP XO RN XN XCAN
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 15

Parameters:

RA: Armature resistance, in per unit. This must be non-negative.

XL: Armature leakage reactance, in per unit.

XD: Direct-axis (d-axis) synchronous reactance, in per unit.

XQ: Quadrature-axis (q-axis) synchronous reactance, in per unit.
XDD: Direct-axis transient reactance, in per unit.

XQQ: Quadrature-axis transient reactance, in per unit.

XDDD: Direct-axis subtransient reactance, in per unit.

XQQQ: Quadrature-axis subtransient reactance, in per unit.

The meaning of the next four time-constants depend upon the parameter FM, in the
PARAMETER FI'ITING card

1) FM S 2.0 (open circuit time constants - avoid influence of saturation effects!)

"TDOP: Direct-axis open-circuit transient time constant, in seconds

TQOP: Quadrature-axis open-circuit transient time constant, in seconds

TDOPP: Direct-axis open-circuit subtransient time constant, in seconds

TQOPP: Quadrature-axis open-circuit subtransient time constant, in seconds

2) FM > 2.0 (short circuit time constants - preferable)

TDOP: Direct-axis short-circuit transient time constant, in seconds

TQOP: Quadrature-axis short-circuit transient time constant, in seconds

TDOPP: Direct-axis short-circuit subtansient time constant, in seconds

TQOPP: Quadrature-axis short-circuit subtransient time constant, in seconds

XO: Zero-sequence reactance, in per unit.

•
RN: The real part of the neutral grounding impedance, in per unit.

XN: The imaginary part of the neutral grounding impedance, in per unit.
NQ.t.e: The machine is assumed to have a Wye-connected armature, with the neutral
connected to ground through the impedance R + j X If the machine is in
A II.

fact ungrounded (but still Wye-connected) simply use a large grounding

impedance.

XCAN: Canay's characteristic reactance, in per unit.

If this field is left blank. the program will set XCAN = XL (leakage
resistance) .
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 16

~ gn simulatign Qf reduced models:

If the user wants to simulate a reduced model, that is, a machine without one or
more rotor windings, the following rules are to be used:
1. The field coil must always be present, therefore XDD > 0.0 and TDOP > 0.0.
2. If the damper winding on the direct axis is to be dropped, the user should set
XDDD = XD and TDOPP = 0.0.
However, as the parameter XDDD is not going to be used, the user can also leave
this field blank.
3. If a machine without the g-winding (eddy-current winding) on the quadrature
axis is to be simulated, punch XQQ equal to XQ (or XQQ = 0.0) and set TQOP = 0.0.
4. If the damper winding on the quadrature axis is to be dropped, the user should
set XQQQ = XQ (or XQQQ = 0.0) and TOOPP = 0.0.
5. If a machine without any damper winding at all on the quadrature axis is to be
simulated, set XQQ = XQQQ = XQ (or = 0.0), and TQOP = TQOPP = 0.0.

b. Internal parameters
Should the user'have chosen to describe the machine by means of internal per unit
inductance and resistance matrices (no PARAMETER FITTING card used), then the Class
3 S.M. data are completed with three cards of the following format:

I-
I- I' I! II I' IE
~E WI< ~!I( 1. 1' III!! ( I- )I ~q( I' H! ~I II ~~I ( 1:1- 1' I!I< f!f! taqe I' ~I tile Ie
LF LAF LFKD LD LAKD LKD
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

~ I~ I~ IE F
,~ ·~IE r~l~ I~ r~fE r~'~{ 1,1" ~~fE r~I~le I ~I' i~l( I~ "~~fE t! i~l( i~I·t' ~* '~IE W~ l ~~ E r~l~ c
LG LAG LGKO LO LAKO LKO
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

, ,
I' I~ 't IE
'I~ ~'I ~ ~ E r! ~ ~~~ ! ! (t cie .• 1' t<fE r!l!i( 1.1< i E I~I~'( ~t ~~i ( [Link]~ W!i( f~~ E i~l( 1~ 'il~lc
XO RA RF RKD RG RKO RN XN
E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

LF: The self-inductance of the field winding, in per unit.

LAF: The mutual-inductance coefficient between the armature and the field winding I

in per unit.

LFKD: The mutual-inductance coefficient between the field winding and the d-axis
damper winding, in per unit.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNlIMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 17

LD: The self-inductance coefficient for the direct axis of the armature, in per
unit.

LAKD: The mutual-inductance coefficient between the armature and the direct axis
damper winding, in per unit.

LKD: The self-inductance of the direct axis damper winding, in per unit.

LG: The self-inductance of the eddy-current winding, in per unit.

lAG: The mutual-inductance coeffiecient between the armature and the eddy-current
winding, in per unit.

LGKQ: The mutual-inductance coefficient between. the eddy-current winding and the
q-axis damper winding, in per unit.

LQ: The self-inductance coefficient for the quadrature axis of the armature, in
per unit.

LAKQ: The mutual-inductance coefficient between the armature and the quadrature
axis damper winding, in per unit.

LKQ: The self-inductance of the quadrature axis damper winding, in per unit.
XO: Zero-sequence reactance, in per unit.

RA: Armature resistance, in per unit.

RF: Resistance of the field winding, in per unit.

RKD: Resistance of the damper winding on the direct axis, in per unit.

RG: Resistance of the eddy-current winding, in per unit.

RKQ: Resistance of the damper winding on the quadrature axis, in per unit.

RN: The real part of the neutral grounding impedance, in per unit.

XN: The imaginary part of the neutral grounding impedance, in per unit.
NQ.t.e.: The machine is assumed. to have a Wye-connected armature, with the neutral
connected to ground through the impedance R.+jX •. If the machine is in
fact ungrounded (but still Wye-connected) simply use a large grounding
impedance.

~ an ~ simulation g! reduced models:

The simulation of a reduced model is also possible when internal parameters are
used. Two rules must be followed:
1. In order to avoid a zero-division error, whatever value different from O. must
be punched for the self-inductance coefficient of the winding which is to be
dropped.
2. All the mutual-inductance coefficients of this winding must be set equalt to
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 18

O.
For instance, if a machine without the q-axis damper winding is to be modelled
then the user should punch LAKQ = LGKQ = 0 and LKQ , O.

VIII-C-4. Class 4 SM data cards

Next come the mass cards which contain mechanical parameters for the shaft system.
There is to be one such card for each mass, punched according to the format
immediately below. In number, there are "NUMAS" such cards (see 1st card of Class
3 data, columns 1-2); ordering is actually immaterial (the mass cards can be
shuffled), though it is generally clearer to stack such cards in naturally-increasing
order of the mass number "ML". Further,the unit system to be used depends on
MECHUM, which was specified on the first card of class 3 data (column 7).

! ~ I' Il I~ E IE
I~ ~~f~H :EI~ IC 1~ I-~~f~ [(I~I{ f- !~I~I{ I- H I~IC IJ' ~ E 1(:* I_f~ '~I~{ ~~l' If [~I~I( 'f i~l(
Ml EXTRS HleO DSR DSM HSP DSD
12 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6 E10.6

Parameters:

MF: The mass number. Recall that masses are to be numbered by the user beginning
with number one on either end of the shaft system, and continuing sequentially
to the other end, see figures 1 and 3 at the beginning of this chapter.

EXTRS: the fraction of the total external mechanical torque {power) which is
associated with mass "ML":
Generator: For a generator, enter the fraction of the total external mechanical
torque of this shaft system which is applied to this particular mass.
If a pump, enter a negative value.
Motor: For a motor, enter the fraction of the total external mechanical torque
of the shaft system which is developed by this particular mass. If a
pump, enter a positive value.

HlCO: The moment of inertia of mass number "ML". This is to be in units of

(million pound-feet2) if MECHUN = 0
(million kg-m 2) if MECHUN = 1

DSR: The speed-deviation self-damping coefficient for mass number "ML". By

definition,
T.-DSR(w,-w.)
where
T, is this particular damping torque under consideration for mass i
w, is the angular velocity of mass i
0).is the synchronous mechanical velocity for this shaft system.
Data is to be punched in units of
[(pound-feet) / {radians/second}] if MECHUN = 0
[(N-m)/(radians/second)] if MECHUN = 1
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE. SOURCE - 19

DSM: The mutual-damping coefficient. This pertains to the present mass (i = ML)
and the mass with the next higher number (i~l). The damping in question is
function of the velocity difference between the two masses
T=DSM(wl-w l +.)
The mutual-damping coefficient is to be punched in units of
[(pound-feet) / (radians/second)] if MECHUN = 0
[(N-m)/(radians/second)] if MECHUN = 1

USP: The spring constant. This pertains to the elastic connection between the
present mass (i = ML) and the mass with the next higher number (i~l). Units
for this data are
[(million pound-feet)/(radians)] if MECHUN = 0
[(million N-m)/(radians)] if MECHUN = 1

DSD: The absolute-speed self-damping coefficient for this mass number i. By

definition,
T1-DSDw l
where
TI is the associated damping torque on mass number i
WI is the angular velocity (absolute) of this mass.
Units for this data are
[(pound-feet)/(radians/second)] if MECHUN = 0
[(N-m)/(radians/second)] if MECHUN = 1
It will be noted that fields "DSM" and "HSP" contain data which really does not
belong exclusively to mass number i = ML, they also pertain to the mass which is
number i+1. For the last mass card (number "NUMAS"), these two fields have no
meaning, and are to be left blank.

Terminate the mass cards with a blank card.

VIII-C-5. Class 5 8M data cards

a) General remarks
The Class 5 (output request) cards follow the blank card terminating the Class 4
(mass) cards.
The requests for the output of S.M. variables are divided into five separate groups
as follows:

1. Electrical variables
2. Mechanical angles of shaft masses
3. Mechanical speed deviations of shaft masses
4. Mechanical torques on shaft sections
5. Machine parameters and initial conditions
To request an output of any S.M. variable. the user has to specify the output group
to which the variable belongs and an unique number identifying that variable within
that output group. The rules for asSigning those numbers are explained in the
following sections.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 20

There is a common data card format for all different output groups. The user must
specify the desired S.M. output (.s) in the following format:

2 ~ ~ ~ If !E
~ 1<1 ,f IE j< I~ I~I~ ,E rf~ (Ie : ~f :E Ie j2 f!,E tE Ie I" f~ ,E rf~~ I( :1- I!,E I cI~I < ,~ rf~C IC i ~I_ 'f~si(

~
~ Nl N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 ....
2) II 4X 16 16 16 16 16 16

Parameters:

GROUP: Flag identifying the output group to which the variables specified on this
card belong. Presently, there are 5 possible output groups. All are explained
in detail in the remainder of section VIII-C-5 [points b} up to f}].

ALL: Flag identifying a request for the output of all possible variables in this
output group.
o or blank: Selective specification of variables in columns 9-80
1: All possible variables in this class are to be output; columns 9-80 will not
be scanned.
Nl •••• N12: Identification of variables to be output (in 16 format). Depending on
the GROUP code, the meaning of output request parameters Nl. ••• N12 is different.
This is explained in detail in the remainder of section VIII-C-5 [points b) up
to f}].
The output request cards can be stacked in any order, i.e., a request for output
group i does not have to precede the request for output group i+1. Similarly, the
variable numbers {columns 9-80} can be specified in any order. It is also possible
to stack any number of cards specifying the requests for different variables within
any output group.

For EMTP output and plotting purposes, the output variables are actually identified
by a pair of 6-character names. The first name identifies the machine in question,
in order of data input; for example, "MACH 3" would apply to the third machine.
The second name identifies the variable type mnemonically, as documented in sections
b) up to f). Some examples of such column headings are shown in section VIII.D.

A blank card terminates the Class 5. S.M. data cards.

b) Specification of variables in Output Group 1

Presently there are 15 possible electrical variables in this group. The actual
number of variables requested will vary depending on the complexity of the model
used. The following Table summarizes the meaning of the request values in case
of GROUP = 1.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 21

Table I. Summary of variables in OUTPUT Group 1.

Variable Output request number Units A6 format

Output identification name
ID 1 A "ID"
IQ 2 A "IQ"
10 3 A "10"
IF 4 A "IF"
IKD 5 A "IKD"
IG 6 A "IG"
IKQ 7 A "IKQ"
IA 8 A "IA"
IB 9 A "IB"
IC 10 A "IC"
VF 11 V "VF"
MFORCE 12 A "MFORCE"
MANGLE 13 Rad "MANGLE"
TEG 14 Nmx106 "TQ GEN"
TEXC 15 Nmx106 "TQ EXC"

where ID current in the d-axis armature winding

IQ current in the q-axis armature winding
10 armature winding zero-sequence current
IF field winding current
IKD current in the d-axis damper winding
IG current in the eddy-current winding
IKQ current in the q-axis damper winding
IA current in the phase "a" armature winding
IB current in the phase tlb" armature winding
IC current in the phase "c" armature winding
VF voltage applied to the field winding; this will be a constant
voltage, unless the user explicitly specifies a connection to
TACS exciter dynamics as part. of the Class 6 S.M. data cards
MFORCE the total mmf in the air-gap of the machine
MANGLE angle between the q- and d-axis components of the total mmf
TEG electromagnetic torque of the machine
TEXC electromagnetic torque of the exciter

c) Specification of variables in Output Group 2

This output group contains the mechanical angles of the different masses in the
lumped mass model of the turbine-generator set. The number of possible variables
in this group depends on the number of masses used in the representation of the
machine (parameter NUMAS in Class 3 S.M. data cards).

Every mass of the turbine-generator set has been assigned a number ("MLtI) during
the specification of its parameters (Class 4 S.M. data cards). The same number
is to be used when requesting the output of the mechanical angle of that mass.
The output is in units of degrees. The output identification name is "ANGi".
YIIl. THREE-PHASE DYJW1IC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 22

d) Specification of variables in Output Group 3

This output .group contains the deviations of the mechanical speeds of the different
masses of the machine shaft from the synchronous speed. Similarly to Output Group
2. specify the appropriate mass number to obtain the desired output in units of
radians/ seconds. The identification name is "VELi".

e) Specification of variables in OUtput Group 4

This output group contains the mechanical torques on the different shaft sections
of the turbine-generatof set. The shaft torque number i is the torque on the shaft
section connecting masses number i and i+1; therefore. there is no output possible
for a single-mass model.· The units of the output are million Newton-meters. The
output identification name is "TORi".

f) Specification of variables in Output Group 5

This output group can be printed only immediately following the steady-state
solution. At present. there are two possible requests in this group obtained by
punching 1 and/or 2 in ~ of the variable number fields (columns 9-80) or Group
5 card:
Punch "1" to request the printout of all machine parameters (reactances. resis-
tances. shaft data. etc.) following the steady-state solution
Punch "2" to request the complete printout of the initial conditions of a machine

VIII-C-6. Class 6 8M data cards

Following the blank card terminating the Class 5 SM data cards come cards which
describe any interface connections between the machine under consideration and
TACS. Ordering of the different possible cards is immaterial: they can be shuffled.
without altering the results. Should a machine have no connections at all to TACS.
then no Class 6 data should be specified. This card grouping should NOT be
terminated by a blank card. Instead. class 7 cards immediately should follow the
blank card of Class 5 or the last Class 6 data card. The general format for such
Class 6 cards is as follows:

I' <I ! € IE
~~ ,f 'EI~!( ,~ .~ r~1 ~~( ,.; f~1 f tf ~( I~i~ 14~ ff IflH If :fl~ .~I~ If rf ie I~I' ,.I .e :f 't I~{ .,~" '~iE rEi~IC
K~ BUS KI

12 A6 6X 13

Depending on the kind of TACS control one wants to model. following guidelines
apply:

a) If the field voltage of the machine is to be controlled by exciter dynamics

which have been modelled using TACS. then the following is required:
KK: punch "71tt in columns 1-2, as a special request for the exciter connection.
VllI. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 23

BUS: The 6-character name of a TACS variable is to be punched in columns 3-8.

The numerical value of this TACS variable will then be used by the EMTP
logic for scaling the field voltage value EFD of this machine.

~:
- This "scaling" is not simply a multiplication factor: some "history terms"
are involved. Suppose that one wants to "scale" machine parameter EFD
using a TACS variable called VF. The following formulas apply:
EFD(l) = EFD(2) = EFD(O) * VF(O}
EFD(i} = EFD(i-l)*VF(i-2)/VF(i-3) (for i .GE. 3)
- Should the user want to code the logic of this TACS connection, but
temporarily bypass the associated dynamics, then set this TACS value to
"UNITY". Recall that this is the name of the built-in TACS source which
has output identically equal to 1.0.
- If no such a card is used, the EMTP logic will simply hold the field
voltage for this machine constant, at the value obtained by steady-state
solution.
KI: to be left blank.

b) If the mechanical power applied to any mass on the shaft system is to be

controlled by dynamics which have been modelled using TACS, then the following
is required:
KK: Punch "72" in columns 1-2, as a special request for the TACS control of
mechanical power.
BUS: The 6-character name of a TACS variable is to be punched in columns 3-8.
The numerical value of this TACS variable will then be used by the EMTP
logic as a multiplicative factor for scaling the otherwise-constant
(steady-state) mechanical power values.
Note:
- Should the user want to code the logic of this TACS connection, but
temporarily bypass the associated dynamics. then set this value to "UNITY".
- If no such a card is used for mass N, the EMTP logic will Simply hold the
external mechanical power applied to that mass constant (at whatever value
was dictated by the initial condition. calculation). Consequently, the
user can selectively control the mechanical power on different shaft
sections.
KI: Should contain the mass number of the mass under consideration (see parameter
"ML" , Class 4 data).

c) If the internal electrical machine yariables are to be passed into TACS, then
one data card must be specified for each such variable. The data card format
to be used is as follows:
KK: Punch "73" in columns 1-2, as a special request for the internal electrical
machine variables
BUS: The 6-character name of a TACS source whose value is to be equal to the
desired electrical machine variable at each time-step.
KI: Punch variable number in columns 15-17. The following Table summarizes the
variables which can be passed to TACS.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYHAHIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 24

Table II. Summary of variables accessible by TACS

Variable Output request number Units

ID 1 A
IQ 2 A
10 3 A
IF 4 A
IKD 5 A
10 6 A
IKQ 7 A
VD 8 V
VQ 9 V
VO 10 V
VF 11 V
MFORCE 12 A
MANO 13 Rad
TEO 14 Nmxl()6
TEXC 15 Nmxl06
PSID 16 Weber-turn
PSIQ 17 Weber-turn

where ID current in the d-axis armature winding

IQ current in the q-axis armature winding
10 armature winding zero-sequence current
IF field winding current
IKD current in the d-axis damper winding
10 current in the eddy-current winding
IKQ current in the q-axis damper winding
VD voltage applied to the d-axis
VQ voltage applied to the q-axis
VO zero-sequence voltage
VF voltage applied to the field winding; this will be a constant
voltage, unless the user explicitly specifies a connection
to TACS exciter dynamics as part of the Class 6 S.M. data
cards.
MFORCE the total mmf in the air-gap of the machine
MANO angle between the q- and d-axis components of the total mmf
TEO electromagnetic torque of the machine
TEXC electromagnetic torque of the exciter
PSID d-axis flux linkage
PSIQ q-axis flux linkage

d) If mechanical variables (e.g. mechanical angles Bit angular velocities Wit or

shaft torques T 1) of the shaft system are to be passed into TACS, then one data
card must be punched for each such variable. The data card format is as follows:
KK: Punch "74" in columns 1-2, as a special request for the access to S.M.
mechanical variables.
BUS: This field is to be punched with the name of the TACS source whose value
is to be controlled by the mechanical machine variable at each time-step.
VIII. THREE-PHASE J)YXJIMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 25

KI: Code number which identifies the mechanical variable in question:

for 8 punch i
j

for W I punch NUMAS + i

for T, punch 2xNUMAS + i
where
i mass number "ML" as specified in Class 4 S.M. data cards (mass cards)
NUMAS number of connected masses on the shaft system of this S.M. (specified
in Class 3 S.M. data cards).
~:
- Angles are passed into TACS in units of absolute radians; the value of
the TACS variable is increased 2njl(NPI2) radians every second. Remember
that the output of a mass angle is in degrees.
- The angular velocities passed into TACS. in radians/second, are absolute
veloci ties, while the output variables from Output Group 3 are deviations
from the synchronous speed, in radians/second too.
- Shaft torques are passed in million Newton-meters.

VIII-C-Z. Class Z 8M data cards

The end of a machine data cards is to be indicated by a special terminator card.
If the machine in question is not paralleled by one or more additional dynamic
S.M. source components, then a card bearing the text "FINISH" in columns 3-8 is
to be punched.

If a second dynamic synchronous machine is to be connected in parallel (armature

windings connected to the same busses) with the one just input, then the " FINISH It
card must be modified to read "FINISH PART", indicating to the EMTP that S.M. data
for this three-phase bus, to which armatures are connected, have only been partially
completed. Next come data cards for the second machine, beginning with Class 2
and ending with Class 7.
This procedure can be generalized to apply to as many machines as the user wants
to parallel on the same bus. For M machines, the first M~l has data cards which
end with a "FINISH PART" card. while the final one ends with a It FINISH It card,
indicating to the EMTP'that no other machines follow on that machine bus. Only
the first of the M machines has any Class 1 data cards, since this applies to the
common bus; all M-l following machines skip this data.

VIII-D. Illustratiye examples

To show the structure of data files which involve three-phase dynamic synchronous
machine modelling, some simple examples are shown in this section. The comments
for each case are aimed to help the user to understand the options chosen for each
test machine and the information contained in the output listing generated by the
program.
· VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 26

VIII-V-1. Example 1
Consider the system shown in Figure 6. A synchronous generator is connected to
a power network consisting of a transformer, a transmission line, compensated by
a series capacitor, and an infinite bus.

~1~21 I
I
;--t
I1-+-----...--8
BUS1 BUSO

~ %=0.075 Yo-0;610 Yo=" =0.045

I\.....
R, = 0.021 X, =0.236 Xc =75% Infinite
of X,
6./'6. Bus
26/500 kV
x -0.100

Impedances in p.u. on generator base power

Figure 6. System diagram for Example 1

The synchronous machine has the-following data:

a. Ratings
892.4MVA. 2 poles. 26 kV. 60 Hz

b. Air-gap line and saturation curve

1800 A Field current which produces rated voltage on the air-gap line
1907 A Field current which produces rated voltage (1 p.u.) on the no-load
saturation curve
3050 A Field current which produces 1.2 p.u. voltage on the no-load saturation
curve

All these values apply to the direct axis. The air-gap line and the saturation
curve of the quadrature axis are not known.

c. Electrical data
Ra - [Link]
X, = 0.130pu
Xd - 1.790pu
Xq = 1.710pu
Xd'-0.169pu
X q' == 0.228pu
Xd- - O. 135 pu
Xq- = 0.200 pu
LdO' - 4.300sec
LqO' == 0.850sec
Ldo - - 0.032sec
L q " - == 0.050sec
X0 - 0.130pu
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 27

The Canay's characteristic reactance is not known. it is supposed to have the same
value that the leakage reactance has. X,.

The armature winding are Wye-connected and the neutral is solidly grounded (Rn =
0.0 and Xn = 0.0).

d. Mechanical data
Mass Torque Frac- Inertia (sec) Spring constant
tion (pu Torque/rad)
HP 0.30 0.0928970 19.303
IP 0.26 0.1555890 34.929
LPA 0.22 0.8586700 52.038
LPB 0.22 0.8842150 70.858
GEN 0.8684950 2.822
EXC 0.0342165

The transformer has no losses and the reactance value is in per unit on the machine
base power.
The system is running under balanced steady-state with the following operating
conditions:

a. Infinite bus voltage

Voltage magnitude: 1.00 p.u. (p.u. value on 500 kV base)
Phase "a" angle: 0.0 degrees

b. Generator terminal voltage

Voltage magnitude: 1.05 p.u. {p.u. value on 26 kV base}
Phase "a" angle: 36.5 degrees
Before creating the data file, some calculations are needed in order to convert
data given in per unit to physical quantities.

The base impedance in both sides of the transformer is

High -vol tage side Z IIa5l/\ - 8:':.:0 - 280.143 (0)

26 2
Low-vol tage side Z IIasel - m:To - 0.75751 (0)

Taking into account that the lower side is delta-connected, the actual reactances
of each side, using the proper base, is

High-voltage side X /\ - o.~oo x 280.143 - 14.01 (0)

Low-voltage side XI_o.~ooX0.75751x3-0.1136 (0)

VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 28

No conversion is necessary for the electrical data of the machine as they are
standard manufacturer's data in per unit, which are accepted by the EMTP. However,
mechanical data are to be input in physical units; should the user want to input
these data in English units, the values can be calculated using the following
formula:
2xS
W R2 - Hx 1I0le X 23.7304 (million pound - Jeet 2 )
0)110. . 2

(million pound- JeeUrad)

being WR2 the moment of inertia

H the inertia constant, in seconds
Sbase the three-phase rated (base) power, in MVA
%ase the rated (base) speed, in radians/second
K the spring constant
Ku the spring constant, in pu Torque!rad
The data input for the synchronous machine of this example looks as follows:
BEGIN HEW DATA CASE
C
C TYPE-59 S.H. TEST CASE - EXAMPLE 1
C STEADY STATE INITIALIZATION
C
POWER FREQUENCY. 60
C
0.0001 0.0100 60.0 60.0
1 1 -1
5 5 20 20
C ----- Source impedance
BUS1-ABUSO-A 12.61
BUS1-BBUSO-B 12.61
.BUS1-CBUSO-C 12.61
C ----- Series capacitor (75% compensation)
BUSC-ABUS1-A 20168.
BUSC-BBUS1-B 20168.
BUSC-CBUS1-C 20168.
C ----- Transmission line
51BUS2-ABUSC-A 21.0 170.9
52BUs2-BBUSC-B 5.88 66.11
53BUS2-CBUSC-C
C ----- Step-up transformer
TRANSFORMER TRAN A
9999
1BUS3-ABUS3-C .1136 26.00
2BUS2-A 14 .01 288.67
TRANSFORMER TRAN A TRANB
1BUS3-BBUS3-A
2BUS2-B
TRANSFORKERTRAN A TRAN C
1BUS3-CBUS3-B
2BUS2-C
C ----- ConnectiYitr capacitors
BUS3-A 1.0
BUS3-B 1.0
BUS3-C 1.0
BLANK CARD ENDING BRANCH DATA.
BLANK CARD ENDING SWITCH DATA.
C ----- Infinite bus voltages
14BUSO-A 408248.3 60. 0.0 -1-
14BUSO-B 408248.3 60. -120.0 -1.
14BUSO-C 408248.3 60. 120.0 -1.
C ----- Synchronous generator specifications
59BUS3-A 22290.4 60. 36.5
BUS3-B
BUS3-C
TOLERANCES 20
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 29

PARAMETER FITTING 2.0

C --- Machine ratings
6 5 6 2 1.0 1.0 892.4 26.0 -1800.0 1907.0 3050.0
-1.
C --- Electrical parameters - Manufacturer's data
0.000 0.130 1.790 1.710 0.169 0.228 0.135 0.200
4.300 0.850 0.032 0.050 0.130
C --- Mechanical syst.. data
1 0.30 0.0276843 33.70161
2 0.26 0.0463672 60.98344
3 0.22 0.2558931 90.85449
4 0.22 0.2635058 123.7128
5 0.2588211 4.927003
6 0.0101969
BLANK CARD ENDING MASS CARDS
C --- OUtput data request
11
21
31
41
51
BLANK CARD ENDING OUTPUT REQUEST
FINISH
BLANK CARD ENDING SOURCE DATA.
C ----- Node voltage output request
BUS3-ABUS2-A
BLANK CARD ENDING SELECTIVE NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT REOUEST
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK CARD ENDING PLOT REQUEST.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
BLANK

When inspecting this file the following points can be noted:

1. The code 59 has been punched in columns 1-2 of the first Class. 1 card, indicating
that a three-phase dynamiC S.M. source is going to be input.

The machine is connected to the nodes BUS3-A, BUS3-B and BUS3-C.

Remember that the specified value of the voltage magnitude at the terminals of
the machine is the peak value. Since the machine is supposed to run under
balanced initial conditions, voltage magnitUde and phase angle of the second
and third cards are not specified.

2. The maximum number of iterations for the calculation of the rotor speed, parameter
NIOMAX, has been redefined using the TOLERANCFS card. This number is now 20.

3. A PARAMETER FIITING card is used to indicate that manufacturer's data (external

parameters) will follow in Class 3 data cards.

4. An extra minus sign has been added to parameter AGLINE. This sign is used as
a flag to indicate that the machine is saturable. A negative value (-1.0) for
AGLQ, on the next card, indicates that the air-gap line for the q-axis is not
known; in this case approximate values will be internally generated by the
program.

5. The field XCAN is left blank since the Canay' s characteristic reactance is not
known; the program will internally set XCAN = XL.
6. As an external mechanical torque is applied to several masses on the shaft
system, a fraction of the total torque is punched in the cards associated to
those masses.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 30

The field HICO ([Link] inertia) is punched in every mass card. while the
field HSP has not been punched in the card associated to the highest number
mass. Remember that the moment of inertia is to be punched in units of million
pound-feet2 when English units are used.

7. All machine variables are requested by punching 1 in column 4 (field ALL) of

every output group card.

8. This machine has no connections to Control Systems (TACS). Hence no Class 6

data card has been inserted.

9. The "FINISH" card at the end of the machine data deck indicates that this machine
is not paralleled by any additional S.M.

The output listing for this case is shown next.

c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD - 1. C data:[Link]
Marker card preceding new EMrP data cas.. BEGIIe !lEW DATA CASZ
c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD - 3. C
cc-nt card. IIVI'!I)C!) - 4. C TrP£-59 S.M. TEST CAS£ - EXI\I!PLE 1
c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD" 5. C STEADY STATE UIITIALIZATION
c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD" 6. C
_ _ r frequency STATPR" 6.00000000£+01 Hz. POWER FREQUENCY. 60
c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD" a. C
Misc. data. 1.000£-04 1.000£-02 6.000£+01 0.0001 0.0100 60.0 60.0
Misc. data. 1 1 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1 1 -1
Printout : 5 5 20 20 0 0 5 5 20 20
c . - n t card. JfIlIIDCD - 12. C ----- SOUrce i8pedance
Seri •• R-L-C. 0.000£+00 3.)45£-02 0.000£+00 BUS1-ABUSO-A 12.61
series a-L-C. 0.000£+00 3.)45Z-02 [Link]+OO BUSI-BBUSO-B 12.61
Seri •• a-LoCo 0.000£+00 3.)45£-02 0.000£+00 BUSI-CBUSO-C 12.61
c..-nt card. JfIlIIDCD" 16. C ----- Seri •• capacitor (75~ ~ation)
Series R-L-C. [Link]+OO 0.000£+00 5.350£-05 BUSC-ABUSI-A 20168.
Serie. R-L-C. [Link]+OO [Link]+OO 5.35O£-OS BUSC-BBUSI-B 20168.
Seri •• a-LoCo 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 5.3501-OS BUSC-CBUSI-C 20168.
co-nt card. JfIlIIDCD "20. C ----- Trens.i . . ion Une
lat of coupled a-L. 2.10000Z+01 4.533261-01 5UUS2-ABUSC-A 21.0 170.9
5.880£+00 1.754Z-01 0.0001+00 0.000£+00 [Link]+OO 52BUS2-BBUSC-B 5.88 66.11
5.040£+00 9.2651-02 5.0401+00 9.265£-02 1.092£+01 53BUS2-CBUSC-C
c..-nt card. JfIlIIDCD" 24. C -----Step-up transforaer
Set. Xforaer. 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 TRANSFORMER TRAN A
Special t ....ination-of-pointa card. 9999
Winding 1. [Link]+OO 1. 136OZ-01 2.6000Z+01 lBUS3-ABUS3-C .1136 26.00
Winding 2. [Link]+OO 1.4010Z+01 2. 8867Z+02 2BUS2-A 14.01 288.67
[Link] copy using [Link]..- "TRAN A· TRANSFORMER TRAN A TIUIIf B
Winding 1. (110 values .....s. since copy) 1BUS3-BBUS3-A
Winding 2. tNo value. . . . .d. aince copy) 2BUS2-.
Tranafo .... r copy using [Link]..- ·TRAN A· TRANSFORMER TRAN A TRAN C
Winding 1. (110 values .....s. aincecopy) 1BUS3-CBUS3-B
Winding 2. (110 Yal_ • .....s. aince copy) ZBUS2-C.
co-nt card. ICUMDCD - 35. C ----- Ccnnectiy1ty capacitors
seri •• R-L-C. 0.000£+00 0.0001+00 2.653£-09 BUS3-A 1.0
Seri •• a-L-C. 0.0001+00 0.000£+00 2.6531-09 BUS3-. 1.0
seri •• R-L-C. 0.000£+00 0.0001+00 2.653E-09 BUS3-C 1.0
Blank card ending branch.s. 1M. NTOT - 21 19 BLANK CARD ENDING BRANCB DATA.
lIlank carel ending • .,i tch... ICSWTCII" O. BLANK CARD ENDINGSWITCB DATA.
C..-nt card. NUllDCD - 41. C ----- Infinit. bUll voltag••
SOUrce. 4.08E+OS 6.00Z+01 0.001+00 -1.00£+00 148USO-A 408248.3 60. 0.0 -1.
SOUrce. 4.08Z+OS 6.00Z+01 -1.20£+02 -1.00E+OO 14811SO-. 408248.3 60. -120.0 -1.
SOUrce. 4.081+OS 6.00Z+01 1.20E+02 -1.00E+OO [Link]-C 40824e.3 60. 120.0 -1.
co-nt card. ICUMDCD - 45. C ----- SYncllronou. generator specifications
SOUrce. 2.23Z+04 6.00Z+01 3.65Z+01 -9.99Z+03 59BUS3-A 22290.4 60. 36.5
2nd pha•• of S.M. 2.22904E+04 -83.50 BUS3-B
3rd phase of S.M. 2.22904Z+04 -203.50 BUS3-C
[Link]. 1.001+02 1.00E-15 1.00£-16 20 TOLERANCES 20
[Link]. Park'. data. 2.0002+00 PARAMETER PITTIICG 2.0
C..-nt card. NIlIIDCD· 51. C --- Maclline ratings
4tll S.M. card. 6 5 6 0 2 1.000 1.000 6 S 6 2 1.0 1.0 892.4 26.0 -1800.0 1907.0 3OSO.0
q-axis. 0.000 -1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -1.
C..-nt card. NIlIIDCD - 54. C --- Electrical pareaeters - ManUfacturer'. data
5tll S.M. card. 0.0000 0.1300 1.7900 0.000 0.130 1.790 1.710 0.169 •• 228 0.135 0.200
6tll S.M. card. 4.3000 0.8500 0.0320 4.300 0.850 0.032 [Link] 0.130
C..-nt card. NIlIIDCD - 57. C --- Mechani cal syst_ data
Ma. . card 1 1 3.0001-01 2.768E-02 [Link]+OO 1 0.30 0.0276843 S3.70161
Mass card 2 2 2.6002-01 4.6372-02 0.0002+00 0.26 0.0463672 60.98344
Ma. . card 3 3 2.200£-01 2.559£-01 0.000£+00 3 0.22 0.2558931 90.85449
Mass card 4 4 2.200£-01 2.635£-01 0.000£+00 4 0.22 0.2635058 123.7128
Mass card 5 5 0.000£+00 2.588£-01 0.000£+00 5 0.2588211 4.927003
Ma,. card 6 6 0.0002-00 1. 020£-02 0.000£+00 6 0.0101969
Blank card t ....inating S.M. aas. carda. BLANK CARD ENDING MASS CARDS
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 31

Co..ent card. I'I\JPIDCD - 65. C OUtput data reque.t

5.". output reque.t card for cla •• 1. 11
5.". output reque.t card for cla•• 2. Z1
5.". output reque.t card for cla•• 3. 31
5.". output request card for cIa. . 4. 41
5.". output reque.t card for cIa •• 5. 51
lIlank card terwinating 5.". output ~t.. llANX CI\IUI EllDIIIG OUTPVI' IU!QUEST
End ot 0 S.".-TACS interface variables. FIIIISB
Blank card end. electric network .ource.. llANX CI\IUI EllDIIIG SOUIICII DATA.
Top -TAPSAV". IICBAIII' - ,
Top "TAPSAV". IICBAIII - 1
Total net_rk 10. . I'-loa. by • .-ing injecti.... - 7.1245444143%51+06
"-'CB 1 Data [Link] end initial condition. of neat . .chine follow. -------------------------------------________ _
"IUS3-A" Unit 1
~china reactance. end ...[Link]•• in [oIIIul. Quantiti•• labelecl a. iJlductances are in fact reactance.,:
1.720989911+02 Lf - .elf-inductance ot the d-axi. f1eldwindtng:
1.444444441+01 Lef - ... tual 1nductance be~ fiald end arasture:
1.659%29511+02 Lflal - [Link]-~r ... tual iJlductance for the d-axi.:
1.355939041+00 Ld - self-inductance of the d-axi. areature winding:
1.444444441+01 LeIal - ... tual inductance f .... areature to d-axb ~r:
1.664685091+02 utd - self-inductance of the d-axi. ~r windiftg:
1.908392171+02 Lg - •• If-1nductance of circuit 1 of the q-ax1.:
1.374832661+01 ~ - ... tual inductance. q-axi. circuit 1 to . . . .ture:
1.579266641+02 Lglcq - ... tual inductance. q-axi. circuit 1 to circuit 2:
1.295338411+00 Lq - .elf-inductance of the q-axi. areature winding:
1.374832661+01 Lekq - ...tual 1nductance. q-axi. circuit 2 to a . . . ture:
1.673421lill+02 Lkq - self-inductance of circuit 2 of the q-axi.:
9.847601971-02 Lo - [Link] .~ce iJlductance:
0.00000000•• 00 J t o . zero aequ."ce rea1acance;
1.406140911-01 Kf - [Link] of the d-axi. [Link] winding:
0.000000001+00 Ra - resistance of the . . . . ture:
4.067991471-01 RIcd - resbtance of the d-axi. ~r winding;
1.413862101+00 Rg - [Link] of circuit 1 of the q-axl.:
1.190409891-01 RIcq - [Link] of circuit 2 of the q-axi.:
I'Iechanical par_t.... in phy.1cal units. . . [Link] by the = 1 _ heading. thet fo11_.
_ t of inertia 5elf....[Link] coeff1cients of _ . ~tual-cSallping coeff. Torsional .pring ccmatant
of rotor _ . Speed_i.Uon [Link]-speecl ( ..ith foll_ing _ ... (with following . . . . 1
"111ion [n-a/red/sec··21 ~llion [n-a/red/.ecl ~llion [n-_/red/sec--21 "1111on [n_/recll
1.16664341-03 0.0000000I.00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001.00 4.57096961+01
1.95395901-03 0.0000000I+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001.00 8.27122061+01
1.07135151-02 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001.00 1. 23%26491.02
1.11043911-02 0.00000001.00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001.00 1. 6779241£+02
1.09069731-02 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 6.6825237£+00
4.29707301-04 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001.00
Tabulat10n of: negative s~ce current. CMNEG. ~ - 4.51421011351-11 -1.6237270
z_ro .~ce current. ~El. CAZEl - 3.00745012311-11 -0.2547513
Tot.l current [Link] into the net_rk . t the _rator bus. in. pha•• coordinates. FOr [Link].l . .~s. this la the COIIbinad
total for all of _ . The fir.t 11_ [Link] the current. . . found by the phasor net_rk aolution. end they w1l1 be unbalancecl
i f the nat_rk la. The 2nd line . _ only the _itive-.equwace coooponM\ta ot thea.. ~itude. of currents are in unit. of
(up.).
Pha.e -.- injection Pha•• -b- injection Pha.e "c" [Link]
~itud. Degree. ~itude Deg..... ~itude Deg.....
Actual: 1.72835521+04 15.1863853 1.72135521+04 -104.1136147 1.72135521+04 135.8863853
Poe • •eq.: 1.72835521+04 15.1163853 1.72135521+04 -104.1136147 1.72835521+04 135.8863853
Arwature current. of generator in rotating reference f r _ (d-q-o coordinat •••• in unite of [_re.).
Id Iq [0
-1.679666460311+04 1.281230S41761+04 5.040931304591-11
Podtiva-_ence ~t of _ r a t o r areature current in phaHo coordinat ••• in units of [_re.l.
~ture
I'Iagni tude
1.72835521.04
Deg.....
of phas. -a-

15.8863853
Mgn! tude
1.72135521.04
A~tur. of phase -b-
. Degree.
-104.1136147
A~ture
""gn! tude
1.72835521+04
of phea. "c"
Degree.
135.8863853
[Link] current of the [Link] in unit. of [ _.... I. Total dc [Link]
3.61945797121.03 3.61945797121+03
[Link]~lcal torque of the generator in unit. of [_lIlian n-.J. tot~ de [Link]
1.43474811061+00 1.4347481106£+00
Exciter .lectroaachanical torque in units of [aillion n-a). Total dc [Link]
4.88635258591-03 4. 8863525859E-03
critical level of total air-gap MMF to begin saturation. in units of [up.l: 1.714298844541+03 1.60523487584£+03
All rotor ....... hev. angul.r velocity OI!IIGA" 3.769911111+02 [recliana/ . .c). l!echanical angl •• of rotor . . . . . . tallow. in
units of [Degreesl: 160.5132177 159.9119257 159.4134641 158.8913500 158.3997606 151.3578651
Shaft torque. [Link] between rotor . . . . . . "i· and "i+l", for i-1. 2 . . . . ~ - 1. unite.... [a1111on n-_). It is to
be noted that the [Link] ~ing torque ia [Link] t .... thia calculation. due to the constant. uniforw speed of the .teady state.
0.43189033901+00 0.80619529941.00 0.11229148811.01 0.14396344631.01 0.48863525861-02
Top -TAPSAV". IICBAIII - 8
c - . t card. JIUIIIDCD - 74. Ic ----- _ voltage output request

Blank card ending reque.t. tor output variabl...

I
Type-59 5.". nu.i>er 1 begin. operation on ~t. 2 and 3.
card ot n . . . . for ti_-nep loop output. IUS3-AIIIIS2-A
BLANK CARD EllDIIIG SILECTIVE IIODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT REQUEST
coluan headings for the 34 ~p output variabl •• follow. The•• are divided aaong the 5 po •• ibl. cla••e • • • follow •••..
Fir.t 2 output variable. are [Link]-network voltage [Link]. (upper voltage .inu. l __ r voltagel:
lIext 32 output variabla. partain to Type-59 5.". ~t. ([Link] are generatecl [Link]:
Step Ti_ IUS3-A BUS2-A MeR 1 MeR 1 "-'CB 1 "-'CB 1 MeR 1 MeR 1 MeR "-'CB
[D [Q 10 IF [KD IG IKQ. IA
"-'CB IIACB 1 MeR "-'CB 1 "-'CB IIACB 1 MeR MeR 1 "-'CB "-'CB
IB IC lYO PlfORCE IVIHG TQ GEM TQ IXC lING 1 lING 2 lING 3
"-'CB 1 MeR MeR MeR 1 IIACB MCB 1 MeR 1 MCB 1 "-'CB 1 IIACB 1
lING 4 lING 5 lING 6 VEL 1 VEL 2 VEL 3 VEL 4 VIL 5 VEL 6 TOR 1
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAKIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 32

MCII 1 .....CII 1 MCII 1 MCII 1

"lOR 2 TOR 3 TOR 4 TOR 5
0 0.0 17918.291 419759.041 -16796.665 12882.3054 .50409£-10 3619.45797 -.3677!-11 .36415£-13 -.476!-12 16623.4302
-4214.5157 -12408.915 -508.94679 2399.24255 .453027055 1.43474811 .004886353 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399761 158.357865 .56843!-13 0.0 -.5684E-13 0.0 0.0 0.0 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1. 43963446 .004886353
.U-3 17405.6518 418553.96 -16796.692 12882.2736 .56429!-123619.45817 .002168509 .540219£-3 .001886795 16433.3165
-3579.'018 -12.53.515 -508.94679 2399.24239 .453026937 1.43474665 .004886353 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
15'.'9135 158.399761 158.357865 .56843!-13 .56843!-13 -.5684!-13 .22737£-12 .67083'E-8 -.3024E-I0 .431890339
••06195299 1.12291488 1.43963446 .0048.6353
2 .21:-3 1686'.6262 416750.586 -16796.72 12882.2394 .58791£-12 3619.45837 .004346248 .001119425 .003906633 16219.8535
-2939.9988 -13279.855 -508.94679 2399.24222 .45302681 1.43474509 .004.86353 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399761 15'.357865 .56843£-13 .11369E-12 -.5684E-13 .20460-11 .272816£-7 -.12085!-9 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291.... 1.43963446 .004886353
3 .3E-3 16307.257' 414357.908 -16796.746 12882.2032 .23599.-11 3619.45856 .006444689 .001734927 .006049899 15983.'3429
-2296.0172 -13687.326 -508.94679 2399.24204 .453026675 1.43474334 .004886353 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
151.'9135 158.399761 158.357865 0.0 .17053£-12 -.5684!-13 .85834!-11 .63OO48!-7 -.26921!-9 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1. 43963446 .004886353
4 .4£-3 15723.0938 411373.419 -16796.773 12182.1688 .16503£-11 3619.45877 .00852544 .002320062 .008083569 15724.1213
-1648.7739 -14075.347 -508.946792399.24186 .453026546 1.43474173 .0048.6354 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399761 158.357865 -.1137£-12 .22737£-12 -.5684E-13 .25125.-10 .114105!-6 -.469988-9 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1. 43963446 .004886353
5 .5!-3 15116.198'407807.164 -16796.7'8 12882.1339 .26025!-12 3619.45896 .010503858 .002912944 .010140944 15442.5561
-999.1879 -14443.368 -508.94679 2399.24169 .453026415 1.43474004 .0048.6354 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399761 158.357865 -.1705!-12 .284221:-12 -.5684E-13 .59515.-10 .1'03128-6 -.715098-9 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1.43963446 .004886353
10 .001 11778.991 381405.781 -16796.917 12.81.959 -.1579.-12 3619.45997 .019792886 .005897038 .020446008 13714.6695
2251.53619 -15966.206 -50'.94679 2399.2408 .453025755 1.43473133 .004886355 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.'9135 158.399761 158.357865 -.2274E-12 .45475!-12 .34106£-12 .9299018-9 .7458698-6 -.21618E-' .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1.43963442 .004.86354
15 .0015 8024.07399341493.781 -16797.022 12881.7801 .4716411-13 3619.46096 .027788526 .008962382 .030950031 11500.9761
5422.5045 -16923.481 -508.94679 2399.23988 .453025071 1.43472183 .004886357 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399761 158.357865 -.4547!-12 .7389611-12 .40927!-11 .47509211-8 .1726328-5 -.212488-' .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1.43963432 .004886358
20 .002 3985.34285 289484.626 -16797.113 12881.5971 .51185£-13 3619.46194 .03460656 .01211099 .0416591748879.89346
8401.38832 -17281.282 -508.'4679 2399.23894 .453024362 1.43471156 .004886358 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
15'.89135 158.399761 158.357865 -.454711-12 .7389611-12 .23363E-I0 .152099E-7 .3152548-5 .3237978-8 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291488 1.43963412 .004886366
40 .004 -12107.958 2289.96161 -16797.32 12'80.8312 -.1613E-11 3619.46527 .048977131 .025415962 .086105131 -3676.5922
16463.4419 -12786.85 -508.94679 2399.23495 .453021297 1.43466283 .0048.6362 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.399762 158.357865 -.108E-11 .1'872E-I0 .1513858-8 .25597211-6 .1387358-4 .217413E-6 .431890339
.806195299 1.12291486 1.43963153 .00488647
60 .006 -21637.936 -2'6145.91 -16797.237 12880.0373 -.106411-11 3619.46667 .040146994 .039414002 .131561803 -14239.885
15601. 7182 -1361.8336 -508.'94679 2399.23085 .453017939 1.43460233 .004.86364 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158;89135 158.399764 158.357865 .716238-11 .462535E-9 .17675311-7 .13476U-5 .337218-4 .130879E-5 .431890339
.806195298 1.122914" 1.43962405 .004886768
80 .008 -19438.671 -419470.86 -16796.81 12879.3049 -.6232E-12 3619.46467 .00519098 .052573377 .172762947 -17084.229
6283.46554 10800.7635 -508.94679 2399.22717 .453014604 1.43453482 .0048.6362 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.89135 158.39977 158.357866 .127272E-9 .460034E-I .101013!-6 .436992E-5 .633156E-4 .445837E-5 .431890339
••0619529 1.12291405 1. 43960892 .004887371
100 .01 -6702.3258 -325413.66 -16796.064 12878.7659 -.1709E-l1 3619.45838 -.05277804 .062605733 .202015976 -10668.042
-6440.0962 17108.1385 -508.94679 2399.22463 .453011802 1.43447065 .004886353 160.513288 159.971926 159.413464
158.891351 151.399779 158.357866 .115.5311-1 .270604!-7 .38821111-6 .1077948-4 .1013718-3 .113208!-4 .431890338
.806195256 1.12291232 1.43958391 .00488.363

Note that every variable is identified bya pair of 6-character names, the first
name (upper name of the printed pair) identifies the .synchronous machine in order
of input; in this example there is only one machine. The second name (lower name
of the printed pair) identifies the variable as documented in section VIII.C.5.

Since the machine has more than one mass on the shaft system, mechanical variables
are identified by using the number associated to each mass in the second 6-character
name. The name ANG is used to identify variables of the Output Group 2 (mechanical
angles), the name VEL is used for variables of the Output Group 3 (deviations of
the mechanical speeds from the synchronous speed) and the name TOR is used for
variables of the Output Group 4 (torques between masses). Note that 6 variables
of groups 2 and 3 are printed, but only 5 pertaining to group 4.

VIII-D-2. ExaTlU2le 2; Two machines running in parallel

Figure 7 shows the system diagram of this second example, two machines running in
parallel are connected to a power network consisting of a transformer, a transmission
line and an infinite bus.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 33

I B~S21
Ro-0.003
R,=[Link]
I
Xo-0.032
X,=0.011
.
BUSt BUSO
Xo=X,=O.OO9
.8 "-'
Infinite
6./'6. Bus
'3.8/220 kV
X =0.040

Fig.7. System diagram for Example 2.

The synchronous machines of this case have the following data:

GENERATOR 1
a. Ratings
90 MVA. 8 poles. 13.8 kV. 50 Hz. 280 A (field current)
b. Electrical data
Ra - O.038pu X , - O.220pu
X d -l.200pu X q- O.700pu

X~-O.3S0pu

X~- O.2S0pu X~- O.230pu

-r~o - 6.240sec

-r~o - O.032sec -r~o - O.060sec

Xo· [Link]

c. Mechanical data
H = 4.5 sec

GENERATOR 2
a. Ratings
76 MVA. 8 poles, 13.8 kV. 50 Hz, 250 A (field current)
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 34

b. Electrical data
Ra - O.OO4pu X , - O.17Spu
[Link] Xq - O.68Spu
X~- O.310pu

X~- O.210pu X~-O.182pu

-r~o - S.8S0sec
't~o - O.036sec -r~a - O.073sec
X a - O.132pu

c. Mechanical data
H = 5.7 sec

Both machines are not saturable. they have the armature windings wye-connected and
the neutrals solidly grounded. Canay's characteristic reactance is not known for
any machine.

The transformer has no losses and the value of its reactance is in per uni t on 100
MVA base.

The system is running under balanced steady state with the following operating
conditions:

a. Infinitue bus voltage

Voltage magnitude: 1.00 p.u. (p.u. value on 220 kV base)
Phase "a" angle: 0.0 degrees

b. Generator terminal voltages

Voltage magnitude: 1.04 p.u. (p.u. value on 13.8 kV base)
Phase "a" angle: 0.0 degrees

c. The power is split among the two generators assuming the following proportion ali ty
factors
Real power - Machine 1 = 0·55 Machine 2 = 0.45
Reactive power - Machine 1 = 0.55 Machine 2 = 0.45

Procedures to convert p. u. reactance of the transformer and mechanical parameters

of both machines to ac~ual values are similar to those studied in Example 1.

The data deck for both machines is given next.

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C
C TYPE-59 S.M. TEST CASE - EXAMPLE 2
C STEADY STATE INITIALIZATION
C
POWER FREQUENCY. 50
C
0.0002 0.0100 50.0 50.0
1 1 -1
5 5 20 10
C ----- Source impedance
BUS1-ABUSO-A 4.356
VIII. THREE-PHASE DY1QMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 35

BUS1-BBUSO-B 4.356
BUS1-CBUSO-C 4.356
C ----- Transmission line
51BUSZ-ABUS1-A 1.45Z 15.488
5ZBUSZ-BBUS1-B 0.484 5.3Z4
53BUSZ-CBUS1-C
C ----- Step-up transformer
TRANSFOJUtER TRAN A
9999
1BUS3-ABUS3-C .1143 13.80
ZBUs2-A 9.680 127.02
TRANSFORMER TRAN A TRAN B
1BUS3-BBus3-A
ZBus2-B
TRANSFOJUtER TRAN A TRAN C
1BUS3-CBUS3-B
2BUS2-C
C ----- Connectivity capacitors
BUs3-A 1.0
BUS3-B 1.0
BUS3-C 1.0
BLANK CARD ENDING BRANCH DATA.
BLANK CARD ENDING SWITCH DATA.
C ----- Infinite bus voltage.
14BUSO-A 1796Z9.Z 50.0 0.0 -1.0
14BUSO-B 1796Z9.2 50.0 -lZO.O -1.0
14BUSO-C 179629.2 50.0 lZ0.0 -1.0
C ----- Synchronous machine specifications
59BUs3-A 11718.36 50.0 34.0
BUS3-B
Bus3-C
C ----- Firat generator
PARAMETER FITTING 2.0
C --- Machine ratings
1 1 8 0.55 0.55 90.0 13.8 Z80.0
BLANK CARD - NO SATURATION MODELING
C --- Machine parameters - Manufacturer's data
0.038 0.220 1.Z00 0.700 0.350 0.700 0.250 0.Z30
6.240 0.032 0.060 0.150
C --- Mechanical syst_ data
1 1.0 3.116092
BLANK CARD ENDING MASS CARDS
C Output data request
51
1 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 8 11
21
31
BLANK CARD ENDING OUTPUT REOUI!!ST
FINISH PART
C ----- Second generator
PARAMETER FITTING 2.0
C --- Machine ratings
1 1 8 0.45 0.45 76.0 13.8 250.0
BLANK CARD - NO SATURATION MODELING
C --- Machine parameters - Manufacturer's data
0.004 0.175 1.150 0.685 0.310 0.685 0.210 0.18Z
5.850 0.036 0.073 0.13Z
C --- Mechanical system data
1 1.0 3.333065
BLANK CARD ENDING MASS CARDS
C --- OUtput data request
"51
1 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 8 11
Z1
31
BLANK CARD ENDING OUTPUT REQUEST
FINISH
BLANK CARD ENDING SOURCE DATA.
C ----- Node voltage output request
BUSI-ABUS2-ABUS3-A
BLANK CARD ENDING SELECTIVE NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT REQUEST.
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK CARD ENDING PLOT REQUEST.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

The following points can be remarked from this data file:

VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 36

1. Since the two machines are connected to the same nodes, the Class 1 data cards
are common to both of them.

2. No saturation is considered for any machine; in this case, parameter AGLINE is

positive in the first Class 3 S.M. data card and the next card is left blank.

3. Reduced order models are used, the g-winding on the q-axis is to be dropped for
both machines. Note that field XQQ is punched equal to field XQ and TQOP is
left blank.
4. A proportionality factor is used to split the power among the machines, the
same values for both, real and reactive powers, 55% for the first machine and
45% for the second one.
5. There is only one mass on each shaft system, therefore, the total external
mechanical torque is applied to this mass (EXTRS = 1.0), in both machines.

6. A selective request of variables is made for Output Group 1 (electrical variables)

by punching flag ALL = 0 and identifying the number of the variable to be output.
Due to the fact that there is only one mass per shaft system, flag ALL must be
set to 1 for requesting mechanical variables of Output Groups 2 and 3. For the
same reason, no variable of Output Group 4 (torques between masses) can be
requested. The output groups are not in order, because it is not necessary to
keep the natural order.
7. A "FINISH PART" card indicates the end of data pertaining to the first machine
and that the machine is paralleled by one (or more) additional machine(s). A
"FINISH" card at the end of the second machine data deck indicates that there
is no more machines connected in parallel to the same nodes.

The output listing generated for this second case is shown next.
co-nt card. JI\IIIIDCD - 1. C data:[Link]
Marker card preceding new EMTP data case. aEGIK NEW DATA CASE
c:c-en t card. JI\IIIIDCD - 3. C
co..ant card. NUMllCD - 4. C TYPE-59 S.M. TEST CAS£ - EXAMPLE 2
co..ant card. JI\IIIIDCD - 5. C STEADY STATE INITIALIZATION
c:c-en t ca rd. NUMllCD - 6. C
N_ power frequency STATFR - 5.00000000E+01 Bz. POWER FREQUENCY. 50
co..ant card. JI\IIIIDCD - 8. C
Misc. data. 2.000£-04 1.000£-02 5.000£+01 0.0002 0.0100 SO.O SO.O
Misc. data. 1 1 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1 1 -1
Printout : 5 5 20 10 0 0 5 5 20 10
C~t card. NUllDCD - 12. C ----- SOurce l~ce
Series R-L-C. 0.000£+00 1.387£-02 0.000£+00 8US1-ABUSO-A 4.356
Series R-L-C. [Link]+OO 1.387£-02 [Link]+OO BUS1-aausO-a 4.356
Series R-L-C. [Link]+OO 1.387£-02 [Link]+OO aUS1-CauSO-c 4.356
c:c-ent card. NUMllCD - 16. C -----Transahsion line
1st of coupled R-L. 1.45200E+00 4.92998£-02 51BUS2-ABUS1-A 1.452 15.488
4.840E-01 1.695E-02 [Link]+oo 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 52BUS2-BBUS1-a 0.484 5.324
3.227E-01 1.078E-02 3.227£-01 1.078£-02 8.067£-01 53BUS2-CBUS1-C
[Link] card. NUMllCD - 20. C ----- Step-up trandoraar
sat. Xforaer. 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 [Link]+OO TRANSJIORMER TRAN A
Special teraination-of-polnU card. 9999
Winding 1. [Link]+oo 1.1430£-01 1.3800£+01 1BUS3-ABUS3-C .1143 13.80
Winding 2. 0.0000£+00 9.6800£+00 1.2702£+02 2BUS2-A 9.680 127.02
[Link] copy using reference naae -TItAN A- TRANSFORMER TRAN A TRAN B
Winding 1. (No values read. since copYI 1BUS3-BBUS3-A
Winding 2. (110 values read. since copyl 2BUS2-B
[Link] copy using raference naae -TRAM A- TRANSFORMER TRAN A TRAN C
Winding 1. (No values read. since copYI IBUS3-CBUS3-B
Winding 2. (No values read~ since copy) 2BUS2-C
Cosssan t card. NUMllCD - 31. C ----- COnnectivity capacitors
Series R-L-C. [Link]+oo 0.000£+00 3.183£-09 BUS3-A 1.0
Series R-L-C. 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 3.183£-09 BUS3-8 1.0
Series R-L-C. 0.000£+00 0.000£+00 3.183£-09 BUS3-C 1.0
Blank card ending branch.s. IBR. NTOT - 18 16 BLANK CARD ENDING BRAKC/I DATA.
Blanx card ending switches. KSWTCH" O. BLANK CARD ENDING SWITCH DATA.
Ca..ent card. NUMDCD - 37. C ----- Infinite bu. voltages
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 37

source. 1.80£+05 5.00£+01 0.00£+00 -1.00£+00 14BUSO-1I 179629.2 50.0 0.0 -1.0
SOUrce. 1.80£+05 5.00£+01 -1.20£+02 -1.00£+00 14IUSO-. 179629.2 50.0 -120.0 -1.0
SOUrce. 1.80E+05 5.00£+01 1.20£+02 -1.00E+OO 14111SO-C 179629.2 50.0 120.0 -1.0
eo-en~ card. NUMDCII - oil. c ----- synchronous .achine _peci:flcat1ons
SOUrce. 1.17£+04 5.00£+01 3.40£+01 -9.99£+03 59BUS3-A 11118.36 50.0 34.0
2nd pha.e of S.M. 1.17184£+04 -86.00 BUS3-B
3rd phe.e of S.M. 1.17184£+04 -206.00 IUS3-C
C.-ent card. JnIIIDCD. 45. C ----- Firu _ r a t o r
Optiaize Park'. dat•• PlIIIMl:1'EIl FlTTIJIG 2.0
eo-ent card. JnIIIDCD. 41. C --- "*chine rating.
4th S.N. card. 1 1 0 0 • 0.550 0.550 1 1 • 0.55 0.55 90.0 13 •• 280.0
q-axi., 0.000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 llAIQ[ CIIRlI - 110 SllTllllllTI CIII' IIOD£LIJIG
eo-ent card. JIUIUICII. 50. C --- Machine [Link] - Manufacturer'. data
5th S.M. card. 0.0380 0.2200 1.2000 0.0311 0.220 1.200 0.100 0.350 0.100 0.250 1).230
6th S.M. card. 6.2400 0.0000 0.0320 6.240 0.032 0.060 0.150
eo-ent card. JIUIUICII. 53. C --- Mechanical . p t _ data
"* •• card 1 1 1.000£+00 3.116£+00 0.000£+00 1 1.0 3.116092
Blank card te~1nat1ng S.M . . . . . card•• BlAIQ[ CIIRlI ENDING _ CIIIIDS
eo-ent card. JnIIIDCD. 56. C OUtput data request
S.N. output requ... t card for cla. . 5. 51
S.M. output reque.t card for cla•• 1. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 14
S.M. output reque.t card for cla. . 2. 21
S.N. output reque.t card for cla•• 3. 31
Blank card te~inating S.M. output requeU •• BlAIQ[ CIIRlI ENDIIIG OUTPUT IlBOI/EST
End of 0 TACS int .. [Link].. [Link] follow •• FllfISB PI\IIT
co..ent card. JnIIIDCD. 63. C ----- 5econd generator
Optl.1ze Parle". data. 2.000£+00 PARAMETER FITTING 2.0
co..en t card. JnIIIDCD. 65. C --- "*chiJ18 rating.
4th S.N. card. 1 1 0 0 8 0.450 0.450 1 1 8 0.45 0.45 76.0 13 •• 250.0
q-axi.. 0.000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 BlAIQ[ CIIRlI - JfO SllTIIIIIITION IIODELIlfG
co..ent card. JIUIUICII. liB. C --- Machine parl!lJl8terw - Manufacturer' _ elata
5th S.M. card. 0.0040 0.1150 1.1S00 0.004 0.175 1.150 0.685 0.310 0.685 0.210 0.182
6th S.N. card. 5.8500 0.0000 0.0360 5.850 0.036 0.073 0.132
co..ent card. JnIIIDCD - 71. C --- Mechanical syU_ data
"*•• card 1 1 1.000£+00 3.333£+00 0.000£+00 1 1.0 3.333065
Blank card te~inat1ng S.N . . . . . cards. BlAIQ[ CIIRlI ENDING NllSS CIIIIDS
eo-ent card. NUMDCII· 14. C --- OU~PUt data ~t
S.M. output reque.t card for cl. . . 5. 51
S.M. output reque.t card for el... 1. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 14
S.M. output reque.t card for cia•• 2. 21
S.N. output requeu card for cla. . 3. 31
Blank card t .. ~1nat1ng S.M. DDtpUt requests. BlAIQ[ CIIIID ENDIlfG OUTPUT I!EQVl!ST
End of 0 S.M.-TACS interfaes . .riBbles. FllfISB
Blank card _ electric ne~rk source•• BlAIQ[ CIIRlI ENDIJIG ~ DATil.
Top "TIIPSIIV·, IfCIIIIIlf· 6
Top -TIIPSIIV-. IfCIIIIIlf· 8
Tot.1 na~rk 10.. P-lo.. by .uaaing injectiDftS. 1. 851491291313E+05
MIlCH 1 Dat. par_t .. ra and initial conditiDftS of ...... t .ac:bJJ18 follow.
-BUS3-1I- [Link] 1
Machine reactances and [Link]•• in ( _ . ] . Quantities [Link] . . inductance. ar. in fact reactance.):
1. 35748883£+03 Lf - .elf-inductance of the d-axi. field winding:
4.92857143£+01 Laf . . . . tual inductance between field and . . . .ture:
1. 17138692!+03 Lfkd • fiald-~r _tuel inductance for tM d-axb:
2.5392oooo!+00 Ld • _If-inductance of the d-axio a . . . ture winding;
4.92857143£+01 Lakd - _tual inductance froe . . . .ture to d-axb "-<tr;
1.21755480£+03 LXd - .elf-inductance of the d-axio daaper winding:
5. 73740533!+02 Lg - .elf-inductance of circuit 1 of the q-azta:
[Link]!+OO Lag - ... tual inductance. q-axb circuit 1 to . . . . ture:
[Link]!+OO LgJeq - _tual inductance. q-axb circuit 1 to circuit 2:
1.4812oooo!+00 Lq - .elf-inductance of the q-axio ..... ture winding:
2. 41399417!+01 Lakq . . . . tual inductance. q-azts circuit 2 to ..... ture:
5. 85941179!+02 Lkq " •• If-inductance of circuit 2 of the q-azt.:
3. 17400000!-ol 1.0 • zero _equance indUctance:
8.04080000.-02 Ro - zero sequence reaiatance;
7.10863533£-01 Rf - resiatance of the d-axb [Link] winding:
8.04080000£-02 ... - resiatance of the [Link]:
2.00343385£+01 Rkd - resistance of the d-axia daaper winding:
0.00000000£+00 a g " [Link] of circuit 1 of the q-exi.:
3.10854951!+01 Rkq - [Link] of circuit 2 of the q-azts:
Mechanical par_tera in physical units. . . [Link] by tM co1 _ _ ing. that follow.
""-nt of inerU. Self-daaping coefficient. of . . . . Mutual-daaping coeff. Torsional .pring constant
of rotor . . . . [Link] [Link] (with following " •• 1 (with following . . . . 1
Nillion [n-_/rad/ ••c ••2] Million [n-_/r.d/.ec] Million [n-a/rad/.ec··2] Million [n-e/r&d]
1.3131515£-01 [Link]!+OO 0.0000000£+00 0.0000000£+00 0.0000000£+00
Tabulation of: neg.U. . aequence current. alNEG. CI\II!G. 2.4066854341£-11 3.2401646
zero .equence curren~. CMZER. CllZER • 2.4063113984£-12 1.5701963
Tot.l current injected into the ne~r" . t the [Link] bus. in pha•• coordinat.... For parallel . .china•• this is the coabined
tot.l for all of~. The fir.t 11ne displays the currents . . found by the phaaor network solution. and they will be unbalanced
i f the network b. The 2nd 11ne . _ only the [Link] ~ts of the_. "*9Ritudlla of currents .re in unit. of
[-p.].
Pha.. -.- injection Pha.e -b- injection injection
"*gni tude Degree. "*gni tude Degree. "*gnitude Degree.
Actual: 8.0509394£+03 3.6261425 8.0509394£+03 -116.3738575 8.0509394£+03 123.6261425
Po•• seq.: 8.0509394£+03 3.6261425 8.0509394!+03 -116.3138575 8.0509394£+03 123.6261425
[Link] current. of generator in rotating reference f r _ I d-q-o [Link].l. in units of [eaperas].
Id lq 10
-3.70541628614£+03 3.25215311026£+03 2.55205363316£-28
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 38

Po.l~lve-.equanC8 [Link] of generator [Link] current In phase coordinate•• in units of [ _ r e . ) .

[Link] af phase -.- Araature ofpha•• -b- Araature of pha.. ·e·
Magnitud. Degree. Magni tude Deg..... Magni tude Deg .....
4.0254697E+03 3.6261425 4.02546971!+03 -116.37311575 4.0254697E+03 123.6261425
Fi.1d current of the generator in units of [ _.... ]. Tot.1 dc [Link]
4.7259603654E+02 4. 7259603654E+02
[Link] torqwa of the [Link] in un! t. of [ailli.,.. n-a). total de [Link]
•• 0214592897E-ol 8.0214592897E-ol
Critical level of total air-gap MMF to begin saturation. in unit. of [.-p.) , 1. 71429884454E+03 1.60523487584E+03
All rotor ....... have angu1.r velocity DImGI\ - 7.153981638+01 [radi.... /.ac). Mecl1aft1cel ang1 •• of rotor . . . . . . follow. in
units of [Degree.), 35.5883776
MCB 2 Data par_ters and initial conditions of neat _ i n e follow.
-8US3-A - unit 2
Machine reactance. and [Link] •• in [ _ I . Quantiti •• 1.ba1ad as inductance. . . . . in fact .... ctance."
1.455410318+03 Lf - •• If-inductance of the d-aa1. fi.1d winding;
5.520000008+01 Laf - ... tual inductance ba~ [Link] and _ t u... ;
1.247179498+03 Lfkd - tie1d-~r ...tua1 inductance tor the d-aa1.;
2.881657891+00 L4 - ••1f-inductance ot the d-. .i. _ t u ... winding;
5.520000008+01 LaIcd - ... tul inductance trDII .raature to d-aa1. [Link];
1.306945418+03 LXd - ••1f-inductance of the d-aa1. [Link] winding;
6.523708098+02 Lg - ••alf-inductance of circuit 1 ot the q-aai.:
[Link]+oo Lag - IlUtul Inductance. q-aa1. circuit 1 to ...... tu... ;
0.000000008+00 Lgkq - IlUtlUl1 inductance. q-aa1. circuit 1 to circuit 2:
1.716465791+00 Lq - ••1f-inductance of the q-axi • •raeture winding;
2.887384628+01 Lakq - ... tlIA1 inductance. q-aa1. circuit 2 to araeture;
6.614495288+02 Lkq - .elf-inductance of Circuit 2 of the q-aa1.;
3.307642111-01 1.0 - zero .equence inductance:
1.002315798-02 Ro - zero .equence [Link];
8.152364488-01 Rf - .... [Link] of the d-aa1. fi.1d winding;
1.002315791-02 Ra - [Link] of the _ture;
2.045943111+01 Rkd - [Link]. of the d-aa1. [Link] winding;
0.000000008+00 Rg - .... istance of circuit 1 of the q-aa1.;
2.884190748+01 Rkq - .... [Link] of circuit 2 of the q-aai.;
Mechanical par_t.r. in phydcal units. . . [Link] by the col.... heading. that follow.
Moaant of inertia self-daaping coefficiant. of . . . . MUtlIA1~ing coeff. Torsianal spring constant
of rotor . . . . Speed-deviation Ab.o1ut_apaad fwith following _"I fwith follOWing _ . . I
Million [n-a/red/aec**Zl Million [n-a/red/sac) Million [n-a/rad/aec··2) Million (n-a/rad]
1.40458618-01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000008+00 0.00000008+00
Tabulation of, negative .equence cur...... t. atIiBG. CAIIl!G - 1.96910626431-11 3.2401646
zero sequence current. Cl'lZER. CAZER - 1.96884932608-12 1.5707963
Total current injectad into the network at the generator_. in phase coordinate.. For parallel _c:h1nas. thh is the COIIbined
total for all of thea. The first lin. displays the cur......t. a. found by the [Link] network solution. and they will be unbalanced
i f the network la. The 2nd line ahow. only the poslti ......equance ~t. of tha... Magnitude. of currents are in unit. of
[eap.] •
_ . "a- injection ...... -b- injection Pbaae ·e· injection
Magnitude Degree.
Magnitude Degree. llagnitude Deg.....
ACtllAl: 8.05093948+03 3.6261425 8.05093941+03 -116.3738575 8.05093948+03 123.6261425
Pos. seq., 1.05093948003 3.6261425 8.05093948+03 -116.37311575 1.05093948+03 123.6261425
Araatura currant. of generator in rotating ... ference fr . . . fd-q-o coordinat •• I. in unit. of [[Link].) •
Id Iq 10
-3.034205470691+03 2.657999998081+03 2.0880431111688-28
[Link]:e [Link] of [Link] anaature current in phas. coordinat ••• in units of [ _ r e . ) .
A~ture of pha•• w._ Arlaature of phase '-b- Araature of pha.e ·c·
Magni tude Deg ..... llagnituda Deg..... llagnitude Deg.....
3.29356618+03 3.6261425 3.29356618+03 -11'.37311575 3.29356618+03 123.6261425
Field current of the ganerator in unit. of [ _.... l. Total [Link]
4.05577326331+02 4.05577326331+02
81ectro.achanica1 torque of the generator in unit. of (aUllonn-a) • total de [Link]
'.38017474381-01 6.38017474381-01
Cri tical level of total air-gap "'IF to begin . .turation. III unit. of [.-p.): O. 000000000001+00 0.000000000001+00
All rotor _ .... have angular velocity DImGI\ - 7.853981631+01 [radians/ ••c). Mechanical angle. of rotor _ •••• fOllow~ in
units of [Deg ..... ) : 35.6018495
Top -TAFSAV·. IfCBAIN - 8
C....... t card. IIU!IDCII - 12. Ic -----_ volt_output reque.t
++++ TYPe-59 S.M. nuaber 1 begins oparation on .egaent. 0 and O.

Blank card anding [Link] for output variab1...

I
TYPe-59 S.M. nuaber 2 begin. oparation on .egaent. 0 and O.
card of ......a for U_-atep loop output. BVS1-ABUS2-ABUS3-A
BlANK CAIIlI !NDING S8L1CTIVE NOIII VOLTAGI OUTPUT REQUEST.
Co1uan heading. for tha 27 EMTP output variabl.. follow. The•• are divided aaong the 5 po•• ib1. c1a.... a. follow • • • . .
Fir.t 3 ou~t variab1 •• are .lectric-network volt_ diff.......ee. Cupper voltage ainus lover vo1tagel;
[Link] 24 ou~t variab1 •• partain to Type-59 S.N. [Link]. C...... are generated interna11yl,
Step Ti_ BVS1-A BUS2-A BUS3-A IIIICB 1 MCB 1 MCB 1 MCB 1 MCB MCB 1 MCH
III 10 10 IF IKD IG IKO
Mea 1 MCB 1 MCB 1 MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 2 MCB 2 MCB 2 !IACII 2
IA IFII TO CEJ( lUfG 1 VEL 1 III 10 10 IF IKD
MCB 2 MCB 2 IIIICB 2 IIIICB 2 IIIICB 2 IIIICB 2 IIACII 2
IC 11(0 IA8F11 TO CEN ANC 1 VEL 1
o 0.0 180606.407 182019.752 9714.96073 -3705.4163 3252.15311 .260361-27 472.596037 -.41278-12 0.0 .187211-13
4017.41063 -335.95129 .8021459Z9 35.5813776 0.0 -3034.2055 2651. .21298-27 405.577326 .301658-12
0.0 -.20268-13 3286.97233 -330.64142 .6311017474 35.6018495 0.0
.28-3 176039.698 172296.152 7444.261416 -3809.9352 3345.4032 -.11431-12 473.452332 3.40524347 0.0 -3.11352715
4103.19727 -335.95129 .824891113 35.5883775 -.173218-4 -3139.8055 2757.79364 -.1105E-12 406.590279 3.49174529
0.0 -4.350211 3378.14341 -330.64142 .661360932 35.6018494 -.166198-4
2 .48-3 183004.193 189076.909 10681.6101 -31102.8536 3345.33502 .5628-13 473.411982 3.15401508 0.0 -3.8197047
4061.75042 -335.95129 .82460777935.5183771 -.517478-4 -3133.5631 2758.47512 .52776£-13406.5463063.26672986
0.0 -4.3680164 3347.77476 -330.64142 .661249043 35.601849 -.49778£-4
3 .6£-3 172906.161 168798.787 6496.17745 -3806.3779 3338.9843 .40398£-12 473.457216 3.24984705 0.0 -3.5457957
4007.05538 -335.95129 .823487253 35.5883763 -.85103£-4 -3138.0018 2752.33996 .38962E-12 406.603762 3.39609805
0.0 -4.0886215 3304.77401 -330.64142 .660262501 35.6018483 -.82155E-4
4 .8E-3 178431.435 184089.018 9584.67811 -3101.5017 3344.27399 .1331E-12 473.43412 3.07141722 0.0 -3.7515552
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYHAHIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 39

3929.32505 -335.95129 .824360058 35.5883751 -.11827£.3 -3134.0339 2758.55853 .13328£-12 406.581165 3.24681003
0.0 -4.3485154 3238.70314 -330.64142 .66130059335.6018471 -.11457£-3
5 .001 167109.736 162780.111 5461.75263 -JlO4.1601 33J1.7JU6 • 19236£-lZ 47J.4767J1 3.15909199 0.0 -3.5111707
3842.37911 -335.95129 .823390701 35.5883736 -.15136£-3 -3138.258 2753.13371 .19231£-12 406.636462 3.36919336
0.0 -4.1001391 3167.96659 -330.64142 .660441351 35.6018456 -.14711£-3
10 .002 148940.227 153586.661 5702.348 -3196.1328 3340.23062 .33787£-12473.4837492.78780677 0.0 -3.5145453
3176.54208 -335.95129 .823391936 35.5883603 -.31257£-3 -3134.5262 2755.95833 .34586£-12 406.675119 3.1586938
0.0 -4.1669177 2620.80934 -330.64142 .660872192 35.6018326 -.30796£-3
15 .003 100718.336 95107.9784 -1069.6774 -3793.1451 3333.10232 -.5991E-12 473.529761 2.60859345 0.0 -3.1Ii52741
2205.54516 -335.95129 .821891994 35.5883379 -.46159£-3 -3136.3412 2747.59206 -.5565£-12 406.764305 3.13471406
0.0 -3.7474744 1822.82615 -330.64142 .659J14186 35.6018104 -.46553£-3
20 .004 57690.2849 60516.4666 -1799.05 -3787.8379 33J1.168 -.5858£-12 473.55076 2.3607908 0.0 -3.3199569
1015.2989 -335.95129 .822735331 35.5883066 -.62195E-3 -3135.2279 2750.52816 -.5797£-12 406.823409 3.01621618
0.0 -3.8231415 843.108497 -330.64142 .65993767 35.6017793 -.61961E-3
30 .006 -54435.032 -53090.209 -8149.3475 -3182.4159 3340.02251 -.2535£-12 473.619369 2.05277934 0.0 -3.2i96087
-1529.9164 -335.95129 .822977535 35.5882171 -.92923E-3 -3134.946 2744.12444 -.2991£-12 406.953245 2.85169082
0.0 -3.4474689 -1252.3379 -330.64142 .658769581. 35.6016912 -.91664£-3
40 .008 -144760.29 -144178.68 -11022.785 -3781.0511 3343.12588 -.2679£-12 473.707391 1.89297498 0.0 -3.3092905
-3488.4195 -335.95129 .823635103 35.5880933 -.00124645 -3133.3509 2737.86741 -.3557£-12 407.061063 2.65468488
0.0 -3.0866228 -2867.0052 -330.64142 .657569287 35.6015698 -.00119886
50 .01 -178990.49 -178414.52 -9431.6401 -3783.4054 3344.91149 -.1677£-13 473.820568 1.86040399 0.0 -3.2734102
-4114.1269 -335.95129 .824179475 35.5879317 -.00157615 -3130.7561 2732.74562 -.1331£-12 407.149562 2.43594414
0.0 -2.7833527 -3386.6165 -330.64142 .• 656539552 35.6014169 -.00146762
Note that parameters and initial conditions of each machine are printed in order
of input.

Since the g-winding is dropped for both machines. some electrical parameters (Lag,
Lgkq and Rg) associated to this winding are zero; however. the self-inductance of
this circuit is positive; this is internally done by the program in order to avoid
a zero-division.

Output variables of each machine are named with two 6-character names, the first
(upper) of the two names is used to identify the machine. and this is done in the
same order of data input.

VIII-D-3. ExamPle 3: COnnection to Tacs

A very simple example will be used to illustrate the connection of the Type-59
S. M. model and TACS. Consider a synchronous generator running alone and supplying
power to a balanced load. The machine has the same parameters as the first generator
of the latter example; however, in this example the neutral is grounded through
the following impedance
R.+ jX. - 0.005+ jO.005 (in p.u. on the generator base)

The generator is supplying 70 MVA. power factor 0.8 (lagging). being its terminal
voltage magnitude 1.0 per unit on generator base voltage.

The equivalent impedance per phase of the load can be calculated according to the
following formula

1V12
Z=--
P-jQ

being Ivl phase-to-phase voltage magnitude (rms) at the terminals

p. Q three-phase real and reactive power. respectively.

Taking into account the initial operating conditions of the generator, this
equivalent impedance has the following value
Z - 2.1765+ jl.6325 cn)
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE' - 40

For this case, internal inductances and resistances, instead of manufacturer's

data, will be punched (No PARAMETER FITTING request card). By using the same
procedure which has been implemented in the EMTP to calculate internal parameters,
see reference [48], the following values (in per unit) are obtained

Lq - 0.7000

L a/ - 0.980000 Lall - 0.0000

Lald - 0.980000 L alq - 0.4800

L,- 1.135696 1 11 -0.0000

Ltd - 1.018625 L lq -0.490213

R I -5.94719£-4 [Link]

R td -1.67610£-2 R tq - 2.60066£ - 2

The field voltage will be controlled by a TACS source; the rotor angle and the
angular velocity will be passed to TACS.

The machine data deck of this example looks as follows:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C
C TYPE-59 S.M. TEST CASE - EXAMPLE 3
C AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION
C
POWER FREQUENCY, 50
C
0.0002 0.0800 50.0 50.0
1 1 -1
5 5 40 20 100 100
TACS HYBRID
C ----- Field Toltage control
98EFD • 1.0
C ----- Mechanical Tariablea [Link] to TACS
92MGLE
92SPEED
C ----- OUtput request
33EFD ANGLE SPEED
C ----- Initial conditions
77EFD 1.0
77ANGLE 0.46773069
77SPEED 78.5398163
BLANK CARD ENDING TACSDATA.
C ----- Generator load
BUSI-A 2.176 1.632
BUSI-B 2.176 1.632
BUSI-C 2.176 1.632
BLANK CARD ENDING BRANCH DATA.
BLANK CARD ENDING SWITCH DATA.
C ----- .Synchronous generator specifications
59BUSI-A 11267.65 50.0 0.0
BUSI-B
BUSI-C
TOLERANCES 20
C --- Machine ratings
1 1 8 90.0 13.8 280.0
BLANK CARD - we SATURATION MODELING
C --- Machine parameters - Internal .parameters
1.1357 0.9800 0.9800 1.2000 0.9800 1.0186
0.4902 0.7000 0.4800 0.4902
0.1500 0.0380 5.9472E-4 1.6761E-2 2.6007E-2 0.005 0.005
C --- Mechanical system data
1 1.0 3.116092
BLANK CARD ENDING MASS CARDS
C --- OUtput data request
51
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 41

1 e 11 14
21
31
BLANK CARD ENDING OUTPUT REQUEST
7lEFD
74ANGLE 1
74SPEED 2
P'IIfISH
BLANK CARD ENDIIfG SOURCE DATA.
C ----- Node voltage output requeat
BOS1-A
BLANK CARD ENDING SELECTIVE NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT REQUEST.
PRINTER PLOT
BLANK CARD ENDIlfG PLOT REQUEST.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
The most interesting features of this new case are the following:

1) The electrical part is described by using internal parameters (Park's data),

no PARAMETER FITTING card is inserted.

2) Since the g-winding on the q-axis is to be dropped, the mutual-inductance

coefficients and the resistance of this winding are left blank, while the
self-inductance coefficient is punched equal to the self-inductance coefficient
of the q-axis damper winding, Lkq.
3) The field voltage is controlled by a TACS source, therefore a Class 6 card (KK
= 71 in columns 1-2) has been inserted to indicate the TACS source name (BUS
= EFD in columns 3-8) which performs this function.
4) The mechanical angle and speed of the rotor mass are passed to TACS, for both
variables field KK is punched equal to 74. Note the number punched in columns
5-7 (field KI) for each variable.
5) Caution with TACS: the old way to initialize each TACS block will create a
self-damped transient during the transition of the SM and its regulators between
steady state and non-perturbated transient solution. In order to avoid that
phenomenon, the user himself must initialize the 77 card of each block.

The output listing for this case is given. next.

[Link] card. IIUIIDCD - 1. C data:[Link]
......ker caret prec:ecUng new EI'ITP data case. IEGIII NEW DATI\. CASB
[Link] caret. IIUIIDCD - 3. C
[Link] caret. IIUIIDCD - 4. C TYPE-59 S.M. TEST CAS£ - J!XMPLE 3
C....." t caret. IIUIIDCD - 5. C I\.I/TOI'II'.TIC I1UTIALIZATIOJI
[Link] caret. IIUIIDCD - 6. C
N_ power frequency STI\.TFR - 5.00000000E+Ol Hz. POWER FREQ11ENCY. 50
[Link] cant. IlUJllDCD - 8. C
Misc. data. [Link]-04 [Link]-02 [Link]+Ol 0.0002 0.0800 50.0 50.0
Mbc. data. 1 1 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1 1 -1
Printout : 5 5 40 20 100 100 5 5 40 20 100 100
Begin IIODELS (new. lIOre-powerful TACSI. TI\.CS HYBItID
C....."t caret. IIUJIIDCD - 13. C ----- Field volt_ control
Jl'rea-foraat TACS suppl_tal variable defined. 98EJI'D - 1.0
[Link] caret. IIUIIDCD - 15. C ----- Mechanical variables pa. .e4 to TACS
TI\.CS source. 0.000£+00 [Link]+OO 0.000£+00 9ZA11GLE
TI\.CS sourea. [Link]+OO [Link]+OO 0.000£+00 92SPEED
[Link] caret. IIUIIDCD - 11. C - - - - OUtpUt request
N..... of TACS Yariabl•• for outpUt vactor. 33EJI'D IIoRGLE SPEED
c:....."t caret. IIUJIIDCD - 20. C ----- Initial condi tiona
TACS initial condition. "EJI'D O.l00000E+Ol 77EJI'D 1.0
TACS initial condition. "IIoNGLE " 0.467731£+00 77110RGLE 0.46773069
TACS initial condition. ·SPEED " 0.785398E+02 77SPEED 78.5398163
Ilanlc caret teralnating all TACS data carets. BtANK CI\.IUl ENDING TACS DATI\..
c.-ent card. IlUJllDCD - 25. C ----- Generator load
serie. R-L-C. 2.176E+00 5.195E-03 [Link]+OO BUS1-A 2.176 1.632
series R-L-C. 2.176E+00 5.195E-03 [Link]+OO BUSI-B 2.176 1.632
serle. R-L-C. 2.176B+00 5.195E-03 [Link]+OO BU51-C 2.176 1.632
Blank card endIng branche... 18R. IITOT - 3 4 BtANK CIIoRD ElIDING BRl\.liCH DATI\..
Blank card ending switches. KSWI'CB - O. BtANK CARD ENDING SWITCH DATA.
VIl1. THREE-PHASE DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 42

c~t card. IfIIPIDCD - 31. C ----- Synchronouo generator opacification.

SOurc.. 1.13Z+04 5.00Z+01 [Link]+OO -9.9'E+03 591US1-A 11267.65 SO.O 0.0
2nd phase of S. M. 1.126161:+04 -120.00 IUSI-1
3rd .pha •• of S.M. 1.12676Z+04 -240.00 IVS1-C
[Link]. 1.00E+02 1.00E-15 1.00E-16 20 TOLERANCES 20
eo-nt card. IIlIMDCD - 36. C --- [Link] ratings
4th S.M. card.
q-axi.. 0.000
1 1 0 0 • 0.000 0.000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1 1 •
lLANJC CARD - 110 SATUlIATION IIDDZLIIIC
90.013.' 280.0

eo-nt card. JI1JMDCD - 39. C --- Mac:hina par. . . t.r. - Internal par. . .tero
5th S.M. card. 1.1357 0.9800 0.9800 1.1357 0.9800 0.9800 1.2000 0.9800 1.0116
6th S.M. card. 0.4902 0.0000 0.0000 0.4902 0.7000 0.41100 0.4902
7th S.M. card. 0.1500 0.0310 0.0006 0.1500 0.0310 5.94721:-4 1.6761Z-2 2.6OO7Z-2 0.005 0.005
eo-nt card. JIVMDCII - 43. C --- Mechanical .y.t_ 400ta
Ma•• card 1 1 1.000E+00 3.116£+00 [Link]+OO 1 1.0 3.116092
Ilank card [Link].nat1Jlg S.M . . . . . cards. lLANJC CARD EllDIIIC MASS CARDS
eo-nt card. JI1JMDCD - 46. C OUtput 400ta raquaU
S.M. output request card for cla. . 5. 51
S.M. output request card for cla. . 1.
S.M. output reque.t card for cl. . . 2.
1
21
• 11 14

S.M. output ....,....t card for cia•• 3. 31

Blank card t.rainat1Jlg S.M. output reque.t •• lLANJC CARD EllDIIIC OUTPUT IIEQ1IEST
TACS-controlled _citation. -EPD 71ZPD
Auxiliary S.M. input to TACS. 74 -MCLE - 1 74AIfCLE 1
• ..sata I_ra.. IP. 1IDX1.IVS6. 'l'I:XIII:C(NDlUI • 12 15MGLE A\fGLE
Auxiliary S.M. input to TACS. 74 -SPEED" 2 I 74SPEED 2
• .tate . . .rch. IP. JIDXl. .. '8U56" TEXVEC(lfDX1) - 12 155PEED ARCLE
_ t a [Link].. IP. JlllXl. IVS6. 'l'I:XIII:C(NDXlI - 13 16SPEED SPEED
End of 2 S.M.-TACS [Link] variabl•••
Blank card _ _ .lactric naUOOrk lourceo.
Top -TAPSAV". JlCllAllf - 6
I rllfISB
lLANJC CAIlD ENDIIIC SOURCE DATA.

Top "TAPSAV". JlCllAllf - •

Total network 10......10.. .by o_ing [Link].... - 5.601173670110E+07
IIACII 1 Data par_t.... and initi ..l conditiono of """t _ i n a fo11_.
"IUSI-A- unit 1
Machine reactance. and resistance•• in (oha.). Quantiti •• labeled AI indUctanceo ara in fact ....ctance.l:
1. 35749401Z+03 Lf - salf-inductance of tha d-... i. field winding:
4.928571431:+01 Laf -_tual indUctance between [Link] and araatura:
1. 17138692Z+03 Lfkd - [Link]-daaper .utual inductance for tha d-axio;
2.539200001+00 LoS - .elf-inductance of thad-axil araatura w1nd1Jlg:
4.928571438+01 Lakd - 8Utual inductance f~ araatura to d-axi. ~r;
1.21752522Z+03 LKd - self-inductance of the d-axi. ~r wind1Jlg:
5. 85932520Z+02 Lg - •• If-inductance of circuit 1 of theq-axi.:
0.000000001+00 Lag - 8Utual inductance. q-axi. circuit 1 to araatura;
[Link]+OO Lgkq - _tual inductanca. q-axi. circuit 1 to circuit 2:
1.481200001+00 Lq - salf-inductance of tha q-axi. araatura winding:
2. 41399417E+Ol Lakq - _tual inductanca. q-axb circuit 2 to araatura:
5. 85932520E+02 Lkq" •• If-inductance of circuit 2 of the . .axi.:
3.491400001-01 Lo - zero oequenca inductance:
1. 12148000E-Ol Ro - [Link] .equenca [Link]:
7.10864521E-ol af - .... [Link] of the d-axi. fiald wind1Jlg;
8.0408ooooE-02 .. - [Link] of the araatura:
2.00343OZZZ+01 8l<4 - [Link] of tha d-axi. ~r winding;
0.000000001+00 ag - realstance Of circuit 1 of tha q-axi.;
3.101597931:+01 8kq - resistance of circuit 20f tha q-uia:
Mechanical .par. . . tars in physicaluniu. . . described by the col..... hea4iJIg. that follow.
- ' t of inarUa Salf-dulping coefficient. of . . . . IIIltual-dulp1Jlg coeff. Torsional .pring [Link]
of rotor . . . . ~-davi ..ti_ [Link] Iwith follow1Jlg . . . . I (with following ..... 1
MUlion In-a/red/.ac"2) !lillion [n-a/rad/...,) MUUan [n-a/rad/.ec**Z) Million (n-n/rad)
1. 3131515E-ol [Link]+OO [Link]+OO [Link]+OO [Link]+OO

_to
Tabulation of: negativ. sequenca currant. CMJf8G. CAlfEC " 9. 8819667455E-13 -1.0040671
[Link] sequence currant. CMZD, CA2D - 7.1123106695E-13 -2.2531129
Total currant injacted into the network at the g ....r .. torbuo. in phase coordinate.. For parallal . .china•• thio is the coablnad
total for all of t~. The first lina display. tha currant. a. found by the phaoor network solutian. and they will be unbalanced
i f the network h. The 2nd Una . - . only the [Link] of tha.e. Magnitudes of current. ara in units of
(aapa).
Phase -.- injaction Phase '-b- [Link] Phase "c" injection
Magnitude Degree. Magnitu4e Deg"". Jlagni tude Deg .......
Actual: 4. 1425184E+03 -36.1698976 4.14251848+03 -15".8698976 4.1425184E+03 83.1301024
PD•. seq.: 4. 1425184E+03 -36.8698976 4.14251848+03 -156.8698976 4.1425184Z+03 83.1301024
[Link] currents of generator in rotating reference fra.. td-q-o coordinat •• I. in units of [ ...... ra.).
~ ~ ~
-4.10799644756!+03 2.977423188041+03 -I. 53282642705E-13
[Link].-.equence [Link] of generator araeture current 1n phase [Link] ••• in unit. of [_ra.].
AraatuN of pha•• -.- Araatura of .pha•• -b" Arwature of pha.e ·e·
Magni tu400 Deg..... Magni hade Il0l9..... Magni tude Da9r_o
4.14251841+03 -36.8698976 4.1425184Z+03 -15',8691976 4. 1425184Z+03 113.1301024
[Link] current of the g .... rator in unit. of [ ...... ra.). ~tal dc c:oooponent
4.83985231991:+0Z 4.'398523199Z+02
[Link] torque of the venerator in unit. of [nUli"" Il_). total 4c c:oooponent
7.39516548861-01 7.39516548861:-01
Critical leval of total air-gap MMr to begin .aturation, in units of [aapo): 1.7142911144548+03 1.605234875841+03
All rotor . . . . . . have angular [Link] OMEGA - 7.85398163Z+01 [radians/.ac). Mechanical angl •• of rotor . . . . . . follow, in
unit. of (Degree.]: 26.7989943
Top "TAPSAV·. IICIIAIII - 8
e.-nt card. JroMDCD. 57. Ie -----
Node YOltage output reque.t
Type-59 S.M. nuaber 1 begin. oparation on • _ _ to o and O.
Card of naaas fDr [Link] loop output.
Blank card ending requests for output variabl ••. I
IUSI-A
BLANJC CARD E1fDlIfC SELECTIVE II0DI: VOLT1d:E OUTPUT REQUEST.
VIII. THREE-PHASE DYNAI1IC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE SOURCE - 43

COlUMn heading. for the 9 EMTP output variabl.. follow. The •• are divided [Link] the 5 po•• ibla cIa.... a. follow.
Fir.t 1 output variable. are electric-network voltage difference. (upper voltage .inu. lower volta~):
Next 5 output variables pertain to Type-59 s.". [Link] ([Link] are generated [Link]~~y);
Nex~ 3 output varIables belong to TACS (with -TACS· an internally-added' upper ~ ot pair).
Step Ti_ BUSI-A PIACII 1 IVICB 1 PIACII 1 IV\CII1 IV\CII1 TACS TACS TACS
IA EPD TO GEM ANG 1 VEL 1 EPD ANGLE SPEED
0 0.0 11267.65 3314.01471 -344.04793 .739516549 26.7989943 0.0 1.0 .46773069 78.5398163
1 .2E-3 11246.0205 3463.50574 -344.04793 .739504209 26.7989943 .939731E-8 1.0 .48343865 78.5398163
2 .4£-3 11171.6764 3599.33266 -344.04793 .739493687 26.7989943 .36204E-7 1.0 .499146613 71.5391164
3 .6E-3 11068.5134 3720.95843 -344.04793 .739483566 26.7989943 .787299E-7 1.0 .514854577 78.5398164
4 .8E-3 10913.5672 3827.90638 -344.04793 .739472952 2'.7989943 .137045E-6 1.0 .53056254 78.5398165
5 .001 10716.4858 3919.75082 -344.04793 .739462531 26.7989943 .2113781-6 1.0 .546270503 78.5398166
10 .002 9115.57852 4141.90299 -344.04793 .739416746 26.7989943 .803126E-6 1.0 .62481032 78.5398171
15 .003 6622.75997 3958.69214 -344.04793 .739381689 26.7989944 .170345E-5 1.0 .703350138 78.5398111
20 .004 3481.73148 3388.03094 -344.04793 .739357608 26.7989945 .282813E-5 1.0 .781889956 78.5391192
25 .005 -.51059875 2485.76224 -344.04793 .739342523 26.7'8'947 .41OO62E-5 1.0 .860429776 78.5398204
30 .006 -3482.0034 1340.1'646 -344.047'3 .739334461 26.7"995 .5459731-5 1.0 .'38969597 78.5398218
35 .007 -6623.5311 63.4614999 -344.04793 .739331034 26.7"9'54 .686128E-5 1.0 1.01750'42 78.5398232
40 .008 -9115.682 -121'.4712 -344.04793 .739330599 26.7989958 .827643£-5 1.0 1.09604924 7'.5398246
60 .012 -9115.2764 -4141.5299 -344.04793 .73933656 26.7989983 .138523E-4 1.0 1.41020855 78.5391302
80 .016 3482.36966 -1340.0648 -344.04793 .739339018 26.7990021 .192802E-4 1.0 1.72436788 78.5398356
100 .02 11267.5575 3313.34064. -344.04793 .739338'6 26.7990072 .246846E-4 1.0 2.03852724 78.539841
200 .04 11267.6494 3313.36942 -344.04793 .73933703 26.799051 .5187081-4 1.0 3.60932433 7'.53'8682
300 .06 11267.6324 3313.39744 -344.04793 .739336264 26.79912&1 .7911128E-4 1.0 5.18012197 78.5398955
400 .08 11267.6248 3313.42606 -344.04793 .739335871 26.7992325 .106542E-3 1.06.75092015 78.5399229

When inspecting this listing the following points should be noted:

1) The TACS source which is controlling the field voltage is set to 1.0. Since
the value of this source remains constant, the field voltage also remains
constant.
2) All the electrical parameters in the output listing of this example match the
parameters of the first machine of Example 2, except the zero-sequence resistance
and reactance due to the fact that this machine is not solidly grounded.
3) The printed values of the machine variable ANG 1 and the TACS variable ANGLE
pertain to the same mechanical variable, the rotor angle. The output of the
machine variable is punched in degrees and remains constant. while the TACS
variable is punched in radians and increases steadily its value. Verify that
after one period (2° milliseconds) the value is increased in 2n/(Number of pole
pairs) radians.
4) The output of the rotor speed (variable VEL 1) is in fact the deviation of the
speed from the syncbronous speed, while the value passed to TACS (variable
SPEED) is the absolutc:: speed, both values are given in units of radians/second.
page 9B-1

I X. RULES FOR USING THE UNIVERSAL MACHINE MODULE

A. Introduction
Before presenting the structure of the data records required ;n the Use of
the Universal Machine (U.M.) module, a brief overview of the functions carried
out by the module, along with the characteristics of the computational model,
will be given with the hope that the preparation of the data which is required
can be done in a clear, systematic way. The data records necessary to define a
particular machine type are then given, along with sample data files for simple
machine-network systems. Techniques for reduction of undesired transients
which arise at the beginning of a problem solution because of improper initial
values are described in a final section.

B. Overview of the U.M. Algorithm

B. 1. What the U.M. Algorithm Can Do
The U.M. algorithm does, or permits use of, the following functions:
1. Direct simulation of 12 machine types as described in Table I below.
Additional types can be simulated through creative use of the algo-
rithm. The armature (power side) can have a polyphase connection
(limited to a maximum of three-phase); and no more than one polyphase
system (limited to a maximum of three-phase) can be applied to the
field (excitation side) system. The number of singly-excited 'field'
windings which can be simulated is limited only by the dimensions al-
loted to the arrays when theEMTP is initialized.
2. Representation of mechanical systems which are arbitrary in size and
configuration as equivalent electrical networks. The mechanical sys-
tem is restricted to linear elements; unless special precautions are
taken to isolate the non-linear elements, as is done for any EMTP net-
work. In versions M39 and. higher of the EMTP, up to three machines of
any type may be connected to the same mechanical system. The number
of groups of shared mechanical systems that can be in a simulation is
unrestricted.
3. Simulation of systems with multiple machines in a network. In ver-
sions M33 and higher of the EMTP, direct interconnection of machine
armature circuits can be made through the use of the 'prediction'
option. Use of the classical, phase-compensation option requires that
each machine circuit be isolated from other circuits of the same or of
other machines by the insertion of stub lines.
4. ·Approximation of saturation effects .. ~

5. Accepts data with parameters specified in SI (metric) units or speci-

fied in the per-unit system. Use of the per-unit system requires that
all elements of the complete simulation be in per unit on a common
base.
page 9B-2

6. Permits initialization of the calculations to reduce or eliminate un-

desirable transients at the start of a simulation. Options are
a. automatic use of the solution of the EMTP, steady-state, load flow
and/or phasor solution subroutine for three-phase machines;
b. use of the EMTP restart feature;
c. entry of known currents, voltages, and mechanical variables at the
instant the simulation takes as the starting time.
7. Accepts three-phase, synchronous machine parameters based on the stan-
dard short-circuit test and which is entered in S.M. Type-59 data
format. The necessary conversion to Park Domain resistances and in-
ductances in SI units is accomplished with a preprocessor routine de-
signed for the U.M. module.
8. Honors three-phase synchronous machine data in the S.M. Type-59 for-
mat. The mass data is used within the. U.M. algorithm to construct an.
equivalent electrical a~alog of the mechanical system.

TABLE I: Machines which can be directly simulated by the U.M.

algorithm through specification of a type-code.

Basic Machine Permutations Type-Code

Synchronous 3-phase armature (power side} 1
2-phase armature 2

Induction 3-phase armature, cage. rotor 3

3-phase. armature, 3-phase field
(excitation side) 4
2-phase armature, cage rotor 5
Single-Phase a.c. I-phase field 6
(synchronous or 2-phase field 7
induction)
Direct Current Separate excitation 8
Series compound (long shunt) field 9
Series field 10
Parallel compound (short shunt)
field 11
Parallel field (self-excitation) 12

B. 2. Limitations Imposed in the U.M. Module

The universal machine module was added to the EMTP in order to treat the
overall dynamic interaction between mechanically loaded or driven machines and
an electrical network. It was not intended to be a tool used for machine de-
sign. Consequently, the algorithm will not treat directly the following (or
similar) situations:
1. Magnetic unbalance of polyphase windings.
page 98-3
m
2. Asym~trically-distributed polyphase windings.
3. Paths of saturable leakage-flux.
4. Distributed, internal capacitance.
5. Non-sinusoidal distributions of air gap flux.
6. Machines having reluctances which vary with position as viewed in the
d-q domain reference frame (Polyphase machines with a non-cylindrical
armature, or single-phase and d.c. machines with salient rotorsJ.
7. Armature-reaction saturation and interpole effects in d.c. machines.
S. Core loss associated directly with air gap and leakage fluxes.
9. Frequency-dependent circuit elements.
10. Unbalanced resistances in polyphase circuits.
11. Time-varying parameters.
It is possible to approximate unbalance, some frequency-dependence, and satur-
able leakage inductance effects by transferring the affected element(s) under
consideration from the U.M. module to the circuits connected to the machine
terminals; so that standard EHlP features can be employed.
Programming convenience and the iterative solution methods used introduce
additional constraints on the type of problem or network configuration which
can be conveniently treated. Limitations which have been imposed are: .
1. One-, two-, or three-phase operation of the armature (power side).
2. Only one, two- or three-phase field set (excitation side) is allowed.
The three-phase field set is restricted to machine type 4 (doubly-fed
induction machine); and no other excitation coils may be used with it.
3. The phase-compensation interfacing technique used for all field coils,
the mechanical node and, as an option, the armature coils will not
permit inclusion of ·non-1in~ar elements in any electrical or mechani-
cal network directly coupled toa machine coil or node. The intercon-
nection restriction has been relaxed to the extent that
a. a maximum of three field coils belonging to one machine may be
connected in common to a network which does not contain non-linear
elements;
b. a total qf three field coils belonging to as many as three differ-
ent machines may be connected to one source-network;
NOTE: A machine armature circuit interfaced to a network using
the prediction option does not appear to be a non-linear
element to the external network; while an armature circuit
interfaced using the phase-compensation method does appear
to be non-linear to the external network.
c. a maximum of three machines can be directly coupled into a single
mechanical network; -
d. when the compensation option is used for armature coils, the two-
or three-phase armature coil-sets of one machi ne may be connected
in common to a network which does not contain non-linear elements.
'Page 9C-l

NOTE: Direct connections can be. approximated by the insertion

of a very short stub line (distributed-parameter line)
between the. non-l inear elements .
.4. The prediction option is not available for single-phase machine types
6 and 7.
5. The automatic (or coupled) initial ization feature of the U.M.· algo-
rithm reduces the effort required of the user in setting up initial,
steady-state conditions. The characteristics of this feature of the
U.M. algorithm are:
a. only d.c. machines and machines with a three-phase armature are
initialized; i.e., types 1, 3, 4, 8-12;
b. electrical analogs of mechanical networks are. required for
successful initialization of machines;
c. when machines which cannot be initialized (types 2, 5, 6 and 7)
are mixed in a simulation with those that can be initialized, the
uninitializable machines are bypassed in the automatic initializa-
tion process; and their specified initial conditions are used.
6. When the U.M. algorithm is used to simulate synchronous machines whose
characteristics are given in the S.M. Type-59 data formats, the fol-
lowing conditions apply:
a. only three-phase machines are allowed;
b. the form of the mechanical system is restricted to that treated by
the Dynamic Synchronous Machine module (see Sect. 1.62, p 34d),
and no external electrical analog can be formed;
c. the data-conversion algorithm constructs an 'internal' electrical
analog of the mechanical system specified by the S.M. Type-59 mass
records, so that the parameters available for output are the same
as for the 'normal' U.M. electrical analog;
d. specification that one machine in a group is represented by S.M.
Type-59 data causes automatic machine initialization to be invoked
for the entire simulation.
7. The interpreter used to convert S.M. Type-59 data internally sets ini-
tialization of all machines of the simulation to automatic initiali-
zation, if possible.
8. Circuits floating with respect to system ground are not allowed by the
EMTP; so an electrical path must be provided to system ground for all
circuits, both mechanical and electrical. The conventional means of
grounding is to connect a large resistance from one or more nodes of
the otherwise isolated network to ground.

C. The Computational Model

. -
The details of the Park Transformation and the transformations used in the
U.M. algorithm are. given in Chapters 8 and 9 respectively of the EMTP Reference
Manual. A brief summary will be given here for convenience.
Page 9C-2

C. 1. The O-d-q Domain Equivalent Circuit

All the machine equations are solved in the O-d-q domain with the vari-
ables normalized by the turn-ratios of the various windings so that the equiva-
lent .circuits shown in figure 1, p. 6, represent them. Note that positive cur-
rent directions are assigned for generator operation (power out) and that the
0-, d- and q-axis circuits (or coils) are isolated from each other; except for
the speed-voltage coupling between the d- and q-axis circuits. In addi~ion,
the spatial reference frame for machines whose air gap fields are decomposed
into rotating components is taken to be fixed on the rotor. The values of all
the parameters shown in figure 1, except v ' s ' constitute the required, raw coil
data. J

C. 2. Reference Frame Transformations for the U.M. Machine Types

Because measurable parameter values have to be transformed into normalized
d-q domain variables in order to use the U.M. algorithm (three-phase, synchron-
ous machine data is a possible exception), diagrams of the transformations and
the conventions used in the algorithm will be presented as an extension of the
material in Chapter 9 of theEMTP Reference Manual.
Figure 2, p. 7,shows the stages used to establish the calculation vari-
ables in the d-q domain for d.c. machines and for machines with two- or three-
phase armature connections and whose field windings can be directly associated
with the direct or quadrature axes on the rotor. Specifically, calculations
for machine types 1, 2, 3, 5 and 8 through 12 follow the pattern of figure 2.
•
It should be kept in mind that the parameters which experience a rotation-
al transformation are transformed to a reference frame locked to the structure
whose coils are not rotationally transformed. For the a.c. machines described
by figures 2 and 3(a) (p. 8), the field coil s are physically on the rotor; so
the refer·ence frame for those machines is locked to the rotor.
Note that types 3 and 5 are induction machines with cage rotors. The U.M.
algorithm is designed to make it possible to monitor all internal variables; so
windings representing the rotor cage in the d-q domain are brought out. These
rotor circuits are normally closed with very small resistances during a simula-
tion.
The relations for d.c. machines are defined in the section labeled nd.c.
component" in figure 2. The usual shunt and series fi·elds are assigned to the
currents ifdl and ifd2 respectively. The armature circuit is defined by the
current iq;and the d-axis,armature circuit is not used. The implications of
the d.c.-machine modeling are discussed further below.
The zero-axis (or zero-component) term which may arise in three-phase ma-
chines is always decoupled from the d- and q-axes; so it has been omitted in
figure 2. The [5] and [P] transformations apply to the zero-axis in the same
manner as for the d- and q-axes.
The convention followed in the U.M. module is that phase A is the refer-
ence phase for the transformation of three-phase, armature variables. For two-
phase systems, programming convenience led to the deletion of phase A, rather
than phase B or C, from the armature set. Phase B is the reference phase for
Page 9C-3

Rfj1 , II fj1 i f..il.,.

0
v
fj1
.
Rfjn , Llfjn i fj,!..

L.
IlIJ vfjn

0
(a) (b)

Fig. 1: Equivalent circuits representing the normalized O-d-q domain

equations used in the U.M. algorithm. (a) the zero-axis or
zero-component circuit; (b) the circuit for the d- or q-axis
variables. The symbols are defined as follows:
1) j, denotes d or q axis quantity
2) f, denotes field (excitation)
variables
3) Vj and Vfjn' the transformed coil voltages
4) vjs ' the speed voltage which couples
the direct- and quadrature-axis
circuits
5) the boxes represent the series-connected, trans-
formed and normalized resistance and leakage in-
ductance of each coil or they represent resist-
ance or inductance as labeled.

¢ .
lIIJ
t ¢2j
¢3j

weber-
turns

i 2j '3j
i mj , amperes

-¢2j
-¢3j
Fig. 4: Piecewise-linear approximation to the d.-q domain satura-
tion curve of the direct axis (j = d) or of the quadrature
axis (j = q). The currents i2' and '3' are used for the
S.M. Type-59 data format. J J
page 9C-4

A A
r. r
m m
a a
t t
u u
r r
e e
Two-ax; s coil
S Transformation S
i ;
d d
e e
Rotational
Transformation

-!__ .n-. { d. c.
----- component
IE iqt va . I I E'
x 7f!1!!!-..-- I x
c l~ 1--0 c
i
t
d-q Domain ,vfam I
10--0
i
t
a
t
I a
t

o
i I i
o
n ~---ou----o Ol-----·~u n
S Turn Ratios S
i
d
e
.. --1--1--1- -1--
o o o o
i
d
e

Fig. 2: Variable definitions, transformation steps and excitation-

side normalization used in the U.M. algorithm. Simulation
of two- and three-phase machines (except the doubly-fed
induction machine) uses the pattern shown. The zero-axis
(zero component) term which arises from unbalanced, three-
phase systems is not shown. The transformation matrices
[S], [S]-l, [P] and [prl are" similar to those defined in
Chapter 9 of the EMTP reference manual.
page 9C-S

ABC B C
IPA IPB IPC A IPB IPC
o 0 0 0 0 0 r E
S
t
m
a
x
c I-phase _1-1<:0:0) R
a t i o·
t u t 2-phase -< > t
o r a o
r e t s r
.----l-...,d q i i
i a ua o d
r x ax E n e
e i d i x
Res . s c p d q
o t i o i a u a
t t w r x ax • m
o a e e i d i
r t r a I c s . s · S
Two-axis Coil i u E t · t
Transformation 0 S x 2 • a
n i o 0 0 0 t
o 0 0 0 0 0 d lEI IE3 o
lEI _IE2 IE3 e main r
B C A
(a) (b)

Fig. 3: Changes to the diagram of figure 2 for: a) the doubly-fed

induction machine (type 4); b) the single-phase machines
(types 6 and 7). The terminal pairs are marked with the
names of the corresponding output labels for the currents;
and with the relative phase. labels.

i
.,.
)------r-O X

c
o
i veoi1
1
L...---I------------'--O Y

Figure 5: Reference currents and voltages

used for machine .c041s.
Page 9C-6

the two-phase system.

Figure 3(a) shows the changes made to the scheme of figure 2 for calcula-
tions of the behavior of the three-phase, doubly-fed, induction machine. The
differences are
a. the three-phase excitation of the rotor circuit undergoes a three- to
two-phase coordinate transformation similar to that used to transform
the armature variables;
b. no field coils are allowed in addition to the three-phase set.
The changes made to figure 2 for the single-phase machine are shown in fi-
gure 3{b). The most significant difference for computation purposes is that
the d-q reference frame is placed on the stator instead of the rotor; so that
the field coils (taken to be on the rotor) undergo a rotational transformation
. and the armature coils (assigned to the stator) do not. The current ifd1 is
assigned to the main, power winding; and the current ifd2 is assigned to the
auxiliary winding. The inversion of the roles of the armature field circuits
is predicated on the construction of most single-phase machines; where the ro-
tor surface is smooth, and the stator surface is constructed with saliency.
With the inversion, the reluctance along the d- and q-axes is independent of
rotor position.
Coils may be specified on the quadrature axis of the singl~-phase machine
in addition to the main and auxiliary windings. Each will be a stator coil.
Excitation on the rotor is restricted to two coils; which, if both exist, are
taken to be displaced 90 electrical degrees from each other.

C. 3. Modeling of D.C. Machines

At first glance, it would appear that d.c. machine types 9 through 12 are
redundant with respect to the general form of type 8. However, the use of
phase-compensation to interface the machine ~quations, ·which are non-linear, to
the external network means that the individual field circuits of the Type-8 ma-
chine would have to be connected to the armature circuit through stub lines to
create the shunt and/or series machine connections. The equations for the
self-excited connections have been pre-programmed into the machine model of
types 9 through 12; so that stub lines are not required.
When the prediction option is used for the armature circuits of a Type-8
d.c. machine, three compensated field windings {no prediction option for field
windings} may be connected to the armature circuit; so a self-excited d.c. ma-
chine can be constructed using the Type-8 model. Direct connection of two
self-excited, Type-8 machines to the same bus would not be possible, however;
because the field circuits of both would be connected to the same armature bus,
which is not allowed. Of course, any number of separately-excited, Type-8 ma-
chines may be connected in parallel; so long as the field circuits are not di-
rectly interconnected.
When the prediction option is used for types 9 through 12, the shunt and/
or series field circuits are lumped together with the armature circuit; so that
the entire, three-coil combination of each type behaves as a linear element.
Consequently, machines of type 9 through 12 may be directly connected in par-
allel to a common bus without the use of isolating stub lines when the predic-
Page 9D-2

D. l~ 1. Configuration Data
The configuration information required is
,a. machine type (see Table I);
b. number of pole-pairs;
c. the d-q domain coil system as based upon the machine type and the ex-

Table II: Correlation of inductance and magnetization-curve parameters

required for the description of the non-linear forms of the
m~in inductances Lmd and Lmq with the definitions given in
flgure 4.

Figure 4 Parameter Labels and Units

Axis Quantity U.M. Format*** S.M. Type-59 Format**
LMUD, henry not specified
LMSD, henry not specified
------r-----------~------~
take~ as
~2d FLXSD, volt-sec* 1.0 I ADl
Direct for OR for
AGLINE I SID, amp
not used
not used AD2
not used 52, amp
FLXRD, volt-sec* not used
LMUQ, henry not specified
LMSQ, henry not specified
-------~------------~-----------~
take~ as
~2q FLXSQ, volt-sec* 1.0 I AQI
Quadrature for OR for
ABLQ I SlQ, amp
not used
not used AQ2
not used S2Q, amp
FLXRQ, volt-sec* not used
NOTES:
*** -- Values can also be entered in per unit.
** -- All values in per-unit volts; unless given
. explicitly in amperes. ~
* -- Flux-linkage may also be expressed in weber-
turns.
page 90-1

tion option is used.

It should be noted that field excitation may be .provided to as many as
three separately-excited (type 8) d.c. machines from a common source; provided
that .all other field circuits are isolated from each other.
C. 4. Approximations for Saturation
The effect of the saturation of the major flux· paths in a machine can be
approximated through use of a three-segment, piecewise-linear relation between
flux-linkage and current in each axis in the d-q domain. The approximation is
applied only to the common (main) inductance, Lmj' shown in figure 1.
Figure 4, p. 6, shows the parameters used to define the segmented, magne-
tization curve for each axis in the d-q domain. The curve is specified by the
flux-linkage at the break points and the line slopes (inductances). This re-
presentation is very simple to implement in the U.M. algorithm, but it requires
some effort on the part of the user to transform known machine data into the d-
q domain. The amount of effort can be reduced by working with per unit quanti-
ties.
•
4,
SaturatRn in machines having a uniform air gap is not well represented by
considering saturation in each axis independent of the flux in the other. The
U.M. algorithm will treat saturation based on total air-gap flux when requested
by the user. In that case, the constants of the air-gap magnetization curve
are entered as d-axis constants.
When synchronous machine data is entered using the S.M. Type-59 format,
the unsaturated, common (main or air-gap) inductance is indirectly specified by
the current and the per-unit flux-linkage at pOint 2 in figure 4. Residual
flux (point 1 in figure 4) is always taken to be zero for S.M. Type-59 data.
Specification of point 3 in figure 4 provides enough information to compute the
saturated inductances, Lmsj .
In order to tie the elements defining the magnetization curves together,
the names used in the U.M. algorithm to identify the points on the segmented
magnetization curve and/or the common inductances are listed in Table II.

D. Collection of Data for a Simulation

This section will summarize in general terms the information which must be
collected and organized in order to use the U.M. module to simulate the dynamic
interaction between machines and electric networks. It will be seen that many
parameters may be entered with per unit or physical values. The data processor
of the U.M. module converts all per-unit values to physical values before a
simulation is begun. Solution values are given in physical units, regardless
of the form of the input data.
D. 1. Machine Electrical Parameters
Machine data can be separated into four broad groups; a) configuration
data, b) raw coil data, c) network data and d) machine initialization data. A
subset of coil data is manufacturer's short-circuit data for synchronous ma-
chines.
page 9D-3

ternal connections; i.e., primarally the number of coils on the direct

and quadrature axes;
. d. power system operating frequency;
e. if, desired, the segmented, straight-line approximation to the d-q do-
main, common-flux, saturation curve;
f. units to be used for the entire simulation, either per unit or SI
(amperes, volts, watts,rad/sec, Newton-meter, etc.).
D. 1. 2. Raw Coil Data
The raw coil data applies to the d-q domain coils and consists of the fol-
lowing parameters:
a. unsaturated d- and q-axis common (main) inductances. (see fig. 1);
b. if desired, the two- or three-segment saturation approximation to the
d- and q-axis common magnetization curve (see fig. 4);
c. d-q domain form of the resistance and leakage reactance of each coil;
d. a TACS-controlled voltage source that may be connected in series with
a coil (see fig. 5, p. 8).
When a three-phase synchronous machine is being simulated, the U.M. algo-
rithm will accept O-d-q domain data in the S.M. Type-59 format. It should be
noted that use of the S.M.-data format eliminates the possibility of including
an internal voltage source with any machine coil.
In most cases, it will be necessary for the user to transform physical
quantities into d-q quantities as indicated in figures 1 and 2. The trans-
formation is one-for-one for all but three-phase, physical coil-sets when the
field-coil turn ratios are unity.

D. 1. 3. Synchronous Machine Manufacturer's Data

The following manufacturer's short-circuit data in the S.M. Type-59 format
will be honored in place of the.O-d-q domain data when the 'PARAMETER FITTING'
request (see Sect. 1.62, p 34h) is made:
a. Direct-axis reactances in per unit
1. synchronous reactance, ,Xd
2.. transient reactance, Xd
~. subtransient reactance, Xd"
b. Quadrature-axis reactances in per unit
1· synchronous reactance, ,Xq
2.. transient reactance, Xq n
~. subtransient reactance, Xq --
, seconds
c. Open-circult time constants in
1· direct-axis transient, Tdo
Page 9D-4

Z· quadrature-axis transient, !~o

~. direct-axis subtransient, Tdo
n
!. quadrature-axis subtransient, Tqo
NOTE: The conventions used in the S.M. module (see
Sect. 1.62, pp 34i-j) when some of the quadra-
ture-axis parameters are not known are still
used by the preprocessing algorithm of the
U.M. module.
d. Per-unit values of the V-connected armature parameters
1· resistance, Ra
Z. leakage reactance, Xl; or Canay's characteristic reactance
~. zero-sequence reactance, Xo
!. neutral grounding impedance, Zn • Rn + j(Xn)

D. 1. 4. Network Connections
The connection of the machine(s) in the electrical network must be defined
keeping in mind the assignments in the U.M. algorithm for phase sequence, re-
ference directions, and reference polarities which are taken as positive. In
making connection decisions, the following conventions imposed by the U.M. al-
gorithm must be followed:
a. external references for each machine winding (coil) are positive for
generator operation as shown in figure 5, page 8;
b. when raw coil data is entered, a TACS-controllable voltage source may
be included in series with a machine coil aDd its physical terminals
with a reference polarity such that a positive source adds to the ter-
minal voltage as shown in figure 5; i.e.,
vcoil • Vxtacs + vxy ;
c. the three-phase transformation used assumes an internal phase sequence
a-b-c for positive d- and q-axis variables (The definition of the con-
nection between network and machine models is described more fully in
the section on. data structure);
d. the two-phase transformation used in the U.M. algorithm requires a
phase sequence c-b (vc leading vb by 90 degrees) in order to yield the
same direction of rotor motion as produced by the phase sequence a-b-c
for a three-phase machine.

D. 1. 5. Initialization Data and Mode Selection~

Steady-state initialization of the U.M. components of a simulation can be

coupled to or decoupled from the initialization of the electrical networks ex-
ternal to the machines. Coupling of the initializations means that steady-
state solutions for all operating conditions (for both network and machine)
will be sought using the EMTP load-flow and/or phasor network solution algo-
Page 9D-S

rithms (called automatic initialization hereafter). Oecoupled initialization

means that terminal quantities of machines (including the node. which couples
the machine to the mechanical-analog network) must be specified; while the form
of .initialization used in the networks external to the electrical portions of
the machines can be chosen at the convenience of the user.
The initialization procedures used in the U.M. module requires that all
U.M. machines be initialized in the same mode for a given simulation. When
synchronous machine data is entered in the S.M. Type-59 format, only coupled,
automatic initia~ization is possible.
In the material that follows, the explicit specification of the initial
conditions will be described as manual or manual-override initialization.

D. 1. 5. a. Requirements for Decoupled Initialization

No calculation of machine initial conditions is done within the EMTP in
the decoupled-initiali'zation mode. The initial conditions of the following
parameters must be available as part of the machine data:
a. mechanical speed (rad/sec or per unit);
b. electrical angle of the rotor [Link] with respect to the stator (in
radians), or the torque angle in electrical radians for synchronous
machines;
c. all currents of the machine windings (coils).
With these parameters specified, the initial air-gap torque of each machine is
determined; so the initial torque at the internal node where coupling to the
mechanical network occurs need not be specified.
If a machine is modeled with a Single rotor mass acted on by an external
torque, an electrical network analog is not needed. The data specified above
will completely describe the electromechanical system. When an electrical
analog of the mechanical system of a [Link] is ·used, the analog network is
treated as one of the external networks which are de'coupled from the U.M. ma-
chine equations. In this latter case, an initial transient (a false transient)
will be observed in the solution; unless the initial currents of the machine
and the network torque and speed are mutually matched.. Thi s matching. must be
done before the data file is completed.
Except for extremely simple networks, automatic initialization is expected
to be used in the networks which are decoupled from the U.M. machines. When
automatic initialization is used in these networks, the decoupled machine ports
are treated as open circuits. Consequently, the subnetworks associated with
the field coils and the mechanical system of a machine will have zero output to
the machine ports. Initial conditions in the external subnetworks can be spe-
cified using the EMTP manual-override feature (see Sect. 1.1, p 37) in order to
obtain a match with the initial currents [Link] for the machine field coils.
The same is true for the mechanical network when it is used; i.e., required
current and voltage (torque and speed) at the node coupling the electrical and
mechanical equations of a machine must be found and the pertinent variables of
the mechanical analog appropriately set.
Page 9D-6

In simulations in which decoupled (manual) initialization of the U.M. ma-

chines is necessary and different perturbations about an initial operating
point are to be investigated, the EMTP restart feature can be profitably used
to determine initial conditions. The parameter values after steady-state has
been .reached can be extracted from the restart files or from the output list-
ings requested by the user.

D. 1. 5. [Link] and Constraints for Coupled (Automatic) Initiafization

The U.M. algorithm permits coupled, or automatic, initialization only for
three-phase and ~ machines which have their mechanical systems represented
with an electrical analog. The initialization of d.c. machines can be done
only with the phasor,steady-state solution algorithm. Three-phase machines
can be initialized by using the EMTP load flow and/or phasor solution. The
initial cQnditions which must be provided for each three-phase machine are
reduced to,
a. for synchronous or d.c. machines,
1. the amplitude of the armature terminal voltage (volts or per
unit);
l. the identity of the field voltage to be adjusted for proper field
current at zero time;
~. the reference-phase {[Link] phase A} terminal voltage phase-
angle in degrees (synchronous machines only).
b. for induction or doubly fed machines, the percent slip.
For three-phase machines, the initialization interface of the U.M. module
checks to see that the armature currents provided by the external calculations
constitute a balanced set. If they do not, a warning is issued. A balanced
set of currents is constructed based upon the A-phase currents provided, and
the machine initialization is carried out as if the currents were balanced.
Program execution is not stopped; even though a false initial transient will
occur.
The initialization process for induction machines includes finding the
Thevenin-equivalent of the externally-connected, three-phase circuits. If the
external circuits are unbalanced or contain non-linear elements, the computed
initial values will not satisfy the prOblem requirements and an initial, false
transient will appear in the solution.
In order to achieve the proper initial conditions for U.M. machines using
coupled initialization, the current sources in the mechanical-analog network
and the voltage sources in the excitation circuits must be EMTP Type-14 when
they affect initial conditions. The simulation can be organized with other
types of EMTP or TACS sources as well; but these sources are not allowed to be
active during the initialization process.
Some helpful hints to keep in mind when setting up the U.M. networks for
automatic initialization are now given.
a. The U.M. interface will not accept an EMTP source connected directly
to the terminals of a machine or to the coupling node for the mechani-
cal network. If such a condition is necessary, the required separa-
tion can be achieved by inserting a very small resistor between the
page 90-7

source and the machine terminal or node.

b. Load flow and/or ph as or initialization must be set up on a three-phase
basis for proper initialization of three-phase U.M. machines. Note
that the EMTP phasor solution will be carried out using positive-
sequence voltages and currents; so that non-linear elements or unbal-
ances in the external network will cause improper initialization of
the system.
c. Single-mass, mechanical systems must be represented with an electrical
analog network. If not, the initialization will be aborted.
d. Constant sources (for d.c. excitation of coils or for constant mechan-
ical torques) are approximated by setting the operating frequency of
the Type-14 source to a very low value « 0.001 hz).
e. Since automatic initialization uses either specified slip or specified
terminal voltage as a starting [Link] for U.M. machines, each fie1d-
source and at least one torque-source for each machine must have an
adjustable amplitude in order to give internal values consistent with
those initially specified.
f. If multiple mechanical sources occur for a given machine, proper spe-
cification of the Type-14, equivalent sources will permit fixing the
percentage share of-the total torque provided by each source.
g. A special effort must be made to ensure that all source frequencies in
a common subnetwork are the same.
h. The Type-14 sources in the excitation circuit of the doubly-fed (Type
4) induction machine must be a balanced, three-phase set with the same
arbitrary, positive frequency specified for each (determination of the
required frequency is part of the initialization calculation).
i. As described more fully below, the excitation [Link] containing the
Type-14 source for synchronous and d.c. machines is taken to corres-
pond with the coil defined with the first direct-axis coil record
after the three armature-circuit records of the coil-data group (only
one excited coil is allowed during the initialization process).
j. When initialization with load flow is used,
1. a synchronous U.M. machine can have only real power and voltage
constrained at its armature terminals;
Z. a caged-rotor induction machine (Type 3) can have no constraints
at its armature terminals (it is treated as an impedance. connected
at a bus);
~. a doubly-fed induction machine (Type 4) is treated as a network
connected between the armature terminals and the excitation sour-
ces, so real and reactive power or voltage and real power can be
constrained at the bus where the excitation-sources are connected;
-- machines must have a Type-
k. A mechanical network shared by two or-three
14 source which can be. adjusted to accommodate the sum of the inital
torques produced by the machines. The automatic-initialization flag
must be set in order for sharing to be accepted.
page 9D-8

1. A machine which cannot be initialized but which is included in a simu-

lation in which automatic initialization is specified is treated as an
open-circuit at all nodes (electrical and mechanical). The user must
provide the initial conditions to be used.

D. 1. 5. c. Mode-Selection Summary for the U.M. Module

From the discussions above, the factors to be considered in se1ectirig an
initialization mode are summarized as follows.
a. For a particular simulation, all U.M. machines must have the same mode
of initialization.
b. Decoupled (manual) initialization is mandatory for the following situ-
ations:
1. a single-mass mechanical system modeled with mechanical inertia and
damping constants, regardless of machine type (the electrical ana-
log network must be used for multiple-mass mechanical systems);
Z. a system with a sing1e- or two-phase machine in it (types 2, 5, 6
and 7).
c. Coupled (automatic) initialization is mandatory for a three-phase syn-
chronous machine described in S.M. Type-59 data format.
d. When a network external to a machine includes a non-linear element, an
unbalanced element, switches, diodes or thyristors, the EMTP phasor
solution will not produce an exact match, in general, for either mode
of initialization.
e. Automatic initialization with load-flow constraints can be performed
for systems which include three-phase machines. Machine treatments
include
1. constraints on terminal power can be set for synchronous and
doubly-fed machines (types 1 and 4);
Z. cage rotor machines (type 3) are represented as a lumped impedance
connected to the network.
f. The phasor-solution method can be used for d.c. machines as well as
three-phase machines. A very low frequency of operation is used when
initializing d.c. systems.
g. The EMTP manual-override feature can be used to initialize decoupled
machine circuits.

D. 2. Mechanical System Parameters

The mechanical system associated with a .fIIachine simulated with the U.M.
algorithm is usually represented by an equivalent electrical network as exP-
lained in the EMTP Reference Manual, Sect. 9.4, p 9-13. When a torque acting
at the shaft of a system with a single rotor mass is an adequate model or when
machine data is given in S.M. Type-59 format, the parameters of the mechanical
system are grouped with the machine's electrical data. Otherwise, the mechani-
Page 9D-9

cal parameters are entered as electrical branch data; and the mechanical net-
work node at which air-gap torque appears in the machine is the only data
entered along with the electrical description of the machine. This node pro-
vides the only connection between the electrical and mechanical-equivalent net-
works of a machine.
The parameters required for each representation of the mechanical system
and the units for each are listed below.

D. 2. 1. Single-Mass System CU.M. Data Format}

Situations ~in which the mechanical torque is specified as a signed source
(positive for generator operation) applied to a system with only a single, ro-
tor mass 'may be treated without resort to the network model. The data which
must be provided is
a. rotor moment of inertia (Newton-meter-sec 2/rad or per unit);
b. viscous damping coefficient (Newton-meter-sec/rad or per unit);
NOTE: the unit [sec/rad] follows from the inverse of angular
velocity, [l/(rad/sec)].
c. source of mechanical torque, a TACS variable..

D. 2. 2. U.M. Form of the Mechanical System

The torque equations for mechanical components are,
for a torsional spring, Ttj = K ~,
for viscous damping, Tdj - B d~/dt ,
for inertia, 2 2
Tij - J d~ / dt
where ~ = angular displacement
d~/dt - angular velocity.
The U.M. algorithm uses current as the electrical analog for torque and voltage
-as the electrical analog for angular velocity with the variables scaled so that
torque in newton-meter is numerically equal to analog current in amperes and
angular velocity in rad/sec is numerically equal to analog voltage in volts.
Consequently, since torques add in a mechanical system, the electrical analog
circuit equations will be in the current-summation or nodal-equation form.
With the analog electrical quantities substituted in the mechanical equations,
we have,
for torsion between
two masses, d(isjk)/d~ ~ K (V jg - vkg )
= (l/L)(V jg - vkg ),
Page 9D-l~

for viscous damping, dJ = B [Link]

i .
.. G v. ,
Jg
for inertia, iij .. J ~(Vjg)/dt
.. C d(vjg)/dt;
where 'j' and 'k' denote electrical nodes equivalent to masses
, j' and ' k' ;
'g' denotes the electrical reference (or ground) node.
The torsion analog equation was given in inverted form for simplicity in
writing. The more comprehensive relation has current expressed in terms of the
integral of differential voltage.
With these analog relations, the equivalent electrical network of the me-
chanical system has a node at each mass. A capacitor connected to ground from
each node with a value in farads equal to the corresponding value of ~ in
newton-meter-sec 2/rad for the mass will give a properly-scaled current-voltage
(torque-speed) relation. A conductance connected to ground with a value in
siemens (mho) equal to ~ in newton-meter-sec/rad will account for viscous damp-
ing associated with a mass. Torsional coupling between masses is accounted for
by connecting an inductor between the corresponding nodes with an inductance in
henry equal to lLK with K given in newton-meter/rad. If there is viscous damp-
ing associated with a difference in speed between two masses, it can be modeled
by connecting a conductance between the corresponding nodes with its value cho-
sen as for the mass viscous damping described above.
External torques applied to the mechanical system, such as torque from a
prime mover applied to a generator, are modeled by current sources in the elec-
trical analog. The current sources are applied at the most appropriate nodes
for correct modeling of the mechanical system. As indicated in the discussion
on intialization, at least one adjustable, Type-14 source which is active be-
fore time-zero must be included. TACS sources or other EMTP sources may be
used, but they are not allowed to be active before time-zero.
No additional data is required when more than one machine shares a me-
chanical system (network). All that is necessary is that the U.M. algorithm be
properly informed as described below.

D. 2. 3. S.M. Type-59 Data Format

The S.M. Type-59 data format would usually be used when it is acceptable
to use manufacturer's short-circuit data for a synchronous machine or when data
has already been generated for the EMTP Dynamic Synchronous Machine (S.M.) al-
gorithm. Because changes in S.M. Type-59 data records were to be minimized,
the mechanical data required is entered in mixed English and SI units, and con-
sists of
a. the number of interconnected masses on the shaft system;
b. identification numbers of the masses belonging to the synchronous ma-
chine and its exciter, if any;
page 9E-l

c. distribution of external mechanical torque among the masses, in frac-

tional form;
d. the inertia constant, Wr2, (in million pound-feet);
e. the viscous damping coefficient associated with each mass (in pound-
foot-sec/rad);
f. the viscous damping coefficient associated with the net mechanical
angular velocity between adjacent masses (pound-foot-sec/rad); .
g. the viscous damping coefficient for speed perturbation about the oper-
ating speed for each mass (in pound-foot-sec/rad);
h. the torsional spring constant of the connection between adjacent
masses (in million pound-foot/radian).
E. Creating the Data File

In the following description, lines of data which have previously been re-
ferred to as cards will be called records.
In creating a data file, two general conditions must be met. The first is
the sequence to be used in combining data for U.M. machines with other network
data. The second is the format of the. records to be used to enter the data ne-
cessary to define the machine configuration.

E. 1. Overall File Structure

For simulations which include machines, we expect to have to define (in
~ddition to the machines) elements, sources, the configuration of the electri-
cal analog of the mechanical system, and the configuration of the excitation
circuits. The overall sequence of records is, then,
a. An optional Special-Request record specifying dimensioning of arrays
associated with the U.M •. module. This record must be inserted after
the record 'BEGIN NEW DATA CASE' and before the EMTP Miscellaneous
Data. If this Special-Request record is omitted, the [Link] dimen-
sioning of the EMTP will be used.
b. An optional Special-Request record specifying the power-network opera-
ting frequency, which is inserted as is the dimension request. The
record is used to change the EMTP variable STATFR from the default
value of 60hz.
c. Records defining nodes, branch-elements and sources in the electrical
and mechanical networks associated with the machine. These records
are placed in the standard data sequence. for EMTP data files (See
Sect. 1, pI).
d. U.M. machines are treated as dynamic sources. As such, the records
defining all machines are grouped with the conventional EMTP sources.
The U.M. data must be pl aced after all the records defining the con-
ventional EMTP sources.
e. Records defining manual override of computed initial conditions, if
necessary.
page 9E-2

f. Output requests.
g. Plot Specifications.
h. Termination records.
E. 2~ Machine-Specific Data Input
The description of the U.M.-machine data requirements is separated into
two parts, general sequencing and record contents.
E. 2. 1. Overall Sequencing
The sequencing of records within the U.M.-source data is
a. record 1 - a flag-record which signals that U.M. data follows by
having the number 19 entered in the first two columns;
b. record 2 - general specifications applicable to all machines;
c. record 3 - blank or 'BLANK (ENDING GENERAL U.M. SPECIFICATIONS)';
d. records associated with machine 1;
e. records associated with machine 2;
f. etc.
NOTES: 1) The U.M. algorithm applies numbers to the machines in the
sequence in which the machine record-groups are entered.
2) If a machine represented by data in the S.M. Type-59 for-
mat shares a mechanical network with another machine, the
records for the 'S.M.' machine must be placed ahead of the
records defining the other machine; i.e., earlier in the
sequence of machine data-groups.
3) The data-groups for machines sharing a given mechanical
network do not have to be placed in sequence immediately
after the data-group of the first sharing machine.
g. final record -- blank or 'BLANK (ENDING ALL U.M. DATA)'.
E. 2. 2. Detailed Machine Sequencing
The U.M. data records for machines fall into three groups; 1) the machine-
table group, 2) the coil-table group, and 3) the S.M. Type-59 group. The coil-
and machine-table groups together describe standard U.M. data for a machine.
These two groups can be replaced by the S.M. Type-59 group when appropriate.
The sequence to be followed for the U.M. data is
first, the machine-table group;
and
second, the coil-table group.
Each of these groups is divided into subgroups which must be entered in the
order in which they are described below.
E. 2. 2. a. U.M. Machine-Table Group
The machine-table group is divided into two subgroups, 1) general machine
data and 2) initialization data.
Page 9E-3

The general machine data subgroup is entered first and has the same struc-
ture for all machine types; viz., 3 records which will be described in detail
below (4 records for machines which share a given mechanical network) .
.The initialization subgroup is included only when automatic initialization
is requested. The number of records depends upon the configuration of the me-
chanical system. The details are given below.

E. 2. 2. b. U.M. Coil-Table Group

Each coil-table record contains the O-d-q domain resistance and leakage
reactance of a coil along with the nodes to which the corresponding physical
coil is connected. The records must be organized into three subgroups, which
are arranged sequentially in the. data file. The arrangement of the subgroups
depends upon the machine-type being defined. However, they can be classified,
in the order they are entered, as
a. subgroup 1 rotationally transformed coils;
b. subgroup 2 nominal, direct-axis field coils;
c. subgroup 3 quadrature-axis field coils.
The subgroup definitions and record contents are:
a. subgroup 1: always consists of three records containing data for
coils which are rotationally transformed into the O-d-q
domain.
1) record 1 - contains the zero-axis parameters and the
network nodes to which the terminals of
reference phase A are connected.
2) record 2 - contains the d-axis parameters and the
network nodes to which the terminals of
phase B are connected.
3) record 3 - contains the q-axis parameters and the
network nodes to which the terminals of
phase C are connected.
NOTES: a) For two-phase armatures (types 2 and 5), record one is
blank and phase B becomes the positive sequence reference
phase.
b) For [Link]-phase armatures (types 6 and 7), the excitation
(field) is assigned to phases Band C; so record 1 is left
blank for type 7, and records 1 and 2 are blank for type 6.
c) For d.c. machines, records 1 and 2 are blank and record 3
defines the armature coil.

b. subgroup 2a: data for the direct-axis field coils which remain in
the 'real' world. --
NOTES: a) Data for machine types 4, 6 and 7 are excluded from sub-
group 2a.
b) The counter NCLD, which is set with the machine-table data,
defines the number of records to be included in subgroup
page 9E-4

2a. MAKE THEM MATCH!!

c) Records within this group may be entered in any order for
machine types 3 and 5.
d) For d.c. machine types 9 through 12, NClD must be 2; with
record 1 taken to bea shunt winding and record 2 taken to
be a series winding. Record 1 is blank for type 10 and
record 2 is blank for type 12.
e) When automatic initialization is used, record 1 is· always
taken to be associated with the coil having an adjustabl e
~ source (EMTP Type-14) connected to it for synchronous
machines or separately-excited d.c. machines (types 1, 2
and 8).

c. subgroup 2b: data for the field windings of the three-phase doubly-fed
induction machine (type 4), which requires a coordinate
transformation.
1) record 1 - contains the d-axis parameters and the net-
work nodes to which the terminals of phase B
are connected.
2) record 2 - contains the q-axis parameters and the net-
work nodes to which the terminals of phase C
are connected.
3) record 3 - contains the zero-axis parameters and the
network nodes to which the terminals of ref-
erence phase A are connected.
NOTES: a) Records in subgroups 2a, 2c and 3 are omitted for the type
4 induction machine.
b) ~ is set to zero for the type 4 induction machine.
c) The order of the records in subgroup 2b differs from the
order of the records for three-phase armatures in subgroup
l!!

d. subgroup 2c: data for machines with single-phase armatures (types 6 and
7).
record 1 ---- contains the parameters for the armature
coil, which is taken to be on the d-axis;
and the network nodes to which the termi-
nals of the armature coil are connected.
NOTE: NClD is always set to 1. No d-axis stator coils are al-
lowed in addition to the armature coil.

e .. subgroup 3: data for the quadrature-axis coils which are not trans-
formed from the 'real' world.
. --
NOTES: a) The counter NCLQ, which is set along with the machine-table
data, defines the number of records to be included in sub-
group 3. MAKE THEM MATCH 1!
Page 9E-S

b) Subgroup 3 data cannot be included for d.c. machine types

9 through 12; so NCLQ • Q for those types.
c) The q-axis armature circuit for d.c .. machines is defined in
subgroup 1; so NCLQ gives the number of additional q-axis
coils for a Type-8 d.c. machine.
d) Single-phase machines usually have only one q-axis auxili-
ary winding on the stator. However, as many as desired may
be included when NCLQ is set accordingly.
E. 2. 2. c. S.M. Type-59 Data Group
The U.M. module accepts data in the format of the Type-59 synchronous ma-
chine (See Sect. 1.62, pp 34f-h, 34jl-q) with the following changes:
a. only the special-request record 'PARAMETER FInING' is accepted;
b. in record 1 of Class 3 data,
1. the fields for SMOUTP and SMOUTQ (cols. 11-30) should be left
blank;
Z. when AGLINE (cols. 51-60) is positive, the following blank record
(used for quadrature-axis and saturation data) can be omitted.
c. Canay's data convesion (see EMTP Reference Book, Chap. 8, Sect. 8.6.5,
p 8-73) will be done when the correct reactance value is entered. with
a negative sign in place of Xl in record 2 of the Class 3 data.
d. the mass records (Class. 4) must have a node name entered. in cols. 71-
76, where the node name permits accessing the speed at the mass;
e. the format of the output requests has been modified substantially; see
the discussion on variable output given below.
f. the text record 'FINISH' is required to terminate the data for each
S.M. Type-59 machine.
E. 2. 3. Data-Record Contents
The variable-values assigned to each record will be listed in the sequence
in which the records must be entered in the data file for a simulation. A
columnar layout of each record showing the fields assigned to each variable
will be given followed by the description of the. variables. To assist in in-
terpreting the data requirements, the record diagram will be divided into rows;
where
a) fields whose data is read in integer format will have the
specification listed in row 1,
b) mandatory numeri ca.l entri es wi 11 be 1i sted ; n row 2,
c) optional numerical entries will be listed in row 3,
d} mandatory entries of text will be shown with the required
justification in row 4,
e) optional text entries will be shown~with the required jus-
tification in row 5.
Each field will be identified with the name of the variable in the U.M. program
code to which the data is assigned.
page 9E-6

Unless otherwise specified, all fields will be read correctly when numbers
are entered in decimal or exponential form; e.g .. ,
0.0389, 327.2, 1.0
or
0.369E-4, 3.89E-2, 5.0E8, etc.
All entries in integer fields must be right-justified in the fields for correct
interpretation.
Zero-entries given in the following record definitions should be left
bl ank.

E.2. 3. a. Dimensioning Information

An optional dimensioning record (a Special-Request record) is shown below;
where the symbols I I I , I J I , 'K 'and 'L' represent integers. For this record,
the variable-values are entered in free-form format.

column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A I
row 1
I I 1 ~ 1 J~ i ~ f ~ ~ I ~ ! , ~ 5 ~ t ~ ~ J~ ~ ,
2 A B SOL UTE U. M. DIM ENS ION S, I, J, K, L

The four quantities define, for all U.M. machines combined, the maximum allow-
able values for the total number of
I - coils,
J - machines,
K - machine-variables which can be output,
L - 6-character names which can be assigned
to variables to be output.

E. 2. 3. b. Operating Frequency
The optional frequency-setting record (a Special-Request record) is shown
below. The frequency, F, is entered in free-form format.

column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1I I 1 ,
~ ~ ~ §
row 1 I
2 pow E R F R E QUE N C Y, F

For d.c.-machine simulations, F would be set to a very small value; e.g., 0.001
hz.

E. 2. 3. c. General-Specification Group
This group consists of three records entered in the order given under Gen-
eral Sequencing above.
Page 9E-7

a. record 1 - U.M. source-flag.

column 1 2 ~ 4 5 6 7 a 9 b I I ! 1 I I J A~
row 1
219
II
2

b. record 2 - general specifications.

Comments
column 1 2 3 4 5 6
row 1 I I 16 I <-- integer [Link] specs.
200 o < required value*
311 LIM ASS 1 < optional values
4 < mandatory text
5 S M0 A T A < optional text
I I I * - blanks may be used
NN C in place of zeroes
PI a
UT M
U P
M
The variables and their interpretation are:
co 1 . 1, INPU flag for the units of the input quantities;
o => SI units
1 => per unit.
NOTE: Per-unit data should not be specified; unless the complete sys-
tem being simulated is specified on a common, per-unit base.
col. 2, INITUM -- flag for the form of initialization;
o => decoupled, variable specification
1 -> automatic initialization.
cols. 3-8, Text flag that data for some machine is given in
the S.M. Type-59 data format;
blank -> U.M. data format only
SMDATA => S.M. data.
NOTE: INITUM should be set to one when SMDATA is specified; so that
the user will be reminded that automatic initialization will
always be used whether INITUM is set to zero or not.
cols. 9-14, LlMASS -- limit on S.M. rotor masses for the speci-
fication of output variables;
o => default value of 10
I => LIMASS = I.
col. 15, ICOMP -- flag for pregiction or compensation inter-
facing; .
o => compensation used
I => prediction used.
Page 9E-8
c. record 3 - blank record as specified in the section Overall Sequencing,
above.
E. 2~ 3. d. U.M. Machine-Tabl~ Group
E. 2. 3. d. 1. General Machine Data Subgroup
In the following presentation, the sing~e-mass mechanical system wll1 be
taken as 'mandatory'; and the analog network will be taken as the optional ex-
tension.
a. record 1 - machine specifications.

c~01~1~3~5~78~9+A~~~1~~~A~~~~~i~~~~~5~~~~~g~~~~~~~~~3~3~8~~~i~~~A~B~~~i~~~~~6~~~I~~~8=7§,
1 121212111 12
2 J NL P RJ DCOEF EPSOM FREQ
3 IKM o o
4 blankTACS
5 M NODE blank
J N N TOT N
T C C QMH P
Y L L 000 P
PDQ UUU A
E TTT I
R
cols. 1-2, JTYPE U.M. type number, J.
cols. 3-4, NCLD number of untransformed (excitation) coils
on the direct axis, N.
cols. 5-6., NCLQ -- number of untransformed (excitation) coils
on the quadrature axis, L.
co1. 7, TQOUT -- torque/[Link] s flag for quantities to be
output, 1;
o => no output
1 -> air-gap torque
2 -> air-gap torque and d-axis, common
flux
3 => as 2 plus d-axis magnetizing cur-
rent.
co1. 8, OMOUT -- speed/q-axis flag for quantities to be out-
put, K;
o => no output
1=> rotor shaft speed in rad/sec
2 => as 1 plus q-axis, common flux
3 => as 2 plus q-axis magnetizing cur-
rent.
col. 9, THOUT -- flag for output of rotor position (mech.
rad.) for all machine types, except types 1
and 2; or torque angle (elee. rad.) for
types 1 and 2, M.
eols. 10-15, M NODE -- name of the node at which the air-gap tor-
que ;s coupled to the analog network.
page 9E-9

NOTE: MNODE also serves as a flag. When the field is blank. TACS.
RJ and DCOEF define the mechanical system for the machine.

cols. 16-21, TACS name of the mechanical torque source when

the network option is not used; a TACS var-
i abl e.
cols, 22-23, NPPAIR -- the number of pole pairs, P.
cols. 24-37, RJ -- rotor moment of inertia (N-m-sec 2/rad) when
the network option is not used.
cols. 38-51, DCOEF -- damping coefficient (N-m-sec/rad or per
unit) when the network option h not used.
cols. 52-65, EPSOM rotor-speed, iteration-convergence margin;
. default value of 0.01% of synchronous speed
(rated speed for d.c. machines) is used
when the field is blank.
cols. 66-79, FREQ -- override of the steady-state network fre-
quency at the armature terminals as set in
STATFR (See Operating Frequency, above).

b. record 2 - direct-axis flux/inductance data.

column 1 3 5 7 9 11 31115 17 19 21 32 25 7890
2223 3 3 3 3 4 444 4 4 5 5 5 555 6 6 6 6 6 77
2 4 6 8 0 234 6 8 0 2 4 678 0 2 4 6 8 01
row 1
2 o LMUD o o o
3 OMEGM o lMSD FLXSD FLXRD
J
S
A
T
·0

cols. 1-14, OMEGM -- initial mechanical speed (in mechanical

rad/sec or per unit) for decoupled (man-
ual) initialization (blank otherwise).
NOTE: OMEGM and THETAM (record 3, below) can be non-zero for machine
types 2, 5, 6 and 7 when automatic initialization is invoked;
because these types are ignored in the automatic initialization
process.

cols. 15-28, LMUD -- unsaturated, d-axis, common inductance (see

note c, below).
NOTES:
--
a) The following fields can be left blank when the saturation
option is not used.
b) See figure 4 and Table II for the definition of the satura-
tion parameters.
page 9E-llil

c) Inductance values can be in henry for all or in per unit

for all.
d) Flux-linkage may be given in volt-sec or weber-turns.

col. 29, JSATD -- d-axis saturation flag;

0-> no d-axis saturation
1 => apply d-axis saturation
5 -> total saturation option for· uni-
form air gaps.
cols. 30-43, LMSD saturated, d-axis, common inductance.
cols. 44-57, FLXSD flux-linkage at the upper break of the d-
axis magnetization curve.
cols. 58-71 , FLXRD residual flux-linkage.

c. record 3 - quadrature-axis flux/inductance data.

column
row 1 I
2 o LMUQ 0 0 0 0
3 THETAM 0 1 LMSQ FLXSQ FLXRQ
J
S
A
T
Q

cols. 1-14, THETAM -- initial position of the rotor with respect

to the stator in mechanical radians for all
machines except synchronous. For synchron-
ous types 1 and 2, enter the initial torque
angle in electrical radians (Leave blank
unless decoupled initialization is being
used) .
NOTE: See the NOTE for OMEGM of record 2 above.

cols. 15-28, LMUQ unsaturated, q-axis, common inductance (see

Note c of record 2).

NOTE: The following fields can be left blank when the option of total
saturation is used or when q-axis saturation is not desired.
col. 29, JSATQ q-axis saturation flag.
cols. 30-43, LMSQ saturated, q-axis, common inductance.
page 9E-ll

cols. 44-57, FLXSQ as FLXSD, but for the q-axis.

cols. 58-71, FLXRQ as FLXRD, but for the q-axis.

d. record 4 - optional: used when the machine shares a mechanical system

with another machine.

column 1 •
row 1 16 16
2 NUM2 N U M3
3
4 SH ARE

cols. 1-5, Text -- enter the flag-word 'SHARE'.

cols. 6-11, NUM2 "-- number of a machine with which the mechani-
cal system is shared.
NOTE: Machine numbers are assigned by the algorithm in the sequence
in which the machine record-groups are encountered in the data
fi 1e.

cols. 12-17, NUM3 as NUM2 for another machine; leave blank if

none.

E. 2. 3. d. 2. Initialization Subgroup
The following records are included only when automatic (coupled) initiali-
zation is specified (INITUM = 1 1n the general-specification record). For the
purpose of illustration, the synchronous machine will be taken as "mandatory".
a. record 1 - initial-value and TACS.

column 1 3 5 7 9 11 345
III 1 1 2 2 2 2223 3 3 3 3 4 4
7 9 I 3 5 7890 2 4 6 8 0 2
row 1
2 AMPLUM ANGLUM <= synchronous machine
2- - AMPLUM - - 0 -<a d.c., induction machine
3 BUSF BUSM <= d.c., synch. machine
3- blank BUSM - -<= induction machine

cols. 1-14, AMPLUM -- voltage/slip parameter:

for synchronous or d.c. machines, enter
the initial magnitude of the voltage
acros"s the term; na 1s of the armature
coils (defined to be the phase volt-
age);
for induction machines, enter the initial
slip in per cent.
Page 9E-12

cols. 15-28, ANGLUM -- phase for synchronous machines:

for three-phase machines, enter the angle
of the phase A armature voltage in de-
grees;
for two-phase machines, enter the angle of
the phase B armature voltage (phase C
is taken to lead phase B by 90 degrees
for positive sequence);
for all other m~chines, leave this field
bl ank.
cols. 29-34, BUSF field-circuit excitation node:
for synchronous or d.c. machines, the name
of the node in the excitation network
to which the adjustable, EMTP Type-14
source is connected; the excitation
network in which the adjustable source
is embedded must be connected to the
coil defined by the first record in
the direct-axis excitation subgroup
(subgroup 2a) of the coil-table re-
cords;
for all other machines, leave this field
bl ank.
cols. 35-40, BUSM torque-source identifier:
enter the name of the node in the me-
chanical network to which is connected
an EMTP Type-14 source which can be
adjusted to match air-gap torque.
NOTE: When machines share a mechanical system, BUSM is left blank in
the data for the second .(and third) machine(s) encountered in
the data file and which share(s) the mechanical system; i.e.,
all initialization data for the shared system is entered with
the data of the first sharing machine in the machine sequence.
The extension records described next are omitted for all but
the first machine of the sharing set of machines.
b. records 2 -) n -- additional torque-source identifiers; one record for
each source.
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 344 4 4 4 4 5 555
co 1umn 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 901 3 5 7 9 1 345

row ! IMOREI IBUSM21 DISTRF I

cols. 1-4, Text enter the· word 'MORE' as shown in order to

flag the additional records.
cols. 35-40, BUSM2 as 'BUSM' in record 1 above.
page 9E-13

cols. 41-54, DISTRF -- the source identified by 'BUSM2' will have

a torque which is (DISTRF) times the torque
of the source defined by record 1; a neg-
ative value for 'DISTRF' indicates a torque
which is the reverse of that from 'BUSM'.
E. 2. 3. e. U.M. Coil-Table Group
Records for all the coil-table sub-groups are the same. The format is
shown below.

column
row 1 I
2 RESIS LLEAK 0
3 1 CUR
4 BUSI BUS2 2
5 XTACS
C
U
R
a
U
T

cols. 1-14, RESIS -- O-d-q domain resistance of the coil in ohms

or per unit (see the General Specification
Group).
NOTE: A non-zero value is required for RESIS.
cols. 15-28, LLEAK -- O-d-q domain leakage inductance of the coil
in henry or per unit.
cols. 29-34, BUSI -- name of the network node to which terminal
. X (see fig. 5) of the physical coil is con-
nected.
cols. 35-40, BUS2 name of the network node to which terminal
Y (see fig. 5) of the physical coil is con-
nected.
cols. 41-46, XTACS name of a TACS voltage source which may be
internally connected in series with the
coil (see fig. 5).
col. 47, CUROUT current output flag;
o ::) no output
1 =) print the physical coil current
(see fig. 5 for the positive re-
ference direction)
2 =) prj nt the O-d -q domai n power cur-
"rents for all but single-phase
machines; the O-d-q domain cur-
rents of the excitation coils
will be output for single-phase
machines (Use of this value is
Page 9F-l

restricted to coils defined in

subgroup I}.
cols. 48-61, CUR initial, physical coil current as required
for decoupled initialization; units are in
amperes or per unit, depending upon the
value used for INPU in record 2 of the Gen-
eral Specification Group.

F. Output Selection and Interpretation

The following discussion of available displays and their interpretation
will be restricted to those associated directly with the U.M. algorithm. Volt-
ages and currents in the external network, including the mechanical network,
are selected using the conventional EMTP rules.

F. 1. Available Variables
For purposes of description, the available variables will be discussed in
three groups: I} variables associated with the U.M. mechanical system; 2}
"standard" electrical U.M. variables; and 3) S.M. Type-59 variables. For each
set, the output will be in SI units or per unit, depending upon the units used
in the simulation.

F. 1. 1. U.M. Mechanical-System Variabl~s

The mechanical variables which can be displayed directly for a machine are
the air-gap (electromechanical) torque and the speed and relative angle of the
rotor mass. When the electrical analog is used for the mechanical system, cur-
rents between nodes and injection currents at nodes are interpreted as torques;
and node-to-ground voltages are interpreted as speeds.

F. 1. 2. U.M. Electrical Variables

The electrical variables which can be specified for display from the U.M.
module are the physical coil currents as shown in figure 5 plus some selected
O-d-q domain currents and flux-linkages. Terminal voltages are selected using
standardEMTP procedures applied to the nodes at which each machine is connect-
ed to the external network.
The O-d-q domain [Link] which may be displayed are
1. the currents of the circuits undergoing rotational transformation into
the O-d-q domain; viz., those coils specified in subgroup 1 of the
coil records (the armature coils of all machine types except the
single-phase);
2. the currents flowing in the common in?ustances Lmd and Lmq (see figure
1); and which will be called magnetizing currents;
I
Page 9F-2

3. the flux-linkage associated with the common inductances Lmd and Lmq .

F. 1. 3. U.M.-S.M. Type-59 Variables

Although the U.M. algorithm accepts data in the S.M. Type-59 formats, the
calculations performed are basically different from those in the Dynamic Syn-
chronous Machine module. Consequently, the variables available for .display
differ between the two algorithms. The U.M. algorithm provides direct access
to the variables listed below.

F. 1. 3. a. Mechanical Variables
The mechanical variables available are torques, speeds and air-gap (elec-
tromechanical) torque angle. The specific variables are
1. the shaft torque between masses i and (i + 1);
2. the air-gap torque of the synchronous machine;
3. the air-gap torque of an exciter associated with the synchronous ma-
chine on the same mechanical system;
4. the air-gap torque angle of the synchronous machine in electrical de-
grees (this angle is +90 degrees at no load);
5. the absolute angular velocity (speed) of the masses in the mechanical
system in rad/sec.
NOTE: All torques are given in Newton-meters or per unit.

If angular positions of the various masses in the mechanical system are

desired, it is necessary to pass the corresponding angular velocities to TACS;
so that they may be integrated to yield the angles. Relative angles can be
computed by taking differences of "mass angles" in TACS.

F. 1. 3. b. Electrical Variables
The S.M. Type-59 data formats permit use of two quadrature-axis excitation
(or field) coils and two direct-axis coils in addition to the required, three-
phase armature circuit. The variables which may be displayed are (all currents
in amperes or per unit)
1. armature phase (or coil) currents m:: the O-d-q domain armature cur-
rents;
2. the field current which is identified as the 'first' direct-axis coil
current;
3. the d- and q-axis damper currents (the 'second' direct-axis coil and
the 'first' quadrature-axis coil);
4. the 'second' q-axis field-coil current 1"eddy current" coil);
5. the d- and q-axis flux-linkages associated with the common inductances
Lmd and Lmq respectively (units of volt-sec or per unit).
page 9F-3

F. 2. U.M.-S.M. Type-59 Variable Display Selection

Because of the desire to make machine data in the S.M. Type-59 format ac-
ceptable to the U.M. algorithm, an attempt has also been made to honor the var-
iable display requests of the Dynamic Synchronous MacMne Module. The selec-
tion of the variables to be output for a machine described in the modified S.M.
Type-59 format is made through the equivalent of the Class 5 S.M. data records.
As in the S.M. data structure, the output requests for a given machine are
placed immediately after the mass data for the machine. • .
A minimum of two output-selection records are required. If the number of
masses specified for a machine (NUMAS in cols. 1-2, record 1, of the Class 3
S.M. data) exceeds 80, a continuaton of record 2 will be accepted. The first
record contains flags applicable to the particular machine as a whole. The
second record contains flags for the selection of the speed and torque of each
mass associated with the machine.

F. 2. 1. Record 1 flags
The flag assignments for record 1 are shown below and are identified with
the variable names used for output selection in the Dynamic Synchronous Machine
module (Sect. 1.62, .p 34t). Note that the U.M. algorithm does not perform the
functions flagged by the variables JMIC (cols. 16-20) and JFV (cols. 46-50) of
the S.M. module; so the fields corresponding to these flags are left blank in
record 1. The effect of the flags as described below is obtained when non-zero
values are entered for them.

column
row 1 IS I IS I 15 I IS I IS I 15 I IS I 15 I 15
2
3 JPAR JETM JETEJIABC JSAT
4 EXTEND I I I
cols. 1-6, Text the word 'EXTEND' must be entered to iden-
tify the format of the output-flag records.
cols. 11-15, JPAR -- causes the O-d-q domain circuit parameters
to be listed (see fig. 1, p 1.63- 6).
cols. 21-25, JIDQO -- causes the armature currents in the O-d-q-
domain to be listed.
NOTE: Armature currents cannot be simultaneously listed for the phys-
ical coil form and the O-d-q-domain. A non-zero value for the
flag JIDQO forces JIABC (cols. 61-65) to be internally set to
zero regardless of the value contained in record 1 for JIABC.
cols. 26-30, JFI causes thejield current (first record of
the untrarisformed coils) to be listed).
cols. 31-35, JD2 causes the current of the direct-axis dam-
per coil (second record of the untransform-
ed coils) to be listed.
Page 9F-4

cols. 36-40, JQ1 causes the current of the quadrature-axis

damper coil (third record of the untrans-
formed coils) to be listed.
cols. 41-45, JQ2 causes the current of a second quadrature-
axis damper coil (fourth record of the un-
transformed coils) to be 1isted.
cols. 51-55, JETM causes the electromagnetic torque (TQGEN)
• to be listed •
NOTE: A non-zero value for JETM will prevent the listing of direct-
and quadrature-axis fluxes, regardless of the setting of JSAT
(cols. 66-70).
cols. 56-60, JETE causes the exciter torque or the machine
rotor angle to be listed;
3 -> list the relative rotor angle of
the machine in degrees (+90 deg.
at no load).
k -> k ~ 3 causes the listing of the
torque at the exciter mass.
cols. 61-65, JIABC -- causes the physical, armature, phase cur-
rents to be listed (see the note at JIDQO).
·cols. 66-70, JSAT -- when JETM is set to zero,
1 -> list the direct- and quadrature-
axis components of the main flux,
the rotor speed (OMEGM), and the
electromagnetic torque.
2 -> direct- and quadrature-axis mag-
netizing currents included also.
F. 2. 2. Record 2 Flags
Record 2 (and any continuation) consists of a set of flags; each of which
occupies one character positio~ in the record. Character-position 'j' is used
to specify the mechanical parameters to be displayed for mass 'j'. The flag
settings and the corresponding variable displays are given in Table III.
Table III: Settings of the jth character in output-control record 2 for
the mechanical variable selection of the jth mass of a U.M.-
S.M. Type-59 synchronous machine.

Flag Value Output Variable Units

0 None --
1 angular velocity -- absolute radians/sec
2 shaft torque between masses 'j' and 'j+1' newton-meters
3 both angular velocity and shaft torque as above
Page 9F-S

F. 3. Summary of the Variable-Display Selection Flags

The variables which must be selected for display within the U.M. module
are summarized in this section. The identity of the output-selection flags and
their location within the data stream for both 'standard' and U.M.-S.M. Type-59
data formats are given in tabular form.

F. 3. 1. Standard-Format U.M. Flags

The variables which can be selected for output when tbe input data is in
the 'standard' U.M. format are listed in Table IV, below, along with their re-
spective selection flags. Output of a variable is not obtained when its flag
is left blank or is set to zero.

Table IV: Variables which can be displayed as output of the U.M.

algorithm, and the standard, associated selection flags.

Variable to be Output Flag

Name Output Label(s) Name Set to Location of the Flag
armature coil current IPO, IPD, IPQ CUROUT 2 col. 47 of a coil
in the O-d-q domain record in subgroup 1
coil current to the IPA, IPS, IPC, CUROUT 1 col. 47 of the coil
external network IEl, IE2, etc. record
current, d-axis IMD TQOUT 3 col. 7, record 1, of
magnetizing General Machine Data
Subgroup
current, q-axis IMQ OMOUT 3 col. 8, record 1, of
magnetizing General Machine Data
Subgroup
flux, d-axis main FLUXMD TQOUT 2 or 3
(see LMUD)
flux, q-axis main FLUXMQ OMOUT 2 or 3
(see LMUQ)
rotor angle or THETAM THOUT 1 col. 9, record 1, of
torque angle General Machine Data
Subgroup
rotor speed OMEGM OMOUT 1, 2 or 3
electromagnetic torque TQGEN TQOUT 1~ 2 or 3
Page· 9G-l

F. 3. 2. U.M.-S.M. Type-59 Selection Flags

. The variables which can be selected for output when the input data is in
the .U.M.-S.M. Type-59 format are listed in Table V, p 1.63-39 along with their
respective selection flags. Output of a variable is not obtained when its flag
is left blank or set to zero.

F. 4. Variable-Labeling on the Printed Output

The variable labeling for output of the parameters calculated by the U.M.
algorithm follows the general pattern described in Section 1.8, Output-Variable
Specification Cards, of this rule book. Of the two rows of [Link] allotted to
each number position of a time-step data group in the printed output, the first
row of a U.M. output label is the machine identifier and the second row is the
variable label. A sample is given in figure 6 for the third machine of a group
of machines simulated by the U.M. algorithm. Tables IV and V give the labels
(TQGEN, FLUXMD, etc.) associated with the output variables.

UM-3 UM-3 UM-3 UM-3 UM-3

TQGEN FLUXMD IPA lEI THETAM
Fig. 6: Sample of U.M. output-variable labeling for machine 3 of an
input data group.

The U.M. algorithm always uses an electrical analog to calculate all me-
chanical variables. For the standard U.M. data format, the e.1ectrical analog
of the mechanical system is specified by the user. When data in S.M. Type-59
format is read, an electrical network is internally constructed to represent
the mechanical components of the rotor-system masses. The names entered on the
mass records of an S.M. Type-59 data set are used to identify the nodes of the
hidden electrical network.
Calculated values for any mechanical system are labeled as node or branch
voltages (for mass or intermass speeds) and/or branch currents (for torque) as
specified in Section 1.8. In the case of S.M. Type-59 data input, only the
node voltages representing mass absolute speeds can be displayed. For standard
U.M. data input, the mechanical system is spedified by the user; so that any
conventional EMTP voltage or current may be displayed.

G. Sample Simulations of Three-Phase Machines

Listings of the data files used to simulate simple, three-phase-machine
systems are shown in this section, along with the variable labels produced at
the start of the simulation output.. The comments accompanying each listing are
keyed to the circled letters on the listing .. -
Simulations for a synchronous machine described in standard U.M. data for-
mat, a synchronous machine described in U.M.-S.M. Type-59 data format, a cage-
rotor induction machine, and a wound-rotor, doubly-fed induction machine are
discussed.
Page 9G-2

Table V: Variables which can be displayed as output of the U.M.

algorithm, and the U.M.-S.M. Type-59 selection flags.

Variable to be Output Flag

Name Output Label(s} Name Set to
.
Location of the Flag
armature coil current IPO, IPO, IPQ JIOQO 1-9 cols. 21-25 of re-
in the O-d-q domain quest record 1
armature coil current IPA, IPS, IPC JIABC 1-9 cols. 61-65 of re-
in the phase domain quest record 1
field coil current IEl JFI 1-9 cols. 26-30 of re-
quest record 1
current, d-axis IE2 JD2 1-9 cols. 31-35 of re-
damper quest record 1
current, q-axis IE3 JQl 1-9 cols. 36-40 of re-
damper quest record 1
current, q-axis IE4 JQ2 1-9 cols. 41-45 of re-
eddy (coil 2) quest record 1
current, d-axis IMD
- r-
cols. 66-70 of re-
magnetizing quest record 1
current, q-axis IMQ
- JSAT 2-
(both currents are
magnetizing obtained)
flux, d-axis main FLUXMD
- "-

(see LMUD)
- JSAT 1-2
~(both fluxes are
flux, q-axis main FLUXMQ obtained)
(see LMUQ)
-
speed, mass 'j' See NOTE ? 1 or 3 col. 'j' of request
record 2
rotor speed OMEGM JSAT 1-2
electromagnetic torque TQGEN JETM 1-9 eols. 51-55 of re-
, quest record 1
torque angle THETAM JETE 3 cols. 66-70 of re-
quest record 1
torgue, exciter JETE 1
torque, intermass: See NOTE ? 2 or 3 col. 'j' of request
masses 'j' and record 2
'j = l'
NOTE: Mass speed and intermass torques are identified by the names on the
mass records, columns 71-76. I ~
Page 9G-3

G. 1. Synchronous Machine; Standard U.M. Format

. The system used for the simulation of a three-phase, synchronous machine
is shown in figure 7. The listing of the input file is given in Table VI,
p 41. The example consists of a three-phase. fault at the terminals of a syn-
chronous generator connected to an infinite bus through a short transmission
line modeled wi th lumped parameters. Two sources of torque. (current sources)
and tw~masses (capacitors) are included in the mechanical network. Note that
the common prefix 'BUS' used for node names in the listing has been dropped in
figure 7.

RS FO ,- - - -, Al XL
AO
F 7 1----04-
Ii N AiLs
T ~R ~a I
~---o·---------

MSI
a-iId
NA
TOe
oM t
u
r
1--{}--+-iCl--c)--t
BO

0 UH e
1r S~
~-O----('~
3e E

Mechanical
Network

Fig. 7: System diagram for example simulation of a synchronous ma-

chine with two sources of applied torque and two masses on
the shaft. The network elements are defined as follows:
a) 01, 02, 00 - small, current-sensing resistors used to
measure torques at the masses;
b) Ml, M2 capacitive equivalents of the masses on
the rotor shaft;
c) PE -------- series R-C elements which act as snub-
bers across the switches;
d) RC, RCE ---- large resistors which provide the connec-
tivity required by the EMTP;
e) RS -------- small resistor used for 'isolation';
-"
f) S -------- switches. repr·esenting the fault;
g)- XL -------- R-L elements used as approximations to a
transmission line.
TABLE VI: Listing of the Input File for the Simulation of a Synchronous
Machine Described in the Standard U. M. Format
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C ~14~.~T p VI-l I .. BATZ 3.. 0.00001 -1.0 p VI-2
C --------- TEST CASE FOR SN DATA ACCORDING TO FOUAD AND ANDERSON C' --------- INFINITE 8US SOURCE VOLTAGES
C - IN REAL UNITS I AUTONATIC INITIALIZATION 14BUSA. 30.... ba.O ••• -\. a
ABSOLUTE U.N. ,DINENSIONS, 20, 2, '0, 100 -@ 141USBO 3000.. b •• ' -120.' -1.0
C --------- TIHE SET '4BUSCO 3000.' 60.' "IZO.O -loa
0.0002 0.' C --------- EXCITATION SOURCE VOLTAGE (ActUAL VALUE SET 8Y ss INITIALIZATION'~
I I 0 • t -I a 141USFS '0.001 0.00001 -\. a )~
C -------- REQUEST FOR CHANGE IN ,RINTOUT INTERVAL C --------- HECH INPUT TORQUE (ACTUAL VALUES SET IV 55 INITIALIZATION) }
14BUSHSI-' 0.0000001 •.• 0101 -1.0 <i)
10
TACS HYBRIII
490 :500 '00
1~9USHS2-1 0.00000.1 0.00001 -I..
STEPI
9TEP2
FIRE
+8ATt
+BAT2
-TFAULT
-TCLEAR
-STEPO "STEP I -STEP2
C --------- TACS UNITY SIGNAL SOURCE
C --------- UH DATA
19 uH
I
BLANK RECORD ENDING GENERAL UI1 SPECIfICATION
J®
)@
IISTEPO 1.0 -1.0 C --------- UH-l HACH-TA9LE
'C --------- EHTP OUTPUT TO TACS \ 2 tl118USHG I 0.0373
90BATI '.'0~181:5
fOBAT:! 0.003'8:50
'OTFAULT 3030.0 \:5.0 BUSFS BUSI1SI
'OTCLEAR "ORE BUSHS:! -10. a
BLANK RECORD ENDING ALL TACS DATA C --------- UH-I COIL-TA8LE
C --------- EHTP CONNECTIVITY BUSAI
'USA a
tUSBO
BUSCO
I. 8E+8
I. IE+8
I. OE"8
C --------- TRANSI1ISSION LINES (0.001 OHHS AND 1.0 HILLI HENRY)
BUSAI 8USAO I. DE-3 \.0
'.001~42
'.001'42
0.0010
'.01834
0.07:560
•. a00:5~'5
0.[Link]
0 .••• 3767
'.0002075
0.00'133~
IUSll
tUSCI
8USFO }@
BUSBI 8USBO BUSAI BUSAO I BLANK RECORD ENDING ALL UH DATA
~USCI BUSCO BUSAI BUSAO I [fLANK RECORD ENDING ALL SOURCES ......•.••••.....••.••••...••....•.•.....
C --------- EHTP CONNECTIVITY REQUIREHENT
£lUSFS
BUSfS BUSfO
I. OE+b
I. OE-'
C --------- PARASIT\C ELEHENTS IN PARALLEL WITH SWITCHES (BUSI TO GROUND)
}@ C --------- REQUEST FOR NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT
BUSAI 8USAO BUSFS IUSHG
BLANK RECORD ENDING NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT SPECIFICATION .••..•...•••.•.....
PRINTER PLOT
BUSAI 10.1 3.0E+3 BLANK RECORD ENDING PLOT RECORDS ..•••••.••••••••••••.•••••••..•••..•••••..
£lUSBI BUSAI BEGIN NEW DATA CASE '0
BUSCI BUSAI PLANK DATA CASE 0.1
C --------- CIRCUIT FOR SWITCH CONTROL I.C
BAll 1.. In
BAT:! 1..
«All TFAULT 1.1 \0
BAT2 rCLEAR t.1 Cl
C --------- HECH NETWORK I
eUSI1G I.E"09 .to.
(tUSHP '.E"09
EtUSHP BUSNG [Link]-b
C SHALL RESISTANCES IN SERIES WITH TORQUE SOURCES I
(lUSHS lBUSHG
BUSHS2BUSHP IUSHS11USI1G
[Link]-Io
;}©
BLANK RECORD ENDING BRANCHES •.•.•....••......•...•....••..••••.•..••.••
C --------- TIHE OF FAULT AND TIHE OF CLEARING
TfAULT a."
TCLEAR 0.28
C --------- TACS CONTROLLED SWITCHES
118USAI FIRE
IIBUSBI FIRE
IIBUSCI FIRE
BLANK RECORD ENDING SWITHES ... ~ ........................•....••.••.•••••.
C --------- IATTERIES FOR SWITCH CONTROL
\ 4811TI 2.0 0.00001 -1. 0
Page 9G-S

The fault is represented by switches which are opened and closed under the
control of TACS signals. The. infinite bus is established by a balanced set of
EMTP Type 14 (sinusoidal) voltage sources. EMTP Type 14 sources are also used
to control the TACS signals, to provide field excitation and to provide current
equivalent to torque in the electrical analog of the mechanical system at the
machine shaft. The frequency of the latter sources is set to [Link]; so,
over the interval of 0.5 seconds covered by the simulation, their amplitudes
are essentially constant; i.e., the sources behave as d.c. sources. Thus, over
the interval of the simulation, the TACS reference signals (BAll AND BAT2), the
excitation voltage (node FS) and the mechanical torques. (nodes MS1 and MS2) are
effectively constant.
The components of the data file related directly to the simulation of the
synchronous machine are indicated by the circled letters on the listing. The
branches of the electrical network representing the mechanical system (mechani-
cal network) are specified in the same manner as for the other electrical sub-
networks and along with them (group C). The equivalent torque sources (group
£) are specified to be current sources by the entry of '-I' in columns 9 and
10.
Machines modeled in the U.M. algorithm are defined to be sources of EMTP
Type 19. The text string 'UM' in the record containing '19' in columns 1 and 2
(see group F on the listing) is not read during data input. The string serves
to aid in reading the list. The information contained in the second record of
the General Specifications (group F) is as follows:
a) a blank appears in column 1, indicating that all variables and parame-
ters are to be taken as specified in SI (physical) units;
b} a '1' appears in column 2, specifying that automatic initialization is
to be carried out.
c) a blank appears in column 15, indicating that compensation, rather
than prediction, is to be used in interfacing the UM module to the 3-
phase network.
Note the blank record which is required for termination of the General Specifi-
cation group.
The non-zero entry in column 2 of the second record does not trigger ini-
tialization. It does cause the proper incorporation of the U.M. module in the
normal, phasor-solution initialization of the EMTP. In the example simulation,
the initialization process is invoked by the entry of '-1.0' for TSTART {cols.
61-70} in the Type 14 source records.
The data in the machine table (group G on the listing) conveys the follow-
ing information:
a} From record 1,
1) work with U.M. Type 1 (1 in cols. 1-2);
2) two d-axis field coils {2 in cols. 3-4};
3) one q-axis field coil (1 in cols: S-::6);
4) output the electromechanical torque, TQGEN (1 in col. 7);
5} output the absolute rotor speed, OMEGM (I in col. 8);
Page 9G-6

6) output the torque angle, THETAM (1 in col. 9); .

7) use the node 'BUSMG' as the connection point of electromagnetic
torque to the mechanical network (BUSMG in cols. 10-14);
8) two-pole machine (1 pole-pair; 1 in cols. 22-23);
9) convergence margin for rotor speed - 0.0373 (cols. 52-65)
10) default system frequency used (cols.66-79 blank).
NO]E: Since a mechanical network was specified, cols. 16-21 and .
col s. 24-51 were left blank.
b) From record 2,
1) initial condition on the mechanical speed is not used (blank in
col s • 1-14);
2) unsaturated d-axis inductance = 0.0057815 hy (cols. 15-28);
3) no d-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).

c) From record 3,
1) initial condition on the torque angle is not used (blank in cols.
1-14);
2) unsaturated q-axis inductance = 0.0035850 hy (cols. 15-28);
3) no q-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).

d) From record 4,
1) peak value of the initial, armature-terminal voltage • 3030v (cols
1-14);
2) initial phase of the armature-terminal voltage = I5deg. (cols. 15-
28);
3) the type-14 source to be adjusted to meet the 4nitialcondition on
the current in the first direct-axis coil is connected at node
BUSFS (cols. 29-34);
4) the type-14 source to be adjusted to meet the initial condition on
the electromagnetic torque is connected at node BUSMSI (cols. 35-
40) in the mechanical network.
e) From record 5,
1) an additional type-14 source is to be adjusted to meet the initial
condition on electromagnetic torque (MORE entered in cols. 1-4);
2) the source is connected at node BUSMS2 (cols. 35-40) in the me-
chanical network;
3) the torque of the second source is 10 times that of the source at
node BUSMS1 and is of opposite sign (-10.0 in cols. 41-54).
The coil-table records (group H on the listing) contain the following in-
formation:
a) From record 1,
1) armature phase A of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSAI (eols. 29-34) and ground (blank in eols. 35-40);
page 9G-7

NOTES: a) Positive sequence in the U.H. module is always A-B-

C; regardless of the sequence of the external net-
work connected at the coil [Link].
b) Current into the external network at BUSAI is taken
as the positive reference.
2) the zero-component calculations are bypassed (blanks are entered
for the zero-component resistance and leakage inductance in' cols.
1-28). •
b) From record 2,
1) armature phase B of the U.H. model is connected between network
node BUSBI (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2} direct-axis, armature-coil resistance is 0.001542 ohms (cols. 1-
14);
3) direct-axis, armature-coil leakage inductance is 0.0005595 hy (see
cols. 15-28).
c) From record 3,
1) armature phase C of the U.H. model is connected between network
node BUSC1 (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2) quadrature-axis, armature-coil resistance and leakage reactance
are equal to the respective direct-axis values;
d) From record 4,
1) the first direct-axis field coil is connected between node BUSFO
(cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2) by the automatic-initialization convention, the. first direct-axis
field coil is the excitation field;
3) non-zero resistance and leakage inductance are given for the coil
(co ls. 1- 28) ;
e) From record 5,
1) the second direct-axis field coil is short circuited to ground
(blanks in both cols. 29-34 and 35-40);
2) non-zero resistance and leakage inductance are given for the coil
(cols. 1-28).
f) From record 6,
1) the first quadrature-axis field coil is short circuited to ground
(blanks in both cols. 29-34 and 35-40);
2) non-zero resistance and leakage inductance are given for the coil
(cols. 1-28).
Since two direct-axis field coils and on. quadrature-axis field coil were
specified in record 1 of the Machine-Table Group (group G on the listing), no
more data is required for the first machine. The blank record following the
coil-table records terminates the input for machines modeled through the U.M.
algorithm.
Page 9G-8

The only records left in the listing are those specifying node voltages to
be output, plot controls and data-case termination. These are in the standard
EMTP format .
.Table Vllt p 46, gives the beginning of the modified output listing for
the example problem. Output of the voltages to ground at nodes BUSAl, BUSAO,
BUSFS and BUSMG were requested at the end of the input data file. Output of
the currents in phases Band C of the pseudo-transmission line was specified by
a '1' entered in -column 80 of the respective branch records. Output 'of the
coil currents at the terminals of the machine was requested by a '1' entered in
column 47 of each coil-record. Output of electromagnetic torque (TQGEN), rotor
speed (OMEGM) and the torque angle (THETAM) were requested by setting the re-
spective flags to '1' in record 1 of the Machine Table Group.

G. 2. Synchronous Machine; U.M.-S.M. Type-59 Format

The system used for the simulation of a three-phase, synchronous machine
described by data in the S.M. Type-59 format is shown in figure 8. The listing
of the input file is given in Table VIII, p 47. The example is Benchmark Case
OC-26, and consists of a single-line-to-ground fault on a model of a short

VTACSI
.------, TR
TACS- 0 I~ V
Exciter
Model
leN
C AI
I r
- - -.J....--1 d ~ ~ I Bl TR
-- 10M tH
I oNA
C
UH
~ I
I S I e I TR
I ~

Fig. 8: System diagram for example simulation of a synchronous ma-

chine specified in S.M. Type-59 format. The transmission
line consists of the following elements:
a) S -------- switch representing the fault;
b) TC -------- shunt capacitors;
c) TL -------- pure inductive elements;
d) TR -------- small, resistive, current-sensing element
interconnecting-the transmission line and
machine terminals;
e) TRL -------- R-L elements;
TABLE VIII BeQinn1nQ of the Output L1stinQ for the S1""I.t10n of a Synchronous
[Link] with the Dat. in the Standard U.H. For".t

COLUHN HEADINGS FOR THE 28 EM1P OUTPUT VARIABLES FOLLOW. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO THE FIVE
POSSIBLE EHTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES, AS FOLLOWS .•.•
FIRST 4 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE £LECTRIC-NETWORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH RESPECT TO LOCAL GROUND) I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH VOLTAGES (VOLTAGE OF UPPER NODE HINUS VOLTAGE OF LOWER NODE) I
NEXT 6 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH CURRENTS (FLOWING FROH THE UPPER EHTP NODE TO THE LOWER) I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES PERTAIN TO DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS HACHINES, WITH NAMES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO 'TACS' (NOTE INTERNALLY-ADDED UPPER NAME OF PAIR).
FINAL 9 OUTPUT VARIABLES 8ELONG TO UNIVARSAL HACHINES (UM), WITH NAMES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
BRANCH POWER CONSUMPTION (POWER fLOW, If A SWITCH) IS TREATED LIKE A BRANCH VOLTAGE FOR THIS GROUPINGI
BRANCH ENERGY CONSUMPTION (ENERGY fLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TREATED LIkE A BRANCH CURRENT FOR THIS GROUPING.
STEP TIHE BUSAI BUSAO BUSFS BUSHG 8U8Bl BUSCI BUSHG BUSHP
(Has. H1 BUSBO BUSCO TERRA BUSMG
Speed) (Acceleratioll (Jnter"".s
Torque at HI) Torque, 111-H2) 0tJ
OJ
\Q
BUSHSI 8USHS2 UM-l UI1-1 UH-I UI1-1 UI1-1 Utt-t CD
BUSHG BUSHP TQCEN OHEGH THETAM IPA IP8 IPC
(Torqlle of CTorque of (Electro- (Rotor CTlIrque \0
Source 1) SlIIrce 2) ""Qnetic Speed) Angle) Cl
Torque) I
UH-l UH-l UH-l \0
lEI lE2 IE3
(Field
Current)
o 0.000000 0.292676E+04 0.300000E+04 0.380334E+Ol 0.376991E+'3-0.866803£+03-0.1212a7£+'~ 0.000000[+01 0.316677£+0'
-0.316677E+04 0.316677£+05 0.285010E+05 0.376991E+03 0.106896E+Ol '.236319£+04-0.918935£+03-0.1~4425E+04
-0.376568E+04 0.000000£+00 0.000000£+00
0.000200 0.285936E+04 0.299148E+04 0.380334£+01 0.376991£+03-0.721215£+03-0.133751E+04 0.175184E+00 0.316677E+05
-0.316677E+04 1.316677E+05 0.285008E+05 0.376991£+03 0.106896E+Ol 0.233365E+04-0.150808E+03-8.158284E+04
-0. 376510£+04-0.372960£-81-0.616817E-01 •
2 0.000400 0.211514E+04 •• 296596E+04 0.380334£+01 0.376991E+03-0.571530£+03-0.145455E+04 0.509146£+00 1.316677£+05
-0.316611£+04 '.316671E+05 0.285004E+05 0.316991E+03 0.106896E+Ol 0.22908~E+04-0.518414E+03- •• 171243E+04
-'.376511E+04-•• 645'~9E-Ol-0.134613E+OO
J 0.000600 0.261632E+04 '.292358E+14 •. 380334E+Ol 0.316991E+03-0.418600£+13-1.156334E+04 0.876911E+00 0.316616E+05
-0.316611E+04 0.316611E+05 O.284999E+O~ •• 31699'E+03 0.106896E+01 0.223503£+04-0.402735E+03-0.183230E+04
-0.316513£+04-0.866473E-Ol-0.210212E+00

NOTEI The bracketed leQ_nd. onder th, vari"ble label. were not p"rl of the output 1i.t1nQ.
They were added t. clarif, the interpret",t.n of the .utPlll labelinQ.
TABLE VIII: Listing of the Input File for the Simulation of a Synchronous
Machine Described in the U.M.-S.M. Type-59 Format.
STORE p VIII-l P VIII-2
BE'lN NEW DATA CASE AI 81 CI A2 B2 C2 AJ 8USHI
C THIS IS [Link] VITH ADDITIONS FROH [Link] .tANK RECORD ENDING NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT REQUEST
. C TEST CASE FOR RUNNI"' Sit TYPE-:I9 WITH THE UH CODE PRINTER PLOT
C THE DATA CASE 19 COPIED FROH BENCHHARK DC-2b WITH HODIFICATIONS I .LANK RECORD ENDING PLOT RECORDS.
e •. TRANSFORltER AND PI-SECTION REPLACED 8Y LINEAR BRANCHES I BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
~ • HACHINE UOLTAGE INCREASED BY A FACTOR OF 500 AND ANGLE +/00 DEGRI 8LANK RECORD ENDiNG DATA CASES.
C • INFINTE 8US VOLTAGE INCREASED BY A FACTOR OF 1001
C • TACS INTERFACING OF FIELD VARIABLES.
POWER FREQUENCY, 50 -@
.000200 .050 :10. :10.
I I I 0 1 -I
C -------- REQUEST FOR CHANGE IN PRINTOUT INTERVAL
10 10 20 20 100 100
TAC9 HYBRID
II VTACSI I .0 -I. 0 I .0
nVTACSI
~LANK RECORD ENDING ALL TACS DATA
C TRANSMISSION LINES :
AI A2 .1
Eel 82 AI A2
CI C2 AI A2
A2 A3 .8052 57.15
82 83 A2 AJ
C2 C3 A2 A3
A2 31.416 'tJ
[<2 31. 416 III
C2 31.41/0 \Q
A3 A4 43.34 m
~3 B4 A3 A4 IJ)
CJ C4 A3 A4 c;)
EcLANK RECORD ENDING BRANCH RECORDS
C NEXT RECORD HAS TOPEN • 80 itS "INUS EPSILN TO AVOID DELAYED OPENING I
I-'
C (HALF A CYCLE I' FOR PR IHE AND BURROUGHS! WSH. 27 FE8 1982.
lSI
113 .001 0 . 07"
~LANK RECOR 0 ENDING SWHCH RECORDS
14M 1120.59' 50. -20. -I.
14114 1120.5' 50. -140. -I.
14C4 1120.59 50. 100. -I.
C UM WITH SM TYPE-59 DATA INPUT
19 UM
S"DATA
BLANK RECORD ENDING GENERAL Ult SPEC
}©
J~
59AI 5/09'.05 ".0 +30.0
5981
59CI
PARAMETER FtTTING
I I 2
e. 001 ..
5.14757
0 . 115
1.0
I. 85
150.'
1.1&
13.8
0.2575
0.051142 0.382/009 O. 197985
/000.0
I. 76
600.0
0.18
120.0
0.18
J @
C --------- MASS RECORD
I 1.0 51.0 I. 0 BUSHI l@
C --------- OUTPUT REQUESTS
EXTEND 0 0
3
C --------- S.H. CLASS 6, TACS INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
11VTACSI
FINISH
-~LANK RECORD ENDING ALL Ult DATA
{:
BLANK RECORD ENDING SOURCE RECORDS
Page 9G-l1

transmission line connecting a synchronous generator to an infinite bus. A

constant torque is applied to the shaft system of the rotor. Inertia and vis-
cous damping are associated with the single mass of the rotor system. The
field voltage is supplied through an interface to TACS.
The fault is represented by a switch which is closed at 0.0199 sec and re-
opened at 0.0799 sec. The infinite bus consists of a balanced set of EMTP Type
14 (sinusoidal) voltage sources. Excitation for the field is provided -through
an interface to a TACS signal, which, in this case, is a constant.
The components of the data file related directly to the. simulation of the
synchronous machine are indicated by-the circled letters on the listing. The
operating frequency is set to 50 hz by the special request record (comment A).
The beginning of the Universal Machine source is indicated by the record
in group C which contains '19' in columns 1 and 2. The comments given above
for standard data input apply here.
The second record of the General Specifications (group C) contains the
following information:
a) a blank appears in column 1, indicating that all variables and parame-
ters are to be taken to be specified in SI (physical) units;
b) a blank appears in column 2, indicating that manual initialization is
to be carried out; however, the presence of S.M. Type-59 data over-
rides this flag;
c) the text SMDATA (co1s. 3-8) informs the algorithm that one or more ma-
chines in the data groups which follow are. described by data in the
S.M. Type-59 format, and automatic initialization is invoked for all
U.M. machines;
d) a blank appears in column 15, indicating that compensation, rather
than prediction, is to be used in interfacing the UM module to the 3-
phase network.
Note the following blank record which is required for termination of the Gener-
al Specification group.
The requirement for automatic initialization is not sufficient to trigger
initialization. It does cause the proper incorporation of the U.M. module in
the normal, [Link] initialization of the EMTP. In the example simu-
lation, the initialization process is invoked by the entry of '-1.0' for TSTART
(cols. 61-70) in the Type 14 source records defining the infinite bus.
The records in group D on the listing are S.M. Class 1 data (Sect. 1.62,
p 34f). The data defines the initial, steady-state, peak, terminal voltage
(cols. 11-20), operating frequency (co1s. 21-30), and phase angle. Blank en-
tries on the second and third records indicate that a balanced, three-phase set
of voltages exists at the machine terminals. The amplitude and phase informa-
tion is used to establish the initial field voltage and the shaft torque during
the automatic initialization process. -
The text record f contains the words 'PARAMETER FInING', which indicate
that manufacturer's data, rather than O-d-q domain data, describes the machine.
Page 9G-12

The data in group F of the listing is the S.M. Class 3 data (Sect. 1.62, p
34jl). The information contained is:
a} from record 1,
1) one mass on the rotor shaft (cols. 1-2);
2) the rotor mass is mass number 1 (cols. 3-4);
3) no exciter on the rotor shaft (blank in cols. 5-6);
4) two-pole machine (cols. 7-10);
5) machine rated at 150.0 mva (cols. 31-40);
6) machine rated at 13.8 kv rms (cols. 41-50);
7} no-load field current for rated voltage is 600 a (eols. 51-60);
and no saturation is used (the entry is positive).
b) manufactur·er's short-circuit data in records 2 and 3 (the blank record
required for the normal S.M. data when no saturation is specified is
omitted for U.M. data output).
The data in group G of the listing is the S.M. Class 4 data (Sect. 1.62, p
34p). The information contained for mass number 1 (see cols. 1-2) is:
a} all of the external mechanical power is associated with the mass (1.0
in col s. 11-20);
b) the moment of inertia is 50xl0 6 pound-feet (cols. 21-30);
c) the viscous damping coefficient is 1.0 (cols. 61-70);
d) the mechanical node in the internally-generated mechanical network
which couples it to the electromagnetic torque in the machine is BUSMI
(cols. 71-76);
Record group H on the listing specifies the parameters to be listed with
the output. The information contained is:
a) from record 1,
1) EXTEND entered in columns 1-6 indicates that the output specifica-
tions are in the extended format (required by the U.M. module);
2) No output of Park-domain circuit parameters (0 in cols. 11-15);
3) the flag for the field of cols. 16-20 of the S.M. output request
is ignored, so it is left blank;
4) No output of Park-domain armature currents (0 in cols. 21-25);
5) current in the field winding (lEI) will be output (1 in cols. 26-
30);
6) current in the direct-axis damper winding (IE2) will be output (1
in cols. 31-35);
7) current in the quadrature-axis damper winding (IE3) will be output
(1 in cols. 36-40);
8) current in the quadrature-axis, eddy-current coil (IE4) will be
output (1 in cols. 41-45);
Page 9G-13

9) the field voltage cannot be requested as part of the U.M. module

output (cols. 46-50 left blank);
10) the electromagnetic torque deve.1oped in the machine will be output
(1 in cols. 51-55);
11) there is no exciter on the rotor shaft, so no exciter torque out-
put is requested (cols. 56-60 left blank);
12) the armature currents UPA, IPB, IPC) will be output (1 in . cols.
61-65);
13) since no saturation was specified in group F, no output of satura-
tion data is requested (cols. 66-70 left blank); neither will mag-
netizing currents nor rotor speed be listed.
b) the '3' entered in column 1 of record 2 requests the output of the ab-
solute speed of mass I and the shaft torque between mass 1 and mass 2
(which does not eXist).
The data in group I of the listing is the S.M. Class 6 data (Sect. 1.62, p
34v). The first record has '71' entered in the first two columns, which means
that VTACSI is the. TACS variable providing the field excitation. The second
and third records indicate that electrical and mechanical variables, respect-
ively are to be passed to TACS; however, the variables are not coded onto the
records, and these two requests are ineffective.
The text record 'FINISH' terminates the data string fo.r the first (and
only) U.M.-S.M. machine.
The node-voltage request and other terminating conunands at the end of the
file play the same role as described above for standard data input.
Table IX, pSI, gives the beginning of the modified [Link] listing for the
example problem. Output of the voltages to ground at nodes AI, Bl, Cl, A2, B2,
C2, and BUSMI were requested at the end of the input data file. Output of the
currents in phases A, Band C at the machine terminals was specified by a '1'
entered in column 80 of the respective, current-sensor-branch records. Output
of the armature coil currents of the machine was requested by a '1' entered in
column 65 of the first output-request record. Output of electromagnetic torque
(TQGEN), rotor speed (OMEGM) and the other variables shown on the output list-
i ng were requested by setting the. respecti ve fl ags to ' l' as descri bed above.

G. 3. Cage Rotor Induction Machine

The system used for the simulation of a three-phase, induction machine is
shown in figure 9, p 52. The listing of the input file is given in Table X,
p 53. The example consists of a three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motor
whose load torque undergoes a step change. The machine is connected to an in-
finite bus through a short transmission line modeled with lumped parameters.
The source of torque (a current source), the lumped shaft masses (a capacitor),
and viscous damping are included in the mechanical network. Note that the com-
mon prefix 'BUS' used for node names in the listing has been dropped in figure
9. The infinite bus is established by a balanced set of EMTP Type 14 (sinu-
soidal) voltage sources.
TABLE IX, BeoinninQ" the Output [Link] 'or the SiMUlation .r a Svnchronous
Hachine with the Data in the U.H.-S.H. Type-59 For"at.

COlUHN HEADINGS FOR THE 29 EHTP OUTPUT VARIABLES FOLLOW. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO THE FIVE
POSSIBLE EHTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES, AS fOLLOWS •.••
FIRST 4 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE ELECTRIC-NETWORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH RESPECT TO LOCAL GROUND) I
'COLUHN HEADINGS FOR THE 29 EHTP OUTPUT VARIABLES FOLLOW. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO THE FIVE
POSSULE EHTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES, AS FOLLOWS ••••
FIR8T 8 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE ELECTRIC-NETWORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH RESPECT TO LOCAL GROUND) I
NEXT- I OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH VOLTAGES (VOLTAGE OF UPPER NODE HiNUS VOLTAGE OF LOWER NODE) I •
NEXT 3 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE 8RANCH CURRENTS (FLOWING FROH THE UPPER EHTP NODE TO THE LOWER)'
NEXT .• OUTPUT VARIABLES'PERTAIN TO DYNAHIC SYNCHRONOUS HACHINES, WITH NAHES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
NEXT 1 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO 'TACB' (NOTE INTERNALLY-ADDED UPPER NAHE OF PAIR).
FINAL 8 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO UNIUARSAL HACHINES (UH), WITH NAHES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
8RANCH POWER CONSUHPTION (POWER FLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TREATED LIKE A BRANCH VOLTAGE FOR THIB GROUPINGI
BRANCH ENERGY CONSUMPTION (ENERGY FLOW, IF A SWITCH) 18 TREATED LIKE A BRANCH CURRENT FOR THIS GROUPING.
STEP TIHE Al al Ct A2 B2 C2 A3 BUSHI
(H •• s 1 8peed.
[Link] Req.)
BUSHt AI 8t CI TACS UH-I UH-l UH-l 'tI
TERRA A2 B2 C2 VTACSI TQCEII IPA IPB OJ
(H .... 1 Speed. (Field (£lectro- I.Q
Output Request> Voluoe) ",·onetic 10
Torque)
UH-I UH-I UH-I UH-l UH-I \0
IPC lEI IE2 IE3 IE4 Cl
(Field I
~
Current·) ~
0.000000 0.493206E+04 0.126154E-02-0.493206E+04 0.492521E+04 '.47764'E+Ol-0.492999E+04 0.402300E+04 '.314159E+03
0.314159E+030.684382E+02-0.477514E+02-0.206868E+02 0.100000£+01 0.139939E+04 0.684432E+02-0.471514£+02
-0.206918E+02' .309304E+03 8.000000E+00 •• OOOOOOE+OO 0.000000£+00
0.000200 0.47434IE+04 .357789E+03-8.510120E+04 0.473648E+04 0.36223IE+03-0.509812£+04 0.408206E+04 •• 314159£+03
'.314159E+03 .692838E+02-0.444269E+02-0.248570E+02 0.100000E+OI 0.139921£+04 0.692839E+02-0.444269E+02
-0.248510E+02 .309204£+03 '.100167£+00 0.000000£+00 0.755842E-03
2 0.000400 0.453613E+04 .713988£+03-1.525012£+04 0.452914E+04 0.718080£+03-0.524722£+04 0.41250IE+04 •• 314159£+03
'.314159£+03 .698564£+02-0.409277£+02-0.289287E+02 0.100000£+01 0.139918E+04 0.698565E+02-0.409271E+02
-0.289288£+02 .309003£+03 '.300070E+00 0.000000£+00 0.B76436E-03
3 0.000600 0.431096E+04 .106134£+04-0.537830£+04 0.430394£+04 0.107107£+04-0.537502£+04 0.415168E+04 '.314159£+03
0.314159E+03 .701529£+02-0.37266IE+02-0.328869E+02 0.100000£+01 0.139915E+04 0.701530E+02-0.372661£+02
-0.328869E+02 .308804£+03 O.4989~OE+00 [Link]+OO 0.984334E-03
4 0.000800 0.40687~E+04 .141652£+04-1.548528£+04 0.406174£+04 0.141987£+04-0.548160E+04 0.416197E+04 '.314159£+03
0.314159E+03 .701731£+02-0.334583£+02-0.367148£+02 0.100000£+01 •• 139911E+04 0.70173IE+02-0.334582£+02
-0.36114~E+02 .308605E+03 •• 697003£+00 [Link]+OO 0.111153£-02

NOT£I The [Link] leoends under the [Link] labels were not p.r~ .f the output [Link].
The, were .dded t. cl .. rl', [Link] of the output labelino.
page 9G-IS

The components of the data file related directly to the simulation of the
synchronous machine are indicated by the circled letters on the listing.
. . The branches of the electrical network representing the mechanical system
. (mechanical network) are specified in the same manner as for the other electri-
cal subnetworks and along with them (group B).
The equivalent torque source (group C) is specified to be a current source
by the entry of '-~' in columns 9 and 10. The frequency of the sources is set
to [Link]; so, over the interval of 0.8 seconds covered by the simulation,
its amplitude is essentially constant; and the mechanical torque (node MS) is
effectively constant.
r------, TR
AS2
I ~
I GI A
r
Mechanical I E~ m TR
Network U a BS2
MS I f~ t
u
r
IX 6R e
Irq N1
N
TR
u E
I---D----Cll--i e _ _ _ --.J

MGR

Fig. 9: System diagram for example simulation of a squirrel-cage

induction machine with a variable applied torque, a single
mass on the shaft, and mechanical loss which varies as the
square of the speed. The network elements are defined as
follows: .
a) Dl, D2, ---- resistor equivalents of the viscous load;
b} Ml -------- capacitive equivalent of the mass on the
rotor shaft;
c} RC -------- large resistors which provide the connec-
tivity required by the EMTP;
d} T -------- resistor used for torque sensing;
e) TR -------- terminal-current sensing resistors.

Machines modeled in the U.M. algorithm are defined to be sources of EMTP

Type 19. The text string 'UM' in the record containing '19' in columns 1 and 2
(see group D on the listing) is not read during data input. The string serves
to aid in reading the list. The. information -contained in the second record of
the General Specifications (group D) is as follows:
a) a blank appears in column 1, indicating that all variables and parame-
ters are to be taken to be in SI (physical) units;
TABLE X: Listing of the Input File for the Simulation of a Squirrel-Cage
Induction Machine.
'.110 0.0012
P X-2
BLANK RECORD ENDING ALL UH DATA •.•....••••.•.•••••.•••••••••.••.•••..•..
BLANK RECORD ENDING ALL SOURCES ••••••••••••••••••••.•••.•••.•.....••...•
J®
P X-I C ---------- REQUEST FOR OUTPUT OF NODE VOLTACES
eUSAS2BUSA2 BUSHG
BLANK RECORD ENDING NODE VOLTACE OUTPUT SPECIFICATION .••••••.••.••.••...
tEGIN NEW DATA CASE 'RINTER PLOT
C UH TYPE-J I 3-PHASE POWER SIDE, 0- AND Q- SQUIRREL CAGE ROTOR. BLANK RECORD ENDING PLOT RECORDS ..••.....••.•••.•••.•••••••.•.....•••.•.
e RATING I 2.541 HVA, 4.2 KV, 4 POLE ( 85.67 X EFFICIENCY AT
C 0.S4b PF AND 14.0E+1 NH. I KIPP TORQUE. 1'.157E+3 NH ,SLP.24.3X) BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK DATA CASE
•
~aSOLUTE U.H. DIHENSIONS, 20, 2, 50, 100 -@
. C TIt1E SET
1.0005 0.8 ..
1 1 0 0 1 -I o
C -------- REQUEST FOR CHANGE IN PRINTOUT INTERVAL
10 1'0 200 I 210 7'0 1000 200
C -------- TR~NSt1ISSION LINE LOSSES
.USA2 8USAS2 5.0E-3
BUSP2 8US8S28USA~ .USAS2
BUSC2 BUSCS28USA2 aUSAS2
C --------- CONNECTIVITY OF EHTP FOR ELECTRIC NETWORK
auSAS2 I .IE+b
BUS8S2 BUSAS2
~USCS2 BUSAS2 't1
OJ

:~
C --------- HECHANICAL NETWORK COHPONENTS
'USHG BUSHGR If•• 5 1.0
!\)
~USHGR 8USHG 8USHCR
BUSHG 6.0E+4
C -------- FOR HEASUREHENT OF ELECTROHECHANICAL TORQUE \0
BUSHS BUSHG I. IE-I. Cl
ElLANK RECORD ENDING BRANCHES •.............•...................••••••.••. I
BLANK RECOIID ENDING SWITCHES .... , •..•..........•....•.....•........•.... .....
e --------- SOUIICES·FOR INFINITE aus 0'1
14'USA92 IBO.O 60.' I.' -1.1
149USBs:! IBO.O '60.0 -120.' -1 ••
-1.0
148USC52 lS0.0 bO.'
148U5HS -I 8.000081 0.00001
+120.'
C --------- HECHANICAl LOAD TORQUE (ACTUAL VALUE SET BY 55 INITIALIZATION).
C STEP DOWN IN LOAD TORQUE AFTER 0.1 SECONDS I
149US/15 -I +100.0 0.00001
-I. 0

0.1
}©
C
19 UH
1
--------- UH DATA
J@
BLANK RECORD ENDING GENERAL U.H. SPECIFICATION

}@
C --------- UH HACHINE-TABLE
C --------- UH TYPE 3 (INDUCTION HACH) DATA
3 1 111 I BUSHG 2 0.1885
0.82358
0.02358
C STEADY-STATE INITIALIZATION REQUEST AT B % SLIP I
B.O BUSHS

~
C --------- UH COIL-TABLE
e THE POWER (ARHATURE/STATOR) COILS •
'.063 0.0001911 BUSA2 I
C REHARK. IF NO ZERO CURRENT OF THE POWER COILS IS DESIRED, THEN SIMPLY LEAVE
C THE RESISTANCE AS WELL AS THE INDUCTANCE IN THE CARD ABOVE BLANK.
• • 0103 0.0013925 BUS82 I
0.0&3 0.0003925 BUSC:! I
C THE EXCITATION (ROTOR) COILS I
'.110 0.0012
page 9G-17

b) a '1' appears in column 2, specifying that automatic initialization is

to be carried out.
c) a blank appears in column 15, indicating that compensation, rather
than prediction, is to be used in interfacing. the UM module to the 3-
phase network.
Note the blank record which is required for termination of the General Specifi-
cat i on group. '
•
The non-zero entry in column 2 of the second record does not trigger ,n,-
tialization. It does cause the proper incorporation of the U.M. module in the
normal, phasor-so1ution initialization of the EMTP. In the example simulation,
the initialization process is invoked by the entry of '-1.0' for TSTART (co1s.
61-70) in the Type 14 source records.
The data in the machine table (group E on the listing) conveys the follow-
ing information:
a) From record 1,
1) work with U.M. Type 3 (3 in cols. 1-2);
2) one d-axis field coil (1 in cols. 3-4);
3) one q-axis field coil (1 in cols. 5-6);
4) output the electromechanical torque, TQGEN (1 inca 1. 7);
5) output the absolute rotor speed, OMEGM (1 in col. 8);
6) output the angle of the rotor relative to the. stator, THETAM (1 in
col. 9);
7) use the node 'BUSMG' as the connection point of electromagnetic
torque to the mechanical network (BUSMG in cols. 10-14);
8) four-pole machine (2 pole-pair; 2 in cols. 22-23);
9) convergence margin for rotor speed • 0.1885 (co1s. 52-65);
10} default system frequency used (cols.66-19'b1ank).
NOTE: Since a mechaniCal network was specified, cols. 16-21 and
cols. 24-51 were left blank.
b) From record 2,
1) initial condition on the mechanical speed is not used (blank in
cols. 1-14);
2) unsaturated d-axis inductance • 0.02358 hy (co1s. 15-28);
3) no d-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).
c) From record 3,
1) initial condition on the torque angle is not used (blank in cols.
1-14); ; .-'

2) unsaturated q-axis inductance = 0'.02358 hy (eols. 15-28);

3) no q-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).
Page 9G-18

d) From record 4,
1) the initial slip is 8 percent (co1s 1-14);
2) an induction machine is simulated; columns 15-34 are left blank;
3) the type-14 source to be adjusted to meet the initial condition on
the electromagnetic torque is connected at node BUSMS (co1s. 35-
40). in the mechanical network.
The coil-table records (group F on thp listing) contain the follOwing in-
formation:
a) From record 1,
1) armature phase A of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSA2 (co1s. 29-34) and ground (blank in co1s. 35-40);
NOTES: a) Positive sequence in the U.M. module is always A-B-
C; regardless of the sequence of the external net-
work connected at the coil terminals.
b) Current into the external network at BUSA2 is taken
as the positive reference.
2) the zero-component calculations will be carried out using the re
sistance and inductance values given in columns 1-14 and 15-28,
respectively (see the note after record 1).
b) From record 2,
1) armature phase B of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSB2 (co1s. 29-34) and ground (blank in co1s. 35-40);
2) direct-axis, armature-coil resistance is 0.063 ohms (co1s. 1-14);
3) direct-axis, armature-coil leakage inductance is 0.0003825 hy (see
co1s. 15-28).
c) From record 3,
1) armature phase C of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSC2 (co1s. 29-34) and ground (blank in co1s. 35-40);
2) quadrature-axis, armature-coil resistance and leakage reactance
are equal to the respective direct-axis values;
d) From record 4,
1) direct-axis, field-coil resistance is 0.110 ohms (co1s. 1-14);
2) direct-axis, field-coil leakage inductance is 0.0012 hy (co1s. 15-
28).
3) the direct-axis field coil is short-circuited to ground (blanks in
both co1s. 29-34 and 35-40);
f) From record 5,
1) the quadrature-axis, field-coil [Link]..istance and leakage reactance
are equal to the respective direct-axis values;
2) the quadrature-axis field coil is short-circuited to ground
(blanks in both cols. 29-34 and 35-40);
page 9G-19

Since one direct-axis field coil and one quadrature-axis field coil were
specified in record 1 of the Machine-Table Group (group E on the listing), no
more data is required for the first machine. The blank record following the
coil-table records terminates the input for machines modeled through the U.M.
[Link].
The only records left in the listing are those specifying node voltages to
be output, plot controls and data-case termination. These are in the standard
EMTP format.
. Table XI, p 57, gives the beginning of the modified output listing for the
example problem. Output of the voltages to ground at nodes BUSAS2, BUSA2 and
BUSMG were requested at the. end of the input data file. Output of the current
in phase A of the pseudo-transmission line was specified by a 'I' entered in
column 80 of the phase-A-branch record. Output of the coil currents at the
terminals of the machine was requested by a 'I' entered in column 47 of each
coil-record. Output of electromagnetic torque (TQGEN), rotor speed (OMEGM) and
the torque angle (THETAM) were requested by setting the respective flags to '1'
in record 1 of the Machine Table Group (group f).

G. 4. Doubly-Fed Induction Machine

The system used for the simulation of a three-phase, doubly-fed induction
machine is shown in figure 10, p 58. The listing of the input file is given in
Table XII, p 59. The examp.1e consists of a three-phase., wound-rotor induction
motor whose rotor coils are excited by a balanced, three-phase set of voltage
sources and whose load torque undergoes a step change. The machine is connec-
ted to an infinite bus through a short transmission line modeled with lumped
parameters. The source of torque (a current source), the lumped shaft masses
{a capacitor}, and viscous damping are included in the mechanical network.
Note that the common prefix' BUS' used for node names in the. 1i st i ng has been
dropped in figure 10.
The components of the data fil e re.l ated directly to the simulation of the
doubly-fed machine are indicated by the circled letters on the listing.
The infinite bus is established by a balanced set of EMTP Type 14 ([Link]-
soidal) voltage sources. The sources connected to the rotor circuit (group D)
are also EMTP Type 14 voltage. sources.
The branches of the electrical network representing the mechanical system
(mechanical network) are specified in the same manner as for the other electri-
cal subnetworks and along with them (group C).
The equivalent torque source (group E) is specified to be a current source
by the entry of '-1' in columns 9 and 10. The frequency of the sources is set
to [Link]; so, over the interval of 0.9 seconds covered by the simulation,
its amplitude is essentially constant. The mechanical torque (node MS) is ef-
fectively constant; except for the step change at 0.02 seconds.
. -'

Machines modeled in the U.M. algorithm are defined to be sources of EMTP

Type 19. The text string 'UM' in the record containing '19' in columns 1 and 2
(see group F on the listing) is not read during data input. The string serves
to aid in reading the list. The information contained in the second record of
the General Specifications (group F) is as follows:
TABLE XII 8.91nnin9 of the Output Listinq for thR Si"[Link] 0' • Squirrel-C.9R
Induction [Link] •.

COLUHN HEADINGS FOR "fHE 23 EHTP OUTPUT VARIABLES FOLLO~. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO THE FIVE
POSSIBLE EHTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES. AS FOLLOWS •.••
FIRST J OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE ELECTRIC-NETWORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH RESPECT TO LOCAL GROUND) I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH VOLTAGES (VOLTAGE OF UPPER NODE HINUS VOLTAGE OF LOWER NODE)I
NEXT 4 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH CURRENTS (FLOWING FROH THE UPPER EHTP NODE TO THE LOWER) I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES PERTAIN TO DYNAHIC SYNCHRONOUS HACHINES, ~ITH NAMES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO 'TACS' (NOTE INTERNALLY-ADDED UPPER NAHE OF PAIR).
FINAL 8 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO UNIVARSAL HACHINES (UH), WITH NAHES GENERATED INTERNALLY I
DRANCH POWER CONSUHPTION (POWER FLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TREAtED LIKE A BRANCH VOLTAGE FOR THIS GROUPINGI
DRANCH ENERGY CONSUHPTION (ENERGY FLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TREATED LIKE A BRANCH CURRENT FOR THIS GROUPING.
STEP UHE DUSAS2 DUSA2 BUSHG BUSA2 BUSHG BUSHG BUSHS UH-l
([Link] DUSAS2 BUSHGR TERRA DUSHG TQGEN
Speed) (Il."ping (Acce1er.tin9 (Source (E1ectro".gnetic
Torque) Torque ,It H) Torquit) Torque) ."
Q/
I.Q
UH-t UH-l UH-I UtI-! UH-l UH-l UH-l
OHEGH THETAH IPA IPB IPC lEI IE2 111
(A ot or (Aehtive \0
SpeRd) Ronr An91e) G"l
I
o 0.000000 0.180000E+03 0.11948IE+03 '.113416E+03-0.103866E+03 0.525503E+OI 0.000000E+00-0.135659E+03-0.140914E+03 N
0.173416E+03 0.1853'8E+OO-'~I03866E+03 0.104913E+03-8.104672E+OI 0.523455E+O~-0.1281~4E+03 lSI
0.000500 0.176812E+03 0.116244E+03 0.173416E+03-0.113482E+03 0.525503E+01-0.516792E-02-0.135659E+03-0.140'09E+03
\ 0.173416E+03 0.812106E+00-0.113492E+03 0.919398E+02 0.215418E+02 0.504133E+02-0.129516E+03
2 0.001000 0.167360E+03 0.166764£+03 0.173416E+03-0.119082E+03 0.525502E+OI-0.119130E-Ol-0.135659E+03-0.140903E+03
0.113416E+03 0.958814E+00-0.119082E+03 0.151131E+02 0.433681E+02 0.484683E+02-0.130250E+03
3 0.001500 0.151919E+03 0.151311E+03 0.113416E+03-0.120464E+03 0.525502E+OI-0.228129£-01-0.135659E+03-0.140892E+03
0.17341bE+03 0.104552E+01-0.120464E+03 0.5b805bE+02 0.636581E+02 0.465015E+02-0.130951E+03

NOTE: The [Link] le9Rnds under the ~.[Link] 1.bR1s were not [Link] of the output 1istin9.
They werR .dded to [Link] the [Link] of the output 1.belln9.
Page 9G-21
a) a blank appears in column It indicating that all variables and parame-
ters are to be taken to be 1n SI (physlcal) units;
b) a '1' appears in column 2, specifying that automatic initialization is
to be carried out.
,c) a 'I' is entered in column 15, indicating that prediction, rather than
compensation t is to be used in interfacing the UM module to the three-
phase network •

•
RM .-----, XL
AS2

AI
BSl
RM ~I
a
XL
BS2
t
~ I
e
RM I C2 XL

L .20rqu!... --'~

VL
Mechanical
Network

Fig. 10: System diagram for example simulation of a doubly-fed, in-

duction machine with one rotor mass and one applied torque
at the shaft. The network elements are defined below.
a) M --------- capacitive equivalent of the mass on the
rotor shaft;
b} RC -------- large resistors which provide the connec-
tivity required by the EMTP;
c} RM -------- small , current-sensing resistors;
d) TS -------- small, torque-sensing resistor;
e) VL -------- resistors forming a viscous-friction load
on the mechanical system;
f) XL -------- R-L elements used as approximations to a
transmission line;

Note the blank record which is required for ter:mi.!)ation of the General Specifi-
cation group.
The non-zero entry in column 2 of the second record does not trigger ini-
tialization. It does cause the proper incorporation of the U.M. module in the
TABLE XII: Listing of the Input File for the Simulation of a Doubly-Fed
Induction Machine.
p XII-2
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
p XII-I
C COHDINATION OF CASES· [Link] AND .[Link]
C DOUBLr FED HACHINE WITH EXTERNAL ROTOR VOLTAGE SOURCE
C AUTOHATIC SS FoR UH TYPE 4 ( 3-PHASE [NO. HACH.)
C POWER COILS NON-COHPENSATED (PREDICTION USED).
·C STEP ON INPUT TORQUE AT 0.02 SECONDS
C --------- ROTOR COILS
'.110
0.110
0.0012
0.0012
8USBt
BUSCI
8USAI
BLANK RECORD ENDING ALL UH DATA
I
• 1
I
J
C RATING I 720 KVA ,4.2 KV, • POLE ( 8~.b7 % EFFICIENCY AT IILANK RECORD ENDING ALL SOURCES •...••.••.••••.•••••••••.••..••••••••..••
C __________ REQUEST FOR OUTPUT OF NODE VOLTAGES
C 0.94b PF AND. 14.0E+3 NH. ) KIPP TORQUE • • ~.09E+2 MH. 8LIP·2.~X)
ABSOLUTE U.H. DIHENSIONS. 2D, 2. ~O, 60 --@ IIUSA82BUSA2 9U5Al 8USHG
BLANK RECORD ENDING NODE VOLTAGE OUTPUT SPECIFICATION •••••.•••••••••.•..
C TIHE SET
0.0002 D.9 PR INTER PLOT
I 2 I • I -I o eLANK RECORD ENDING PLOT RECORDS ...•••••••••••••••••••••.•.•••••••••••••
C -------- REQUEST FOR CHANGE IN PRINTOUT INTERVAL BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
~oo :500 ~OOO 2~OO BLANK DATA CASE
10 90 100 I 110 390

}~
C --------- ROTOR EXTERNAL RESISTANCES
BUSAI BUSASI t .E-O~
BUS81 BUS8S18USAI 8USASI
BUSCI 8USCSIDU5AI BUSASI
C -------- TRANSHISSION LINES
BUSA2 BUSAS2 "OE-4 18 .• I
I
BUS82 BUSBS2BUSA2 BUSAS2 I 'tI
BUSC2 8USCS2BUSA2 BUSAS2 III
C --------- CONNECTIVITY OF EHTP FOR ELECTRIC NETWORK \Q
BUSAS2 I. IE+b CD
BUSB82 BU5AS2
BUSC82 8USAS2 U)

:r
C .--------- HECHANICAL NETWORK COHPONENTS G)
DUSH," BUSHGR .• :54B I
BUSHGR DUSHG BUSHGR N
9USH," [Link]+7 N
C -------- FOR HEASUREHENT OF ELECTROHECHANICAL TORQUE
BUSHS BUSHG I. DE-II
BLANK RECORD ENDING 8RANCHES ••.•••••.• : ••.•......•......••..•..•••.•••••
BLANK RECORD ENDING SWITCHES ••••.•••••........•...••..•..••.••••••••••.•
C --------- SOURCES FOR INFINITE BUS -t.o
148USAS2 JOOO.O bO.' 0.'
148U5882 JOOO.O bO.' -120.' -1.0
148USCS2 JOOO.O 60.0 +120.' -1.0
C --------- J-PHASE SOURCES AT AOTOA SIDE (ACTUAL FREQ SET BY SSI.
I'!BUSASI
I 49US8S1
14BUSCSI
[Link]
JOB.b
J09. 6
1.2
\,2
J. 2
+30.'
-90.'
+I~O. 0
-I.'
-J. 0
-\'O
}@
C --------- HECHANICAL INPUT TORQUE (ACTUAL VALUE SET BY S51.
148USHS -I 0.000001 0.00011 -1.0
C -------- STEP ON INPUT TORQUE AT T • 0.02
148USHS -I J900.. 0.00001 +0.02 Jev
C --------- UH TYPE. ([Link] DATA
19 UK
I I
8LANK RECORD ENDING CLASS 1 UH DATA
}CD

~
C UH-l HACH TA8LE
" II I BUSHG ;! '.0188
'.123:;B
0.02J~B
2.0 BUSHS
C UH-l COIL TABLE

~
C --------- STATOR COILS
lIUSA2
0 •• t2 0.0012 BUS9:!
0 .• 12 0.0012 BUSC:!
page 9G-23

normal. phasor-solution initialization of the EMTP. In the example simulation,

the initialization process is invoked by the entry of '-1.0' for TSTART (cols.
61-70) in the Type 14 source records .
.The data in the machine table (group G on the listing) conveys the follow-
ing information:
a) From record 1,
1) work with U.M. Type 4 (4 1n cols. 1-2); •
2) only one set of three-phase coils is allowed for the field of the
Type 4 machine; consequently, columns 3-4 and 5-6 are left blank;
3) output the electromechanical torque (1 in col. 7);
4) output the absolute rotor speed (1 in col. 8);
5) output the rotor angle relative to the stator (1 in col. 9);
6} use the node 'BUSMG' as the connection point of electromagnetic
torque to the mechanical network (BUSMG in cols. 10-14);
7) four-pole machine (2 pole-pair; 2 in cols. 22-23);
8) convergence margin for rotor speed - 0.188 (cols. 52-65);
9} default system frequency used (cols.66-79 blank).
NOTE: Since a mechanical network is specified, cols. 16-21 and
cols. 24-51 are left blank.
b} From record 2,
I} initial condition on the mechanical speed is not used (blank in
col s. 1-14);
2) unsaturated d-axis inductance • 0.02358- hy (cols. 15-28);
3} no-d-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).
c) From record 3,
1) torque angle initial condition is not used (blank in cols. 1-14);
2) unsaturated q-axis inductance - 0.02358 hy (cols. 15-28);
3) no q-axis saturation (blank in col. 29).
d) From record ~,
1) the initial slip is 2 percent (cols 1-14);
2) an induction machine is simulated; columns 15-34 are left blank;
3) the type-14 source to be adjusted to meet the initial condition on
the electromagnetic torque is connected at node BUSMS (cols-~ 35-
40) in the mechanical network.
The coil-table records {group H on the listing} contain the following in-
formation:
a) From record 1,
1) armature phase A of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSA2 (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
page 9G-24

NOTES: a} Positive sequence in the U.M. module is always A-B-

C; regardless of the sequence of the external net-
work connected at the coil terminals.
b} Current into the external network at BUSA2is taken
as the positive reference.
2) the zero-component calculations are bypassed (blanks are entered
for the zero-component resistance and leakage inductance in . cols.
1-28;
b) From record .2,
1) armature phase B of the U.H. model is connected between network
node BUSB2 {cols. 29-34} and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2} direct-axis, armature-coil resistance is 0.412 ohms (cols. l-14);
3) direct-axis, armature-coil leakage inductance is 0.0012 hy (cols.
15-28) .
c) From record 3,
1) armature phase C of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSC2 (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2) quadrature-axis, armature-coil resistance and leakage reactance
are equal to the respective direct-axis values;
d) From record 4,
1) rotor (field) phase B of the U.M. model is connected between net-
work node BUSBI (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
NOTES: a) Phase B and excitation d-axis parameters are associ-
ated with excitation record 1; phase C and excita-
tion q-axis parameters are associated with excita-
tion record 2; and phase A-and the excitation zero-
component are [Link] record 3.
b) Current into the .external network at BUSAI is taken
as the .pos i t i ve reference.
2) direct-axis, field-coil resistance is 0.110 ohms (cols. 1-14);
3) direct-axis, field-coil leakage inductance is 0.0012 hy (cols. 15-
28).
f) From record 5,
1) armature phase C of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSCI (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
2) quadrature-axis, field-coil resistance and leakage reactance are
equal to the respective direct-axis values;
f) From record 6,
1) armature phase A of the U.M. model is connected between network
node BUSAI (cols. 29-34) and ground (blank in cols. 35-40);
Page 9G-25

2) the zero-component calculations are bypassed (blanks are entered

for the zero-component resistance and leakage inductance in cols.
1-28 .
.Since the machine. is Type 4, no more data is required for the first ma-
chine. The bl ank record following the coil-tabl e. records terminates the. input
for machines modeled through the U.M. algorithm.
The only records left in the listing are those specifying node voltages to
be output, plot controls and data-case termination. These are in the standard
£MTP format.
Table XIII, p 62, gives the beginning of the modified output listing for
the example problem. Output of the voltages to ground at nodes BUSAS2, BUSA2,
BUSA1 and BUSMG were requested at the end of the input data file. Output of
the currents in phases A, Band C of the pseudo-transmission line were speci-
fied by a '1' entered in column 80 of the respective branch records. Output of
the coil currents at the terminals of the machine was requested by a '1' enter-
ed in column 47 of each coil-record. Output of the currents in the sources
driving the rotor-circuit was requested by a '1' entered in column 80 of the
branch records defining the sensing resistors.
Output of electromagnetic torque (TQGEN), rotor speed (OMEGM) and the rel-
ative angle between the rotor and the stator (THETAM) were requested by setting
the respective flags to '1' in record 1 of the Machine Table Group {group G}.
TABLE XlIII Beqinninq 01 the Output Listinq lor the Si"ulation 'f I Doublv-Fed
Induction Mlchin •.

COLUMN HEADINGS FOR THE 29 EHTP OUTPUT VARIABLES FOLLOW. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO THE FIVE
POSSIBLE EHTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES, AS FOLLOWS ....
FIRST . . OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE ELECTRIC-NETWORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH RESPECT TO LOCAL GROUND)'
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH VOLTAGES (VOLTAGE OF UPPER NODE HINUS VOLTAGE OF LOWER NODE)'
NEXT 7 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH CURRENTS (FLOWING FROK THE UPPER EHTP NODE TO THE LOWER)'
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES PERTAIN TO DYNAKIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES, WITH NAHES GENERATED INTERNALLY.
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO 'TACS' (NOTE INTERNALLY-ADDED UPPER NAHE OF PAIR).
FINAL 9 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO UNIVARSAL MACHINES (UH), WITH NAHES GENERATED INTERNALLY.
BRANCH POWER CONSUMPTION (POWER FLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TREATED LIKE A DRANCH VOLTAGE FOR THIS GROUPING.
BRANCH ENERGY CONSUMPTION (ENERGY FLOW, IF A SWITCH' IS TREATED LIKE A BRANCH CURRENT FOR THIS GROUPING.
STEP TIKE BUSAS2. BUSA2 BUSAI BUSHG BUSAI BU8A2 BU8B2 lIU8C2
(KIss BUBASt 'BUSAS2 BUSBS2 BUSCS2
Speed)
UH-t "C
BUSHG BUSHG BUSHS UH-t UH-I UI1-1 UH-l QI
BUSHGR TERRA BUSHG TQGEN OHEGK THETAH IPA IPB l!l
(o. .. p inq (Acce1erltinq (Source (Electro .. aqnetic (Rotor (Relath. 111
Torque) Torque H H) Torque' Torque) Speed ) Rotor An91.)
\D
U"-1 UH-\ UI1-\ UH-I G'}
IPC lEI IE2 IE3 I
0.000000 0.300oo0E+04 0.716~63E+04 0.267233E+03 O.184726E+03-0.21950IE+04-0.1~1688E+03-0.101892E+04 '.111061[+04 I'.)

•• 20308 .... E+03 .000000E+00 0.189777E+'~ '.169468E+04 0.184726E+03 0.185398E+00-0.l~1688E+03-0.101892E+04 0'\

\ 0.1I706IE+04 .134202E+04 0.852990E+03-o.219501E+04
0.000200 0.299148E+0 .... .778667E+04 0.26700IE+03 0.184726E+03-0.219542E+04-0.560794E+02-o.107351E.04 1.112959E+04
0.2030S4E+03 • 321123E+Ol 0.189777E+04 0.169147E+04 0.184726E.03 0.822343E+00-0.560794E+02-1.117351E+04
0.112959E+04 .133939E+04 0.85b028E+OJ-0.219~42E+04
2 0.000400 0.296~96E+04 .776369E+04 0.266767E+03 0.184126E+03-0.219583E+04 0.398499E+02-0.112200E+04 0.10821~E+04
'.203084E+03 .622378E+Ol 0.189777E+0 .... 0.168846E+04 0.184726E+03 0.859288E+00 0.398499E+02-0.112200E+04
0.108215E+04 .133676E+04 '.859066E+03-o.219583E+04
3 0.000600 0.292358E+04 .769636E+0 ...... 266~33E+03 0.184726E+03-0.219623E+14 0.13~~55E+03-0.1164t2E+04 •• 1028~6E+04
0.203085E+03 .902402E+ol 0.189117E+04 0.168566E+04 0.184726E+03 0.89623 .... E+00 0.13~555E+.3-0.116412E+04
•• 1028~6E+04 .133413E+04 0.862103E+03-0.219623E+04
4 0.000800 0.286459E+0 .... .758530E+04 0.266298E+03 0.184726E+03-0.219663E+04 0.230489E+03-0.119962E+04 1.969132E+03
'.2030B5E+03 .117684E+02 0.189777E+04 0.168292E+04 0.184726E+03 0.933179E+00 0.230489E+03-1.119962E+04
'.969132E+03 .133149E+04 0.865138E+03-0.219663E+04
5 0.001000 0.278933E+04 .743114E+04 0.266062E+03 0.184726E+03-1.219701E+04 0.324114E+03-0.122831E+04 '.904199E+03
'.203085E+03 .144340E+02 '.189777E+04 0.168025E+04 0.184726E+0:" c "'1~4E+OO 0.324114E+03-1.122831E+04
'.904199E+03 .132884E+04 0.868171E+03-o.21970IE+04

NOTE: The bracketed 1eqends under the u.r1able labels were not part .f the output 11stin9.
Thev were added to c1arifv the interpretation of the lutput [Link].
Page 10-1

x. PCWER CCNSTAAIN'I'S: THE EMTP LOM) FI...O>l

The steady-state phasor solution for initial conditions of the electric

net'NOrk can be determined so as to observe power constraints at one or more
busses. By analogy with the dominant steady-state program of system planning
departments, this has been named. the "load flow" feature of the EMTP. In
effect, it is multi-phase load flow capability (albeit in some~at restricted
form) that is available to the EMTP user.

X-A. Background Information about the EMTP Load Flow

Each single-phase node of a net'NOrk involves. four real variables of

interest. There are real power injection PK, reactive power injection OK,
phasor voltage magnitooe. VK, and phasor voltage angle THETAI<. Since there is
one real-power and one reactive-power constraint equation for the node, this
implies that t'NO of these variables can be specified quite arbitrarily, and the
other t'NO then can be determined by nunerical computation. Before the load flow
was available, EMTP users could apply only the special zero-power constraint
(with both PK = 0 and OK = a, meaning no connection) • Control of non-zero
power was only indirect, and by trial and error. But now, thanks to the new
EMTP load flow, the user can choose among the following three constra ints for an
EMTP source node. The user can:

a) specify PK and OK at the node. The EMTP then will solve for VK
and THETAK. This is ordinary load modeling of conventional, single-phase load
flow usage by system planning departments. or, alternatively,

b) specify PK and W. The EMTP then will solve for OK and 'I'HETAK.
This is ordinary generator modeling of conventional, single-phase load flow
usage by system planning departments. Or, alternatively,

c) Specify 'I'H.E'IAK and OK. The EMTP then will solve for PK and VK.
This thi I'd and final option is seldom used.

There is no 1 imi t on the nunber of busses that are so constrained, al thou:Jh at

least one source should be unconstrained. The unconstrained source commonly is
taken as the reference for other phasors (THETAK for this node is fixed at
zero) • In the terminology of conventional, single-phase load flows, this is
called the n slack bus".

For those who intend to terminate execution once the load flow is complete
(Le., for '!MAX non-FOsi tive) , life is particularly simple. No EMTP source
cards ate required, and FOwer constraints can be applied to any node of the
net'NOrk. The only program limitation is that the source table (List 4) must be
sized to equal or exceed the total nllTlber of power-constrained nodes of the
net'NOrk. This is because one source is automatically, internally defined for
each power-constraint card as it is read in overlay 9.
Page 10-2

When a transient simulation is to follow the EMTP load flow (i.e., if '!MAX
is positive), the user should U"lderstand that his po\ro1er constraints will be
forgotten once the time-step loop is entered. With po\ro1er constraints applied
only to nodes with 'JYpe-14 voltage sources, the angle and/or magnitooe of this
source will be automatically adjusted prior to entry into the time-step loop,
and adjusted to correspond to the load flow solution. 'Ibis mayor may not
resul t in approx imate continued observance of the steady-state po\ro1er constra ints
during the transient simulation, of course 'lbe result is a function of
nonlinearities, and of unpredictable transients, which are quite beyond any
general SlImIary. '!he user should simply keep in mind that load flow constraints
only provide for the automatic, internal setting of constants (e.g., generator
angles) at time zero, and have no other direct effect on any subsequent
simulation.

As presently implemented, power constraints are only allo\ro1ed at nodes of

known voltage, or at the armature nodes of rotating ac machinery. SUch
constraints can not be applied to current sources. For cases without any
associated transient simulation, this is not a restriction, since the required
voltage sources are defined internally, to whatever nodes the user wants to
apply power constraints. But for cases involving transient simulation, current
sources are simply not allo\ro1ed (i.e., the user can not apply a po\ro1er constraint
to a current source). Perhaps the EMTP could be generalized to handle such
cases in the future (Vol. XIII, 23 July 1983, Section II-A, page VDEL-3, middle
paragraph), al thoU;h no plans have been made as of April, 1984, as this page is
being written.

A power constraint of the EMTP load flow may only be applied at a network
bus. '!he user can not constrain a line flow, nor can he constrain a group of
line flows (the familiar area interchange control) , directly. Neither is there
any automatic adjustment of transformer or phase shifter taps at the present
time. But certain limits on voltage magnitooe and angle at a po\ro1er-constrained
node can be observed. First, at a load bus that normally would have both A<
and OK fixed, the reactive-power constraint will only be maintained wi thin
user-specified limits on voltage VK, and the real-power constraint will only
be held wi thin usera-specified limits on the angle THETAK. Second, at a
generator bus that normally would have both A< and VK fixed, the real-power
constraint will only be held within user-specified limits on the angle ~.
'!hird and finally, at a bus that normally would have both CJ< and 'I'HE:'mK
fixed (\\Iho knows a good, short name for such a bus?), the reactive-power
constraint will be held only within user-specified limits on voltage VK.
Conspicuous by its absence in this list is the popular choice of system planners
for generators: the maintenance of voltage VK with limits on reactive power QK.

'!hus far, there has been a mixture of talk about network busses and
individual nodes.'Ihese mayor may not be synonymous, for purposes of EMTP load
flow usage. '!he p:>ssible difference is due to multi-phase constraints. '!he
user can gang three nodes together, and control them as a unit, if he likes. In
this case, all three voltages are assumed to be balanced, positive-sequence
page 10-3

phasors. Any specified real or reactive power is a total 3-phase injection,

which will be split equally among the three phases only if the rest of the
problem is balanced. But if either the network or same excitation is
unbalanced, note that the 3-phase injections will not be balanced, either. In
addition to this conventional 3-phase usage, it is possible to drop the third
phase <phase "c", which lags phase "a" by 240 degrees), so that. only phases "a"
and "b" are ganged together. '!his could be of use to those stooying outages
(the loss of one phase) •

For each netw::>rk bus that is to have a power constraint, there is one EMTP
data card that specifies the associated local control parameters. Following the
last such data card, there is an extra card of overall control parameters, which
shall be called the miscellaneous data card of the load flow. '!his data
structure is summarized as follows:
card for first power constraint of load flow
< < Etc. > >
Card for last power constraint of load flow
Miscellaneous data card for load flow
Ole 3-phase bus requi res only one source card, if the user accepts the 3-i:tlase
logic that this implies. Alternatively, each phase could be controlled
separately, thereby requiring three EMTP data cards. In any case, taken
together, all such cards consti tute data peculiar to the EMTP load flow - data
that affects no other aspect of the simulation. '!his data follows the blank
-card ending sources (Section VII), and. it precedes the initial condition cards
for the electric network (if any; see Section XI) and the node voltage output
requests (Section XII).

If the user wants such EMTP load flow capabil i ty, he must declare his
intention early, before the miscellaneous data cards. '!his is done using a
special-request card reading "FIX SOURCE" (see Section II-A).
All data for the EMTP load flow are read wi thin overlay 9 by the single
EMTP load flow module, SUBROtJI'INE FXSOUR. Module" FXSOUR" conta ins all
logic for the network solution that observes the user-specified power
constraints. An impedance matrix algorithm is used, but with a complete
simul taneous solution (rather than the adjustment. of one equation at a time) ,
which allows the exploitation of the already-calculated and triangularized nodal
admittance matrix [YJ. '!he solution is iterative, then, with convergence less
than certain, and not always speedy. But, for practical, realistic cases of
corrmon interest, perfo Illlance has been found to be good, so any user who reall y
wants to begin his transient simulations with given power flows is urged to give
the EMTP load flow a try. As long as X/R ratios are reasonable (do not try the
EMTP load flow for purely resistive networks!), and a solution exists, and the
guess is not unreasonable, then there would seem to be a good chance of success.
Iterative convergence of the EMTP load flow is monitored on WNIT6, where
the largest correction of each iteration is displayed, 20 numbers per line, as
these are calculated. '!here also is an option (see the load flow miscellaneous
data parameter NNNOur) for the parallel output of the numbers of the power
constraints that. prodoced these largest corrections. Numbering of this
identification corresponds one-for-one with the user-inputted data cards. As an
example of such output, consider the first eight columns of the first two rows
of twenty, which might appear as follows (taken from BENCmARK OC-26):
Max del-v: .2192 .2158 .1861 .1597 .137 .1176 .1013 .0896
Source No. -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -3
Page 10-4

'!he variable changes are always posi tive (absoute values are used), with any
negative sign shifted to the integer 2nd row where there is more room. '!his was
the case for 0:-26 (the largest initial corrections were in fact negative as
shown) • Note that convergence is slow (a characteristic of the "crurmy" Z-
matrix iteration that is used), and that the generator having the WC)rst
correction is always the same (DC-26 involves just a single load flow source).
If program output goes to the disk, then the user will not see such output U'ltil
later, so timing is irrelevant. But if WNIT6 output goes to a canputer
monitor, then the timing of the display is im{:Ortant. At most 20 iterations (a
full line) will occur between such load flow outputs, thereby assuring the user
that the canputation is progressing. '!he user has control over the frequency of
this output (variable NFLDtJl' of the load flow miscellaneous data card \Itlich
will be described shortly). FOr some canputers (those allowing overprinting
wi th the "lH+" carriage control characters), the user can see the result at the
end of each iteration, \Itlen one more mmber is added to the output buffer (a
full output line) •

It is im{:Ortant that the load flow user check for convergence, since as
presently implanented, the EMTP simulation will continue \Itlether the iteration
has converged or not! Should not all of the user-suppl ied control tolerances be
met, a warning message will be printed. But execution will not be stoFPed.
'!he load flow user may have special interest in knowing the solution at his
power-constrained busses. SUch special output is possible via variable NPRINT
of the load flow miscellaneous data card (the final card of load flow data) •
SUch output precedes the phasor branch flows, with the following being a
representative sample taken from the solution to BENCHMARK DC-26. NOte
convergence in 133 iterations, and truncation on the right (the reactive (:Ower
column is missing):

Exit the load flow iteration loop with counter NEKITE = 133. If no warning
Fbw Node Name Vol tage mag tegrees Real 'fOwer Reacti ve 'fOwer
4 8 Al 0. 113901E+02 -30."002 0.399872E+02 -0.450736E+01
5 9 Bl 0.113901E+02 -150.0002 0. 399872E+0 2 -0. 450736E+01
6 10 C1 0. 113901E+02 89.9998 0.399872E+02 -0.450736E+01
Yet there really is nothing special to see, since such phasor values have always
been available via the regular steady-state printout (e.g., by the display of
injections \Itlich follow phasor branch flows) •
Exanples of EMTP load flow usage can be found in standard test cases
BENCfMARK DC-2S and 0:~26, which involve synchronous machines. Since the
'JYpe-59 S.M. is represented by nothing other than three 'lYPe-14 sinusoidal
sources in the steady-state, it is trivial to awly power constraints to these
using EMTP load flow cap:ibility. '!he U.M. is not quite so simple, due to its
generality; but it, too, is now compatible with the EMTP load flow for induction
and synchronous modes, as documented in Prof. LaUW" s paper (Ref. 22, May 1984) •

X-B. Formats for EMTP Load Flow rata cards

First, there must be one data card for each power constraint. Ordering of
these cards is arbitary. Each such data card is to be keyed according to the
following rules:
Page 10-5

C 1 2 3 4 5
C \3456781901234\56789011234567890123456178901234567890121
CI 1--1 1 1 1-
121 A6 1 A6 I A6 1
CI I 1--1
E16.0 I
I
E16.0 I
I-
... below
Continued
NK Bt.51 Bt.52 Bt.53 PK or (J< OK or VI<

678
134567890112345678190123415678901
1 I· 1 1 1
I E8.0 1 E8.0 1 E6.0 1 E6.0 1
1 1 1 1 1
VMIN VMAX TlfotIN 'I'ffw\AX

NK (colunns 1-2) is the type code of power constraint. Choose among:

"0" to constrain R< and (J< (with unknown VI< and THETAK); "I" to
constrain R< and VK (with unknown (J< and THETAK); "2" to constrain C!<
and THETAK (wi th unknown R< and VK).

Bt.51 (co1unns 3-8) is the first of up to three names of network nodes

that are involved in this power constraint. For single-tt'lase usage, leave Bt.52
and BUS 3 blank. But for 3-P'Jase usage (the other ccmnon case), name the three
nodes in natural, positive-sequence order: first "a", then "b", and finally
"c" •

Bt.52 (colunns 9-14) is the 2nd of up to three names of network nodes that
are involved in this power constraint. See BUS1.

Bt.53 (colunns 15-20) is the 2nd of up to three names of network nodes

that are involved in this power constraint. See Bt.5l.

R< or 'I'HETAK (colunns 21-36) is the first of two constraint values. In

case injected real power PK is to be constrained (for constraint type NEK = 0
or 1), key the desired value in units of power (units of voltage times units
of current, whatever that might be for the user's problan) • For a multi-Filase
constraint, this is the total of the two or three individual injections at the
bus of interest. Alternatively, for the remaining, less-carmon case having
constraint type NEK = 2, key the desired fixed Filase angle 'I'HETAK in units
of [degrees].

(J< or VI< (colunns 37-52) is the second of two constraint values. In

case injected reactive power C!< is to be constrained (for constraint type
NEK =" or 2) , key the desired value in units of power (units of voltage
times units of current, whatever that might be for the user's problan) • For a
mul ti-phase constraint, this is the total of the two or three individual
injections at the bus of interest. Alternatively, for the remaining, case
having constraint type NEK = 1, for fixed VK, key the desired value in units
of peak voltage.
Page 10-6

VMIN (co1l1t1ns 53-60) is the minimlltl vol tage W, for those cases where
voltage is not fixed. 'lhat is, this input is used for constraint type NEK = 0
or 2. 'lhe keyed value is to be in units of peak voltage. A blank or zero
means that no minimlltl will be imp:>sed.

VMAX (collltlns 61-68) is the maximlltl voltage W, for those case!? where
voltage is not fixed. 'lhat is, this input is used for constraint type NEK = 0
or 2. 'lhe keyed value is to be in units of peak voltage. A blank or zero
means that no maximlltl will be imp:>sed (internally, infinity becomes the limit) •

".IH-1IN (co1l1t1ns 69-74) is the minimlltl angle 'lHE'I1\K for those cases where
the angle is not fixed. 'lhat is, this input is used for constraint type
NEK = 0 or 1. 'lhe keyed value is to be in units of [degrees]. A blank or
zero means that no minimlltl wi 11 be imp:>sed (internally, '1lflIN is set to minus
infinity) •

'1lflIN (coll1t1ns 75-80) is the maximlltl angle 'IHETAK for those cases where
the angle is not fixed. 'lhat is, this input is used for constraint type
NEK = 0 or 1. 'lhe keyed value is to be in units of [degrees]. A blank or
zero means that no maximlltl will be imp:>sed (internally, 'l'HttIN is set to
infini ty) •

'lhe interpretation of this power constraint card confirms only the first 4
of 6 total floating p:>int parameters (co1lJt1ns 21-68). 'lhe following
illustration has been taken from the 1st half of BENCHMARK DC-25:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C
FIX.
1--------------------
2. 803E+09 1.383E+09 2. 000E+04 2.500E+04 1 MH:Al MIlCB1 MIlCC1 2803

-
After the last such power constraint card, add the following miscellaneous
ata card of the load flow, which is recognized by the leading blank field (co1s.
-8 unused):

C 1 234 5 6
C 3456781901234561789012341567890121345678901123456781901234561789012341
C --1---1- 1- 1 1 I ·-1 1
1 18 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 ES.0 I ES.0 1 ES.0 1
C I I 1 --1---1- 1 -1----1
C mNour NITERA NFLDur NPRINT RALCHK CFITEV CFITEA

NNNOur (collltlns 9-16) is a binary flag for control of additional

interacti ve output during the load flow iteration. A value of unity will add
variable identification in parallel with the always-present interactive output
of the largest variable correction at each iteration. 'lhe preceding explanation
of convergence monitoring illustrated such usage. But if no such identification
of the worst corrections is desired, and if the sign of the corrections is of no
interest, key zero or blank.

NITERA (columns 17-24) is a bound on the number of iterations of the load

flow. Any non-positive entry will be given a default value of 500.
Page 10-7

NFLOtJI' (collJnfls 25-32) is the buffer size for accunulating the output
that is associated with the interactive convergence monitoring (the largest
correction at each iteration). kly non-PJsitive value, or any value in excess
of 20, will be set equal to the default value of 20. Since exactly 20 nunbers
fit on a line, a value of 20· corresponds to w:liting for a line to be· filled
before the user is shoW'1 any of the contents. Positive values less than 20
generally should be used only for computers having electronic monitors that
honor the "lH+" carriage control (for overprinting), since this is the device
that is used to avoid line feeds after outputs of partial lines. A value of 20
is always best for solutions that the user is not w:ltching.

NffiINT (co1unns 33-40) is a binary flag that allows for the selection or
suppression of special tabular printout for the nodes with power constraints.
Key unity to obtain output of such values (VK, 'lliE'I1\K, PK, CJ<), or zero (or
blank) to suppress it.

RAiCHK (colunns 41-48) is a relative convergence tolerance that controls

the accuracy of the solution. For termination of the iteration, all PJwer
mismatches must be less than RAiCHK times the largest scheduled PJwer (either
PI< or CJ<) of the network. A non-PJsitive value will be taken as a request for
the default tolerance 1/100.

CFITEV (collJnfls 49-56) is an acceleration factor associated with the

conversion of a change in reactive PJwer to a change in voltage magni tu:le. See
Ref. 43 for a more precise definition. In the absence of knowledge about this
parameter, leave the field blank (which represents a request for the default
value of 2/1(3) • CFITEA (collJnfls 57-64) is an acceleration factor
associated with the conversion of a change in real PJwer to a change in voltage
angle. See Ref. 43 for a more [Link] definition. In the absence of knowledge
about this parameter, leave the field blank (which represents a request for the
default value of 2.5).

The interpretation of this miscellaneous data card of the load flow

confirms only the first 5 of 7 total parameters (through colunn 48) • The
following illustration has been taken from the 1st half of. BEN:mARK DC-25:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 3456789012345678901234567891312345678913123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------1-
Load flow iter. 1 500 20 0 0.10E-02 1 1
Page 11-1

XI. CARre FOR OVERRIDING INITIAL CONDITIONS

These cards are used only if the user wants to supply initial conditions himself.
The transients program starts from correct initial conditions as long as everything
was zero at t <'0 or if an ac steady-state existed at t < 0 (the latter is simply
indicated by TSTART <0 on sinusoidal source cards)
Ini tial condi tiona that are neither zero nor ac steady-state must be supplied as
input. Any initial conditions that are provided through input will override the
respective zero-or ac-steady-state initial conditions computed by the program.
There are two cases where the user might want to supply the initial conditions:

a) Continuation of a previously run case, mere a continuation beyond

t was already contemplated. The continuation can either use the
max
same At or a changed ~t. Continuation is handled by having the
preceding run punch the voltages and currents at the very last step.
Then simply use this data deck in the new run
(no blank card at end!). Note that continuation works only if
(1) the passive network has not been changed between the
previous and the new run, including the order in which
the branch cards are read in, and
(2) there are no branches with distributed parameters (in
this case the punching in the previous run would have
been interrupted).
b) New Case: If the user knows the initial conditions for a new case, he
can supply them as part of the input. This could be used to start a
case from steady-state conditions with more frequencies than the
fundamental (example: steady-state performance with a number of
super-imposed harmonic sources); however, the user has to find the
initial conditions himself (an extension of the automatic ac steady-
state solution to the case of super-imposed sinusoidal sources with
differing frequenciea is planned). lote that zero initial condi tiona
or ac steady-state conditions at only one frequency are automatically
bandled by the program. *)
Trap charge: SuPply all Toltage T&lues· at nodes with trap charge
(steady state frequency = 0 or blank on very first voltage card).
Supply cards for currents in linear branches having trap charges
(only node names must be listed and fields A, B, C, D are left blank:
if in1 tial currents are zero).

a) RULES:
(1) In networks containing branches with distributed parameters, only
dc or ac-steady-state solutions can be used as initial conditions.
In this case, all initial voltages and currents must be specified as
phasor values x(O)+jy(O), where x(O) is the instantaneous value at
t = 0 (note that the magnitude of the phasor quantity is the crest
Talue and not the rms value). Punch the steady-state frequency into
the very first card with anini tial node voltage on it.
-::*::-=)-:::~:-:-i:""'is-Gd,·,,-:-i..[Link]-l-I&~\D ltd ~e ~f'QrTI ~e iJ\il:io.Q [Link] whene'\le1' possib\e) i:hM i5 for Qt s\ead~·£bie
~ we\\ CiS ~r at. [Link].::s.s\crte .1.1'\ -\.~ lo:l-\.er [Link]) \1Se Ctlsi"e f~ciiortS w\\'" ~ \0'111 -\T~\I..~l\~ ~
s''''\I.\aie dt Stl\.\.T"C~. ~ "- (:). 00\ t\~ -.No"l"ked.. ve~ U)~ \"1\ ~~~ IN\. ~~ ~\[J)C. ~c:~~~ h\:e~-\\~.
Page 11-2

(2) In networks without distributed parameters, any initial conditions

are acceptable. In this case, all initial voltages and currents are
specified as instantaneous values x(O) (ignore format fields provided
for the imaginary part yeO) of phasor values and the steady-state
frequency as described in rule 1).
Stack cards for initial conditions in the following order: Cards for
node voltages ("2 tt in column 2), then cards for currents in linear
branches (" 3" in column 2), and finally cards for currents in nonlinear
and tille-varying branches ("4 t1 in column 2). This order is mandatory,
since the program computes initial conditions in a branch from the
currents on the card plus the node voltages already read in. If cards
for node vOltages were read in behind cards for branch currents, then
the program would assUlDt vol tages zero at both ends of the branch. Ii t~
[Link] ~[Link].\\el bl"[Link] wl~ \~.I\\\~o1 1\O\l.e po.i."S 1 ~ oll \'f\\~ (Of\cU.\:~ CII\ '\he "~. - [Link].s ~o \",'\:0
OM k:>'\"'O.f\c:h Of\\\\. """''W\'\'tI ,.....\a t~9 ~\11>'t ()~ e~\I.~cl \'f\ '""_ ~ \\$\. In ~en~ I -t\"~
~l"[Link]$ ""tong i"i\ia.'l c:[Link])Y\$ <':po\~_ Cl)[Link].c,\:. ~ ~t~t':):, A'fQ\~'. ~"'~~ \~ thi$ ~~
comes ~. n \.her-e a..~ O'f\\~ 2 ~nth.s in ~\\iit\ ) ~~ ~- ~~m ~~, o.u,cla~ D~
;.,,~\~\~ ~ \)~&. """~ ~,~, ~"S. \'1\
q-..erslt O'tMT t SIL~
_ c.u,'M't.n+s , .. "',,' j"ea't" Q.",.l ~~..l bTO."I\o. .. R -\0 \....
"'-i",e·'ltClT\\\n~ \wCl,,_S . - 2.~4.. 'b;-",,~
- ~'C"~,,'\s
l_ u...
ill \'''t,,'f ~~ 1.. '" II .""'~ "fY\G.~
o\\I¥e 'l ~'f'().wh.s
- na~ 'ltOWCl.~ [Link]"..~"~\1i ~crr
-'en. .. ~ .. - Ot.~s.).
b) FORMAT:

Card for noae voltages ("2" in column 2):

f '" \o\~ 01\ ~ iTS\. .

~c\. i" ~i!. ~ o~
,,~ 'to\ C'Q...ds

f • stead~-state frequency (punCh only on very fir8t

card, and only in cases where branches with
distributed parameters are present)
RefE(O)}+ jImfE(O)} • phasor voltage. at t • 0 (rule})
e{O) - in8t~taneous voltage at t • 0 (rule 2)
(2) Card for linear branch currents ("3" in column 2}:
'-1 ~.! ,\-,It' tii-2.<:t 'lO-1t1t 'tS-S«t
c
E \$.i

Sequence of node names on this card and on associated branch card

(section 1.2) must be identical (example: if branch card says "L" to
"R", then punch "L" to "R" and not .tR" to "L").
a) Lumped series R-L-C: , No card n~cessary if branch is purely
resistive (L -0, ~c.. 0) or l.f current through branch plus
page 11-3

capacitor voltage are both zero; otherwise punch

•
k ~lk,m,
i ,m (0) in A
k
eCAP(O) in B
~f---.m
....
ee-.,p·
.. ~t- em

b) Single or mul [Link] ".. -equivalent:

:11 W,.F --------

i
k';I k 1 ,. Data-input listing interpretation
of the 1st distributed-parameter
line card reads "LINEAR 1."
interpretation on the 2nd and
Punch i k ,m (0) in A later such cards of a multi-rlo. ... se
line reads "DISTRlB. I."
ik,o(O) in B -~---------
(0) in C
i
m,o
This card must be punched in case of non-zero terminal voltages,
even if all currents are zero; otherwise all initial conditions
in the Circuit, including charges on the capacitors, will be set
to zero.

For multiph.a.se1i-equivalents, punch a card for each phase in same

phase sequence as branch cards were read in. Here, i 0 is the
k
total shunt current going to ground and the other phases.
c) Single or multiphase line with distributed L', t':

_\t ti!- Punch: Re(Ik )

ImClk )
in A
in B
in C
J,t
)
Re(lm)
Im(Im) in D

See rule 1 why phasor values must be given. This card must be
punched in case of non-zero terminal voltages, even if all currents
are zero. For multiphase lines, punch a card for each phase in same
sequence as branch cards were read in.

Card for nonlinear and time currents ("4" in column 2):

page 11-4

Incomplete initial-condition specification capability (WARRIBG)

Unfortunately, the manual specification of initial conditions

is !!.2! possible at the present time for many Eltl'P components.
SpecifiCally excluded are the following components:
a) Saturable "[Link]" cOllponent of Section IV-E
b) Recursive convolution frequency-dependent line modeling of
Section IV-D-4. Well, actually, s1nusoidal initial
conditions (past histol"1) i.! possible, for those who know
how. But the format shall not be explained here.
c) Type-99 pseudo-nonlinear resistance of Section V-A
d} Type-98 pseudo-nonlinear 'reactor of Section V-B
e) Type-97 staircase resistance of Section V-C ;
f) Type-19 dynamic Universal Machine (U.M.) of Sect. IX ;
g} T;rpe-16 controlled dc Toltage source of Section VU-B
'h) Dynamic synchronous machine (S.14.) components of Section VIII
i) !lOS modeling of Section III.
Hence, for typical, modem production studies, the manual specification (over-
ride) of initial conditions is!!2! possible. This is as of May, 1980
("M27." idents).

As for the future, plans are to expand the initial condition input
capability so as to handle all possible EMrP components under all possible
conditions. Yet, it is not expected that the user will actually punch such
ini tial condition cards himself, manually_ For one thing, the operati on is
tricky and error prone at best, based on BPA experience; for large, cases, it
is extremely tedious; and for non-sinusoidal past history of distributed
components or del~ lines, the data is voluminous and impossible to calculate
by hand [Link]~. So, such initial condition cards will be punched by the EmP
itself, as terminal conditions of a simulation which has been stopped by the
user. This capability is seen to be a crucial ingredient of 8 real-time
EmF simulator package, which will be fully interactive. Stay tuned!
====================================================
Retraction of plans for initial-condition completion
====================================================
The preceding hopeful paragraph remained true until the spring of
1981, when a new concept of interactive control was discovered. This
is what we now refer to as "EMTP simulators" ---- implemented for our
VAX-ll using shared COMMON. See the 38-page memo which begins Vol. XI
EMTP Memoranda for a complete description (Ref. 8, 17 July 1981,
pagination IEEO). Separate program "EMTPSPY" provides the
interactive control and observation.

Current thinking is that "EMTPSPY" allows enough interactive

control and modification so as to doom the completion of initial-
condition 'usage as at the top of this page. -It has the advantage of
avoiding a 2nd or later pass though overlays 1-15, thereby making the
continuation almost instantaneous. The interactive control and
observation is far more powerful, for those variables which are not
buried within derived symbols. On the other hand, buried variables
can not practically be changed yet, so structural modifications to
unearth critical parameters of interest (e.g., "DELTAT") are ~ow
being considered. Anyway, pre-198l plans have been abandoned.
XII The OUtput specification cards - 1

XII The Output specification cards

The time response of the electric network being solved is available for the
user's inspection via one of the following three procedures:
- "LUNIT6-output"; tabulated decimal numbers. on the line printer.
- "batch mode plotting"; be it printer plot. Calcomp plot or screen plots
(highly dependent of the computer system in use; refer to section I-F for
more detailed information).
- "PL4-file"; can be used for later processing on printer. plotter or screen
via interactive plotting programs TPPLOT andWlNDOWPLOT (if such feature is
provided for the computer system in use; refer to section l-F for more
detailed information).
The user can only look at variables for which an output request has been made
as part of the simUlation run. The procedure for doing this depends upon whether
a conventional single deterministic simulation is involved. or on the contrary.
a statistical overvoltage study is of concern.
Values for vol tages. currents. powers and energies are computed by the simulation
part of the EMTP program at discrete time instants t - O. tot. 2tot. •..• Such values are
then either printed on LUNIT6. (with frequency controlled by the miscellaneneous
data parameter "lOUT") or they are written to disk via logical unit number 4. (with
the frequency "IPLOT tt ) for purposes of later plotting after the simulation is
finished (see section II-B for details on miscellaneous parameters lOUT. !PLOT and
IeAT). In both cases. any variable to be output must be specified by the user.
Following output request exist :
- node voltage output
- branch output (branch voltage, branch current, power or energy)
Let us now discuss in more detail how to obtain the required output.

XII.l Node voltage output

As explained in .section I-I. the user must input one or more cards specifying
all the node names for which he wants to have printed or plotted node voltage
output.
Distinction should be made between two cases: all nodes, or node selection;
- If all node voltages are requested, the user should punch one specification
card with a ttlt~ in column 2. Do Dot terminate with a blank card.

- If a selective list of the node voltages is required. the user should list
the node names on one or more cards which have the first 2 columns blank.
See figure. All cards must have columns 3 to 8 non-blank. The list is
terminated bya blank card.
XII The OUtput apecification carda - 2

Names of nodes having voltage output

BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 BUS9 BUS10 BUS11 BUS12 BUS13
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

Note: Only the first of the 13 potential fields per card: must be
non-blank. All other fields may be randomly left blank.

- if no node voltages are required, just supply a single blank card.

XIIt2 Branch or switch output

Following are possible branch and switch outputs :

- branch voltage (voltage difference between begin and end node)
- branch current
- branch power
- branch power
- branch energy

There are two ways to request such output.

The first method is to flag such output in column-80 of the branch cards at
input time; hence no further specification is required at this point (see section
IV for details).
Another method is to request branch and switch outputs along with node-voltage
outputs. The format for this added altemate branch and switch output is as
follows:

w Names of Branches and Switches

~ NAM1 NAM2 NAM3 NAM4 NAM5 NAM6 NAM7 NAMa NAM9 NAM10 NAMll NAM12 NAM13

12 A6 A6 AS AS AS AS AS A6 A6 AS A6 AS A6

PARAMETERS :
TY= -1 -+ request for only current output
-2-+ request for only voltage output
-3 -+ request for both voltage and current output
-4 -+ request for power and energy output
-5 -+ request to calculate voltage differences between a pair of node names,
irrespective whether or not these two nodes are actually connected
via a branch
XII The OUtput specification carda - 3

A list of 6-character names of branches or switches on one or more cards,

beginnning at column 3. The user can mix any branch or switch card with any node
voltage output request card. One blank card is needed to terminate the specification
of the EMTP output requests.
Note: If the user has specified the "all node voltage" card. this card (wi th
a "1 tt in column 2) must be the terminating card and no blank ending card is allowed.
Following are 2 examples of the output request cards

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 ••••

-2BRCH1 BRCH2
BUS1 BUS4 BU9
-3BRCH5
BLAJIK CARD TERMlll'ATINO OUTPUT REOUEST

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 ••••

-101 F3
1

The printed heading for branch-variable output consist of a pair of node names,
one above the other; This ordering (upper to lower) indicates the polarity of the
output. Suppose that node "u" represent the upper node, and "1" the lower node
of the pair, then:
a) The branch voltage output is v.,(t) - v.(t)- v,et)
b) The branch current output is i.,(t)

For non-switch elements, power and energy output represent the consumption (loss
or storage) of the branch and the net flow into the branch from the time t - 0 up
to the time in question.
For switches, the power and energy flow through the switch:
c) The switch power output is p.,(t)-p.(t)-P,(t)
d) The switch energy output is np.,(~)d(~)

Plotting creates no special problem, unless output for parallel branches should
be requested. Nevertheless, only· the first current (energy) output of the 2
parallel branches/switches is accessible to the user. As a practical restriction
this limitation is not serious. One can always insert a near-zero resistance
branch. thereby eliminating any parallel connection. Another method is to alter
the node name sequence when specifying the branch/switch.
,
For example, should the power pet) and energy E(l), in addition to the branch
current and voltage. be desired, the configuration shown below could be used.
Resistance R2 is chosen to be "small" according with the rule concerning sys-
tem-dependent minimum values (see Section IV-A). Current output (a i-punch in
column BO) is requested on the branch card for resistance R z• Resistance R, can
be chosen very large. and branch voltage output is to be requested for it (a 2-punch
in column BO). The nonlinear element has a 4-punch in column Bo, to give its power
and energy consumption.
XII The OUtput specification cards - 4

XII.3 The general appearence. of the tabulated time-step lOQP.

In general, there are five possible. groupings of variables for EMTP printed
output of the time-step loop. In order of appearance, these are:
1) voltages (both node and branch)
2) branch/switch currents.
3) S.M. variables.
4) TACS variables.
5) U.M. variables

A pair of 6-character names is used to identify each output variable, although

for node voltages, the second name is blank. For branch voltages and currents the
tabulated value is taken from the upper value down to the lower value. For TACS
variables the first name is always "TACS". For the U.M. and S.M. the first name
is internally generated and contains the number of the rotating machine. Example
"UM-12" will be the first name for the 12-th U.M. "MACH-3" would be the first name
of a variable belonging to the third type-59 S.M.
The number of variables in each of these 5 classes of variables will be printed
by the EMTP, provided the number is positive. The absence of a class total means
no such ouput exists. As an example the output of benchmark DC34 is included.

COl..... heading. for tile 20 DIl'P output variabl •• follow. The. . are cliyl _ _ tile 5 _albl. el. . . . . . . follow.
Pir.t 5 output variable. are electric-network voltage differencea lupper voltage .inu. lower voltage):
Next 6 output variabl. . are branch current. (flowing f...,. tile uppal' node to tile lower node):
Pinal 9 outpu·t yariabl •• pertain to Type-19 [Link]. COII(>Oft8I\ta I _ a are. generated. internally):
Step Tt.e BUS-At BUs-al BUS-C1 aUS-III BUS-IIO BUS-AI aUS-Bl BUS-C1 BUS-Ill BUS-MO
aus-AO BUS-eo BUS-CO TERRA

BUS-IIO Ull-l VII-l VII-I l1l'i-1 Ull-l VII-l l1l'i-1

BUS-Ill THETA!! IPA IPB IPC IE1 IEZ 1E3

o 0.0 1.56413 -.30745 -1.25677 1.0 1.0 1.38494 -.95793 -.42701 0.0 0.0
1.01 1.00124132 1.0 .93787 1.386 -.95877 -.42721 -2.826 0.0 0.0
1 .001 1.25370608 .317284401 -1.5709433 1.00000302 1.0000025 1.40049668 -.50888659 -.89163009 .012094107 .010000262
1.00999974 .997905631 1.0 .93787 1.40049668 -.50888659 -.89163009 -2.8259503 .85956£-4 -.00481942
2 .002 .763603075 .891559332 -1.6551247 1.00000988 1.0000075 1.22097729 .010653511 -1.2316108 .015338089 .010001714
1.00999829 .994660197 1.0 .93787 1.22091729 .010653511. -1.2316108 -2.8258183 .309395£-3 -.0092568
3 .003 .167906931 1.34760378 -1.5156333 1.00001841 1.0000125 .870655506 .528248848 -1.3989244 .018762&45 .010005857
1.00999414 .9912314911 1.0.93787 .870655506 .528248848 -1. 3989244 -2.8248425 .001999525 -.01265851
4 .004 -.45063432 1.60600319 -1.1551614 1.00002854 1.00001751 .399835869 .970563338 -1.3703792 .021776117 .010014326
1.00998567 .988209557 1.0 .93787 .399835869 .970563338 -1.3703792 -2.8235957 .004025981 -.01505822
5 .005 -1.0090049 1.64759793 -.6388854 1.00003997 1.00002252 -.12650205 1.27567094 -1.1491889 .023944838 .010028569
1.00997143 .986026593 1.0 .93787 -.12650205 1.27567094 -1.1491889 -2.8218048 .006841813 -.01548113

In this example, voltages. branch/switch current and UM-output are present.

but SM and TACS output are lacking.
Page 13-1

XIII. TYPE-1 SOURCE IEFINITIONS: EACH TIME STEP, I VAlliE PER SOURCE

Section VII-A explained that 'lJ'Pe-1 sources are empirically defined by the
user, and can [Link] as many as the user wants. Actually, such sources can
first be defined empirically this way, and then possibly modified analytically
by user-supplied FCRTRAN of SlBROUTINE AN.1>.LYT. First, consider the empirical
definition (the next two paragraphs) •

'lYPe-l sources of Section VII-A are empirically defined, with the user
obliged at each time step to supply one source value (a nunber) for each source.
SUch nunbers are read as 10E8.0 information, with the data of a new time step
always beginning on a new card as shown. USe as many cards as necessary (11-20
Type-1 sources will require two such cards per time step, 21-30 will require 3,
etc.) •
C 1 2 3
C 3456781901234561789012341567890121
C 1 1 1 1 (one nunber per
ES.0 1 E8.0 1 E8.0 1 E8.0 1 Etc. 'JYPe-1 source, in
C 1 1 1 I ••••• order of sources)
C 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
Within each time step, order of the source values is critical. It is the user's
responsibility to see that order of these source values corresponds to input
order of the 'JYPe-l sources. Remember, relative order is the only way the
program can associate nunerical values with sources. If there is a time beyond
which all source functions are identically zero, such input cards can be
terminated by a 9999-card (keyed in columns 5-8). For sample usage, refer to
BENClfv1ARK OC-6 and OC-42.

The interpretation of data cards defining TYPe-1 sources empirically is

illustrated by the final four such lines of BENCHMARK DC-42. Note that the
last of these is the bound ing9999-card:
C 1 2 3 4 5 6
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345
C 1-----------
More 'lYPe-1 sources, nunbers 1 onward. 1 0.0
More'Jype-l sources, nunbers 1 onward. 1-.430000
More 'Jype-1 sources, nunbers 1 onward. I -.2
End last input card for 'lJ'Pe-l sources. 1 9999

user-supplied FCRTRAN that is associated with the special-request word

"ANALYTIC SOURCES tsAGE" (see Section II-A) next can be used to define or
modify the values of empirically-defined source functions of TYPe 1. In fact,
it can be used to define or modify the values of any sources, not just 'JYPe-l
sources. It is user-supplied SUBROl1I'INE ~LYT that does the job, as called
by "SUBTS3". Note carefully that SUBROUTINE ~LYT is CALLed after the
empirical definition in the case of 'JYpe-1 sources. My user wanting to supply
his own " ANA LYT " must first write the FCRTRAN, of course, then compile it, and
finally linkage edit it with the rest of EMTP. Because this may not be a
trivial operation for the computer of interest, and/or it may involve logistics
that are difficul t for the user, II [Link]" is not much used anymore. It dates
back to earlier times when the EMTP was much smaller (and hence more quickly
linkage-edited, and stored in multiple versions) • For an illustration of such
usage, however, see BENCrMARJ< DC-6.
..,..,-" .
page 14A-l

XIV. CARDS FOR BATCH-MODE PLOTTlNG

Cards of this type are required for

the input of additional data associated
wi th the plotting of llldTP solution
variables as functions of time. n:Lis
is batch-Ol'lOde plottiL6 , with results available either
on t~~ compute~driv~n X-Y ~lotte~ (calcomp plotter), or on the
line printer (printer plotting). Interactive CRT plotting is done separately
from the EMTP data-case setup, so is not described here (see Section 1-L ).

X1 - A. General Rules and Procedures Concerning Patch-Mode Plotting

Rule 1 : Variables are available for plotting only if they have been previously
requested for output as per Section XII-A.

Rule 2 Any number of plots can be made from any one solved data case. Up
to four curves per plot are pennitted. Only ~urves of the. same type
(among the five different classes: node voltage, branch voltage,
branch current, branch power, branch energy) can generally be plotted
on the same graph.

Rule 3 Two graphing modes are available for batch-mode plotting, as the
user is assembling his card deck of plot [Link]:
a) A graph just on the Calcomp pen-and-ink plotter. '!his will
be referred to hereafter as the ttCALOOMP PLOT" mode of
operation, after the special reques.t card bearing this
text. See Section Xlv-B-9 •
b) A graph just on the line printer. 1his will
be referred to hereafter as the "PRINTER PLOT" mode of
operation, after the. special request card bearing this
text.

'ftle user is free to switch back and forth between these two modes, during
the course of his plot requests (see Section Xlv·-B-9 ). "CAI,OOMP PLOT"
is of course the most accurate and the nicest, \¥hile ''PRTh'TER PLOT" is
generally the least demandi~ of computer job time (not to [Link] the
much faster actual plot time).

Rule 4 Branch or switch current, power, or energy plots for two or more elem~~ts
which are connected in parallel are not possible at the present time. As
plot branches are identified only by terminal node-pair names, the
program will always pick the first of the two or more qualifying
[Link] which it finds in the output vector. Refer to Section XII-A
for a remedy, should this restriction bother the user.
page 14A-2

Rule 5 Table space for plotting is limited by program dimensioning (see "VARDIM",
Sect. I-G). List 13 (LSIZ13) provides working space for all program
versions. The "ROOT20" [Link] of card 4 (Sect. I-G-2) has influence
only if raw plot data points are stored in virtual memory (if LUNIT4 < 0 ).

Eule 6: !.there are 13 different types of cards which may be used in requesting
batch-mode graphs from the D!TP; the plot cards as a group or class
of data will generally consist of a controlled mixture of these types:

1. Card bearing 78-character case title text.

2. Cards bearing graph subheading text.
3. Plot specification card.
4. Card for specification of 3 or 4 branch node-pair names
(speCial request word ttBRANCH").
5. Card for extended precision of floating-point fields
(special request by zero time-scale).
6. Card for Calcomp graph-size adjustment
(special request word "HEIGHT").
7. Card for Calcomp graph-separation adjustment
(special request word ''KARGIN'').
8. Card for redefintion of smoothing tolerance ~
(special request word "SMOOTH").
9. Card tor changing the graphing-mode selection
(special request words ''PRINTER PLOT", "CALOOMP PLOT" ) •

Hl. card for the directing "CAICCMP PLCYI'" output. '!he user
can choose among "s:REEN PLOT" I "PEN PLOT" I and the
canbination of both of these, which is "OCREEN PEN".

11. card for changing the pens that are used to draw each
curve and the grid of a "[Link] PLOT". It is the
"PEN CHOICE" request that redefines such choices.

12. Unused.

13. card for requesting that curves of tW'O or more plot

cards be plotted on the same "CAICCMP PLOT" graph
(special request W'Ord ltsupERIMPOSE").

14. card for the photographic magnification or reduction of

a plot image, with special application to metric plotting
(special request W'Ord "OCALE").

15. card to plotting one EMTP variable against another

(spec ial request W'Ord "X-Y PLOT" ).

16. card for switching from plotting to Fburier series

(special request W'Ord "FOURIER (lIT" ) .

17. card for switching from Fburier series to plotting

( spec ial request wword "FOURIER OFF" ).

18. card to mark the termination of all preceding plot cards.

Page 14A-3

Of the. above card types, only the plot specification card of number 3
iD actue.:l.l.l [Link] to produce a plot; there will be one graph for
each such card. A detailed description of the format and precise
function of all of these cards will be found in Section XIV-B, under
the numbers which are used above.

Rule 7 ~e one to four curves which can appear on the same graph are identified
by the following symbols and node names:

CUHC, Prl~t.t.r tal t.o....p Name for node

.,01 tage ie read
l'Iod.-pa1r DIUIIes for branch or
..1\co OU\PU\ (2A6 infOrma\1on)
nu",be.1" Plot Plot fJ'CID col_: 1. :read f%'Olll col\lll!'lll:

1 A (!) 25 -30 . 25-3" -1'! node. piJlr

2 B A 31 - 3(, 37-11 --- 2~ no~e. ,~i"

3 t + 3'1 -1e 41'-'0 } "'ft. W ~"
quant1t1e. require
,.-

Wle of apec1al
4 0 X 1~ -..,8 " -72 "BlIA1H5" request.

*
IIIt8reecUOIl of 2
or IIIOre <:U"eB
. .. .-.. ~1 .~ 'r .:

In the upper right- hand corner of every plot, there will be a legend
which shows the symbol, the curve number, and a sample line drawn by
the pen - for each curve. An illustration for a case with three
curves follows:

1he output frequencl of the cuI"'fe-indication symbols on the calcomp

plots corresponds to every one inch tor the unemoothed (raw) data;
larger separations which will generally be observed allow for estimation
by the user of what traction of the data points has been discarded
during "smoothing" (see Hule 8 below).

Rule 8 If a Calcomp plot is to be made, the program first discards those

data points which will not visually affect the plot, according to the
following algorithm. This is the so-called "smoothing" algorithm:
page 14A-4

1he first point of raw plot data is always retained, and an

imaginary line is drawn from it through the second point of plot data.
Starting with the third point, then, the distance d of each succeeding
point from the line is calculated, and compared to a smoothing tolerance
(see lUle 6, Point S) E:. :

a) As long as d ~ Eo, the distance calculation is

simply repeated for the following point.

b) Eventually, for some n it is found that the n-th point

is fUrther removed than E:. from the line ( d > E.. ). In
this case, the (n-1 }-st point is saved,and all points
between the (n-1)-st point and the last previously-saved
point are discarded. 1his is based on the prinCiple that
throwing away such pOints will not significantly affect the
resul ting graph visually, since they li e on, or almost on,
the line about which the distances were calculated.

Such distance-testing is then continued recursively, following the

sample just outlined. It is begun by drawing a new line from the
(n-1)-st point through the n-th point, and then checking distances
from this new line for pOints numbered n+ 1 onward.

~e one exception to the distance comparison based on E. as just

described is that pertaining to relative minima or relative maxima; such
a point of relative extremum is alwayS Baved, regardless of its distance
from the line. In effect, E." 0 is used for the calculation at extrema.
I

The value of smoothing tolerance E:. is under user control, by

means of a special IlSMOOTH" request card. Details are covered in
Section XIV-B-S, as well as Sect. I-E-2 (STARTUP, Card 4, TOLRCE).
Line printer plotting is executed before smoothing occurs. !rhus
if only this mode of batch-mode plott~ is bein8 used (the last request
of Hule 6, Point 9 was "PRINTER PW'l'" ), the entire smoothing process
is bypassed. and not executed.

Rule 9 The user has control over whether all plots are to be positioned end-to-
end horizontally (down the length of the graph paper), or are also
to be lined up vertically as well (as [Link] by the paper width).
For example, consider the following contrasting situations:

00 • • • • • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • 0 • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • •

Fig. 1. All plots

positioned
horizontall;)
CO • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • • • •
Page 14A-S

•••••••••••••••• 0 • • • • • • • 00

Fig. 2. Plots
positioned
vertically
as well as
horizontally.

fMl Plot
#3 Etc..
~
0·0 •••••••••••••••••••••••

The general rule as to ErrfrP batch-mode plott~ is as follows: plots are

posi tioned vertically (one on top of the other) until the paper width
would be exceeded; then the process begins at the bottom again, to the
right of the just-completed plots. The first plot of a new data case
automatically begins at the bottom of the paper, too.

User control of this graph-positioning process (vertical stacking) is

by means of the following variables:

"sZPLTII Paper width (height as use.d here), as described

in Section 1.0c

"BEGIN" l- Height of each individual plot, as defined by

"SPAN" J a "HEIGHT" card. See the description of
[Link] XIV-B-6

Recall that default values exist for these, assuming that they are not
re-defined by the. user. In June of 1977, CDC translations were using
10., 1.0, and 8.0 inches for these, respectively. Using these
just-stated values would give the horizontal positioning of Fig. 1 above,
regardless of the actual width (height) of the plot paper. On the other
hand, changing "SZPLTII to 24.0 inches would result in the positioning
of two plots vertically as shown in Fig. 2 above ---- again regardless of
the actual width of the plot paper. Of course if the actual paper width
is less than "SZPLT", the pen will attempt to move off of the paper
(not a very satisfactory situation). It is the user's responsibil1 ty to
see that the paper is at least as wide as the "SZPLT" value which is
being used, then.
Page 14B-1

~l V- B. Input IAta card Format, tor llBtch-Mode Plotting

Point 1 : card bearing 78-character case-title text

ih1e card has a "2" punched in column number 2, followed by up to 78

arbitrary characters of case-title text. ~is text will then appear at the top
of all plots which are requested after this definition ---- until redefined at
some later stage of the plot-data input. mank text is automatically provided
on all plots which precede the user's first definition. Height of letterir.g
on the [Link] for this text is 0.12 inches. !lhe fozmat for data input is:

Point 2: cards bearing graph subheading text

Zero to four such data cards for defining graph subheading are permitted, the
text of which will appear as a subheading on only the immediately following graph.
Fach line is 78 characters in length, with the lettering being 0.1 inches
high on [Link] plots. Fach subheading data card is to have columns 1-2 blank,
with the aribi trary text then punched in columns 3-80, as per the following
format:

NoCA.t~~"~II\.-:".:~,
~'?,',' ... ~ .........•....
..~.~ ... ,

Point 3: Plot specification card

This is the only plot card type actually required in order to produce a
graph; there will be one graph produced on the Calcomp and/or line printer
for each such plot card. !lhe card format is as follows (see following page for
diagram):

Cols. 1-2 -------------- Punch a "1" in column 2.

Col. 3 --------------- Punch an integer which depends upon the t,ype of

variables being plotted:

i) For node-voltage plots, punch a "4"

if all curves regardless of number are
desired on the same plot.
I f the requested curves are to be divide'
among two or more plots, pu.~ch the numb~
of curves which are to appear on the
same graph, maximum.
_ au :; UP 10 4 NObE N~t-tES fOR
t? ,.. 1&I.:t ~ Q. ~ BODK VOLT~"E PLOTS
~li4; Qtcn.-l ""' Den GRA{)H VERTICAL AXIS
<0 IUA e &&.(1) 1- ... ar: llP TO 2 PAIRS OF N()l)E NAMES HEAblNG HEADING
w c.. :z:z't) bCl ~ 'Ott BRAN CH OR SWITCH PLOTS
::tt;~ ~W., :< ~g ~ L~SEL LABEL
~ ~ If wS- ~ bt Element lnd Element
~S] .!~~
,...O-e . ~ ~~~ I~>
>,,~ ';>~
&AI COl - - -

r 1d-
voH:'S~
r V(ltto.~
2".1
,. .

E 4.0 I Elf.O I ES.O I EIt.O I ~,

I AltJ A' ", 2"', "It ~"" Act

"1~ DESR.££S 1...-- b;)~-ed on the. ~~n(.h ... onol).s >0

WZ" (ye lES r
powe..... Sre.,\)[Link]~ "STATFR" \Q
DI
(1)
"3" ~EroNDS ......
"If MILLISECONDS .c.
!l7
"5- MICROSECONDS N
I

£X"MPlE:
I'f"l.·~i. oa'\t>.o-o .SOt).SO 'l\Q.~e ~~\l~ fIve ,~. tY(t~ ,~~, \ffL" ~t~ 9~~ u\\11
\9\{2.()%.~\:·~~.~ 1\\ 1\1. ~\ ~2 lU.\tQ..\?~ ,-

\JtI\.'-u.~ ~ ~~ IN\ \~'-l ~{"1>\ ~ t.\. <l..v-t\.. L tu.~~~ (1'4\ ~ ~t.t""c\... ~~

'\ ,
~ ~1.:.(L'\a. (0->1\. ~ ~(;.JM_&. ~t:;\ ~ ~'\I\. ~ '\\k U~~I'('.
Page 14B-3

i1) lOr voltage differences or powers of

branches or switches, punch an "8"
i:a column 3.
iii) For currents or energies of branches or
switches, punch a "9" in column 3.
Remember that dynamic synChronous machine
variables are all plotted as though they
were branch currents, so they use a "9"
punch too.

Col. 4 --------------- A code number indicating which units are desired

for the time axis. Floating-point time specifications
to follow are then assumed to be i:a these units:
"1" for degrees 1. Based on the s,ynchronou[
"2" for cycles J power frequency "f"" 'l'Pi
(STARTUP file, car~ _).
"3 " for seconds
"4" for milliseconds
"5" for microseconds
"6" for frequency in Hertz
"7" for the base-ten logarithm of "6"
Note: "6" and "7" are applicable
to Bode plots only ---- the
plotting of phasor solutions in
the frequency domain only.
See "FREQUENCY SCAN" use.

Cols. 5-7 1he desired horizontal scale "HPI" i:a time units
(whatever they may be, from the col. 4 request)
per i:ach.
For example, if the user punches "3.0" in column~
5-7, and "4" in column 4, then he will get a
time axiS with scaling 3.0 msec/i:ach •
A blank or zero field has special significance,
as a request for extended floating-point precision
for plot-card input fields (see Section XIV-B-1).

Cklls. 8-11 The beginning time "EtlIN" where the time axis
will start, in units of whatever the user has
selected by his column-4 punch.

Cklls. 12-15 1he final time ''[Link]'' where the time axis
will end, in units of Whatever the user has
selected by his column-4 punch.
1he curves will be plotted from the left graph
limi t "HMIN" to the rig.'lt graph limit "HMAX"
only; these limits themselves will generally
lie somewhere in the study time-range of zero
to "~"o
Page 148-4

Cols. 16-20 - - - - - - - - Value at bottom of vertical axis, ''VMIN''.

!!hi.s i.e the minimum ordinate on the scale.
Leave blank if automatic scaling is desired.

Cols. 21-24 --------- Value at top of vertical axis, ''VldAX''.

'!his is the maximum ordinate on the scale.
Leave blank i f automatic scaling is desired.

Further comments about ''WIN'' and ' [Link]''

Parameters ,tyMIN" and ' VMAX'' only have meaning for plotting
on the calcomp plotter, since line printer plots are always
automatically scaled so as to utilize the full 132 characters
of carriage width.

In cases where the minimum and maximum values of the one or

more curves for a given calcomp graph are not known in advance,
it is usually convenient to let the EMTP decide upon the
appropriate vertical scaling. This is requested by leaving
fields ''VMIN'' and ' VMAX'' blank.

In order for the "tic" marks on the vertical axis of a C81comp

plot to correspond to nice round numbers, the variable span
of that axis (VMAX - VJ4IN) should be divisible evenly by the
axis length in inches. !!:he axis length.!!. under user control
(see Section XIV-B-6), although it is normally left at its
1nstallation-dependent default value (typically 8.0 inches).

Cols. 25-30 Network node names are read from the four AfJ
fields which are contained in the columns 25-48.
31-36 'lhese identify the curves to be plotted, as
37-42 follows:
43-48 i) For node-voltage plots, the name or names
of the nodes in question are to be punched.
Any of the four name-fields can be left
blank, if not needed.

ii) For branch or switch variables (element

voltage difference, current, power, or
energy), punch either one or two node-
pair names which identify the branches
in question. Columns 25-36 are for
one branch, and columns 37-48 for another.

If more than two branch or switch variables

are desired on the same graph, the user
should punch the special request word
"BRANCH" in cols. 25-30; then the EMTP
will read the node-pair names for up to
four elements from a followL~g card, as
detailed in Section XIV-B-4.
Page 14B-5

Ools. 49-64 ------- 16 arbitrary alphanumeric characters, to be

used as the main graph heading label. On the
calcoIl'lP, this will be drawn with letters 0.20
inches in height.

Cole. 65-00 ------- 16 arbitrary alphanumeriC characters, to be

used to label the vertical axis of the graph.

Point 4: card for input of 3 or 4 branch-variable names

If the .special .request word "BRANCH" is punched in columns 25-30 of the
plot specification card (Point 3), then the variable identification is ~
made using columns 25-48 as usual; instead, the EMTP will read such infonnation
from an additional card which immediately follows, where up to four node-pair
variable identifications are to be provided:

NCRV ----- Leave blank if all curves are to be plotted on the same
graph.
A nonzero integer between 1 and 4 will be taken to
mean the number of curves on the same graph. Such usage
is rare.

BUS1, BOS2 ------ node-pair names for the first branch or switch which
is to have its variable plotted on the graph.

BOS', BJS4}
BOS5, BUS6 --- Similar meanings for the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th branches
mS7, BUSS or switches.
,
If anyone of the four node-pair identifications contains two blank words
(12 blank characters), the request is simply ignored.

Point 5: Card for extended precision of floating-point fields

1he five floating-point fields of the plot specification card, "HPI",

"HMIN", "HMAX", "VMIK", and ''VM.A.X", all vary in width from three to
five columns. Now, this is generally suffiCient for typical production usage,
in which nice round numbers such as 20.0 msec/inch for the horizontal axis
scaling are typical. But the precise scaling of odd-ball tolerances such as
16-Z13 msec/inch is clearly impossible using such limited-precision fields
for data input. The option described below r~oves this limitation.
Page 148-6

Por full 16-column-width precision in the specification of all five

floating point plot-specification card parameters, the user need only leave
columns 5-7 (field "HPI") of the plot-specification card blank. !!he program
will then read an additional following card, from which it will extract the.
five variables in question, in the same order, using the following fomat:

:
... j ..·:"HtJ. ··· j
I-II 1N _ .. I ..
.•. ~'i
I
HM.A;V
.
•

~~
,.J ..•.. : . .
. ,.. [Link] ::
.'

.. i.· ..
t i ;
E" . 10:' I'
1ft .. ... ~ ..•
.. E 1'':'' 10 .
4...... . .\:J • .

Exception: For a situation where the user desires to use both the "BRANCH"
option of Point 4 and also the option just described, it is the
present extended-precision card which is to be deferred:
1. Plot specification card with blank cols. 5-7, and
"BRANCH" punched in columns 25-}o.
2. ~en the branch-variable name card of Point 4.
3. 1nen (finally) the extended-precision card immediately above.

Point 6: Card for Calcomp graph-size adjustment

'!be bottom margin and vertical-axis height of a Calcomp plot are installation
dependent, t~ough typically set to default values of 1.0 inch and 8.0 inches,
respectively. Either or both of these parameters can be changed by the user,
as per a special request card having the following fomat:
~",!- .. ,""t!~I~·c·t;a. 2 :.~=,=, ~:::fI:::!=::~;;;:::n:::i 1X:~=~Ii::~

'"a..>-
t-
-z
Z
....,
IJ)

Q)
4:
.0..
.n
.sp"ial
~~e,~
';/0 d
~ ..
~E.l6tn
~ !E-4.0 £4.0

Cols. 1-2 ______ "ITYPE", the card type-code is to be punched

as unity.

Cols. 8-11 ------ "BEGIN", the new lower margin in inches, read
using FA.O format.

Cola. 12-15 "SPAN", the new graph height (vertical axis span) in
inches, read using E4.0 format.

Cols. 25-30 'lbe special 6-character request word "HEIGHT".

All plots requested after input of this card will have this specified bottom
margin and vertical-axis height, unless subsequently changed by another sucr~
card at a later stage of the plot-data input cards.

It might be mentioned that implicit to this discussion is the assumption

that the operator will start the Calcomp plotter with the pen origin at the
bottom of the graph paper; if not, the lower margin is simply relative to
whatever point the operator initializes the origin at.
page 14B-7

If the total distance represented by bottom margin "BEGIN" plus vertical

axis height "SPAN" is .greater than the installation-dependent plot-paper size
"SZPLT", a message is printed on the line printer and the graph size-adjustment
request in question is ignored by the ntTP. In this case, the program would
continue to use the last legal values for "[Link]" and "SPAN II ---- either those
originally set by default, or defined on a previous graph-size adjustment card.
In this discussion, variable "SZPLT" is the total width of the plotting paper,
the value for which is under user control via the STARTUP file (Sect. I-E-2).

Line printer plotting is completely unaffected by the presence or absence of

such a graph-size adjustment card (since it only applies to the Calcomp).

Point 7: card for Calcomp graph-se:earation adjustment

The spacing between successive Calcomp plots is initially set by the program
at the start of each new data case to an installation-dependent value of ''KSEPII
inches (an integer; usually equal to 2 inches). att such graph separation
can be altered by the user at any stage of the plotting, by means of a card
having the following format:

1 ....... ~RGIN

Cols. 1-2 ------ [Link]", the card type-code is to be punched as

unity.

Col. 4 ---------- "K SEP II , the inter-graph separation distance which

is deSired, as an integer number of inches between 2
and 9, inclusive.

Cols. 25-30 ----- The special 6-character request word "MARGIN".

The inter-graph separation which is requested in this way will continue in

effect for all Calcomp plots of a given data case u.'1til another such "MARGIN"
request is encountered. att remember that each data case will automatically
be initialized to the default value for "KSEP" at the very beginning j henc e
such ''MARG IN" requests are only local to the data case of which they are a part.

Requested separations IIKSEP" of less than 2 inches are rejected by the

EMTP, with the preceding legal value ([Link] it may have been) simply continuing
in effect, in this case. A warning message of such a rejection is outputted to
the line printer in such a case, for the user's benefit.

Line printer plotting is completely unaffected by the presence or absence of

suct a graph-separation adjustment card (since it only applies to the C:lcomp) •

•
Page 148-8

Point 8: Card for redef1n1 tion of smoothing tolerance E.

'!he numerical value for smoothing tolerance E. which was described in

Section XIV-A-8 is given a default value of 0.01 inches by the EMTP at
the beginning of each new data case. However, its value is under user control,
and can be changed from one plot to another by use of a special request card
of the following format:
-. .... ""!·:'"t·I""i., .. ~:.=t=~, ="":=~~ =~.:::: .• ;::;e::;UI-
W : ~ Spt(.i.l
Q.. ..
)0- EPS pe~
l- 'tIo d
=--1 - .- ... - --
i"'
ES'~O
-
SI'\OOTH
""-

Cols. 1-2 ------- "ITYPE", the card type-code is to be punched as

unity.
Cols. 16-20 "EPS", the desired new smoothing tolerance in
inches, read using E5.0 format.

Cols. 25-30 ------ The special 6-character request word "SMOOTH".

A tolerance so defined will remain in effect for all Calcomp plots of

the the data case in question which follow, until another such redefinition of
£. is encountered.

If the user defines tlEPS" to be 0.1 inch or more, a warning message

is printed out on the line printer. While relative extrema will be exact in
such a case, the general plot shape begins to look significantly distorted, in
general. The message just reminds the user why his plots look so jagged.

Should the tolerance field "EPS" be left blank or punched with a. value
of 0.0001 (inches) or less, the EMTP sets the tolerance ~ identically
to zero, and no smoothing at all occurs; the associated smoothing operations
are completely bypassed, and all raw data pOints are plotted on the Calcomp.

Line printer plotting is completely unaffected by the presence or absence of

such a smoothing-tolerance redefinition card (Since it only applies to the Calcomp).

Point 9 card for selecting the graphing mode

preceding any plot card, the user can change the mode of batch-mode
graphing between the alternatives of character plotting (with WNIT6 line
printer output) and vector-graFt'lic (calCoolp) plotting. Choose one of the two
following declarations:
C 123
C 13456789~123456789~1234567890
C 1---------------------
PRINTER PLOI'
CALCCMP PLOI'
page l4B-9

Initialization at the beginning of each new data case will set the program to
"CALCCMP PLOT" mode, so if this is 'what the user wants, he need not declare
anything. But the user wanting a character (line printer) plot must always use
a "PRINTER PLOT" declaration before the first such plot card. Within the
vector-graphic (calComp) alternative, there may be additional choices, too (see
Point 113 immediately below). .

Interpretation of the input declaration confirms the new mode of batch-mode

plotting that has been selected. The following two alternatives were copied
from different places of the solution to BENCHotARK OC-37:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 345678913123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C
Request for character (line printer) plotting.
-1--------------------
I PRINTER PLOT
Request for "ca1Comp" (vector-graphic) plotting. 1 CAlCCMP PLOT

Point 113 card to direct ltCALCCMP PLOT" to an output device

If the vector-graphic mode of batch-mode plotting has been selected (see

"CALCCMP PLOT" of the preceding Point 9), then there still remains a decision
about the destination of the graFh. The plot can be sent either to a vector-
graphic computer monitor, or to a calComp-like pen (or more cOO1llonly, today:
electrostatic) plotter, or to both of these devices simultaneous. The three
associated declarations are, respectively:
C 1 2 3
C 134567891312345678901234567890
C 1-----------------------
SCREEN PLOT
PEN PLOT
SCREEN PEN
All computers will read and interpret such EMTP data cards, and will set the
appropriate flags so that installation-dependent plotting modules (see Section
I-E-1-f) can service them. In the absence of any such declaration, the vector
plot mode will be set in accord with user wishes of the STARTUP file (see
Section I-E-2, card 10, variable MODSCR).

But will the installation-dependent plotting modules service the universal

flags just mentioned? There can be no general answer. Nothing is assured, even
for a particular brand of computer. Apollo workstations (see Section I-F-l)
provide a good example. Most owners and users probably do not have access to a
separate plotting dev ice that is independent of the screen. Yet some (e.g. ,
Bernd Stein of FGH in Mannheim, Germany) do, and they do not want their vector-
graphic Apollo EMTP output to be sent only to the screen. The declarations of
the present section were designed for such well-endowed users. But the average
Apollo user wants "9:REEN PLOT" only, so this is why the sample STARTUP
file of Section I-E-2 has MODSCR equal to two.
page 14B-10

Interpretation of the input declaration confirms the new destination for

vector-graphic plots that has been selected. The following three alternatives
were copied from the solution to BEN:lfw1AA1< DC-33:

C 1 2 3 4 567
C 345678901234567890123456789'111234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C - 1----------
Choose the screen as target for CalCanp output. 1 SCREEN PLOT { If a vec
Cancel screen as target for Calcanp (now paper). I PEN PLOT { If a vec
Oloose both screen and paper for ca1canp output. I SCREEN PEN { If a vec

Point 11: Card for changing the pens and the grid status

Different curves of any plot may be drawn with different pens, if desired.
Common usage is~to either vary the boldness. of black lines, or else to plot in
color (with each curve being a different color). Such a choice of pens can be
changed at will by the user ---- from plot to plot, if desired.

The option of a pen-drawn grid for plots is also available. Common usage is
for plotting on unruled (blank, pure-white) paper. Grid lines are drawn. every
inch, both horizontally and vertically, as extensions to the "tic" marks of the
axes.

User control of the two preceding options is provided by a single card,

which is to have the following format:

Cols. 3-12 -------- Special request-word text "PEN CHOICE" is

punched in this field.

Cols. 17-24 "KPGRID", the integer pen number ( 18 format)

which. is to be used for drawing the grid. A zero
or blank field will suppress the grid (i.e., none
will be drawn).

Cols. 25-32 KPEN(I) , the integer pen number ( 18 format)

33-40 which is to be used to draw curve number "I" of
41-48 the plot. A zero or blank field is taken to mean
49-56 no change in the pen number (from the preceding
assignment) for the curve associated with that data
-- field.
page 14B-11

The requested pen choices and grid specification will remain in effect
throughout the data case in question, until altered Qy another such request card.

Before the first appearance of such a card within any data case, the program
automatically provides the following initialization:
ICPGRlD = 0 ( KPEN( I) = 1 for all I )
That is, there will be no grid,andall curves will be drawn with pen number 1,
unless an explicit request to the contrary follows.

Point 13: Card to superimpose plots and,lorsuppress vertical-axis labeling

It is not uncommon for the user to desire extensions to the basic plot
capability of the Point 3 format. For example, he may want:
- - the plotting of more than 4 curves on the same graph, or
- - the plotting of different variable types (e.g., node voltages
and branch currents) on the same graph, or
the addition of a vertical offset for one or more curves of
a .graph, or
suppression of the vertical-axis labeling (leaving just the
vertical line with tic marks).
All of these operations are possible,Qy careful use of the powerful (but tricky)
"SUPERIMPOSE" card.

User control of special features such as those just mentioned is by means

of a special-request card having the following general format:

I ' ..
:SUPf..R1MP.O~E,
1 1 ~
:':18 :
I , '
18
;

'MPL4 MPLS:

Columns Special-request word "SUPERIMPOSE" is punched in

3-13 columns 3-13.

The integer number of plot specification cards (Point 3)

which are to be superimposed. Any non-positive integer
(e.g., zero or blank) will be defaulted to unity.
Page 14B-12

A flag for possible suppression of the vertical-axis

labeling. If no such labeling is desired, punch a
"1" in column 48; otherwise, leave the field
blank, or punch zero.

This "SUPERIMPOSE" feature is very powerful, but also a little tricky.

For this reason, it is desirable that the user understand a few basic operational
principles, rather than just the plotted effect.
Principle 1: The superposition feature is based on suppression. of the
origin-changing operation which normally occurs upon the
completion of a plot. If the change of origin is omitted,
the folloWing plot will 'be drawn on top (i.e., superimposed)
of the preceding one. Thus the superimposed plots are
really separate, independent EMfP plot; they are produced
separately, just as would be the case if there were no
"SUPERI:.filOSE" card.
Principle 2 All non-curve inking for the second and later of a group of
superimposed plots is automatically suppressed. Thus the
grid (if requested), the axes, the date and time (etc.),
and any title will only be drawn once - for the first
of the superimposed plots. The scaling of the second and
later superimposed plots isB£1 documented on the plot,
then, it will be noted.

With this underlying information now in hand, let us consider several cases of
novel (but not uncarmon) usage:
Usage 1: Suppose that the user wants to plot more than four EMTP
variables on the same graph. He simply places these on as
many different plot specification cards ~Point 3) as he
may require or desire, and then these are preceded by the
appropriate "SUPERIMPOSE" card.
As an example of this usage, consider the required data cards
for seven node voltages on the same graph:

SUPERIMPOSE 3
..... I. D.O aD. -20. 2 •• NOOEI NOOE5 "00E9
t .... a. 0.0 al. -20. 20.NODE3 NODE"
I .... I . 0.1 ao. -20. [Link] BLUE

Usage 2 Suppose. that the user would like to mix different plot-variable
classes (e.g., node voltages and branch currents) on the same
graph. Separate plot specification cards (POint 3) would be
constructed for variables within anyone class. These would
then be preceded by the appropriate "SUPERBD?OSE" card.
As an example of this usage, consider the data cards which
will plot two node voltages and one branch current on the S8!Ile
graph:

SUPERIMPOSE 2
I~" 8. 0.0 aD. -20. 20.NOOE3 NOOE~
19 .. a. D.a aD. - ... 0 ... OBUSK BUS"
page 148-13

Usage 3 Suppose that the user wants to compare two or more curves
which are similar. If such curves were plotted to the same
scale on the same plot, it would be difficult to distinguish
one from the other. One possible remedy is to offset one
or more of the curves [Link]. In the case of three curves,
there would be3 separate plot specification cards (POint 3);
the vertical. offset for each is produced by adding the
appropriate constant to both "VMIN" and "VMAX" of columns
16-24. As usual., such plot specification cards wo~d be
preceded by the appropriate "SUPERIMPOSE" card, in this case
having a "3" punched in column 32.

As an example of this usage, consider the case of three node

voltages. The second is to be offset one inch above the first,
and the third is to be offset one inch above the second. Also,
vertical-axis labeling is to be suppressed, note:

SUPERIMPOSE 3 I
I~ a. 1.0 aD. -20. [Link]
I~' a. 1.0 ao. -25. 15.MODE2
I" I. 1.0 ao. -30. 10.NOOE3

Usage 4 Suppose that the user wants to suppress al.l axis

labeling' on a conventional. plot (not lmcommon in the case
of publication). To do this, the usual plot card would be
preceded by a "SUPERIMPOSE" card having a " 1" punched
in columns 40 and 48. There will not actually be any
superposition as such, of course. Rather, the user is merely
exploiting the axis-labeling suppression which is available
only via the "SUPERIMPOSE" feature.

As an example of this usage, consider the case of two node

voltages, for .which no vertical-axis labeling is desired:

SUPERIMPOSE I I
.,' a. I.D aD. -20. [Link] NOOE9

In the case of "SUPERIMPOSE" usage, variable identification has been modified

(compared with Rule 7) so as to account i'ora large number of variables. The
curve number (e.g., "7"), the curve symbol (e .• g., "+"), and the one or two
6-character identifying names are all drawn side by side. This begins in the
upper right hand corner, and proceeds downward in order, spaced four per inch.
A sample is shown at the right, below. Standard
CalComp symbols have been used, the first few ,. ' ' I' .:,
.

of which have the following correspondance: -. -.-~ .. "-

J.
1
CDGEN PRI .,.
....
?
~.
' CRTH - 1.
SE. i
3 +- LOAD ,I
. . ~
Page 14B-14

Vertical-axis scaling is unambiguous if the user does the scaling himself,

manually (i.e., by punching fields "VMIN" and "VMAX" of columns 16-24 ot
the Point 3 plot-specification card). But. if these vertical-axis fields are
left blank, then the EMrP will pertonn its own scaling, and the user will be
forced to figure this out after the fact for variables of the second and later
plot-specification cards. Remember, only the vertical axis for the first
such card is drawn, .and even this can be suppressed if so desired by the user!
As a general rule, it is recommend that the user do all at his own vertical-axis
scaling, on those plots which involve the "SUPERIMPOSE" usage.

As for time-axis scaling, it is assumed that the user has enough sense to
keep this the same for all superimposed plots, if this is what he really wants
(and it normally is). There are exceptions, however, such as comparing different
segments of the same curve. If the time-axis scaling is varied wi thin a group
of superimposed plots, the user is simply advised to be careful, and to remember
what he did, since only the time axis of the first plot-specification card will
be drawn on the graph.

FRINt HEAn OFF

SU?E:RIMPOS£ 2 •
''34 2. 0.0 t 5. -'3. '2. GE N PRI CATH SfC
144 2. 0.0 IS. -20. _20.LOAO .. '-;-~

I -
i : ;
I
;
';'(!) I liN !,,-I
I - , Z .. ' CATH !Itt
I , I 3 + Lon'J •
+- .. _.i __ ' .. _~ ...•.

--+ .. ~
.--. -~ . --.-'_.- .
! -~---- - ,-. '
~ _)~-.------..:.---=..-----.:.----~:...-/ I . ;-

/ -----...,. ,< - --- -- . ~. -

~I
_.... _
/
"
I
.t.:,:,
;n·
i<
c.:: e.:: . . . . .
-<:"''''C''-5 ~ ~
f
:C.:J
,
;2·0:) \
.'/
l':.:~
I
:[Link],
I
:8.00.
I

- - I
, I

.'. ___ .v~~ '~ .. :-._._~. - ' \ --:

, - I

.,
...!.'
. , ,,--
-, ,-
/ -- -- -. ._- '. -. . .
I
. , -
I

••• "

: p_

.
••••

.
:. -!.
)

- I

,
. ' . .
' ___ ~ __~ __. ___ ~ ..__ .J..____ ~_~_j~, __ .. ~_
_______ .. _. __

• • • 0 • ~ • • 8 0 0 0 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 • • 0 •
page 148-15

Point 14: Card for photographic magnification or reduction

CalComp plotting software has a SUBROUTINE FACTOR (F) which
allows for the photographic magnification or reeduction of a plot. It
is by means of the key request word "SCALE" that this is made
available to the EMTP plotter:
1-11'" .,,,, ..... ''is! - -~~l~ ;!L::l!' ~p.~::::::;:. :c'~I:::I~~:;; ;;; ::;::
(3 - 7) special request ··H<Jr ............ 1••••••••• j. ..................... d· hLI'(t'; ..
word "SCALE" ···IJ:·I"I~. "if ....!.. ...... -1--. ........ H·j~·I~I··ijI. ..
••.•• 1•••• Et.f....
(25-32) reciprocal of argument ···~·H·····
,
" F"
of CalComp FACTOR .
With SS = 1.0, there is no alteration of the plot size; for SS
greater than unity, the plot contracts; and for SS less than unity
it expands.
The most common application is for metric plotting, in countries
other than the USA and Canada. The idea is very simple: do the
plotting with English units as described in the instructions, and then
slightly contract the plot so that one inch will equal two centimeters.
For this, one uses S5 = 1.270025. All labeling will then be a little
smaller (by this factor), and axis "tic" marks and the optional ruled
background grid will have separations of 2.0 centimeters. As an EMTP
user, one simply mentally replaces all mention of "inches" in the
instructions by "two centimeters". For example, consider variable
"HPI" of columns 5-7 of the plot-specification card. Instructions
say that this is the number of time units (e.g., msec) per inch for
the horizontal axis. But if one uses 5S = 1.270025, this is then
to be read as the number of time units per two centimeters. That is,
divide the number by two to get the number of time units per centimeter.
It really is quite straightforward, then.

Point 15: Card for plotting one EMTP var iabl e v s. another
Historically, all EMTP plotting was done with one EMTP variable
on the vertical axis (ordinate), and with time on the horizontal axis
abscissa). But, subject to some restrictions, and with use of the
special request "X-Y PLOT", the user is able to plot one EMTP
variable as a function of the other, as first described in Ref. 8,
Vol. VIII, 27 January 1979, pages PROV-9 onward. The following
description is reproduced from that presentation.
Rules for the::.ew "X-Y PLOT" feature are really quite simple, su:ccarized
by the following:

Rule 1 So~e of the old ~ batch-mode plotting ca--ds arp. ~onoredt and some
ar~ not. We bave:
a) The ca--:ls which are honored i:[Link] the case t1 tle and graph
subbcadin; cardsTsee· !iule 6, ?~1.:lts 1 and 2 on page 4.0 a
of the User's Manual). ':he same goes for the I!?~ CSO!G:E"
card of :Foint 1 1, and the pr...::lt ~ee.d cards of Point 10 •
Fi=.allj, the ''[Link]'FI'' reques,,; of Point 4 is ace ept ed if :n
space is required for spec1f1eati~n of the variables.
b) Other special requests or teatu:es in the list are ~ honored,
so should not be u.-; ed by 1:he US er.
Page 14B-16

Rule 2: Three special, new ca:t'ds sigDal the requ~5t tor "7.-Y PLOT" usage:
Card , :

(3-10) Special request word. "X-Y PLOT" 1s punched

in aolu::ms 3 through 10.

(15-38) Arbitrary [Link] title tor t.r.e

horizontal ax1s.
Card 2 :

( 1-a) Variable "LENX", the length ot ~.r.e

horizontal (flxtt) a::d..s, in [Link]. Zero or
blank 19 detaulted to eight (S.O) i:[Link].
(9-16) Variable ''XMIN'', tbe m1n1::ru:m 'IX" Talue
(value at lett end ot horizontal ax!s).

(17-24) - Variable ''n!A,I", the I1Exj:mn ";c" value

(value at ~l::e right ex::i ot the [Link]::.tal ax!s).
~roteI:1" the user leaves both "1~r" [Link]
'''DIA.X'' bJJmk, t!:e ~![? nll auto-
matically choose these values to
cover the curve being plotted (by
means of call to CalComp "SCALE") •

!!=~== ::~:::I=r.:-:::=' .~::::.::!.::.~=~ :;:::~ ;:;=:::I::::-!:"~

Ca...-d 3 I _ _ _ ... _ ... _ _ _

,
E&.d - Eg.O E8.0 ES.O E:2 .. Q.
I

[Link] YMI.N __y~~X. _DIY. _ ~Sy~

(1-24) "ariabl~s l'L1::!lY", "Y".J!!N Il , and "Y'..!AX",

w!lich are analogous to the x-axis variables
0"1: Card 2 - ')1"..17 here par:;uneters ar! tar
tbe vertic&:. ("1'11) axis.

( 25-32) !hl!l:.~er ot d!.~1ons per il:cb. ot :he graph paper

DIY 'Kllicn t:J be1r.g drawn on. ':!!h1s is us I!d as a
para:ne'ter for CalGo:::ro :lcdule "SCA.I.:Z".
A zero or blank field-is defaulted to ~an (10.0).

(33-40 ) Cne lese tl::.::!.n t!le ::.umber of sr-bol.s "Rhicb. is us ed

ST..t to iden~if1 tbe ~ea. Zero or blank is
i![Link] ~o !:lean that no sy::lcols shall be
placed on the cu.~es =or ~~o3e3 of 1d=~tit1oatjc
StandarcL CalComp 1dent1t'!.cat1on symbols are
'l.S!d, ba.s~ on the curve number.
Page 14B-17

Rule 3 The above cards are to be :"ollowOO by a cOllventiona.l ~ plot-

specification card (see page 40d of the User's Manual). Some fields
3re ignored, however, and others have an altered meani:lg. Supply the
fol:o~ information:

?unch -"1" 1:l column 2, always.

Graph me code. Uoae "4" for node voltages,

"8" tor branch [Link], and "9" for
bra:[Link] Cu::Tents.

A code-integer for tbe un1ts ot the eolumn

8-15 time spec1:ficaticn. Use "4" for
milliseconds, ~tc., as with [Link] plots.

(8-11) ---- or begi::[Link] time ot the po1:lts to be

~€1nt'ItIJ:l:
plotted, in units ot tbe COlu::!:l-41 speci:!'1cat~

( 12-15) f6axj:nm or ending time of the po1:lts to be

plotted, in units of tbe colUl:1n-4 spec1!ica~ion.

S1x-charaeter names (A6 t[Link].t) of ~

variables which are to b, plottec.. 'r~e first
two variables are tor one cu.-ve, as an order~
(X,Y) pair of variables. For node vol:ages,
then, columns 25-36 id~llt1:fy tbe first curve
(with the X-name appe~.ng first), ~ columns
37-48 identify the second (it a secoM exists).
For branch voltages or branch curr~nts, a ~
of names is required for variable identificatiOD,
~ecall (e.g., col~ 25-36
just for t~e X-va:!able); !or ~ore ~han
one curve of branch variables, the ''3:.A:1C3 t1
option can ';:)e used (see roint 4, P:lg9 40g
of tbe t!s er I s :.[Link]).

Exemp1es of ~"X-YPLOT" usage can be found in BENClMAAK OC-33 (vector-

graphic usage) and BENCfMARK OC-42 (character plot usage).
The interpretation of the three special "X-Y PLOT" cards confirms six of
the eight numerical parameters that are defined. The following illustration has
been taken from the solution to BENClMAAK OC-33:
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C -----------1------------------
Plot one EMTP variable against another. 1 X-Y PLOT Horizontal
x-axis. 1. 1000E+01 -1.1000E+00 1.1000E+00 I 11. -1.1 1.1
y-axis. 8. 0000E+00 -4.0000E+00 4. 0000E+00 1 8. -4.0 4.0
Page 14B-18
Point 16: Card for Fourier series computation
Although it has nothing to
do with plotting, the Fourier
- '", .., ",'on -0 ....
Ool~ ':: ~!::! .::!I:!: .~ NN :~ !rJ ~~ Il'!l !~ .:;. ::; I~
:: =:t!!: Sial; N'"
series computation of the EMTP
,
CD

can only be accessed via this .. .. ~ . .. ....!... ~ .. ... .. • • o. .... ..... .. .. .. . .. ....
EMTP data classification,
using the special request card
(see right) which switches
t P-.. ~ f~ ~... r:: i ... I'!oI' ..
" .. ... ..... .. . ..
o. • • • :] "e"
. .. ....
.. .. .. .. ...
from plotting to Fourier series . ~~ ~. ( r: ~'I~
( 3-12) special request word "FOURIER ON"
(25-32) Number of harmonics which are to be printed, NFOUR.
If left blank, 30 will be printed (default value).
For KPL equidistant points in the fundamental period,
only KPL/2 harmonics are computed. If the user
punches a larger NFOUR, it will automatically be
reduced to this maximum.
Next come "plot cards", each of If'lJ
1- " 1"'1· III:.
I'!
.'.
I~
11I1;:
~1 .
t!:! IlU!I :::I!
·e .~~ · .. ... ...... ......... ..
• ...¥
:.II: &::ill :1: JI
I ~ i, ,.
which identifies one EMTP variable I" it II'! III
"
"'1:1 "'\111:
.. . ..~ ~ . · . .. . .. . -I- •
~

.i ·l '1'" ..
I.!., ... iii .. iii
and a time window over which the
Fourier analysis is to be performed.
Columns 16-24 and 31-80 can be ~~ . '~ ~. · .. .. . .... . "" ~I~
"
~~

left blank. Punch only:

.( 1- 2) Punch a "1" in column 2, as with all plot cards.
( 3 ) Punch "4", "8", or "9", depending upon whether one
is to Fourier analyze a node voltage, a branch
voltage, or a branch current, respectively.
( 4 ) A code number indicating which units are desired for
time parameters HPI, HMIN, and HMAX below. For
cycles at the power frequency, punch "2"; etc.
( 5- 7) Punch any believable horizontal scale HPI. This
data is not used for the Four ier c alcul ation, but a
credable value is required to successfully pass
through plot card data checking logic.

( 8-' 1) The beginning time "HMIN" of the one-cycle window

that is to be used for the Fourier analysis, in units
of whatever the user has selected by his punch of
column number 4.
(12-15) The ending time "HMAX" of the one-cycle window, etc.
(25-30) "BUS1" , first A6 EMTP variable name.
(31-36) "BUS2", 2nd A6 EMTP variable name, if any.
For the Fourier analysis of a node voltage, only BUS1
is used; but for branch voltage or current, BUS2
is also required to identify the variable.
There are as many such "plot c8rds" as the user wants Fourier
analyses. For each, there will be a tabulated output showing the
harmonic number (first column), cosine coefficient (2nd column), sine
coefficient (3rd column), complex amplitude (4th column), and relative
size (fifth column), of which the following is an example:
Page 148-19
".
ELECTROMAGNETIC TRANSIENTS PROGRAM (EMTP), DIGITAL (D~C) VAX-11/7~0 TRANSLATION AS USED BY &PA I~
DATE (MM/DD/YY) AND !IME OF DAY ([Link].)& OY/30/~O 22.54.40 VAX/V~S PLOT FIL~ ; 93022544C
rOR INrO~MATION, CONSULT T~E 700-PAGE EHTP RUL~ BOO~ D~1£D SEP1EM9ER, 1990, PROGRAK VERSIO~ =·
INDEP~NOENT LIST LIMITS FOLLOW, TOTAL LENGTI! or ILABELI EQUALS 249971 INT£GER wORDS.
125 6100 10000 50 300 100 140 20 9000 '00 9 4 30 6000 27600 220
.....................•..............•.•.•........••.... -- .........•••....• -...•.....•..•..•...••.
DESCRIPTIVE INTERPRETATION or NEW-CASt INPUT DATA 1 INPUT DATA CARD IMAGES PRINTED BELOw, ALL 90
o 1 214
0 0 0 0 0
• • • • • • • • • • __ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • _ •••• _ •• _ •• _ ••• _ ••••~ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1
(
MARKER CARD PR£CEDING NEW DATA CASE. 18EGIN HEW DATA CAst
MISC. DATA. 0.100E+01 0.900£+01 [Link]+OO 1 1.0 9,0
( MISC. DATA. 1 t O O 0 O· 0 o 0 0 1 1 1
SERIES ~·L-C. 0.100E+01 0.000£+00 O,OOOE+OO 1 VALUE 1.0
BLANK CARD TERMINlTING ~RANC~ CARDS. 1BLAtlK CARD ENDING BRANCH CARDS.
( BLiNK CARD TER~INATING SWITCH CARDS. lSLANK CARD ENDING SWITCH CARDS,
SOURCE. [Link]+OO 0.00£+00 0.00£+00 0.00£+00 1 1 VALUE
BLANK CARD tERMINATING SOURCE CARDS. 18UNK CARD ENDING SOURCE CARDS.
REQUEST FOR OUTPUT OF ALL NODE VOLTAGES, 1 1

COLUMN HEADINGS FOR THE 1 EMTP OUTPUT VARIABLES fOLLOW. THESE ARE ORDERED ACCORDING TO ...
c POSSI~LE
FIRST
EMTP OUTPUT-VARIABLE CLASSES, AS FOLLOWS ••••
1 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE £LECTRIC-~lETwORK NODE VOLTAGES (WITH R£SPECT TO LOC~L GROUND)'
NEXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH VOLTAGES (VOLTAGE OF UPPER NODE ~INUS VOLTAGE OF LOwE~
~EXT 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES ARE BRANCH CURRENTS (FLO~ING FROM THE UPPER EKTP NODE TO THE LO~ER
fiEXT 0 OUTPUT VA~IABLES PERTAIN ~O DYNAMIC SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES, WITH NAMES G£NgRAT£D INTE
FINAL 0 OUTPUT VARIABLES BELONG TO 'TACS' (NOTE INTERNALLY-ADD£O UPPER NAM£ OF PAIR).
BRANCH POWER CONSUMPTION (POWER FLOW, IF A SWITCH) IS TR£ATED LIKE A BRANCH VOLTAGE FOR THIS C
BRANCH £NERGY CONSUMPTION (~NERGY FLOW, 1F A SWITCH) IS TREAT£D LIKE A BRANCH CURRENT FOR THIS G

c STEP TIME VALUE

o 0.000000 0.000000£+00
( ANOTHER INPUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES. 1
1 0.100£+01 0.340000£+01
ANO-:-;:~P. !NPUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES. 1.848S:U2
2 0.200E+Ol 0.849528E+00
AHOTHER IUPUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES, 1 0.0
3 0.300£+01 [Link]+OO
ANOTHER INPUT C~RD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES.
" 4 0.~00E+01.0.434314E+00
ANOTHER INPUT CARD rOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES, 1 -,2
( 5 0.500£+01-0.200000£+00
ANOTHER INPUT CARD FOR ~Y~E 1-10 SOURCES, 1-,948528
6 0.600£+01-0.948529£+00
ANOTHER INPUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES,
7 0.700£+01-0.400000£+00
ANOTHER INPUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES, 1-1,56569
9 0.800£+01-0.156569E+01
ANOTHER I~PUT CARD FOR TYPE 1-10 SOURCES, 1 ~.o

COMMENT CARD. lC 345678901234567990123456799012

(
.*
FOURIER SERI£S STARTED. NrOUR.
PLOT CARD, 0.100£+01 0.100E+01
1~
0.800E+01
1 fOURIER ON
1 143 1. 1.0 8.0 VALUE
10

BEGIN FOURIER SERIES CALCULATION USING 8 EQUIDISTANT POINTS. BEGINNING TWO POINTS.
0.3400000000£+01 0.9495292000£+00 ENDING TWO POINTS = -0.4000000000£+00 -[Link]
(
COEFrICIENTS OF RESULTANT FOURIER SERIES, WITH -CO~PL£X AMPLITUDE- BEING THE SQUAR£ ROOT
or ~H£ SUM OF THE SQUARES or THE TWO PRECEDING £NTRIES. THE FINAL COLUMN APPLIES TO THIS AMPL:
, HARMONIC COSINE SINE COMPL£X FRACTION or
\.
NUMBER COEFFICIENT COErrICIENT AMPLITUDE FUNDAM£NTAI.
o 0.9999952500£-01 0.0000000000£+00 0.9999952500£-01 0.08574891
( 1 0.9999990764~+00 0.6000008972£+00 0.1166190049£+01 1.00000000
2 0.9000000000£+00 0.5000010500E+00 0.1029563524£+01 0.99284369
1 0.8000009236E+00 0.4000008972£+00 0.9944194194E+00 0.76696626
( 4 0.6000004750E+00 0.0000000000£+00 ~,60000047S0E+00 0.51449631

3LANK CARD TERMINATING PLOT SPEC. CARDS, IBLANK CARD ENDING PLOT CARD!,
(

I'
page 148-20

The sample usage just displayed is based on Hermann's a-point

illustration in the documentation which follows. A user-defined
Type-l EMTP source was employed to establ ish the eight desired data
points as node voltages for node VALUE. Due to the EMTP field width
of eight, precision is slightly reduced, note.
The user is reminded of the importance of defining exactly one
cycle of the periodic wave, with no overlap. Because of the floating-
point counting of the EMTP (T = T + DELTAT), this can be tr icky,. and
even installation-dependent. The first two points and the last two
points are pr inted out as confirmation, so that the user knows that
his window is exactly right. In this regard, all plot points for
T .LT. HMIN or T .GT. HMAX are rejected. If the user is having
trouble wi th one or both end. points, he may want to add or subtract
half a time step ~hen he defines HMIN and HMAX; and if this
requires more field width than the regular format allows, remember
the extended (16-column) precision option of Point 5 plot data.
The user is also warned that no interpolation on the EMTP plot
file points is performed. Hence it is important that time-step size
DELTAT (as defined on the floating-point miscellaneous data card)
be an exact multiple of the period. For 50 Hz problems, this will
usually be the case, but not so for we North American users of 60 Hz
systems. Remember, ifDELTAT = 1.E-4 sec, then there are exactly
166.666666 •.•. steps in a cycle, which implies some error in the
Fourier transformation. Better to choose DELTAT so that the number
of steps per cycle is an integer. For 60 Hz systems, carry quite
a bit of precision, preferably using free-format capability for the
floating-point miscellaneous data card. Put several extra commE'S at
the end of the nonzero data, so ensure proper bounding.
One final point regarding the FORTRAN, which is module "SERIES"
of overlay 31. An interactive debugger can stop at S.N. 3209 and
ex am ine and or adjust various variables. (EVDOUB(J), J=1, KPL) is
the data being transformed, and IPRSUP .GE. 3 will print it all.

Point 17: Card to turn off Fourier Analysis, and return to plotting.
If the user wants to return to conventional
EMTP plotting after the use of Point 16 Ilmm~I1ID~fJ1

~g:g: b;:ti:::m~a~:~f~Hi~;S~~~:: i: ~:~: 'Imm~aiuJ

=================================================================
BACKGROUND AND DOCUMENTATION OF EMTP FOURIER SERIES COMPUTATION
=================================================================
The Point 16 and Point 17 features were implemented very
hurriedly by WSM on September 29th and 30th, 1980, just as this manual
was going to press. It was a rush job, in response to Bob Hasibar's
immediate need. Hermann had written a little self-contained Fourier
analysis program many years ago, and it is his coding which formed the
basis of the new EMTP feature. The first three pages of Hermann's
five-page writeup dated 30 October 1972 are reproduced below as added
documentation of the formulas used:
page 148-21

_~x
""

"'
'-'he program will compute the values a o ' ••• am (cosine-coefficiel,ts) and b '
o
b. (~ine-co~ff1c1ents) of Eq. (1), as well as the magnitudes Co, ••• C ' with m

..
-._. $

' ' ~
°1 = ~ a~ + b~ ~

n
If n is even, then m = 2'
n-1 :J!.4 0'\,:.:
m ""
-r- .'.~ 7-";·
... :" -
series ..
-~~.",:~

m
p(x) • 2:
i-o
Q..
~
-coa(ix) +
•.•.• -!.

passes through the n g1 ven pOints ("exactly," except tor round-off errore) ADd--' -.-'.;~

provides a smooth interpolation between points with the least possible nuaber
~"" of harmonics.
Perm of I8ta Deck Page 14B-22

Any number of curves can be analyzed consecutively. Each curve is

one card defining n Pormat 13

as [Link] cards as necessary deti~1ng t 1'

1'7'
'. , . : ; : eo:. ~ : :~;-~:.~. 0:
.. . ,"

hrminate the data deck w1-th"' blank :_rd. . "'.

. ........;:;. ...,.
J.
.
.. ~ .. '.~
.
Test Examples

'Example A: ibe function

~ lx) :- e.i t th:.. .. ~.q cr.:.'b' .. ~ ~ ~)k +~ "t~lt)( + G ~ ~tl\l" (; ~ 'M....[Link] .. (; 't~lifal.(;,%~cM.'f(..
was used to generate 8, 9 and 20 values at equidistant points to define one
period of the periodic function. '!'hese pOints were used as input to generate

the coeffiCients, which agreed wi til those at tile original tWlction as shown on

p. 3.

Example B: The curve was taken from a study described in E. J. Dolan, D. A. Gillies,
•
and E. W. Kimbark, "Ferroresonance in a Transfonner Switched with an EFT Line,"

IEEE Trans. on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-91, May/June 1972, pp. 1273-1280.

The curve as well as the results are shown on p. 4-5.

:.$:,. .,
FOURIER A.. ALYSIS ~~b..~\e A.: ~~~ \l.\~ .
. " t . ~ ,

a EQUIOISTANT POI~TS
RECO~O O~
3.3999~99
ORDINlTES IN
.8~SS282 -[Link] ••• ao -.It3 .. JI44 .'. Z.I'.": "~ ;~..•"'SZ"
. ~£
-.3999999 -1.5&5&85& -- .. -:.: .---- .... "-- - -. "
-~-
'.;';:':';
.
. " , ' .....
"
"0.':'> ':! .
'

FOURIER :OEFFICIENTS
_.t-- HARMONIC ·COS-COEFF.
:. o .tOtIOO
! .'
I 1.080000
2 .gOOIOO
3 .800100
i It • 0000
.. L ... J .i
I

...._{ \;\\U..\~
, . Page l4B-23
• -0 -FOURIEit A~AL 'SIS
~ --:

J '
FOURIER COEFFICIENTS
:.11- ...
• HARMONIC COS-COE". SIN-:OEFF.
a •• oaOI8 [Link]
I
1'-
' 1 •• 000100 .&100.0
or'
· '- 2 .90DIOO .;00000
~- .., 3 .80~0'0 .... 0000
4 .&00000 .80'000
! •
FOURIER A~ALYStS .. .1.
t
RECORD 01:' ORDINATES IN 211 [QUIlISTANT POINTS
3.3999999 3.9985&50 2.1 335581 -.Z222683 -.9123345 -.ooooor'
.6979&39 .1.32515 -.8817&09 -.9534801 -.20'0001 .•• 3796~
-.456 .. 355 -1.094.824 -.90;9809 -.1~99999 -.6 .. 9 .. 687 -1.45Q9024 ..J

-1.2243 .. 22 .871.544
-
- .
~

I
FOURIER :OEFFI:tENTS I
HARMONIC COc)-COEFF. SI ~.::>:: FF • M4~NITUOE
0 .100000 0.0111000 • 100000
,. ~ o.
I 1.000000 .500000 1.166'90
.oJ __
. -, Z .900aoo .;00000 1.0295&3
I . 3 .800000 .1t10000 .894427
-~~~.
•
_.'
It
5
.6001nO .800000 1.000000 :i
...--.. .8001'0 .000000 .000000
J & .0080.0 •• 10000 .OeOO08 -. ..~i
J, 7 .000800 -.000000 .000600
.--- :- •• - -- .-. 0::

..
'---',
-'.-
....
~':
;

\:.- a .0aOODO -.01'000 .OOO[)OO

t; 9 .000080 -.[Link] .018001

.t'-f.
-. -.. . ., ,- .-. - ", . -.."'_'-; ~..:,-~-i
~
to .t00800 1 •• 08108 .001000 .' ~t

..
. ~' .... ~ __ ; ~~ _1_ -f '.~~:, ~
. 1 .. ;---+-.,.. r
-~- ;.- .'-

Point 18: Card to begin each PRINTER PLOT on a new pag!

A plot card with "PAGE" punched in columns 3-6 will produce a

page skip on the line printer just prior to the output of each new
PRINTER PLOT.

For those not having high-resolution (vector-graphic) plot

capability, PRINTER PLOTs are very important. Some printers do not
print continuously over the fold of line printer paper, thereby
breaking PRINTER PLOTs and inserting about an inch of blank space. Or,
even if the printer does print continuously over folds, some users may
choose to separate pages along fold lines for purposes of record
keeping. In either case, the beginning of a PRINTER PLOT at the top
of a line printer page may be important.

Point 19: Card to mark the termination of all plot cards

A blank card is used to signal the end of all data cards that
are associated with plotting. This then also completes the data for
the data case be i ng set up.
page 15-1

XN. RE(lJEST CARll3 FCR STATISTICAL TABUlATIONS

For "Sl'ATISTICS" or "SYSTEMATIC" data cases (integer miscellaneous data

parameter NENERG nonzero), the input data ends with an indeterminate nunber
of requests for statistical tabulations of peaks of output. variables. '!he
imprecise term "peaks" is used because all tabulations are FOsitive. Sign is
ignored, and the peak of any variable and any energization is defined to be the
larger of the absolute value of the maximun and the absolute value of the
minimun. Tabulations will give no hint of the original sign.

A statistical tabulation can be either for the peaks of a single,

individual output variable, or for the peaks of a [Link] of output variables.
Let !<NT be the nunber of energizations. In either case, each statistical
table is generated fran only !<NT data FOints. For the case of the single,
individual variable, this is obvious. For the case of a grouped tabulation,
this should be carefully noted: for each energization, there is just one data
value that will be used. '!his grouped data value is defined to be the maximun
of the peaks of variables in the group.

Each statistical tabulation is serialized using the FOsitive integers in

order (one, two, etc). '!his is done solely for ease of relocating a tabulation
of interest. When there are many tables, positioning can be confusing at times,
particularly when USing a computer editor. '!he statistical tabulation of a
single, individual variable begins with a single horizontal separator to the
right of the serialization nunber, as the upper left hand corner of the l5-th
table prodoced by BEN:fIt1ARK OC-24 shows:

15 )
Statistical distribution of peak voltage for branch "GENe " to "Cl "
Interval vol tage vol tage in Frequency ClInulative
nunber in per unit physical units (densi ty) frequency
4 0. 2000000 0. 60600000E+0 2 0 o
5 0.2500000 0. 75750000E+02 2 2

A grouped tabulation is easily spotted by its double separator lines that

enclose repeated use of the label "StJo1MAAY". '!he following shows the upper
left hand corner of the 21st tabulation of BENCHMARK OC-24:

21 ) - - - . - - - -
SlMMARY SlMMARY SlMMARY Stn1ARY Stn1ARY Stn1ARY Stn1ARY St.r-1M
21 ) - - - -
The following is a distribution of peak overvo1tages among all output nodes
'!his distribution is for the maximun of the peaks at all output nodes with
Interval voltage voltage in Frequency CUmulative
nunber in per unit physical units (density) frequency
36 1. 80000013 13. 54540eJ00E+03 0 0
37 1.85000013 13. 56055eJ0eJE+03 2 2
38 1.900001313 0. 575700eJeJE+03 1 3
Page 15A-1

For each statistical tabulation, the colunn labeled "Frequency (density)"

contains the nunber of data in each canpartment. '!he entry on any given line is
the nunber of };:eaks lying bet'Ween the variable value of that line and the
variable value of the .preceding line. As an illustration, for the .preceding
example, there was one };:eak bet'Ween 1.9 and 1.85 (the row 3 and 2 variable
values, respectively) • '!he colunn labeled "OJmulative frequency" is the
cunulative sum of the "Frequency (density)" figures throlX3h the current row,
so this colLmn always will vary between zero and the nunber of energizations
!<NT of the stooy.

Each such statistical tabulation win be fono-wed by sLl11nary statistics

showing the mean and the standard deviation, both before and after the EMTP
nunbers have been canpartmentali zed. As an ill ustration, consider the fi rst
such statistical tabulation of BENCHMARK DC-24, which uses a compartment size
of 1/20 per unit (variable AINCR of the STARTUP file):

Distribution parameters follow. Grouped data Ungrouped data

Mean = 1.40833333E+00 1.40208495E+00
Variance = 8.33333333E-04 8. 7509211lE-04
Standard deviation = 2. 88675l35E-02 2. 9581 9558E-02

Here the colunn heading "Grouped data" should more .pro};:erly read
"Compartmentalized data," except that this more pro};:er name is too long. So
the name was shortened as shown. '!he formula for the sample mean involves
division by the nunber of samples !<NT, whereas the sample variance involves
division by one less than this. See any statistics text book for a
justification of these formulas, which are merely stated here for convenient
reference:

KN1"
-x - ~
-2
CO -
J: 1
'!he EMTP itself only .produces line .printer tabulations of the statistical
distribution. But the user of a flexible canputer work station can easily
convert such output to vector-graphic plots using another window. For Apollo
usage, see .program "STATPLOT" in Section I-F-1-g.

Data cards to produce the statistical tabulations just described can take
one of two general forms, de};:ending up:m whether control parameters are being
changed or variables for tabulation are being named. '!hese two a1 ternate data
structures are explained in the following two subsections.

"iN-A. Optional "STATISTICS [Link]" Defines Miscellaneous Data

The ".STATISTICS [Link]" .request card allows definition of three parameters

that control statistical tabulations. A blank or zero value for any variable is
ignored, leaving the variable unaltered. '!he "STATISTICS IY>.'I7\" request may be
scattered among the requests for statistical tabulations, thereby allowing each
request to be customized individually, should this be desired by the user. '!he
format is as follows, with data of colunns 25-48 following the special request
text "STATISTICS IY>.TA" of colunns 1-15:
Page 15B-l

C 1 2 3 4
C 34567890123456789012341567890121345678901123456781
C I I I 1
STATISTICS 1l\'m I 18 1 FS.0 I FS.0 1
C 1 1 1 1
C MCDTAB AINCR XMAXMX

MODTAB (columns 25-32) controls the type of output tables that will be
produced. "1" will produce only single, individual tabulations, "2" will
produce only the grouped (Sl.Jo1MAAY) tabulation, and "3" will produce both of
these types of tabulations. '!here will be no grouped (St.J't'IMARY) tabulation for
a group consisting of a single variable, however, since this would be identical
to the individual tabulation for that variable. Hence only use "2" for a
group of two or more variables.

AINCR (columns 33-40) is the per unit compartment size for statistical
tabulations. First defined by the STARTUP file (see Section I-E-2, card 2,
variable 10), that positive value can be altered for any tabulation. Or, by
aJ::Pending a minus sign, the user can request statistical tabulations using a
fixed nunber of comparments. If AINCR is defined to equal a negative integer
-NCCMP, exactly N:CMP compartments will be used in each statistical
tabulation. unless the first compartment is filled, there will be one more row
in the table, however. '!his is because the last zero compartment preceding the
first nonzero compartment also is shown, for perspective.

XMA»1X (columns 41-48) is a per unit value that is expected to bound all
variables that are to be tabulated statistically. First defined by the STARTUP
file (see Section I-E-2, card 2, variable 9), this bound can be redefined if
needed (unlikely) • Of the three variables on the card, XMAXMX is the least
likely to be used. Most often, columns 41-48 will be left blank or keyed with
a zero (meaning no change) •

Interpretation of the "STATISTICS 1l\'m" request card confir:ms any new

values of the three variables, of course. For a zero input value (meaning no
change), it is the old value that is displayed. As an illustration, consider
such an interpretation taken from the solution to BENCfMARK DC-24:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C
MCDTAB, AINCR, XMAXMX = 3 -10.000
1-----------------
10.000 ISTATISTICS 1l\'m

XV-B. Request for the Statistical Tabulation of EMTP Variables

To request a single statistical tabulation or several statistical

tabulations, the user must name all EMTP output variables of interest, and also
indicate a desired scaling (a base value) for the conversion from physical
values to per unit values. As many as 10 node voltages or 5 branch variables
can be named on each card, which has the for:mat:
page l5B-2

C 1 2 3
c \34567890123415678901123456\78901213456781
ell
12\ E12.0 \ A6
\
\ A6
I
I A6
I
\ A6
I
\
.... Etc. throLgh
the BlE10 field
c \- \ \- \ 1 1 of cols. 69-74.
c 1 EASE 1 BlE1 1B1E2 1 BlE3 1 BlE4 1

IBROPT (cols. 1-2) is the type code for all variables of this declaration
(all variables named on the card) • IlJe toa lack of space, the name (IBROPI')
could not sho\rttl in the format .imnediatelyabove. USe type code "0" for node
voltages, "_1" for branch voltages, "-2" for branch currents, "_3" for
branch or swdtch .powers, and finally, "_4" for branch or switch energies.

BASE (cols. 3-14) is the base variable value that is to be used for the
per unit statistical tabulation of all variables on this data card. '!he units
should agree with those of all variables on the request card, of course. If
AINCR is positive, a blank or zero value for Bl>.SE will be given special
default values. For voltages (IBROPT equal to either zero or -1), the default
value will equal the voltage of the user's first '!YPe-14 source card (see
Section XIII, data field IiMPLITUDE of colunns 11-20). 01 the other hand, the
defaul t value of unity is assumed for currents (IBROPT = -2), powers (IBROPI' = -
3), and energies (IBROPT = -4). '!his is all for positive AINCR. However, if
AINCR is negative (indicating the desire for a fixed nunber of canpartments) ,
[Link] cols. 3-14 will be ignored, and the program performs its O\rttl calculation
as follows:

BASEV' = YMIN ! Assurne that minimun can be used for per unit base
IF ( YMIN .EQ. 0.0 .OR.! If 0 min, or if max to min ratio is too
I YMAX / YMIN .Gl'. 3.0) Bl>.SEV' = YMAX ! big, use max for base

In words, the minimun is used if it is reasonable.. But if the minimun is either

zero or less than a third of the maxirnun, then the maximun will be used instead.
'!he result will be per unit values that are not far fran unity while spanning
the desired nunber of table rows.

BlEI (cols. 15-20) throLgh BlEl0 (cols. 69-74) are devoted to the
specification of node names that identify the variables to be tabulated
statistically. Each name represents 6-character, altbanuneric information.
Note that the final 6 colunns of the card (cols. 75-80) are never read as a node
name. There are two distinct cases, depending on the value of IBROPI'. First,
if IBROPT = 0, then the variables in question are node voltages, and these are
simply named using one name for each node. Blank data fields are ignored
wi thout caranent in this case. 01 the other hand, if IBROPT is negative, this
is the second case, which is for branch variables. In this case, the names are
taken as ordered pairs: (BlEI, BlE2), (BlE3, BlE4), etc. 'Ihese pairs of
names identify the branch voltages, branch currents, branch/switch powers, or
branch/swi tch energ ies that the user wants to tabulate statistically. My
pair of two blank names will be ignored without cOITITIent.
Page 15B-3

variable groups are defined by the user, who has complete freedom to group
together whatever variables of whatever type he wants provided this does not
exceed the program storage limit of 200 variables for each group. By
definition, a group consists of all variables that the user has defined on the
present single data card plus any imnediately preceding cards with "CCNr."
keyed in colunns 76-S0. The special mark "CClfl'." is an abbreviation for
"continued on the following card," then. MY data card not containing "CCNr."
will terminate a group, and the following request card will begin a new group.
If "CClJT." is not used, a data card and a variable group are synonymous. The
"CClfl'." mark is required only for one of two reasons. Either a single card
does not have adequate space to name all variables, or the user wants to mix
variable types (IBROPI') within the group. For simplicity, it has been assuned
that the base value Bl\SE is the same for all cards defining the group. It is
the user's responsibility to see that this restriction is observed.

There are no ordering restrictions on such requests for statistical

tabulation, nor is there any limit. on the nunber (except for the "CCNr." usage
of the preceding paragrat;b). The last request is signaled to the EMTP by a
blank card. Statistical tabulations will occur in the order the cards are read,
and from left to right within a data card. As for a grouped tabulation, this
always will follow all irdividual tabulations of the group (assuming individual
tabulations are not being suppressed by MODl'AS = 2).

Illustrations of the data of this section can be found in several standard

test cases: BElCFMARK OC-16, OC-24, OC-4~, and OC-4S. In addition, a
simple hypothetical example follows:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6
C 34567S901234567S901234567S901234567S9~1234567S9~1234567S9~1
-1 l~~. SENDA TERMA
-1 SEND: TERMC OOI.D.l\ NEUI'RL
STATISTICS ~~ 1 0.0 ~.~
ASW1~ Bs-l1~ Cs-l1~
STATISTICS m~ 3 -2~. ~."
-3 TERMS Bs-ll
-2 "• SENDB TERMS HOI.D.l\ NEUI'RL
-4 0. TERMS Bs-ll

Card 1: The statistical tabulation of branch vol tage bet\oJeen nodes

"SENDA" and "TERMA" has been requested. The base voltage for per unit
output is specified to be EASE = 100 volts.

card 2: Two branch voltages are requested: First bet\oJeen nodes "srnoc"
and "TERMC n, and second bet\oJeen nodes nHOLna." and "NEurRL". The base
voltage for the output tabulations for these two branch voltages is blank, which
means that the AMPLITUDE inputted on the first type-14 sinusoidal voltage
source is to be used as the base voltage. Following the two single, individual
tabulations, there will be the grouped tabulation.

card 3: This is a miscellaneous data card that changes only nonzero

parameter MODrAS from its original value of ")" to a new value of unity.
This will suppress grouped tabulations.
Page 15B-4

card 4: The statistical tabulation of three node vol tages has been
requested. '!he nodes are named "ASW1~", "BS>l1~" and "C9'l1~". Since no
base voltage was keyed, a default value will be assigned as explained for
card 2. '!here will be no grouped tabulation after the three ind-ividua1
tabulations due to the change of card 3.

card 5: This is a misce11aneous data card upon which nonzero values

MCDI'AB = 3 and AlNCR = -2~ have been keyed. '!he first of these restores the
original value, meaning that a11 FOssible statistical tabulations wi11 be seen.
'!he negative AINCR means that exactly 20 canpartments (21 rows of a table)
will be used for the statistical tabulations that follow.

card 6: The statistical tabulation of po\tJer flowing in a branch connecting

nodes "TERMS" and "BS>l1 " has being requested. Il1e to the AINCR value
of card 5, no base FO\tJer is read from card 6 for purFOses of per unit
calculation. 'IWenty compartments wi11 be used for the statistical tabulation,
and a reasonable base value automatically will be computed by the program.
Since there is only a single variable, there will be no grouped tabulation.

card 7: The statistical tabulation of two branch currents has been

requested: first, the current flowing from node "SENDS" to "TERMS", and
second, the current flowing from "HO~" to "NEurRL" • '!here will be the
tw:> single, individual tabulations, and then the grouped tabulation.

card 8: The statistical tabulation of energy consumed in the branch

connecting nodes "'lERM8" and "BSV1 " has been requested. Since there is
only a single variable, there will be no grouped tabulation.

Interpretation of the input data confirms the variable type code in words,
and the base value PASE nunerically. Exanples drawn from the solution to
BENCHMARK DC-24 fo11o~:
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 345678913123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C 1-------------
Statistical output of branch voltage ~.1~~0E+03 1-1 100. GENA Al {
Statistical output of node voltage ~.3030E+03 I ASW10 BSWI0
Statistical output of branch current 0.l0~0E+01 1-2 0. GENB Bl
Statistical output of .branch power 0.1000E+01 1-3 B1 BSWI
Statistical output of branch energy ~.1~00E+01 1-4 0. B1 BSWl
Page l5C-l

'IN-C. Explanation of other "STATISTICS" or nSYSTEMATIC n Oltput

EMTP output of the base case is identical to that of single, conventional

. simulations, so it requires no special explanation here. As for statistical
tabulations themselves, these were explained in Section YN. Hence it is only
the output for each energization, and plots of randan switching times, that
remain to be explained, and are the subject of the present subsection.

Variable switching times (roth closing and opening) for each energization
are normally requested, since this is critical information controlling the
solution. It is variable ISW of the "STATISTICS n or II SYSTEMATIC"

miscellaneous data card (Section II-C-l or II-C-2) that controls such output.
Chly variable (not fixed) switching times are displayed, with the switching time
in seconds following the switch [Link]. As an illustration, consider the fi rst
such output fran the solution to BENCHMARK DC-24:

Randan switching times for energization number 1

1 1.88268~E-e3 2 4.247281E~3 3 5.37l358E~3

The heading that precedes the output of each energization looks somewhat
like the heading for the time-step loop output of a single, conventional
simulation. This is because variables are identified in the same way by pairs
of 6-character names. en the other hand, rather than a step number and time on
the left, it is nReference angle" that will be labeled. As an illustration,
consider the energization heading fran the solution to BENCHMARK DC-24:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 3456789~123456789~l23456789~1234567890l23456789~123456789~1234567890l23456
C
GENA GEOC
1-------------------
ElIDA Bl
Reference angle AI Cl AHl BEWl

GENS ENDA
Bl Al~

Extrema for each energ ization are automatically provided, and the preceding
heading applies to these, of course. It is the peak of the absolute value that
is actually shown, although a minus sign is appended if the extremum occurred as
a negative number. Below such extrema will be found a parallel display of the
times at which the extrema occurred. As an illustration, consider the first
such output of the solution to BENCHMARK DC-24:

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C 345678901234567890123456789~1234567890123456789~12345678901234567890123456
C -1-----
141.9164096 -72.1873524 -35.0598126 372.1266197 -4
1. 257471517 -1.8597131393
Times of max ima : .002 .13141 .0127 .£l051
.02 .1317
Page l5C-2

For "STATISTICS" data cases only (not for "SYSTEMATIC" cases) ,

following the blank card ending all such statistical tabulations there will be
miniature character plots showing the distribution of randan switch closing
times. Each "STATISTICS" switch has one such character plot, which is always
the same si ze : 30 col [Link] wide by 25 I ines long. Up to three such plots can be
spaced horizontally across the page. ecperimenta1 (sample) values are marked
wi th the symool "A" for the left plot, "B" for the plot in the center ( if
any), and "C" for the plot on the right (if any) • 'lbe symoo1 "*" is used
for all theoretical distributions (W"iich will either be bell-shaped or vertical
straight lines). '!he order of output of these plots is the same as the order of
swi tch card input. M:>re than one plot is produced horizontally on the page if
the following one or two switches have identically the same variance as the
first one (\tthich goes on the left). '!his will normally be the situation for the
poles of a 3-J;base breaker, and the user will generally want all three "grat=hs of
such a grouping to be spaced horizontally across the page. But if the user
desi res otherwise, he can sl ightl y perturb one or more var iances (a swi tch wi th
a variance that differs fran the preceding one will autanatically be placed
below on the left). As an illustration, consider the final two miniature switch
plots of BENCl-MARK DC-50, which simulates 100 shots:

SWitch -Al0
4. 458140l3E-0l
- to -ASW10 -
switch closings per colunn
SWitch -B10
1.40277773E-01
- to -8&110 -
switch closings per colunn
Colllllns Coll111ns
S 10 15 20 2S 30 S 10 15 20 2S 30
4 I I
X 1 A •
X 1 • A
X 1 A •
X 1 A •
A* 1 A •
1 * A 1 • A
A • 1 A •
1 A* 1 • A
1 * A 1 A •
1 A* 1 • A
1 A * 1 * A
1 • A 1 A *
1 8. ""00E-03 A • 1 1. """"E-02 * A
1 • A 1 * A
1
1
A
A*
• 1
1
A*
~*
1 A* 1 A
1 A * 1 A*
1 * A 1 A *
1 * A 1
1
• ~

A* * A
X 1 A *
X 1
1
A •
* A
X
X 1 A *
Time (scale = 6.66666667E-04 Sec/line) Time (scale = 1.44337567E-04 Sec/line)
Page 16-1

XVI. INTERACTIVE EXEC trr ION , CBSERVATION, AID CCNTROL (SPY)

Interactive EMTP execution means that the program will execute while the
user waits. 'Ibis is to be contrasted with batch-mode execution, wherein
execution will be performed at some later (usually indeterminate) time •.

Interactive EMTP observation means that the user can see what is happening
- during his interactive execution. 'Ibe user certainly should be able to observe
UJNIT6 line pr inter output as it is generated, since this is simple. For
simulations (the most imp::>rtant case of program usage), the user also should be
able to produce graphs of output variables as the simulation progresses. SUch
plots should be capable of automatic advancement as the simulation progresses,
I ike a strip-chart recorder for analog computers. Finally, the user should be
able to examine internal variables of the program --- variables that otherwise
would be inaccessible. All of these capabilities constitute interactive
observation, which is to be contrasted with a canplete lack of all knowledge
during batch-mode execution. Note that interactive program. execution does not
imply interactive observation. It is not uncOlIlllOn for a minicomputer terminal
to be tied up with interactive EMTP execution while the user waits but sees
nothing, since the LUNIT6 output is frequently sent to disk rather than to the
screen.

Interactive EMTP control means that program execution can be modified "on
the f1 Y," while the EMTP is executing. 'Ibis is to be contrasted wi th batch-
mode execution, where changes can only be made before the job sutmittal, or
after the sol ution has been returned. It should be noted that interactive EMTP
execution and observation do not imply interactive control. on the other hand,
one can not conceive of interactive control without interactive execution and
observation.
'Ibese three concepts of interactive EMTP use --- execution, observation,
and control - are combined by the EMTP feature named "SPY" for short. SPY
allows nearly complete observation, and also substantial control, during
interactive EMTP execution. SUch usage is requested at the time program
execution begins (see Section I-C, or 'lNI-A below) •
When some surrmary phrase such as "interactive usage." of the program is
mentioned, what does it mean? Now that observation and control are available
via SPY', interactive execution no longer qualifies as "interactive usage" of the
EMTP. As used today, "interactivity" and "SPY" are EMTP synonyms.

Although in theory most modern canputers can supp::>rt most SPY' functions, it
is the scientific workstations with variable character fonts, scrollable
windows, and graphics that are ideally suited for SPY' usage. Most mainframe
computers either will not allow such operation, or are controlled by
organizations that make such operation so expensive or so inconvenient that it
is the user who will not want to consider it. In between these two extremes,
there are minicomputers that mayor may not be suitable, depending. upon the
p::>litics of those who operate them. MY reader who is unsure about his own
computer system is advised to consult the installation-dependent information of
Section I-F.
Details of SPY' usage follow in the remainder of this section. Where an
illustration is required, Apollo will always be used, since SPY' has been the
most fully developed for such scientific workstations of Section I-F-l.
page l6A-l

YNI-A. Initiating EMTP Execution that Includes SPY

Before EMTP execution begins, the FOtential user of SPY should consider his
STARTUP file. Section I-E-2 describes such variable initialization. Of the
more than 100 parameters that are user-definable via this file, perhaps'a third
or more apply to SP'{ , and many must be set as execution beg ins. '!he best
exanple of this is the configuration of the vector-graFhic plotting window. For
most computers, installation-dependent log ic to configure the plot window can
onl y be performed once, at the start of execution. So, make sure SI'AR'I'UP
values are reasonable before execution begins.

As explained in Section I-C, SPY usage must be selected at the very

beginning of EMTP execution. An illustration using Apollo follows:
$emtp
EMTP begins. Send (SPY, file_name, DISK, HELP, CD, KEY) :
SPY
The first line is merely the operating system canrnand to execute the Apollo EMTP
(a disk file named "emtp"). '!he second line is the program's initial output,
which requests the user to choose among several options. If "SPY" is keyed at
this FOint (see the third line), program execution that allows interactive
observation, and control will begin.

For this and al1 other EMTP dialogue involving key words of one type or
another, capital letters (rather than lower-case) are required. O1ce inside
SPY, the user is able to remove this restriction by the "CASE" command if he
wants, but this does not help at the very beginning. It is generally
recommended that the user set his CAPS LOCK key as execution begins.

Chce SP'i execution has begun, input will normally shift from the EMTP
output window to the SPY window. . Apollo provides a good il1ustration, as shown
on the next page. Execution began in the bottom window with the smal1 character
font. '!he initial choice "SPY" was also sent in this window, after which the
top two windows were opened automatical1y by the program. All subsequent
keyboard input is via the SPY window (above and to the left). '!he window to the
right of this has no input pane, and is used solely for vector-grap"lic output of
the "PLor" COll1TIand of SP'i.

SP'i dialogue is initiated by short key words called SPY conrnands. Some 68
different such commands exist, and several of these (MTA, CD, BREAK, and PLor)
can be seen in the SPY window on thefol1owing page. It is the usage of this
special SP'i language that will dominate the remainder of this present chapter of
the Rule Book.
PLOT: TIME O. 8.
PLOT: ROLLV DtNCHMARK OC-4
--- Toggle to "ON" (ROLling vector plot) [Link]
?LOT: SPY
SPY: GO
SPY: LOCK
SPY: PLOT
PLOT: CHOICE
Type-4 entries (node voltages)
GEN TRAN,
Type-8 entries (branch voltages or powers) 0.00
GEN TRAN TRAM TRAN LOADG
Type-9 entries (branch currents or energies) :
TRAN GEN TRAN TRAN LOADG
PLOT: NAME
SEND NODE NAME (END. LAST) ["GEN "]: GEN
SEND NODE NAKE (END. LAST) ( "TRAN ... ] : END
SEND BRANCH VOLTAGE NAMES (END, LAST) [ TRAN , LOADG ] : GEN
SEND BRANCH VOLTAGE NAMES (END, LAST) ( , ] : END
SEND BRANCH CURRENT NAMES (END, LAST) [
SEND BRANCH CURRENT NAMES (END, LAST) [
]
)
:
:
TRAN
END
-[Link]
"0
PLOT: TIME O. 8. Graph NUMber 3 I1-Jun-S7 OS.52.2G DI
\.Q
PLOT: ROLLV NaMes : GEN GEN TRAN TRAN (1)
--- Toggle to "ON" (ROLling vector plot)
PLOT: SPY Y-Min . Y-..ax . dYJinch = -so. 80. 40. .....
0'1
SPY: GO T-Min . T-Max . dT/inch = 8.0 IG. 1. G »I
I
r-J
SPY: LOCI<
SPY:

~T"'CP:,<l 0 . Ell
Reinitialize pointer: NEYVrC, KPTPLT, IND8UF = 51 8 4343
TIMVAL. NFORSP, KPLT, MXYPL = B 19B8 B
5ee 5.e 16.79816244 3.057499669 3.05749967 19.85626211 3.957499669 -.2884e3828 -.288661396 -.563318E-3
6eO 6.0 12.26216725 54.94912105 54.94912987 67.21188829 54.94912105 -.094557817 .1742561973 .1733191918
700 7.0 -1.96663234 54.73987731 54.73987708 52.77324497 54.73981731 .0067690665 .2441152359 .231812,1817
800 8.0 -8.922464 -1.26238835 -1.26238837 -19.1848524 -1.26238835 .2998957397 .3114929427 .9116325599
Reinitialize pointer: NEYVEC. KPTPLT, INDBUF = 51 8 8969
TIMVAL. NFORSP, KPLT, MXYPL = 9 369 9
900 9.9 -14.1962557 -49.9727923 -49.9727922 -63.779948 -49.9721923 .9869213399 -.141225996 -.143249948
1000 19. .6916922079 -59.3361124 -59.3367121 -58.7351101 -59.3367124 -.994491717 -.251191635 -.241459241
HOe 11. .9201629552 -.619571675 -.619571651 .3995993883 -.618571675 -.321194545 -.346896322 -.92424872
-- -- ---- .... --
,.._ ........ "...'" ",.,.,.,..,.. .... ,.. ",,,-,,,..fnnnnn '[Link]: ... .,.,
page l6B-l

XVI-B. Oppor tun i ties for SPY Dialogue: the Keyboard Interrupt

When the interactive EMTP user desires some new observation or control of
the program, he will key one of these carmands. At some point, this keying will
be complete, and the user will want SPY to irrmediately service his request.
Some special signal, called a keyboard interrupt of SPY, or simply a user-keyed
interrupt, will exist for this purp:>se, and will be activated.

For flexiblecomp,lters (e.g., Apollo), the SPY user will not even be aware
that a special keyboard interrupt signal has been sent, since the normal
carriage return key (abbreviated hereafter as <CR» serves this function. But
Ywhatever the signal, once the keyboard interrupt has been sent, how quickly can
or will the EMTP .respond to the user's request? 'lhe answer may depend both upon
Ywhere prog ram execution is located at the time of the request, and also upon the
size of the data case being solved. Barring installation- dependent
improvements, the EMTP only checks for SPY inp,lt at certain prearranged places,
of Ywhich the following are the most important:

1. Each time a new data card is read by SUBROUI'INE CIMIIGE. Since data
cards generally will be read at a rate of several per second, it will seem to
the user that SPY inp,lt is accepted instantaneously during data input.

2. Each time a new lTrPF overlay is entered. Depending upon the overlay,
this mayor may not provide quick response to a user request. Some overlays are
passed through quickly, whereas others may involve substantial computational
effort. Between the end of source cards (UTPF overlay 5) and the beginning of
output variable requests (UTPF overlay 15), there may be noticeable delay in
responding to SPY inp,lt, then.

3. Each row of major tabular outputs of the program. Imp:>rtant examples

are the connectivity display (controlled by miscellaneous data parameter IDOUBL
of Section II-B) and the Fhasor branch flows and injections that follow the
steady-state network solution (controlled by miscellaneous data parameter
KSSOlJI' of Section II-B). OJring such outputs, the response to SPY inp,lt will
appear almost instantaneous.

4. At the beginning of each of three segments making up the time-step loop

of lJI'PF overlay 16. For a snaIl case that simulates at a rate of one or more
time steps per second, the resp:>nse to SPY conmands should appear instantaneous.
But for giant cases on a weak computer, there could be noticeable delays.

'lhese opportunities for SPY inp,lt assume that SPY is not intentionally
skipping some opportunities for user input. 'lhe STARTUP file does control
such attentiveness by SPY in the form of variable MAXFDG, which normally
should be unity. O1ly the exper ienced user is advised to tamper with this, and
any changes should only be for very good reason. O1e such reason might be that
the comp,lter being used could involve unusually large overhead checking for
keyboard interrupts, and the user might not want to slow the simulation
needlessly.

When using a speedy computer with adequate real memory (to minimize
paging) , and [Link] the program will be checking for user-keyed interrupts several
times a second, the response to SPY corrmands and associated data will appear
to be nearly instantaneous. 'lhe user has the impression that there is time-
sharing of the computer between theEMTP simulation and SPY. '!his is the way it
should be: an illusion. In fact, there is no time sharing at a11.
page l6C-l

XVI-C. SI?':{ Carmands Explained According to General FUnction

With more than 60 distinct SI?':{ commands, the complete explanation or

definition of all of these is a big job. Rather than define each SI?':{ command
individually as a dictionary might, the presentation of this section will be
organized according to broader categories of surmary purpose.

The user Who wants specific information about. a single specific SI?':{ command
is referred to the program itself, since this provides such information
interactively. As an illustration, consider What happens When the user first
sends the SI?':{ corrmand "HELP", followed by the subcommand "GO" (Which is SI?':{
comnand mmber eleven):

SI?':{: HELP
Available key-word responses to the "SI?':{:" prompt are as follows:
Nl'.MES STOP PLOl' HELP EXAMINE DEr05IT SWITCH APPEND
SAVE RESTORE GJ EX:HO FIND LIST SF.{ BREAl<
WHEN CCMMENT @ ROLL TYPE VERIFY FILE SLEEP
SOURCE CASE WAKE CA'11\r..cx:; BEX3IN STEP DEBl.(;
M'11\ RAMP TIME TEK BRAN:H YFCRM N:>Y FAC'!UR
N:>F RLC LNUSED BtE SIZE LIMIT 10m NODE
N:>NLIN SPACE WNIT4 SERIES LOCK [Y] [F] NOROLL
$ UNUSED 8M fDNK HEADING TACS WAIT V-I
MENU DICE FCNT OVERVI&l
Send "OJERVIE.W" for conmand-independent general information.
KEY-WCRD OF INTEREST (AlL, NEXT, '!UP, ear, 8.'\CK, OVERVIEW): GJ
KEY WCRD NO. 11: "GO" - - --
This command can be issued in response to the " SI?':{: " prompt to terminate
several sequences, such as one Which might have begun with "RESTORE". In
this case, there would exist preceding transfers of control from overlay 16
to overlay 20 ("KA'l1\IG"), and then back to overlay 16 again. As a second
example, "GO" cancels the "lOCK" command (Which disables time-sharing and
holdS control within SI?':{). Third, it can be used to begin the EMTP solution
following the "01\'11\" command (for data card input at the beginning of
program execution). Finally, "GO" cancels the suspension of execution
Which accompanies the "SLEEP" conmand.
KEY-WCRD OF IN'iEREST (AlL, NEXT, '!UP, Bar, 8.'\CK, OVERVIEW):

Sometimes this assistance can go deeper, to a second level, in the case of

certain complicated SI?':{ commands such as "PLOl'''. If the display ends with
another, more-specialized menu, this is What has happened. As an illustration,
consider the end of description about "PLOl''':
This comnand has its own prompt, and 32 subconmands, which follow:
SHAFT MENU MODE DEBl.(; UNUSED SET COLUMN RESET TIMESPAN
COOICE TIMElNITS N.l>.ME LABEL ROLLV ROLLC LNUSED FR(lIIT
X-Y CURSOR EXTREMA lEVEL SMOOTH SIZE SHav FAC'IOR
OFFSET PEAK AVERAGE RESCALE TIME ALL TIME mAW FOLRIER
SUBCa.1MAND OF INTEREST (MENU, ALL, <CR>, '!UP, Bar, 8.'\CK, END):
The serious student of SI?':{ really should have all such explanation available
both as a disk file and in printed form. The disk file is useful for
interactive searching with a computer editor program, note. producing all such
"HELP" output is simple enoll3h (use "AlL" instead of "GO" as illustrated). But
Page l6C-2

how does the user transfer such output from the screen to the disk?
Unfortunately, this operation is installation-dependent, so only general
guidelines can be given here. For ~rkstations with scrollable windows (e.g.,
Apollo) , just use "cut and. paste" to create a disk file. '!he next-best
alternative is redirection the SPY output channel to disk. For those systems
that do not separate SPY dialogue from llJNIT6 output, this merely requires
send ing all llJNIT6 output to disk. For sane systems ( e.g. , IEC VAX), one can
simply assign a file externally. FOr others, one can use the "DISK" option at
the beginning of program execution. If the user is unsure about what to do for
his own computer system, he is advised to consult with Program Maintenance.
Reading about his computer in Section I-F may also be helpful.

'!he SPY user will normally key capi tal letters (see the "HELP" and "GO"
of the preceding illustration). Yet there are times when lower case text is
desi red (e.g., for plot label ing), and it sometimes is a aggravating to set and
release the "CAPS LOCK" key of the keyboard ~ SF.{ key words can be made
insensitive to case by means of the "CASE" coomand. '!his toggles the binary
control of the t~ possible states.

Under the assumption that the user has all "HELP" output available to him
both in printed form and as a disk file, the fo11owing explanation wi11 be
organized in more general fashion, and will not repeat a11 of the details.
volllne is simply too great ("save a tree in the Ardennes"), and content is too
subject to change.

Appl icable to a1l input loops wi thin all SF.{ comnands is the use of "SPY"
to return to the It SF.{: " prompt. For example, this is the way the just-
displayed loop of "HELP" ~u1d be exited. Since this ~rks everywhere, and is
assumed to be known by all users, it is implicit. '!hat is, it is not listed
among alternative responses, generally.

xvr-c-l. lDading and/or Changing EMTP Data cards via SF.{

"DATA" will be the first SF.{ conmand that the average user will issue. It
tells the EMTP that the user is ready to specify an EMTP data case that next is
to be solved. '!he following illustrates usage for the interactive solution of
BENCI+1ARK OC-4:
SF.{: [Link]
SEND EMTP DATh FILE NAME (CCNTROL) OC4.
46 = cards read. llJNT10 limits KCARDl, KCARD2 = 5489 5534
SPY:
The user sent "DC4." (see the right side of the 2nd line), to \J1ich SPY
appended the missing, impl ied file type "OAT". SPY then connected the disk
file [Link].T, read the contents, and stored these 46 card images in positions
5489 throu:Jh 5534 of the program data card cache (\J1ich uses llJNT10). If some
different directory, disk, or even computer (of a network) were required for the
file of interest, this would be required, of course.
Page 16C-3

XVI-C-2. SF.{ Commands to Halt or Resume Program Execution

"GO" is the SF.{ conmand that will order a resumption of an EMTP simulation
after it has been suspended. Since SF.{ begins with the simulation suspended,
"GO" will be sent early in the typical SF.{ dialogue.

"U:X:K" is the SF.{ command that will suspend an EMTP simulation. To

_reawaken such a hibernating EMTP simulation, the user simply sends "GO".

"BREAK" allows the user to request a suspension of the simulation either

at some future simulation time, or at sane place (some Ul'PF overlay) that later
will be passed. When the break occurs, there will be a message in the SF.{
window, followed by the familiar SF.{ prompt, of which the following is
illustrative:
SF.{: II Service "BREAK". T = 0.20000E+00 16 = NC~IN
SF.{:
At this point, the simulation will hibernate until a subsequent "GO" allows it
to advance once again. In between can be arbitary SF.{ dialogue, of course.

"SI'EP" will toggle the binary flag that controls whether or not the
simulation will be suspended at every possible opportunity. The main use for
this is diagnostic, although it is critical to certain other applications as
well (e.g., the plotting of Section XVI-E).

"SI'OP" will terminate EMTP execution Unmediately via a call to the

install at ion-dependent ENI'RY STOPl'P of stBROUl'INE WINIXl-l. Since" SI'OPl'P" may
close files or windows in a civilized. fashion that the operating system prefers,
the SF.{ command "grop" is the preferred way to [Link] program execution of
single, deterministic simulations (the most common case of interest).

XVI-C-3. SF.{ Commands to Cbserve EMTP Tables: Bt.5, BRAN:H, etc.

Interactive observation using SF.{ poses the challenge of convenience.

Although any variable of any CCMMCN block can be observed using the "EXAMINE"
comnand of Section XVI-C-6, this is usually cllIlbersane and slow - much like
symbolic debuggers of factory-supplied software. Since most EMTP data is
organized using about a dozen major tables, high-level SF.{ comnands have been
implemented especially to allow the observation of such major table contents:
BUS - to observe the List-1 EMTP bus table;
NODE - to produce node nllIlbers corresponding to names;
BRAN:H - to observe the List-2 EMTP branch table;
RIC - - to observe the List-3 EMTP table of R, L, C;
SWITCH to observe the List-6 EMTP switch table;
SOURCE to observe either the rmcs source table
or the List-4 EMTP switch table;
NONLIN to observe the List-9 nonlinear elements;
V-I to observe the List-10 nonlinear characteristics;
[Y] to observe rows of the Y-matrix of the time-step
loop. The output is of nonzero colllI\ns only,
one row at a time (upon request of the user).
[F] to observe rows of the triangularized Y-matrix
of the time-step loop. Etc. (like [Y]).
to observe parameters of Type-59 S.M. sources.
Page 16C-4

There is considerable similarity in the usage of all such commands for the
observation of EMTP tables. In all cases, the user enters an interactive loop
in which he requests one or more additional rows or entries of the table being
considered. When the user has seen enol,):Jh, he sends "SP':{", and the loop will
be exited (there will be a return to the "SP':{:" prompt). Simple table output
is requested by sending a beginning and an ending row mmber using free-format
(USing a blank or comma separator) • Key words are recognized alternatives,
however. "All" will display the entire table, "'lOP" will display row one,
"BOT" will display the last row, "NEXT" or just a carriage return will
display the following row. In order to truncate an on-going display, send the
user-keyed interrupt.

Several EMTP tables have too many columns for an 80-column display without
wrap-around. kly such EMTP table has been split into two or more subtables
among which the user can choose. Chce inside the display loop for the table
command of interest, sending "E:)ITAA" will change to the next subtable, and
sending ".HFAO" will refresh the current table heading. Such alternation among
subtables is cyclic, so after the last subtable will come the first subtable
once again.

As an illustration of the observation of EMTP tables, consider the

following display of the first oftv.o "BRAN:H" tables, for a modified version
of BENCIMARI< OC-4:

Row name name-K name-M I<BlE MBlE LGTH NR KODEBR KOCSEM LITYPE IMODEL INDHST
1 LIN001 GEN TRAN 4-3 1 -1 0 0 0 o 0
2 R-mag 'mAN TERRA 3 1 1 -2 0 0 0 o "
3 LIN003 LQbJX; 3-2 1 -3
TRAN 0 0 0
"
4
5
LIN004
LIN005
LOAIG TERRA
GENXX TERRA
2
5
1
1
1 -4
1 -5
0
"
0
0
0
0 ""'" "'"
Not shown is the "BRAN:H" command, followed by "AIL" (which [Link] normally
be seen to the right of the heading, had it not been cut off to narrow the
display.

XVI-C-4. "PLCYI''' for Vector or Character Plots ruring Execution

The SP':{ command "PLCYI''' represents a gateway to sophisticated, on-line,

interactive plotting of the ongoing simulation. Both character and vector
plotting options are available. SP':{ plotting involves its own separate prompt
and command-oriented vocabulary, as the following dialogue during entry
illustrates:
SP':{: PLOT
Time 1 imi ts are .15 )
PLCYI': MENU
DEBU:; TIME FACTOR SIZE CHOICE MENU
SHAFT MODE SET COLU RESET TIMESPAN TIME un
NAME lABEL ROLLV ROLLe FRONT X-Y
CURSOR EXTREMA LEVEL SMOOTH SHCW OFFSET
PEAK AVERAGE RESCALE ALL TIME rRJlW FOURIER
PLOT:
page l6C-5

Note that the beginning and ending times of available. plot data (here zero
throlXJh 150 msec) are shown as plotting is entered. '!he "MENU" subcarmand
displays the 30 possible subccmnands that are honored within plotting. For ease
of printing, this tabulation has been narrowed to only six columns, versus eight
on the screen. Note that "HELP" is not one of the subccmnands. If the user
wants details of any of the IIPLOI'" subcarmands, he should exit and use the SPY
"HELP" corrmand • .

Many parameters and conventions of SPY plotting are determined by the

STARTUP file .(see Section I-E-2). Since this can be either computer-, or
installation-, or user-dependent, little can be said here that would be
applicable to everyone.

'IWO types of plots are possible: character plots and vector-grap'lic plots.
It is the II MODE " subccmnand that toggles the binary selection between these
two. If vector plotting is available for the computer system of interest, it
will normally be the beginning choice, since it should usually be preferred (due
to the higher resolution). If in doubt about the default decision, consult
variable LTEK of the SI'ARTUP file (Section !-E-2). For a 3-window
configuration, any character plot of SPY ·PLOI'II will appear in the SPY window,
whereas any vector plot will appear in the separate vector plotting window. '!he
width of the character plot can be changed by means of the "SET COLUMN"
subcommand (80 and l32-column plots are carmonly used) •

'!here is no special provision within EMTP software for the production of

plots on paper using the "PLOI'" command of SPY. Hence such hard copy mayor
may not be possible, depending upon the software of the operating system that is
being used, and the hardware associated with the computer monitor. For Apollo,
system software provides the solution automatically. '!he shell cornrnand $CPSCR
("copt screen") creates a disk file of the screen image, and this can then be
printed using. the shell ccmnand $PRF with the -PLOI' option (for bit-mapped
printing). For many Tektronix users, separate hardware is connected to create a
hard copt at the p,lSh of a button. Finally, conventional instant photographic
cameras (e.g., Polaroid) are not uncommon.

'!he user can exit and re-enter SPY "PLOI'" without any loss of plot
variables or parameters. that have already been selected. '!his non-volatile
memory is to be contrasted with that of early versions of the separate
interactive plotting program "TPPLOI''' (inclooing the BPA version throlXJh May of
1987) •
Mother difference from the separate interactive plotting program "TPPLOT"
is that no plot file need be specified. When one uses SPY "PLOT", it is only
the data already stored in the program's plot buffer that can be plotted. Hence
the familiar specification of a disk file of interest is dispensed with (except
for the exceptional case of Section XVI-E) •

'!here are several binary control parameters that can be toggled between the
two possible states using key words. '!he revised status of such variables is
illustrated by a single standard message in which the function is summarized
within parentheses on the right. As an illustration, the first input of
"EXTREMA" wi 11 resul t in the prog ram response:
page l6C-6

Toggle to "ON" (extrema display)

Later, when such output of maxima and minima is turned off by means of a second
such request, the program will acknowledge the change as follows:
- Toggle to "OFF" (extrema display)
AI thol.J3h a 1i ttle abbreviated, this should be clear enol.J3h after a Ii ttle
practice.

All users will specify variables to be plotted, and it is the "NNiE"

subcorrmand that begins such inlXlt. cnce this input begins, it operates in
similar fashion to the separate plotting program "TPPLCYI'", with three loops.
Node voltages must be specified first, then branch voltages, and finally, branch
currents, corresponding to the three major classes of batch-mode EMTP plotting.
cne class is terminated by "END", at which point input changes to the
following class of input, if any remains. M illustration of the three
different prompts for the three different classes of variables follows:
PLOT: NAME
SEND NODE NAME (END, tAST) [ "JDAYA .. ] :
SEND BRAN::H VOLTAGE NAMES (END, lAST) [BeMA , NEl1I'RL ] :
SEND BRAN::B CURRENT NAMES (END, lAST) [ NEl1I'RL, ] :
Within square .brackets are shown existing variables that can be reused, if
desired (a <CR> rather than a nonblank response will do this) • After the last
variable has been specified via such input, "lAST" will end all such input and
return to the "PLOT:" prompt. In case the user wants a list of the available
plot variables, he can use the subcommand "COOICE". 'Ihe following is
illustrative:
PLOT: CHOICE
Type-4 entries (node Voltages) :
GEN TRAN GENXX
Type-8 entries (branch voltages or powers) :
GEN TRAN TRAN 'mAN LCY>J:X:;
Type-9 entries (branch currents or energies) :
TRAN GEN TRAN '!'RAN LCY>J:X:;

There normally will be a need for manual variable sealing only if a single
plot is to mix different types of EMTP variables (e.g., both voltages and
currents) , or variables of the same type but variables that have been drawn from
different sides of a transformer. 'Ihis is because of the wide variation of the
nLInbers that are involved involved. Well, not only can the user scale plot
variables linearly ,via the "EAC'lOR" subcorrmand) , but he also can provide a
constant offset if desired (via the "OFFSET" subcomnand). 'Ihe tw:> prompts
associated with these options appear as follows, and should be self-explanatory:
PLOT: FAC'IDR
SEND VEC'IOR OF MULTIPLIERS, separated by ","
PLOT: OFFSET
SEND VEC'IOR OF OFFSETS, separated by ","
In order to cancel any such usage, and return to the natural, initial seal ing ,
use the "RESCALE" subcorrmand •

plot labeling is optional. If wanted, the "lABEL" subcormnand will result

in prompts for a I-line super title, a I-line vertical axis label, and finally,
a multi-line case title. Unless the computer being used provides a large vector
plotting window, the multi-line case title will generally be dispensed with
(just send "END" in response to the third prompt) • For the record, the three
prompts follow:
page 16C-7

PLaI': lABEL
SEND SUPER-TITLE [Sample I-line su ••• ] :
SEND VERl'ICAL AXIS £.ABEL (Vol tage in kV ••• J :
SEND CASE-TITLE LINE I [ ••• ] :
Much as for the preceding "N/V>1E" carmand, the. beginnings of old definitions
are shown within square brackets. If these are to be reused, they can be
.accepted by a simple <CR>. '!bose. \oJho do want to use the case title are referred
'to the "HELP" carmand for details of display (the "PLAYBACK" subconmand) and
selective modification (some lines can be accepted without change \oJhereas others
are changed) •

vertical axis scaling (and limits) will normally be determined

automatically by the program. But there are times \oJhen a user will want to
override this by manual selection, and the "PEAK" subconmand serves this
purp:>se. A typical subsequent prompt. would be:
VERTICAL MIN & MAX [ -0.800E+e2 0.800E+e2]:
where the existing Y-axis minimum and maximum are shown within square brackets.
The first such usage will switch from automatic scaling to fixed scaling. Send
"0,0" to cancel previous manually-specified limits, and thereby return to the
original automatic scaling. of the vertical axis.

'!be request to actually produce a plot takes the form of a specification of

a time interval of interest, (t-beg, t-end). It is possible to do this in
several ways. First, the "TIMEu subcomnand will result in a prompt for such
an interval. A second. choice is the use of "ALL TIME", which will simply
-~produce a plot using all available data. A third option is "mCNT", which is
designed to plot only the most recently-produced p:>ints. For convenience, the
user can append the required parameters to these comnands, thereby bypassing the
subsequent prompt for them. For example, "TIME 0 Sill" is a request. to produce
a plot over the time range (0, 50), and "FRCNT 20" will produce a plot of
only the most recent 20 time units of data. A fourth alternative is "DRAW",
which just reuses the times of the preceding plot, whatever they may be. 010 ice
of the time [Link] for a plot is under user control via the "TIMElNITS"
subconmand, to which the user will add the appropriate integer code exactly as
is used for batch-mode plotting ( e.g., "4" for mill iseconds, etc.). If no such
change is made, the time units will be installation- dependent, as set within
the Sl'ARTUP file (variables IHS and TIMULT).

In case the resulting plot is seen to involve consecutive, saw-toothed

oscillation, perhaps succeeded by a smooth trajectory down the middle, there may
be a need to change the control over the averaging of successive ordinates. The
"AVERAGE" subcorrmand allows for the change in the number of consecutive ups and
downs before automatic averaging is instituted. Parameter NSMTH is involved,
with the initial value set by the installation-dependent srARTUP file.

UROLLV" and "ROLLC" are used to turn vector and character plots,
respectively, into strip-chart recorders that will "roll" automatically along
with the simulation time. Which command is appropriate will depend upon which
mode of plotting is in use ("MODE" chooses bet\l\leen the two). Normally, the
"ROLLV" or "ROLLe" subconmand will be the last input to plotting before a
return to "SF.{: " prompt (by sending "SE¥" in response to the "PLaI':"
prompt) • Remember that the time scale of the subsequent roll ing plot will be
determined by the last plot before the roll command, so this should be chosen
carefully. As for other attributes of the rolling plot, some can be changed on
the outside using the "TEK" command of SPY. '!he prompt will appear as
follows :
page l6C-8

SP':{: TEK
>< To tamper with the ROLLing vector plot, send choice.
>< OPl'ION (MARK, IE LAY , PLOT, OVERIAP, MENU) :
For a quick [Link][\ary of the options shown, send "MENU". 'Ihe subcarmand "MARK"
will immediately identify the curves by applying the appropriate letters ("a",
"b", etc.). USe "OVERLAP" to modify the overlap bet~en successive pages of
the continuing plot (parameter CNRLAP of the Sl'ARTUP file). . "DELAY"
allows modification of the size of the buffer that controls relative
instantaneity of the rolling plot (parameter l<SI..CWR of the Sl'ARTUP file).
Finally, "PLOT" transfers the user to the "PLOT:" prompt of "PLOT" -
plenty of rope with 'Nhich the user can hang himself (be careful of this one) •
So much for the SP':{ command "'lEK" • Yet another SP':{ cornnand that controls a
rolling plot from the outside is "NOROLL" (to terminate the rolling) •

"SMOOTH" is used to mod ify the tolerance 'IOLRCE that allows for the
discarding of plot points. 'Ihe initial value is installation-dependent, since
it comes from the Sl'ARTUP file.

"EXTREMA" and "lEVEL" are not really a logical part of plotting, since
plots are unaffected by these subconrnands. But because implementation of the
associated functions was much easier inside of "PLOT" than i t ~uld have been
on the outside, these t~ corrmands are subcorrmands of "PLOT" rather than SP':{
corrmands. At issue is the interactive tabulation of minima and maximun (in the
case of "EXTREMA") or level crossings (in the case of "lEVEL") of plot variables
over the time range of interest. Normally there is no such output. Sending
either corrmand will toggle the associated binary switch that controls such
tabular output prior to a plot. M illustration of the "EXTREMA" table
follows:
MPLOT Name-l Name-2 Minimun Maximun T of min
4 GEN -6.92995E~1 7.00000E~l 3.00000E~0
2 TRAN -5.98629E~1 6.47100E~1 3.00000E~0
9 TRAN LOA!G -2. 02090E-0l 2. 49046E-0l 3.00000E~0
Actually, one column is missing on the right due to lack of space --- a colunn
entitled "Tof max" (the time of the maximun) • As for the first column, the
magni tude gives the variable nunber in the output vector, and any minus sign
means a reversal of polarity compared with the output vector. 'Ihe display of
"lEVEL" is transposed compared with this, with unlabeled columns corresponding
to the plot variables. For the same three plot variables just shown, an
illustration follows:
Levels sought 1.S0000E+00 -2.00000E+00 3.14000E-01
1st hit time 1. 54935E+00 7.ll894E-0l -9.99.900E~3

"FOURIER" is the gateway to interactive Fourier series computation. 'Ihe

basic mathematics and assumptions are identical to those of the "FOURIER CtJ"
option of batch-mode EMTP plotting (see Section XIV). EVen the printed results
will be the same: a table of harmonic content in the LUNIT6 window. But instead
of the specification of parameters via a batch-mode plot card, within SP':{
"PLOT" the controls are interactive, via the keyboard. Also, at the end of any
such interactive Fourier computation, the user can interactively plot the
magni tudes of complex harmonics as a function of frequency in the form of a bar
chart. '!his requires vector plotting, ho~ver (see "MODE"). O'le simple
restriction to the use of "FOURIER" is that only one plot variable is allo~
(i.e., the user can only find the harmonic content of a single signal at anyone
time) • '!here are three prompts wi thin the "FOURIER" subcommand, and this
might be shown as minimal docunentation:
Page 16C-9

SEND T-beg, FREQ [ 0.0, 60.] (END, PLOT, LIMIT)

SEND H-beg, &-end (END, <CR» [0 9 J :
SEND V-max «CR>, 0) [0. 0001Zl01Zl00E+00 ] :
'!he fi rst of these seeks to identify the cycle of interest in terms of a
beg inning time and the frequency. 'Ihere may be a sl ight delay following the
anS\to1er to this first prompt, as the Fourier series is computed, and the ·harmonic
table is displayed in the UJNIT6 window. 'Ihe second prompt asks for the
beginning and ending harmonic mmbers for the bar chart. If the user wants no
such plot, he sends "DID" to return to the first prompt. 'lO exit the first
prompt, use "ENO", which will return to the "PLOT:" prompt. 'Ihe third and
final prompt requests vertical-axis scaling information for the bar chart.
Provided the signal frequency is equal to the £X)WE!r frequency, and the first ten
harmonics scaled to fill the vector plot window provide an adequate display,
three carr iage returns «CR» will respond to these three prompts. '!he use of
"SP.i" to exit is not recoamended, since it may leave certain control parameters
in an unnatural state, thereby adul terating the memory of "PLOT" (in case the
user wants subsequent graphs). It is good practice. to exit the Fourier
computation using "END" ••• always.

"SHAFT" is the gateway to interactive analysis of the loss-of-life of a

generator shaft due to an appl ied torque. It is a new plotting function that is
still undergoing experimentation and modification, so is not recarmended for the
general public. But the general operation is easy enough to sunmarize. Shaft
torques can be predicted by the dynamic modeling of rotating machinery (see
Sections VIII and IX), so such a signal is assllt'led to be available for plotting
in the output vector when "SHAF'I" is requested. Just as with "FOURIER",
only one output variable can be analyzed at anyone time, and the shaft analysis
is provided in lieu of a. plot. Normally the user will plot the torque first.
'!hen, having that picture in front of him, he will request a second pass of the
same data, during which loss of life is computed. With all diagnostic turned
off, the result will be a single sunmary message in the UJNIT6 window having
the following form:
End of loss-of-life calculation for generator shaft torque.
TOTLOL = 0.00001Zl1Zl1Zl0E+00
Data used for this fatigue calculation follows. 'Ihe number
of points of the fatigue curve, which cane from disk file
SHAFT.I::1>.T, is NPl'LOL = 3. 'Ihe torque tolerance (for
ignoring relative extrema) is EPSLOL = 1.OO001Zl01Zl0E+01.
'!he fatigue curve itself, (TOR(.l,JE (J), [Link] (J), J=l, NPI'LOL),
follows:
1.OO00IZlE+05 1.1Zl1Zl1Zl1Zl0E+01Zl 1. 0001Zl0E+03 1. 01Zl1Zl00E+0l 1.1Zl1Zl01ZlIZlE+01Zl
1.0001ZlIZlE+02
As suggested by this output, there is an internal connection of a disk file
named [Link].I::1>.T, which must contain data describing the shaft of interest.
'!his use of a fixed name and fixed I/O channel are temporary restrictions only,
as experimentation continues. Cllce production usage begins, this can be
generalized. But for now, the single disk file SHAFT.I::1>.T must apply to the
torque of interest, and it must begin with one miscellaneous data card
[Link] t\t,O parameters:
D13 (columns 1-8) is the torque scal ing factor, wi th
blank or zero is taken as unity:
EPSLOL (columns 9-16) is the torque tolerance below
which excursions are ignored.
Page 16C-10

This first card is to be followed by the torque-cycles characteristic. This

consists of one JX>int (a pair of nl..lilbers) per card, read as 2E16.0 data:
TORQJE (colunns 1-16) is the torque value of the next
point on the loss-of-life characteristic;
CYCIES (colunns 17-32) is the associated nl..lilber of cycles
to crack at this level of oscillation.
Both of these values ~ll always be JX>sitive. This characteristic is to be
defined for monatonically-increasing TORQUE, for which the associated CYCLES
~va1ue should be monatonically decreasing. The characteristic is to be
terminated by a card with TORQUE =
9999.

"X-Y PLOT" toggles the binary control variable that chooses between normal
plotting as a function of time and the plotting of one variable against the
other as time increases. Since the program begins with normal plotting, the
first such use is a s~ tch to X-Y plotting. For those with vector plotting
capability, X-Y plotting should .be JX>ssible. But there is not yet any such
capability for the character mode of plotting. It could be provided upon
demand, but thus far there has been no demand. Imnediately after the switch to
X-Y plotting, there will be a prompt for a horizontal axis title. The following
illustrates this:
PLOT: X-Y PLC1f
--- Toggle to "ON" (X-Y plotting)
SEND X-AXIS IABEL [ ••• )
The only other difference from a conventional plot will occur after the time
span of interest is specified. At this point, the user will be prompted for
limits of both the horizontal and vertical axes before the plot is produced.
The following is illustrative:
PLOT: TIME 0 4
REVISE X-min, X-max [] (OLD) : -100 100
REVISE Y-min, Y-max [] : -100 100

"CURSOR" is the gateway to logic that allows for the experimental

determination of ordinates and slopes of curves using some JX>inting and marking
device. The logic was originally developed for the Tektronix 4014, which had
horizontal and vertical lines ("cross hairs") that could be accurately
posi tioned using tw::> thl..lilbwhee1s. D::> not attempt to use this feature unless it
is known that the capability has been implemented for the computer and vector-
graphic display device of interest.

XVI-C-S. Corrmand Fil es : @K, FILE, CCMMENT, VERIFY, TYPE

Much the way modern computer operating systems allow interactive user
commands to be built into disk files for execution as a group, so S~ allows the
modulari zation of commands. Disk files of spy commands will be called "command
files" (following the IEe VAXNMS name). Such command files can be executed by
preceding an identification of the file by the "@" symbol (again modeled
after VAX/VMS). Alternatively, there is a batch-mode connection to such files,
too (see $S~ of Section XVI-D) •
page 16C-ll

There are· ten special, reserved corrmand files that can be accessed by a
single decUnal digit (variable from 0 through 9). This is quicker than keying a
typical file name. To check on the existence of one or more of these, use the
"FILE" corrmand, of ~ich the following is an exampl e:
SP'i: FILE
File number: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
INCLSP'i? .~T: X X X X X X X
An "X" indicates existance of a given file, whereas a blank indicates
nonexistence. This display also shows the real name of the disk files (the 5th
w::>uld be named INCLSP'i5.~T) •

carmand files can in fact be memory-stored rather than disk-stored, and

this provides for faster input in case of repetive input (looping within the
file, via the subcoomand "GOTO" of the SP'i corrmand "APPEND"). ()le way to
load card images from disk to memory (the WNT10 program card cache) is via
the "COP'i" sub-sub-corrmand of the "CARD" subccmnand of the "SPACE" corrmand
of SP':{. ()1ce in memory, a ccmnand file is executed by appending a slash ("I")
in front of the file identification, and using a WNTl0 card index for the
file identification. For example, whereas "@2" will execute the disk-stored,
second special ccmnand file (sho'N[1 in the next paragraph), "@/6350" is the
corrmand to execute ~tever ccmnand file beg ins in card number 6350 of the EMTP
card cache (LUNT10) • A1 though the input from most disk-stored comnand files
will continue until an end-of-file is encountered (at which point control will
be returned to the keyboard), a soft'llare end-of-file is also possible. This is
simple enough: "EOF" in columns 1-3 of a ccmnand line. SUch usage is
mandatory in the case of memory-stored ccmnand files, of course.

usage of ccmnand files can not be nested (Le., no such command file can
itself contain an "@" corrmand). But other user aids are allowed, including
EMTP comnent cards ("C ") • The SP':{ "CQt1MENr" comnand controls whether or
not such lines are seen in the SP':{ window (the initial choice is for such
echoing) • In-line carments are also allowed, and are to be encouraged (they
make the sequence of comnands much more understandable to a human) • The Apollo
symbol "{" has been reserved for this role --- to mark the place where all
input records will be truncated. For an example of such usage, see
INCISP'[Link].T in the next paragraph. In case the user is so sure of the
correctness of both his program and his comnand file that he does not want to
see conmands as they are executed, he can use the conmand "VERIFY", which
toggles the binary switch that controls such output. Finally, a pounds sign
("@#") can be used for reserved blanks, should such be needed.

When a comnand file ends (usually when input is halted by a hardware end-
of-file, although the software construct "EOF" will accomplish the same
termination), control is returned to the keyboard. But where? What should the
prompt be? Because SP':{ is not smart enough to remember, it. simply displays a
good guess, namely the frequent "SP':{:" prompt. Just remember that this mayor
may not be correct, depending upon where SPY' control was at. the instant data of
the corrmand file was exhausted. '!here may be one erroneous prompt.
Page l6C-12

"TYPE" allows for the inspection of a cOlTllland file before that file is
executed. Actually, any ASCII disk file can so be inspected, inclooing EMTP
data files. But the most corrmon use will be for corcmand files. If there is any
question about the content of a corcmand file, it is better to find out before
execution (i.e., before it may be too late to make a correction) • An
illustration of such usage follows:
SP'l : TYPE 2
Line 1 C Begin lNClSP'i2.I:AT SP'i corcmand file that illustrates
Line 2 C the use of an argll\1ent (albeit trivial) •
Line 3 HELP
Line 4 %%%%%%%% { Argll\1ent is to be the SF':{ corcmand of interest
Line 5 SP'l { Exit the "HELP" corcmand, returning to "SPX':"
Line 6 C Bottom of lNClSP'[Link]\T; EOF comes next
SP'i:
Note the argll\1ent (the a percent .signs on line 4). If the user \\/ants to obtain
information about the "PLOT" command of SP'i, he need only send "@2 HELP".
This is particularly useful if the user has access to just a single terminal of
a time-shared comp.1ter. For a more flexible ~rkstation such as Apollo, the
utility is limited because the operating system provides for multitasking, and
the user could independently view the file via the system editor.

As just illustrated, parameters or argll\1ents of corrmand files are allo\Ved.

Free-format inp.1t is used, with a corrma (" ,It) separator in the case of t~ or
more. 'I'emp;:>rary restrictions inclLrle a length limitation of a bytes for each
argll\1ent, a maximll\1 of 10 argll\1ents, and a line length (for the "@" ccmnand)
of not more thana0 colll\1ns. Within the cc:mnand file, usage of argll\1ents is
marked by strings of eight percent signs ("%"). Of course, there must be a one-
for-one correspondance bet\Veen the argll\1ents of the call (the "@" conmand)
and the "%%%%%%%%" fields within the corrmand file.

XVI-C-6. EMTP Variables: EXAMlNE, ~ES, ROLL, UST, FIND, DEPOSIT

Somewhat analogous to "symtx:>l ic debuggers" of modern computer systems, SP'i

can observe or modify any variable of EMTP tables of the solution overlays. It
is the "EXAMlNE" and "DEPOSIT" commands of SF':{ that allow this. Yet there
are [Link] differences: 1) the simulation can not be halted at an
arbitary line of an arbitrary subroutine, and 2) only variables that are
stored in COMMON blocks (not local variables) are accessible. In order to find
where variables are stored, and what the names are, the corrmands"LIST" and
"FIND" have been provided.

The "EXAMlNE" conmand began with keyboard orientation, but has since been
converted into a structure that is better adapted for use within corrmand files.
For ~rkstations having windows, this is no handicap, since a corrmand file can
be edited at the same time the program is executed. Specific rules of usage for
"EXAMINE" could be figured out from the "HELP" text, of course. But for the
casual user who wants to begin operation rapidly, it is easier just to copy and
modify some established cOlTllland file that already uses the feature. As an
illustration, consider INCLSF':{l.~T, which contains considerable explanatory
annotation. ft'ost of this concerns definition of the variables that are to be
observed ("EXAMllJE" input). At the end, there is the command to display the
variables ("W>.MES"):
Pag.e l6C-13

C Begin INCLSP':{[Link]>.T by building a fixed debu:;Jging table

EXAMINE This SP':{ cOll1lland enters the 'NOrld of "EXAMINE" choices
ClTI' 0 Reset table length to zero (in case of previous. usage)
AID Go into "append mode", adding to bottom of "EXAMINE" table
ISTEP First EMTP COw'IMCN variable to be placed in "EXAMINE" table
'!MAX 2nd EMTP COw'IMCN variable
WNIT4 3rd EMTP COw'IMCN variable •••
T 4th EMTP COw'IMCN variable ••••
N:w\IN 5th EMTP CCMMCN variable ••••
'!WOPI 6th EMTP COw'IMCN variable ••••
END EXit loop over EMTP variable names (back to choices)
TABLE Display all variables of "EXAMINE" table now defined
FCRM Process entries of "EXAMINE" table, so ready for later use
1 6 1st variable is to have its width expanded to 6 colunns
2 8 2nd variable is. to have its width expanded to 8 colunns
37-6 3rd throu:;Jh 6th variables • •• • • expanded to 7 colunns
SHCl'l Oonfinn that these 5 modifications have been made correctly
END Break out of "FffiM" loop, moving back to "EXAMINE" choices
SF.{ Back to "SP':{:" prompt (done. with "EXAMINE" usage)
NAMES Display heading for variables, followed. by current values
C '!hat's all there is; EOF comes next; Exit INCLSP':{[Link]>.T next.

'Since the in-line corrments explain most of this, such description will not be
repeated here. However, this says little about the different SP':{ prompts to
which these lines are responses. '!he result of "@2" should docunent the
prompts better than words:

SF.{: EXAMINE
CHOICE (TABLE, WIDTH, ClTI', NE.W, AID, COP':{, FCRM, SHa-l) Ct1I' 0
COOICE (TABLE, WIDTH, ClTI', NE.W, AID, COP':{, FCRM, SHCl'l) AID
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: ISTEP
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: '!MAX
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: llJNIT4
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: T
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: N:[Link]
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: '!WOPI
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: END
CHOICE (TABLE, W>IDTH, cur, NE.W, AID, COP':{, FCRM, SHCl'l) TABLE
Row Name INTOt1I' LOCOur IMIN !MAX 6 = NlMEX
1 ISTEP 1 45 1 1
2 TMAX 0 20 1 1
3 LUNIT4 1 119 1 1
4 T 0 18 1 1
5 NCHl\IN 1 77 1 1
, 6 '!WOPI 0 19 1 1
CHOICE (TABLE, WIDTH, Ct1I', NE.W, AID, COP':{, FCRM, SHew) : FCRM
Triplets of (index, width, text). NUMEX = 6.
1 5 ISTEP 2 6 [Link] 3 6 LUNIT4 4 6 T 5 6 NCHAIN
6 6 '!WOPI
SEND K-index, K-width (END, SHew; "-KENO use") 1 6
SEND K-index, K-width (END, SHCl'V; "-KENO use") 2 8
SEND K-index, K-width (END, SHCl'V; "-KEND use") 3 7 -6
SEND K-index, K-width (END, SHew; "-KEND use") SHew
Triplets of (index, width, text). NUMEX = 6.
Page
,
16C-14

1 6 ISTEP 2 8 TMAX 3 7 LUNIT4 4 7 T 5 7 NC~IN

6 7 '!WOPI
SEND K-index, K-width (END, SHOll; "-KENO use") : END
COOICE (TABLE, WIDTH, CUT, NEW, AID, COP'f, FCRM, SHCW) SP'f
S P'f : N»1ES
!STEP TMAX LUNIT4 T NC~IN '!WOPI
79 • IE 20 -4 3.95 18 6.2832 {I}
It is only the final t\f.U lines that normally \[Link] be of interest to the user:
output of the ItMES" corrmand. '!bese show that the simulation is on time step
mmber ISTEP = 79, which corresponds to simulation time T = 3.95 seconds.
'!be end-time of the simulation will never be reached (TMAX = 1. E19 is set
internally for all SP'f usage) • '!he overlay mJrlber N:~IN is 18 (within the
time-step loop), variable '!WOPI is hardly a surprise, and llJNIT4 being
negative means that plot data points are being held in memory rather than being
wri tten to I/O uni t mmber llJNIT4. '!be nunber "l II wi thin braces on the right
is a line nunber. Here, only a single line was required, but for more
variables, two or more lines might be required. SP'f provides for this
automaticall y •

After the variable definition of II EXAMINE" , the user can request the
display of variable values at any .later time. 'As already seen, this is done by
the SP'f corrmand "N.l>IMES", which results in a display of the variable headings
as well as the current variable values. If only current variable values are
wanted, a <CR> should be used instead. A final variation of observation is
provided by the SP'f corrmand "ROLL" , which "continuously" (at every SP'f
opportunity) watches the output variables, and only produces an output if one or
more variables has changed since the last check. If one of the variables being
exanined is expected to change every time step, beware (the output can be fast
and voluninous)! To cancel such "ROLL" operation, use "NOROLL" (which also
will cancel any rolling plotting).

Numbers of the "EXAMINE" output are optimally encoded within the

available, user-controlled space. It is input to the "FCRM" subcorrmand that
defines the colunn width. So, if 12 decimal digits were wanted for '!WOPI
instead of the five that are shown, this could have been requested. '!be ability
to tailor output precision to user needs is a powerful feature of the new
"EXAMINE" • Another advantage is the abil i ty to make selective changes (e.g., a
correction) without redefining the whole display.

'!he "LIST" and "FIND" commands are useful in determining what the
available variable names are, and where such data is stored in the computer
memory. Consider first several lines of a representative "UST" display:
SP'X': LIST
Row Symbol WOrd Vector? 'Ascii? Next 687 Symbols
Number Name Address (Yes=l) (Yes=l) : 10,12
10 'It:LOCK 1204348 1 1
11 ABUFF 1187434 0 80
12 Cll 1201032 13 13
The heading (lines 2 and 3) shows that 687 distinct symbols are available to the
user. Had the user sent "ALL" instead of "113,12" in response to the prompt
of the heading, he w:>uld have received all 687 rows instead of just rows 113
throlXjh 12. '!he "WOrd Address" colunn shows the result of memory location
Page l6C-l5

function "lOCINT" awlied to the s}'l11bol in question. '!be next cohmn

distinguishes between vectors and scalars (note that only '!'ClOCK is a vector) •
Finally, there is a distinction between nuneric and CfP\RAC'IER variables. '!be
zero for CII signifies a nuneric variable, whereas the unity of '!'ClOCK is a
~spec ial posi ti ve s}'l11bol ind icating At.PfIANlIt1ERIC (A6) usage. Posi ti ve val ues
-other than the special value of unity are byte lengths (note that ABUFF is for
80-colunn card images). But what if the user does not know where a s:rmbo1 of
interest is located? '!be "FIND" corrmand will locate the row nunber, as shown
by the following example:
Sp'{: FIND
Symbol Word Jlddress Next
index address change s:rmbo1 : ABUFF
11 1187434 1187434 KODEBR
657 1133096 -54338
'Ihe output is produced one row at a time, as the user requests a different
symbol. '!be first request was for ABUFF, note, and the second was for
KODEBR. '!be wild card "*" is honored here much as it is for VAX/VMS directory
conmands. So, if the user wanted to find. all s:rmbo1s that contained the
character string "BUS", he should key "*BUS*".

"DEPOS IT" allows the user to change the contents of any cell of the EMTP
tables. Of course, sane changes to a-tTP variables will be canmon enoll3h that
special code has been written. for that purpose. An example is the SP.{ command
"lOUT", which shows the user the current value of this variable at the same
time it prompts him for a revised value. If such a dedicated canmand exists,
and will perform the desired modification, it is preferable. But often no such
specialized ccmnand exists, in which case " DEfUS IT" must be used.

Just as with "EXAMINE", the memory location or locations of interest are

identified to "DEPOSIT" by [Link] of a s:rmbo1 name and a subscript range
(allowing vector deFOsi ts). '!bere is a lot of power here, so the user should be
careful. '!hose who do not know much about the internal 'AIOrkings of the EMTP
really should use this tool only after having been advised by some EMTP expert.
In any case, an illustration follows:
SP.{: DEPOSIT
SElID EMTP VARIABLE: IPRSUP=9
SEND EMTP VARIABLE: VOLTI(3:5)=0.0
SEND EMTP VARIABLE:
'IWo operations are shown here: fi rst a scalar change, and second a vector change
(zeroing cells 3 throll3h 5 of vector VOLTI) • While most cormnon1y subscripts
will only be applied to a vector, no such program restriction exists. For
example, if the user wants to see what integer is located one 'AIOrd beyond the
scalar IPRSUP, he could examine IPRSUP(2). '!bis 'AIOrks with either "EXAMINE"
or "DEFOSIT" •
page 16C-l6

~I-C-7. Table runping/Restoring: SAVE, RESTORE, SLEEP, WAKE, WHEN

Table dunping is the saving of every state variable of an ongoing EMTP

simulation. The subsequent reloading of the copy of variables into original
locations in memory is called table restoration. SUch table dunping and
restoration can be accomplished interactively using the • SAVE" and "RESTORE"
corrmands of SP't, which allow the user to back up time on the simulation clock
(assuming that simulation time will advance between the time of saving and the
time of restoration) • Any interactive simulation that involves the repetitive
solution of the same basic problem, only with some parameter (e.g., some control
system gain) altered between successive solutions, will normally require such
table dunping and restoring. After table restoration, but before the simulation
is actually restared, the user normally will modify EMTP variables somehow
(e.g., using the "DEPOSIT" command of SP't). After all, the user normally has
no interest in solving the identical same problem twice.

The just-mentioned "SAVE" and • RESTORE" commands of SP't are for use
during a single program execution. The resulting storage of EMTP tables is
volatile, and it will disappear if either execution is terminated, or if the
computer crashes. Should the user ~nt to save tables permanently, then it is
the SP't "SLEEP" command [Link] should use. This is nothing more than an
interactive connection to the batch-mode feature involving integer miscellaneous
data parameter MEMSAV= 1 (see Section II-B). 'Ib restart such a sleeping EMTP
simulation, use the SP't "WAKE" corrmand, which is the interactive equivalent
of the batch-mode "START AGboIN" request (see Section II-A).

The "WHEN" command allows the user to delay table saving or restoring
until some later, user-specified time. The following illustration is typical:
SP't: WHEN
SUPPLY TMAX FOR "SAVE" & ·RESTORE" [0.00000000E+00 ] :
Within brackets will be seen the current time for such delayed table hand I il'¥3 •
If "WHEN" has never been used before, this will be zero as shown (meaning no
delay) •

Since table dunping is performed wi thin installation-dependent module

"KATAIG" of overlay 20, it is possible that there be installation-dependent
details. But for most systems, only the name of the disk file that is used
might be changed. Nominally, this is TPI'[Link] (used for both Apollo and
VAX, for exanple) • In the case of permanent table saving ("SLEEP"), the user
should check whether his computer system allows version numbers for files, as
\[Link] does. If version nunbers are allowed, each permanent dumping should
create a new version, so nothing \t,Quld be lost by t\t,Q or more usages. But for
systems that do not allow version nunbers (e.g., Apollo), the same file name
\t,Quld normally be reused, in which case a second saving of tables \t,Quld erase
the preceding first results. In that case, it normally is the users obligation
to rename the disk file himself, to protect it from being overwritten. If the
user's subsequent ~WAKE" command has nonblank characters to the right of this
corrmand word (e.g., "WAKE FlLEl.D\T"), the nonblank appendage is taken to be the
disk file name for the tables of interest.

Illustrative usage of "SAVE" and "RESTORE" can be found in standard SPY

command file nunber 3, which runs itself. Just send "@3" in the SPY window
at the first opportunity, and sit back and watch the show. Just remember that
it is an illustration, not a practical application: no variables are altered
following table restoration.
Page l6C-l7

The speed of table dumping and restoration is highly dependent upon

computer system. It is IEC VAX for \Which we have found the ideal sol ution (a
single block transfer from memory to memory for the dominant "LABCOM" portion of
tables), so VAX is the model for other systems. Apollo is still slow, due to
random ordering of the CCJ-1MCN blocks of "LABCOM". More \WOrk is needed (we have
ideas, but just have not found the time to do the \WOrk) • For a system that is
painfully slow, the interactive user of "SAVE" and "RESTORE" will want to
minimize EMTP table size by carefully choosing his input List Sizes for ~ARDLM"
(see Section I-G).

XVI-C-a. "DICE" for Statistical Tabulation of ftDnte Carlo Simulation

The "DICE" coomand is meaningful only when the ongoing simulation is a

ftDnte Carlo ("SI'ATISTICS") [Link]. If such a data case were to be executed
wi thout SP'i, the requested [Link] of energizations NENERG. (integer
miscellaneous data parameter of Section II-B) \WOuld be simulated, followed by
statistical tabulation of the variables of interest (as requested by data of
Section XII-B). But when using SPi, the number of energ izations is set to
infinity internally, so it is the user's responsibility to exit the tight loop
when he believes~nswers are smooth enough for his needs. The "DICE" command
allows the user to preview the statistical tabulations that normally would be
delayed until all simulations are complete. Resul ting statistical displays
will, of course, be based only on those energizations that will have been
.£Ompleted at the instant of use, however.

Variable selection and scaling information for the "DICE" display must be
buil t into the data case just. as \WOuld be required for batch-mode usage.. In
case changes to such data are desired during execution, edit the disk file of
data cards in a separate window (assllIling the user has a \WOrkstation such as
Apollo) , and then reload the file using "M'l7\". When doing this, just be
careful not to add or remove any cards prior to the requests for statistical
tabulation, since the card number of the first request for statistical
tabulation must remain unchanged.

The EMTP itself only provides for llJNIT6 character output of the
statistical resul ts. But users of a flex ible workstation such as Apollo should
have the nicer, vector-gra~'lic alternative, thanks to the inspiration and
research of Mr. E. J. Michelis of KEMA (Arnhem, The Netherlands). '!his involves
the simultaneous usage of a separate supporting program "SI'ATPLOT", and "cut
and p:1ste" cap:1bility of the operating system software. For details, refer to
the Apollo Section I-F-I.

The termination of a ftDnte carlo study will depend upon what more the user
wants by way of output. USing SPi, the user will from time to time issue a
"DICE" corrmand, in order to see how smooth resul ts have become. Cl1ce he is
satisfied that distributions are close to assymptotic limits, it only remains to
be decided how execution is to be terminated. The quickest way would be an
operating system interrupt via the keyboard (e.g., VAX,/VMS C'IRL-Y or Apollo
C'IRL-Q). Equally effective and nearly as quick is the "SPin stop command.
But either of these quick ex its will result in a loss of the snall character
plots of switching times that normally conclooe statistical tabulations. There
also would be a loss of the case summary statistics. In order to avoid such a
loss, the SP':{ corrrnand "DEPOSIT" should be used to set variable NENERG equal
Page l6C-18

to the current energization mmber, thereby allowing a natural exit of the Monte
Carlo loop after completion of the current energization. 'Ihis nunber should be
one of the last outputs to tuNIT6 (at the end of the last line that begins:
"Random switching times for energization nunber") • 'Ihe final consideration is
about possible table saving. Rather than ending execution definitively, one can
put the ftbnte Carlo simulation into hibernation by setting MEM~V = 1. at the
same time NENERG is altered, if the input data (integer miscellaneous data
card) did not set this switch at the very start.

XVI-C-9. Mathematics within Comnand Files: "APPEND"

The "APPEND" command provides a gateway to mathematics at the S~ command

level. A1 though much more is possible, and extensions may be more fully
developed in the years ahead, the dominant present use is for counting,
incrementing, comparing, and junping - t h e ingredients required for looping
within command files, and the modification of EMTP data within such a loop.

Even before considering what any of the details mean, it might be

informative to look at a simple example. The standard command file
INCISP'f8.J:lb.T provides an illustration:
APPEND { Issue SP'f command to enter the ~rld of " APPEND" subcommands
MENU { Confirm we are inside "APPEND" by display of possible subcommands
SETPRI=4 LEN=l VAL=0. 0 { Initialize REG (4) ,APPEND reg. nunber 4, to 0
SET PRI=5 VAL=1.0 { Initial ize REG (5), APPEND reg ister nunber 5, to 1
SET PRI=6 VAL=2 { Initialize REG (6) , APPEND register nunber 6, to 2
AID PRI=4 SEX:=5 LEN=1 STN=3478 { Top of loop: REG(4) = REG(4) + REG(5)
KEY PRI=2 MES=SEND REG (2) : { pause for unused keyboard input to REG (2)
LOOK PRI=l LEN=12 - { Display the contents of REG (1) through REG (12)
IF PRI=4 .LT. SEX:=6 {If REG (4) is less than REG (6) , then
roTC [Link]=3478 {loop back four lines (to top of loop to increment again)
END {Exit "APPEND" command, returning to "S~:" prompt
TIME { Confirm that we have "SP'f:" by issuing this simple S~ command
'Ihe reader is encouraged to execute this file ("@8") on his own computer.
'Ihere is a loop that will be traversed twice, and each time execution is hal ted
to allow the user to key a nunber that will be deposi ted in register nunber 2.
USe distinctive nunbets (e.g., "98765"), so that they can be easily recognized
in the subsequent display of reg ister contents.

Ideally, one ~uld prefer FCRTRAN-like capabil ity for the mathematics of
SP'f. Eventually this may come, much as it already has for 'mCS (thinking of
'mCS supplemental variables) • But SP'f "APPEND" usage is just in its infancy,
and something more like assembly language is all that is being provided now.
Numerical values must be stored in one of a fixed nunber (presently 58) of
special registers that are identified by a nunber. Arithmetic is performed only
on one or more of these registers. Finally, conditional execution depends on
the relative size of t~ register contents.

()jce inside the "APPEND" corranand, a list of the available subcorranands can
be generated by sending "MENU". The result is as folloYJS:
page l6C-l9

SPY: APPEND
>: MENU
IF GOTO LNUSED CCMP END LIB lOOK MAP
L~ USE AID SUB MUL DIV COP':{ SET
!NIT KILL CARD KEY TAGS MENU
"While this is an imposing list, it is possible to understand the overall idea
rather quickly by means of a few examples and the summary description of a few
- general classes of operation.

Whereas registers are referred to by nunber, most often only two [Link]
are involved. For example, one can add the. content of one register to another,
or one asks Whether one register is equal to another. For most such usage, the
two registers of interest are referred to as primary and secondary [Link],
respectively. Symlx>ls are used in that the user first defines these two
registers using "tags" such as PRI=3 and SEC=4 (to have register [Link] 3 be
the primary register, and register mmber 4 be the secondary register. Other
tags are possible, as illustrated by the following "APPEND" line that uses
four tags to describe an addition operation:
ADD PRI=34 SEC=44 LEN=3 INC=l
The "ADD" is the "APPEND" comnand for addition, with the four tags giving
the location and extent of this operation. Vectors are involved, and the tag
[Link]=3 says that these are of [Link] three. Just as FCRTRAN DO-loops can skip
cells, so can such vector operations, altho~h such is not bein; done in this
example (the tag INC=l says that consecutive registers are involved. By
definition of the addition comnand, the primary register is to have the
~ secondary register added to it. Hence registers 44, 45, and. 46 are to be added
to registers 34, 35, and 36, respectively. Tags must be separated from the
comnand (if any; here, from the "AID") and from each other by one or more
blanks. '!he comnand· (if any) must come fi rst , and must beg in in col unn one.
'!hereafter, tags can be placed in any order, and are free-format (except that
imbedded blanks wi thin a. tag are not allowed, since blanks terminate one tag and
start another) •

"IF" usage allows for the conditional execution of the following command,
if and only if the content of the primary register is related to the content of
the secondary register by the appropriate relational operator. Identical to
FCRTRAN, six relational operators are recognized:
• LT. • I.E. .NE. • EQ. .GE. .GI'.
and these must appear somewhere to the right of "IF" (a tag is not used for
these operators, note). Just be sure that the relational operator has one or
more blanks before and after it, and no imbedded blanks (between the bounding
periods). As an illustration, consider:
IF PRI=4 • LT. SEC=42
This is equivalent to the FORTRAN condition
IF ( REG (PRI) • LT. REG (SEC) )
Should the cond i tion of the relational operator not be satisf ied , then the
following "APPEND" comnand (line of the corrmand procedure, usually) will be
discarded. unl ike FORTRAN, the following statement Which is to be cond i tionall y
executed must always occupy the following line (it can not be added to the line
carrying the "IF", nor can it extend to several 1 ines via continuation) •
page 16C-20

"GOTO" provides for an unconditional transfer to another line of the

command procedure that is being executed. But unlike the column 1-5 statement
nunber of FCRTRAN, the destination here need only be uniquely identified by an
alphanuneric string of up to six characters. It is tag "lAB" which
identifies the destination of the junp, whereas tag "srn" must appear on the
line to which control is to be transferred. Take two such lines out of
INC LS P'f 5. Ill>.T :
ADD PRI=4 SEC=S STN=3478
GOTO IAB=3478 LEN=l
The first of these is the top of the loop, and is identified by the character
string "3478". The line itself requests the addition of register nunber 5 to
register nunber 4. The second line involves an unconditional transfer of SPY
control to the fi rst line. The tag "LEN=l " sets the vector length to uni ty
for the just-described register addition. By combining integer counting with
"IF" and "GOTO", one has a loop, of course.

"Aro" , "SUB", "MUL", andtlDIV" are the basic arithmetic commands

within "APPEND". Vector operations are involved (the "LEN=" tag defines the
length) , as is possible incrementation of indices by other than unity during
the vector operation (use the tag [Link]=" to control this). The four SLm'tlary
definitions in equivalent FORTRAN are, respectively:
REG (PRHK) = REG(PRI+K) + REG(SEC+K)
REG (PRI+K) = REG(PRI+K) - REG(SEC+K)
REG (PRI+K) = REG(PRI+K) * REG (SEC+K) •
REG (PRI+K) = REG (PRI+K) / REG (SEC+K) •
For scalar operations (the ccmnon case), "K" would be zero in these
defintions, and there would be no loop incrementing it.

"UB" is used to apply a library function to registers beginning with the

primary register. The "LEN=" tag controls the nunber of registers in this
vector application. As for the function, it is selected by a "F'lN=" tag,
with the following choices allowed to the right of the equal sign:
"EXP" the EMTP library function "EXPZ" (exponential);
"SCRT" the EMTP library function "SCRTZ" (square root);
"RAN" the EMTP library function "RANDNM" (random nunber);
"TIME" the current EMTP simulation time T in seconds;
"COO" the EMTP library function "CCSZ" (cosine);
"PI" the circular constant, equal to 3.14159265 •••
"ASS" the EMTP .library function "ASSZ" (absolute value);
"INT" integer truncation (removal of fractional part).
If the reader's favorite function is missing, complain, since it is trivial to
expand the set arbitrarily (only 2 lines of FORTRAN are required for each
function) •

"SET" allows the user to load registers with constants. This is a vector
operation, beginning with the primary register. The value of the constant is
defined using the "VAI.;=" tag. AA illustration follows in the next paragraph.

"COPY" allows the user to transfer the contents of one append reg ister to
another. The transfer is from the primary to the secondary register, and a
vector operation Ltags "LEN=" and "INC=" are appl icab1e) •
Page l6C-2l

"LOOK" provides observation of reg ister contents. '!his is a vector

operation, beg inning with the pr imary reg ister • As an ill ustration, consider
the definition and observation of three registers:
>: SET FRI=12 LEN=3 VAL=3.14
>: tooK
Register contents follow. 1st and last = 12 14
12 0. 314000E+01 0. 314000E+01 0.314000E+0l

"KEY" allows register definition from the keyboard. '!his would normally
only be used in the middle of a conmand file. '!hree tags control the operation.
First, "PRI=" and "LEN=" define the range of contiguous registers (a
vector), and also the nunber of free-format values that are to be read from the
j...eyboard. Finally, "MES=" defines a prompt of up to 80 colunns, without any
imbedded blanks. Wi thout such a prompt, the. EMTP user might not know that he
was supposed to key some nunbers. Or, in the case of two or more requests, he
might not know which of the mul tiple inputs was involved. As a degenerate
special case of "KEY" usage, rather than from the keyboard, the required input
can be read from the following "APPEND" line (of a ccmnand file, normally).
USe "MES=NONE" as special request for this in-line data, which may sometimes
- be simpler or clearer than the use of "SET" for load ing reg isters wi th
nunerical values.

"~ allows the nuneric modification of some data field of a group of

EMTP data cards that currently is stored in the card cache of LUNT10. '!he six
required integer parameters come from tags, as follows:
FRI - [Link] of the reg ister that is to be used. '!he nuner ic
contents of this are to be encoded on a data card.
SEC - LUNT10 nunber of the card at which modifications begin.
BEX; - Beginning colunn nunber of the data field to be defined.
END - Ending colunn number of the data field to be defined.
MOD - Mode of the nuneric encoding: 0=Real, l=Integer.
LEN - The nunber of consecutive cards to be so modified.
INC - To increment FRI in cases of LEN > l, so that
the nunber being dep::>si ted is varied as the card is.
It is in conjunction with the "BEX;IN" carmand of Sp'{ that this "CARD"
subcommand of "APPEND" will normally be used. '!he concept is simple enolJ3h.
Whereas "DEPOSIT" allows the arbitrary tampering with EMTP tables, some
network parameters are buried so as to be inaccessible [Link] the time-step
loop. As a result, it is not possible to change such parameters as a simulation
is advancing. But it is possible to restart such a simulation at time zero with
altered data. '!his can all be done automatically with a command file. Via
ad thmetic of "APPEND" , the next desired value of some network parameter is
computed. '!his val ue then is dep::>si ted on the card image of interest, after
which the solution can be restarted. '!he result is [Link] arbitrary parametric
studies --- an enormous extension over the one such specialized application that
has been hard-coded into EMTP FffiTRAN: Monte carlo stooies) • As an example of
practical interest, consider variation of the inductance of a smoothing reactor
of an hvdc filter.
Page 16C-22

"W>.p" , "I..Q.l>..D" , "!NIT" , "KILL", "COwiP" , and "USE" all are corrmands
that are associated with coomunication bet'oNeen append registers and the outside
~rld ( i .e. , either EMTP tables, or a synchronized parallel process. Yet such
usage is still highly experimental, and it is not simple. Further, it is
dependent upon comp.1ter. As a consequence, it is not reccmnended for anyone
other than program developers at the present time. O'l the other hand, it should
be understood that such capability is seen as one possible way to improve the
present CSP (concurrent sequential processing) capability of the present "~CS"
corrrnand of SPY. Refer to Section XVI-C-12 for additional ccmnent about the idea
of CSP.

XVI-C-H~. "RAMP" and "SERIES" for Continuous Linear variations

Some EMTP variables can be changed instantly from one value to a completely
different value without difficulty. kl example ~uld be the flashover voltage,
or the closing time, of a switch. For such cases, the "DEFOSIT" ccmnand of
SPY is appropriate, since this is the way it operates: instantl y and
discontinuously.

O'l the other hand, there are variables that must only be altered slowly and
snoothly. kl example :might be the inductance of some series R-L-C branch. In
order to avoid abrupt changes, the "AAMP" ccmnand was devised. It allows the
user to specify an arbitrary nunber of beginning and ending times, and beginning
and ending parameter values, for linear variations that will occur each time
step. Storage for such usage is appended to the U.M. working space after any
normal machine storage, so any such intensive user might consider augmenting
List Size 25.

'!be "SERIES" comnand provides special logic to connect with the "AAMP"
command for the variation of series R-L-C branches only. '!bese are ccmnon and
imp::>rtantenoll3h to deserve special logic of their own. Altholl3h discontinuous
variations are also allo'oNed, the snooth, ramped change is the more useful and
common, probably. At any point prior to overlay 12, the user must declare his
intention to tamper with seriesR-L-C branches by issuing the "SERIES"
declaration. '!ben the program will pause in overlay 12 to allow the user to
select those branches that he might later want to vary. '!be help command
provides more details of this high-level command.

Yet before the potential user becomes too excited about the p::>'oNerful idea
of ramping EMTP parameters, it should be p::>inted out that many variables are
effectively inaccessible to him. Altholl3h he can go throll3h the motions of
ramping such variables, the result will not be what it should be because other,
unknown program variables that det=end upon the .ramped variables are not being
modified at the same time. '!he classic case is the time-step size DELTAT,
up::>n which many, many other var iables det=end. Do not try to ramp DELTAT as
shown in a following example, since no good can come of it.

'!hose
¥.ho are not familiar with internal program structure (i.e., EMTP
FCRTRAN) are to be discouraged from using "RAMP" for any but the simplest
case. Even the veteran develot=er may need to think a little, and use some trial
and error. '!here are two supporting SPY corrmands that should be considered at
the same time, namely "SERIES" and "YFCRM". '!he fi rst of these should always
be used if the parameters of a series R-L-C branch are being ram}:ed, since then
page l6C-23

the nodal admittance matrix [Y] will be appropriately modified each time step,
and that matrix will also be retriangularized. Unfortunately, such quality
support for other components is lacking, so if the user knows that [Y] formation
and triangularization are required at each time step, he must request it
himself, manually. .

A final potential peril might be mentioned. Actual ramping of variables is

handled wi thin SUBROl1l'INE AN.l>.LYT of "ANl\LYTICAL SOURCES lSAGE" fame. But
this is an installation-dependent (see. Section I-E-l). Hence any intended user
of "RAMP" should check that ramping logic has not been removed by those
responsible for maintaining the program.

'!here are three basis prompts of "RAMP", and these are nested in the
order shown:
SP'i: RAMP
SEND "T-begin", "T-end" (END, SHQ\1, REWIND) :
SEND "F-begin", "F-end" (END) :
SEND EMTP VARIABIE:
Actually, the final prompt is from "DEPOSIT" to which this "RAMP" logic
junps in order to [Link] and identify the variable. Just as with "DEFOSIT", a
,vector response is acceptable. An example would be "'I'X(3:.5)", which would
resul t in the simultaneous ramping of three consecutive cells of the '1'X
vector. '!he order of nesting is intentional. Variables can be specified one
'after the other as long as both time (the outer loop) and ramp value (the middle
loop) remain applicable. When this ceases to be true, send "END" in response
to that inner-most prompt and there will be a return to the middle prompt for
beginning and ending parameter values. If these "F" values are changed, there
will be an automatic return to the inner level for more variables. on the other
hand, if times must be changed, or if the user is done specifying ramps, sending
"END" in response to the middle prompt will return to the outer prompt for
times. To erase all previous usage., send "REWIND". To produce a slltlnary table
of all ramps, send "SHCl'l", of which the following is an illustration:

Row Name I-beg Length T-begin T-end F-begin F-end

1 TX 3. 1. 0. 15000E+01 0. 25000E+01 0. 50000E+07 0. 70000E+07
2 DELTAT 1. 1. 0.75000E+00 0. 90000E+00 0.50000E-01 0.75000E-01
No RAMPing before 7. 50000000E-01 or after 2.50000000E+00 sec.

It is always prudent to produce this output as the very last operation prior to
returning to the "SP'i:" prompt (by sending either "SP'i" or "END"). '!his is
because it is much easier to spot errors from such a table than it is by
reviewing the voluninous input. Note that whereas the user inputs beginning and
ending subscripts, the table show the beginning index ([Link] for a scalar) and
the length of the vector that is being ramped. '!he final 1 ine reminds the user
of when the first ramp will begin and the last ramp will end.
page l6C-24

XVr-C-ll. Utilities: HFADING, TIME, SIZE, UMIT, HONK, EX::HO, WAIT, $

"HEADING" is the corrmand to produce a new heading for the time-step loop
output in theWNIT6 window. It may be that the user has many output variables,
and can not remember which is which. E.\1en if the window can be ·scrolled
backward to find the normal head ing , it may be more convenient just to
regenerate the heading via this command.

"TIME" is primarily designed to show the current simulation time T (a

variable of "BLKCOM"). But since this hardly requires a whole line, the time-
step size, the end time '!MAX of the study, and the wa11-clock time, have all
been appended. In case the user wants to check the responsiveness of SPi to
keyboard [Link], or to reassure himself that SPi is still alive and well, this
is a good, simple corrmand to use. lID example follows:
SP'i: TIME
T = 0.20.0000E+00 '!MAX = 0.1000E+20 DELTAT = 0.5000E-01 ·91.58.44

"SIZE" and "UMIT" are two simple utilities related to EMTP List Sizes
(see Section I-G). Both result in displays of 27 nunbers, with 10 nunbers per
row. '!he difference is that "SIZE" shows the current actual burden on EMTP
tables, where as "UMIT" shows the table dimensioning. .Just as with case
surcmary statistics, if no figure is available, .a"-99.99" should be displayed.
'!he fo11owing illustration was produced during the solution of a slightly
modified version of BENCHMARK DC-4:
SP'i: SIZE
5 5 6 2 9 0 695 1 10
18 9 -9999 -9999 -9999 0 0 23 o
o o 6 1 -9999 -9999 -9999
SP'i: LIMIT
252 300 500 100 2500 40 1375 1750 75 160
50 50 5000 -9999 -9999 40 4 5 1600 660
100 150 4000 3 400 50 50

"lDNK" is the SP'i corrmand that rings the bell of the computer monitor.
'!here will be a subsequent prompt for the duration or amplitude (precision is
impossible due to the installation-dependent nature) as shown by the following
example:
SP'i: HONK
SEND SEVERITY LEVEL OF ALERI' (l TO 10) : 3
Audible alarm began at ll-May-86 08.54.1 3 bells.
'!he convention is that zero produces no response, while 10 indicates a disaster
(wi th this latter warning continuing indefinitely until suspended by a user-
keyed interrupt). '!he user will normally avoid the use of ten, which was
designed for internally-generated program alarms (e.g., when program storage for
plot data has overflowed). As for the mode of usage of "H(lIJK", it will almost
always be in a corrmand file, for those cases where there is a need or desire to
attract the attention of the operator (who may not be looking at the monitor) •

"EX::HO" is .designed to accunulate keyboard input during testing, so that

once an interactive control sequence is perfected, a command file can be
established wi thout the n~cessi ty of rekeying all of the commands. Also,
"EX::HO" provides a very compact history of what the user has been doing. An
illustration follows:
Page l6C-25

SF.{: EX:HO
SEM> DESIRED OPERATION (BFXiIN, FILE, SHew) : SHew
Compacted listing (between "/") of 21 stored ccmnands follows.
/ TIME / BJW.X:H / AU. / SF.{ / FILES / 'IYPE 1 / @l / HEADING
/ LIST / 255,260 / Sl":{ / SIZE / LIST / l, 5 / SF.{ / LIMIT / BREAK
/ -150 / GO / fCHO / SHew
SEND DESIRED OPERATION (BFXiIN, FILE, SHew) :
In this case, II fCHO" was first requested some 21 SF.{ corrmands earlier, when
SF.{ inp.1t began to accl.J'llulated. At that. first usage., the response to the prompt
was "BFXiIN" to begin the accl.J'llulation. '!his time, the request was to
II SHew" the accl.J'llulation to date. 'Ib terminate such accl.J'llulation, send "FILE".
'!here will be an opportunity to save the accl.J'llulation in a disk file, but this
probably would never be most convenient for the worstation user having "cut and
paste" capability. If no disk file is desired, send just a <CR> in response
to the prompt for a file name.

"$" is the SF.{ comnand to send the inp.1t line into "CIMPGE" for processing
as a conventional $-card of batch-mode usage (see Section I-D). Cl"lly the
dollar sign in coll.l1ln 1 is mandatory, with all other characters of the line left
for "CIMAGE" usage. For an illustration, use "@9" (INCLSl":{9.D\T).

"WAIT" is the corrmand for all aspects of program execution to hibernate

for a fixed per iod of time. -'!he actual delay will be accompl ished wi thin
installation-dependent function "'I'IEIAY" of FUlCTION RFlNLl. '!here will be a
subsequent prompt for the desired delay time in seconds.

XVI-C-l2. "'mCS" Gateway to Concurrent Sequential Processing (CSP)

AlthoU3h still the subject of research and experimentation, the concept of

Concurrent Sequential Processing (CSP) is imp:>rtant enou;h to deserve mention.
'!he SP':l corrmand that provides access to this feature is "'mCS". 'Ihe general
concept of CSP is simple enoU3h: Allow the user to send arbitrary EMTP variables
to 'mCS each time step for processing as supplemental variables. Also allow him
to bring back the 'l1\CS results each time step, and apply those results to
arbitary variables. '!he use of such comp.1tation every time step explains the
adjective "concurrent," and "sequential" comes from the fact that this is an
inherent restriction of 'mCS supplemental variables.

Entry to "'l1\CS" reveals several options, which now will be briefly

sLmTlari zed :
SP'i : 'I1>.C S
SEND CCNTROL (REWIND, SOURCE, SUPPLEMENTAL, PA'ICH, SHCW, END) :
Sending "REWIND" will erase all previous such definitions, so that definitions
will beg in from level zero. I f " SOURCE" is sent, all following input is
assumed to be 'l1\CS source cards, until terminated by an II END" card. If
"SUPPLEMENTAL" is sent, then all following input is assumed to be 'l1\CS
supplemental variable/device data cards, also until an "END" card is
encountered. '!tie subcorrrnand "PA'ICH" [Link] the user to connect any EMTP
variables to his 'l1\CS sources (in order to define the inputs). It also allows
the user to apply supplemental variable results to any EMTP variable. '!he "any"
comes from the use of a memory address of the SPY corrrnands "UST" or "FIND",
page l6D-l

just as "EXAMINE" or "DEPOSlT" are qui te unrestr icted. '!here will be

separate prompts for all such 'l1\CS input and output connections. When all such
connections are complete, "SHCW" can be used to display asurrmary table of all
'l1\CS CSP input/output connections.

'!he future of the "'l1\CS" conmand depends in large measure on future

evolutionary developnent. '!he "'l1\CS· carmand has the advantage that it is
universal, and requires no complter-dependent special features. en the other
hand, the proceSSing is limited by the rules of 'l1\CS supplemental variables,
which are far less general than the FCRTRAN compiler (e.g., 'mCS can not yet
invert a matrix easily, or perform fast FOurier transformation, or complte with
limited precision). As for the next generation of 'mCS (already being
designed) , who can be sure? One alternative to using 'l1\CS for CSP involves a
synchronized, detached process, which provides much more flexibility for those
complters that can handle the operation efficiently. Hence, the soon-to-be-
improved "'l1\CS" is a direct competitor for certain not-yet-fully-developed
features of the "APPEND" conmand. In summary, it is clear that the concept of
(SP will remain valid, and flexibil i ty of the implementation will improve. But
details of such future usage are quite unclear at the present time.

XVI-C-13. Servicing [YJ Changes: YFCRM, IDY, F1>.C'IOR, IDF

Due to practical complications, the production user most likely will have
no explicit, manual use for the four SP':{ conmands of this present section (see
the heading). '!hey are associated with reforming the nodal admittance matrix
[YJ of the time-step loop, and with retriangularizing it. In idealistic theory,
whenever the user modifies the computer storage of some network parameter (e.g.,
by using "DEPOSIT", or CSP of "'l1\CS", or a synchronized parallel process of
"APPEND") , he should have [Y] reformed and also retriangularized. '!hen all
would be well forever after, right? Right in theory, but wrong in practice
today, unfortunately. rue to the dependence of other program variables on the
one being changed by SP':{, such reformation of [YJ can only be successful in
certain cases. It will take a lot of reprogranming before the time step DELTAT
can so be modified. So, only researchers should be using these functions
explicitely for a while.

Yet the production user may well be exploting the log ic of these functions
implicitely, without even knowing it. For example, the "R1>MP" and "SERIES"
coomands connect with the code just mentioned. Hence there is no question about
the possible removal of unused features.

XVI-D. Batch-Mode Execution of SP':{ Corrmands: SSPY and SSP':{END

There is a batch-mode connection to SPY, for those users who can foresee
all details of SPY input in advance, before EMTpexecution beg ins. For example,
a user [Link] have no interest in interactive observation and control.
tbwever, SPi might provide some special control that might be needed for the
data case of interest. A second example of usefulness is for the documentation
of SPi capabil i ty using standard test cases. '!he user is referred to BENClf1ARK
DC-56 and DC~57 as illustrations.
page 160-2

$SP'i (keyed in colunns 1-4 of an EMTP data card) is the key that allows
SP'i conmands to mixed with normal EMTP data. 'Ibis request must precede a block
of SP'i comnands, and $SP'iEND must follow that block to mark the end. As an
illustration of such usage, consider data cards extracted from BDK:lfWU< OC-56:
14GEN 70. .1591549 -1. .
$SP'i { Request of "CIMAGE" ($-card) to begin batch-mode SP'i connection
IEBU::; { 1st SP'i COllllland is trivial, unnecessary request to change OIAGIOSTIC
o { Do-nothing level change, since without this, the IPRSP'i level would be 0
==< < Etc. (some 57 lines have been omitted to save space) > >=
BREAK { It is the latter: no more "@" cards read until "BREAK" occurs
TIME {Trivial SP'i COIIIIIand just to demonstrate that we. have "SP'i:" prompt
STOP { This SP'i comnand will terminate execution of the data case
$SP'iEND { Bound on in-line SP'i COIllTlandS; back to batch-mode program data
B~ card ending all electric sources
It is seen that a large block of SP'i COIlIIlands has been inserted after the last
EMTP source card, before the blank card end ing such sources.

AlthoU3h $SP'i looks like a $-card that might be processed by "CIMAGE"

(see Section 1-0 for details), this is not the case. Just as with $ INC WOE ,
$SP'i is processed at the very beg inning of execution, where the following
happens. All card images following the initiation of $SP'i, and preceding the
termination of $SP'iEND, are in fact removed from the EMTP data card cache of
WNT10, and are placed in a separate disk file named " SP'[Link]\'I'" • 'Ibis is
a reserved name, so the user should [Link] it and all related files (as the
serialization digit preceding the dot varies from 1 throU3h 9). '!he $SP'i card
is converted to the following:
$OPEN, LNIT=17 STATl5=OLD FlLE=SP'iFILEl. Il\T
which will, of course, be. serviced by "CIMAGE". '!his really is just a special
connection for what otherwise would be a SP'i COIIIIIand file ("@" usage) wi thout
argunents. Note the use of fixed. I/O channel nunber 17 - different from. any
other program usage (to avoid conflicts) provided the user avoids this nunber in
his srARTUP file declarations for WNIT1, etc.

'!he location of $SP'i usage within an EMTP data case is critical, since
this defines the point at which the program begins reading. the SP'i cOIllTlands.
'!his does not imply that all SP'i conmands will be read at this point, however.
'!he user generally will delay the input of other commands by some device such as
a "BREAK" comnand followed by "WAIT" and "BREAK" (to inhibit further input until
the break point has been reached). A good illustration is provided by
BENCHMARK DC-56.

It is possible to have multiple $SP'i and $SP'iEND declarations, if this

proves to be necessary. '!he present program limit is nine, due to the single
serial ization digit that follows "SP'iFILE" as explained above. '!here is no need
to be sure that one group of SP'i commands is exhausted before the next group is
requested, since the program handles the transition by brute force. Prior to
the connecting of a new "SPY'PILE" in "CIMAGE", any old one is disconnected -
-- whether or not all records have been read from the old file. An
illustration of multiple $SP'i declarations can be found in BENCHMARK DC-57.
page 16E-1

XVI-E. Use of SPi "PLOT" Instead of Separate Program "TPLOT"

A .special, new, degenerate application of "SPi" has nothing to do with

simulation. Rather, it concerns the plotting of preceding simulations - a
function that previously required a separate, special plotting program ""TPPLOT".
A separate program no longer is needed, and in many cases, is no longer desired.
While the reader could learn this new usage of the EMTP on his own fran the
detailed information of Section XVI-C, it is imp:>rtant enolgh to deserve special
mention in this special section.

usage of the EMTPjust as a plotting program has the advantage of speedier

response for the plotting of large data files. Rather than input data p:>ints of
curves from disk as they are needed (which is the "TPPLOT" approach), the EMTP
loads the contents of a " • PIA" plot file into memory at the very start. '!hen
[Link] is either fran memory or via paging (virtual memory management), which is
an order of magnitooe faster than FCRTRAN READ operations fran an I/O unit. For
big data cases, this can save a lot of time, .so is worth consider ing • '!he
really serious user may even want to create a special EMTP version in which the
simulation code has been cut out in order to remove the burden of all that extra
code and table space, thereby allowing the expansion of plotting .space without
further burdening the computer.

Plotting via the EMTP is simple enolgh. Begin EMTP execution, and select
SPi, of course. '!hen key the following SPi corrmands, in order:
1) DATA - Request of EMTP for specification of disk file
2) disk file - contains a single $OPEN card (see below)
3) STEP- - - Instruct SPi to halt the simulation everywhere
4) GO - - Beg in EMTPexecution. Repeat this 4 times!
5) SPACE - SPi corrmand allowing management of memory
6) PLOT - It is plot data storage that we will manage
7) READ - - We want to read plot data p:>ints into memory
8) ALL - - Time range of data to be loaded (the whole file)
9) 1 Handle every N-th time step, where N = 1 here
10) 0 No offset for memory storage of the plot data
11) SPY After plot p:>ints are all loaded, exit to "SPY:"

For an ill ustration of such execution that connects and loads the plot data
of the file named OC3T054.PL4 (created by .solving BENCIJt1ARK DC-3), send the
SPi corrmand "@0" as the first SPi [Link]. 'Ihat is, inspect and test the
cornnand file INCISPi0 •.Ob.T, the last entry of the "FILES" display. '!he disk
file that is named in step 2 contains just a single card: a $OPEN statement
that connects the desired ".PL4" disk file of raw plot data p:>ints to unit
WNIT4. 'Ille mul tiple "GO" cornnands merely serve to step past unwanted SPY
break points to where EMTP data normally should be read, in UTPF overlay nunber
1. The new-case head ing should appear , and after it, the interpreted copy of
the $OPEN card that is contained within the disk file of step 2. 'Ille
remaining SPY cornnands serve to load this data from disk into the EMTP's virtual
manory, and finally exit from the "SPACE" command (step 11). When execution
of the cOlmland file ends, there will be a "SPi:" prompt to which the user can
respond with "PLOT" as the plotting begins. Hereafter, details are no
different than have already been docunented in Section XVI-C-4.
page l6E-2

Under \!bat circunstances might a user not want to do his plotting this way,
using the EMTP? First, there is little or no speed incentive for small ".PL4"
files. Since starting the big EMTP is slower than starting the small, separate
program "TPPLOT", and since the EMTP requires special steps as just listed, use
of the EMTP in such cases is probably more trouble than it is worth. . Second,
there may be a space problem for trulyenonnous ".PL4" files. Remember that
"TPPLOT" has no limit on the size of the ".PIA" file, whereas the EMTP does
(since all such points must be loaded into memory) • If a properly dimensioned
version of the EMTP is not Lmmediately available, the resizing of tables
represents an added complication. 'ttlird, the EMTP has no built-in hard copy
connection using calCCXnp plots the way "TPPLOT" does (the "COP':{" conmand).
Whereas some computers may have hardware and an operating system that
automatically provide hard copies of the screen, this is not tD'liversal, and
usage of it may not be as convenient. In conclusion, SP':{ "PLOT" is a powerful
new tool, but it is not a general replacement for other froms of EMTP plotting
(inclooing "TPPLOT") for all users in all cases.

$OPEN provides an al ternate, newer, even more flexible fonn of such SP':{
plotting. Rather than burying the file-connection command in a separate file
(see "disk file" of step 2 above) , this command can be sent directly through the
SP':{ window. 'ttle $-comnand of SP':{ allows this more tD'lified treatment.
Otherwise, not much is changed. For an illustration, see lNCLSP':{9.O\T (try
"@9") •
XVII. JHARTI setup - 1

XVII. JMARTI setup

XVII-A. Purpose and applications

The supporting routine JMARTI setup can generate only one model (travelling
wave model) and is only valid for conventional overhead lines.

In the travelling wave model, both the characteristic impedance Zc as well as

the propagation function Al are obtained using modal characteristics, calculated
over a user defined frequency range, under the assumption of a constant transformation
matrix (phase-mode transformation).

Then, both Zi and Ai undergo a high-order rational function approximaiton. In

the time domain, this fitting is represented by a sum of real exponentials, thus
allowing usage of recursive convolution methods in the time domain. The order of
fitting no longer equals two (like it was the case in Semlyen setup). Typical
figures for the order are 5 .•• 10.

The generated LUNIT7 punched card output immediately is in the proper input
format to be used for a subsequent transient run, as explained in section IV-D-3.

In order to allow the program to calculate the necessary modal characteristics

for the conductor system under consideration, the JMARTI code imbeds the LINE
CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS code. For an example using LINE CONSTANTS, we refer
to benchmark DCNEW3, 2ndsubcase of DCNEW4, DCNEW5 and DCNEW6. For CABLE CONSTANTS,
results are considered to be unreliable because the assumption of constant
transformation matrix allover the frequency range does not hold for cables.

XVII-B. Input structure

Input data cards for .JMARTI setup involve an imbedded LINE CONSTANTS data case
following the initial JMARTI declarations.

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. JWffiTI SKnW ~Q~T
3. Optional special request cards
BRANCH
4. A LINE CONSTANTS data case
5. JWffiTI miscellaneous fitter specifications
or DEFAULT card
6. BLANK card terminating JMARTI
7. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
10. BLANK CARD terminating all cases

Let us discuss the above card formats in more detail now. Whenever appropriate,
distinction between the transposed and untransposed case will be clarified.

1 BEGIN liE!d Z2llIll CliSB.

XVII. JMARTI 8etup - 2

2 JMARTI setup request

JMARTI SETUP POTO

EB.O

Parameters :

PDTO: controls possible reduction in the order of approximating rational

functions.
Default value = 1.
~:
This parameter PDTO is not actual.l.y used by the :ritter itsel.:r. but is merel.y passed
along from the declaration card just shown to any branch cards that later are to
be punched. Indeed,. in the punched cards of section IV-D-3, parameter PDTO can
be found back on cols. 33-38 and has the following meaning:
- The fitter always returns to LUNIT7 the full order of the approximating rational
functions for Zc and Ai. The higher the order, the more poles and zeroes are
being calculated.
- During the transient run, the approximative functions are taken into account
using recursive convolution and transfer from modal domain to phase domain.
These calculations are very timeconsuming.
- In order to speed up calculations during the transient run, the user can specify
a threshold for the order reduction (i.e. reduce the number of poles and zeroes
approximating Zc and Ai). Usage is illustrated in DCNEW4 (first subcase versus
second subcase).
3 Optional BRANCH request

.~ I~E E
I~ ~~ tE Ic ~ fE l~ IC :~ ~! Ie f~ tn* IC I'. ~~f~ t! I~ IE r!l«
BRANCH SENJ(1) REC( 1) SEND(2) REC(2) SEND(3) REC(3) SE/ll(4) REC(4) SEl'l:(5) REC(5) SEND(6) REC(6)

A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

The node names should be placed in pairs (sending end, receiving end), phase
per phase.
When specified, these node names will also appear in the LUNIT7 punched output.
When omitted, the user himself will have to enter the desired node names in
the punched output file.

4 ~ follows .a LI1iE.. CONSTANTS [Link].a ~

As explained in section XXI, such input sequence typically looks as follows:
XVII. JHARTI setup - 3

a. LINE CONSTANTS request card

b. unit specification card (ENGLISH or METRIC)
c. conductor cards
d. BLANK card ending conductor cards
e. 2 or 3 frequency cards
f. BLANK card ending frequency cards
g. BLANK card ending LINE CONSTANTS imbedded usage

Note regarding frequency cards:

- Depending on whether or not the line is assumed to be transposed {MODAL-spe-
cification; cols. 69-70} or not. the number of frequency cards differs.

- For the untransposed case (MODAL. 1):

- Three frequency cards are needed
- The first card (transient frequency card) contains the single frequency FREQTRAN
at which the transformation matrix should be calculated. Recall that in effect.
such matrix is frequency dependent. Hence. FREQTRAN somehow should be related
with thtefrequency of the transient phenomena one wants to observe. For
overhead lines. 5000 Hz is a typical value. Finally. also remark that via
parameter TR. the user can specify details on the transformation matrix to be
used. It is even possible to use a user-defined rather than a calculated
transformation matrix.
- The second card (steady state frequency card) bears the single frequency FREQSS
at which the steady state values should be calculated. Typically. this is the
frequency value of the type-14 sources.
- The third card (frequency looping card) specifies the frequency range to loop
over for the calculation of the modal parameters Zc and Al. Typically. the
starting frequency FREQINIT is set to 0.01 Hz. the number of decades DEC equals
8 or 9 and one must take PNT = 10 points per decade.
Via parameter TR. the user can specify details on the transformation matrix
to be used.
= O. blank or -2 (this option is recommended): the eigenvectors (= columns of
the complex trans ormation matrix) will be rotated closer to the real axis.
so that their imaginary part is assumed to become negligible.
=-9: the full complex transformation matrix will be used.
=-1: the user needs to define his own current transformation matrix. immediately
following the first frequency card.
- RHO. FCAR. DIST. ISEG and MODAL should be equal on all 3 cards. Hence. the
card format looks as follows:

R
FREOTRAN F o 1 ?
1---
C I
H FREQSS 1 ?
A S 1---
o FREOINIT R T DE(PN 1 iTF
1--1-
FB.2 Fl0.2 A10 FB.3 13 13 12 12
'--'--
XVII. 3MARTI aetup - •

- For the transposed case (MODAL -0):

- Only two frequency cards needed. Recall that no transient frequency card is
needed. because the transformation matrix in case of a transposed case is known
a priori. Furthermore. in this special case. the matrix is constant trhought
the frequency range.
- The first card (steady state card) bears the single frequency FREQSS at which
the steady state values should be calculated. Typically. this is the frequency
value of the type-14 sources.
- The second card (frequency looping card) specifies the frequency range to loop
over for the calculation of the modal parameters Zc and Ato Typically. the
starting frequency FREQINIT is set to 0.01 Hz. the number of decades DEC equals
8 or 9 and one must take PNT = 10 points per decade.
- RHO. FCAR. DIST. ISEG and MODAL should be equal on all 2 cards. Hence. the
card format looks as follows:

t!l~I~
I!
tll!l(" fE i( I ~ ~'l~ tll!l( ~. Ie l"
R FREQSS F 0 1 0
H C I ~
o FREQINIT A S iDE( PN 0
R T
t-
FB.2 F10.2 Al0 FB.3 13 13 12
~

5 JMARTI miscellaneous fitter soecitikations

There are two possible ways to specify miscellaneous fitter specifications:
- using the DEFAULT option. In this case. only one card is needed.
- explicite definition of fitter parameters. In this case. three cards are needed.
Let us discuss both possibilities in more detail now.
S.a Using the DEFAULT option

This is the only card one needs. Such request is generally recommended for
the non-experienced user.
S.b Explicite definition of fitter parameters
This option should be selected by the experienced user. who wants to have
control over some (or all) of the individual fitting parameters.
Three different types of parameters can be specified on the different fitter
cards:
- miscellaneous data
- parameters for Zc fitting
- parameters for At fitting
Let us discuss these three card formats in more detail now.
XVII. JHARTI setup - 5

S.b.l Miscellaneous data

IJ~ :1~ 1~1 fHH~~~

i E
I~ i4~ If Ie l~ tf tc IE Ie ~E l'fE I'I~I~
~* r!t ~
"
IDEBUG IPUNCH KOUTPR Gt.10DE
18 18 18 18

Parameters :

IDEBUG provides control of diagnostic printout during the JMarti fitting. A

value of unity is recommended for normal production usage, since this will
result in a display of the number of poles and zeroes, and the accuracy of
the fit, for each iteration of the corners-allocation loop. Higher values
(2, 3 or 4) result in more output.

IPUNCH controls whether or not branch cards will be punched after the fitting.
Value zero will produce JMarti branch cards. whereas unity will omit such
output.

KOUTPR controls visibility of JMarti input data card interpretation of the

subsequent transient simulation. Recognized. distinct values of KOUTPR are
zero, unity, and two. The user-keyed value is placed on resultant branch
cards (if any) as variable SKIP. For further details. refer to this variable
in Section IV-D-3. Rule 1.

GMODE is the conductor conductance in the modal domain (the same as phase to
ground conductance in the phase domain. if such conductance is assumed to
be the same for all phases, and if there is no mutual conductance between
phases. The default value is 3.E-B mhos/km (equivalent to [Link]-B mhos/mile).
The units of length should agree with those used within LINE CONSTANTS data.

S.b.2 Parameters for Zc fitting

NEXt.1IS EPSTOL NORMAX IECODE IFWTA IFPLOT IFDAT INELIM

18 E8.0 18 18 18 18 18 18

NEXMIS will normally be left blank. A nonzero value indicates the mode number
for which a different fitting card is to be supplied. A blank means that
all modes of characteristic impedance Zc will use the same fitting card.
A nonzero value gives the mode of interest. For example. NEXMIS = 3 means
that the characteristic impedance of the third mode is to be fitted using
parameters specified on a new fitting card.

EPSTOL is the error tolerance for fitting, in percent. The fitting error is
evaluated in a least-squares sense, and averaged over a range that excludes
initial or final asymptotic regions (by 0.001%). The default value for
blank or zero is 0.30%.
XVII. JHARTI aetup - 6

NORMAX is the maximum order (maximum number of poles) to be allowed for the
rational function approximation. Blank or zero is given a default value
of 30.

IECODE is a switch to determine the mode of fitting. If zero, EPSTOL is used

to determine the order of the approximating function. If unity, then EPSTOL
has no effect on the order. Instead, the best fit with an order less than
or equal to NORMA}{ is determined. Of course, when using the EPSTOL criterion.
it is possible that a fit within this tolerance is not possible. The. user
will be infored of such difficulty of fitting only if IDEBUG is positive.
Increasing the value of NORMA}{ might in such cases allow the EPSTOL criterion
to be met. but not always. Higher order does not guarantee greater accuracy.
since the logic is imperfect. So use engineering judgement (moderation in
all things).

IFWTA controls tabular printout of the fitting. The value unity will result
in the display of a table comparing the magnitude and phase angle of the
rational approximation with the therortical values as a function of frequency
(rows of the table). Zero will suppress such output.

IFPLOT controls graphical printout. The value unity will produce a character
(line printer) plot comparing the magnitude of the rational approximation
with the theoretical value as a function of frequency. Zero will suppress
such output.
IFDAT controls possible tabular printout of transmission circuit parameters
as a function of frequency. The value unity will result in such a display.
whereas zero will suppress such output.
INELIM is a switch controlling logiC of the fitting process. The value zero
means that order increases of the approximating function will end if and
when the error becomes five times larger than the previous minimum. On the
other hand. unity allows increases of order regardless of whether there is
improvement. This is within limits represented by parameters NORMA}{ or
EPSTOL. of course.
5.b.3 Parameters of Al fitting

NEXMIS EPSTOL NORMAX IECODE IFWTA IFPLOT IFDAT INEUM AMINAl

18 E8.0 18 18 18 18 18 18 E8.0

Parameters:

All variables except the first and the last have meanings that are identical
to those for Zc (see preceding section XVII-B-2). The first. NEXMIS. differs in
that a minus sign is required to indicate a mode of Al rather than a mode of Zc.
The final parameter is a new one in cols. 65-72 named AMINAl. Data points with
magnitude less than AMINAl will be discarded during the fitting process. Blank
or zero is given a default value of 1/20.
6 BLANK ~ terminating JMARTI
XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFlT - 1

XVIII NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

XVIII-l Purpose and Applications

The importance of more precisely simulating transmission transients is increasing due to the economical
incentive of using more accurate modeling in design as well as protection studies. For switching, fault,
and fault-clearing surge studies, the most important and also the most difficult part. of the simulation is
the inclusion of the frequency dependence of a transmission line. The frequency dependence of modal
propagation has been investigated widely, and some models have been already installed in ATP-EMTP
like SEMLYEN SETUP (see Chapter XXII) and JMARTI SETUP (see Chapter XVII). But all of
them only take into account the frequency dependence of the modal propagation and ignore the
frequency dependence of the modal-transformation matrices (hereafter those models are referred to
modal-domain line models), although the frequency dependence of the matrices can be significant in
many cases. Especially, it is demonstrated when modeling vertically-arranged overhead lines and
underground cables.

The modal-domain line models successfully reproduce the modal-domain frequency dependence.
Nevertheless, when the frequency dependence of the modal-transformation matrices is heavy, the use
of constant modal-transformation matrices causes an error and numerical instability. The inclusion of
the frequency-dependent modal-transformation matrices can be achieved by either applying convolution
to the matrices [1,2] or direct phase-domain approaches [3-6]. The practical implementation of the
transformation-matrix convolution could be complicated in terms of eigenvalue tracing by mode
crossing (at some frequency, two or more eigenvalues become equal) [7]. On the other hand, the direct
phase-domain approaches avoid the modal transformation itself, but the application of recursive
convolution to a phase-domain response is difficult because Qfthe time-domain discontinuities of the
response due to modal traveling-time differences.

The NODA SETUP is one of the direct phase-domain approaches developed by Dr. Taku Noda [5].
The line model uses an ARMA (AutoRegressive Moving-Average) model for the time-domain
realization of the phase-domain convolution, and. the phase-domain discontinuous response is
accurately reproduced by the ARMA model, taking advantage of the one-sample-delay nature of the Z-
operator. In ref. [5], further improvements to the line model are made. The improvement to
convolution allows each ARMA model to use its own time step interfacing with the external circuit by
a linear interpolation technique, and thus the model is designated as IARMA (interpolated ARMA)
model. A steady-state initialization method is also developed in the reference in order to make possible
such as fault calculations. The matrix stability conditions presented in ref. [5] is not installed in the
present version of the NODA SETUP, because it requires more investigation for the accurate evaluation
of eigenvalues.

The usage of the NODA SETUP andARMAFIT is illustrated using an example: 500-kV double-circuit
overhead line of which the conductors are vertically arranged.
2 - xvm. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

XVIII-2 Computational Steps

XVIII-2.A Overview

The modeling of a transmission line (overhead lines and cables) using the NODA SE TUP requires the
following two steps :

1. Calculation of the frequency-dependent line constants of the transmission line, hereafter referred
to frequency data, using CABLE PARAMETERS or LINE CONSTANTS supporting routine
in ATP. The result is written in •AFT file (ARMAFITfile). Note that CABLE CONSTANTS
cannot be llsed to make the . AFT file.

2. Fitting the frequency data in the •AFT file with IARMA models for the time-domain realization of
the frequency dependence using an independent program ARMAFIT. The result is written in . PCH
file (punch-out file).

F or fitting the frequency data a foreign line constants calculation program might be used, because
ARMAFIT is independent ofATP. This is important, because a certain transmission-line configuration,
which is not supported neither by CABLE PARAMETERS nor LINE CONSTANTS, can be fitted using
ARMAFIT, if the frequency data is prepared in .AFT file by a user-made line-constants calculation
program. The format of .AFT file is illustrated in Section XVllI.2.C. The computational steps to
create model data for EMTP simulation is given schematically in Fig. 1.

Transmission line data

(conductor configuration and data.

earth resiStivity. etc.)

NODASETUP liNE CONSTANTS AGF2PG

in conversion program
ATP-EMI'P CABLE PARAMETERS

Frequency data obtained Row plot data Plot data to visualize

for
ARMAFlT offitting results jitting results
(*.AFF input data file) (*AGF metafile) (*.PG plot file)

ARMAFIT Model data for PGVGA

separate fitting program ATP simulation screen plotting program
(*.PCH outputfile)

Fig. 1 Computation steps to obtain line model data

xvrn. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 3

In order to use the line model for a time-domain simulation, the name of • PCH file is specified in a
branch card in anATP data case unlike other line models. (Using other line models such as SEMLYEN
SETUP, JMARTI SETUP. PCH file has to be pasted as branch cards using $INCLUDE) Because the
. PCH file remains outside of the data case, the • PCH file can be used by other data cases by simply
specifying the file name.

XVIII-2.B Example: 500-kV double-circuit overhead line

A 500-kV double-circuit overhead line of which the conductors are vertically arranged is used to
illustrate the usage of the NODA SETUP. The conductor configuration is shown in Fig. 2.

24m
• •
i
gw
•• 16m
~
• gw AS 160

80m i a(I)O
17m
o c' (4)
TACSR810
• •o
65m i b(2)O
18m
b' (5) x6
sep. = 0.5 m
55m i 0
c (3)
0
a' (6)
45m
line length = 100 km
I
Fig. 2 500-kV double-circuit overhead line

The line length is 100 km. Each of the ground wires is a single conductor AS 160, and each of the
phase wires is a bundle of 6 conductors TACSR 810 of which the separation is 0.5 m. Fig. 2 shows the
frequency dependence of the first-column elements of the voltage modal-transformation matrix A.
Because the frequency dependence of Au and A41 elements is heavy (about 16%), the proposed phase-
domain model is advantageous than model-domain models. Switching-surge and fault-surge
calculations of the line are carried out in Chapter III.

0.8
-------------------

-8
.a 0.6

'I 0.4 - :Au =A41

----- :A21 =ASI
0.2
A31 =A61 = 1.0 (normalization)
4
10 las
frequency fHz1

Fig. 3 First colunm elements of voltage transformation matrix A

4- xvm. NODA SETUP and [Link]

XVIII-2.C Calculation of Frequency Data using NODA SETUP

The following data caseVERT500 . DAT calculates the frequency data of the example line and writes
them into file VERT500 . AFT, using ATP. It uses the CABLE PARAMETERS supporting routine.

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE {VERT500 .DAT}

C 500-kVVertica1l.y-Arranged Doubl.e-Circuit Overhead Line
NODA SETUP {Request Taku Noda's AlWAmodel. fitter. No printout of F-scan
[Link] {outputfil.e name ([Link] requests use of default [Link])
HOMOGENEOUS LINE {keyword for homogeneous [Link]
-1. { time step (if neqative, optimum time step request)
4 16 { min and max orders for [Link] deformation matrix [H]
1 12 { min and max orders for char . admittance matrix [YO]
3. .5 3. 3 {error constants: EpsA, EpsM1, .EpsM2 in percent, and Nitr
1, 4 2 , 5 3 , 6 {pair (s) of phases having symmetry
NODA SETUP END {Bound of fitter data; begin CABLE PARAMETERS data
CABLE CONSTANTS
CABLE PARAMETERS
102
3 1 6 1
19.20E-03 4.S00E-03 10.50E-03 1.000E-03 0.5
3.941E-08 1. 0 5.526E-08 1.0
3 1 6 1
19.20E-03 4.S00E-03 10.50E-03 1.000E-03 0.5
3.941E-08 1.0 5.526E-08 1.0
65.0 65.0 -8.1 55.0 55.0 -8.6
45.0 45.0 -9.0 65.0 65.0 8.0
55.0 55.0 8.5 45.0 45.0 9.1
80.0 SO.O -12.0 80.0 SO.O 12.0
300. 1. 6 10 100.E3 { 1st f. card for f. scan
300. 100.E6 100.E3 { 2nd f. card to determine v
BLANK ending frequency cards
BLANK ending CABLE CONSTANTS
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

First comes keyword BEGIN NEW DATA CASE as usual, and keyword NODA SE TUP follows. The
next line specifies the name of .AFT file to which the frequency data is written, and VERT500 .AFT
is specified in the present example. Then, keyword HOMOGENEOUS LINE follows. Lines enclosed
by keywords HOMOGENEOUS LINE and NODA SE TUP END are simply copied into the . AFT file,
and thus the description ofthose lines are provided in the next section IT-D. Those lines contain fitting
parameters. Next comes a standard CABLE PARAMETERS case describing the line configuration,
which has two frequency cards. The first frequency card determines the range of frequency
logarithmically scanned for the subsequent frequency-domain fitting using ARMAFIT. In the example,
from 1 Hz to 1 MHz with 10 points per a decade. The second frequency card specifies a frequency at
which the velocity of all the natural modes of propagation are determined. Usually, a value which is
larger by 2 decades than the highest frequency of the frequency scan may be recommended. Finally
comes BEGIN NEW DATA CASE and BLANK to terminate the ATP execution.

XVIII-2.D Format of .AFT File

The contents ofVERT500 . AFT is shown below. The lines between keywords HOMOGENEOUS
LINE and NODA SETUP END in the .DAT file are copied into the first part of the .AFT file as
mentioned in the previous section. First comes HOMOGENEOUS LINE to declare that the present
transmission line is simulated by a homogeneous line model. Other line models, for example CORONA
XVIll. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 5

LINE to include corona branches, would be added in the future, but only the homogeneous line model
is supported for now. (If keyword KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT is specified here, the frequency
characteristic of an admittance element can be modeled as an ARMA model or as a Laplace s-function
model to be used as a KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT element in a branch card in an ATP data case,
although the format of the following parameters and data is different.) From the second to sixth lines
are fitting parameters which can be placed in a free format separated with space' 'or comma ' , ' .
There is no distinction between space and comma, and contiguous space or comma are treated as one
separator. The second line specifies a time step, with which all the ARMA models in the line model, is
synthesized. If a negative value is specified, then an appropriate time step is automatically determined
by ARMAFIT as in the following equation:

where
f min : lowest frequency,
fmax : highest frequency,
N : number of total frequency points of the frequency scan,

and fmin = 1 Hz, fmax = 1 MHz, N = 60 in the present example. The meaning of the above equation is
that the time step is determined by the sampling theorem using a frequency which is [Link] higher than
the highest frequency. The third line specifies the minimum and maximum orders

HOMOGENEOUS LINE { keyword for homogeneous 1ine } {[Link]}

-1. { time step (if negative, optimum time step request)
4 16 { min and ma.x orders for vo1tage defo:r:mation matrix [H]
1 12 { min and max. orders for char. [Link] matrix [YO]
3. .5 3. 3 {error constants: EpsA, EpsMl., EpsM2 in percent, and Nitr
1 , 4 2 ,5 3 , 6 {pair (s) of phases having: symmetry
C End data for fitter. Begin F-scan output for fitter.
6 {NG above DO 890 of NEWCBL
1.0000000000000000E+05 { DIST above DO 890 of NEWCBL
C Begin data for next frequency of F-scan.
1.0000000000000000E+00 { FREQ upon exit from PRCON
C Next comes CZCHAR for JNC = 6
2. 7505413428897600E-03 1.3040338648627105E-03 -6.27 .. . { End row 1
-6. 2732454175991445E-04 -4.5844275604238537E-04 2.. 84 .. . { End row 2
-3.4375081828096494E-04 -1.74951545975112.46E-04 -6.36 .. . { End row 3
-4.4191865545622496E-04 -2. 8875558905680845E-04 -3.22 .. . { End row 4
-3.2289519658382660E-04 -1.5063229124422632E-04 -3.43 .. . { End row 5
-2.4924579548355629E-04 -9.1772867549232853E-05 -3.13 .. . { End row 6
C Next comes AI for JNC = 6
1.8706602470669148E-01 -1.6551217820610420E-02 1.32 .. . { End row 1
-1.8521331040189884E-01 -1.5676859558619773E-03 2.83 .. . { End row 2
-1.8448452080598216E-01 -9.5802838509942805E-03 3.68 .. . { End row 3
2.5938719090784324E-01 2. 6690124032475397E-04 2.0S .. . { End row 4·
-2.5243637063269153E-01 -5. 9240387975043832E-04 2.71 .. . { End row 5
1. 6353884250116110E-01 -2.9971521498993311E-03 2.18 .. . { End row 6
C Next comes A for JNC = 6
9. 9974575555930156E-01 -2.2548264703990531E-02 -6.53 .. . { End row 1
1.0071696294614401E+OO 4.1512638575577708E-02 9.99 .. . { End row 2
9. 9529692666225078E-01 -6. 9997145897572350E.-03 -5.92 .. . { End. row 3
9. 9978328925059745E-01 -2.2417404173010257E-02 6.48 .. . { End row 4
1.0073118492346393E+OO 4.1868107726403994E-02 -9.91 .. . { End row 5
9. 9518500528747500E-Ol -7.575738654192376SE-03 5.88 .. . { End row 6
C Next comes vector ON.
5.8082744026295919E-09 3.8819226136679583E-08 1.41 ...
6 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

C Begin data for next frequency of F-scan.

1.2589254117941673E+00 { FBEQ upon exit fromPReON
C Next comes CZCHAll for mc = 6
3.0003593783218497E-03 1.2337713228203128E-03 -7.24 ... { End row 1

9. 9999812059239424E-01 1. 9387655039394408E-03 9.99 ... { End row 6

C Next comes vector aN.
2.3212834559188691E-04 2.1219062265983042E-02 1.17 ...
2NDFBEQUENCY CARD. SAME OUTPUT FOR IT FOLLOWS:
C Begin data for next frequency of F-scan.
9.9999999999999985E+07 { FBEQ upon exit fromPReON
C Next comes CZCHAll for mc = 6
4.0609713760903386E-03 1.3950144817973304E-07 -1.09 ... { End row 1

C Next comes vector aN .

2.5916994586333468E-03 2.0984680796854747E+00 1.47 ...

N min , NJ1W{ of the ARMA models which represent the elements of the propagation-function matrix
H(jm). The fourth line specifies those of the characteristic-admittance matrix YO(jm). From author's
experience, Nmin = 4 and NUJI.X = 16 is recommended for the propagation-function matrix. Because each
element of the characteristic-admittance matrix has smoother frequency characteristics than the
propagation-function matrix, Nmm = 1 and NJ1W{ = 12 is recommended for the characteristic-admittance
matrix. If desired fitting accuracy cannot be obtained, the maximum order may be increased for
achieving better fitting by user. In the fifth line, the values of the error tolerances are specified:
EA , EMl , EM2 , and Nitr . The description ofthe error tolerances is

EA : error tolerance in the stage ofleast-square fitting in %

EM} : error tolerance for detecting modal traveling timings in %
EM2 : error tolerance for detecting dominant modes in each phase response in %
Nitr : maximum iteration steps in the .stage of nonlinear improvement

The author recommends EA = 3 %, EMl = 0.5%, EM2 = 3 %, and ~tr= 3 as in the example. ARMAFIT
uses a linearized least-squares method presented in refs. [10] and [13] by the author for the fitting, and
the stage of an nonlinear improvement using the Newton-Raphson iteration is added purposing better
fitting. It improves the solution obtained by the least-squares method by the Newton-Raphson
iteration. It is important that if the iteration does not converge, ~tr should be set to O. For theoretical
background, consult [10, 11, 13, 14]. The sixth line provides the symmetry information of line
configuration for ARMAFIT. In the example line, phases 1 and 4, phases 2 and 5, and phases 3 and 6
are respectively symmetrical with a reference .line which is usually the tower supporting the wires. If
there is no symmetry in the line configuration, keyword NO SYMME TRY is placed here. The symmetry
information is used to reduce the number offitting. Because the proposed line model is a phase-domain
mode~ the computation time of the frequency-dependence synthesis is in proportional to n2 (n : number
of phase wires). Thus, the reduction of the .fitting time is important, although the linearized least-
squares fitting method is quite fast. The theory is presented in refs. [14,15].

The next two lines specifies the number of phase wires n and the line length l. In the present example,
the number of phase wires is n= 6 (the ground wires are eliminated using a matrix manipulation
assuming zero voltage), and the line length is I = 100 km.
XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 7

In the next part, N sets of line constants are provided, where N is the total number of frequencies of the
frequency scan :

(1) frequency
(2) characteristic-admittance matrix Yo
(3) voltage transformation matrix A
(4) inverse of voltage transformation matrix A-I
(5) propagation constant 1

Frequency is specified on the first line in each set. Then, characteristic-admittance matrix Yo, voltage
transformation matrix A, and inverse of voltage transformation matrix A-I are provided in the following
matrix form :

Xl 1real XUimag XIZreal XIZimag Xlnreal Xlnimag

XZlreal XZ1imag XZZreal XZZimag XZnreal XZnimag

Xnlreal Xnlimag XnZreal XnZimag Xnnreal Xnnimag

where n is the number of phase wires, and xi] is the (i, j) element of matrix X. At last, propagation
constant 1 is provided in the following vector form :

Ylreal Ylimag 1Zreal Ynreal Ynimag

where Y i is the i-th element of vector 1. After N sets of the above line constants, keyword 2ND
FREQUENCY CARD. SAME OUTPUT FOR IT FOLLOWS: comes to declare that the same set
of line constants follows in order to calculate the velocity of the natural modes of propagation.

XVIII-2.E. Fitting using ARMAFIT

In order to perform fitting of the frequency data prepared in •AFT file as described in the previous
section, an independent program ARMAFIT is used. ARMAFIT can also be used to fit the given
frequency characteristic of an admittance element with an ARMA model or with a Laplace s-function
model, and the identified model can be used as a KIZ ILCAY F-DEPENDENT element in a branch
card in an ATP data case. The instructions for this use are provided in Section XVIII-4.

ARMAFIT is an MS-DOS application requiring Salford DBOS DOS extender. To execute ARMAFIT,
type as follows on a command line :
C:>ARMAFIT F [Link]

F_NAME. AFT is the file name containing the frequency data. If the file name is TEMP. AGF, it can. be
omitted as:
C:>ARMAFIT
8 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

Files TEMP. PCH and TEMP. AGF are created by the execution. TEMP. PCH contains the fitting
results, i.e. the coefficients ofthe identified ARMA models of the transmission line, and it is used in
subsequent transient calculations. TEMP .AGF (ARMAFIT graph file) contains information used by a
small plotting program PGVGA to show the graphs of the fitting results. Iffile name TEMP. PCH is not
desired, -p option can be used to specify the name as :

In the present example,

C:>ARMAFIT [Link] -[Link]

may be appropriate. VERTSOO • PCB is created instead of TEMP. PCB. If one needs more information
during the fitting, shelhe can modify the debugging level of the execution using -d option. Bigger
value provides more information, and the default is zero. To execute the present example with
debugging level 2, type :
C:>ARMAFIT [Link] -[Link] -d2

To modify file name TEMP. AGF, -g option can be used in the same manner as the -p option.
In order to visualize the fitting results using PGVGA, • AGF file has to be converted into . PG file that
can be read by PGVGA. For this purpose, a small converter AGF2PG is used. PGVGA and AGF2PG are
compiled by Borland C/C++ compiler and thus does not require the Salford DBDS DOS extender. To
convert F _ NAME .AGF to F_NAME • PG, type as :
C:>AGF2PG F [Link] > F [Link]

And the results is shown by typing as :

C: >PGVGA F NAME

If TEMP .AGF is always used, batch file G is prepared to simplify the above two steps into one step.
Thus, typing as
C:>G

is equivalent to the following two steps :

C : >AGF2PG TEMP .AGF > TEMP. PG
c: >PGVGA TEMP

Other command line options : - t to request transformation matrices output, - S to request step
responses are available. -? option invokes the following help screen :
usage : ARMAFIT [fil.e name] [options]

[fil.e name] : specifies input fil.e name, when [Link] is not desired

[options] -d<n> requests n-th [Link]. debugging mode: 0-3

-p<fil.e name> specifies the name of punch-out fil.e,
when 'TEMP. PCB' is not desired
-g<fil.e name> specifies the name of ARMAFIT graph fil.e,
when '[Link]' is not desired
-t requests transformation-matrices output
([Link] for the NODA SETUP [Link] model.)
-s~ requests step response of each ARMA
model. ( 0 < t < ·TmaJt: end time )
-1 : prints this help
xvm. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 9

XVIII-2.F Format of .PCH File

File VERTS 0 0 • PCH created from VERTS00 • AFT using ARMAFIT is shown below. If one prepares
another fitting program, this section would help, or otherwise can be skipped. First comes the copy of
the first line of .AFT file, In the present example, it is HOMOGENEOUS LINE, The second line
specifies the number of phase wires, Then, the identified ARMA coefficients of the elements of the
propagation-function matrix HUro) and of the characteristic-admittance matrix YoUro) follow, First
comes HUro), and then YoUro) comes next, and the element order is (1,1), .. " (l,n), (2,1), .. " (2,n),
(3,1), .. " (3,n), .. " (n,n) for HUro), and (1,1), (1,2), .. " (l,n), (2,2), .. " (2,n), (3,3), .. " (3,n), .. " (n,n)
for YoUro) considering the symmetry of conductor configuration,

C PUNCH-OUT FILE GENERATED BY ARMAFIT (NODA SETUP)

C
HOMOGENEOUS LINE
6 -1.00000E+00 {number of phase, simn1ation ~ step
C
C *** VOLTAGE DEFORMATION MATRIX [H]
C
C PHASE (1,1)
3.98666E-07 3.33987E-04 {~step, min±mum traveling ~
7 (optimum order
o -8.274653485712564E-03 1.000000000000000E+00
1 7.528397386656641E-01 -2.126568253243974E+OO
2 -1. 471106180157977E+00 1.269977709398951E+OO
3 7.265012311708612E-01 -1. 776595974102977E-01
33 -1.506730710077502E-03 6.575121912178510E-02
34 6.260578742981290E-03 -4. 618327398313728E-02
35 -7.158843715498257E-03 2. 456714003946597E-02
36 2.453349564 716568E.-03 -9. 876428406518090E-03
C
C PHASE (1,2)
3. 98666E-07 3.33987E-04 ~ step, min±mum traveling ~
10 {optimum order
o -6.588584708260395E-03 1.000000000000000E+OO
1 -1. 410102902038087E-Ol -2.720298100309956E+OO
2 4.646819531667218E-01 2.197916234916072E+00
3 -4.803439361481772E-01 -1.725880139040105E-Ol
4 1. 632808854959012E-01 -4.631597800007359E-Ol
33 -L035543060647U8E-03 3.082201104298183E-01
34 -8. 949953167804173E-04 -2. 637356723307325E-01
35 8.036226679380594E-03 1.883725745328373E-01
36 -9.540977334950568E-03 -9.011106966677926E-02
37 3.415261430664519E-03 1.538371652484067E-02
38 -4. 374625661718312E-14 [Link]+OO
C

C PHASE (6,6)
SAME AS 3, 3
C
C *** CHARACTERISTIC ADMITTANCE MATRIX [YO]
C
C PHASE (1,1)
3.98666E-07 {~step
1 {optimum order
o 4.010927595142271E-03 1.000000000000000E+OO
1 -4.010921931909.790E-03 -9. 999965918383292E-01
C
C PHASE (1,2)
10 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

3.98666E-07 {time step

2 {optimum order
o -1.114929831742434E-03 1.000000000000000E+OO
1 1. 114929516191998E-03 -9. 999977182440943E-01
2 3.155504362580691E-10 [Link]+OO

C PHASE (6,6)
SAME AS 3, 3
C
C

F or each element of H(jro), the first line contains the time step and the fastest traveling time of the
element. The fastest traveling time is the traveling time of the fastest mode included in the element, and
the value is evaluated at frequency specified by the second frequency card. The second line is the
determined model order, and then the identified ARMA coefficients follow. For the illustration of the
format of the ARMA coefficients, the following ARMA model is used:

The order of the above ARMA model is 3, and the coefficients are specified as follows:

index numerator coefficients denominator

coefficients

0 ao 1.0

1 at bt

10 alO b2

11 au b3

If the frequency characteristics of element Hif is identical to element Hid considering the symmetry of
conductor configuration, SAME AS i, j replaces the above format to avoid duplication.

For each element of Yo(jro), the first line contains the time step. The second line is the determined
model order, and then the identified ARMA coefficients follow in the same manner. If the frequency
characteristics of element YOy is identical to element YOId' SAME AS i, j also replaces the format to
avoid duplication.

The above parameters are placed in a free format separated with space I I or comma ','. There is no
distinction between space and comma, and contiguous space or comma are treated as one separator.
XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 11

XVIII-3 Time-domain Simulation

XVIII-3.A Branch Cards

In order to include a transmission-line model created by the Noda Setup in an ATP data case, the name
of . PCH file containing the ARMA coefficients of the line model is specified in a branch card as shown
below.

C --------------------------------------------------------------------
C 1 2 345 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C BUS1 BUS 2 Noda Line FILE NAME SHOW X
C --------------------------------------------------------------------
-lSND1 RCV1 Noda [Link] F_NAME.PCH SHOW 1 { 1 of n }
-2SND2 RCV2 { 2 of n }

-nSNDn RCVn n of n }

An n-phase transmission line requires n branch cards in the same manner as other line models. The first
column of the branch cards is occupied by minus sign -, and the second column by phase index (1, 2,
... , n). Specify the two terminal nodes ofthe branch by 6-character alphanumeric node names using
columns 3 to 8 and 9 to 14. The order of the two pairs of phases follows the rule of CABLE
PARAMETERS or LINE CONSTANTS supporting routine. Only on the first line, keyword Noda
Line is required in columns 25 to 33, and . PCH file is specified using columns 35 to 46. Keyword
SHOW is also required only on the first line in columns 47 to 50, and a digit in column 52 controls the
amount of information printed out on screen. Bigger digit shows more information of the line model.

XVIII-3.B Switching-Surge Calculation

Using the present example, a switching-surge calculation is carried out to illustrate the use of the Noda
Setup in an ATP data case. Fig. 4 shows the circuit diagram of the calculation, and corresponding ATP
data case SWITCH. OAT is listed below. Fig. 5 shows the calculated results at the receiving end.

3000 100km

~~----~
Ip.u, I
~ ... 0

~
o
0

~
0

Fig. 4 Switching-surge calculation

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE {[Link]}

l.E-6 l.E-3
100 1 1
GENlA SNDlA 300.
12 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

-lSND1ARCVl.A Noda line VERT500. PCH SHOW 1 { 1 of 6 }

- 2SND1B RCV1B { 2 of 6 }
- 3SND1C RCV1C { 3 of 6 }
-4SND2C RCV2C { 4 of 6 }
-5SND2B RCV2B { 5 of 6 }
-6SND2A RCV2A { 6 of 6 }
BLANK card ending branch cards
BLANK card ending switch cards
11GEN1A 1.
BLANK card ending source cards
RCVl.A RCV1B RCV1C
RCV2A RCV2B RCV2C
BLANK card ending output variab1e requests
BLANK card ending p10ts
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

I I I

phase lA
1 -

phase IB

o
V I I
phase

I
Ie
-

200 400 600 800 1000

time,nricroseconds

0.4

0.2
=
ci.
& Ot-----i-,
S
~
-0.2 phase 2A

-0.4

200 400 600 800 1000

time, nricroseconds

Fig. 5 Calculated results of switching-surge

XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 13

XVIII-3.C Fault-Surge Calculation

A fault calculation of the example line is also carried out to illustrate the use of the Noda Setup. Fig. 6
shows the circuit diagram of the. calculation, and corresponding ATP data case FAULT. DAT is listed
below. During a normal operation, phase a of the first circuit is short-circuited to the ground through
one ohm resistance representing a tower-footing resistance. Fig. 7 shows the calculated results at the
receiving end.

50mH 100 Irm

~--~
~ ~
1 p.u.

Fig. 6 Fault-surge calculation

Contents of data case FAULT. DAT:

o 10 20 30 40
time, milliseconds

Fig. 7 Calculated results of fault-surge

XVIII-4 Use of ARMAFIT to create KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT model data

XVIII-4.A Purpose and Applications

KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT model (see Section IV-H) enables to represent a high-order rational
admittance function specified by the coefficients of numerator and denominator polynomials given
either in form of Laplace transform or Z-transform. This linear branch is used to model low-order
network equivalents and any other power system component, when frequency data can be fitted using
any suitable approximation program like ARMAFIT. Besides fitting frequency data of transmission lines
as described above, ARMAFIT can also be used to fit the given frequency characteristic of an
admittance element. The result of ARMAFIT is the model data for KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT,
XVllI. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 15

which can be directly included in a data case using $INCLUDE request. ARMAFIT detennines gainK
and (a, b or A,B)-coefficients for the desired fonn of the admittance function shown below:

• in Laplace domain:

• in z domain:
Ao + A 1z -1 + ... + Amz-m
Y(Z) = K--------------------
Bo 1
+ B 1z- + ... + B z-n
n

XVIII-4.B Structure of Input Data for ARMAFIT

The input data are entered line-wise using a text editor in free format. Numbers or letters in a line are
separated by blank' '. Any line starting with' c. 'is interpreted as comment line and a curly bracket
, { 'in any data line designates the position a comment starts, i.e. data or text in that line following' { ,
will be discarded by ARMAFIT. Input data will be entered line-wise in the given order, when comment
lines in between are omitted. Input data depending on the type of rational function are as follow:

- Rational function in s-domain:

1. line KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT {keyword for the KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT use

2. line S {'Sf: Laplace s-rational model
3. line Yo y- {Yo y_ are admittance values at f = 0 Hz and infinity
4. line min max {min~ and max~ orders of the rational function

5. line e i~ {e [Link] error in %, i~ max. number of iterations

6. line Nf K {Nf nUmber of frequency points, K pre-defined gain
7. line frequency 1 (Hz) magnitude 1 (mho) phase angle 1 (degree)
8. line frequency 2 (Hz) magni tude 2 (mho) phase angle 2 (degree)

Additional explanations for input data:

2. line : Lower case letter's' is also accepted.

3. line : Admittance values (mho) can be fixed at f = 0 Hz and infinity during fitting procedure. If a
negative number is given, the value at that frequency (0 or OQ) will be determined by
ARMAFIT. None, one or both values can be zero.
4. line : Fitting is performed by increasing order of the model from min. order to max. order
specified to find a best fit. The best fit is determined based on a logic of Standard Deviation
(SD) and Akaike's Information Criterion (AlC).
16 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

5. line: ARMAFIT stops increasing the order of the model, when SD becomes smaller than the
permitted error E. ARMAFIT uses linearized least-squares (LS) method proposed in Refs.
[5] and [8]. Although the linearized LS usually gives good accuracy, further improvement
of the fitting accuracy may be achieved using the Newton-Raphson iteration. It is
recommended for the first time to set the maximum number of iterations to zero to omit the
iteration, because the Newton-Raphson method sometimes does not converge. After getting
a good modeL it is worth to try to improve the fitting accuracy using NR-iterations.
6. line : N f lines of frequency data should be available following this line. Pre-defined gain K is a
factor, which is multiplied with the magnitude data.

- Rational JUnction in z-domain:

1. ~ine KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT {keyword for the KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT use

2. ~ine Z {'Z': Z-rationa~ (~) mode~
3. ~ine ~t {~t time step to be used a~so in the time-domain simu~ation

4. line min max {min~ and maximum orders of the rationa~ function

5. ~ine e i""", (e permi tted error in %, l...ax max. number of iterations

6. ~ine NfK (Nf number of frequency points, K pre-defined gain
7. ~ine frequencY1 (Hz) magnitude 1 (mho) phase ang~el (degree)
B. ~ine frequency 2 (Hz) magnitude 2 (mho) phase [Link]~e 2 (degree)

For the z-domain fitting only the data in 2. and 3. lines are different from s-domain fitting. Lower case
letter I z I is also accepted. Appropriate time step At should be selected, which does not violate the
sampling theorem. The same time step must be used in the subsequent EMTP simulation.

XVIII-4.C Example

The frequency characteristic of the input admittance of a series RLC circuit is used to illustrate fitting
by ARMAFIT to create a KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT model. The frequency response of the series
RLC circuit was measured experimentally by Dr. Taku Noda and is shown in Fig. 8. The approximate
values of elements are:

R = 100 n, L = 50 mH with a loss of65 n, C = 4800 pF.

XVlII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 17

0.01

0.001
'0
.s:::
-E
>-
-0.0001

1E-05
100

-
CD
~ 50
0>
CD

-
"C
CD
0> 0
c:
co
CD
I/)
co -50
..c:
0..

-100
1E3 1E4 1E5
Frequency (Hz)

Fig. 8 Measured frequency characteristic of the input admittance

of an series RLC circuit

The contents of input data files SAMPLE1S • AFT and. SAMPLE1Z • AFT for ARMAFIT fitting are
shown below.

- s-domain fitting:

C SAMPLE1S . AFT
C
C To execute A:RMAFIT, type as : "A:RMAFIT [Link]". ARMAFIT reads
C this file, and generates files "[Link]" and "[Link]". The fonner .is
C the punch-out [Link] used as KIZILCAY F;..DEPENDENT branch cards, and the
C latter .is a file containing: the [Link]: result. The [Link]: result may
C be [Link]:med by [Link]: "G", .iIlVok:[Link]: a batch. file "[Link]" to convert
C "TEMI?AGF" to "[Link]" and to execute a small plotting: proqram. "PGVGA"
C (VGA [Link] of ProGrapher 3.4). "[Link]".is the .input to "PGVGA".
C To replot the [Link]: results, [Link]: "[Link]" .is preferred to bypass the
C [Link]. To fulfil this procedure., the [Link]: files are [Link]:
C A:[Link] [Link]
C [Link] data converter (from *.AGF to *.PG)
18 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

e [Link] vector-p10tting program

e [Link] batch fi1e for p10tting
e [Link] batch fi1e for rep10ttinq
e If a user wishes to specify another name for "[Link]" and for
e "[Link]", then invoke AlU!IAFIT in the he1p mode as : "AlU!IAFIT -1". In
e this case, the data conversion shoul.d be done by the user, by typing
C "AGF2PG [Link] > 111 .PG", where "111" is the spec:i.f:[Link] f:i.1e name.
e
e Al.1 rights are reserved by Prof. Dr. Mustafa Kizi1cay, FH Osnabrueck,
e Germany, on beha1f of Dr. Taku Noda, SimuTrek, 2-14-10-316 Kosobe-cho,
e Takatsuki-shi, Osaka-pref. 569-11, Japan.
e
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT {keyword for the KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT use
e f:[Link] parameters -------------------------------------------------------
8 { '8': Lap1ace s-rationa1 mode1, 'Z': z-rational (ARMA) model
O. O. { admittance values at freq = 0 and inf:[Link]
1 6 {min and max orders
3. S {permi tted error in %, and max number of iterarion
21 1. { number of frequenc:[Link], and pre-defined gain
e
e A line starts with 'e' is considered as a comment line, and a curly
e bracket '{' des:[Link] the po:[Link] a comment starts.
e
e
e -- frequency response -------------------------------------------------------
1.0E3 3.0BE-S 88.2 {frequency [Hz], magnitude [mho], phase ang1e [deq]
2.0E3 6.32E-5 87.8
3.0E3 1.00E-4 8B.6
S.OE3 1.97E-4 90.0
7.0E3 4.11E-4 84.2
8.0E3 6.34E-4 84.1
8.SE3 8.6SE-4 78.6
9.0E3 1.28E-3 73.9
9.SE3 2.41E-3 61.9
10.0E3 4.98E-3 -2.S2
10.SE3 2.69E-3 -57.1
11.0E3 1.63E-3 -70.9
12.0E3 8.34E-4 -79.9
13.0E3 5.85E-4 -84.2
lS.0E3 3.67E-4 -85.9
17.0E3 2.74E-4 -88.1
20.0E3 2.01E-4 -87.1
30.0E3 1. 12E-4 -89.1
50.0E3 S.99E-S -89.6
70.0E3 3.91E-5 -89.2
100.0E3 2.35E-S -89.6
e -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

- z-domain fitting:

e [Link]
e
e To execute AlU!IAFIT, type as : "AlU!IAFIT SAMPLEIZ .AFT". AlU!IAFIT reads
e this file, and generates files "[Link]" and "[Link]". '!'he former is
e the punch-out fi1e used as KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT branch cards, and the
e latter is a file containing the fitting resul.t. The fitting resul.t may
e be confirmed by typing "G", invoking a batch file "[Link]" to convert
e "[Link]" to "[Link]" and to execute a small p10tting program "PGVGA"
e (VGA version of ProGrapher 3.4). "[Link]" is the input to "PGVGA".
e To rep10t the .fitting [Link], us:[Link] "[Link]" is preferred to bypass the
e conversion. To [Link] this procedure, the following files are required:
e ARMAFIT . EXE fitter
e [Link] data converter (from * .AGF to * .PG)
C [Link] vector-plotting program
XVIll. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 19

C [Link] batch fi1e for p10tting

C [Link] batch fi1e for rep10tting
C If a user wishes to specify another name for "[Link]" and. for
C "[Link]", then invoke ARMlU'IT in the he1p mode as : "ARMlU'IT -?". In
C this case, the data conversion shou1d be done by the user, by typing
C "AGF2PG ??? .AGF > ??? .PG", where "???" is the specified fi1e name.
C
C A11 rights are reserved by Prof. Dr. Mustafa Kizi1cay, FH Osnabrueck,
C Ge:r:many, on beha.l.f of Dr.. Taku Noda, SimuTrek, 2-14-10-316 Kosobe-cho I
C Takatsuki.-shi, Osaka-pref. 569-11, Japan.
C C
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT {keyword for the KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT use
C -- fitting parameters -------------------------------------------------------
Z { 'S': Lap1ace s-rationa1 mode1, 'Z': z-rationa1 (ARMA) mode1
1.E-6 {t±me step
1 6 {min and max orders
3. 5 {pez:m:[Link] error in %, and max number of iterarion
21 1.. { number of. frequencies, and pre-defined gain
C
C A 1ine starts with 'C' is considered as a comment 1ine, and. a cur1y
C bracket' {' designates the point a comment starts.
C
C
C -- frequency response -------------------------------------------------------
1. OE3 3. 08E-5 88.2 {frequency [Hz], magnitude [mho], phase ang1e [deq]
2.0E3 6.32E-5 81.8
3.0E3 1.00E-4 88.6
5.0E3 1.91E-4 90.0
7.0E3 4.11E-4 84.2
8.0E3 6.34E-4 84.1
8.5E3 8.65E-4 78.6
9.0E3 1.28E-3 73.9
9.5E3 2. 41E-3 61..9
10.0E3 4.98E-3 -2.52
10.5E3 2.69E-3 -57.1
11.0E3 1. 63E-3 -70.9
12.0E3 8.34E-4 -79.9
13.0E3 5.85E-4 -84.2
15.0E3 3.67E-4 -85.9
17.0E3 2.74E-4 -88.1
20.0E3 2.01E-4 -87.1
30.0E3 1.12E-4 -89.1
50.0E3 5.99E-5 -89.6
70.0E3 3.91E-5 -89.2
100.0E3 2.35E-5 -89.6
C -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

The contents oftheARMAFIT output files SAMPLEl.S. PCH and SAMPLE1Z. PCH are given below,
respectively:

- Model data in KIZ ILCAY F-DEPENDENT format (s-domain fitting):

C TEMP. PCH --> SAMPLE1S. PCH

C PUNCH-OUT FILE GENERATED BY ARMlU'IT (NODA SETUP)
C
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT 4 1.00000E+00 S
[Link]+OO 1.000000000000000000E+OO
4.834912963292372560E-09 2.891310391118851100E-06
7.580029502548451760E-15 2.542263894031624150E-10
3.992371.183553768360E-21 4.8498201211721.85350E-16
[Link]+OO 3.255511288682856340E-23
20 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

,- WDBOS· PGVGA
-- - - ~ - - - - - -I!lIilI:!- ~

] . . . . . . . .1
I
I
-.Ofr ................................. ..................................
,
-1I

-60 1 a 3 4 5 6 ?
ORDER
ORDER-Ale characterlstlc ( dt = -1.00E+OO )

, WDBOS· PGVGA !I[i1£)

i 0.01
i
)
I
1
I
.~
0.0011
it-
~
il [Link]. -

1E-qn~OOA----------------------------~1E~+~O=4.--------------------------.1FE+'05
FREQUENCV Utz]
[Link]-t'IAOHlTUOE characteristic ( dt = -1.00E+OO )
0r-----------------4~~:-----------------~
j
j
J.. -90

~
jW -180
JIll
II!'!
-l!
F -a?O~ ______~__~~__
.. ~
...~.h~..~
..~-~~-

I -~
-36lb,...,u..--u--------------------TP
... IO·+!-.'uor.r.-----------------TPi
...IO<+05:
-1 [Link]'o' [Hz]
1 [Link]-PHASE characteristic ( dt = -1.00E+OO )

Fig. 9 Screen output of ARMAFIT s-domain fitting results

XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT - 21

- Model data in KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT format (z-domain fitting):

C [Link] --> [Link]

C PUNCH-OUT FILE GENERATED BY ARMAFIT. (NODA SETUP)
C
C dt = [Link]-06
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT 3 1.00000E+00 Z
9.150679491660524490E-06 1.000000000000000000E+00
-9.305344079212201230E-06-2.989690720683914280E+00
-8.786470860113876200E-062.983350063948425840E+00
8. 941090797935189810E.-06-9. 936485813055728760E-01

U sing the present example, a switching-surge simulation is carried out by applying a step voltage of
10 V to the series RLC circuit modeled by a z-rational admittance function given above. The contents
of corresponding EMTP data are as follow:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C See "[Link]".
l.E-6 2.E-3
100 2 1
SRC SND 1.E-3 1.
SND 88.8 {d~ branch for the fo~~owing KFD
C PUNCH-OUT FILE GENERATED BY ARMAFIT (NODA SETUP)
C
C dt = 1.00000E-06
KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT 3 1.00000E+00 Z
9.150679491660524490E-06 1.000000000000000000E+00
-9.305344079212201230E-06-2.98969072068391.4280E+00
-8.786470860113876200E.-06 2. 983350063948425840E+00
8. 941.090797935189810E-06-9. 936485813055728760E-01
BLANK ending branches
BLANK ending switches
11SRC 10.
BLANK ending sources
1
CALCOMP PLOT
144 .2 2. SRC
194 .2 2. SRC SND
BLANK ending p~ots
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

The simulation results are shown in Fig. 10.

u{V]
12
i(}JA]

ro +---------------------------------- 2f}00

8 1000

6 o

4 ·1000

o 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

t (}Js]

source voltage circuit current

Fig. to Step response of the series RLC circuit modelled by KIZILCAY F-DEPENDENT
22 - XVIII. NODA SETUP and ARMAFIT

XVIII-5 References

[1] A. Ametani, Refraction coefficient method for .switching-surge calculations on untransposed transmission
lines (Accurate and approximate inclusion of frequency dependency), IEEE PES Summer Meeting, C
73-444-7, 1973.
[2] L. Marti, Simulation oftransients in underground cables with frequency dependent modal transformation
matrices, IEEE Trans., Power Delivery, vol. PWD-3 (3), pp.1099-l110, 1988.
[3] G. Angelidis and A. Semlyen, Direct Phase-Domain Calculation of Transmission Line Transients Using
Two.,Sided Recursions, IEEE Trans., Power Delivery, Vol. 10, No.2, pp. 941-949, April 1995.

[4] B. Gustavsen, J. Sletbak, and T. Henriksen, Calculation ofelectromagnetic transients in transmission

cables and lines taking frequency dependent effects accurately into account, IEEE Trans.. Power
Delivery, Vol. 10, No.2, pp. 1076-1084, April 1995.
[5] T. Noda, N. Nagaoka, and A. Ametani, Phase domain modeling offrequency-dependent transmission
lines by means ofan ARMAmodel, IEEE Trans .. Power Delivery, Vol. 11, No.1, pp. 401-411, January
1996.
[6] T. Noda, N. Nagaoka, A. Ametani, Further Improvements to a Phase-Domain ARMA Line Model in
Terms of Convolution, Steady-State Initialization, and Stability, IEEE Power Engineering Society
Summer Meeting, Denver, Colorado, USA, 1996. (to be published in IEEE Trans.)
[7] Tsu-huei Liu and Li Jin-gui, Call for Help with Rational Function Approximations to Frequency-
Dependent Transformation Matrices of Cables and Lines, EMI'P News, Leuven EMTP Center, March,
1988.
[8] T. Noda and N. Nagaoka, Development of ARMA Models for a Transient Calculation using Linearized
Least.,Squares Method, Trans. lEE ofJapan, Vol. Il4-B, No.4, pp. 396-402, 1994.

[9] T. Noda, Development of a Transmission-Line Model Considering the Skin and Corona Effects for
Power Systems Transient Analysis, Ph.D. Thesis submitted to Doshisha University, 1996.
[10] T. Noda, N. Nagaoka, and A. Ametani, Fault-Surge Calculations using the Phase-Domain ARMA Line
Model, Trans. lEE ofJapan, Vol. 116-B, No. 11, pp. 1409-1414, 1996.
XIX. Supporting. routine. - 1

XIX. Supporting routines

Supporting routines are used to translate some input data. which is known for the
user. to some other output data which directly can be used in. an EMTP application.
One group of these supporting routines is treated in this chapter. while other
supporting routines are treated in some separated chapters. '

Following supporting routines are treated in this chapter:

1) "XFORMER" to derive [R]. [uL] of single-phase transformers

2) "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" for parallel "STATISTICS"
3) "BCTRAN" to derive [AJ. [R] or [R]. [uL] of multi-phase transformer
4) "CHANGE SWITCH" to convert former switched R. L elements to type-99. -98
5) "OLD TO NEW ZNO" to update pre-"M39" ZnO data cards
6) "DATA BASE MODULE"
7) "SATURA" to derive (1II,i) peakvalue curves
8) "HYSDAT" to create type-96 hysteretic inductor characteristic
9) "ZNO FITTER" to punch type-92 nonlinear branch cards
10) Convert saturable transformer cards to linear equivalent [R]. [L]
XIX.A wXFORHER w to deri.e [R). [wL) of [Link] tranaformera - 1

XIX.A "XFORMER" to derive [R], [wL] of single-phase transformers

The supporting routine "XFORMER" can be used to derive a linear [R]-[wL] repre-
sentation for single-phase transformers (both 2- and 3-winding transformers), using
test data of the excitation test and short-circuit test at the rated frequency.
Exci tation losses can't be taken into account by this model. On the other hand,
these losses can be neglected for a single-phase transformer, recall. The
short-circuit losses can (and should) be taken into account, however.
Stray capacitances are ignored in this representation, which therefore is only
valid up to a few kHz. On the other hand, the model is not valid for extremely
low frequencies either. The latter is mainly due to the fact that the XFORMER
model uses admittances internally without first separating the resistive and
inductive parts. At DC conditions, this mathematical manupulation then results
in non-zero off-diagonal resistive elements, which indicate induced voltages in
the secondary winding. At DC, of course, such voltage induction is physically
impossible.

Non-linear behaviour can't be included in the "XFORMER" model proper. Such behaviour
(saturation or hysteresis) could be taken into account, however, by adding type
93, 96 or 98 elements, connected to the proper transformer terminals (i.e. those
windings that are closest to the core) in the electrical network, during the
steady-state or transient run. In such case, however, it would be mandatory to
specify lex = 0, since otherwise, the magnetizing inductance will be taken into
account twice. On the other hand, of course, lex = 0 is impossible, since this
would result in an admittance matrix being singular. Hence. XFORMER will not be
able to take saturation into account properly. Usage of BCTRAN is desirable in
such case. Alternatively, for the two-winding transformer, this problem can be
circumvented by using the saturable transformer component (which explicitely takes
into account the saturation). In the 3-winding case, however, the saturable
transformer component can become numerically instable for unknown reasons.

Although this model uses the admittance notation internally, nevertheless it is

mandatory that the magnetizing current certainly is not near-zero (or zero).
Indeed, if the user specifies too little magnetizing current, the magnetizing
impedance gets lost in the admittance matrix that becomes nearly singular, so that
it can't be inverted any more to result in the desired [R]-[wL] matrices. Remark
that the floating-point miscellaneous data parameter EPSLIN (see Section II-B) is
used as a Singularity tolerance. In cases with small magnetizing current, it is
more appropriate to use the "BCTRAN" model of Section XIX-C. For a 2-winding
transformer, the equivalent circuit as created by XFORMER looks as follows:

Zsc Zsc = short-circuit impedance

1/2 M 1/2 M Xm = magnetizing inductanCE

g (the exc itation loss)

( is NOT included in -this mode
XIX.A "XFORMER" to derive [Rl. [wLl of single-phase transformers - 2

The punched card output of XFORMER can be used immediately as input branch cards
for mutually coupled R-wL elements (TYPE 51, 52, ••• ) in the electrical network
(Section IV-C). Do not forget to set the miscellaneous parameter XOPT (to be used
during the transient run) equal to the value of the rated frequency used to perform
the excitation- and short-circuit test. Indeed, all input data are only valid at
this implicit frequency. Further, note that it is impossible (even useless) to
try to reset the value of this frequency!!

The following will. explain the input data-deck structure for all possible "XPORMER"
cases.

XIX.A.! Input data-deck structure for "XFORMER"

The only differences between the input rules for a 2-winding and a 3-winding
transformer are the following:
- (pOint 4) Number of terminal nodes, mentioned on the "BRANCH" card.
- (point 5) Number of cards "NC" in the grouping specifying the electrical parameters
of the transformer.
- (point 6) The output for a 2-winding transformer only contains TYPE 51-52 branch
cards, whereas the output for a 3-winding transformer contains TYPE
51-53 branch cards.
Suppose that a user wants to model a single-phase, 2- or 3-winding transformer
using the XFORMER supporting routine. His data deck then should have the following
structure:
1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
2. XFORMER - special-request word
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. SERASE - request (optional)
(erase all card images that might exist in punch buffer)
4. BRANCH - card (optional)
(name the terminal nodes of the transformer windings)
'5. "NC" data cards
(specify the electrical parameters of the transformer)
NC = 2 for the 2-winding case
NC = 4 for the 3-winding case
6. SPUNCH - request (optional)
(flush contents of punch buffer of preceding XFORMER case)

Remark that the data of points 4, 5 and 6 may be repeated as many times as
desired. Each such grouping is a separate data case within the "XFORMER It
setup, corresponding to a different transformer.

7. BLANK CARD ending all XFORMER cases

8. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case.
As for an example of such input for a single-phase, 3-winding transformer, we
.
refer to benchmark DC-15.
Let's discuss the different card formats one by one, in closer detail now.
XIX.A wXFORKER w to derive [R]. [wL] of single-phase transformers - 3

1. The "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card comes first.

11JJ}JJiJJ~lJJJJJIJj~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJ1JJ~lJJ}JJiJ~~lJJ~JJi~~~lJJJJJfJJ~lJJ{IJIJJ~
BEGI N NEW DATA CAS

2. Next comes the "XFORMER" card, a special-request card which serves to transfer
control to the overlay in question.

3. Next comes the optional "$ERASE" card, a special-request card which serves to
reset the punch buffer (LUNIT7).

11JJJJll~J~lJJJJJJJJ~lJ4JJJiJ~~lJJJJJiJ~~lJ1JJJ1J~~lJJlJJ1J~~lJ1JJJ1JJ~lJJJJitJ~~
$ERAS

NOTE: This optional $ERASE card should be used whenever punchcard output is requested
as input for the electrical network.

4. Next comes the optional "BRANCH" card. which serves to name the terminal nodes
of the transformer windings. Thus. each winding will be interpreted as a branch
between "BUS1" and "BUS2". Since all of these branches will be represented as
TYPE-5x elements. mutual coupling can be taken into account.

NOTE: This optional card should be used whenever punched card output is requested
as input for the electrical network.

The card format is slightly different for the 2- and 3-winding cases. In the
FORMAT diagrams. "HV" stands for high voltage, "LV" stands for low voltage. and
"MEn" stands for medium voltage.
XIX.A "XFORHER" to derive [R]. [wL] ot .ingle-pha.e tran8former. - 4

a) Iha 2-winding ~:

I~ I" IE Ie
I :;I~ i~ '~I( I~ r! Id~l( l!t~l( I! I~ IE 'I I~I( l' rH~ ~. 'It~l(

BRANCf A6 A6 A6 A6

BRANCf BUS1 BUS2 BUS1 BUS2

TYPE-51 TYPE-52
HV-winding LV-winding

b) ~ 3-winding ~:

I:; I- IE Ie
~* tcl~ Ie :~ Ie f!
BRANO
I"

A6 A6
'* I~

A6 A6
i"l-

A6
I-I'

A6
:~ l- IE ~ ct~l( ~~ ~!I~ 'c!5lc

BRANC~ BUS1 BUS2 BUS1 BUS2 BUS1 BUS2

TYPE~5' TYPE-52 TYPE-53
HV-winding MED-winding LV-winding

5. Following are data cards, specifying the electrical parameters of the transformer.
These cards can be split into two parts:

- The first card groups excitation data and the output specification request.
This card is slightly different for both 2- and 3-winding transformers
(parameter "NW" in column 1).
- The second group of cards contains short-circuit data. The number of cards
in this second grouping depends on the number of windings. For the 2-winding
case, only one card will be needed, but for the 3-winding case, 3 cards are
needed.

5.1. F2rst comes one card, containing both the excitation data and the output
specification request. The only difference between the 2- and 3-winding cases
is the value of the parameter "NW".

I~
I~ Ie t<lc
E9.0 E10.0

~ IMAGN SBASE
XIX.A "XFORMER" to derive [R). [wL) of single-phase transformers - 5

Parameters:

NW Number of windings.
=2 2-winding transformer
=3 : 3-winding transformer

lMAGN: The transformer magnetizing current (in percent).

Use following formula:

VOLT2
IMAGN-I u SBASE 100

where lex = measured excitation current

VOLT2 = rated voltage of LV-winding
SBASE = power base

Note that the case of "lMAGN = 0" will result in an error message. In such
case, the user is adviced to use the BCTRAN model (section XIX-C). Further,
it is accurate enough to use the magnitude of the value of the exciting current
rather than the exact (but smaller) magnetizing current.

SBASE: Power base (in MVA), used for "lMAGN"-referencing

5.2. Cards containing short-circuit data. For the 2-winding case, only one card
will be needed, but for the 3-winding case, 3 cards are needed.

a) ~ 2-winding~: (only 1 card needed)

1~~4 ~J( ,H~ 14~! ~HJ~ fJ~~1 I~, I€ Ie

I~ l' Ie rq~ H t~i~le I~ ~! r*lc
[10.0 [10.0 E10.0 E10.0 [10.0

VOLT 1 VOLT2 PLOSS12 ZSC12 SBASE

HV-side l.:V-side

Parameters:

VOLT1: Rated RMS voltage (in kV) of winding 1 (high voltage side).
VOLT2: Rated RMS voltage (in kV) of winding 2 (low voltage side)

PLOSS12: Short-circuit losses (in kW) at rated frequency.

ZSC12: Magnitude of the short-circuit impedance (in percent) of the transformer

between winding 1 and winding 2.
XIX.A "XFORHER" to derive [R). [wL) of single-phase transformers - 6

Note that this percent value is implicitly frequency dependent, since it is

measured at a very specific frequency: the rated frequency_ Further following
formula should be used:

ZSC12- U -" SBASE 100

I,,, VOLT1 2

where Ir'1 = nominal current

Up' = short-circuit voltage
S:t,SE = power base
VCLTl = rated voltage of HV winding
SBASE: Power base (in MVA), used for "ZSC12."-referencing
(e.g. the rated power of the transformer).

b) Ina 3-winding~: (3 cards needed)

E10.0 E10.0 E10.0 E10.0

VOLT 1 PLOSS12 ZSC12 S812 ~ HV-winding

VOLT2 PLOSS13 ZSC13 5813 ~ MED-winding
VOLT3 PLOSS23 ZSC23 S823 ~ LV-winding

Parameters:
VOLTi: Rated RMS voltage (in kV) of winding "in.
PLOSSij: Short-circuit losses (in kW) at rated frequency.
ZSCij: Magnitude-of the short-circuit impedance (in percent) of the transformer
between winding "in and winding "j".
Note that this percent value is implicitly frequency dependent, since it is
measured at a very specific frequency: the rated frequency. Further. following
formula should be used:
USB"lJ
ZSCi ._~
J I,,, VOLTi2

where Ish= nominal current

USh = short-circuit voltage
SBij = power base
VOLTi = rated voltage of winding i
SBij Power base (in MVA). used for "ZSCijlt-referencing
(e.g. the rated power of the transformer)
XIX.A -XFORHER- to derive [R]. [wL] of single-phase transformers - 7

6. Next comes the optional "$PUNCH" card, a special-request card which serves to
activate the puncher (LUNI'I7).

11JJJJjJJJ~lJ1JJJJ4J~lJ1JJJjJJ11JJJJJJ4J~lJJJJJi4J~lJJJJJi4J~lJ1JJJ14J~lJ1JJliJJ~
$PUNC

NOTES: 1) This optional card should be used whenever punched card output is
desired.

2) Since both the resistance- and inductance matrix are in Ohms, at the
rated frequency, one should use XOPT = "rated frequency" during
transient runs using this punched output as branch card input.

3) This punched card output will use the high-accuracy free-format

notation for TYPE -51-52-53 elements. Asa consequence, the free-
format separation- and continuation characters (see Card 18 of the
STARTUP file of Section I-E-2) will be used on all punched cards. Of
course. the usage of such characters must be consistent between the
"XFORMER" derivation and the subsequent usage as part of a simulation.

Note that the data of points 4, 5 and 6 may be repeated as many times as desired.
Each such grouping is a separate data case within the "XFORMER" setup, corre-
sponding to a different transformer.

7. To end all "XFORMER" cases, a blank card is used.

8. If the user wants to shut off the EMTP at this point, a "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE"
card, followed by a blank card should be entered next.

XIX.A.2 Example of "XFORMER" data set up

Consider a one-phase two-winding transformer with both primary and secondary

winding grounded at one terminal. The other terminals are to be named ttHI" and
ttL1" for high-vol tage and low-voltage node, respectively. Finally, the following
data were obtained by measurement (at 50 Hz) for this transformer:

Power rating S 0.0063 MVA

Excitation losses [Link] 0.065 KW (not needed for XFORMER)
Excitation current lex 1,85 Amps
Short-circuit losses [Link] 0.095 KW
Short-circuit current Ish 16 Amps
Short-circuit voltage Ush 8.3 Volts
Voltage rating Vprim/Vsec .220/.377KVolts
XIX.A "XFORHER" to derive [R). [wL) of [Link] transformers _ 8

The derived values for the other parameters are:

per-unit magnetizing current:
220
1.85X
6300
• .0646 p.u. or 6.46%

short-circuit impedance:
U,/l 8.3
Z'/l-]= 16 =.518 Ohms (at SO. Hz)
. ,/l

per unit short-circuit impedance:

S
Z,/l.P.-Z,/l·-2-=0.02296 p.u. or 2.296%
U HS

The short circuit test was performed using 16 A rather than the normal HV current
Ino.. Hence the value for the losses should be modified:
I slt,ao",)2
P sit, aD", • P sit. ",X ( - I - -
slt,In

where the index "nom" refers to nominal conditions and "m" refers to actual measuring
conditions.

Since I • 6300. 16 71 A
[Link] 377 •

we find (16.71)2
P s/l, aOln - 0.095x 16 - 0.1 0363KW

Further note that the resistance values can be tested by handcalculations:

P,/l 95
Rslt - - - 16 2 - 0.37110hm
I:/l
0.3711
HV:R Hv - 2 -0.186

LV:R _ 0.3711 (220)2 _ 0063

LV 2 x 377 .

These values can not be traced back in the punched results. This is because the
full admittance matrix is inverted, resulting in non-zero off diagonal values in
the resistance matrix. Further details can. be found in the Theory Book.

The card deck representing the XFORMER input, then would result in the following
card sequence:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
XFORHER
$ERASE
BRANCH H1 L1
c
C 2 windings. IHAG • 6.460 %. PBCOR • . 0063 HVA
c
XIX.A ·XFORHEX· to derive [X]. [wL] of aingle-phaae tranaformera - 9

2 6.460 .0063
c
C .377/.220 voltage ratio. PLOSS12 • • 10363 KW. %SC12 • 2.296 ,. PB%12 • • 0063
C
.377 .220 .10363 2.296 .0063
SPOMCH
BLANK CARD ENDING XFORHEX
BLANK CARD ENDING ALL CASES

XIX.A,3 Output data-deck structure

For the sample input data of the preceeding paragraph, the output appears as
follows:

c:o-n t card. IIUIIllCD· 1. C data://C/GUlDO/[Link]

Marker card preceding new EMTP data ca.e. BEGIN NEW DI'oTA CASE
c:o-nt card. IIUIIllCD - 3. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C~t card. KUMDCD. 4. C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
[Link] for transfo.-.er [R) + jw( L) coooputatlon. XPORMER
Era•• all of 0 cards in the punch buffer. SERAS!:
Nod........ for UllIIT7-punched branch card•• BRANCH HI
c:o-nt card. 1IUIIllCD· 8. C
ec-ent card. JfUMDCD. 9. C 2 winding•• IMAG • 6.460 •• PBCUR - .0063 MYA
c:o-nt card. IIUIIllCD· 10. C
Naw device. 2 6.46ooooE+00 6.300000£-03 2 6.460 .0063
C - . . t card.1IUIIllCD - 12. C
c:o-nt card. IIUIIllCD - 13. C .371/.220 YOltege ratio. PLOSS12 - .10363 !tW. ZSC12 - 2.296 •• PBZ12 - .0063
c:o-nt card. IIUIIllCD - 14. C
Wind. 0.377E+00 0.220E+00 O.104E+oo 0.23O!:+01 .317 .220 .10363 2.296 .0063

Single-phase. 2 _inding transfo .... r.

Vol tag. aero. . winding
[ kV )
Lo....
III>\GN - 6.46000000:£+00 perc:m>t based on

in [kW)
Iapadance based on
[percent) [MYA)
6.30000000E-03 MYA.

8igh 0.38 8igh -- Low 0.10 2.2960 0.006

lapadance . .tria a. required for transient .tudie•• with reactance X in _ at the _ r frequency.
R x R X R X
8igh 0.9212619E-Ol 0.3493188£+03
Low -0.5411077£-01 0.2037411E+03 0.3157658E-Ol 0.1189555E+03

Short-circuit input iapadancas follow --- obtained free the just-printed iapadance . .trix by rever•• COIIputation. Thb represents
sort of a check on the ~utation:
8igh -- Low 0.37071 0.36138
Repeat the preceding calculation. only this t i _ the starting point will be the iapadance . .tria with aU a l _ t . rounded to
approxi_taly five deei. .l digits:
High -- Low 0.37070 0.37938

Request for flushing of punch buffer. IsPIINCB

A [Link] of 80-coluan card i_ges now being flushed free punch buffer foU""s.

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

C ( ••• +++) cards punched. by aupport routine on 17-Apr-89 10.34.43 <.+.+.+)

C XFORMER
C SEllASE
C BRANCH 81 L1
CC
C C 2 windings. JIII\G - 6.460 t. PBCUR - .0063 MYA
C C
C 2 6.460 .0063
C C
C C .377/.220 voltage ratio. PLOSS12 - .10363 KW. ZSC12 - 2.296 ll. PBZ12 - .0063
C C
C .377 .220 .10363 2.296 .0063
51.81 0.9272618817281£-01 0.3493188082966E+03 •
52.L1 -0. 5411071293636E-Ol 0.2037410770117E+03 S
0.3157657837292£-01 0.1189555285801:£+03 •
--------.( End of LUNIT7 punched cards as flushed by SPUNCH request ) •••••••

XIX.A.4 Usage of TYPE 51-52-53 punched output of "XFORMER"

TYPE 51-52-53 punched output cards can be used immediately as branch cards
representing the transformer. Don't forget to put XOPT (miscellaneous data card)
XIX.A "XFORMER" to deri •• [R]. [wL] of single-phase transformers - 10

equal to the value of the rated frequency (transformer testing frequency) during
a transient simulation. Further, be sure that the free-fromat separation- and
continuation characters are compatible between XFORMER and the transient run. For
more details, see Section IV-C.

Recall that XFORMER can not deal with non-linearities (such as saturation and
hysteresis). This could only be done via external addition of a. saturation curve.
But in such case, XFORMER proper should deal with lex = 0, wich is impos~ible.
XIX-B. "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" for Parallel "STATISTICS" - 1

XIX-B. "OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" for Parallel "STATISTICS"

The philosophy and theory behind OPMC is covered in Ref. [52]. so such
information will not be repeated here. Instead, the presentation here will be
limited to an explanation of the interactive dialogue that is possible following
the program prompt, which appears as follows:
key (INIT, SHOW, END. ADD, EDIT, USE, WAIT, GO, SHOT, WIDTII, CARD, HELP, QUIT):
User alternatives, most of which are shown in parentheses, will be explained one
at a time in following paragraphs.
"INIT" (short for "initialize") is the appropriate first command if no
correctly-structured disk file [Link] already exists. Alternatively, it
can be used to erase all history from such an existing. legal, history file.
"SHOW" will produce a display having one row for each EMTP process that has
submitted information since the previous initialization. For example:
USERID Starting time La.t-ahot time XNT NENERG INDHCB Eztrema and .witch time • • tored here --)

1 Hilano II-Nov. 20.48 11-Nov. 20.54 26 750 600 //c/w.m/[Link]

2 London 09-Nov. 14.03 10-Nov. 01.39 142 200 146 //b/keep/proce •• 2/Binary OUtput. bin
4 Berlin 12-Nov. 19.45 12-Nov. 19.46 2 430 48 //c/vam/[Link]. -
5 [Link] 12-Nov. 19.45 12-Nov, 19.46 12 150 242 //a/BOB/Goodie_Ooodie.bin

The 6-byte USERID is from either the STARTUP file or a subsequent "USER
IDENTIFICATION" declaration. Note that lower case is preserved. This label
must be unique for any such parallel Monte Carlo simulation, since it identifies
the process. The "Starting time" is the same figure that is a part of the
heading that begins the LUNIT6 output of a simulation. The "Last-shot time" is
the time at which a row of the table was last updated, at the completion of
another energization. Variables KNT and NENERG show the number of the last-com-
pleted energization and the terminal number of such energizations. INDMCB is
the index to RAM-based storage of the energizations. Finally. history of the
energizations is stored in the disk file having the 40-byte name labeled "Extr-
ema and switch ••• ", which was taken from theSOPEN card connecting this file to
LUNIT2. Should the user want more information, he should send "SHOW ALL", which
will append more information after the just-explained table. An illustration
follows:
Proce.. JJP'I1LL created "START AGAIN" table. named .• //c/vam/[Link]
XNTSUM KSWTCH NTOT IBR KSTAT JJLAST LSIZ23 JJFULL
182 6 25 15 10 6 4000 2

Shown first is the file name of the "LABCOM" tables (normally there will be
just one). About following integers, KNTSUM is the sum of all energizations
(sum of rows in the KNT column), KSWTCH is the number of switches, NTOT is the
number of nodes, IBR is the number of branches, NSTAT is the number of output
variables, JJLAST is the last row of the table (visible only if it has not been
made inactive by USE), LSIZ23 is the dimensioned limit to RAM-based storage of
the energizations, and finally, JJFULL is the process number mentioned in the
first line. The command "SHOW TOP" will display three hidden records at the
beginning of the table. An illustration follows:
Columns! 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678
Hisc. data - 6 25 15 10 6 4000 2 //c/wsm/[Link]
File locks -1 11 1
Inactivity" 1
XIX-B. wOBSERW [Link] ttOlfTE CARLOw tor Parall.l ·STATISTICS· - 2

Should the user want to "EDIT" these rows, they are numbered -2 (miscel-
laneous data), -1 (file locking flags), and 0 (inactivity flags). If a number
follows the "SHOW" command. (e.g., "SHOW 5" or "SHOW ALL 5"). it will be
interpreted as the repetition time in seconds for the display. The loop will
continue until it is broken by the user-keyed interrupt of SPY. This assumes
that the user-keyed interrupt is available for the computer of interest. If
not, perhaps a computer-dependent interrupt of the process will be required.
The "END" command will conclude either a single process, or all parallel
processes, at the end of the on-going energization or energizations. For a
single process, follow the command by the process number (e.g., "END 3" to put
process number 3 to bed. By definition ,. the process number is the row number
in the "SHOW" display. To put all processes to bed, send "END ALL". The
response of OPMC is to reduce NENERG to KNT. The EMTP checks for such a change
after each energization except the first, and it will modify NENERG accordingly,
resulting in a premature end to the energizations and a beginning of statistical
tabulations. if any.
The "ADD" command will punch EMTP data cards for subsequent statistical
tabulation of all energizations of all parallel processes. More preCisely, it
will create the cards to combine (hence, "ADD") all such raw data. during a
subsequent execution of EMTP. The user takes possession of these cards follow-
ing a $PUNCH request. To the computer-created cards must be added the tabula-
tion requests that are desired by the user. of course. This is done by manual
editing prior to use of the data cards.
The "EDIT" ,command allows the user manually to replace any single row of
the central statistics file [Link]. Follow the command word by the
process number (the row number of the "SHOW" display). There will be two
prompts for the 99-column line in two parts.
Send bytes 1-56 (through INDMCB) for line 6 :
Send file name (bytes 59:98) to complete row :
Note that the two blanks preceding the file name, columns 57 and 58, are not
redefined.
The "USE" command will toggle the activity status of a row of the central
statistics file without affecting the associated process in any way. Follow the
command by the process number (the row number of the "SHOW" display) that is to
be modified. A subsequent "SHOW" will illustrate the modified status. A row
that was visible will become missing (inactive), whereas a row that previously
was missing will become visible (active). In the preceding illustration, row
number 3 was missing because it had been made inactive by means of a "USE 3"
command. The next time a new process would be added to the table. it would fill
the las t such inactive row before a brand new row would be appended to the end.
"WAIT" is like "END" except that it results in process hibernation rather
than termination. The hibernating status of a process is indicated in the
"SHOW" display by a minus sign applied to the maximum number of energizations
"End" • To reactivate a hibernating process. use "00".
"GO" is like "END" except that it cancels the hibernation of "WAIT". Such
activation may require a few seconds (up to five for Apollo) actually to take
effect, however.
XIX-B. 'OBSERVE PARALLEL MONTE CARLO" for Parallel "STATISTICS' - 3

"SHOT" is like "END" except that it allows the user to change the maximum
number of energizations NENERG at the end of the on-going energization. There
will be a subsequent prompt for the new NENERG (either one ora full vector for
all processes). If "SHOT ALL" is used, a subsequent implied "SHOW" will confirm
the modified NENERG for all processes.
"WIDTH" allows the user to adjust the column width of the output. The
command is to be followed by the maximum column width, which must not be less
than 79 to avoid rejection. This is the same as the special-request word
"TRUNCATE OUTPUT LINFS". Without any such declaration, the truncation width is
set equal to the output width KOL132 as defined by STARTUP at the start of a new
data disk file (not by SSTARTUP or SWIDTH, however). To see the full row of the
"SHOW" table requires 102 columns, with any smaller figure truncating the
40-byte file name on the right. The full width of "SHOW TOP" requires an extra
8 columns (i.e., 110).
"CARD" results in the conversion of the UNFORMATTED output file of a process
into 80-column FORMATTED output cards. Follow the command by either the process
number (the row number of the "SHOW" display) or by the file name following the
tag "FILE=" (e.g., "CARD FILE=[Link]). This is the input. The output will
be punched cards (access bySPUNCH). For the inverse operation (for FORMATTED
input and UNFORMATTED output), use "CARD READ", after which the user must con-
nect his own input and output files using SOPEN. As a prompt will clarify,
these involve units 87 and 88, respectively, and these must be followed by "GO"
to actually perform the conversion. The "CARD" command is useful if the Monte
Carlo simulation has been split between two or more incompatible computers or
operating systems. Of course, in FORMATTED form, results can be exchanged
between any two EMTP computers, whereas UNFORMATTED output files generally can
not be. Punched cards provide a universal medium of exchange, after which "CARD
READ" restores the original, computer-dependent UNFORMATTED form. Also, the
"CARD" command allows for [Link] inspection and mechanical editing of output
files, should this ever prove to be necessary or desirable.
"HELP" produces explanation of the sort now being read.
"QUIT" will exit "OPMC" in civilized fashion, returning to the opening EMTP
prompt after the case-summary timing line that generally is of no interest (ig-
nore it).
XIX-C. -BCTRAH- to deri.e (1). [R) or [R). [wL) of .ulti-ph••e [Link]~er - 1

XIX-C. "BCTRAN" to derive [A], [R] or [R], [u.£] of multi-phase

transformer

Supporting routine BCTRAN can be used to derive a linear [A]-[R] or [R]-[u.L]

representation for single- or 3-phase (both core-type and shell-type) 2-winding.
3-winding or multiple-winding transformers. using test data of both the exciting
test and the short-circuit test at the rated frequency.

Excitation losses can be taken into account by this model. although these losses
can be neglected for both single-phase transformers and three-phase low-reluctance
transformers. Some more explanation related to the zero-sequence excitation test
for three-phase transformers seems to be desirable:

1. For three-phase transformers having one or more DELTA-connected windings, the

core construction (Shell type or core type) is of minor importance. In such a
case. the excitation test really becomes a short-circuit test because a closed
DELTA acts as a short-circuit for zero-sequence currents.
It is therefore assumed that all DELTA connections are open during the zero
sequence excitation test. In this case. the homopolar flux will close its path
through the tank, where saturation effects will occur. Unfortunately. only one
working point rather than a complete saturation curve can be specified currently.
Because the excitation current can not be neglected. also the excitation losses
should be included.
"On the other hand. if the DELTA winding remains closed. neither the value of
the zero sequence exciting current nor the value of the zero sequence. excitation
loss are critical.

2. For three-phase transformers having only WYE-connected windings, the core

construction is of major importance. A distinction should be made between
low-reluctance and high-reluctance transformers.

2a. Low reluctance: e.g. - banks of single-phase tranSformers

- three-phase shell-type transformers
- three-phase four- or five-leg transformers
In such case. the homopolar flux closes its path over core-material. thus
meeting a low-reluctance path. In this case. the zero sequence excitation
current will be small, and the resulting excitation losses will be negligable.

2b. High reluctance: e.g. 3-leg core type transformer.

The homopolar flux will close its path through the air "and the tank (i.e.
a high reluctance path). Because in such case the zero-sequence excitation
current is important. the resulting excitation losses can not be neglected.
Even saturation effects will occur in the transformer tank. Unfortunately.
only one working point rather than a complete saturation curve can be
specified.

The short-circuit losses can. and always should. be taken into account.

Stray capacitances are ignored in this representation. which therefore is only

valid up to a few kHz. As opposed to the XFORMER model. the BCTRAN model is even
valid at low frequencies. This is due to the fact that the inductive and resistive
part of the short-circuit impedance are treated separately by this model. As a
consequence, all off-diagonal resistive elements will remain zero, unless one takes
XIX-C. -BCTRAN- to derive [A). [R) or [R). [wL) of [Link] tranaformer - 2

into account the excitation losses. Since at DC these losses are zero, no non-zero
resistive elements can occur at DC anyway. Therefore,at DC conditions. no voltage
can be induced from one winding into the other, which is physically correct.

Non-linear behaviour can't be included in the "BCTRAN" model proper. Such behaviour
(saturation or hysteresis) can be taken into account, however, by adding type 93,
96 or 98 elements , cormected to the proper transformer terminals (i. e. those
windings which are closest to the core) in the electrical network, during the
steady-state or transient run. In such case, however, it is mandatory to. specify
[Link] = 0, since otherwise, the magnetizing inductance will be taken into account
twice. Another possibility is to switch over to the "saturable transformer model"
(section IV-E), which seems to work fine for all types of 2-winding transformers,
but which can become unstable numerically for the 3-winding cases. The reason for
this instability is not yet understood, but reordering the winding sequence might
solve the problem.

Since this model uses the admittance formulation internally, the magnetizing current
can have any value (even zero). On the other hand, of course, if the user specifies
too little magnetizing current, the admittance matrix becomes nearly Singular, so
that the [R]-[u..i..] output option becomes useless. Always use the [A]-[R] output
option in such cases. Recall that [A] equals the inverse of [L]. Further, note
that the floating-point miscellaneous data parameter EPSLIN (see Section II-B) is
used asa .singularity tolerance.

The punched card output of "BCTRAN" immediately can be used as input branch cards
for mutually coupled, high-precesion PI-circuit elements (high-precision TYPE 1,
2, ••• ) in the electrical network (Section IV-B) . This is explained in section
XIX-c-4. Assigning node names not only establishes the type of connection. (WYE or
DELTA), but also the phase shift (clock system) for a three-phase transformer (see
example in section XIX-C-3).

Further, don't forget that all input data are only valid for the rated frequency
at which all tests have been performed. Also note that it is impossible (even
useless) to try to reset the value of this frequency!!

The following subsection will explain the input data-deck structure for all possible
BCTRAN cases. Next will follow a .single-phase and a three-phase transformer example.
In the last subsection, applications of BCTRAN output will follow. It should be
stressed that all formulas to be used are in accordance with lEe Publication 76-1.

XIX-C-l Input data-deck structure for "BCTRAN"

The most important differences between single-phase and 3-phase transformer

input are the following:

- 1-phase transformers:
- leave all fields for the zero-sequence input parameters blank.
use only the single-phase, positive-sequence power rating.
set the flag "NP" =
1 on the excitation test data card (point 4)
use the winding voltages, devided by SQRT(3) (point 5)
assign only node names to BUS1 and BUS2 of phase 1 (point 5)
leave flag "ID" blank on all short-circuit test data cards (point 6)
XIX-C. -BCTRAH- to derive [A). (R) or (R). [wL) ot multi-phase [Link] - 3

- bank of 3 single-phase transformers:

- leave all fields for the zero-sequence parameters blank.
use only the single-phase, positive-sequence power rating.
- set the flag "NP = 1" on the excitation test data card (point 4)
for the winding voltage, the connection (WYE or DELTA) is important
(point 5)
assign node names to BUSl and BUS2 for all three phases (point 5)
leave flag "ID" blank on all short-circuit test data cards (point 6)

- low-reluctance transformers:
- the excitation behaviour depends on the winding connection. If no
DELTA-windings occur, the zero-sequence excitation current IEXZERO
will be low, and the corresponding losses LEXZERO can be neglected.
However, if a DELTA-winding occurs, it has to be opened during the
zero-sequence excitation test. The excitation IEXZERO will become
important and the corresponding losses LEXZERO have to be taken into
account.
value of the impedances (short-circuit impedance, magnetizing impe-
dance) equal in both the posi ti ve- and zero-sequence mode.
- set the flag "NP" = 0 on the excitation test data card.
(point 4)
- for the winding voltage, the connection (WYE or DELTA) is important
(point 5)
- assign node names to BUS1 and BUS2 for all three phases (point 5)
- take "care for flag "ID" (point 6)
- high-reluctance tr~formers:
- in this case the zero-sequence excitation current will always be high,
and hence, the corresponding losses should be taken into account. In
addition, the excitation behaviour depends on the winding connection,
the same way as for the low-reluctance transformer.
- the value of the impedances (short-circuit impedance, magnetizing
impedance) is different in both the positive sequence and zero sequence
mode.
set the flag "NP" = 0 on the excitation test data card.
(point 4)
- for ..the winding voltage, the connection (WYE or DELTA) is important
(point 5)
assign node names to BUSl and BUS2 for all three phases (point 5)
take care for flag HID" (point 6)

The difference between 2-winding, 3-winding or multi-winding transformer input

is straightforward:
- "NW", the number of windings per core leg,· is an input parameter.
(point 5)
- Flag "ID" (point 6) is important for 3-phase, 3- or multi-winding transformers.

In general, an input data-deck for the "BCTRAN" supporting routine has the
following structure:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE.

2. BCTRAN - special request
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. $ERASE - request (optional)
XIX-C. wBCTRAN w to deri •• [Al. [Rl or [R]. [wL] o~ multi-phaae trana~ora.r - •

(erase any card images that might exist in punch buffer)

4. 1 excitation test data card
5. NW winding data cards
(NW = number of windings per core)
6. NW*(NW-l)/2 Short-circuit test data cards
7. BLANK CARD terminating short-circuit test data
B. $PUNCH - request (optional)
(flush contents of punch buffer of preceding BCTRAN case)

Remark that the data of points 4 through B may be repeated as many times as
desired. Each such .grouping is a separate data case wi thin the BCTRAN setup,
corresponding to a different transformer.

9. BLANK CARD ending all BCTRAN cases

10. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case
11. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases

For an example of such input, the reader is referred to benchmark DCNEW-B or

to sections XIX-C-2 and XIX-C-3. Let's discuss the different card formats in more
extensive detail now.

1. The "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card comes first.

11JJJJ~i~JJ1JJJJJ{lj~IJJJJJjlJ~lJJJJliJJ~IJJ1JJiJJ~lJJJJJi~J~IJJJJlIJJ~IJJJifl~J~
BEGI N NEW DATA CAS

2. Next comes the "BCTRAN" card, a special-request card that serves to transfer
control to the overlay in question.

11JJJJ~JJ~J1JJJJJIJJ!lJ1JJJ1JJ~IJJJJ~JJJ~IJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJJIJJ~IJIIJJIJJ~IJIJiJIJJ~
ACCESS MODULE BCTRA

3. Next comes the optional "$ERASE" card, a special-request card which serves to
reset the punch buffer (LUNIT7).

11JJJJjJJJJ1JJJJJ{JJ~lJJJJJIJJ~lJ~JJJ1JJ~lJJ1JJ{JJ~lJJJJJIJJ~IJiJJJtJJ~IJJJiJIJJ~
$ERAS

NOTE: This optional card should be used whenever punched output is requested.
XIX-C. "BCTRAN" to deri.e [AI. [Rl or [Rl. [wLI of multi-ph•• e [Link] - 5

4. Next comes one card containing excitation test data, construction data, the
rated frequency, and the output requests:

II
I~ I'~! I ~ tfl~l( I~ I'~' r!~! ~ ,t f I( I: ~ E td~l( ~ It! ~.I' rl ie I·r!II tlhl< r!I~I<

12 E10.2 E10.2 E10.2 E10.2 E10.2 E10.2 E10.2 12 12 12 12

IN.I F"REQ I EXPOS SPOS LEXPOS I EXZERO SZERO LEXZERO NI IT 1\\ IP

positive sequence test zero sequence test

(all DELTA windings open)
»»> leave blank if NP= 1 «« ~

Parameters:

NW total number of windings per core leg

FREQ rated frequency (in Hz) at which all tests are performed. Note that
this value is necessary only to allow either [A]-[R] or [R]-[uJ...] output. For
this conversion, the value of w = [Link] is needed.

IEXPOS : exciting current (in percent) in the positive-sequence excitation test.

The formulae are as follows:
Vty
single phase: lEX POS - I IX S;;;S 100

[3v LV
three phase : lEX POS - I .... SiOS 100

=
where lex measured excitation current (nominal conditions - phase value)
VLV =
rated line voltage on LV side (see card 5)
SPOS =
power base

Note that if both IEXPOS = 0 and IEXZERO = 0, the [R]-[uJ...] output request will
generate an error message. Indeed. in such cases, the admittance matrix becomes
singular, so it can not be inverted!!! In such case, only the A-R option
should be used. Note. that [A] = [L]-l.

SPOS the power base (in MVA). used for "IEXPOS"-referencing.

LEXPOS excitation loss (in kW) in the positive-sequence excitation test.

single phase: LEXPOS =

[Link] (negligable)
three phase : LEXPOS = Pex . loss
where Pex.l088 = measured excitation loss (nominal conditions)
XIX-C. -BCTRAN- to deri.e [A). [R) or [R). [WL) ot multi-phaae tranatormer - 6

IEXZERO : the exciting current (in percent) in the zero-sequence excitation test.

NP =1 : IEXZERO = blank
I :[3v Ly
three phase: IE XZ E RO -;1 [Link] 100

where I ex . h = measured excitation current (nominal conditions)

VLV = rated line voltage on LV side (see card 5)
SZERO = power base
- If at least one DELTA winding exists. it should be opened because for the
zero-sequence current the closed DELTA would act as a short circuit path.
For open DELTA. the homopo1arexcitation current I ex .h always will be important.
However. if the DELTA remains closed. neither IEXZERO nor LEXZERO are critical.
Taking the positive sequence values is a good enough approximation then.

- If only WYE-connected windings occur. the homopo1ar excitation current Iex.h

can only be neglected in case of a low-reluctance transformer. not in the
case of a high-reluctance transformer. Typical values are:
- three-leg core type: IEXZERO = 100%
- five-leg core type: IEXZERO = 4*IEXPOS
Note that. if both IEXPOS = 0 andIEXZERO = O. the [R]-[uL] output request will
generate an error message. Indeed. in such cases. the admittance matrix becomes
singular. thus it can't be inverted!!! In such case. only the A-R option should
be used. Note that [A] = [L]-l.
SZERO the power base (in MVA). used for "IEXZERO"-referencing.
NP = 1 : SZERO = blank
three phase : SZERO = (non-zero) e.g. SPOS
LEXZERO : excitation loss (in kW) in the zero-sequence excitation test (nominal
condi tions). These losses can only be neglected for three-phase low-reluctance
transformers. having only WYE-connected windings. Leave blank for both a single
phase transformer and a bank of 3 single-phase transformers (NP = 1).

NP flag. used to distinguish between Single-phase and 3-phase

=0 or blank : true 3-phase transformer
= 1 a bank of 3 single-phase transformers or 1 single-phase transformer.

IT = 1 ••••• NW : reference number of the winding from where the excitation

test was made. Normally this is the low-voltage winding.
Note that winding reference numbers are allocated in card type 5. Further.
note that. if both "IT" and "IW" are zero or BLANK. then the program connects
magnetizing branches across ALL windings. Finally. if "IT" is specified, then
"IW" also should be!

IW : = 1. • ••• NW : reference number of the winding across which the magnetizing

branch is to be placed. In most cases this will be the low-voltage winding.
since this is the winding closest to the iron core.
Remark: see "IT".
XIX-C. -BCTRAH- to derive [Al. [Rl or [Rl. [wLl of multi-phase transforaer - 7

IP : output request flag

=0 or blank : matrices [A] and [R] requested as output
> 0 : matrices [R] and [uL] requested as output
< 0 : both [A]-[R] and [R]-[uL] requested as output
Don't forget to specify the $PUNCH-request!! (point 8).

Note that, if both IEXPOS = 0 and IEXZERO = 0, the [R]-[uL] output request
will generate an error message. Indeed. in such cases, the admittance matrix
becomes singular, so it can not be inverted!! In such cases, only the A-R
option should be used. Note that [A] = [LI-i.

5. Next come exactly "NW" data cards, one for each transformer winding. These
cards can be read in arbitrary order, since each card bears its own winding
reference number. The card format is displayed next:

, I: ~ !~ If IE
: t'! € I~ !e :, l'~ E 'fl~f( ,. ~! ,C ~I- l'~ E tE Ie I~ !~f! fE I( f( : . I~I= rEI* ,~l~
1* I- 'EI~C

I _
E10.2 E10.2 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

K VRAT R 8US1 8US2 8US3 8US4 8US5 8US6

(optional) phase 1 phase 2 phose 3

Parameters:

K : winding reference number. This numbering should be in order g.t: decreasing

(actually. Don-increasing) voltage, so that winding 1 is to be the highest
voltage winding, winding 2 is the next highest, etc. The placement of the
cards in the deck is in arbitrary order, though.

VRAT rated winding voltage (in kV)

single phase transformer:
VRAT = V/.[3 (line-to-ground' equivalent)
three-phase transformer or bank of 3 single-phase transformers
DELTA-connected: VRAT = V (line-line value)
WYE-connected : VRAT ::: V/.[3 (line-to-ground value)

Note that V is the rated nominal line-line value to be used in all former and
following per-unit calculations.

R winding resistance (in Ohm. at rated frequency) of one phase.

NOTE: 1) If the values differ in the three phases. the average value should
be used.
2) If the winding resistances are not known. their value can be derived
automatically from the short-circuit losses "Pij" (see group 6), only
if the following three conditions are fullfilled at the same time:
- NW .LE. 3 (see group 4)
- Pij > 0 for all short-circuit tests {see group 6}
- IL ) 0 on FIRST short-circuit card (see group 6)
XIX-C. "SCTRAN° to derive (A). (a) or (a). (wL) of [Link] tranaformer - 8

BUSi : node names of the terminals of the winding "k" in each one of the three
phases. One pair of node names is needed per phase.

NOTE: 1} If a terminal is connected to ground. then use a blank field for the
name of that terminal.
2} By assigning names to the winding terminals. the punched card output
can be used directly as branch card output for a subsequent transient
simulation.
3) Assigning node names not only establishes the type of connection
(DELTA of WYE) but also the phase shift (clock system) for a three-phase
transformer.

Example:

Dy5 500/2.30 kV 8US1 BUS2 PHASE

A2 10.1 C1 R

L>c,
C2 x

A1
A
C2 92
81
A2
Cl
92
A1
x
91
x
S

Fig.l : Clock-system declaration.

Note that for a grounded WYE. x should be replaced by BLANK.

PHASE R PHASE S PHASE T

K VRAT R BUS 1 BUS2 BUS 1 BUS2 BUS 1 BUS2
2 230 - C2 x A2 x B2 x
13
1 500 - Al Cl Bl Al Cl Bl

Note that on the DELTA side a path to ground should exist. in order to avoid
"floating subnetwork" warning messages. This problem is discussed in extensive
detail in section IV-E-3.

6. Next come exactly "NW*(NW-l}/2 tt cards. one card for each short-circuit test
between a pair of windings. The cards can be read in arbitrary order. since
each card bears its own pair of winding reference numbers. The card format
is as follows:

I~ I~ f I E
~.l ~ rfl~ I( .~ f~ I! I~ I' 'fi~ I( I" 'fl~l( I'~' l~~1 'fi~l( I- .~ rE :( l~ !€ 'El~lc ~~l ~ ,E [fie (

1212 [10.2 [10.2 [10.2 [10.2 E10.2 12 12

I J Pij ZPOSij SPOS ZZEROij SZERO lOlL

Parameters:
XIX-C. -BCTRAH- to deriYe tAl. tal or cal. C~l of multi-phase transformer - 9

I, J : reference numbers of the pair of windings between which the short-circuit

test is made.

Pij : short-circuit loss or load losses (in kW) in the positive-sequence test.
Take care of the following
single phase Pij = Pah
three phase : Pij = Pah

where Pah = measured load loss (nominal conditions)

- Under certain conditions, the winding resistance "R" (see preceeding group 5
data) can be calculated from the load losses. See parameter "R" of the
preceeding group 5 for more details.
ZPOSij : short-circuit impedance (in percent. at rated frequency) in the posi-
tive-sequence short-circuit test for winding "in with winding "j" shorted.

II •• 51'05
for three-phase: ZPOS= r:.
31 ,II
,#"J
-,-100
v NY
where Iah = nominal current on HV side (line value)
Ush = measured short-circuit voltage on HV side (nominal
conditions,line value)
SPOS = power base
VHV = rated line voltage on HV side{see card 5)
SPOS power base value (in MVA). used for "ZPOSij"-referencing.
ZZEROij short-circuit impedance (in percent. at rated frequency) in the zero
sequence test for winding "in with winding "j" shorted.

for single-phase: ZZERO = blank

1I •• 5ZEI.0
for three-phase: ZZERO----IOOx3
',. V~y

where Iah = nominal current on HV side (line value)

USh = measured short-circuit voltage on HV side (nominal
conditions. line value)
SZERO = power base
VHV = rated line voltage of HV side (see card 5)
Note: for a closed DELTA, the excitation test results with closed DELTA are
almost the same as the short-circuit results.
SZERO : power base value (in MVA), used for "ZZEROij"-referencing.
for Single-phase SZERO = blank
for three-phase : SZERO = (non-zero value tt) e.g. SPOS
ID : this variable is only important for three - or more - winding three-phase
transformers.
= blank : in all Single-phase transformer cases.
XIX-C. wBCTIAR· to [Link] •• [A). [X) or [X). [wL) of multi-ph.a. tranaformer - 10

=0 : this is a flag, indicating that the zero-sequence reactance will be

calculated, using the zero-sequence short-circuit impedance and the
resistance (automatically calculated) representing the positive- sequence
short-circuit losses. Hence, the resistance of the group 5-data will NOT
be used. This can be done in following situations :
- in all two-winding three-phase transformer cases, regardless of the
winding connection.
- for multi-winding three-phase transformers, where the zero sequence
short-circuit test only involves windings i and k. If during th~s test,
an additional DELTA-connected winding (different from i or k) is
involved, this DELTA must be open.
>0 This is a flag,indicating the fact that the winding resistances given
on group 5-data will be used to obtain reactances from impedances for
the zero-sequence test. Hence these winding resistances will represent
the zero-sequence short-circuit losses. This situation can only occur
as follows :
- for multi-winding three-phase transformers where the zero-sequence
short-circuit test not only involves windings i and k, but also another
winding (reference number = ID), typically closed-delta connected.
The following clarifies the rules for 3-winding transformers:
Yyd-connection: "d" is the additional shorted winding in the
zero-sequence test between "Y" and "y".
YDd-connection: "d" is the additional shorted winding in the zero-sequence
test between "Y" and "D". flD" is the additional shorted winding in
the zero-sequence test between fly" and "d". Furthermore, both these
tests should produce identical impedances.
Ddd-connection: the program cannot handle Ddd-connected windings without
first opening the delta-connection. This agrees with field measurement
experience: in order to be able to perform the zero-sequence test,
the delta-connection should be opened anyway!!!
IL flag specifying how the winding resistance (.group 5 data) should be
obtained.
= 0 or blank: The read-in winding resistances (see group 5 input cards) will
be used.
> 0 : the read-in winding resistance values of the group 5 data will be ignored.
Instead. the winding resistance values will be calculated from the
short-circuit losses "Pij" , on condition that all restrictions mentioned
above (see "R". point 5) are fullfilled.

Note: This parameter should only be specified on the FIRST short-circuit test
data card.

7. A blank card comes next. to terminate the input of short-circuit test data.
8. Next comes the optional "$PUNCH" card, a special-request card which serves to
activate the LUNIT7 punching of branch cards:

11JJJJIJJJJ1JJJJJIJJ~IJJ~JJJ~J~IJJJJJIJ~~lJJJJJIJJ~IJJJJJIJ~~lJIJJJ)J~~lJJIIIIJ~~
$PUNC
XIX-C. "BCTRAH" to deri.e [Al, [Rl or [Rl, [wLl of [Link] tranaformer - 11

Notes: 1) This optional card should be used whenever punched card output is desired.
2) This punched output will use the high-accuracy fixed-format notation for
TYPE-1-2-3 elements.
3) We refer to section Xlx-c-4 for rules to be followed when inserting the
punched card output in an electrical network simulation.

Remark that the data of points 4 through 8 may be repeated as many times as
desired. Each such grouping is a separate data case wi thin the BCTRAN setup.
corresponding to a different transformer.
9. To end all "BCTRAN" cases, a blank card should be entered next.

10. If the user wants to shut off the EMTP at this point, a "BEGIN NEW DATA
CASE" card, followed by a blank card, should be entered next.

XIX-C-2 Single pbase example

a. Data setup

Consider the case of a one-phase transformer with both primary and secondary
winding grounded at one terminal node. The other terminals are called "P1" and
"Sl" for primary and secondary, respectively. Finally. the following data were
obtained by measurements on this transformer (at 50 Hz):
Power rating S 0.0063 MVA
Excitation losses [Link] 65 W
Excitation current lex 1,85 Amps
Short-circuit losses [Link] 95 W
Short-circuit current ISh 16 Amps
Short-circuit voltage USh 8.3 Volts
Voltage rating Vpria/Vsec 220/377Volts
The values for the actual input parameters will be derived hereafter:

NW = 2 since we have a 2-winding transformer

FREQ = 50 since both the excitation test and short-circuit test have been
performed at 50 Hz

IEXPOS = 6,4603 (%)

Indeed, the per-unit magnetizing current:
220
I. 85x 6300x100- 6.4603%

SPOS = 0.0063 (MVA)

LEXPOS = 0.065 (kW)
NP =1 because we have a Single-phase transformer.
XIX-C. WBCTRAN" to derive [AI. [RI or [R). [wL) of [Link] tranaformer - 12

IT =2 because the excitation test was made at the low-voltage winding, having
reference number 2.

IW = 2, assuming the low voltage winding is closest to the core.

IP = -1, thus requesting all possible output. Note that IEXPOS = 6,4603%,
hence no danger for near~singularity of the admittance matrix [AJ.

A total of NW =2 cards of this type will be used in this example.

Card K = 1 (l1V -winding card)
* VRAT (1) = .377/.[3 = .21766 (kV)
* The entry of R is not mandatory, since it can be calculated automatically
by BCTRAN. If one would prefer to work manually, following formula must
be used:

R (1) = .186 (Ohms)

Indeed. the short-circuit resistance:
R.1t - P .[Link].. _ 95 - .3711 Ohms
I~II 16 2
Thus. the resistance of the HV winding (1) equals .3711/2 = .186 Ohms.
* We further take BUSl = Hl and BUS2 = blank (connection to ground)
Card K = 2 (LV-winding card)
* VRAT (2) = .220/.[3 = .12702 (kV)
* The entry of R is not mandatory, since it can be calculated automatically
by BCTRAN. If one would prefer to work manually, following formula must
be used:

R(2) = .063 (Ohms)

The short-circuit resistance R.h = .3711 Ohms (see above) so the resistance
of the LV winding (2}equals:
.3711 (220)2
-2-* 377 - 0.063 Ohms

* BUSl = Ll and BUS2 = blank (connection to ground)

A total of NW * (NW-l}/2 =1 card of this type will be used in this example.

1=1

J = 2
XIX-C. "BCTRAH" to [Link]. [Al. [al or [al. [wLl of multi-phase tranaformer - 13

P12 = .10363 (kW)

The short circuit test was performed using 16A rather than the nominal HV
current Inom. Hence the value for the short-circuit losses should be modified
according to the following formula:

P ./1. ao.. - P .11." x ( -]--

1./[Link].. )2
./1 ...

where the index "nom" refers to nominal conditions and "m" refers to the
actual measuring conditions.
6300
S ince I sh •nOll = 377 = 16 .71 A
we find (16.71)2
1 6 - O,10363kW
c

P ./[Link].. - 0, 095x

ZPOS12 = 2,2994 (%)

z POS - 8.3 x 0.0063 xl00 - 2.2994

16 0.377 2

SPOS = .0063 (MVA)

ID = blank because this is a Single-phase transformer case
IL = 1 because we want the program to calculate the winding resistances out
of the short-circuit losses automatically

The supporting routine "BCTRAN" will calculate the magnetizing shunt resistance
(iron core loss) too. In order to verify the output. the user can check this
parameter very easily:

v2s 220 2
R ..olla - P - '65- 744 ,620hm
a... 10..
Note that EMTP calculates a value R-self = 747,01
Input data cards for the "BCTRAN" processing of this case then could appear
as follows:

eBEGIN NEW DATA CASE

--____________________________ a _______________________ -----------------------
e (input data correspond to excitation and short-circuit teats.
e performed on 13/02/84 on a 1-phase transformer )
C
C Power rating: 0.0063 KVA
C Voltage rating: 220/377 Volts
e Ezcitation loss.s: 65 W
C Ezcitation current: 1.85 A
C Short circuit losses: 95 W
C Short circuit current: 16 A
C Short circuit voltag.: 8.3 V
C -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACCESS MODULE BCTRAH
$ERASE

C -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
C Ezcitation data
C 3456789
C -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
2 50. 6.4603 0.0063 0.065 1 2 2-1
XIX-C. -BCTIIAN- to deri". [A]. [It] or [It]. [wL] of lIIulti-phaa. tranaformer - 14

1.21766 H1
2.12702 L1
cC Short
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
circuit data
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
1 2 .10363 2.2994 0.0063 1
BLANK LINE ENDING SHORT-CIRCUIT TEST DATA
$PUllCH
BLANK LINE ENDING bctran

b. output
co-ent card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 1. e data://B/TRArD/[Link]
Marker card preceding ·...wDITP data ca••• B!GIII WEW Jl,\TA CASE
r=-.t card. IIUMDCD - 3.
co-ent card. IIUMDCD - 4.
ee -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(input data [Link] to excitation and .hort-circuit t •• t ••
co-ent card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 5.
e perfo~ _ 13/02/84 _ a l-pha.. [Link] . . . r I
e
c-nt card.
-
IIUMDCD • 6.
c-nt card. JIUI'IDCJ) 7. e Power rating: 0.0063 IIIIA
cc-nt card. IIUMDCD • I. C Yol tage rating: 220/377 VOl U
c - n t card. JIUI'IDCJ) • 9. C Excitati_ 10.... : 65 W
c - n t card. IIUMDCD • 10. C Excitation current: 1.85 A
c - n t card. JIUI'IDCJ) • 11. e Short circuit 10.... : 95 W
c - n t card. IIUMDCD - 12. e Short circuit current: 16 A
c - n t card. IIUMDCD - U. e Short circuit voltage: '.3 Y
c - n t card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 14. e -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
canerat. trllftSfo . . . r (a).(L) or (A).(a). ACCESS IIODVl.! BCTRAN
Er••• all of 0 card. in the punch buffer. SEllASE
c - . t card. JIIIIIDCI) - 17. e -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
c - n t card. IIUMDCD - 11. e Eacitati_ data
c - n t card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 19. e ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
c - n t card. lIIJIIDCIJ - 20. e M567!9 12M54789 12M56719 12M56719 12M56789 12M56789 12M56789 12M56789
Excit. card. 2 5.00E+Ol 6.462+00 6.3OE-03 2 50. 6.4603 0.0063 0.065 1 2 2-1
Winding card. 1 2.11E-ol [Link]+OO "81 1.21766 Bl
Winding card. 2 1.27E-Ol [Link]+OO "1.1 2.12702 1.1
Excitat1_ t . . t _ f .... winding n _ r 2. Magnetizing ~ is placed aero. . winding"-r 2.
Pod tt_ .~ca zero .~ca CloJOad dalta
10.. (W) I~ca (per.,....t] Rating (IIIIA) I~ca (percent) . .ting [IIIIA) in
IIUMDCD - 24. e ------------------------------------------------------------------------
JIUI'IDCJ) • 25. e Short circui tdata
co-ent card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 26. e ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
co-ent card. JIUI'IDCJ) - 27.
e M56789 12M56789 12M56789 12M56789 12M567" 12M56719 12M56?" 12M56789
Short t . . t. I 2 1.0U-Ol 2.3OE+00 1 2 .10363 2.2994 0.0063
1 2 0.10363 2.29940 0.006 2.29940 0.006 0
Short t. •• t. o o [Link]+OO [Link]+OO IBIAIOC Lin DlDIIIG SIIO&T-CIIlCIIIT TEST Jl,\TA
ILOSS - 1
a •• [Link] . .tria value. [Link] froe load 10•••••
Shunt [Link] for representation of ezeltation los •••.
Place tha .hunt [Link] . . tri. aero•• winding 2 vith a-•• lf [~) • 7.47008966£+02 and [Link] (aha) • [Link]+OO
Branch card. vi th (A). (a) in "ida (SVIIITAGE. 11. fixed foraat are c .... ted next. II. . a SPIIIICII data card to . _ a copy of tha ••
an UlN1T6. !latria [A) is the inver•• inductance _tria in [l/henri •• ). _ . . . . . (II) 1& .... istance . . tria in (aha.).
Branch carda "ith (a). (wL) in vida (SVIIITAGE. 11. fixed foraat .... c ....ted next. II. . a SPIIIICII data card to . _ a copy of the.a
on UlNIT6. Radian frequency w corresponds to the input f~ l'ItEQ" 5.00000000E+Ol Hz.
_ _.t for flushing of punch buffer. IsPIIWCB
A [Link] of eo-col-. card i_g........ baing flushed [Link] buffer '011_.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567.901234567.9

C (+.+ ••• ) card. pmlcbed by aupport [Link] on 01-Peb-91 09.44.22 ( •••••• )

e ACCESS IIODUl.! BCTRAN
e SEIIASE
e e -------------------------------------------------------------------------
e e Excitation data
e e -----------------------------------------------_______ ---------------------
e e 3456789 123456789 12M5678' 12M56789 12M56789 12345678' 12M567119 12M5678
C 2 SO. 6.4603 0.0063 0.065 1 2 2
e 1.21766 Bl
e 2.12702 1.1
e e -------------------------------------------------------------------------
e e Short circuit data
e e -----------------------------------------------_______ ----------------------
e C 3456189 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 1234567.9 12345678
e 1 2 .10363 2.2994 0.0063
e BIN/)( LINE DlDIWG SHORT-CIRCUIT TEST Jl,\TA
SYIIITAG!. 1.
1Ll 747.00896590667
USE AR
lRl 866.71803330735 .18554656040922
21.1 -1485.197977718 0.0
2547.6262427514 .06318876613197
SYIIITAGE. O.
SUlIITS. -1..-1.
XIX-C. ·BCTRAH· to deri •• (Al. [Rl or [R]. (WL] ot [Link] tranatormer _ lS

USE RL
C ---------------- « ca. . ._rator ») ----------
SVnt'TACE ... 1..-
1L1 747.00896590667
USE Nt
1 866.71803330735 .18554656040922
2 -1485.197977718 0.0
2547.6262427514 .06318876613197
SVINTlIGE. O.
SUIUTS. -1 •• -1.
USE RL
C ---------------- « ca•• _rator ») -----------
SVINTAGE. 1. '
1L1 747.00896590667
USE Nt
1 866.71803330735 .11554656040922
2 -1485.197977718 0.0
2547.6262427514 .06318876613197
SVINTlIGE. O.
SIlKITS. -1 .• -1.
USE RL
C ---------------- « ca •• aeparator ») __________ _
SVINTAGE. 1.
lL1 747.00896590667
USE RL
SIlKITS. 0.50E+02 • O.
IBI .18554656040922 354.0518885064
2L1 0.0 206.40271389066
.06318876613197 120.45061844065
SVINTAGE. O.
_ITS. -1 •• -1.
USE RL
c ---------------- « case _rator ») -----------
SVINTIIGE. 1.
lL1 747.00896590667
USE RL
_ITS. 0.5OE+02 • O.
1 .18554656040922 354.0518885064
2 0.0 206.40278389066
.06318876613197 120.45061844065
SVINTAGE. O.
SIlKITS. -1. ~-1.
USE RL
c ---------------- « ca.. ._rator ») -----------
SVINTAGE. 1.
lL1 747.00896590667
USE RL
_ITS. 0.5OE.02 • O.
1 .18554656040922 354.0518885064
2 0.0 206.40271389066
.06318876613197 120.45061844065
$VINTAGE. O.
SUIIITS. -1. .-1.
USERL
C ---------------- « _ _ _ rator ») -------••••
••••••••• ( End of UnHT7 punched card_ as flushed by SPllllCII request ) ••• - •• -

Note: 1) The shunt resistances representing the excitation losses across winding
2 are added automatically.
2) The "SUNITS. -1.. -1." request is used to toggle back to the normal XOPT
and COPT values used further in the network.

XIX-C-3 Three-phase example

a. data setup

Consider the case of a three-legged core type three-phase transformer with

both primary and secondary winding WYE-connected. and with both STAR-pOints grounded
(YNynO). The other terminals are called BUS1_R. BUS1;...S. BUS1_T and BUS2_R. BUS2_S.
BUS2_T respectively. Further. following data were obtained by standard measurements
on this transformer (at 50 Hz):
XIX-C. wBCTRAN w to derive [Al. [al or [al. [wLl of multi-ph.a. tranaformer - 16

Power rating S 35. MVA

Voltage rating 132./11.05 kV

direct measurements:
Excitation losses 18.112 kW
Excitation current 2.39 A
Excitation voltage 11.01 kV
Short-circuit losses 192.53 kW
Short-circuit current 153.1 A
Short-circuit voltage 35.213 kV
homopolar measurements:
Excitation losses 115.325 kW
Excitation current 500. A
Excitation voltage 1.183 kV
Short-circuit losses 8.825 kW
Short-circuit current 70. A
Short-circuit voltage 2.86 kV
The values for the actual input parameters are derived hereafter:

NW =2 since again we have a 2-winding transformer

FREQ = 50. (Hz)

indeed all tests have been performed at 50 Hz.

IEXPOS = 0.1316 (%)

Because the direct excitation test was not performed under nominal
conditions, a current upgrading must be performed:

11.05)
1.-2.39 ( 11.01 -2.4074A

Converting this value to percent values results in

IEXPOS - 2.4074.1O- 3 x .J3x~~ .05 xl00 - 0.1316%

SPOS = 35. (MVA)

LEXPOS = 18.244 (kW)
Because the direct excitation test was not performed under nominal
conditions, an upgrading of the losses must be performed:

LEXPOS-18.1l2c~:~~r -18.244kW
XIX-C. -BCTRAH- to dar1 •• [A). [a) or [a). [wL) of ault1-ph•• e tranaforaer - 17

IEXZERO = 49.15 (%)

Because the homopolar excitation test was not performed under nominal
conditions, again a current upgrading must be performed:

I - 500 x 11.05 _ 898.81 A

o 3 ./3 x 1.183

In percent values this results in

IEXZERO- 898,81.10- 3 x J3x;~ .05 xlOO- 49.15%

Note that this is only half of the value, adviced by the "Rule of Thumb".
SZERO = 35. (MVA)
LEXZERO = 3353.93 (kW)
Upgrading to nominal conditions is necessary for the homopolar excitation
losses too:

LEX ZERO - 115.325 ( r;:. .

11.05 )2 - 3353.93kW
.y3xl.183

NP = 0: a true three-phase transformer

IT = 2: excitation tests were made from the low-voltage side (2)

IW = 2: the magnetizing branch should be placed across the low-voltage winding

(2)

IP = -1: we request both [A]-[R] and [R]-[uL] ouptut

A total of NW =2 cards of this type will be used in this example.

Card k = 1 (HV-winding)
VRAT = 76.21 (kV); line-to-ground value, because the winding is WYE-connected
(132././3>

The entry for R is not mandatory, but it can be derived easily:

R - ! 192530.2 _ 2.738 Ohm

•• 11 3 153.1
hence, 1
R.-
2 [Link] -1.369 Ohm
XIX-C. wBCTRAH w to deri •• [A). [a) or [R). [wL) of [Link] tranaformer - 18

Card k = 2 (LV-winding)
VRAT = 6.38 (kV); line-to-ground value, because the winding is WYE-connected
(11.05//3)

The entry for R is not mandatory, but it can be derived easily:

R - R (11.05)2 - 000959
2 1 132 .

The allocation of names to the winding terminals is as follows:

YNynO 132./11 .05kV

BUS1 BUS2 PHASE
BUS1-R BUS2-R B US1-R BUS2-R R

~~
BUSH BUSL
BUS1-S BUS2-S S
BUSH BUSL
B US1-T BUS2-T T
BUS1-T BUS1-S BUS2-T BUS2-S BUSH BUSL

Fig.2 : Clock-system declaration

A total of NW * (NW-l}/2 =1 card of this type is needed in this example:

1=1

J =2
P12 = 192.53 (kW)
The direct short-circuit test was performed under nominal conditions

ZPOS12= 26.691 {%}

ZPOSI2- 30~~~; x315:~ xl00- 26,691 %

The test was performed under nominal conditions

SPOS = 35. (MVA)

ZZER012 = 24.6213 (%)

2860 35
ZZER012 - 3x 24, 6213%
70 x 1322xl00 -
SZERO = 35. (MVA)

ID= 0 ; zero-sequence reactance can be calculated automatically (using positive

sequence load losses or short-circui t losses) • because this is a two-winding
transformer.
XIX-C. -BCTRAN- to derive [AI. [RI or [RI. [wLI o~ multi-phase transformer - 19

IL = 1; the winding resistance can. be calculated automatically (using posi-

tive-sequence short-circuit losses), because this is a two-winding
transformer and all short-circuit values are positive
Input data cards for the "BCTRAN" proceSSing of this case then could appear
as follows:

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

ACCESS I'tODULE BCTRAN
$ERASE
C II FRZO; IEXPOSI SPOS; LEXPOS; IEXZERO; szzao; LEXZEROHPITIWIP
2 50. .1311 35. 18.244 49.15 35. 3353.93 o 2 2-1
C k; VIlAT; Rl; lbusl: tbua2: Ibual: :bua2: :bual: :bua2:
1 76.21 BUSl RBUSH BUSl SBUSH BUSl TRUSH
C k; VIlAT; R2: .:buar: Ibus2: :busI: :bua2: :bu.i': :bua2:
2
C II
1 2
•
. 6.38
PIJ;
192.53
ZPOSIJ;
26.691
BUS2_RBUSL BUS2 SBUSL BUS2_TBUSL
SPOS: ZZZROIJ:
35. 24.6213
SHOI1IDIL
35. o 1
BLANK CARD TERHlHATE INPUT OF SHORT-CIRCUIT TEST DATA
$PtmCH
BLANK
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
b. output

c - . t cant. IIUIIDCD - 1. C elata: //B/TRAFO/1ICTJU\I'I3r .111

Marker can1 preceding . - DITP data cue. BIGIII IIEII DATA CASE
c - t card. IIUIIDCD - 3. C power rating: 35. MYA
c - . t cant. NUMIICD - 4. C VOltage rating: 132./11.05 IIV
c - n t cant. NUMIICD - 5. C direct ......u.~t.:.
c - t cent. IIUIIDCD - 6. e Excitation 1oe ••• 18.112 leW
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 7. e Eacltatlon current 2.39 A
c - . t cent. NUMIICD - 8. e Excitatlan voltage 11.01 lc'II
c - . t cant. IiUMDCD - 9. e .hort-circuit 1...... 192.53 leW
c - . t cant. NUMIICD - 10. e .hort-circuit currtlftt 153.1 A
c - n t cant. NUMIICD - 11. e .hort-circuit voltage 35.213 lc'II
c - . t cant. IIWUICll - 12. e~lar_...~U:
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 13. C Eaci taU on loe . . . 115.325 W
c - t cant. NUMIICD • 14. e excitation currtlftt 500. A
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 15. e excitation voltage 1.113 lc'II
c - n t cant. IIUIIDCD - 16. C .hart-clrcuit 10•••• 8.125 leW
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 17. C .hort-clrcui t current '70. A
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 18. C ahDrt-ci rcu1 t voltage 2.16 lc'II
_ r a t . tr_folWer IIl).IL) or (AI. (Il). ACCESS IIOIIUIZ IICTJU\I'I
Era •• ell of 0 calida in the pw>ch INffer. SERASE
c - . t cant. IIWUICll - 21. C I ntEOl lEXl'OSI Sl'Osl LEXPOSI IDZEIlOI SZEllol LEXZEIlOICPITIWIP
Excit. cant. 2 5.00E+01 1. 31E-01 3.S0E+Ol Z so. .1311 35. 11.244 49.15 35. 3353.93 0 2 2-1
c - t cant. IIWUICll - 23. e lei VltATI 1
III 1_111_211_111_211_111_21
w1nding cant. 1 7.62Z+01 [Link]+OO -aUS1.R-. 1 76.21 aUS1..usa aUS1 SBUSB BUS1 TaUSH
c - t cant. NUMIICD - 25. C lei ·VltATI Il2I IIN.ill_211_ill_211_ill_21
Winding cant. 2 [Link]+oo [Link]+OO -BUS2 R-. 2 [Link] BUS2 IUVSL, ausz SBUSL aus2 TaUSL
Excitation tnt _ fn. .,indlng n _ r 2 . · ~tizing i~"" 11 placed _croa. .,ind1hg _ r 2:-
'odti_ ._enca [Link] ~"" CI_..t delte
rroa To Load 10.. [W) I~ce (percent) Rating IIIVA) I..,..sanc:. lpercent] Rating IMIIII) in
c - t cant. IIUPIIICII - 27. Ie I I 'IJ I ZPOStJ I s!'OSl ZZEROlJ I SIlOfIIDIL
Short t.u. 1 2 1.93Z+02 2.67Z+01 1 2 192.53 26.691 35. 24.6213 35. 0 1
1 2 192.53000 26.69100 35.000 24.62130 35.000 0
Short teat. 0 0 0.001+00 0.001+00 IBLANIt CIUID TEIUIlllATE llCPUT or SBORT-ClIlCUIT TEST DATA
[Link] - 1
R•• [Link] .atria value. [Link]. frca load 10••••.
Shunt [Link]. for repreaentation of .xcitation 10•••••
Placa the .hunt rel1uanca .atria acro. . winding 2 .,ith [Link] lahIt) - 4.47446552Z+03 end lI..... t1O&l lahIt) - -2. 21891079E'03
Branch cant. "lth IA). (R) in "Ide ISVIIITAGZ. 11. 11_ fo~t are c .... t..t next. U•• a SPUNCB elata cant to . . . a copy of the••
an LUKIT6. Matrix IA) 11 the in_rae inductance .atrix in 11/henri•• ). _...... III) i . re.1Itance _trix in I - a ) .
Branch calida ..ith (II). ("L) in .,lde (SVIIITAGZ. 1). f i _ fo . . . t are Cl'Mt..t next. U. . a SPUNCB date cant to . . . a copy of thesa
on LUKIT6. Radian f.....,.....". " [Link] to the input f~.". ntEO - 5.000000001+01 Hz.
Ilequeat for fluahing of punch INffer. ISPUNCB
A lilting of eO-col.... cant l_ga. now being nua_ froa pw>ch INff.r foll_ ••

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

c <++ • • • • )
carda punched by aupport routine on 07-Feb-91 09.49.30 <•••••• )
e ACCESS MODULE IICTIlAII
C SEltASZ
eel PRzol I EXPOS I SPOSI LEXPOsl IEXZEIlol SZEllol LEXZEROIIPITIW
C 2 50. .1311 35. 18.244 49.15 35. 3353.93 0 2 2
C C kl VRATI III I
Ibusl11INo211 1N1111 lms2 11bual11INa21
C 1 76.21 BUS1 RBUSH IIUS1 saUSH &US1 TBUSB
C e kl VltATI R21 Ibuoillbuo211 busillbus211buaillbus21
e 2 6.38 BUS2_RBUSL BUS2_SBUSL [Link]
XIX-C. -8CTRAH- to deri.e [A). [I) or [I). [wL) of aulti-phaa. trenaformer - 20

C C I I PIJI zPOSIJI sPOsl ZZEltOIJI [Link]

C I 2 192.53 26.691 35. 24.6213 35. 0 1
C .LIUOC CARlI TEIIIIIIOITE INPUT OP SBORT-CIac\lIT TEST [Link]
SVINTACZ. 1.
1aUS2.....USL .... 74.4655159359
[Link] -2211.9107118382
"474.4655159359
[Link] -2218.910711382
-2211.9107118382
.... '4.4655159359
USI!!M
[Link] ....USH 2.4311266503345 1. 369233463069
2.US2:....USL -29.0401SD711715 0.0
361.43763967638 .0095961038351
[Link] .06629545237001 0.0
-.7919011530511211 0.0
2.4311266SD3345 1.369233463069
[Link] -.79190853051128 0.0
23.9ODD8SD59572 0.0
-29.0401SD711715 0.0
361.43763967638 .0095961038351
[Link] .06629545237001 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
.06629545237001 0.0
-.79190853058211 0.0
2.43112&6503345 1.369233463069
[Link] -.71190853058211 0.0
23.9ODDBSD59572 0.0
-.7919085305828 0.0
23.9ODDBSD59572 0.0
-29.0401SD711715 0.0
361. 43763967638 .00959610311351
SVINTACI!!. O.
_ITS. -1. .-1.
USE RL
C ---------------- « caae .eparator » ) -----------
SVINTAGI!!. 1.
lBUSZ ....USL ....74 ...655159359
2BUS2:[Link] -2211.91071113112
..474 ...655159359
[Link] -2211. 9107118311Z
-22111.9107811382
4474.4655159359
US! RL
_ITS. [Link]!+02 • O.
[Link] ....USH 1.369233463069 276371. 46702425
zauSZ:....USL 0.0 23125.11931411548
.0095961038351 1936.0083753803
[Link] 0.0 -137608.3908058
0.0 -11519.74302843
1.369233463069 276371.46702425
...[Link] 0.0-11519 . 7430Z843
0.0 -964.31173575831
0.0 23125.119314115411
.00959610311351 1936.00837531103
[Link] 0.0 -137608.390110511
0.0 -11519.74302843
0.0 -137608.390110511
0.0 -11519.74302843
1.369233463069 276371.46102425
[Link] 0.0 -11519.743021143
0.0 -964.3117)575831
0.0 -11519.74302843
0.0 -964.3873515831
0.0 23125.89314115411
.0095961038351 1936.0013753803
SVINTACI!!. O.
_ITs. -1..-1.
USE RL
C --------------- « cas. . . . .[Link] ») -----------
---------( End of LUXIT7 punched cardl as fluabedby SPUNCH reque.t )-------

Note: 1) Observe the mutually coupled shunt resistances representing the excitation
losses across winding 2. Although these values are calculated by EMTP,
resul ts can be verified easily:

direct: 11010 2
R"..d- 18112 -6693

homopolar: 3x 1183 2
R ... 1t - 115325 - 36.41
XIX-C. -BCTRAN- to dar1.a [A). [R) or [R). [wL) of .[Link] tranaformer - 21

Then it follows:
1
R. - 3(R ... h + 2R ... ct ) - 4474

2) In this example, the homopolar short-circuit losses can not be covered

only by winding resistance losses. Hence additional losses can be confined
to a single resistance, to be placed between BUSH (star point of HV-side)
and ground. The value of this resistance is calculated as follows:

153.09)2
P .[Link].. - 8.825 ( 70/3 - 379.94kW
Indeed, we had to upgrade the losses, since the homopolar short circuit
test was not performed under nominal. conditions.

Psh,extra = Psh,hom - (both under nominal conditions)

Psh,dir
= 379.94 - 192.53 = 187.41 kW

R 187410 -0.889 Ohm

.h.u/ra - (3x 153.09)2
3) The "SUNITS, -1., -1." reques t is used to toggle back to the normal XOPT
and COPT values used further in the network.

XIX-C-4 Applications of "BCTBAN" OUtput

TYPE-1-2-3 punched output can be used as branch cards immediately, thus

representing the transformer. This is explained in more detail in Section IV-B.
One should not forget to add shunt resistances (representing the excitation or
homopolar short-circuit losses) manually, however. Further, one should obey the
following rules, when inserting the punched card output in an electrical network
simulation:
- [A]-[R] option; value of XOPT without importance
SVINTAGE, 1
USE AR
C punched output cards: A in Henry-i,
R in Ohms and interpreted the same.
SVINTAGE, 0
SUNITS, -1., -1. {toggle back to XOPT and COPT values that where in use in the
rest of the network
- [R]-[uL] option: set XOPT = FREQ (see point 4) on the miscellaneous data card.
(FREQ = value of rated frequency at which tests were performed)
SVINTAGE, 1
USE RL
XIX-C. "BCTRAH" to deri •• [A}. [R} or [R}. [wL) of multi-phase transformer - 22

C punched output cards: L and R read in Ohms, but interpreted in Henries

and Ohms respectively. This explains a factor of
about 3.18 E-3 difference between left and right
hand side.

$VINTAGE, 0

Use this [R]-[u..L] option only if the per unit excitation current is sufficiently
large. In case of a near-zero excitation current, the admittance matrix [A] =
[L]-l is near -singular and hence can't be inverted to produce an [L] matrix. The
[A]-[R] notation should be used in such case.

At this stage, non-linearities (such as saturation and hysteresis) can be added

to the linear model, as obtained by BCTRAN, whenever necessary. In such case,
however, it is mandatory to specify [Link] = 0, since otherwise the magnetizing
inductance will be taken into account twice.
XIX-D. MCHANCE SWITCH" to Convert Former SVitched-R.L Elements to Type-99. 98 - 1

XIX-D. "CHANGE SWITCH" to Convert Former Swltched-R,L Elements to

Type-99, 98

Section II-A-42 explains the reason for the "CHANGE SWITCH" feature in considerable
detail. and that introduction will not be repeated here. Nor will there be any
explanation of former switched-R and switched-L element formats. which can be found
in Rule Books printed earlier than the 1982 removal of such elements.

Following the "CHANGE SWITCH" request. the user can place an old EMTP data in its
entirety. if this is most convenient. What the program. does is discard all input
cards through the first blank card (for a complete. data case, this would be the
blank card ending branch cards). Then it reads cards that are assumed to be switch
cards, until the blank card terminating these. All later cards. through the
following "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" separator card. are also ignored. So. it is only
switch cards that are considered. and only the switched-R and switched-L elements
among these are actually processed. Other switches are ignored. This illustrated
by the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC-14. which contains informative comment
information:

SECIK KEW DATA CASE

C 2nd of 2 subcases converts old Type-91. 92. or 93 to pseudo-nonlinear.
CHANCE SWITCH
KODEl ItODE2 1.0 ( Series R-L-C will be discarded. of course
91LEFT IIICHT 0.3E6 (From p. 20 example of 1980 Rule Book) 1
0.0 300.
0.3 200.
0.6 150.
1000. 150.
9999
91 KODEl ItODE2 COPYL COPYR .25E6 ( Final card from p. 20 of 1980 Rule Book
BLAKK card ending progrsm branch cards. This is flag that switches follow.
C Type-92 switched-a element follows (to be con•• rted):
92JDAYA LMOHA 8.5 3.E5 3.5E5 3
C Type-93 switched-L element follows (to be converted):'
93SEKDA KEUTRL •• 2 2.5 0.7 3.3 1
BLAKK card terminating progr. . switch cards
BECIK KEW DATA CASE
$PUKCH (Flush the punched-card output of [Link] pseudo-nonlinear elements
BLAKK

Punched output includes the original switch cards on comment cards as documentation
for the Type-98 and Type-99 elements that follow. Other comment cards label the
new data. This is illustrated by the beginning of the punched output from BENCHMARK
DC-14:

fterk.r cerd preceding new ~ dete ce... IIEGI" WEW DAT~ CASE
C_nt card. 1nMlJCD. &3. C 2nd of 2 ."...,.••• [Link] old Type-9l. 92. or 93 to p....do-nonlln•• r.
convert .wltehed-R.L card. to pseudo-nonlinear. ~GE SWITCH
Thi. code wiil reed date typeo 91-Ti. . -Dependant R. [Link]•• and 93-SwitchBd Inductor. S"ch old data will be con. . rtad.
and punched as paeudo-nonl1near [Link] to ... t .adarn EMTP requlr.-entsa
Type-91: piectlVb. Unear reolotor .1LEn RIGHT 0.3E6
CINIracterlotlc. 0.0 lCD. 0.0 lCD.
[Link]. 0.3 200. 0.3 200.
[Link]. 0.1 150. 0.1 150.
CharacterloUc. 1000. 150. 1000. 150.
[Link]. 9999 9999
Type-91: ptectlVtoe Unear restotor 91 "ODEI "ODU COPTL COPYl! • 25E6
C....,nt card. 1fUPIDCD· 77. C Type-92 .witched-It .1 ...nt foll0w0 Ito be converted):
c.-.mt cerd. InIIIDCD. 78. C 3451789012345678901234567890123456789012345178901234517890
Type-92: .witched [Link] 92JD~Y~ LMO"~ 8.5 [Link] 3.5E5 3
C....,nt cerd. IItIMDCD· 80. C Type-93 owitched-L el . . .nt followo Ito be converted):
Type-93: SWitched inductance 93SENDA "EUTRL 4.2 2.5 0.7 3.3 1
Reque,t for [Link] of punch buffer. SPUNCH {Flush the punched-card output of equivalent [Link]-nonllnear el..ent.
XIX-D. "CHANGE SWITCH" to Convert Former Switched-R.L Element. to Type-99. 98 - 2

J\ lhUng of80-colWIII card l_ga. now beIng [Link] frOlO punchbuffar fallow •.

123456789012)45678901234567890123456789012)4567890123456789012)456789012)456789

C 91L1!" IIlCRT 0.3E6

91L1!" IIJCRT 3333.
C YSTMT
0.3!6
C TIl In •• c. AITII) In 01....
e 0.0 300.
0.0 300.
C 0.3 200.
0.3 200.
e 0.6 150.
0.6 150.
c 1000. 150.
1000. 150.
C "99
"'09
-:

••••••••• ( End of IJJNIT7 puncheel card ••• fIlla_by SPUNCH [Link] ) •••••••
XIX-E. ·OLD TO HEW ZHO· to update pre-"H39." ZnO data card. - 1

XIX-E. "OLD TO NEW ZNO" to update pre-"M39." ZnO data cards

Section II-A-23 explains access to this supporting program by means of an "OLD TO

NEW ZNO" request. Only those with Zno branch cards predating "M39." program
versions of the spring and summer of 1984 need be concerned,. of course. Old Zno
branch cards are easily recognized, since data is split into two or more isolated
groups. A Type-92 nonlinear element just reserved space for the ZnO arrester, and
it involved a dummy characteristic. Parameters of the Zno itself were read from
special data cards immediately before the output-variable (usually node-voltage)
specification cards of Section XII.
The "OLD TO NEW ZNO" special request is to be followed by the complete, old data
case. The conversion routine deals with variable classes, counting blank cards
that terminate these, so be careful if other than a complete data case is supplied.
As an illustration, consider the 2nd subcase of BENCHMARK DC-14. There is no
printout at all while the program is executing. except for any comment cards. When
the ZnO data conversion is complete. there will be a one-line message to this
effect. as shown by the following output:
C 1 234 5 6 7
C 34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456
C ------------------------------------------------l---~---------------------
Request to convert old Zno data to new formats. 10LD TO NEW ZNO { Spe
Done with ZnO conversion in "SATURA" of overlay 24.
Timing figures characterizing central processor (CP) solution speed. ------

It is the user's responsibility to pick up the punched cards (via $PUNCH request).
since otherwise, there is no output.
XIX-F. DATA BASE HODUl.E - 1

XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE

IX-F-l. PURPOSE AND APPLICATIONS

Already in 1983, EMTPenhancements were made to allow the user to modularize

network sections. Any repetitive connection of certain network elements can be
seen as such a module. The more a certain grouping of network elements is repeated
through the network, the more efficient the usage of modules will be.

The network section within the module is fully described in what is called a
template. This template uses fixed values in combination with module arguments,
pretty much in the same format as a normal network would be represented for EMTP
purposes. Details on both argument definitions and creation of templates will be
discussed further in this section.
Such module can have fixed values in combination with variables or arguments,
referring to both numerical values and node names. For numerical data, some of the
parameters in such module can have fixed values, whereas other values should be
treated as parameters. Parameter values will be allocated when referring to the
module in question. This is done by the extended and powerful SINCLUDE command.
On the other hand, node names always should have unique names throughout the network
under study. This can be obtained either by user allocation (extended SINCLUDE
command). either by automatic name generation (treatment of dummy node names).

Possible examples of usage of such modules :

- generator, followed by subtransient reactance. The connecting names of this
module with the rest of the network under simulation should be under user control.
Internal node names could receive an automatically generated node name. The value
of the subtransient reactance can be either fixed or treated as a parameter.
- frequency-dependent cable- or overhead line models (JMARTI or SEMLYEN models).
In this case, one can assume fixed values for the actual fitting parameters. But
node names, which are the connection between the model and the rest of the network
under study, better can be declared as arguments of the module.
- The usage of "nested" includes is possible, too. The situation of a modularized
substation, including a module containing generator and subtransient reactance
and another module taking the transformer and busbars into account is a typical
example using the feature of "nested includes".

After a while, one will end wi th a lot of modules. Then it will become difficult
to have an overview of all existing models. Further it will become difficult to
remember the meaning and the number of arguments per module. Most of these problems
can be handled by using strong standardisation in module naming. Further, usage
of a relational data base (such as DBASE III) would be useful.

The input format for the .supporting routine "DATA BASE MODULE" contains two
different sections:
an "argument declaration list"
a "template"
XIX-F. DATA BASE ttODULE - 2

"Arguments" are parameter names. There are three types of arguments:

- named arguments referring to node names;
- named arguments referring to numerical values;
- dummy arguments (should always refer to internal node names of the module).

The "argument declaration list" defines whether an argument is named or dummy.

For named arguments, further specification is needed in order to make the difference
between node name parameters or numerical parameters. Hence the named arguments
are treated different from the dummy arguments. Both will be discussed separately.

The named arguments will have a value allocated through the. SINCLUDE argument
list (sections I-D-19 and I-K). Currently, the number of named arguments in such
list is limited to 35. The named arguments can be defined in any arbitrary order
and a mixed sequence of node name arguments and numerical arguments is allowed.
But the sequence of arguments in. the argument declaration list of the template
should correspond to the sequence of allocated values and node names in the SINCLUDE
argument list. Further, it is the user's responsibility to guarantee the uniqueness
of node names throughout the entire network under simulation. This is rather easy
to obtain for connection points but it becomes extremely cumbersome for internal
node names within the module. For internal node names (i.e. nodes inside the module,
without any link to the rest of the network), the feature of "dummy arguments" can
assist the user in obtaining unique node names allover the network under study.

The allocation of names to dummy arguments is fully automized. so that the

number of dummy arguments basically is without any limit. The generation procedure
for naming is based on a user defined 3-digit root name, followed by a. three-digit
serialization number. So at first glance the number of dummy arguments is. limited
to 1.000. But via the SDUMMY command, the user is able to modify the three-digit
root name to another string. Just as the named arguments, the dummy arguments need
to be specified in the argument declaration list, in any arbitrary order. But
unlike the named arguments, the dummy arguments don't need to have a value allocated
in the SINCLUDE argument list since as explained before, dummy arguments will
receive a serialized name automatically.

A "template" is nothing else then the EMTP input representation of the module
or network section under study. Hence all rules applicable to the normal EMTP input
format are also applicable to this templates. The only difference is that in some
places, arguments (parameter names) rather than actual values are used. This means
that there is a. combined use of both actual values and arguments. Further. the "/
card" feature is in use (see section I-J: EMTP data sorting by class).

Let's discuss the input rules in more detail now.

IX-F-2. INPUT DATA-DECK STRUCTURE

The input file for the supporting routine "DATA BASE MODULE" should show
following card sequence:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE --NOSORT--

2. DATA BASE MODULE request card
3. SERASE card
4. argument declaration list
XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 3

(ARG, NOM, DUM)

5. template
(/BRANCH, /SWITCH, /SOURCE, •.•• )
6. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE special request card
7. Comment cards
(number of comment cards depends on KASEND-parameter of STARTUP file)
8. $PUNCH card
9. BLANK card teminatingall cases

Let's discuss the input cards one by one now, in more detail:

1.. "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" special request card, specifying the NOSORT option,
somewhere on the very first .input card (the position of the word NOSORT is
unimportant). This card is always used to indicate the beginning of a new program
run. Hence this special request card can be thought of as a case separation
marker.

2. "DATA BASE MODULE" request card. This special-request card transfers program
control to the supporting routine that searches the user's raw data for the
character strings of all arguments of interest and establishes numerical pointers
for all arguments in order to speed up later usage with the empowered SINCLUDE
command, allowing the transfer of arguments ( see sections I-D-19 and I-K).

3. SERASE card. This card is used to clear the buffer that holds punched card
output (see section I-D-17).

4. Argument declaration list (ARG, NOM, DUM). The argument declaration list defines
whether an argument is named or dummy. For named arguments, further specification
is needed in order to make the difference between node name parameters or
numerical parameters. Let t S discuss the declaration of all three argument types
separately:

4a. Named arguments .re!entng to node names.

Declaration (free format):

ARG namel, name2, •••

Remarks :
- The sequence in this argument list later should correspond to the sequence
of allocated values in the SINCLUDE argument list.
- In order to avoid a "length mismatch error", the length of the argument name
must be equal to the length of the allocated name specified in the SINCLUDE
argument list. In order to adjust the argument length, following symbols can
be used:
"_" (underscore) in the argument name
"II" (pound sign) in the allocated name
- Automatic phase indication is possible too. In that case, only the first
five digits of the name field are free for parametric usage. The sixth (utmost
right) digit remains fixed in the template (see point 5. further in this
section)
XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 4

4b. Named arguments referring to numericaL vaLues.

Declaration (free-format):
ARG name!, value!, value2,
NUM value!, value2
Remarks:
- The sequence in this argument list later should correspond to the sequence
of allocated values in the SINCLUDE. argument list. Further, all named arguments
referring to numerical values should likewise be declared in a NUM-list. The
order of arguments in the NOM-list is of no importance. however.
In order to avoid a "length mismatch error", the length of the argument name
must be larger then (or equal. to) the length of the allocated value specified
in the SINCLUDE argument list. In order to adjust the argument length,
following symbol can be used:
"_" (underscore) in the argument name
With respect to the E-format usage for reals, it is advised to use real
numbers with decimal point in the SINCLUDE argument. list.

4c. Dummy arguments should always refer to internal node names of the module.
Declaration (free-format.):
ARG namel, value 1 , ••••
NUM value!,
DUM dummy!, dummy2, ••••
Remark:
- Dummy argument names DON'T appear in the ARG-list, nor the NOM-list.
Consequently no value will be allocated via the SINCLUDE argument list.
- The sequence of dummy names in the DUM-declaration list is purely arbitrary.
The name allocation will be generated automatically, based upon a three-digit
root name, followed by a unique three-digit serialization number.
- In order to avoid a "length mismatch error", it is important that the argument
name contains six digits. In order to adjust the argument length, following
symbol can be used:
"_" (underscore) in the argument name
5. Template (/BRANCH, ISWITCH. ISOURCE ••••• ).
A "template" is nothing else then the EMTP input representation of the module
or network section under study. Hence all rules applicable to the normal EMTP
input format are also applicable to this template. The only difference is that
in some places, arguments (parameter names) rather than actual values are used.
Further, the "I" card feature is in use (see section I-J: EMTP data sorting by
class). The separator cards must be specified with the reserved symbols (BRANCH,
SWITCH, SOURCE) to recognize the place where the data module information has
to be copied to.
e.g. all template information mentioned under IBRANCH will be placed before the
separator card:
BLANK card ending BRANCH cards
e.g. all template information mentioned under /SOURCE will be placed before the
separator card:
BLANK card ending SOURCE cards
XIX-F. DATA BASE HODt1LE - 5

Arguments should be carefully placed in the template. though:

5a. Named arguments referring to node names.

In the template. arguments referring to node names should be placed left-adjusted
in the zone reserved for such variables in normal EMTP input cards. It is
important to remark that the allocated node names will be left-adjusted in the
zone defined by the argument name in the template.

Automatic phase indication is possible too. In that case. only the first five
digits of the name field are free for parametric usage. The sixth (utmost
right) digit remains fixed in the template.

5b. Named arguments referring to numerical values.

In the template. arguments referring to numerical values should be placed
right-adjusted in the zone reserved for such variables in normal EMTP input
cards. It is important to remark that the allocated value will be right-adjusted
in the zone defined by the argument name in the template. With respect to the
E-format usage for reals, it is advised to use real numbers with decimal point
in the SINCLUDE argument list.

5c. Dummy arguments, always referring to internal node names of the module.
In the template. dummy arguments referring to node names should be placed in
the zone reserved for such variables in normalEMTP input cards . Since by
definition. the length of argument name and allocated name are both equal to
six, the positioning of names remains unchanged.

6. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE.

7. Comment cards.
This combined case separation marker is used as a flag, indicating that the
data card input for themodularization is terminated here. The number of comment
cards needed is controlled by variable KASEND in the "startup" file.

B. SPUNCH card.
This special request command is used to flush the contents of the punch buffer.
which now contains numerical pointers for all arguments used in the template.
as well as the template itself.
The usage of these pointers will speed up later processing of the template via
the empowered SINCLUDE command (see section I-D-19). certainly when actual
values and names should be allocated to the arguments .

9. BLANK card terminating all cases.

1X-[-3. EXAMPLE

Benchmarks documenting this usage are: DC36 (template creation) and DcB (usage
of the created punch file). Nested usage is explained in DC5B. The best way to
discuss the possibilities of this powerfull tool is to illustrate its usage for
a simple example, which represents a 6-valve thyristor bridge used in HVDC stations.
The electrical scheme of this circuit is represented in Fig.l.
XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 6

,- '200

I0Il3
RESIS 1.0

'\.l1S

Fig. 1: Sc hematic diagram of the HVDC bridge

represented in the template
Arguments : NODE. MINUS. PLUS. fiRE, RESIS, CAPACI
Dummy: M1D1, 1.1102, 1.1103, M1D4. 1.1105. 1.1106

a) Following file is an example of the corresponding input needed for the DATA
BASE MODULE supporting routine.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ---- NOSORT
DATA BASE MODULE
$ERASE
AJlG, _IIODE, _KIIWS, _PLUS, _FIRE,RESIS,CAPACI
HUH,RESIS,CAPACI
DUM, KID1, KID2, KID3, KID., __HIDS, __KID6
/BtWfCH - -
C3 Begin with anode reactors and parallel resistors (6 paira):
..ODEA KID1 RESIS CAPACI
-IIODEA-KID1 1.0
-IIODEB-KID3 RES IS
-IIODEB-KID3 1.0
- ..ODEC-KIDS RESIS
-HODEC-KIDS 1.0
:"PLUS KID. RESIS
PLUS KID. 1.0
-PLUS-KID6 RES IS
-PLUS-KID6 1.0
-PLUS-KID2 RESIS
-PLUS-HID2 1.0
C3-"[Link] the snubber circuits. across valves and anode reactors:
IIODEA KIIWS 1200. 0.1
:NODEB:KIIWS 1200. 0.1
_HODEC_KlNUS 1200. 0.1
_IIODEA_PLUS 1200. 0.1
HODEB PLUS 1200. 0.1
-NODEC-PLUS 1200. 0.1
C3- Nextcome the valves:
/SWITCH
11 KID1 KIIWS FIRE2
11-KID3- KINUS -FIRE.
11-KIDS-KINUS -FIRE6
11-HID.- HODEA -FIRES
11-KID6-IIODEB -FIRE1
11-I1ID2-NODEC ::::FIRE3
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C Just a comment card
$PUNCH ( Flush critical portion ot answers tro. preceding tirst subcas.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

When inspecting this file, please note the following:

XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 7

- BEGIN NEW DATA CASE; free-format NOSORT - declaratie !!

- $ERASE card to flush the punch buffer.
- Automatic phase indication in the template; "_NODE" is only 5 digits long, but
in the template, the node names are " NODEA" , " NODEB" ," NODEC". etc. In these
names, only the first 5 digits are V-ariable, the last digit (phase indicator)
is fixed. The same remark applies for "_FIRE", used in names" _FIRE1". "_FIRE2" ,
etc. Remark that dummy names never can have automatic phase indication.
- Because "_MID1", "_MID2". etc. are internal node names (Le. without any
connection toward the outside of the module ) they could be declared as dummy
argument. But in this case. the length of the argument name must be set equal
to 6. Hence note the use of "_" (underscore).
- Arguments referring to node names (be it named or dummy) are always positionned
left-adjusted in the template; NODE, MINUS. PLUS. FIRE.
_MID1._MID2._MID3._MID4._MID5._MID6. - - - -
Arguments referring to numerical values are positionned right-adjusted in the
template; RES IS , CAPACI.
- Some of the parameters have fixed values. whereas other numerical values get
their value allocated through a named argument; RESIS. CAPAC!.
- Only one comment card needed, since KASEND =1 in the startup file used here.
b) Following is an extract of the output of supporting routine "DATA BASE MODULE":

A listing of SO-column card images now being flushed from punch buffer follows .
...............................•.....................•.......••..•••.••........
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
...................•.......................................•..•........••....•.
IWID 2 2 2 2 33 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11
11 12 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 1617 17 18 18 19 1921 21 21 22 22 22 23
23 23 24 24 24 25 25 .25 26 26 26
IWIG 1 5 6 -1 1 -1 1 5 -3 1 -3 1 5 -5 1 -5 3 5 -4 3 -4 3 5 -6 3
-6 3 5 -2 3 -2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 4 -1 2 4 -3 2
4 -5 1 4 -4 l' 4-6 1 4-2
XBEG 3 28 39 9 3 9 328 9 3 9 3 28 9 3 9 3 28 9 3 9 3 28 9 3
9 3 28 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 9 65 3 9 65 3 9
65 3 9 65 3 9 65 3 9 65 3
KENO 7 32 44 14 7 14 7 32 14 7 14 7 32 14 7 14 8 32 14 8 14 8 32 14 8
14 8 32 14 8 14 7 14 7 14 7 14 7 14 7 14 7 14 14 69 8 14 69 8 14
69 8 13 69 8 13 69 8 13 69 8
XTEX 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1'1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 111 1 111
/BRMCR
C3 BEGIN WITH ANODE REACTORS AND PARALLEL RESISTORS (6 PAIRS):
_WODEA.-KID1 RESIS CAPAC I

11 KID2 WODEC PIRE3

SEer uaer-aupplied header carda follow. 12-sep-88 14.33.22
[Link], KINUS. PLUS. FIRE. RUIS. CAPACI
[Link] - -
DUM. KID1. KID2. KID3. KID4. KID5. KID6
••••-;;••• ( End ofLUNIT7punchedcarda""';a fluahed by SPOMCH requeat ) •••••••
XIX-F. DATA BASE I10DULE - 8

Remark that besides the entire template.• the punch buffer now contains numerical
pointers for all arguments used in the template. Lets discuss the meaning of all
five these pointing vectors:

KARD : This can be thought of as the record number of the template. Remark that
some card numbers (e.g. 1. 20 •••• ) seem to be missing. In effect. these
card numbers refer to so-called "I"-cards (e.g. card l=/branch. card
20=/switch, etc).

KARG : Named arguments have a positive value for KARG. whereas. dummy arguments
show negative KARG-values. Positive KARG values refer to the. position of the
current argument name in the ARG declaration list,. whereas negative KARG
values refer to the position of the current argument name in the DUM declaration
list.

KBEG : First position, taken by the current argument name on the specified card
in the template.

KEND : Last position. taken by the current argument name on the specified card
in the template.

KTEX : Flag. indicating whether the specified argument refers to a numeric value
(0) or a node name (1).

Once created, it is important NOT to though the created punch file again. Even
simple insertion of comment lines would ruin. the pointer setup.

c) Next data set illustrates how this module named \WSM/[Link] then should be
used in network simulations:

F1RE2
'2110 ,.. f'IIIf;6

0.'

'.0 '.0

IOCIICIloO

JICHODII

;ooa,c

FlIES 1"11£. 1"11£3

0.' 0..' 0.'

X'lZ52'

'.0 '.0 5000. '.0

PUIS

n,.2: Allocation of argument values ( e _ - n;.• )

DUM-list AAG-list
MID' = XYZ520 NODE =ACNOD
101102 = XYZ52' FIRE =FIRE
MID3 = XYZ522 MINUS =MINUS
MID4 = XYZ523 PLUS =PLUS
MID5 = XYl524 RES IS =5000.
MID6 = XY2525 CAPACI=3.
XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 9

BEGIHHEW DATA CASE

$PREFIX. \WSH/
$SUFFIX. • PCH
.005 •• 0
1 -1 1 1 1 -1
5 5 20 20
TACS HYBRID
99 FIREl - TIMEX
99 FIRE2 - TIMEX
99 FIRE3 -TIMEX
13FUE
98 FIRE452+t1HITY 1. o. o. TIMEX
98 PIRE552+t1HITY 1. o. O. TIMEX
98 PIRE652+t1HITY 1. o. o. TIMEX
BLAHK card encls all TACS data
C
C H.r. the root n ... 1 ••• t to XYZ and the off •• t 1•••t to 519 • •0 the numb. ring of the
e dummy node n .... starts at number 520.
e
$DUHHY .XYZ519
C
C By_.an. ofth. tolloving$IHCLUDE requ•• t. [Link] 1. includ.d
C Par the [Link] "PCH". the command $SUFFIX va. i ••u.d in the beginning of this progr...
C
$IHCLUDE. POHSK. ACHOD. 'MlNUS. [Link]. 'FIRE. 5000 •• 3.0
/BRANCH
MINUS 1. {1 Ohm resistance to ground
BLANK card encling BRANCH card.
BLANK card anding SWITCH card.

When inspecting this file, please note the following:

- SPREFIXand SSUFFIX cards are used to set the working directory and default
extension of the file name to be included. Remark that the sequence:
SPREFIX, \WSM/
SSUFFIX, .PCH
SINCLUDE, PONSK, ACNOD, NMINUS,NNPLUS, NFIRE, 5000., 3.0
would be equivalent with following sequence:
SINCLUDE, \WSM/[Link], ACNOD, NMINUS, NNPLUS, NFIRE, 5000., 3.0
- The SINCLUDE option internally will be interpreted as the dynamic opening of the
specified file, and then replace the arguments by their actual values or names
(see sections I-D-19 and I-K). Hence this feature only works on those computers
and/or operating systems that allow dynamiC file opening. Contact program
maintenance if there is doubt about this possibilities for your computer system
and/or possibilities to emulate this feature. In our example, this allocation
will have following consequences (order specified in the ARG-list):
ARG, NODE, MINUS, PLUS, FIRE, RESIS, CAPACI
SINCLUDE, filename, ACNOD, aMINUS, NNPLUS, aFIRE, 5000., 3.
- Note the sequence as well as the length of the allocated values. Both should
agree with the the argument specifications in the input file for the DATA BASE
MODULE supporting routine.
- The SDUMMY card can be used to reset both the root name and the initial serialization
number for dummy node names as they are specified in the STARTUP file (veriable
TEXNAM). In our example, this will have following consequences (order specified
in the DUM-list):
$ DUMMY , XYZ5i9
DUM, __MIDi. __MID2, MID3, MID4, MID5, MID6
node names: XYZ520. XYZ52i , XYZ522. XYZ523. XYZ524 , XYZ525
XIX-,.. Il1c'~1\ BASE HODULE - 10

Note that specifying TEXNAM = XYZ519 (STARTUP file) would have the same effect.
In such case, one can ommit the $DUMMY specification.

d) Finally, an extract of the output of the resulting transient simulation will

be printed (see Fig.2).
- . . .,ith dbk fUe CClDSE) • .I, 1119 0 57 3991
Done copying 100Mr carda beck to top coo
1135).
( 0 0 0 ) Done .,ith or-card .orting by data c1a... _ b a r that the .DUrcB fUe _ a r . dlffarent froe interpreted lnPln data.
Alternative Trandenc. progr_ CATP). Apollo tr_Iatlon. COpyrigl>t 1914. V. . 11.,.....ed only through IZC CIt.V. LInIVan . . . . lgl_l.
Date Cdd_th-rr) and ti_ of day Chh._ ••• 1 0 12-sap-11 14.30.18 _ of the dbk plot flle. i f any. b: P~ •• P\A
Par 1nforaetion ........ult tha copyrighted ATP E!ITP Rule Book publbhad by IZC In JUly. 1987. La.t _jor progr_ update: llay. 191e
Total length of 01A8CClff. table. 0 59770 IJrTEGER _rda. "VARIII'" Lbt Sbe. foll_: 214 255 425 42 2125
34 595 1487 53 136 42 50 4250 17 700 34 3 4 1600 660 100 150 3400 3 400 42 42

[Link] Interpretation of Input data carda. I Input data card l_ga. are . _ bal_. all eo col ...... character by charecter
o 1 234 5 671
012345671901234567190123456789012345671901234567190123456789012345678901234567190

c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 1. C data,[Link]

llarlcer card protCllding . - E!ITP data caae. 8JIGIII II'DI MTA CASI:
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 6. C
c:o..ent card.
c:o..ent card.
"i.c. data.
JrUIIDCJI 0 7.
JrUIIDCJI 0 • •
5.0001-03 4.0001:+00 0.0001:+00
C SPREFIX.

.005
'-I
C eSUFFIX • • PCB
4.0
"i.c. data. 1 -1 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 0 1 -1 1 -1
PrlntDUt : 5 5 20 20 0 0 5 5 20 20
1:1ectric ... ~rk. too. Bolt TACS data flrat ••• TACS IIYBIlIU
F....-foraet TACS .uppl_tal variable daf1nad. 99 FIUl 0 TtllEX
Free-foraat TACS .uppl_ta1 variable daflnad. 99 FlRE2 • TllIEX
Fr. .-foraet TACS .uppl..antal variable daf1nad. 99 FIRE3 0 TllIEX
TACS .DUree. 0.0001.00 0.0001:+00 0.0001:+00 13~
TAeS .uppl_tal devlee type 52. 9. FIRE452+UJrITY 1. O. O. TllIEX
TACS .uppl_tal device type 52. 98 [Link] 1. O. O. TllIEX
TACS .uppl_tal device type 52. 91 FIRE652+UJrITY 1. O. O. TllIEX
Blank card t .... lnating all TAeS data card.. 8lAJrK card end. all TACS data
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 22. C
c:o..ent card. JIUMDCD 0 23. C llere the root . - 1 • •et to XYZ and the [Link] b .et to 519 • •0 the _ r l n
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 24. C ~ node _ . atarc. at _ r 520.
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI0 25. C
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 26. C SDIMtY .XYZ519
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 27. C
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 21. C 8y ....... of the following SIJrCLUDI: requeat. the routlna [Link] 10 i n c l _
c:o..ent card. JrUIIDCJI 0 29. C Par the ..,.tendon ·PCB·. the ~ 'SVFFIX .... 18._ in the beginning of th
cc-nt card. JrUIIDCJI 0 30. C
c:o..ent card. JIUMDCD 0 31. C 'IIICLUDI. POIISX. ACIIOD. "'IIIVS. IIPWS. 'FIRIE. 5000 •• 3.0
Serie. R-LoC. 5.0001:+03 0.0001:+00 3.0001:-06 AClfOMXYZ520 5000. 3.0
sari•• R-L-C. 0.0001+00 1.0001:-03 0.0001:+00 ACIIOMXYZ520 t.O
sarie. R-L-C. [Link]+03 0.0001:+00 0.0001+00 ACIIOU8XYZ522 5000.
sari. . a-LoCo 0.0001:+00 1.0001:-03 0.0001E+00 ACIIOU8XYZ522 1.0
sarie. a-LoCo 5.0001:+03 [Link]+OO [Link]+OO ACIIOJlCXYZ524 5000.
sari. . R-LoC. 0.0001+00 1.0001:-03 0.0001:+00 ACIIOJlCXYZ524 1.0
sari •• a-LoCo 5.0001:+03 0.0001+00 0.0001:+00 PWSXYZ523 5000.
sari •• R-LoC. 0.0001+00 1.0001-03 0.0001E+00 PWSXYZ523 1.0
sarle. R-L-C. 5.0001:+03 0.0001:+00 0.0001:+00 PWSXYZ525 5000.
sarie. R-LoC. 0.0001+00 1.0001:-03 0.0001:+00 PWSlIYZ525 1.0
sarie. R-L-C. 5.0001:+03 0.0001:+00 0.0001E+00 PWSXYZ521 5000.
sari. . R-LoC. [Link]+OO 1.0001:-03 0.0001:+00 PWSXYZ521 1.0
sarie. R-LoC. 1.2001:+03 [Link]+OO 1.0001:-07 ACIIOM IIIJrDS 1200. 0.1
Sed. . R-LoC. 1.2001+03 0.0001+00 1.0001:-07 ACIIOUB IIIIIVS 1200. 0.1
S.r:l•• R-L-C. 1.2001+03 OaOOOE+OO 1.0001:-07 ACIIODC JUIIVS 1200. 0.1
sarie. R-L-C. 1.2001:+03 0.0001:+00 1.0001:-07 ACIIOM PWS 1200. 0.1
sari.. R-L-C. 1.2001+03 0.0001:+00 1.0001:-07 ACIIOU8 PWS 1200. 0.1
sari. . R-L-C. 1.2001+03 0.0001E+00 1.0001-07 ACIIODC PWS 1200. 0.1
Blank card ending brancha•• In. JrTOT 0 18 12 8lAJrK card ending BlUUfCB carda
Valva. 0.0001:+00 0.0001:+00 0.0001:+00 • FIXU· llXYZ520 "IIIVS FIRI:2
Valva. 0.0001:+00 0.0001+00 0.0001+00 • FIRE4" llXYZ522 "IIIVS rIRlE4
Valva. 0.0001:+00 0.0001E+00 0.0001+00 • FIRE6" t1XYZ524 IIIIIVS FlRE6
Valva. 0.0001:+00 0.0001+00 0.0001+00 • FIRE5· llXYZ523AC1fOM FIRES
Valve. 0.0001+00 0.0001:+00 0.0001+00 • FIREl· llXYZ525ACJrOUB rIRlEt
Valva. 0.0001:+00 0.0001+00 0.0001:+00 • FlaE3· llXYZ521AC1'1ODC FIRlE3
Blank card ending • .,i tcha•• XSWl'CII • 6. 8lAJrK card ending SWITCH carda

When inspecting this output, please note the following:

Node names are left-justified in their field, whereas numerical values are
right-justified in the field specified by the argument name in the template.
XIX-F. DATA BASE MODULE - 11

- All cards are sorted and put under the section they belong; branches are added
to the branch card grouP. switches to the switch card group and sources to the
source card group. This can only happen when separator cards are properly used:
e. g. BLANK card ending BRANCH cards
BLANK card ending SOURCE cards
na.t.e..:.. all template information mentioned under /BRANCH will be placed before the
separator card
BLANK card ending BRANCH cards
all template information mentioned under /SOURCE will be placed befC?re the
separator card
BLANK card ending SOURCE cards
Combined usage of ordinary input cards and include file;

- if the SINCLUDE is placed in the branch card section. and if the include file
contains card types other than "branch" • an additional /BRANCH card should follow
the SINCLUDE command. in order to specify the nature of the input card.
(e.g. MINUS-terra 1 Ohm resistance branch - see example)
("include comes first. then .sorting by class")
All values (named as well as dummy arguments) are allocated as was pre-defined
in the template and argument list.
XIX-G ·SATUJIA· TO DERIVE ( .... 0 PEJ\.KVALUE CURVES - 1

X:IX-G "SATURA" TO DER:IVE ('Ij1.i) PEAKVALUE CURVES

X:IX-G-l. Purpose & Applications

The specification of nonlinear inductors requires a (flux-current) saturation

curve relating the total flux linkage to the element current. Such curve can be
derived. either by using RMS (voltage. current) readings. or by using a (current,
incremental inductance) characteristic.

Both approaches are possible. and will be discussed separately. because of the
differences in data entry.

The punched results (1\1. i) then can be used in the saturable transformer component
model (section IV-E) or in the nonlinear inductor (type-98 pseudo-nonlinear reactor
or type-93 nonlinear inductance) that can be added externally to linear transformer
models obtained via BCTRAN (section XIX-C) or XFORMER (section XIX-A).

Although the resulting saturation curve will be single-valued, hystereSiS can

be taken into account by manually displacement of the values of the current. These
results than can be used for the type-96 pseudo-nonlinear hysteriC reactor
(section V-D). This solution is an alternative for the special supporting routine
HYSDAT (section XIX-H).

X:IX-G-2. Input data deck structure for SATURA

In general. an input data-deck for the supporting routine SATURA has the
following structure:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. SATURA - special request to activate supporting routine SATURA (see
section II-A-
3. $ERASE - request (optional) to .clear punch buffer
4. Per unit base specification card
5. Card grouping, supplying (IRMS. VRMS) or (current. incremental inductance)
break points, terminated by a special flag card
6. $PUNCH - request (optional) to activate punching

Remark that the potnts 3 through 6 may be repeated as many times as desired.
Each such grouping then is considered as a separate data case. corresponding
to a different saturation curve.

7. BLANK CARD ending all saturation cases

8. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
9. BLANK CARD ending all cases
X1X-O -SATURA- TO DERIVE (V.i) P~UE CURVES - 2

For an example of such input, the reader is referred to benchmark DC13 (first
subcase) or to section XIX-O-3. Because of the possibility of two different
approaches, two different data entries will be discussed next:

- (los. VRMS ) data entry;

- (I,L) data entry.

Only card type 4 and 5 will be discussed. All other cards are self-explanatory.

XIX-G-2.a. (lItAlS' VitAls) data entry

____------5
4
>
Q)
CI
.B
"6
>
Vl
:::E
0::

RMS current i
Fig.l: I , V ) curve, specified by break points
RMS RMS

With an impressed sinusoidal voltage, an RMS reading of the non-sinusoidal

current into the winding is obtained. Supporting program "SATURA" is designed to
convert from the user's RMS (v-i) curve to the peak values of a (~-i) curve needed
for transient simulation.
The user inputs his (v-i) curve (RMS values) as a sequence of points, with
linear interpolation between these values assumed. The output ('II-i) curve (peak
values) is likewise piecewise-linear with the same number of points. Following
approximations are made:

1. The use of linear .interpolation in between points.

2. The use of finite-difference approximation to sinusoidal excitation. One-degree
step-size is used, along with trapezoidal-rule integration where needed.
3. Hysteresis is ignored.
Let us discuss the data entry in more detail now. Only card type 4 and 5 will
be discussed here.
XIlt-G "SATUlIA" TO DERIVE ( .... i) [Link] CURVES - 3

Card 4. The card format for the per unit base specification card :

I- If
I~ l' If I~ f·~· IE Ie ~* r~ Ie i~ If IE I ~f~i~ r~f~IC ~~H fSiC rf
FREQ YBASE SBASE KTHIRD

E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 18

Parameters:

FREQ: frequency (in Hz) of the impressed sinusoidal voltage source.

VBASE: single-phase base voltage (in kV) on which the input break points are based.

SBASE: single-phase base power (in MVA) on which the input break points are based.

KTHIRD: parameter controlling the type of output.

= 0 : only first-quadrant output;
= 1 : full curve (first- and third-quadrant output).
Card 5. Ne~t comes a card grat..rping, supplying the (lIMS' V us) break pOints :

Only one breakpoint per card can be specified. One should start by specifying
the break point closest to the origin (omitting point (0. ,0.). though). and
then moving continuously away. The curve must be single-valued. Successive
slopes should be non-decreasing. The slope defined by the last breakpoint will
be extrapolated to infinity (cfr. fig. 1). Values are in per unit, based on
the previously-specified single-phase base :

S"a..
I"a .. = V-(kA)
"a••
IIMS(pu) -IIMs(A)11 "a•• (A)
V ItMS(pU) - V IMsCkV)IV "a•• CkV)
The card format to be used is as follows

I~ If IE
I~ '~if i( I~ l~lf ' Ef~ H rE f~IE isle f_i~ :~ f- IE 'E i~lc :~ic f: 'Eicic

I RMS [P.U.] V RMS [P.U.]

E16.0 E16.0

- The maximum number of breakpoints is limited to 100.

XIX-O -SATURA- TO DERIVE (V,i) [Link] CURVES - ..

- If the saturation curve is intended for a type-98 pseudo-nonlinear element,

a maximum of five breakpoints .is recommended, in order to avoid numerical
tracking problems.
- On the other hand, for a type-93 true nonlinear element, many breakpoints
around the kneepoint of the saturation curve should be used whenever a smooth
approximation of the nonlinear magnetizing current is of interest.

This card grouping should be terminated by following special flag card

11J1JJJiJJ~1~JJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJ1JJJjJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJ1JJJjJJ~lJ1JJ1JJJ~
999

XIX-G-2.b. (I,L) data entry

Instead of an (IRMs , VRMS ) characteristic, the user has the option of inputting
a current versus incremental inductance characteristic. The trapezoidal rule of
integration is then used in this case, to convert the inductance curve into the
desired output curve of flux versus current :

111(0 = i j

L(n)dn

k=2,3 ....

Cll
v
c
£
v
:l
"0
.!:
]
c
Cll
E
...v
Cll

.!:

Fig. 2: Current versus incremental inductance characteristic

Card 4. The card format for the per unit base specification :

I~ IE IE
I~ 14l~ IE tE Ie I~ .,l! ~E tff£ I' t( I' I' II
tH* f!~E f£ tEfW I d~IC .,l' t*lc
FLAG [Link] SCALL KTHIRD

E8.0 E8.0 E8.0 18

XIx-a ~SATURA~ TO DERIVE (V.i) PEAXVlU.11E CI1RVES - 5

Parameters :

FLAG: = -1; special request flag for (I,L) data entry (as opposed to (I RMs , VRMS)
data entry, explained in point 2.a).

SCALI: multiplicator for the current coordinate of the input breakpoint, in order
to obtain results in Amps.

SCALL: muliplicator for the inductance coordinate of the input breakpoint, in order
to obtain results in Henries.

~: II both SCALI and SCALL are btank. or zero, the supptied characteristic is
understood being specilied in units 01 Amps and Henries, so that no conversion
is necessary.

KTHIRD: see point 2.a.

lfJ:J.:U.: Atthough lor the (I,L) data entry, the origin point (0. ,0) 01 the saturation
curve appears in the printed output, this vatue witt be omitted in the punched
output.

Card 5. Card grouping specilying a current versus an incrementat inductance

characteristic.

The current breakpoints i k must be monotone increasing, starting with value

zero. Values are in Amps (if SCALI = 0) or otherwise, i k * SCALI is in Amps.
The incremental inductance values L t .. [~;]", all must be positive. Values are
in Henries (if SCALL = 0) or otherwise, Lk * SCALL is in Henries.

The card format to be used is as follows :

I~ I€
f~ rft~l( • f~f~ IE r! tf f!lf 1* f' I~ I~I( ~H~I( ~~ rf

'k Lk

E16.0 E16.0

The same recommendations as in point 2.a. are valid. This card grouping should
be terminated by the same special flag card, as explained in 2.a.
XIX-G -SATURA- TO DERIVE (V.i) [Link] CURVES - 6

XIX-G-3. 3. Example

Consider a five-leg core-type transformer with STAR-connected high-voltage

winding with grounded neutral and DELTA-connected low voltage winding (YNd5).
Rated power: 750 MVA
Rated voltage: 420 kV/27 kV (line-line values)
From the positive-sequence excitation test. following data are available
Table 1.

Uex lex P ex

KV A KW
22.76 8.20 206.21
24.29 11.35 240.26
25.64 15.50 270.13
27.00 21.16 311.00
27.50 24.68 323.03
28.47 31.63 355.48
29.10 38.30 385.41
32.50 80.97 560.00

where Uex = excitation voltage (RMS. line-line value)

lex = excitation current (RMS, three-phase average)
Pex = excitation loss (three-phase value)
As a first approximation. the RMS excitation current lex.w in a DELTA winding equals

1 u._ .. 1 u/J3 (harmonics neglected)

Further, the RMS magnetizing current I •. w in the DELTA winding is approximated by

1 ....... 'VI1u2... - ( 3U
u p )2
u
Hence. the above measured Table 1 reduces to following saturation
characteristic :
XIX-G "SATURA" TO DERIVE ( .... 0 [Link] CURVES - 7

Table 2:

Uex 1_
KV A
22.76 3.65
24.29 5.66
25.64 8.23
27.00 11.60
27.50 13.70
28.47 17.78
29.10 21.66
32.50 46.40

When converting this characteristic into input data for supporting routine
SATURA, we first need to convert to per unit values for the equivalent phase.

Sbase = =
750/3 250 MVA
Vbaae = 27 kV
~= 9259A
I base = 3.27

The input data (table 3) can be obtained from. table 2, using the following
conversion formulas

IRMs(pu) = IRMS(A) / Ibaae(A)

VRMS(pU) = VRMs(kV) / Vbase{kV)

This finally results in following table

Table 3:

VRMS(PU) IRMS{pu)
0.8430 0.3942 E-3
0.8996 0.6113 E-3
0.9496 0.8888 E-3
1.000 1.253 E-3
1.019 1.480 E-3
1.054 1.920 E-3
1.078 2·333 E-3
1.204 5.011 E-3

The input file for supporting routine SATURA then looks as follows:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
C input data for supporting routine SATURA
C Excitation test results for 3-phase transformer
C UBASE • 27 kv (RKS. equivalent phase)
C SBASE • 750/3 • 250 HVA (equiYalent phase)
C Ibase • 250 / 27 • 9.26 kA
C
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C 1 234 567 8
$ERASE
SATURATION
50.0 27.00 250.0 1 o
.3942 -3 .8430
XIX-G -SATURA- TO DERIVE ("4I.i) [Link] CURVES - 8

.6113 -3 .8996
.8888 -3 .9496
1.253 -3 1.0
1.480 -3 1.019
1.920 -3 1.054
2.333 -3 1.078
5.011 -3 1.204
9999
$PUNCH
BLANXLINE ending .aturation data
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANX LINE ENDING ALL CASES

The corresponding output looks as follows

co-nt card. JIUIIIDCD - 1. C data: IIA/GUIDO/SATURAl. IN
Marker card prececUng new DITP data ca••• 8!CINJIEW IlATA CllSI!
co-n t card. JIUIIIDCD - 3. C input data fDr aupportlng routine SATIJIlA
C....... t card. JnJIIDCD. 4. C beltation taat .... ults for 3-phaa. tranaforwer
co-nt card. JnJIIDCD. 5. C IlBASE - 27 lev IJIIIIS. ooquivalMlt phaa.1
c.......t card. JnJIIDCD. 6. C SaASl! • 750/3 - 250 IIVA laquivalMlt phaael
c.......t card. JIUIIIDCD. 7. C lbaa• • 250 I 27 • 9.26kA
c.......t card. lfU!IDCJ). I. C
c.......tcard. JnJIIDCD. 9. C 345678901234567190123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
c.......t card. JIUIIIDCD. 10. C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Er... .11 of 0 card. in the punch buffer. SEllASI!
Requeat for aagnatlc .aturation ~tation. SATIJIlATJ ON
Iliac. conat. 5. OOOE+Ol 2. 7001!+01 2.5001.02 o 50.0 27.00 250.0 o
11. VI point. 3.94200E-04 1.43000E-Ol .3942 -3 .8430
II. VI point. 6.113OOE-04 8. 99600E-Ol .6113 -3 .8996
CI. VI point. 8. 188001!-04 9. 49600E-Ol .8888 -3 .9496
CI. VI point. 1.253OOE-03 1.00000E'00 1.253 -3 1.0
11. VI point. 1.480008-03 1.019008.00 1.480 -3 1.019
n. VI polnt. 1.920008-03 1.05400E'00 1.920 -3 1.054
n. VI point. 2.333OOE-03 1.078OOE+00 2.333 -3 1.071
n. VI point. 5.01100E-03 1.204001+00 5.011 -3 1.204
Special [Link]-of*polnt. card. 9999

Derived aaturation curve giv.a _ k current aa a function of flux :

Jtow CUrrent I _ J 1'1ux (volt-_cJ
1 0.0000000000 0.0000000000
2 5.1618795027 102.4604983603
3 12.3418337241 109.3398153320
4 17.5040965216 115. 4169!i04661
5 24.8062758133 121.54270261112
6 31.4592838067 123.8520140322
7 39.1754389519 128.1060086260
8 49.5865689002 131. 0230334903
9 97.2627733421 146.3374140282
9999

Next. check the darived curve by In4apendant rever •• ~tation. "'a_tnq sinuaoida1 voltage Ifluxl at the level of each point •
. . . current h found ..... rically. TIlle curveahould be _ 1 to the original I-V pointe inputted.
Row CUrrent In P.U. Vol tag. in P.U.
2 0.00039420 0.14300000
3 0.00061130 0.89960000
4 0.00088880 0.94960000
5 0.00125300 1.00000000
6 0.00141000 1.01900000
7 0.00192000 1.05400000
,8 0.00233300
0.00501100
1.07800000
1.20400000

Reque.t for fluahing of punch buUer. ISPtnlCB

A Hating 'of 80-col.... card i_gee ...... l>[Link] fluahacl froe punch buffer follow •.

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

c <•• ++++) carda punched 'by .upport routine on 29-~un-89 09.04.57 <•••••• )
C SATIJIlATION
C 50.0 27.00 250.0 0
C .3942 -3 .8430
C .6113 -3 .8996
C .8888 -3 .9496
C 1.253 -3 1.0
c 1.480 -3 1.019
C 1.920 -3 1.054
C 2.333 -3 1.078
C 5.011 -3 1.204
C 9999
5. 16187950E+00 1. 02460498E.02
1.23418337E+01 1.09339815E'02
1. [Link] 1. 15416950E+02
2.48062758E'01 1. 21542703E+02
3.14592838£+01 1.23852014E+02
XIX-G -SATUlIA- TO DERIVE (V. i) PEAXWU,UE CURVES - 9

3. 9175439O!+01 1.%8106009!+0%
4.95865689£+01 1.31023033£+02
9.726277331+01 1. 46337414E+OZ
9999
---------< End of LUNIT7 punched card. a. flushed by SPUNCH reque.t ) ______ _

The resulting (~. i) characteris tic looks as follows

'air

-; s = saturation flux
"r = rated flux

i mw

After the flux 'II1(t) exceeds saturation flux "' .. the last slope of the non-linearity
is determined by the air-core inductance Lalr (the additional flux travels in air).

The air-core inductance Lair can be approximated by the geometry of the

corresponding winding (in this case the low voltage winding).

LaIr" 1-10' w 2 • AI ./

where A = cross-sectional area of the winding (17.925 em2 )

I = winding length leg length (263 em)
w = number of turns (54)
=
Po permeability of free space (1.256637 * 10-8 H/cm)
For the transformer considered,Lair ow 0.0025 H.
This value includes the leakage impedance of the low voltage winding. If we use
the BCTRAN Matrix for the linear transformer model, the nonlinear elements are
connected to the low voltage transformer terminals in addition to the linear
transformer elements. (In this case it is not necessary to correct Lal r by the
winding leakage inductance) (By using the [A] [R] Matrix without excitation
information, it is also not necessary to correct the nonlinear inductance elements
by the linear magnetizing reactance).

For the transformer in question vs-1.21\1r-146Vs.

If 1\Ir•• -O.61\1r-72.9Vs in one leg, the flux in this winding at its first maximum
becomes : 2 * 121.54 Vs + 0.6 * 121.54 Vs = 316 Vs.
The air flux 1Palr = 316 Vs - 146 Vs = 170 Vs.
The last point of the nonlinear characteristic can be calculated from

~_ = 170 Vs/0.0025 H : 68000 A

1_ = 68000 A + 97 A = 68097 A
XIX-H. -HYSDAT" to create type-96 [Link] inductor [Link] - 1

X:IX-H."HYSDAT" to create type-96 hysteretic inductor

characteristic

X:IX-H-i. PuhPose and applications

The specification of remanent magnetism requires a (flux-current) hysteresis

curve. Recall that the shape of the hysteresis loop for an inductor depends
primarily on the material of the core, while the scaling of the hysteresis loop
depends on .geometry, the number of turns and other construction factors.
•
What is actually stored in supporting routine HYSDAT is essentially the shape
of the loop for a certain type of material. The user then should provide information
for the actual reactor being specified, so that a correct scaling can be performed.
Hence the data entry is very simple.

The punched results (1\1. i) can be used for the type-96 hysteretic inductor
(section V-D). Up to now, only one curve shape (corresponding to ARMCO Mo) can
be selected. With some care, supporting routine SATURA (section XIX-G) can be
used to generate hysteresis loops for other materials, it should be noted.

X:IX-H-2. :Input data deck structure for BYSDAT

In general, an input data deck for supporting routine HYSDAT has the following
structure :

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. HYSTERESIS - special request to activate supporting routine HYSDAT
(see section II-A-45).
3. $ERASE - request (optional) to clear punch buffer
4. shape specification card
5. scale specification card
6. $PUNCH - request (optional) to activate punching.
Remark that the points 4 through 6 may be repeated as many times as desired.
Each such grouping then is considered as a separate data case, corresponding
to a different hysteresis .loop.
7. BLANK CARD ending all hysteresis loops
8. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
9. BLANK CARD ending all cases

For an example of such input, the reader is referred to benchmark 13 (third

subcase). Only card 4 and 5 deserve a further explanation. All other cards are
self-explanatory.
XIX-H. -HYSDAT" to create type-96 hy_teretic inductor charactariatic - 2

Card 4. Shape spectltcatton card :

Since the shape of the hysteresis loop for an inductor depends primarily on
the material of the core, such core material specification should be possible.
This can be obtained using following card format :

I~ IE Ie
I" f~'E 'E ~(
. " l'~! f' tE f< IEI~IC ~E ~~ l,f<l~ rf~~f( 'E Ie
ITYPE LEVEL

IS IS

Parameters:

ITYPE: type code specifying the magnetic core material of the inductor.
= 1: ARMCO Mh oriented silicon steel
(perhaps, other alternatives will be provided later).

LEVEL: flag, specifying the desired level of accuracy.

= 1: hysteresis loop represented in 4 to 5 points
= 2: hysteresis loop represented in 10 points
= 3: hysteresis loop represented in 15 points
= 4: hysteresis loop represented in 20 to 25 points.

Card 5. ScaLe spec tIt catton card :

The scaling of the hysteresis loop depends on the geometry, the number of turns
and other factors of the actual construction. This scaling can be fully
specified via the location of the positive saturation point. By definition,
this is the point in the first quadrant where the hysteresis loop changes from
being multivalued to being single-valued. Following card format allows you
to specify this point :

CURSAT FL XSAT

ES.O EB.O

Parameters:

CURSAT: current (in A) of the positive saturation point.

FLXSAT: flux (in Vs) of the positive saturation point.

XIX-H. -HYSDAT- to create type-96 hyeteretic inductor characterietic - 3

li.!J:1£.: By definition. the positive saturation point is the point of the first
quadrant where the hysteresis loop changes from being multivalued to being
[Link]. One suggested 'WO.y of determining values for botii these
coordinates from normal or DC magnetizing curves is as follows. [Link]
at the right (i.e. linear part) on the normal magnetization curve. a
straight-edge is used to extrapolate this line back to the left. The point
~here this straight line and the actual curve first begin to diverge is then
taken as the positive saturation point.
It is recommended to use the DC magnetization curve. since this is more
readily available than hysteresis loops.

SQ:+ \J rOo:'" '0 n

t
n«5o.i'.". ~"""""'''i.",

XIX-H-3. Example

The following is an extract from DC13. The input looks as follows

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
HYSTERESIS
C ITYPE LEVEL Requeat Armco "4 oriented .ilieon .te.l -- only 1 [Link]
1 2 That va. ITYPE-l. Ae for LEVEL-2. moderate accuracy output
500. 1.0 ( Current and flux coordinatee of poeiti.e .aturation point
SPUHCH
BLANK card ending -HYSTERESIS- data caee.

The output looks as follows

co-ent card. N1JIIIDCD - 1. C data:IIA/CUIDO/[Link]
Marker card preceding new EMTP data ca... BEeIM NEW DATA CASE
[Link] to _ke Type-96 hysteresis branch cerds. HYSTERESIS
c - n t card. NIII'IDCD· 4. C I TYPE L£VEL
{Request AMICO M4 oriented Silicon steel -- only 1 available
&eqtn I-H generator. ITYPE - 1. LEVEL. 2. 1 2 (That waa tTYPE-t. As for L£VEL.2~ .aderate accuracy output
CURSAT. FLXSAT • $.0000£.02 1.0000£.00 SOO. 1.0 ( CUrrent ,and flux coordinate. of positive saturation point
Derived characteristic: for Type-96 '[Link]-nonllnear DlTP branch card follows.
CUrrent flux
-1.25000000E'02 -9. 70588235E-01
-1.5625OOOOE.01 -9.19411765E-01
9.37S00000E+OO -8.41058824E-Ol
2.1875OOOOE'01 -6.58823529E-01
[Link] S. 70588235£-01
XIX-H. "HYSDAT" to create type-96 hrateretic inductor characteriatic - •

6. 5625OOOOE.01 7.52941176E-01
1.12500000£+02 8. 64705882E-01
2.07812!iOO1·02 9.411764711-01
5.00000000E·02 1.00000000£+00
6. 87500000E+02 1.00588235E+00
9999.

Jleql>Ht for flushing of punch buffer.

A listing of Io-colu.n card [Link].s now being flushed fro- punch buffer follows.

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567190123456719

c <•••••• ) card. punched by .upport routln. on 29-Jun-19 06.33.56 ( •••••• )

C IIYSTERESIS
C C ITYP£ IZIIEL Request Arwca 1M oriented dUcan st . . l -- CWll1' 1 a"allab
C 1 2 That wee ITYPE-1. A. for IZIIEL·Z. 80derata accuracy autp
C 500. 1.0 ( current and f l .... coordinata. of podU_ saturaUCWl poi
-1.25000000E+02 -9.70588235E-01
-1.56250000E+01 -9.19411765E-01
9.37500000E.00 -8.47058824E-01
2.1I750000E.01 -6.58823529E-01
4.218750001:+01 5. 705118235E-01
6. 5625OOOOE.01 7. 52941176E-01
1.125000001:.02 11.647058821:-01
2.078125OOE.02 9.411764711-01
5.00000000£.02 1.000000001:.00
6.17500000E.02 1.005882351+00
9999 •
••••• ----( End of LUWIT7 punclled cards a. fluohed by: SPUNCH request ) •••••• -
XIX-I. ·ZNO FITTER· to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch carda - 1

XIX-I. "ZNO FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch cards

XIX-I-l Purpose and application

The supporting routine "ZNO FITTER" can be used to derive a true (as opposed to
pseudo) non-linear representation (type 92 branch card) for a zinc-oxide surge
arrester. starting from manufacturer's data for the surge arrester.

The model can be used successfully to represent both gapless arresters as well as
arresters equipped with series passive gaps or shunt passive gaps. Series active
gaps (i.e. current limiting) can llQt be represented adequately by means of the ZNO
model described here.

There is some application of the present model to silicon carbide (SiC) arresters,
although serious (perhaps unacceptable) approximations must be made. No dynamiCS
of the gap can be provided. Hence the possibilities of such usage will not be
emphasized. In essence, such usage represents the SiC block very accurately ("two
exponential segments appear to provide a very adequate fit") while ignoring totally
the dynamics of the gap (the .gap modelling after flashover). In the original EMTP,
a dedicated SiC surge arrester model (type 94 branches) did exist. Data acquisition
was too complicated and not sufficiently documented. Hence, support of that model
was terminated.

The basic constraint equation for ZnOmodelling is resistive, and is highly nonlinear
(exponential):

i.P(_V )0
V r./

where "i" is the arrester current, "v" is the arrester voltage. and "P". "Vret".
and "q"are constants of the device. Typically one picks the reference voltage
"V ret " to be twice the rated voltage, or something close to this. In theory, the
choice is arbitrary (it is an extra parameter, note). However, a good choice of
Vret normalizes the equation. and prevents numerical overflow during the expo-
nentiation. Constants "p" and "q" are unique parameters of the device.

Due to the extreme nonlinearity of Zno characteristics, very little current is

drawn for voltages that are substantially below the rated voltage (e.g.,
0.5**30 = 9. E-l0) . So, in order to avoid the possibili ty of underflow during
exponentiation, and also to speed the numerical solution, a linear model is actually
used for low voltages and low currents (see AMIN; card number 2), the so-called
leakage current region. But this is hidden. out of sight of the user, and it need
not concern him. In physical terms, the solution is unaffected by such sim-
plification.

The nonlinear V-I arrester characteristic can be approximated by an arbitrary

number of exponential segments. Both gapped and gapless arresters can be represented.
The difference is made through the specification of VFLASH (see first miscellaneous
data card) and A5 (see second miscellaneous data card). The gapped arrester
requires the specification of two (I,V) characteristics {one before and one after
XIX-I. "ZNO FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch. carda - 2

flashover). while the gapless arrester requires only one such (I.V) characteristic
(before flashover). The calculation of the exponentials. fitting the user-specified
(I,V) characteristics can be automated via the separate supporting routine ARRDAT.

"ARRDAT" fits exponential curves in the log-log plane using the least-squares
approach. There are two options for the determination of the number of exponentials
(curve segments) that are to be used. Variable NEXP (miscellaneous data cards)
is used as a flag to select between both options.
1. the user may specify the number of exponentials or curve segments. and the
boundaries of the segments.
2. the program can determine the number of exponentials or curve segments auto-
matically, based on the maximum permissible relative fitting error specified
by the user. This is the more common case.

An optional "BRANCH" card allows the user to name the terminal nodes for the Type-92
branch cards that will be punched. Punched results are immediately in the correct
format to be used for nonlinear branches of type 92 (section V.E). For an example.
we refer to DC39.

XIX-I-2 Input ~ ~ structure ~ ZHQ FITTER

In general, an input data deck structure for the supporting routine ARRDAT has the
following structure:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. ZNO FITI'ER
3. $ERASE (optional)
4. BRANCH speCification card (optional)
5. miscellaneous data cards
6. card grouping to specify the {I.V} characteristic. terminated by blank
card
7. cards that specify the flashover behaviour. terminated by a blank card
(only when A5 < 0 and VFLASH > 0)
8. BLANK card terminatingARRDAT usage
9. $PUNCH
10. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
11. BLANK

Let us discuss the above card sequence in more detail now.

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. Request for supporting routine "ZNO FITTER"

~ f~' E "I~ Ie I' f~~ f

i~1
~
( Illt I'~ ~I ( IE
I~
r EI~I ( I~ IE '
,i~ 1~lt ~ E
if
tlt~l( f· ,tiE
'U* ' .1< ·'if
IE
re ~I c
ZNO FITTEr;
XIX-I. -ZHO FITTER- to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch carda - 3
•

3. $ERASE (optional)
$ERASE request is optional, and serves to clear the punch buffer

4. BRANCH specification card (optional)

I~ IE
~i~ ·elf If Ie .~~ El-IE ~CI ( l~fE IE Ie I: ~E 'fl~ Ie I~ H~ fE 1m !~I' fE Imlc I'f_ 'f~ ~ ,.,' iEls
BRANCH SEND( 1 REC(l) SEND(2 REC(2) SEND(3 REC(3)

A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

~: [SEND(i},REC(i}] are the terminal ends (sending end and receiving end) for
phase i. The usual naming convention is used. A blank for a name indicates
direct connection to ground. The number of phases is specified by variable
IPHASE on the miscellaneous data card (see point 5, card number 1).

5. Miscellaneous data cards

There are two such cards. The first one bears flag variables (to select the proper
model) and fitting specifiers. The second one contains the base value specifications.
Card Number 1;

~~ IE IE
:1- I'fe IE leff lEi! I~ff IE~! I( I ~ ~E I
i' e~f rE!~ lei! rE~~~C : "f~ I(~*
!
NEXP
'EI9C
IPHASE ERRUM
'* ~

IPRZNO
!~I'

VREF
,

VFLASH
'E,*

112 112 E12.0 112 E12.0 E12.0

Parameters:
NEXP: flag to select between the two possible fitting options.
<0: request for the automatic determination of the number of exponential
segments. The user will specify the (I,V) characteristic (see point 6)
>0: number of segments, requested by the user. He will specify both the (l,V)
characteristics as well as the boundaries of each exponential segment
manually (see point 6 data).

IPHASE: the number of phases of the arrester bank for which branch cards are to
be produced. If left blank or keyed with zero, the value will be changed
to unity, meaning that a single arrester is to be modelled. If IPHASE > 1,
only one phase will be punched explici tely • For all other phases, the
reference branch option is used. Do not forget to use the optional BRANCH
option, specially designed to allocate node names to the nonlinear branches
in the punched output.

ERRLIM: this value only has meaning when flag NEXP < O. ERRLlM is the maximum
relative error permitted during the automatic determination of the number
of segments (assuming that the user has keyed NEXP negative). A blank or
zero field will be converted to the default value of 1/20. The relative
XIX-I. "ZNO FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch cards - 4

error is: ERROR = ABS (Cl - C2) / Cl, by definition. where Cl is the value
of the current as specified by the user, and C2 is the value of the current
as predicted by the exponential approximation.

IPRZNO: controls diagnostic printout •. Suggested values are between zero and three.
The amount of printout increases with the variable value.

VREF: the reference voltage (RMS value) that will be used to scale the voltage
data points (see point 6. card grouping that specifies the (I. V) char-
acteristic). The idea is to produce numbers close to unity for exponentiation.
thus avoiding numerical overflow. If left blank or keyed with zero, the
value will be changed to twice A2 of card number 2 immediately below.
Beware: 1) VREF is used for all (I,V) characteristics, both before and after
flashover.

2) When Vret is ill conditioned (Le •. V/Vret too far from unity), the
fitter will redefine Vref, after giving the user a proper warning.

VFLASH: the gap flashover voltage in units of [volts]. This is a peak (or cres t)
value, not an RMS (effective) value. Leave this field blank, or key with
zero if the arrester is to be gapless.

Card Number 2;

,~ !E IE
If tEI~!( " ~ . 'EI~I( If Ie .~
f~IE I~ic I~ ~~~ E tl ~I' I (I~I\. ·~I f rH~,e ~ l~,E rmlc
"
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 AMIN
E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0 E12.0

Parameters:
Al: is a divider used for the scaling of voltage points. For example. Al could
be used for the voltage rating of the arrester upon which the input data are
based, in order to convert the specified voltage points into per-unit values.
This is in units of [volts] RMS.

A2: This really is just a multiplicative scaling factor for the voltage points,
that can be used creatively in more than one way by the user. For example,
A2 can be used to convert the arrester voltage points from per-unit to
[volts]. Alternatively, the user could produce the characteristic of an
electrically similar arrester having a different voltage rating. The
properties of similar arresters do not change with rating, provided a
proportional number of blocks is used to obtain the new rating. Note that
if VREF is maintained proportional. to A2, then similar arresters will have
identical parameters at all ratings.

A3: is a multiplier used for the additional scaling of voltage points. For example,
it can be used to obtain a minimum characteristic (maximum energy) from a
maximum characteristic (maximum voltage). The most commonly used value is
unity. however.
XIX-I. ·Z"O FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch ca.d. - 5

A4: is a current multiplier that is used to obtain results for arresters with a
number of columns that differs from that for which the data points are known.
An even (homogeneous) current distribution is assumed among all columns.

A5: is a flag signaling the existence (or lack of it) of additional data describing
the arrester after flashover of the arrester passive gap.
a) If zero oruni ty, the arrester is gapless. and no additional data follows;
b) If negative, additional data follows (to represent dissimilar material
for a shunt or a series passive gap) . See point 7 (cards to [Link] the
flashover behaviour).
c) If positive but not unity. there is no further data. Instead. the
original input data representing the situation before flashover are to
be used to represent the characteristic after flahover, simply by
multiplication of the voltages by A5. This is to represent similar
material for a shunt or a series passive gap.

AMIN: is the minimum current above which the exponential approximation of the
arrester characteristic begins. For currents I < AMIN, a linear rather than
an exponential approach is used in order to speed up the solution, and also
in order to avoid numerical problems (underflow during exponentiation). Even
if fitting a straight line that passes through the origin, do not leave AMIN
blank or zero, since the logarithm of zero is not defined.

6. Card grouping that Specifies the (I,V) Characteristic

Cards that specify the arrester characteristic before flashover come next.

a) For the most common case of NEXP .negative (see card 1 of miscellaneous data),
the program automatically determines the number of segments ,and there is to
be only one data group, containing an arbitrary number of data pairs (I ,V} . A
blank card will terminate the grouping that defines the non-linear characteristic.

b) But for positive NEXP, there are to be NEXP segments. For each segment, a card
grouping containing an arbitrary number of data pairs (I, V) is to be specified.
Each such group is to be terminated by a blank card.

In both cases ,each card can contain only one data pair (I, V), using following
format:
IE E
I:: f!ft If Ie i ~ ~tl' rft< i ~ rfl~ I~ i~ I~ Iff~ f- 1~lc ~ ~~! rff~l( ~! rfi«
CURRENT VOLTAGE

E12.0 E12.0

Points always must be in order of increasing current and voltage. The inter-
pretation will confirm the unscaled (I, V) point, as specified by the user.

7. Cards that specify the flashover behaviour

If VFLASH of miscellaneous data card number 1 was positive, also the characteristic
after flashover needs to be specified by the user. Depending on whether the passive
gap (shunt or series) is of similar or dissimilar material, different situations
can occur:
XIX-I. -Z80 FITTER- to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch carda - 6

- gap is of similar material; A5 (second miscellaneous data card) is positive. but

different from UNITY. Value A5 is used as a multiplication factor for the voltage
points of the (I,V) characteristic. Because the gap is of similar material as
the rest of the arrester, the same basic (I,V) characteristic is used before and
after flashover.

- gap is of dissimilar material. parameter A5 of miscellaneous data card number

_2 is negative. In this case two additional items of information must be supplied
to define the Zno characteristic after flashover. .

. First, there is to be another card number 1, although only variable NEXP of

columns 1-12 will actually be read from the card (all other parameters of the
card are assumed to remain unchanged). This gives the. user the opportunity to
change his fitting option (user-specified number of exponents to fit. or automatic
determination of the best number of exponents) for the flashover characteristic.

Second, there are to be cards specifying the arrester characteristic after

flashover. The (I, V) pairs have the same format as previously described. Again,
the number of segments depends on the (second) NEXP value. Again, each segment
should be terminated by a blank card.

8. BLANK card terminating ARRDAT

An indeterminate number of data cases can be stacked sequentially and solved in
a single execution by the program. Each new case follows immediately the blank
card terminating the data for the last segment of the preceding. case. After the
last such Zno data case. one extra blank card then exits the supporting program
"ARRDAT".

9. $FUNCH
As with other supporting programs t SPUNCH is used to create the Type-92 branch
cards that represent the Zno arrester being processed. If the user wants such
output. it is his responsibility to request. it. Further, do not forget either to
use the optional BRANCH specification card (see point 4). in order to be sure. that
the node names will be included in the created type-92 branch cards. The punched
output is particularly valuable because it includes comment cards that label the
Type-92 branch parameters. As an example. consider the punched output from the
solution to the first subcase of BENCHMARK DC-39:
1\ [Link] of 80-colwtn card i_g•• now being flWlhed troa punc:h buffer fall_a.

12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CRating. 192000.0 [Link]· 9.620008-01 [Link]. 3.000008+00 Gapl...

92RECII 5555.
C V-reference V-flashover
4.1250000000000000£+05 9.2121212121212130£-01
C MUltiplier EXponent V·.in
2.9479544296115170£+04 2.6530262418533470£+01 5.45050636122850508-01
9999
5.96059571777253608+05 2.6530262418533470£001 4.86652275816740008-01
9999
92RECII 5555.
92RECC 5555.

10. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

11. BLANK
XIX-I. "%NO FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear braftch cards - 7

XIX-I-3 Illustratiye Usage: 7he ~.21 BENCHMARK DC-39

Consider a single-columnZnO arrester. The voltage points are known for a

single-column ZnO arrester rated 1-KV (crest or peak value), maximum voltage
characteristic. The current points are given in [amperes] (crest). The user wants
parameters for a 192-KV (rms) (A2), 3-column arrester with a maximum energy
characteristic. The conversion f·actor to this characteristic is 0.962 (A3), by
assumption. The arrester is equipped with a shunt gap, and the shunted part is
electrically similar (A5 should be positive, but different from unity) to the rest
of the arrester. The shunt gap consists of 12% additional blocks. That is, after
gap sparkover, the arrester contains 0.89286 (1/1.12 = 0.89286) of the original
blocks, from which it follows that A5=0.89286 (crestfactor). A reference voltage
equal to 412.5KV (VREP ) was chosen, since this is the expected operating range of
the 3-phase surge arrester. Finally, the arrester is assumed to be equipped with
a shunt gap that flashes over at 380KV (VFLASH) (crest). For this basic data,
three different EMTP representations are to be obtained, as summarized in the
following three subsections. This information was used to construct BENCHMARK
DC-39 , so the user is referred to this standard test case to see the EMTP
implementation.

11 DC-39 subcase ~ Single-Exponent ~ (NEXP = 11

According to the data provided above, the following values are assigned:
1) A1 = 1000 / [2 is the original rating of the arrester in [volts] (rms);
2) A2 = 192000 is the desired rating of the output in [volts] (rms);
3) A3 = 0.962 is the scaling factor for obtaining the desired maximum energy
characteristic;
4) A4 = 3.0 since the original data are given for a single-column arrester, this
factor of three will convert them to the desired 3-column device;
5) A5 = 0.89286 since the arrester before flashover contains 12% additional blocks;
6) AMIN = 1.£-3 [amperes] would be a common default choice, which is about the end
of the leakage current region.

1.1 DC-39subcase l.:.. Double Exponential fi.:t (NEXP = II

Next, the characteristic described above is to be fitted with two exponentials.

The border between the two segments has been determined graphically using log-log
paper to lie between 100A and 200A. All other parameters on cards number 1 and
number 2 remain unchanged.

al DC-39 subcase ~ Automatic Segment Determination (NEXP _ ~

Finally, the same data will be fitted with a relative current error of 1/20, which
means that ERRLIM = 1/20.
XIX-I. "%NO FITTER" to Punch Type-92 nonlinear branch carda - 8

~ Usage Qf puncbed output

This model internally uses the compensation method. Unlike other situations using
the compensation method for a multiphase ZnO surge arrester, the phases do NOT
need to be separated by stub lines.
XIX-J. Congert aaturable tranaformer carda to linear equi9alent [R].[L] - 1

XIX-J. Convert saturable transformer cards to linear equivalent

[R],[L]

This supporting routine can be used to convert data lines for the SATURABLE
TRANSFORMER model (IV.E) into a coupled [R]. [L] equivalent (type 51.52.53 branches) •
The user should be carefull. however. because some inherent limitations exist
for the conversion routine:
- Although the SATURABLE TRANSFORMER component can take non-linear behaviour
into account, the type 51.52,53 equivalent branches can not: they only provide
a LINEAR equivalent. Of course, the user can add the non-linear behaviour
as an external branch, but this is tricky (zero magnetizing current is not
honored) •
- Although the SATURABLE TRANSFORMER component can process transformers with
zero magnetizing current, type 51,52,53 can not. This situation is similar
to the XFORMERmodel. Recall that only the BCTRAN model can process zero
magnetizing current, because it has the AR-notation available.
- The data lines for the SATURABLE TRANSFORMER model should be self-contained
(Le. no reference component usage that copies the data of a preceding
transformer) .
- For the ATP4 version, the punched output is not immediately usable because
the free-format output form is incorrect with respect to the node names: the
user himself should add separating commas inbetween the fields of the node
names. Please refer to punched cards of this model with XFORMER punched cards
for comparison. This is a bug that has to be cleared in next program releases
(see section J.4).

XIX-J.1. Input ~ ~ structure:

Suppose a user wants to convert a self-contained (i.e. no reference branch

usage) SATURABLE TRANSFORMER dataset into a linear equivalent [R],[L]-notation.
For that reason he would use the supporting routine "CHANGE TRANSFORMER". The input
data deck would look as follows:
1) BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
2) CHANGE TRANSFORMER
3} $ERASE
4) self-contained SATURABLE TRANSFORMER data case
remark: - no reference component usage allowed
- no zero magnetizing current allowed
- specification of non-linear characteristic will not be taken
into account in the final linear model.
5) BLANK card ending CHANGE TRANSFORMER supporting routine
6) $PUNCH
7) BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
8} BLANK CARD ENDING ALL CASES
Remark that several pOint-4 data may be stacked one after the other, without
the need to separate. For an example, we refer to the first subcase of Dc67.
The card formats to be used are so obvious that they do not need to be explained.
XIX-J. Convert saturable transformer cards to linear equivalent (a).(L) - 2

XIX-J.2. Example

Following example is an extract of benchmark Dc-67, where only the first subcase
is used.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
CHANGE TRANSFORMER ( Special-request word transfers to special conversion code
$ERASE ( Rewind (erase) buffer of punched cards as _ prepare to punch more
TRANSFORMER .005 [Link] 1.E4 3
.005 30. {1st point of (current. flux): characteristic
.01 40. {2nd point of (current. flux): characteristic
.02 45. (3rd point
0.1 50. (4th pOint
5.0 100. (5th and final point of (current. flux) char.
9999 Special terminator bounds characteristic (current • 9999)
lGElfT OPEN 5.0 5.E4 50. ( 1st of 2 winding cards
2LOADFF 20. 2.E5 100. ( 2nd and final winding. card
BLANK card ends saturable TRANSFORMER components to be [Link] to tRl. [Ll.
$PUNCH { Flush the punched-card output of just-created TJpe-51. 52 ••••
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

XIX-J.3. Output .da:ta ~ structure:

11 listing of liD-col.... card i_gaa now being flushed f..- punell buffer follows.

123456789012345671190123456789012345671190123456789012345678901234567190123456789

C (.+ • • • • ) card. pW\ched: by support routine on 2,-,J8I\-91 16.20.46 ( •••••• )

C CHANGI: TlU\I(SPORMER (SpeeLal-requeat word transf .... to .pecial comre ... i _ cacle
C SERASI: { R_ind ([Link] buttar of punclutd cardll sa ... prepare to puncb_re
C TlU\I(SPORMER .005 30. TlU\I(FF 1. Z4
C .005 30. {lat point of (current. flw,,: _reetariat
C .01 40. {2ntt point of (current. nWtp _ractarist
C .02 45. {3rd point '"
C 0.1 50. (4th point •••
C 5.0 100. {5th and final point of (current. f1Wtl _ r .
C 9999 Special terainatDr boUnds characteristic (CDrrent • 99991
C" 1GIENT OPEN 5.0 5.1:4 50. { lat of 2 "inding cards
C 2LOADl'l' 20. 2.1:5 100. { 2nd and final "inding. card
51GENT OPEN 5.9066393442623£+03. 1.279501119672131:+06 . . . . .
52LDADl'l' 1.111032786885251:+04. 2.45901639344261:+06 S
2.36265573770491:+04. 5.11803278688521+06 •••••
••••• -.--( End of LUNIT7 punched carda sa flushed by SPUNCH request ) •• - •• _.
Note that the output is not in. the legal free format: no separation by comma's
in between node names. Following section shows how data should be modified.

XIX-J.4. Usage

The first case is the representation of the saturable transformer as it appears

in its normal form:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
$WIDTH. 79. { Request narrow. SO-column LUNIT6 output as an illustration
BEGIN PEAK VALUE SEARCH. -1. ( Time of -1 i. request to read following card
0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 ( Limit extrema to these 2 subranges
PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH. 10; 2. ( Request max precision of 6 numbers in. SO byte•
• 010 6.0
1 1 1 1 1 -1
5 5 20 20 100 100
GEN GENT 1.E-3 3
LOADFF 1.0EO 3
TRANSFORMER .005 [Link] 1.E4
.005 30 •
. 01 40.
. 02 45 •
0.1 50.
5.0 100.
9999
lGENT OPEN 5.0 5.E4 50.
XIX-J. Convert aaturable tranaformer carda to linear equivalent [R].[L] - 3

2LOADFF 20. 2.15 100.

OPEN 1.17
BLANK card finiahing all branch carda
BLANK card ending non-exiatent switch carda
HGEN 200. .1591549 -1.
BLANK card terminating program aouree carda
1 ( Requeat for all node voltage outputa
CPRINTERPLOT
C 193 .5 0.0 4.0 toAD GEN GENT
BLANK card terminating plot carda
$WIDTH. 132. ( Done with 80 columna. aoreturn to wide. 132-column LUXIT6 output
BEGIH HEW DATA CASI
BLANK

The next case will show the same example. but now in the [R]. [L] representation.
with use of the punched card. There is a necessary manual manipulation needed.
because of program bug.
BIGIH HEW DATA CASI
$WIDTH. 79. ( lIequeat narrow. 80-column LUXIT6 output aa an illuatration
BIGIN PEAK ~V! SEARCH. -1. (Tiae of -1 ia requeat to read .following card
0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 ( Limit extrema to theae 2 aubrangea
PRINTID truHBIR WIDTH. 10. 2. ( Requeat aax preciaion of 6 number. in 80 by tea
.010 6.0
1 1 1 1 1 -1
5 5 20 20 100 100
GEN GENT 1.1-3 3
LOADFF 1.0E3 3
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
[Link]... 5.90663934426231+03.1.27950819672131+06 ••••• (reaark extra coaaa'a
[Link].... 1.18032786885251+04.2.45901639344261+06$ (following type code and
2.36265573770491+04.5.11803278688521+06 ••••• (node namea
OPEN 1.17
BLANK card fintahing all branch carda
BLANK card endingnon-exiatent switch carda
HGEN 70. .1591549 -1.
BLANK card terminating program aouree carda
1 ( Requeat for all node voltage output a
C PUNTIR PLOT
C 193 .5 0.0 4.0 LOADFF GEN GENT
BLANK card terminating plot carda
$WIDTH. 132. ( Done with 80 columna. ao return to wide. 132-column LUXIT6 output
BIGIH NEW DATA CASI
BLANK
XXI- A. Purpose & applications - 1

XXI. LINE CONSTANTS

XXI-~ Purpose A applications

The "LINE CONSTANTS" supporting routine can be used in the following circum-
stances:

-"Line Constants" stand alone: this option can be used to derive the resistance.
inductance and capacitance matrix (both symmetrical components and phase com-
ponents) for any given configuration of overhead conductors, at any frequency
between 0.0001 Hz and 500 kHz.

- "Line Constants" mutual coupling request: this option can be used to calculate
the mutual coupling between a 3-phase power carrier and a parallel communication
line.

- Frequency scan option: this option can be used to derive the zero and positive
sequence resistance, inductance and capacitance values over a predefined
logarithmically-spaced grouping of frequencies.

- PI-circuit output request: this option can be used to derive either a nominal
PI-circuit (or short line equivalent. valid for transient phenomena) or an
equivalent PI-circuit (or long line equivalent, valid to describe steady state
conditions only). (See section XXI-E for more details).

-K.C. Lee or Clarke output request: this option can be used to obtain a constant
parameter, travelling wave line model. Note that this output can be used to
'prepare branch cards in the input data for typical cases of electric network
simulation (see sections IV-D-1 and IV-D-2):
- K.C. Lee model: untransposed case
- Clarke model: transposed case

- JMARTI output request: although this involves imbedded usage of line constants,
we like to refer to this output option here too, since it will result in a
frequency-dependent travelling wave line model. Note that this output can be
used as branch cards in the input data (see section IV-D-3). More details on
the imbedded usage of line constants within the JMARTI setup can be found in
section XVII.

Following applicatibns of the "LINE CONSTANTS" supporting routine will be

discussed in detail in this chapter:

- stand alone case

- Mutual coupling of a three-phase power line [Link] a parallel
telecommunication line.
- frequency scan option
- nominal PI-circuit representation of the line
- constant-parameter, travelling-wave line model (K.C. Lee or Clarke)
XXI- B. ·LINE CONSTANTS· atand alone caae - 2

XXI-Its. "LINE CONSTANTS" standalone ~

XXI-B-l. Input data-deck structure

A data deck for a simple "LINE CONSTANTS - STAND ALONE" case is composed out
of the following sequence of data cards:
1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
2. LINE CONSTANTS -special request word
( transfers control to the proper overlay )
3. special request cards: ENGLISH or MErRIC (necessary)
4. conductors cards: "single conductor"- option
"automatic bundling"- option
5. BLANK CARD ending conductor data
6. frequency cards: "single frequency" -option
7. BLANK CARD ending frequency cards
8. BLANK CARD ending line constants
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin newEMTP data case
10. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases
As for the conductor sequence, no special order is needed since each conductor
card bears its own phase-number.
Let's discuss the different card formats in more extensive detail now.
1. "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card comes first

11JJ1JJ1JJ~lJJ1JJiJj~llJJJJiJJ~lJJ1JJJJJ~lJJ1JJJJJ~lJJlJJJJJ~lJJ1JJJJJ~lJJ1JJIJJ~
BEGI N NEW DATA CAS

2. Next comes the "LINE CONSTANTS" card, a special-request card which serves to
transfer control to the overlay in question:

11JJ1JJJJJ~lJJlJJtJJ~lJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJIJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~lJJJJJiJJ~lJJJJJJJJ~
LINE CONSTANT
XXI- B. -LINE CONSTANTS- stand alone cas. - 3

3. Following are special request cards. For this "stand alone" case, only two
requests can be applied, namely "METRIC or ENGLISH".

Illi~~llJmmmmummmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm~

11JJJJJjJJJ1JJJJIIIJ~IJJJJJIJJ~IJJJJJIJJ~llJJJIIJ~~IJJlJIIJJ~IJIJJIIJJ~IJJJJ'IJ~~
ENGL IS

These keywords can be used to request either "Metric units" or "English units"
for input/output purposes within the "LINE CONSTANTS" supporting routine.
Defaults: ENGLISH

4. Following are "NC" conductor cards, used to define the geometry and some of
the fundamental electrical properties of the line under study. It is possible
to use two different options:
- single conductor - option
- automatic bundling - option
Use one such card for each physical conductor or 'regular' bundle. It should
be noted that the meaning of the variables on the conductor card can have a
different interpretation, depending on whether one is using the "single
Conductor-" or the "automatic bundling-" option. This difference will be stressed
where needed during the discussion of the meaning of the variables.

If one wants to input a "regular bundle". the "automatic bundling option" should
be preferred. By definition, a regular bundle consists of identical component
conductors, uniformly spaced around the Circumference of a circle.

If one wants to input a single physical. conductor or a non-regular bundle, the

"single conductor option" should be used.
As for the conductor card input sequence, no special order is needed since each
conductor card bears its own phase-number. Single physical conductors having
the same phase number will be assumed to belong to the same phase bundle.

Following are typical settings, valid in almost any case:

SKIN = T/D
RESIS = DC resistance (Ohm/mile or Ohm/Km.)
IX =4
REACT = BLANK
XXI- B. "LINE CONSTANTS· atand alone caae - •

4a. Single conductor option

In case of the single conductor option, following card format should be used:

~'f! I~~~ IC I" i' r! f' II I- ff ~ . r!

I~
IC rl
IE
IC r!I~I(
If
r~l*
13 F5.4 FS.5 12 FS.5 FS.5 FS.3 FS.3 FS.3

IP SKIN RESIS IX REACT DIAM HORIZ vrOWER WID

metric Ohm/km see below em m m m

english Ohm/mile inch feet feet feet

In this case. all variables apply to one single-physical conductor.

Parameters:

IP : phase number of the conductor.

Single physical conductors having the same phase number will be bundled in
a tnon-regulart bundle.
= 1. 2, 3 •.... : phase number
= 0 : ground wire
SKIN skin effect flag, see parameter RESIS

RESIS skin effect parameter

- no skin effect:
SKIN = 0.0
RESIS = AC-resistance value (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) of the conductor.
- skin effect to be included:
SKIN = 0.5 for solid conductor.
SKIN = T/D for tubular conductor
(T= thickness of tubular conductor)
(D= outside diameter of the tube)
RESIS = DC-resistance value (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) of the conductor.
IX self-inductance flag, see parameter REACT

REACT: self-inductance parameter

IX = 0 : specify for REACT the reactance (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) for one-unit
(m or foot) spacing, which is assumed to be valid for whatever
frequency one specified on the .frequency Card. The internal inductance
is NOT corrected for skin effect.
IX = 1 specify for REACT the reactance (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) for one-unit
(m or foot) spacing at 60 Hz. If frequencies other than 60 Hz appear
on the frequency card, the reactance will be changed proportionally.
The internal inductance is NOT corrected for skin effect.
IX = 2 specify for REACT the GMR (cm or inches). The internal inductance
is NOT corrected for skin effect (GMR = geometric mean radius).
XXI- B. -LINE CONSTANTS" atand alone caae - 5

IX = 3 specify for REACT the GMR/R - ratio. The internal inductance is NOT
corrected ror s~ errect.
(GMR = geometric mean radius, R= physical radius)
(GMR/R = 0.7788 for a solid conductor).
IX = 4 leave field REACT blank in this case. Note that the internal inductance
will be corrected for skin effect and the calculation of the
self-inductance will be based on tubular conductor geometry.

DIAM : outside diameter (cm or inch) of tubular conductor.

HORIZ: horizontal distance (m or foot) from the center of the conductor to some
reference line. Use the same reference line for all conductors and bundles
within the same data case !

VTOWER: vertical height (m or foot) of the center of the conductor above the ground,
at the tower.

VMID : vertical height (m or foot) of the center of the conductor above the ground,
at midspan.

NOTES: - In case that both, Vl'OWER and VMID, are specified, the average height,
as used for internal calculation will be set to:
v = 2/3 x VMID + 1/3 x Vl'OWER
- In case that only Vl'OWER or VMID is specified, the average height
as used for internal calculation will be set to this value.

4b. Automatic bundling option

In case of the automatic bundling option, following card format should be

used:

!~ ~,L ' ~( H~ rE rf 1'1' L'~E ~ . I~

I~~( flf~ r~
If
Ie f! rm ,< i~ f~ rcls
Ie

13 FS.4 F8.S 12 FS.S FS.S FS.3 F8.3 FS.3 FS.5 F6.2 12

IP SKIN RESIS IX REACT DIAM HORIZ ¥TOWER WID SEPAR ALPHto N

metric Ohm/km see below em m m m em degree

english Ohm/mile inch feet feet feet inch degree

In this case. the variables SKIN, RESIS, IX, REACT and DIAM all apply to one
component conductor within the "regular bundle". Recall that in such case. all
component conductors within the same bundle are assumed to be identical.

The variables HORIZ. VTOWER and VMID all apply to the position of the fictious
center of the bundle with respect to the ground.

The variables SEPAR, ALPHA and NBUND describe the bundle geometry.
XXI- B. "LINE CONSTANTS" .tand alone case - 6

Parameters:

IP : indicates the phase number of the regular bundle.

1, 2, 3, .... = phase number
o = ground wire
SKIN : skin effect flag, see parameter RESIS

RESIS : skin effect parameter

- no skin effect:
SKIN = 0.0
RESIS = AC-resistance value (in Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) of one
component conductor of the bundle.
- skin effect to be included:
SKIN = 0.5 for solid component conductors
SKIN = T/D for tubular component conductor
(T= thickness of tubular conductor)
(D= outside diameter of tubular conductor)
RESIS = DC-resistance value {in Ohm/km or Ohm/mile} of the component
conductor

IX self-inductance flag, see parameter REACT

REACT: Self-inductance parameter.

IX = 0 : specify for REACT the reactance (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) for one-unit
(m or foot) spacing (for 1 conductor component only), which is assumed
to be valid for whatever frequency specified on the frequency card.
The internal inductance is NOT corrected for skin effect.
IX = 1 specify for REACT the reactance (Ohm/km or Ohm/mile) for one-unit
(m or foot) spacing at 60 Hz (for one conductor component only).
If frequencies other than this 60 Hz appear on the frequency card,
the reactance will be changed proportionally. The internal inductance
is NOT corrected for .skin effect.
IX = 2 specify for REACT the GMR (=geometric mean radius (cm or inch) of
1 conductor component only). The internal inductance is NOT corrected
for skin effect.
IX = 3 specify for REACT the GMR/R - ratio. The internal inductance is
NOT corrected for skin effect.
(GMR = geometric mean radius of one conductor component)
(R= phySical radius of one conductor component)
(GMR/R=O.7788 for solid conductors)
IX = 4 : leave field REACT blank. Now, the internal inductance will be
.corrected for skin effect and the calculation of the self-inductance
will be based on tubular conductor geometry.

DIAM : outside diameter (cm or inch) of one conductor component.

HORIZ: horizontal distance (m or foot) of the center of the regular bundle to some
reference line. Use the same reference line for all conductors and bundles
in the same data case t

VTOWER: vertical height (m or foot) of the center of the regular bundle above the
ground, at the tower.
XXI- B. ·LINE CONSTANTS· .tand alone ea.e - 7

VMID : vertical height (m or foot) of the center of the regular bundle above the
ground, at midspan.

NOTES: - If both VTOWER and VMID are specified, the average height as used
for internal calculation will be set to:
v = 2/3 x VMID + 1/3 x VTOWER
- If only VTOWER or VMID is specified. the average height as used for
internal calculation will be set to this value.

SEPAR: distance-separation (cm or inch) between the centers of two adjacent component
conductors within the same bundle.

ALPHA: angular position of the center of one component conductor of the bundle.
As reference, the horizontal line is used. Positive angles are measured
counter-clockwise.

NBUND : number of conductors which make up the bundle.

5. Next comes a blank card ending all conductor data cards.

6. Following are the frequency cards, specifying the discrete frequency for which
line constants are to be calculated.

I~ I~ 'E
.~ 1~1( I ~ ~ .. l~ 'Ef~ l~ I~ tflSiC ~ ~~ E I~ I ~f' ~E
'*1
tE rd~ ~I r! 'I.

F8.2 Fl0.2 Al0 6 '1 6 '1

RHO FREO FCAR 'CPR ,ZPR , ,

Parameters:
RHO resistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth (Carson theory)

FREQ discrete frequency (Hz) at which the line parameters will be calculated.

FCAR : flag, used to control the number of correction terms in Carson's earth-return
formula for the impedance.
=0 : no correction terms added
=1 in column 28: calculation uses highest accuracy
=blank= calculation uses highest accuracy
Beware: ATP uses character checking here. Consequently, the interpretation of
a zero and a blank is different. This is in derrogation to the rest
of the input (where zero or blank usually have the same meaning)!

ICPR printout control parameter for the capacitance

XXI- B. "LINE CONSTANTS" .tand alone case - 8

lCAP : Control flag. specifying whether the capacitance matrix [C] or the susceptance
matrix u{C] (per km or per mile) should be requested. The actual output
further also depends on parameter ICPR:
ICAP=[Link]=lOOOOO inverse of u{ C ]
010000 inverse of u{ Ce]
001000 inverse of u{C.)
000100 u{C]
000010 u{C e ]
000001 u{C.]
lCAP=[Link]=100000 inverse of [C ]
010000 inverse of [C e J
001000 inverse of [Cs]
000100 [C ]
000010 [Ce]
000001 [C.]

Note with respect to the meaning of these variables:

- no index means: "for the unreduced system".
Each physical conductor has a row and column in the matrix. as
does each ground wire.
- index e means: "for the equivalent phase conductor system after
elimination of ground wires and the bundling of conductors".
- index s means: "for the symmetrical components of the equivalent
phase conductor system".

DlST : specifier (cols 45-52) not really needed: all results are expressed per
unit of length.
lZPR : printout control parameters for the series impedance matrices [Z]= [R]+ju{LJ
or their inverse:
=100000 [Z]
=010000 [Ze]
=001000 [Zs]
=000100 inverse of [Z ]
=000010 inverse of [Ze]
=000001 inverse of [Zs]

ISEG : a flag. used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires

7. Next comes a blank card ending all frequency cards.

8. Next comes a blank card ending all "LINE CONSTANTS" cases.

9. Next comes a "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card to begin a new EMTP data case.
10. Next comes a blank card ending all EMTP cases.
XXI- B. "LINE CONSTANTS" atend alone caae - 9

XXI-B-2. Sample test case

In order to practice the above discussed rules, let I s consider the 400-kV
Portuguese line Riomaior-Cedillo. as used by [Link] Lima (EDP, 1981). The line
configuration is as follows (all in metric units):

-- 7.85 m
--

.-----.
tower : 30.5 m
o

midspan : 23.20 m -- 12 m
-...
I

u
SEPAR = 0.4 m
ALPHA = 0 degrees
tower: 21.63 m NB = 2 conduct/bundle
midspan: 9.83 m

l' u

////////////////////////////////////////////
Fig.: Riomaior-Cedillo 400 kV line

The phase conductors are tubular, with:

T/D = 0.231
DC resistance = 0.0522 Ohms/Km
outside diameter D = 3.18 cm

The sky wires are solid, with:

T/D = 0.5
DC resistance = 0.36 Ohms/Km
outside diameter D = 1.46 cm

The earth resistivity equals 250.0 Ohm-meter and all line data are requested
at 50 Hz. Let's document the use of both options: "manual bundling" as well as
"automatic bundling" for this simple example. The input data deck then looks as
follows:
XXI- B. "LINE CONSTANTS" stand alone case - 10

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
C.·..
C
MANUAL BUNDLING •••••
1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
10.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12.2 21.63 9.83
10.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -11.8 21.63 9.83
20.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -0.2 21.63 9.83
20.231 0.0522 4 3.18 0.2 21.63 9.83
30.231 0.0522 4 3.18 11.8 21.63 9.83
30.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12.221.63 9.83
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.85 30.50 23.2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.85 30.50 23.2
BLANK CARD ENDING COJfDUCTOR CARDS
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
250.0 50.0 1 111 111 1
BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS
C··· AUTOMATIC BUNDLING •••••
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
10.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
20.231 0.0522 4 3.18 0.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
30.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.85 30.50 23.2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.85 30.50 23.2
BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS
C 1 2 345 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
250.0 50.0 1 111 111 1
BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS
BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANTS
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK CARD TERMINATING ALL JOBS

XXI-B-3. Output data deck structure

Only the output of the second .subcase of the previous paragraph was kept.
COIIIIent card. JIUMDCO - 21. C "--- A~Tle IUNDLlnG ----
e ....... t card. JIUMDCO - 22. e 1 234 6 7 8
e 3456189 12345618' 12345618' 123456189 123456189 123456189 123456189 123456189
Ca..ent card.

Line conductor card.

NUIUICD - 23.
Line 'conductor card. 2. 310Z-01 S.220E-02
2. 310E-Ol 5. 220E-02
.
4
1 0.231 0.0522 4
2 0.231 0.0522 4
3.18
3.11
12.
O.
21.63
21.63
9.83
9.13
40.
40.
O.
·0.
2
2
Line conductor card. 2. 310E-01 5. 220E-02 4 3 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12. 21.63 9.83 40. O. 2
Line conductor card. [Link] 3.6001:-01 4 o 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 1.85 la.S 23.2
Line conductor card. 5.0001-01 3.600!-01 4 o 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.15 la.5 23.2
Blank card [Link] conductor cards. BLANX CAIID ElfDlnG lXIIfDUCTOIl CAIIDS
C~nt card. 1ftIMDCl). la. e 1 2 345 678
ComMIInt card. IfUPlDCD· 31. e 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456719 123456789
Frequency card. 2.5001:+02 5.0001:001 0.0001:000 250. SO.O 1 111 111

Line conductor table after sorting and in! Ual proce. . ing.
Table Ph•••
Row NWlber
Skin effect
a-type
Resistance
R l_/ke)
Reactance data specification
X-type XI_Ike) Dr GfIR
Di_ter
I ce
3.1_
, Rorizantal
X l_trs'
11.100
Avghe!ght
Y l_trs,
13.763
Ii_
1
2
3
1
2
3
0.23100
0.23100
0.23100
0.05220
0.05220
0.05220
4
.. 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
3.11000
3.11000
-0.200
-12.200
13.763
13.763
4 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 12.200 13.163
5 2 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 0.200 13.763
6 3 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 -11.800 13.163
0 1.46000 7.150 2S.633
8 0
0.50000
0.50000
0.36000
0.36000
4
. 0.000000
0.000000 1.016000 -7.850 25.633

Matrices are for earth resistivity - [Link]£002 ot>e-. .tero and frequency 5.00000000!.01 HZ. correction factor -
1 .00000000£-06

Capacitance . . tria. in units of [farads/_ter 1 for the syst_ of .phylical conductor••

Rows and colWlfta ,proceed In the . . . . order . . the sorted input.
1 1. 113194E-08
2 -3.112124E-I0 1. 117169E-08
3 -8.122125E-l1 -3.147100E-I0 1.111559E-08
4 -6.126836E-09 -2.1472741-10 -7.479889£-11 1. 111559E-08
5 -3.580533E-I0 -6.073371E-09 -2.747274E-I0 -3.147100£-10 1.117769£-08
6 -8.851474E-l1 -3.5805331:-10 -6.126836E-09 -8.122125£-11 -3.112124!-10 1.113194E-08
7 -5.390157E-I0 -4.oo7901E-10 -1.904813!-10 -5.302347!-10 -4.257381!-10 -2.002942E-I0 6.641598E-09
8 -2.002942E-10-4.257381£-10 -5.302347£-10 -1.904813!-10 -4.007901E-I0 -5.390157E-I0 -6.955842E-10 6. 641598E-09

Capacitance _trix. in units Qf [farads/_ter) for the oyot. . of equivalent phase conductors.
Rows and colwms proceed in the SAIM order as the sorted input.
1 9. 993860E-09
2 -1.258703£-09 1.020865£-08
XXI- C. "LIME CONSTANTS" [Link] the mutual coupling option - 11

3 -3.25751011-10 -1.2587031-09 9. 993UOI-09

capec:1tonce _tria., 1n unit. o~ [taro4a;/Jatete" J tor -r-etrlcal cc:.ponent. 0'

t ... equivalent pba• • conductor
Rows proceed In the SeqlMlRce (0. 1. 2). (0. 1. 2). atc.; col ...... proc:eK in the ..equ_ce (0. 2. 1). (0. 2. 1). atc.
o 8.17001"1-09
0.0000001+00
1 1.1969311-10 -3."67804£-10
-2.0731"51-10 -6.006413£-10
2 1.1969311-10 1.1013181-08 -3.4678041-10
2.0731"51-10 0.000000£+00 6.006"131-10

.apedance _trlx. In unl u of (aha.. / _ t . r ) for the .1'U_ of phl't>lcel conductor••

Row. and col..... proc:eK In the .._ order a. the .ort... input.
1 1.0100031-01
7.2895161-01
2 ".8362301-02 1.010003£-01
3.0326191-01 7.2895161-01
3 ".8345231-02 .... 362301-02 1.0100031-01
2.5971"11-01 3.0326191-01 7.2895161-01
.. ".8368091-02 .... 36191£-02 ".8344478-02 1.0100038-01
5.169645£-01 3.0120171-01 2.5867571-01 7.2895161-01
5 .... 362681-02 4.'368091-02 ".8361918-02 4.'36230£-02 1.0100038-01
3.0539191-01 5.1696"5£-01 3.0120178-01 3.032619£-01 '.289516£-01
6 4.8345971-02 4.8362681-02 4.8368091-02 4.8345231-02 4.8362301-02 1.0100031-01
2.6077001-01 3.0539191-01 5.1696451-01 2.597141£-01 3.032619£-01 7.2'95161-01
7 4.7965581-02 4.7963808-02 4.795174£-02 4.796546£-02 4.7964038-02 4.795231£-02 4.0780271-01
3.0107981-01 2.9249231-01 2.6200601-01 3.0042041-01 2.9346638-01 2.6293851-01 7.'508681-01
8 4.7952311-02 4.796403£-02 4.796546£-02 4.7951741-02 4.7963801-02 4.7961158£-02 4.756628£-02 4.0780271:-01
2.629385£-01 2.934663£-01 3.004204£-01 2.6200601-01 2.924923£-01 3.010798£-01 2.8724228-01 7.850868£-01

.lOpeclanc:e _tri". In Wilt. of (aha./_t.r ) for the .l'.t_ of equIvalent p ..... conductors.
Rows and c o l _ proceed In the . _ order as the ..ort ... Input.
1 8.437393£-02
4.8217681-01
2 5.863546£-02 8.633031£-02
1.580488£-01 4.720861£-01
3 5.663409£-02 5.863546£-02 8.4373931-02
1.2089111-01 1.5804881-01 4.'21768£-01

loopeclance _tri". in Wilt. of ( _ / _ t a r ) for .~tr1cal _ t .. of the equivalent pha•• conductor

Row. proceed in the _ c e (0. 1. 21. (0. 1. 2). atc.; c o l _ proc:eK In the _ c e (0. 2. 11. (0. 2. 1). etc.
o 2.009627£-01
7.7013908-01
1 -8.4731891-03 -2.4024861-02
-3.36'6561-03 1.465'411-02
2 7.1539361-03 2.7057721-02 2.4706981-02
-5.653669£-03 3.3315041-01 1.3476941-02

sequence surge [Link] AUenuation velOCitY wavel_th bda_ _ctance SU.. ceptance
_gn1tlldelolla) angl.(deqr.) db/ ... "'/aec ... _ / ... aha/... liii0/...
Zero: 5.56866£+02. -7.31242£+00 1. 58014£-03 2.21602£+05 4.432041+03 2.009631-01 7.70139E-ol 2. 56669E-06
Positive: 3.10816£+02 -2.321621+00 3.78381£-04 2.9Z376E+05 5.847511+03 2.705771-02 3.33150£-01 3.45989£-06
Blank card taraineting frequency card••
Blank card endIng "LIn COftSTANTS" ....... IBLAIIIt CARD ENDIIIG I'Il£OUDCY CARDS
BLAIIIt CARD ENDIIIG LIn COftSTANTS

XXI-c..... "LINE CONSTANTS" using :tbJl mutual coupling option

XXI-C-l. Input data deck structure

A data deck for "LINE CONSTANTS" requesting output for MUTUAL COUPLING of a
three-phase power carrier line with a communication line, parallel to this power
line, is composed out of the following sequence of data cards:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. LINE CONSTANTS -special request word
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. special request cards: ENGLISH or METRIC (necessary)
4. conductors cards: "single conductor"- option
"automatic bundling"- option
5. BLANK CARD ending conductor data
6. frequency card with "mutual coupling" option request
7. BLANK CARD ending frequency cards
8. BLANK CARD ending line constants
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case
10. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases
XXI- C. -LIME CONSTANTS' uaing the mutual coupling option - 12

Most of the cards used in this option also appeared in the "stand alone" case.
For the conductor cards, only a small remark with respect to the variable "IPHASE"
will be necessary. Also the "mutual coupling" option request on the frequency
card needs some explanation. For the detailed description of all other variables,
we refer to the previous paragraph, dealing with the "stand alone" case {section
XXI-B} .

4. Just as in the previous paragraph, conductor cards are used to define the
geometry and some of the fundamental electrical properties of the .system under
study (= three-phase power carrier line. parallel to a communication line).
Again it is possible to specify a single physical conductor ora regular bundle
(see sectionXXI-B-l. card 4).

Only the variable IPHASE needs a special explanation in this case;

IPHASE: indicates the phase number of the physical conductor or regular bundle.
Conductors having the same phase number are to be bundled in a 'non-regular'
bundle.
= 0 : ground wire
= 1. 2. 3 : phase number
= 4 : communication line
The meaning of all other variables. as well as the card format remained
unchanged.

6. frequency card with "mutual coupling" option request:

Again this card specifies the frequency for which the line constants are to be
calculated. Remark that the formula, used to calculate the mutual .impedance
between a three-phase power circuit and a communication line only allows ONE
DISCRETE frequency (NO logarithmically-spaced grouping of frequencies allowed! ) •

Don't forget to specify the special output control flag "MUTUAL".

!-
If IE
. ~ ~~I f If Ie l'ft 'E I. I' tH~I( I- f' l'~ E I~ I' I~I( l'H ~* rEl*
F8.2 F10.2 A10 6 11 6 11

RHO FREQ FCAR ICPR IZPR I 1If.

~IL
IEIT
iell
~
Il

Parameters:

RHO reSistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth {Carson theory}

FREQ discrete frequency (Hz) at which the line parameters will be calculated.
XXI- c. ·LINE CONSTANTS· [Link] the mutual coupling option - 13

lCPR printout control parameter for the capacitance

lCAP matrix or the susceptance matrix (per km or per mile) or their inverse:
lCAP=O,ICPR=100000 inverse of u.{C ]; unreduced system
010000 inverse of u.{C e]; equivalent phase conductor system
001000 inverse of u.{Cs]; symmetrical components only
000100 u{C]
000010 u.{C e]
000001 u.{C.]

ICAP=[Link]=100000 inverse of [C ]
010000 inverse of [Ce]
001000 inverse of [C.]
000100 [C ]
000010 [Ce]
000001 [C.]
DIST :specifier (cols 45-52) not really needed: all results are expressed per unit
of length.
ISEG : a flag, used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires

IZPR : printout control parameters for the series impedance matrices [Z]= [R]+ ju.{L]
or their inverse:
=100000 [Z J
=010000 [Ze]
=001000 [ZI]
=000100 inverse of [Z ]
=000010 inverse of [ZeJ
=000001 inverse of [Z.]
MUTUAL: request for calculation of the mutual impedance of a three-phase transmission
line, parallel to a communication line.
=1: obtain this output as printed output.

XXI-C-2. Sample test case

Following example describes how to use this request for calculating the mutual
coupling between a 3-phase power carrier and a parallel telephone line. As for
the configuration of all lines. we took the same line setup as before. The only
XXI- C. ~LlNE CONSTANTS~ uaing the mutual coupling option - 14

change is that now, there is a telephone line, located at .5 m height, on a distance

of 4 m to the right of the tower (=reference line for the horizontal position of
all other lines, too).

7.85 m

tower : 30.5 m
midspan : 23.20 m
12 m

~--. • • •
SEPAR = 0.4 m
ALPHA = 0 degrees
tawer : 21.63 m NB = 2 conduct/bundle
midspan : 9.83 m

tower = midspan = 0.5 m

////////////////////////////////////////////
Fig.: Riomaior-Cedillo 400 kV line with parallel telephone line

The phase conductors are tubular, with:

TjD = 0.231
DC resistance = 0.0522 OhmsjKm
outside diameter D = 3.18 cm

The sky wires are solid, with:

TjD = 0.5
DC resistance = 0.36 OhmsjKm
outside diameter D = 1.46 cm

The telephone wire is solid, with:

TjD = 0.5
DC resistance = 0.36 OhmsjKm
outside diameter D = 1.46 cm
XXI- C. "LINE CONSTANTS" using the mutual coupling option - 15

The earth resistivity equals 250.0 Ohm-meter and all line data are requested at
50 Hz. Let's document the use of the "mutual coupling" option only. The input
data deck then looks as follows:

BEGIN NEW DATA ~E

LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
C··· AUTOMATIC BUNDLING. mutual coupling •••••
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
10.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12.0 21.63 9.83 40 0.0 2
20.231 0.0522 4 3.18 0.0 21.63 9.83 40 0.0 2
30.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12.0 21.63 9.83 40 0.0 2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.85 30.50 23.2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.85 30.50 23.2
40.5 0.36 4 1.46 4.00 0.50 0.50
BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS
C 1 2 3 4 567 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
250.0 50.0 1 1
BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS
BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANTS
BEGIN NEW DATA ~E
BLANK CARD TERMINATING ALL JOBS

XXI-C-3. Output data deck structure

An extract from the output for the above data case is as follows:

[Link]-CONDUCTOIt TABLE AFTER SORTING AND INITIAL. PROCESSING.

TABLE PllASZ SKIN EFFECT RESISTMC\! IlEI!.CTMCZ-DATA SPECIFICATIOII DINIZTZR HORIZONTAL AVG BIGHT CONDUCTOR
ROW IlUllBER R-TYPE y IIITIIS)
1
2
1
2
0.23100
0.23100
R Ioml/ICII)
0.05220
0.05220
X-TYPE

4
.. XIOIIII/ICII) OR Gl'IR
0.000000
0.000000
I QII
3.11000
3.11000
) X IIITIIS)
-12.000
0.000
13.763
13.763
IfNIE

. 3

S
3
4
1
O.Z:UOO
0.50000
0.23100
0.05220
0.36000
0.05220
4
4
.
0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
3.11000
1.46000
3.111000
12.000
4.000
-12.000
13.763
[Link]
13.763
iL 6
7
8
2
3
0
0.2:UOO
0.23100
0.50000
0.05220
0.05220
0.36000
4

4
. 0.000000.
0.000000
0.000000
3.111000
3.11000
1.46000
0.000
12.000
-7.850
13.763
13.763
25.633
9 0 0.50000 0.36000 4 0.000000 1.46000 7.850 25.633

FOLLOWING i'lATRICES ARE I'OIt EARTH RESISTIVITY" 250.00 0IIII-11 AND nEOUI:NCY. 50.00 HZ. COIlIU!CTION FACTOR· 0.000001
PlUTUAI. IItPEIIAI'ICE POSITIVE- 0.02017 OIII'I/ICI'I NEG.\TIVE- 0.011166 omI/lCI'I ZERO- 0.4930 omI/lCI'I
BLNIJ( CARD TERIUNATING fltEOUEIICY CARDS. IBLNIJ( CAIID ENDING I"REQOEIICY CAIIDS
BLNIJ( CARD TERIIINATING LINE-CONSTANTS CASES. ULAN!( CAIID ENDING LINE CONSTANTS
XXI- D. Logarithmically-spaced grouping of frequencies - 16

XXI-~ Logarithmically-spaced grouping 2f frequencies

XXI-V-I. Input data deck structure

Beware: this option always assumes full transposition of the N-phase system.
As a result, only the zero- and positive sequence can be obtained.
A data deck for "LINE CONSTANTS" requesting output for a LOGARITHMICALLY-
SPACED GROUPING OF FREQUENCIES is composed out of the following sequence of data
cards:
1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
2. LINE CONSTANTS -special request word
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. special request cards: ENGLISH or METRIC (necessary)
FREQUENCY (optional)
4. conductors cards: "single conductor"- option
"automatic bundling"- option
5. BLANK CARD ending conductor data
6. frequency card with flfrequency scan" option
7. BLANK CARD ending frequency cards
8. BLANK CARD ending line constants
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case
10. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases

Most of the cards used in this option also appeared in the "stand alone" case.
The special request card "FREQUENCyfl needs some explanation, as well as the
"frequency scan" option on the frequency card. For a detailed description of all
other cards, we refer to section XXI-B, dealing with the "stand alone" case.

3. For this case of LINE CONSTANTS, besides the requests METRIC or ENGLISH (as in
the "stand alone" case) also the FREQUENCY request can be applied using the
following card format:

Il~JJJ~jJjJ1JlJJijJ~~lJllJJtJ~~lJJ1JJjJ~~lJll1JtJ~~lJllJJtJJ~lJJJJJjJ~~lJlJJJ{J~~
FREQUENC

Caution: in older program versions, this extra line was mandatory. From ATP4
onwards, this extra card just is neglected: it will not disturb the input
sequence.
XXI- D. Logarithmically-spaced grouping of frequencies - 17

6. The frequency card wi th "frequency scan" option only contains following variables:

I~ IE IE
,; f!~E Ie I: tl I( I ,~, I ~ I' t!l~ tIl! I' Ilt, Ie I,l' tll~l( t! tl Ie
FB.2 F1O.2 A10 13 13

RHO FREQ FCAR I DEC PN

Ie:
11=

I\.

Parameters:

RHO resistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth (Carson theory)

FREQ starting frequency of the frequency-looping.

FCAR : flag, used to control the number of correction terms in Carson's earth-return
formula for the impedance.
=0 : no correction terms added
=1 in column 28: calculation uses highest accuracy
=blank= calculation uses highes.t accuracy
Beware: ATP uses character checking here. Consequently, the interpretation of
a zero and a blank is different. This is. in derrogation to the rest
of the input (where zero or blank usually have the same meaning)!

DIST :specifier (cols 45-52) not really needed: all results are expressed per unit
of length.
ISEG : a flag, used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires

DEC : number of decades which are to be spanned by the logarithmically spaced

frequency looping.

PNT : number of frequency points per decade.

XXI-D-2. Sample test case

Following example describes how to use this request for calculating the frequency
dependency of the zero-sequence and posi ti ve-sequence line. parameters for a 3-phase
power carrier line. As for the configuration of all lines, we took the same line
setup as in point XXI-B-2. Let's assume that the frequency span starts at 0.01
Hz, with 2 decades to be spanned, using 3 points per decade. The input data deck
is as follows:
XXI- E. -LINE CONSTANTS- requeeting lumped PI-circuit output - 18

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
FREQUENCY
C··· AUTOMATIC BUNDLING, FREQUENCY SCAN REQUEST ••••••
C 1 2 345 678
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
10.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
20.231 0.0522 4 3.18 0.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
30.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12.0 21.63 9.83 40. 0.0 2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.85 30.50 23.2
00.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.85 30.50 23.2
BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
250.0 00.01 1 2 3
BLANK CARD ENnING FREQUENCY CARDS
BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANTS
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK CARD TERKINATING ALL JOBS

XXI-D-3. Output data deck structure

An extract from the output of the above data case looks as follows:

Marker card preC:tI,Ung new EMTP date ca... IEG!1f IfEW OAT'" CAS!
Coapute overhead 11ne constanta. UeU - 90 LIN! CONSTMTS
Requast for . .tric ,not English) units. MET1tIC
Request for frequency-loop printout.
Co..ent card. ,1RJMDCl). 6. C --- A~TIC auKIILIIfG. PREQUI!JfCY SCl\If REQUEST -----
C~t card. NUMDCD - .,. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 , 8
C~nt card. NUMDCD - I. C 3456789 123456789 123456719 123456719 123456719 123456719 123456789 123456789
Line conductor card. 2. 310E-ol 5. 220E-02 .. 1 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12. 21.63 9.13 40. O. 2
Une conductor card. 2. 310E-Ol 5. 220E-02 4 2 0.231 0.0522 4 3.11 O. 21.63 9.13 40. O. 2
Line conductor card. 2.310E-Ol 5. 220!-02 4 3 0.231 0.0522 4 3.11 -12. 21.63 9.83 40. O. 2
Une conductor card. [Link]-01 3.600E-Ol 4 0 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.15 30.5 23.2
Una conductor card. [Link]!-01 3.600E-Ol 4 0 0.5 ·0.36 4 1.46 -".15 30.5 23.2
Ilenk card tareinating conductor cards. lLAN1C CAaJ)!IID!1fG CONDUCTOR CAIIDS
COIIIIent card. NUMDCD - 15. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c - . . t card. NIII'IDCD - 16. C 3456719123456719 123456789 123456789 123456719 123456789 123456789 123456789
Frequency card. 2.500E+[Link]-02 [Link]+OO 250. 0.01 1 Z 3
Une conductor tebla after aorting and initial proceaaing.
Table

2
3
Pha..
Row Nuaber
1 1
2
3
Skin .ffeet
R-type
0.23100
0.23100
0.23100
Reaiatance
R 'aha/ke)
0.05220
0.05220
0.05220
Reactance data .specification
X-type
4
4
4
Xlaha/ke) or CMR
0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
I
-
Dl_ter

3.11000
3.11000
3.11000
)
HOrizontal
X ,etra)
11.100
-0.200
-12.200
lI"g height
Y letra)
13.763
U.763
13.763
If_

4 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 12.200 U.763

5 2 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 0.200 U.763
6 3 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.11000 -11.800 U.763
7 0 0.50000 0.36000 4 0.000000 1.46000 7.150 25.633
8 0 0.50000 0.36000 4 0.000000 1.46000 -7.150 25.633
--------------- Zero sequence --------------- ------------- posiU"e sequence -------------
Alpha Bate II Llal1l1- Cleicra- Alpha Bata II Lleill!- Claicro- Prequency
Neper/ke lIadian/ke aha/ke Benry/ke) hrad/ke) Naper/ke b4ian/ke _Ike -.ry/ke) Parad/ke) Hz
4.1360£-06 4.199IE-06 4.20521-02 1.02461.01 1.31411-02 4.1300E-06 4.1424!-06 4.2004!-o2 1.7121E+00 1.7724£-02 1.00001-02
6.0251E-06 6. 2194E-06 4.21011-02 9 ••741E+00 1. 314IE-02 7.0790E-06 7.11111-06 4.2004£-02 1.712U+00 1.7724£-02 2.15441-02
8.7080£-06 9. 2982E-06 4.22311-02 9.50161+00 1.31411-02 1.0357E-05 1.04111-05 4.20041-02 1.71211+00 1.77241-02 4.6416E-02
1. 2388E-05 1. 4172E-05 4. 2504E-02 9. 1269E+00 1.31481-02 1.50991!-05 1. 549O!-05 4.2004£-02 1. 7121!+00 1.7724!-02 1.0000E-01
1.7107E-05 2.2437£-05 4.3U1!-02 I. '473E+00 1. 3148J!-02 2.113.,!-05 2.3075£-05 4.2004£-02 1.7121!+00 1. 7724E-02 2.1544£-01
2.2532£-05 3. 7976E-05 4. 463OE-02 8.35631+00 1. 3148E-02 3.1052£-05 3.49611-05 4.20041-02 1.7121£+00 1.7724E-02 4.6416£-01
2.8501£-05 7.0231!-05 4.8458£-02 7.93741+00 1.3148£-02 4.26011-05 5. 4894E-05 4.2006£-02 1. 7121!+00 1. 77241-02 1.00001+00
8lank card terainating frequency carda. 18lA1Q( CAaJ) ENDINC PIlEQIIDICY CAllJ)S
8lank card ending - LlN£ CONSTANTS· ca•••• BlAIQ( CAllJ)END!1fG LINE COIfSTMTS

XXI-L., "LINE CONSTANTS" requesting lumped PI-circuit output

XXI-E-l. Input data deck .structure

It should be stressed that two different PI-circuit outputs can be obtained:
the so-called nominal PI-circuit (or short line equivalent) as well as the equivalent
PI-circuit (or long-line equivalent).
XXI- E. -LINE CONSTANTS- requeating lumped PI-circuit output - 19

Recall that the equivalent PI-circuit (long-line-equivalent) correctly

describes the steady state conditions of a line at its terminals (i.e. for one
specific frequency and a specified length). This equivalent PI-circuit can IlS2.t
be used for transient phenomena. Accordingly. no punched card output is possible.
One can only obtain a transfer admittance or transfer impedance and a shunt
admittance or shunt impedance matrix.

Recall that the nominal PI-circuit (short-line-equivalent) gm be used for

transient phenomena (although a travelling wave model generally should be preferred).
On transient network analyzers, distributed parameter lines are approximated as
cascaded connections of short-length nominal PI-circuits with lumped elements.
Accordingly, punched card output can be obtained, readily usable with transient
network simulations. For this purpose. do not forget to use the optional request
card "BRANCH" (point 3).

In both cases a data deck for a "Line Constants" case requesting PI-CIRCUIT
output is composed out of the following sequence of data cards:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. LINE CONSTANTS -special request word
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. special request cards: ENGLISH or METRIC (necessary)
BRANCH (optional)
$ERASE (whenever punching)
4. conductors cards: "single conductor"- option
"automatic bundling"- option
_5. BLANK CARD ending conductor data
6. frequency cards with PI-circuit output request,
followed by a "$PUNCH"-card.
7. BLANK CARD ending frequency cards
8. BLANK CARD ending line constants
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case
10. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases
In this case, only the special request card "BRANCH" and some variables on the
frequency card need to be discussed. All other cards are as in the "stand alone"
case (see section XXI-B).

3. The optional special request card "BRANCH" better can be used whenever punched
nominal PI-circuit output is desired as branch cards for following
applications: - mutually-coupled RLC branches
- CASCADE PI (only for steady state)
This card names the nodes of all the branches representing the line. The card
format is as follows:
XXI- E. ·LINE CONSTANTS· requesting lumped PI-circuit output - 20

~~! rf~l I~l

I~ I' I' E
I~I' r~le rfl* ~ ~~If
rEI* I~ ff rf iE Ie I~ , ll$ Ie I ~ f~I~lf Ie ~nf

BRANO A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

BUS1 BUS2 BUSl BUS2 BUS' BUS2 BUSl BUS2 BUSl BUS2 BUS' BUS2
phose 1 phose 2 phose .3 phose 4 phose 5 phose 6

Parameters:

Enter a pair of points (BEGINk,ENDk) for each phase k. So, one card can handle
up to six phases.

Likewise. it is recommended to erase the old contents of the punch buffer by

using the following command:

rJIJJlJJJ~IJIJJJJJ~~IJJJJJJJ~~IJIJJJJJJ~IJJ1JJIJ~~IJIJJJIJJ~IJJJJJIJ~~IJJ11IJJ~~
$ERAS

6. The frequency card with PI-circuit output request specifies the frequency for
which line constants are to be calculated. Also the control parameters for
PI-circuit output need to be specified on this card.

km
or N
miles

Parameters:

RHO resistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth (Carson theory)

FREQ frequency (Hz) for which the line constants, as well as the exact PI-circuit
matrix (using the short line equivalent) need to be calculated.
XXI- E. ~LINE CONSTANTS· requeating lumped PI-circuit output - 21

FCAR : flag, used to control the number of correction terms in Carson t s earth-return
formula for the impedance.
=0 : no correction terms added
=1 in column 28: calculation uses highest accuracy
=blank= calculation uses highest accuracy
Beware: ATP uses character checking here. Consequently, the interpretation of
a zero and a blank is different. This is in derrogation to the rest
of the input (where zero or blank usually have the same meaning)!
lCAP : control flag, specifying whether the capacitance matrix [C] or the susceptance
matrix u{C] should be output by any IPlPR or PUN=44 request. ICAP=l means
[C] output, whereas lCAP=O means uiC] output.
DlST : length (Ian or mile) of the transmission line section. The resulting
Pi-circuit output (be it the equivalent or the nominal Pi) values are for the
full line length.
lPlPR: request to calculate the equivalent Pi-circuit.
1000 shunt admittance and transfer admittance matrix of
the unreduced system
0100 shunt admittance and transfer admittance matrix of
the symmetrical components of the system of equivalent
phase conductors (perfect transposition assumed)
0010 shunt impedance and transfer impedance matrix of
the unreduced system
0001 shunt impedance and transfer impedance matrix of
the symmetrical components of the system of equivalent
phase conductors (perfect transposition assumed)
Recall that the eQuiyalent Pi-circuit (long-line. equivalent) correctly
describes the steady state conditions of a line at its terminals (i.e. for
one specific frequency and a specified length). This equivalent Pi-circuit
can nQt be used !s:u: transient phenomena. Accordingly, no punched card output
is possible. One can only obtain a transfer admittance or transfer impedance
and a shunt admittance or shunt impedance matrix.

lSEG : a flag, used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires
PUN=44: request for automatic punching of the EMTP branch cards for a nominal
PI-circuit representation of an untransposed transmission line. Only the
system of equivalent phase conductors is Withheld; output of the unreduced
system is not available.
Recall that the nominal Pi-circuit (short-line equivalent) ~ be used for
transient phenomena (although a travelling wave model generally should be
preferred). On transient network analyzers, distributed parameter lines are
approximated as cascaded connections of short-length nominal. Pi-circuits with
lumped elements. Accordingly, punched card output, readily usable with
transient network simulations. For this purpose, do not forget to use the
optional card "BRANCH" (point 3).
XXI-E. -LINE CONSTANTS- requesting lumped PI-circuit output - 22

NOTES: 1) If one wants to use this output as the branch card input for a
mutually-coupled R-L-C-branch or a CASCADE-PI ce1, take care of the
following:
- output is in double-precision format ($VINTAGE.1)
- R in Ohm for the specified section length.
- X in Ohm for the specified section length. so use XOPT = FREQ
(FREQ = frequency at which the PI-circuit data are being
calculated) •
- When ICAP=O, field "C" is expressed in 1J,DIho (or pS) for the
specified section length. so use COPT=FREQ. On the other hand.
when ICAP=l. field tiC" is expressed in llfarad (or pF) for the
specified section length. so use COPT=O.

2} Only in the case PUN = 44 (nominal Pi-output), this frequency card has
to be followed by a tI$PUNCH" card, in order to have punched output being
printed.

XXI-E-2. Sample test case

The following is an example that illustrates the request for lumped nominal
PI-circuit output for an untransposed1ine. The line configuration is the same
as in point XXI-B-2. and hence does not need to be repeated here. It is assumed
that the line section under consideration has a length of 13.8 Km.

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 3456789 123456789 123456789123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
BRAHCHBEG.S END.S [Link].T END.T
C···· AUTOMATIC BUNDLING. PI CIRCUIT OUTPUT REQUEST ••••
C 1 234 567 8
C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
1 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12. 21.63 9.83 40. O. 2
2 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 O. 21.63 9.83 .0. O. 2
3 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12. 21.63 9.83 40. O. 2
o 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.85 30.5 23.2
o 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.85 30.5 23.2
BLANK CAIID ENDING CONDUCTOR CAIIDS
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
2~. ~. 1 13.8 1 1 (EQUIVALEN
250. 50. 1 13.8 .4 (NOMINAL P
SPUNCH
BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CAIIDS
BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANTS
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

XXI-E-3. Output data set structure

Following is an extract from the output of the above data case:

eo..en t card. JIUMDCI) - 1. C da~a://B/KOLA/[Link]

Marker card preceding _ IEl!lTP dat;a ....... BEGIN NEW DAT~CASE
[Link]. [Link] line const;ants. Llait - 90 LINE CONSTANTS
Request for . . tric (not English) units. IlETRIC
Ca-en t card. NUllDCD' S. C 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 8
CoIuIen t card. NUllDCD - 6. C 3456789 1234S6789 123456789 1234S6789 123456789 1234S6789 123456789 1234S6789
Pa1ra of 6-character bu. naaa. for each phase. UA1ICH BEG.S [Link].R [Link] IIEG.T END.T
C~nt card. NUMDCJ) - 8. c ---- ~UTOMI\TIC BUNDLING. PI CIRCUIT OUTPUT REOI1EST ----
coaaen t ca rd. NUllDCD - 9. C 1 2 3 4 S 6 8
CDlllDent card. tfUMDCD - 10. C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
Line conductor card. 2.310£-01 5.220£-02 4 1 D.231 0.0522 4 3.18 12. 21.63 9.83 40. o.
Line conductor card. 2.310£-01 5.220£-02 4 2 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 o. 21.63 9.83 40. o.
Line conductor card. 2.310E-Ol 5.220£-02 4 3 0.231 0.0522 4 3.18 -12. 21.63 9.83 40. o.
XXI- E. wLIHE CONSTAHTS w requesting lumped PI-circuit output - 23

Line conductor card. 5.000£-01 3.600£-01 4 0 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 7.115 30.5 23.2
Line conductor card. [Link]-Ol 3.6ooE-Ol 4 0 0.5 0.36 4 1.46 -7.115 30.5 23.2
Blank card [Link] lng conductor cards. BlANX CAJt.D END lNG CONDUCTOR CARDS
Ca-ent card. HUMDCD - 17. C 1 234 5 & 7 I
C.,...,nt card. HUMDCD - 18. C 345&789 12345&789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 U3456789
Frequency card. 2.500£+02 !i. 000£+01 1. 380E+01 250. 50. 13.8 1 1 IEQUIVALEN

aow
1
2
3
-
Line conducto .. tabla .ftar .o..ting and initi.l [Link].
Tabla 1'tIa••

..
1
2
3
Skin .[Link]
a-type
0.23100
0.23100
0.23100
aaaiatance
a 1_/laol
0.05220
0.05220
0.05220
aeactance data apac1f1caU...
x-type
4
4
4
XI oM/laI I or _
0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Di_t...
I ca I
3.18000
3.18000
3.18000
BO .. b ... t.l
x l_t"'l
11.Il00
-0.200
-12.200
AVV llaight
y l_t".1
13.763
13.763
13.763
-
4 1 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 12.200 13.763
5 2 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 0.200 13.763
Ii 3 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 -11.Il00 13.763
7 0 0.50000 0.36000 4 0.000000 1.46000 7.8!iO 25.633
8 0 0.50000 0.36000 4 0.000000 1.46000 -7.8!iO 25.633
Long-line [Link] _trices fo .. 11ne length - 1. 38000000E+Ol kll_t .... follow.
Th. [Link] of 2··1 equal ••cti... of length 6.90000000E+00 kll_t .... eacb .... involved in thia [Link] •

Tranaf... [Link] _ t .. ix. In unit. of I - a ) fo . . .:r-trical ~U of the [Link] phas. condUctor

Row. proceed in the .equence 10. 1. :11. 10. 1. 21 • •tc.; col ..... proceed in tIIa sequence 10. 2. 11. 10. 2. 11. .te.
o 2.300614£-02
-8. 815709E-02
-2.040163£-03 -1.711359£-02
-1. 789154£-03 6. 933955E-03
2 2.569534E-03 1.786165E-02 1.45617I!-o2
-8.722560E-04 -2.176898E-Ol 1. 135383E-02

Two ti_. tlla shunt [Link] _trb. in unita of 1 - . ) fo . . .: r - t .. ical ~to of tIIa equivalent pha •• conductor

The .WI of tlla two equal .hunt _ittanca• • t both t . . .1nel.. 0" it.
o 2.173615E-10
in_.....
Rows proceed in the .equence 10. 1. 21. (0. 1. 21 • •tc.: col ...... proceed in tlla . _ c e (0. 2. 11. (0. 2. 11. ate.
printed to canfo. . to the DlTP input fo .... t.

3.542110E-05
8. 988147E-07 2.604039£-06
5. 189245E-07 -1.503449£-06
2 -8.988092£-07 5.331448£-11 -2.604045£-06
5.189341£-07 4. 774715E-05 -l.!i03440E-06

o 2.773025£+00
1.062745£+01
._ce -
Transfer illpedanca _trix. in uni to of 1 - ) fo ...:r-trical ~to of tlla [Link] pha•• conducto ..
Rows proceed in the (0. 1. 21. (0. 1. 21 • •tc.: c o l _ proceed in t I I a . _ (0. 2. 1). (0. 2. 11. etc.

-1.169266E-01 -3.315320E-Ol
-4.648683E-02 2.022785E-ol
2 9.872209E-02 3. 733762E-ol 3.409443E-ol
-7.801802£-02 4.597351E+00 1. 859759E-01

Half of tlla .hunt 18padance _ t .. ia. In _it.

of 1 - ) fo ...:r-trical ~t. of tlla [Link] phas. conductor
Row. proceed in the .equence (0. 1. 21. (0. 1. 21 • •tc.: col ..... procaecl in tIIa . _ c a (0. 2. 11. (0. 2. 11. ate.
The .WI ot the two equal .hw\t [Link]. at both t ....inal.. or ita in_..... printed to conto ... to the DItP input fo .... t.
o 1. 733385£-01
-2. 826564E+04
1 5.005604E+02 1.136541E+03
2.89OOOOE+02 -6.561816E+02
2 -5.0056158+02 2.3337928-02 -1.1365408+03
2.8'9980E+02 -2.103887£+04 -6.56111268+02

Frequency card. 2.5OOE+02 5.0001+01 1.3808+01 12!iO. SO. 1 13.8

-"th -a- and -x- .... in I - I : -C- .... in 1_1c..-o.].
Request fo .. [Link] of punch buff.r. IsPUIICII

1234~678901234~678901234567a901234~678901234567890123456711901234567890123456789

SVINTAGE.
lBEC.S END.S 1. 16436023E+00 6.654040351+00 4.33273578£+01
2BIG.R END.R 8.09169334E-Ol 2.18107312E+00 -5. 45697875E+00
1.191358341+00 6.514788751+00 4.42585510E+Ol
38EG.T EHD.T 7. 815!i0386!-01 1.668297268+00 -1.4122112478+00
1I.09169334E-01 2 .1III0731%E+00 -~. 456978751+00
1.164360238+00 6.654040351+00 4.3327357118+01
SVINTACI. 0
---------< End of LUHIT7 punched cards •• flushed by SPUNCH request )-------
Blank card t .... inat1n9 frequency card.. IBLANX CMD ENDINC FREOUENCY CMDS
Blank card ending wLlNE CONSTANTS- ca.... BLANX CMD ENDINC LIN£ CONSTANTS
XXI- F. Constant-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 24

XXI-~ Constant-parameter. travelling-wave ~ model

This model is valid for both non-transposed as well as transposed lines. Also
the special case of a double-circui t three-phase line wi th zero-coupling inbetween
the two three-phase circuits can be modelled without much problems. The punched
cards, automatically generated by this supporting routine can be used immediately
as branch cards for transient line simulation studies (see sections IV-D-l and
IV-D-2.) •

XXI-F-l. Input data deck structure

A data deck for a "Line Constants" case requesting a constant-parameter,
travelling-wave line model (for a transposed or untransposed line) as output is
composed out of the following sequence of data cards:

1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

2. LINE CONSTANTS -special request word
(transfers control to the proper overlay)
3. special request cards: ENGLISH or METRIC (necessary)
BRANCH (optional)
4. conductors cards: "single conductor"- option only
("automatic bundling"- option NOT allowed)
5. BLANK CARD ending conductor data
6. frequency cards with a request for output for a constant parameter.
travelling-wave line model.
(both transposed or untransposed)
7. BLANK CARD ending frequency cards followed by $PUNCH card
8. BLANK CARD ending line constants
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE - card to begin new EMTP data case
10. BLANK CARD ending all EMTP cases
In this case, it needs to be remarked that currently the automatical bundling
option does not work properly. Further, only some variables on the frequency card
need to be discussed. The special request card "BRANCH" already has been discussed
in the preceeding paragraph (section XXI-E). All other cards are as in the "stand
alone" case (section XXI-B).

4. As for the conductors cards, only use the "single conductor"- option. The
"automatic bundling"- option does NOT work properly and hence is not allowed.
For more details, we refer to section XXI-B-l, card 4.

6. In this case, the frequency cards contain a request for output for a con-
stant-parameter, travelling-wave line model, applicable for both transposed as
well as untransposed lines. Since the variables in use are different for both
the transposed and the untransposed case, both cases will be discussed separately
in the following. The main difference lays in the value of flag "MODAL".

Note: The special manipulations needed to model a double-circuit line with

special transposition (section IV.D.2) are explained in an example in
section XXI-F-3.
XXI- F. Con.~ant-par. . . ~er. travelling-wave line .odel - 25

6a. Continuously transposed case: nODAL = 0 (Clarke model)

Except for the flag "MODAL =
0" in column 70, no new variables are involved.
Due to the setting of this flag, the positive- and zero-sequence line parameters
will be calculated at a certain frequency and written on LUNIT6.

Beware; This LUNIT6 output format can not be used immediately for branch card
input. No SPUNCH output is created. The user himself should put the
output in the correct type -1,-2,-3 branch card input format (see
section IV. D) .
The input card format is as follows:

<1 IE
1- ~ ~I ( • L'fE f- f· Ie ~~~ E 1~ I~ Ie f! f~le IE rf
FB.2 F10.2 A10 F8.3 0

M
RHO FREQ FeAR OIST I
0
D
km : metric A
miles: english L

Parameters:

RHO reSistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth (Carson theory)

FREQ discrete frequency (Hz) at which the line parameters will be calculated.

FeAR : flag, used to control the number of correction terms in Carson t s earth-return
formula for the impedance.
=0 : no correction terms added
=1 in column 28: calculation uses highest accuracy
=blank= calculation uses highest accuracy
Beware: ATP uses character checking here. Consequently, the interpretation of
a zero and a blank is different. This is in derrogation to the rest
of the input (where zero or blank usually have the same meaning)!

DIST: length (km or mile) of the transmission line section. The resulting Pi-circuit
output (be it the equivalent or the nominal Pi) values are. for the full line
length.
ISEG : a flag, used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires

6b. Fully untransposed case: nODAL • 1 ([Link] line model)

Besides the flag "MODAL = 1 tt in column 70, also a new variable "TR" is introduced.
Due to the setting of this flag, the modal parameters and the modal transformation
matrix (as specified by "TR") will be calculated at a certain frequency and
written on LUNIT7 as branch data.
XXl- r. Constant-parameter. travelling-vave line model - 26

Beware; Unlike for the Clarke model, for the K. C. Lee model, this punched card
output can be used immediately as type -1, -2, -3 branch card input (section
IV.D).

The input card format is as follows:

metric : km A
english : miles L

Parameters:

RHO resistivity (Ohm-meter) of the homogeneous earth (Carson theory)

FREQ discrete frequency (Hz) at which the line parameters will be calculated.

FCAR : flag, used to control the number of correction terms in Carson I s earth-return
formula for the impedance.
=0 : no correction terms added
=1 in column 28: calculation uses highest accuracy
=blank= calculation uses highest accuracy
Beware: ATP uses character checking here. Consequently, the interpretation of
a zero and a blank is different. This is in derrogation to the rest
of the input (where zero or blank usually have the same meaning)!

DIST : length (km or mile) of the transmission line section. The resulting Pi-circuit
output (be it the equivalent or the nominal Pi) values are for the full line
length.
ISEG : a flag, used to indicate whether ground wires (if any) are to be treated
as being continuous or segmented:
=0 continuous ground wires
=1 : segmented ground wires

TR through this variable, the user can request either the full complex
transformation matrix, or its real part only.
=0, blank or -2 (This option is recommended for transient simulations):
The eigenvectors (= columns of the complex transformation matrix) will
be rotated closer to the real axis, so that their imaginary part is assumed
to become negligible.
=-9: The full complex transformation matrix will be used. This option is
recommended for steady state calculations. In addition, when using the
punched cards. it is adviced to make the special request "EXACT PHASOR
EQUIVALENT" (for details. please refer to Rule Book sections ILA.53.
IV.D.l as well as the second subcase of DC11).
XXI- F. [Link]-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 27

=-1 The user needs to define his (her) own current transformation
matrix, immediately following the first frequency card.

NOTE: The format to be used for entering a transformation matrix is as follows:

IIJ1JJJJJJ~IJ1JJJIJlI1JJIJtJJlI1JJIJJjJj~IJIJIJjJllljlJJJjJJ~IJllfJjJJI1JJJJllj~~
E13.0 E13.0 E13.0 E13.0 E13.0 E13.0

The elements of the modal transformation matrix should be entered row by row.
For a given row, the real part of the matrix elements of all columns comes
first. Then, on a following card, comes the corresponding imaginary part of
the same row of the transformation matrix.

Remark that in both the transposed as well as the untransposed case. the results
are given in per unit of length. We refer to section IV-D for further usage of
these data.

XXI-F-2. Classical test case

a) Input
The following is an example to illustrate the request for a constant-parameter.
travelling wave model for both a transposed as well as an untransposed line. The
line configuration is the same as in section XXI-B-2. and hence does not need to
be repeated here. Let I s ask for the same line configuration both the Clarke line
model (transposed line assumption) as well as the [Link] line model (untransposed
line assumption).

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C
LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
BRANCH BEG.S END.S BEG.R END •• BEG.T END.T
C If bundeling i. required. better Wle .anual rather than aut_tic bundling II
1 .2 .273 4 1.7653 O. 39. 20.
2 .2 .273 4 1.7653 30. 39. 20.
3 .392 .0585 4 3.1750 2.3 27.5 8.5 50.8 45.
BLANK card ending all conductor card. of embedded "LIME CONSTANTS" data ca.e
C TEST LINE CONSTANTS
C atand alone caae
C creation of type -1.-2.-3 punched output card.
C DIST • 20. km
250. 50. 1 1 1 0 20. 0 (Clarke
250. 50. 1 20. 1 0 {[Link]
250. 50. 1 20. 1-9 {[Link]
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
BLANK card ending frequency carda of embedded "LIRE CONSTANTS" data ca.e
$PUNCH
BLANK card ending "LINE CONSTANTS" data case.
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK
XXI- F. Conatant-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 28

b) Output data deck structure

An extract of the output representing the travelling-wave, constant parameter
line model, is as follows:

Line concIuctor tabla aft.r .orting and Initial p.....,..a1ng.

Table Phase
Row l'I...ber
l 1
Slcln effect
a-type
0.20000
hdstance
a I_/Ica,
0.21300
aeactance data _pacification
X-type
.... XI_/Ica, or cat
0.000000
Dl_tar
I CII
1.76530
, Horizontal
X Cau.,
0.000
Avghelght
y lat ... ,
25.333
i'l-

2
3
2
3
0.20000
0.39200
0.27300
0.05850 . 0.000000
0.000000
1.76530
3.17500
30.000
2.300
211.333
14.133

Frequency card. 2.5001.02 5.0001.01 2.0001'01 12so. SO. 1 o 20. 0 IClarke

Sequence Surge iapedance Attenuation ""locity wa""l_th habtanca [Link] suaceptanca

aegnitu4eI oha) ang1ICdegr.) db/lca lca/alc Ica oha/Ica oha/Ica 1Iho/1ca
Zero : 1.690351+02 -7.506581+00 1. 74D091-03 2.066371+05 ".132731+03 3."52121-01 1. 28717J!+00 1. 76459E-06
Positiye: 4.736051+02 -1.121581+01 1.8'770J!-o3 2. 86639J!+05 5.132181+03 2.01926J!-01 ".1910J!-01 2.3S9241-06

Frequency card. 2.5001+02 5.000J!+01 2.000J!+01 12so. SO. ZO. 1 0 {[Link]

Modal .paraaeter. at frequency PRl!Q. 5.00000000J!+01 Hz
Mode R•• iatance Reactanc. suacaptanca The .urg. lapedanca in unita of [ _ . ) velocity Attenuation
ohea/Ica _a/Ica _/Ica real 1aeg 10•• 1... Ica/aec naper'/lca
3. 2144B5J!-ol 1.2567UJ!+00 1.781519J!-06 '.4663071+02 -1.065565J!+02 8. 39198U+02 2.0128041:+05 1.1983988-04
2 2.7009941-01 5.0850321-01 2.2262"51:-06 ".934116J!'02 -1.2292161:+02 ".779256E+02 2.8596041+05 2.7366711-04
3 1.3758881-01 ".7873491-01 2.415241J!-06 ".4421171+02 -6.256104J!'01 ".397834J!+02 2.8572111+05 1.5486851-04
Eigenyector aetria [Til for current trenafo.... tion: I-phaae. [Til*I--'. Fi ... t the real pert ....... by ...... :
5. 0951871562Z3113J!-01-7 • 6168OO39Z653407ll-01 3. 624247695640644J!-01
5.652289624753418£-01 6.379386364631714J!-o1 4.660855552312346£-01
6.487733798558929J!-01 1. 134804559924306J!-ol-8 • 07101320536168211-01
Finally. the iaeglnary part. ...... by .--:
0.0000000000000001+00 0.00000000000000011+00 [Link]+oo
0.00000000000000011+00 O. 0000000000000001+00 O. OOOC CCCOOOOOOOOE+oo
0.00000000000000011+00 O. 00000000000000011+00 O. 0000000000000001+00
Z-aurge In the pha.e _ i n . ha1atance and the laeglnary pert of ITi) .... ignored.
6.0702258839066641+02
1.25650655712062211+02 6.176154384'69'6111+02
1.5339196791212131+02 1.10450809160491"11+02 5."'916912062150111+02

Frequency card. 2.50011+02 5.0001.01 2.0001.01 1250. 50. 1 20. 1-9 {[Link]
Mode llea1atance Reactance sua_tance The .urge 1apedance in unitaof I _ I V.1ocity Attenuation
_a/Ica _ _ /1ca ./ke real laeg [Link].. ke/.ec napera/ke
2.9784341-01 1.164.. 95E.00 1.922786E-06 7 ...... 5971.02 -9.8131671+01 7. 782211E+02 2.082804E+05 1.898398E-04
2 2.690953£-01 5.0661291-01 2.2345SZI-06 4.'1647111+02 -1.U"707J!+02 ".7614901+02 2.8596041+05 2.7366711-04
3 1.2979781-01 4.5162631-01 2.6238161-06 4.190580J!+02 -5.902"151+01 4. 1488D4J!+02 2.8572111+05 1.548'851-04
ligenvector aenix ITi) for cur .... t tr.... fo .... Uan: I_pha• • • ITil*I--'. Firat the ....1 pert • .-- by ...... :
4.9976491767247251-01-7.608751482350712E-01 3.59028"278S08403J!-ol
5.545877590750385£-01 6.3737138596008721-01 4.610924103355744!-01
Ii. 321750846115239£-01 1.13250562461176211-01-7.96819"3554209191-01
Finally. the l_ginary ;P8rt. ...... by ...... :
-'.6277236413578701-02 1.568574765713728J!-02 1.061193645195082£-01
-9.59493610332'411£-02 2.0238415262361771-02 6.0745781802030651-02
1.6732486446065251-01-3.667968276727409£-02 9.Z8428496735301ZE-OZ
Z·.urge In the pha•• doeain. hdat ...ce and the 1aeginary part of IT!) are l_red.
5.9480485913032411+02
1.129215862564355£+02 6.0214068005325621+02
1.488880907099826E+02 1.077553906402578J!+02 5.3104"50153118761+02

A [Link] of 80·col ..... card i . .g •• now being f1uahed fro. punchbuff.r follow •.

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345'78901234567890123456789

c; 250. 50. 1 1 o 20. o {Clar

C
C reaark: no punched card. created for Clerke 80dal III
C
C 250. so. 20. 1 0 {ICC.L
C The transfo .... Uon aetrllt .... calculated at [Link]+Ol Hz.
$VINTACE. 1
-lI1EC.S END.S 3.21441J!-D1 '.39898!+02 2.082101'[Link]+01 3
-2BEC.R END.1l 2.700991-01 ".71926£.02 2.859601+05-2.000001+01 3
-3REC.T !HD.T 1.375891-01 4. 3978311+02 2. 85721J!+05-2. 0000011+01 3
SVINTAGE. 0
0.50951872 -0.76168004 0.3£242477
0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
0.56522896 0.63793864 0."6608556
0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
0.64877338 0.11348046 -0.80710132
0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
C
C 250. 50. 20. 1-9 IKC.L
C The transforaation aatrix was calculated at 5.00000000E+Ol Hz.
XXI- F. Constant-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 29

$VINTAGE. 1
-lBEG.5 ENO.S 2.97843£-01 7.78222£002 2.0B2BO£00!>-2.00000£001 1 3
-2BEG .• END •• 2.69095£-01 4.76149Eo02 2.85960£005-2.00000£+01 1 3
-3BEG.T ENII.T 1.29198£-01 4.14880£002 2.85121£+05-2.00000£.01 1 3
SVINTIIGE. 0
0.49976492 -0.76087515 0.35902843
-0.07627724 0.01568575 0.10611936
0.5!>4!>8776 0.63737139 0 •• '109241
-0.09!>94936 0.02023842 0.06074578
0.63217508 0.11325056 -0.796819.4
0.16732486 -0.03667968 0.09284285
---------( End of LUKIT7 punched card. . . flushed b¥ SPUNCH reque.t )-------

XXI-F-3. Double-circuit special transposition example

a) in;put
The following is an example to illustrate the special measures to be taken
when requesting output for the so-called double-Circuit special transposition
(section IV.D.2.).
The line configuration used consists of 2 identical three-phase lines. with
100m interspace. In the SEMLYEN SETUP chapter (section XXII-D). we will use the
same line configuration for data comparison.

BEGIN NEW DATA CASE

C Line configuration should agree vith zero sequence configuration
C Two indentical poles. vith 100 . . ter interspace.
LINE CONSTANTS
METRIC
BRANCH BEG1.SEND1.SBEG1.REND1.RBEG1.TEND1.TBEG2.SEND2.SBEG2.REND2.RBSG2.TEHD2.T
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1 .231 .0522 4 3.18 5. 20. 20.
2 .231 .0522 4 3.18 O. 25. 25.
3 .231 .0522 4 3.18 -5. 20. 20.
4 .231 .0522 4 3.18 105. 20. 20.
5 .231 .0522 4 3.18 100. 25. 25.
6 .231 .0522 4 3.18 95. 20. 20.
BLANK card ending all ccmductor carda of _bedded ·LllIB CONSTANTS· data case
C TEST LINE CONSTANTS
C stand alone case
C special double circuit line - deriving type -1.-2.-3 punched output carda
27. 50. 1 1 0 200. 0 {Clarke
27. 50. 1 200. 1-9 ([Link]
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
BLANK card ending frequency cards of embedded -LINE CONSTANTS· data case
$PUNCH
BLANK card ending -LINE CONSTANTS- data cases
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
BLANK

b) Output data deck structure

Line conductor table after .orting. and initlal proce•• ing.
Table Plla••
Row N.-bar
Skin [Link]
a-type
...inance
It '_Ilea,
Reactance data .pacification
X-type X'_/1ea1 or GIIJt
0.000000
,
IIi_tar
ca
3.18000
, HOrizontal
X ,atr.,
5.000
Avg height
Y 'atr.,
20.000
N_
1 1 0.23100 0.05220 4
2 2 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 0.000 25.000
3 3 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.,18000 -5.000 20.000
4 4 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 105.000 20.000
5 5 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.111000 100.000 25.000
6 6 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 95.000 20.000

Frequency card. 2.700£+01 5.000£+01 2.000£+02 I 27. so. o 200. o (Clarke

sequence surge 1JIpedance Attenuation velocity wavelength ... lstance "'c'tance SUSceptance
_gnitudel_' angle\degr. I db/ka ke/.ac lea _Ike _Ilea IOho/lea
Zero: 8.82252£.02 -4.49333£+00 9.28354E-04 2.30987£+05 4.61974£+03 1.1111012£-01 1.111885£.00 1.54634£-06
Positive: 3.77637£.02 -3.75160£+00 6.06746£-04 2.94899£.05 5.89798£+03 5.26460£-02 3. 99713E-01 2.82705£-06

Frequency card. 2.700£.01 5.000£+01 2.000£.02 27. 50.I zoo. 1-9 ([Link]
I_pedance aatrix. in unit. of [ohas/lcaeter J tor the .y.t . . of physical conductor••
Rows and coluans proceed in the sa.e order as the sorted input.
XXI- F. Constant-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 30

1 9.8052851-02
6.624066£-01

2 4.4983181-02 '.7197971-02
2.704796E-01 6. 634639E-01

3 4.5399431-02 4.4983181-02 9.805285£-02

2.4817901-01 2.7047961-01 6.624066£-01

4 4.3612661-02 4.309583£-02 4.3282111-02 9.8052851-02

1.0427461-01 1.017347£-01 9.844722£-02 6.5240661-01

5 4.340600£-02 4.2899321-02 4.309583£-02 4.49831111-02 9.7197971-02

1. 0785581-01 1.0530941-01 1.0173411!-o1 2.7047961-01 6.6346391-01

Ii 4.3922791-02 4.3406001-02 4.3612661-02 4.5399431-02 4.49831111-02 9.&05285£-02

1.1074811-01 1.01115511-01 1. 0421461-01 2.411190£-01 2.7041961-01 6.62406&1-01
Modal P6r_tera et frequeney f'REII - 5.000000001+01 Hz
Moda [Link] Ileactance Suaceptance 'l1Ie eurge iapedance in unite of I - l Velocity Attenuation
~./ka ohaa/ka ./ka real i-.; [Link].e ka/eee nepere/ka
1 3.1644231-01 1.4933051+00 1. 5211 99£-06 9.9621441+02 -1.0439911+02 9.9071931+02 2. 0729311+OS 1.511812111-04
2 !;. 7689371-02 8.59611241:-01 1.6106611-06 7.3098921+02 -2.4499131+01 7.3057851+02 2. 6683OO1+OS 3.94591101-05
3 5.2647681-02 4.1444911-01 2.724552£-06 3.9080381+02 -2.4722671+01 3.9002111+02 2. 9SOS031+OS 6.7358191-05
4 5.2323921-02 4.114762£-01 2.740258E-06 3.882837£+02-2.458836£+01 3.8750441+02 2.9526311+05 6.7378471-05
5 5.2556321-02 3.8579311-01 2.918870£-06 3.54396511+02 -2.47532211+01 3.63554811+02 2.953663£+05 7.225141£-05
6 5.2209841:-02 3. 84144011-01 2.9312221-06 3.6284281+02 -2.4544551+01 3. 6201111!-02 2. 953810£+OS 7.1945531-05

Manual calculatione:
Za - (9.1I05285E-02 + 9.7107971-02 - 9.805285E-02113 - 9.77671911-02 (real P6rtl
C6.624066£-01 -6.634639£-01 + 6.624066£-01113 - 6. 6275901!:-ol U_lnary pert 1
Ze - 14.498318E-02 + 4.5399432-02 + 4.4911318I!:-o21/3 - 4.512193£-02 1.....1 pert)
(2.704796I!:-ol • 2.481790£-01 + 2.7047961!:-01113 - 2.63046U-01 (ieaglnary P6rt)
Zp - 14.3612661-02 • 4.309583£-02 • 4. 3282111!:-02 +
4.3406001-02 • 4.289932£-02 + 4.3095831-02 +
4.392279£-02 • 4.3406ooE-02 + 4.361266E-02119 - 4.3370361-02 (real .part)
(1.042746£-01 + 1.017347£-01 • 9.11447221-02 •
1. 078558£-01 • 1.053094£-01 • 1. 0173471!:-01 •
1.1074811!:-01 + 1.0785581-01 + 1.0427461!:-011/9 - 1.046928£-01 (1aeginary pert)

Zg - Z. + 2ZII • 3Zp - 3.1812281!:-01 + J 1.50293O!+00 _/ka • 5.1185961-01 • j 2.4182141!:+00 OhIo/eile

Z11- Za + 2Z1t - 3Zp - 5.790067!-02 • j 1I.747721E-01 OhIo/ka - 9.316211!.02 + j 1.407509!+00 OhIo/eU.
Zl - Z. - ZIt - 5.264596£-02 + j 3.997129!-ol _/ka • '.470735E-02 • j 6.431381£-01 OhIo/aUe

It should be remarked that the modal values calculated by the program agree
quite well with the sequence values (ground, interline and line) calculated by
hand. They also agree with the values calculated by Semlyen Setup (section XXII-D).
In the latter case, no manual calculation is involved, so maybe this method is
recommendable for the user. We refer to section IV.D.2. for more details on how
to convert these modal results into a format, usable for constant-parameter
travelling-wave models (type -1,-2,-3), in the special case of double-circuit
special transposition.

XXI-F-4. Applications
Punched card output (LUNI'I7)is generated automatically, only for the
untransposed case (K.C. Lee model). For the ful1 transposed case (Clarke model),
sequence values are calculated, but the user should convert these LUNIT6 results
to the proper input format manually • For the special transposition of a double-circuit
line (see section IV.D.2), the user even should perform some manual calculations
in order to obtain the values to be entered in the input format (see section
XXI-F-3). An alternative consists of using the Semlyen Setup code steady state
results (NSS=ll for double-circuit special transposition). More explanation can
be found in the related example of section XXII (Semlyen Setup).
Output is for the constant-parameter travelling-wave model as described in
section IV.D.1 and IV.D.2.

Note: If one wants to use this output as the branch card input for a
constant parameter line model, take care of the following:
- output is in extended precision ($VINTAGE, 1)
R in Ohm/kIn or Ohms/mile, depending on the unit request card
- X in Ohm/kIn or Ohms/mile, depending on the unit request card,
XXI- F. [Link]-parameter. travelling-wave line model - 31

so use XOPT = FREQ on the miscellaneous data card.

- C in micromho/km or micromho/mile, depending on the unit request card,
so use COPT = FREQ on the miscellaneous data card.
XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP - 1

XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP

XXII-A. Purpose and applications

The Semlyen Setup can create two types of models for both conventional overhead
lines as well as underground or overhead cable systems:
- LUNIT7 output for travelling wave modelling
- LUNITB output containing the phase-coordinate PI-equivalent transfer admittance
matrix and half shunt admittance matrix at each frequency within a given frequency
looping.
- in addition, the ordinary LUNIT6 output can contain steady state results and
modal values, pretty much the same way as LINE CONSTANTS does. This output can
be extremely usefull for the special case of double-circuit special transposi tion,
as described in section IV.D.2.
In the travelling wave model, both the propagation response as well as the
admittance response are obtained using modal characteristics, calculated over a
user defined frequency range, under the assumption of a constant transformation
matrix (phase-mode transformation). Then, both the propagation response as well
as the admittance response are approximated in the time domain, using only two
real exponentials, thus allowing usage of recursive convolution methods in the
time domain. The punched card output thus created immediately can be used in time
domain simulations, as explained in section IV-D-4.

In order to allow the program to calculate the necessary modal characteristics

for the conductor system under consideration, the Semlyen code imbeds either the
LINE CONSTANTS, or the CABLE CONSTANTS code. Wherever appropriate, both situations
will be treated separately further in this chapter. For an example, we refer to
benchmark DC29 and DC60.

XXII-B. Input data deck structure

The input data deck for a Semlyen Setup depends on whether LINE CONSTANTS
rather than CABLE CONSTANTS is imbedded. First we will discuss the general Semlyen
parameters and then, we will go into detail to clarify the imbedded use of both
LINE CONSTANTS and CABLE CONSTANTS.

XXII-B-l. General structure

•
Following general structure should be used for the input data deck:
1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
2. SEMLYEN SETUP request
$OPEN, UNIT = B, ••• if IPUN = 3 on the miscellaneous data card
3· Optional special request cards:
BRANCH
TOLERANCES
$ERASE
4. Miscellaneous data card
5. Optional extensions to the miscellaneous data card
XXII. SEHLYE1'I SETUP - 2

IOTX
lOSS
IOFL
6. One single complete data case for LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS
7. SPUNCH (optional)
8. BLANK and terminating SEMLYEN SETUP
SCLOSE, UNIT = 8, ... if IPUN = 3 on the miscellaneous data card
9. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
10. BLANK CARD terminating all cases

Let's discuss the card format in more detail now. Wherever appropriate, the
LINE CONSTANTS and CABLE CONSTANTS imbedded usage will be discussed separately.
1. BEGIN NEW DATA CASE card.

2. SEMLYEN SETUP.

This card serves to transfer control to the supporting overlay in question.

The card format is as follows:

11JJJJJ1JJ~IJ~lJJIJlI1IJJJIJJlI1JJJJJJJ~~1111JJIJJtIJJlJIIJl~IJlIJIIJJ~IJ1JJIIJJ~
SEM.. YEN SET U

3. Next, the user can specify following special request cards, in any arbitrary
order: a "BRANCH" card or a "TOLERANCES" card. These cards are recognized by
the leading special request word •

.la. BRANCH card.

This card can be used to name the terminal nodes at each end of each phase of
the multiphase conductor system (overhead transmission lines or overhead or
underground cable system). Hence this option should be used whenever one intends
to use the punched card output for later simulations. The card format to be
used is as follows:

I~
. l'~ E tE fe .~
~.l· t!lc
.~
1( l~~f
1'

fe 1~ ~.
I-
tE Ie IE t!l~le
IE
i~ ~E rH~f( [~ tE Ie I: ~! ~!
i~

Ie
BRANO A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

BEGIN1 END1 BEGIN2 END2 BEGIN3 END3 BEGIN4 END4 BEGINS ENDS BEGIN6 END6

PHASE1 PHASE2 PHASE3 PHASE4 PHASES PHASE6

XXII. SEI1LYEN SETUP - 3

Up to 6 phases can have a name allocated to both terminal ends using this cards.
Be sure to respect the phase order of the LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS
case:

- For LINE CONSTANTS. the phase order is defined by parameter "IP" on the
conductor cards (see section XXI-B-l).

- For CABLE CONSTANTS (CLASS A + B). the phase order (= order of the node name
pairs) is as follows:

First of all, the order of the ~ system should be obeyed. Recall that
this order is as follows:
- All 3-conductor (i.e. core + sheath + armor) SC coaxial cables must precede
any 2-conductor (i.e. core + sheath, no armor) SC coaxial cables.
- All 2-conductor SC coaxial cables must precede any core-only SC cables.

In addition to this first rule, following rules should be applied:

- First. the user should allocate node pair names to all cores {obeying the
~ system order}.
Next, node name pairs should be allocated to all sheaths {if any}. obeying
the same ~ system order.
Recall: continuously grounded sheaths shouldn't have a name pair allocated.
Next, node name pairs should be allocated to all armors (if any). obeying
the same ~ system order.
Recall: continuously grounded armors shouldn't have a name pair allocated.
The pipe name pair (if any) comes last.
Recall: continuously grounded pipes shouldn't have a name pair allocated.

- For CABLE CONSTANTS (CLASS C) (i.e. overhead transmission lines). the phase
order (or order of the node name pairs) is as follows.
First of all, the order of the circuits should be obeyed. Recall that this
order is as follows:
- First come the circuits with the highest number of phase-wire bundles
- Order to the lowest number of phase-wire bundles.

In addition ~o this rule. following rule should be applied:

- First come all the phase-wire bundles. in the order of the circuit number.
previously obtained. Within a circuit, the phase ordering is arbitrary.
- Next come all (if any) ground-wire bundles in the order of the circuit
number previously obtained. Within a circuit. the ordering of ground-wire
bundles is arbitrary.
Recall: continuously grounded ground-wire bundles shouldn't have a name
pair allocated.
XXII. SEHLYElf SETUP - "

Jb. TOLERANCES card.

This card can be used to redefine one or more of the 18 different near-zero
tolerances or iteration limits. used in the iteration algorithm of the Semlyen
code. If no. such card is supplied. built-in default values will be used (see
table 22.1). The card format is as follows:

, 1
, '::j
'1": II 11": 8
4
1 1 111.4 ~
iii
1
I'
1 lEI' fl'::j
OlERANCES 12 E11.0 12 E11.0 12 E11.0 12 E11.0 12 E11.0

I I I I I
N N N N N
D value D value D value D value D value
E E E E E
X X X X X

FIELD 1 FIELD 2 FIELD 3 FIELD4 FIELDS

For each of the five fields. an index and corresponding value can be defined.
The index refers to the variable for which one wants to redefine the value.
Hence. variables can be redefined in any order. Table 22.1 specifies the index
number. variable name. corresponding default value and meaning of the value in
the Semlyen routine. Also recommended values for both cable and overhead line
simulations are quoted in a remark.
XXII. SEHLYEN SETUP - 5

Table 22...l.

Index Variable Default Usage of variable within "SEMLYEN

number name value SETUP"
1 EPS .005 Maximum least-square error
2 EPSl .005 Maximum relative error of a1 or ~,
3 FIT2Z .1 "beginning" of time-step-response.
sequence
4 PIVTHR 1.E-5 Minimum pivoting element magnitude for
Jacobian of [Link] fit
5 EPSRSE .01 ?
6 ? .9 ?
7 FT2EMX 1.E-4 Maximum steady-state error
8 EPSEIG l.E-7 Convergence tolerance for eigenvalue
calculation
9 EPSPV2 1.E-16 Minimum size for squared pivot element,
within inversion routine
10 FMED 5E+3 Frequency in Hz at which transformation
matrix is to be calculated (second
point of Yc )
11 EPSYC 1.E-3 Maximum relative error. for the char-
acteristic admittance fitting procedure
12 EPSN 1.E-3 Maximum total error for the character-
istic admittance fitting
1.3 FFINP 1.0 Final value of time-domain fitted step
response
14 NFIT 10. Maximum number of iterations for ~t
selection
15 NlTERl 10. Maximum number of iterations for
steady-state or phasor fitting
16 NITER 10. Maximum number of iterations for least
squares fitting
17 NlTERY 10. Maximum number of iterations for char-
acteristic admittance step-response
fitting
18 NIEIG 30. Maximum number of iterations for the
eigenvalue/vector calculation

Remark:

In most cases, it is better to respecify tolerances

#14 = 30
#15 = 30
#16 = 30
#17 = 30
#18 = 100
- Tolerance number 10 (FMED) specifies the frequency at which the transformation
matrix is to be calculated. This frequency depends on the type of study one
wants to perform.
XXII. SEI1LYEN SETUP - 6

For !WiLt. transients. put FMED :: (4,;)-1

where:
1 .
,; - - for overhead hnes
Co

,; - ..['(E;) . ..!.. f or cables

E, - relative permittivity of the insulator layer. nearest to the cable core

Co - speed of light
1- length of power carrier

For .almt transients and steady state calculations:

FMED = 800 Hz for cables
FMED = 5000 Hz for overhead lines.
Be sure to have FREQ = FMED also specified on the first frequency card in the
imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case if and only if the power carrier
is assumed to be yntransPQsed (NSS :: 0, see. point 4).

3c. $ERASE
This card should be used to clear the punch buffer. Use this request whenever
one intends to create punched card output for later use of the Semlyen output
in a simulation run (see section IV-D-4).

4. Next comes the miscellaneous data card, speCifying fitting parameters. The
card format to be used is as follows:

I- I~ IE S
~ f"l< ~ E tE !e 1~I'; .~ I d~~( i~ f~fE 11 ~( I~i- tfl~l( ~,l~ fE '~I~ 1~ IE iff~IC f- f~.E rfiS Ie 2 5E ~ f I.

NOO N
P
N I~ K
1*
S i~ P 1./ P 0
I I IOTX lOSS IOFL

0 s s U0
I N C
N
T

15 15 1:2 I I 12 II 1212 16 16 16
1I II

Parameters:

NOO : This number defines the basic time axis spacing 6t for the step response
fitting;
';0 l
6t-------
NOO NOO.c o
Typical values:
XXII. SEHLYEN SETUP - 7

= 100-300 for overhead lines; in this case, the initial shape of the step
response is rather steep, so we need a lot of points.
= 50-100 for cables; in this case, the initial shape of the step response is
rather smooth, so we don't need much points.

NPOINT : Number of time points defining the time window for time domain fitting
of the step response. Since an exponential Fourier transform is used, there
is no relation between the number of time points (defined by NPOINT) and the
number of frequency points (defined by the frequency looping; last frequency
card of the embedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case).
Typical values:
= 150 for overhead lines;
= 50 for cables.
These values should be increased in case the fitter is too demanding (see
parameter N2)
NSS : Flag, used to indicate whether or not the phases are assumed to be continuously
transposed:
=0 : untransposed circuit; in the [Link] LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS
case, THREE frequency cards will be mandatory (see point6).
= 1 : continuously-transposed circuit: in the imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE
CONSTANTS case, only TWO frequency cards are needed (see point 6).
= 11: special double-circuit transposition (see section IV.D.2 of rule book):
in the imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case, only TWO frequency
cards are needed (see point 6). An illustrative example is depicted in
section XXII-D.

N1 Digit which indicates how the characteristic admittance is to be fit.

= 0 frequency-domain fitting (not blank: character string verification of
the input treats zero and blank different!);
= 1 time-domain fitting; use N3 ~ 1 to evaluate the fitting.
N2 This digit tunes the desired time axis spacing l!1t for the step response
fitting;
= 0 : use l!1tas specified by NOO (not blank; characterstring verification of
the input treats 0 and blank different!!).
= 1 locate the toe and the 2/3 point of the step response and size l!1t to
put approximately 15% of all NPOINT values between the toe and the 2/3
point.
= 2 locate the 2/3 point and the 1/3 point of the step response and size
l!1t to put approximately 5% of all NPOINT values between the 1/3 and 2/3
point.
~: Because of oscillations in the output of inverse Fourier routines.
one or both of these points may not be obtainable (kill code =
152), requiring either a reduction in the value of N2, or an
increase of NPOINTso as to increase the accuracy of the inverse
Fourier routine.

KPS : A flag, indicating whether or not the step response fitting at the steady-state
frequency is desired.
= 0 : no fitting at the steady-state frequency; this is the case for fast
transient calculations.
= 1 : attempt to fit the propagation step-response exactly at the steady-state
frequency; this is the case for calculation of slow transients.
XXII. SEMI. YEIf SETUP - 8

=2 attempt to fit the propagation step-response exactly at the steady-state

frequency; this is the case for calculation of slow transients. If the
iteration does not converge, however, the program will fall back on the
original (starting) fitting.

N3 =0 no printer plotting.
=1 a printer plot of characteristic admittance vs. time will be generated,
showing how the frequency-domain-fitted exponentials compare with an
independent inverse Fourier transformation result.
=2 a vector plot will be created, provided that SPY is available and in
use.
=3 both a vector plot and a character plot will be made under the same
conditions as specified above.
N4 A parameter which indicates how the characteristic admittance is to be treated.
= 0 : for all modes, use the fitted time-dependent characteristic admittance.
Make N1 = 1.
= 1 : for all modes, use the constant characteristic admittance (at the
steady-state frequency).
= 2 use the fitted time dependent characteristic admittance for the zero
sequence mode. For all. other modes, use the constant characteristic
admittance calculated at the steady-state. frequency. Make N1 = 1.
= 3 for all modes, use the constant characteristic admittance calculated
at the natural resonant frequency Fres of the power carrier.
1- Co
F r··- 2 "t o -21
with "to = travel time at speed of light.

IPUN : Parameter, indicating whether or not the EMTP branch cards are to be
punched:

= 0 : branch cards are generated on both the line printer and the punch
(LUNIT7) (don't forget SPUNCH ,. following the frequency cards of the
imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case).
= 1 punch only (don't forget $PUNCH, following the frequency cards of the
imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case).
= 2 printer only.
= 3 : phase-coordinate Pi-equivalent transfer admittance matrix and half
Pi-equivalent shunt admittance matrix at each frequency will be written
into LUNIT 8 = 8, which must be opened using It SOPENt, as a formatted
file before ItSEMLYEN SETUP It request. The phase-coordinate Pi-equivalent
matrices must be requested through lOSS and 10FL. Typical value: 4100
octal.

IDOC Flag, indicating whether or not the generated branch cards are to be preceded
by descriptive comment cards. For this purpose, the data cards of ItLlNE
CONSTANTS It or ItCABLE CONSTANTSIt are used,. after conversion to comment cards
(ItC It in column 1).
= 0 no such comment cards will be output.
= 1 : generate descriptive comment cards.
XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP - 9

IOTX : Parameter, controlling the printout of intermediate results (e.g •• eigenvalues

and eigenvectors) which are computed at the frequency FMED (see tolerance
card, point 3b).
= -1: user is confused by octal numbers, and would prefer to punch "IOTX",
"lOSS", and "IOFL" in binary. In this case, "lOSS" and "IOFL" fields
(columns 37-48) are to be left blank, and three extra cards (see point
5 hereafter) are to follow as extensions to this miscellaneous data
card.
= 0 no such intermediate printout is desired.
= K : positive octal "K" will generate the printout at frequency FMED as
documented in the explanation of point 5 hereafter.
lOSS: Parameter, controlling the printout of intermediate results (e.g. eigenvalues
and eigenvectors) which are computed at steady state frequency.
= 0 : no such intermediate printout is desired.
= K : positive octal "K" will generate the printout at steady state frequency,
as documented in the explanation of point 5 hereafter.
~: This field is ignored if IOTX = -1.

IOFL : Parameter, controlling the printout of intermediate results (e.g. eigenvalues

and eigenvectors) which are computed at ten discrete frequencies within the
specified geometrically-spaced looping of frequencies (see last frequency
card of the imbedded LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS case).
= 0 : .no such intermediate printout is desired.
= K : positive octal "K" will generate the printout at ten discrete frequencies
wi thin the specified frequency looping, as documented in the explanation
of point 5 hereafter.
~: This field is ignored if IOTX = -1.

5. Extensions to the miscellaneous data card.

If and only if field "IOTX" of columns 31-36 of the miscellaneous data card
(see point 4) is punched with the value -1, three extra cards must immediately
follow the miscellaneous data card as extensions to it. These three cards serve
to define "IOTX". "lOSS", and "IOFL" - one variable per card, in this order.
Binary is used, with up to twelve of the 14 fields of the following format being
punched:

J~
I~ i~ I~ It iE
t~~( ~ ~( ~~ f~ f~ fe I~I- H 'E Ie I,f~ r~t~fe !~
rfl* .~ It L' rf i(

'IO??' components (binary)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

Each of these component fields is to be assigned a binary digit (either zero

or one). If zero (or blank). then the associated intermediate printout will
DQt be generated; if unity, it ~ be. The following is a directory showing
XXII. SEMLYElf SETUP - 10

what printout is controlled by each bit:

Index Description of the printout which is being

number controlled by this component field
1 Approximate modal equivalent-Pi
2 Approximate modal equivalent-Pi
3 Approximate modal characteristic Z
4 Approximate modal Z.Y matrices
5 Approximate modal velocity and attenuation
6 Phase-coordinate equivalent-Pi matrices
7 Modal equivalent-Pi matrices
8 Modal characteristic impedance
9 Exact modal Z and Y matrices
10 Exact modal velocity and attenuation
11 Exact transformation matrices
12 Matrices Z and Y in phase coordinates

The relation between such binary specifications and the possible octal
specifications of the miscellaneous data card (see point 4) is simple: separate
the binary bits into groups of three. and then read as an octal number. For
example.
1 0 1 001 1 1 0 1 0 0 (binary) = 101 001 110 100 = 5164 (octal).

6. Following is one single. complete data case for LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS.
For details. we refer to chapter XXI (LINE CONSTANTS) or chapter XXIII (CABLE
CONSTANTS). Only following important points are repeated here:
- Start this grouping by the proper request word: LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE
CONSTANTS.

- The card format for the frequency cards includes a special length specification
"LENGTH". Further remark that. although the same parameters must be entered,
the format for LINE CONSTANTS and CABLE CONSTANTS differs. Following are the
formats to be used:

l..I1:m CONSTANTS:

FB.2

RHO FREQ LENGTH

(km or
miles
XXII. [Link] SETUP - 11

CABLE CONSTANTS:

E15.6 £15.6 15 15 E8.3

RHO FRED IDEC IPNT LENGTH

(meter)

- If NSS .,. 0 (see point 4, miscellaneous data card), the line or cable is assumed
to be UNTRANSPOSED, and hence THREE frequency cards are needed:
1. The first frequency card defines the frequency at which the modal trans-
formation matrix will be calculated. Be sure to put the same frequency
value on both the variable FREQ of the first frequency card and on the
tolerance-card (point 3) for variable FMED (index number 10). For hints
on FMED values, we refer to point 3. As far as the card format is concerned,
only RHO, FREQ and LENGI'H should be specified. Leave IDEC and IPNT blank.
2. The second frequency card is to specify the steady state frequency FREQ
at which the resulting line (or cable) model will be used for later
simulations. Be sure to put this same frequency value as STATFR-parameter
in the STARTUP file when making later transient calculations using the
generated punch card output. As far as the card format is concerned, only
RHO, FREQ and DIST should be specified. Leave IDEC and IPNT blank.
3. The third frequency card is to specify the logarithmically-spaced frequency
span to be used for inverse Fourier transformation. All card parameters
should be specified.
Typical settings: FREQ = 1. Hz = starting freq.
IDEC = 5-6 decades
IPNT = 10-20 points per decade for cables
20-30 points per decade for overhead lines
Don t t forget to specify RHO and LENGTH.

- If NSS .,. 1 or 11 (see point 4,miscellaneous data card), the line or cable
is assumed to be TRANSPOSED (Le. the modal transformation matrix is lmown
a priori), and hence only TWO frequency cards are needed:
1. The first frequency card is to specify the steady state frequency at which
the resulting line (or cable) model will be used for later simulation.
Be sure to put the same frequency value on both the variable FREQ of the
first frequency card and the STATFR-parameter in the STARTUP file. As far
as the card format is concerned, only RHO, FREQ and LENGI'H should be
specified. Leave IDEC and IPNT blank.
2. The second frequency card is to specify the logari thmi cal ly spaced frequency
span to be used for inverse Fourier transformation. All card parameters
should be specified.
Typical settings: FREQ = 1. Hz
IDEe = 5-6 decades
IPNT = 10-20 pOints per decade for cables
20-30 points per decade for overhead lines
Don't forget to specify RHO and LENGTH.
XXII. SEMLYEIf SETUP - 12

- Terminate the LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE CONSTANTS data set by Z blank cards:
the first one to terminate the frequency cards, and the second one to terminate
the usage of the imbedded supporting routine (either LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE
CONSTANTS) •

7. Only if IPUN = 0 or 1 on the miscellaneous data card (point 4), the optional
$PUNCH card should follow next. This in order to flush the punch buffer to
LUNIT7 output. The punched card output thus created immediately can be' used in
time domain simulations, as explained in section IV-D-4.

8. Next, a blank card should follow, terminating the Semlyen setup.

Only if IPUN = 3. on the miscellaneous data card (point 4) a $CLOSE card should
follow to close LUNIT8 = 8.
9. A "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card. followed by another blank card then will terminate
all cases.

XXII-C. Classical Examples

The combined usage of LINE CONSTANTS imbedded in a SEMLYEN SETUP case already
is illustrated in benchmark DC29.
The following example illustrates the usage of a CABLE CONSTANTS imbedded in
a SEMLYEN SETUP case. For the specific CABLE CONSTANTS data, we refer to section
XXIII-C-l; the same class A cable is repeated here. The aim of the example is to
illustrate specifics related to the imbedded use of the CABLE CONSTANTS data in
the SEMLYEN case.
First of all, special attention should be paid to the "BRANCH"-card:

- there are 3 two-conductor SC coaxial cables present: all SC cables

only have a core and a sheath, no armor

A2RC A3RC
A2SC class A cable A3SC
A2TC untransposed
A3TC
A2RS A3RS
A2SS length = 3000 m A3SS
A2TS A3TS

Equivalent of class-A cable under study

XXII. SEHLYEN SETUP - 13

- the BRANCH card first allocates names to the terminal ends (A2, A3) of the
cores (C) of all three phases (R, S, T):
phase R; A2RC-A3RC
phase S; A2SC-A3SC
phase T; A2TC-A3TC
Only after this list, names are allocated to the terminal ends (A2, A3) of
the sheaths (S) of all three phases (R, S, T):
phase R; A2RS-A3RS
phase S; A2SS-A3SS
phase T; A2TS-A3TS
Further remark the specified tolerances:
# 14 = 30.
# 15 = 30.
# 16 = 30.
# 17 = 30.
# 18 = 100.

Suppose that we want to use the fitting result for the simulation of fast transients.
In such case, the frequency FMED (controlled by the tolerance number 10) should
be calculated as follows:
# 10 = 1/(4*TAU}
= Co / (4*LEN*SQRT{EPS1})
= 300.000.000 / (4*3.000*SQRT{2,3»
= 16.48E3 Hz
{with EPS1=2,3 ; LEN=[Link] m}
Since we assume an untransposed cable (usual case), be sure to specify the same
frequency for the variable FREQ on the first frequency card (specifying the frequency
to be used for calculating the modal decoupling matrix).

Next the miscellaneous data are to be specified:

NOO = 80.
NPOINT = 50.
NSS= 0; untransposed circuit; THREE frequency cards will be needed in the
imbedded CABLE CONSTANTS case.
Nl = 0; request for frequency domain fitting of the charactristic admittance
N2 = 1; usually, cables don't cause much fitting problems, since the initial
wave shape of the step response is rather smooth. But since N2=0 doesn't
result in a good fitting of the step response for all the modes, we
decided to make N2 = 1. Another measure could be the increase of NOO.
KPS= 0; we want to use the fitted results to simulate fast transients.
N3 = 0; because Nl=O
N4 = 3; For all modes, the characteristic admittance will be calculated at a
frequency, near to the natural frequency 1/(2*TAU)= Co/2*LEN=
300.000.000/2*3.000= 50 kHz. This high frequency fitting is logical
since afterwards, we want to use the fitting results to simulate fast
transients.
IPUN=l; generate punched cards
IDOC=l; punched cards should be documented by descriptive comment cards orig-
inating from the original CABLE CONSTANTS data.
IOTX= 1 (octal); matrices Z and Y in phase coordinates, calculated at transient
frequency FMED
XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP - 14

IOSS= 1 (octal); matrices Z and Y in phase coordinates, calculated at steady

state frequency
IOFL= 1 (octal); matrices Z and Y in phase coordinates, calculated at ten
discrete frequencies wi thin the frequency looping specified by the third
frequency card of the CABLE CONSTANTS case.
Next comes the actual CABLE CONSTANTS case, which already is explained in extensive
detail in chapter 23. Near the end of this imbedded case, following remarks are
felt to be important. though:
- on the first card, remark the repetition of frequency FMED = 16.48E+3
as well as the length specification (in meter)
- on the second frequency card, the steady state frequency is indicated.
This value is equal to the value of the steady state frequency STATFR in
the STARTUP file. Also note the length specification.
- on the last frequency card, the logarithmically spaced frequency looping
is specified: starting frequency = 10. Hz
6 decades
15 frequency points per decade
Also remark the length specification.

INPUT FILE:
===========

BEGIK KEW nATA CASE

C
C 225 xv cable without encloeing pipe
C ••••*... ( claee A example) *•• **.**
C
[Link] SETUP
$ERASE
BRANCH A2RC A3RC A2SC A3sc A2TC A3TC A2RS A3RS A2SS A3SS A2TS A3TS
TOLERANCES 14 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.18 100.
TOLERANCES 10 16.48E+3
C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
C -----+++++--//++//--++------++++++------
80 50 001 003 1 1 1 1 1 {WORItS PERFECT 1"011 ALl. 6 MOnES
CABLE COlfSTAKTS
C TYP SYST KPC EARTH MOnE Z Y
C ---+++++-----+++++-----+++++-----
2 -1 3 0 1 0 0 0
C nWlber of conductore per SC coaxial cable (one nwaber for each SC coax. cable)
C ---•• +++-----+++++-----+++++-----
2 2 2 ( each SC cable hee 1 core + 1 aheath. no araor
C [Link] and phyeical data (one grouping for each SC coaxial cable)
C ---1I1---++++R2++++----R3----++++1I4++++----R5----
8.3288-3 18.008-3 41.708-3 46.60E-3 50.608-3
C --110 C--+++HU C+++--HU I1---++EPS Il++---RO S---+++HU S+++--HU I2---++EPS 12++
2.848-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.408-8 1. 1. 8.0
C
8.328E-3 18.008-3 41.708-3 46.608-3 50.608-3
2.848-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.408-8 1. 1. 8.0
C
8.3288-3 18.008-3 41.708-3 46.608-3 50.608-3
2.848-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.408-8 1. 1. 8.0
C croee-eection location card
C -VERT.l-++HORIZ.1+--VERT.2--++HORIZ.2+--VERT.3--++HORIZ.3+
1198.8-3 51.E-3 1300.E-3 0.0 1300.E-3 102.8-3
C frequency and earth reeietivity card. ueing Careon'e hoaogeneoue earth model
C lIHO----------++FREQ+++++++++
XXII. SEHLYEH SETUP - lS

100. 16.48E+3 3000.

100. SO. 3000.
100. 10. 6 lS 3000.
BIJUfX card ending frequency carda of inbedded wCABLE CONSTAlfTS w data
BIJUfX card ending inbedded wCABLE CONSTAlfTS w caae.
$PUlfCH
BIJUfX card ending "SEHLYEH SETUP" datacaaea
BECIN HEW DATA CASE
BIJUfK

OUTPUT FILE:
============
Following is a selection of the generated output:
First comes an interpretation of the input data (only the part related to
SEMLYEN SETUP; the part related to CABLE CONSTANTS is not reproduced here):
....rk.r card preceding new EIIl'P data ca ••• BEeIII IIEW IIJ\TA CASl'!
e.-ant card. JnlMDCD - 3. e
c - . t card. JnlMDCD - 4. e 225 ICY cabl. vi tbout enclosing pipe
C.-ant card. JnlMDCD - 5. c •••••••• ( cl... A _lLaIIPle) ••••••••
C.-ant card. JnlMDCD - 6. C
2nd-ordar frequency-dependent line _eling. SEI'ILYEIf SETUP
Er••• all of 0 card. in the punch buffara SEllASE
Pair. of 6-character bu. [Link] for each phase. IIRMCB A2IIC
A31tC A2SC A3SC A2TC A3TC A2IIS A31tS A2SS 1.355 A2TS A3T5
II_ [Link] [Link].,... 14 15 16 17 18 TOLERAIICES 14 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.11 100.
11- [Link] tol ...an.,... 10 0 0 0 0 TOLERAIICES 10 16.48E.3
c - . t card. JnlMDCD - 12. C 3456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
C.-ant card. JnlMDCD - 13. C -----••••• --// •• //--•• ------++.++.------
Misc. data. 80 50 0 0 3 o 80 50 001 003 0 1 1 1 1 (WORKS PERFECT POll ALL 6 MODES
Transfer control to -CABLE CONSTANTS·, CABLE CONSTANTS

c - . t card. JnlMDCD - 36. Ie f.-.quencyand earth rea1IUYity card. using carson'. " - - , , . earth _1
cc-ent carci. JfUMDCD - 37. C RBO----------.+PREO•• ++ •• +++
Frequency card 1.000E.02 [Link] 0 1 3.00!.03 100. 16. 48E.3 3000.

Tabl. of underground cable [Link]. follovo .•••

P""•• nuaber 1 boundary radii in (_t.rl) follow. f.-- the cent.r out_rd ....
1 8.32800£-03 Z 1.80000E-oZ 3 4.17000E-02 4 4. 66000E-oZ 5 5.06000!-oZ 6 5.06000£-02 7 5.06000!-o2
lIeI1IU"iU,," in [ - a ) of core, .heath. and ...... r : 2.8400001-08 2.140000!-07 2,1400001-07
IIIIlaUv" pe ....ablliU •• of t h e . - three ............. U 1.000000E.00 1.0000001.00 1.000000E+00
Inlulator 1. lI"lativ. [Link], peraJttivity, end Yeloclty in [a/I.e): 1.000000E.00 [Link]!+00 1.976773E.08
Inlulator 2. lIelattv. pe ....abllity. peraitttvity, and Yelocity in (a/sec): 1.000000E+00 '.[Link] [Link]
Phas" nuaber 2 boundary radii In [_t.rl) follow. f.-- the ..-ter out_rei

Frequency card 1.0001.02 5.000£.01 0 1 [Link].03! ' 100. SO. 3000.

r.-.quency card 1.0001.02 1.0001.01 6 15 3.001.03 100. 10. 6 15 3000.
Blank card te...,inating frequency cards. BlNOCcard anding f.-.quency carels of lnbeddec1 -CABLE COIISTMTS· dat"
Blank card ending "CABLE CONSTMTS" cae... BlNOC card ending i _ ·CABLE COIISTMT5- cae.1

----- calculation of tranlforaation _trice.. continuous trenlpoliUon fleg .SS· 0

Prequency - 1. [Link]

I~'" _trix Adaittance ... tria

Cobe/a, Cllho/_,

1.6925251E-02 [Link] 0.00000001.00 [Link] 0.0000000';.00 [Link] [Link]+OO

1. 6464879!-01 1. 5770564£-05 0.00000001!.00 [Link] -1. 5770564!-05 [Link] [Link]

1.56127471-02 1. 6885517E-02 [Link]!.OO [Link]!.OO [Link]+OO [Link] [Link]

1.27352061-01 1. 64712681-01 1. 5770564!-05 [Link]!.OO [Link]!.OO -1. 577056U-05 [Link]·OO

1.5612747E-02 1.5593307E-02 1.68855171-02 [Link] 0.0000000£.00 [Link]!+OO 0.0000000£.00

1.27352061-01 1. 2969449E-Ol 1. 64712681-01 1.577056U-05 [Link]!+OO [Link] -1. 577056U-05

1.6070830£-02 1. 5612747E-02 1. 5612747!-02 1. 50436981-02 0.0000000£.00 O. OOOOOOOE. 00 0.0000000£.00

1. 4633803E-Ol 1. 2735206E-Ol 1. 27352061-01 1.46261721-01 5. 7538180E-ot [Link]!.OO [Link]

1.5612747£-02 1. 6031096E-02 1.55933071-02 1.5612747£-02 1.6oo3964E-02 0.0000000£.00 0.00000001!.00

1. 27352061-01 1. 4640193!-01 1. Z969449!-01 1. 27352061-01 1. 46325621-01 5. 7538180E-ot 0.00000001.00
XXII. SEHLYEN SETUP - 16

1.56127471-02 1.55933071-02 1.60310961-02 1.56127471-02 1.55933071-02 1.6OO39641-oZ 0.00000001+00

1. 27352061-01 1. 29694491-01 1.46401931-01 1.27352061-01 1.29694491-01 1.46325621-01 5.75381110E-04

Fitting of the propagation step response for .ada [Link] 1:

Iteration AllpUtude XC11 XCZ) X(3) Error

1 9.41601202£-01 3.255111481+00 4.896042031-01 •• 168954731-02 4.912739011-04
1 9. 199OZZ69I-01 3.580622631+00 4. 89604Z031-o1 8.118954731-02 1. 92231087&-04

1 9.020334841-01 3.906133771+00 4.896042031-01 8.1"954731-02 '.776560181-05

2 9.026252501-01 4.23235734E+00 4.41299818&-01 9.71773935&-02 4.04202505&-05
Successful convergence of tha iteration in SUBROUTIKE TDFIT. Tolerance IPS - 5.00000000&-05

Steady-stat. frequency i _ I s . respons •• rotated through delay Uaa X(3) for use in edJWlting by _ for. precise fit at tha
steady-stat. frequency. SBIPTII. 58IFTI - 9.8541051-01 -3.2490361-02
Allplitude 1 Tiaa canst. 1 AllpUtude 2 Ti_ canst. 2 Delay t t .
9.02625251-01 5.75713711-05 9.73747501-02 5.5214755&-04 4.192"85&-04
NOde 1. ti_ step - 1.43330949E-05 5ywbols: ".- - 5eelyen appro.i_tian. ·0· - deaired 1FT outpUt. -.- - intersection
Irror Tt. 0.0 9.736704471-01
.1 •••••••• 1 •••••••• 1 •••••••• 1 •••••••• 1 •••••••• 1. ••••••• 1 •••••••• 1. ••••••• 1 •••••••• 1 •••••••• 1
In! tlalbe IJIIlIIIUF - IIIDIEG 50
0.00000&+00 4.097531-04 0
-2.722301-02 4.2_61-04 0
1.642161-02 4.384191-04 o .
1.108621-02 4.527521-04 O.
-3.530241:-03 4.67085E-04
-1. 054341-02 4.814181-04 .0
-1.180601-02 4. 95751E-04 • 0
-1.113821-02 5.100851-04 .0
-6.916921-03 5.244181-04
-2.01997&-03 5.3875111-04 •
9.100061-05 5.53084£-04
1.'9024E-03 5.674171-04 •
5.081701-03 5.817501-04 O.
7.071551-03 5.960831-04 O.
6.416791-03 6.104161:-04 O.
5.49176&-03 6.24749£-04 O.
6.003531-03 6.39082E-04 O.
7.189531-03 6.534151-04 O.
6.232121-03 6.67749£-04 O.
4.182621-03 6. 82082E-04 •
2.101441:-03 6. 96415E-04
2. 41016E-03 7.107481-04 O.
3.136791-03 7.250811:-04
3.15081&-03 7.394141-04
1.29982&-03 7.53747£-04
-7.402601-04 7.680801-04 .0
-1. 46675E-03 7. 82413E-04
-9.052561-04 7.967461-04
-3.51275&-04 8.110801-04
-5.485971-04 8.254131-04
-1. 211841-03 8.39746E-04
-1. 871331:-03 8. 5407tE-04
-2. 941971-03 8.614121-04 .0
-3.188251-03 8. 82745E-04
-3.515891-03 8. 97078E-04
-2.115351-03 9.114111-04
-9.730601-04 9. 25744E-04 •
-1.232771-03 9.400771-04 •
-2.434181-03 9.544101-04
-3.441461-03 9.687441:-04 •
- 3. 96206E-03 9.830771-04 .0
-3.584601-03 9.974101-04 .0
-2.405091-03 1.011741-03 .0
-1.344311-03 1. 026081-03 .0
-1. 02470E-03 1.04041&-03 •
-1. 279241-03 1.054741:-03
-1. 627141-03 1.069081-03
-1. 701791-03 1.083411-03 *
-1. 491231-03 1. 09774E-03
-1.442011-03 1.112071-03
Nuaber of [Link] • 2 Noraalbed square error par point· 4.04202505£-05
NOde 1. constant characteristic a""ittance - 1.13894909&-01

For NOdes 2 up to 6. [Link] output follows. although i t is no longer illWltrated ure.

Steady-state .ada! [Link]. in aha. and .1croaho. follow. at f~CY

3.141592651+02 Hertz. as calculated froe fitted exponenUals via FOurier transforaaUon.
NOde R X G •
1 2.28820444£-02 1.444~4201E+00 2.968270331+02 1.873867181+04
2 6.67257347£-06 1.21173079E-01 4.25523683£-01 7.727455511+03
3 4.04216079£-06 7. 63830399E-02 5.481576831-01 1.035830891+04
XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP - 17

4 4.11632370£-07 1;. 49883367J!-02 3.22134778E-03 4.30327081E+02

I; 8.21996333£-07 1.0991;4156£-01 1.608859042-03 2.11;2086711+02
6 6.139903321-07 8.212462521-02 2.11;420898E-03 2.881374451+02

Requeot for fluahing of punch buffer. ISPUNC'lI

A liating of 80-cohan card i_geo now being fluohed froot punch bufferfoll_o.

123456789012345678901234567890123456789012341;6789012341;67890123456789012341;5789

c ( •••••• > cards punched by aupport routine on 30-5ep-88 11.21.18 ( •••••• )

C SEMLYEN SETUP
e SERASE
e \lIU\HCII AZRe AlRe USC AlSC A2TC AlTe A2RS A3RS USS AlSS A2'rS A3TS
C TOLEIIAIfCES 14 lO.t!; 30.16 30.17 30.11 100.
e [Link] 10 16. 41E+3
e e 3456789 12341;6789 12341;6789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 12345678
CC -----+ •••• --1/++//--++------++++.+------
C 80 50 001 003 0 1 1 1 1 {WORXS PERFECT POll ALL 6 MODE
C CABLE CONSYANTS
C C TYP SYSY NPC EARTH MOD£ Z Y IfGIIHD
c C --- ••••• -----••••• -----.+++.-----
C 2 -13 o o o o
C C nuaber of conductors per SC coaxial cable (one IlUIIber for_ch SC CDIUt. cabl
c c: ---•• +++-----••••• ----_ ••••• ____ _
C 2 2 2 ( eachSC cabl. hao 1 core + 1 sheath. no ano
e C g_trical and phya1calelata (one grouping for each SC coaxial cable'
C C ---Rl---++++R2+ ••• ----R3----++ •• R4 •••• ----kS----
C 8.328E-3 18.00£-3 41.70£-3 46.50E-3 50.6OE-3
C C --RO C--•••MU C••• --MU Il---•• US 11++---RO S--..... +MU $+++--MU 12---++EPS 12
C 2.842-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.40£-8 1. 1. 8.0
C C
C 8.32811-3 18.00£-3 41.70£-3 46.60£-3 50.60£-3
C 2.10-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.4011-8 1. 1. 8.0
C C
C 8.32811-3 18.00£-3 41.70£-3 46.60£-3 SO. 5011-3
C 2.8tE-8 1. 1. 2.3 21.401-8 1. 1- 8.0
C C ero •• -..ct1on IDeation card
CC -VERT .1-++BO"I%.1 +--VERT. 2--++80.1%. 2+--VERT . 3--++BORIZ. 3.
C 1198.1-3 51.£-3 13OO.E-3 0.0 1300.£-3 102.E-3
C C frequency and earth reabtivlty card. using Caroon's "'->geneaus earth _ 1
C C RRO----------+.FREO.+.++++++
C 100. 16.48E+3 3000.
C 100. SO. 3000.
C 100. 10. 6 15 3000.
C B1AIIK card ...sing frequency cards of i_dec! "CAllLE CONSTANTS" elata
e 81A11K card and1ng i _ " C A l l L E CONSYAIITS" cas ••
CCI.- 3000 •. _tera. rho- 100.0. aa fraq- [Link]. [Link]" 1. ICPS-O. JCYC-
-IAnC AlRC 1.138951-01 4.19269E-04 1 1 2 2 6
2.2882044411-02 1.444542011+00 2.968270332-04 1.87386718£-02 !>. 00000000£+01
0.00000£+00 1.736971+04 9.026251-01 0.0000011.00 1. 811112+03 9.73747E-02
0.0000011+00 1.00000£+00 0.00000£+00 0.00000£+00 1.00000£+00 0.000002+00
-lUSC AlSC 2.525312-01 9.504041-05 2 2 2 2 5
6.572573471-06 1.2117307911-01 4.25523683E-07 7.72745551E-03 !>.000000001+01
[Link]+OO 1.982731+06 1.053331-01 0.0000011+00 9.951041+04 1.9466711-01
0.00000£+00 1.00000£+00 0.000001+00 0.0000011+00 1.0000011+00 0.000001+00
-lUTe AlTe 3.6821;311-01 1.72052£-05 3 3 2 2 6
4.04216079£-06 7.638303992-02 1;. 48157683E-07 1. 03583089£-02 5.0000000011+01
[Link]+OO 2.3645611+06 7.72777£-01 0.0000011.00 1.13437£+05 2.2722311-01
[Link]+oo I.00000E+OO 0.00000£+00 0.00000£-00 1.0000011+00 0.000001.00
-IURS A3RS 8.8463511-02 1.5146911-05 4 4 2 2 6
4.11632370£-07 5.498833671-02 3.22134778£-09 ".30327081£-04 5.00000000£+01
0.0000011+00 1.2601011+07 8.2444311-01 0.0000011+00 6.46060£+05 1.7555711-01
0.00000£+00 1.0000011+00 0.0000011+00 0.00000£+00 1.00000£+00 0.00000£+00
-IA2SS AlSS 4.42409£-02 1.5147211-05 5 5 2 2 6
1.21996333£-07 1. 0995415611-01 1. 6088590411-09 2.15201671E-04 5.000000001+01
[Link]+OO 1.26331£+07 I. 24315E-Ol 0.0000011+00 6. 46720E+05 1. 71;681;£-01
0.000001+00 I.00000E+oo 0.000001+00 0.00000£+00 1.0000011+00 0.00000£+00
-IUYS AlTS 5.9232911-02 1.5147211-05 6 6 2 2 5
6.13990332£-07 8.212462521-02 2.15420,898E-09 2.88137445£-04 5.0000000011+01
0.00000£+00 1.263161+01 1.24321E-Ol [Link]+oo 6.466872+05 1.7S6791-01
0.00000£+00 1.00000E+OO [Link]+OO 0.00000£+00 1.0000011-00 0.0000011+00
9.94032£-01 0.00000£+00 1.004001+00 0.0000011+00 9.9119011-11 [Link]+OO
9.9383911-01 0.0000011+00 1.0000011+00 0.00000£+00 1.06910£-13 [Link]+OO
1.000201+00 0.000001+00-4.9890811-01 0.0000011.00 1.0047711+00 0.00000£+00
1.0000011+00 0.000001+00-4.96919£-01 0.0000011+00 1.0000011+00 0.000001+00
l.ooo20E+00 0.000001+00-4.98908E-01 0.000001+00-1.00477£+00 [Link]
1.00000£+00 0.0000011+00-4.9691911-01 [Link]+OO-l.00000E+OO 0.00000£+00
9.9383911-01 0.00000£+00 1.000001+00 0.00000£+00 9.9303311-11 [Link]+OO
-5.46120£-06 0.00000£+00-1.1280711-04 0.00000£+00 1.07189£-13 0.00000£+00
1.0000011+00 [Link]+00-4.9691911-01 0.0000011+00 1.00000E+oo 0.0000011+00
-5.4962lE-06 0.00000£+00 5.60389£-05 O. OOOOOE+oo-1. 34S06£-04 0.00000£+00
1.00000£+00 0.0000011+00-4.96919£-01 0.00000£+00-1.00000£+00 0.00000£+00
-1;.49621!-05 0.00000£+00 1;.60389!-OS 0.00000£+00 1.34506E-04 0.00000£+00
1.82813E-06 0.0000011+00 7.55214£-05 [Link]+00-2.73563£-15 0.00000£+00
3.32640E-Ol 0.0000011+00 6. 69332E-Ol [Link]+oo 1.77037£-16 0.00000£+00
1.83985E-06 0.00000£+00-3.75167E-05 [Link]+OO 6.72448£-05 0.00000£+00
3.34702E-Ol 0.00000£+00-3.32604£-01 0.00000£+00 4.99932E-01 0.00000£+00
1. 83985£-06 O. OOOOOE+00-3. 75167£-05 0.00000£+00-6. 72448E-05 O. OOOOOE+OO
3.34702£-01 [Link]+00-3.32604E-Ol [Link]+00-4.99932E-01 [Link]+OO
XXII. SEMLYEN SETUP - 18

3.32640£-01 0.000002+00 6.69332£-01 0.00000£+00-1.58415£-11 0.00000£+00

-3.32105£-01 0.00000£+00-6.12012E-01 0.00000£+00 3.13620E-16 [Link]+oo
3.34702E-01 [Link]-3.32604E~01 0.00000£.00 4.99932£-01 0.00000£+00
-3.34167E-01 [Link]+oo 3.33935£-01 [Link]+00-5.02318£-01 0.00000£+00
3.34102£-01 0.00000£+00-3.32604£-01. 0.00000£+00-4.99932£-01 0.000002+00
-3.34167£-01 [Link]+oo 3.339352-01 0.00000£+00 5.0231n-01 0.000002+00
-----.-•• ( End of LUNIT1 punched card. as flushe¢ b7 SPUNCB reque.t ) •••• _.-

XXXX-D. Double-circuit special transposition example

The following is an example to illustrate the special measures to be taken

when requesting output for the so-called double-circuit special transposition
(section IV.D.2).
The line configuration consists of 2 identical three-phase lines, with 100m
interspace. In the LINE CONSTANTS. chapter (section XXI-F-3) we will use the same
line configuration for data comparison. Because we are only interested in generating
data for type -1,-2,-3 branches (section IV.D.2), only the steady state frequency
is important. It is very well possible that fitting will fail. Those interested
in a complete fitting (normal Semlyen setup) probably should increase NPOINT.
Input:
BEGIN NEW DATA CASE
SEMLYEN SETUP
$ERASE
BRANCH BEG1.SEND1.SBEG1.REND1.RBEG1.TEHD1.TBEG2.SEHD2.SBEG2.REHD2.RBEG2.TEHD2.T
TOLERANCES 10 5000. (Illu.trat1on only: value of FKED actually unchanged
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
C '11' in col. 19-20: .pec1al double-circuit [Link].1t1on a ••uaed
C XPOIXT (cola 14-18) had to be [Link] froa 150 to 250
200 2501110 230 1 7 7777 0 ( Sealyen .1acallaneoua data
LINE COIfSTAXTS
tlETRIC
C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1 .231 .0522 4 3.18 5. 20. 20.
2 .231 .0522 4 3.18 O. 25. 25.
3 .231 .0522 4 3.18 -5. 20. 20.
4 .231 .0522 4 3.18 105. 20. 20.
5 .231 .0522 4 3.18 100. 25. 25.
6 .231 .0522 4 3.18 95. 20. 20.
BLANK card ending conductor card. within -LINE COIfSTJXTS· data
C 27. 5000. 138.(T1 calculated at Tran •• freq
27. 50.00 138. (Phaaor aolut1on frequency
27. 5.00 138. 6 20 {log. looping.
BLAKX card ending frequency card. of ·LINE CONSTANTS· data
BLAKX card ending -LINE CONSTANTS· data caae.
$PUlfCH
BLAKX card ending -SEKLYEN SETUP· data [Link]
BEGIN XEW DATA CASE
BLAKX

Following portion of the output is relevant for the steady state results and
for the generation of section IV.D.2. card formats:
Output:

Line conductor table after .orting and initial proce•• ing.

Table Pha•• Skin effect [Link] Reactance data .pecification Di_ter Horizontal Avghelght
Row _bar X latr., y letr.' N_
3.18000•
R-type It I-I"" X-type XI_I"" or GI'IR I CII
1 1 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 5.000 20.000
2 2 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 0.000 25.000
3 3 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 -5.000 20.000
4 4 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 105.000 20.000
5 5 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 100.000 25.000
6 6 0.23100 0.05220 4 0.000000 3.18000 95.000 20.000
XXII. SEHLYEN SETUP - 19

Mode to pha.e voltage Mode to pha.. current

transforaetion aatrix [Link] aatrix
0.408248 0.408248 0.707107 0.408248 0.000000 0.000000 • 0.408248 0.408248 0.707107 0.408248 0.000000 0.000000
0.408248 0.408248 -0.707107 0.408248 0.000000 0.000000 • 0.408248 0.408248 -0.707107 0.408248 0.000000 0.000000
0.408248 0.408248 0.000000-0.816497 0.000000 0.000000 • 0.408248 0.408248 0.000000 -o.81U97 0.000000 0.000000
0.408248 -0.408241 0.000000 0.000000 0.707107 0.408248 • 0.408248 -0.4011248 0.000000 0.000000 0.707107 0.408248
0.408248 -0.408248 0.000000 0.000000 -0.707107 0.408248 • 0.408248 -0.4082411 0.000000 0.000000 -0.707107 0.408248
0.408248 -0.408248 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 -0.816497 • 0.408248 -0.408248 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 -0.816497
calculation of .[Link] per. . . ter•• for frequency F - ~.OOOOOOOOI+01 Bertz.
Frequency - ~.OOOOOOOOI+Ol

serie. iJq>edance aatria Shunt _ittance . . trix

1_/lI1le) lMo/lI1le)
1.~7342171-01 0.00000001+00 0.00000008+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+0
1.06660731+00 3.116266761!-06 -6.117034412-07 -6.87034471-07 -1.88391ft6l!-0II -1.81391161-011 -1.1111391661!-0
7.26167071-02 1.5734217E-01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000008+00 [Link]!+O
4.23331611-01 1.06660731+00 3.86266761-06 -6.117034471-07 -1.118391661-011 -1.811391661-011 -1.118391661-0
7.26167071-02 7.26167071-02 1.57342171-01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+0
4.23331611-01 4.23331611-01 1.06660731+00 3.86266761-06 -1.88391661-08 -1.'8391661-08 -1.88391661-0
6.97978231-02 6.97978231-02 6.97978231-02 1.57342171-01 0.00000001+00 0.00000001+00 0.00000008+0
1.611486691-01 1.68.86691-01 1.68486691-01 1.06660731+00 3.86266761-06 -6.'7034478-07 -6.117034471-0
6.97978231-02 6.97978231-02 '.9797823!-02 7.2616707!-02 1.57342112-01 0.00000008+00 [Link]!+O
1.6848669!-o1 1. &1416691-01 1.68486691-01 4.23331611-01 1.0666073!+00 3.86266761-06 -6. '703447!-0
6.91978231-02 6. 9797823!-o2 6.97978231-02 7.26167071-02 7.26167012-02 1.57342171-01 O. OOOOOOO!+O
1.68486691-01 1.68486691-01 1.68486691-01 4.2333161!-01 4.23331618-01 1.06660738+00 3.116266761-0

_e
The foll .... ing "al ..... are CCIIJ>Utecl ,,,o1ng """"tant tranafo ... tion . .trice••

1
2
O. U5279905206665U-03
0.62610448515726921-04
Alplwl
lnaper/aO
0.24387941393874691-02
0.18939274335441741-02
!leta
IracUan./_lI
[Link]
Idb/ai)
'0.221733301134407971-02
0.543827445997356U-03
velocity
Calle/ • ..,)
0.12881745953263778+06
0.16587713963838721+06
3 0.11241937774555872-03 0.17144534951051771:-02 0.97646230827786751-03 0.111324163720737531+06
4 0.1124193777455587!-03 0.17144534951051771-02 0.97646230827786721-03 0.111324163720737531+06
5 0.11241937774555871-03 0.17144534951051771-02 0.976462301127786751-03 0.18324163720737538+06
6 0.1124193777455587!-03 0.171445349510517711-02 0.9764623082778675!-03 0.183241637207375211+06
[Link] . .ri.. [Link] [Link] Equivalent-Pi . .ria. Half equi,,-Pi shunt

_.....1 1apedanca (ohIo/_lle)

1_
adllittance (Mo/aUe)
....1 ! . .g
iJq>edance ( _ )
....1 i . .g
1apedanca Cohlo.)
real l . .g
1 5.119691-01 2.418731+00 0.000001+002.432081-06 1.oo276!+03-1.0496411+02 4.32700!+Ol 2.059791+02 8.024998-08 1.046521-04
_ittance ( _ )
.....1 i_

2 9.318211-02 1.40781!+00 0.000001+00 2.54512!-06 7. 44142!+02-2.46oo2!+01 7.920268+00 1.201921+02 1.594111-011 1.093611-04

3 8.47255£-02 6.432761-01 0.0000011+00".549701-06 3.768281+02-2.470921+01 7.213111+00 5.496621+01 ... 6273311-011 1.95417!-04
4 11.4725511-02 6.43276£-01 0.000001+00 4.549701-06 3.768281+02-2.470921+01 7.2131111+00 5.496621+01 4.627331-08 1. 954171:-04
5 8.472551-02 6.432761-01 0.0000011+00 4. 54970!-06 3.768281+02-2. 47092E+01 7.213111+00 5.496621+01 4.627338-011 1.95417!-04
6 8.472551-02'. 43276!-01 0.000001.00 4.549701-06 3.7682811+02-2. 4709lE+01 7.213111.00 5.496621.01 4. 62733!-OII 1.954171-04

It should be remarked that the modal values are calculated automatically.

simply by putting NSS=ll (flag for double-circuit special transposition). This is
unlike LINE CONSTANTS. where the sequence values for the special transposition
need to be calculated by hand. Hence. maybe. it is recommendable for the user to
prefer Semlyen Setup rather than LINE CONSTANTS.
We refer to section IV. D. 2 . for more details on how to convert these modal
results into a format. usable for constant-parameter travelling-wave models (type
-1,-2,-3), in the special case of double-circuit special transposition.
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 1

XXli Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS Supporting Program

Prof. Akihiro Ametani's separate program was added to ATP during the summer of 1994 as
documented in Can/Am newsletters dated July and October, 1994. Such usage, illustrated within
standard test cases DC-27 and DC-28, involves a CABLE PARAMETERS declaration immediately
following the old CABLE CONSTANTS declaration. The following is an adaptation of the
instructions for Prof. Ametani's self-contained program. The summary shall begin with Prof. Ametani's
own description (text moved from Section I) --- slightly modified to suit ATP needs. About limits on
number of conductors, most matrices are seen to be dimensioned (12,12), so the limit is believed to
be 12 (temporarily fixed).

WSM + THL, 12 July 1995.

The ATP "CABLE CONSTANTS" routine had originally been developed from 1976 to 1981
by this author, Akihiro AMETANI (Professor at Doshisha University, Kyoto, Japan) under contract
with Bonneville Power Administration, Portland, Oregon, U.S.A. Since then, a number of
modifications have been carried out by various persons. Ametani has found it difficult for himself to
trace all the modifications, and some of the calculated results are not correct. He has kept his own
independent CABLE CONSTANTS which has been modified time by time by himself. He has started
restructuring ofhis own CABLE CONSTANTS since October, 1993, and added new options into the
program. The restructuring has been partially completed, and Ametani has decided to release the new
program named CABLE PARAMETERS through the BPA as an all-new supporting program of
ATP.

The structure and functions of the CABLE PARAMETERS are the same as those of CABLE
CONSTANTS (see ATP Rule Book Chapter XXID). The options of a stratified earth, which was
rarely used, and the crossbonded cable, which was complicated to use, have been deleted in CABLE
PARAMETERS. But several new options have been added:

(1) Arbitrary cross-sectional shape for conductors;

(2) Distributed shunt admittance model;
(3) Transposition/snaking of a cable system

Furthermore, the option of grounded conductors (parameter "NGRND") has been modified. The
modified version of "NGRND" is completely different from that of "NGRND" in CABLE
CONSTANTS.

Produced by A. Ametani
Dept. Electrical Engineering
Doshisha University
Tanabe-cho, Tsuzuki-gun
Kyoto-pref. 610-03, Japan
Tel. +81 774656325 (6211)
Fax +81 774656801
2 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

CONTENTS

1. Introduction

IT. General Description of the Program

IT-I Outputs
IT-2 Input Data

m. CABLE PARAMETERS Data Cards

III -1 General Structures

111-2 Specific F onnat for Data Cards

REFERENCES

1) A. Ametani: "A general formulation of impedance and admittance of cables," IEEE Trans., Vol.
PAS-99 (3), pp. 902-910,1980.

2) H.W. Dommel: Electromagnetic Transients Program Reference Manual (EMTP Theory Book),
B.P.A., Portland, Oregon, U.S.A., August 1986.

3) A. Ametani: Distributed-Parameter Circuit Theory, Corona Pub. Co., Tokyo, Japan, Feb. 1990
(in Japanese).

4) A. Ametani and 1. Fuse: "Approximate method for calculating the impedance of

muhiconductors with arbitrary cross-section," Trans. IEE Japan, Vol. B-l11 (8), pp. 896-902,
1991 (in Japanese); Elect. Eng. Japan, Vol. 112 (2) pp. 117-123 (English version of Trans. IEE
Japan).

5) A. Ametani, 1. Fuse and K Hattori: "Derivation of approximate formulas of a multiphase cable

impedance including earth return," IEE Japan '90 Annual Conf., Paper No. 1401, March 1990.

6) A. Ametani: "An efficient method to deal with boundary conditions in an electromagnetic

transient analysis," ibid., '94 Annual Conf., Paper No. 1374, 1379, March 1994.

7) A. Ametani: "A study of cable transient calculations," Sci. Eng. Rev. Doshisha Univ.,
vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 110-127, July, 1983.
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 3

I. Introduction
See the initial page, to which material of this section was moved.
B. General Description of the Program
B-1 Outputs
The "CABLE PARAMETERS" program can be used to calculate the following outputs of
Class A: underground/overhead single-core coaxial cable (SC cable in Fig. 1 (a)), Class B:
underground/overhead pipe-enclosed type cable (PT cable in Fig. 1 (b)) and Class C: overhead line (OH
line in Fig. I (c)) as a function of frequency f.

medhun 1

mediwn2

'<:!IIi:-~- pipe (pp' ~)

pipe outer insulator (epz)
~--+- pipe inner insulator (ep')
core ( Pc , fJc) i·-·-&-·-·-~~·-·-·~-"~·-·r·-~·--t-·*
1Ifr-/J--i--j-th inner conductor
sheat ( P. , fJ.) (SC Cable)
insulator 3 ( £;3 ) armor ( P., fJ.)

( i ) SC cable cross section ( b) A PI cable : Class B

k-th conductor
j-th cable j-th conductor ~----t
D} : I
f--- ,::- i,
:
h
'1!c
hj :: Ii. :
-..: I -.Jk ~

D2 i
( ii ) System COnfiguratiO~... ..,
\ ,'

( a ) An SC cable system: Class A ( c) An OH line: Class C

Fig. 1 Various types of cables

(1) series impedance [Z] = [R] + j[X], [X] = w[L] [(lim]

(2) shunt admittance [Y] = [G] + j[B], [B] = w[C] [S/m]
(3) characteristic impedance [Zo] [Q]
(4) transformation matrix (eigenvectors) [A] for voltage and [B] for current
4 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

(5) modal quantities; attenuation constant a [dBlkm], propagation velocity v [mJ Jls], impedance Z
[O/m], admittance Y [S/m], characteristic impedance Zo [0], characteristic admittance Yo [S]
(6) 1t (PI) equivalent model of a cable or an OR line per unit length for ATP simulation
(7) Ametani's distributed line model of a cable or an OR line per unit length: multiphase lossy line
model with transformation matrix at a fixed frequency

B-2 Input Data

To calculate the above explained outputs, the following input data are required.
(1) input/output specification; type of cable, i.e. OR line (Class C; !TYPE = 1), SC cable (Class A;
!TYPE = 2) or PT cable (Class B;!TYPE = 3), etc. : corresponds to data card A3, B3, or C3
in CABLE CONSTANTS
(2) $PUNCR is used for punched cards just as with other supporting programs. See illustration in
DC-27 and DC-28.
(3) number of conductors, geometrical configuration and physical constants: corresponds to data
cards A4 and AS for SC cable, B4 to B7 for PT cable or C4 for OR line in CABLE
CONSTANTS
(4) shunt conductance and/or capacitance, which may represent boundary conditions of the
conductors, to be defined by a user independently from the shunt admittance [Y] calculated by
the program (term (2) of Sec. II-2) : data card AS+, B7+ or C4+
(5) geometrical configuration of conductors to the earth: corresponds to data card A6, B8 or C5
in CABLE CONSTANTS
(6) earth resistivity and frequency at which the outputs are to be calculated : corresponds to data
card A7, B9 or C6 called "Frequency Card" in CABLE CONSTANTS

ill. CABLE PARAMETERS Data Cards

ill-I General Structures
The structure of a data case of "CABLE PARAMETERS" will depend upon which of the
following three classes it falls into:
Class A : SC cable, system of single-core coaxial cables without enclosure
Class B : PT cable, system ofSC cables within an enclosing pipe
Class C : OR line, system of conventional overhead lines
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 5

1. Class A Data Structure

AI. First comes a "BEGIN NEW DATA CASE" card (actually optional, as per
Section IT-A).

A2. Next comes a "CABLE CONSTANTS" card, followed by a "CABLE

"PARAMETERS"card. These serve to transfer control to the new code.

A3. First comes a miscellaneous data card.

A4. Next comes one (or possibly more) card upon which is keyed the number of conductors
which make up each SC coaxial cable of the system. One. card will suffice for a system
of up to sixteen cables; two cards are required for 17-32 cables, etc.

A5. Next comes two (or possibly three) cards of geometrical and physical data for each SC
coaxial cable in the system. E.g., for three SC coaxial cables, a maximum of nine cards
would be required.

A6. Next comes one (or possibly more) card which gives the horizontal and vertical location
of the centers of all SC coaxial cables in the system. A single card will handle up to four
SC coaxial cables; two cards are required for 5-8, etc.

A7. Last comes a frequency card, which specifies a new earth resistivity and frequency (or
range of frequencies) for which cable constants are to be calculated.

2. Class B Data Structure

B3. First comes a miscellaneous. data card.

B4. Next will come one card which gives parameters ofthe pipe.

B5. Next will. come one (or possibly more) card which specifies the location of each SC
coaxial cable within the pipe. One card will suffice for up to 4 SC coaxial cables, two
will be required for 5-8 SC coaxial cables, etc.

B6. Next comes one (or possibly more) card upon which is keyed the number of conductors
which make up each Sc coaxial cable of the system. One card will suffice for a system
of up to sixteen cables; two cards are required for 17-32 cables, etc.

B7. Next come two (or possibly three) cards of geometrical and physical data for each SC
coaxial cable in the system. E.g., for three SC coaxial cables, a maximum of nine cards
would be required.

B8. Next comes one card which gives the horizontal and. vertical location of the center of
the pipe.

B9. Last comes a frequency card, which specifies a new earth resistivity and frequency (or
range of frequencies) for which cable constants are to be calculated.
6 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

3. Class C Data Structure

C3. First comes a miscellaneous data card.

C4. Next come three cards for each circuit which belongs to the overhead conductor
system. Parameters specified include the number of phases, the number of ground
wires, the number of conductors in a bundle, geometrical data, conductor resistivity,
etc. E.g., considering a system which consists of a single-circuit 500 kV transmission
line and a double-circuit 230-kV transmission line all on the same right of way, nine data
cards would be involved.

C5. Next comes one (or possibly more) data card which gives the height, sag, and horizontal
location for the center of each bundle of each circuit of the system. One card will
suffice for I or 2 bundles, two cards are required for 3 or 4 bundles, etc. E.g., two
coupled single circuits, each of which is supported by its own towers and has a single
ground wire, would require four cards (because there are eight bundles total -- four for
each circuit).

C6. Last comes a frequency card, which specifies a new earth resistivity and frequency (or
range of frequencies) for which line constants are to be calculated.

ill-2 Specific Format for Data Cards

The preceding section outlined the structure of a "CABLE PARAMETERS" data case in
general terms, for each of the three different general classes of geometry which are permitted. The
format and meaning of the associated data cards shall now be described in detail. Unscaled MKS units
are consistently used throughout, it maybe noted (e.g., distance in meters, voltage in volts, capacitance
in farads, etc.).

1. FOrmat for A3. B3 or C3 data' Miscellaneous Data Card

This card provides miscellaneous data concerning the data class, grounding conditions,
requested output format. These data are applicable to all Sc coaxial cables specified within this cable
system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345 67890 12345 67890 12345 67890 12345 67890 12345 67890 12345 6789012345678901234567890

ITYFE ISYST NPC IEART KM:ODE IZFLA IYFLA NPP NGRND P:DATA IYG

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 "- Section number
explaining
I5 IS IS IS I5 IS I5 IS I5 IS IS the parameter
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 7

1.1 rrYPE; flag indicating the class of the present data case

ITYPE= 1: Class C, OH line

2: Class A, SC cable
3: Class B, PT cable

1.2 ISYST; flag indicating either overhead or underground for a cable system (Class A and B), and
indicating either transposed or untransposed for an OH line (Class C).

(1) Classes A and B·····ISYST = 1: overhead cable

o: cable on the earth surface
-1 : underground cable

(2) Class C .. ·.. ISYST = 0: untransposed OH line

2 : continuously transposed OH line

1.3NPC

(1) Classes A and B; number of SC cables which make up the system of interest. Example:
NPC = 3; three-phase SC cable system (the most common case).

(2) Class C; number of transmission circuits which make up the overhead line system of
interest.

The numbers of phase wires and ground wires in a circuit are to be defined in data card
"C4" (NP = number of phase wires, NG = number of ground wires).

1.4 lEARTH; not used, leave blank.

1.5 KMODE; flag used to request the calculation and output of various modal quantities of interest.

Presently it is fixed to "KMODE=I," and all the modal quantities described in Sec. IT-I
(5) are calculated and printed.

1.6 IZFLAG; flag indicating intermediate printout.

IZFLAG = 0 : no intermediate printout

I : intermediate printout

The format of the impedance and admittance printout is fixed. to:[R], w[L] = [X], [G]
and w[C] = [B], but not [L] and [C].

1 7 IYFLAG; not used. leave blank.

8 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

1.8 NPP

(1) Class A ....NPP = -99 transposition (snaking) ofSC cables

¢ -99 unused

(2) Class B ....NPP = 1 pipe of finite thickness

o pipe of infinite thickness (ISYST is automatically set to be
zero.)
-1 snaking of inner conductors (SC cables) for a finite
thickness pipe (corresponding to NPP = 1)
-99 snaking of inner conductors for an infinite thickness pipe
(corresponding to NPP = 0)
(3) Class C....unused

1.9 NGRNP; This parameter describes the number of grounded conductors in an OR line (Class C)
and a cable system (Classes A and B). (In CABLE CONSTANTS, NGRND descnl>es
the grounding conditions of the cable system, and the value of NGRND does not
correspond to the number of the grounded conductors.)

Grounding starts from the most outer conductor to the inner conductors for all the classes
(Classes A, B and C) as illustrated in Fig. 2. At least, one conductor (a core of phase 'a' SC
cable in Classes A and B, phase 'a' conductor in Class C) has to be left (not grounded).

NGRND= 1 Class A Class B Class C (NP=5, NG = 0)

a b c
4 5
---®
core
/
sheath
@
r
-:-
II PW 01
a
0
02
b
0---111
o
c
3

NGRND=3
a b c
4 5

r~ r -:-
II
IIJ--o
o 1 02
<>--111
1
-:-
3

NGRND=4
a b c
4 5

~ ~ ~
II IIJ--o 0---111
o 1 3
-:- 12
1

NGRND~ 5 NGRND::; 6 NGRND::; 4

Fig. 2 Example of grounded conductors for parameter ''NGRND''

XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 9

For Class C (OH line), when conductors 4 and 5 in the above figure are defined as a ground
wire (GW; NP = 3, NG = 2 in data card C4-1 in Sec. 3), then the conductors 4 and. 5 are
automatically grounded and the conductor system is reduced to 3 x 3 from 5 x 5 independently
from the parameter NGRND. In this case, thus, NGRND should be less than 3 (NGRND ~ 2).
Also, the case with ''NP = 3, NG = 2" gives the same result as the case with ''NP = 5, NG = 0,
NGRND = 2"; three conductors are left (not grounded).

1 10 IDATA; flag indicating the type of the input data "AS," "B7" and "C4." This parameter is a new
one; it does not exist in CABLE CONSTANTS.

IDATA = 0: conventional circular (cylindrical) conductor, data input by radius and

resistivity of the conductor

IDATA = 1: arbitrary cross-section conductor explained in Appendix 2, data input by

cross-section area, outer surface length and dc resistance of the
conductor

1.11 IYG; This is a new option to use a distributed admittance model which takes into account a
number of boundary conditions in a cable or an OH line system. The theoretical
background is explained in Appendix 3.

IYG=O: conventional admittance of a cable or an OH line, Y = jwC. This uses

shunt capacitance only (no shunt conductance).

IYG *" 0: distributed admittance model to take into account an extra admittance
such as a cable conductance and boundary conditions, the extra
admittance to be supplied by a user:

IYG= I : admittance with extra capacitance C', Y = jw(C + C')

2: with extra conductance G, Y = G + jWC
3: with extra conductance and capacitance, Y = G + jw(C + C')

2. Unused (reserved for future development)

3. Format for A4. B4 to B6 or C4-1

4. Format for A5. B7 or C4-2 for IDATA = 0

The following symbol is used to express Sec. corresponding to Classes A, B and C.

"s" for SC cable; Class A (ITYPE = 2)

"P" for PT cable; Class B (ITYPE = 3)
"0" for OH line ; Class C (ITYPE = 1)
10 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

P3.1 Format for B4 Data

This data card indicates the radii and physical constants of the pipe illustrated in Fig. 3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

r p1 r p2 rp3 Pp IIp Epl Ep2

EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1

Parameters: medium 1

inner radius of the pipe [m]

rnedium2
outer radius of the pipe [m]
outer radius of the pipe outer
pipe (pp , Jlp)
insulator [m]
pipe outer insulator (Ep2 )
resistivity ofthe pipe [Q-m]
relative permeability of the pipe inner insulator (Ept)
plpe j-th inner conductor
relative permlttlV1ty of the (SC Cable)
pipe inner insulator
relative permittivity of the
pipe outer insulator

Fig. 3 A PT cable

Note: rpi < r:{l2 < rp3 in theory. Keep this condition independently from the parameter NPP and from
a specific condition of a given PT cable. For example, even if a pipe has no outer insulator, it
has a corrosion protective covering or produces a thin oxide-film, which is a kind of an
insulator, and thus r p2 < tp3. Also even ifNPP = 0, give an arbitrary value for ~2 andtlJ
keeping the condition rpi < r p2 < rp3 ' and an arbitrary (non-zero) value for £p2.

P3.2 Format for B5 Data

This data card indicates the location ofeach inner conductor (SC cable) enclosed within a pipe
in polar coordinates, ie. "dk" and "Sk" in Fig. 3. The reference to the angular position Sk (degrees) can
be taken arbitrary, but it might be better to take the horizontal line as the reference and to measure
positive angle as counter-clockwise.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

dl 81 d2 82 d3 83 d4 84
EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1 EI0.1
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 11

Parameters:

dk : distance from the pipe center to the center of the k-th conductor [m]
6k : angular position of the k-th conductor to a reference line [deg.]

Note: - Since each SC coaxial cable needs one pair (dk , 60, one card can handle up to four cables.

- k varies from 1 up to NPC (see Sec. 1.3).

- Remember to use the same S.c. cable sequence, as the one defined in Sec. P3.3.

S3 = P3.3 Fonnat for A4 or B6 data

For cable systems (either Class A or Class B), the number of conductors which make up each
SC coaxial cable of the system must be indicated; the following format is used:

1 2 3
12345 67890 12345 67890 12345 67890 1234516789~~234516789~~234516789~\1234516789~12345!6789~
NCPP 1 NCPP 2 NCPP 3 NCPP. NCPP, NCPP 6 .... Etc. (1 entry for each of NPC SC cables) .......
IS IS IS IS IS IS IS I IS I IS I IS I ........ I IS I IS

Parameters:

NCPPk: indicates the number of physical conductors, making up the k-th single-core
coaxial cable of the system

= 3: SC cable has core, sheath and armor

= 2: SC cable has core and sheath

= 1: SC cable has a core only.
Note: For purposes of this input, it may be noted that the SC coaxial cables have been numbered
between "1" and ''NPC.'' Such numbering is arbitrary, except that the string ofNCPPk must be
non-increasing (that is, all 3-conductor SC coaxial cables must precede any 2-conductor cables
and a112-conductor cables must precede any core only cables). This ordering, once established,
is assured to apply throughout the rest of the data case.
12 • XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

S4 = P4 Format for AS or B7 data

This data card (maximum three cards in one set) expresses the radii and physical constants
(resistivity, permeability and permittivity) ofan SC cable for Classes A (SC cable) and B (PT cable).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

r1 r2 r3 r4 rs r6 r7
E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

Pc Pc PH €i1 Ps Ps Pi2 €i2

E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

If the SC cable has armor, one more set of the data is required:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Pa Pa Pi3 €i3

E10.1 E10.1 EIO.1 E10.1

Parameters:

For a better understanding of all parameters involved, we refer to Fig. 4.

core ( Pc , Ilc )

sheat ( Ps , Ils )

insulator 3 ( EiJ ) armor ( Pa , Ila )

Fig. 4 SC cable cross-section

XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 13

rt : inner radius of the tubular core [m] = 0 for solid core

r2 : outer radius of the tubular core [m] (= inner radius of the first insulating layer)

r3 : inner radius of the sheath [m] (= outer radius of the first insulating layer)

r4 : outer radius of the sheath [m] (= inner radius of the second insulating layer)

rs: inner radius of the armor [m] (= outer radius of the second insulating layer)

r6: outer radius of the armor [m] (= inner radius of the third insulating layer)

r7 : outer radius of the third (= outer most) insulating layer [m]

Pc: resistivity of the tubular core [Q-m]

!lc: relative permeability of the tubular core

!lit: relative permeability of the first insulating layer (in general, !lit = 1)

Eil: relative permittivity of the first insulating layer

Ps : resistivity of the tubular sheath [Q-m]

!ls : relative permeability of the tubular sheath

!li2 : relative permeability of the second insulating layer (in general, !li2 = 1)

Ei2 : relative permittivity of the second insulating layer

Pa : resistivity of the tubular armor [Q-m]

!la: relative permeability of the tubular armor

!liJ : relative permeability of the third insulating layer (in general, !liJ = 1)

EiJ : relative permittivity of the third insulating layer

03.04 Format for C4-1 and C4-2 data

It should be noted that an overhead line (OH line; Class C) is a special case of an overhead SC
cable. Thus, an OH line parameter is calculated as an overhead SC cable parameter in this program and
in CABLE CONSTANTS (i.g. ITYPE = 2, ISYST = 1 and NCPPk = 1 for k = 1 to NPC). Only
bundles for phase and ground wires cause a difficulty to deal with the OH line as an SC cable. Because
of the above, this program and the CABLE CONSTANTS program have the following difference from
the LINE CONSTANTS program.
14 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

I) It is important to note that the CABLE CONSTANTS code uses another technique than the
LINE CONSTANTS code to take bundling into account. Whereas the LINE CONSTANTS
code first calculates the line parameters for all individual conductors within a given bundle and
then reduces the paralleled conductors to one equivalent phase, the CABLE CONSTANTS
code will immediately handle the bundling (i.e. at input time), using the geometric mean radius
approximation for the bundle.

2) Furthermore, CABLE CONSTANTS assumes the following:

- Within one circuit, all ''NP" phase-wire bundles count for the same number ("KNP") of
individual physical conductors, all having the same geometry and physical data. All physical
conductors within a bundle are uniformly spaced around the circumference of a circle.
- Within one circuit, all ''NG'' ground-wire bundles count for the same number ("KBG") of
individual physical conductors, all having the same geometry and physical data. All physical
conductors within a bundle are uniformly spaced around the circumference of a circle.
- Data are entered for the individual physical conductor, not for the bundle.

3) Finally, recall the sequence rule for overhead transmission line circuits:

- First take the circuit with the highest number NP (number of phase-wire bundles)
- Stop by taking the circuit with the lowest number NP (number of phase-wire bundles)

Hence, ''NPC'' (total number of circuits, see Sec. 1.3) sets of following three card formats need to
specified next:

0.3 Format for C4-1 data

1 2
12345 67890 12345 67890 12345\678 9;\12345\678 9~\123451678 9~\123 4 5167 8 9~1123451678 96112345167 89~
NP NG KBP KBG
IS IS IS IS
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 15

0.4 Format for C4-2 data

~234567890
1
1234567890
2 3
~234567890 ~234567890
4 5 6
~I: 8
1234567890 1234567890 12345678901234567890

ROUT p RINp ROUT g RINg SEPp SEP g

E10.1 EIO.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 EIO.l

1 2 3 4
~I: 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 123456789012345678906 1234567890 1234567890

Pp ].lp Pg ].lg

E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

~
~

a b c

X ISEPp x ~
~ x
Fig. 5 illustrative single-circuit 3-phase overhead transmission line (as seen in CfOSS-
section). The three phase-wire bundles are of four conductors each; there are two
ground-wire bundles, of three conductors each.

Parameters:

NP The number of phase-wire bundles which belong to the circuit in question. E.g., for a
3-phase circuit, "NP" will equal three.

NG The number of ground-wire bundles which belong to the circuit in question.

KBP The number of individual physical conductors which compose each phase-wire bundle of
the circuit in question. If there is no bundling ofphase wires, "KBP" will equal unity, and
leave SEPp BLANK.

KBG The number of individual physical conductors which compose each ground-wire bundle of
the circuit in question. If there is no bundling of ground wires, "KBG" will equal unity,
and leave SEPG BLANK.
16 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

ROUTp outer radius of the individual tubular conductors which are used for each phase-wire
bundle, see Fig. 6(a). [m]

RINp inner radius of the individual tubular conductors which are used for each phase-wire
bundle, Fig. 6(a). [m]
= 0: solid conductor.
ROUTg outer radius of the individual tubular conductors which are used for each ground-wire
bundle, Fig. 6(b). [m]

RINg inner radius of the individual tubular conductors which are used for each ground-wire
bundle, Fig. 6(b). [m]
= 0: solid conductor

(a) (b)

Fig. 6 Cross-section of a conductor

SEPp separation between the centers of two adjacent individual conductors within the phase-
wire bundle. All 'KBP' conductors of the phase-wire bundle are supposed to be uniformly
spaced around the circumference ofa circle, see Fig. 7. [m]
= blank. : no bundling (put KBP = 1).
SEPg separation between the centers of two adjacent individual conductors within the ground-
wire bundle. All 'KBG' conductors ofthe phase-wire bundle are supposed to be uniformly
spaced around the circumference of a circle, Fig. 7 [m]
= blank: no bundling (put KBG = 1).

resistivity of the material used in each individual tubular conductor of each phase-wire
bundle, see Fig. 6(a). [Q-m]

relative permeability of the material used in each individual tubular conductor of each
phase-wire bundle, Fig. 6(a).

resistivity of the material used in each individual tubular conductor of each ground-wire
bundle of the circuit, see Fig. 6(b). [Q-m]
relative permeability of the material used in each individual tubular conductor of each
ground-wire bundle of the circuit, Fig. 6(b).
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 17

.•••......•.• -..
....".# -. , ,

...
! SEP "
..... - - - - - -...... ~
.
... ..
:
.,.
,
,

........
."' ......... .
....
#
#

-.
,

.. ..... '" -.. -"," .... ..-

Fig. 7 A bundled conductor (uniform spacing)

4A. Format for AS', B7' or C4-2' for IDATA=l

..... New option for arbitrary cross-section conductor

When I-DATA = 1, i.e. the case of an arbitrary cross-section conductor, the following input
data instead of the input data S'P4 and 04 are required.

S4A=P4A. Format for AS' or B7' data

This data card (maximum 4 cards in one set) expresses the cross-section area, outer-surface
length and dc resistance of a conductor and the thickness of the conductor's outer insulator rather than
the radii of the conductor and the insulator, and the resistivity of the conductor in the data cards AS or
B7 in Sec. S4=P4.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

Sc 1c Dil Ss ls Di2 Sa 1a
E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Di3

E10.1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

Rc Pc Pil €i1 Rs Ps Pi2 €i2

E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

18 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Ra l1c l1i3 €i3

EI0.1 EI0.1 EID.l EI0.1

Parameters (See Fig. 8.) S., R,.,

cross-section area of conductor [m2] Sa' R",

outer-surface length of conductor [m]
average thickness of insulator [m]
dc resistance of conductor [Q/m]
relative permeability of conductor
relative permeability of insulator
relative permittivity of insulator
......... --. ---------------_.-_.-
subscripts: c for core ~

s for conducting sheath

a for armor Fig. 8 Cross section and physical constant of an
i for insulator arbitrary cross-section SC cable (Classes
I for insulator I (core to sheath) A and B)
2 for insulator 2 (sheath to armor)
3 for insulator 3 ( armor outer)

For a cable consisting of a core and a sheath, 6 data expressing conductor cross-section

(Sc' ~, Dil , Ss, ~ and D12 ) and 8 data expressing physical constants (1\, flc, !lil' fil' 1\, Ils, J.Ii2 and fil)
are required. Thus 2 data cards rather than 4 data cards indicated above are necessary enough. When
a cable is composed only of a core, 3 data for cross-section (Sc' ~ and Ql) and 4 data for physical
constants (R.:, J-lc' J-lil and til) are necessary enough.

04A. Format for C4-2'

Data card C4-2' expresses the cross-section area, outer-surface length dc resistance and
permeability of a conductor, and separation between conductors, while the data related to the above are
expressed as the radii, resistivity and permeability in data card C4-2 as explained in Sec. 04.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 12345678901234567890

Sp 1p SEP p Sg 19 SEP g
EID.l EID.I EID.I EID.I EID.I EID.I
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 19

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Rp IIp Rg J.l g

E10.1 ElO.1 E10.1 E10.1

Parameters (See Fig. 9.)

S: cross-section area of conductor [m2]

I: outer-surface length of conductor [m]
R: dc resistance of conductor [(lim]
J.l : relative permeability of conductor

subscript: p for phase wire

g for ground wire Fig. 9 Cross-section and
physical constant of an
arbitrary cross-section
conductor (Class C)

For an overhead line with no ground wire, leave BLANK for the data Sg' ~, SEPg' ~ and [Link]-

5. Format for A5+. B7+ or C4+ for IYG *" 0

..... New option for distributed admittance
When IYG *" 0, conductances and/or capacitances are to be defined by a user. The
conductances and/or capacitances are added to the shunt admittances of a given cable or an overhead
line which are evaluated automatically by the CABLE PARAMETERS Of the EMTP CABLE
CONSTANTS.

S5 = P5 Format for A5+ or B7+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 12345678901234567890

G{I,l) C{I,l) G{I,2) C{I,2) G{I,3) C{I,3)

E10.1 E10.1 EIO.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

Parameters:

G: conductance [S/m]
C: capacitance [F1m]

subscript: I for phase 'I' of SC cables for Classes A and B

1 for core to sheath
2 for sheath to armor
3 for armor to earth (Class A) and pipe (Class B)
20 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

If an SC cables is consisting of a core and a sheath, the data G(I,3) and C(I,3) are left to be
BLANK. See Fig. 10.

IYG= 1 G = 0 (BLANK.) and C has

to be defined.
2 C = 0 and G has to be G(I, 1) + jwC(I, 1)
defined.
3 G and C have to be defined.

Fig. 10 I-th SC cable consisting of a core and a

sheath with a distributed admittance.

For a PI' cable (Oass B), the following data card is required right after the above data card for
the last phase( i.e., after the last card):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

Gp Cp

E10.1 E10.1

Parameters:

Gp : pipe conductance to be added [S/m]

Cp : pipe capacitance to be added [F1m]

05 Format for C4+

1 2 3 4 5 6
~I:
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 123456789012345678908

G(I,1) C(I,1) G(I,2) c(I,2) G(I,3) C(I,3) .. . Etc . . ..

E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 I E10.1

~I: 3 4 5 6
~l:
2 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 123456789012345678908
12345678901234567890

.. . Etc. . .. G(I,NC) C (I,NC) Gg (1,1) Cg (1,1) . .. Etc • . ..

E10.1
I E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 I E10.1
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 21

Parameters

G(I,k) conductance for phase wire 'k' [S/m] } k = 1 to NC

C(I,k) capacitance for phase wire 'k' [F/m]
NC total number of phase wires in circuit 'I'
GiI,m) conductance for ground wire 'm' [S/m] } m = 1 to NG
CiI,m) capacitance for ground wire 'm' [F/m]
NG total number of ground wires in circuit'!'

If the circuit T is consisting of 3 phase wires and 1 ground wire, 3 sets of G(I,k) and C(I,k) for
the phase wires and a set of Gil, 1) and CiI,I) for the ground wire, which make up one data card, are
required.

Remark for Data A5, B7 or C4

The data cards AS and B7 are per phase, and the data cards C4 are per circuit. Thus, "n" sets
of the data cards are required in the case of"n" phases for AS and B7, and in the case of"n" circuits for
C4. The data input is carried out in the following code.

data cards C4-1 explained in Sec. 03 only for Class C.

illATA = 0 data cards AS, B7 or C4-2 explained in Sec. 4.
illATA #< 0 data cards AS', B7' or C4-2' explained. in Sec. 4A.
IYG '" 0 data cards AS+, B7+ or C4+ explained in Sec.5.

where INPC = the number of phases for AS or B7 (Classes A and B)

the number of circuits for C4 (Class C)

6. Format for A6. B8 or C5

86. Format for A6 data

For each of the "NPC" SC coaxial cables of the system,. the horizontal and vertical location of
its center must be specified as illustrated in Fig. 11(a), according to following card format.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890 1234567890

DC cable # 1 SC cable # 2 SC cable # 3 SC cable # 4

VERT 1 HORIZ 1 VERTz HORIZ z VERT3 HORIZ 3 VERT 4 HORIZ 4

E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

Parameters:

VERTk : vertical distance (m) between the center of the k-th single-core coaxial cable and the
earth surface. Always use POSITIVE values, no matter whether the system of cables is
22 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

underground or in the air. This difference is made by flag ISYST (see point 1.2 in Sec.
t) on the miscellaneous data card.

HORIZk: horizontal distance (m) between the center ofthe k-th single-core coaxial cable and an
arbitrary vertical reference line.

, medium 1
1.),
.5 I

-'
1.)'
u'
c:I' medium 2
1.)'
..,.'
1.)'
c.;::. ,
1.),
=:',, medium 1

..!&I medium 2
~
=:
~
> SC Cable#k

,,
,c .'
HORIZk

( a) SC cable location (b) PT cable l~cation

Fig. 11 Cable location

medium 1 = earth, medium 2 = air for ISYST = 1 and 0

medium 1 = air, medium 2 = earth for ISYST = -1

P6. Format for B8 data

This card gives the vertical location ofthe center of the pipe (which encloses all single-core
coaxial cables of the system) with respect to the earth surface as illustrated in Fig. 11 (b).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890 1234567890 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

CENTER Blank
E10.1 E10.1

Parameter:

CENTER: vertical distance (m) between the center of the pipe and the earth surface. Always use
POSITIVE values, no matter whether the pipe is underground or in the air. This
difference is made by flag ISYST (see miscellaneous data card).
XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 23

06 Format for C5 data

For each of the ''NP'' + "NG" bundles within each of the 'NCCT circuits composing the
overhead conductor system,. a triplet of numbers giving the horizontal and vertical location (near tower
and at midspan) of the center of the bundle is to be specified (see Fig. 12). At this stage of the data
input, the variable expressing the number of circuits is 'NCCT' rather than 'NPC' which now expresses
the total number of conductors. As for the order in which data have to be entered, following rules must
be obeyed:

First take all phase-wire bundles belonging to the circuit with the highest number of phase-wire
bundles.

bundle #k -
4)

.S
4)
Q

=
bundle#k X
e
ce
4) HORIZk
~ I------------------~~

earth 0; earth 0;

Fig. 12 Overhead line location

Stop by handling the phase-wire bundles belonging to the circuit having the lowest number of
phase-wire bundles.

Next start handling the ground-wire bundles belonging to the circuit with the highest number of
phase-wire bundles. .

Stop by handling the ground-wire bundles belonging to the circuit with the lowest number of
phase-wire bundles.

This means:

Keep the sequence of circuits, as specified in Sec. 03 and 04.

First define the. phase-wire bundle location,. obeying the circuit sequence.

Next define the ground-wire bundle location, obeying the circuit sequence.
24 - XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS

1 2 3 4 5 6
~I:
123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678901234567890 123456789012345678908

Bundle # 1 of this circuit Bundle # 2 of this circuit ... Etc. (one

triplet for each
VTOWER 1 VMIDl HORIZ 1 VTOWER 2 VMID2 HORIZ 2 bundle of circuit

E10.1 E10.1 EIO.1 E10.1 E10.1 E10.1

Parameters:

VTOWERk vertical distance (m) near the tower, between the center ofthe k-th bundle and the
earth surface.

VMIDk vertical distance (m) at midspan, between the center of the k-th bundle and the earth
surface.

HORlZk horizontal distance (m) between the center of the k-th bundle and an arbitrary
reference line.

NPC = total number of conductors at this stage, NCCT = number of circuits

NOTE: Since each bundle needs one triplet (VTOWERk, VMIDk, HORlZk), one such card can
handle up to two bundles.

7. Format for A7. B9 or C6

The "frequency card" of all three classes of data cases has the same format.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
123456789012345 678901234567890 12345 67890 12345678 9012345678 9012345678901234567890

ROE FREQ IDEC IPNT DIST I PUNCH

E15.6 E15.6 15 IS F8.3 no

Parameters:

ROE earth resistivity [Q-m]

FREQ frequency [Hz] at which cable or line parameters are to be calculated. FREQ should be
greater than zero.
Ifthe automatic looping over a frequency range has been requested by the user, then the
data 'IDEC' and '!PNT' greater than zero have to be input. Otherwise, i.e. in the case of
the normal single frequency calculation, leave BLANK for 'IDEC' and '!PNT.'

IDEC the number of decades of frequency space which are to be spanned.

XXIII Appendix. CABLE PARAMETERS - 25

IPNT the number of points per decade of frequency space at which the cable or line parameters
are to be calculated. The automatic looping of frequencies is carried out in the following
manner. 8.f= 10lIPNT except IPNT = 3; f= [Link] k x lOn-I; k = 1,2,3, ... , IPNT ; n = 1,
2, ... ,IDEC; fbegin = 8.f, fend = 10IDEC

DIST circuit length in meters. This is needed for several situations that require line length.
Included are NODA SETUP, JMARTI SETUP, and the punching of constant-parameter
branch cards using IPUNCH below.

IPUNCH: Normally leave blank or zero. Value one (1) will result in the creation of ATP branch
cards for a Pi-circuit oflength DIST. Alternatively, value two (2) is for the constant-
parameter, distributed modeling. For either non-zero value, the use of $PUNCH is
required to extract such results from the ATP punch buffer. For node names to be
included, use a BRANCH request of CABLE CONSTANTS before the CABLE
PARAMETERS request. See the DC-28 illustrations.

Examples

(1) IPNT = 1, IDEC = 4; 8.f= 10 Hz, fbegin = 10 Hz, fend = 104 Hz,
f= 10, 10 x 10 = IcY, 10 X 102 = 103 , 10 X 103 = 104

(2) IPNT = 2, IDEC = 3 ; 8.f= 5 Hz = fbegin, fend = 103 Hz,

f= 5, 10, 50,100, 500, 103
k = 1,2 k= 1,2 k = 1,2
n=1 n=2 n=3 =IDEC

(3) IPNT = 3, IDEC = 3 ; fbegin = 2 Hz, fend = 103 Hz

f= 2,5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200,500, 103
k = 1,2,3 k = 1,2,3 k = 1,2,3
n=1 n=2 n=3 =IDEC

(4) IPNT> 3 ; 8.f= 10lIPNT = fbegin

When IDEC x IPNT = 0, the normal single frequency calculation is carried out. Independently
from the above automatic looping, the cable or line parameters are calculated at the frequency
"FREQ" given by the user.
page 24-1

Supporting program "NETE~" will calculate and punch constant-parameter

generator equivalents in the form of Type-51,52,53 EMTP branch cards based on
input data that consists of known short-circuit currents and excluded line
reactances. Access is via the special-request word "NE'lWCRK EaJlVAIENT" •

. XXIV-A. Formats for Input tata of ·NETE~"

Once control is inside "NETEQI", a miscellaneous data card is read first·

'.then cane line cards (LI'ltil a blank terminator card), to define tho.
impedances that are N:YI' to be included in the resultant equivalent. In order
that the resultant equivalent be valid for EMTP simulation, such lines must
correspond to transnission circuits that will be expl ici tely represented in the
EMTP data. Neither missing lines, nor overlapping lines are acceptable, of
course. Following the line cards are .bus cards, one for each terminal node.
'.then a blank card is needed as a request to exit module "NETEQI", unless two
or more such subcases are to be stacked under a single special-request word.
'.the associated data formats, and detailed definitions for the various
parameters, follow.

XXIV-A-l. Miscellaneous tata card:

C 1 2 3 4
C 3456781901234561789012341567890121345678901123456781
C 1 I 1 I I I
18 I 18 I E8.0 I E8.0 I 18 I A8 I
C I I I I I I
C Nl'!MAX N13 EPSILN PERCEN ImcCM M?J::?

NI'!MAX of colunns 1-8 is the maximlltl nlltlber of Newton iterations to be

allowed for the iterative solution. A typical value is ten.
N13 of collltlns 9-16 provides diagnostic printout control. This data field
is used for IPRSUP if and only if a p:>sitive value has not previously been
defined via a "DIAGJOSTIC" card of Section II-A.
EPSILN of columns 17-24 is a convergence tolerance for the iteration. All
variable corrections must be less than EPSILN for the iterative solution to
terminate.

PERCEN of colLrnns 25-32 is the fractional addition of line impedance· at

each step of staged load ing. If no intermed iate sol utions are needed, key the
value unity. But to add the line loading in NUM equal steps, use PERCENT =
1 / NUM.
rmcOM of columns 33-40 controls the possible addition of a blank comme.
card separating the Fhase cards on the punched output. '.this is a cosnetic
detail only. Unity adds the extra blank cards, while blank or zero omits it.
page 24-2

M3C? of colunns 41-48 actually consists of four sep:trate characters that

are pmched in colunns 45, 46, 47, and 48. '!he first of these is C~ of
colunn 45, which is the alIilanuneric s}mbol used to indicate the first phase
(as replacement for OMQ in node names 'IEXTA and/or TEXTB) of the 3-ttlase
branches to be pmched. A blank will leave the default s}mbol "A" in place.
'!he second is ClMB of colunn 46 - like [Link], only for the second
ttlase. A blank will leave the default s}mbol "8" in. place. '!he third is ~C
of colunn 47 - like CHl\RA, only for 3rd phase. A blank will leave the
default s}mJ::ol "e" in place. Finally, the fourth is OMQ of colunn 48, the
alphanuneric S}mbol that is used in 6-cbaracter bus names to mark the location
that will ind icate phase nunber (to be replaced by [Link], CHil\RB, or ClMC).
A blank will leave the default sumbol "?" in place.

XXIV-A-2. Line cards for Circuits to be omitted from Equivalent

C 1 2
C 3456781901234561789012341
C 1 1 1
18 1 18 1 E8.0 1
C I 1 1
C KBts Mats REACT

KBts of coll.n\nS 1-8 is the node nunber of one end of a transnission

circuit in the positive-sequence equivalent network. Since this circuit is to
be represented explicitely in the transient stooy, it is to be omitted from the
equivalent.

Mats of colunns 9-16 is the node nunber of the other end of this
transmission circuit that is to be omitted from the equivalent.

REACT of colunns 17-24 is the positive-sequence reactance of the

transmission circuit in question.

SUch line cards are to be terminated by a blank card. Parallel lines are
not allowed (the user must parallel them himself) • Node nunbers must be
positive integers, with no "holes" (i.e., every positive integer less than the
largest must be used).

XXIV-A-3. Bus card Giving Short Circuit CUrrent

C 1 2 3 4
C 13456781901234156789012341567890123415678901
C 1 1 1 1 1 1
121 A6 I A6 1 E10.0 1 E10.0 1 16 1
C 1 1 1 1 1 I
C 'IEXTA 'IE)cr'B RrHEV XTHEV' NE~TE

NODE of colunns 1-2 (shown poorly on diagram) is the node mmber of the
short circuit data keyed on this card. Although no "holes" in node nunbedng
are allowed, input order is in fact arbitrary.
Page 24-3

TEXTA of columns 3-8 is the 6-character name of the equivalent generator

bus. USe the special symbol ~Q ("?") to mark the position that is to be used
to ind kate Iilase number.

TEX'I'B of columns 9-14 is 1ikeTE>a'A, only for the network side of the
equivalent branch that ~11 connect the two3-Iilase busses.

RI'HEV of columns 15-24 is the X/R ratio desired in the final equivalent at
this node. ·J1esistance is ignored during the solution, and is only added back
: into the result using this fixed proportion at the end.

XTHEV of columns 25-34 is the equivalent reactance at the node. In per

unit, this is the reciprocal of the short circuit current at rated voltage.

NEG.l\TE of columns 35-40 allows the user to disconnect the generator of the
node. '!his "negates" the normal inclusion (blank or zero will incltrle the
generator, whereas unity will negate it).

XXIV-B. Interpretations of Input ~ta cards of wNETEQI"

The first input card is the miscellaneous data card, which bears six
parameters. '!he associated interpretation in columns 1 throlJ3h 51 (to the left
of the card image) awears as follows:
1 234 5
12345617890112345617890123456781901234567890112341516789101
--1-1-1 1 1-1-1-1
Misc. I 18 1 18 I E12.3 I E12.3 I 18 IXI A4 I
--1-1-1 I 1-1-1-1
NI'IMAX N13 EPSILN PERCEN ImCCM N3C?

Next come line cards for those circuits that are to be omitted from the
equivalent because that will be represented explicitely. '!he 51-column data
card interpetation follows:
1 2 345
12345678901234567890123415678190121345678901234561789101
----------1-1 1
Branch card. K, M, X = 1 14 1 14 I E14.4 1
---------------------1---1 I
KB1.5 MB1.5 REACT

Finally, there are the bus cards giving node number, node names and short
circuit currents. ~e names are not reflected in the data card interpretation,
which follows:
1 234 5
12345678901123456178901234567891012345678901213456781901
----I 1 1 1 1
Thevenin. I 16 1 E13.4 1 E13.4 1 16 I
--I I 1 1 1
NODE RTHEV XTHEV NEG.l\ TE
Page 24-4

XXIV-C. Explanation of Other Clltput of "NETEQI"

Since the second subcase of BENCHMARK DC~14 provides several

illustrations of usage, no complete output will be presented, nor will much
space be devoted here. Yet there are some imp:>rtant observations.

'l11e most imp:>rtant output for the serious user will be pmched cards
(coupled R-L branches of 'JYPe 51, 52, ••• ). SUch card images are always written
to the punch buffer. But as explained in Section I-D (see "$PLNCH"), the user
may well require a $PtN::H carmand to save these card images for future use.
'l11is will depend on the program version being used.

Printed output begins with one line for each Newton iteration as it is
performed. 'l11e following is an example (the line has been cut in tlNO to fit
this printed page):
- Done with Newton iteration nlJllber NITER = 1. Largest
correction D4 = 2.22487143E-0l
AltholXJh one iteration only requires negligible time for snaIl problEllls, not so
for larger problEllls such as the 8-node subcase of BDCffotARK DC-14. For those
watching and waiting for the output, the just-described line can provide an
important indication that the comp.1ter is still alive and working on the user's
problElll!

If PERCEN < 1.0 is used to provide staged loading, the user will be
~informed of each change of loading by means of a message such as the following
_(again split in tlNO):
~ Increase admittance by PERCEN to value SCALE =
2. 00000000E-02. Next, solve •••

For those interested in sparse. matrix solutions to linear algebraic

equations, the sparsity plot may have interest. Recall that this will be
produced only if a p:>si tive limit IOFBND is keyed for the the nunber of
generators (see the "NETWORK EQUI~~ request card of Section !!-A-13).
Well, if this is the case, at the end of the canpltation, there will be some
explanatory heading that explains the meaning of p10.t s}mbo1s: "X" for
originally nonzero terms, and "F" for terms that have been "filled in" (made
nonzero) during the ordered elimination. 'l11e following is an illustration from
BENCffttARK OC-14 - the first 11 of 64 rows total. 'l11ere were 8 generators, so
64 rows and collJ[\ns:

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234
1 XXXXXXXX
2 XXXXXXX X
3 . XXXXXXX X
4 XXXXXXX X
5 XXXXXXX X
6 XXXXXXX X
7 xxxxxx:x X
8 xxxxxx:x X
9 XFFFFFFFXFXXXXXX F F F F F F
10 XXXXXXXX F F F F F F
11 XFXXXXXX X F F F F F
page 25-1

~• SUPPORTING REFERENCE MATERIAL

Theory related to theEMTP is scattered through various technical papers

and a few books • '!he following may be found useful for reference purposes:

1. H.W. O::mne1 ,"Digital [Link] solution ofe1ectranagnetic transients in

single and multi!=hase netw:>rks," IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-8S', pp. 388-399,
April 1969.

2. H. W. Doornel, "Nonlinear and time-varying elements in digital

simulation of electromagnetic transients," IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-90,
pp. 2561-2567, Nov/Oec 1971.

3. W. S. Meyer, H. W. Doornel, "[Link] of frequency-dependent

transmission line parameters in an e1ectranagnetic transients program,"
IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-93, pp. 1401-1409, Sep/Oct 1974.

4. W. F. Tinney, J. W. Walker, "Direct solutions of sparse netw:>rk

equations by optimally ordered triangular factorization," Proc. IEEE,
vol. 55, pp. 1801-1809, November 1967. Also available in the 1967
IEEE PES PICA Conference Record.

7. H. W. O::mnel, w. S. Meyer, "[Link] of electromagnetic

transients," Proc. IEEE, vol. 62, pp. 983-993, July 1974.

8. W. S. Meyer, "Transients Program Memoranda." Approximately 1513

pages per vo1l11le, this concerns the EMTP deve10pnent memoranda
lNhich are regular issued as progress is made. Individual memos
are bound lNhen there has been sufficient accllllulation to form a
vo1l11le. As of February, 1984, there were 14 vollllles. O'lly the
most recent vo1l11le is generally available, however, so do not write
requesting a complete set. O1der vollllles are out of print. When a
new vo1l11le is released, a fixed nllllber of copies are printed; and
lNhen these are exhausted, the vollllle becomes unavailable through
regular channels (a Freedom of Information .request w:>u1d always be
honored, of course, but a copying fee w:>uld be charged). As of
April, 1984, EMTP Memoranda writing has been suspended indefinitely,
with the 74-page contribution dated 19 January 1984 (finished on
25 March 1984) being the final one unless management encourages
a resumption. A request for guidance in setting such priorities
was made of higher management on March 26th, 1984.

9. D. R. carroll, W. S. Meyer, "Digital and hybrid [Link] of

electromagnetic transients in power netw:>rks," Sixth Annual
Pittsburg Oonference on Modeling and Simulation, Pittsburg,
Pennsylvania, April 1975.

10. A. Sem1yen, A. oabuleanu, "Fast and accurate switching transient

calculations on transmission lines with ground return using recursive
convolutions," IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-94, pp. 561-571, 1975.

11. A. ~etani, "A highly efficient method for calculating transmission line
transients," IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-95, pp. 1545-1551, Sept/Oct 1976.
Page 25-2

12. L. rube, H. W. D:mnel, "Simulation of control systems in an

electromagnetic transients program with 'lACS," IEEE PES PICA
Conference Record, vol. 10, pp. 266-271, 1977.

13. W. S. Meyer, "Machine translation of an electromagnetic transients

program (EMTP) anong. different digital complter systems," IEEE PES
PICA Conference Record, vol. 10, pp. 272-277, 1977. see also Ref.
8, Vol. VI, 5 January 1977, pagination PICA.

14. V. [Link], H. W. [Link], "synchronous machine parameters in

analysis of electromagnetic transients," canadian Oommunications
and Power Conference, Montreal (P.Q., canada), o:tober 20-22, 1976.

15. V. Brandwajn, "synchronous Generator Models for the Simulation of

Electromagnetic Transients." ph.D. thesis written at the university
of British Colunbia (Vancouver, B.C., canada), .April 1977, 117 pages
plus preface.

16. G. Gross and M. C. Hall, "synchronous machine and torsional dynamics

simulation in the compltation of electromagnetic transients," IEEE
Trans., vol. PAS-97, pp. 1074-1086, July/Aug 1978.

17. H. W. [Link], "EMTPTheory Book," Bonneville Power Mninistration

publication first printed in .April of 1987.

18. IEEE SSR Task Force, "Fi rst bencl'lnark mOOel for com}Xlter simulation
of subsynchronous resonance," IEEE Trans., vol. PAS-96, pp. 1565-1572,
Sept/oct 1977.

19. P. M. Anderson, A. A. Fouad, "Power System Control and Stability."

1mes, Iowa (USA): 'Ihe Iowa State lhi ver si ty Press, 1977.

20. V. Brandwajn, H. w. [Link], "A new methoo for interfacing generator

mOOels with an electromagnetic transients program," IEEE PES PICA
Conference Record, Vol. 10, pp. 260-265, 1977.

21. A. Semlyen, "Contributions to the theory of calculation of

electromagnetic transients on transmission lines with frequency
dependent parameters," paper subnitted to IEEE for presentation at
the 1979 PES S\..ITf[\er Meeting.

22. Daniel Van [Link], Editor, "EMTP Newsletter." Now published quarterly
by LEe of Leuven, Belgiun, issue nunber one appeared during July of
1979. For information about subscription, see Section I-A.

23. V. Brandwajn, W. S. Meyer, H. W. [Link], "synchronous machine

initialization for unbalanced network conditions within an electro-
magnetic transients program," IEEE PES PICA Conference Record, vol.
11, pp. ???-???, 1979. Also available in Ref. 8, Vol. VII,
28 January 1978, pages 'l'rx:E-13 through 16.

24. H. W. D:mnel, B.C. O1iu, W. S. Meyer, "Analyzing transients in ac/dc

systems with the BPA Electromagnetic Transients Program," proc. IEEE
International Conference on OIIervol tages and Compensation on Integrated
ae-de Systems, Winnipeg, canada, July 8-12, 1980.
Page 25-3

25. A. Ametani, "A general formulation of impedance and admittance of

cables," IEEE Trans., vol. P~99(3), pp. 902-9la, 198a.

26. A. Ametani, "wave propagation characteristics of cables," IEEE

Trans., vol. PAS-99, No.2, pp. 499-5a5, March(Spril 198a.

27. R. H. Lasseter, D. M. Demarest, F. J. Ellert, "Transient Over-

voltages on the neutral bus of HVDC transmission systems," IEEE
PES paper No. A78 7a7-4, presented at the 1978Surmer Meeting.

28. R. H. Lasseter ,"Electrical characteristics of long overhead HVDC

transmission lines," IEEE PES paper No. A79 535-6, presented
at the 1979 Summer Meeting.

29. A. G. Phadke, Course organizer: ".Digita1 Simulation of Electrical

Transient Phenanena." IEEE TUtorial Course No. 8lEHOl73-5-PWR,
last given at the 1982 IEEE PES Winter Meeting in New York City.
Sixty pages in length, the notes for this one-day IEEE course
consist of six chapters, as follows:
I - Introdu:::tion to Power System Transients (A. G. Phadke);
II - Present day procedures and program (W. S. Meyer);
III - Extension of the basic solution methods (H. W. D::mnel);
IV - Synchronous machine modeling (D. W. Olive);
V- EMTP synchronous machine modeling (D.H. Baker);
VI - HVDC converters & controls (K. G. Fehrle, R. H. Lasseter).
Anyone seeking a broad overview of the full range of EMTP usage is
advised to consult this "book". Altholgh just an outline, it
points to nunerous other sources of information (there are 145 references).

3a. K. C. Lee, H. W.D:mnel , "Addition of modal analysis to the U.B.C.

Line Constants Program," research report to B.C. Hydro and Power
Authority, Vancouver, canada, January, 198a, published by the
Electrical Engineering Department of the tniversityof British CollJllbia.

31. J. G. Frame, N. Mohan, T.-H. Liu, "HySteresis modeling in an

electromagnetic transients program," IEEE PES paper No. 82 WM
152-7, presented at the 1982 Winter Meeting.
32. R. H. Lasseter, S. Y. Lee, "Dig i tal simulation of static VAR system
transients," IEEE» PES .paper No. 82 WM 178-2, presented at the 1982
Winter Meeting.

33. V. Brandwajn, H. W. D::mne1, I. I. D::mne1, "Matrix representation of three-

phase N-winding transformers for steady-state and transient studies," IEEE
PES paper No. 81 SM 429-a, presented at the 1981 SLll'lner Meeting.

34. H. W. D::mnel, "Transformer models in the simulation of electromagnetic

transients," Fifth Power Systems COmputation Conference
held in cambridge, England, September 1-5, 1975.

35. A. S. Morched, V. Brandwajn, "Transmission network equivalents

for electromagnetic transients stooies," IEEE PES
paper No. 83 WM 039-5, presented at the 1983 Winter Meeting.
Page 25-4

36. H. K. Lauw, W. S. Meyer, "Universal machine modeling for the

representation of rotating electric machinery in an electro-
magnetic transients program," IEEE PES paper No. 81 SM
430-8, presented at the 1981 [Link] Meeting. Published in
Trans. PA&S during .April of 1982?

37. D. Van D:mnelen, "q>timization of initial values of mechanical

variables of turbine-generator lD'lits in an electromagnetic
transients program," IEEE PES paper No. 81 SM 500-8,
presented at the 1981 Slimier Meeting, and later p..1bl ished in
Trans. PA&S, Vol. PAS-100, no. 12, pp. 4990-4994, December 1981.

38. IEEE Working Group, "Modeling of CUrrent-Limiting SUrge Arresters",

IEEE Trans. PA&S, vol. PAS-100, pp.4033-4040, August 1981.

39. J. R. Marti, "Accurate ftbdelling of Frequency-Dependent

Transmission Lines in Electromagnetic Transients Simulations",
proceedings of the IEEE Po\toler Industry Comp..1ter .Applications (PICA)
Conference, Phil adel IX'li a , Pennsylvania, 9 pages, May 1981.

40. V. Brandwajn, H. W. D:mnel, "tunerical oscillations in the

transient analysis of circuits with implicit integration
techniques," paper presented at the XXIV-th Mid\tolestern Symposiun
on Circuits and Systems, PUebla, Mexico, August, 1983.

41. D. Van D:mne1en, Chairman. '!he European EM'l'P Users Group

(see index) has held meetings biannually since its inception
during 1981 (the first meeting, an all-Belgian affair, took
p1ac:e on 21 January 1981). Each meeting has an associated
set of conference docunents, of which sane have been 1 isted
in EM'l'P Memoranda (e.g., Ref. 8, Vol. XIV, 2 January 1984,
pages EMOE-l and 2). Anyone interested in EM'l'P usage should
not overlook this valuable source of information about the program •.

42. F. L. Alvarado, R. H. Lasseter, H. K'WOn, S. K. Mong, "A

module-oriented EM'l'P interface," paper presented at the
1984 Winter Meeting of the IEEE PES in Dallas, Texas.

43. Frank Rasmussen of ElKraft Po\toler Company Ltd., Copenhagen,

renmark, is encouraged to write a paper describing his
pioneering research and developnent that made the EM'l'P load flow
possible. If and when this appears, it will be Reference 43.

44. M. T. Correia de Barros, "Eefeito coroa em linhas de transporte de energia

(Corona Effect on Transmission Lines)." Doctoral thesis of the Instituto
SUperior Tecnico (1ST), universidade Tecnica de Lisboa, PortU:Ja1, 1985.

45. Herbert E. Konkel, II Simulation using a fully-anpo\tolered, improved EMTP

version (ATP) and a $1550 IBM pC ~-compatible personal comp..1ter. n First
printed on 28 February 1987, and mailed that \toleekend by WSM and HEK to all
EMTP User Groups as \tolell as various parties having individual interest.
page 25-5

46. James T. O'Reilly, "Federal Infonnation Disclosure; Procedures,

Fonns, and the Law." '!his definitive 2-vo1unne work docunenting
the u.s. Freedom of Infonnation Act (FOIA) is published by:
Shepard' s/~Graw-Hil1; P.O. Box 1235; Colorado Springs,
Colorado 80901. WSM's copy is copyrighted J);cember, 1983.

47. H. W. D:lrmIel, "EMTP Theory Book." '.this work was written under a 4-year
contract with BPA dated September, 1981. Following a I-year delay in the
delivery, and then an additional 9 months to resolve copyright problans of
figures, BPA began printing and distributing this work during June of 1987.
xxv EHTP BENCHHARK CATALOGUE - 1

xxv EMTP BENCHMARK CATALOGUE

Following is a classification of all benchmarks. according to topics discussed in

the Rule Book. A first division distincts between benchmarks illustrating supporting
routines and benchmarks documenting simulation runs. Any remark that could
contribute to the updating or improvement of this list greatly will be acknowledged.

xxY-A Supporting routines

Further subdivisions are based on special request words as found in the Rule
Book.

JMARTI setup:
DCN3.DCN5.DCN6.DCP20
LINE CONSTANTS:
DC29.DC59.DC60,DCN3,DCN5,DCN6,DCP20
CABLE CONSTANTS:
DC27,DC28
SEMLYEN setup:
DC29,DC60
XFORMER:
DC15
BCTRAN:
DCN8
DATA BASE MODULE:
DC36
SATURATION (CONVERT):
DC13
HYSTERESIS:
DC13
NETWORK EQUIVALENT:
DC14

OLD to new ZnO:

DC13
CHANGE SWITCH:
DC14
ZnO FITTER:
DC38,DC39
xxv Et1TP BEHCHHMK CATALOGUE - 2

KILL CODES:
DC13

XXV-B Simulation part

Further subdivisions are based on the models used in the network simulation.
In most cases, these models are referred to, using special request words (as used
in the Rule Book). .

XXV-B-l TACS
TACS HYBRID:
DC1,DC2,DC8,DC19,DC20,DC22,DC30.DC33.DC37,DC38,DC43.DC45,DC47,DC57,
DC63,DCN2.DCN10,DCP17
TACS STAND ALONE:
DC18,DC19.DC20.DC21.DC23.DC46.DCP24
XXV-B-2 USAGE OF LINE MODELS
CONSTANT PARAMETER MODEL (0,1,2) :
DC1.DC2.DC3.DC4.DC5.DC6.DC7.DC9.DC10.DC12,DC16,DC19.DC20.DC22 , DC24 ,DC25
DC26,DC30,DC31,DC32,DC34,DC35,DC38,DC41,DC42,DC43,DC44,Dc45,DC47,DC48
DC50,DC51,DC52,DC53,DC55,DC56,DC57,DC58,DC61,DC62,DC63,DCN1,DCN2,DCN4
DCN7 ,DCN9 ,DCN10,DCNll.DCN12,DCP1 ,DCP10,DCPll ,DCP13. DCP14 .DCP15,DCP16
DCP17,DCP18,DCP19,DCP2,DCP21,DCP22,DCP26,DCP3,DCP4,DCP5,DCp6,DCP7,DCP8
DCP9
KCLEE MODEL (-1,-2,-3):
DC1,DC2,DC7,DC12,DC16.DC24.DC31.DC32,DC37.DC38.DC41,DC47,DC50.DC52,DC61
DC62,DC63,DCN4,DCN7,DCP1,DCP10,DCP13,DCP18,DCP19,DCP6,DCP8
JMARTI MODEL:
DCN4,DCN7
SEMLYEN MODEL:
DC31,DC61
CASCADE PI:
DC9,DC10,DCP25
XXV-B-3 USAGE OF TRANSFORMER MODELS
SATURABLE TRANSFORMER:
DC5,DC25,DC32,DC47,DC51,DC53,DCP11,DCP15,DCP21
PI-CIRCUIT:
DC1,DC2,DCll,DC25.DC26.DC53.DC63.DCN9.DCN10,DCNll.DCP21.DCP26
xxv EHTP BENCHMARK CATALOGUE - 3

XXV-B-4 USAGB OF NON-LINBAR BLBMBNTS

TYPE 91
DC22.DC38.DC42.DC43
TYPE 92
DC37.DC38
TYPE 93
Dc4.DC7.DC45.DC56.DC58.DCP15.DCP22
TYPE 96
Dc45
TYPE 97
Dc42.DCP5
TYPE 98
DCN7.DCP15
TYPE 99
DCN7 •Dcp6
ZINC OXIDE
DC37
XXV-B-5 USAGB OF SWITCHES
TIME. VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED SWITCHES:
DC1,DC2,DC3.DC7.DC12.DC16.DC19.DC20.DC24.DC25,DC26.DC30.DC31.DC32.Dc41.
- DC43,DC47.DC48.DC50.DC52.DC53.DC55.DC57.DC61.DC62.DC63.DCN2.DCN4. DCN7 ,
DCN9,DCN10.DCN11.DCP1.DCP10,DCP12,DCP13.DCP17 ,DCP18,DCP19 , DCP2.DCP21.
DCP26,DCP6.DCP7.DCP8.DCP9
DIODES OR TIIYRISTORS (TYPE 11):
DC1 ,DC2.DC30.DC32 ,DC57.DC63
SPARK GAP OR TRIAC (TYPE 12):
no illustration found
TACS CONTROLLED SWITCHES (TYPE 13):
no illustration found
STATISTIC SWITCH (TYPE 76):
DC16.DC24 ,DC50, DCP13
MEASURING:
DC33
XXV-B-6 USAGB OF SOURCBS
STATIC ELECTRIC NETWORK SOURCE FUNCTIONS:
DC1,DC2,DC3,DC4.DC5,DC6.DC7.DC9,DC10,DC11,DC12.DC16,DC17.DC19.DC22,DC24.
DC25,DC26.DC30,DC31.DC32.DC34,DC35,DC37.DC38.DC41.DC42.DC43.DC44.DC45.
Dc47,DC48.DC51.DC52.DC53,DC55,DC56.DC57,DC58.DC61,DC62.DC63.DCN1,DCN2,
xxv EHTP BENCHMARK CATALOGUE - ..

[Link].DCP12.DCP13.DCP14.
DCP15.DCP16.DCP17.DCP18,DCP19.DCP2.DCP2l,DCP22.DCP25,DCP26.DCP3.DCp4.
DCP5.DCP6.DCP7.DCP8.DCP9
TYPE 16:
Dc44
IDEAL TRANSFORMER (TYPE 18):
DC25.DC55
TYPE 60:
DC22
SM (TYPE 59):
DC25.DC26.DC47.DC53.DCN9.DCN10.DCN11.DCP21.DCP26
UM (TYPE 19):
DC34,DC35,DCN1.DCN2.DCN9,DCN10.DCN12.DCP16.DCP17,DCP21
FIX SOURCE {LOAD FLOW}:
DC25.DC26.DCP26
ANALYTIC SOURCE (TYPE 1-l0):
DC6.DC42
XXV-B-7 STATISTICAL TABULATION
STATISTICAL SWITCH (TYPE 76}:
DC16.DC24.DC50.DCP13
STATISTICS DATA:
DC24.DC40.nc48
OMIT BASE CASE:
DCP13

XXV-B-8 SPECIAL FEATURES

START AGAIN:
DC40.DC49
DISK PLOT DATA:
DC3.DC45.DC54
Spy USAGE:
DC57. DCP22
PEAK VOLTAGE MONITOR:
DC6l.DC62
$INCLUDE:
DC8.DC17.DCP23
xxv EMTP BENCHI1A1IIt [Link] - 5

I-CARD USAGE:
DC33
FOURIER ANALYSIS:
DC42
POSTPROCESS PLOT FILE:
DC46
REPLOT:
DC54
BATCH MODE PLOTTING:
DC42,DC46

Last edited 27/09/88

M. Ulens
G. Empereur
Page 26-1

XXVI. INDEX OF EMTP RULE BOOK

Just a few special rules govern the index that follows. First, when
special request \\Ords are involved, these are capitalized and placed within
quotation marks. '!he presence or absence of quotation marks does not alter the
ordering of entries. '!he same goes for dollar signs ("$") that precede various
such request \\Ords, or slashes (" /"). Page references are not given because the
section nlltlber will generally point the user close enolJ3h. 'Ib translate page
nlltlbers into section nlltlbers, see the explanation at the beg inning of the Table
of Contents (Section e).

'Ibpic or Detail of EMTP Interest, in alphabetical order

[A] , [B] matrix option. See "USE AS" , "OC'ffiAN".

"ABOOLl1l'E TACS DIMElSICNS" to size 'mCS tables within List 19 (Section II-A)
"ABOOLl1l'E U.M. DIMEN5ICNS" to size U.M. tables wi thin List 25 (Section II-A)
Acclltlulator and coLl'lter, Type-65 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Active gap of surge arrester. Model as 'mC5-controlled R(t) , arc (Section V-I)
"AID" subcarmand for SP'f "APPEND" coornand (Section xvr-C-9)
Address 1 imi tations of canp.1ters, importance of. See Section I-F
Aegis operating system of Apollo. See "Apollo version"
Aid, Prof. Imetani of Doshisha lhiversity. See "Japanese ••• "
"ALL" coornand for all rows of any SP'f table (Section xvr-C-3)
"ALL TIME" of interactive plotting. See:
Corrmand of the separate plot program "'l'PPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Carmand of the separate plot program "WINIXWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Subcanmand of the SP'f "PLOT" coornand (Section xvr-C-4)
Allen, Mr. J. Allen Lima of EDP in Lisbon, PortlJ3al. See "Univac version ••• "
"ALTERNATE DIAGICSTIC FRIN'rour" request (Section II-A)
Amdahl EMTP version. See "IBM versions ••• "
Imerican EMTP Users Group. See "canadian/lmerican"
Imetani, prof. Akihiro Imetani of tbshisha lhiversity. See "Japanese ••• "
Analog canp.1ter simulation using 'mCS (Section III)
"ANA~" subroutine for user-supplied FORTRAN (Section I-E-l)
"ANA~IC SOURCES USAGE" signals use of" ANALYT" (Section II-A)
Anode of valve/diode switch canponent (Section VI-B)
Apollo version of'EMTP (Section I-F-I)
"APPEND" coornand of SP'f for SP'i arithmetic (Section xvr-C-9)
Apple Macintosh version of EMTP (Section I-F-12)
Armor of "CABLE CClSTANTS" (Section XXIII)
"ARRIlb.'r'supporting program for Zno exponential fitting (Section XIX-I)
Arrester model ing. See "SUrge arrester model ing"
ASFA Research & Innovation. See "Hewlett-packard •••• 11
At coornand (executed using SP'f "@" coornand) of interactivity (Section xvr-C-5)
AT&T. See "UNIX pC EMTP version"
Austral ian EMTP User Group (Section I-A)
"AtrrONAME" to toggle autanatic naming (Section II-A-4l)
Availability of program (Section I-A-l)
"AVERAGE ourPUT" to remove EMTP noise (Section II-A)
"AVERAGE" of interactive plotting. See:
Corrmaoo of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Subcanmand of the SP'f "PLOT" coornand (Section xvr-C-4)
page 26-2

Base value of statistical tabulation (Section 'YY, variable eASE).

Basin Electric Power Cooperative. See "PRIME ElttTP version"
"PA'ICH" coomand of the separate program "TPPLOl'" (Section I-L-l)
"BC'IRAN" supporting program for 3-phase transformers (Section XIX-C)
"BEXJIN NEW m'm CASE" for data case separation (Section II-A)
"BEGIN PEAK VAllJE SEARCH" for extrema monitoring not over all t (Section II-A)
Beg inning of program execution: user responses to opening prompt (Section I-C)
Belgium. See "European EMTP User Group"
BENCFMARK oc-xx and OCNEl'i-XX test cases
Bessel functions of line constants. See "Skin. effect"
Blank card (data case) to terminate EMTP execution (Section II-A-8)
"B~" cards as separators in a data case (Section 1-1-1)
[Link] disk file of program text (Section I-E-2, card 17)
"BOLD" coomand of interactive plotting. See:
Coomand of separate plot program "TPPLOl'" (Section I-L-l)
Coomand of separate plot program "W'lNIX:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Bonneville Power Administration (Section I-A)
"BOr" coomand for last row of any ~ table (Section 'YYI-C-3)
BPA. See "Bonneville Power Administration"
Branch cards as EMTP data classification (Section 1-1-1)
"BRANCH" coomand of SPY to display List-2 table (Section xvr-C-3)
Branch flows of phasor steady-state. See Section II-B, variable }(sSOtTl'
Branch naming (6-character name for some or all) :
Variable N>1Al1I'O of Sl'ARrUP (Section I-E-2, Card 8)
Use BlE3 field (cols. 15-20) with BJWlCH of STARrUP
Branch output variables. Refer to comp:ment of interest, or Section 'IN
IBRANCH declaration preceding branch cards when sorted (Section I-J)
Brazil. See "Latin Imerican ••• "
11 BREAK" coomand of SF.{ (Section 'YYI-C-2)
Bridge circuit of ac/dc converter. See example of Section I-K
Bundling of condtrtors in "LINE CQ5TANTS" (Section XXI)
"BlE" coomand of SF.{ to display List-l table (Section xvr-C-3)

"CABLE CQ5TANTS" request for transfer to such code (Section II-A)

"CABLE CCN5TANTS" supporting program itself (Section XXIII)
CalComp. See "plotting of EMTP results", ·proprietary software"
Canad ian/lmerican EMTP USer Group (Section I-A-2)
Capacitance modeling in the EMTP. See:
Linear, single-phase representation (Section IV-A)
Linear, multi-phase [C) of pi-circuits (Section IV-B)
For del ta-connected transformer (Section IV-E)
"LINE CCN5TANTS" formulas (Section XXI)
"CARD" subcoomand of the SF.{ "APPEND" coomand (Section 'YYI-C-9)
Carson's formula for "LINE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI, Appendix)
Cartel. See OCG/EFRI Memorandum of tllderstanding, Section I-A-l
"CASCArED PI" feature, for phasor steady-state solutions only (Section IV-F)
"CASE" coomand of SF.{ to toggle case-sensitivity switch (Section 'YYI-C)
Case ti tIe text of batch-mode plotting (Section XIV)
Cathode of valve/diode switch component (Section VI-B)
COC version of EMTP, for new machines having virtual memory (Section I-F-8)
Change existing S.M. data so as to be solvable using the U.M. (Section IX)
"C~ mIN'IDt1l' FRECUENCY" of the time-step loop (Section II-A)
"CHlI.N:iE s-lrn:H" to convert swi tched-R, L to 'IYPe-98 and 99 (Section II-A)
Charles River rata Systems version of the EMTP (Section I-F-ll)
Checkpoint for EMTP execution: see "srART A~IN", "MEMSAV"
page 26-3

"CHOICE" of interactive plotting. See:

Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Carrnand of the .separate plotting program "WINJ:XWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Subcorrmand o.f SPY "PLaI'" cacmand (Section xvr-C-4)
Circuit breaker modeling. See Section V-I, or "S'tIitches; ordinary"
"ClAMP" signal of'.mCS-COntrolled switch (Section VI-C)
"CLOSEtr request of valve/diode card (Section VI-B, Rule 5)
$CLOSE file disconnection request for "CIMAGE" (Section 1-0)
Coaxial cable parameters. See "CABLE CCN5TANTS"
"CCLOO" corrmand of interactive plotting • See:
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Cartnand of the separate plotting program "WINJ:XWPLT" (section I-L-2)
Colors of CRI' plotting. See KPEN of the SI'ARrUP file.
"Ca..[Link]" canmand of separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Carma (" ,") of free-format data inPJt (Section I-H)
Carmand file (executed using SPY "@" carmand) of interactivity (section xvr-C-5)
Corrment card, used in data case (Section I-I-l)
"CCMMENT" corrmand of SPY for carment cards (Section XVI-C-5)
$CCMMENT request for "CIMAGE" to destroy carment cards (Section 1-0)
Corrmercialization of EMTP. See "cartel"
"CCMP" subcorrmand of the SPY "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Canpensation, nunber of phases (Section I-G-l, Ust-24 variable N:CMP)
Compensation procedure for handling electric network nonlinearities (Section V)
Compensation use or non-use with the U.M. (Section IX, variable ICCMP)
CCMPLEX (FOOTRAN) precision (Section I-E-2,Sl'ARrUP variable ZNVREF)
Canputers. See "Installation dependent information"
Concurrent Sequential Processing, abbreviated "CSP· (Section XVI-C-12)
Conductor card of "LINE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI)
Connectivity printout (Section II-B, miscellaneous data parameter IOOUBL)
Control system model ing • See "'.mCS"
Controlled integrator, 'JYpe-58 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Converter model, HVDC, 'JYpe-16source (Section VII-B)
Coprocessor (nuneric). See ''IB101 Ie XT •••• version.
"COPT" LU'lits for capacitance. See "Miscellaneous data cards"
"COPY" request of reference branch (Section I-E-2, STARTUP variable COPY)
"COPY subcorrmand of the SPY "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
COpjright of this book and associated EMTP materials by IEC. See Section I
Core conductor of "CABLE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXIII)
Core-type transformers. See"EC'IRAN" (Section XIX-C)
Corona modeling of an overhead transnission line (Section V-K)
Correia de Barros. See "Corona modeling •••• "
Corvallis, Oregon. See "Universal Machine", "Lauw", "UNIX PC", "COC"
Cross-bonded cable modeling (Section XXIII)
Current outputs. Refer to component of interest, or Section '}W
Current source modeling. See "Source cards"
"CURSOR" of interactive plotting. See:
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Subcommand of the SPY "PLOI''' carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"CUSTOM FLOI' FILE" to alter plot file precision (Section II-A)

Damping of mass. See "Rotatingmachinery"

Damping of transients. See:
"hash" for discussion of spurious switch-related noise
See Ref. 17 for explanation of danping resistors
Daniel, Prof. Daniel Van D:mnelen of LEe. See" European ••• "
page 26-4

"DA~" corrmand of SP'{ to load card cache with EMTP data (Section XVI-C-1)
Data base. See "Sorting" or "$ INCLUDE" or "MTA BASE MODULE."
"0A'I1\ BASE MOWLE" supporting program for $INCLUDE argunents (Section II-A)
Data General version of program (Section I-F-l0)
DC converter. See "Converter" , "valve", and "'D\CS"
DC motor/generator modeling. See "Universal machine (U.M.)"
DCG. See "EMTP Developnent. Coordination Group"
"DESm" request of interactive usage. See:
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Canmand of the separate plotting program "WlNDCWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Usage wi thin SP'f. See:
SP'{ ccmnand to change diagnostic printout (Section XVI-C)
Subcorrmand of the "PLOT" comnand of SP'{ (Section XVI-C-4)
$DEBm request of "CIMAGE" to change Im5tP (Section I-D)
Deb~ging of problem solutions. See "DIACNOSTIC", "DEBm"
DEC. See -VAX version ••• "
Decimal p:>int ending a file name (defined by STARTUP, card 18, FILTYP):
"file name" option to begin EMTP execution (Section I-C)
"MTA" carmand of SP'f (Section xvr-C-1)
Default List Sizes of program variable dimensioning (Section I-G)
"DEFAULT" request of "JMARI'I SETtP" (Section XVII)
Deionization time of a valve (Section VI-B, Rule 4b)
"DELTA CCNNECTION" of the S.M. armature windings (Section VIII, Class 2)
"DELTAT" time-step size definition. See "Miscellaneous data~
"DEFOSIT" carmand of SP'f to change variables (Section xvr-C-6)
Derivative, canputation using a 'IYPe-59 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
'Devices of 'D\CS control system modeling (Section III-E-4)
"'DIAGNOSTIC" printout for deblJ!J9ing (Section II-A-12)
"$DEBm" for in-overlay diagnostic control (Section I-D)
Dice. See "Randan nunber •••• ", "SI'ATISTICS", "M:>nte carlo"
"DICE" comnand of SP'f for statistical tabulations (Section XVI-C-S)
Dig i tal computers. See "Installation dependent information"
Digitizer, a Type-55 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Dimensions of EMTP tables. See -Variable dimensioning"
Diode swi tch comp:>nent (Section VI-B)
Directories of data. See "MJdularization •••• "
"$DISABLE" for implicit carmenting (Section I-D.)
Disclaimer of any responsibility for misuse (Section I-A)
Discontinuity (p:>ssible) at time zero from reactors (Section V)
"DISK" option as EMTP execution begins (Section I-C)
"DISK PLOT Dl\TA" to toggle UlNIT4 (Section II-A)
Distortionless transmission line modeling (Section IV-D-1)
Distributed transmission line modeling. See "Transmission line."
Distribution of random nunbers. See "SI'ATISTICS"
"DIV" subcommand of the SF.{ "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Division sign ("/") used as a special symool. See "Slash"
Dollar-cards ($-cards) of "CIMAGE" (Section I-D)
Dollar-cards ($-cards) executed via SF.{ (Section XVI-C-ll)
Doshisha University. See "Japanese ••• ", "CABLE CCl5TANTS"
"DOT" canmand of interactive plotting. See:
Command of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Canmand of the separate plotting program "WlNDCWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Double-circuit transmission line representation. See:
Transp;:>sed model with zero sequence coupling (Section IV-D-2)
Recursive convolution modeling (Section IV-D-3, 4)
Page 26-5

"DRAW" subcorcmand of the SP'f "PLOT" canmand (Section XVI-C-4)

Dube, Mr. Laurent, author of 'mCS (Section III)
$DtJt1MY of $INCWDE to define internal nodes (Section I-K)
Dynamic limiter of 'mCS control system modeling (Section III-E-I and 2)
Dynamic synchronous machine. See "Synchronous machine" or "S.M."

Earth wires of transnission lines. See "Ground wires"

"ECHO" conmand of SP'i to accunulate carmands (Section XVI-C-11)
ECN5W, Electricity Carmission of New South wales. See "Australian EMTP "
'ErP, Electricidade de Portugal of Lisbon, Portugal. See "Univac version "
ElJucation of program users. See Section I-A
Electric Power Research Institute, or EfRI. See Section I-A-1
Ell iott, Dr. Brian J. Ell iott of ECtSW. See" Austral ian EMTP "
Empereur, Ir. Guido Empereur of IEC, Lewen, Be1giun. See "EUropean "
Empirical specification of EMTP sources as 'JYpe-1 source (Section XIII)
EMTP Deve10pnent Coordination Group, or IX:G (Section I-A-1)
"$ ENABLE" to cancel "$DISABLE" (Section 1-0)
"EOF" for software end-of-fi1e within a data file. See:
Command file of SP'f; "@" for execution (Section XVI-C-S)
Normal EMTP data file (Section 1-1-1)
EFRI. See "Electric Power Research Institute"
"EPSILN" singularity tolerance. See "Miscellaneous data cards"
.EQ. relational operator of SP'f "APPEND/IF" (Section XVI-C-9)
Equivalent-Pi of "UNE CCN:3TANTS" by doubling length (Section .>eXI, Appendix 6)
"ERASE" carmand of plot program "WINIXWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
$ERASE request to initialize the IlJNIT7 punch buffer (Section I-D)
Error messages of program; fatal ones (Section I-C)
European EMTP USer Group (Section I-A)
"EXAMINE" carmand of SP'f to observe variables (Section XVI-C-6)
Exciter modeling for generators (Section VIII, Class 6, Rule 1)
Exponential used in Zno surge arrester equations (Section V-E)
Exponentials of recursive convolution line modeling (Section IV-D-3, 4)
Extensions to miscellaneous data cards (Section II-C)
"EXTRA" carmand for next subtableof more canple.'C SP'f tables (Section xvr-C-3)
Extrema of solution variables. See:
Request MAXOUT of miscellaneous data (Section II-B)
"BEX:iIN PEAK VAWE SEARCH" for delay (Section II-A)
"PEAK VOLTAGEMCNlTOR" for one single peak node voltage (Section II-A)
"STATISTICS" for use in Monte carlo studies
.. EXTREMA" request of 'interactive usage. See :
Corrmand of the se~rate plotting program "'l'PPLOT" (Section .I-L-l)
Subcomnand of the SP'f "PLOT" conmand (Section xvr-C-4)

.. [F]" canmand of SP'f to display the factors of [Y] (Section xvr-C-3)

"FACTOR" canmand of SP'f to triangularize admittance {YJ (Section xvr-C-13)
"FAC'roR" subcomnand of SP'f "PLOT" conmand scales variables (Section XVI-C-4)
Fatal error messages. See "Error messages"
Fella (as in "You lose, fell a" fame), or guy. See "Index"
" FILE" request of interactive use. See :
Conmand of the sep3rate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Command of the separate plotting program "WINl:XJIIPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Corrmand of SP'f to show special, reserved "@" files (Section xvr-C-5)
"FILE RE(UEST" to call "MIOOVl " module (Section II-A)
"file_name" option as EMTP execution begins (Section I-C).
"FILE=" qualifier of the $OPEN corrmand of "CIMAGE" (Section I-D)
page 26-6

"FINDn command of SPY to locate program variables (Section xvr-C-6)

nFINISH n card terminates S.M.-TACS connections (Section VIII, Class 6)
"FIX SOURCEn request for EMTP load flow (section II-A)
"FLAGERn to detect keyboard interrupts during SPY use (Section I-E-1)
Flashover (or spark) gap. See:
Flashover switch (Section VI-A, Class 2)
'!YPe-99 pseooo-nonl inear resistance (Section V-A)
Zno arresters with gap (Section V-E)
Flanish, the dialect of DJtch spoken in tewen, Belgiun (Section I-B)
Floating delta problan of transformers (Section IV-E, near the end)
FOIA of u.S. law. See "Freedom of Information Act"
"FCNI'" carmand of SPY. It ex ists, al tholJ3h it is not yet in production use
Font, character. See" ~llo version of EMTP"
Fontaine, 'Ihe, bane of WEM. See "canadian/1Ifllerican EMTP User Groupn
Format specifications for data; general (Section I-H)
"FCR1=n qualifier of $OPEN comnand of "CIMllGE." (Section 1-0)
Fourier analysis of EMTP output variables. See the next 3 entries:
nFOURIER ~" and
"FOlIUER CFF" (Section XIV, Rule 6, Point 16)
"FOURIER" subcommand of the SPY "PLCYl'" ccmnand (Section xvr-C-4)
Freedom of Information Act, abbreviated FOIA, of u.S. law (Section I-A-1)
Free-format for ~CS supplanental variables (Section III-E-4)
Free-format usage, general. See "Format specifications"
n FREFLD" module of free-field data input (Section I-H)
Frequency card of "LINE CCN)TANTS" (Section XXI, Point 4)
Frequency-dependent sources (List 27, LSIZ27)
Frequency-dependent transnission line modeling. See:
Recursive convolution, "SEMLYEN SETUP", "JMARl'I SETUP"
Frequency meter, a 'JYpe-50 TACS device (Section IIl-E-4)
Frequency of output controlled by variables lOUT and lPLOT of Section II-B
"FRECUENCY s::AN" to loop over ti'lasor solutions (Section II-A-16)
"FRONT" subcommand of the SPY "PLCYl'n ccmnand (Section xvr-C-4)
FUnction block of ~CS (Section 1II-E-l)
FUnctions of the SPY "APPEND" corrmand use "FlN=" tag (Section xvr-C-9)
"FUN=n tag of subcomnand of SPY "APPEND command (Section XVI-C-9)
FlJRNb.S of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. See "Iatin 1Ifllerican EMTP User Group"
F77L FCRTRAN compiler of Iahey Cc:mputer. See "IBM Fe"

Gain of a ~CS transfer function of control system modeling (Section III-E-1)

Gap: see also "Flashover (or spark) gap"
Gap, as a ~CS-controlled EMTP switch type (Section VI-C)
Gap, in Zno surge arrester model (Section V-E.)
.GE. relational operator of the SPY "APPEND/IF" catIIland (Section XVI-C-9)
.Gr. relational operator of the SPY "APPEND/IF" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Generalized machine. See "Universal Machine (U.M.)"
nGO n request of interactive (SPY) usage. See:
Command of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-1)
Command of the separate plotting program "WINDCWPLTn (Section I-L~2)
Command of SPY (Section xvr-C-2)
Option as EMTP execution beg ins (Section I-C)
nGOTO" subcommand for the SPY nAPPEND n conmand (Section xvr-C-9)
Governor model ing of a generator. See nR:;)tating machinery"
GraFhical output. See "Plotting of EMTP results"
"GRID" firing signal of valve or thyrister (Section VI-B)
Ground (local) of electric network: blank name used for it (Section 1-1-2)
page 26-7

Ground wires of "LINE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI, conductor card, IPHASE)

Ground modeling for line constants. See "carson" , "NakagaW3"
Grounding of condoctors of the cable (Section XXIII, variable N:;RND)
Guido, Ir. Qlido BnFereur of IEC. See "anFereur"

Handshake of Apollo-to-Apollo teleli10ne connection (Section I-F-l-i)

Harmonic content of signals. See "Fburier analysis"
Hash in EMTP solutions, due to switch oFening (Section VI)
"HEAD" to refresh heading of any SP'f table (Section XVI-C-3)
"HEIGHT" adj ustment for batch-mode plot (Section XIV)
'''HELP'' request of interactive use. See:
Comnand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Ccmnand of the separate plotting program "WINJ:OlPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Canmand of SP'f (Section XVI-C)
Option as EMTP execution begins (Section I-C)
Heverlee, Belgiun. See "Leuven" or "Ellr0Fean EMTP ••• "
Hewlett-packard version of EMTP (Section I-F-7)
High precision option for data formats. See "$VI~GE" of "CIMAGE"
B:>lding current of a valve/diode (Section VI-A, B; variable lHOLD)
"JDNK" coomand of SP'f to ring the monitor bell (Section XVI-C-ll)
HVDC. See "COnverter", "Valve", ""U\CS"
"HYSTERESIS" request to generateB-H cards (Section II-A-4S)
Hysteresis model ing, magnetic. See:
Branch cards for Type-96 reactor (Section V-D)

IBM versions of the program. See:

IBM mainframe (actually, Amdahl) as used at K.U. Leuven (Section 1-F-S)
IBM R: XT or R: AT desktop Fersonal comlXlters (Section I-F-2)
Ideal transformer as network component (Section VII-A, Type-18 source)
'" IF" subcarmand of the SP'i "APPEND" carmand (section XVI -C-9)
IF-component, 'J:ype-60 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Ignition voltage of an hvdc valve or thyrister (section VI-B, ~le 4a)
IIT, 1nstituto de Investigacion 'l'ecnologica, Madrid. See "Data General ••• "
"INC=" tag for subcarmands of SP'i . "APPEND" coomand (Section XVI-C-9)
INCISP'i?MT disk files for reserved "@" usage. See:
Interactive usage, within SP'i (Section XVI-C-S)
File name definition wi thin STARTUP file (Section I-E-2, Card 17)
Index. You're reading it, hunan (a non-sexist "fella" or "guy") (Section XXVI)
100 ian EMTP USer Group (Section I-A)
Inductance (indoctor) modeling. See "Reactance •••• "
Induction machine modeling using the ll'liversal Machine (Section IX)
Infini te (almost) nllllbers. Defined in STARTUP , variables FLTINF, INTINF
.. nUT" subconrnand of the SP'f "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Initial condition specification for EMTP variables. See:
cards to over-ride electric network initial conditions (Section XI)
Cards to specify (not over-ride) TACS initial conditions (Section III-E-6)
/INITIAL declaration preceding initial condition cards of sorting (Section 1-0)
Initialization of program variables by user. See "STARTUP"
Injection printout of known-voltage li1asor sources. See misc. data RSSOt1I'
In-line conrnents, placed to the right of"{" s}mools. See:
usage with EMTP data cards (Section 1-1-1)
Usage with SPY carmand files (Section XVI-C-S)
Input supplemental variables (Type-99) of ~Cs (Section 11I-E-4)
Inside supplemental variables (Type-88) of ~CS (Section III-E-4)
Page 26-8

[Link]/output lD1i t nunbers of EMTP. srARTUP variables llJNIT? (Section I-E-2)

Installation-dependent info~ation:
General, for all computer systems of interest (I-E)
Specific computer systems, with one subsection for each (Section I-F)
Instantaneous minimlltl/maximun, "IYPe-63 TACS device {Section III-E-4}
Insulator layers of "CABLE CCN)TANTS" (Section XXIII)
Interactive CRT plotting of transients:
In real time, see the SP'i comnand "PLOT" (Section XVI-C-4)
For plotting at any later time, see:
a) the separate plot programs "TPPLOT" & "WINIXl>lPLT" (Section XVI-C-4)
b) Flexible workstations can use "REPLOT" (see section II-A) with
the "KEY" request (Section I-C)
Interacti ve EMTP execution, observation, control (Section XVI, SP'i)
Interpretation of input data cards is explained along with data input rules
Introductory info~ation about the EMTP (Section I)
I/O channels "llJNIT?" are defined by the STARTUP file (Section I-E-2)
1ST (Instituto SUperior Tecnico of Lisbon). See "COrona modeling"
Iteratiions. See "Load Flow"

Japanese EMTP Comni ttee (Section I-A)

"JMARTI SETUP" to punch frequency-dependent branch cards (Section XVII)
"JMARTI SETUP" request for transfer to the fitter (Section II-A-l7)
JUNK root name of SP'i windows 2 and 3. See STARTUP, card 17

"KATAIG" module to dunp EMTP tables (Section I-E-l)

'Karrenbauer transfo~ation for transposition (Section IV-D-l)
--KEY" option as EMTP execution begins (Section I-C)
'ltKEY" subcomnand of the SP'f "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Keyboard interrupt. See SLBROlfI'INE FIAGER (Section I-E-l)
KILL code nunber of error stops. See "Error messages"
"KILL COreS" request to display any EMTP error meSS8ges (Section II-A-18)
"KILL" . subcorrmand of the SP'i "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Konkel, Herbert E. See "IBM ~ XI' ••• "
KSSOUT variable to control phasor solution printout (Section 11-8)
K. U. Leuven. See" EuroFEan EMTP User Group"
Kyoto (Japan), the home of Doshisha university. See "Japanese EMTP "
"IABEL" request of interactive use. See:
Ccmnand of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Canmand of the separate plot program "WINIXl>lPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Subcommand of the SP'i "PLar" corrmand (Section xvr-C-4)
"IAB=" tag for subcorrmands of the SP'i "APPEND" corrmand (Section xvr-C-9)
Lahey Computer F77L FCRTRAN compiler. See" IBM ~ ••• "
language of program. See [Link], also the SP'f "FCNT" corrmand
"LAST" to end the specification of SP'i "PLar" variables (Section XV'I-C-4)
Latin Imerican EMTP User Group (Section I-A)
Laurent. See "Dube", "'[Link]" , "COntrol System M:ldeling"
.LE. relational operator of SF':{ "APPEND/IF" (Section xvr-C-9)
Leakage inductance from self and mutual, for U.M. (Section IX)
LEC (acronJm for Leuven EMTP Center). See "European EMTP ••• It
" LEN =" tag for subcorrmands of the SF':{ "APPEND" corrmand (Section XV'I-C-9)
Leuven (Belg i un) • See" European EMTP ••• "
It rEVEL" request of interactive use. See:
Corrmand of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Subcommand of the SPY "PLOI''' coomand (Section XV'I-C-4)
Page 26-9

$LEVEL for $INCWDE data modularization (Section I-K)

Level-triggered switch, Type-Sl TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Li Jin-gui of EJ?SRI (peking). Contact via "'l'Su-huei Liu"or "W. SCott Meyer"
"UB" subcomnand of the SF.{ "APPEND" carmand (Section xvr-C-9)
Library functions such as the FORTRAN functions SIN, cas, EXP, SQRT, etc.:
Available via 'mCS (Section III-E-4)
General EMTP usage in installation-de};endent "RFlNLl" (Section I-E-l)
SF.{ access via the "UB"subcarmand of SF.{ "APPEND" (section xvr-C-9)
Licensed use of program, only by tEC. See Section I-A-I
Lightning arrester model ing • See "SUrge [Link]"
Lima, J. Allen, of ED? in .Lisbon, Portugal. See "Univac version ••• "
"UMIT" carmand o.f Sf':{ to show dimensioned List Sizes (Section xvr-C-Il)
Limiters for control variables of ~CS (Section III-E-2)
"UMITS" carmand of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (section I-L-I)
"UNE" carmand of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-I)
"UNE CCt5TANTS" request for transfer to the calculation (Section II-A-19)
"UNE CCNSTANTS" supporting routine, the calculation itself (Section XXI)
"UNEAR BIAS l5AGE" for switch bias (Section II-A-211l)
"UST" command of SF.{ to display variables (Section xvr-C-6)
"$LISTOFF/ON" to control data card listing (Section I~)
List sizes of the EMTP. See "Variable dimenSioning" of the program
Literature. See "Reference material"
Liu, Dr. Tsu-huei, of BPA. See "Program Maintenance" at BPA
load flow. See:
"FIX SOURCE" declaration at the start of execution (Section II-A)
Power constraint data cards (Section X)
Special requirements for use with the U.M. (Section IX)
/LQh.O FLCW declaration preceding load flow cards when sorted (Section I-u)
"I:..Q?U)" subcomnand of the SF.{ "APPEND" carmand (Section xvr-C-9)
"r..cx:INT" manory location function (Section I-E-l)
"r..cx:K" command of SF.{ (Section xvr-C-2)
Logical (Boolean) operators of 'mCS (Section III-E-4)
Logical units of FORTRAN EMTP. See "InJ;llt/Output units "
"LONGER" command of separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
"LOOK" subcomnand of the SF.{ "APPEND" corrmand (Section xvr-C-9)
.LT. relational operator of SF.{ "APPEND/IF" (Section xvr-C-9)
Lumped-resistance modeling for transmission line (Section IV-D-l)
LUNIT assignnents for I/O units. See "SI'ARTUP file" definitions

Ma, Ren-ming, of WUhan, China (Sections I-C, III)

Machinery modeling. See "R::Itating machinery"
Magnetizing current or impedance of a transformer. See:
Saturable "'J'[Link]" cornp::ment (Section IV-E, Rule 2)
Linear "XFCRMER" data specification (Section XIX-A)
Maintenance of program (Section I...:.s)
"MAP" subcomnand of the SP'f "APPEND" conmand (Section xvr-C-9)
Mass of rotor. See -Rotating machinery"
Matrix inversion/redoction formulas. See "Shipley"
Mechanical network. See "Rotating machinery"
Memoranda, EMTP. See Reference 8 of Section X':I:V ("References")
Memory requi rernents of EMTP execution. See "Variabl e d irnens ion ing "
MEMSAV = 1 request for table saving at end of simulation. See tlSI'ART [Link] tI
Page 26-10

"MENU" request of interactive usage to show other available comnands. See:

Camnand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Carmand of the separate plotting program "WINIX:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Ccmnand of SP'f (Section XVI-C)
SubcOl'llllaOO of the S~ "PLaI''' comnand (Section XVI-C-4)
SubcOl'lllland of the S~ "APPEND" comnand (Section XVI-C-9)
"MESSAGE" comnand of the separate plotting. program. "TPPLar" (Section I:-L-l)
"MES=" tag for subcarmands of the SF.:{ • APPEND" comnand (Section XVI-C-9)
M:tric CalCanp plotting using a ·s::AtE· declaration (Section XIV, Point 14)
"METRIC· option of ·LINE CGSTANl'S" ([Link] XXI)
M:tric vs. English scaling of plots affects entries in STARTUP (Section I-E-2)
M:yer, Dr. W. SCott; See "Canadian/IWerican EMTP USer Group"
MicroCOOlp.1ters. See "Apollo version ••• " or "IBM Fe XT ••• " or "SUn ••• "
Minicomp.1ters. See "VAX", "PRIME", "Data Genera!", etc.
Min/max tracking, 'JYPe-64 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Minnesota Power & Light. See "PRIME EMTP version"
"MISCEUANE015 D\~ CARIS" by special request (Section II-A-21)
Miscellaneous data cards for regular simulation cases (Section II-B)
l+1F of Type-59 S.M. (Section VIII, Class 5, variable MFCRCE or JSAT)
fot)dal analysis theory of "LINE CGSTANTS" (Section XXI)
"MODE" request of interactive usage. See:
CoIm1and of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
COI'IIlIand of the separate plotting program ·WINIXl\7PLT· (Section I-L-2)
Subc:mnarrl of the S~ "PLaI'" comnand (Section. XVI-C-4)
"MODE VOLTAGE ourPl1I''' (Section II-A-22)
fot)dan for an Apollo teleiXlone connection (Section I-F-l-i)
fot)dulation of electric source by ~S. See the 'JYpe-17 source (Section VII-A)
fot)dulari zation of EMTP data. See "DA.~ BASE MCDULE"
M:xuent of inertia. See "R:>tating machinery"
$MCNITCR request of ·C!M}GE" to watch inp.1t data (Section I-D)
Jtt)nte Carlo stooies. See "STATISTICS"
Jtt)tor model ing • See ·R:>tating machinery"
MS-DOS version of program. See • IBM Fe ••• "
Multi-machine U.M. system sharing a comnon mechanical network (Section IX)
l>Ulti-machine system simulation with the universal Machine (Section IX)
Multiplicities of List Sizes for variable dimensioning "\fARDIM" (Section I-G)
"MULTIPLY" carmand of the separate plot program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
MJtually-coupled R-L elanents (Section rv-C)

Nagaoka, Naoto, of DJshisha university. See "Japanese ••• "

Nakagawa. See "stratified earth model" of "CABtE CGSTANTS" use
Name of a branch or a ~tch (Section 1-1-4)
"N.1\ME" request used on a branch card. See "Name of branch •••• "
"N.1\ME" request of interactive use. See:
Comnand of the separate plotting program "TPPLar" (Section I-L-l)
Ccmnand of the separate plotting program "WINIX:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
SubcOl'lllland of the SF.:{ "PLaI'" conmand (Section xvr-C-4)
"N.1\MES" canmand of SF.:{ to show the "EXAMINE" heading (Section xvr-C-6)
Narrow EMTP output.. See "SWIDrH", or variable KOL132 of the STARTUP file
.NE. relational operator of SPY "APPEND/IF" (Section XVI-C-9)
Network connectivity. See "Connectivity ••• "
"NE'IWCRK ECUIVALENT" to access supporting program NETEQJ (Section II-A-13)
$N&l EPSILN request for "CIMAGE" to change EPSILN (Section I-D)
Newell, Mr. Robert. J., of Basin Electric. See "PRIME version"
Newsletter about program. See EMTP Newsletter at end of Section I-A-2
page 26-11

"NEXT" canmand for next row of any SP'f table (Section XVI-C-3)
Node names of electric net\\[Link] (Section 1-1-2)
Node vol tage output specification ([Link] XII)
"ooF" carmand of SP'f to cancel ,,~C~.. (Section XVI-C-13)
Non-fatal informative messages. Information about these is scattered
Non-grounded EMTP sources. See 'JYPe-18 source (Section VII-A)
"ooNLIN" carmand of SP'f to display the List-9 EMTP vectors (section XVI~-3)
Nonlinear elanents. See "Resistance", "Reactance"
"N:>ROLL"carmand of SP'f to cancel rolling plots and EXAMINE (Section XVI-C-6)
North IBkota State lhiversity. See "PRIME version ••• "
"ooSORT" request is possible on "BEX:iIN NEW I)\'m CASE" card (Section I-J)
"IDY" carmand of SP'f to cancel a .preceding "YFCRM" carmand (Section XVI-C-13)
NTIC of New ~lhi. See "India EMTP User Group"

"OLD TO NEW ZID" to convert old arrester data to new formats (Section II-A-23)
"CFFSET" request of interactive use. See:
Cormland of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Carmand of the separate plotting .program "WINI:X)olPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Subcarmand of the SP'f"PLOT" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
Offsets of "VARDIM" input data (card 4). See -Variable dimensioning ••• "
"o>\IT BASE CASE" of "srATISTICS" or "SYSTEMATIC" use (Section II-A-24)
OPEN/CLOSE statement of FCRTRAN, the imp::>rtance of (Section I-K)
"OPEN/CLOSE" signal of valve or thyrister (Section VI-B, I\lle 4c)
$OPEN file sconnection request for "CIMAGE" (Section 1-0)
Order of EMTP inp.1t data cards. See" Structure of ••• "
Oregon State lhiversity. See "Universal Machine", "ax::: version", "UNIX PC"
Oriental language versions of EMTP. If lucky, see canJ;:Uter of interest
/Ol1I'Pl1l' card preceding output requests Wlen sorted by class (Section I-J)
Output scaling specification for statistical tabulation (SectionXV')
Output specification for electric net\\lOrk variables. See:
a) Section XII for detached specification, independent of branch cards
b) Section IV-A for use of colunn-813 punch to request such outputs
CUtput supplanental variables (Type 98) of 'mCS (Section III-E-4)

"PAGE" request to begin the next "PRIN'reR PLOT" on a new page (Section XIV)
Paging of the canp.1ter operating system. See "Virtual manory management"
"PARAMETERFITTlNG" declaration of IJYpe-59 S.M. data (Section VIII, Class 2)
Parenthesis usage with 'mCS supplanental variables (Section III-E-4, I\lle 4)
Park' sequations for IJYpe-59 synchronous machine (Section VIII, beginning)
PC version of program. See" IBM PC: ••• ", "UNIX PC ••• "
"PEAK" subcanmand of the SP'f "PLOT" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
Peak values of solution variables. See "Extrema"
"PEAK VOLTAGE M(lIJI'roR" for the peak of all net\\lOrk voltages (Section II-A-2S)
"PEN CIDICE" and pen and grid choice of CalComp plot (Section XIV, pOint 11)
Percent ("% ") strings that indicate SP'f arglJllent usage. See
"DA'm BASE MODULE" for EMTP data (Section XIX-F)
ArglJllents of SP'f "@" files (Section XVI-C-S)
Pereira, Mr. Marco Polo. See tlLatin Jlmerican •••• "
period. See "Decimal JX)int"
Personal Computers. See "Apollo," "IBM PC:," "AT&T UNIX PC," etc.
Phasor solution for initial conditions. See:
Electric net\\lOrk printout (Section II-B, variable KSSOl1I'=l, 2, 3)
Control system ThCS usage (Section III-D, Point 6)
Phoenix Computer PLINK86-Plus linkage-editor. See "IBM Fe .....
Pi-circuit branch component (Section IV-B)
page 26-12

Pi-circuit punching (LUNIT7) (Section XXI-7.4, lPUN of frequency card)

Pipe-type cables. See "Ci\BLE CCNSTANTS"
pixels of CRT plotting. See STARTUP variables NXMAX, NYMAX, etc.
PLINK86-Plus linkage-editor of Phoenix canputer. See" IBM R: ••• "
"PLCYI'" carmand of SI¥ (Section XVI-<:-4)
/pLCYI' declaration preceding plot cards when sorted by class (Section I-J)
Plots of "STATISTICS" switch cloSing times (Section XV)
"PLaITER PAPER HEIGHT" of batch-mode vector (calCoolp) plotting (Section XIV)
Plotting of EMTP resul ts. See:
Batch-mode plot card data requirements (Section XIV)
Interactive CRT plotting programs "TPPLOT" and "WINJ::O-lPLT" (Section I-L)
"PLOT" ccmnand of SI¥ (Section XVI -<:-4 )
PLCYI'l0 grapics of 'Iektronix. See "proprietary softw3re"
point-by-p:>int nonlinearity, 'Ij'pe-56 TACS device (section III-E-4)
Portland, Oregon. See "Program Maintenance" or "BPA"
PortlJ3al. See "Corona modeling" or "Correia de Barros" or "Univac ••• "
"POSTPROCESS PLCYI' FILE" using 'l1\CS (Section II-A-26)
Potential coefficient matrix [P] of line constants (Section XXI, Appendix l-b)
Pounds sign (" ") to represent blanks in argunents of "@" ([Link] XVI-<:-S)
Power Constra ints. See" Load floW'
Power frequency declaration (section I-E-2, STARTUP, variable STA'lFR)
"PCWER FRECUDCY" special request (Section II-A-27)
Power output of a branch or a switch. See colunn-80 punch of comp:>nent
$PREFIX to mod ify file names of $INCWDE data modularization (Section I-K)
prime mover of generator. See "Fbtating machinery"
PRIME canputer version of the program (Section I-F-6)
""PRINTED NtJo'IBER WIDrH" for sizing time-step loop colunns (Section II-A-28)
''"IIPRIN'l'ER" carmard of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
'Printout of the time-step loop. See:
variable lOur of miscellaneous data (Section II-B)
"owa PRIN'IOur FREWEN:Y" request (Section II-A-l0)
Output variable specifications (Section XII)
"PRI=" tag for subcomnands of the SI¥ "APPEND" carmand (Section xvr-C-9)
program Maintenance (section 1-6)
proprietary aspects of EMTP. See Section I-A-l.
pgeooo-nonlinear elanent modeling of the EMTP. See:
'I}'pe-96 hysteretic inductor L( i) (Section V-D)
Type-98 saturable reactor L(i) (Section V-B)
Type-99 nonlinear resistor R(i) ([Link] V-A)
Public-domain status of BPA work, due to FOIA (Section I-A-1)
pulse delay, 'Ij'pe-S4 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
"PUN:H" carmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
$PUN:H to flush the pmch buffer of WNIT7 (Section I-D-16)
Punched card output of EMTP. See "$PUNCH"
"PURGE" request of interactive use. See:
Comnand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Canmand of the separate plotting program "WINIXWPLT" (Section I-L-2)

"RAMP" comnand of SPY for linear variation of a variable (Section xvr-C-10)

Random nunber generator testing (Section 11-C-3)
Rao, Prof. Ko Sankara, of North o;kota State University. See "PRIME on00

Reactor modeling 0 See:

for linear case, use series R-L-C branch (Section IV-A)
for multi-phase, linear [L], use [R],[L] (Section rv-C)
pseooo-nonlinear branch card, Type-98 (Section V-B)
true nonlinear saturable inductor L(i), Type-93 (Section V-H)
Page 26-13

Recursive convolution for frequency-dependent lines (Section IV-D-4)

"RECL=" qualifier of SOPEN COlIlnand honored by "CIM/I£iE" ([Link] I-D)
Redimensioning of simulation tables. See "Variable dimensioning"
Reference branch usage to copy previous branches. See:
a) any branch for explanation using terminal node names
b) Section 1-1-4 for explanation using branch names
Reference material (supporting literature; Section XXV)
Reference voltage ZNVREF of zno surge arresters (Section V-E)
References of "LINE CCH)TANTS" (Section XXI, end)
" REF IIE" request of interactive use. see:
COIIInand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section 1-1.-1)
Canrnand of the separate plotting program "WINI:lONPLT" (Section .!-L-2)
Relational operators (e.g., "EQ") of ~CS (Section III-E-4)
"RElATIVE TACS DIMENSICN5" to size 'l'\CS tables (Section II-A-29)
Relay-operated switch, o:Iype-51 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
"REPLCYI'" request for batch-mode plotting only (Section II-A-30)
/RE~ST declaration preceding branch cards 1roben sorted (Section I-i)
"RESCAIE" request of interactive use. see:
Cormland of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
SubcOOJnand of the SP'l"PLCYI'" carmand (Section XVI -C-4 )
Reserved 6-character names to be avoided by the user (Section 1-1-2)
Residual flux of reactor. See "hysteresis"
Resistance (resistor) model ing of the prog ram. See :
lhcoupled, 1 inear R-L-C branch (Section IV-A)
Multi-phase, linear [R] (Section IV-C)
Zinc-oxide surge arrester (Section V-E)
Type-99 pseu::lo-nonl inear resistor (Section V-A)
Type-92 uncoupled, true nonlinear R(i} (Section V-G)
Type-91 tirne-dependent Ret} (Section V-F)
Type-9l TACS-controlled resistor (Section V-I)
"RESTORE" COIIInand of SP'l to load tables (SectionXVI-C-7)
Restrike .rnodeling of breakers. Maybe use ~CS with a dynamic arc (V-I)
Revision date of this Rule Book. See the front cover
" RFLNLI " module for all REAL 1 ibrary functions of one arglJDent (Section I-E)
Right-adjustment of E-field nlJDbers (Section I-H)
"RLC" COIIInand of SP'l to display List-3 vectors (Section XVI-C-3)
RMS sensor, o:Iype-66 TACS device (SectionIII-E-4)
" ROLL" ccmnand of SP'l for continl.X)us " EXAMINE" usage (Section XVI -C-6)
"ROLLe" subcarmand of theSP'l "PLCYI'" conmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"ROLLV" subcorrmand of the SP'l "PLCYI''' coomand (Section XVI-C-4)
Rotating machinery modeling. see:
o:Iype-59, 3-phase, dynamic Synchronous Machine (Section VIII)
Type-19, lhiversal Machine model (Section IX)
Royal ty-free but not publ ic-domain status of IEC materials (Section I-A-1)

"SAME" request of valve/diode model (Section VI-B, Rule 6)

Sample and track, 'JYpe-62 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
"SATURA" routine to convert V-I to PSI-i (Section XIX-G)
" SA'.l'[Link] ON" request for conversion of V-I to PSI-i (Section II-A-3l)
Saturation effects, data, and/or model ing • See :
"Reactors" for the modeling of saturable reactors
"SATURA" for conversion of V-I curve to PSI-i curve
within S.M. modeling {Section VIII, Class 3, AGLINE, Sl, 52)
wi thin U.M. model ing (Section IX, Class 2, .JSATD, LMSD)
"SAVE" comnand of SPY to dlJDptables (Section XVI-C-7)
page 26-14

S-block. See "FUnction block of 'mCS"

Scott: Dr. W. Scott Meyer of LEe. See "canadian/~erican "
Screening matrix of "LINE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI-7.4, II-8)
"S&:=" tag of subcomnands of SPY "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Segmented ground wires in "LINE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI-7.4, II-8.)
Sequence values (Zo, Zl) for 3-Filase, coupled [R]-[L] input (Section IV-C)
"SEM~EN SETUP" request for transfer to 2nd-order fitter (Section II~-32)
"SEM~EN SETUP" supporting routine does 2nd-order fitting (Section XXII)
"SERIES" command of SPY to change R-L-C (Section XVI-C-IB)
Series R-L-C branch card (Section IV~)
"SET" subcomnand of the SP'i "APPEND" carmand (Section XVI-C-9)
"SET COLUMN" request of interactive use. See:
Comnand of the separate plot program "TPPLOI'" (Section I-L-l)
Subcomnand of the SPY "PLar" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"SET Jll\'m" request of interactive use. see:
Cormiand of the separate plot [Link] "TPPLOI'" (Section I-L-l)
Carmand of the separate plot program "WINDCWPLT" (Section I-L-2)
$STARTUP to reread the STARTUP file (Section I-E-2)
"SHAFT" subconrnand of the SP'i "PLar" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
[Link]\T disk file describing a rotating machine shaft (Section XVI-C-4)
Sheath of "CABlE CCN5TANTS" s: coaxial cable (Section XXIII)
Shell-type, 3-phase transfonner (Section IV-E)
Shipley matrix redoction/inversion fonnula (Section XXI, Appendix 4)
Short Courses about the EM'l'P. See ·~ocation •••• "
"Slew" within "lABEL" subcarmand of SP'i "PLar" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"SH(ltl" carmand of the separate plotting program "'l'PPLOI'" (Section I-L-l)
"SHew CURVES" carmand of plotting program "WINIX:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
"SHew WINDC1IlS" carmand of plotting program "WINDC:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Signal selector, a 'JYpe-6l TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Signal sources of ~CS; TACS sources (Section III-E-4)
Single core coaxial cable. See "CABlE CCH)TANTS"
"SINGLE" FlASH" option for '.lYPe-99 pseooo-nonl inear resistance (Section V~)
Singulari ty tolerances. See:
For electric network, see miscellaneous data (Section II-B, EPSILN, 'lOLMAT)
For compensation-based non! inear elanent solution (Section V-E, end)
Sinusoidal steady state. See "phasor solution"
$SIORF/'1F of a telephone connection between two Apollos (Section I-F-l-i)
"SIZE" request of interactive use. See:
Comnand of the sep:irate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Ccmnand of SF.:{ to show "Present figure" List Size usage (Section XVI-C-ll)
Size of EMTP tables. See "Variable dimenSioning"
Skin effect fonnulas of "UNE CCN5TANTS" (Section XXI, Appendix 2)
slash ("/") symbol usage for EM'l'P data sorting by class (Section I-J)
slash (" j") for "@K" carmand file execution from card cache (Section XVI-C-S)
"SlEEP" ccmnand of SP'i to dunp tables (Section XVI-C-7)
"SM" comnand of SPY to display Type-S9 variables and data (Section xvr-C-3)
S.M. See "Synchronous machine"
"SMOOTH" request of batch-mode plotting discards points (Section XIV, Rule 8)
"SMOOTH" request of interactive use. See:
Coomand of the sep:irate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Subcommand of SF.:{ "PLar" corrmand (Section xvr-C-4)
Sorting of input data cards by class (Section I-J)
Source cards of the electric network (Section VII)
"SJURCE" corrrnand of SPY to display List-4 table variables (Section xvr-C-3)
/SJURCE declaration preceding source cards when sorted (Section I-J)
page 26-15

Source equivalents. See:

"NE'IWCRK ECUlVALENT" for constant-parameter equivalent (Section II-A-13)
List 27 (LSIZ27) for frequency-dependent equivalent (Section :!.-{;)
50urce cards of 'mCS (Section III-E-3)
Spark gap. See "Flashover gap"
"SPARK" signal of 'U\Cs-controlled switch (Section VI-C)
Special request cards at beginning of data case (Section II-A)
Spectral analysis. See "Fourier analysis"
"SPY" option as EMTP execution begins (Section I-C)
"SPY" response to any SPY prompt (Section XVI-C)
$SP'{ to mark beginning of in-line, batch-mode SPY data (Section ~r:r-D)
$SPYEND to terminate such in-line, batch-mode SPY data (Section XVI-D)
SP'iFILE? .Ob.T disk files of $SPY usage (Section XVI-D)
SSR. See" Subsynchronous resonance"
Staircase time-varying resistance ('!YPe-97 R(t) element of Sectior, V'C)
"START [Link]" to restart a halted, preceding simulation (Section II-A-33)
S~PY file for any special initialization of SPY parameters (Se~tion I-E-3)
S'l1\RI'LP file to initialize many parameters (section I-E-2)
Statistical overvoltage studies. See:
"STATISTICS" miscellaneous data card (Section II-C-l)
Requests for statistical tabulation of STATISTICs./SYSTEMATIC (Sect)on XV)
"STATISTICS" switch (Section VI-A, Class 3a)
/STATISTICS preceding STATISTICs./SYSTEMATIC output requests (Section I..,J)
"STATPLOT" separate program for vector statistics plotting (Section XV!-C-S)
"STATlS=" qualifier of $OPEN command of "CIMAGE" (section I-D)
Steady-state phasor solution printout. See "KSSOUT" variable controll ing it
"STEP" command of SPY to break at every opportunity (Section XVI-C-2)
-STEP ZERO CotPLE" for compensationsubnetw:>rk identification (Section II-A-34)
lIS'IN=" tag for subcarmands of the SF.{ "APPEND" ccmnand (Section XVI-C-9)
"SI'OP" .request of interactive usage. See: .
Option as EMTP execution begins, to halt program execution (Section I-C)
Carmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-I)
Carmand of the separate plotting .program "WINJ:Xl\fPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Canmand of SPY, to haltEMTP execution (Section XVI-C-2)
"$ STOP" to halt execution as batch-mode data request of "CIMIGE" (Section I-D)
Stratified earth model, Nakagawa formulas of "CABLE CCtSTANTS" (Section XXIII)
Structure of an EMTP data case for simulation (Section I-I)
"SLS" subcorcmand of the SP':{ "APPEND" corrmand (Section XVI-C-9)
Subsynchronous resonance (SSR) stooies. See "Rotating machinery"
$SUFFIX to modify file names of $INCWDE data modularization (Section I-K)
SlII11ler, a zero-th order function block of 'mCS (Section III-E-l)
Sun MJcrosystems version of EMTP (Section I-F-9)
"SIJPERIMIDSE" for superimp:>sed batch-mode (calComp) vector plots (Section XIV)
Supplemental variables of 'mCS (Section III-E-4)
Supporting routines. See Table of Contents, Sections XVII throlJ3h XXIV
Surge arrester model ing • See:
Exponential Zno model (Section V-E)
Pseudo-nonl inear 'IYpe-99 resistance (Section V-A)
True non-linear resistance with flashover (Section V-G)
TAC5-controlled, time-varying resistance (Section V-I)
Surge function, 'IYPe-15 electric network source canJ?Onent (Section VII-A)
Surge impedance Zs used as transnission line data input (Section IV-D-l)
"EWI'rCH" corrmand of SP':{ to display List-6 table (Section XVI-C-2)
/EWI'rCH declaration preceding switch cards \tJhen sorted (Section I-J)
Page 26-16

SWi tches, incllrl ing thyr ister s and diodes. See:

Introduction and overview (Section VI)
Ordinary switches (time-controlled, flashover,
"STATISTICS" , "SYSTEMATIC"; Section VI-A)
Diode and thyrister (valve) modeling, 'lYPe 11 switch (Section VI-B)
Spark gap and 'IRIAC modeling, 'JYPe 12 switch (Section VI-C)
Symbolic Debugger. See" Apollo ••••• "
Symmetrical component quantities. See:
"UNE CCNSTANTS" theory (Section XXI-7.4, SUbsection 5.)
[Link] for 3-Fhase, [R], [L] branch data input using these (Section IV-C)
Synchronous machine (S.M.) modeling:
'lYPe-59 modeling for balanced, 3-Iilase usage (Section VIII)
Alternative modeling via the tl'liversal Machine (Section IX)
"SYSTEMATIC" switches. See "STATISTICS"

Table of Contents (Section 0 at the front of the book)

"'mCS" COJmIand of SP'{ for concurrent sequential processing (Section XVI-C-12)
/'mCS declaration preced ing 'mCS cards \tohen sorted by class (Section I-J)
TACS (EMTP control system modeling caIJability). See:
Rules for data assembly and operation (Section III)
Card to introduce 'mCS data (Section III)
"ABSOLt11'E 'mCS DIMElSICH)" request card (Section II-A-l)
TACS-controlled switch. See "Valve", "Gap"
'.mCS-controlled voltage or current of electric network (Section VII-A, 'l)1pe 60)
TACS-modulated voltage or current of electric network (Section VII-A, 'l)1pe 17)
"'.mCS HYBRID" request precedes 'mCS data if also electric network (Section III)
,,'mCS STAND AI..Cl'£" request preceding 'mCS data if no electric net (Section III)
"'.mCS WARN LIMIT" to redefine limit on 'meS warning messages (Section II-A-35)
Tags for subcarmands of the SP'i "APPEND" COJmIand (Section XVI-C-9)
"TEK" carmand of SP'{ to change parameters of a ROLLing plot (Section XVI-C-4)
Tektronix. See "Plotting of EMTP resul ':5" , "Proprietary software", PLOT10
TeleIilone connection of two Apollo computers (Section I-F-l-i)
Terminal condition punching and the end of a simulation (IPUN of Section II-B)
Thyrister model ing. See "Valve"
"TIME" camland of SP'{ to show simulation time (Section XVI-C-ll)
Time usage to identify plot files. See "REPLOT"
Time-sequenced switch, Type-S7 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
"TIME STEP LOOP" request begins "START AG\IN" simulation (Section II-A-36)
"TIME" request of interactive use. See:
Command of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section !-L-l)
Command of the seIJarate plotting program "WINDa<YPLT" (Section !-L-2)
Subcorrmand of the SP'{ "PLOT" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
Time-step size (integer miscellaneous data, variable IELTAT, Section II-B)
"TIME UNITS" request of interactive use. See:
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "W:rNDC:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Subcomnand of the SP'{ "PLOT" carmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"TIMESPAN" request of interactive use. See:
Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section I-L-l)
Cornmand of the seIJarate plotting program "W:rNDC:WPLT" (Section I-L-2)
Time-varying resistance elements. See:
Type-97 staircase resistance (Section V-C)
Type-91 continuous resistance (Section V-F)
Type-91 TACS-controlled resistance (Section V-I)
'!'MAX termination time of stooy. (floating miscellaneous data, Section II-B)

- -----. -- ----, -"-'-----.1 - -.------ ------- -_._-- ----

"ZINC OXIDE" request to modify Zno Newton iteration controls (Section It-A-J9)
Zinc-oxide surge arrester modeling:
Branch card data input (Section V-E)
Supporting routine "~T" to fit exp:mentials (Section XIX-I)
"ZOO FITTER" to transfer to "ARRDl\T" supporting program (Section II-A-40)
page 26-17

Tolerances, near-0, defined by Sl'ARTUP file variables EPSZOO, EPIlARN, etc.

"'1vpit catmar.d to dit:play the first row of any SFi table (Sectior WI-C-3)
"TPPLI11'" program IOI separate interactive EMTP plotting (Section r ·L-l)
TPI'[Link] disk file of a hibernating solution ([Link] >WI-C-7J
Transfer function of a control system. See "FUnction block"
Transtonn~tion ~trices of transmission lines (Section IV4D)
Transformer model ing. See:
Saturable "TR.\t£FtRMER'" call:EX>nent (Section IV-E)
"OCTRAN" supporting program for mul ti~ase linear model (Secticr:-XIX-C)
Linear coupled 01]- [L] branch cards to represent (Section IV-C)
Ideal transfoJCme:c (Section VII-A, 'l)Ipe-18 source)
"XFc::RMER" supporting program for 3 phases or fewer (Section XIX~!,~
Refer also to nonl inear f9actor merlel ing for Si3turation of transfoI":'E!rs
Transmission circuit modeling. See:
Pi-circuit modelling, used mainly for cables (Section lV-B)
Constant-parameter, distributed-parameter line model (Section rv-o-l)
Frequency-dependent model ing of overhead lines (Section rv-D-3, 4»
supporting programs produce data: Section xvn [Marti], or XXII [8~lyen]
Transport delay, ".IYPe-S3 TACS device (Section III-E-4)
Transpo!::li tion of 1 mes, the mathematics of it (Section XXI, 1q)pend ix c;)
'i'rapped charge of aline (Section VlI-A, source 'tYPe 14, TSTART = 5432)
'''I'AASH" node of Type-16 source .(Section VII-B, [Link] 7) (STARTUP card 18)
Tdac • See " EMi tches"
Tsu-huei, Dr. 'ISu-huei tiu. See "Liu·
"TYP-16" node of 'lYPe-16 source (Section VII-B, Rule 7)
Tyag i , Mr. S. D. of NTFC, New [Link] i India. See· India EMTP User Group"
"TYPE" canmand of 5P.{ to display a disk file (section >WI-C-S)

"UM 'ID TACS" to pass U'liversal Machine (U .. M.) variables to 'mCS (Section II-A)
U.M. See ·Universal Machine"
U.M. has a special interface with the EMTP load flow (Section IX)
Ungrounded sources (particularly for voltage): Type-18 source (Section VII-A)
$UNITS card to changes miscel1.::meou.c; data p:!rameters XCPI', COPI' (Section I-D)
"UNIT=" qualifier of the $OPEN ccmnand of "CIMAGE" (Section I-D)
Univac version of the program, used by EDP of Lisbon, Porttgal (Section I-F-13)
Univer::oal machine (U.M.), modeling for genera] rotating machinery (Section IX)
Unix oFerating system. USed by (see) Sun, H-P, AT&T, Apple Macintosh
UNIX PC 731313 EMTP version for this AT&T desktop computer (Section I-F-3)
Universal randan ntmbers. See SlBROtJI'INE RFLNL1 (Section 1-E-1)
Untranspcsed transmission lines. See "Transmission line modeling·
~~S£ AS" opti~n for Pi-circuits to allow inverse of [L] (Section IV-B, Rule 8)
"USE RL" option for pi-circuits to return to IR], IL] {Section IV-B, Rule 10)
User Groups for the noncommercial dissemination EMTP information (Section I-A)
User instruction. See "Education"
Use.::!::. f>1anual: former name for this \\Ork (now the EMTP Rule Book)
"USER SUPPLIED SW:rn::H TIMES" for user's l-bnte carlo T-switch (Section II-A-37)
page 26-18

Valve (thyrister) switch canp:ment used in hvdc and SVC models '(Section VI-B)
'VAli=" tag for subcorrmands of the SP'f "APPEND" conmand (Section xvr-C-9)
Van D:>n1nelen" Prof. Daniel Van D::mnelen of K.U. Leuven. See "E)Jropean .... " ,
'VARDIM" program to change dimensions of the EMTP (Section I-G)
Variable dimensioning of EMTP tables by use of "VARDIM" program (Section 1-G)
Variables of program tables. See SPY "UST", "FIND", "EXAMINE" (Section XVI-C)
VAX/VMS DEC (Digital Bquipnent) catlp.1ter version of program (Section I-F-4)
"VERIFY" [Link] monitors "@" execution of corrmand files (Section xvr-c-S)
. 'V-I" corrmaOO of SPY to display List-9 vectors (Section XVI-C-3)
"$VINTAGE" card to select inp.1t data field width (Section 1-0)
Virtual manory for plot data p:>ints. See WNIT4, Sl'ARTUP definition l card 15
Virtual memory management, imp:>rtance for EMTP canputers (Section r--F)
Voltage regulator (of synchronous machine) modeling. See "Exciter modeling"
Voltage source modeling. See "Source cards", "Rotating machinery"

"WAIT" "'carmand of SPY will stall for a fixed time interval (Section xvr-C-ll)
"~" corrmand of SPY will re-load tables to end hibernation (Section xvr-C-7)
$WA'ICH request for screen monitoring of inpJt by ·[Link]" (Section 1-0)
"WHEN" carmand of SPY for delayed table dLlllping/restoration (Section XSJI-C-1)
Width of WNIT6 output is controlled by Sl'ARTUP (card 8, variable I<OL132)
$WmrH changes 8e vs 132 co1unn WNIT6 output width in "CIMAGE" (Section 1-0)
"WINDCW" routine to manage 3-window interactive (SP'f) display (Section I-E-1)
Windows. See "Apollo •••• or ·SUn ••• " or "Apple Macintosh"
Workstations. See "Apollo ••• " or "SUn •••• or "Apple Macintosh"

"X-Y PLOT" request of interactive use. See:

Corrmand of the separate plotting program "TPPLOT" (Section 1-L-l)
Subcorrmand of the SPY "PLCYI''' conmand (Section XVI-C-4)
"X-Y PLCYI''' request of batch-mode plotting (Section XIV I Point 15)
"XFORMER" request for transfer to supporting routine (Section II-A-38)
"XFORMER" routine for calculation of transfonner (R], [L) (Section XIX-A)
"XOPI'" units for indoctance (mH vs. oms) • See "Miscellaneous data cards"

"[Y]" corrmand of SPY to display matrix [YJ of time-step loop (Section XVI-C-3)
"YFORM" command of SPY to fOnD matrix [Y] (Section xvr-C-13)

Z-block of 'mCS, originally a special zeroth-order function. See "SUrmler"

"ZINC OXIDE" request to modify zno Newton iteration controls (Section !!-A-39)
Zinc-oxide surge arrester modeling:
Branch card data input (Section V-E)
Supporting routine II ARRIl\T" to fit exp;>nentials (Section XIK-I)
"ZOO FI'ITER" to transfer to Ii [Link]\T" supporting program (Section II-A-4e)

EMTP/ATP Power System Simulation Guide
No ratings yet
EMTP/ATP Power System Simulation Guide
9 pages
Introduction to Alternative Transients Program
No ratings yet
Introduction to Alternative Transients Program
110 pages
Atprulebooktr PDF
0% (1)
Atprulebooktr PDF
1,170 pages
Introduction to Alternative Transients Program
No ratings yet
Introduction to Alternative Transients Program
14 pages
ATP Tutorial for Protection Analysis
No ratings yet
ATP Tutorial for Protection Analysis
30 pages
SynchroTeq Transformer Switching Solutions
No ratings yet
SynchroTeq Transformer Switching Solutions
15 pages
Siemens Power Engineering Guide 7E 489
No ratings yet
Siemens Power Engineering Guide 7E 489
1 page
PV Dynamic Model User Guide
No ratings yet
PV Dynamic Model User Guide
61 pages
Fault Currents in Wind Power Plants
No ratings yet
Fault Currents in Wind Power Plants
10 pages
ATPDraw Version 3: Transformer Modeling
100% (1)
ATPDraw Version 3: Transformer Modeling
6 pages
EMTP Rule Book Overview and Applications
100% (2)
EMTP Rule Book Overview and Applications
1,195 pages
Hybrid Transformer Model in ATPDraw
No ratings yet
Hybrid Transformer Model in ATPDraw
13 pages
PSCAD-EMTDC in Power Systems Education
No ratings yet
PSCAD-EMTDC in Power Systems Education
11 pages
Parametric Variation in ATP-EMTP
No ratings yet
Parametric Variation in ATP-EMTP
6 pages
Users Guide to ATP Models
100% (2)
Users Guide to ATP Models
169 pages
ATP-EMTP Installation Guide
No ratings yet
ATP-EMTP Installation Guide
3 pages
Small Signal Stability in Power Systems
No ratings yet
Small Signal Stability in Power Systems
42 pages
ATPDraw 3.5 TACS Reference Manual
No ratings yet
ATPDraw 3.5 TACS Reference Manual
126 pages
Radio Compliance Check Calculator Guide
No ratings yet
Radio Compliance Check Calculator Guide
13 pages
Modeling of Power Networks by ATP-Draw For Harmonics Propagation Study
100% (1)
Modeling of Power Networks by ATP-Draw For Harmonics Propagation Study
8 pages
PJM NERC MOD-026-027 Guidance
No ratings yet
PJM NERC MOD-026-027 Guidance
35 pages
01'96 Feb
No ratings yet
01'96 Feb
28 pages
Nanocrystalline Cores in Current Transformers
No ratings yet
Nanocrystalline Cores in Current Transformers
5 pages
Per Unit Calculations in Power Systems
No ratings yet
Per Unit Calculations in Power Systems
35 pages
12'00 May
No ratings yet
12'00 May
87 pages
Grounding System Simulation in Power Stations
No ratings yet
Grounding System Simulation in Power Stations
120 pages
Power Systems Protection Study Guide
No ratings yet
Power Systems Protection Study Guide
8 pages
WhatsNew 2016 en PDF
No ratings yet
WhatsNew 2016 en PDF
54 pages
Negative Phase Sequence Protection
No ratings yet
Negative Phase Sequence Protection
15 pages
Power System Simulation Lab software-NEPLAN Features PDF
100% (1)
Power System Simulation Lab software-NEPLAN Features PDF
14 pages
ATPDesigner: Power Network Simulation Guide
100% (1)
ATPDesigner: Power Network Simulation Guide
33 pages
Understanding PSS Functions in Power Systems
No ratings yet
Understanding PSS Functions in Power Systems
50 pages
MERSEN - Sizing Fuses of PV Systems Per NEC
No ratings yet
MERSEN - Sizing Fuses of PV Systems Per NEC
5 pages
Power System Reliability Analysis
No ratings yet
Power System Reliability Analysis
69 pages
Atp Emtp Rule Book Download - Diakakaconpue PDF
No ratings yet
Atp Emtp Rule Book Download - Diakakaconpue PDF
6 pages
TOV Analysis in Wind and Solar PV Systems
No ratings yet
TOV Analysis in Wind and Solar PV Systems
20 pages
Evaluating THD Mitigation Techniques
No ratings yet
Evaluating THD Mitigation Techniques
75 pages
Validation of IEC 61400-27-1 Wind Model
No ratings yet
Validation of IEC 61400-27-1 Wind Model
9 pages
Mutual Coupling Measurement Guide
No ratings yet
Mutual Coupling Measurement Guide
21 pages
IBR Modeling for NERC Compliance
No ratings yet
IBR Modeling for NERC Compliance
24 pages
Second Benchmark Model for SSR Analysis
No ratings yet
Second Benchmark Model for SSR Analysis
10 pages
Application Note - Large Scale EMT Studies - PSCAD and E-TRAN PDF
100% (1)
Application Note - Large Scale EMT Studies - PSCAD and E-TRAN PDF
4 pages
Understanding Power System Transients
No ratings yet
Understanding Power System Transients
21 pages
Lightning Overvoltage Study Overview
No ratings yet
Lightning Overvoltage Study Overview
19 pages
PV System Model Comparison: PSCAD vs PowerFactory
No ratings yet
PV System Model Comparison: PSCAD vs PowerFactory
8 pages
RuleBook 2018
No ratings yet
RuleBook 2018
913 pages
Rulebook
100% (2)
Rulebook
296 pages
ATP Rule Book Overview and Guidelines
No ratings yet
ATP Rule Book Overview and Guidelines
4 pages
Álózati Tranzienseinek Számítógépi Szimulációja: V - MS V - I
No ratings yet
Álózati Tranzienseinek Számítógépi Szimulációja: V - MS V - I
38 pages
ATP-EMTP Simulation Overview
No ratings yet
ATP-EMTP Simulation Overview
31 pages
Special-Request Data Cards Overview
No ratings yet
Special-Request Data Cards Overview
101 pages
Power System Transient Analysis Guide
No ratings yet
Power System Transient Analysis Guide
44 pages
ATP Data Structure Overview
100% (1)
ATP Data Structure Overview
589 pages
ATP-EMTP vs MATLAB-Simulink Analysis
No ratings yet
ATP-EMTP vs MATLAB-Simulink Analysis
14 pages
ATP-EMTP vs MATLAB-Simulink Analysis
No ratings yet
ATP-EMTP vs MATLAB-Simulink Analysis
14 pages
ATPDraw User Manual for Circuit Simulation
No ratings yet
ATPDraw User Manual for Circuit Simulation
10 pages
ATP Tutorial for Protection Analysis
No ratings yet
ATP Tutorial for Protection Analysis
19 pages
ATP Rule Book Updates 1990-2001
No ratings yet
ATP Rule Book Updates 1990-2001
25 pages
Cadence Analog Simulation Tutorial
No ratings yet
Cadence Analog Simulation Tutorial
16 pages
Cadence Virtuoso Tutorial Guide
100% (1)
Cadence Virtuoso Tutorial Guide
40 pages
Feedj: Arrotondare ai Centesimi
No ratings yet
Feedj: Arrotondare ai Centesimi
123 pages
Grade VI Decimal Multiplication Worksheet
No ratings yet
Grade VI Decimal Multiplication Worksheet
13 pages
Area and Volume Review Exercises
No ratings yet
Area and Volume Review Exercises
19 pages
BHRT Clinical Benefits and Guidelines
No ratings yet
BHRT Clinical Benefits and Guidelines
171 pages
Invoice for Consultancy Services - Sept 2022
No ratings yet
Invoice for Consultancy Services - Sept 2022
19 pages
486-PVT Motherboard Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
486-PVT Motherboard Configuration Guide
15 pages
Welding Shield and Face Shield Diagrams
No ratings yet
Welding Shield and Face Shield Diagrams
1 page
Whitman's Vision of Manifest Destiny
No ratings yet
Whitman's Vision of Manifest Destiny
18 pages
Grade 4 Robotics Quiz Questions
No ratings yet
Grade 4 Robotics Quiz Questions
1 page
Thermal Imaging Report for Thianis Apparel
No ratings yet
Thermal Imaging Report for Thianis Apparel
93 pages
Rate Analysis for Solapur Power Project
No ratings yet
Rate Analysis for Solapur Power Project
59 pages
Product Innovation Strategy Guide
No ratings yet
Product Innovation Strategy Guide
78 pages
International Tropical Timber Agreement 1983
No ratings yet
International Tropical Timber Agreement 1983
21 pages
Summation and Probability Concepts
No ratings yet
Summation and Probability Concepts
26 pages
Water Quality Index in Thrace Lakes
No ratings yet
Water Quality Index in Thrace Lakes
11 pages
New Concept English 1 Text Lessons
100% (1)
New Concept English 1 Text Lessons
20 pages
Power Quality Events Overview
No ratings yet
Power Quality Events Overview
59 pages
Climatic Geomorphology Overview
No ratings yet
Climatic Geomorphology Overview
2 pages
Zyme-Flow® UN657 Safety Data Sheet
No ratings yet
Zyme-Flow® UN657 Safety Data Sheet
6 pages
Calibration Verification Procedure Guide
No ratings yet
Calibration Verification Procedure Guide
2 pages
Aashto M 251-06 (2016) - 1
No ratings yet
Aashto M 251-06 (2016) - 1
18 pages
So Hum Meditation: Practice and Benefits
No ratings yet
So Hum Meditation: Practice and Benefits
3 pages
DG - Point 15 MCQ
No ratings yet
DG - Point 15 MCQ
12 pages
Pathology MCQs for Medical Students
No ratings yet
Pathology MCQs for Medical Students
28 pages
210 MW Boiler and Auxiliaries Overview
100% (2)
210 MW Boiler and Auxiliaries Overview
18 pages
Tariff Determination for Lakshadweep Solar Project
No ratings yet
Tariff Determination for Lakshadweep Solar Project
29 pages
TIME5300 Metal Hardness Tester Overview
No ratings yet
TIME5300 Metal Hardness Tester Overview
4 pages
FFSSD
No ratings yet
FFSSD
25 pages
Classification of Logic Families in Electronics
No ratings yet
Classification of Logic Families in Electronics
23 pages
ANOVA and Regression Analysis Insights
100% (1)
ANOVA and Regression Analysis Insights
17 pages